1the Coptic Gnostic Library A Complete Edition of The Nag Ham PDF

THE COPTIC GNOSTIC LIBRARY
EDITED WITH ENGLISH TRANSLATION, INTRODUCTION AND NOTES

published under the auspices of
THE INSTITUTE FOR ANTIQUITY AND CHRISTIANITY
General editor:
JAMES M. ROBINSON
VOLUME III
A Complete Edition o f the Nag Hammadi Codices
VOLUME III
EUGNOSTOS THE BLESSED AND THE SOPHIA OF JESUS CHRIST

THE DIALOGUE OF THE SAVIOR
THE APOCALYPSE OF PAUL
THE (FIRST) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES
THE (SECOND) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES
THE APOCALYPSE OF ADAM
THE ACTS OF PETER AND THE TWELVE APOSTLES
THE THUNDER: PERFECT MIND
AUTHORITATIVE TEACHING
THE CONCEPT OF OUR GREAT POWER
PLATO, REPUBLIC 588A-589B
THE PRAYER OF THANKSGIVING
SCRIBAL NOTE
THE DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH
ASCLEPIUS 21-29
THE GOSPEL OF MARY
THE ACT OF PETER
BRILL
LEIDEN BOSTON KOLN
2000
The volumes contained in this paperback reprint were originally published by
Brill Academic Publishers between 1975 and 1995 as part of the Nag
Hammadi Studies and Nag Hammadi and Manichaean Studies monograph
series.
ISBN 9004117024 (Set)
THIS BOOK IS PRINTED ON ACID-FREE PAPER.
Copyright 2000 by Koninklijke Brill NV, Leiden, The Netherlands

Cover design by TopicA (Antoinette Hanekuyk)
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, translated,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without prior written permission
from the publisher.
Authorization to photocopy items for internal or personal use is granted by Brill
provided that the appropriate fees are paid directly to
The Copyright Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Suite 910
Danvers MA 01923, USA.
Fees are subject to change.
PRINTED IN THE NETHERLANDS

CONTENTS
VOLUME 1
Nag H am m adi Codex I (The Jung Codex)

T he P rayer o f th e A po stle P a u l
T he A po c r y ph o n o f Ja m e s
T he G o spel o f T r u t h
T h e T r e a t is e o n t h e R e s u r r e c t i o n
T h e T r ipa r t it e T r a c t a t e
VOLUME 2
Nag H am m adi Codices II, 1; III, 1 ; and IV, 1

T he A poc ryph o n of Jo h n
Nag H am m adi Codex II, 2-7

T he G o spel o f T h o m a s
T h e G o s p e l o f P h il ip
T h e H y p o s t a s is o f t h e A r c h o n s
On t h e O r ig in o f t h e W o r ld
T h e E x p o s i t o r y T r e a t is e o n t h e S o u l
T he B ook of T h o m a s the C o ntender
Nag H am m adi Codices III, 2 and IV, 2

T h e G o s p e l o f t h e E g y p t ia n s
VOLUME 3
Nag H am m adi Codices III, 3-4 and V, 1

and T h e S o p h ia o f
E u g n o sto s th e B le s s e d J e su s C h r is t
Nag H am m adi C odex III, 5

T h e D i a l o g u e o f t h e S a v io r
Nag H am m adi Codex V, 2-5

T h e A po c a ly pse o f P a u l
T h e ( F ir s t ) A p o c a l y p s e o f J a m e s
T he ( S e c o n d ) A p o c a l y p se o f Ja m e s
T he A po c a ly pse o f A d a m
Nag H am m adi Codex V I

T he A cts o f P eter a n d th e T w elve A postles
T h e T h u n d e r : P e r f e c t M in d
A u t h o r it a t iv e T e a c h i n g
T h e C o n c e p t o f O u r G reat P o w er
P la t o , R e p u b lic 588 a - 589 b
T h e P r a y e r o f T h a n k s g iv in g
S c r ib a l N o te
T h e D i s c o u r s e o n t h e E ig h t h a n d N in t h
A s c l e p iu s 21-29
P ap y ru s Berolinensis 8502,1 and 4

T he G o spel of M ary
T he A ct of P eter
VOLUME 4
N ag H am m adi Codex V II
T he P a r a ph r a se of S hem
T h e S e c o n d T r e a t is e o f t h e G r e a t S e t h
A po c a ly pse of P eter
T h e T e a c h i n g s o f S il v a n u s
T h e T h ree S t e les of S eth
N ag H am m adi Codex V III

ZOSTRIANOS
T h e L e t t e r o f P e t e r t o P h il ip
G reek and Coptic P ap y ri from the C artonnage of the Covers
VOLUME 5
N ag H am m adi Codex IX
M e l c h iz e d e k
T he T hought of N orea
T h e T e s t im o n y o f T r u t h
N ag H am m adi Codex X
M ar sanes
Nag H am m adi Codex XI

T h e I n te r p r e ta tio n o f K n o w le d g e
A V a le n t in ia n E x p o s itio n w ith
On t h e A n o i n t i n g
O n B a p t is m A a n d B
On t h e E u c h a r i s t A a n d B
A llo g e n e s
H y p s ip h r o n e
Nag H am m adi Codex X II

T he S entences of S extus
T he G o spel of T ruth
Nag H am m adi Codex X III

T r i m o r p h ic P r o t e n n o i a
On t h e O r ig in o f t h e W o r ld
NAG HAMMADI STUDIES
VOLUME XXVII
NAG HAMMADI STUDIES
EDITED BY
MARTIN KRAUSE - JAMES M. ROBINSON

FREDERIK WISSE
IN CONJUNCTION WITH
A l e x a n d e r B o h l i g -J e a n D o r e s s e -S o r e n G iv e r s e n
H a n s J o n a s -R o d o l p h e K a s se r -P a h o r L a b ib
G e o r g e W . M a c R a e I - J a c q u e s -E. M e n a r d
T o r g n y Save-S o d er b er g h
W il l e m C o r n e l is van U n n i k I - R . M c L . W il s o n
JAN ZANDEEf
XXVII
GENERAL EDITOR OF THE COPTIC GNOSTIC LIBRARY
JAMES M. ROBINSON
published under the auspices o f
NAG HAMMADI CODICES

111,3-4 AND V,7
WITH
PAPYRUS BEROLINENSIS 8502,5 a n d
OXYRHYNCHUS PAPYRUS 1081
Eug n o sto s and T h e S o p h ia of Je su s C h r is t
EDITED BY
DOUGLAS M. PARROTT
' S
/ 68* '
E.J. BRILL
LEID EN N EW Y O R K K 0 B E N H A V N KOLN
1991
The paper in this book meets te guidelines for permanence and durability of the Committee on
Production Guidelines for Book Longevity of the Council on Library Resources.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Eugnostos the Blessed. English & Coptic.

Nag Hammadi codices 111,3-4 and V,1 with Papyrus Berolinensis
8502,3 and Oxyrhynchus papyrus 1081: Eugnostos and The Sophia of
Jesus Christ / edited by Douglas M. Parrott.
p. cm.(Nag Hammadi studies. ISSN 0169-7749; v. 27) (The
Coptic gnostic library)
Parallel text in English and Coptic.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 90-04-08366-9 (alk. paper)
1. Nag Hammadi codices. 2. Papyrus Berolinensis 8502.
3. Oxyrhynchus papyri. 4. Wisdom (Gnosticism) 5. Gnosticism.
I. Parrott, Douglas M. II. Sophia of Jesus Christ. English &
Coptic. 1991. III. Title. IV. Title: Nag Hammadi codices III. 3-4
and V, 1 with Papyrus Berolinensis 8502,3 and Oxyrhynchus papyrus
1081. V. Series. VI. Series: The Coptic gnostic library.
BT1392.E92A3 1991
299.932dc20 91-19243
CIP
ISSN 0169-7749
ISBN 90 04 08366 9
Copyright 1991 by E.J. Brill, Leiden, The Netherlands

All rights reserved. No part o f this book may be reproduced or
translated in any form, by print, photoprint, microfilm, microfiche
or any other means without written permission from the publisher
Authorization to photocopy items fo r internal or personal

use is granted by E.J. Brill provided that
the appropriate fees are paid directly to Copyright
Clearance Center, 27 Congress Street, SALEM MA
01970, USA. Fees are subject to change.
TABLE OF CO NTEN TS
Foreword by JamesM. Robinson ................................................................ vii

Preface........................................................................................................... xi
Table of Tractates in the CopticGnostic Library ...................................... xiii
Abbreviations............................................................................................... xv
Works Consulted.......................................................................................... xvii
Textual S igns................................................................................................ xxiii
Introduction................................................................................................... 1
I D iscovery........................................................................................ 1
II Publication History ........................................................................ 1
III Titles ................................................................................................ 2
IV The Relationship of the Tractates and
its Significance.............................................................................. 3
V Dating ............................................................................................. 5
VI Original Language ......................................................................... 6
VII Provenance...................................................................................... 7
VIII Writers and Audiences................................................................... 8
IX Sources of Eugnostos..................................................................... 9
X Relationship of the T e x ts.............................................................. 16
XI T heC odices.................................................................................... 18
XII Physical State of the Tractates...................................................... 19
XIII Scribal Characteristics ................................................................... 20
XIV Transcriptions ................................................................................ 27
XV Translation Policies ....................................................................... 29
XVI Footnotes and Endnotes................................................................ 30
XVII Literary Forms ............................................................................... 30
Guide to the P arallels................................................................................... 31
The Parallel Texts ........................................................................................ 35
Endnotes........................................................................................................ 181
Word Indices................................................................................................. 185
Coptic W ords...................................................................................... 185
Greek Loan Words ............................................................................. 201
Proper N o u n s...................................................................................... 208
Oxyrhynchus Papyrus 1081 ........................................................................ 209
Introduction ........................................................................................ 209
Text and Translation........................................................................... 211
FO R EW O RD
The Coptic Gnostic Library is a complete edition of the Nag Hammadi Cod
ices, of Papyrus Berolinensis 8502, and of the Askew and Bruce Codices,
comprising a critical text with English translations, introductions, notes, and
indices. Its aim is to present these texts in a uniform edition that will
promptly follow the appearance of The Facsimile Edition o f the Nag Ham
madi Codices and that can be a basis for more detailed technical and interpre
tive investigations. Further studies of this sort are expected to appear in the
monograph series Nag Hammadi Studies, of which the present edition is a
part.
The gnostic religion was not only a force that interacted with early Chris
tianity and Judaism in their formative periods, but also a significant religious
position in its own right. General acceptance of this modem insight had been
seriously impeded by the scarcity of original source material. Now this situa
tion has been decisively altered. It is thus under a sense of obligation
imposed by the discovery of these largely unique documents that the present
edition has been prepared.
This edition is a project of the Institute for Antiquity and Christianity,
Claremont, California. The translation team consists of Harold W. Attridge,
J. W. B. Bam st, Hans-Gebhard Bethge, Alexander Bohlig, James Brashler,
G. M. Browne, Roger A. Bullard, Peter A. Dirkse, Stephen Emmel, Joseph
A. Gibbons, S0ren Giversen, Charles W. Hedrick, Wesley W. Isenberg, T. O.
Lambdin, Bentley Layton, Violet MacDermot, George W. MacRaef, Dieter
Muellert, William R. Murdock, Douglas M. Parrott, Birger A. Pearson, Mal
colm L. Peel, James M. Robinson, William C. Robinson, Jr., William R.
Schoedel, J. C. Shelton, John H. Sieber, John D. Turner, Francis E. Williams,
R. McL. Wilson, Orval S. Wintermute, Frederik Wisse, and Jan Zandee.
The project was initiated in 1966 with only a limited number of tractates
accessible, but rapidly developed as the texts became increasingly available.
In view of the fact that the bulk of the material in Codices I-V I had at that
time either been published or announced for imminent publication in com
plete editions in other languages, the edition in the Coptic Gnostic Library
was envisaged in the complementary role of providing merely English trans
lations in a single volume, which in subsequent planning was then envisaged
as two volumes. It was at this stage that preliminary announcements were
made in New Testament Studies 16 (1969) 185-90 and Novum Testamentum
12 (1970) 83-85, reprinted in Essays on the Coptic Gnostic Library (Leiden:
Brill, 1970). The publisher and editorial board of Nag Hammadi Studies at
their meeting in Uppsala, Sweden, in August 1973, recommended that the
Coptic Gnostic Library edition be complete for Codices I-V I and BG as well
as for VII-XIII. This plan was adopted by the volume editors at their Sep
tember 1973 work session in Cairo. This resulted in Codices IVI and BG
Vlll FOREWORD
being planned for six, then nine volumes. They do not correspond precisely
to the seven codices, for it is preferable to publish parallel texts together.
Thus the present volume presents in parallel columns the two copies of Eug
nostos (III,J and V ,7) and the two copies of its Christianized second edition,
The Sophia o f Jesus Christ (111,4 and BG,5) in order to facilitate study of the
complex interrelations involved. After it was decided to include in Nag
Hammadi Studies a new English edition of the other Coptic Gnostic codices
known previously, the Askew and Bruce codices, the publisher included
them in the Coptic Gnostic Library to make it complete.
The volumes and the editors of the Coptic Gnostic Library are as follows:
Nag Hammadi Codex I (The Jung Codex): Volume I, Introduction, Texts, and
Translation; Volume 2, Notes, volume editor Harold W. Attridge; NHS 22
and 23, 1985; Nag Hammadi Codices 11,1 and IV,1: The Apocryphon o f John,
Long Recension, edited by Frederik Wisse, NHS 32, in preparation; Nag Ham
madi Codex 11,2-7, together with XIII,2*, Brit. Lib. Or.4926(1), and P. Oxy. 1,
654, 655: Volume 1, Gospel According to Thomas, Gospel According to Phi
lip, Hypostasis o f the Archons, Indexes; Volume 2, On the Origin o f the
World, Expository Treatise on the Soul, Book o f Thomas the Contender,
Indexes, edited by Bentley Layton, NHS 20 and 21, 1989; Nag Hammadi
Codex 111,1 and Papyrus Berolinensis 8502,2: The Apocryphon o f John, Short
Recension, edited by Peter Nagel, volume editor Frederik Wisse; Nag Ham
madi Codices 111,2 and IV,2: The Gospel o f the Egyptians (The Holy Book of
the Great Invisible Spirit), edited by Alexander Bohlig and Frederik Wisse in
cooperation with Pahor Labib, NHS 4, 1975; Nag Hammadi Codices 1113 -4
and V,1 with Papyrus Berolinensis 8502,3 and Oxyrhynchus Papyrus 1081:
Eugnostos and The Sophia o f Jesus Christ, edited and translated by Douglas
M. Parrott, NHS 27, 1990; Nag Hammadi Codex 111,5: The Dialogue of the
Savior, volume editor Stephen Emmel, NHS XX, 1984; Nag Hammadi Cod
ices V,2-5 and VI with Papyrus Berolinensis 8502,1 and 4, volume editor
Douglas M. Parrott, NHS 11, 1979; Nag Hammadi Codex VII, volume editor
Frederik Wisse; Nag Hammadi Codex VIII, volume editor John H. Sieber,
NHS 31, in the press; Nag Hammadi Codices IX and X, volume editor Birger
A. Pearson, NHS 15, 1981; Nag Hammadi Codices XI, XII and XIII, volume
editor Charles W. Hedrick, NHS 28,1990; Nag Hammadi Codices: Greek and
Coptic Papyri from the Cartonnage o f the Covers, edited by J. W. B. Bamsf,
G. M. Browne and J. C. Shelton, NHS 16, 1981; Pistis Sophia, text edited by
Carl Schmidt, translation and notes by Violet MacDermot, volume editor
R. McL. Wilson, NHS 9, 1978; The Books ofJeu and the Untitled Text in the
Bruce Codex, edited by Carl Schmidt, translation and notes by Violet Mac
Dermot, volume editor R. McL. Wilson, NHS 13, 1978. Thus, as now
envisaged, the full scope of the edition is seventeen volumes.
An English translation of all thirteen Nag Hammadi Codices and P. Berol.
8502 has also been published in 1977 in a single volume, The Nag Hammadi
Library in English, by E. J. Brill and Harper & Row. A first paperback edition
of that preprint augmented by the inclusion of Yale inv. 1784 of the Beinecke
Library at NHC III 145/146 (p. 238) appeared in 1981 at Harper & Row and
FOREWORD ix
in 1984 at E. J. Brill. It was not possible to include there subsequent improve

ments in translations. A third, completely revised edition appeared in 1988 at
E. J. Brill and Harper & Row.
The team research of the project has been supported primarily through the
Institute for Antiquity and Christianity by the National Endowment for the
Humanities, the American Philosophical Society, the John Simon Gug
genheim Memorial Foundation, and Claremont Graduate School; and through
the American Research Center in Egypt by the Smithsonian Institution.
Members of the project have participated in the preparatory work of the
Technical Sub-Committee of the International Committee for the Nag Ham
madi Codices, which has been done at the Coptic Museum in Cairo under the
sponsorship of the Arab Republic of Egypt and u nesco . The extensive work in
the reassembly of fragments, the reconstruction of page sequence, and the col
lation of the transcriptions by the originals not only served the immediate
needs of the facsimile edition, but also provided a basis for a critical edition.
Without such generous support and such mutual cooperation of all parties con
cerned this edition could not have been prepared. Therefore we wish to
express our sincere gratitude to all who have been involved.
A special word of thanks is due to the Egyptian and unesco officials
through whose assistance the work has been carried on: Gamal Mokhtar,
President until 1977 of the Egyptian Antiquities Organization, our gracious
and able host in Egypt; Pahor Labib, Victor Girgis, and Mounir Basta, Direc
tors Emeriti, and Dr. Gawdat Gabra, currently Director of the Coptic Museum,
who together have guided the work on the manuscript material; Samiha Abd
El-Shaheed, First Curator for Manuscripts at the Coptic Museum, who is per
sonally responsible for the codices and was constantly by our side in the rooms
of the Coptic Museum; and, at unesco , N. Bammate, Deputy Assistant Direc
tor General for the Social Sciences, Human Sciences, and Culture until 1978,
who has guided the unesco planning since its beginning, and Dina Zeidan, spe
cialist in the Arab Program of the Division of Cultural Studies, who has
always proved ready with gracious assistance and helpful advice.
Gary A. Bisbee (Chiron Inc.) in conjunction with the Computer Based
Laboratory of Harvard University has designed the Coptic characters, key
punched the manuscript and produced the camera-ready copy for this volume
with great commitment and competence.
Edmund S. Meltzer was kind enough to read the typescript and make valu
able suggestions before the volume went to press.
We also wish to acknowledge our great indebtedness to the directors of
E.J. Brill during the years in which this volume was in preparation, F.C.
Wieder, Jr., Director Emeritus, the late T. A. Edridge, and Dr. W. Backhuys,
Director Emeritus, and Drs. M. G. Elisabeth Venekamp, Vice-President, who
is in charge of Nag Hammadi Studies for Brill.
James M. Robinson
General Editor
PR EFA C E
This project was begun in 1967, while I was a graduate student at the Gra
duate Theological Union. In connection with the Coptic Gnostic Library
Project at the Institute for Antiquity and Christianity, James M. Robinson
suggested that I try to produce the parallels of Eug and 5/C , using the only
source then available to us, namely, the text of Tills edition of BG and his
footnotes, which contained the variants from 5/C -B G found in Eug-III and
5/C-III. His hope was that we might be able to test the then recently pub
lished arguments of Krause regarding the priority of Eug. The result was
somewhat less than satisfactory because of the gaps in m#-III in Tills
edition gaps made necessary by restricitons imposed upon him. When pho
tos of the Nag Hammadi texts became available to the Institute for Antiquity
and Christianity later in the decade, I began working on the parallels of
Ewg-111 and 5/C -B G in translation (with variant readings in footnotes),
which would have been part of the then projected volume of Codices I-VI in
English translation only.
When that was replaced in 1973, as a result of the decision to publish criti
cal editions of all the texts, I put aside the parallels project in order to com
plete Nag Hammadi Codices V, 2-5, and VI and Papyrus Berolinensis 8502,
I and 4, which was published in 1979. I have worked on various aspects of
this edition since that time, using portions of the earlier work.
I want to express my thanks to a number of persons who have helped with
this project. Stephen Emmel, while working as the Cairo representative of
the Coptic Gnostic Library Project, recollated Eug III and retranscribed
5/C-III, both with the aid of ultraviolet light, identified important fragments
in Eug-V (after publication of the facsimile edition) and provided invaluable
feedback for textual questions about Eug-V. Bentley Layton, while he was
also in Cairo, recollated the whole of E ug-V with the use of ultraviolet light
and made numerous important suggestions regarding the filling of lacunae.
Martin Krause made available an early draft of his anticipated parallel edi
tion. Hans-Martin Schenke provided photos of BG. And Harold Attridge
lent his infrared photos of P. Oxy. 1081 for the new edition of that fragment
included here.
Egyptologist Leonard Lesko (then at UC Berkeley, now at Brown Univer
sity) and his assistant David Larkin gave expert and invaluable advice
regarding knotty translational problems during a week in Berkeley in the
spring of 1981.
Also, this edition has benefited in a variety of ways from the discussions at
the fortnightly meetings of the Coptic Texts Seminar at Claremont Graduate
School during the 1983-84 academic year. The regular participants in that
group, besides myself, were James Goehring, Edmund S. Meltzer and James
M. Robinson, all three from the CGS faculty; graduate students Jon Daniels,
Xll PREFACE
Clayton Jefford, Stephen Patterson and Leif Vaage; and Richard Smith, then
Instructor in Coptic at Fuller Theological Seminary.
Finally I want to thank Howard Jackson, Tulane Peterson, Jirair Tashjian
and Leif Vaage, graduate students at CGS, who assisted me at various stages
in the preparation of this volume. I am also grateful to Lenore Brashler for
mediating expertly between me and her word processor.
The editing of this volume was made possible in part by grants from the
Committee on Research of the University of California at Riverside.
Readers are requested to communicate to the general editor of the Coptic
Gnostic Library any errors that may be found so that a list of corrections can
be published.
Although this volume was accepted for publication in 1984, for a variety
of reasons, including the special problems involved in setting it up, actual
publication has been delayed for some time. During this time, of course,
scholarship has continued, and I have been able to take some of it into con
sideration, but by no means all. I especially regret that limitations on the
number of changes have not allowed me to incorporate references to Michel
Tardieus translation, with notes and comments, of Eugnostos and the Sophia
o f Jesus Christ in his Ecrits gnostiques: Codex de Berlin, Sources gnostiques
et manicheennes 1 (1984). I anticipate making good use of it in a future
commentary.
Douglas M. Parrott
TABLE OF TRACTATES IN THE
C O PTIC G N O STIC LIBR A R Y
The following table lists, for the thirteen Nag Hammadi Codices and
Papyrus Berolinensis 8502, the codex and tractate numbers, the tractate titles
as used in this edition (the titles found in the tractates themselves, sometimes
simplified and standardized, or, when the tractate bears no surviving title, one
supplied by the editors), and the abbreviations of these titles. The abbrevia
tions in parentheses are used only in this volume, for the sake of brevity.
u 77*e Prayer of the Apostle Paul Pr. Paul

1,2 The Apocryphon of James Ap. Jas.
1,3 The Gospel of Truth Gos. Truth
IA The Treatise on the Resurrection Treat. Res.
1,5 The Tripartite Tractate Tri. Trac.
n,7 The Apocryphon of John Ap. John
n ,2 The Gospel of Thomas Gos. Thom.
n ,5 The Gospel of Philip Gos. Phil.
IIA The Hypostasis of the Archons Hyp. Arch.
n ,5 On the Origin of the World Orig. World
n ,6 The Exegesis on the Soul Exeg. Soul
n ,7 The Book of Thomas the Contender Thom. Cont.
m ,7 The Apocryphon of John Ap. John
m ,2 The Gospel of the Egyptians Gos. Eg.
m ,5 Eugnostos the Blessed Eugnostos (Eug)
ma The Sophia of Jesus Christ Soph. Jes. Chr. (SJC)
m ,5 The Dialogue of the Savior Dial. Sav.
IV, 7 The Apocryphon of John Ap. John
IV,2 The Gospel of the Egyptians Gos. Eg.
V,7 Eugnostos the Blessed Eugnostos (Eug)
V,2 The Apocalypse of Paul Apoc. Paul
V,3 The (First) Apocalypse of James 1 Apoc. Jas.
VA The (Second) Apocalypse of James 2 Apoc. Jas.
V,5 The Apocalypse of Adam Apoc. Adam
VI,7 The Acts of Peter and the Twelve Apostles Acts Pet. 12 Apost.
VI,2 The Thunder: Perfect Mind Thund.
VI,5 Authoritative Teaching Auth. Teach.
VIA The Concept of our Great Power Great Pow.
VI,5 Plato, Republic 588b-589b Plato Rep.
VI,6 The Discourse on the Eighth and Ninth Disc. 8-9
VI, 7 The Prayer of Thanksgiving Pr. Thanks.
VI,5 Asclepius 21-29 Asclepius
VU,7 The Paraphrase of Shem Paraph. Shem
VII,2 The Second Treatise of the Great Seth Treat. Seth
v n ,5 Apocalypse of Peter Apoc. Pet.
v n ,4 The Teachings ofSilvanus Teach. Silv.
XIV TABLE OF TRACTATES
vn ,5 The Three Steles of Seth Steles Seth

vra,7 Zostrianos Zost.
vra,2 The Letter of Peter to Philip Ep. Pet. Phil.
IX, 7 Melchizedek Melch.
IX,2 The Thought ofNorea Norea
IX, 3 The Testimony of Truth Testim. Truth
X Marsanes Marsanes
XI, 7 The Interpretation of Knowledge Interp. Know.
XI,2 A Valentinian Exposition Val. Exp.
XI, 2a On the Anointing On Anoint.
XI ,2f> On Baptism A On Bap. A
XI,2c On Baptism B On Bap. B
XI, 2d On the Eucharist A On Euch. A
XI,2c On the Eucharist B On Euch. B
XI,5 Allogenes Allogenes
XI, 4 Hypsiphrone Hypsiph.
xn,7 The Sentences of Sextus Sent. Sextus
xn,2 The Gospel of Truth Gos. Truth
xn,5 Fragments Frm.
Xffl,7 Trimorphic Protennoia Trim. Prot.
Xffl,2 On the Origin of the World Orig. World
BG,7 The Gospel of Mary Gos. Mary
BG,2 The Apocryphon of John Ap. John
BG,5 The Sophia of Jesus Christ Soph. Jes. Chr. (SJC)
BG,4 The Act of Peter Act Pet.
A B B R EV IA TIO N S
(Abbreviations commonly found in standard English dictionaries are omitted

from this list. Nag Hammadi tractates are listed at the beginning of the
volume.)
A Achmimic dialect
^2 Subachmimic dialect
AD AIK Abhandlungen des Deutschen Archaologischen Insti-
tuts Kairo
alt. alternative
Apoc. Mos. Apocalypse o f Moses
Att (in notes) Attridge*
B Bohairic dialect
BASP The Bulletin o f the American Society o f Papyrologists
BDF Blass, Debrunner and Funk*
BG Berlin Gnostic codex (Papyrus Berolinensis 8502),
ed. by Till (1955)* and Till-Schenke (1972)*
Corr. Correction by scribe
D (in notes) Doresse (I960)*
do. ditto
Epiphan. Pan. Epiphanius, Panarion
F Fayyumic dialect
Gen Book of Genesis
H (in notes) Hunt*
JAC Jahrbuchfur Antike und Christentum
K (in notes) Krause (1974)*
LSJ Liddell, Scott and Jones*
LXX Greek Version of the Old Testament (Septuagint)
NHC Nag Hammadi Codex
NHLE Nag Hammadi Library in English, 3rd ed., ed. by
James M. Robinson*
NHS Nag Hammadi Studies
NovT Novum Testamentum
OLZ Orientalistische Literaturzeitung
PO Patrologia orientalis
P. Papyrus manuscript
P. Oxy. Papyrus Oxyrhynchus
par(r.) parallel(s)
Pist. Soph. Pistis Sophia
Plat. Tim. Plato, Timaeus
*See Works Consulted.

xvi ABBREVIATIONS
Pu (in notes) Puech (1963)*

Rom Letter to the Romans
S Sahidic dialect
SBL Society of Biblical Literature
sugg. suggestion
TDNT Kittel, G. and Friedrich, G., eds. Theological Diction
ary o f the New Testament, 10 vols. Trans, and ed. by
G. W. Bromiley. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans,
1964-76.
T-S (in notes) Till-Schenke*
Tr (in notes) Trakatellis*
TU Texte und Untersuchungen
W (in notes) Wesseley*
VC Vigiliae christianae
ZRGG Zeitschrift fu r Religions- und Geistesgeschichte
* See Works Consulted.

W ORKS CO NSU LTED
Attridge, Harold W. P. Oxy. 1081 and the Sophia Jesu Christi.

1975 Enchoria 5: 1-8.
Bams, John W. B. Greek and Coptic Papyri from the Covers

1975 of the Nag Hammadi Codices: A Prelim
inary Report. In Essays on the Nag Ham
madi Codices: In Honour o f Pahor Labib.
NHS 6. Ed. by Martin Krause. Leiden: E.J.
Brill.
Bamsf, John W. B.; Browne, Nag Hammadi Codices: Greek and Coptic
G. M.; and Shelton, J. C., Papyri from the Cartonnage o f the Covers.
eds. NHS 16. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
1981
Bellet, Paulinus The Colophon of the Gospel of the Egyp

1978 tians: Concessus and Macarius of Nag Ham
madi. In Nag Hammadi and Gnosis:
Papers read at the First International Con
gress o f Coptology (Cairo, December 1976).
NHS 14. Ed. by R. McL. Wilson. Leiden:
E.J. Brill.
Bickerman, E. J. Chronology o f the Ancient World. Revised

1980 ed. London: Thems and Hudson.
Blass, F.; Debrunner, A.; and A Greek Grammar o f the New Testament
Funk, Robert W. (BDF) and Other Early Christian Literature.
1961 University of Chicago.
Bohlig, Alexander and Labib, Koptisch-gnostische Apokalypsen aus Codex

Pahor, eds. V von Nag Hammadi im Koptischen Mu
1963 seum zu Alt-Kairo. Sonderband. Wissen-
schaftliche Zeitschrift der Martin-Luther-
Universitat. Halle-Wittenberg.
Bohlig, Alexander and Nag Hammadi Codices III, 2 and IV, 2: The
Wisse, Frederik, eds. Gospel o f the Egyptians (The Holy Book o f
1975 the Great Invisible Spirit). NHS 4. Leiden:
E.J. Brill.
xviii WORKS CONSULTED
Bultmann, Rudolf The History o f the Synoptic Tradition. 2nd

1968 ed. Trans, from German (2nd ed., 1931) by
John Marsh. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.
Colpe, Carsten Heidnische, jiidische und christliche Uber-

1976 lieferung in den Schriften aus Nag Hammadi
V. JAC 19.
Crum, W. E. A Coptic Dictionary. Oxford: Clarendon.

1939
De Santos Otero, Aurelio, ed. Los Evangelos Apocrifos. Madrid: Biblio-

1956 teca de Autores Cristianos.
Dillon, John The Middle Platonists: 80 B.C. to A.D. 220.

1977 Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University.
Doresse, Jean Trois livres gnostiques inedits. VC 2:

1948 137-60.
1960 The Secret Books o f the Egyptian Gnostics:

An Introduction to the Gnostic Coptic
manuscripts discovered at Chenoboskion.
Trans, from French (1958, 1959) by Philip
Mairet. New York: Viking.
Emmel, Stephen Unique Photographic Evidence for Nag

1978 Hammadi Texts: CG I I 1, III 1-4 and IV
1-2. BASP 15: 195-205.
1979 Unique Photographic Evidence for Nag

Hammadi Texts: CG V-VII. BASP 16:
179-91.
Facsimile Edition V The Facsimile Edition o f the Nag Hammadi

1975 Codices: Codex V. James M. Robinson, et
al. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Facsimile Edition III The Facsimile Edition o f the Nag Hammadi

1976 Codices: Codex III. James M. Robinson, et
al. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Fallon, Francis T. The Gnostic Apocalypses. Semeia 14:

1979 123-58.
Hedrick, C. W. Christian Motifs in the Gospel of the Egyp

1981 tians: Method and Motive. NovT 23:
242-60.
WORKS CONSULTED xix
Hunt, Arthur S. The Oxyrhynchus Papyri. Part 8. London:

1911 Egypt Exploration Fund.
Kasser, Rodolphe Complements au Dictionnaire copte de

1964 Crum. Biblioth&que d etudes coptes 7.
Cairo: L institut fran9 ais d archeologie
orientale.
Klostermann, Erich, ed. Apokrypha 2. 3rd ed. Kleine Texte 8. Ber

1929 lin: W. de Gruyter.
Krause, Martin Das literarische Verhaltnis des Eugnostos-

1964 briefes zur Sophia Jesu Christi. Mullus,
Festschrift Theodor Klauser. JAC Ergan-
zungsband 1: 215-23.
1974 The Letter of Eugnostos. In Gnosis: A

Selection o f Gnostic Texts 2: Coptic and
Mandean Sources. Ed. by Werner Foerster.
Trans, from 1971 German ed. by R. McL.
Wilson. Oxford: Clarendon.
Krause, Martin and Labib, Gnostische und hermetische Schriften aus

Pahor, eds. Codex II und Codex VI. AD AIK, Koptische
1971 Reihe 2. Gliickstadt: J. J. Augustin.
Liddell, Henry George; Scott, A Greek-English Lexicon with a Supple

Robert; and Jones, Henry ment. Oxford: Clarendon.
Stuart (LSJ)
1968
MacRae, George W. The Jewish Background of the Gnostic

1970 Sophia Myth. NovT 12: 86-101.
Menard, Jacques E. Normative Self-definition in Gnosticism.

1980 In Jewish and Christian Self-definition 1:
The Shaping o f Christianity in the Second
and Third Centuries. Ed. by E. P. Sanders.
Philadelphia: Fortress.
Pape, W. and Bensler, G. Worterbuch der griechischen Eigennamen.

1911 3rd ed. Braunschweig: Friedr. Vieweg &
Sohn.
Parrott, Douglas M. The Significance of the Letter of Eugnostos

1971 and the Sophia of Jesus Christ for the
Understanding of the Relation Between
Gnosticism and Christianity. SBL Seminar
Papers 2.
XX WORKS CONSULTED
1975 Evidence of Religious Syncretism in Nag

Hammadi Tractates. In Religious Syncre
tism in Antiquity: Essays in Conversation
with Geo Widengren. Series on Formative
Contemporary Thinkers 1. Ed. by Birger A.
Pearson. Missoula, Montana: Scholars.
1979 Ed., Nag Hammadi Codices V, 2-5 and VI

with Papyrus Berolinensis 8502, 1 and 4.
NHS 11. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
1987 Gnosticism and Egyptian Religion. NovT

29: 73-93.
1988 Eugnostos and All The Philosophers.

Religion im Erbe Agyptens: Beitrage zur
spatantiken Religionsgeschichte zu Ehren
von Alexander B5hlig. Manfred G6rg, ed.
Agypten und Altes Testament 14. Wies-
badn: Otto Harrassowitz: 153-167.
Perkins, Pheme The Soteriology of Sophia of Jesus Christ.

1971 SBL Seminar Papers 2.
1980 The Gnostic Dialogue: The Early Church

and the Crisis o f Gnosticism. New York:
Paulist.
Przybylski, B. The Role of Calendrical Data in Gnostic

1980 Literature. VC 34: 56-70.
Puech, H.-C. Les nouveaux ecrits gnostiques decouverts

1950 en Haute-Egypte. In Coptic Studies in
honor o f Walter Ewing Crum. Boston:
Byzantine Institute.
1963 Gnostic Gospels and Related Documents.

In Edgar Hennecke, New Testament Apo
crypha 1: Gospels and Related Writings.
Ed. by Wilhelm Schneemelcher. Trans,
from German (1959) by R. McL. Wilson.
Philadelphia: Westminster.
WORKS CONSULTED xxi
Robinson, James M. Codicological Analysis of Nag Hammadi

1979 Codices V and VI and Papyrus Berolinensis
8502. In Nag Hammadi Codices V, 2-5
and VI with Papyrus Berolinensis 8502, I
and 4. NHS 11. Ed. by Douglas M. Parrott.
Leiden: E.J. Brill.
1984 The Facsimile Edition o f the Nag Hammadi

Codices: Introduction. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
1988 Ed., The Nag Hammadi Library in English.

Trans, by Members of the Coptic Gnostic
Library Project of the Institute for Antiquity
and Christianity. 3rd, completely revised
ed. New York, et al.: Harper & Row.
Schenke, Hans-Martin Nag-Hamadi (sic) Studien II: Das System

1962 der Sophia Jesu Christi. ZRGG 14: 263-77.
1966 Review of Bohlig-Labib. OLZ 61: Cols

23-34.
Smyth, Herbert Weir Greek Grammar. Rev. by Gordon M. Mess

1956 ing. Cambridge: Harvard.
Stem, Ludwig Koptische Grammatik. Leipzig: T. O.

1880 Weigel.
Till, Walter C. Ed., Die gnostischen Schriften des kop-

1955 tischen Papyrus Berolinensis 8502. TU 60.
Berlin: Akademie-Verlag.
1961 Koptische Dialektgrammatik mit Lese-

stiicken und Worterbuch. 2nd ed. Munich:
C.H. Beck.
1966 Koptische Grammatik (saidischer Dialekt)

mit Bibliographie, Lesestiicken und Worter-
verzeichnissen. 3rd improved ed. Leipzig:
Verlag Enzyklopadie.
Till, Walter C. and Schenke, Die gnostischen Schriften des koptischen

Hans-Martin, eds. Papyrus Berolinensis 8502. TU 60. 2nd ed.
1972 Berlin: Akademie-Verlag.
Trakatellis, Demetrios 0 YFIEPBATIKOI 0EOS TOY EYTNQI-

1977 TOY (The Transcendent God o f Eugnostos:
An Exegetical Contribution to the Study of
xxii WORKS CONSULTED
the Gnostic Texts of Nag Hammadi).

Athens.
Treu, Kurt P. Berl. 8508: Christliches Empfehlungs-

1982 schreiben aus dem Einband des koptisch-
gnostischen Kodex P. 8502. Archiv fiir
Papyrusforschung 28: 53-54.
Wesseley, C. Les plus anciens monuments du christian-

1924 isme ecrits sur papyrus, II. PO 18: 493-95.
Wilson, R. McL. Gnosis and the New Testament. Philadel

1968 phia: Fortress.
Wisse, Frederik Nag Hammadi Codex III: Codicological

1975 Introduction. In Essays on the Nag Ham
madi Texts: In Honour o f Pahor Labib.
NHS 6. Ed. by Martin Krause. Leiden: E.J.
Brill.
TE X TU A L SIGN S
A dot placed under a letter in the transcripton indicates that the letter
is visually uncertain, even though the context may make the reading
certain. Dots on the line outside of brackets in the transcription
indicate missing letters that cannot be reconstructed but of which
vestiges of ink remain.
[] Square brackets in the transcription indicate a lacuna in the MS in
which there is every reason to believe that writing existed at one
time. When the text cannot be reconstructed, or when it can only be
partially reconstructed, the number of estimated missing letters, up
to five, is indicated in the transcription by dots; beyond that an Ara
bic number is used, followed by a plus or minus sign (). In the
translation, brackets are used not only for lacunae but also for letters
or portions of letters that do not make translatable sense units.
Three dots in brackets indicate an unreconstructed, and therefore an
untranslated, portion of indeterminate length. Brackets are not
allowed to divide words: words are placed either entirely inside
brackets or wholly outside, depending on an estimate of the cer
tainty of the words they translate.
<> Pointed brackets indicate an editorial correction of a scribal omis
sion or error. In the latter case a footnote records the MS reading.
{} Braces indicate letters or words unnecessarily added by the scribe.
N' High strokes indicate that the letters so designated were written
above the line by the scribe.
() Parentheses in the translation indicate material supplied by the trans
lator for the sake of clarity.
11 Two daggers indicate that the words between them are considered
corrupt.
IN T R O D U C TIO N
I. D ISCOVERY
The thirteen Nag Hammadi codices were discovered in December, 1945,

on the right bank of the Nile, near the town of al-Qasr (ancient Chenoboskia)
and close to the larger town of Nag Hammadi, which is on the opposite
bank.1 Facsimile editions of all thirteen have been published. The MSS are
now preserved in the Coptic Museum in Old Cairo, Egypt.
Evidence in the cartonnage used to stiffen the leather covers suggests the
library was buried sometime in the last half of the fourth century C.E. (Bams
et al.: nos. 63-65). It is possible the codices had been used by monks in the
nearby Pachomian monasteries and were buried during a time of heresy-
hunting.2
P. Berolinensis 8502 (commonly designated simply BG) was purchased in
or near the city of Achmim, Egypt, and acquired for the Berlin Museum in
1896. At first Carl Schmidt, who initially proposed to edit it, gave it a fifth-
century date, although subsequently he thought it should be dated later.
Stegemann placed it in the early fifth century (Till-Schenke: 6-1)?
II. PU B LIC A TIO N H ISTORY
The four tractates published here are two versions of Eugnostos and two
of The Sophia o f Jesus Christ. They are presented in parallel form because
of the large amount of common material.
Eugnostos (abbreviated, Eug-V) is the first tractate of Nag Hammadi
Codex V (1,1-17,18) and has not been published before in a critical edition.
Eugnostos, The Blessed (abbreviated, wg-III) is the third tractate of Nag
Hammadi Codex III (70,1-90,13). The portions of the text and translation of
Eug-YH that are variations of sections in The Sophia o f Jesus Christ were
published in Till (1955) and Till-Schenke. However, non-parallel parts,
including all the frame material, were omitted. The text and translation
(modem Greek) of E ug-\\\ was published by Trakatellis as part of his Har
vard dissertation. His text was based on preliminary work of my own with
1The most authoritative account of the discovery and subsequent history of the codices is to
be found in Robinsons introduction to the facsimile edition (1984).
2See Bams: 9-18. But for cautions about Bamss conclusions, see Sheltons introduction to
Bams et al.
3 For a brief account of the unsuccessful efforts of Schmidt to publish BG during his lifetime,
see Till-Schenke: 1-2.
2 INTRODUCTION
some modifications by George MacRae, who was the dissertation director

(corrrespondence with MacRae). Translations of E ug-lll by Krause (1974:
27-34) and myself (NHLE 3 : 206-43) have been published. In both cases the
portion of Eug-V covering the missing two pages of Mg-III (79-80) was
also published.
The two versions of The Sophia o f Jesus Christ (hereafter, SJC) vary from
each other in relatively minor ways. One version is the third tractate of BG
(77,8-127,12), which was edited (text and German translation) by Till
(1955). His edition was later revised by Schenke (Till-Schenke). Translated
portions were also published by Puech (77,9-79,18; 124,9-126,16;
126,17-127,10) (1963: 246-47).
The other version is the fourth tractate of NHC III (90,14-119,18). It was
published by Till with the BG version, in the sense that places where it varied
from the BG text were printed in the footnotes. Unfortunately, in many
instances the Till edition (and its revision) did not completely reflect the vari
ations, particularly the orthographic ones. Krause translated the portions of
5/C -III that vary from E ug-lll and published them in endnotes (1974:
35-39). A translation by myself of all of 5/C -III is published in NHLE3. In
both cases, the parts of 5/C -B G covering the missing four pages of 5/C-III
(109-10; 115-16) were also published.
In addition to the two Coptic MSS of 5/C, one leaf of a Greek copy has
survived among the Oxyrhynchus papyri. It is numbered 1081 and is
presented here in a new edition, following the parallels.
III. TITLES
The title of E ug-lll in the incipit is eyrN ojcT oc ttm&k&pioc , Eug

nostos, the Blessed, which agrees with the subscript title (90,12-13). But
Eug-V has only faint traces of its subscript title and the incipit is very frag
mentary. Enough of the latter is visible, however, to make clear that
ttm&kapioc , the Blessed, was not part of the line. It is also evident that
ttm&kapioc could not have been part of the subscript title (see V 17,18n.).
But what of Eugnostos? It appears nowhere in the tractate. The correct
number of spaces is available in the incipit. And the same is true of the sub
script, where, in addition, the only visible letter (omicron) is in the correct
position for the reconstruction of Eugnostos. But since other names would
also be possible, the designation of Eugnostos as the title of the tractate
depends on the recognition of the similarity of this tractate and Eug-lll.
The titles of both copies of 5/C appear in superscriptions and subscripts.
The superscriptions are the same in both, except that the spelling of the nom-
ina sacra in BG (FcT and x c ) differs from that in Codex III (me and xpc).
In 5/C-BG , the same title appears in the subscript, except that this time the
nomina sacra are spelled as they are in the superscription of 5/C-III. The
subscript of 5/C -III omits xpc', Christ, perhaps through scribal error (see
m.A, below). In regard to the difference between the nomina sacra in the
INTRODUCTION 3
superscription and subscript of BG, it is noteworthy that while the former

conform to the usage elsewhere in the codex (based on the Till-Schenke
index), the latter are unique, suggesting a copyists adjustment.
Till leaves co<t>ia. untranslated, on the ground that the word refers to the
divine hypostasis who appears prominently in the tractate (1955: 55).
Doresse (1948: 146) and Puech (1963: 245), however, prefer to translate it,
on the ground that it refers to the teachings of Jesus found in the tractate.
The latter view seems preferable because Sophia is not the dominant figure in
the tractate, as one would expect if the tractate were titled after her. How
ever, we have adopted Tills practice because it seems to have become gen
erally accepted.
IV. THE R E L A T IO N SH IP OF THE TRACTATES

AND ITS SIG N IF IC A N C E
Because most of Eug is found in SJC, where it is attributed to Jesus, and

because Eug seems to be without any obvious Christian elements, the ques
tion of priority was raised very early. It was thought that if Eug were com
posed first and had been used in the editing of SJC, then we would have a
clear example of the movement from non-Christian Gnosticism to Christian
Gnosticism.
Doresse argued for the priority of Eug (1948: 137-60) and was followed
by Puech (1963: 248). Till, however, took the opposite position (1955: 54),
without arguing the point. Schenke joined him, after carefully examining and
rejecting the arguments of Doresse (1962: 265-67). (Schenke has since
changed his mind [personal conversation in November, 1982].) A more per
suasive approach (than that of Doresse) in favor of the priority of Eug was
taken by Krause (1964). He began by distinguishing between the material
common to both Eug and SJC and the material each has separately, and
argued that that tractate was primary in which the common material and its
separate material were most compatible. Using this criterion he concluded
that the material special to Eug fitted better with the common material than
did that of SJC, and that Eug therefore preceded SJC.
Although individual points of Krauses argument are not convincing (Par
rott, 1971: 399-404), his method has had a significant effect: since he wrote,
no one has attempted to argue the priority of SJC. It appears that as scholars
have examined the tractates for themselves, in the light of his approach, they
have become convinced of the greater likelihood of the priority of Eug by
observing the artificiality of the dialogue framework of SJC and the differ
ences in vocabulary and ideas between the common material in SJC and its
separate material (on the latter point, see Parrott, 1971: 405-06). The priority
of Eug is now usually simply assumed (e.g., Perkins: 35).
That conclusion would diminish in importance, however, if Eug could be
shown to be Christian in some significant way. Schenke maintained that
there were signs of Christian influence, without giving any specifics (1962:
4 INTRODUCTION
265). Wilson listed terminology that might be Christian (115), but admitted
that it fell short of demonstrating Christian influence. I suggested that the
so-called summary section of Eug-III (85,9ff) was deliberately edited in a
Christian direction, but it is also possible that haplography occurred (1971:
412-13; 1975: 180-81), and in any case Eug-V lacks the changes. The one
rather clear indication of Christian influence in E ug-\\\ is found at the con
clusion, where editing appears to have sharpened the reference to the one
who is expected (90,7-11), so that it easily is seen to refer to Christ in the
next tractate, which is SJC. Since that sharpening is not found in Eug-V, it is
possible that Eug-III has been subject to some Christian modifications, but
that does not alter the basic non-Christian character of the original form of
Eug (similarly, Menard: 137). One should perhaps note here that the last
sentence in Eug-V may be a direct quote from Mark 4:25 or one of its paral
lels, but it could also have been drawn from the common treasury of secular
proverbs assumed by Bultmann as the source for the passage in the gospels
(102-04).
There is another aspect of the relationship between these two tractates that
needs to be discussed, namely, what appears to be their symbiosis. This is
immediately suggested by their juxtaposition in Codex III. It is further sug
gested by the above-mentioned ending of Eug, which in its clearest expres
sion, in Codex III, looks forward to the coming of one who will not need to
be taught but who will speak all these things to you joyously and in pure
knowledge (90,7-11), clearly (in Codex III) pointing to Christ in SJC. What
could be the reason for this juxtaposition and interconnection?
When Doresse discussed SJC, he assumed the tractate was an attempt to
make Christians think that Christ taught Gnosticism (so also Krause, 1964:
223) and suggested that the knowledge Christians had of the existence of Eug
would have made clear to them that that was in fact a fraud (1960: 198). One
suspects that problem would have been obvious to the Gnostics, which sug
gests then that they had something else in mind for SJC, something which
would have made the relating of these two tractates more than a mistake.
An alternative would be that Christian Gnostics were interested in having
those who knew and revered Eug come to know that Christ fulfilled the pro
phecy of Eugnostos (probably initially known by them in its more ambiguous
form found in Codex V). That would make it possible for them to accept
Christ as the new revealer and recognize that he had triumphed over the sin
ister powers, thereby opening the way for them to do so also. In other words,
the intention may have been to convert non-Christian Gnostics to Christian
Gnosticism.
Supporting this is the allusive nature of the references to traditional gnos
tic doctrines in the material added to Eug to produce SJC. The reader learns
something, but not very much, about the ignorant and bad creator god (III
107,5-11), the sin of Sophia (III 114,14-18), the fall of the divine drops of
light into the prison of this cosmic order (III 106,24-107,6, par.), the evil of
sexuality (III 108,10-16, par.), and the punishment of the creator god and his
INTRODUCTION 5
minions (BG 121,13-122,5). In no case is one of these doctrines presented

in a fully developed way. That suggests that the intended audience was made
up of those who already knew those doctrines; that is, that the intended audi
ence were Gnostics. The one doctrine that is fully developed is the doctrine
of Christ. (For a similar argument and conclusion, see Perkins, 1980: 98; see
also Perkins, 1971: 177.)
Eug and SJC could both have a life of their own, as is demonstrated by
Codex V, which has Eug but not S JC ; and BG, which has SJC but not Eug.
But it is the symbiotic relationship as seen in Codex III that seems to reveal
the reason for the creation of SJC.
V. D ATING
The dating of the composition of the tractates is difficult because no date-

able events are referred to in them. Krause has suggested the first or second
centuries C.E. for Eug without specifying the reasons (1974: 26).
D. Trakatellis is more specific, suggesting the beginning of the second cen
tury C.E., because he thinks that Eug belongs early in the period in which the
leading figures of Gnosticism made their appearance (32). However, those
figures produced systems with clear Christian elements, whereas Eug has
none. A date no later than the first century C.E. seems justified. An even ear
lier date is likely. Eug is directed against the views of all the philosophers
(III 70,15). From the brief descriptions of these views, the philosophers can
be identified as Stoic, Epicurean, and the theoreticians of Babylonian astrol
ogy. The latest time when these could be thought of as all the philosophers
was probably the first century B.C.E. (Parrott, 1988).
As to the date of SJC, Puech has dated P. Oxy. 1081 early in the fourth
century, thus providing a terminus ad quem (1950: 98 n. 2; 1963: 245). He
also suggests that SJC might have been composed in the second half of the
second century, or at the latest, the third century, but gives no reason (1963:
248). Till suggests a relative dating between Ap. John (NHC 11,7; 111,7;
IV, 7 ; BG 7) and Pist. Soph. Assuming that SJC is an integrated whole, he
argues that in it the understandable philosophical viewpoint found in Ap.
John and its consistent development are diminished, while SJC seems to
represent an early state in the development of a Weltbild that ends in Pist.
Soph. (Till-Schenke: 56). Doresse puts SJC close to the first books of Pist.
Soph. (1948: 159).
In contrast to these rather late datings, there are certain crucial elements
that taken together suggest an early date. The likelihood that SJC was pro
duced to persuade non-Christian Gnostics to accept Christian Gnosticism has
already been mentioned. That suggests an early date, especially in view of
the fact that it seems to be assumed that the intended audience knows little or
nothing about Christ, although one cannot deny the possibility of a continu
ing body of non-Christian Gnostics to whom Christian Gnostics might have
wanted to appeal.
6 INTRODUCTION
Further, there is the absence of polemics connected with the gnostic-

orthodox struggle. This is seen rather dramatically when the frame material
of SJC is compared with that of Ap. John. In Ap. John, both the beginning
and the ending contain elements that seem to refer to the conflict. John is
depicted as a traditional Jewish Christian (going to the temple) at the start,
who is confronted with charges against Christ by the Pharisee Arimanius. He
is unable to answer them and so turns away from the temple and goes to the
desert (II 1,5-19). John, then, is seen as moving from the inadequate ortho
dox way (based on Jewish tradition) to the gnostic way.
At the end of Ap. John, we sense the defensive posture of a group that
anticipates attack in the instructions from Christ that the words of the revela
tion are to be given only to Johns fellow spirits (for this is the mystery of
the immoveable race), that John is to write down and keep secure what he
has heard, and in the curse that follows against anyone who might sell what is
written (probably to opponents) (II 31,28-37). There is none of that in SJC.
In the beginning the disciples are perplexed (no reason is given) and go to the
place where they have reason to think they will receive answers from the
risen savior. And in the end, they are simply told to continue the savior's
mission, which, according to the account, they begin to do by preaching the
Gospel (i.e., what they have just heard).
Another reason for assigning an early date is the fact that SJC contains
nothing that would clearly indicate that it had been influenced by the great
systems of the middle third of the second century. There are numerous
points of contact, of course, but nothing that demonstrates dependence.
Finally, when one examines the attempt in SJC to integrate the person of
Christ into the system of Eug, it is clear that problems remain: Christ is
identified with Son of Man, but not with Savior; but a major section on the
work of Christ (III 106,24-108,16, par.) is placed immediately after the sec
tion on the appearing of Savior, who is the son of Son of Man (III
106,15-24), which would lead one to think that a second identification of
Christ this time, with Savior was being made. Perhaps in an attempt to
resolve this confusion, the bridge section, which provides a summary of
sorts, in SJC identifies Savior with Son of Man and ignores the son of Son of
Man (BG 108,1-7) (although he is mentioned in the Eug-V parallel). All
this suggests that in SJC we are at the beginning of the process by which
Christian Gnosticism was to become rationalized or theologized.
Taken together, then, these points tend to the conclusion that SJC should
be dated early. If Eug is dated in the first-century B.C.E., then SJC should
probably be dated late in the first or early in the second century.
VI. O R IG IN A L LA N G U A G E
Prior to the identification by Puech of P. Oxy. 1081 as a leaf from a Greek

copy of SJC (1950: 98, n. 2), Doresse asserted that SJC was composed origi
INTRODUCTION 7
nally in Coptic (1948: 152). But once the identification was made, a Coptic
original became improbable. And given a Greek original of SJC, a Greek
original of Eug is very likely. Further confirmation of this is provided by the
presence in Eng-III of an untranslated conjugated Greek verb (75,8); evi
dently it was unfamiliar to the scribe-translator, so he left it as it was.
VII. PRO V EN A N C E
Trakatellis holds that nothing can be concluded about the provenance of

Eug. The fact that the scribe of Gos. Eg. has the name Eugnostos as his spirir
tual name, and could therefore be the same person as the writer of Eug (on
the unlikelihood of which, see the next section), might suggest Egypt. But
Trakatellis argues (following Bohlig-Wisse) that one cannot be certain that
Gos. Eg. was in fact directed to the Egyptians (32).
There is, however, another element in Eug that suggests Egypt, namely,
the reference to the three hundred sixty days of the year (III 84,4-5). In
Eug the number of days of the year is thought of as existing because it is a
reflection (type) of the 360 supercelestial powers. Hence it is part of the
necessary ordering of things. From ancient times the Egyptians had calcu
lated the year as having 360 days, divided into twelve months of thirty days
each, plus five epagomenal days (Bickerman: 42). Furthermore, when the
Romans conquered Egypt they left the 360 day period intact, decreeing only
that every four years another day should be added to the epagomenal days
(Decree of Augustus, 26 B.C. [Bickerman: 49]), thus bringing the Egyptian
year into line with the Julian year, which was standard elsewhere in the
Roman Empire.
Przybylski has suggested several possible sources other than Egypt for the
360 day reference (1 Enoch, Jubilees, a purely theoretical rather than a prac
tical calendar, ancient Babylon) (60-62), but it seems unlikely that any of
them would have been the source without some word of explanation to the
reader. It was only in Egypt where such a reference would have been taken
for granted.4
A further reason for believing in an Egyptian provenance is found in the
discussion of sources in Section IX.
If Eug had an Egyptian provenance, it is reasonable to think that SJC had
one also.
4 As noted, 360 days did not constitute the whole year for the Egyptians. But the references
in Eug-IH and Eug-V do not claim that, and indeed Eug-lU seems to suggest that it is only a
part of the year, with its strange word order and odd (for the context) preposition:
no)MT{T}ojece n t n TepoM<n> n z o o y , lit., The three hundred sixty from the year days
(84,4-5). It should be noted that the Valentinians also assumed a 360 day period (Iren., Haer.
2.15.1, and Val.Exp. [XI,2] 30,34-38).
8 INTRODUCTION
VIII. W RITERS AND A U D IEN C ES
Eug
The name Eugnostos is not widely attested, but there is one reference to it
(Pape and Bensler: s.v.; contra Bellet [47]). From the tractate there is no rea
son to think that it is anything other than a proper noun (derived from an
adjective). It may be a spiritual name here (in contrast to a birth name), since
Eugnostos is the spiritual name of the scribe of the colophon of Gos. Eg. (Ill
69,10-11). Or, if we can assume that the non-Christian Eug was earlier than
the colophon of the Christianized Gos. Eg., it may be that the name became
spiritual within a gnostic community because it was the name of the revered
writer of our tractate. Bellets conjecture that Eugnostos is the title of an
official in a gnostic circle requires for credibility an unlikely transposition,
since the title should be in second position in relation to the name of the per
son possessing the title. Such a transposition has not been found in other
sources, as Bellet himself admits (47 and 55-56).
The designation ttm akapioc , the Blessed, which appears only in
-III, would probably not have been applied by the writer to himself, since
it is honorific, and should therefore be considered secondary. It may have
been inserted to indicate that Eugnostos was dead. Such usage was not lim
ited to Christian communities, contrary to Bellet (55) (see TDNT 4:362
[Hauck] and LSJ: s.v.).
The writer of Eug may have been a teacher of some significance, since his
writing is preserved in two quite different versions, testifying to long usage.
In view of the fact that the compiler of Codex III placed Gos. Eg. and Eug
side-by-side, he may have identified Eugnostos with the scribe of the colo
phon of Gos. Eg. If that was the case, it seems unlikely that he was correct
(contra Doresse, 1948: 159; 1960: 196), in view of the probability that Eug
was considerably earlier than Gos. Eg.
Eug is ostensively addressed to those who are his (ID 70,1-2). His
may refer to Eugnostos himself, in which case the audience would be his dis
ciples. But one gains the impression from the tractate that the audience may
not be familiar with some of Eugnostos teachings (see, e.g., Ill 74,12-14).
If that is the case, his could refer to a deity to whom the audience is
thought to belong. Sons of Unbegotten Father are mentioned in III 75,22.
SJC
The author of SJC wants it to appear that he is a disciple (III 91,12-19,
par.).5 However in point of fact we have no knowledge of who the author is.
5In Pist. Soph., Philip, Matthew and Thomas, all of whom are named in SJC (along with
Bartholew and Mary), are designated as those who are to write everything that Jesus says
(71,18-72,1; 72,11-20).
INTRODUCTION 9
It seems clear, however, who the audience is. It is made up of those who,
like the disciples in SJC, seek answers to basic questions about the meaning
and purpose of the whole cosmic system, and about their place in it. As men
tioned above, they are probably non-Christian Gnostics who are being
encouraged by the writer to adopt Christianized Gnosticism.
IX. SOU RCES OF EU G N O STO S
It may be that Eug originally existed without the letter format, as a cosmo
gonic text, as Krause has suggested (1964: 222). The minor items that make
it a letter could easily have been added, but there is no way to be certain (see
XVII below).
There is evidence, however, that Eug, as we have received it, in both its
versions, is the result of major earlier editorial activity. That can be seen in
two places: in the first major portion of Eug (III 70,1-85,9, par.) (Part A),
where two originally separate speculative patterns seem to have been com
bined; and in the second major part (III 85,9-90,3, par.) (Part B) where evi
dence is found that it may originally have been an independent unit.
A. Two Speculative Patterns in Part A
The two patterns emerge when a comparison is made of the first group of
major deities and the second, the latter of which is described as the type of
those who preceded them (HI 82,10-11, a phrase omitted in Eug-V\), that
is, the type of the first group. The following chart shows the comparison:
First Group (III 71,13-82,6, par.) Second Group (III 82,7-83,2, par.)
(Variant terms found in only one text are indicated.)
1) He Who Is; Unbegotten; Father 1) Unbegotten (III); Unbegotten
of the Universe; Forefather; First <Father of> All things (V). Cow-
Existent (HI) (III 71,13-75,2,3) so rt: All-Wise Sophia.
2) Self-Father; Self-Begetter; Con- 2) Self-begotten. Consort: All-
fronter (III); Self-grown, Self- Mother Sophia (III),
constructed Father (III); He who
Put Forth Himself (V) (III 75,3-11;
76,14-17)
3) Man (V); Immortal Man; 3) Begetter (IH); Begotten (V).
Immortal Androgynous Man (III); Consort: All-Begettress Sophia
Self-perfected Begetter (V); (III).
Begetter Mind who Perfects Him
self (V); Begotten; Perfect Mind
(HI); Father; Self-Father Man; Man
of the Depth (V); First Man (III).
10 INTRODUCTION
Consort'. All-wise Begettress

Sophia; Thought, She of All Wis
doms, Begettress of the Wisdoms
(V); Truth (V); Great Sophia (V).
(Ill 76,19-V 8,32)
4) First-begotten Son of God (V); 4) First Begetter (III); Begotten of
First Begetter Father (III); Adam of the First (V). Consort: First Beget
the Light (III); son of Man. Con tress Sophia (III).
sort : First-begotten Sophia, Mother
of the Universe; Love. (V 8,33-111
81,21)
5) Savior, Begetter of All Things; 5) All-Begetter (III); All-begotten
All-Begetter (84,13) Son of Son of (V). Consort: Love Sophia.
Man (V 13,12-13). Consort:
Sophia, All-Begettress (III); Pistis
Sophia (III 81,21-82,6)
6) Arch-Begetter (III) (V, in la
cuna). Consort: Pistis Sophia.
The most obvious and significant thing to observe is that the second group
has one more deity than the first. It is also notable that the name of the con
sort of the fifth deity in the second group, namely, Love, is one of the names
of the consort of the fourth being in the first group. Also, the name Pistis
Sophia, which belongs to the consort of the sixth deity in the second group, is
one of the names of the consort of the fifth deity in the first group. Notable
also is the fact that the second group lacks the terms Man, Son of Man, Son
of Son of Man, and Savior.
Contrary to III 82,10-11, then, the second group is not now the type of
those who preceded them in any complete sense.
If we ask which list is primary, the answer seems to be the second, since
the number six is important subsequently in the tractate (see discussion
below), whereas the number five is not.
If we assume that III 82,10-11 originally was correct, the first group once
had six members; now it lacks Arch-Begetter.
The reason for the dropping of the antetype of Arch-Begetter seems to be
that another pattern was superimposed on the first group, the pattern of
Immortal Man, Son of Man, and son of Son of ManSavior. This pattern
had no figure to identify with the antetype of Arch-Begetter.6
6The name Arch-Begetter (by some translators, simply transliterated as Archigenetor) does
not appear in Eug after IE 82,18; however, it does appear in SJC, in a non-Eug section, where it
is identified with Yaldabaoth, the ignorant and malevolent creator god (BG 119,14-16).
INTRODUCTION 11
The original form of the first group, then, would have resembled that of
the second, except raised to a higher level of perfection. Thus, Unbegotten
Father in the second group has a consort, while Unbegotten in the first is sim
ply one. Moreover, Unbegotten in the second group is merely father of the
multiplicities (all things), while Unbegotten in the first group is Father of
the Universe. Therefore the first group would originally have looked some
thing like the following:
1) He Who Is; Unbegotten; Father of the Universe; Forefather; First

Existent.
2) Self-Father; Self-Begetter; Confronter; Self-grown, Self-constructed
Father.
3) Begotten; Self-perfected Begetter; Perfect Mind; Begetter Mind who
Perfects Himself (V). Consort: All-wise Begettress Sophia; Thought, She of
All Wisdoms, Begettress of the Wisdoms; Truth; Great Sophia.
4) First-begotten; First Begetter Father. Consort : First-begotten Sophia,
Mother of the Universe.
5) Begetter of All Things; All-Begetter. Consort: Love Sophia.
6) Arch-Begetter. Consort: Pistis Sophia.
The pattern here is one that is found in Egyptian religion: An initial all-
encompassing divinity (Amun, in Egyptian thought), creates a separate divin
ity by himself (i.e., no consort is involved). This divinity is then responsible
for the creation of four other divinities, each of whom have a single female
consort, thus making a total of eight (in Egyptian thought, the Eight Urgdtter
of Hermopolis). These, in turn, are responsible for the creation of various
heavenly realms and other divine beings, leading ultimately to the structures
of this world (in Egyptian thought, they create the gods who bring structure
to the cosmos). This pattern can be traced to the Theban theology of the
Ramesside period and (judging from Eug) became more abstract and hence
more universal by the end of the Ptolemaic period. Since the pattern was not
found elsewhere in the period under study, it seems reasonable to think that
Egyptian religion is its source (Parrott, 1987: 82-88).
The pattern imposed on this reconstructed original pattern, namely, the
pattern of three androgynous men, Immortal man, Son of Man, and Savior,
appears to be the result of speculation on the first five chapters of Genesis.
An important clue to that is the identification of Son of Man with Adam. He
is not earthly Adam, of course, but his antetype, Adam of the Light (III
81,12), who exists in the transcendent realm. Another clue is the
identification of Son of Man as also Son of God (V 9,2-3).
The idea that Adam was androgynous comes from Gen 1:27 and 5:1,
where it is said that God created Adam male and female. He also created
him in his own image, which can be taken to mean that God himself is man
and that he too is androgynous. Hence, if antetype Adam is Son of Man,
antetype God is Immortal Man, Adams father. Son of son of Man-Savior
12 INTRODUCTION
should then in all probability be identified with the antetype of Seth, since
only of Seth is it said that he was begotten in Adams image (Gen 5:3) (and
hence was androgynous).
The three man pattern appears to presuppose a myth like that found in
Apoc. Mos., where God is the benign ruler and Seth is the eschatological
savior of Adams progeny (13.1-3). One can speculate that the reason for
combining this pattern with the Egyptian one was that those who thought of
Seth as a savior felt the need to give their beliefs the support of a broader
theological-philosophical context. The beginning of Eug makes clear that the
writer, at any rate, felt that he was having to deal with a spiritual threat from
various philosophical teachings teachings that presupposed either that
there was no transcendent world (Stoicism and astrology) or, if there were,
that there was no connection between that world and this one (Epicureanism)
(Parrott, 1988: 166-67).
The two patterns were combined by the simple expedient of adding the
names of the second pattern at appropriate places. This is the same method
used in SJC, where, in the Christianization process, Christ is identified with
Son of Man. Probably the same thing has occurred in such tractates as Ap.
John and Gos. Eg. (see Krause, 1964: 223; Hedrick, 1981). Since the names
of the consorts are present in the second group, which was not affected by
this combining, it seems likely that the three-man pattern lacked such names,
and was simply identified as androgynous. As we have noted, because there
was no fourth man, the antetype of Arch-Begetter (in the second group) was
dropped. But instead of merely dropping his consort Pistis Sophia, the editor
identified her with the consort of the preceding figure, which led, then, to the
shifting of the name Love from that figure to the next preceding one.
These names must have had some importance in the conceptuality of the edi
tor, but what it might have been at the early date of Eug is not clear.
Part A then permits us to see the combining of a universalized Egyptian
cosmological system and a speculative system based on Genesis. To the
extent that these or similar elements are present in combined and elaborated
form in later tractates, such as Ap. John and Gos. Eg., we are probably
justified in thinking of Eug as the source.
B. An Originally Independent Second Part:

Part B (III 85,9-90,3, par.)
The originally independent character of Part B is suggested by the fact

that it is at odds in a number of important ways with the earlier part of the
tractate. The following analysis will show the points of conflict.
Part B is introduced by a bridge section, whose purpose is to relate it to
the foregoing. In particular, the intention is to relate the number of aeons in
Part B to those in Part A and to suggest that the aeons to be described are the
types of the preceding ones. It is here that the problems begin.
INTRODUCTION 13
The earliest version of the bridge section is undoubtedly in E ug-V

(13,8-20), as Krause observed (1964: 221), which states that three aeons pre
ceded (the same number as in Part B), with another aeon (that of Unbegotten,
presumably) embracing them. The three are the aeons of Immortal Man, Son
of Man, and Son of Son of Man. Left out of account, however, are Self-
Begetter (the reflection of Unbegotten) and the twelve aeons created by All-
Begetter for the twelve angels (III 84,13-17, par.). To be sure, no aeon is
mentioned as having been created for Self-Begetter in Part A, but neither is
one mentioned for son of Son of Man. So the three aeons of the bridge sec
tion (in Eug-V) do not accurately reflect the preceding material. It appears
that they were designed to meet the need created by the presence of three
aeons in Part B, in the light of what might be called the typological dogma.
What is described subsequently is called the Eighth that appeared in
Chaos (III 85,19-21, par.). Eighth is probably to be thought of as the
highest sphere of the visible cosmos (Chaos), perhaps the sphere of the fixed
stars (the seven planetsincluding the sun and mooneach having their
own spheres below it; for the fixed stars, see the description of the multitu
dinous lights in III 86,6-8). However, one cannot rule out the possibility, in
view of the discussion below, that Eighth refers to the eighth day of crea
tion.
The creation described in Part B is said to be the work of Immortal Man,
even though his work seemed to have been concluded in Part A (V 8,15-18).
The whole section appears to be based on Genesis 1-5, as was the case with
the three-man pattern earlier. The clue to the Genesis connection is in the
discussion of the androgyne Assembly ( k k a h c ia ), which begins in III
86,24, par. Its female portion is called Life (zojh), and it is explained that
in this way (by giving her this name) it might be shown that from a female
came the life in all the aeons (III 87,5-8, par.). That is closely parallel to
the LXX version of Gen 3:20, where the woman is given the name Zan\
rather than Eve, and where it is explained that she has that name because
she is the mother of all living things (oxt a w r | |J.TiTr|p ndvtcov t <b v ^ covtoov).
Her mate, however, retains the name of the androgyne, as also happens in
Genesis 3, but here he is called Assembly rather than Adam. The replace
ment of Adam with Assembly seems strange at first, since the Greek for
Assembly is feminine. It thus breaks with the convention that the gender
of names taken from common nouns should be the same as the sex of the
being who is named (but see III 112,7-8, where it also occurs). However it
seems clear that the writer is simply following the pattern of Genesis 3,
without giving much thought to the convention. (Knowledge of the Hebrew
Bible, where the word usually translated eKtcXriaia in the LXX is masculine
[l?np], is unlikely in view of the general lack of such knowledge among Egyp
tian Jews [e.g., Philo].) In any case, there is no hint of this change of termi
nology in Part A, where, as has been noted, the term Adam is used (III 81,12,
par.).
14 INTRODUCTION
The change suggests that behind the account in Part B lies a body of
speculative thought identifying antetype Adam (taken in a collective sense)
with the type of an assembly that would subsequently appear, perhaps the
assembly of the Gnostics. This seems unrelated to the statements in Part A
that antetype Adam was Son of Man, of the Light (III 81,12, par.), and the
type for time (HI 83,22-23, par.).
The editor of Eug seems unaware of the tension here, or, indeed, that
speculation on Adam lies behind Assembly. In what appears to be an edi
torial expansion (since it relates Part B to Part A), he identifies Assembly as
the type not of Son of Man / Adam of the Light but of the Assembly that
surpasses heaven (III 86,22-24, par.), which is described in III 81,3-10,
par., and is in fact the creation of Son of Man / Adam (III 81,1-12, par.).
Assembly and his mate begin the spiritual generation that leads to the
appearance of multifarious immortals (III 87,8-88,3, par.). The creation of
the immortals is surprising, since the aeons of the immortals had earlier been
described as above the sphere of the Eighth (III 85,17-18, par.). (This gen
erating activity suggests typological speculation on Gen 4:25-5:32, where the
sons of Adam and Eve are listed, along with their amazingly long life spans.)
The immortals in turn provide themselves with great kingdoms, through
the authority of Immortal Man and his consort Sophia (III 88,3-89,3, par.),
who is here given the name Silence, which is different from her name in
Part A, namely All-wise Begettress (III 77,3-4, par.). This realm, then, is
said to provide the types for all subsequent creations (III 89,6-15, par.). That
would seem to be in tension with the statement in Part A that our aeon is the
type of Immortal Man (III 83,20-22, par.) (not the type of a separate realm
created by him) and that temporal aspects of our aeon are the types of other
beings described in Part A (III 83,22-84,11, par.).
In addition to these points of tension, it is worth noting that Part B seems
to have been diminished in size as a result of being connected with Part A.
The three aeons that have already been mentioned (V 14,3-7; III 86,8-13)
are (1) beginning (V) or first (III), (2) the middle, and (3) the unending (V)
and/or the perfect (V and III). Little is said about the first two in Part B and
attention is concentrated on the third. However, the identification of the first
two is important for our discussion, and that can be attempted by looking
more closely at the third aeon.
The third aeon is named for Assembly (III 86,1417, par.). If Assembly is
initially antetype Adam and Eve (as androgyne), and then antetype Adam
alone, then it would be reasonable to think that the third aeon is to be related
(as antetype) to the account of creation that begins in Gen 2:4. The term
unending would be appropriate, since there is no concluding formula for
creation there, as there is in Gen 2:1. The term perfect would also be
appropriate, since the third contains the ideal patterns for subsequent crea
tions.
INTRODUCTION 15
If that is the third aeon, then the first (beginning) would perhaps be con
nected with the creation account that starts with Gen 1:1 (In the begin
ning___ ). The second, the middle, then might refer to the divine sabbath
in Gen 2:2-3, which identification would be supported by V 14,7-9, as it is
restored ([The first] in it was called [Above] Unity [and Rest], implying
that Unity and Rest was the Second aeon) (but note the wg-III and SJC
parallels).
These three, then, may well have reflected the whole of the Genesis crea
tion account and been intended to present a complete account of cosmic ori
gins. One can conjecture that the description of the three was truncated by
the elimination of most of the discussion about the first two aeons, in order to
fit the account into the scheme established in Part A.
When one takes into consideration the other differences we have noted, it
is not unreasonable to think that originally Part B (minus the bridge section
and the conclusion, and with the inclusion of the deleted material) stood by
itself, as an account of the creation of the cosmos by the antetype of the crea
tor God of Genesis, namely androgynous Immortal Man. The first aeon
would perhaps have been the super-celestial and invisible realm, the third,
the visible realm, and the second, the space that separated the two. The
account may well have ended where it ends now, just at the point where our
part of the visible cosmos would come into existence.
To summarize, in its present context, Part B appears to be a description of
the highest level of the visible universe (the Eighth), and its three aeons are
seen as types of three supercelestial and hence invisible ones. The evidence
suggests, however, that Part B was originally an independent speculative
account based on Genesis 1-5, which provided a total description of the
universe, up to the point of the creation of the world as it is.
Looking back on the whole of this section, we have found that Part A is
made up of two originally different speculative systems that have been com
bined; and now, in the discussion of Part B, we have found a third specula
tive scheme, which an editor has attempted to bring into some sort of har
mony with Part A.
One must ask why it would have seemed necessary to combine these
three. Why not simply start fresh in constructing a speculative system that
would be inwardly consistent? First, as we have learned from the critical
study of the book of Genesis, the bringing together of accounts that speak
essentially of the same thing (e.g., the accounts of creation, the flood, etc.)
may be a sign of the alignment of groups for whom these accounts had sacred
significance before that alignment. The recognition that one of the systems
contains an indirect reference to Seth, suggests the identity of one of the
groups Sethians, or more likely, proto-Sethians. It was this group that
made use of the Egyptian cosmological pattern. An ideological reason has
already been suggested for that to have a broader theoretical structure for
dealing with philosophical challenges. But the fact that it was Egyptian may
suggest a strong Egyptian component in the group, for whom the pattern
16 INTRODUCTION
would have had special significance. As to Part B, it is not possible to iden

tify what group might have held it in special regard, but it is so different from
Part A that there must have been a separate group of origin. Second, there is
the conviction that truth is a self-consistent unity (V 6,9-14; 17,13-15). That
is, the various parts of truth must agree among themselves. If one believes
that different parts of truth are communicated separately, as the final editor of
Eug appears to, then one could conclude that when those parts are put
together, probably under the guidance of Thought (V 3,29-4,5, par.), one
would have a broader, but, ex hypothesi, still consistent, expression of Truth.
Obvious differences among the parts could be ascribed to human error in the
reception of revelation and therefore could be thought of as correctable at a
later time (III 90,4-11).
It may be that this explanation would also account for later developments
in gnostic systems, where disparate elements seem often to be involved.
It should be noted here that there is nothing in the sources of Eug that can
be considered classically Gnostic. The use of the theory of types means that
both parts of Eug assume that the structures of this world are reflections of
the supercelestial world, and not the creation of an inferior deity. There is
only one reference to distinctively gnostic ideology, and that seems clearly
editorial (III 85,8). However, Eug should nonetheless be considered proto-
Gnostic, since it provided a theoretical basis for later developments that led
to classic Gnosticism, as SJC shows.
X. R EL A T IO N SH IP OF THE TEXTS
We have already noted that Eug was prior to SJC and that Eug-lU was
apparently edited in the light of SJC by sharpening the prediction at the end.
Since that sharpening is only apparent because of the parallel in Eug-V, the
latters reading is probably to be thought of as earlier here. In addition to the
prediction, there are two other places, which we noted, where Eug-V seems
earlier than Eug-lll, namely, the titles in the incipit and subscript.
We must now look at other evidence that bears on the question of the rela
tionship of the texts.
An examination of the parallels shows that the two texts of SJC are very
close. Differences in vocabulary and sentence structure mostly seem to
reflect different Coptic translators rather than different Greek Vorlagen.
Gaps in one text in comparison with the other, which are infrequent, can be
explained as the result of homoioteleuton (e.g., BG 89,16-17, which is lack
ing in S/C-III) or minor editorial activity (e.g., BG 83,17-19, which js also
lacking in S/C-III). If we take into consideration P. Oxy. 1081, which is
very similar to the two Coptic texts, we are probably justified in thinking that
there was only one major edition of SJC.
A further examination shows that the text of Eug used in composing SJC
generally was closer to Eug-lU than to Eug-V. A good indication of that is
the bridge section (III 85,11-21 || BG 108,1-18; V 13,8-18). SJC-BG has
INTRODUCTION 17
two aeons, which are embraced by a third. E ug-III has the same pattern,
although the first two are listed in reverse order. But Eug-V has three aeons,
embraced by a fourth. Beyond that we can observe that the parallels between
Eug-lll and the two copies of SJC are very close, both in terms of the extent
of text in parallel sections and in language. On the other hand, Eug-V
differs, in regard to the extent of text alone, some eighteen times, at points
where the other texts agree with each other.
It seems impossible to tell which text of SJC might be closer to iswg-III.
At four points Eug-lU agrees with 5/C -B G in having more text than 5/C -III
(HI 72,3-6 || BG 84,13-17; III 74,3-4 || BG 89,16-17; III 86,22-24 || BG
111,3-5; III 89,5-6 || BG 115,1415). In two of these instances, however,
the lack in 5/C -III might well be the result of homoioteleuton. In the other
two, scribal error of some sort would not be surprising. There are also a few
places where E ug-l\\ and 5/C -III agree against 5/C -B G (e.g., Ill 72,11-13 ||
95,5-7 || BG 85,6-9; III 73,12-13 || 96,7-10 || BG 87,1-4; III 76,23-24 ||
101,7-8 || BG 94,9-11; HI 87,9 || 111,12 || BG 112,3), but these are minor
and attributable to coincidence, and may have arisen in the process of transla
tion into Coptic.
Although the text used in the composition of 5/C more closely resembled
Eug-HI than Eug-V, there are two significant places where Eug-V is closer
to SJC. First, after the address proper, E ug-V has the same verb as the 5/C
parallels (V 1,3 || III 92,7 || BG 80,4), toytoey, I want (Gr. SeXto). Neither
that verb nor an equivalent is found in Eug-lll. And second, in the last sen
tence of Eug-V. both it and the two 5/C parallels have the word N z o y o ,
more. That word and the sentences it is found in have no parallel in
Eug-lll. Although the sentences are not exact parallels, there is a similar
idea in both (Eug-V: To everyone who has, more will be added; 5 /C : that
you [the disciples] might shine in Light [even] more than these.), which sug
gests that at this point the writer of 5 /C was looking at a text of Eug closer to
Eug-V.
We can conclude that the text used in the composition of 5/C was gen
erally like that of Eug-IH, but that in a few places it was closer to Eug-V.
Changes in the text that resulted in Mg-III, as it stands, would have occurred
subsequent to the composition of 5/C.
In comparison with Eug-III, E ug-V appears to have undergone consider
able expansion. Although EugV has one significant gap (it lacks III
73,14-20), there are fourteen instances where it has more text (according to
the arrangement of parallels in this text and excluding the section
corresponding to the missing pp. 79-80 in wg-III). It should probably be
thought of as later than the text represented by Eug-Ul. However, as we
have noted, it seems to have some readings that are earlier. Eug-V, then,
appears to have developed independently and to have been subject to
modification over a longer period of time.
18 INTRODUCTION
The following time chart diagrams the conclusions about text relationships
arrived at above:
(1st cent. B.C.E.)
It is not clear why Eug-III and the SJC texts did not share the extensive
kind of modification that is found Eug-V. It may have had to do with the
pairing of Eug-lU and SJC, which could well have acted as a brake on nor
mal scribal tendencies to add glosses, since it would have been evident that
the texts had to remain quite similar. (That assumes that Eug-lU and SJC
were paired for most of their textual history.) It is also possible that both
texts came to be thought of in some measure as scripture among certain
groups of Gnostics.
The Coptic versions of Eug and SJC were translated by different persons.
That is shown by the passage left untranslated in Eug-lU, and its parallels
(75,7-8 || III 99,8-9 || BG 91,10-12 || V 4,21-3). In no case is that passage
treated the same. While Eug-III does not translate it, S/C-III attempts to do
so, but does it incorrectly, and SJC -BG also tries and succeeds. In Eug-V,
the passage is translated, but quite differendy from SJC-BG. (For a recon
struction of the Greek, see the section later in the volume on P. Oxy. 1081
[lines 46-50].)
As to the Coptic translations in their totality, Eug-lU, SJC-III and
SJC-BG all seem related. The grammar, sentence structure and vocabulary
are frequently the same. In contrast, E ug-V is often quite different. The
similarities of Eug-III, S/C-III and SJC-BG may be accounted for by
assuming that they were translated by members of the same or related scribal
groups, which had developed more or less common translation traditions.
(For individual differences between the translators of Eug-lU and SJC-BG,
see endnote 4.)
XI. TH E CO DICES
A codicological analysis of NHC III has been done by Frederik Wisse

(1975). In the process he has also described the characteristics of the scribal
hand. Codicological analyses of NHC V and BG have been done by Robin
son (1979: 16-30; 36-44). His analysis of BG supersedes the one in
Till-Schenke (331-32). Further developments in the analysis of these
INTRODUCTION 19
codices are to be found in Robinson (1984: chaps. 3 [The Quires]; 4 [The

Rolls]; 5 [The Kollemata]; and 6 [The Covers]).
As to the dating of the codices themselves, the material in the cartonnage
of the leather cover of NHC V is dated between 298 and 323 C.E. (Bams, et
al.: 3), which provides a terminus a quo for the inscribing of the codex, but is
only suggetive of the terminus ad quem, since the scraps used for the carton
nage could have come from a time considerably before the time of inscribing.
Unfortunately the cartonnage of Codex III is no longer extant (Facsimile Edi
tion : xiii). The date of BG was discussed above (see I). A recent examina
tion of the cartonnage from the BG cover suggests that the cartonnage should
be dated sometime late in the third century or early in the fourth (Treu).
XII. PH Y SIC A L STATE OF TH E TRACTATES
Eug-V. The Codex as a whole is unevenly preserved (Parrott, 1979: 3-4),

and Eug is the least well preserved of all the tractates. Substantial portions of
the tops and bottoms of all the leaves are missing (more of the latter than the
former). In addition, the first eight pages have significant gaps in the midst of
the remaining text. Fading occurs throughout and is particularly marked on
the first three right-hand pages. Flaking is found on p. 11.
It should be added that the quality of the papyrus is among the poorest in
the library. Examples of this can be found on pp. 1 and 5, in the breaks in the
vertical fibers, and the heavy, discolored horizontal fiber on p. 6, all of which
forced the scribe to compensate in one way or another.
Numerous fragments were placed prior to the publishing of the facsimile
edition (1975) and therefore need no comment here. However, two were
placed subsequently. On August 8, 1977, Stephen Emmel, working at the
Coptic Museum in Cairo, placed two fragments, nos. 1 and 40, in the inside
lower margin area of pp. 5 and 6, thus providing more text at the beginning
of 5,27-29 and at the end of 6,29-31 (see 9*f/10*f in Addenda et Corrigenda
in Robinson, 1984).
Eug-lll and SJC -lll. Three leaves are missing from the tractates: 79-80,
109-10, and 115-16. Wisse has proposed that they (and three others in the
codex) were removed by a dealer for showing to prospective buyers, which
would sugget that they may still be extant (1975: 227).
Damage attributable to age and rough handling by the discoverers or mid
dlemen is very limited in comparison with Codex V. Reconstruction of the
text is required on pp. 70-74 (lower inner margin area), 73-88 (middle of the
top area, extending down to the 5th line at one point), 87, 89, 93 (top outer
comer), 95-100 (top, toward the inner margin), 105-14 (middle, inner mar
gin area), 117-19 (middle third of page, from the inner margin to approx. 3
cm. from the outer margin). The MS is remarkably free of flaking or fading.
SJC-BG. The leaves on the whole are well preserved. Restorations are
needed on pp. 96 (outer margin area), 97-106 (top margin area) and 111-18
(inner upper margin area). Fading occurs on pp. 77-79 and 118. One leaf
20 INTRODUCTION
(85-86) was cracked or tom in antiquity subsequent to inscribing and was

repaired with narrow strips of papyrus pasted over the break on both sides of
the leaf. The strips on p. 86 partially cover letters of the text.
XIII. SC R IB A L C H A R A C TE R ISTIC S
A. Errors and other Peculiarities
Eug-V
I have earlier listed some of the errors found here (1979: 4-5). The
present list is based on a more intensive study of the tractate and is therefore
more complete.
1. Errors corrected by the scribe
a. Haplography corrected by letters written above the line or in the mar
gin at the place of omission: 6,6.24; 7,17. In each case a stroke is
placed above the letter. That occurs elsewhere in the codex only in
28,8.22. For similar corrections without a stroke, see 26,6.10.18; 27,3;
31,9.13; 56,23. This difference suggests there may have been more
than one corrector of the codex.
b. Deletion of incorrect letters by dotting: 7,26.33.
c. Replacement of incorrect letters by letters written on top of them (i.e.,
covering them) without erasure: 2,18; 9,1; 10,3; 14,4.
d. Marking out of an unnecessary letter: 14,4.
2. Errors not corrected by the scribe.
a. Haplography: 2,16; 8,10; 9,17; 10,18.
b. Unnecessary letters: 5,18; 15,4.
c. Incorrect letters: 5,18; 6,29; 7,16; 7,20-22; 7,27; 8,7; 10,19.
3. Other peculiarities
a. Omission of a circumflex with zu> at 17,7.
b. Use of a dot (stop) to set off an attributive from the noun it depends
on (5,4; 7,10; 17,14), perhaps as a way of rendering a Greek attributive
adjective in the second position (note that the parallels for 5,4 and
17,14 have relative clauses in place of the attributives).
c. Use of low dots as word separators in 8,7.16; 12,10 (see also 34,10).
d. In 7,25 a dot may replace a sentence pronoun.
e. Numeral written at end of 11,20 (a gloss, similar to those later in the
codex [Parrott, 1979: 5]), with a stroke above.
f. Instead of using a second present with a noun and an adverbial expres
sion, the scribe in one instance uses a sentence pronoun and puts the
adverbial expression in first position (11,14). Also sentence pronouns
are used as shorthand for cyume e - in 7,2429 and for u) aymoyt 6
epooY x e in 11,18-20 (cf. Ill 106,22).
g. x is mistakenly written for x in 6,29; 7,20-22.
INTRODUCTION 21
Eug-lll and SJC -lll

The scribe of Codex III is much more error prone than his counterpart in
Codex V.
1. Errors corrected by the scribe.
a. Haplography, corrected by letters written above the line at the place of
omission: 72,14; 91,11; 95,2; 105,8; 113,11.
b. Replacement of erased or partially erased letters by letters written on
top of them: 70,2; 71,21; 72,8.21; 73,12.19.22; 77,16; 84,3; 85,9.16;
87,10; 89,10.12; 91,2; 94,15.20; 96,15 (correction of dittography);
97,11; 100,21; 102,7; 106,13; 107,1.6; 113,11; 118,2.5.6; 119,7.
c. Erasure of unnecessary letters, etc.: 81,11 (erased point); 85,8; 87,22;
92,24 (erased dot); 95,24; 96,14 (erased stroke).
d. Replacement of marked out letters by letters written above them: 72,12;
95,6 (marking out omitted); 97,18; 113,8. In all of these a change of
meaning occurs.
e. Marking out of unnecessary letters: 72,12; 89,10; 95,6; 106,19 (dialec
tal change); 113,8.
f. Re-forming of a letter to make another without erasure: 73,4.
It is possible that a second scribe made some of these corrections. The
letters written by the corrector under d seem somewhat different from
letters in the rest of the tractate, but the differences are not sufficient to
make a determination of a second scribe certain (see Bohlig-Wisse for a
similar judgment regarding 111,2 [4]; Wisse expresses more assurance
about there being only one scribe in his later essay [1975: 236]).
2. Errors not corrected by the scribe.
a. Haplography: 71,5; 73,10.14; 76,14; 83,5; 86,3.4.10.14.17; 89,10;
94,13(7); 95,22; 96,2.23; 97,7.17; 98,24.25; 99,8; 102,9; 103,6.10.23;
104,1; 107,7.8.21; 111,18.20; 113,7.
b. Unnecessary letters: 74,10; 76,5 (dittography); 77,7; 84,5 (dittogra-
phy).16; 85,4; 86,17; 95,6; 97,3 (dittography). 18; 99,11; 113,8; 118,1
(dittography).
c. Incorrect letters: 78,22-23 (reversal of letters); 82,2; 83,13.14; 84,13;
86,7; 87,23; 89,2; 91,15; 93,22; 101,20; 105,22; 106,14; 107,11;
113,1.
d. Corruptions: 86,17; 99,8-9.19-22; 112,7-11.
3. Other Peculiarities.
a. In 99,8-9 a Greek phrase is partially, and incorrectly, translated. It is
left untranslated or rendered correctly in the parallels.
b. The status pronominalis of c o j t m is always spelled c o t m c #.
c. The lack of care of the scribe is further attested by random drops of ink
that appear here and there; e.g., at 92,1.10.14; 94,12-13; 100,8.
d. A sentence pronoun is used as shorthand for qjayMOYTe e p o c x e in
106,22 (cf.V 11,18-20).
22 INTRODUCTION
SJC-BG
1. Errors corrected by the scribe.
a. Haplography, corrected by letters written above the line at the place of
omission: 84,1; 89,14; 92,2; 102,15; 112,16; 127,8.
b. Replacement of erased letters by letters written on top of them: 92,18;
116,18.
c. Erasure of unnecessary letters: 93,13; 108,15; 109,12; 116,17.
d. Marking out of unnecessary letters: 78,10.
2. Errors not corrected by the scribe
a. Haplogrpahy: 84,3.12; 86,11; 89,17; 91,16; 93,10; 95,10; 98,6;
101,12.18; 102,9; 110,4.5.11; 111,3.7; 112,7.10.12.16; 113,16; 114,7;
116,5; 118,15; 119,2; 123,9; 125,8 (misplacement).
b. Unnecessary letters: 91,1; 95,10; 102,18; 105,7; 108,16; 110,12;
112,12; 115,16; 120,16; 124,15.
c. Incorrect letters: 84,12; 87,5; 90,16; 92,11-12; 95,1.6; 99,4; 102,11;
103,15-16; 104,11; 105,8; 107,13; 109,15; 110,10; 112,14.16;
113,1.4.7 (mistranslation of Greek); 115,17; 119,11; 120,15; 121,4;
125,9-10 (misplacement). Of the above, the following may be errors
of hearing: 84,12; 87,5; 105,8.
d. Corruptions: 87,5; 103,15-16; 105,8; 116,8-9.
3. Other peculiarities
a. Strokes are used instead of diereses over the diphthong ai in 104,11;
115,11; 123,16 (for the use of the dieresis, see 97,9).
b. Ae appears three times in the phrase cboa ac zn , when cboa is not
in first position in the sentence, in 111,3-4; 112,10; 126,2. It may be
that Ae simply provides a mild emphasis in these instances.
c. Plene writing occurs in 83,7-8 (eMneapxH and e M n e e a o y c ia .) and
122,15 (qjopen).
d. x is used for x in 112,15.17.
e. Asterisks and diples in the body of the text highlight certain questions
and answers (see detailed description below under Transcriptions).
B. Dialectal Influences
Eug-V
Although the dialect is basically S, there are numerous signs of other
dialects, as is the case in the rest of the codex (Bdhlig-Labib: 11-14):
1. The regular use of the demonstrative t t h , t h , n h with the relative, as in
B and F.
2. The regular use of ctas* for the first perfect relative and the second
perfect, as in BA FtA J (for second perfect: 12,6; 14, 18).
3. The frequent irregular (from the point of view of S) use of ntc in the
genitive construction.
INTRODUCTION 23
4. The occasional appearance of the pronominal form n t c #, as in A- (e.g.

3,8.15).
5. The consistent use of e as the qualitative of eipe , as in A and F.
6. The use of M iz-, as in A, A2, and B, for the prefix for ordinal numbers
(13,9.12), although Mez- (S) occurs also (10,19).
7. The single appearance of e \ e - , as in F, instead of e p e- (7,18).
8. The single appearance of the F form of the sign of the future (Ne*)
(17,16).
9. The BAF form of the second perfect used as a temporal, apractice fre
quent in B and F (6,21; 10,13; 11,22; 14,18).
10. The AA2 form of the negative third future (16,4).
11. The AA2 form of the negative consuetudinis (2,17),although the S
form also occurs.
12. p regularly precedes Greek verbs as in A and A2 (but this occurs in
early S MSS alsoCrum: 84a).
13. The following non-standard (for S) orthography:
a. mm as in A and A2 (4,25);
b. N i6 as in A, A2 and F (6,22.25; 9,10);
c. sa.M as in A, A2 and F (6,10; 7,29; 12,27);
d. x a e i c as in A, A2 and F (6,30).
I have not mentioned ni -. f - , ni - in the above. This form of the article is
identified by Till as most characteristic of B and F (1961: sec. 64), but
Krause subsequently noted that at least the plural is quite characteristic of
early upper-Egyptian dialects as well (Krause-Labib: 29). In Codex V these
forms are found intermingled with n-, t -, n -, without discernible difference
in emphasis to a modem reader. Nor is it possible to see that one form of the
article is preferred to the other with certain words.
As mentioned, these characteristics are essentially the same as in the rest
of Codex V. Bohlig-Labib accounts for them by positing a Middle Egyptian
(presumably, F) translator who intended to render the original into S but
occasionally reverted to his native dialect (12). Schenke disagrees, seeing a
pre-classical S dialect with A2 features and only occasional signs of F (1966:
col. 24). For Eug-V, Schenke is correct regarding the small number of items
that occur only in Middle Egyptian (7. and 8. above). But his characteriza
tion of the dialect as pre-classical S makes it hard to understand the variations
that go beyond spelling differences, since even the pre-classical stages of a
language would need to have the internal consistency necessary for satisfac
tory communication. It is perhaps better to think of those differences as
having appeared in the course of transmission as scribes from different
regions adjusted the text in an ad hoc fashion (see Bohlig-Wisse, for a simi
lar explanation as applied to Codex III [11-12]).
24 INTRODUCTION
Eug-III and SJC-III

The dialect employed is S with no significant indications of other
influences. Occasionally one finds orthography more familiar in other
dialects according to Crum (e.g. anhzc [A A2] for eNez ; eMAZTe [A2] for
a.Ma.zTe and Meoye [A] for Meeye, all of which are found along with
standard S spelling). But these are also found in S texts that have become
available since Crum (see Kasser) and therefore are best accounted for as
reflecting an earlier non-standardized state of S spelling rather than A or A2
influences, as proposed by Till-Schenke (21) (Bohlig-Wisse has made an
observation similar to the one adopted here on the orthography of 111,2
[6-7]).
SJC-BG
The dialect is basically S with some features that are similar to other
dialects, especially A2. Those features are not sufficient to make one think
that we are dealing with a mixed dialect. Till-Schenke agrees with this and
thinks that the translator intended to translate into pure S, that some forms
were in doubt, and that in those cases he would sometimes revert to his native
(non-S) dialect (21). Although all the orthographic forms referred to by
Till-Schenke (18-20) are also found in S texts, the other features are not (the
irregular use of the preposition n t c - , and the doubling of the n before an ini
tial vowel), and therefore support Till-Schenkes view. The fact of the
widespread nature of these peculiarities in the tractate makes Till-Schenkes
explanation preferable here to the one proposed above for Eug-V.
It should be noted here that the use of n i -, f-, n i - is frequent in BG. This
form of the article is preferred with words beginning with a . Mostly its use
adds nothing discernible to the emphasis of the word to which it is attached
beyond an ordinary article. When demonstrative force is desired, ctmmay
is normally added (105,7; 111,4; 119,12-13; 120,11-12; 121,5.8). In at least
one instance, however, this form of the article (without eTMMay) does have
demonstrative force: 96,6.
C. Scribal Style
1. Script
In Codex V, the script is small and ligature occurs frequently where the
line of one letter can naturally be extended to meet another, often without
regard to word separation. The letters m, y and qj regularly lean to the left,
giving many lines the appearance of a bias in that direction. The scribe often
ends a long vertical stroke (as with a p, t , q and t ) with a slight curve to the
left, showing a certain flair. The scribe also varies the width of his strokes
(e.g., the middle horizontal stroke of the e is thinner than the rest of the
letter). He enlarges the x when it comes at the beginning of a line. Often y,
INTRODUCTION 25
when it appears at the end of a line (and sometimes elsewhere too), will have
a non-cursive form (like a printed y).
Codex III has a larger script than Codex V. Ligature often occurs where
lines can be naturally extended, but there is less here than in Codex V. The
scribes strokes are uniformly thin in width with little interest shown in
decorative accents. Letter size tends to be uniform throughout. No letters
regularly lean, which gives a sense of verticality to the whole. Altogether,
the impression is of ascetic spareness.
In BG, the script is bold and square in character, with strokes that tend to
be heavier than in Codex IH, but that vary in width, as in Codex V. Ligature
occurs often within words. Letter size tends to be uniform, although some
times letters become smaller toward the end of a line, as a result (apparently)
of an attempt to stay within a margin (unmarked). It should be noted that an
unusually large <| begins 120,1, for no apparent reason. Final letters (in a
line) are occasionally enlarged, perhaps in an effort to make the right margin
straighter (see the discussion of diples below). The letters q and y (the
non-cursive form is used throughout) often resemble each other, resulting in
occasional difficulties in franscription (see note to 107,13). Sometimes the
vertical stroke of q, <|>, and the like is extended into the line below.
2. Superlinear Strokes
The five uses of the superlinear stroke common to these tractates, and
indeed throughout the library, are these: (1) It signals that two consonants are
part of a single syllable and are united by a sub-vocalic sound; (2) It signals
that an initial consonant is a sonant; (3) It is used to tie three consonants
together in a sense unit (i.e., m n t ); (4) It marks abbreviated Greek nouns
(particularly nomina sacra)-, (5) It signals the omission of an n at the end of a
line.
The scribe of Codex V is quite careful. In regard to the first use, he places
the stroke over both consonants; for the second, he places it over only one;
for the third and fourth he puts the stroke above all the letters, although typi
cally he begins at the end of the first letter. As noted earlier, the scribe also
places a stroke over letters that have been omitted in the course of copying
and that are placed either above the place of omission or in the margin. In
addition, at 11,20 a stroke is placed over a numeral written in the margin as a
gloss for a number in the text (similar to other such numerals later in the
codex).
Wisse has discussed the use of superlinear strokes in Codex III (1975:
235). I would only add to his careful analysis that they are regularly omitted
with final n , t and z in two-consonant combinations.
In BG, the scribe is inconsistent in his use of superlinear strokes. He gen
erally omits them over the initial n of the perfect relative/second perfect
prefix (but see 97,9; 105,17; 113,11; 117,15; 126,1), as he does frequently
with other initial n s or m s . Also they are omitted normally over the third
26 INTRODUCTION
person masculine singular pronoun when it is suffixed to a consonant (but see

100,10), and over the final two consonants of such words as cyopn and
o y t o N z (but see 125,15). The strokes are made with a certain casualness.
Often the stroke over an initial sonant begins late and is continued over a por
tion of the following letter. Also when one expects two strokes side by side,
the scribe makes only one (e.g., 101,19). For the editorial policy on strokes,
see below under Transcriptions.
3. Articulation Marks
In Codex V, the scribe places curved vertical hooks on r , p and t when
they are in the final position in a sense unit; i.e., always when they come at
the end of a word, but also with c t , m n t , a t , etc., apparently to make clear
syllabic closure. Sometimes k has a hook on it also, but there is no con
sistency about its use and we have therefore ignored such hooks in this edi
tion.
In Codex III the scribe uses dots or short curved lines unattached to the
letters in place of vertical hooks. These have been considered by Wisse
(1975: 234).
BG has no such marks, except for the one in 88,11.
4. Page Numerals
Becasue of the method of presentation of the texts here, it has not been
possible to show visually how the page numerals are related to the body of
the text. A description is therefore provided here.
In Codex V, the few numerals that remain are found above the text just
within the outer text margin. The numerals are placed between two horizon
tal strokes.
In Codex III, the page numerals appear in the center of the upper margin.
No strokes accompany the numerals.
In BG, the page numerals are also written in the center of the upper mar
gin. The numeral on p. 94 has, in place of the normal delta (after the fai), a
figure resembling an alpha, although it is different in form from alphas found
elsewhere in the text. The numerals have one horizontal stroke above them.
5. Asterisks, External and Internal Diples and Paragraph Markers
Asterisks are found only in BG. They occur in the left margin on the fol
lowing pages: 86, between lines 6 and 7; 86,9; 87, between lines 8 and 9;
87,12; 106,11.14; 107,17. These serve to identify questions asked by Philip
and Thomas (see textual note for 107,13) as well as the responses. On 86
and 87, the initial asterisks are accompanied by very large diples placed in
the body of the text where the introduction to the question begins. In each
case the scribe has lengthened the lower line of the diple so it ends on the
INTRODUCTION 27
next line between the end of the introduction (x e ) and the first word of the
question proper.
A similar diple is found in the body of the text at 82,19, this time introduc
ing a question by Matthew. The marginal indicator in that case, however, is
not an asterisk but a paragraphus cum corone. Another diple marks the
introduction to the response to Matthew (83,4).
Asterisks are also used at the beginning and end of each of the lines at
127,11-12, in order to highlight the title.
No paragraph markers occur in the extant text of Eug-V. In Eug-lll, a
paragraphus cum corone appears in the left margin on p. 76, between lines
12 and 13, and two are found at the conclusion of the tractate, setting off the
subscript title. In S/C-III, a paragraphus cum corone is found in the left
margin between 96,14 and 15. In the first instance a major shift is indicated
(another knowledge principle). In the second, a question by Thomas is sig
naled. In BG a paragraphus in the right margin is used to mark the introduc
tion to the first general statement of the disciples concerns by Philip at
79,18. A paragraphus cum corone occurs also in the left margin on p. 126
between lines 16 and 17, marking the beginning of the conclusion of the trac
tate.
External diples, used as line fillers in Codex III and BG (but not Codex V,
except as concluding decorations), have been removed from the texts
involved but have not been listed in footnotes. It is appropriate to list here
the lines where they are found in the MSS.
In the two tractates in Codex III diples occur at the end of the following
lines: 72,7; 73,4; 81,14.18; 82,6.22; 83,23; 85,14.23; 86,21(2); 87,15; 88,16;
91,11.23; 93,6.19; 94,8; 97,6; 98,21; 100,5; 102,16; 104,1; 106,1; 114,24;
117,10; 118,25. In 5/C -B G diples are found at both the beginnings and ends
of lines. They are at the beginning in the following lines: 80,5.6; 87,13;
108,6-10.16.17; 117,7.8; 123,14-17; 124,17; 127,3-7. They are at the ends
of the following lines: 83,1^1; 89,1; 106,5.17.19; 107,1.2; 108,5.6.13(2);
109,8; 110,3.7(2); 111,11; U2,7(2).12; 115,15-17; 116,6(2). 15.16; 117,9.15;
119,6.13; 120,10.13; 121,1-6; 122,5; 123,12; 124,11; 125,14; 126,8.12.15;
127,10.
In BG 108,13, the tip of the second diple is extended and curved back (as
with the final e in 127,3), giving Till-Schenke the impression of a third
diple, which would be anomalous. Diples are also placed in the body of the
BG text at a number of points, all of which are noted in the footnotes. In
116,8, one precedes the final two letters, perhaps as an indicator of an
anacoluthon.
XIV. T R A N SC R IPT IO N S
The transcriptions of the three Nag Hammadi tractates presented here

were made on the basis of careful examination of original MSS at the Coptic
Museum in Cairo and a number of sets of photographs of those MSS in the
28 INTRODUCTION
possession of the Institute for Antiquity and Christianity, by the editor and
other members of the Claremont team (see the preface). They have been
compared with a preliminary draft of parallels prepared some years ago by
Martin Krause. Eug-III was also compared with the version published by
Trakatellis (see II above). The SJC-BG transcription was made on the basis
of the editio princeps (Till-Schenke) with the aid of photographs of the origi
nal MS.
Because of the similarities of the texts and the Coptic, as well as the rela
tively intact character of the MSS, occasional restorations and corrections of
Eug-Ul, SJC-III and SJC -BG were done mostly without great difficulty.
The same was not true, however, with Eug-V, where extensive lacunae made
numerous restorations desirable. As noted above, the text is considerably
expanded in comparison with the parallel texts, and the Coptic translator was
from a different translation tradition. These factors made the use of the
parallels problematic in the restorations. I want to acknowledge again the aid
I received, particularly in regard to Eug-V, from Bentley Layton and Stephen
Emmel.
As to the citations in the footnotes, since Krauses parallel version is only
in draft form, it is not cited. However, Krauses translation of Eug-TK,
S/C-III and various portions of Eug-V and SJC -BG (1974) has often made
it possible to extrapolate the Coptic text that lies behind it and refer to it in
relation to the transcriptions.
The following, then, are the citation policies in this edition regarding res
torations and emendations in each of the tractates.
Eug-V. Only Emmel is cited. Those citations occur where he lists photo
graphic evidence for particular readings.
Eug-III. Divergences from Krause and Trakatellis are noted. They are
also cited in support of this edition in case of disagreements. Till-Schenke is
always cited where it takes a clear position. Silence in regard to
Till-Schenke should be taken to mean lack of evidence, since only parts of
Eug-Ul are published in that edition.
SJC-I11. Divergences from Krause are noted (where they can be deter
mined). Support for this edition is also cited, except for pp. 117-19, where
there are numerous restorations and Krause has a continuous text; then, only
divergences are noted. Till-Schenke is cited when it is clear; the text of
wg-III was dealt with in Till-Schenke only as it related to the editing of
SJC-BG and therefore there are places where E ug-III is not printed. Silence
in this edition regarding Till-Schenke means no evidence.
SJC-BG. Till-Schenke emendations are followed except where noted,
and in those cases the Till-Schenke emendations are specified. Minor diver
gences, such as the dotting of a letter or the position of brackets, are not
noted.
INTRODUCTION 29
In regard to superlinear strokes, the following policies have been adopted

for purposes of standardization. When a stroke spans two consonants in the
MS, it is here only shown over the second, with two exceptions: where an ini
tial m or n is a sonant and has a stroke that continues over an immediately
following consonant (common in BG), the stroke is placed over the first letter
only. The same policy is followed in regard to the conjunctive conjugation.
When a stroke spans three consonants in the MS, it is here placed over the
middle letter only. Exceptions are made in the case of proper nouns and
where the stroke is the sign of an abbreviation.
XV. TR A N SL A T IO N PO L IC IES
Since this is a parallel edition of four tractates, it has been necessary for
the translations to be fairly literal to make comparison between the texts as
easy as possible.
The following translation policies have been adopted here:
1) Abstract and predicate nouns that were (presumably) anarthrous in
Greek (see BDF: sec. 252, 258) seem often to have been translated with an
indefinite article in Coptic (Stem: sec. 232). In rendering these Coptic words
in English, I have routinely omitted the article in the case of abstract nouns
(but note III 77,11) and supplied a definite article in the case of the predicate
nouns. Examples: V 4,11 (cf. parr.); 7,4; 7,6-9, parr.; Ill 101,18, par.
2) I have translated demonstrative plurals as singulars if they appear to
reflect Greek demonstrative neuter plurals, which are routinely understood as
singular.
3) There is some difficulty in distinguishing among names, titles, roles
and attributes for the various divine beings. I have tended where possible to
take terms as names, since knowledge of them seems to have been important
among the Gnostics (see V 4,1416).
4) Ethical datives have by and large not been translated since they are
generally archaic in English. Examples: V 6,22; 6,26; III 88,12 (but see
88,21!).
5) Occasionally the adverb N U ) o p n , which is usually translated at first,
or the like, is here translated very soon, because at first does not seem
appropriate in the context and something akin to the lexical rendering early
does. Examples: V 6,16; 12,25; III 111,14.
6) The translation of apxh has been difficult at times because of the
problem of knowing whether it means beginning or principle. I have
sometimes opted for giving both possibilities in the text.
7) In regard to the notes, I have attempted to give the significant alterna
tive renderings. In some cases I have noted incorrect readings that may have
attained some currency. For ease of comparison, I have translated quotations
from the German and modem Greek versions into English.
30 INTRODUCTION
8) The Greek of Greek loan words is omitted in this edition. These can
be readily identified in the Coptic text by anyone with facility in Greek.
Highlighting them in the translation is not only esthetically jarring but poten
tially misleading, since it suggests that the words have not been integrated
into Coptic, which might be true in some cases, but certainly not in all. A
Greek Loan Word index is provided at the end of the volume.
XVI. FO O TN O TES AND EN D N O TES
The footnotes and endnotes have been kept as brief as possible. Attention
has been focused on issues connected with editing and translating. Matters of
interpretation have been dealt with only in passing, in view of an anticipated
commentary. Special abbreviations for earlier editions have been adopted for
the notes and are identified in the list of abbreviations. A separate set of
notes is provided for each text, with transcription and translation notes com
bined. The endnotes deal with matters involving two or more texts, and the
need to refer to them is signaled by a footnote in each instance.
XVII. LITER A R Y FORM S
Although Eug is in letter form, it quickly becomes apparent that it is basi

cally a religio-philosophical controversy discourse, which has a form of its
own. This form begins with a description of the position that is opposed.
There is then a refuation of that position (often very brief). Finally the alter
native proposed by the writer is presented, which is often the bulk of the
piece. It can be found elsewhere as a separate form (e.g., Orig. World
[H,5 ]), and in combination with the letter form (e.g., The Letter o f Ptolemy to
Flora [Epiphan., Pan. 33.3,1-7,10], first noted by Doresse [1948: 154-55]).
SJC is the account of a revelation discourse of a heavenly being (Christ)
who appears in a special place, in response to the perplexities of his fol
lowers. There are twelve disciples, of whom only Philip, Thomas, Matthew
and Bartholomew are named, and seven women, of whom only Mary
(presumably Magdalene) is named. The discourse is punctuated by the ques
tions of the followers. SJC concludes with a commission to the followers by
Christ, who then disappears. The disciples then set forth to carry out the
commission. The form of SJC, while unique among the Nag Hammadi writ
ings, has close resemblances to Ap. John. (For further discussion of the form
of Gnostic revelatory tractates, see Fallon, and Perkins, 1980: 25-58.)
G U ID E TO THE PA R A LLELS
of Eug and SJC
(Minor similarities and differences are not reflected)
Eug-III alone is referred to for Eug Only and Common Material, except
for those places found only in E u g -V . 5/C -III is referred to for 5/C Only,
except for those places found only in 5/C-BG .
Sections opposite each other in the outside columns are so placed not because
they are parallel in language (although they may be) but because they occupy
the same relative space in the tractates.
Names of deities and other realities are italicized only at their first appear
ance.
Eug Only Common Material SJC Only

1. Address of letter (HI 1. Male disciples and women
70,1-3). go to mountain in perplexity
and meet resurrected savior;
Philip states the general
query. (HI 90,14-92,7).
2. Disputed views of philo
sophers about God and the
cosmos (HI 70,3-22).
3. Self-disclosure by savior
(HI 93,8-12).
4. Refutation of philosophers
(HI 70,22-71,5).
5. Invitation to another 5. True knowledge to be
approach (HI 71,5-13) given to elite (HI 93,16-24).
Matthew's request: Teach us
the truth (EI 93,24-94,4).
6. Description of Him Who
Is, The Unbegotten One, pri
marily in negative terms (HI
71,13-73,3).
7. Philip asks how he
(Unbegotten) appeared to the
perfect ones (HI 95,19-22).
8. He embraces all and is
characterized by certain men
tal qualities (ID 73,3-13).
Their whole race is with
Unbegotten (omitted by
Eug-V) (HI 73,14-16).
32 GUIDE TO THE PARALLELS
9. Thomas asks why these

came to be (ffl 96,14-21).
Response: Because of his
mercy and love (III
96,21-97,16).
10. They have not yet
become visible (omitted by
Eug-V). The difference
between what comes from
perishableness and imperish
ableness. Ignorance of this
brings death (HI 73,16-74,7).
11. Transition to new topic 11. Mary asks how we will
(HI 74,7-14) know that (ffl 98,9-12).
12. The way to true
knowledge: go from visible
to invisible with the aid of
Thought (ffl 74,14-19).
13. This is a knowledge prin
ciple (m 74,19-20)
14. Distinction between
Forefather and Father. Self
begotten Father appears (ffl
74,20-75,12).
Revealing of the Generation
over Whom There is No
Kingdom. Rejoicing over
Unbegotten Father (ffl
75,12-76,10).
15. Transition to another 15. Matthew asks how Man
knowledge principle (HI was revealed (III 100,16-21)
76,10-14). 16. Revealing of Immortal
Man (ffl 76,14-77,2).
17. About the female part of 17. Role of Immortal Man in
Immortal Man (III salvation; his consort (III
77,2-77,9). 101,9-19).
18. First appearance of
names; creation of aeon for
Immortal Man and the grant
ing of authority (ffl
77.9-78,5).
Immortal Man's mental qual
ities (ffl 78,5-9).
The hierarchical differences
among these qualities (QI
78.9-17).
19. Elaboration of differ
ences. The relationship of
numbers shows the relation
ship among these qualities
(ffl 78,17-V 8,6).
GUIDE TO THE PARALLELS 33
20. The coming to appear

ance of other things from
these qualities (V 8,6-18).
21. Rejoicing in Immortal 21. Bartholomew asks
Mans kingdom (V 8,18-30). whether the Son is related to
Man or Son of Man (IH
103,22-104,6).
22. Revealing of First- Identified as Christ
begotten (Begetter) Son of
Man and his Sophia (V
8,31-11181,3).
23. The multitude of angels 23. Disciples request more
are lights (HI 81,3-10). details about Man (III
105,3-11).
24. Son is called Adam. Additional material
Rejoicing in the kingdom of
Son of Man (III 81,10-21).
25. The savior is the revealer
(m 106,5-9).
Disciples ask how those who
truly exist came to the world
(m 106,9-15).
26. Revealing of Savior,
Begetter of All Things, and
his Sophia (III 81,21-82,6).
27. Revealing of the six spir 27. Saving work of the
itual powers by Savior (who savior (HI 106,24-108,16).
then are identified as twelve
by counting the consorts), Thomas asks how many are
and those that came from the aeons that surpass the
them. Antetypes of our aeon heavens (III 108,16-23).
are provided by these and
earlier revelations (III
82,7-84,11).
28. Creation by All
(SelfBG) Begetter of
twelve aeons for the twelve
angels (EI 84,12-17).
29. Creation of heavens and
firmaments in these aeons (III
84,17-85,6).
30. Summary statement;
defect of femaleness appears
(m 85,6-9).
31. Thomas asks how many
are the aeons of the immor
tals (BG 107,13-108,1).
32. Description of aeons:
(Eug-V has four aeons;
Eug-in and SJC have three.
The order differs between
Eug and SJC [in 85,9-21]).
34 GUIDE TO THE PARALLELS
Description of the revealing

of the Eighth (Seventh
SJC) by Immortal Man, with
aeons, powers and kingdoms;
the naming of aeons (III
85,21-86,16).
Designation of the third aeon
as Assembly (HI
86,16-87,9).
Assembly and his consort
begin the engendering that
leads to the revealing of all
the immortals (HI 87,9-88,3)
Authority of immortals 33. (Inserted at IH 88,21)
comes from Immortal Man The Apostles ask about those
and Sophia. Immortals use it in the aeons (EI
to provide themselves with 112,19-113,2).
domains and retinue (III
88,3-89,6).
From this area come the types
of subsequent aeons and
worlds (IH 89,6-15).
General rejoicing by all
natures (III 89,15-90,3).
34. Conclusion: Words of 34. Reason for the revelation
Eugnostos are to be accepted (m 114,5-8).
(preserved) until one who
need not be taught comes (IH 35. Mary asks where the dis
90,4-11). ciples came from, where they
are going and what they
should do in the world (HI
114,8-12).
The coming into the lower
regions of the drop from the
Light (III 114,12-BG
119,16).
Development of psychic man
(BG 119,17121,13).
Coming of the savior and his
work (BG 121,13-ffl 118,3).
Commissioning of disciples
( m i 18,3-119,8).
Disappearance of the savior
and beginning of disciples
mission (III 119,8-17).
TH E PA R A L L E L TEX TS
Please note: A new page of Coptic text always begins at the left margin
of a line marked by a Coptic page number. It is not otherwise indicated.
THE SOPHIA OF JESUS CHRIST 37
NHC III 90,14-91,9 BG 77,8-78,10
[q] TCO<|>IA NIHC" TTCXPC" MNN TCO<|>IA n Tc " f ie x c " I M N N C A

T p e q T to o Y N cbo a . zn N TpeqTouoY 10 c b o a zn
N6 |TM O O Y T n ctm o o yt |N TepoYei n si
N epeneqM N t c n o |o yc neq|M N TCN O O Yc
MMAOHTHC MN C A U )q e | N C Z IM 6 M M A H|THC MN C A ( y q e N C z T|M
M AQ HTeYe N a q e | A Y e i c tc N 6 Y M A e H 15T e Y e N A q e z p A T
C T r A A IA A IA . C X M T T T O O Y e T T A I A l A A l A ZM TTT O O Y T C
e a j^ Y M O Y T e e p o q x e m an th | q jA Y M O Y T e e p o q x e m a |t h z i
z i p A iy e n tcpo yccu o yz P A ty e e Y A n o p i o y I ctbc
z io Y lc o r t e Y ^ n o p i ctbc Y T T O C T A C IC M|TTTHPq MN
T Z Y n O C T A | C IC M lTTH Pq- MN T O IK O N O M I 5A MN T C TTP O N O IA
T O IK O N O M IA 5 MN T 6 T T P O N O IA 6 T O Y I A A B MN T A P C T H
C T O Y A A B " MN I T A P C T H N N e | 3 0 Y c iA e T B e zcu b n im |
N N e a o Y C iA aycu e T B e | z u >b n im e T e p e n c o ) T H p e ip e m |m a y
e T e p e n c c o T H p e ip e | m m ooy NM M AY M M YCTH PI 10O N
NMM&Y ZM n M Y C T H lP IO N
[90] The Sophia of Jesus Christ. After 15 The Sophia of Jesus Christ. | After
he rose from the | dead, his twelve | he rose 10 from the dead, | when his
disciples and seven | women | twelve disciples | and seven
continued to be his followers and | women | who continued to be his
went to Galilee onto the mountain followers 15 went up to Galilee |
91 called Divination | and Joy. When onto the mountain
they gathered together | and were called Divination | and Joy and
perplexed about the underlying were accordingly perplexed | about
reality | of the universe and the plan the underlying reality | of the
and 5 the holy providence and | the universe and the plan 5 and the holy
power of the authorities and about | providence | and the power of the
everything that the Savior is doing | authorities, | about everything | that
with them in the secret | of the holy the Savior is doing with them, the
secrets 10 of
S/C-m:
91.1 Preceding this line, MS has a short line of decoration with a paragraphus cum
corone just below in the left margin.
91.1-2 See endnote 1.
91.2 Corr.: second e for erased o .
5/C-BG:
78,10 Corr.: m is marked out after o n .
EUGNOSTOS
NHC III 91,9-24 BG 78,10-79,14
NTOIKONOMia eTO yaaB 10 NTOiKONOMia e |T o y a a B aycu

aqoywNZ n s i nctuTHp zn aqoycuNz | e p o o y n s i ttcojthp
Teg|(yopit xe N ' mmop<|>h a a a a zn | Teqtyopn mmop 4>h a | aAAa
zm n e |n N a N azopaTON' zpaY zm n ia z o p a T d 15 Mima
neqeiNe Ae | N ee n o y n o s neqeiN e Ae N e|neiN e n e
N a fre x o c n t c n o y |o e iN n n o y n o s N |a rre A o c ntc
neqcM Ot Ae nn&oj q j i 15i e n o y o eiN
epoq NNeoj c a p s nim neqcMOT Ae Nau) | c y ix e epoq oe
eu}a<c>|M oy ujonq e p o c aAAa mn o y c a p a | eojacM oy Naoj
o y cap a | NtcaeapoN NTe a b io n TcuoyN | zapoq aAAa o y c a p a
Nee | NTaqTcaBON epoq zixm Nicaseap o N n t c a i o c N Teq|ze
n T o lo y eujayM oyT e epoq x e 20 NTaqTcaBON ep p q | zT n T o o y
n a N x o e it zn T raA iA aia ayto eT eojayM oylT e epoq x e n a
| n e x a q x e fpHNH n h tn f|pHNH n { t} x .o c it | n e zn T raA iA aia
eTe Touei t c f t mmoc | n h tn n e x a q 10 x e tPHNH n h tn +ph|nh
ayp qjnHpe TH poy | aya) ayp eT e tcu'i' Te f t m m o 'c ' | n h tn
zoT e1nccoTHp aq aytu ayp cgnHpe | th p o y ayp
zo T e ancw |TH p
plan,10 the Savior appeared, not in the holy plan, | then the Savior
his | previous form, but in the | appeared | to them, not in | his
invisible spirit. And his likeness | previous form | but in the invisible
resembles a great angel of light. | 15 spirit. And his likeness was | the
But his resemblance I must not likeness of a great | angel of light.
describe. 15 No mortal flesh | could But his resemblance I must not | 79
endure it, but only | pure (and) describe. No mortal flesh | could
perfect flesh like | that which he endure | it, but only pure 5 (and)
taught us about on the mountain | perfect flesh like his, | which he
called 20 Of Olives in Galilee. taught us about | on the mountain
And | he said: Peace be to you (pi.)! called | Of Olives | in Galilee. He
My peace | I give | to you! And said: 10 Peace be to you (pi.)! My
they all marveled | and were afraid. peace | I give | to you! And they
The Savior all marveled | and were afraid. The
Savior |
SJC-HI:
91,15 MS has q (incorrect gender noted by T-S).
40 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 1,1-3 NHC III 70,1-3
[ e y r N Q j c T o c n ] n io j [H pe . . . ] \ | e y r N U J C T o c t t m a k a p io c
[ 8 ] mn N(g[. . ] NTe | [ 7 ] ['] NNe|Te Noycj Ne x e paxge zn
x a jp e [*] N e | e i*
[Eugnostos, to] the [sons . . . ] | Eugnostos, the Blessed, to those |

[ . . . ] and the [ . . . ] | [ . . . ] who are his. Rejoice in this, |
Greetings!
Eug-V:
1,1 Stroke over n is partially visible in MS.
Sons: Here and elsewhere <yHpe could also be translated children (child,
when cyHpe is in the sing.).
1,1-2 If the word areNNHToc appeared elsewhere in the tractate or indeed the
codex, it would be tempting to restore Nicy [Hpe MTTi]ai|[reNNHToc], the sons
[of] I[Unbegotten], on the basis of 5,7-8.
Eug-Ul:
70,2 Corr.: second Ne for partly erased Noyq (dittography?).
This: lit. these, the Coptic of which is probably a too literal rendering of a
Greek neuter pi. demonstrative, which is often used to refer to a singular thing
(Smyth: sec. 1003) (so rendered by K & Tr); see also BG 120,14.
70,2-3 Bellet proposes that zn Neei (incorrectly transcribed as znn 2li by him)
equals zn*i and should be translated, /r is pleasing to me that you know___
p*<ye might then be taken as rendering the Greek xaipe, Greetings. Thus the
initial statement would be essentially the same as the parr, (without xaipe in SJC)
(57). Attractive as that is, it is probably an impossible reading of the text as it
stands, since zn** does not appear to be found elsewhere with the n geminated, or
with a stroke over the n. Also the scribe has placed a stop betwen zn Neei and
NHC III 92,1-7 BG 79,14-80,4
<jB ccoee n e x & q N a y x e e T B e o y | cooBe n e x & q N * y 15 x e e T B e o y

TeTN M eoye T e T N a n o p e i | T6TM M e|e ye h c t b c o y
eTeTN tgiN e n c a o y n e x e | Te TN |a .n o p i h e T C T N u jiN e |
4>iAirtnoc x e e T B e n c a o y n e x i q n s i <t>i\in|noc
e y n o 5C T a c i c m it t h p c j ' mn e T B e y n o c T a .d c | MtiTHpq m n n
t o i k o |n o m i 3l * ncu)THp n e x & q t o i k o |n o m i & Mnco)THp | n e x & q
N ay | x e xe
92 laughed and said to them: What | laughed and said to them: 15 What
are you thinking about? (Why) are are you thinking about? | What are
you perplexed? | What are you you | perplexed about? What are
searching for? | Philip said: For you searching | for? Philip said:
the underlying reality 5 of the For the underlying reality | of the 80
universe and the plan. | The Savior universe and the plan | of the
said to them: Savior. | He said:
5/C-HI:
92,1 There is a drop of ink above n in a position that suggests it was not intentionally
placed there. Other random drops are found in the MS, e.g., 92,10 and 14;
94,12-13 (rt. margin).
SJC-BG:
79,19 MS has a paragraphus in the right margin next to n o c .
(Eug-III continued)
eTpeTNeiMe , indicating that he probably understood the passage as it is rendered
in my translation. Contrary to Bellets assertion, the Coptic as it stands makes
sense grammatically. The infinitive here ( e T p e T N e iM e ) is not causative and
dependent, but rather purely nominal, in apposition to N e e i . It is possible, to be
sure, that errors were made in the course of transmission and that the original text
was closer to the parr.
42 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 1,3-17 NHC III 70,3-17
f o y t D t g | [ 6 T 6 t ] n m [m c ] x e e T p e T N e iM e x e p c o m c n im |
N p u)M [e] T H p o y N 5[ x n o ] N TA yxnooy x n n tkatabo ah 5
MITK.|>l]2 XIN NTKA[T]ABOAH M ITK O CM O C ti)A T 6 N O Y C 6 0 |
N|[Te TTlJlCOCMOC U}A ZOYN N i y z i s e y t y iN e n ca nN oy|Te
e fN o y ce|q j[iN ]e n c a nN oyTe xe n im ne h o yeu ) N ze n e |
x e nim n e - | h [oy]auj mminc M n o yze epoq N C A B e e ye
n e - Ayto Mnoy|SNTcj' Ne+Meye c t n |z h to y N zo yo c b o a zn
Ae eBOA. N2 H10Toy x e zb n c a b c T A IO IK H ,0C I C M n K O C M O C A y f

Ne c b o a zm ni |p o [o ]y tg n t c tan tn I e T M H e A yto
nuco [c]m [o]c- nh eT e | tm c M n e n T A N T N T A | z e TM He
ujoort n z h to y an* niT ezo | ta p T A IO IK .H C IC N TA P | o } A y a } A x e
epATtj n t c n[i Jaicon ujA yxooq | e p o c N iy o M T e N | s iN a } A x e
NOJOMNt NCMOf Cb[oa] e B O A 2 IT O O T O Y
zi T p p T o y 15 c t b c nAT N c e f n 1s n <|>i a o c o (|>o c THpoy ctbc |
m c tc [mn] N e[y]|epH oy a n ' n A i' N cecYM <t>co N ei an z o e i |Ne
a y o [ 8 ] t o I . [ . . ] 7. [ 9 ] .
I want | [you to know] that all men, that you know that all men | bom
who are 5 [bom] of the [earth], from from the foundation 5 of the world
the foundation of | [the] world until until now are | dust. While they
now | [inquire] about God, who he is have inquired about God, | who he is
| and what he is like, and they have and what he is like, | they have not
not | found him. And those of them found him. The wisest | among
who think 10 they are wise, them have speculated about the truth
(speculating) from the | care (taken) from the ordering 10 of the world. |
of the world, | have no truth in them! And the speculation has not reached
For | the ordering of the aeon is | the truth. For the ordering | is
spoken of | in three ways by them, 15 spoken of in three (different)
(and) hence they do not agree [with] opinions | by 15 all the philosophers,
each other. I [ . . - ] I [ .. * ] . For | (and) hence | they do not agree. For
some | of
Eug-V:
1.4 First and second superlinear strokes are in lacuna.
1.5 First superlinear stroke is in lacuna.
1.10 Between the last two letters ms has space with ink marks. The scribe apparently
attempted to use the space but found he could not because of imperfections in the
sheet.
NHC III 92,7-22 BG 80,4-81,5
toytotD e T p e T N e iM e | x e f o Y t o t g 5 e T p e T N e iM e th ptn |
Npu)Me t h p o y N T A Y i n o l o Y e N 6 N T A Y * .n o o Y e n |K A Z x in
e n K A Z 'X IN TKATABO AH T K A T A B O A H I M ITK O C M O C 0 )A
MlcnK 0 CM 0 C u}A T 6 N o y e y o | t |n o y e Y M e e y e e y t g i 10N e
n o jzis eYtyiN e n c a t t n o y I t c n ca nN oyTe x e n im |ne h
xe nim n e ayu> o y a u ) m|min o yauj N ze n e | M n o y ze epoq
n e M n o y ze e p o q N | c A B e e Y e A e NCABe | A e c t n z h t o y {* e }
NZOYO 6 T N Z H 15T O Y 6BOA ZN eBO A. I ZN T A IO IK H C IC
TAIOIKHCIC M lnKOCM OC MN M n K 0 15C M 0 C MN nKIM A Y t I
nKIM A Y t I TAN TN TO N TN n e Y TO N TN | A6
M neneYTAN TN A e t a | z e tm hc* M n eq TA ze tm c |ta io ik h c ic
TAIOIKHCIC TAP U)AYl<!)AXe TA P UJAY
e p o c n o jo m n t N ze 20 e Y ^ r e x o o c e p o c x e c o Y A r e | m m oc nA
MMOC ZITN Ne<|>IA.O|CO<|>OC N O JO M N Te Nze | z'i t n
t h p o y ' eTB e n i 'f N i((> iA o c o < t> o c t h | p o y e T B e n&T
Nce|CYM(|>(UNei a n ' z o e iN t a p N c e c Y M 5<|>a)Ni a n z o T n t a p
| I want you to know | that all men I want 5 you all to know | that those
bom | on earth from the foundation who have been bom | on earth from
of 10 the world until now, being | the foundation | of the world until
dust, while they have inquired about now, | while they have thought to
God, | who he is and what he | is inquire 10 about God, who | he is and
like, have not found him. Now the | what he is like, | have not found him.
wisest among 15 them have Now the wisest | among them have
speculated from the ordering of | the speculated from | the ordering of the
world and (its) movement. | But world 15 and (its) movement. | But
their speculation has not reached | their speculation | has not reached
the truth. For it | is said that the the truth. | For it is said
ordering is directed in three ways 20 that the ordering is directed | in three 81
by all the philosophers, | (and) hence ways | by all the philosophers, |
they do not | agree. For some of | (and) hence they do not agree. 5 For
44 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 1,17-24 NHC III 70,17-71,1
z p 'i'N e | ra.p c b [ o a . n z h t o y NTA.P N 2H T O Y C C X C O M M OC |

c e x to m m ]o c | x [ e o ] y n [ N X n e e n K 0 C M 0 C x e N T A Y A r e MMoq |
z I t o o t c j ] O Y A [A .]q 20 Z I T O O T q MMIN M M O q
? [ n k ] o [ o y c x e e T a Jq u ju m e z e N 20ic o o Y e x e o y t t p o n o i a Te1
[ z ] a | [ t n O Y n p o N o ia . ] t N n o o Y e z e N | ic o o Y e x e O Y n e T H ir e u jio n e
x [ e ] | [e T A q t g u m e z a t n | n e AYto o y o n n n a T a n N e |
OY]2,|MA.PMe|[NH' AY<0 A.AAY T u jO M T e <se n c m h N T A e ip | typn
n n ]a .T P n e q x [ i ] | [ e T M e 1 N X O O Y MN O Y e i M M O O Y
HIT C T M H e 01
some [of them say] | that [it is spirit them say | about the world that it
by] itself. 20 [Others, that] it was was directed | by itself. Others 20
[subject to] | [providence]. Others, that it is providence (that directs it). |
[that] | [it was subject to] fate. | Others, that it is fate. | But it is none
[But] none [of] these has attained | of these. | Again, of the three voices
[the truth. I have just | mentioned, none
is true. 71
Eug-V:
1,19 x : see Emmel, 1979: 182. First superlinear stroke is in lacuna. See note to
5/C-BG par.
Eug-TE:
70,21 fate: see endnote 2.
NHC III 92,22-93,8 BG 81,5-17
N|2HTOY cex tt) MMOC n z h |t o y c e x to mmoc x e

enK0|CM0C x e e y A re MMoq oyITTnTeqoyAAB n e zTTo|oTq
ZITO mmin MMoq ZNKo|oye Ae x e
qr oTq mmin MMoq zeN K ooy[e] | oynpoN oiA 10 Te zNicooye Ae
Ae x e oynpoN oiA t c x e o y |T e eo N T Te Ayto oyA
zeNKOloye Ae x e oyneTHit n |n a T a n n e TeeiajOMTe | s e
etyume | n e ay<o NoyoN nnaT ncmh n t Ay x o o y N|<yopn cboa.
a n Ne 5 TtgoMTe e e ncmh zTtn Npu)Me 15 N T A yxnooy
n ta c ip | tgprt N x o o y mmn o y e i enicAZ mn | oyoN mm ooy c b o a
M|MOOY 2 HN eTMHe H 6BOA ZN T|MHe
zi |t n pu)Me*
them say about the world | that it is some of | them say that | it is pure
directed by itself. spirit by itself. | Others, | that it is
93 Others, | that it is providence (that providence (that directs it). 10
directs it). Others, | that it is fate. | Others, that it is | fate. But it is none
But it is none of these. 5 Again, of of | these. Again, these three |
the three voices I have | just voices that have just been mentioned
mentioned, none | is close to the | are from men 15 who have been
truth, and (they are) from | man. bom on the earth; | none of them is
of the | truth.
SJC-HI:
92,24-25 See note to SJC-BG par.
92,24 Corr.: an erased superlinear stroke above t o .

93,8 Alt.: <N>po)Me, from <the> men" (T-S); K has through men.
SJC-BG:
81,7 pure: holy (T-S). The Coptic can mean either. The T-S choice is based on
the assumption that the translator of BG took a form of ayevv for ayiov
irv(eun)a. That seems unlikely in view of the probable reconstruction of V 1,19.
That the world is, in some sense, (pure) spirit and is directed by it was Stoic doc
trine (see TDNT [6], 1968: 354-56 [Kleinknecht]). The parallels in Eug-lU and
S/C-III appear to reflect the Epicurean view that there is no directing power. Since
the text earlier says that these three opinions are different, and pure spirit, here,
is, in essence, the same as providence, which is the next view, the readings in
Eug-III and S/C-III are probably to be preferred.
81,10-11 fate: see endnote 2.
46 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 1,24-2,4 NHC III 71,1-8
9 ]<y[ . ] n e . 25 [ 13 ]. n [ . . ] n e T C B O A TA.R 2IT O | O T tj MMIN

(7 lines lacking) M M oq o y B i o c e q | < y o y e if ne
<ya.qA.&q T e n p o | N o ia .
O yM N TCO S T C TeTZA N T 5
m [ 7 ]e m[ 12 ] | iti[ oy<ei e> M ecece^N e t c
n e ]T e o y N [lysoM s e mmoij s e M Moq e e i
n e T e o y N u j| s o m
e e i ] | en [N ]p Y T e N T e [ t m c e z o y N M n|boa. N T e e iq jo M T e
eBOA. 2ITN] I KeCMH [ n ] c A B O A n c m h N T A .| e iu )p n N i o o y N q e i
. . . ] 25 [ . . . ] | (7 lines lacking). For whatever is from itself | is an

empty | life; it is self-made.
Providence | is foolish. (And) fate 5
is an undisceming thing.
[ . . . ] | [ . . . ] Whoever, then, [is Whoever, then, is able | to get free
able to come] | to the God of [truth of | these three voices | I have just
by means of] | another voice, mentioned and
Eug-HI:
71.3 u)Aqa.Aq it is self-made: translation omitted by K & Tr (text is not emended
by Tr).
71.4 fate: see endnote 2.
71.5 T-S emends o y < e i e e > , but elsewhere in Eug-HI and 5/C-IH only o y e i is
found, is . . . thing: is something that is not known (K [by an emendation?],
followed by Tr, who does not emend the line).
71.6 to get free o f (similarly, Tr): less likely, penetrate to the solutions (sic) of
(K).
NHC III 93,8-16 BG 81,17-82,9
anok A e N T A e ie i e|BO A zm A N O K A e N T A 'l'e i e | B O A ZM

n o y o e iN N Anepa n to n 10 t n io y o T N n a t A |p H x q anok
M n ee iM A a n o k tap fco o y N | c tco o yn
MMoq x e e e i e x u ) nhtn M M oq x e e e ie T A M e |th ytn
N T A | K P IB IA N TM H6' e T A K p iB e iA N T|M H e
n e T e O yeBO A | z i t o o t Zj m m in n e T e O yeBO A tap | zV To o Tq
MMoq o y B i o c |eqcooq m m in M M o q .5 n e o y B i o c
n e T e a jA q A A q T e n p o 15n o ia mn e q z o o y n e T e | o j< A q > A A q
M NTCABH N 2 H T C T e | T 2 A N + A 6 T e { T } n p o N o iA o y |a c o 4>o n A e
M ececeA N e - T e T e e o N T | A e o y e ie
M A C A lC S A N e I Te
But I, who came | from Infinite But I came | from Infinite Light | I
Light,101 am here for I know him know him (Light)
(Light) | that I might speak to you that I might instruct | you about the
about the precise nature | of the precise nature of the | truth.
truth.
For whatever is from | itself is a For whatever | is from itself 5 is a
polluted life; | it is self-made. wicked life; it is self-made. | And
Providence 15 has no wisdom in it. providence | lacks wisdom. And
And | fate does not discern. fate | is an undisceming thing.
S/C-m:
SJC-BG:
48 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 2,4-8 NHC III 71,8-13
N T [e 'l U )]O M [T e ncm h ] 5 e t o Y N z i |t n icecM H N g o y c o N Z

e T A . Y * . 9 [ o ] y tlNa.pcyM <|>a)[Ni eBO A. M n 10N O Y T 6 N T A A H e iA
n o J y |o n n im N q cyM (J)a ) | n i n o yo n n im
TBHHTtf C T B H T tj
a.Yto qe n [ n i t m o y -] I eY^TMOY na.T OYla.ea.NA.TOC n e equjoori

Ae n e eqcgoort [zn t m ] h t [6 z n t m h |t nnpco m c e o ja y M o y
N]|zeNpaiMe eYMooYt*
different from these [three voices] 5 come by means | of another voice to

that have been mentioned, he will confess the 10 God of truth and agree
agree [in] | everything concerning | in everything concerning him,
him,
and he is [immortal.] | But, although he is | immortal, dwelling in the

he is immortal, he dwells [in the midst | of mortal men.
midst of] | mortal men.
Eug-IH:
71,9 to confess: and reveal (K & Tr).
NHC III 93,16-94,1 BG 82,9-83,1
NTU)|TN fie N 6 T C T O N H TN N T C D TN A e n e T C T O N H 10T N

e c o o y N | a y 40 N e T M n u jA 6 C O O Y N MN N 6 T M |ITUJA N C O O y N
M ncoo yN | c e N A t n a y nnh e T e C C N 1 T A |A C N A Y N A T C T 6
M n o y % n o o Y c b o a zn M n o Y lx n o o Y c b o a zn
T e c n o p A N T 6 | T P IB H 6 T X A Z M * T C C T T O |pA N T 6 T P IB H 6 T X A Z M 6 15
aaaa zm n e z o Y le it A A A A 6 B O A ZM n e Z O Y 'l'T |
e<T>AYTNNOOYH' x e N TAYTN N O O Yq x e
nA 'f t a p | o Y i e A N A T o c n e ZN it a T | t a p o y ^ t m o y ne zn
t m h t c N|ppa)M e e T e t g A Y M O Y ' TMH |T C N N 6 T C U JA Y M O y NPU)|M
nexA q' n e x A g NAg n si ma
[<j ] a N A q n si M A 6 6 A IO C x e n x o e ic o a io c x e nexe"
But to you | it is given to know; | | But to you it is given 10 to know;

and whoever is worthy of knowledge and whoever is | worthy of knowing
| will receive (it), whoever has not will receive | it, whoever has not
been 20 begotten by the sowing of | been | begotten by the sowing | of
unclean rubbing but by First | Who unclean rubbing 15 but by First |
Was Sent, Who Was Sent, for | he is an
for | he is an immortal in the midst immortal in the midst | of mortal
of | mortal men. men.
Matthew said | Matthew said to him:
[9]4 to him; Lord, Christ,
S/C-m:
93,16-19 But . . . receive (it): To you is given to know, and to those who are
worthy of knowledge. It will be given (K).
93,22 Ms has e (error noted by T-S).
SJC-BG:
82,9-12 B ut. . . it: But to you it is given to know, and to those who are worthy to
know. It will be given to (T-S).
82,9 MS has the last two letters in ligature.
82,19 MS has a paragraphus cum corone in the left margin and a large diple after Me.
The diple seems intended to show the place of the major division.
50 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 2,8-13 NHC III 71,13-18
tth [o y ]N e + | o )o o rt N o y o e iu ) n e f | t g o o r i o y a iT < g a .x .e e p o q n e 1
n im e Y A .[t]({)a .x .e 10 mmo<| n e M 15n e a .p x H c o y t o N q
M n o y c o y t D N ij n si zcn a pxh |mn M n e e 3 o y | c ia . M n e z y n o T a r H
z e N e a o y c ia . o y T e nh e + T y c ic | n i m in
| o y T e [ < M y c ic n im im h [ t i NTKATABOAH MnKOCMOC |

e q e ] iM [ e ] | N a q o y & a .q ' eiMHTi N T o q oyAAq'
[Now He] Who Always Is, | being He Who | Is is ineffable. 15 No

ineffable, 10 no principles or principle knew him, no authority, |
authorities | knew himneither no subjection, nor any creature |
those who [ordain] | nor any from the foundation of the world, |
creatureexcept [he (alone) knew] | except he alone.
himself.
Eug-TH:
71,15 principle: power (K).
NHC III 94,2-13 BG 83,1-17
| MMN AAAY NA.O) S N T M H ' MN A 4 .| a .y N 4.0) Z e C T M e iM H T I

6 l|MHTI 6 BOA Z IT O O T K . | C B O A z Tt O O TK. M iT iM O |66
6 6 6 TMHC ' nCCOTHP
M A T iM O N | e T M H e n e x & q n 56 i n c u iT H p
nex& q x e <xe>
5 neT cgoort o y artg ak x e e p o q n e n e T q jo o n | n ia . T c y a . x e e p o q 1
| Mne&pxH coytoNq e T o jo | o n C M neA R X H co y cu N q |
M n e e a o y lc ia . M n e z y n o T a .rH e M n e e a o y c ia oyTe
M n e < t > y |c i c n i m x i n M | n e z y n o T a . r H o y T e M n e 106 O M
NTKATA.BOAH M |n * .O C M O C OJA o y T e M n e < J > y c ic | x i n
T 6 NOY eiM HTI 10 N T O q O Y A A T q* T K .A T a .B O A H M n K O | C M O C
mn neT ezN & q | e e c u A rt N&q c o y t o N q o j a T e | N o y e iM H T I
eBOA ziT ooT q- | n^T eT e N T o q o y a l& q
O y e B O A zm n e z o y | e i t a y c o m n n e T e z N & q 15b o a
N o y o e iN ' x in N TeN oy z i't o o t neN T& qei | c b o a zm
n e z o y e iT n o y |o Tn x in TeN oy
| no one can find the truth except | no one | can find the truth except |
through you. Therefore teach us | through you. Therefore teach us |
the truth. The Savior said: the truth. The Savior said:
5 He Who Is is ineffable. | No 5 He Who Is, | the ineffable one
principle knew him, no authority, | who exists, | no principle knew him,
no subjection, nor any creature | | no authority, nor did | subjection 10
from the foundation of | the world or power or creature | from the
until now, excep t10 himself alone foundation of the world know him |
and anyone to whom he wants | to until now, | except himself alone
make revelation through him | who | and anyone whom he wants (to
is from First | Light. From now on know him) 15 through me, who came
| from First Light. | From now on
S/C-m:
94,11 Alt.: zitoot , through me (T-S [see BG par.], followed by K).
94.13 The sentence that follows this line in BG (83,1719) may have been acciden
tally omitted here. However, the text makes sense without it.
SJC-BG:
83,4 MS has a large diple after the second word.
83.14 neTezN&q : + <esu)An n &<|>, and whomever he wants <to make revelation
to> through me (T-S).
52 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 2,13-17 NHC III 71,18-72,3
it h rap e T M M i y c m n | n e T M M A Y I TA P O Y A A N A T O C
M N tN o y T e [ejxtoq* o y tg a . e N e z n e o y o ) a a n h 20z c n e e M N T e q
n [ e ] 15 e y q j A e N e z n e [ ' ] x n o O Y O N TA P I NIM 6 T C
Meqcyiort e p o q N pfyJl x n o - O YN TA q x n o qN ATAKO I
e [ y ] a .t M ic i Ae ne <q e> n n a + + 9 Y A r e N N H T o c n e eM N Tq a p x h |
[ e iN e ] | e p o [q * o y a n t a p n im e T e o y N T A q
A P X H I O Y N T A q Z A H - MMN A.A AY
apxi e
x w q M M N TA q pan neT e oyN |Tq
pa n tap n c u )N T n kco ya | ne
For since no divinity is over him, | For he | is immortal and eternal, 20

he is eternal. 15 Being eternal, he having no birth; for everyone | who
does not experience | birth. And has birth will perish. | He is
being unbegotten, <he is> without unbegotten, having no beginning; |
[likeness.] for everyone who has a beginning |
has an end. No one rules
over him. He has no name; for
whoever has | a name is the creation
of another. | He
Eug-TR:
71,21 Corr.: first q for an erasure.
NHC III 94,14-24 BG 83,17-84,13
qNA | SCI)A n e p tO T N C B O A 2IT O |O T

| 1NOK TTNOG N C U )T H P ' A N O K n e TTNOG N C (l)p
n e T M 15M A y r A p o y A + M o y n e n eT M M A y t a p o y a.T M v o x y | n e nA
o y u )A | e N e z n e - o y u ) A e N e z A e o y o )A e N e z n e o y |a )A e N e z A e
n e | e M N T A q m o o y o N r a p n im < n e > eM N TAq | x n o m m ay
e|Te o y N T a q x n o qN A TA K O ' o y o N ta p 5 n im e T e oyN TA q
o y | A re N N H T o c n e eM N Tq a p x h in o | qN ATAKO n iT x n o A e |
20 o y O N TAP NIM 6 T O y N T A q M N T e q A P X H O Y O N TA P I NIM
A P lX H o y N T A q ZAH* M N A A A y e T e oyN TA q a p x h | oyN TA q
a p |xi e xtu q eM N TA q p a n n e T e | ZA H A y to MN 10 A A A y A p x e i
oyN TA q p a n ta p n ctu N t e x c u q M N |Te q p a.N n e T e
N |neoyA n e 1 oyN TA q I PA N TA P nCO)<N>T
N K e o y |a n e
he will | make revelation to you

through | me.
11 am the Great Savior. I am the Great Savior.
For he 15 is immortal and eternal. | For he is immortal | and eternal. 84
Now he is eternal, | having no birth; Now <he is> | eternal, having no |
for everyone | who has birth will birth; for everyone 5 who has birth |
perish. He is unbegotten, | having will perish. And Unbegotten | has
no beginning; 20 for everyone who no beginning; for everyone | who
has a beginning | has an end. Since has a beginning | has an end. And
no one rules | over him, he has no no 10 one rules over him. He has no
name; for whoever | has a name is | name; for whoever has | a name is
the creation of | another. the <creation> of another. | He
5/C-ffl:
94,15 Corr.: oj for o .
94,20 CorT.: second p for erased x .
5/C-BG:
84,3 Not emended by T-S.
84,12 MS has nciDTe, the ransom.
54 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 2,17-27 NHC III 72,3-14
e y a . ] + t eiNe A e e p o q n e ' o y A T f p a n e p o q n e M N TAq |

MA.q|q)<i)rt e [ p o q n o y m o ]p (J> h ' m o p <J>h N pcoM e n e T e o y N T t j 5
[n]H r A p | e f [tgoort e p o q MOP<J)H r A P N P 0 )M e n C O JN T I
noym op<|>]h o y f c c o N f ] 20 N T C N Keoya. n e
K .e [o y A r e ' o y f i T A q ' N N o y z i |a b a m m in
............] ? m [ . ] e y . | [ . . ]' MMo q N e e a n n |t z i a a
e N .[ 14 ] y e | [N ]T o q o y A A q N T A N X IT C " H N T A N N A y | e p O C
[ o y fiT A q n o y c m o ] t | [ e ] q e A A A A O Y 2IA 6 A NUJMMU) 10 TC
n n o s e o f y o N n i m A y co e c o y A T B N z o y o N K A NIM I
e q c A ]| [T ]iT e o y o N n [im 12 ] 25 e c c A T i i e N i n T H p q - ' e c N A y | zi
[ . . ] h ' A y<p [ 16 ] | [ . ]t c c na ' n im eceToopz m m oc |
9YA+ [ 17 A + ]| f b in [e e p o q O y A A C ' Z I T O O T C MMIN M M OC |
19+ ] oyATApNH/ x q n e
| And [being without] likeness, he is unnameable. He has no | human

does not | take on [form]. For form; for whoever has 5 human form
[whoever] | [takes on form is] the is the creation | of another.
[creation] 20 of [another . . . ] | He has his own semblance | not
[ . . . ] | only he [has a resemblance] like | the semblance we have
| [that] is greater than [everything received and seen, | but a strange
and better] | than everything [ . . . ] semblance 10 that surpasses all
25 [ . . . ]. And [ . . . ] | [ . . . no] | things | and is better than the
likeness [ . . . ] totalities. It looks | to every side and
sees itself | from itself. | He is
infinite;
Eug-V:
2,18 Corr.: first n incorporates initial q (cf. 9,In.).
2,20 e could be a . Only a large dot remains immediately before the lacuna. For e
with such a dot, see 3,13 (first e ) Facsimile EditionV. If the letter were a, one
would expect the dot to be a bit lower.
Eug-HI:
72,8 Corr.: second an for an incomplete y.
72,12 Corr.: zics a / for e z ic e , It looks at every labor (both e s are marked out;
a seems to be in a second hand). See note to HI 95,6.
NHC III 94,24-95,7 BG 84,13-85,11
O Y^Tf pan NAq | n e M N Teq

Mop<t>H N 15pu)M e n e T e o y N T A q |
MOP<J>H TA P NRCDMC | nCCO N T
N ic e o Y ^ . n e
OYNTa.q a c n o y zi O Y lN T q o y c in b enouq m
<j[e] a e A T [c p ]q m m in M M o q T e N | e e m in M M oq n e N e e an | ne
N [T A T ]e T N N A Y e p O C VA N X H N TATeTN N AY H N 66
N e e I N T 4 .T e T N X .IT C n |t a t t n x i a a .a .a o y e i l N e
o y z i A e a . | n o )m m u ) T e e c o y a . T B NUJMMO e q o y o T B 5 n e bnka n im
C N K A 5 NIM AYU) e C C O T r f ayco e q | c o T n e N in T H p q
e n T H p q ' e | c N A Y 2' c { e } x A ' n im e q e i |wpz n ca ca n im eqNAY I
e c e io o p z m m o c | z i t o o t c epoq cboa z Y T o o T q | M A \A A q
O Y A A T C M N A R H X C | O YAnepAN Toc 10 A e n e
o ya tta ko Ae |ne
is unnameable. | He has no human

form; 15 for whoever has | human
form | is the creation of another.
And he has a semblance He has | a likeness of his own
9[5] of his ownnot like | what you have not like | what you have seen and | 85
seen and | received, but a strange received, but a | strange likeness that
semblance | that surpasses all things surpasses 5 all things and is | better
5 and is better than the universe. | It than the totalities. It sees | on every
looks to every side and sees itself | side and looks at | itself from | itself.
from itself. Since it is infinite, And he is infinite 10 and
imperishable. | He
5/C-ffl:
95,1-2 Lacunae so restored by T-S.
95,6 Corr.: zicna ' for e z i c e , It looks at every l a b o r the initial e is marked out,
a is written above the next e in what may be a second hand, and that e is not
marked out. The same correction was made in the same way, and by the same
hand, in 72,12, except that there the second e is marked out. The a is written over
an erased letter, possibly itself an a.
SJC-BG:
85,top MS has a strip of papyrus pasted above the page number. This strip and two on
the other side of the leaf seem designed either to restore a broken leaf or to prevent
a weakened one from breaking further.
56 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 3,1-4 NHC HI 72,14-73,3
(5 lines lacking) O YA .TTak.zoq n e 15 o y A eqMHN

boa ne n a ^ s a p It o c ' oyA
e M N T A q n e q e iN e ne |
o y A T A e o c n e N A T c y iB e
o y A T It y u x u T n e o y A eqMHN
[f] [ . . . oyMAicApiJpc [n e ' cboa | n e o y m a i c a p i o c ne
eyATNo]ei M M oq | [ n e '9 ] o y A T N o 20e i M M oq ne
cboa m [ ___ J e y A T M i c e | [n e ' e q jA q N o e i M |M oq m m in M M oq
eyA +a)]A xe ep o [q n e '] o y A T t g i |Ttj n e " o y A T X i s e i M
ajAyMoyTe | [epoq x e ni]tu+ NCtoq n e | o y T C A e i o c n e
MnT[Hp]q' e M N T e q tgco
a )T o y M A i c [ a ] p i o c n e or
n A<t>OAp | t o c a j i y x o o c e p o q
x e n iio T | M nTHpq'
| (5 lines lacking) he is incomprehensible. 15 He is ever

imperishable | (and) has no likeness
(to anything). He is | unchanging
good. He is | faultless. He is
[3] [he is blessed. Since he is everlasting. | He is blessed. He is
unknowable] | [ . . . being] unknowable, 20 while he
unbegotten (and) | [ineffable,] he is (nonetheless) knows | himself. He is
called | [Father] of the Universe. immeasurable. | He is untraceable.
He is | perfect, having no defect.
He is imperishably blessed. | He is 73
called Father | of the Universe.
Eug-V:
3,2 Superlinear stroke is in lacuna.
Eug-III:
72,21 Corr.: atoj for partly erased a t x i .
NHC III 95,8-22 BG 85,11-86,9
oyA+TAZoq n e eqM HN c b o a - | o y A T T A Z o q n e a y I to o y A
oya *Pt o c n e eMNTAq e q M H N e s o \ n e | A y to m n n e f N e
n e q e i 10N e o y A T A e o c n e M M o q | o y A T A e o c n e a .y a)
eM eqcyiBe | o y A T c g c u tu t n e M e q 15a jiB e o y a t o j t a n e o y | a j i
o y u jA A N H z e | n e o y m a i c a p i o c e N e z n e oyM A .icâL.^p i | o c n e
ne e M e y N o | e ie M M oq o y a T N o e i M M o q | n e u ja iq N o T
q jA q N o e ie M M oq | o y A A T q M M o q m a . y| a a q o y A T u j i T q ne
n e o y A + 15x i s e x M e
o y a .T o jiT q ' oy
Ncwq n e ' o y t c a i o c | n e a tx i n s c e NC<uq n e
E M N T A q U)(U(Ut o y m a k a | p i o c o y lT e x io c n e eM N TA q o )| ta
ne N i.< t>e a.p To c u j A y M o y lT e mm A y o y m a k a p i o c ne |
epoq x e n e itu t MnTHpq N A T X tu zM e q ) A Y M O Y T e 5 e p o q
x e n e i a j T M nTH pq | n e
| <J>iA.irtnoc n e x A q x e n x o e ic <|> iA in n o c n e x A q | x e ne5cc"
20 ncoc s e A q oy w N Z e N T e A io c | n tu c s e A q o y u )| N e s e N T e x io c
n e xA q N aq n si n T e \ io c n e x A q n | si n T e \ io c nccuthr
n c c u |t h p xe xe
| he is ever incomprehensible. | He is incomprehensible and |

is imperishable and has no likeness everlasting, | and there is nothing
(to anything). 10 He is unchanging like him. | He is good and he does
good. | He is faultless. He is eternal. n o t15 change. He is faultless. He is
| He is blessed. While he is not | eternal. He is blessed. | He is
known, | he ever knows | himself. unknowable; | he ever knows
He is immeasurable. He is 15 himself. | He is immeasurable.
untraceable. He is perfect, | having He is untraceable. He is | perfect,
no defect. He is imperishably having no | defect. He is blessed |
blessed. | He is called | Father of (and) without blemish, (he) who is
the Universe. called 5 Father of the Universe.
I Philip said: Lord, 20 how, then, | Philip said: | Christ, how, then,
did he appear to the perfect ones? | did he appear | to the perfect ones?
The perfect Savior said to him: The perfect | Savior said:
57C-BG:
86,top MS has a strip o f papyrus pasted in such a way that it covers most o f the page
number.
86,4-5 Between these lines a narrow strip of papyrus is pasted in the MS, extending
from the fifth letter almost to the end of the lines.
86,6 MS has a large diple between n e and after <J>i\innoc and a large asterisk in the
left margin slightly below the level o f the line.
86,9 MS has a large asterisk in the left margin.
58 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 3,4-15 NHC III 73,3-14
z a e H A e 5 [ M n a T e A ] a a Y o y u jN Z za H e M i r a T e A a a y | o y c u N z z n
CBOA. N T e I [NH e T O y ] o N Z ' N e T o y a N Z eBOA" 5 + m n t n o 6 mn
z e N M N tN o s mn z c N | [ e 3 o ] y c ia N i e a o y c i a e | T q ) o o r i N ZH Tq
tth A e e t t y o o i t N ZH T q | e [q c ]c p e q a M a z T e n n i |nTH pq N T e
e q a .M a .ZT e M nTH pq N T e y | NirtTHpq- ' a y c u m|mn A a a y
[t]h p 9 Y e N cea M a zTe Ae N Toq a M a z T e M M oq' n e T M | M a y r a p -
M M oq 10 a N e B O A z7 t n A a a y ' o y N o y c TH p q" o y e N N o ia 10 mn
naT o y N o y c | n [ e m ]n o y e N e y M H c ic o < y > 4 > p o n h c ic |
o y e N N o i a ['] 9 y [ M ] e e y e A e | oyA on cM o c mn o y A y N a M ic |
m [n o ] y c B U ) m n o y o ) o x . N e ' m n N TO O y THpoy
nH | e t z 7 x N o y a j o x N e m n Z e N Z IC O A y N a | M IC N e MTTHrH
o y s p M n a | n i6 o m T H p o y z cu c NNIITTHpq N e
e q [ q j ] 9 o r t N N o y 15n H rH N T e y | a y o ) n e y r e N o c THpq < x i n
THpoy
Even before 5 anything is visible of | Before anything is | visible among

[those that are visible], majesties and those that are visible, 5 the majesty
| authorities, He Who Is in Himself | and the authorities that | are in him,
[continuously] embraces the totality he embraces the | totalities of the
of them a ll | but is not embraced 10 totalities, and nothing | embraces
by anything. He is mind | and him. For he | is all mind, thought10
thought; also thinking and | teaching and reflecting, considering, |
and counsel; and he is | above rationality and power. | They all are
counsel and powerall powers | are equal powers. | They are the sources
his, since [he] is the 15 source of of the totalities. | And their whole
them all. race <from
Eug-V:
3,9 Fourth letter: see Emmel, 1979: 183.
3,11 Superlinear stroke: see Emmel, 1979: 183.
Eug-Ul:
73.4 Corr.: N e T o y a N Z for t t c t o y a n z (in) that which is visible.
73.5 that: omitted by K & Tr (text is not emended by Tr).
73.6 he embraces: less likely, He rules (K). For the concept, see Gos. Truth (1,5)
22,21-33.
73,8 embraces: less likely, rules (K); see 73,6n.
73,10 So emended by T-S.
73,12 Corr.: p in t h p o y for erased z.
73,14 Not emended by T-S, K or Tr; r e N o c , race: see endnote 3.
NHC III 95,22-96,10 BG 86,10-87,5
ZAOH N C e o y N Z A A A Y I 6 BO A 10 Z A T 6 Z H N c e o y w N Z a a a y I

N T C N6 T O Y A N Z C B O A TM N |TN O S CBOA <NTC>NCTOyONZ
mn T e a o y c i A e y t y o o r t t m n t |n o s m n N e a o y c iA
(j[<;] NZHTtj e q e M A Z T e [M n z o ]\ o > N | e y q ) o | o n N ZH T q e q e M A Z T e |
N <N >IITTH Pq CM N A A A Y NTC n T H p q 15 cmn
N N in T H P q
e M [a i]z T e | M M oq' n e T M M A y t a p AAAY AMAZT6 M|MOq neTMMAY
o y I n o y c THpq n e Ayco TA P O Y lN O Y C TH pq
o y n 5n o i a n e m n o y < | > p o n h c ic o Y e N Y M H | c ic n e o y c n n o i a
| mn o y e N e y M H c ic mn n e mn | o yM N T C A B e o y M e e y e
oy|\oncM oc mn o y s o M - mn o y e o M n e n t o o y th | p o y nz
N T O | O Y T H P O Y Z 6 N Z IC O N c e o jH o j m n N e y e P H Y I zn tso m
N A Y lN A M IC N C ' MnHTH N N in T H P q N T n H rH N N in |THpq
10 N C
Ayo) n e y r e N o c TH pq x in | A yto n e N T A q c y tu n e 5 THpq x i n
| Before anything is visible | of 10 Before anything is visible | <of>

those that are visible, the | majesty those that are visible, the | majesty
and the authority are and the authorities | are in him, since
9[6] in him, since he embraces the whole he embraces | the totalities of the
of the totalities, | while nothing universe, 15 while nothing embraces
embraces | him. For he is | all mind. | him. For he is | all mind; he is
And he is thought 5 and considering reflecting; | he is thought and |
| and reflecting and | rationality and wisdom; he is thinking
power. They | all are equal powers. and power. They all | are equal to 87
| They are the sources of the each other | in the power of the
totalities. 10 And their whole race source of the | totalities. And all that
from came to be 5 from
syc-Hi:
95,24 Corr.: erased z at the end of the line.
96,1 Stroke over m in lacuna is visible.
Lacuna is not restored by T-S.
96,10 t c n o c , race: see endnote 3.
SJC-BG:
86,13 since he embraces: less likely, He rules (TS); see IH 73,6n.
86,15 embraces: rules (T-S); see IH 73,6n.
87,4-5 neNTAqajiune , that came to be: See endnote 3.
60 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V NHC ffl 73,14-16
N tt )o p n > q)a. ak.pH15x . N o y

e y t g o o r i zm n e z o y e i f |
n c o o y n M n a .r e N N H T o c
first> to la s t15 is in the

foreknowledge | of Unbegotten,
NHC 11196,11-20 BG 87,5-15
N o jo p rt <yA a p h x n o y N e y | 2 N T A P X H Cl)A < A P H X N O y > | N A y ZM

neqcgpn n c o o y n neqcyopn n c o |o yn n iA T A p H x q
n iA | n e p A N T O c n a t c n n h t o c | N A T X n o q | N6ICDT
N e ic o t : nexA q n si co |m ac x e nexe*
o cdm ac n e i i q 13 N a q x e ttccd th p e 10T B e o y an a T cycone
n x o e ic n ctu T H p | eT B e o y A ytu | e T B e o y A y o y t o N Z cboa |
an a T c g to n e 'f i e T B e | o y a n a T nexA q n si n T e x io c N Ctop | x e
oycoN Z c b o a .' n e x i g | n<si anok A 'fe i B O A ZM
n T e \io c n c o jth p ' x e a n o k | n i | A n e p A N T O N x e e e i e T c e 15B e
A e ie ? c b o a . zm n A ire p A N T o c 20 TH YTN CN KA
x e eeiN A X u ) n h t n n z id b
| first to last was | in his beginning to <end> | were in his

foreknowledge, (that of) the infinite | foreknowledge, | (that of) the infinite
Unbegotten | Father. Thomas said Unbegotten | Father.
to him: 15 Lord, Savior, | why did Thomas said: | Christ, Savior, why
these come to be, and why | were 10 did these come to be, and | why
these revealed? | The perfect Savior were they revealed? | The perfect
said: | I came from the Infinite 20 Savior | said: I came from the |
that I might tell you all Infinite that I might teach 15 you all
5/C-m:
96.12 Alt.: < M > n iA n ep A N T O c , foreknowledge <of> the infinite (T-S).
96.14 Corr.: a diagnoal stroke after the double stop is erased.
Between this line and the next, MS has a paragraphus cum corone in the left mar
gin.
96.15 Corr.: NAq x e n x for erased e c o M A c ne.
5/C-BG:
87,5 Alt.: cyA < o> y or cyA <ne>yxto<K>, to (their) end (T-S). This proposal is
not satisfactory because xcdk does not occur in this phrase ( x i n t a p x h . . . ) else
where in 5/C-BG, while ap h xn oy does. The emendation adopted here is found
in the parallels. It may be that n a y (line 6) should be included in the portion of
the text to be emended (see EugIII par.). Or perhaps it caused part of the initial
problem through similarity of appearance.
87.7 Alt.: <M>niATApHX.q , foreknowledge <of> the infinite (T-S).
87.8 MS has a large diple after the first word and a large asterisk in the left margin
slightly below the level of the line.
87.12 MS has a large asterisk in the left margin.
EUGNOSTOS
NHC III 96,21-97,12 BG 87,15-88,12
| n im ' n e n N A e T i g o o r t n im n e | n N A e T u jo o n
N e Y l p e q x n o n e - s y n t a x mm A y N eYP eq |xn o ne eYN TAq m m ay
| n o y s o m < n > o y o y c ia n |n o y s o m N p e q x n e o y c ia |
N peqxno N P e q f MOp<)>H X 6 K A A C 20
[qz] N p [e q f ] m o p <)>h x e K iic eceoY<uN Z c b o a n s i t n o s
e C N A | o y u )[ N Z ] 6 B O A N 6 I T N 0 6 M M N TP M M A O e T N Z H T q | 6 T B 6 nH
MMNt| ( T ) p M M iO ' 6 T 2 H n N ZH Ttj TeqM N TX C m n Teq|ATAnH
e T B e I T e q M N T X P H C T O C MN A q o y o jc y c b o a z i | T O O T q m m i n
Te q A .ra.n H 5 A q p z N A q z iT O O T q MMo q e x 5n o N Z N K A p n o c x e
m m in M|Moq e x n e z e N K a p n o c N N eq |p A n o A A ye m a yAAq
x e n |N e q a .n o A < a > Y e o y A a t q N Tq|M N TATA O C A A A A
ZN TeqM N | T A rA O C ' A A A A Z N K e | r fN A N T e T r e N e A e T e |
ze N ice n N A - n |t 6 T re N e A m a c k im N c e x n e c o j m a 10 zY
n a t k im e y e x n e 10 c o jm a z i KApnoc o yco o y mn |
KAp n o c o y c o o y mn | o y t im h O Y M N T A T T A K O MN T e q | X A P I C
zn oY a<)> A pciA mn | neqzM o t
| things. Spirit Who Is was the things. | Spirit Who Is was the
begetter, | who had | the power <of> begetter, | who had | the power of
a begetter one who begets substance | and
[97] and form-[givers] nature, that | the gives form, that 20 the great
great | wealth that was hidden in him wealth that was in him might be 88
might be revealed. Because of | his revealed. | Because of his mercy and
mercy and his love 5 he wished | to his | love he wished | to bring forth 5
bring forth fruit by himself, that | he fruit by himself, that he might not |
might not <enjoy> his | goodness enjoy his | goodness alone but (that)
alone but (that) other spirits | of the other | spirits of the Generation That
Unwavering Generation might bring | Does Not Waver might bring forth
forth 10 body and fruit, glory and | body 10 and fruit, glory and |
honor in imperishableness and | his imperishableness and his | infinite
infinite
5/C-ni:
96,23 Not emended by T-S or K (power, a begetting, form-[giving] nature).
97,7 Not emended by T-S or K, both of whom translate isolate himself in. Iso
late is somewhat removed from the lexical meaning of djtoA.iSeiv.
97,11 Corr.: z for erased m.
64 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V NHC HI 73,16-19
N e|M TTA Toyei tap encTo yA N z |

N e o y N oyAia.<t>opA. A e u j o o n ' |
[ o ] y T e Nia.<t>A.pToc n a ic o n
| for they had not yet come to

visibility. | Now a difference existed
| among the imperishable aeons.
Eug-'HI:
73,19Corr.: e ni forerased o y N .
Lacuna so restored by T-S.
NHC III 97,12-23 BG 88,12-89,7
e T e MNTtj A P H x g ' | x e eTe mn a ph xc xe | k a a c
e p e n e g A .rA .eo N oycoNZ c b o a . | e g e o y i o N Z c b o a . | n s i

2ITN ITAYTOreNHC N N o y T e 15 n e g A T A e o N c b o a 15 j ' l T O O T q
N eicot NA<t>6APCIA NIM ' MN | M n i A T x n o g | n n o y t c n e ic o T
NeNTAycycune m n n c a n a T | m m n t |a t t a k o n im mn
N e< M > n A T o y ei A e e n e T o y A N Z N e N | T A y u )< o n e m n n c a n a b i

| n e - o y N o y 'c g ' ( e }iBe A e | N eM nAToyei Ae e n e T o y
eNAcycu<q> | o y T e n ia < ( > 6 a p to n " O N 2 e B O A . O Y A IA < t> O P A |Ae ne
Negcocy 20 c b o a . e g x i o m m o c x e e N A cycoc c c g o o n o y | T (o o y
n e T e | o y N M A A x e MMog N N IA T T A K O
eccoTM e|N IA nepA N T O N N eg|cucy A e c b o a xe neTe
MApegctoTM | Ayco n b t p h c o y 5N T e g M A A x e m m a y e c c o | T M
M A p e g c c o T iT 6 N IA T | T A IC O a n o k
grace, | that his treasure might be grace, | that his treasure | might be
revealed | by Self-begotten God, 15 revealed 15 by Unbegotten | God, the
the father of every imperishableness father of | every imperishableness
and | those that came to be and those that | came to be
afterward. afterward.
| But they had not yet come to | But they had not yet come to
visibility. | Now a great difference | visibility.
exists among the imperishables. Now a great difference | exists 89
He called 20 out saying: Whoever | among | the imperishables.
has ears to hear about | the infinities, And he | called out: Whoever has 5
let him hear; | and I have ears to hear, | let him hear about the
addressed those imperishables! | I will
S7C-IH:
97,13 th a t. . . revealed: for his goodness was revealed (K).
97.17 m s has n.
97.18 Corr.: cy for marked out z a ; the corrector neglected to mark out the following e
(see similar problem in 113,8 and to a lesser degree in 95,6); originally zacibc ,
shadow.
MS has c at end of line (gender agreement with z a e ib c ).
SJC- BG:
88,19-89,2 B u t . . . among (so also Schenke in T -S : 340): or possibly, But before
they have come to what is revealed, a significant difference exists, however,
between (T-S).
66 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 3,15-24 NHC III 73,20-74,7
20 M A p e N N o e i s e N T e e i z e xe |
n [H ] r a p T H p q | e T e u ja q u ju m e N K A NIM N TAY<ytl)TTe C B O A ZM |
6 b [o a z m tt] t 3l k o ' | qN A p 17TAICO C C N A T A K O
A + c y io n e z t o c e A Y < y u )| n e c b o a zm n f A ic o -
[nH e t e B O A ] z n f| [ A < | > ] e A p [ c iA ' n e N T A q ty o )
qNA.]p A [tu } (u n e a n '] a a a a | ne c b o a zn TA <t>eA .p ciA oa
qNAp z o y [ e a 4 > a p t o n ' N q N A |t a ko an aaaa
z o j c 0 ] y e B 0 A 20 z n f A < t > e a [ p c ia e q N A u jc u n e N |A <)>eA PTO c
6 ] n e ' | q [ 1 2 ] iu n z (d c e a q c y u m e e |B O A zn
[oyMH]HUie | [ r a p N T e N ]ipu)M e TA<)>e A P C IA '
a y c (o [p m ' e N c ] e | [ c o o y n ] a n z c o c T e O Y s MHHU)e N puiM e
NfAiA<)>opA [eTe t a T T ] e ' | A ynAAN A | M n o yco yN
[ N e e n n h e ] + z e T [ B ] p q )[ M e ' TeeiAiA<t>opA e T e | ta T Te
A Y M O Y '] AYMoy
20 Let us, then, consider (it) this way.

For all | that comes [from the] | Everything that came from | the
perishable | will come to naught. perishable will perish, since it came |
[Whatever is] from | from the perishable. Whatever came
imperishableness [will not come to from imperishableness will not | 74
naught] but | will be more perish but will become |
[imperishable, since] it is from 20 imperishable, since it came from |
[ . . . ] imperishableness. | [ . . . For] imperishableness. So, 5 many men
many | men went [astray because went astray | because they had not
they did] | not [know] the difference; known this difference; that | is, they
[that is,] | [as with] murderers, [they died.
died.]
Eug-V:
3,16 Final letter: see Emmel, 1979: 183.
3,19 Letter immediately after lacuna and last 3 letters: see Emmel, 1979: 183.
Eug-HI:
73,22 Corr.: second c for erased b (initially z u b ).
74,1 T-S and Tr restore [ e i] .
74,4 so: so that (T-S, K & Tr).
NHC III 97,23-98,9 BG 89,7-20
anok A e it y a x e I nmm &y ' e n f N a t y a x e | m n N e T p o e ic en

A q o y cu z e T O O T q ' A qo y|coz e T O O T q n e x A q x e
[qH] n e x A q x e
N K A NIM N T [ A y U } ] ( U | n e 6 B O A ZM N 10K A NIM N TAqq)(DTTe 6 B O A | ZM
iit a k o c 6 n [ a t ] a |k o IT T A K O q N A T A K O
x e N T A y a jc o n e cboa . zm | z t o c | e y a jc o n e cboa
TIT A K O " zm r ? T A |k o
n e N T A q u jc o n e A e 5 c b o a zn n e N T A q ty co n e cbo a | zn
TM N +A +TA KO M CqTA|KO A A A A T M N T A T ^ T A 'K O M A 'q 'T A K O 15
ajA q c g to n e n a + t a |k o ' aa aa q iy o o n n attako |
zc o c e y c y o o n c b o a zn |
TM N TATTAKO
zto c o yM H H tge N pcoM e | A y c io p M N e < n > t Ay|M HHcye Npu)M e
e M ir o y c o y N T e e t |A ia<t>opa cco pm |eN ceco oyN an
A yM oy N T e e i 2 a ia <|)Op a AyM oy
who are awake. | Still he continued address | those who are awake!
[98] and said: Still he continued | and said:
Everything that came | from the Everything 10 that came from | the
perishable will perish, | since it perishable will perish, since | it
came from | the perishable. But comes from the perishable. |
whatever came 5 from Whatever came | from
imperishableness does not perish | imperishableness does not perish 15
but becomes imperishable. but is imperishable, | since it is from
| imperishableness. Just as | many
| So, many men | went astray men went astray | because they did
because they had not known this | not know this 20 difference, (so) they
difference and they died. died.
5/C-HI:
98,1 So restored by T-S.
98,7 The section found in the parr, immediately before zoic, so, may be missing
here through homoioteleuton (so also T-S).
68 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 3,25-4,2 NHC III 74,7-17
25 |> y <d z<d] tga. ne[TM]A e[TBe Aytu zu) oja | n e e iM A ' e n i m n
ni]|[ak.<J>ak.pTOc] N N o y r e z n tgsoM n a a a y I t o y b c
[ 7 ] | [ ......... ] . o [ . ] ntc T e < t> Y c ic N N u j i x e 10 n t a b i p
T[ 10] I [ ......... ]o c n .[ . ] typn N x o o Y ( e ) m t t m a | k a p io c
tM [ 11 ] | [ 7 ] eq[o]yu)(y NA.<t)a.PTOC N N O Y T C I MMHe'
[ e ] N [ a .z T e e N i ] 30[a )A A .e c + k h ] eojcone s e eyN oya | eqoyeqj
ezpa.Y n [ 8 ] | [ 8 ]e n i C T e Y e eN ty ax e | c t k h ezpaJ
M A [p e q B U )K c b o a .] M & p eqM O Y<i)T 15 a .n M n e e w i cya.

zti t n n i a t ] x i H[ne e p o o y nxco tc M n e | T o y A N Z c b o a . a y 40
e tzH rt] | 6 t[m m a y Te e te N N O i | a n ATCABoq
M]a.peq[Moy<yf Ae uja ttixiok] |
25 [But this much is enough about But this much is | enough, since it is
the] | [imperishable] God in [ . . . ] | impossible for anyone | to dispute
[ . . . ] of the [ . . . ] | [ . . . ] I [ . . . ] the nature of the words 10 I have just
who wants [to believe th e ]30 [words spoken about the blessed, |
set] down (here) [ . . . ] I [ . . . ] , imperishable, true God. | Now, if
anyone | wants to believe the words
| set down (here),
let [him leave] let him go 15 from what is hidden to

[the numberless things that are the end of what is visible, | and this
hidden,] | [and] let him [go to the Thought | will instruct him
end]
Eug-V:
3.25 Omission of circumflex with z to: see 17,7.
3,30 Superlinear stroke is in lacuna, but a circumflex is visible above what would have
been the second letter in the second lacuna.
Eug-Ul:
74.10 Not emended by Tr.
74.11 true God: less likely, God of truth (K & Tr).
NHC III 98,9-16 BG 89,20-90,9
n e x A C N a q 10 n si Ma.piza.MMH nexac
x e n x o e ic | N a ty N z e s e N aq n si M a p iza M xe ne|xc cf
e N N a c o y N N aY | n e x e n to c c e N a c o y t o N | N a T n e x a q
n T e x io c n c o jt h p xe n si n T e x io c | n c o jt h p x e
| aM HeiTN" X IN N ia T O y t U N Z | a M H eiTN - 5 X IN N ia T O y C O N Z
cbo a ty a n x t o K N N e T o y a N Z ' 15 cboa eg a | n x t o K N N e T o y o N Z
ayto n to c T a n o z p o ia *N T e | | b o a a y to n to c T a n o p p o i| a
T e N N O ia N a o y c o N Z n htn N T e N N O ia CN aoyw N Z | n htn
Mary said to him: 10 Lord, | then Mary said to him: | Christ, how will 90
how will we know that? | The that be known? | The perfect |
perfect Savior said: Savior said:
I Come (pi.) from invisible | things Come (pi.) 5 from invisible things
to the end of those that are visible, 15 to | the end of those that are visible,
and the very emanation of | Thought | and the very emanation | of
will reveal to you Thought will reveal | to you
SJC-BG:
90,2 T-S suggests the third person pi. prefix of the verb may be the result of dittogra
phy (ntoc); note that P.Oxy. 1081,26 supports the reading in S/C-III.
70 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 4,3-12 NHC HI 74,17-75,2
nnh e [ + o y ] o N Z A y t o [ q N A S iN e xe n to c TTTICTIC I NNCT6
n n ia t ]| o y u ) n z [z p ] a T ZN N ceoyoN Z gboa a n ' a y |c n tc
N e + o [ y o N Z fe N p N O iA tap zm t t c t o y a n z cboa'
6 [c n a ]ta m o o y [ f n ic n c ] | ra.p
N TeN ne T e nh e T e N ce [o yo N z]
| A N N e NH e T O Y O N Z
t a T A e [Te o y a p x h ] |
N f r N t o c ic O y 20A p X H N C O O Y N T e T A V
n x o e ic n tc n [T H p ]q | N N e t g A y f nxoeVc | M iTTH pq k a t a
ran epoq a n k a [ t a t ] m n 10t m c T A A H e e iA M [e y ]|x o o c epoq
x e n it o t a a a a n it g o p iT N e i t o t | x e e itO T A A A A n p [ o ] | n A T t o p
n it o f ta p o y a p x h n e n t c nh n e it O T TA P T A P X H M
eTN H O Y I C B O A 6 B O [a ] neToyAN z [c b o a ] ne n eT M |M A y
I of those [that are visible], and [he how faith | in those things that are
will find the invisible things] | in not visible was | found in what is
those that [are visible.] For Thought visible.
5 [will] teach them. For [the] higher
[faith] | is (that) those things that are
not [visible] | are those that are
visible. And this [is a principle] | of This is a 20 knowledge principle.
knowledge.
The Lord of the [Universe] | was not The Lord | of the Universe is not
rightly called 10 Father but rightly | called Father but
Forefather. | For the Father is the Forefather. | For the Father is the
beginning (or principle) of those that beginning (or principle)
are to come | through him, but the of what is visible. For he (the Lord)
Eug-V:
4,8 Third superlinear stroke is in lacuna.
4,10 First and second superlinear strokes are in lacuna.
Mg-III:
74,21 So restored by T-S.
75,1 T-S and Tr restore [z cb o a tt].
NHC III 98,16-25 BG 90,9-91,2
e |B O V x e nco c t it ic t ic nn |Te cb o a x e ncoc t t t i c 10t i c

N ceoyoN z cboa . a n - a y <s n t c | n n i a t o y c o n z c b o a A.Y|ze e p o c
2N N 6 T O Y O N 2 C B O A 2N N 6 T O Y O N 2 e | B O A
NeTHrt e 20n iA .r e N N H T o c N e ic o t N T e n iA r e N H T O c N e i |o j t n e T e
n e | T e O Y N T tj M i i x e ccco tm | o yn M A A X e M |M oq e c c o T M
M A p e q cto T M M A p e q c u ) 15t m
n x o e i c M THpq | e u j i y x o o c nexe"MnTHpq e q jA Y |x o o < c > eN
epoq an x e e it o t | a a a a ep o q x e eicoT | a a a a
n p o n A T co p < n e ic o t t a p > t a .p x h nponATcop neitoT
N T e 25 N 6 T N A O Y U )N 2 6BOA. < n e > - TAP ( n ) t APXH NNTNAOY|l0N2
neTM c b o a n e neTMMiy
| how faith in those | things that are how faith 10 in invisible things was |
not visible was found | in those that found in those that are visible
are visible,
those that belong to 20 Unbegotten | of Unbegotten Father. | Whoever
Father. | Whoever has ears to hear, | has ears | to hear, let him hear.
let him hear.
The Lord of the Universe | is not 15 The Lord of the Universe is | not
called Father | but Forefather. called Father | but Forefather.
<For the Father is> the beginning (or For the Father is the beginning (or
principle) of 25 those that will principle) of those that will appear, |
appear, but he (the Lord) but he (the Lord)
5/C-BG:
90,16 n :<3l>n (T-S). Emendation is not necessary (see Kasser: 2).
72 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 4,12-22 NHC III 75,2-9
z l T O O T t j' TTIA.TA.PX[H] A C | rA P nAN[A]pXOC MTTPO|nAT(DP

n n atp Z A [e ] e q cyo o rt
N N o y < g [o p ]iT N e i | t u f
zI n a x e e N e o y t o u ) P zm o + 15
NAq N N o yp A N ' o y tap
n tn co o yn an | x e o y n [e ]
N o y o e io ) A e n im e q e iM e | epoq e q N A y e p o q m m in | M M oq n zp a Y
NZHTq N e e n zpa Y zn o y e iA e A | N Z H T q N e N o y 5e i A \
e c o y [o )N ]z eB O A e c e iN e M Moq" e A q o y iu N z c b o a zm n e q | e i N e
N T o q | A e n e [n iC M o ]f N T [e ]q N A y T o n A T to p e T e nA Y | n e
[ e T ] A y f [p ] a [ n ] 20 e p o q x [ e n a y T o r e N e T t u p * Ayco
n it u f N ] p e [ q x n o ] q o y A A q | N A N | T O n O C e n i A N T O n iT O )
n ip [e q M T o M n e q z o -] e n iA H zm | M n p O | O N T O C N A re N N H T O C
m e [ M o t ] N [T e q e A q o y < D N ]z
Unending Non-Principle (or is | the beginningless | Forefather.

beginning) | is Forefather
| in order that we might be ready
to g re e t15 him by name. For we do
not know | who he is.
Now he always understands | He sees himself | within himself,
himself within himself as in a like a 5 mirror, having appeared in
semblance | that appears and his | likeness as Self-Father, that is, |
resembles himself. And it | is [his Self-Begetter, and as Confronter, |
resemblance that] was [called] 20 since he confronted | Unbegotten
Self-[begotten Father,] | He [Who First Existent.
Is before His Presence,] since in |
[his resemblance he appeared
Eug-V:
Eug-III:
75,1-3 he . . . sees: less likely, he, the Forefather without beginning, sees (K &
Tr). The lack of a sentence pronoun may result from the scribes sensing that it
would be stylistically unacceptable to put it in its expected place, either immedi
ately before or after t a p , for. Or perhaps neTMMiy is thought of as a sentence
pronoun in this context by the scribe (but see 71,18-19).
75,8 since he confronted: in the presence o f (K) (?).
NHC III 99,1-10 BG 91,2-13
[ge] m ay A [e i t i ] a .n a .p x o c | A e t t ia n a p x o c n e N u jp n |
N n p o n A .| T t u p [ - n c ic o t
e q ]N A Y e p o q m m in M M oq | eqNAY epoq m m in 5 M M oq z p a .T
NZPA.[T] N ZH Ttj z n o y e i A A N Z H T q ZN O Y le iA A . U )A q O Y 0 )N Z
a q o y | co N 2 e B O A e q e iN e M M oq cboa e q | e iN e M M oq m m in M M oq
mmin 5 M M oq N T o q A e n e q e iN e | N T o q A e n e q e iN e A q o y lO N z q
a q | o y co N 2 cbo a ' n o yn o ytb cboa N typ n N e ito T 10 n n o ytc
Ne i| w t z it o o T q m m in M M oq | n c ic u t ayco n |A N T o n o c e n i
AYO) < N > l N T O n O C t ZIXN qM TO cboa | M<t>o M n e T c y o o n
N A N TO IfTITO N t n e n p O O N T O C x in n | c y o p n n iA r e N H T O c
N A re N 10N H T O C
99 is [the] beginningless Forefather. | is the beginningless | Forefather.
| Seeing himself | within himself in a Seeing himself 5 within himself in a

mirror, he appeared | resembling | mirror, he appears | resembling
himself, 3 but his likeness appeared | himself, | but his likeness appeared |
as Divine | Self-Father | and <as> as Forefather, 10 as Divine Father,
Confronter t over the confronted and as | Confronter, since he is | in
ones, 11 First Existent Unbegotten the presence of Him Who Is from |
the First, Unbegotten
5/C-III:
99,1-2 Lacunae not restored by T-S.
99.8-9 2ix n n & n t o t t i t o n : The parr, make clear that the translator mistook the
Greek subordinate conjunction, fbtei', for the preposition, em, and attempted to
transform the subsequent word into a noun.
5/C-BG:
91.8-9 AqoyoNzq, his likeness appeared": Translation assumes that the Coptic
translator was rendering a Greek aorist middle (see P.Oxy. 1081,45). Alt. But he
showed his likeness as . . . (T-S).
74 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 4,22-32 NHC III 75,9-15
e [ s o \ ] N it y p t p ff M ] n i A [ + ] x . n o q - o y z i 10c o xpo n o c M N n e
[N e M N T e q o y ty tu q )] | n [ x ro ]n o c M n eT ZA |Teq zH '
mn nH e T p ty[o p fT e p o q
N ] 25o [ y o e i N ]
eq M M e e p o q an [N cyoprT' a a a a ]
| [n e m n o y o ] e i u ) e q e
N N A [ t q ) 0 ) n e e q ]| [N Z H T q
N o jy o e it y n im - [A ytu
o jA p e z o 'f ] | [ n c Mee]ye xe
e q o )H [u ) o ] y [ B H q a n z n ] | [ t s o m - aaaa NqqjHty o y B H q | a n z n
M N N c]u>q A q o y u ) N [ z B O \ ] 30 T 6 0 M " MNNCCOq A q o y | (U N Z eBO A
[ 7 ]' NH e [+ ] N N A [ 5+ ] I [ . . . N o y M H H tye n a n | t o t t o c
m n ] n c a A e ZNN p [ 8 ]I [ ........... N A y T O r e N H C n z i c o 15x p o n o c
NA]yroreNH[c 10 ]
before] | Unbegotten. He was not 10 He is indeed of equal age with the

equal] | [in age] with the one [before one who is before | him,
him, who is] 25 [light,] since he did
not know him [at first. Bvt] | [there
was no] time when he was [non
existent, since he was] | always [in
him. And some] | [think] that he is but he is not equal to him | in power.
[not] equal [to him in] | [power. Afterward he revealed | many
Afterward] he revealed 30 [ . . . ], confronting, | self-begotten ones,
who [ . . . ] | [ . . . ] And then in equal in age 15 (and)
[ . . . ] | [ . . . ] self-begotten [ . . . ]
Eug-V:
4,22-23 Nojpfpft m-], [before]: The context requires that the Coptic be understood
relationally, although normally it would be construed temporally.
4.24-25 him . . . [light]: See P.Oxy. 1081,49-50 for a reconstruction of the Greek,
p q)[opfT epo#], [before]: See note to 4,22-23.
4.25-27 The reconstruction of these lines is somewhat conjectural, since only the cen
tral portion remains in the MS and there are no parr. The reconstruction of the
second lacuna in line 25 may be two letters too long.
NHC III 99,10-16 BG 91,13-92,2
N e io o t o y z ic o x p o | n o c m cn ne N e iiD T | o y z ' i ' c o x p o n o c m cn

{ z lM n o y o e iN e T Z A | T e q e z H n e 15 M n e T Z A T e q e z H n n o y Io Tn
AAAA NqU)HO) N M M i q | A N ZN 4 A A < 4 > qa)H(y o y B H q a n | ZN

TSO M ' MNNCCUq A A Y O Y | U 3NZ T S O M MNNCCUq A e I AqoycUNZ
c b o a N 6 i oyM H H cge eBO A NCI o Y a
N i N 15T O n O C N A Y T O r e N H C TO N iN T O n O C N A Y T O r e |nh c
TH P O Y N| Z IC O X P O N O C THPO Y N Z T C 0 X P 0 N 0 nC / |
10 Father. He is indeed of equal age Father. | He is indeed of equal age 15

| <with> the Light that is before | with the one before him, who is
him, light,
but he is not equal to him | in power. | but he is not equal to him | in

And afterward was revealed | a power. And afterward | was
whole multitude of confronting, 15 revealed a
self-begotten ones, | equal in age whole multitude of confronting,
self-begotten ones, | equal in age
SJC-Hi:
99,11 Not emended by T-S (in the light).
5/C-BG:
91,15 with . . . light: with that from the lights, which is before him (T-S).
n n o Y o Tn is most likely an attributive. The doubling of n before o y is a frequent
practice in BG (T-S: 21). See P.Oxy. 1081,49-50 for a reconstruction of the

Greek.
76 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 5,1-9 NHC m 75,15-23
[ 8 ]yq)[ 9+ ]n | [ 7 zn]n e o [ o y n z ic o a y n a m ic ey|ZAeooy

NN]A.tf H n e | [ e p o o y n h ] eT e e M N T o y H n e - e u )A y | M o y T e
o)A.y[t pan] e p o o y ' I [x e e p o o y x e T re N e A e|Te mn
fre N e ]A n n a t p p[po] ezpAV M N TPP O Z IX U ) C N ZP A T | ZN
e X ( l) C 5 [N ZP A T ZN m m ntppaT eTK H ezp A T
nim ]NTppo)[oy] e t K H e z p A i'
| [iT IA T O ] A [e T]H ptj N T N IA T P nM H 20HO)e A e TH p g m ttm a e T e

p p o e zp A T | [ e x o > ] o y c y A y f pan MN | M N TPPO z i x t o g u ) A y x o o c
epooy x e N |[u)H p ]e n tc e | p o o y x e N tgH pe
n i A T M ic e mn n i n p p e | [eB ]c>A N TTA reN N H | T O C N e itO T
M M og o y A A g -
[ . . . ] | [ . . . in] glory (and) power, being | in glory and without

numberless, | [are those] who are number, who are called | The
[called] | [The Generation] That Is Generation over Whom | There Is
Kingless 5 [Among the] Kingdoms No Kingdom among | the Kingdoms
That Exist. That Exist.
| [And the] whole [multitude] of And the whole multitude 20 of the

kingless | ones are called | [Sons] place over which there is no |
of Unbegotten and Him Who | Put kingdom is called | Sons of
Forth Himself. Unbegotten | Father.
Eug-V:
5.3 Translation assumes the second half of a cleft sentence begins here.
5.4 The punctuation is not a stop but seems to be a way of dealing with a Greek attri
butive adjective in the second position. Note that the parr, use a relative. See also
17,14-15 and 7,10 (related).
NHC III 99,16-100,4 BG 92,3-16
21 zicoaynamic | eyzA n z V c o a y n a m o c eyzA e|ooY

e o o y eMNToy H ir e - eMNTey Hire tta'i' e 5Te
eo)AYlMY Te e n e y re N o c qjAYMOYTe eneqre|NOc x e
xe TreNe|A* eT e mn mn + ppo T r e N e A e T e mn | m n tp p o
ZIXOOC zYxtuc
f e 20B o \ zm n e N T A T e T N o y to N Z TTaT NTA|TeTNOYU)NZ eBOA.
N| ZHTtj ZtOtTHOYTN 6BOA ZN NZH|Tq eBOA Ae ZN NiptUMe 10
NI iPCOMe eTM M AY't eTMMAY
nMHHtge | A e TH pq btm m ay Te N T e TTMA e T e I MN MNTPPO
MN MNTlPPO ZIXtDOY OJAYMOYTe zVxtuq a)A<Y>|MOYTe epo<q>
epo x e TTAreNH | t o c
oy x e NcyHpe M nir[eNN]HToc |
Neiuit
nN oyTe t t c [u) t ] hp | nujHpe T IN O Y T e n ctO TH P I NNOJHpe N T e
< M > n N o y T e tta T e T e | n e q e iN e T T N o y T e 15 t t a T e T e M N TA q e iN e
NMMHTN n m |m h t n
and power, | being in glory (and) I and power, being in | glory without
without number, whose race is called number. 5 His race is called | The
| The Generation | over Whom Generation | over Whom There Is
There Is No Kingdom No | Kingdom.
t from the one 20 in whom you It is in this (race) that | you
yourselves have appeared | from appeared. And by these men
these | men. t
And that whole multitude | over 10 of the place over which | there is
which there is no | kingdom is called no kingdom, <he> is called |
Sons of Unbegotten | Father, Unbegotten,
God, [Savior], | Son of God, | | God, Savior | of the Sons of God,
whose likeness is with you. 15 He Who Has No Likeness |
among You.
SJC-HI:
100,3 MS has n (not emended by T-S).
SJC-BG:
92,11-12 MS has ojAqMoyTe e p o o y (active instead o f passive).
78 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 5,9-21 NHC III 75,23-76,12
n i A + c o y iU N q 10 A e e q M e z c b o a N T o q Ae n iA T N o e i
ZN N e o o y NIM N A"f |T JlICO MN M M oq eq[M H Z e ]B O A n n a y n im | o[$)
o y p e q je N N A t u j A x e | e [ p o ] q - NA<t>6 A p C I A [m n o ] Y P A U )e
e [ T ] B e it a Y N e q ice q jH p e | T H p o y n a t u ) a |x e e p o q n t o o y T H p o y
O y N T A y MITIM T O N Z P a Y | N ZHTtj" e y M T O N I M M O O y NZHTcj" eyM H N
e y p A q je e yM H N zm 15 n e y e o o y 6 b o a 5 e yp A cy e zn o ypA cge
N N A t(l)IB e MN niT6 |AHA N N A + f n a t { t J t y i x e | e p o q e zp A T exM
a il e p o q " nH e T e M | n o y c tu T e M n e o o y e T e M eq|u)iB e m n
epoq e N e z- o y T e tTTeAHA e T e MeyqjiTq"' I nAY
M | [n o ]y c o y a )N q zp a Y z < n > e T e M noycoTM eq eN ez oy|A e
{t iJ k O C M O C I NIM N T A Y MN M n o y N o e i M M oq z n n a iu jn 10
N e y ^ K U N [ T H p o y MN N e y K O C M O C '
A yu) | zu) u)A n e e iM A x c k a a c
NN N |BU )K 6 BOA. ZM TTIAITIPON '
c ] b o \ 20 A e zm n e Y n ip e 6 b o [a .]
M M oq o y A A q | A [ c n ] p p e c b o a
Now the Unknowable 10 is full of Now the Unknowable

every imperishable glory | and [is] ever [full] | of imperishableness 7(6]
ineffable joy. | Therefore all his sons [and] ineffable joy. | They all are at
also | have rest | in him, ever rest | in him, 5 ever rejoicing in
rejoicing in 15 their unchanging ineffable joy | over the unchanging
glory and the | measureless glory | and the measureless
jubilation that was | never heard of jubilation | that was never heard or |
or | known among all their | worlds known among all the aeons 10 and
and aeons. their worlds.
But | this much is enough, lest we |
go on endlessly.
20 Now from Him Who Put Forth
Himself | came forth
Eug-V:
5.13 Third and fourth letters: see Emmel, 1979: 183.
5.14 First two letters: see Emmel, 1979: 183.
5,18 First superlinear stroke is in lacuna. MS has m.
Eug-lll:
76.1 K translates [remains] always incorruptible, apparently restoring [mhn ]boa.
Tr translates And the unknowable [is] in every imperishableness and in ineffable
joy. For n a y nim as ever, see Crum: 235a.
76.2 T-S restores [ i a ] and [o ] only. Tr restores [ia a yo j o ], K has in (zn ) for
MN.
NHC III 100,4-16 BG 92,16-93,12
n tocj 5 A e n e n a r p N o e i mmoi)' | NToq A e niATNoT | MMoq eqMHZ

eqMez N e o o y nim NA<t>eAp|TON N N e o o y | nim zT m n t a t t a k o zT
zi paqje N i T i y i x e e p o q | pa.u)e N A T a jix e e p o q | n t o o y
NTOOY THPOY C6MTON M|MOOY Ae th po y ceM | t o n m m ooy
NZHTq' eyMHN cboa . 10 ey p A tg e NZHTq e y | mhn ey p A o je zn
zn oypange n a t q a | x e e p o q zm o y p A 5tge N N iT t y ix e e p o q zm |
n e q e o o y e T e M eqlqjme mn n e q e o o y e T e Megcgi |Be mn
nTeA.HA e T e M ey|u )iT q ' na.T nTexHA. e T e MAylcyiTq nAV e T e
M noycoTM eq e |N e z o y A e mtio y | c OTMeq e N e z o y A e o 10
M noyN oei MMoq 13 zn aiujn M noyNoT MMoq z n < n > a i | u) n
NIM' MN NeyKOC|MOC U)A THPOY MN NeyKOC|MOC tgA
T eN oy T6NOY
Now he 5 is the Unknowable, | who Now the Unknowable | is full of

is full of every imperishable glory | every glory | and imperishableness
and ineffable joy. | They all are at and
rest | in him, 10 ever rejoicing in ineffable joy. | And they all are at
ineffable joy | in his unchanging rest | in him, | ever rejoicing in
glory | and measureless jubilation; | ineffable joy 5 in | his unchanging
this was never heard | or known 15 glory | and the measureless
among all the aeons and their worlds jubilation | that was | never heard or
| until now. even 10 known among all the aeons |
and their worlds | until now.
SJC-HI:
100,8 A probably random drop of ink is above the second n.
5/C-BG:
92,18 Corr.: first i for partly erased t .
80 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 5,21-27 NHC III 76,13-17
n si K e a.p X H cboa | [M n e q x ]n o | K e a .p x H n co o yn T e t a .Y - c b o a
o y a .a .q M M O N o re N H C | [ n eg a x e ] z i | T O O T q M n < a .Y T O > re N N H T O c
n iN T t O C '
n H ra.[p e T a . q ] l 9 [Y JN z ] b b o a n e z o Y e iT 15 N T a .q o Y U )N Z z a e H
Z a 0 H MITTHPq 25 ZM [n i U )N M n T H p q ' | z m n a .n e p a .N T O N
N N ]a.TN a.pH X <j n i u j f [ e t ] | f [ o Y U J O Ya.YTO <J>Y |h c n e
c b o a ] M M oq O Y a .a .q - e y [ e ] | N a .Y T O K T IC T O C N e it o f
[n ]a p x h []
another principle | [from his] Only- | This is another knowledge

begotten, Wholly Unique | [Word;] principle from | <Self->begotten.
for it is [in] him [who] | [appeared] The F irs t15 who appeared before the
before the universe 25 [in the] infinite universe | in infinity is Self-grown, |
[aeon], the Father | [Who Put Forth] Self-constructed Father,
Himself, who [is] | [the] principle
(ior beginning),
Eug-V:
5.22 First three letters after the lacuna: see Emmel, 1979: 183.
5,22-33 See 17,11.
5.23 [NujAxe], [Word]: or [NU)Hpe], [Son]; see 111,2 (Gos. Eg.) 68,25-26 (neq-
MONoreNNHc NujHpe). The next sentence makes the reconstruction in the text
more likely.
iTf n : see Emmel, 1979: 183.
5.24 o a : see Emmel, 1979: 183.
Eug-lll:
76.13 knowledge principle from: beginning of knowledge. Through (K & Tr).
76.14 <self->begotten: unbegotten (K); Tr does not emend but translates
unbegotten. Support for my emendation: 82,13-14 and V 5,20.
76,14-16 Both K & Tr have a comma after -begotten and a grammatical break after
infinity.
NHC III 100,16-101,1 BG 93,12-94,2
n e x A q | N A q n<si M a e e i i o c xe n e x A q | nA q n s i m a s a io c xe |
n x o | e i c n ctu T H p * n t u c AnpcoM e n t o c A q o y c o N Z e B O \ n 156 i
| o y tu N Z e B o \ ' n e x e i t t c m 20o c nptDM e n e x A q n s i | n T e \ i o c
n c c u th p ' x e fO YtO O ) I NCCUTHP x e tlOYOJO)
e T p e T N e iM e x e e T p e T N e iM e |xe
n e N T A q | o y tu N Z z a o h MiTTHpq * n e N T A q o y < o n z z a t c | z h MiTTHpq
zm | n in e p A N T O N ttia y t o < | > y h c zm n A n e p A N 20t o n
pa n a y t o k t ic t o c N e it o t n A Y T O < j> Y H c n a y t o k t i c | t o c
N 6 I0JT
Matthew said | to him: Lord, | Matthew said | to him: | How was

Savior, how was Man revealed? | Man revealed? 15 The perfect |
The perfect 20 Savior said: I want | Savior said: I | want you to know |
you to know that that
he who | appeared before the he who appeared before | the
universe in | infinity, Self-grown, universe in 20 infinity,
101 Self-constructed Father, Self-grown, Self-constructed |
Father,
S/C-m:
100,21 Corr.: first n for a y (?); n for erased n.
SJC-BG:
93,13 Corr.: an i is erased immediately after e .
82 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 5,27-6,5 NHC III 76,18-77,1
tt[h ] e T e T u y i[ .x .] e u ) o [ o r t ] |
[N 2 H T ]q -
eqM ez cboa N o y o e [ i N ] | [e q p | eqxH K cboa zm n o y o e iN
o y jp e iN N [ N ] a .t [ c g a .] x [ e e p o q -] e T p o y | o e iN N A T cy a xe epoq
| 30 [ n t jip x h ] A e e q M e e [y e na.T i q N O 20e i n tapxh
e T p e ] | [ n e q e iN ] e < yu )n [e e T p e n e q e iN e <yu)|ne n o yn o s
N O Y N O S N SO M n ] n so m ' N TeyN oy |atapxh

q o [ y o e iN eqp] o y [ o e iN 9 ] | Mn o y o e i N ctm m ^ y | o y cu N z
N j o y t N o y n ip ]o )M [e e T e cbo a N o y p to M e na a |n ato c
o y a .p x H n e ] | n t c [ n o y o ] e i N N z o o y fc z iM e
e T M M A fy a .q o y u )N 2 M ]|m eu )N n e q p a .N
N [ Z 0 ] 9 Y + C Z ? M [e N N A T M O y ' m m n t z [o o y t q jA y x o ] o c epoq [ozj
f ] 5M N t 2 0 0 [ y t ] M 6N u ) [ a y t P A N
epoc]
that the Word | dwells,

full of shining, | [ineffable] light. 30 | and is full of shining, ineffable
And [in the beginning,] when he light. | In the beginning, he decided
took thought | [to have] | [his 20 to have his likeness become | a
likeness] become [a great power of] great power. Immediately, | the
[6] [shining light. . . , ] | [immediately principle (or beginning) of that light
Man, who is the principle (or | appeared as Immortal |
beginning)] | of that [light, appeared Androgynous Man. His male name
as] | the androgynous [immortal] is [77]
aeon.
[The] 5 maleness [is called]
Eug-V:
5,27-29 The left side of the text reflects fragment placements made by Stephen
Emmel on August 8, 1977, at the Coptic Museum, Cairo, which are not included in
the facsimile edition. The fragments are those numbered 1 and 40 in the facsimile
edition.
6,3 Second superlinear stroke is in lacuna.
Eug-151:
76,19-20 In . . . become: This one comprehended (perceivedK) the apx^.s0
that his appearance became (T-S, K [similar] & Tr).
76,23 appeared as (so also T-S, alt. & Tr): revealed (T-S, alt. & K).
NHC III 101,1-8 BG 94,2-11
e q | x H K eBOA. M n o y o e iN eqxH K cboa . | M n o y o e iN e T p

e T p o y | o e iN e y a . t q ) a . x e e p o q o y o e iN | e o y jiT q )a .x e e p o q n e
ne | e & q N o e i n tapxh e q 5N o T n tapxh e T p e n e q e i |Ne
e T p e n e q 5e iN e cytone n o yn o s cycone zn oyN os n so m |
N 60M ' I N T 6 Y N O Y atapxh N T e y N o y c t m m a y A n o y o | e iN
Mn o y o e i N | e T M M iy o y tu N Z N T A P X H 6 T M M A Y O y|tD N Z C B O A
N oypcoM e | N i e i N i T O c zn o y z o y e i T N 10pu)M e
N z o o y + c z iM e N N A S iN iT O C N |ZO yTCZYM e
being full | of shining light | and being full | of shining light | and
ineffable, | in the beginning, when ineffable, 5 in the beginning, when
he decided to have his 5 likeness he decided to have his likeness |
become a great power, | immediately come to be in a great power, |
the principle {or beginning) | of that immediately the light | of that
light appeared as Immortal | principle (or beginning) | appeared
Androgynous Man, in a first10 immortal | androgynous
man,
S/C-III:
101,4-5 in . . . become: when he comprehended the apxil, so that his appearance
became (T-S).
101,7 appeared as (so also T-S, alt.): revealed (T-S, alt.).
SJC-BG:
94,5-6 in . . . power: (he) comprehends the apx^l. so that his appearance comes in
great power (T-S).
84 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 6,6-11 NHC III 77,2-6
| x e x f K N o y c N p eq xn c> | x e n e x [ n o n N o y c eT]xm c
[e ]T X OC
fe N N O I A T A N IC O S IA TH P O Y co<t>i a N r e N e T e i p A -
[fp e q ]| x n o N Te Nic o s ia ' cexu) 5 m m oc e p o c o n x e
e c e iN e M n e c | c o N ay<u
neccY N Z Y roc1
q)A yf p a .[n e ] p [ o c ] 10 x e t m c '
e n iA H ceu)H <y zn t s a m | mn
N e y t g o p if N e io T e
| Begetter Mind Who Perfects | | [Begotten,] Perfect [Mind].

Himself. [And] his femaleness (is | And his female name (is) All-wise
called) | Thought, She of All | Begettress Sophia.
Wisdoms, Begettress | of the
Wisdoms.
It is also said 5 that she resembles
her | brother and her consort.
[She] is called 10 Truth,since
they are equal in power | with their
forebears
Eug-V:
6,6 The unusual stroke over n indicates that the letter, written above the line, should
be inserted (see 6,24; 7,17 [insertion from the margin]; 28,8.22). Although the
stroke seems to continue to the left of the letter in the MS, the line is almost cer
tainly the result of the bleeding of the ink along a papyrus fiber.
Second superlinear stroke is in lacuna.
Eug-TR:
77,2 n e x [n o : Begotten: the . . . [nous] (n eN [oyc) (K). The form of the Coptic
article suggests a noun with two initial consonants, and the trace of the first letter
suggests x rather than n. Tr restores n e x [ o e ic , the [Lord. Support for my
reconstruction: 82,14-15; V 10,20-21.
77,6-8 consort. . . truth: consort, a truth against which there is no contention; for
as to the lower truth, the error that is with it (K & Tr). Line 7 is not emended by
Tr.
NHC III BG
86 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 6,11-14 NHC III 77,6-9
6 T 6 N T< ?C T 6 | + M N TM 6 n n a t p oy|M H e e { y } M e y t nm m ac t c -
m a & [z ] e c [ c o o y ] N m |m o c tm h |e ra.p M necH T u ) A .c f n m m a c
n zh tc zm n e T Z H rt' e y N T * .c | | N S I T e n \ A N H 6 TN M M A C
N f n x a .N H e c f e z p a .T e x tu c-
who is | indisputable truthfulness, | She is uncontested truth; | for here

[knowing] | herself within herself in below error, which exists with truth,
secret, and having | error fighting | contests it.
against her.
Eug-V:
6,12 e c [c o o y ]N : The space in the lacuna seems sufficient for only three letters. One
must assume therefore that the scribe either wrote very small or omitted some
thing. Although the facsimile edition makes it appear that the final letter could be
an e , ultraviolet examination suggests that n is more likely.
NHC III 101,9-19 BG 94,11-95,4
| X 6 K A A C 6 B O A 2ITN TTIPCOMC 10 x e K A A c e | b o a z'i'tm n i A T M o y

ctm m ay N io iN iT o c e y e f | e |t m m A y NpcDMe e y e f M e | T e
m atc M n e y x A 'f NceNH<t>e | M n O y X A 'l NC6NH<t>e 15 6 B O A 2 N
CBOA. 2N TBtge 2ITN T B c y e c b o a 2 T | tm n p e q B tu A
4>epMH |N eyTH C N T A y T N N O o y g - N T A y T A o y | o q nAV c tn m m h tn
nAl' I 6TNMMHTN OJA TTXCOK. 6BOA (QA I 2 A e N TM N T2H K.6 N N C O | O N 6
15 NTMNT2HK6 N N C O O N 6' e T e q q jB e e p e T e t
T e g | cy N zy ro c Ae T e tn o s c o < t A tn o s N T A < y > T o o )c | qe
NCO|<t>IA N T A y T O O JC XIN x in n c y o p n N 2PA Y N 2 h t [ q ] |
N cyopit | n z p a T N ZHTcj e y N o y 2B e y c y N z y r iA 2T t m
z i t n | n a y T O f e N H C N e ic o t n i A y l T o r e N H C N e itu T
| that through that Immortal 10 Man that through | that Immortal | Man
they might attain | their salvation they might attain | salvation and
and awake | from forgetfulness awake 15 from forgetfulness through
through the interpreter | who was | the interpreter who was sent, | who
sent, who | is with you until the end is with you until <the> | end of the
15 of the poverty of the robbers. And poverty of the robbers, | since his
his | consort is the Great Sophia, | companion is
who from the first was destined in Sophia, the great one, | who from the 95
him | for union by | Self-begotten first was destined in [him] | for
Father, union by Self-begotten | Father.
S/C-III:
101,14m s unaccountably has stroke over to.
SJC-BG:
94,11-13 through . . . attain: through this immortal one men m ight attain (T-S).
95,1 ms has q (active instead o f passive).
88 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 6,14-24 NHC III 77,9-17
eBOA. A e 15 zm niptuM e 6 B O A 10 t l T O O T l j M IIA 0 A N 1 T O C

N N A T M O y A q o y tD N Z I eBOA. NPiUM e I A C O y tD N Z e B O A N S I
N tgopfT n s i n p A N oyonom a | c i a N tg o p ri x e
N f M N T N O [ y ] |T e MN fM N + X O e i C M N T N O y T e I ZI M N T P P O 'n ilU T
MN 0 Y M N T P P [ 0 ] I MN NH ta p e q )A y | x o o c epoq x e
e t M N N C W o y c b o a z n n a T ' | nH npiDM e N A y T 0 15nA TU )P
A e e T e y f P a [ n ] epp[q] x e A qo ycD N z M n e e i c b o a |
mu> [ t ] 20 nip tp M e N T e ntgcDK A q T A M IO N A q N O Y N O S NAIiUN
o y e i u ) t 6 b o [ a ] | m m [o ]<j
eT A q o ytu N Z M nAT c b o a A q |x n o
N A q N O Y N A S N N e iO N '
[ n p o ] c T [ e ] | T e Ttoq m m n tn as | n p o c TeqM N TN O S
o y N o [y q )B H p ] | e q u j o o r t z n
o y z io x f ' r t -
Now 15 from Immortal Man very Through 10 Immortal Man |

soon appeared | the name of divinity appeared the first designation, |
| and lordship and kingdom | and namely, divinity | and kingdom, for
those that came afterward from the Father, who is | called Self-
them. | And he who is called Father Man, 15 revealed this. | He
Father, 20 Man of the Depth, Self- created a great aeon
Father, | when he revealed this,
created | a great aeon
[for] | his own majesty. | for his own majesty.
There is [a companion] | in
conjunction
Eug-V:
6,15-17 See endnote 4.
6,24 The stroke over t : see 6,6n.
Eug-111:
77,11 appeared . . . designation: first appeared a designation (T-S, K [similar] &
Tr).
77,16 Corr.: t a m i o n for partly erased t i n o N A q.
NHC III 101,19-102,5 BG 95,4-14
eB O A zm 20 n i e i N i T o c NptoM e c b o a zY5t m n i i T M o y npcom c

t N T a .q o y | c o N 2 c b o a N o i o p r t z i i p i | f i N o y t D N Z c b o a . N cy o p n |
M N T N o y lT e zi m n t p p o t n e i a i t {N }Z M M N T N O y T e zT M N T P l p o f
rip e q j iy n e it u T r i p e q j i y x o c | e p o q x e
PB MOYTe e p o q x e n p u ) M e ' nptuM e n i y T O 10n iT U ) p { n i T }
n iy lT o n iT t u p iq o y io N Z M n iT iq o y u ) N Z < M n iT > e | B O A
6 |BOA i q T i M I O N A q N O y N O tS iq T iM IO N i q N O y | N O (S N ilC O N
n |a. ICON
eneqp&N n e z o r A O i c e n e q p iN n e | z o r A O i c
5 n p O C T6q M N TN 06 n p o c TeqMNT|NO<s
from 20 Immortal Man t who Through 5 Immortal Man, then, |

appeared | as First and divinity and t we first appeared | in divinity and
kingdom, 11 for the Father, who is kingdom, f I for the Father, who is
102 called Man, Self-Father, | revealed called | Man, Self- 10 Father,
this. | And he created a great aeon, | revealed <this>. | And he created a |
great aeon,
whose name is Ogdoad, whose name is | Ogdoad,

5 for his own majesty. for his own majesty.
S/C-IH:
101,21 z i: < zn> (T-S sugg.), resulting in the following rendering: From Immortal
Man he appeared first <in> (?) divinity.. . . See endnote 4.
SJC-BG:
95,7 Alt. { n z } M M N T N o y T e , etc. (T-S), which results in the following rendering for
lines 6 and 7: we first revealed divinity and kingdom. See endnote 4.
95,10Not emended by T-S Che appeared). It may be that the Coptic translator mis
took avcov for auxoq (see III 102,2).
90 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 6,24-31 NHC III 77,17-24
e i q [ f N * q n o y ] 25n a .6 A q f NA.q n |o y n o <s N e a o Y c ia .1

N N e a o Y C i a . - * q p p p [o e z p a .T ] | a.qp ppo ezpiT | e x N n c c o n t
[extoo]Y' e a .q c o J N f n a [(| t h p o y a .q c a JN T 20 N A q
N26N]NOY|[Te] MN N ze N N O Y T e mn
z e N i p x i f r e x f o c z ]n tb [a zeN A p xA f |r e x o c m n
M]|[MN]Ta.tt Hne ep oo y [ezpa.T t e N A fr e x o c z c n tb a | cm n to y
eY]<Ma)[e] H ne- ezoY N eyzyn H Ipecia.
|cbo a Ae zm n iT a c p [a p ]< x > i CBOA. 6 6 Z IT O O T C j MT?PU)Me |

N 6 j [ f M ] N [ T ] 30[ N ] O Y T e MN 6TM M AY A C A p x e c e A l N SI
f M N [ T ] x A 6 I C [MN f M N T ] | [ p ] P 9 tm n tI
to whom he [gave] 25 great authority. He gave him | great authority, and

He ruled | [over them], having he ruled | over all creations. He
created [gods] | and archangels, created 20 gods and archangels | and
unnumbered | myriads [for] retinue. angels, myriads | without number,
for retinue.
| Now from him [originated] divinity| Now through that Man | originated
30 and lordship [and kingdom] | and divinity
Eug-V:
6,29 m s has x (a common scribal error for x ) .
6.29-31 The right side of the text reflects fragment placements made by Stephen
Emmel on August 8,1977, at the Coptic Museum, Cairo, which are not included in
the facsimile edition. The fragments are those numbered 1 and 40 in the facsimile
edition.
6.29-32 The left margin in the m s appears to have been shifted about one letters
width to the right, perhaps because of an imperfection in the sheet.
Eug-lU:
77,23 T-S holds that the section found in SJC following zynHpeciA is missing from
Eug-\\\ through homoioteleuton. However it seems more closely related to the
Sondergut of SJC than to Eug.
NHC III 102,5-17 BG 95,14-96,8
* Y t NAq | N O Y N O fi A q f A e NAq n n o yn o s 15
N e a o y c iA A q p p p o | e i M N e a o y c i A A q p p p o e z p A i | e x .N
n C tD N f NTM N+ZHK.C I AqCU)Nt NCCUNT N T M N T ZH |lCe A q C U JN T
NAq N Z C N N O Y T e I MN NAq n zn n o y | Te mn Z N A rre A o c
2 e N A .fre A .o c < m n > MN ZN| A p X I A r r e A O C Z N T B A 6M N
z c n a p x a F 10r e A o c z c n t b a T e y H n e e y u jM cg e MS
e M N T O Y H n e | e y u )M < y e e |b o a zm noyoYN ctm |m aym n
cb o a . zm n o y o e i N | e T M M iy m n nenNA n u j m t |z o o y t e T e nAY
n enfJaT n o ) o | m n t N z o o y t e T e ne nA t 5c o <|>i a T e q u jB e e p e
n & T co |< t> i& n e T e q c y N z y r o c
e 15BOA rA p zm n e e i N o y T e e|BO A t a p zm n iN o y T e
& c|A pxeceA i N SI A C lA P X e C O A l N 6 I T M N T N O y | T e
T M N < T > N O y T e I MN T M N T P P O ' MN T M N T P P O
He was given | great authority, and | And he gave him great 15 authority,
he ruled | over the creation of and he ruled | over the creations of
poverty. | He created gods | and poverty. | He created gods | and
angels <and> archangels, 10 myriads angels and | archangels, myriads
without number | for retinue without
from that Light | and the | tri-male number for retinue 96
Spirit, which is that of Sophia, | his I from that Light | and the tri-male
consort. Spirit, | that is, that of 5 Sophia, his
companion.
15 For from this God originated | | For from this God originated |
divinity | and kingdom. divinity | and kingdom.
S/C-IH:
102,7 Corr.: first n for t .
92 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 6,31-7,8 NHC III 78,1-8
MN NH 6 T O Y H 2 [ n C IO O Y -] I [ e T B ] e N O YTe m [n t m n t p p o e ] T B e naiY
[ ita T ] A .y f P * n e [p o q x e n N o y ] a y + I PN q x e n N o y [ T e
[ t c N T n in o y r ] e n [ i x o e i c n n n o y It 6 '
nppo | NpptooY'
N T ]e | [ N ix o e ic n ip p ] o n t [ e nezo[Yeif N]pu)Me
Nip ] p ( o o y I [A q o y to N Z A e b ] b o \
zm [na.]T n s i ice| [ 7 ] o c '
e y [ e ] o y n H rH 5 [n e n t c nh | t it ic t ic n e N N [e ]T N A u )(u n e 5
e T ] A y < y u ) [ n ] e M NNCooq' m nnca n a T
| [o Y N T A q A e n o ]y n o y c m n OYNTAq NZHTij N|OyZIAION
0 y e N | [ N 0 iA ] n no yc o y e N N O iA '
N|ee eTe q o nmoc

mn O Y to a )' O Y M e e y e A e | [m n ] oyeNeyMHCic | mn
o y c b [ u>] m n O Y<yoxN e* o y (|>pon hcic oy\oncM oc
those that follow [them]. |

[Therefore he] was
called [God] [and kingdom]. Therefore he was |
[of gods, Lord of] | [lords, King] of called God of gods, King | of
kings. | [And] from [him appeared] kings. First Man | is Faith for
another | [ . . . ] , who [is] the source those who will come 5 afterward.
5 [of those who came] afterward. |
[Now he has] mind and [thought] He has, within, | a unique mind
(and) thoughtjust as | he is it
| and will, also thinking | [and (thought) (and) reflecting | and
teaching] and counsel considering, rationality
Eug-V:
7.3 Third superlinear stroke is in lacuna.
7.4 The trace immediately following the first lacuna is compatible with the tail of an a
or m.
Eug-III:
78,3-4 So restored by T-S (but superlinear stroke is omitted).
NHC III 102,17-103,1 BG 96,8-18
eTBe naT a y Im o y tc epoq xe iY t o e | T B e na.T aqcMoy epoq 10

nNOYTe n |n n o y t 6' nppo x e nN O YTe n n n o y tb | a y
n p p o jo y ne 20 zo yeit NpcoMe nppo N N epcooY I nujpn NpcuMe
eyN Taq m |m a y M n e q z iA io N O Y N T A .q | MMAY N ZH Tq

N N O YC | N2PA.T N Z H T tj MN n o y I n o y c e n co q ne m m in 15
oyeNNOii M M oq m n o y e N N o i i
| N ee e T q o m m oc | N Tze eTqo m m oc
oY<t>PO N H |cic o y e N e y M H d c O Y | e N Y M H C IC MN
oyxon | o y 4*Po |n h c ic oyM eeye
CM OC
Therefore he | was called God of | And therefore | he blessed himself 10

gods, King of kings. 20 First Man as God of gods | and King of
kings. | First Man
has | his unique mind, | within, and has, | within, a | mind, which is his
thought | -just as he is it own, 15 and thought | -just as he is
(thought) (and) considering, | it (thought) | (and) reflecting and
reflecting, rationality, considering, | thinking
5/C-III:
102,23 See endnote 5.
SJC-BG:
96,9 aqcMoy e p o q , he blessed himself: <2k y M o y T e > ep o q , he <was called>
(T-S sugg.); <aycmoy > e p o q , he <was blessed> (T-S sugg.). In the context,
self-benediction does not seem inappropriate.
94 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 7,8-18 NHC III 78,9-17
mn | [ tth 6 ] + z ix [n n ] o y u j o x N e
MN O Y S O M 10 [ j ] e N M 6 \ [ o c ] | MN OyAYNAMIC ' M6AOC NIM
N T 6 A IO C AytD N N A | T M O [ y e 10TU)OOTi ZNT6AIOC N6
k a t ]a A e fA < | > e A p ciA e y|q )H cg ZNA6ANA|T0C N KATA M6N
mn [n ] h e f N e m m ooy eB O \' TA<|>eApCIA Ce|U}HU)
| K [A T ] A t< s[O M ] A e KATA TCOM OYN OyAIA |<}>OPA'
c e a )B B iH o y t N |ee e T e o y to t N e e NncgiBe N o y e ic o f |
o y e i t o f o y e t 15 o y u j H p e - A yto eytgH p e Ayto oycyHpe
n iy H p e e y e N N O iA | f e N N O iA eyeN N O iA 15 Ayto t c n n o ia
< A > e e c o y A T B e N iice ajco | x n encycoxri N e e NlTAeitypri
T H p o y A y io N e e n zpa T zn n x o o c zn N e N T A y x n o |o y
N IA T |XTTO' e A e f M O N A C TMONAC o Ntyopri
even | [that which] is over

counsel | and power. All the attributes 10
and power: 10 perfect and immortal that exist are perfect and immortal. |
[attributes]. | Now [in respect to] In respect to imperishableness, they |
imperishableness, they are | [equal] are indeed equal.
to [those] that resemble them. | But
[in respect to power], they are (But) in respect to power, there is a
different, just | as father differs from difference, | like the difference
15 son, and the son from thought, | between father | and son, and son
<and> the thought surpasses and thought, 15 and the thought and
everything else. | And in the (same) the remainder. As | I said earlier,
way, among uncreated things, | the among the things that were created, |
monad the monad is first.
Eug-V:
7,10 First superlinear stroke is in lacuna. Punctuation: see 5,4n.
7,12 First word: see Emmel, 1979: 183 (line identified as 7,22 up).
7.16 m s has t.
7.17 The stroke over x: see 6,6n. x is written in the left margin.
7.18 The F form of the nominal subject prefix of the present circumstantial is not
found elsewhere in the codex; but see 29,6 for a similar form.
NHC III 103,1-10 BG 96,18-97,11
o yso M * M e x o c n im e Y | <yo o rt MN I 0 Y <S0 M M6 A.O C NIM e T

ZNT6A.ION Ne ayco | [cg o o n ZNTex]ion Ne
z e N ie iN iT O N Ne ka ta m cn | Z N | [a T M O Y N ]e K l T i M CN |
TA<t>ApciA c e o jH tt) T M N T i T T i K O CeU)HU)
kata o y 56 om ce cg o se N e e | K.ATA. A 6 T S O M C e u j 0 5B N 0 6
Mno)iBe | N o y e K o t e y c g H p e - M ncgie e N O Y | e iu )T e y u jH p e m n
< a Y u> o Y q )H p e > e y e N N O i i " | o y | a )H p e e y e N N O iA . mn
a Y id t b n n o i a . e n u ) ( u x it N e e | o y le N N O ii e n n e c e e n e | a Y io
N N e N T ie ip cgprt N x o o y zn | N e e N T i T x o o c N 10< y o p n
N eN TA yxnooy tm o n &c T M O N iC ZN N jc y p n N i n o A N
N 10q)oprt
power. All the attributes that exist | and | power. All the attributes that
are perfect and | immortal. In exist are [perfect] (and) | [immortal].
respect to | imperishableness, they In respect to | imperishableness, they
are indeed equal. are indeed equal.
(But) in respect to 5 power, they are | But in respect to power, they are
different, like the difference | different, 5 like the difference
between father and son, <and son> between | father and son, and | son
and thought, | and the thought and and thought, and | thought and the
the remainder. As | I said earlier, remainder. | Now, as I said 10
among | the things that were created, earlier, the monad is not among the |
the monad is 10 first. first creations.
5/C-m:
103,6 Erroneous omission noted by T-S.
5/C-BG:
97,10 MS has just one stroke over the last two letters.
97,10-11 T M O N i c . . . a n , the monad . . . creations: TS sees a textual corruption
here and proposes that the text read t m o n a c N cyop n or T e T iyop rr z n N cyopn
N x n o , the monad is the first among the first creations (omitting a n ). T-S may
be correct, but see V par.
96 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 7,18-28 NHC III 78,17-24
AytD tAYA.C I (pAZPAT C O Y H Z I N C tO C N S I T A Y A C MN

[n ia je K ic ' niA eic a c A e 20 T e T P IA C I U )A ZPA T N PAM HT
9 e p A R < x > i ezp A T e x N | N PAM HT A e 20 C 6 A P X I X N
n ia n u ) ' N iA N cg e A e N P A o je - e p e N R A c y e | a p x i e a n
c e p A p < x > e i e zp A T e x N | n p A cyo' e p e N o )o - a p | x i
N IA N U JO N IAN U JO A C exN <np a >tb a necM of ne nA'f
c e p A p < x > e i | [e ]x N n ia n t b a < z n > | < n > a a n a t o c n e z o y e if
neTcM ot on n e | [ e i] < g o o r t zn NPco|Me N T e e i z e ' T e q M O N A c T e
N IA T M O y f M O N A C 25 A 6 MN (Coptic pages 79 and 80 are
f e [ N ] N O I A - N A TTIP(UM. [e ] missing.)
n |n [a ] t [ m o y ] N iM e e y e u )[tu n e ]
| e < N > A e i c [ i ] c ' N iA N cg e A e N [e
N i c B o ] | o y e ' [ n i a n ]< g[o A e ] N e
and the dyad | go up to [the] decads, The dyad | follows it, and the triad, |
and the decads 20 rule the hundreds, up to the tenths. Now the tenths 20
| and the hundreds rule | the rule the hundredths; the hundredths |
thousands, and the thousands rule | rule the thousandths; the
the ten thousands. Again it is this thousand<th>s rule | the ten
pattern | [that] exists among the thousand<th>s. This is the pattern
immortals: the monad 25 and the <among the> | immortals. First Man
thought are those things that belong | is like this: His monad
to [Immortal] Man. | The thinkings
[are] for | <the> decads, and the
hundreds are [the teachings,] | [and
the thousands] are the
Eug-V:
7.20-22 m s has in each case x (a common scribal error for x).
7,24-25 the monad . . . Man: see 7,6-7. Apparently mind, thought and will are
referred to. The punctuation in line 25 is a word separator but may also be
intended to replace a missing sentence pronoun.
7.26 Corr.: tgopff, first, is deleted at the beginning of the line by a dot over each
letter.
7.27 MS has f (sing.).
Eug-IH:
78,19-21 Tr translates the fractions as whole numbers without emending the text. See
endnote 6.
78,22 First emendation: m s has Ne.
78,22-23 m s has n z n , of immortaLs (not emended by Tr, although his translation
reflects an emendation).
THE SOPHIA OF JESUS CHRIST
98 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 7,28-8,8 NHC III
N ic y o x N [ e ] | n [ i ] a n t b a [A e N ]e
n k s a m n h [ a e + ] 30[u)]<pn e
b [o a z n ] n c t [ . . . . ce ]| c y o o rt
mn N e y i[ 11 ] I [ z ] n n e q j[N ]
NIM [ 12] | [ . . . ] . . [ . . ] a.
u)<u[ 10 ]
[h] n [ 7 ] a.c o [yo) nz 6 boa zm ] |
it n o y [c n ]ta .r[x h n s i t e N N O li ]
| m n n im [ e e ] Y e - a^yô e B O A z n
N iJ lM e e y e n [ ic ] b u ) c [ b o a z n
n ic b (u ] 5 N ic g o x N [e ] e B o [a z n
N iu ) o x N e ] | o y c o M '
m n n c a . [<s]e A e m [ m c a o c ] I
T H P O Y - A .<q >O Y<0N Z B [ o ] a z n
N [eg<SO M ] I NSI TTH THPtj
counsels, | [and] the ten thousands

[are] the powers. [Now] those [who]
30 come [from the . . . ] | exist with
their [ . . . ] | [in] every aeon [ . . . ] |
[...]
[8] [ . . . In the beginning, thought] | and
thinkings [appeared from] mind, |
[then] teachings [from] | thinkings,
counsels 5 [from teachings], (and)
power [from] | [counsels].
And after all [the attributes,] | all
that [was revealed] | appeared from
Eug-V:
7,33 Corr.: y deleted between a and eg by two superior dots.
8.4 boj: see Emmel, 1979: 183 (line identified as 8,30 up).
8.5 b: see Emmel, 1979: 183 (line identified as 8,29 up).
8,7 Low dot probably indicates word separation; see 8,16n.
ms has y (incorrect pi. pron.).
a : see Emmel, 1979: 183 (line identified as 8,27 up).
NHC III 103,10-12 BG 97,11-14
< N > e & H A e N N K 2 l n im N zaie A e | n F ic* n im aLqoyoN zoy

* q | o y u )N 2 e B O A n <si | 6 B O \ 2N Teq<SOM NGI |
n e N T a L y o y o N zq | c b o a TH pq * n e N T a L q o y o N z q TH pq
And after everything, | all that was And finally he who | revealed it all |
revealed | appeared from his power. revealed everything | from his
power.
S/C-ffl:
103.11-12 all . . . power: all that was revealed from his power appeared (T-S);
less likely because of the Coptic punctuation and the parr.
SJC-BG:
97.11-14 And . . . power7: or .. he who wholly revealed himself . . . ; But he
brought to appearance the last (pi.) of all things from his power, namely, the one
whom he brought to appearance completely (T-S). The sentence appears to be
corrupt; see parr.
100 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 8,8-18 NHC III
e T a y [ o y ] o N z q [c b o a ] | a y tu
a q o y c u N Z [c b o a ] z m tth
[e T A Y ] 10C O < N > T C j n si nH
e T a y M [o N K .q ] a y to | nH e T a y f
MOP<|>H N [ a q a ] q o y U ) N Z | B O A
zm nH e - r a y [M o ]N [K c r] nH |
e T a y f paN e p o q - a q o y tu N Z |
eBO A z m it h eTayf m o p <J>h N aq-
15 e a f A ia<|>opa N Te nh
e T a y x . n o | o y . o y to N Z e B O A zm
nH e T a y f p [a N ] | e p o q x in
T a p x H q )a a p H x q * i c a j a |
o y s o M N T e Nieu>N T H [ p ] o y
[his powers.] | And [from] what

[was] 10 created, what was
[fashioned] appeared. And | what
was formed appeared | from what
was [fashioned.] | What was named
appeared | from what was formed, 15
while the difference among begotten
things | appeared from what was
[named], | from beginning to end, by
| power of all the aeons.
Eug-V:
8.8 oNzq: see Emmel, 1979: 183 (line identified as 8,26 up).
8.9 ?m: see Emmel, 1979: 184 (line identified as 8,25 up).
8.10 Last three letters and preceding superlinear stroke: see Emmel, 1979: 184 (line
identified as 8,24 up). The stroke is visible in the MS. Emmel reports seeing a
remnant of the letter under the stroke, but none is visible in a photo taken prior to
removal of transparent tape.
8.11 ytuNz: see Emmel, 1979: 184 (line identified as 8,23 up).
8.12 Final word: see Emmel, 1979: 184 (line identified as 8,22 up).
8.13 Final letter: see Emmel, 1979: 184 (line identified as 8,21 up).
8,16 Low dot after initial o y is not a stop; it makes clear word separation; cf. V
34,10.
NHC III 103,12-21 BG 97,15-98,7
6BO A ZN T e q S O M - I a y u ) G B O A 15 ay<o c b o a zm n e N T A q | c o N T q
zm n e N T a y c o N T q | A q o y u iN Z TH pq AqoycoNZ | c b o a n c i
6BO A N61 n 6 N T A y 15p n A A C C A r t e N T A Y n A A c | C A M M oq THpq
MMoq THpq" C B O A ZM I CBOA I ZM n e N T A Y fT A A C C A M
n e N T A .Y P n A A .c c i M M oq M o q Aqoy<p[NZ c b o a n g i ] |
A q |o yo )N Z n s i n e N T A q x i neN TAqxi mop4>h zm |
MOP|<t>H C B O A ZM n e N T A q X I neN TAqxi mop<)>h n e | N T A y f
m o p 0 h | n e N T A Y t PA.N e p o q p a n N A q c b o a zm 5 n A f A n a jiB e
eTBe nAY 20 Anojm e cycune a jcu n e N | N iA < T > x n o c > Y x i n
NNIAreNNH |T O C X N NTAPXH OJA T A P X H OJA I A P H X N O y
APHXNO Y
And from what | was created, | all 15 And from everything that he |
that was fashioned 15 appeared; from created, all that | was fashioned |
| what was fashioned | appeared appeared; | from what was
what was formed; | from what was fashioned,
formed, | what was named. Thus 20 appeared | what was formed; from |
came the difference among the what was formed, | what was named.
unbegotten ones | from beginning to From 5 this came the difference
end. among | the unbegotten things from
beginning to | end.
102 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 8,18-28 NHC III
mpto |Me a c n n a t m o y eqMez

g b o a . N N [ e ] 20o o y n im '
N N A t T l K O MN O y P A O je |
N N i t a j i x e MMoq*
e peTeqM N TP|po t h p c t c a h a
M M OC N Z H T C ZN O y lT e A H A N 0 )A
N et* nh e T e M n [o Y ]| c a )T M
e p o o y eN ez- o ytc
Mf n o Y l ^ c o t Y l t o N O Y z n n e [tu ]N
n im e [ T iq ] | [ ( y ] < u n e M N N C < p [o ]y
[ m ] n N e q K 0 [ c ] | [ M 0 c : M N N Ctuq
ic q j[c o ]n e n si K .[e ]| [a .]p xH cboa
z [m
Now Immortal Man | is full of every

20 imperishable glory and ineffable |
joy. His whole kingdom | rejoices in
| everlasting rejoicing, those who
never | have been heard of or known
25 in any aeon that | [came] after
[them and] its [worlds]. | Afterward
[another] | [principle] came from
NHC III 103,22-104,4 BG 98,7-13
|t o t s n e x A q NAq n is i T O T e n e x A q | NAq n <s i

b a p o o a o | m a io c x e n t u c B A p e o a o m a i | o c x e n co c
A YO NO M AZe < M M O q > Z I A y M o y T e 10 e p o q zm
pa n e y A f r e A o n x e npiDM e | n e y A r r e A iO N | x e npu)M e ay<o
Aycu ncynpe MnpcoMe n e e i |o)Hpe n o jH p e | M nptoM e n iq jH p e
e o y e B Q A z n n im m | m o o y n e o y e | B O A N A tg m m ooy ne
| Then Bartholomew | said to him: Then Bartholomew | said to him: |

How (is it that) <he> was How (is it that) he was called 10 in
designated in the Gospel | Man and Son | of
104 the Gospel Man | and Son of Man? | To which of them is the Son
Man? | To which of | them, then, is
this Son related? The
104 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 8,28-9,3 NHC III
n ] i p u ) [ M e ] N N i T M o y [ ' ] I ijh e T e
q jiY t [pan e ]p o q x e
rripeci 30[ x n o ] n x i d k c [ b o a
m]moc| o y t A . A . q ] | [ N T e p e q x i
ttif ] M e j e N T e q c y N [ 2 y r o c ] |
[ f N o c nco< J)ia i q ] o y c p N 2 c b [ o \
M ] |[ n ia ) o p r f M M ice 6 t ] m m i [ y ]
N 2[ o o y t ]
[e ] [c z i Me1 nH e T ] e q )a .[y f p ]a n |
[ep oq x e niujHpe ] N<yop[rt]
MMice | [ n t c n N o y T e ]*
Immortal [Man], | who is [called]

Self-perfected 30 [Begetter.] |
[When he received the consent] of
his [consort,] | [Great Sophia, he]
revealed | [that first-begotten
androgyne,]
[9] [who is called] | First-begotten
[Son] | [of God].
Eug-V:
9.1 Corr.: n incorporates initial q (cf. 2,18n.).
NHC III 104,4-16 BG 98,13-99,9
n e x& q n a .<j n <s i 5 neToyaiaLB ' x e n e | x & q n<si n e T o y a .A .B x e 15

to y io tg - eTp e|TN eiM e x e f o y t u q ) e T p e T N e iM e | x e
n e t o y e it Npu)|Me <ga.YMOYTe n e z o y e i T n pcum c e | T e
epoq x e | n p e q x n o n N o y c u ja iY x o o c e p o q x e n p e q | x n o
6 T X H K | 6 B O A Z I T O O T tj M M IN n N o yc N ayTO Te
MMoq 10 na.T A q e N s y M e i mn [ a . io c n a i A q e N je y M e i mn |
tn o s N|co<t>iai T e q cY N Z Y ro c T e e iN o e n c ] o 0 ia T e q | u )[B e ]e p
^ q o y lt U N z c b o a M n e q u j o p r t A q o yco N Z c b o a |
N x n o | N iy n p e N z o o y t c z i M e M n e q n p 0 T < 0 > re N < H T 0 c> 5
n e q |p a iN N z o o y t t g a . Y M o y T e N 0)H p e n z o y t c z Y m c | na.Y e T e
e 15p o q x e n p tu T o r e N e T io p neqp& N n z o | o y t n e
N|q)Hpe M n N o y T e - n p o T o r e N e |to>p n q jH p e
M n N o y lT e
Holy One 5 said to him: I want you related? | The Holy One said: 15 I
| to know that want you to know | that
First Man | is called | Begetter, First Man, who | is called |
Self-perfected | Mind. 10 He Begetter, Self-perfected
reflected with Great | Sophia, his Mind, reflected with | [this Great]
consort, and revealed | his first- Sophia, his | companion, and
begotten, | androgynous son. His | revealed | his first-<begotten>, 5
male name 15 is called First androgynous son, | whose male
Begetter | Son of God; name | is First Begetter, | Son of
God,
SJC-BG:
98,18-99,1 T-S mistakes the last 7 letters of 98,18 for two words and divides thus:
Nay, to them and t o t e , then. The latter word is made the beginning of a
new sentence, which is continued by T-S on 99,1 with the questionable restoration
of o y n .
99.3 Alt. o)Beep<e> (T-S; unnecessary since qjBeep is also fem. [Kasser: 84]).
99.4 ms has npoTereNeTcop , First Begetter (harmonization: see lines 7 and 14).
T-S has only the first emendation, but translates as above, which is possible
because of the ambiguity of the word (see LSJ, s.v.). It is difficult to believe, how
ever, that that ambiguity was involved here.
106 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 9,3-15 NHC ffl 81,1-5
T eq[M N ]+ c2i M e | [ x e f c g o p n e ]
M M l [ c e ] N C O < J)li 5 [fM A .A .y
MnTHp]tj' 6 T 6 u ) A p e z o | [ T N e
M oyT e] e p o c x e ta ta tth - |
[N T o q A e n i ] a ) o p f f M M ice
e y N | [T A .g N T e q e ] 3 f o y c ia . cboa
zm | [ n e ] q [ e iu ) +
A .g ]T A M IO N a g N O Y 10N A 6
N [e u )N ] n p o c T e g M N T N O c *
| e[q T A M io ] N a g N z e N A fr e A O C A .g T A M [io NA.g N z e N ] A . f r e A o c | [ru]
| n n a [n ] t b a N N a t f H n e e p o o y z e N T B fi eM N Toy] Hne e zo yN |
| ezp aT eyu jM q je- e y z y n H p e c iA .-
TTAcyeV THpg | N N i a f r e A o c nM HHaje TH p g | N N A f r e A o c
e t y a y M o y T e e p o 15o y x e CTM M A.Y q ) i y x o 5o c e p o o y x e
His female aspect | [is First-]

begotten Sophia, 5 [Mother of the
Universe], whom some | [call]
Love. | [Now] First-begotten,
since he has | [his] authority from |

his [father],
created a 10 great [aeon] for his own
majesty,
| [creating] numberless myriads of | He created angels, | myriads [81]
angels | for retinue. [without] number, | for retinue. The
The whole multitude | of angels, whole multitude | of those angels are
who are called called
Eug-V:
9,10 First superlinear stroke is in lacuna.
For the remarkable reconstruction of the first word I am indebted to Bentley Lay
ton.
NHC III 104,16-105,2 BG 99,9-100,1
e T e n e xe " n e
neqp&N I n c z im c tco<|>ia n e q pAN m m n tczi'm c n e
NnptDTo I r e N e n p i t m a a y n p o | T o re N e T e ip A tco<J>ia |
MnTHpq* | q jA p e zo e iN e M o y T e t m a y MnTHpq t a T e T e |
e p o c 20 xe TA.rA.nH* N T o q A e qjA pezoYN M o y T e e p o c xe |
nqjopri | N x n o T A rA n H n e n p o T o r e N e 15Ttop t a p
ojAYM oyTe e p o q xe | n e xp c" e o )A y M o y T e | e p o q xe n e x e
eyN TA q N T e a o y c iA | zitm e o y N T e q | T e a o y c iA zYTO O Tq
neqeitot M|neqeiu)T
A qTAM IO I N A q N O yM H H U je AqTAMIO NAq | n o y a t o

N A fre N A r r e \ o c bm n
\ o c cm n to y H ne t o y n n e e fy z y n H p e c iA ] [P]
eyzynH |p e c iA
his female | name, First | Begettress | who is Christ; his 10 female name is
Sophia, Mother of the Universe. | First | Begettress, Sophia, | Mother
Some call her 20 Love. Now first- | of the Universe, | whom some call |
begotten is called | Christ. Since Love. For First Begetter,
he has authority | from his father, 15 who is called | Christ,
since he has | authority from | his
father,
he created | a multitude of angelscreated | a multitude of angels

without number for retinue without
number for [retinue] [100]
SJC-BG:
100,1 Restoration is T-S, alt. Others are: e[yq)Mq)e] (correctly rejected by T-S as
too short); e [zo yN eyqjM oje] (T-S, alt.; a combination not found elsewhere in
BG). Meanings are similar in all cases.
108 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 9,15-21 NHC 11181,5-10
TeK.ICA.HCia. N N e + O Y A .A .B I NH T B K K A H C Ii N N e | T O Y iiB '

6 T 6 N o y o e iN MN N li+ 2 i 1 |[ b ]c N oyoeiN N iT Z ieiB ec |
<n 6> ' N u rre A o c o y n ctm m a y I NCTMM4Y c e e y o jA N ic n iz e |
[e ]iy u > n e e Y t y i N f n i e p N n n b y c p h o y (yi.peNeYA.cnic |
NCYlepHpY- moc tyco n e N z e N i f r e x o c
< y a . p e N e Y i c n a . C M O C ' 20 [ t y a ) n ] e e Y 10e iN e m m ooy
N zeN afreA oc c y c in c |
[m m o o y ']
15 Assembly of the Holy Ones, | 5 Assembly of the | Holy Ones, the

are the lights and shadowless ones. | Shadowless Lights. | Now when
Now when these angels | kiss each these greet | each other, their
other, | their embraces 20 [become] embraces | become angels 10 like
angels like | [themselves.] themselves.
Eug-V\
9,21 ms has a blank o f approx. 1 cm. between the lacuna and the subsequent word.
Eug-Xil:
81,5-6 Assembly . . . Lights (similarly, Tr): The church of the saints of light
without shadow (K); . . . of the holy lights . . . (K, footnote).
NHC III 105,2-9 BG 100,2-10
c b o a zm nefrFTaT m n n o y | o e i N | e b o a zm n e [ n N A m n n o ] Y | o i'N
n e x A Y N a q n c i N eqM a | h t h c n e x A Y N A q n<si N eq|M A @ H TH C
x e n x o e i c n e T e q > A Y 5M O Y T e x e n e x e - n e i 5o j t e T e
e p o q x e npaiM e* o y lt D N Z n a n a jA Y M o y T e e p o q | x e nptDM e
CTBHHTq ' X K i i C I ZtDtDN M A T C A B O N e | p O q X e K A A C ZtDtDN
e N A e iM e A K p iB to c e | T B e e N | N A C O Y a )N n e q e o o y
n e q e o o y n e x A q n v <sK a k p i | b o )c n e x A q n<si n T e A . io c
n T e | \ io c n c u jt h p x e n e T e 10 N c tu T H p x e n e T e
| from Spirit and Light. | His | from [Spirit and] Light. | His |
disciples | said to him: Lord, reveal disciples said to him: Christ, 5 teach
to us 5 about the one | called M an us | about the Father, | who is called
that | we also may know his glory Man, that we also may | know his
exactly. | The perfect | Savior said: glory exactly. | The perfect 10
Whoever Savior said: Whoever
110 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 9,21-25 NHC III 81,10-12
neytyopff MMice | [ ........ n e n p t o T o r e N e |Ttup' N e ic u f

Nei]u)t tpfajyt p a n [ep]oq | [xe a jiy x o o c epoq | x e aaam na
.......... ] . [ . ] n o [ y c - a ] a a [ m c t Jc n o y o e iN '
| [ttibaa. n n o y o e i N n e ' ] nH
[ e T i t j ] 25 [ e i CBOA. ZM
n o y o e i N ']
Their first-begotten | [ . . . father] is First Begetter | Father is called |

called | [. . . Mind, Adam, who] | Adam of the Light.
[is the Eye of Light,] who 25 [came
from Light,]
Eug-V:
9,23 ms has a stroke above the second lacuna.
Eug-HI:
81,11 Corr.: an erased point between first cu and p. The point following p is inexpli
cable, unless it, together with the erased point, was intended to signal the deletion
of p.
NHC III 105,9-19 BG 100,10-101,6
O Y N Ttj 10 M A A X C M M iy e CU JTM oyNTtj | M A A X C eCCOTM

MApeq|C<OTM* M A p e q |CCUTM
n e n p tD T o re N e T tu p N | e ic u t n e n p o T o re N C T to p | n c ic o t
e q j& y x o o c e p o q x e a a am ' | e a )A Y M o y T e e p o q | x e aaam
[ tt] b a a M n o y o e iN x e N T A q e i n B A \ M n o y o T N 15 c b o a . x e A q e i
e | [ B o ] \ zm n o y o e i N CBOA. ZM n o y l o ' l N
TeqM N Tepo A e t h r c | t a
noyoTN Te
e Tp o y o e i N 15 [m n ] ctp oyoVN | m n N e q A r r e A o c
N e q A fre A O C c t o y a a b - CTO yA
N | A t< y A x e e p o o y n a t z A e i B e c | [a b N A T a ) A x e ] e p o o y | [ F i]
e y T e p n H e yM H N c b o a e y p A | u je [ n A T Z A iB e c ] c e T e p n e | e y M H N
zn T e y e N e y M H c ic n t a y | x it c cboa e y p e a je | z n
n t n n e y e it o t T e y e N e y M H c ic n 5t a y x i t c
N T O O T q M ln e y e it o T
has 10 ears to hear, let him | hear. has | ears to hear, let him | hear.
First Begetter | Father is called First Begetter | Father is called |
Adam, | Eye of Light, because he 'Adam, Eye of Light, 15 because he
came | from shining Light, came from Light.
| And his whole kingdom | is of the
shining Light,
15 [and] his holy angels, who are | and his holy angels, who are
ineffable | (and) shadowless, | ever [ineffable] | (and) [shadowless], ever [101]
rejoice with joy | in their reflecting, | rejoice | with joy | in their reflecting,
which they received from their 5 which they received from | their
Father. Father.
SJC- III:
105,14 Regarding the section in the parr, (added here by K) following n o y o e iN ,
Light, see BG 100,16-17n.
S/C-BG:
100,16-17 TeqM NTepo . . . T e , And . . . Light (omitting "shining): T-S holds
that this section is missing in S/C-III through homoioteleuton.
112 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 9,25-10,2 NHC III 81,12-21
nity [H p e ] | [e T e p e T e q M N T p p o t m n t p I p o A e M nojH pe PnpcoMe
M ]e z t [ h p c ] | [ N o y p A t g e
I [ 21 ] I
N N i T ( l ) i ] x e m m [oi|]
t 21 ] 30 [ 21 ] | [ 21 ] | [ 21 ] | e c | M e z N p A iy e n a . fe y a x e epoq
t 11 o y A e M n e q o y ] 15 mn o y T e x H A . e M e q tyiB e
[T1 [c o n z zn n e to ]N n [im e T A yty co n e ] e Y T e p | n e e yM H N c b o a . zn
| M N N C < p [o Y ] MN [ N e y K O C M O C ' o y p A t y e NAT|<yA2.e e p o q e zp a T
ex.N n e y e o o y | n a t t a k o - nAV
e T e M noyco|TM eq eN ez oyA e
M n e q o y tD N t 20 c n a i i u n T H p o y
N T A y ty to n e | mn N e y it o c M o c
the [Son] | [whose whole kingdom And the kingdom | of Son of Man
is] full | [of ineffable joy] | [ . . . ] I is | full of ineffable joy 15 and

[ ] 30 [ ] I [ ] I [ ] I unchanging jubilation, (they) ever
[ . . . nor has it been revealed] rejoicing | in ineffable joy | over
[10] [in all the aeons that came] | their imperishable | glory, which has
afterward and [their worlds.] | never been heard nor has it been
revealed 20 to all the aeons that came
to be | and their worlds.
Eug-V:
NHC m 105,19-106,6 BG 101,6-102,3
TMNTP20RO THPC MTIUlHpe T M N T e p o A e | t a n u jH p e

MnpcoMe M npu)M e | T e
| neTeajiYMOYTe epoq xe e T e a )A Y M O Y T e | e p o q x e
n|a)Hpe MTiNOYTe ne5oc
e<c>MH2 NpA|tye N iT ig ix e e c M e z 10 thpc N pauye
epoq natzacibcc | zi tbaha. n A T t ijA | x e e p o q n atza Yb c c |
eMegujiBe eYPOOYt 25 ezpAT < M N > O Y T 6 A H A C M A q o jIB e |
exM neqeooY NA.tTa.no eYTepne c Y m hn c b o a | ezp A T
eTe MnoYcoTMeq eNez oja | e x M n e q e o o Y 15 n a t t a k o i t a T
TeNOY OYAe MireqoYtoNz | e T e M | n o Y c o T M e q e N e z o ja |
6 BOA ZN NAIU)N NTAYU)0)176 | tbn o y O Y A e M n e q o Y | u )N Z zn
MNNCA NAY MN NeyKOCMOC' < N > A IU )N N T A Y < y a )| n e M N N C A
5 ANOK NTAeie? eBOA 2 ITN N A I MN
nAYlToreNHC mn N Y K O C [m O C [pb]
anok n e N ]| T A q e i c b o [a zm
T T A Y T O r e ]| N H C AYU) e B O A
The whole kingdom 20 of Son of Now the kingdom is | that of Son of

Man, Man,
| who is called Son | of God, | who is called | Christ.
is full of | ineffable and shadowless It is completely 10 full of ineffable |
joy, | and unchanging jubilation, and shadowless joy, | <and>
(they) rejoicing 25 over his unchanging jubilation, | (they) ever
imperishable rejoicing | over his imperishable 15
glory, which has never been heard glory, which has | never been heard
until | now, nor has it been revealed until | now, nor has it been revealed
| in the aeons that came | afterward | in <the> aeons that came |
and their worlds. 5 I came from afterward and
Self-1 begotten and their worlds. [102]
| [I] came [from Self-begotten] | and
from the
5/C-III:
105,22 ms has q (incorrect gender, by attraction to nojHpe, Son; not emended by
T-S).
5/C-BG:
101,12 Alt.: <zi > T a h a (T-S, alt.).
101,18 Alt.: zn ancDN <n i m >, in <every> aeon (T-S, alt.).
114 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 10,2-6 NHC ffl 81,21-23
m n ] | Nccuq a.[q]<g<une [N 6 i . . .
c b o a ] | zm n a .T e [ T ] e n q jH [p e nujHpe c e | MnpcoMe
M nipcoM e ] 5 ne- ea.q[t] m b tc &qcyM<t><uNei mn |tco<
|>
ia
[m n Tco<t>ia. T e q ] | c y N Z y r o c ' Te q cyN zyro c
| Afterward [ . . . ] came from | him,

[who] is Son [of Man.] 5 Having Then Son | of Man consented with |
consented [with Sophia, his] | Sophia, his consort,
consort,
Eug-V:
10,3 Corr.: a over false start of another letter.
NHC III 106,6-17 BG 102,3-17
n e z o y e it N lo y o e iN eTe mn zm n e | z o y e i T N o y o iN
&PHxq* x e | e e ie M H N e y e n h tn M n iA 5n e p a . N T O N xe
NNK.A I NIM ' n i \ I N N eqM AQ H TH C e e iN a .t c & .|b t h y t n cnaY
10 n e x ^ Y x e m &t & m o n zn T H p o y I n a iA iN n e x a iy n s i
oy|o)N Z e B O \ x e n i o c cb o a . zn N e q | m &.@h t h c x e n e x e
n i |a t o y nz cboa. Ayei enecH T m a |t c a b o n zn n o y co N Z < c b o a
| z it n n i i e i N i T O C e n K o c | M o c x e n<oc> c 10b o a z n n i &t o y w n z
e o )a .< q > M o y n e x e n T e 15A i o c N A|e i e T t y o o n e a < Y > e i
NC00THR' X C en e|cH T cboa z n n ia t m o y I
enKOCMOc eT e <y&.q|MOY
n e x i i | N<si n T e A i ,5o c n cco th p
Xx e '
nu)Hpe M|np<UMe & q q i m n najHpe M|npu)Me A.qcyM<t)coNi mn
tco <|h a T e q | c y N 2 y r o c | t c o ()ia. T eq c y N z y ro c |
First | Infinite Light that | I might | First Light of the 5 infinite that I
reveal everything to you. | Again, might teach | you all these things. |
his disciples said: 10 Tell us clearly Again, his disciples | said: Christ,
| how (it is that) they came down teach | us clearly <how> (it is) that
from the | invisibilities, | from the 10 those who truly exist came down |
immortal (realm) to the world | that from the invisibilities, | from the
dies? The perfect 15 Savior said: immortals, | to the world that |
dies? The p erfect15 Savior said:
Son of | Man consented with Son of | Man consented with |
Sophia, his Sophia, his consort
SJC-HI:
106.10 clearly: through a revelation (K).
106.13 Corr.: third \ for erased o .
106.14 ms has y (incorrect pronoun number; not emended by T-S).
SJC-BG:
102,4-5 m s has stroke over the second n (line 4), w hich rightly belongs over the fol
lowing M.
Alt.: <N>a.nepANTON , infinite light (T-S sugg.).
102.11 m s has q, he came down (translation line 10) (emendation is T-S sugg.);
unemended, those who truly exist would be in apposition to the invisiblities.
116 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 10,6-18 NHC 11181,23-82,12
& {|[oYU )N Z e B O A .] I N 0 Y N 0 6 A qoY|u>N Z cbo a n o yn o c

M<t>(uc[THp e q e N 2 o ] | o Y + c z ? M e - n o y o c in
e T e [n e q p A N n z o ] | o y + N z o o y f [cziM e neqp]AN
u )a y m o y [t6 epoq x ] e MMNT|200YT tl)A<Y>[X00C
n [ c t u ] 10THp n i p e q x n o n t [ c e p o q ] x e n c u )| T H p n p e q x n e
n it h p ] o y I n e q p A N n ic a n [ i] m n e q p A N | m m n t c z im c
M M N + c 2? M [e u ) A p e z ] o | e iN e f o j a y x o o c e p o q x e 5 tc o < )> ia
p a n e p o c x e [ t it ic t ic ] n A N re N e n p A u )A p e | z o e iN
tc [o ]| < | > ia ' x o o c e p o c x e t it ic t ic
e T A n C tU T H P O Y N t M6 T 6 | MN | n cc u T H p e e AqcYM<|>u)Nei mn |
T e q c Y N Z Y r o c T m c T i c 15 T e q cY N Z Y ro c T m c T ic co 0u |
TCO<t>IA' A q o y tO N Z e B O A A q o yco N Z N c o o y
n n o y a [n ]| c o o y m tt n iic h ece M TfN eyM A 10TIICO N N Z O O Y T C Z IM e
N t o o Y t | c z i Me* e T e npan e n T Y ln o c n e N N eTZATeYZH *
N T 6 YM N + [ 2 0 ]|0 Y t N A T N 6 N Z O O Y T I N 6 YP A N N NAT
he [revealed] | a great luminary, and | revealed a great androgynous

[who is] androgynous (and) | whose light.
[male name] | is called [His] masculine name | is [called]
[Savior,] 10 Begetter of [All Savior, | Begetter of
Things]. | Some call his All Things. His feminine name | is
feminine | name [Pistis] Sophia. | called 5 Sophia, All-
Then when Savior consented with | Begettress. Some | call her
his consort, Pistis 15 Sophia, he Pistil. | Then Savior consented
revealed | six spiritual beings, who with | his consort, Pistis Sophia, |
are androgynous, (and) | whose and revealed six androgynous
masculine names | are these: spiritual beings 10 who are the type |
of those who preceded them. | Their
male names are these:
Eug-Ul:
82.1 T-S restores only necjp],
82.2 MS has q" Alt. ty^pfezoiN x o o q x ] e , name [is called] (?) (Tr; an unusual
locution in the context; see lines 5 and 6). All that remains of q is the lower part of
the long vertical line, which would be compatible also with p or f .
NHC III 106,17-24 BG 102,18-103,9
a.q O Y N 2 6BOA. N | O Y N O (S A q o Y tU N Z c b o a . ( z ) n n o y I
N o y o e iN N z o o y t | c j i m c [n o s N O Y O e iN ] N Z O Y T | [ C 2IM e [Pr]
neqp& N N z o o y t 20 u jA Y M O Y T e T e ]q M N T Z O | 9 Y T M 6N
e p o q x e n c< o |TH p n p e q x n e n ic a e t y a iY M OY l T e e p o c x e n ctD T H p
n im neq|p& N n c z im c ne 5 n p e q x n o N n ca . n im |
n & N r e N e n |p a c o <|>i a T e q M N T c z 'i'M e A e x e | c o <J>i a
c y a p e z o e iN m o y tc | e p o c x e n A N r e N H T e i |p a e T e ty & p e zo 'i'N
T n iC T IC m o y It c e p o c x e T m c T ic
| consort, and revealed | a great | and revealed a

androgynous light. | His male name [great] androgynous [light]. | His [1 0 3 ]
20 is called Savior, | Begetter maleness | is called | Savior, 5
of All Things. His | female name is Begetter of All Things; | and his
All-Begettress Sophia. | Some call femaleness is called | Sophia, All-
her | Pistis. Begettress, | whom some call |
Pistis.
SJC-BG:
102,18 Not emended by T-S (appeared in). I had earlier thought it best not to
emend [1975: 176, n.3], but the testimony of the other texts here, as well as the
evidence of scribal carelessness elsewhere in BG, have persuaded me otherwise.
118 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 10,18-11,4 NHC EI 82,12-83,2
nqjopiT n e n A T |x n o < n c i u )+ n a jo p r i n e n A | r e N N H T o c

nn i >THpoy TTMezcN&y [ n e ] 20 n M e z c N A y n e nA y| T o r e N N H T o c
n i x n o c b o a . mmoii' n M ezu )O M N T 15 n e n r e N e T t o p '
n;M[ezu)OMNT] | n e nH n M ezq To oy n e |
e T A y x n o q [- nM ezqT o]|oy [ne] n e n p to T o re N e T to p n M e zf| o y
m x n [ o ] n t c n[u)opfT] | n e n A N r e N e T a jp n M e z c o o y |
nM [ez]foy [ n e n u tn o THpq n e n A p x ir e N C T t o p * n p an z to o y |
nMez] | [e o o y ] n [e 15] N N e z io M e N e naT* T q jo p r i n e 20
251 . . . . ] Nip [ a n ffna.N C O ()O C CO<J)IA' T M 6 Z C N T 6
N T e y M N f c z i M e] | [ n a T N e '] | n e nANM HTW P* CO<t>IA'
fz [ o y e iT e ne 6 ] | tmczujo | mtc n e nANreNenpA
(6 lines lacking) CO<)>IA'
[T a ] [ 12 ] . [ 10 ] | [ 13 ] ttM e z fe | TM ezgTo e n e
n e ] | [TATAnH tc o ^ J i .a ' T e n p o ) T o r e N T i |p a co<t>iA'
t[Me]?[co n e] | [m icT ic T M e zfe T e T A rA n H c o
t ]c o <|>i [ a - <|>ia * T M [ e z c o e T e T n ] i c T i c [nr]
co|<)>i a
first, Unbegotten | <Father of> All first, Unbegotten; | second, Self-

Things; second, 20 Self-begotten; | begotten; th ird ,15 Begetter;
[third,] | Begotten; [fourth,] | fourth, | First Begetter; fifth, |
Begotten of the [First;] | fifth, All-Begetter; sixth, | Arch-
[All-begotten; sixth,] I [ . . . ] 25 Begetter. Also the names | of the
[ . . . ] the [feminine names] | [are females are these: first, 20 All-wise
these: first,. . . ] | (6 lines lacking) Sophia; second, | All-Mother
[11] [ . . . ] I [ . . . fifth,] | [Love Sophia; third, | All-Begettress
Sophia; sixth,] | [Pistis] Sophia. Sophia; | fourth, First Begettress |
Sophia; fifth, Love Sophia;
[sixth], Pistis Sophia. [83]
Eug-V:
10,19 For restoration, see V 3,4.
120 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 11,4-19 NHC III 83,2-10
o ]y NT3lY 5 tAe NZCNKCpjAN' n [h

c ]t a Tt a a y I [nhtn Nqjopff-
cJb o a . Ae zm n if Me|[Te ntay] 6 B [O A ZN Te]yCYN<t>0)NH | c ic
ctayp ujopiT N i o o y I n t a c i p o jp n n x o o y a y o y I u jn z
[ a Y Y < o n z ] C B O A N61 ZN NAICDN C T K H C Z R A l N C I 5
Z 6 N 6 N N O IA | [ZN ZC N CU JN ] AY P N C N N O IA * cboa ZN < N > C N N O IA
(y o p ff N i O O Y 10 C B O [ a A C zn ] N N | YM H CIC C B O A ZN
n ic n n o ia N iM e e Y e ' I c [ b o a ac N 6 N Y M H C IC | NC(t>PONHCIC
zn ] n im c c y n ic b o o y c " | c b [o \ C B O A ZN N<t>PONH |C IC
ac zn ] N iC B O o y e N i a j o x N e | N A O riC M O C - C B O A ZN
cbo a Ae zn N it g o x N e N io y c o c y N A O T I |CM O C N e e C A H C IC ' CBO A
| C B O A A C ZN N IO Y U X y N ZN N e 10 e A H C IC N A O r O C -
niojax e'
15 OYNTAY AC NZCNKCPAN
NieN |noia a c qjAYMOYTe
epooY x e | ni n o y t c nimccy e
a c xe ni |[xo]eic ' nicbco n c
NiAfreAOC- | NicyoxNe nc
[And] they have 5 [other names,

which] I gave | [you earlier.]
Now from the consent | [of those] I [From the] consenting | of those I
who have just been mentioned, | have just mentioned, thoughts
thoughts [appeared] | [in aeons] that appeared | in the aeons that exist.5
were mentioned earlier. 10 [And From thoughts, reflectings; | from
from] thoughts, thinkings; | [and reflectings, | considerings; from
from] thinkings, teachings; | [and considerings, | rationalities; from
from] teachings, counsels; | and rationalities, | wills; from 10 wills,
from counsels, wills; | and from words.
wills are words.
15 Now they have other names.
Thoughts | are called | gods;
thinkings, | lords; teachings are
angels; | counsels are
Eug- III:
83,3-4 K omits in and incorrectly makes aeons the subject of appeared (fol
lowed by Tr).
83,5 Not emended by Tr, although his translation reflects the above emendation (so
also Ks translation). My translation omits the articles here and elsewhere in the
list because it appears that inclusive collectivities are referred to.
NHC III BG
122 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 11,19-25 NHC III 83,10-16
N iA fr e A .o c 1t N i o Y 20[Ju) n ]c
N icyaxe' f
t a N M N t < C N O O Y C > IB" | [ A e ] N T T M N T C N O O Y C | 6 N SO M
NKSOM C T e A.YP 0) 0 |[pff N T A .e ip typ n N xooy |
n ] x [ o o ] y e T A Y e ip e N N o y t I A ycyM <t)cuN ei m n N e y e p H o y I
[ M e T ] e ' A.YOYOJN2 b b o a . A Y O Y O JN 2 CBOA. N 61 N Z O O Y T
n n o y a n | [ c o n s o m m W n ]'kh < > | N e z iO M e < > z t o c T e
T ? y e [ i ] T O Y e [ i ] 25 [ m ] m o o y N c e p t g q e 15C N O O Y C n a y n & m ic
N e e e T [e nh] m m [n + zo o y + ] I T e tgq e cN O |oyc a y o y o jn z c b o \
angels; t [wills] 20 [are] words. t

[Now] when the | twelve powers Then the twelve | powers, whom I
who have [just] | been [discussed] just discussed, | consented with each
achieved | [consent], each (pair) other. | <Six> males (each) (and)
revealed | [six spiritual powers]. 25 <six> females (each) were revealed,
Just as [the masculine (off-spring)] | so that there are seventy- 15 two
powers. Each one of the seventy-
two | revealed
Eug-V:
11,19-20 Some text has apparently dropped out: Nitg&xe , words, is not another
name (11,15).
11,20 The numeral at the end of the line following the written number is probably a
scribal gloss, similar to those in Apoc. Adam (V,5) 80,9; 81,14; 82,4; 82,10.
Apparently interest in the gloss led the final copyist to overlook the second half of
the number.
11.23 Third letter after lacuna: see Emmel, 1979: 184.
Second superlinear stroke is in lacuna.
11.24 Emmel reconstructs ]nN[a.T]i kh (1979: 184). An examination of the photo
graphs leaves me unconvinced of any ink traces before FloT; moreover the abbrevi
ation Emmel employs for jcvevjia-nKn differs from that used in the one other place
in the codex where the word is found: 10,16.
11.25 Second and fifth letters after first lacuna: see Emmel, 1979: 184.
Eug-Ul:
83,13-14 MS has, in each case, c c . Since c is the numeral for 200, it is inappropriate
in the context. At some point in the transmission of the text stigmas (<;) were
apparently mistaken for sigmas (c). Not emended by Tr, although his translation
reflects an emendation (so also K).
Corr.: second c (line 13) for erased ziMe .
124 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 11,26-12,4 NHC III 83,16-20
[n ] t N e y c o p t Y ' e y e ] N c o o y Ni Toyei To ylei mmooy Nfoy

c o [ o y ] | [ztu ]cT e n [h e T ]< g u > n e M n N e y M A T i |k o n
n z [i o m m ]| [n R ]* .' e y [ e eTe n a T N e T t y M T o je c e
n co ] c [ o * a.ya) n a T e T ]| e nIaynamic neyztoTp thpoy ne
n ia [N tg q e cN O o y c N T e 20 noYtoty
n ia ]y n 30[ a m ic Ne a y o y u ) n jF
eBOA 6 ]
(2 lines lacking)
[7 b- ] [ . n ia n u )m ] N + ( y [ e c e n e Y Z O JT p
n e ] | [n iO Y to ty
M n i] a )+ ' n [H e T A q o Y O N Z o y ] I
x e e Y [ e o ) ] t u n e [ N z e N T y n o c ] |
nipo)M [e c ] e n n [a t m o y n i e i N i T O C <se NpcoMe |
| of the six (pairs) of them [are] six | five spiritual (powers), | which
each, | so [those who] are [female] | (together) are the three hundred sixty
[spirits are six each. And these] | | powers. The union of them all is 20
[seventy-two] 30 [powers revealed the will.
. . . ] | (2 lines lacking)
[12] [ . . . the three hundred sixty. Their
union is] | [the will
of the Father, who revealed them] |
that they might become [types.]
| [Therefore our aeon] Therefore our aeon came to be as the
type
Eug-V:
11.26 Third letter after first lacuna: see Emmel, 1979: 184.
11.27 tg: see Emmel, 1979: 184. Emmel reconstructs e immediately after the first
lacuna, but all that is visible is the top of the curve. Since a middle stroke, which
usually extends to the right of the upper curve, is not visible, the more likely
reconstruction is c.
12.2 See endnote 7.
Eug-Ul:
83,20will: see endnote 7.
NHC III BG
126 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 12,4-12 NHC III 83,21-84,4
a n e N e t u N ] 5 q)u>ne A q u jw n e N A q N T y n o c n <s i
M n e q T [ y n o c n ix p o N O C ] | A e neN| a iio n ' nexpoN oc Aqujtone
e T A q q jt o n e N o [ y T y n o c n ]| t c N | T y n o c M n e n p t u T o re N e T o ip
m tg o p if" is ix n o N [ T e q N u jH p e ] | n e q q )H p [e * T e p o M n e A]cq)(une
t P O M n e A e A c u )[u > n e N | T y n o c M n [c tu T H p '
N oyTYnoc] |n tc ncp ' ttm n ] t c n o |o yc n sbo t Ayajcone
n iM N + [ C N O O y ] c A 10 N N C B O t . N T y n o c I N T M N T C N O O y C NSOM'
A y c g u jn [e N o y T y n ] o c | n tc
fM N + C N O O y [C N CO M e T ]A Y | O Y
u )n z c b o a . zm n c p ' N i A f r e \ o c |
came to be 5 as the [type] of | of Immortal Man. | Time came to

[Immortal] Man. [Time] | came to be as | the type of First Begetter,
be as the [type of] | [his] first- his son. [The year] came to be as |
begotten [son.] | The year [came to the type of [Savior. The] twelve |
be as the type] | of Savior. The months came to be as the type | of
twelve 10 months came to be [as the
type] | of the twelve [powers who] |
appeared from Savior. They are
Eug-V:
12,10 Low dot may indicate word separation (see 8,7 and 8,16).
Eug-HI:
83,21-22 K unaccountably does not translate the possessive article n e N - (our),
leaving instead a lacuna indicator. He also incorrectly makes the immortal Man
the subject of the sentence.
84.1 ^qo)]cune (Trincorrectly restored).
[Tepo M ne ], [the year]: [the all-begetter] (n^N reN eTcop ) (K) (too long for
the lacuna).
84.2 savior: not restored by K.
84.3 Corr.: T y n o c for T o n o c (erasure).
MS has the second superlinear stroke in lacuna.
NHC in BG
128 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 12,13-21 NHC 11184,4-11
N e n iq jM N '+ tg e c e n zo o y N Te | n q )M T 5 { T } q ) e c e n tn
T e p o M n e A y ty to n e T e p o M < n > e N z o o y N lT A y tg u m e
N o y T Y 15n o c N T e f u jM N + c g e c e N T y n o c N TcyM Tcye|ce n so m
N S O M | e T A y o y o U N Z B O A ZM N A T N T A y O y tO N Z C B O A I ZM
ncco TH p - | N iA f r e A o c A e n c to T H p N A f r e A o c N T A Y lcy cu n e
e T A y tg o u n e c b [o a ] | zn n a T eye eBOA zn n a T e T e mn H n e 10
N N A t f H n e e p o o y [ ] I A y c g to n e e p o o y A Y tg to n e nay N Tynoc |
N oyTynoc n t a [y ] 20 n si n si N eYN Q oye mn n c y c o y c o y
n iz o o y mn N eyoyN oy m [n ] |
N eyco yco y
| the angels. The three hundred sixty the twelve powers. The three 5
days of | the year came to be as the hundred sixty days of the year |
type 15 of the three hundred sixty came to be as the type of the three
powers | who appeared from Savior. hundred | sixty powers who
| The days with their hours and | appeared | from Savior. Their hours
moments came to be as the type of | | and moments came to be as the 10
the angels who came from 20 them type of the angels who came | from
(the three hundred sixty powers), them (the three hundred sixty
since | they are numberless. powers) (and) who are without
number.
Eug-V:
12,13 The absence of punctuation after Ne may indicate that N ia x re A o c Ne, They
are the angels, is a gloss (see par.), or it may mean that the scribe intended the
rendering The angels are the three hundred sixty days of the year. They came to
be. . . .
Eug-III:
84,5 MS has TepoM Te. Tr emends this word but lacks the initial emendation.
NHC III 106,24-107,5 BG 103,10-17
N C TN H O Y 25 T H P O Y C Z O Y N 10 O Y O N NIM 0 T N H Y e n | K O C M O C
e n ic o c M o c n a y t n n o o y I c s c b o a zT tm n a e i
l e e N O Y T \ f \ e s b o a zm | N e N N O Y T A f A e C B O A | ZM
n o Y o e iN | c b o a z it o o t Z j M naT n o Y o V N e n K O C M O C 15
c y tn n o Io y m m ooy enKO CM O C M n n a .N T O K p a .T io p f e a . | p e z e p o q
M rtna.N|TOKpa.Tu>p- x e e Y e z a p H z 6 B O A z T T O O T q t I ay>
e p o o Y 5 BOA Z IT O O T tj' A.YU)
All who come 25 into the world, like 10 All who come into the | world
7 a drop from the Light, | are sent by have been sent | by him, | like a drop
him | to the world of Almighty, | | from the Light, to the world 15 of
that they might be guarded 5 by him. Almighty, | t to guard it by him. t
And the | And the
S/C-III:
107,1 Corr.: second a for erased p; z for erased letter.
EUGNOSTOS
NHC III 107,5-14 BG 103,17-104,11
ATICIDNZ N | T e q B U )e M O Ptj' ZM TM ppe N T e q B tg e | A C M o p q zm

n e Te zN e c | n tco <}>i a xe noyuxge n
epenzu>B < n a o y <o n z > b b o a t c o 4>i a [ x e K A A C e p e n i]| z io B [P A ]
ZI |TO O Ttj M fTKO CM O C THptj N A O y [(U N Z c b o a m ]| t t k o c m o c
N TM N <T >| ZH K 6 6 T B 6 TH pq ZN T M [N T ]| Z H K e 6 T B C
T e q M N T X A C I ZH + 10 MN T C q M N T X A 5C I ZH T MN
TeqM N TBw e' mn T C q M N T B AAC | MN
TMNf a | T C O O y N x e A < Y > t pan T e q M N T A T C O O Y N x e | A Y t PA N
epoq anok |Ae nt A e ie i boa epoq anok Ae |aTei c b o a zn
zn N T o n o c M | [n ]c A z p e - zm N T o n o c | N Tne zpa T zm n o ycuq )
n e Te zN e q m t t in o s | [N o ] y o e iN m 10i t n o s n o y o 'i' n a T bco a
N TA zei c b o a zm n c u iN Z M | n C tD N < Z > e T M M A Y
bond of | his forgetfulness bound fetter of his forgetfulness | bound

him by the will | of Sophia, that the him by the will of
matter might be <revealed> through Sophia, [so that the] | matter might [1 0 4 ]
it | to the whole world in poverty | be revealed [to] | the whole world in
concerning his (Almightys) poverty | concerning his
arrogance 10 and blindness and | the (Almightys) arrogance 5 and
ignorance that he was named. But I blindness | and his ignorance that |
| came from the places | above by he was named. But 11 came from
the will of the great | Light, (I) who the places | above by the will of 10
escaped from that bond; the great Light; I have loosed | that
<bond>;
5/C-III:
107.6 Corr.: second z for erased n.
107.7 So emended by T-S (in translation only) & K.
107.8 in poverty: as poverty (K).
107.9 concerning: because o f (K).
107.11 ms has q (active rather than passive: he gave himself a name; not emended
by T-S or K). For the significance of a deitys being named, see 94,21-24, and
parr.
107.13 T-S restores [nc].
107.14 who: which (K) (great light? will?).
5/C-BG:
104,4 concerning: because o f (T-S).
104,6-7 See ffl 107,1 In.
104.11 ms has T , that creation (not emended by T-S).
N.B. the stroke rather than the expected dieresis in the last word; see also 115,11
and 123,16.
EUGNOSTOS
NHC III 107,15-22 BG 104,12-105,4
15 [6 t]m m a y A e icio A rt M(J>cob A 7ca)A TT | M<j>U)B MTTMZAOy

n n | [c ]o o n A e iT o y N o c q N C O N e | A 'f T O Y N O c q x c ic a a c
x c k a a c eq|N Af K A p n o c e q e | f K A p n o c e N A cy io q cbo a 15
6NAU)U)q CBOA I [ z j u o o t N 6I zTT0 T N 6 I f T A f A e 6TM |M Ay
n iT \ + \ e c tm m a y I TA T N T A y T N N O O y C I GBOA
n e N T A .Y TN N 0 0 yq z it n tco<J>ia Z'i'T O O T C NTCO<t>l |A N C X IO K
20 e q e x o jK c b o a Aycu NCTMcgcone
N N eqcyuiaiT | s e ' aa aa 6 e [n ]o )ta a a a a e y e N A | zB e c [Pe]
eyN A N O Z q c b o a z i t o | o t c b o a z 'i't o o t a | n o k n e n N 0 6
n N 0 6 NCtOTHP x e NCCUTHP I X 6 K A A C
151 have cut off the work of the | I have cut off | the work of the
robbers; I have wakened that drop | robber tomb; | I have wakened that
that was sent from Sophia, | that it | drop | that was s e n t15 from Sophia,
might bear much fruit 20 through me | that it | might bear much fruit |
and be perfected and not again be | through me and be perfected and not
defective but be <joined> through | again become
me, the Great Savior, that defective but be joined | through [1 0 5 ]
me11 am the Great Savior | that
SJC-ID:
107,15 ms has first superlinear stroke in lacuna.
cut o ff: revealed (K, apparently translating s to A n instead of c c u a t t ).
107,18 Regarding the gender of T A f \ e , see BG 104,13-105,2n. and Tills endnote
(T-S: 328).
107,21 Not emended by T-S or K (be separated). T-S takes the word to refer to
separation from material bonds, n o z # is unattested elsewhere as stat. pron. of
N o y z e , separate. In view of the BG par. it seems, therefore, more likely that
n o z # should be emended as above. See BG 105,l-2n.
SJC-BG:
104,13-105,2 N.B., the pronouns referring to ta + a c are masc., preceding its
occurrence, and fem. following it. T-S suggests that the scribe copied his Vorlage
until he came to the noun, which he took to be fem. (it occurs as either masc. or
fem.). Subsequent pronouns therefore were changed (T-S: 328).
105,1-2 be joined: less likely, be fertilized (T-S). T-S takes the verb to be dif
ferent from, although similar in appearance to, noyzb , to yoke, be joined
(Crum: 243a). Crum also makes this distinction but expresses his uncertainty
(243b). For the transitive use of n o y z b (2), meaning to fertilize, Crum cites
only the instance here, the grammatical object of which he mistakenly takes to be a
female personage. For the concept of joining, see 122,5-123,1.
EUGNOSTOS
NHC III 107,22-108,12 BG 105,4-106,5
epeneq|eooy n a o y <d n z c b o a .* e p e n e q e o 5o y o y o )N Z c b o a x e
xeKAac | eyNA.TMA.eie e y le T M A 'f e T ice co < t> iA |cboa
TK.eco<|>iA eBOA. zm 25 n e sp u iz ZM TTIiyTA 6 T { e } | < M M A y x e
eTMMAy x e N N e N e c N > N N e c o )H |pe s e u ju in e n u j t a
pH o)Hpe s e <yume n u j t a a a a a | A A A A 10 e y e M A T C N N O y T IM H I
e y N A f MATe j n t b t im h m n | m n o y e o o y n c c b c o k | e z p A T o ja
o y e o o y n c b b u j k b j p a T o ja n e y e i i u T A y|o ) N c e c o y t U N
n e y | e iu )t N c e c o y S N iy & x e t b z T h N N | c y A X e M n o y o e iN
M noy5o e iN M M N + zo o y t n t o j t n N T U )15T N A y T N N O O y T H y T N I
N| A e N T A y T N N O O y TH O yTN e B O A z 'l'T O O T q M na)H |pe
z i |tm najHpe N T A y T N N o o y q - | N TA yTN N ooyq XeKA|AC
x e e T e T N A X i o y o e iN 6 T 6 TN A X I O YO Tn N
N TB TN 'IC A Ze TH N O y eBOA T e T N C A z e t h y [ t ] n e|BO A [PS]
NTBuje N 10N e 3 o y c iA Ayto N TBcye N N e s o y lc iA
NCTMoytBNZ | s e e T B e t h n o y N C T M o y iu N Z s e e T | B e t h y t n
NSI TBTpiBH I eTXA ZM TH 6 T 6 N S I tT P IB H 5 6 T X A J M T 6 B O A ZM
his | glory might be revealed, so that his glory 5 might be revealed, so that
| Sophia might also be justified in Sophia | might also be | justified in
regard to that 25 defect, that her regard to <that> defect, | <that> her
108 sons might not again become sons | <might not> again become
defective but | might attain honor defective b u t10 might attain honor |
and | glory and go up to their | and glory and go | up to their Father
Father and know the words of the and | know the way of the | words of
masculine Light. And 5 you | were Light. You 15 were sent | by the
sent by | the Son, who was sent | Son, | who was sent that | you might
that you might receive Light and | receive Light and
remove yourselves from the remove yourselves | from the [106]
forgetfulness of 10 the authorities, forgetfulness of the authorities, | and
and that it might not again come to that it might not again come to
appearance | because of you, appearance | because of you,
namely, the unclean rubbing | that is namely, the unclean rubbing 5 that is
S/C-DI:
108,11 because of you: for your sakes (K).
SJC-BG:
105,8 Ms has M&qtgiNe , that does not seek."
136 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 12,21-23 NHC III 84,12-15
N T e T ze o n n [h e]|TAyoYUJN2 | N T e p o y tu N Z A e c b o a n s i
c b o a - AqTAM io N[a.q] | n <s i N e N | T A e io )A X e e p o o y
n e y e iu )+ n ip e q x.n o n [n h ] | A q T A M IO N A <q> I N 6I
nAN reN CTtop n e y e iiD T N ,5a)opri
Thus, again, | the father of those | And when those whom I have
who appeared, | Begetter of All discussed appeared, | All-Begetter,
[Things], very soon created their father, very soon | created
Eag-III:
84.12 NTepoy<oy>(ONz (Tr; unnecessary emendation).
84.13 MS has y (correction of untranslated ethical dative): not emended by Tr, who
translates for them (so also K).
their father, very soon: their first father (T-S, K & Tr).
NHC III 108,12-25 BG 106,5-107,5
oycboa T e | z m n e icp io M btza n|KO)Z 6 T Z A T N T 6 N T A C |ei 6 B O A

zo tc ' neN |TAqei c b o a zm
n c A p ic iN o c m 15m o o y z <d m - ZM n C A P K IN O C | M MOOY

e zp A T e i N T e y | n p 0 N 0 i A t o tc 6 T 6 T N e |ZOOM e x N
n e x A q N A [q ] | n si c o m a c x e T e q n p o N o i 10a t o t c n e x A q
n x o e i c n c a )| T H p n cto yatb N A q n s i | e a iM A C x e n e x c T
e N n H o y e o y | H p N e" n cyakdn n c< u | T H p o y H p N e n ia ic o n |
n e x e n T e 20A i o c n c o jt h p ' xe e T o y o T B e M TtH ye n e|X A q nsi
f e n A i N o y | m m id t n x e n T e A io c n c o ) 15t h p x e
T e T N 0 )IN e N C A I N IN O S N A IU )N t e r t A i N o y m Im o jt n x e
x e N e T N N o y |N e e y z N T e T N t y iN e | e TB e n in o s n a k u n
N IA n ep A N T O N | x e N eTN N oyN e e yzp A |ei zn
N IA n e P A N T O N
N T e | p o y o )N Z A e n s i nh N T e p o y a jN Z A e n s i |
N T A e i ^ u j A x e e p o o y N iy o p rt n c n t a Y x o o y N c y o | p e n A qp
A q T C A [n o ] cypn n t a m i |o N A q n s i
n A y T o r e N e 5to>p n c i c o t
I from the fearful fire that | came from the | envy that is with what |
from their fleshly part. 15 Tread upon came from their fleshly part, | and
their | malicious intent. Then (also) that you might | tread upon his
Thomas said to [him]: | Lord, malicious intent. 10 Then Thomas
Savior, | how many are the aeons of said to him: | Christ, Savior, | how
those | who surpass the heavens? many are the aeons | that surpass the
The perfect 20 Savior said: I praise | heavens? The | perfect Savior said:
you (pi.) because you ask about | the 15 I praise | you (pi.) because you
great aeons, for your roots | are in ask | about the great aeons, | for
the infinities. your roots are | in the infinities.
Now when | those whom I have Now when | those whom I have
discussed earlier were revealed, 25 discussed earlier were revealed, |
he [provided] Self-Begetter | Father very soon
created
SJC-HI:
108,25 Bracketed letters are those presumed to be at the beginning of 109,1.
SJC-BG:
106,6 Alt. for line: <k u >z t c t z a zotb n t a i )->, the <fearful fire that> came . . .
(T-S sugg.); see S/C-III par.
106,11 m s has a large asterisk in the left margin.
106,14 MS has a large asterisk in the left margin.
138 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 12,24-30 NHC III 84,15-85,3
THPO Y M M N + C N O O [ Y C NNeCDN ] 25 m m n t c n o o y c NAicuN | ezoyN

N a)o p [fl] e y [q )M ]u je eTzynHpecia.
MfTIMN T C N [ o o y C ' ] m (n }nMN |t c n o o y c N A fre A o c -
| [ N f l ^ e N e | [c u j n ' n ] p Y ^ n o y a . A.yU) NZPA.Y I 2N N3lIU)N THPOY

N N [ h ] I N f O B N<S2lM n c y n c o e - c o e - n e - zm n o y *
e T A . [ y o Y ] a J N t c [b o a ] | [ N t] H T [ t j TTOyA. M M O O Y Z U JC T e 20 N C e p
oyntay N f o y ] N C T e[p eiu M A .] | ty q e c N o o y c M ne N Te
[z]n N e t Y n H o y e T H p o y ] T e u )| q e c N 0 0 y c nsom naT
2 i u c T [ e ] 30 N [ c ] e [ p q )M N + q je c e N T A .y O Y U )N 2 I eBO A. N2HT(j' A Y >
NCTepeujM^ . . . ] 2N M n H o ye | t h p o y N e o y N f o y
(2 lines lacking) t o y N C T e lp e iu M a . j o j c t c N c e p
o jM T q je
c e N C T e[p eu)M 3k . n ] t c
TU )M T< ye|ce n s o m [n^T
N T a.Y o ]y a)N 2 c b o a . | n z h t o y
| twelve [aeons] 25 for [retinue] for 15 twelve aeons | for retinue for the
the twelve (powers). twelve | angels. And in | each aeon
| So each of the [aeons] of | the there were six (heavens), | so 20
seventy-two powers who appeared | there are seventy-two heavens of the
[from him have five] firmaments | seventy-two | powers who appeared
[in all their heavens], so 30 [there are | from him. And in each of the
three hundred sixty firmaments . . . ] heavens | there were five
| (2 lines lacking) firmaments, | so there are
(altogether) three hundred sixty
[firmaments] of the three hundred |
sixty powers that appeared | from
them.
Eug-V:
12,28 Fifth superlinear stroke is in lacuna.
12,30 Ms has a superlinear stroke visible in the second lacuna above the letter that
would have followed cTepeoiMai.
Eug-ID:
84,16 Not emended by T-S, K or Tr (with the twelve).
85,1 Tr restores as above but leave n tc untranslated ([firmaments]. Three hun
dred) (similarly, K).
85,3 from. . . firmaments: less likely, from the firmaments. When they (K & Tr).
NHC III BG 107,5-8
(Coptic pages 109 and 110 are m m n t c |n o o y c n & ko n

missing.) e y z H ln e p H C ia . m t t i m n t c |n o o y c
N a .r r e A .o c
5 twelve | aeons for retinue | for the

twelve | angels.
140 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 13,1-7 NHC III 85,3-9
[ff] [ 9 ] . [ . b t ] a y p q jo | [p ff N x o o y
NTe]peN[icT ]epecoMA | [a <uk N e c T e p e c o M A N T e lp o y A iD K .
cbo a - a .] y t p [a n ] epooy Ae | cb o a. A Y t p n { n } o y A e 5
[ f T 3 M n H o y e ] N Nicy [o p ]ff T q jM T c g e c e f i n e e n p A N
N N (U N ' NMlnHoye eTZATeyzH
5 [NAY A6 THROY 2 ]eNT6 AIOC Ayco n a Y t h |p o y c e x H K Ayco
Ne 6 n a |[n o y o y a y ]) Nfze n an o y Aycu N T e | e i t e A q o y w N z
AqoycoNZ | [cbo a n c i n e ] ( j) T A 6 BO A N 6 1 n Z Y C T e lP H M A
NfMN+CZ? Me- N T M N T C 2IM6 *
[13] [ . . . that] have | [just been

mentioned.
When] the firmaments | [were When the firmaments | were
complete,] they were [called] | [The complete, they were called5 The
Three Hundred Sixty Heavens] of Three Hundred Sixty Heavens,
the [First] Aeons. according to the name of the |
heavens that were before them.
5 [And all these] are perfect and | And all these | are perfect and good.
[good. And] in this way [the] defect And in this | way the defect | of
| of femaleness appeared. femaleness appeared.
Eug-V:
Eug-UI:
85,4 Not emended by Tr.
85.8 Corr.: erased i at end of line.
85.9 Corr.: hma. for erasures.
NHC III BG 107,8-108,1
n a .|T t h p o y s n t c m o n nc 10
A.YU) N A .N O Y O Y e B O A I
z T t o o t o y n n a T A .qoY|o)N 2
e B O A n c i neq)|TA. z n T e c z iM e
n e x 4 < q > | N&q x e o y h p N e
n i 15a.iu)n JtiN N i^ n e p a T | t o n
N T e n i a t m o y n e | x a .q N 6 i
n T e A i o c n ccu | th p x e n e r e
O Y N T q | M A i i e e ccu T M M ^peq
CtDTM
All | these are perfect 10 and good. |

Thus | the defect | in the female
appeared.
And <he> said | to him: How many
are the 15 aeons of the immortals, |
starting from the infinities? | The
perfect Savior said: | Whoever has |
ears to hear, let him
hear.
SJC-BG:
107,13 T-S has y. they (followed by K), but it is difficult to determine from the
photograph whether the scribe intended Y or q . If the pi. was intended, this is the
only instance in the tractate where the questioner or questioners are not clearly
identified. If the sing., the questioner remains Thomas.
107,14-16 How . . . infinities?: How many aeons are there of the boundless ones
of the immortals? (T-S).
107,17 ms has a large asterisk in the left margin.
142 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 13,7-19 NHC III 85,9-18
| [ayto niu)op]fr n n c c d n n i n e z o y e if 10 se N a ic o N na
nipu) |Me n [ n a t m o ] y n e n a e a .N a .T o c NptDMe | n e

n iM a z c N a y 10 n [ a nujHpe n M e z c N a y N a io u N n a n u jH p e |
M]npu)Me ne* ith e T o y | M 9 y [ T e MnpcuMe n e n e T e q j a y j t o o c

e ]p [o ]q x e nqjopiT MMice e|poq xe n e n p tD T o re N e T co p
neTe | q ja y M o y T e e p o q x e
nCCDTHP
| n iM ^ e c y o M e t n i n q jH p e
M |nu)Hpe M nptoM e n e ' nH e T e |
cgayM oyTe epoq xe nccuTH p-
15 nH Ae eTa.Mak.2Te NNaT n e 15 n e T e M a z T e N N a T n a iw N
n ie co N | [M n i]a .T p p p o e z p a Y n e T e | m n m n t p p o z ix t o q n t n
excuq N T e | [n N o y T ]e N<ya n q ja | eN ez N N o y T e
6 N C 2 MN n ia .T N | [a .P H Jtq n t ]e N a n e p a N T o c n a i| c u N N T e
[N ie ]u )[N n ]tc N i [ a ] T M o y | [nH N ia icu N n tn N aeaN aTo c |
| [Now the first] aeon is that | of The first10 aeon, then, is that of
[Immortal] Man. The second 10 is Immortal Man. | The second aeon is
that [of Son of] Man, who is | called that of Son of | Man, who is called |
First-begotten. First Begetter, (and) who | is
| The third is that of the son of | Son called Savior.
of Man, who is | called Savior.
15 Now that which embraces these is 15 That which embraces these is the
the aeon | [of the] Unruled One, of | aeon | over which there is no
[the] Eternal [God] and the | kingdom, (the aeon) of the | Eternal
[Infinite, (the aeon) of the aeons of] Infinite God, the | aeon of the aeons
the immortals, | (the of the immortals
Eug-V:
13.9 Superlinear stroke is in lacuna.
Kg-III:
85.15 embraces (so also Tr): rules over (K); see 73,6n.
85.16 Corr.: second t for partially inscribed and erased n .
85.17 Eternal Infinite God (similarly, K [footnote], & Tr): divine, boundless Eter
nal One (T-S); eternal, divine unlimited (K).
NHC III BG 108,1-18
n iy o p n n a h o | n a . ncyH pe
KinptDMe | ne n e T e u )a y m o y t |
e p o q x e n p o T o r e N e 5Ttop n e T e
( O ^ y m o y I t c e p o q x e n cc u T H p |
n a T N T A .q o Y o )N 2 c b o a |
n M e z c N ^ Y na.iu>n n a | npcuM e
e T e < i)a iY M O Y 10T e e p o q x e
AAAM nBAA | MnoYoYN
n e i i M i J |T e n n a T n m to N ne |
eTe mm m n tppo zY|xcuq N T e
m iga. e N e z 15 N ^ n e p a n to n
n n o y |t n iA Y T o r e N H c
{n }|n a i u )n n tc n ia ic o n |
eTN ZHTq N N 4 TM O Y
The first aeon | is that of Son of

Man, | who is called | First
Begetter, 5 who is called | Savior,
| who has appeared. | The second
aeon (is) that of | Man, who is called
10 Adam, Eye | of Light.
That which embraces | these is the

aeon | over which there is no
kingdom, | (the aeon) of the Eternal
15 Infinite God, | the Self-begotten
aeon | of the aeons | that are in it,
(the aeon) of the immortals,
5/C-BG:
108,11 embraces: rules (T-S); see III 73,6n.
108,14-15 Eternal, Infinite God: eternal, divine Boundless (T-S).
108,15 Corr.: an erased letter between the last two n s.
144 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 13,19-27 NHC III 85,19-86,5
e T N T T T e N TM A2(l)M O y ]N 20 e T N Z H T t j' TTCA N Zpe

[e T A C o Y tO N f c b o a z m t t i] x a o c * N T M e 2 (l)20M O Y N e N T A 2 O Y 0 JN 2
6 B O A 2M n | X A O C
| [niptoM e A e n n a t ]m o y N T o q A C n A O A N A T O C NpCDjMe
A q O Y | [ )N Z C B O A N Z e N e U )]N MN A q o y to N Z cboa n z n a ic d n | m n
2 eN |[M N T P P (l)O Y MN 2 e ] N S 9 [ M ' ] | Z N S O M MN Z C N M N T P P O | A q f
[Aqf eaoYCiA nay ] thpoy 25 N T 6 3 0 Y C I A N O Y O N N IM '
[e T A Y O Y O )N ]z 6 B O [ a ] N ZH Ttj | N T A Y p t Y l v N 2 BOA N ]Z H T ij'
[ 16 ] a y [ . . ] I [ 1 3 M n i] x A 9 C ' e | T p 0 Y T A N 0 [ n n a Y e T O Y A ]u )O Y
(5 lines lacking) | u )A n c z o o y e T M n < c > A ? p e
M n e x A | o c n a T t a p aycym<|>u)ni
m n < N > e Y 5e p H O Y
aeon) [above the Eighth] 20 [that | who are in it, (the aeon) above the
appeared in] chaos. Eighth 20 that appeared in | chaos.
| [Now Immortal Man revealed] | Now Immortal Man | revealed aeons

[aeons] and [kingdoms] | [and | and powers and kingdoms | and
powers] | [and gave authority to] all gave authority to everyone
25 [who appeared] from him | [ . . . ] who [appeared from] him | to make
| [ . . . of] chaos. | (5 lines lacking) [whatever they desire] | until the
days that are above chaos. | For
these consented with each other
Eug-V:
13,22 First letter after lacuna: see Emmel, 1979: 185.
13,25 First letter after first lacuna: see Emmel, 1979: 185.
Eug-HL:
85.19 above: the upper part o f (K & Tr).
85.20 in (so also T-S): out o f (T-S, alt., K & Tr).
86.1 So restored by T-S, except that second z is in lacuna.
86.2 Alt.: [o n n t o y o y a ]u )o y (T-S & Tr); the doubling of o y is uncharacteristic
of the scribe (see 84,12; 89,4).
86.3 that are above: of the upper part (Tr).
86.4 Not emended by Tr, although his translation, which follows K, reflects the above
emendation.
NHC III BG 108,19-109,15
| n t a T x o o y N tg o p n
N T n e N T M e z c A u jq e |
N T i C O y i O N Z C B O A t N I TC O < (>IA
e T e n e z o Y ' i T | n a i c o n ne
N T o q A e n i 5p<i)Me n a t m o y
A q O Y | U )N Z N Z N A IU )N C B O A . | MN
Z N S O M MN Z M M N | T P P O A Y<0 A q f
N T e | 3 0 Y C IA N N 6 T O Y O N 2 10
t h p o y NZHTq x e e y e le ip e
NNeYOYuxy u)a | NiZAe eT e
N eTN Tne | Ne M n exA o c naT
ta p I AyCYM<J)C0NI M N N 6 Y 15epHY
I whom I described earlier,

(the aeon) above the Seventh | that
appeared from | Sophia,
which is the | first aeon.
Now 5 Immortal Man revealed |
aeons | and powers and kingdoms |
and gave authority | to all who
appear 10 in him that they might |
exercise their desires until | the last
things that are above | chaos. For
these | consented with each 15 other
SJC-BG:
109.2 from (so also T-S, alt.): in (T-S).
109.3 which: or who (presumably Sophia).
109,12Corr.: a mostly erased letter (z?) after the first t , whose superlinear stroke
remains.
146 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 14,1-10 NHC III 86,5-15
a y o y t U N Z E B O A M M NT|NO(S NIM'
a y c o eBO A. zn oynN aT |
[T a ] 12 ] | [2] n < N > o y M H H o je N o y o e i N e y | z A
eo[oy] Hne e p o o y '] I e o o y eM N Toy Hne n ^T N |TA yf
nh e T a .[y f ] n e y p [a .N e p o o y p iN o y n tapxh
NA.T] I N T 6 f a .[ p x ] H MN [fM H T C e T e n e e i 10 n e T e z o y e i T e
MN t ] 5A T P 2A.H [ e ] T e n[x<DK TM H T6 <M N > n X 0 )K
cboa ne* | EBO A
n e ]| 2 o y e it n n c i d [n m n n iM e z e T e n a .T n e n e z o y e i f n a i I con
C N & .y] | m n n iM e zcy o M [e t* mn n M ezcN ^y mn n M e z | o jo m n t

n e z o y e i t ] | z m n a.T a y t pan n e z o y e i f a . y t PNi| | x e
e [ p o q x e n ic a .z ] | p e n tc tm n < t> o y 3 l ak.<yu)>
fM N to y [a L mn niM to n Tak.N ak.na.ycic e y 15N T e
o ] y [ N ] 10T e noya^. n o y a . noya. noyat
5 and revealed | every magnificence,

[14] [ . . . ] | [in glory (and) numberless.] even from spirit, | multitudinous
| They [received] their [names, lights | that are glorious and without
those] | of the [beginning] and [the number. These | received names in
middle and the] 5 unending, which the beginning, th a t10 is, the first, the
[is the perfect, middle, <and> the perfect; | that is,
the] | first aeon [and the second] | the first aeon and | the second and
and the third. [The first] | in it was the third. | The first was called |
called [Above] | Unity [and Rest.] Unity and Rest. 15 Since each one
10 Each one has
Eug-V:
14,2 Superlinear strokes are in lacuna.
Reconstruction: see 5,2.
14,4 Corr.: after first e , n is crossed out. The following t seems to be made from an
initial i (i.e., the scribe first wrote n i [pi. art.]).
Eug-Ul:
86,7 MS has m (not emended by Tr).
86,10 MS has m. Not emended by T-S or Tr, although Trs translation, which follows
Ks (the midst, the perfection), reflects the emendation t m h t c (m )ni<oic
gboa .
86,14 Tr lacks the first emendation but has the second.

NHC III BG 109,15-110,8
A<Y>OY>NZ CBOA I MMNTNOS

nim a y <o | cboa tM nernoaT
n o y Ia t o noyoi'n e y z x eo|oy
CMNT6 Y Hne NAT N
ta y m o y tb epooY I tN tapxh
e T e n A e i | n e n e z o Y e iT n a iJ J |
MN <nMC2>CNAY MN
<nM62>a)OMNT 5 n ezo y e iT
< n e > e q ja .Y M O Y | T e e p o q x e
TMNTOYA I AYU) Tak.NA.na.YCIC I
noYA noYA
and revealed | every magnificence,

even | from spirit, | multitudinous
lights that are glorious | and without
number. These
were called | in the beginning,
that is, | the first aeon | and <the

second> and <the third>. 5 The first
<is> called | Unity | and Rest. |
Each
SJC-BG:
109,15MS has q, he revealed (not emended by T-S).
110.4 Not emended by T-S (and two and three"), although T-S recognizes that
Eug-HI par. has the better text.
110.5 Not emended by T-S. The gap in the sentence, remedied here by the insertion
of a copula, may be caused by the omission of a line of text (see V par.).
148 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 14,10-18 NHC III 86,15-24
n [ e q p a .N '] e T p e y l t p a n A e x e m m ay neq|pAN { x e }
T C K K [\ H C I3 l M ]ni |M e 2 (y O M e t iYONOMiZe NTCKKAH |CIA
N N e [c u N c t Jb g | n a u y a u {z)Mn<Mee>qjoMNT naiujn {xe}
e T ^ q o Y t o N ? c b o a . zm | n i o y ^ ' e | B O A ZM n i A T O NMHHOje
N T A lt O Y t O N Z 6 B O A ZM TTIOYA
n o y 20a t o eTBe n^T
x e e y e ctD O Y Z th p o y e p en iM H H cye | ccuoyz
N c e e i e Y M N T O Y A .- | o j a y m o ytc
15 c y m a e zp a iT c o y a f i c e f epooY xe
neylP^N xe 6KICAH |C l A e B O A ZN f e K K A H C ia
T C IC K A H C ia .' 6 B O A | ZN eTO YATB' | eTn e
t e K K A H C ia . e + x o c e e N [ m e ] |
e T A .C O Y U > N ? CBOA. N fi I e T B e n e e i T e ic x A H c ia . n |
[its (own) name.] And the naming | has its (own) | name, the | <third>
[of] the third | [aeon] as Assembly aeon was designated Assembly |
is [because of] | the multitude that from the great multitude that |
appeared in | the one, so that they all appeared in the multitudinous one.20
might be gathered 15 together and | Therefore, when the multitude |
named Assembly, from | the gathers and comes to a unity, | they
Assembly above the [heavens.] | are called Assembly, | from the
When the Assembly that surpasses | heaven.
Therefore, the Assembly of
Eug-HI:
86,17 Not emended by Tr, although his translation reflects the second emendation, as
does Ks, which lacks the other two also; T-S does not have the first emendation;
see endnote 8.
NHC III 111,1-3 BG 110,8-111,7
o y N T A .q | n e q p A N cboa. xe
AY 10< o > N O M A z e n t 6 k ic a h | c ia
M n < M e z > q ) O M N T N i l |(un {x e }

C B O A ZM n|MHHU} e T N 3iU}U)q |
N T A q o y tO N Z CB O A 15 ZN oyA
a y a t o o y o n |z o y c b o a c b o a
A e | x e NiMHHUje o ) a y
[c]u)OY2 ezoYN
i N cee i e Y M N T O Y ^ ' cyak.NMoy|Te N c e p o y I [ a e ] T B e tta Y
epooy xe e a )A Y M O Y | [ T e ] < e p o o Y > x e
eK K A H C IA EBOA | A ZN
fe K K A H C Ii 6 T M SM A Y to y o tb
em e
TeKKAHCIA N TC | TMe2U)MOyNe' | e T B e t t a Y t k.k a h c i |a
one has | its (own) name; for 10 the

<third> aeon | was designated
Assembly | from the | great
multitude that | appeared: 15 in one,
a multitude revealed themselves. |
Now because | the multitudes
.1 and come to a unity, we call | them gather and become one, | therefore 111
<they> are called | Assembly, |
from that Assembly 5 that surpasses
Assembly | of the Eighth. heaven. | Therefore the Assembly |
<of>
5/C-ni:
111,2 The section in the parr, immediately after x e may be missing here through
homoioteleuton (so also T-S).
SJC-BG:
110.10 m s has a.
110.11 Not emended by T-S (the three aeoru).
110.12 Not emended by T-S.
150 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 14,18-30 NHC III 87,1-12
t [ e K K A H ] | c iA . N T e f z o [ r ] A O A C T M e zty [ m o y n c a y o ] y < ? n z c
[ A Y t p a n ] 20 e p o c - eBp[A] | eYZAoytTCziMe* AY]t
e Y [zo o Y + C 2 ? M e T e ' k a ]| t a e [e pan e p o c | en M epoc n z o o y t
N O YM 6RO C N Z O O Y + m n] | [a ]y < d e ic M e p o c | n c z im c *
o y m b p [ o c N C Z iM e - n iM e p o c n z o o Y T A Y t PN q x e 6 k 5k a h c ia
n z o ] | o y t A Y t [p a n e p o q x e T e c z iM e x e zcu h X | k . a a c
T k ] | k a h c i a [ n iM e p o c A e e c N A O Y U )N z c b o a x e c b o a | z n
N c z iM e ] 25 x e [zu)H x e o y c z i m c A n u )N Z cycone zN |
e c N A O Y U JN ? c b o a x e ] | a t t u )n z NAICUN T H P O Y ' P A N NIM
q j[co ]n e [ c b o a z n n o y ] | [ c 2 i] m 6 6 A Y .2C l| T O Y X IN N T A P X H 6 BOA
n [ n h ] T H p [O Y ' N IP A N A e ] I zm n e q 10M e T e m n T e q e N N O iA
THpoy [ 16 ] | M e n n [ 17 ] 30 AYO YCU N Z I N S I N A Y N A M IC NAY
(3 lines lacking) n t AYt PI|n o y Jce NNOYTe-
[Assembly] of the Ogdoad | the [Eighth was] revealed | as

appeared, it [was named,] 20 [androgynous] and was named |
[because it was androgynous, partly as male and partly | as female.
according to] | [a male portion and] | The male was called Assembly, 5
a [female] portion. [The male] | the female, Life, that | it might be
[portion] was [called] Assembly, | shown that from | a female came the
[and the female portion,] 25 [Life, life | in all the aeons. Every name
that it might be shown that] | life for was received, | starting from the
all [things came] | [from a female. beginning. From his 10 concurrence
And] all | [the names . . . ] | (3 with his thought, | the powers
lines lacking) appeared who were called | gods;
Eug-V:
14,27Circumflex is visible in MS. Superlinear stroke is not visible in MS.
Eug-TR:
87.1 Tr restores second perfect.
87.2 Corr.: first & for erased e (transcribed as o by Tr). Tr restores AYlt pan, as
above, but translates in the present, following K (similarly in line 4); T-S does not
restore
87,10Corr.: z for an erased letter.
See endnote 9.
NHC III 111,3-15 BG 111,7-112,9
a c o y <o n z e|BOA. e y z o o Y + c z i M e <N>TM A.ZO )M O Y N 6 N | T A Y O Y O N Z C

T e A Y t P ^ N 5 e p o c e ic M e p o c eeoA x e | z o ytcz Tm c a y + P^n
N z o o y t ^Y> I e ic M e p o c e 10p o c e ic M e p o y c m m n t |z o o y t
n c z im c < t>o o Y + m c n | < y a .Y t PNq ayu) e ic M e l p o y c m m n t c z im c |
x e T e K K A H ciA . ' T e | c z iM e A e <|>o o y t m cn a y m o y t c | epoq
u j& Y t pnc x e zu)H | x e xe c k k a h c ia T e ,5c z T M e A e
e(|N&OY<DNZ e B O A x e cboa 10 aym o ytc e|poc x e z o jh xe
z it n o y c z im b a t t u in z ty u m e e y e lo Y O N z q cbo a x e e e o x | zn
N|NIAI(DN th po y pan A NIM T eczY M e attw n z
A Y l X I T O Y X IN N T A P X H e B O A (y w n e n n ia ic d n [ t h ]| p o y npan
r&p zm | neqxco N q mn A e t h p o y [ a y ]| x i t o y n to o tc
T e q e N N O ii a y o y Iu jn z e e o A N t [ A p ] | X H C B O A T A P ZN
N SI N 6 0 M ' N ty o p it N A Y 15 T e q e y 5A O K iA m n T e q e N N O i |a
[n t ] a y + P^n epoo y x e n o y t c AYP )P n NOYCDNZ e | B O A < N 6 I >
n so m naY n t a y Im o y t c e p o o y
x e n o y It c
It appeared | as androgynous and the Eighth was | revealed as |

was named 5 partly as male and | androgynous and was named 10
partly as female. The male | is partly as masculine | and partly | as
called Assembly, while the | feminine. | The male was called |
female is called Life, | that it might Assembly, 15 while the female was
be shown that from 10 a female came called | Life, that it might be |
the life for | all the aeons. And shown that from | the female came
every name was | received, starting the life
from the beginning. For from | his for all the aeons. | And all the names
concurrence with his thought, the were | received from the beginning
powers | very soon appeared who 15 (or principle). | For from his consent
were called gods; 5 with his thought, | the powers very
soon appeared | who were | called
gods;
SJC-HI:
SJC-BG:
152 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 15,1-7 NHC III 87,12-18
[i"e] (Line 1 lacking)

| [ ......... N26NNO]YT[e n ] t
n in [o y ]| [T e -
N IN O Y T 6 A C N ] T e N [ l N O Y ] T e NNoyTe Ae | c b o a zn
A [y ]| [o y a )N 2 eB O A ] Ney<J>poNHCic AyoylcuNZ cbo\
{ z }N Z 6 [ n n ] o Y T 6 ZN 5 N Z N N o y T e N N o y 15T e N N oyTe
[ N e y M N T C A B e -] n in [ o ] y T e A e | Ae cboa ZN Ney|<t>poNHcic
[AyoytDNZ BO ]\ ZN NeyCBUT I AyoycoNZ n z n x o Ic i c *N x o e ic
[ t iz e N x o e ic n ] t z e N x o e ic A e N N X o e ic cboa | zn
[15] (Line 1 lacking) | [ . . . gods of] the

[gods;]
| [and the gods of the gods] | and the gods | from their
[revealed] gods in 5 [their wisdoms;] considerings revealed | divine gods;
and the gods | [revealed] from their 15 and the gods from their |
teachings | [lords of] lords; [and] considerings revealed lords; | and
the lords of the lords from
Eug-V:
15,4 ms has zn , in.
Eug-HI:
87,14-15 NNoyTe, divine: untranslated by K; the English translators note in K
suggests it may be a dittography; Tr renders gods of gods."
NHC III 111,16-20 BG 112,9-16
| [n ]n o y t A e N N N o y T e eBO A N N o y T e A e N N N o y 10T e cboa

2N T e y lM N T C A B e A y o y iD N Z A e 2N T e < Y > < | > p o | N H C IC
N ze N N o y T e | e e o x 1< N N o y T e A y o y to N z eB O A | < n > n n o yt 6
A e > 2 N T e y M N T C A B e A y o y tD N Z I { n }N N o y T e | n n + A e e e o x jn
N z e N x o e i c c b o a .' n x o c i c Ae T e y M N T | cA B e A < y > o y o )N 2
N20[ N ] X O e iC A Y O y tU N Z 6 B O A e B O A | 15 n <> c n <> c n <> c
Ae nn <S> c | A y o y tu N j cboa
| and [the] gods of the gods from | and the gods of the gods 10 from
their | wisdom revealed gods; | <and <their> considering | revealed |
the gods> from their wisdom <the> divine gods; | and the gods
revealed | lords; and the lords of 20 from their wisdom | revealed 15 <the
the lords from their thinkings lords> of <lords>; and the <lords> of
revealed lords; the <lords> | <from> thinkings
S/C-ffl:
111,17-18 The first letter of each line has been lost from the MS but is preserved in old
photographs. See Emmel, 1978: 204.
111,19-20 m s has first superlinear stroke in lacuna (line 19).
At the beginning of each line T-S restores [n ] and [n ] respectively.
Line 20 is not emended by T-S (the lords of the lords revealed their thoughts of
lords). However T-S considers the correct reading to be found in Eug-HI.
SJC-BG:
112,10 { a c } (T-S). Although untranslatable, A e does seem to have an emphasizing
function here in Coptic, perhaps on analogy with its use with pronouns in Greek.
112,12-13 <n >n o y t c . .. N N f, <the> . . . gods: <the> gods. The divine gods
(T-S).
Alt.: first emendation: < nzc > (indefinite article) (T-S, alt.).
112.14 MS has q (incorrect pronoun number).
112.15 m s has x for each emendation. Without the emendation the translation would
be Christs here and on line 17 in each case (not emended by T-S, although the
error is recognized), x for x is a common scribal error.
154 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 15,7-20 NHC III 87,18-88,7
N ix o | [ e ic A e N N ]ix o e ic N e y A o r o c A y o y tu N Z cboa |
A y o yto N Z | [c b o a z n N Z N x o e ic *N x o e ic A e c b o a zn
N e ] y i y o x . N e N z e N x o 10[ e i c 20 N e y s o M A y o y t o N z cbo a
A N i x o e i J c A o y u )N z c b o a | z n n zcn |A p x A f r e A O C "
[N 6 Y C O M ] N z e N A p x iA f r e A o c ' | N A p x A f r e A o c A y lo y t o N Z cboa
N [iA p x iA f r ]e A o c A e A y o yto N Z | N ze N A fre A o c c |b o a zn <n>aY
c b o a zn N e y iy A x e A T Z I A A O y tU N Z -
N z e N A f r e | a o c ay<o b b o a zn z r c x h m [ a z Y mop<(>h] e f p a n |
n a Y a y Y 15<unz g b o a n c i e N IA I [ con T H P O Y mn]
Z e N e i A O C MN I Z 6 N C X H M A MN N e y t c o lc M o c ' n a [g ] a n a t o c
ZNMOP<)>H | MN N ie u )N T H P O Y th po y N T A | e ip typ n N x o o y
mn N e y ic .o c | [ M o c ] o y N T [ e ] e y N T o y T e 53 o y c i A T H p o y
N IA T M O y T H P O Y I [ N T 6 3 0 Y C I A e B O A ZN T 6 0 M M |TTIA e A N A TO C
c b o a zn f e ] o M M n i20[pa)M e NPCOMe MN TCO|<t>IA
the | [lords of the] lords revealed | | their words revealed lords; | and
[from their] counsels lords; 10 and the lords from 20 their powers
[the lords] revealed | from [their revealed | archangels; the archangels
powers] archangels; | and the | revealed angels; from | <them> the
[archangels] revealed | from their semblance appeared
words angels; | and from them with structure [and form] for naming
appeared 15 shapes and | structures | [all] the aeons [and] their worlds. |
and forms | and all the aeons and All the immortals, whom | I have
their worlds. | All the immortals just described, have authorityall of
have | [authority from the power] of them 5 from the power of |
20 [Immortal Man Immortal Man and Sophia,
Eug-V:
Eug-Ul:
87.21 archangels (2): +<out of their words> (K).
87.22 Corr.: at the end of the line the letters b o a are erased.
87.23 ms has t a Y , her or this (not emended by K or Tr).
88,2-3 Lacuna in line 3, so restored by T-S.
their worlds. All the immortals (so also T-S): all their immortal worlds (K &
Tr).
NHC III 111,20-112,7 BG 112,16-113,15
< z> N N e Y M e l o y e N z e N X o e i c < z n > Nz 'M M e | e y e n <x >c n <x >c

N x o e ic A e z n | Tey soM Ae cbo a
^ y o y tu N Z e e o x zn Teyco M A < y > o y a )N Z |
n z b n a p |[ x A ] f r e \ o c - [ c ] b o a N Z N A p x iA r r e | [\o ]c
N A f X A f r e A o c c b o a . | [z ]n N A p x iA r r e A o c A e | [eb Joa zn
N e y A o r o c a y o y to N Z cb o a . n N e y x o ro c A < Y > 5[ o ] y u ) N z c b o a
ib ze N A fre A o c cb o a. zn n a Y n z n a t | t c a o c A y tu e B O A z n
A .z e N | z iA A o y a iN z z i cxhm a zi n a | e i < z e N Z iA A A > y o y a ) N Z
MOP|<t>H ZI P A N e N IA IU )N THPO Y | e|B O A ZI CXHMA ZY M O P | 0 H ZY
MN N e y iC O C M O C N A 6 A N A T O C 5 P A N eNIAIOBN T H 10P O y M N
A e N T a e i x o o y N ig o p rt o y N | T A y N e y ic o c M o c | n ia t m o y A e
e 3 o y c ia i T H p o y e e o \ zm | n ta Y u ja |x e e p o o y N cgopn
n i i . e A N a . T o c Npu)M e f n e T e O Y l T O Y 6 3 0 Y C I A e B O A ZN I
T 6 0 M M TTIATM O Y N 15P<0 M n T
| and the lords from | their power revealed <lords>; | and the <lords>
revealed archangels; | the archangels from their power revealed |
| from their words revealed angels; archangels; | and the archangels |
112 from them | semblances appeared from their words 5 revealed angels; |
with structure and form | and name and from them | <semblances>
for all the aeons | and their worlds. appeared | with structure and form |
And the immortals, 5 whom I have and name for all the aeons 10 and
just described, all have | authority their worlds. | And the immortals,
from | Immortal Man, f who whom I have | just described, have |
authority from | the power of
Immortal 15 Man, who
5/C-BG:
112.16 Not emended by T-S (the <lords> of the <lords> revealed <lord>-thoughts).
However T-S considers that the correct reading is found in fwg-III.
112.17 MS has x for both emendations (not emended by T-S).
113,1 ms has q (incorrect pronoun number).
113,4 ms has q (incorrect pronoun number).
113,7 MS has a Vn ^ y e , I saw that structure . . . appeared; T-S plausibly suggests
that the translator of the Greek misunderstood idea and thought it meant, I saw,
but T-S does not emend the text. In the T-S translation, however, <semblances
(v8ea)> is inserted before structure, while I and saw remain as the subject
and verb!
156 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 15,20-16,2 NHC III 88,7-19
n n it m o y ef pan ] epooy | T e q cy N Z Y ro c ta T n ta y Ix o o c
[t c o <J>i a Ayf pan epoc xe] e p o c x e c ir H n t a y ! p n c | x e
T C IT H I [ x e A C X W K cirH x e n z p a T z n
N T C C M N T N A ] s T H P C | [ZN O Y 6 N S Y M H 10C I C A X N U )A X e
o y e N e y M H C ic a x n ] a jA x e | A C X < I)K N T 6 C | m n t n o c
[1 9 ]aY N A <J>eA R CIA eYN TAY I
(8 lines lacking) N T 6 3 0 Y C I A A Y T C A N O N A Y N6 I |
noyA noyA m m ooy n zcn n o s |
M M NTPPO JOY ZN M ITHO Ye T H 15POY
N A e A N A T O C MN N eYCTe|pe<D M A
ZN e p o N o c zeN p n e | n p o c
T 6 YM N TN O S
zo TncMeN | zn mma Ncgcone mn
[ i q] [ 12 e o o y n n a + ]| [ty ]A x e zeNZAp | ma eyzA e o o y
[m m ]o o [y nh e T e
to name] them. | [Sophia they called] | his consort, who was | called
Silence, | [because she perfected Silence, (and) who was named |
her] whole [majesty] | [by reflecting Silence because by reflecting 10
without] a word. | [ . . . ] 25 (8 lines without speech she perfected her |
lacking) own majesty. Since the
imperishabilities had | the authority,
each provided | great | kingdoms in
all the immortal heavens 15 and their
firmaments, | thrones, (and) temples,
| for their own majesty.
Some, indeed, | (who are) in
[16] [ . . . ineffable] | [glory, who dwellings and in chariots, | being in
Eug-V:
16,2-3 Reconstruction: see 8,23-24.
Eug-lTl:
88.10 See endnote 10.
88.12 provided: created (K, translating ta m io instead of t c n a o ; followed by
Tr, who does not emend).
88,17-19 Some . . . glory: some indeed dwelling-places and chariots unspeakably
glorious (K, who overlooks z n , in, & Tr).
NHC III 112,8-17 BG 113,15-114,9
| u )a y m Y T e p o q x e T c ir H xe q ja iY M O Y lT e e p o q x e m capcuq
| eBOA. z n o y e N e y M H c ic a x n 10 < c b o a x e > | zT tn
<ya.xe i c x c u K c b o a n<si o y e N e Y M H c ic | a x n <y& xe
T6C|M N TN 06 THPC f TeqMNT
N&<t>e&pcia. eYlNTaiY rap N O S TH PC a q X O K C e|BO A Pi a
N T 6 3 0 Y C I3 l A.YTA.M IO | N ^ Y N J iT T a k o 6 y [ n ] | t o y T e a o Y c ia i
N O Y N O fi N M N TPP O N 6 I | n O Y ^ . A .Y T[a.]|M IO NA.Y N N O Y N O [ s
n O Y A M M OOY 2N m ] 5m n t p p o noYA. n o y* . z [n ] |
TM ezig 15m o yn " a .y n
zeNCTepetDM A. n p o c | ZN e p o | N O c mn ZN pne n p o c |
N CYM N TN O C N6 Y M N T N 0 6
| is called Silence | because by is called | Silence, <because> | by

reflecting w ithout10 speech all her reflecting | without speech
own majesty was perfected, f | For he perfected all his own majesty. | 114
since the imperishabilities had | the Since the imperishables had | the
authority, each created | a great authority, they created | a great 5
kingdom | in the Eighth 15 and (also) kingdom. Each one is [in] | his
thrones and | temples (and) ogdoad with his | firmament <and>
firmaments for | their own majesties. thrones | and temples for | their own
majesties.
5/C-ffl:
112.16 npoc: npo[c] (T-S).
SJC-BG:
113,18-114,1 See endnote 10.
114,4 Alt. {n }n o y (T-S; unnecessary in view of examples in 78,16 and 95,14).
114,7 Not emended by T-S (his firmament of thrones, although T-S translates his
firmament, thrones, i.e., as though the n before z n s p o n o c were deleted).
158 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 16,2-6 NHC III 88,19-23
M n o y ]| [c ]o )T M [epjooy [ n o ja N A .T q ja .x e epooy 20 n * T cm n
cn cz zcoc] | N e y q j [ x o ] o y o js o m exooy zm <t>y|cic n im *
n [ n i <|>y c i c THpoy]
5 A .Y T 2LM IO A e n [ 2lY AYt c *NO N*Y NZeNlCTPiTIA

N Z 6 N C T P 2L T IA ] | N T 6 N A .r r e \ o c z g n t b a 6 | m n to y
z e N a p x iA f [ r e \ o c mn Hne e zo Y N e yzY n H
have] | [never been heard of, since] | ineffable gloiy 20 and not able to be
they cannot [be sent] into [any sent into any creature,
creature.]
5 Now they created [hosts] | of | provided for themselves | hosts of

archangels [and] angels, myriads | without number,
for retinue
Eug-V:
16,4 sent: see endnote 12.
Eug-Ul:
88.20 and . . . creature: less likely, which cannot be described in any condition (K
& Tr [similar]).
sent: See endnote 12.
88.21 provided: created (K, translating t a m io instead of t c a .n o ; followed by
Tr, who does not emend).
NHC III 112,17-113,5 BG 114,9-115,7
NaT rap thpoy I ayajtonc zitn N a T r a p 10 T H p o y a y u jc o n e zm |

neTezNe | TMaay MtiTHpq" tot n o y t o o } N T M a y m tith |p c) to tb
n i % o c t o \ o c eToyaaa N an o cTo \o c |eToyaaa
nexay | Naq xe n x o e ic nexay Naq | xe nexc n c to T H p
nctuTHp* | a x i NCTZN NiaiCDN n c t 15z n N ia ic u N oyo N zoy |
epoN xe | TaNaficH n^n Te nan cboa epoN
. e n i t a n a t Iic h
eTpeNti)[i ] | n c Nctooy n ex e Te etgiNe N |ccooy n e xaq n c i
nTeAioc N me
ir cojthp x e etgxe <e>TeTN<yiNe [a ]io c nccdthp x e e a )| [x ]e
| Nca zcuB nim ' fN a x o o y c r c d tn T e T N u jiN e N c a | [ z u ) ] b n im
fN axooy e|[pcu]TN
| ayTaMio N a y NzeNCTpaTia ayTaMio Nay N5ZNCTpana
N|arreA.oc zeNTBa cm ntoy N a rr e A o c | z n t b a c m n t o y nne
Hne 5 eytyMcye mn N e y e o o y e y | a )M u }e m n oyeooy
For these all | came by the will | of For these 10 all came by | the will of
the Mother of the Universe. Then 20 the Mother of the Universe. | Then
the Holy Apostles said | to him: the Holy Apostles | said to him: |
Lord, Savior, | tell us about those Christ, Savior, 15 reveal to us those
who are in the aeons, | since it is who are in the aeons, | since it is
necessary for us to ask | about necessary | for us to ask about |
them. The perfect them. The perfect
.13 Savior said: If you ask | about Savior said: If | you ask about |
anything, I will tell you. anything, I will tell | you.
I They created hosts of | angels, They created 5 hosts of angels, |
myriads without number 5 for retinue myriads without number for | retinue
and their glory. They and glory. And
S/C-III:
113,1 m s has a (not emended by T-S).
160 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 16,6-17 NHC III 89,1-8
je N ] | a r r e A .o c n tb z n t [b a p e c i a m n o y e o o y eTi
Na .tf] | Hire epooy e y [u )M < y e zeN n & p e [e ]| N o c < m > it n i
m n oy]|eo oy mn N o y o e iN N a T t g a ix e | e p o o y
zeN na. [ p e e N o c m n ] 10 z e N ffN a T 1 MMN Z i c e MMAY Z A T H | O y MN
e y e N o [ y o e iN ] N N A + lu jA x e M N T A .T 6 0 M ' 3lA A 3l OyCUOje 5
m m o o y ' m [n t o y z lc ] e | r* p m m at ne'
z a t o o t o y - oy[T]e
[ o y ] M N t| a .ts o M ' 3lA aa. oyu)a)
o y a .e T c j | n c
A.ya) cyA cjajcone N TeyN oy uj&qujcDne N T e y |N o y
15 ^ ya) N T e Y z e ACJXCUK GBOA. N T e e iz e Ayxcuic 6 b o a n s i |
n s [i ] | n e u )N mn m e mn naicon mn N e y n e ' M N
n i c T e p e a ) |m a n tb n p u )M e N e c T e p e |toMa. M n e o o y
| angels, (hosts) of [numberless] | and glory, even virgin | spirits, the

myriads for [retinue and] | glory, ineffable lights. | They have no
even [virgins and] 10 spirits, who are sickness | nor weakness, but it is
ineffable | [lights]. For [they have only will: 5 it comes to be in an
no sickness] | nor weakness, | but it instant. | Thus were completed | the
is only will, | and it comes to be in aeons with their heavens and
an instant. 15 And thus was firmaments | for the glory
completed | the aeon, with (its)
heaven and firmament, | of Immortal
Man
Eug-V:
16.8 Stroke over m is visible.
16.10 Third superlinear stroke is in lacuna.
t: see Emmel, 1979: 185 (line identified as extant line 9).
16.11 End of line: see Emmel, 1979: 185 (line identified as 16, extant line 10);
Emmels restoration is too short for the lacuna.
Eug-III:
89,1-2 even . . . lights: less likely, in view of V 16,9-11, indescribable virgin
spirits of light (K & Tr).
89,2 MS has n (not emended by Tr).
89,6 Thus could be taken with the preceding sentence (noted by T-S).
89.8 for: o f (T-S, but perhaps for; K & Tr).
NHC III 113,5-12 BG 115,7-18
AYTA|MIO N Z e N T T A p e e N O C a y It a m i o A e N Z M n a .p e e | N o c
M f f N T N lo y o e iN N A T c y A x e M f lN i N O Y O T N N 10A T (Q A X .e
e p o o y N a.< T> |Na )/ { e }iB e c m n e p o o y Aytu n |a t z a Tb c mn
z ic e ra.p m m a y I z a t h o y A y io z T c e TA P I Z A T H Y O Y T 6 MN
mn M N T A T S O M 10 A A A A O ytU O ) iT S O M I A A A A O y tD U )e M M A Te
ne ne
| a y <d n t c y n o y A Y o ) t o 15n e
a n a iid n xco k e | b o a N T e e iz e ZN N f z e A y X C U K N<SI I N A IU )N MN
o y f i e n NH/ m n M n e | m n {n j M n H y e | m n < N > e c T e p e a ) M A
N e c T e p e u )M A zm n e o o y | M |neooy M n ip u )M e nat
created | virgin spirits, the | they | created virgin | spirits, 10 the

ineffable and unchangeable lights. | ineffable and shadowless | lights.
For they have no sickness | nor For there is no sickness | among
weakness, 10 but it is will. them nor weakness, | but it is only
will, | and they came to be in an
Thus the aeons were completed | instant. 15 Thus were completed the
quickly with the heavens | and the aeons | with the heavens | and the
firmaments in the glory firmaments for | the glory of
Immortal Man
5/C-III:
113,8 Corr.: xqj/ for marked out ea.; c marked out after second e (see 97,18 for
similar correction); uncorrected, the text agrees with the BG par.
113,11 Corr.: first m for erased letter.
5/C-BG:
115,15 Thus could be taken with the preceding sentence (noted by T-S).
115,17 ms has n, the firmament (not emended by T-S).
for: o f (T-S, but perhaps for).
162 ECJGNOSTOS
NHC V 16,17-28 NHC III 89,8-18
n n it m o y [mn] | Teqco<t>ia c t [c M n a e a N a T O C | NptoM e m n

OyNTaq N2H]|T(j NT[e]c[MOt Tco <|>ia T e q c y N 10z y r o c nM a
N6CUN NIM MN KO]20CM[OC NIM e T a < q u )u )n e p o q n t c c m o t
mn nh eTayajtune] | Nc<p[oy N > e U )N n im m n | N e y iC O C M O C
eTpeYTca.NO n n it y ] | tioc m n N e N T a y o )U ) | n e m n n c a N aY
Bp [ \ ZM ITMa CTMMiy] I 2N e T p o y r c a N O n | n t y t t o c mttma
Mn[Hoye M m x a o c mn e T M M a y N e y le iN e z n M nHoye
NeY ]|[ic]ocM [oc<aya) Te<J>ycic S i n e x a o c m n 15 N e y n o c M o c -
5 ] 25 [t ]hp[c T e < t > y c ic Ae t h p c
| c b o a zm n a e a N a T o c x i n
M n a |re N N H TO C
17+] | [ 21 ] | [ 21 ] | [ 21 ] | (g a n 6 < o \ r i e B o x M | n e x a o c zm
[and] | his Sophia, [which has in] | it of Immortal | Man and Sophia, his
the [pattern of every aeon and] 20 consort: 10 the area which
[every world and those that came] | ccontained the pattern of> every
afterward, [in order to provide the aeon and | their worlds and those
types] | [from there] | in the that came | afterward, in order to
[heavens of chaos and their] | provide | the types from there, their |
worlds. [And all natures . . . ] likenesses in the heavens of chaos
and 15 their worlds. And all natures
25 [ ] I [ ] I [ ] I [ ] I I
from the Immortal One, from
Unbegotten
| to the revelation of | chaos, are in
Eug-W:
16,25 The superlinear stroke is visible, since a large portion of it is over p (not an
unusual position for a final stroke in this tractate).
Eug-TQ:
89,10 Corr.: t for erasure; corr.: ojn for o ; a letter has been marked out between cojn
and n im ; not emended by K or Tr, although both note (as does T-S) that the
sentence is incomplete as it stands.
89,12 Corr.: third n for T.
provide: create (K, translating t a m io instead of t c in o ; followed by Tr,
who does not emend).
89,14 M n e x a o c , of chaos: m < n > n e x a o c , <and> chaos (T-S, probably).
89,18 are: omitted by T-S, K & Tr, for all of whom the predicate begins in line 21
(ever delight themselves . . . ).
NHC III 113,13-21 BG 115,18-116,13
M n A .e A N A .T o c NptoM e mn M O Y MN TCO<t>IA
tco |(|>i a T e q c Y N Z y r o c tt m a T e [q ]| c Y N Z Y ro c it m a n [ t a y ]| x i
N T A Y ^ I 15 C M O t M MAY N S I T y n o c eBO A n [z h t i j ] |n si a iu jn
AIU)N NIM ZI K 0 | [ C ] M 0 C MN n im zY k [o c ] 5m oc <m n>
N 6 N T A Y (y< u n e m n n | c a n a Y N T A Y ty c o n e m n |n n c a n a Y a y * i
cb o a . n z h t i j e n e Y T A M io | T Y ln o c c b o a zm ttm a c |t m m ay
N z e N e iN e z n M n e M n e x A o c | 6 T A M IO < N > N < e Y > | e iN e MTTHY
mn N e y K O C M O c 1 T 6 < | > y c ic A e 20 M { N } n e 10X A O c m n N e y ic o c M O c
THPC | <|>YCIC A e NIM
X IN MTTOYCDNZ M n e X A O C | 6 B O A x in m | iio y < d n z M n e x A o c | c b o a
| of Immortal Man and Sophia, | his and Sophia, his | consort: the area
consort: the area from which 15 [from which] | every aeon and world
every aeon and world | and those | <and> those that came afterward 5
that came afterward | took (their) took (their) types. | They took (their)
pattern for their creation | of types | from there | to create <their>
likenesses in the heavens of chaos | | likenesses for the heavens <of> 10
and their worlds. And all natures, chaos and their worlds. | And all
natures,
20 starting from the revelation of starting from | the revelation of

chaos, | are chaos, | are
SJC-HI:
113,16 Lacuna so restored by T-S.
113,18 Alt.: m< n > n e x A o c , "<and> chaos (T-S, probably).
5/C-BG:
MS has final superlinear stroke in lacuna.
116,8-9 On line 8, MS has a large diple followed by n a at the end of the line (not
emended by T-S). On line 9, T-S does not emend but divides the first four letters,
ei n c , and translates the whole, in order to create. These are: the heavens and
chaos (see explanatory n., TS: 273). The lack of clear meaning, the parallels,
and the unusualness of t a m io without an object make the T-S solution unaccept
able. The problem may have been caused by an error of hearing.
116,12 t t x a o c , chaos: < n x p ic T o c >, <Christ> (Schenke, 1962: 275, n. 57).
164 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 16,29-17,9 NHC III 89,18-90,6
[ 21 ] 30 [ 21 ] | [ 8 e y p A q je noYoeiN eTp oyoeiN |

cym hn] NATZA6IB6C MN OypAtye
[ 7 z ] [zm n e y e o o y ' n n a t J u jib [e ] | N iT a ja ^ x e epoq mn o y t a.ha
[m n n iM T O N N N ] a . f [ f a)]i e p o [ q -] NNiT iO I oq eyTepneceAi
| [n h c t c m n iy ] s o M N [ o y ] a ) i x e 6YMHN CBOA. | eZPAT
| [ e x t o m m o o y ] ' N c e [ c o ] Y < 0N O Y neyeooy eTe Meq|q)iBe mn
5 [z n NietO N t h p ] o y e T A y t y t o n e TANi n i y c i c eTe m ay Iojitc
| [ M N N C i] n [ a T ] MN N Y< SO M ' ta .T eTe mn u)OM e a jiie |
I [ 7 ] za) e p u )T N <yA n e 'i'M A epoc oyAe NNeyeujNoei | <j
| [n h A e t h ]p p [y ] c t a y p ty o p fT | mmoc n zpa T zn naicdn TH|poy
n [x o o y n h t ]n ' i i a j i x e m m o o y NTAytycone mn n cyco m
| Ayu) zco q)A neeiMA*
n a T Ae TH5poy NTAeip ajpri
N io o y nak | A eixo oy
[ ] 30 [ ] I [ ever the light that shines without shadow

rejoicing] | and (in) ineffable joy 20 and
[17] [in their unchanging glory] | [and the unutterable jubilation. | They ever
unmeasured rest,] | [which cannot be delight themselves | on account of
described] | or [known] 5 [among all their glory that does not change | and
the aeons] that came to be | the rest that is not measured, | which
[afterward] and their powers. cannot be described
or conceived | among all the aeons | 90
that came to be and their powers.
| [ . . . ] this much is enough for you. | But this much is enough.
| [Now all] that has just been | [said Now all 5 I have just said to you, 11
to you, ] I spoke said
Eug-W:
16,31-17,1 Reconstruction: see 5,14-15.
17,3 Second superlinear stroke is in lacuna.
NHC III 113,21-114,7 BG 116,13-117,10
2M n o y o e i N eTp o y o e iN e |T e zm nioyoY N e|T p oyoY N

MNTij z a c i b c c m n o y P A ty e | natza Yb c c 15 eyzM npAtye
eNeyecy i g i i e e p o q mn NNA T|a)Axe e p o q mn n T e |aha
o y | T e \ H \ N A .t x .o o q eyMHN NATXo o q e y | T e p n e eyMHN
eBO A 25 e y p o o y t e z p A Y e x N BOA
neyeooy [e]zpAY e x M n e y e o o y | PI2
RIA N &t cyi Be MN T ANATTAy CI C [ n ] a TU}IB6 M N neyM |[T O ]N
n a |to )itc taY eT e NNeyea) NATtgiTq" n a Y e | [ T e ] N e y a )
ujA|xe e p o c z n n a i c u n T H p o y a)Axe e p o 5 [ o ] y z n ai cun nim
NTAy|(yu)ne m n n c a n a Y m n n |t Ay t y c o n e m n n c a | n a Y m n
Ney560M THpoy Ne y s o M TH |poy
naYAe THpoy N |T A e i x o o y na Y n t a Yx o o y N | a ) o p n
epu>TN N t y o p r t A e i | x o o y A Y x o o y n h 10t n
in the Light that shines without in the Light | that shines without
shadow | and joy that cannot be shadow, 15 being in the ineffable joy
described | and | unutterable | and the unutterable | jubilation. |
jubilation. They ever 25 delight They ever delight themselves
themselves on account of their on account of their unchanging | 117
unchanging glory glory and their immeasurable | rest,
114 and the immeasurable rest, | which which | cannot be described 5 among
cannot be described | among all the all the aeons that | came to be
aeons that | came to be afterward afterward | and all their powers.
and all their 5 powers.
Now all that | I have just said to you, | These things that I have just | said,
11 said I said to you
S/C-ni:
113,21 are in: from (T-S; for T-S the predicate begins in lines 2425, ever
delight themselves . . . ).
SJC-BG:
116,13-15 are . . . being: from the light. . . are (T-S).
116,17-18 Corr.: cyi erased at the end of line 17; t for partly erased n at the begin
ning of line 18; originally qjine , be ashamed.
166 EUGNOSTOS
NHC V 17,10-18 NHC III 90,6-12
10 N e [ e e N e y ] N co m IC&.T&. e e C T K N A U ) I TtO O Y N
N T C T N q j o n o Y I e [p u )T N t h ]p o y m m oc <ya.NTenia.T | f cbuj
a } A . N T e n ic y ix e | N N i [ t f c ] bcd O ytO N Z C B O A .- NZHTK." | A.y(D N iT
N & q u jiN T e q n p p e | c b o a . zn thpoy q N i x o o y e 10p o n zn
T H Y T N - A.Y> q N i| B ( 0 \ N H TN o y p it y e mn oycoo yN |
nn &T zn o y r N t o c i c 15 N N o y o T e eqTOYBHOY
eCTBBH O Y+<
o y o n | ra.p n im c tc o y N T & .q
c e N e o y | i o z [M na.T] N z o y o :
| [eyrN (ocT]o[c] e y r N t o c T o c n M & | K & p io c
10 in [such a way that] you might in the way you might | accept, until
preserve it | [all], until the word that the one who need not be taught |
need not be taught | comes forth | appears among you, | and he will
among you, and it will | interpret speak all these things to you 10
these things to you in knowledge 15 joyously and in | pure knowledge.
that is one and pure.
| For [to] everyone who has, | more
will be added.
| [EUGNOSTOS] | EUGNOSTOS, THE BLESSED
Eug-W:
17.11 Translation: see 5,22-23.
17,14 Punctuation: see 5,4n.
17.17 Stroke over m is visible.
17,17-18 Decorative diples and a line to the margin follow the full stop. Decorative
marks are also visible on the next line to the right of what remains of the title. The
left side of that line is in lacuna.
17.18 A small mark appears on the Facsimile Edition-V page to the upper left of the
omicron. An ultraviolet examination of the original by James M. Robinson in
December, 1980, failed to show any indication of ink.
It seems likely that the title contained only eyrNtucToc . It is only one line long
(there is no decoration for a second line), and the practice of the scribe elsewhere
in the codex is to center titles so there is about as much decoration on the right side
as on the left. If that held true here, the space between the left and right decora
tions would have allowed only one word of nine letters, not two words, as in
Eug-m.
Eug-HI:
90.11 m s has a paragraphus cum corone in the left margin just below the line. The
end of the text is decorated, as is the title, with diples and lines.
NHC III 114,7-8 BG 117,10-12
u)a n t t n
p o yo eiN zm | ajiN TeTN p oyoTN | zm n o yo e iN
noyoeiN N zoyo c n a T' Aytu N2oy|o c n a T
that you might shine in | Light more 10 that you might shine | in Light
than these. even more | than these.
5/C-m:
5/C-BG:
168
Since Eug concludes on p. 166, both facing pages will be used for the
remainder of SJC, beginning with p. 170.
NHC III 114,8-25 BG 117,12-118,10
TTCXAC | NAq NSI MA.PI2A.MMH n e x i c N A q n | s i m a p iz a m xe

x e n x o 10e i c e T o y A A B - Tiexc I C T O Y A A B N K M A H 15T H C
N6KMA0HTHC N|TAyI TIDN fi N T A y e I TU)N H I eyN A BtD K. TU )N
eyN A ctcd n fi e y | N A p o y I h e y p o y m ttim a n e | x A q N A y
M neeiM A ' n e x A q nay |n si N S I T lT e A IO C
TlT e A IO C NCCOTHP Xe fO Y | u > 0 ) n c o )th p xe to y o )[q }] | [p ] i h
e T p e T N e iM e xe t c o <)>i a 15 e T p e T N e iM e x e t [ c o ]| < | )ia
TM A A Y MTTTHPq t m a y n n i t t t [Hpq]
Aya) T c y N Z y | r o c a cp zn ac
Z IT O O T C MMIN I M M OC C T p e N A T
ojcone |n eczo o yT zm
n e T e z N A q A e | M n e ia iT MTTTHpq-
x e e p e n e q ^ A ^ A Q O N o y iD N Z | N A o y u )N Z n e q A r A . [ e o N ] 5 cboa
cboa N ATM e|oye e p o q e q e o y u iN Z b [ o a ] | mn neqNA
AqTAM IO M n e e iK A I T A T te T A C M A MN T e q M N T | A T X I T A S C 6 N C U )C
O YTO JO y N N IA |O A N A T O C A y (I) A q | T A M IO M TTIKATATte |T A C M A
o y T t o o y N N e | N T A y a )(u n e oyTe n ia t m o y 10 A y io o y T e
Mary said | to him: Holy Lord, 10 Mary said to | him: Holy | Christ,
where did your disciples | come where did your 15 disciples come
from and where are they going and from and | where will they go | and
(what) should they | do here? | The what should they do here? | The
perfect Savior said to them: I want | perfect
you to know that Sophia, 15 the Savior said: I want | you to know [1]18
Mother of the Universe that Sophia, | the Mother of the
and the consort, | desired by herself | totalities
to bring these to existence without |
her male (consort). But by the will |
of the Father of the Universe,
that his 20 unimaginable goodness | will reveal his goodness,5 and it
might be revealed, | he created that will be revealed | with his mercy and
curtain | between the immortals | his untraceable | nature. He |
and those | that came created the curtain | between the
immortals 10 and those
170 THE SOPHIA OF JESUS CHRIST
NHC III 114,24-25 BG 118,10-119,11
M N N C A N A T 25 Xe NeNTA.Y<ya)lne M N N C 1 N i l '
epena.KOAOYON AKOA.c>Y[eei ] 2.eKA|AC epeneTHn eu)co|ne
(Coptic pages 115 and 116 are eq eo yA zq
missing.) NCA. A. I I (UN NIM AYO) n e X A O C 15
xe e q e < O Y > ( N Z n<si n e u )|T A
N T e c z V M e N c q )o )|n e
e p e T e n x A N H f n m |m a c n a Y Ae
N T A Y< yto
n e NKATAneTACM A | n n o y ttn T pfe
eeo\ zn < n > a 1 1 con N T n e
N N A n o p | p o ia N o y o i N Nee
n 5t a T x o o c N a jo p n c > Y | T \ t * e
cboa. zm n o Y l o e i N m n n e f f N T
e A c e i | e z p A Y e M M e p o c Mm |tn
N T C n n A N T O IC P A 10T(UP
M nexAoc xka|ac
afterward, 25 that the consequence that came | afterward, that | what has
might follow to be | might follow
every aeon | and chaos, 15 that the
defect of the female | might
<appear>, and it might come about
that | Error would contend with |
her. And these became
the curtain | of spirit. From <the> 119
aeons | above the emanations | of
Light, as 5 1 have said already, a |
drop from Light | and Spirit came |
down to the lower regions | of
Almighty 10 in chaos, that
S/C-III:
114.24 T-S restores x [ . ] at the end of the line, but the remains are more likely those
of a diple.
114.25 Bracketed letters are presumed to be at the beginning of 115,1 (so restored by
T-S).
SJC-BG:
118,15 Not emended by T-S or K (might live"). Emendation is T-S sugg.; for sup
port, see 107,11-12.
118,16-18 and i t . . . her: and she engage in a struggle with Error (an admittedly
free translation by T-S); and she (Sophia) might come to be, since Error fights
with her (literal rendering by T-S in n.); and she (female) exist, Error contend
ing with her (K).
NHC III BG 119,11-120,11
e < y> eo ya)N 2 N N e y |n A A C M A

eBOA. ZN + T A | f A e C T M M A y
e y T A | x o nac| n e
n A p x ir e N e 15t <
op c tc
a ja iY M O Y T e | e p o q x e
Ta a a a b a c o | f T A t A e C T M M A y
A c |o y (U N 2 N N e y n A i C M i | c b o a
z Tt m n N iq e ey
<|>yxH e c o N Z aczcosb |acn ko tk pic
cbo a zn T B | a je n tc ^y x h
N T e p e c |z m o m cbo a zm n N iq e 5
n tc n N o s N o y o e iN | n tc
<|>o o y t Aytu A q M e | e y e
ezM M eeye e y |x i pan thpo y
N(SI N T |Z M n iC O C M O C
M n e x A 10o c a y <o n k a nim
ctn |ZH Tq z Y T O T q M n iA T M x o ' y |
| their molded forms might appear |

from that drop, | for it is a judgment
| on him, Arch-Begetter, 15 who is
called | Yaldabaoth. | That drop
revealed | their molded forms |
through the breath, as a
living soul. It was withered | and it 120
slumbered in the ignorance | of the
soul. When it | became hot from the
breath 5 of the Great Light | of the
Male, and it took | thought, (then) |
names were received by all who |
are in the world of chaos 10 and all
things that are in | it through that
5/C-BG:
119,11 ms has q, that he might reveal their (not emended by T-S or K).
119,19 as: in (T-S&K).
NHC III BG 120,11-121,10
e T M M iy N T e p e r iN i |qe N iq e
e zo yN epoq | n a T Ae
N T e p o y t y t u n e 15 zm n o y co q )
N T < M A > A y | { n }t c o <|>i a
XCKi i C NZB|CU) eTM TIIM A
eqezop
M iz e m mooy n si n i| a .T M o y
NpcoMe e y T i . | x o n a y n n ic o n c
ayci) | A < q > A .c n A .z e N T e n N O H 5
c b o a . zm n N iq e eTM |M A.y
ey|yxiK o c ac | ne
eMnequ)<SM<soM e | iy u m e p o q
n +co m ctm |m a y cyA.NTqxcDK
N S I 10 TTA pieM O C M n e X A O C I
| Immortal One, when the breath |

blew into him. | But when this came
ab o u t15 by the will of Mother |
Sophiaso that Immortal Man |
might piece together
the garments there | for a judgment |
on the robbers | <he> then
welcomed the blowing 5 of that
breath; | but since he was soul-like, |
he was not able to take | that power
for himself | u n til10 the number of
chaos should be complete,
SJC-BG:
120.14 this: lit. these (rendered as above by T-S but not by K); see III 70,2n.
120.15 m s has ntmmay; alt.: <>tmmay, by that will of Sophia (T-S, alt.).
120,16-121,3 Apparently a gloss on lines 14-15 that has crept into the text. It
represents an ascetic interpretation of the will of Sophia; i.e., she brought all this
about so that nakedness might be covered and the robbers (who use sex to enslave
the soul) might therefore be rebuked (cf. Gen 3:21).
121,2-3 for a jugment on the robbers (so also Schenke in T-S: 340, & K): less
likely, while (or whereby) the robbers were condemned for them (T-S).
121,4 m s has y, they (emended as above by Schenke in T-S: 340; not emended by
T-S or K).
NHC III 117,1-6 BG 121,11-122,16
e q a jA N ^ t o K a c n ci n No ' y | o e i < g
eTHn z i t m t t n o <s | N A rre \o c
A N O K A e A I |T C A B e T H Y T N
e n p io M e 15 n a t m o y a y u j a T b co a
e|B O \ N N CN O O YZ N N CO |O N C
n c a n b o \ MMoq | A izco cy q
N M ny\H n t c
N IA T N A e M n e y M T O I CBOA. PKB
A IQ B B IO N T C Y ln p O N O IA AYXI
q jin e | t h p o y a y t o jo y n e 5B O \
zn T C Y B t y e e T | B e n A T <se A T e i
e n iM A |x ck a a c eyeN O YZB mn |
n in N A
iz ctm m ay mn n N iq e N c e < y u )| n e C T M M A Y m n | n r n q e A Y to
M necN A y n o y a N e e o n x in | eY e<gto10n e M necN A y e y a
N a jo p rt x e e T e T N A f K A p n o c | N O y| 0 )T K A T A 8 6 X IN N 0) 0 |pn
eN A ojcoq N T e T N B t u ic e z p A T eg a 5 XeKAC eTCTN A f I KApnoc
n e T q jo o r t x in N cyoprt zn e N A tgw q n I t c t n b c u k e zp A Y
O Y lP A a je N A T u j [ i ] x e e p o q m n e n d 15a j o o n x i n n q jo p e n | m n
| (that is,) when the time |

determined by the great | angel is
complete. Now I have taught | you
about Immortal 15 Man and have
loosed | the bonds of the robbers |
from him. | I have broken the
gates of
the pitiless ones in their presence. | I 122
have humiliated their | malicious
intent, and they all have been
shamed | and have risen 5 from their
ignorance. Because | of this, then, I
came here, | that they might be
17 that [ . . . ] and Breath, and might | joined with | that Spirit
from two become one, just as from | and | Breath, and m ig h t10 from two
the first, that you might yield much become a single one, | just as from
fruit | and go up to 5 Him Who Is the first, | that you might yield |
from the Beginning, in | ineffable much fruit | and go up to Him Who
joy and Is 15 from the Beginning,
NHC III 117,6-18 BG 122,16-123,15
o y p a ig e N A T a jix e | e p o q m n
o y e o o y | mn o t y T A e io mn o y e o o y m n | o y T A 'i 'o m n
o Jy z M o t n t c | [n]e[iu)+ o y x a p ic
m itth p c j] n e T C O o y N | [ c e NTe neitoT MnTHpq | n e T c o o y N piEf
Mneio)t z n o y r N ] (u c ic c e M n io )T | z n o y c o o y N
n k a 10[ a p o n na.Y q N A X tu jp i e q o y a & B | eqNABcoic o ja neiouT
e n i o ) t | [ n c jm t o n m m oi) zm ] 5 ayco e q e M T O N MMoq | zm
n a r e N N H | [ t o c N e ic u t n i A T x n o q N eito T [ n e T c o o y N
n e T c o o ] y N A e M |[M oq z n Ae MMoq | z n o yq jTA . eqeqjoone
o y i g i o i o l f e q N & x u )| [p i e n c y u x o t | ZM n e O )TA N (j<M >TO N M10Moq
a.y]to Ta.NA.na.YCic 15 z n TM eztQ M oyN e | n e T c o o y N
[ N T M e z o )M o y ]N e - n e T c o o y N | A e M ninN A | n a t m o y e T e
[A e MnefTFTaT n a ] a . n a t o c N T e | n o y o T N | n e z n oyKA pcuq z i'tn |
[ n ] o y o e iN zn t c it h z it n T C N O y M H C IC MN T e y 15AO Kia.
t c n y |[ m ] h c ic m n T e y A O K i A
| with ineffable joy | and glory and |

glory | and [honor and] grace of | honor and grace
[the Father of the Universe]. of the Father of the Universe. | 123
Whoever, [then], knows | [the Father Whoever, then, knows the Father | in
in pure] knowledge 10 [will depart] pure knowledge | will go to the
to the Father | [and repose in] Father 5 and repose | in Unbegotten
Unbegotten | [Father]. But Father. | But whoever knows him |
[whoever knows] | [him defectively] defectively will dwell | in the defect
will depart | [to the defect] and the and repose 10 in the Eighth. | Now
r e s t15 [of the Eighth. Now] whoever knows Immortal Spirit, |
whoever knows | Immortal [Spirit] | who is Light, | in silence, through |
of Light in silence, through reflecting reflecting and consent15 in truth,
| and consent
S/C-m:
117.9 T-S restores only t n ].
117.10 T-S restores only [e& poN] and [xtu],
117,12 T-S restores only [t o c .
117,14 T-S restores only [p i .
117,16 T-S restores only a ].
117,18 eyAOKiA . consent: the eudokia ( = the decree) (K) (?). Seeendnote9.
SJC-BG:
123,12-13 Light, in silence (so also Schenke in T-S: 340): Light in silence (T-S).
123,1415 T-S leaves both n y m h c ic andeyAO KiA untranslated. Seeendnote9.
NHC III 117,18-118,6 BG 123,15-124,15
zn TMHe | M ip e q e iN e N il zn n o y M H e M i| p e q e iN e N il
N ZC N CyM B O \ O N 20 N T C N Z N C y M | B O A O N N T 6 I I IA T N A y
n i i z o p i T O N i y u ) e q N A cy c o | n e e | p o q iy o ) eqecycun e | N o y o iN
N o y o e iN zm n e f i N i r N T c ir H | zm nenN i m
n e T C o o y N MntQHpe m tt p c u |[m ] n K A p cu q n e T c o o y N | M ncyHpe PICA
zn oycoo yN m n o y a x a it h | M npcoMe | z n o y c o o y N mn
M ip e q e iN e N eei * o y i | r i . n H M A p e q e iN e n a 5c i
n o ycym bo ao n N N O y c y M B O A O N I MTTOJHPe
ih ( n ) n t n o jH p e MnptDMe N q x a )| p i MnpcuMe | i y u ) e q N ic g c u n e
6NMA MN N 6 T Z N T M e z < y M o y | N e M | n M i e T M M iy m n n c t |z n
e i c ZH HTe A e io y i o N Z n htn | TM e z a jM o y N e e i c 10 zhh tc
M npeN M n i T e x i o c noyuxye 5 i'l'T c e B e th y < t > n | e n p iN
THpq n tm aay N N ifr e A o c M n iT e A io c | n o y a x y e TH pq
e T o y | i i B * x e e q N A X c o ic cboa N N ir | r e A o c e T o y i i B mn |
T M i i y x e i c i i c e q ls e x a > K
in the truth, | let him bring me signs let him | bring me signs of | the
20 of the Invisible One, and he will Invisible One, | and he will become |
become | a light in the Spirit of a light in the Spirit of
Silence. | Whoever knows Son of Silence. Whoever knows | Son of 124
Man | in knowledge and love, | let Man | in knowledge and love, | let
him bring me a sign him bring 5 me a sign | of Son of
118 of Son of Man, that he might depart | Man, | and he will dwell there | with
to the dwelling-places with those in those | in the Eighth. Behold, 10 I
the Eighth. | Behold, I have revealed have taught you | the name of the
to you | the name of the Perfect One, Perfect One, | the whole will of the
the whole w ill5 of the Mother of the holy angels | and | the Mother, that
Holy Angels, | that the masculine 15 the male
[multitude]
SJC-U1:
117,20 MS has first superlinear stroke in lacuna.
118.1 So emended by T-S.
118.2 Corr.: first m for erased letter.
118.5 Con.: first n for erased letter.
118.6 Con.: q for incomplete and erased n .
5/C-BG:
124,15Alt. word division: xcdicm m ttim a , that the . . . might wash there (Carl
Schmidt as reported in T-S).
NHC III 118,6-17 BG 124,15-125,12
M ne|eiM a n <s i nMHfHoje m {m JniM a n s i | nM HH tye
mm]n t z o | o y + x e ey[eoya)N z zn n z o o y t | x e eyeoytuNZ c b o a |
N IA l](o [N ] I eBO A. N fij ZN NiaiUJN th p o y XIN
[Nia.nepa.NTON aytu] 10 Nia.nepa.NTON ty a z p a |e i

NeNTaytg[<one zn tm n tp m m ao ] e N eN T a ytg tu n e | z n t m n t p m m a o
| N N 1 T X I 5 e [ X M 6 NCCUC N T e NNaT| x i T a s c e n c c d c NTe
n N o s ] | N a z o p a [ T O N Mima x e n N o s 5 N N a T N a y e p o q M im a |
e y e x i ] | T H p o y c b o a [zm xe eyexi t h p o y c b o a | zn
n e q a ra e o N ] | mn t m n t p m Im ^ o Te q M N Tarae o c m n |
N T e y a N a n a y ] 15c i c e T e mn TM N T p M M ao <NTe neyMa
m n [t p p o z i x c u c * a ]| N O K n m t o n > eTe mn | m n tp p o
N T a e ie ? [c b o a zm n cg o p rt zTx<o<q> ( n t 6 n e y 10Ma n m ton)
n ]| T a y T N N O o y q x e aN O K A e N |TaYei c b o a zm
nezoyTT | NTayTNNOoyq xe
| may be completed here, | that there multitude may be | completed here, |

[might appear, in the aeons,] | [the that they might appear | in all the
infinities and] 10 those that [came to aeons, from
be in the] untraceable | [wealth of the infinities to | those that came to 125
the Great] | Invisible [Spirit, that be | in the untraceable wealth | of
they] all [might take] | [from his the Great 5 Invisible Spirit, | that
goodness,] | even the wealth [of their they all might take | from his
rest] 15 that has no [kingdom over it]. goodness, even | the wealth <of their
11 came [from First] Who | Was place of repose> that has no |
Sent, that kingdom over it. 10 And 11 came
from First | Who Was Sent,
SJC-m:
118.7 Alt.: Si]n (T-S; incorrect restoration made on the basis of the visible superlinear
stroke and the cross stroke).
118.8 there [. . . aeons]: [they may reveal aeons] (K).
118.9 Lacuna not restored by K.
118.11 T-S restores only [x m s .
118.12 T-S restores only [ i T o c (incorrect gender for nfia).
118.14 T-S restores only NTeyaNana y].
118.15 TS restores only [n t p p o z ix c o c .
SJC-BG:
125.9 MS has c (not emended by T-S).
125,9-10 Bracketed words not deleted by T-S.
NHC III 118,17-119,6 BG 125,12-126,12
e e iN A O y u > N [z] | n h t n cboa e e i | e o y u )N Z e B O A n h t n

Mn e T t g o o r t xn N |u jo p rt e T B e M | n e T o jo o n x i n n < y o 15p f f e T B e
T M N T X A C I ZH + 20 t m n t x a c i | ZH T
M iiA p x ire N e T tD p m n M n A p x ir e N C T U jp | mn
N eq& r |reA.oc x e ce x cu m m oc N e q A rre A o c x e ce | x u ) m m oc
epooy I x e zeN N o yTe Ne' e p o o y x e | z n n o y tc Ne an o k
a n o k A e | N T a e ie ? e c A z t o o y Ae
N T e yM N T |B\A.e* x e e e i N A X to N T A T e i e c o o z e M M o|oy cbo a
N O YO N NIM 25 M TTN O YTe 6 T Z IX M " Ae zn TeyM N |TBAAe x e
n TH p q - e e ie T C A B e |oyoN n im
>16 NTIDTN s e Ztt)M e Z P A ? e X N enN oyTe 5 btz Tx m nTH pq
N ey|M ZA oy T e y n p o N o iA n t o j |t n se ztOM czpa Y exN |
M A e B | e io c aycu n e y N A Z if N e y M Z A o y A ytu N T e |t n o b b i o
o y o 6 n q ' | A y a ) ntuT M A T o y N o c q N T e y n p o |n o ia N TeTN Zuxyq
A lf 5 NHTN N T 6 3 0 y C I A N N K A M 10n e y N A Z B e q A yto
n im ' | z u )c ujHpe n t c n o y o e i N N T e | T N T o y N o c M n e T e | n to e i
I might reveal | to you Him Who Is that 11 might reveal to you | Him
from | the Beginning, because of the Who Is from the Beginning, 15
arrogance 20 of Arch-Begetter and because of the arrogance | of Arch-
his angels, | since they say about Begetter | and his angels, since they
themselves that | they are gods. And | say about themselves that | they are
II came to remove them from their gods. And I
blindness | that I might tell everyone came to remove them | from their
25 about the God who is above the blindness | that I might teach |
universe. everyone about the God 5 who is
119 Therefore, tread upon their | graves, above the universe. | Therefore,
humiliate their malicious intent | and tread upon | their graves and |
break their yoke | and arouse my humiliate their malicious intent | and
own. I have given 5 you authority break their 10 yoke and | arouse
over all things | as Sons of Light, whoever | is mine. For I have given
S/C-HI:
5/C-BG:
NHC III 119,6-16 BG 126,12-127,8
x e e T e |t n a z i d m e z p A T e x N n e A 'l'f t a p n h |t n N T e a o y c iA
Teyso M ' za | [N ]e T N [o ]y e p H T e N fK .A I NIM ZO)C OJHpe N T
n a T N e NTAq|[xooy n c i ] n No ' Y 15o 'N ezo )M e x N
n [M A K A ]p iO C N C tD T H P 10 [A q p T e y ls o M zn N eTN oyPHTe |n aY
A T O y U JN Z N CA. N B O ] \ N A Y" T O T 6 A qxooy n ci n M A | K A p io c
| [ m m a q h t h c T H p o y A y q )]u )n e NCtDTHP A q P
ZN O y | [ N O S N T6A .H A A T O Y U )N [z ] N C A NBOA. M|MOOy
N A T ] i g [ A ] x e e p o q zm | [n e ffN A " A y o jc o n e z n z n |n o <s n p a o j e
x in ] n e z o o y ctm m a y | N A T a jA x e | e p o o y zm niffNA"
[ANeqMASHT]HC APX6C0AI x in 5 n e zo o y ctm m ay Ayp |
eTAq)e15[oeia) M n ey A ]fre\io N A pxeceA i n si N e q M A |h t h c
m i t n o y I [t c n e n N A N A ]<t>eA pTO N e T A o je o e io j | M n e y A rre M O N
you | authority over all | things as

| that you might tread upon their Sons of L ig h t15 to tread upon their |
power with | [your] feet. These are power with your feet. | These are
the things [the] blessed | Savior the things the blessed | Savior said,
[said,] 10 [and he disappeared] from and he
them. Then | [all the disciples] were disappeared from them. | And they
in | [great, ineffable joy] in | [the were in | great, ineffable joy | in the
spirit from] that day on. | [And his spirit from 5 that day on. And his |
disciples] began to preach 15 [the] disciples began | to preach | the
Gospel of God, | [the] eternal, Gospel of
imperishable [Spirit].
SJC-m:
119,7 Corr.: y for erased q.
119.10 T-S restores only e e o ] \ .
119.11 T-S restores only qj],
119.16 The neuter form of the adjective makes restoration of n e ic o T NA]<|>eApTON,
imperishable [Father], following BG (so restored by K), unlikely if not impossi
ble (so also T-S). T-S suggests rre ico T n n a ^ g a p t o n , Father of the] imper
ishable things, or n t m n t p p o n a J ^ o a p t o n , [of the] imperishable [King
dom]. Support for my reconstruction: 117,16.21; 118,12.
SJC-BG:
126.16 ms has a paragraphus in the left margin just below the line of the text.
127,1-12 ms has extensive decorations in both margins and surrounding the title.
NHC III 119,16-18 BG 127,8-12
n o )a | [ e ] N e z z a m h n : M iiN No ' Y | T e n e ic u T n o ja c n c j
t c o 4 > ia n i h c N 10N A TTA .K .O U)2i N ie N e Z I
t c o ^ i a . n |i h c " n e x p c "
| Amen. | THE SOPHIA God, | the eternal Father, 10

OF JESUS imperishable forever. | THE
SOPHIA OF I JESUS CHRIST
S/C-m:
119,17-18 MS has diple and line decorations at the end of the text proper and sur
rounding the title.
EN D N O TES
1. Ill 91,1-2 || BG 78,1-2 Divination (derived from (xavxeia): less

likely, Place of Harvest Time (T-S) or Place of Ripeness (Pu & K). See
Tills note, T-S: 327. The word division ma n, assumed by T-S, Pu & K, is
not supported by the scribe of either III or BG. The former omits the
expected stroke over the n, and in BG the scribe treats n as though it were a
part of M i by using the conventional stroke over a at the end of the line in
place of the n . The spelling m a n t h may reflect an Ionic form (jiavTniil)
and may have been an attempt to archaize. MavTEia is related to joy, as
here, in Plat. Tim. 71d.
2. Ill 70,21 o Y n e T H T T e c y c u n e , fate || III 93,3 (do.) || BG 81,10-11
oyTeeoN T, fate: The par. in V, of which Till was unaware (T-S: 327),
makes clear that fate is the correct translation, both here and where
T e e o N T recurs (III 71,4 [ t b t -z a n t ]; III 93,15-16 [do.]; BG 82,7). Crum
says that z o n t is a qualitative of unknown meaning, citing only the instance
in BG (691b). Till considers that it might be an unattested qualitative of
z id n , bid, command (Crum: 688a) but expresses his uncertainty (T-S:
327). It is more likely a qualitative of z c o n t , approach, where the form
z a n t (found in HI) is attested (Crum: 691b). Its basic meaning then would
be that which comes, or the like (so also K & Tr). The use of the fem.
article probably reflects r| ei|Aapêvt|.
3. Ill 73,14 || III 96,10 || BG 87,4-5 T-S suggests, probably correctly,
that behind the differences among these texts lies confusion over yevoi; and
yevojievoi;.
4. V 6,15-17 || III 77,11-13 || III 101,20-22 || BG 95,6-8 The lack of
the term o n o m a c i a ( p a n ), designation (name), in either version of
SJC, while it is present in both versions of Eug, shows that the haplography
probably occurred in the text of SJC rather than Eug. And further, since the
Greek text used by both SJC translators was, in all probability, uniform (see
Introduction, sec. X), and the Coptic texts are so different, we are probably
justified in thinking that the translators met the problem in the Greek
independently and attempted to deal with it each in his own way in their
translations. (It is possible that subsequent Coptic copyists were involved,
but that seems less likely in view of the fact that both texts deal with the
problem, suggesting that it could not easily be overlooked by a translator.) If
that was the case, then those attempts provide us with some evidence about
the two Coptic translators of SJC.
182 ENDNOTES
The translator of S/C -III seems to be more conservative (e.g., he

preserves the correct person and number of the, for him, lost subject), but he
makes a clumsy and basically meaningless connection with the preceding
sentence. The translator of SJC-B G is more daring, conceiving of the idea
that the passage was a reference to the intiial appearance of the gnostic race,
which would mean that it was engendered by Immortal Man. Unfortunately,
in taking that position, he has ignored a preceding statement that the gnostic
race appeared prior to Immortal Man (III 99,13-19 || BG 91,17-92,9).
5. Ill 78,6-7 || III 102,23 || BG 96,16 N e e c t c <jo n m o c (and the
like), just as he is it (thought): Appears to be a gloss (n.b. its absence in
V). The point seems to be that First Man not only has thought but is thought.
That is perhaps based on an identification of his feminine aspect, the Great
Sophia (see III 104,10-11 & parr.), with hypostasized thought. T-S renders
just as he is (connection with preceding and following is not clear); K,
just as he is a reflection; Tr, thought as he is (?).
6. V 7,19-22 || III 78,19-21 In V there are whole numbers, while III
has fractions. The former version is probably to be preferred since it is the
more difficult reading, i.e., it is easier to imagine larger fractions (e.g., tenths)
ruling over smaller fractions (e.g., hundredths), then smaller whole numbers
(e.g., tens) ruling over larger ones (e.g., hundreds). N.B. that the last two
numbers were left unchanged in III.
7. V 12,2 11 III 83,20 will: less likely, interval (Crum: 501b).
8. Ill 86,16-20 A Y O N O M A z e . . . n o y a t o , the . . . multitude || BG
110,9-16: they called the church in the third aeon the multitude from the
multitude, which the multitude caused to appear from the one (K [III];
similarly Tr); the church of the three aeons was spoken of, because, from
the crowd that came to appearance in (or from) one, a multitude was
revealed (T-S [BG]); the church of the three aeons was furnished with
names . . . (Schenke in T-S: 340 [BG]). The problem of III 86,16-17 and
BG 110,9-12, reflected in the variety of translations above (n.b. the similarity
of the texts), may go back to the Greek where the distinction between the
designation and the designee may not have been clear grammatically. That
the designation is Assembly or Church, however, is evident from III
86,22 and BG 111,3. And that one of the aeons is the designee is clear from
III 86,1416 and BG 110,8-9. As to the omission of the ordinal prefixes, see
110,4 for additional examples of the error in BG. In III, lines 11-13 make
clear the error (for omission of numeral prefixes, see 78,21-22). Both texts
appear to have been adjusted in minor ways in hopes of making sense out of
what was received, but the result was to make a difficult situation worse. The
text of V, lacking those adjustments, seems closer to the original. Since
the original can be discerned, I have chosen to edit Eug-III and SJC-BG
accordingly.
ENDNOTES 183
For nioya. n o y i t o , the multitudinous one (III 86,19-20), T-S has one
as a multitude; K & Tr omit a translation of n o y a t o , although Tr leaves
the text unemended.
9. Ill 87,10 MT, concurrence || III 111,13 xcoNq, concurrence ||
BG 112,4 c y a o k ia , consent: good will (Tr [g-III]); good pleasure
(K [ug-III]); untranslated (T-S [BG]). Basic for understanding c y a o ic ia
here, as well as the Coptic words used to translate it, is the observation of
LSJ that euSoKia can be equivalent to et>86KT|cn.<; when used of God. Thus it
can mean consent, concurrence. See also TDNT (2), 1964: 750 (Schrenk).
10. Ill 88,10 || III 112,10 || BG 113,18-114,1 The fem. pronouns in III
88,10 refer to Sophia (contra T-S). It appears that the reference to Sophia
was dropped at an early stage from SJC and that the BG version (with masc.
pronouns) reflects a more careful adjustment to that fact than does 5/C -III.
11. Ill 88,11 || III 112,11 || BG 114,2 Should (Eug-III &
S/C-ffl) or ATTaiico (BG) be translated with the preceding m n tn o s ,
majesty, as an adjective (as though a genitive) (so also K & Tr [wg-III])
or in an identity relationship (as imperishability) (so T-S [wg-III &
S/C-HI])? Or should they be taken with the following c y n t o y , had, as
the plural subject, as I have done (so also T-S [BG])? My decision is based
on the clear-cut nature of the case in BG and the difficulty of relating
A<t>e&pci& (in Eug-III & 5/C -III) satisfactorily to m n tn o s .
12. V 16,4 || in 88,20 sent: or sown (xo, Crum: 752a).
13. Ill 114,7 || BG 117,10 that you might shine (so also T-S): until
you shine (K).
14. Ill 118,18-19 || BG 125,14-15 Him Who Is from the Beginning:
that which is from the beginning (T-S, D & K).
15. Ill 119,13-14 || BG 127,4-5 from that day on. And his: From
that day (on) his (T-S, Pu, D & K).
W ORD IN D IC E S
Words in the Coptic Words index are ordered according to Crums Coptic
Dictionary. Nouns are indicated simply by gender designation (m. or f.),
where that is clear. Where it is not, nn. is used. Verbs are indicated by v.
f designates the qualitative form of the Coptic verb. Definitions are omitted
as unnecessary in view of the translations to which the entries refer. Where a
word or phrase is split between two lines in the text, only the first line is indi
cated. In the Greek Loan Words index the Coptic form of Greek loan words
is not shown when the Coptic and Greek are identical in spelling; in this con
nection, a Greek rough breathing mark and a Coptic z are considered identi
cal.
Omissions from the Coptic Words index because of frequency of
occurrence and minor grammatical and lexical interest include the conjuc-
tions Ayto and m n , demonstratives (except b t m m a y ), possessive pronouns,
the preposition z n (except in combinations), and n s i . Omissions from the
Greek Loan Word index include the conjunctions aAAd, yap, 8e and jiev.
From the Proper Nouns index are omitted all proper nouns constructed from
verbs or attributives (except e y r N c u c T o c and x p i c t o c ). Those are fully
indexed in the other word indices.
C O PTIC W ORDS
AM oy: See e i .
am a zt v. V 3,8.9; 13,15. Ill 73,6.8. BG 86,15; 108,11. m a z t III 85,15;
96,1.[2]. BG 86,13.
a n - (collective numeral indicator) V 7,20.21.22twice.23.27.[28].[29]; 9,[12];
10,[15]; 11,<20>.[23].[29]; 12,[1].

a n negative particle V 1,12.16; 3,10.[18].23; 4,7.9.15.25.[28]. Ill 70,16.22;
72,7; 74,2.18; 75,12; 92,22; 93,4; 95,2; 98,18.23; 99,13. BG 78,13;
81,5.12; 85,1; 89,19; 91,16; 97,11. n III 91,11. BG 90,16.
a n o k pron. Ill 93,8.10; 94,14; 96,18; 97,23; 106,5; 107,11; 118,[15].22. BG
81,17.19; 83,19; 87,13; 89,7; 102,[1]; 104,7; 105,2; 121,13; 125,10.19.
a p h x # nn. V 8,17. Ill 73,14; 95,7; 96,11; 97,12; 103,21; 106,7. BG 87,<5>;
98,7. a t a p h * * III 72,14. BG 81,18; 87,7. a t n a p h x * V 5,25; 13,[17],
m n a p h x * BG 88,12.
a t o m. V 5,[6]. 11186,18.19. BG 91,18; 99,19; 109,18; 110,15.
ao ) interrog. pron. BG 98,13. a u j m m in V 1,8. Ill 92,12. n a u j n z III
98,11. oyAuj n z BG 80,11. eqj n z III 70,7.
a.o)ai m. V 14,13. AigeT V 9,13.
a x n prep. V 15,[23]. Ill 88,10; 112,9; 114,17. BG 113,18.
186 WORD IN D IC ES
b u )k v. BG 117,16. b o j k o j a - BG 123,4. bojic c b o a z n III 76,12. b o jk c b o a

- V 3,[31]. book e z p A 'f e - BG 122,14. b u jk . e z p A T u j a - III 108,3;
z it n
117,4. BG 105,11.
baa V 9,[24]. Ill 105,13. BG 100,14; 108,10.
b (o a v. V 17,14. BG 104,10. b u j a c b o a BG 121,15. p e q B to A nn. BG 94,16.
b o a m.: c b o a n - BG 98,12. c b o a x e BG 100,15; 110,9.16. b o a and
g b o a are otherwise listed with the verb or preposition in conjunction

with which they occur.
B A A e nn.: m n t b a a c III 107,10; 118,23. BG 104,5; 126,2.
bot m. V 12,10. EI 84,3.

e N e z m.: o j a c n c z III 85,16. BG 108,14. c n c z adj.: n o j a c n c z V 8,23;
13,17; 16,[3]. Ill 119,[16]. BG 127,9. o j a a n h z c III 71,19; 95,11. q ji
6 N z V 2,14.15. Ill 94,15.16. BG 84,2.3; 85,16. o j a n i - c n c z BG
127,10. CNez adv. V 5,17; 8,24. Ill 76,8; 81,19; 100,13; 106,1. BG
93,9; 101,16.
epHY nn.: NeyePHoy V 1,[15]; 9,18. Ill 81,8; 83,12; 86,4. BG 87,2; 109,14.
e c H T m.: M ir e c H T III 77,8. See further e'l .
e T B e - prep. V 3,[25]; 14,[12]. ffl 91,3.6; 92,4; 97,3; 107,9; 108,11; 118,19.
BG 78,3.7; 80,1; 88,2; 104,4; 106,3; 125,15. e T B e h a i V 1,15; 5,12;
6,[32], ffl 70,15; 78,[1]; 86,20; 92,21; 102,17; 103,19. BG 81,4; 96,8;
111,[2].6; 122,5. e T B e n e e i - III 86,24. e T B e o y HI 92,1; 96,16 twice.
BG 79,15.16; 87,9.11. t b h ( h ) t # V 2 ,6 .11171,11; 105,6.
e o o Y m. V 5,[2].10.15; 8,[19]; 14,[2]; 16,[1].9; 17,[1]. Ill 75,16; 76,6;
81,17; 86,8; 88,19; 89,1.8.22; 97,10; 99,17; 100,6.11; 105,8.25; 107,23;
108,3; 113,5.12.25; 117,6. BG 88,10; 92,3.17; 93,6; 100,8; 101,14;
105,4.11; 109,18; 115,7.18; 117,1; 122,17.
e tg x e conj. 111113,1. BG 115,[1].
e i v. Ill 114,11. BG 117,15. e i e - V 2,[2], 111 73,17; 86,21; 90,18; 97,17;
111,1; 118,23. BG 88,19; 122,6; 126,1. e i c b o a z n V 9,[25]. Ill 93,8;

96,19; 105,[13]; 107,12.14; 108,14; 118,[16]. BG 81,17; 83,15; 87,13;
100,15; 102,[2]; 104,8; 106,7; 125,11. e i c b o a z i t n - III 106,5. ei
enecHT III 106,12. BG 102,11. e i e z o y N III 71,8. e i e z o y N
m t t b o a n - III 71,6. e'l e z p A Y e- BG 77,11; 119,7. a m h c i t n " imperat.
Ill 98,13. BG 90,4. For q u a lita tiv e ,s e e nhy*.

e i A A f. Ill 75,5; 99,3. BG 91,6.
e iM e v.: e iM e x e III 70,3; 92,7; 100,21; 104,6; 114,14. BG 93,17; 98,15;

118,2. m m c x e V 1,[4]. e iM e n a * V 2,[12]. e iM e e - ( e p o * ) V 4,16.
BG 80,5. m m c e p o * V 4,25. e iM e e T B e - III 105,7.
e iN e v. (carry): e iN e n a * III 117,19. BG 123,16; 124,4. e iN e Ne* III
117,24.
e iN e v. (resemble) V 4,18; 9,20. Ill 77,5; 81,10; 99,4. BG 91,7. m e BG
85,13. IN C C B O A V 7,12. e iN e m. V 5,[31]. in 72,16; 75,6; 76,20;
89,14; 91,12; 95,9; 99,5; 100,4; 101,5; 113,18. BG 78,15.16; 84,18; 85,3;
91,8; 92,15; 94,5; 116,9. a t + e iN e e p o * V 2,[16].[17].[26].
C O PTIC W ORDS 187
eipe v. V 11,22. Ill 91,7. BG 78,8; 109,11. p- V 12,[30]. Ill 83,14;

84,20.24; 114,12. BG 117,17. See further k a z , ujoopn, z o y o . a a # III
71,3; 93,14. BG 82,6. e * V 2,6.<16>.23; 4,26; 5,[26]; 6,[2]; 10,[7].16;
11,[26].[28]; 12,18; 16,10. o * III 70,5; 78,7.17; 92,10; 102,23. BG
96,16.
euopz v. Ill 72,12; 95,6. eitopz n c a - BG 85,6.
eic interj.: e ic zhhtc III 118,3. BG 124,9.
e iiu T m. V 7,14; 9,[9].[22]. Ill 74,22.23; 76,17; 78,13; 84,14; 97,15;
98,23.<24>; 99,6; 101,1.22; 103,6; 104,23; 105,19; 108,4; 117,[9]. BG
88,16; 90,16.17; 91,10; 95,8; 97,6; 99,18; 100,4; 101,6; 105,12; 123,4;
127,9. iu)t V 4,10.11; 6,[19]; 12,[2], III 77,13; 117,10. BG 123,2.
A r e N N H T o c N ( e ) ia ) T III 75,22; 96,13; 98,20; 99,9; 100,1; 117,[11].
BG 90,12; 91,13. iT x n o (q ) n c k o t V 10,<18-19>. BG 87,7; 123,6.
A Y T o r e N e T t o p N e ic o T BG 107,4. A Y T o r e N H c N e icu T III 101,19.
BG 95,3. ayTO<t>YHc n a y t o k t i c t o c n c i c u t BG 94,1. e itO T c b o a
MMoq V 6,[20]. ( e ) i a ) T M nTH pq V 3,[4]. Ill 73,2; 95,18; 114,19;
117,[8]. BG 86,5; 123,1. e itO T n i p e q x n o nnh th p o y V 12,[23], ic o t
Np e q x n o q oyAAq V 4,[20]. h o t n e T A q x . n o M M oq oyAAq V
5,[25]. npto(or o ) T o r e N e T ( o p N ( e ) ia ) T III 81,10; 105,11. BG 100,12.
a)(o)pfr N e ico T or n c i o t c V 4,10.[13]; 6,11. BG 91,3.9.
e iT N m.: M n iT N n tc - B G 119,8.
ne- adj. V 2,4; 5,12.21; 7,3.16; 8,[27]; 11,[5].15. Ill 71,9; 76,13; 97,8;
107,24. BG 88,7; 105,6. K e o Y A V 2,[20]. Ill 72,2.6; 94,24. BG
84,12.17. K .o o Y e pi. V 1,[20].21. Ill 70,19.20; 93,[1].2. BG 81,8.10.
See further c e e n e .
ku ) v.: kh* e zp a .T V 3,[30]; 5,5. Ill 74,14; 75,19; 83,4. See further p o .
kim v. BG 88,9. kim m. Ill 92,16. BG 80,15. atkim III 97,9.
kpu)m m. Ill 108,13.
Kiz m. Ill 92,9. BG 80,7; 81,15. See further x n o .
Kcoz m. BG 106,6.
\A*Y indef. pron. V 1,[23]; 3,[5].10. Ill 73,3; 74,8; 95,22. BG 86,10. ( m ) m n
\ \ \ \ III 71,24; 73,7; 94,2.21; 96,2. BG 83,1; 84,9; 86,15.
ma m. V 14,15. Ill 75,20; 89,10; 113,14; 118,2. BG 92,10; 116,2.7; 125,<8>.

niMA. BG 122,6. n M A c t m m a y V 16,[22]. Ill 89,13. BG 124,8.
m n (i ) m a BG 117,17; 120,17; 124,15. M n e e iM A III 93,10; 114,12;
118,6. m a N tg co n e III 88,18. See further t h , z o j .
m a - (imperat. of f): See t a m o , t c b o , t o y n o c , b b i o .
Me f. V 1,12.[24]; 6,10. BG 80,17; 83,2. mhc III 70,11.12; 71,1; 74,12; 77,7
twice; 92,18; 93,7.12; 94,2.4; 117,18. BG 81,17; 82,3; 83,4; 123,15.
mntmc V 4,9; 6,12. See further N o y T e .
moY v. V 3,[24]. Ill 71,13; 74,7; 91,16; 93,24; 98,9; 106,14. BG 79,3; 82,18;
89,20; 102,14. m o o y t* V 2,8. N e T M o o y T t BG 77,10. moy ni.:
atm o y V 2,[6].7; 6,[4]; 7,[10].24; 13,[18]; 15,18. Ill 94,15. BG 82,17;
188 W ORD IN D ICES
84,1; 97,[2]; 102,12; 107,16; 108,18; 113,11; 118,9; 120,11; 123,12. See
further poiMe.
MA.AZ m.: ATP MA.AZ V 6,[12].
(m)mn- (negation of existence) V 2,13; 4,[26]. Ill 70,24; 93,6.15; 95,7;
106,7; 113,9. BG 81,15; 85,13; 115,11.12. m m n - m m a y III 89,3; 113,8.
m nt(6 > V 4,[23]; 16,[11]. Ill 71,22; 72,23; 94,19; 97,12. BG
84,7.10.14. ( m ) m n t a * ffl 71,20; 72,1.3.16; 94,17.22; 95,9.16. BG 92,15.
m n t a # mm a y BG 84,3; 86,2. See further a p h x *, a a a y , p p o , ton,
Z A eiB ec, c o m .
MMIN MMO* 111 70,19; 71,2; 72,7.13.21; 75,3; 93,1.13; 95,1; 97,5; 99,2.47;
104,9; 114,16. BG 81,8; 82,4; 84,18; 88,4; 91,4.7; 96,14.
MiNe f.: See ao ).
m o y n v.; MHNf V 5,14; 16,[31]. BG 93,4. m h n 1, c b o a . 111 72,15.18; 76,4;
81,16; 89,21; 95,8; 100,9; 105,17; 113,24. BG 85,12; 101,3.13; 116,18.
M O YN K V .; M ONK* V 8,[10].[12].
MTTU)A V .: MTTUJA N - ffl 93,18. BG 82,10.
m o y p v.: Mops' III 107,6. BG 103,18. Mppe f. BG 103,17.
M ic e m. ojo pff MMice V 8,[33]; 9,7.21; 13,11. t y o p n e MMice V 9,[4].
ojHpe Ncyopn MMice V 9,[2]. A T M ice V 3,2; 5,8. a t m i c i V 2,16.
m h t cardinal number: p a m h t III 78,19 twice, m n t - in the following cardinal
number: m n t c n o o y c V 12,[9].[11].[24].[25]. 111 83,10; 84,2.4.15.16;
90,16. BG 77,12; 107,5.7. a n m n t c n o o y c V 11,<20>.
MA T C V .: M A T N- BG 105,10. M A T e m. t M A T e n - III 101,10. t MAT6
z n - III 108,2. f m c t c m n - V 1,[15]; 10,[5].13. f M e T e n - BG 94,13. f
m c t c m. V 8,[31]; 11,[6].[22]. m c t c m n - 111 87,10.
m a t c : m m a t c adv. 111 89,5. BG 115,13.
MHTe f. V 14,[4]. 111 86,10. z n t m h t c V 2,[7]. Ill 71,12; 93,23. BG 82,17.
MOYTe v.: m o y t c epo# BG 110,1. m o y t c e- (epo#) xe V 3,[3];
9,[6]. 14; 10,[9]; 11,16; 13,[11].14. 111 75,17; 85,14; 86,22; 91.1.19;
95,17; 99,17.24; 102,1.18; 104,7.14.19.21; 105,5.21; 106,20.23; 111,1;
112,8. BG 78,1; 79,7; 86,4; 92,5.12; 98,9; 99,13.15; 100,5.13; 101,8;
103,3.8; 108,3.5.9; 110,5; 111,13.15; 112,8; 113,15; 119,15. m o y t c
xe BG 111,[2].
m t o m.: m t o b o a BG 122,1. m t o c b o a prep. BG 91,11. peqMTO m - V
4,[21],
m t o n v.: m t o n m m o * z n - ( n z h t *) 111 76,3; 100,8; 117,[11]. BG 93,2;
123,5.<9>. m t o n m. V 5,13; 14,[9]; 17,[2], BG 117,[2]; 125,<8>.
May nn.: c t m m a Y V 2,13; 4,[2]; 6,[3]; 8,[33]; 9,17. 111 71,18; 73,8; 75,1;
76,22; 77,24; 81,4.7; 94,14; 96,3; 98,25; 99,22.23; 101,7.10; 102,12;
107,[15].18.25; 117,1; 119,13. BG 84,1; 86,16; 91,2; 92,10; 94,7.8.12;
96,2; 104,11.15; 111,4; 116,7; 119,13.17; 120,12; 121,5.8; 122,8; 127,5.
See further m a , ( m ) m n -, o y o n .
m a a y f. Ill 118,5. BG 120,15; 124,14. m a a y MiTTHpq V 9,[5]. Ill 104,18;
112,19; 114,15. m a y MiTTHpq BG 99,12; 114,11. m a y NNinTHpq" BG
118,[3].
C O PTIC W ORDS 189
Meeye v. V 4,[28]; 5,[30]. BG 79,15; 80,9. M e y e V 1,9. M e o y e III 92,2.

M eeye e - BG 120,6. M e e y e m . V 3,[11]; 7,7.26; 8,[3].4; 11,10.11.17.
BG 86,19; 96,18; 112,16; 120,7. M e o y e III 111,20. A T M e o y e e p o # III
114,20.
MHHtge m. V 3,[21], III 74,5; 75,13.19; 81,3; 86,7.18.20; 98,7; 99,14.22;
104,24; 118,[7].BG 89,18; 110,13.17; 124,16.
M oyajT v. V4,[2]. 11174,14.
M o yz v.; M ez* V 9,[26]. Ill 81,14; 100,6. BG 101,9. m h z * III 105,22. BG
92,17. M ez* c b o a V 5,10.28; 8,19. m h z + c b o a III 76,[1]. m a z - and
M e z- in ordinal numbers; see c n a y , e o o y , c A t y q , f o y , u j m o y n ,
UJOM NT, q T O O y .
m zaa y m.: m z a o y III 119,2. BG 104,12; 126,7.
m aaxc m. Ill 97,21; 98,21; 105,10. BG 89,5; 90,13; 100,11; 107,19.
na m. BG 118,6. iT N ie BG 122,1.
n a v.; n a e - III 114,11.
N Hyf e - BG 103,10. N H o y f e B o \ V 4,11. N H o y * e z o y N e - III 106,24.
n k a m.: n k a NIM UI 72,10; 73,21; 82,[3]; 95,4; 98,1; 103,10; 106,8.21;
119,5. BG 85,5; 87,15; 89,9; 120,10. F k a n im BG 97,12; 103,5; 126,13.
NKOTK V. BG 120,2.
n im interrog. pron. V 1,7. HI 70,7; 92,12; 104,3. BG 80,10.
n im indef. pron. V 2,12; 5,10.19; 7,32; 8,20.25; 10,[1]; 16,[19].[20]. Ill 70,3;
71,17; 72,12; 78,9; 86,6; 87,8; 88,21; 89,10; 91,15; 94,8; 95,6; 97,15;
100,6.15; 103,1; 111,11; 113,15. BG 85,7; 88,17; 92,18; 96,19; 109,16;
116,4.11; 117,5; 118,14. See further n k a , n a y , o y A , o y o N , o y o e i u ) ,
ZU)B.
n an o y- v. Ill 85,7. n an o y * V 13,[5]. BG 107,10.
N oyNe f. Ill 108,22. BG 106,18.
NoY T e m. V 1,7; 3,26; 6,[26]; 9,[3]; 11,17; 13,[17]; 15.[2] twice. [3]
twice.[4].[5]. III 70,6; 74,11; 77,20; 87,12 twice.14 twice.15; 92,11;
100,2; 102,8.15; 111,15.16 twice. 17.<18>; 118,22; 119,[15]. BG 80,10;
92,13; 95,17; 96,6; 112,8.9 twice.12 twice; 125,19; 127,8. N f BG
112,13. A T x n o q n n o y t c BG 88,15. A y T o r e N H c N N o y T e III 97,14.
N o y T e e T Z i x r T TTTHpq III 118,25. BG 126,4. N o y T e n n n o y t c III
78,[2]; 102,18. BG 96,10. N o y i e N T e n n o y t c V 6,[32]. N o y T e
N T A A H e e iA III 71,10. N o y T e n t c t m b V 2,[3]. N o y T e adj. Ill
85,17; 87,14; 99,6. BG 91,10; 108,15. m n t n o y t c V 2,14; 6,16.[29].
Ill 77,12.24; 101,21; 102,16. BG 95,7; 96,7. See further u )H p e.
n t o c pron. V 6,11. Ill 98,15. BG 90,7.
n t c d t n pron. Ill 93,16; 108,5; 119,1. BG 82,9; 105,14; 126,5.
n t o o y pron. Ill 73,12; 76,3; 96,7; 100,8. BG 87,1; 93,2.

N Toq pron. V 2,[22]; 4,18; 9,[7]. Ill 71,18; 75,23; 85,21; 94,10; 99,5; 100,4;
104,20. BG 83,13; 91,8; 92,16; 109,4.
N Toq conj. V 3,9.
190 WORD IN D IC ES
nay v- HI 72,11; 95,6. BG 85,2. n a y e p o # III 72,8; 75,3; 95,2; 99,2. BG

85,7; 91,4. a t n a y e p o # BG 123,17; 125,5.
N A Y m .: NN A Y NIM III 76,1.
N A O )e - v.: n a o j c u # III 97,18; 107,17; 117,4. BG 89,2; 104,14; 110,13;
122,13.
N iq e v.: N iq e c z o y n e p o # BG 120,13. N iq e m . Ill 117,1. BG 119,19;
120,4.12; 121,5; 122,9.
n o y z b v.: n o y z b m n - BG 122,7. n o z b # III 107,<21>. n a z b # BG 105,1.
N O Y 2 B m . Ill 101,18. N A ZB III 119,3. N A 2 B C BG 126,10.
N A 2 T 6 V.: N A 2 T 6 C - V 3,[29].
N O S adj. V 2,23; 5,[31]; 8,[32]; 10,7. Ill 76,21; 77,16.17; 81,24; 88,13;
91,13; 94,14; 97,2; 101,5.16; 102,3.6; 104,10; 106,18; 107,13.22;
108,22; 112,13; 118,[11]; 119,[12]. BG 78,16; 83,19; 87,20; 94,6;
95,1.12.14; 99,[2]; 103,[1]; 104,10; 105,3; 106,17; 114,[4]; 120,5;
121,12; 125,4; 127,3. n a s V 6,22.25; 9,10. m n t n o c V 3,6; 9,10. Ill
73,5; 77,17; 86,5; 88,11.17; 95,23; 102,5; 112,11.17. BG 86,11; 95,13;
109,16; 113,18; 114,9. m n t n a c V 6,23; 15,[22].
on adv. V 7,23; 12,21. Ill 77,5; 117,2. BG 93,9.

o e iq )nn.: t a u ) o e iu ) III 119,[14]. BG 127,7.
n e f. V 14,[17]; 16,16. Ill 84,20; 85,5; 86,24; 89,7; 113,11.18. BG 111,5.

nHYe pi. BG 106,13; 115,16; 116,9. n H o y e pi. V 12,[29]; 13,[4];
16,[23]. m 108,18. N T n e V 4,6. BG 104,9. N T n e n - V 13,[19]. BG
109,1.12; 119,3.
n e t f.: f n i e p N - V 9,18.
neipe v.: nppe c b o a . V 5,[21]. nppe c b o a z n - V 17,12. nppe m.: nppe
c b o a . m m o# V 5,[8]. nipe c b o a . m m o# V 5,[20].
n e x e - v.: n e x e - x e III 92,3; 98,12; 100,19; 106,14; 108,19; 112,24.
n e x A # BG 79,18; 83,4. n e x A # x e III 91,21; 94,4; 95,19; 96,17; 98,1;
105,8; 106,10. BG 79,9; 80,4; 86,6.8; 87,8.12; 89,9; 90,3; 93,15; 98,13;
100,9; 102,7.14; 106,13; 107,16; 114,18. n e x A # n a # x e III 92,1.6;
93,24; 95,21; 96,14; 98,9; 100,16; 103,22; 104,4; 105,3; 108,16; 112,20;
114,8.12. BG 79,14; 82,19; 89,20; 93,12; 98,7; 100,3; 106,10; 107,13;
114,13; 117,12.17.
po m.: KApcuq m. BG 113,16; 123,13; 124,1. p a - in fractions: III 78,19

twice.20 twice.21 twice.<22>.
pcuMe m . V 1,[4]; 2,8; 3,22.[24]; 6,[2].20. Ill 70,3; 71,13; 72,4.5; 74,5;
76,23; 77,23; 92,8; 93,8.24; 98,7; 99,22; 100,18; 101,7.9; 104,1; 105,5.
BG 81,14; 82,18; 84,15.16; 89,18; 92,9; 93,15; 98,11; 100,6; 108,9.
a s a n a t o c NpujM e III 77,10; 83,20; 85,10.21; 88,6; 89,8; 101,20;
112,7; 113,13. a t m o y n p o jm c BG 94,12; 95,5; 113,14; 121,2. pu)Me
n ( n ) a t m o Y V 6,15; 7,[25]; 8,18.[28]; 12,[4]; 13,[8].[21]; 15,[20];
16,17. BG 109,5; 115,18; 121,14. p i d m b n- or n a y t o t t a t u j p HI 77,14;
C O PTIC W ORDS 191
102,1. BG 95,9. <ypn n p i o m c BG 96,12. z o y e i T n p i o m c III 78,[3].23;

102,20; 104,6. BG 94,9; 98,16. z o y e i T NptoM e n n a q a n a t o c BG
94.9. p m m a o m.: m n t r m m a o III 97,2; 118,[10].[14]. BG 88,1; 125,3.8.
See further q jH p e , z i d t b .
POMne f. V 12,8.14. Ill 84,[1].<5>.
pan m. V 4,15; 6,16; 10,[8].11.17.[25]; 11,[5].15; 14,[10].[27]. Ill 72,1.2;
76,24; 77,3; 82,[1].3.12.18; 85,5; 86,16; 87,8; 94,22.23; 102,4;
104,14.16; 106,19.22; 111,11; 112,3. BG 84,11.12; 95,12; 99,6.10;
110,9; 112,2; 113,9; 124,11. p e N III 118,4. f p a n e - ( e P o # ) V
8,13.[16]; 14,[3].[19]; 15,[20]. UI 87,2; 88,1; 103,19; 111,4. BG 104,7;
111.9. f p a n e - ( e p o # ) x e V 4,9.[19]; 5,[3].7; 6,[5].[9].[19].[32];
8,[29]; 9,[1].[22]; 10,12; 13,[3]; 14,[8].[23]; 15,[21]. Ill 107,11; 111,15.
t p a n n a # BG 98,4. f p a n x e V 14,11.15. f p n # x e III 78,1; 85,4;
86,13; 87,4; 88,8; 111,7.8. f p i n # III 86,9. f p i n # x e III 87,11. x i p a n
BG 120,8. A T f p a n e p o # III 72,3. A T f p a n n a # BG 84,13.
pne m. HI 88,16; 112,16. BG 114,8.
ppo m.: p p o N N e p t o o y BG 96,11. p p o N p p to o y III 78,2; 102,19. p p o N T e
N ip p tu o y V 7,[2]. m n t p p o V 6,[17].[30]; 8,21; 9,[26]. Ill 77,13;
78,[1]; 81,12; 85,23; 101,22; 102,17; 105,19; 112,13. BG 95,7; 96,8;
109,7; 114,5. m n t c p o BG 100,16; 101,6. m n t p p u jo y pi. V 5,[5];
13,[23]. Ill 88,14. m n t p p a T pi. Ill 75,19. p p p o e z p A T e x N - ( e x t o # )
V 6,[25]. i n 77,18. BG 95,15. p p p o e x N - III 102,6. a t p p p o e z p A T
e x u )# V 5,[4].[6]; 13,16. m n m n t p p o z ix u > # III 75,18.20; 85,16;
99,19.23; 118,[15]. BG 92,6.11; 108,13; 125,8.
p o e ic v. BG 89,8. p H c f i n 97,23.
p o o y cg m. V 1,[11].
PAqje v.: p A q je z n - V 5,14. Ill 70,2; 76,5; 100,10; 105,17. BG 93,4. p e q je
z n - BG 101,3. p A ty e m. V 8,20; 9,[27]. Ill 76,2.5; 81,14.16; 89,19;
90,10; 91,2; 100,7.10; 105,22; 113,22; 117,6. BG 78,2; 93,1.4; 101,10;
116,15; 122,16; 127,3. p e q je V 5 ,l l.
ca m. i n 72,12; 95,6. BG 85,7. n c a ( n ) b o a . n - ( m m o #) V 2,[4]. Ill

119,[10], BG 121,17. m n n c a - (-ctu#) V 4,[29].[31]; 6,18; 8,6.27;
10,[2]. m 75,12; 90,14; 99,13. BG 77,9; 91,17. See further z p a T .
c a b c m. V 1,10. BG 80,12. C A B e e y e pi. Ill 70,8; 92,14. m n t c a b b V
15,[5]. HI 111,17.18; BG 86,19; 112,13. m n t c a b h III 93,15. c b o j f. V
3,12; 7,[8]; 8,[4] twice; 11,18; 15,6. C B o o y e pi. V 7,[27]; 11,11.12.
A T f CBU) m 90,7. A T f CBO) N A # V 17,[12].
ctDBe V. Ill 92,1. BG 79,14.
c o ) \ n v. m 107,15. BG 104,11.
cmh f. V 2,4.[4]. m 70,23; 71,7.9; 93,5. BG 81,13.
c m o y v.: c m o y e p o # x e BG 96,9.
c m o t m. V 1,14; 2,[22]; 4,[19].[22]; 7,23; 16,[19]. Ill 78,22; 89,<12>;
91,14. BG 79,1. x i c m o t m m o # III 113,14.

c o n m. Ill 77,6.
192 W ORD IN D ICES
co o n m. Ill 101,15; 107,[16]. BG 94,18; 121,16. c o n BG 104,12;

121,3.
c t o N f v.: c u j n t n a .# V 6,[26]. Ill 7 7 ,1 9 ; 102,8. BG 9 5 ,1 7 . c o n t # V
8,< 10> . Ill 103,13. BG 9 7 ,1 6 . c i u N f nn. V 2,[19]. Ill 72,2.5; 77,19;
9 4 ,2 3 ; 102,7. BG 84 ,< 1 2 > .1 7 ; 9 5 ,1 6 .
c n a y cardinal number III 117,2. BG 122,10. m b z c n a y V 10,19; 14,[6]. Ill
8 2 ,13 ; 8 5 ,1 1 ; 86 ,12 . BG 108,8; 110,<4>. m c z c n t b III 82,20.

m a z c n a y V 13,9. FFV 11,20. See further m h t , CAtyq.
c i d n z m . Ill 10 7,5 .14. BG 1 0 4 ,< 1 1>. c N o o y t p i. BG 121,16.
c o n m. z i o Y c o n III 9 1 ,2 .
c e e n e m.: K e c e e n e BG 97 ,8.
c o j p m v. V 3,[22], f f l 9 8 ,8 . BG 89 ,18 .
c c u t m v. Ill 97,22; 98,21.22; 105,10.11. BG 89,5; 90,14 twice; 100,11.12;

107,19; 108,1. c c u t m e - ( e p o # ) V 8,24; 16,[3]. Ill 97,21. BG 89,6.
c c u t 6 m e p o # V 5,17. c o t m c # III 76,8; 81,18; 100,13; 106,1. BG93.9;
101,16.
c c u t t t v.: c a t t t * e - V 2,[23]. Ill 72,11. c o m * e - III 95,5. BG 85,6.
c o o y cardinal number V 11,[26]. Ill 82,9. c o o y c o o y V 11,[26]. coe
c o e in 84,18. c o c o V 11,[28]. ^ III 83,<13>.<14>. M e z c o o y V
10,[23], III 82,17. M e z c o e III 83,[1]. m c z c o V 11,[3]. a n c o o Y V
10,[15]. 4 n c o V 11,[23].
c o o y n v. V 4,15. Ill 93,17. BG 82,10. c o o Y n n - ( m m o #) V 3,[23]; 6,[12].
m 93,10; 117,8.[12].15.22. BG 81,19; 89,19; 123,2.7.11; 124,1. co Yn-
III 74,6; 98,8.11; 108,4. c o y c u n - BG 90,2; 100,8; 105,13. c o y c d n * V
2,10; 5,18; 8,[25]; 17,[4], III 71,15; 94,6. BG 83,7.12. c o o y n m. Ill
74,20; 76,13; 90,10; 93,18; 117,23. BG 82,11; 123,3; 124,3. a>(o)pfl
n c o o y n III 96,12. BG 87,6. zoyeiT n c o o y n III 73,15. a t c o y u j n *
V 5,9. m n t a t c o o y n III 107,10. BG 104,6.
c o y c o y m. V 12,21. Ill 84,11.
C A q jq cardinal number: C A iy q e III 90,17. BG 77,13. c g q e c N o o yc III
83,14.15; 84,20 twice. M e z c A c y q e BG 109,1. ANtyqecNooyc V
11,[29]. o b V 12,27.
ccucuq v.: co o q * IH 93,14.
ccuoY? v. V 14,14. Ill 86,21; 91,2. ccooy? e to y N BG 111 ,[1].
c o o t e v.: c o o z e m m o # c b o a z n - BG 126,1. C A z e - c b o a n - III 108,9.
BG 106,1. c a z c u # n - III 118,23.
c z i m c f. and adj. V 14,[22],[24].[27]. Ill 87,4.5.7; 90,18; 104,17; 106,22;
111,6.8.10. BG 77,13; 107,13; 111,15.18; 118,16. z i o m b pi. V 11,[27].
m 82,19; 83,14. m n t c z i m c V 6,[7]; 9,[3]; 10,[11].[25]; 13,7. Ill 77,[3];
82,4; 85,9. BG 99,10; 103,6; 111,12. See further zo o y T .
c o 6 m.: m n t c o 6 III 71,4.
t A6 io m. Ill 117,[7].t a T o BG 122,18.

f v.: f - III 107,17; 117,3. BG 104,14; 122,12. f n - ( n a #) V 6,[24];
8,[11].14; 13,[24], ffl 77,17; 85,24; 93,19; 102,5; 119,4. BG 95,14;
C O PTIC W ORDS 193
109,8; 126,12. f m m o# n a # III 91,22. BG 79,11. f n m m a # III 77,7.8.

BG 118,17. f o y B e - III 74,9. f ezpA T e x to # V 6,14. t a a # n a # V
11,[5]. BG 82,11. t o * n a # III 93,17. BG 82,9. p eq f III 97,[1]. BG
87,19. See further e iN e , m a t e , n e i , p a n , c a b c , t o n t n , oyto, ton,
cgi.
t b a cardinal number V 6,[27]; 16,[7]. Ill 77,21; 81,[2]; 88,22; 102,10; 113,4.
BG 95,19; 115,6. a n t b a V 7,23.[29]; 9,[12]. t b a III 78,22.
TBBO V.: T O Y B H O Y 1, III 90,11. T B B H O Y T f V 17,15.
TAKO v. Ill 71,21; 73,22; 74,2; 94,18; 98,[2].5. BG 84,6; 89,11.14. t a k o
m. V 3,16. Ill 73,22.23; 98,2.4. BG 89,11.12. a t t a k o V 5,10; 8,20. Ill
81,18; 98,6; 105,25. BG 85,10; 89,3.6.15; 101,15; 114,2; 127,10.
m n t a t t a k o III 98,5. BG 88,11.16; 89,14.17; 92,18; 97,3.
t c a h a v.: T6A.HA. refl. V 8,22. t c a h a m. V 5,15; 8,23. Ill 76,7; 81,15;
89,20; 100,12; 105,24; 113,24; 119,[12].BG 93,7; 101,12; 116,16.
t a t a v.: T X f A e m. or f. Ill 107,1.18; BG 103,13; 104,15; 119,6.12.17.
t a m io v. HI 113,5; 114,21. BG 115,8; 116,8; 118,8. t a m i o n a # V
9,9.[11]; 12,[22]; 16,[5]. Ill 77,16; 81,[1]; 84,13; 102,3; 104,23; 112,12;
113.3. BG 95,11; 99,18; 107,3; 114,[3]; 115,4. t a m i o m. Ill 113,17.
t a m o v.: T A M e - BG 82,1. t a m o # V 4,[5]. m a t a m o imperat. Ill 94,3. BG
83.3. m a t a m o # xe in 106,10.
TMA(e)io v.: TMAeie- HI 107,24. tm a Tc - BG 105,6.
toon interrog. adv. Ill 114,11. BG 117,15. ctcon in 114,11. BG 117,16.
t a n o v. Ill 86,[2].
t n n o o y v.: t n n o o y e - III 107,2. t n n o o y # III 93,22; 101,13; 108,7;

118,17. BG 82,16; 105,17; 125,12. t n n o o y # z i t n - III 107,19; 108,6.
t n n o o y c b o a . 2 i t n - ( z i t o o t #) BG 103,11; 104,16; 105,15.
t o n t n v.: f t o n t n BG 80,15. f t a n t n UI 92,16. f t a n t n e - III 70,10.
t o n t n m. BG 80,16. t a n t n m 70,11; 92,17.
THP# adj. V 1,4; 3,[8].14.15 twice; 5,[6].13; 6,8; 7,17; 8,7.8.[18].22;
9,13.[26]; 10,19.[23]; 12,[29]; 13,[5].24; 14,14.[27].28; 15,17.18.22;
16,[4].[25]; 17,[5].[8].[11]. Ill 70,15; 73,9.12.14; 75,20; 76,3.10; 77,19;
81,3.20; 83,19; 84,18.23; 85,6; 87,8; 88,[2].3.5.14; 89,15; 90,2.4.9;
91,23; 92,8.21; 96,4.8.10; 99,15.23; 100,8; 103,12.15; 105,20; 106,25;
107,8; 111,11; 112,3.6.11.17; 113,20; 114,3.5 twice; 118,5.13; 119,[11].
BG 79,13; 80,5; 81,3; 86,17; 87,1.5; 92,2; 93,2.11; 97,14.16.18; 100,16;
101,10; 102,6; 104,3; 107,9; 109,10; 112,[1].2; 113,9; 114,1.10; 117,7;
120,8; 122,4; 124,12.18; 125,6. nTHpq V 3,8; 5,24. Ill 72,11; 73,7
twice. 13; 76,15; 91,4; 92,5; 95,5; 96,2.9; 100,22; 114,15. BG 78,4; 80,2;
85,6; 86,14 twice; 87,3; 93,19. n i t h p o y V 10,[10]. See further b i u j t ,
m aay, n o y t c , x o e ic .
Tiope f. occurring in the following prepositions: n t n - III 84,5; 85,16.18.
ziTN - in 71,8; 92,20; 1 0 1 , 1 2 . 1 8 ; 104,23; 106,13; 112,18. BG 81,3; 95,3;
119,19; 123,13. z a t n - V 1,[20]. BG 106,6. z i t o ( o ) t # V 1,[19]. Ill
70,19; 72,13; 92,24; 95,7; 97,5; 99,7; 104,9; 107,7; 114,16; 117,17. BG
81,7; 99,17; 120,11. c b o a z i t n - V 2,[3]; 3,10.[31]. Ill 93,7; 101,9;
194 W ORD IN D IC ES
111.9. BG 81,14; 94,11-15; 95,4; 113,<16>. c b o a z i t o ( o ) t * V 1,[14];

4,[12]. Ill 70,14; 71,1; 76,13; 77,9.23; 93,12; 94,3.11; 107,2.5.[17].21.
BG 82,3; 83,3.14.18; 85,8; 88,3.14; 103,16; 104,14; 105,2; 107,10.
t c a b o v.: t c a b c - e - BG 102,5; 121,14; 126,3. t c c b c - e - BG 87,14;
124.10. t c a b o * epo* III 91,18. BG 79,6. t c a b o * x e III 74,17.
m a t c a b o * imperat. BG 102,8. m a t c a b o * epo* BG 100,6.
TC1 NO v. V 16,[21]. m 89,12; 108,[25], t c a n o n- (na*) III 88,12.21.
f o y cardinal number V 12,[28]. Ill 83,17. f o y f o y III 84,23.M e z f o y V
10,[23]. HI 82,16. M ezfe V 11,[2], III 82,24.
T o o y m. IH 90,19; 91,18. BG 77,16; 79,7.
TA(o)yo v.: t a o y o * BG 94,16.
TtooyN v.: TujoyN m m o* III 90,7. TtuoyN z a p o * BG 79,3. tio o y n
6 B O * Z N - III 90,15. BG 77,9; 122,4.
t o y n o c v. BG 126,11. t o y n o c * III 107,16. BG 104,13. m a t o y n o c *
imperat. Ill 119,4.
tu}eg v. V 2,[11]. Totg* e - HI 101,17. BG 95,1.
TAtye-: See o e itg .
tazo v.: t a z c - IH 70,11; 92,17. BG 80,17. a t t a z o * III72,14; 95,8. BG
85,11. tazo m.: tczo c p a t * V 1,12.
obbio v. BG 122,2; 126,8. MAeijeio imperat. Ill 119,2.
t a x o nn.: T i i o na.* BG 119,13; 121,2.
TA6ce f.: a t x i T A sce ncio * BG 86,1; 125,3. mntatxi taccc nc<d*
BG 118,6. Cf. sex M , with which T A sce is parallel.
o y interrog. pron. V 4,16. Ill 92,3; 114,12. BG 79,18; 117,17.See further

eTBe-.
o y A cardinal number and indef. pron. V 14,14.15. Ill 72,15.16.18; 74,12;
86,19; 117,2. BG 81,11; 85,12; 110,15. o y e i III 70,24; 71,<5>; 93,6.
o y e i e BG 82,8. o y A n im III 71,23. n o y A n o y A V 12,[26]; 14,10.111
84,19; 86,15; 88,13; 112,14. BG 110,8; 114,5. T o y e i Toyei V
11,[24], III 83,16. m n t o y A V 14,[9]. Ill 86,14.21; 111,1. BG 110,6. p
o y A BG 11 1,[1]. See further K e - , o y t u T .
o Ya a * refl. adj. V 1,[19]; 2,13.22; 5,9.20.22; 6,7; 8,[30]. Ill 71,18; 72,13.
BG 83,13. oyAAT* III 94,10; 95,7.14; 97,7. o y a c t * V 16,13.
BG 85,9.18; 88,6. See further eicoT .
oyu) nn.: f oyu> c b o a . V 5,[26].
o y o e i N m. V 4,[25]; 5,[28]; 6,[1].[3]; 9,16.[24].[25]; 16,[10]. Ill 76,18.22;
81,6.12.24; 86,7; 89,2.18; 91,13; 93,9; 94,13; 99,11; 101,2.6; 102,11;
105,2.13.14; 106,7.18; 107,1.[14]; 108,4.8; 113,7.21; 114,8; 117,17.21.
BG 78,17; 94,3.7; 103,[1]; 105,14; 117,11; 119,6; 120,5. o y o i N BG
81,18; 83,16; 91,15; 96,2; 100,[2].14.15.17; 102,4; 103,14; 104,10;
105,18; 108,11; 109,18; 115,9; 116,13; 119,4; 123,12.19. p o y o e iN V
5,[29]; 6,[1], IH 76,18; 89,18; 101,2; 105,14; 113,21; 114,7. BG 94,3. p
oyoTN BG 100,17; 116,14; 117,10. See further ajHpe.
oyoN (affirmation of existence): o y N - V 6,23. Ill 73,18; 74,12; 78,12;
C O PTIC W ORDS 195
84,18.23; 97,18. oyN- mmoc III 97,21. BG 90,13. oyNTe- V 14,[9];

15,[18]. oyNTe- mmay III 86,14. oyNT(e)# III 72,1.4; 88,4; 98,21.
BG 84,17; 99,16; 100,10; 107,18; 113,12; 114,[2]. o YNT(e)# mmaY III
105,9. BG 89,4. o Yn t a # V 2,[22]; 5,13; 6,13; 7,[6]; 9,[7]; 11,[4]. 15;
12,[28]; 16,[18]; 17,16. Ill 71,21.23.24; 72,6; 78,5; 88,11; 94,18.20.
21.23.24; 104,22; 112,5.11. BG 84,5.8.9.11.15; 110,8. o Yn t a # mma Y
III 96,22; 102,20. BG 87,17; 96,12. See further s o m .
oYon indef. pron. Ill 70,22; 93,4. o Yon m mo # BG 81,16. oyoN nim V
2,[5].[23].[24]; 17,15. Ill 71,11.20; 85,24; 94,17.20; 118,24. BG 84,4.7;
103,10; 126,4. oyiN nim III 71,23.
oyNoy f. V 12,20. oyNOoye pi. Ill 84,11. n t Yn o Y V 16,14. Ill 76,21;
89,5; 101,6. BG 94,7; 115,14. n to Yno Y V 6,[2], tbn o y III 70,5;
92,10; 94,9.13; 100,16; 106,2. BG 80,8; 83,12.17; 93,12; 101,17. fN o y
V 1,6.
oy)N(e)2 v. V 6,[3]; 9,[33], III 73,4; 76,15; 82,9; 83,3; 87,10.16.23; 91,10;
95,20; 99,20; 100,22; 101,7; 103,17; 108,10.24; 112,2. BG 86,7; 93,18;
101,17; 106,3; 107,1; 118,<15>; 119,11. o Yonz # V 12,[2], BG 97,14.
o y o n P V 3,[6]; 4,[3].[4].[6].7. BG 86,11; 109,9. oyA N p III 73,17;
97,17; 98,14. oytDNZ e- (epo#) III 81,19. BG 78,11. oycoN? n a #
cboa in 98,16; 118,[17]. BG 90,8. oyoNZ# n a # cboa BG 114,15.
oytUNZ eBOA V 3,5; 4,[18].[22].[29]; 5,[24]; 6,15.21; 8,[l].[7].[9].ll.
13.16.[32]; 10,[6]. 15; 11,[8].23.[30]; 12,12.16.22.[27]; 13,[6].[20].
[21].[25]; 14,13.18.[25]; 15,[4].[6].[8].10.12.14. Ill 71,9; 75,5.12; 76,23;
77,11.15; 81,23; 83,13.16; 84,7.12.21; 85,[2].8.20.22; 86,[1].5.18;
87,6.13.18.20.22; 90,8; 95,22; 96,17; 97,[2]; 98,25; 99,3.6.13; 100,19;
101,20; 102,2; 103,11.14; 104,11; 106,2.17; 107,23;
111,9.13.17.18.20.22.24; 114,20; 118,[8], BG 86,10; 87,11.20; 88,13;
91,1.6.18; 93,14; 95,6.10; 97,16; 98,[1]; 99,3; 102,18; 105,5; 107,11;
108,7; 109,5.15; 110,14; 112,6.11.14.16; 113,[1].[5].7; 118,[5]; 119,18;
124.17. oytoNZ cboa e- III 111,3. oytoNf cboa n - (n a #) III
107,<7>. BG 104,[2]; 125,13. oycoNf cboa zn- (nzht#) V 7,[3]. BG
92,8; 94,8; 97,12; 109,2. oyujN? cboa zitn - III 97,13. oyujnz- cboa
BG 118,4. oyonz # cboa V 8,[8]. Ill 87,[1]; 103,11. BG 91,8; 110,15;
111.8.17. o y o n P cboa III 74,18; 98,18.19. BG 88,19; 90,6.11.
oyAN2f cboa III 73,4; 74,16.19; 75,[1]; 95,23. oytoNf cboa m. Ill
106,10; 113,20. BG 102,<9>; 116,12. atoyujnz V 4,[3]. BG 102,10.
AToyiDN? eBOA III 98,13; 106,12. BG 90,5.10. p AToytDNZ ncaboa
NA# III 119,[10]. p ATOytONZ NCA NBOA MMO# BG 126,[18].
oyon v.: oyAABf BG 81,7; 123,3. eToyA ab * V 9,15. Ill 81,5; 91,5.9;
104,5; 105,15; 112,20; 114,10; 118,5. BG 78,5.10; 98,14; 100,[18];
114,13; 117,14; 124,13.
oYhp interrog. pron. Ill 108,18. BG 106,12; 107,14.
oypoT v.: pooyTf ezpAT e i N - III 105,24; 113,25.
oyepHTe f. Ill 119,[8]. oypHTe BG 126,16.
oycoT adj.: oyoTe V 17,15. oyA noycot BG 122,10.
196 W ORD IN D ICES
o y T e - prep. Ill 73,19; 97,19. BG 118,9.10. o y r u j * III 114,22.23. BG89,2.

o y (u j)u )T e v.: o y i o T - v. V 7,14. o y e T - V 7,14.
o y c o T B v.: o y a t b * e - V 7,16. Ill 72,10; 86,23; 95,4; 108,18. o y o T B e - BG
85,4; 106,13; 111,5.
o y o e i u ) m. V 4,[26]. BG 121,11. N o y o e i u ) n im V 2,9; 4,16.[27].
oyajq) v. V 1,3; 3,[29]; 4,14. Ill 92,7; 100,20; 104,5; 114,13. BG 80,4; 88,3;
93,17; 98,15; 118,[1]. o y e t g - III 74,13. o y A .q j* III 86,[2]. o y to tg m. V
7,7; 11,13.14.[19]; 12,[2]; 16,13. Ill 83,20; 113,10. BG 104,9; 109,11;
114,11; 120,15. o y a i a je III 89,4; 118,4. BG 103,18; 115,13; 124,12.
o y c o z v. V 17,16. o y t o z t o o t * III 97,24. BG 89,8. o y a z * n c a - BG
118,13. o y h z * n c c d * V 6,[31]. Ill 78,17.
o yxA i m. Ill 101,1 l.B G 94,14.
o y i o s n v.: o y o s n * III 119,3.
id b o )v.: (e )B t g e f. Ill 101,12; 107,6; 108,9. BG 94,15; 103,17; 106,2; 120,2;

122,5.
<o n z v.: o n z * BG 120,1. o j n z m. V 14,26. Ill 87,7; 111,10. BG 111,18.
ton v.: HTTf e- III 71,1; 98,19. hit* z i t m - BG 121,12. n e T H n f eujcone in
70,21; 93,3. BG 118,12. Hne f.: m n Hne e p o * III 84,9. m n t ( c ) # Hne
ffl 75,16; 77,22; 81,2; 86,8; 88,22; 99,17; 102,10; 105,1; 113,4. BG 92,4;
95,19; 99,19; 109,19; 115,6. A T f Hne e p o * V 5,[2]; 9,12; 12,18; 14,[2];
16,[7]. m n t A T f Hne e p o * V 6,[28]. a t x i Hne e p o * V 4,[1].
wig v.: a>qj 6 b o a 111 97,19. BG 89,4.
tg- v. 111 90,6; 91,15; 94,2. BG 79,3; 83,2. n a * tg- (non-literary form) III
91,14. BG 79,1. ( n ) n c * t g - V 16,4.111113,23; 114,2. See further s o m .
u) a - prep. V 4,[2]; 8,17. 111 70,5; 73,14; 74,15; 86,3; 89,17; 92,10; 94,9;
96,11; 98,14; 100,16; 101,14; 103,21; 106,1. BG 80,8; 83,12; 87,5; 90,5;
93,12; 98,6; 101,16; 109,11. o j a z o y N e - V 1,6. u ) A z p A ( e ) i e - V7,19.
11178,19. BG 125,1. See further e N e z , Z A e .
ty e cardinal number: u jM N T t y e c e V 12,13.15.[30]. c g M T c g e c e III 83,18;
84,4.6.24; 85,1.5. A N ty e V 7,20.21.27. p A tg e III 78,20 twice, a n -
o jM N f t g e c e V 12,[1]. f I V 13,[4].
eg i v.: u j i t * 111 76,7; 89,24; 100,13. BG 93,8. a t o j i t * III 72,21; 95,14;
114,1. BG 85,19; 117,3. A T f cyi e p o * V 5,16; 17,[2].
t y o cardinal number: a n u j o V 7,22 twice.[28]. p A cg o III 78,21 twice.
cgiBe v. 111 76,7; 81,15; 89,23; 95,10; 100,12; 105,24. BG 85,15; 93,6;
101,12. c g o B e t 111 103,5. BG 97,4. o j b b i h o y t V 7,13. o jib c m. Ill
78,13; 97,18; 103,5.20. BG 97,5; 98,5. A T tg iB e V 5,15; 17,[1]. Ill
72,17; 113,7; 114,1. BG 117,2.
o jb h p m. V 6,[23]. cy B e e p e f. BG 94,19; 96,5. cgB e ep BG 99,[3].
tyujK m. V 6,20.
ujMM o nn. and adj. BG 85,4. u) m m u ) III 72,9; 95,4.
ojmoyn cardinal number: MeztyMoyNe III 85,19; 87,[1]; 111,3; 112,14;
117,[15]; 118,2. BG 123,10; 124,9. m a z u j m o y n c V 13,[19]. BG 111,7.
C O PTIC W ORDS 197
u jo m n t cardinal number V 1,14. Ill 92,19. ty o M T e V 2,[4]. Ill 70,13.23;

71,7; 93,5. BG 81,12. ty o M N T e BG 81,2. M e z ty o M N T V 10,[20], III
82,14; 86,12.<17>. BG 110,<4>.<11>. M e z ty o M T e III 82,21. M e z -
(y o M e T V 14,[7].[11]. M A Z ty o M e T V 13,12. See further t y e , z o o y T .
ajMcye m. V 6,[28]; 9,13; 12,[25]; 16,[8]. Ill 102,11; 113,5. BG96,1; 115,7.
a)iNe v. BG 105,8. ty iN e e T B e - BG 106,16. ty iN e n c a - ( n c i u #) V 1,[7].
HI 70,6; 92,3.11; 108,21; 112,[23]; 113,1. BG 79,17; 80,9; 114,17;
115,2.
tyum v.: tytun e - (epo#) n- V 2,15.[18].[19]. Ill 89,<10>. BG 121,8. tyon#
epo# V 17,[10]. 11191,16.
tyine m.: x \ tyine BG 122,3.
cyume v. V 10,3; 16,14. Ill 76,20; 81,20; 89,5; 90,3; 96,16; 111,10; 112,18;
114,17; 119,[11], BG 87,4.10; 115,14; 118,16. t y o o n * V 4,13; 7,31. Ill
73,18; 78,10; 103,2. BG 83,6; 89,2; 97,[1]; 102,11. tytu n e e - V 7,[26].
tytune m n n c a - (-c t u # ) V 7,[5]; 8,[26]; 10,[1]; 17,[5]. Ill 78,4; 89,11;
97,16; 106,3; 113,16; 114,4.24. BG 88,18; 101,18; 116,5; 117,6; 118,10.
(g am e n - V 5,[31]; 9,[20]; 11,[27]; 12,[3].5.6.[8].[10].14.19. Ill 74,2;
81,9; 83,22; 84,1.3.6; 98,6; 101,5; 103,20; 108,1; 117,20. BG 98,5;
104,18; 105,9; 112,1; 118,18; 123,18; 124,7. tytu n e n - e - BG 122,9.
cyum e n - ( n a #) n - III 83,21; 84,10; 117,1. ty tu n e n c i u # V 16,[20].
<yum e z n - ( n z h t #). Ill 87,7; 118,[10]. BG 94,6; 114,10; 120,14; 123,8;
125,2; 127,2. ty tu n e z a t n - V 1,[20].[22], lyoon* n - V 3,[14]. BG
89,15. t y o o n * z n - ( n z h t # ) V 1,12; 2,[7]; 3,7; 5,[27]; 6,24; 7,24. Ill
71,12; 73,6.15; 95,24. BG 86,12. ty tu n e g b o a z n ( n )- V 3,[16]; 7,[30];
8,[27]; 12,[17]; 14,[26]. Ill 73,21.22.23; 74,3; 84,9; 98,[1].3.4. BG
89,10.12.13. t y o o n f c b o a . z n - BG 89,16. e T t y o o n * V 2,8. Ill 71,13;
94,5; 96,21. BG 83,5; 87,16. e T t y o o n * x i n N t y o p ( e ) n III 117,5;
118,18. BG 91,12; 122,14; 125,14. (p) A T t y t u n e V 3,17.[18]; 4,[26],
ecycune conj. V 9,[18]. Ill 74,12. See further m a , tu n .
ajnnpe nn.: p cynH pe III 91,23. BG 79,12.
ajHpe m. V 1,[1]; 5,[8].12; 7,15 twice; 9,[2].[25]; 12,[7]; 13,12. Ill 75,22;
78,14 twice; 84,[1]; 100,1; 103,6.<6>; 104,3.13; 108,1.7. BG 97,6.7;
98,12; 99,5; 105,8.16. tyH pe M n N o y T e III 100,3; 104,16; 105,22. BG
99,8. ajH pe n t c n N o y T e BG 92,14. tyH pe M n (i)p u )M e V 10,[4];
13,[10].13. Ill 81,13.21; 85,11; 104,2; 105,20; 106,15; 117,[22]; 118,1.
BG 98,11; 101,7; 102,15; 108,2; 124,2.6. tyH pe N T e n o y o ( e ) i N III
119,6. BG 126,14. See further M ic e .
<gu)pn v.: typn n - III 71,8; 78,16. tyopff nn. and adj. V 10,18; 13,[4],[8]. Ill
77,12; 82,12.19; 91,11; 118,[16]. BG 78,13; 108,1. <y(o)pn N x n o V
12,7. Ill 104,12,20. BG 97,11. x n o NTe ntyopft V 10,[22]. Ntyop(e)n
adv. V 4,[25]; 6,16; 11,[6]; 12,[25]. Ill 78,17; 84,14; 101,21; 103,9;
108,25; 111,14; 112,5; 114,6. BG 81,13; 95,6; 97,9; 107,2; 108,19;
113,12; 117,8; 119,5. n o j o p t t n - V 4,[22], x i n Niyop(e)n III
73,<14>; 96,10; 101,17; 117,2. BG 95,2; 122,11. p tyopff e- V 4,[24]. p
tyopff n - V 11,7.9.[21]; 13,[1]; 17,8. p typn n - III 70,23; 74,10; 83,3.11;
198 W ORD IN D IC E S
88,4; 90,5; 93,5; 103,8. BG 107,3; 112,6. See further eitoT , Mice,
pu)Me, c o o y N , cytone.
cycoiuT v. Ill 107,20. cyuxoT m. Ill 72,23; 95,16; 117,[13].[14]. &tu)(i)(dt
DI 72,17; 95,11. ty r* m. V 13,[7], HI 108,1. BG 86,2; 105,1.7.9;
107,12; 118,15; 123,8.9. ^T ty r* BG 85,15.
(qoyo v.: o)OYeiTf III 71,3.
(gcocy v.: 0 )H0 )f III 78,12; 103,4. BG 97,3. q)HO)f mn- (nmm^*) V 7,[12]. DI
99,12. BG 87,2. tyHq)* oybh - V 4,[28]. Ill 75,11. BG 91,16. ojho)*
( z)n - V 6,10. (gojq) m. V 4,[23].
tgzis m. Ill 70,6; 92,11.
q)&xe v.: iy & ie epo* III 70,13; 84,13; 89,24; 91,14; 92,19; 108,25;
113,23; 114,2. BG 79,2; 113,11; 117,4. (y&xe mmo * V 17,9. qjixe
MN- (nmma *) III 97,23. BG 89,7. q ji x e m. V 3,[30]; 5,[23].[27];
11,14.20; 15,13.23; 17,[3].ll. Ill 74,9.13; 88,10; 108,4; 112,10. BG
105,14; 113,18. i T a j i x e epo* V 3,[3]; 5,[11].[29]. IH 71,14;
76,2.5.19; 81,14.16; 88,19; 89,2.19; 94,5; 100,7.10; 101,3; 105,16.23;
113,7; 117,[6]; 119,[12]. BG 83,6; 93,1.5; 94,4; 101,[1].10; 115,10;
116,15; 122,16; 127,3. i T i g i x e mmo * V 2,[9]; 8,21; 9,[27]; 16,[1].10.
siNcy&x. e III 70,14.
tyoxN e m. V 3,12.13; 7,8.9.[28]; 8,[5] twice; 11,12.13.19; 15,[9].
(gcoxn m. V 7,16. in 78,15; 103,7.
qi v.; qi mn -III 106,16.

qxooY cardinal number: M ezqToo y V 10,[21]. Ill 82,15. MezqToe ID
82,23.
2*- prep. Ill 75,10.16; 82,11; 85,6; 86,8; 88,19; 99,17; 119,7. BG 92,3;
109,18. See further To)pe, 2 H.
zxe nn. BG 109,12. zxh III 71,24; 94,21; 103,10. BG 84,9. fiz\e n- BG
97,11. q)A. z x e BG 94,17. a r p z x e V 4,[13]. a t p za.h V 14,5.
ze v.: ze e- (epo*) III 70,8; 92,13. BG 80,12; 83,2; 90,11.
ze f. Ill 92,19. BG 81,2. N ee n- V 3,[24]; III 72,7; 75,4; 78,13; 91,13;
103,5; 106,25. BG 97,5; 103,13. N ee V 4,17; 7,13.17; 11,25; 17,[10]. ffl
78,6.15; 91,17; 95,1.2; 102,23; 103,7; 117,2. BG 85,1.2; 89,17; 119,4.
NTze BG 96,16. N fze V 12,[26]; 13,6. BG 115,15. NTe(e)ize V
12,21; 16,15. Ill 73,20; 78,24; 85,7; 89,6; 113,11. NTeqze BG 79,5.
k i t i e e V 14,[20], III 90,6. BG 122,11. See further *<y.
2h f.: 2 *eH N- V 3,4; 5,24. Ill 73,3; 76,15; 95,22; 100,22. z^Te* (e)zH ffl
75,10; 82,11; 85,6; 99,11. BG 91,15. zzrezH BG 86,10; 93,18.
zi- prep. Ill 72,12; 77,13; 88,1.[1]; 91,2; 95,6; 97,10; 99,16; 100,7;
101,21.22; 103,23; 105,24; 112,2 twice.3; 113,15. BG 78,2; 79,7; 88,10;
92,18 twice; 95,7; 113,8 twice.9; 116,4. See further TU)pe, xtu*.
zih f. BG 105,13.
zo m. V 4,[21]. BG 91,12.
C O PTIC W ORDS 199
2d) v.: 2<o oja rre(e)iM A V 3,[25]; I I I 74,7; 76,11; 90,4. 20) e p o # oja
ne'fMA V 17,7.
2(i)(o# pron. I l l 105,7. B G 100,7. 2u># i n 82,18. zo jt# I I I 99,21.
2cob m. H I 107,7.15. B G 104,2.12. 2u)b nim m 91,7; 96,20; 113,2. B G 78,7;
115,[3].
2&eiBec f.: A T 2A (e )iB e c I I I 81,6; 89,19; 105,16.23. B G 101,[2].11;
115,11; 116,14. a t z a c i b c V 9,[16]. m n t # z a c i b c c I I I 113,22.
2(obc v.: 2bco) f. B G 120,16.
2ico v.: 2Hice adj.: m n t 2h k ni 101,15; 102,7; 107,8. B G 94,18; 95,16;
104, [3],
2o)M v.: 2cum e x N - B G 106,9; 126,15. 2U)M ezpA T e x N - I I I 108,15;
119,1.7. B G 126,6.
2MOM v. B G 120,4.
2m o t m. H I 97,12; 117,7. p 2m o t n a # V 4,14.
2oyN m.: 62o y N e - H I 77,22; 81,2; 84,16; 88,23. See further o ja-.
2(on v.: zhn* e - H I 93,7.
2o (e )iN e indef. pron. V 4,[27]; 9,[5]; 10,[11]. I l l 88,17; 104,19. 2o (e )iN
m 82,6; 106,23. B G 99,13; 103,8. 2o e i Ne N 2HT# I I I 70,16; 92,22.
20 I N N2HT# B G 81,5. 20VNC eBO A N2HT# V 1,[17].
2Ne- nn. and v.: e 2NA# e - m 94,10. e T 2N e - H I 112,18. e T e 2Ne# I II
107,6.13. 6TC2N A # m 114,18. B G 83,14. p 2n a # 11197,5; 114,16.
2(ont v.: T 6T 2A N Tf IH 71,4; 93,16. T e e o N T * B G 81,11; 82,7.
2(on v.: 2Hnf V 4,[1]; 6,13. IH 74,15. 2Hnf n z h t # IH 97,3.
2PaT m.: 2r a T 2n - (n z h t# ) V 4,[4]; 5,13.18. B G 78,14; 91,5; 96,13; 104,9.
2PAei z n - B G 106,18. 62paT e - V 6,[28]; 9,13; 14,15. e2PA'f c x n - V
7,20.21. H I 76,6; 81,17; 89,22. B G 101,14; 117,[1]. N2PAI z n - (n 2 h t# )
V 4,17; 5,[5]; 7,17. H I 75,4.18; 84,17; 88,9; 90,2; 99,[3]; 101,18; 102,22.
B G 95,2. c a ( n ) 2P6 m. V 14,[8]; I E 85,19. M n < c > A 2pe n - I I I 86,3.
Mnc& 2pe I I I 107,[12]. See further q) a -.
2Apez v.: zaphz e p o # H I 107,4. A p e 2 e p o # B G 103,15.
2ic e m.: 2ic e 2 a t o o t o y V 16,[11]. 2i c e 2 a t h ( o ) y IH 89,3; 113,8. B G
115.11.
2h t m.: See x i c e .
20T 6 f.: p z o t c I I I 91,24. B G 79,13. z a z o t c adj. H I 108,13.
zo)tb v.: zeTB pu)Me V 3,[24].
zioTn m. V 6,24.
Z(otp m. V 12,[1]. I l l 83,19.
z o o y m. V 12,13.20. H I 84,<5>; 86,3; 119,13. B G 127,5.
z o o y v. B G 82,5.
2o y o m.: n z o y o V 17,17. I l l 70,9; 92,14. n z o y o e - I I I 72,10; 114,8. B G
117.11. p z o Y e - V 3,[19].
2oY (e )iT nn. V 14,6.7. I l l 76,14; 78,[3].23; 85,9; 86,11.13; 93,21; 94,12;
106,6. B G 82,15; 83,16; 102,4; 109,3; 110,3.5; 125,11. 2 0 Y e iT e V
10,[26]. H I 86,10. See further pooMe, cooyN.
z o o y t m. and adj. V 10,[8]; 14,[21].[22]. I l l 82,11; 83,13; 87,3.4; 104,14;
200 W ORD IN D ICES
106,19; 111,5.6; 114,18. BG 99,6; 111,13; 120,6; 124,16. u jo m n t

n jo o y t III 102,12. o) m t 2 o o y t BG 96,3. z o o y t c z i m c V 6,[4];
8,[33]; 10,[7]. 16; 14,[20]. Ill 76,24; 82,[1].10; 101,8; 104,13; 106,18;
111,4. z a o y t c z i m c III 87,[2]. z o y t c z i m b BG 94,11; 99,5; 103,[1];
111,9. m n t z o o y t V 6,[5]; 10,[17]; 11,[25]. Ill 77,[1]; 82,1; 108,5;
118,[7]. BG 103,2; 111,10.
ztutyq v. BG 121,18; 126,9.
z a z t n - prep.: z a t h *: See zice .
z i u s b v. BG 120,1.
xi v. BG 85,3. x i - V 8,[31]. I l l 103,17.18; 108,8. BG 98,2.3; 105,18. x it *

III 72,8; 87,8; 95,3; 111,12. x i e - V 1,[23]. x i c b o a z n - ( n z h t *)HI
118,[12]. BG 116,[3].6; 125,6. x i t * n t n - ( n t o o t * ) III 105,19. BG
101,5; 112,3. See further p a n , c m o t , t a s c c , tu n , c y m e , s s x m .
x o v.: x o * n - V 16,[4], x o * z n - I H 88,20.
x u ) v.: x o o * V 2,[5]; 11,7.9.[22]; 13,[2], III 70,24; 71,8; 74,10; 78,16;
83.3.11; 88,4; 90,6; 93,6; 103,8; 112,5; 114,7; 119,[9]. BG 81,13; 97,9;
107,2; 108,19; 117,8; 119,5; 126,17. x tu m m o * V 17,[4]. x tu m m o c x e
V 1,[18]. Ill 92,23; 97,20. BG 81,6. x tu m m o c e - ( e p o * ) x e III 70,17;
77,4; 118,21. BG 125,18. x tu n - ( n a *) III 93,11; 96,20; 118,24. x o o *
e - ( e p o * ) m 90,9; 113,2; 114,6. BG 115,[3]. x o o * e p o * x e BG
90,16. x o o * n - ( n a .*) V 1,13; 17,[9]. Ill 90,5. BG 117,9. x o o c epo*
x e III 73,2; 74,22; 75,21; 77,[1].14; 81,4.11; 82,[2].4.6; 85,12; 88,8;
98,23; 105,12. BG 81,1; 98,17. x o c e p o * x e BG 95,8. a x i - epo#
imperat. Ill 112,22. a t x o o * III 89,20; 113,24. BG 116,17.
x tu * m. occurring in the following prepositions: e x N - ( e x t u * ) V 2,[14];
7,[23]. Ill 71,24; 78,20.21.22; 90,19; 94,22. BG 84,10. z i x n ( n )- V
3,13; 7,[9]. Ill 91,18; 99,8. See further z p a T.
x tu K V. V 15,[22]. Ill 88,10. BG 104,18; 115,15; 121,9.11; 124,15. x h k * III
85,7. xtu ic c b o a V 13,[3]; 16,15. Ill 85,4; 89,6; 107,20; 112,10; 113,10;
118,6. XtU K C B O A MMO* V 6,[6]. X O K * C B O A BG 114,1. XH K* CBOA
III 77,2; 104,8. x h k + c b o a n - III 101,2. BG 94,2. x h k * c b o a z n - III
76,18. xtu ic m. V 4,[2]. Ill 74,15; 98,14. BG 90,6. xtD K c b o a V 14,[5].
Ill 86,10; 101,14. x tu K c b o a . m m o * V 8,[30].
x 6 k a a c conj. Ill 76,11; 87,5; 97,1; 101,9; 105,6; 107,16.23. BG 87,19;
88,12; 94,11; 100,7; 104,[1].13; 105,4.17; 118,11; 119,10; 120,16;
122,7.12; 124,14.
x i n - prep. V 8,17. Ill 92,9; 98,13; 119,[13]. BG 80,7; 83,11.17; 87,5; 90,5;
98,6; 107,15; 124,18; 127,4. x(i ) n n - V 1,5. Ill 70,4; 71,17; 74,15; 87,9;
89,16; 94,8.13; 103,21; 111,12; 113,20. BG 116,11. See further tgcopn.
xtuNq m. Ill 111,13.
x n o v. BG 88,4. x n e - III 97,6.9. BG 88,9. x n o * V 8,15; 10,21. Ill 70,4;
78,16; 103,9. x n o n a * V 6,22. x n o * e - III 92,8. BG 80,6; 81,15. x n o
6 b o a m m o * V 10,20. x n o * c b o a z n - III 93,20. BG 82,13. x n o m. V
2,16; 5,[22]; 10,22.[23]. HI 71,20.21; 77,[2]; 94,17.18. BG 84,4.5.
C O PTIC W ORDS 201
a t x t i o V 7,17; 10,18. BG 84,6. a r x n o # V 4,[23]. BG 98,6. p e q x . n o

m. V 6,6.[8]; 8,[29]; 10,10. Ill 96,22.23; 104,8. BG 87,16; 98,17; 103,5.
p e q x n e - III 82,3; 106,21. BG 87,18. x n o M n ic iz V 1,[5]. See further
e i o ) T , N o y T e , cyiopff.
x o e ic m. V 11,[18]; 15,[7] twice.7.[8].[9].[10]. Ill 87,16.17 twice.19 twice;
94,1; 95,19; 96,15; 98,10; 100,17; 105,4; 108,17; 111,19 twice.20.21
twice; 112,21; 114,9. BG 112,<15> four times.<17> two times, x o e i c
M nTHpq III 74,20; 98,22. x c M nTH pq BG 90,15. x o e i c n t c rn-Hpq V
4,[8]. x o e i c N T e N x o e i c V 7,[1]. m n t x o c i c V 6,17. m n t x a c i c
V 6,[30].
x ice v.: x o c e f e- V 14,17. m n t x & c i z h t III 107,9; 118,19. BG 104,4;
125,15.
x o e i T m.: ( t o o y ) N x o e i T III 91,20. BG 79,8.
x<dzm v.: x i . 2M t III 93,21; 108,12. BG 106,5. x & Z M e * BG 82,14.
& tx u )z m BG 86,4.
6 0 ) v. V 3,[8].
6<DA.n v.: 6u)A.n e p o # BG 83,18. s u > A n n a # III 94,11. s c o A n m.: s u ) A n
cboa III 89,17.
SOM f. V 3,13.14; 4,[29]; 5,[31]; 7,9.[13]; 8,6.[7].18; 11,21.[24]; 12,[11].15;
13,[23]; 15,[11].[19]; 17,6. Ill 75,12; 76,21; 78,12; 83,11; 84,4.7.21;
85,2.23; 87,20; 88,5; 90,3; 96,7.23; 99,13; 101,5; 103,1.5.12; 111,14.22;
114,5; 119,7. BG 83,10; 87,1.3.18; 91,17; 94,6; 96,19; 97,4.13; 109,7;
112,7; 113,1.14; 117,7; 121,8; 126,16. c a m V 6,10; 7,29; 12,27. m n
<y s o M III 88,20; 89,24. m n u j s o m n - V 17,[3]. Ill 74,8. o y n s o m V
17,[10]. o y n u) s o m m m o # V 2,[2]. Ill 71,5. a t s o m BG 115,12.
M N T iT 6 0 M V 16,12. Ill 89,4; 113,9. u j s m s o m BG 121,7.
s iN e v. V 4,[3]. 6 N - III 94,2. <s n t # V 1,9. Ill 74,19; 98,18. See further
SO M .
senH v.: z n OYsenH m 113,11.
6ptuz m. in 107,25.
s e x M nn. (not attested elsewhere): a t x i s e x M ( e ) n c u )# III 72,22; 95,14;
118,[11]. Cf. T i s c e , with which s e x M is parallel. s e x M may be
related to s a x m h (Crum: 842b).
G R EEK LO A N W O RD S
oryaBoi; III 72,17; 95,10. BG 85,14. dya06v IH 97,13; 114,20; 118,[13]. BG

88,14; 118,[4]. MNTa.ra.eoc 11197,7. BG 88,7; 125,7.
aydbrn V 9,6; 11,[3]. IU 82,24; 97,4; 104,20; 117,23. BG 88,3; 99,14; 124,3.
ay/eXos V 9,11.14.17.20; 11,18.19; 12,12.17; 15,13; 16,7. Ill 77,21;
81,[1].4.9; 84,8.17; 87,22; 88,22; 91,13; 102,9; 104,24; 105,15; 112,1;
113,4; 118,5.20. BG 78,17; 95,18; 99,19; 100,18; 107,8; 113,5; 115,5;
121,13; 124,12; 125,17.
202 W ORD IN D ICES
ayEiv. a.re III 70,18; 92,20.24. BG 81,1.

dTEVtixoqBG 90,12; 91,13; 92,12.
&7e v v t |t o <; III 71,22; 73,16; 75,9.22; 82,12; 89,16; 94,19; 96,13; 98,20; 99,9;
100,[1]; 103,20; 117,[11].
dOdvaxoq III 71,12.19; 76,23; 77,10; 78,10.23; 83,20; 85,10.18.21;
88,[3].6.15; 89,8.16; 93,23; 101,8.10.20; 106,13; 112,4.7; 113,13;
114,22; 117,[16]. BG 94,10. dQdvaxov III 103,3.
aia0dvea0ai. A i c e A N e BG 82,8. e c e A N e III 71,5; 93,16.
aicov V 1,13; 5,19; 7,[31]. Ill 73,19; 76,9; 77,16; 81,20; 83,4.22; 84,15.18;
85,10.11.15.17.18.22; 86,11.17; 87,8; 88,2; 89,7; 90,2; 100,15; 102,4;
106,3; 108,19.22; 111,11; 112,3.22; 113,10.15; 114,3; 118,[8]. BG
93,10; 95,12; 101,18; 106,12.17; 107,6.15; 108,1.8.12.17 twice; 109,4.6;
110,3.11; 112,1; 113,9; 114,15; 115,16; 116,4; 117,5; 118,13; 119,2;
124,18. ecuN V 5,[25]; 6,4.22; 7,[32]; 8,18.[25]; 9,[10]; 10,[1]; 11,[9];
12, [4]. [24]. [26]; 13,4.8.15.[18].[22]; 14,[6].[12]; 15,17; 16,16.[19];
17,[5], III 89,10.
aKoXouOeiv. A i c o x o y e e i III 114,[25].
dKoAmjGov III 114,25.
aicpi'Peia BG 82,2. a k p i b i a III 93,11.
aKpiPax; III 105,7. BG 100,8.
a ^ G e ta ID 71,10; 74,21.
ajlliv. ZAMHN III 119,17.
dvdyicri HI 112,23. BG 114,16.
dvdworooi<; III 86,14; 89,23; 114,1; 117,14; 118,[14]. BG 110,7.
dvapxoqIII 75,[2]; 99,1. BG 91,3.
avxowceiv. a n t o t t i t c d III 75,8. a n t o i t i t o n III 99,8.
dvTCDJto*;. ANTonoc III 75,7.13; 99,8.14. BG 91,11; 92,1.
dopaxoi;. a z o p a t o n III 91,12; 117,20; 118,[12]. BG 78,14.
aneipoq. a i t ip o n III 76,12.
djiepavxoq III 85,17; 96,12.19. BG 85,9. drcepavxov III 76,16; 93,9; 97,22;
100,23; 108,23; 118,[9]. BG 87,14; 93,19; 102,4; 106,19; 107,15;
108,15; 125,1.
djcoXauew. A i r o x A y e III 97,<7>. p A n o A .A y e BG 88,6.
ajcopetv. Airopi III 91,3. BG 78,2; 79,17. A nopei 11192,2.
arcoppoia BG 90,7; 119,3. a i t o z p o i a III 98,15.
arcoaxoAxx; III 112,19. BG 114,12.
a p a BG 95,5.
apexn m 91,6. BG 78,6.
dpi0|AO<; BG 121,10.
ap|i.a III 88,18.
apjioêiv. z o p M A Z e (reflecting the late form op(idêiv) BG 120,17.
dpxdryeXoi; V 6,[27]. Ill 77,20; 87,21 twice; 102,9; 111,22.23. a p x i-
ArreADc V 15,11.[12]; 16,[6]. BG 95,19; 113,[2].3.
apxeiv. a p x i III 71,24; 78,20.21 twice; 94,21. A p x e i BG 84,10. A p x e c -
G REEK LO A N W ORDS 203
ai 11177,24; 102,16; 119,14. BG 96,6. p*pxi V 6,[29]; 7,20. p ap x ei

V 7,21.22. p& pxeceau BG 127,5.
d p tf V 2,10; 4,[7],11.[12]; 5,21.27.[30]; 6,[2]; 8,[2].17.[28]; 14,[4], III
71,15.22.23; 74,20.23; 76,13.20.22; 86,9; 87,9; 94,6.19.20; 98,24;
101,4.6; 103,21; 111,12. BG 83,7; 84,7.8; 87,5; 91,1; 94,5.8; 98,6; 110,2;
112,[3]. aratpxH V 4,[12].
dpxiYEvexojp III 82,18; 118,20. BG 119,14; 125,16.
aao<pov BG 82,7.
daitdea0ai. i c n i z e III 81,7. BG 121,4.
dajtaanoq V 9,19. Ill 81,8.
auto'yevexcop IH 75,7. BG 107,4.
avxoyevTv; V 4,[32]. Ill 75,14; 97,14; 99,15; 101,19; 106,5. BG 92,1; 95,3;
102,2; 108,16.
auxoyevvTixoq III 76,<14>; 82,13.
avxoKTvaxo? Ill 76,17; 101,1. BG 94,1.
auxoJtdxGjp III 75,6; 77,14; 102,1. BG 95,9.
avxoxeXevo*;. a.yTOTeA.ioc BG98,[18].
a\)xo<pu'n<; III 76,16; 100,23. BG 94,1.
d<p0op<ria V 3,[18].[20]; 7,11. Ill 74,1.4; 76,2; 78,11; 88,11; 97,11.15;
103,4; 112,11.
a<p0apxo<; V 3,[26]. m 72,15; 73,1.19; 74,3.11; 95,9.17. a<p0apxov V 3,[19].
ffl 97,19; 100,6; 119,[16].
pi'o^m71,2; 93,13. BG 82,5.
Teved V 5,[4], III 75,17; 97,9; 99,18. BG 88,8; 92,6.

yevexevpa III 77,4.
yevexoop III 82,15.
yb/oq III 73,14; 96,10; 99,18. BG 92,5.
Yvgxtk; V 4,8; 17,14. in 117,[9].
8eicd<; V 7,[19].19.[27].
8ta<popd V 3,23; 8,15. Ill 73,18; 74,6; 78,12; 98,9. BG 89,1.20.
8iovkt|(ti<; n i 70,9.12; 92,15.18. BG 80,14.18.
8vd<; V7,18. Ill 78,18.
8wani<; V 11,[29]. IU 73,11; 78,9; 83,15.19; 87,11; 96,8.
einiyci. c i m h t i V 2,[12]. Ill 71,18; 94,2.9. BG 83,2.13.

et8o<; V 15,15.
eVapfievri. zl m a p m c n h V 1,[22].
eipiivri. fpHNH III 91,21 twice. BG 79,10 twice.
etc III 87,3 twice. BG 111,10.11. See further |aepo<;.
eKidriCTi'a V 9,15; 14,[11[.16.17.[18].[23]. Ill 81,5; 86,16.22.23.24; 87,4;
111,2.7. BG 110,10; 111,3.4.6.14.
ev0v(ieiv. eisieyMei III 104,10. BG 99,[1].
204 W ORD IN D ICES
evevôi*; V 15,[23]. Ill 73,10; 78,7; 83,5.6; 88,9; 96,6; 102,24; 105,18;
112,9; 117,[17]. BG 86,17; 96,17; 101,4; 113,17; 123,14.
evvoia V 3,11; 4,[4]; 6,8; 7,[6].15.16.[25]; 8,[2]; 11,8.10.15. Ill 73,9; 74,16;
78,6.14.15; 83,5 twice; 87,10; 96,4; 98,16; 102,22; 103,6.7; 111,13. BG
86,18; 90,8; 96,15; 97,7.8; 112,5.
eôwria V 2,11; 3,[7]; 6,25; 9,[8]; 13,[24]; 15,[19]. Ill 71,15; 73,5; 77,18;
85,24; 88,4.12; 91,6; 94,6; 95,24; 102,6; 104,22; 108,10; 112,6.12;
119,5. BG 78,6; 83,8; 86,12; 95,15; 99,17; 106,2; 109,8; 113,13; 114,3;
126,13.
enaiveioGai. enauNO y III 108,20. BG 106,15.
e m '.e n i 74,8; 75,8. BG 91,11; 114,16.
eTtei&n. e n iA H V 4,21; 6,10.
ep^Tiveimta HI 101,12.
exi III 89,1; 97,24. BG 89,8.
euaYyeXiov III 104,1; 119,[15]. BG 98,10; 127,8.
euSoiaa III 117,18. BG 112,4; 123,14.
V 14,[25]. Ill 87,5; 111,8. BG 111,16.
f( V 1,8. Ill 70,7; 72,8; 93,7; 95,2; 96,16; 114,11 twice. BG 79,16.17; 80,11;
85,2; 117,15.17.
0eA,r|<n<; III 83,9.10.

Gpovoqin 88,16; 112,15. BG 114,7.
idea. z ia e * III 72,6.8.9; 87,23; 94,24; 95,3; 112,2. BG 113,<7>. eiA ei V

4,17.
i'Sioq. z i a i o n III 78,6; 102,21.
iva V 4,14.
(aoSuvaiiK;. z i c o a y n a m i c III 73,12; 75,15; 99,16. z T c o a y n a m o c BG
92,3.
iao<;. z i c o n III 96,8.
icoxpovo*;. z i c o x p o n o c III 75,9.14; 99,10.16. BG 91,14; 92,2.
KaOapov III 91,17; 117,[9]. BG 79,4.

Kapjcoi; III 97,6.10; 107,17; 117,3. BG 88,5.10; 104,14; 122,13.
m i d V 4,[9]; 7,[11].[13]; 8,17; 14,[20]. Ill 74,21; 78.11.12; 90,6; 103,3.4.
BG 97,2.4; 122,11.
KatapoX.il V 1,[5], III 70,4; 71,17; 92,9; 94,8. BG 80,7; 83,11.
KaTajcexaana III 114,21. BG 118,8; 119,1.
KoanoqV 1,6.[11]; 5,18; 8,[26]; 10,[2]; 15,[17]; 16,[19].[24]. 11170,5.10.18;
71,17; 76,10; 81,21; 88,2; 89,11.15; 92,10.16.23; 94,9; 100,15;
106,4.13.25; 107,3.8; 112,4; 113,[15].19. BG 80,8.14; 83,11; 93,11;
102,[1].13; 103,11.14; 104,3; 113,10; 116,[4].10; 120,9.
G REEK LO A N W ORDS 205
XoYiqxoi; III 73,11; 78,8; 83,8 twice; 96,7; 102,24.

Kayoq III 83,10; 87,18; 111,24. BG 113,4.
HaOriTeoeiv. MêHTeye III 90,18. BG 77,14.

HaGritnqlll 90,17; 105,3; 106,9; 114,10; 119,[11].[14], BG 77,12; 100,4;
102,8; 117,14; 127,6.
Haicdpu*; V 3,[1]. Ill 70,1; 72,19; 73,[1]; 74,10; 90,12; 95,12.16; 119,[9].
BG 85,16; 86,3; 126,17.
jiavteia. m j l n t h III 91,1. BG 78,1. (reflecting an Ionic form; see LSJ, s.v.)
V 7,[10]; 8,[6]. Ill 78,9; 103,1. BG 96,19.
Hepoi; V 14,21.[22] twice.[24]. BG 119,8. M e p o y c BG 111,10.11. eic
M e p o c III 87,3 twice; 111,5.6.
jitivoeiv. M H N e y e III 106,8.
HovdqV 7,18.24. Ill 78,17.24; 103,9. BG 97,10.
Hovoyeviii; V 5,22.
Hopq>ii V 2,[18].[19]; 8,11.14; 15,16. Ill 72,4.5; 88,[1]; 91,11; 97,1;
103,17.18; 112,2. BG 78,13; 84,14.16; 87,19; 98,2.3; 113,8.
UDornpiov III 91,8. BG 78,9.
vifyeiv. n h <)> III 101,11. BG 94,14.

voeTv. Noei III 72,20; 73,20; 76,9.19; 90,1; 100,14; 101,4. N oeie III
95,12.13. n o T BG 85,18; 93,10; 94,4. A T N o e i V 3,[1]. Ill 72,19; 75,23.
BG 85,17. a t n o T BG 92,16. a r p N o e i III 100,5.
vow; V 3,10; 6,6; 7,6; 8,[2]; 9,[23]. Ill 73,9; 77,[2]; 78,6; 96,4; 102,21; 104,8.
BG 86,17; 96,14; 98,18.
6y8od<;. jo r A O ic V 14,[19]. Ill 102,4. BG 95,13; 114,6.

oiicovonia III 91,4.9; 92,5. BG 78,4.10; 80,2.
oXoq. z o a o j n III 96,[1].
ovo|ideiv. ONOMize III 86,16; 103,23. BG 110,9.
ovonaaialll 77,11.
ov V 4,15.
o-66e V 9,[33]. Ill 76,8; 81,19; 90,1; 100,14; 106,2. BG 93,9; 101,17.
ofiv V 2,[8]; 9,17; 10,13. BG 78,2.
owria III 96,23. BG 87,18.
owe V 2,11.12; 5,17; 8,24; 16,[12]. BG 83,8.9.10; 115,12.
m kiv III 106,9. BG 102,7.

Jta(i(i11XC0p.TTANMHTIOP 11182,21.
Jtavyevexeipa. T T A N re N e T ip a . Ill 82,5.22; 106,22. n a .N re N H T e ip a . BG
103,7.
Jtavyevextop III 82,17; 84,14.
7tdvao<po<; III 77,3; 82,20.
JtavtOKpdxwp III 107,3. BG 103,15; 119,9.
Jtdvxcix; V 5,23.
206 W ORD IN D IC ES
jcap0evo<; V 16,[9]. Ill 89,[1]; 113,6. BG 115,8.

jCTiyn V 3,15; 7,4. Ill 73,13; 96,9. BG 87,3.
jtiaxeueiv. n i c T e y e III 74,13.
m'anq V 4,[5]; 10,[12].14; 11,[4], HI 74,17; 78,4; 82,6.8; 83,[1]; 98,17;
106,24. BG 90,9; 103,9.
TtXavaaGai. t t a a n a III 74,5.
j&dvri V 6,14. Ill 77,9. BG 118,17.
nhx<s\ia BG 119,12.18.
TtXaaaeiv. n u c c i BG 97,17.19. p t t a a c c a III 103,15.16.
jcve6|i.a. WnT V 1,[19]; 11,[28]; 16,10. Ill 86,6; 89,2; 91,12; 96,21; 97,8;
102,12; 105,2; 113,6; 117,[16].21; 118,[12]; 119,[13].[16]. BG 78,15;
81,7; 87,16; 88,8; 96,3; 100,[2]; 109,17; 115,9; 119,2.7; 122,8;
123,11.19; 125,5; 127,4.
jt v e u n m iK o v III 82,9; 83,17. t in iic h V 10,16; 11,[24].
jtvoTi BG 121,4.
npoeivai. np 0 0 NT0 c III 75,8; 99,9.
npovoia V 1,[21]. Ill 70,20; 71,3; 91,5; 93,2.14; 108,16; 119,2. BG 78,5;
81,9; 82,6; 106,9; 122,3; 126,8.
jcpojiaxcop III 74,[22]; 75,2; 98,24; 99,1. BG 90,17.
npoq V 6,[22]; 9,10. Ill 77,17; 88,17; 102,5; 112,16. BG 95,13; 114,8.
nponoyeveTeipa. npiuToreNe-npA III 82,23; 104,17. npoToreNeTeipa
BG 99,10.
jcpcoToyevetcop III 81,10; 82,16; 83,23; 85,13; 104,15; 105,11.
n p o T o r e N e T t u p BG 99,7.14; 100,12; 108,4.
jcpcoToyevriTO*;. np 0 T<0 >reNHT0 c BG 99,<4>.
jt6X.t| BG 121,18.
ncbqlll 74,17; 95,20; 98,17; 100,18; 103,23; 106,11. BG 86,7; 90,2.9; 93,14;
98,9; 102,<9>.
oapiavoqlll 108,14. BG 106,7.

adp III 91,15.16. BG 79,2.4.
myn V 15,21. Ill 88,8.9; 112,8; 117,17.21.
ao<pva V 6,8.9; 8,[32]; 9,4; 10,[5].[12].15; ll.[3].[4]; 15,[21]; 16,18.11177,4;
81,23; 82,5.8.20.21.22.24 twice; 83,1; 88,6; 89,9; 90,14; 101,16; 102,13;
104,11.17; 106,16.23; 107,7.19.24; 113,13; 114,14; 119,18. BG 77,8;
95,1; 96,5; 99,[2]. 11; 102,17; 103,7; 104,1.17; 105,6; 109,3; 116,1;
118,[2]; 120,16; 127,11.
ajcopa III 93,20. BG 82,13.
OT8peG)|i.a V 12,[28].[30]; 13,[2]; 16,16. Ill 84,23; 85,[1].3; 88,15; 89,7;
112,16; 113,12. BG 114,7; 115,17.
axpaxia V 16,[5]. Ill 88,22; 113,3. BG 115,5.
oro^vyi'a BG 95,3.
ox>i\)yoq. cY N Zyroc V 8,[31]; 10,6.14. Ill 77,6; 81,23; 82,8; 88,7; 89,9;
101,16; 102,14; 104,11; 106,17; 113,14; 114,15. BG 102,17; 116,2.
avUpoAov HI 117,19.24. BG 123,16; 124,5.
G REEK LOAN W ORDS 207
ovH<pcoveiv. cyM<t>(ONei III 70,16; 81,22; 82,7; 83,12; 92,22. c y m <|>u)ni III
71,10; 86,4. BG 81,4; 102,16; 109,14. pcym ûjni V 2,[5].
ovjiq>a>vn<Ji<;. c y n ôjnhcic III 83,2.
aX%iaV 15,16. Ill 88,[1]; 112,2. BG 113,8.
ooifia III 97,10. BG 88,9.
owrnp V 10,[9].13; 12,16; 13,14. Ill 82,2.7; 84,[2].8; 85,14; 91,7.10.24; 92,6;
94,4.14; 95,21; 96,15.18; 98,12; 100,[2]. 18.20; 105,9; 106,15.20; 107,22;
108,17.20; 112,21; 113,1; 114,13; 119,9. BG 78,8.12; 79,13; 80,3; 83,5;
86,9; 87,9; 90,4; 92,13; 93,16; 100,10; 102,15; 103,4; 105,3; 106,11.14;
107,17; 108,6; 114,14; 115,1; 118,1; 126,18. cajp B G 83,19; 87,12. cp
V 12,9.12.
xeteux; in 72,23. xeXeiov III 91,17. TeA joc V 7,10; 13,5. Ill 78,10;
95,15.20.21; 96,18; 98,12; 100,19; 105,8; 106,14; 108,19; 112,24;
114,13; 118,4. BG 79,5; 86,2.8.9; 87,12; 90,3; 93,16; 100,9; 102,14;
106,14; 107,17; 114,[18]; 117,18; 124,11. tcaion III 103,2. BG 97,[1];
107.9.
xepJteoGai IH 89,21. T e p n e UI 81,15. BG 101,2.13; 116,18. t c p t t h f f l
105,17.
n\ir\ IH 97,11; 108,2. BG 105,10.
Toitoqm 107,12. BG 104,8.
xote ffl 103,22; 108,16; 112,19; 119,10. BG 98,7; 106,10; 114,12.
Tpid;m 78,18
xpipii m 93,21; 108,11. BG 82,14; 106,4.
tojio? V 12,[3].[5].[6].[8].[10]; 12,14.19; 16,[21]. Ill 82,10; 83,21.23;
84,2.3.6.10; 89,13. BG 116,3.6.
wnipema III 77,22; 81,3; 84,16; 88,23; 105,1. BG 100,[1]. zwrepHcia. BG

107,6.
t>jtoaxa<n<; III 91,3; 92,4. BG 78,3; 80,1.
ikoxayn HI 71,16; 94,7. BG 83,9.
wxepTUia HI 85,8.
<piX6oo<po<; III 70,15; 92,20. BG 81,3.

<pp6vt|<n<; III 73,10; 78,8; 83,7 twice; 87,13.16; 96,5; 102,23. BG 96,17;
112.10.
<p\xn<; V 2,[12]; 16,[4].[24]. Ill 71,16; 74,9; 88,20; 89,15; 94,7; 113,19. BG
83,10; 116,11.
<P<ooxnp V 10,[7].
Xavpeiv. x iip e V 1,3.

Xdoq V 13,20.27; 16,[23]. Ill 85,21; 86,3; 89,14.18; 113,18.20. BG 109,13;
116,10.12; 118,14; 119,10; 120,9; 121,10.
X apiqBG 88,12; 122,18.
XpTlOXO*;. MNTXPHCTOC III 97,4. MNTXC" BG 88,2.
208 W ORD IN D ICES
Xpovoq V 4,[24]; 12,[5], HI 83,22.

XrnpeTv. xiupi III 117,[10].[13]; 118,1.
xiruxn BG 120,1.3.
\|toxik6<;BG 121,6.
(bq V 3,14.[19]; 16,[3]. Ill 73,22; 74,3; 98,7; 119,6. BG 89,11.16; 126,14.
mote V 12,[29]. Ill 74,4; 83,14; 84,19.24.
PRO PER NOUNS
a a a m . aaam ttba a . M ir o Y o ( e )iN V 9,[23]. Ill 105,12. BG 100,14;

108.10. aaa m na. n o y o e iN III 81,12.
B A p e o A .o M A io c III 103,22. BG 98,8.
r x \ \ \ a i a III 90,19; 91,20. BG 77,15; 79,9.
eyrN ajcT oc V 1,[1]; 17,[18]. Ill 70,1; 90,12.
u j m a c 11196,14; 108,17. BG 87,8; 106,11.
TA A A A B A C U d BG 119,16.
ih c o y c . m e" III 119,18. m e " nexpc" III 90,14. BG 127,12. Ic" nexe BG
77,8.
M A e e A io c III 94,1; 100,17. m a s a i o c BG 82,19; 93.13.

m a p iz a m m h III 98,10; 114,9. m a p i z a m BG 90,1; 117,13.
c o <)>i a V 6,8.9; 8,[32]; 9,4; 10,[5]; 15,[21]; 16,18. Ill 81,23; 88,6; 89,9;
101,16; 102,13; 104,11; 106,16; 107,7.19.24; 113,13; 114,14. BG 95,1;
96,5; 99,[2]; 102,17; 104,1.17; 105,6; 109,3; 116,1; 118,[2]; 120,16.
a t a t t h c o < t A V 11,[3]. Ill 82,24. T T A N r e N e T ip A c o <1>i a III 82,22;
106,22. c o < t A n a N r e N e ( o r h ) t ( c ) i p a III 82,5. BG 103,7. t ia n m h -

Tto p co < t> iA III 82,21. n A N c o < t > o c co<t>iA III 82,20. t t a n c o <|>o c
co<t>iA N r e N e T e i p A III 77,3. n i c n c co < t> iA V 10,[12].14; 11,[4].
Ill 82,8; 83,[1]. n p t o ( o r o)T oreN eT (e)ipA co t>iA III 82,23. BG
99.10. c o < t A N n p t o T o r e N C T ip A III 104,17.
< t> iA in n o c III 92,4; 95,19. BG 79,18; 86,6.
x p ic t o c . x p c III 104,22. x c BG 99,9.16; 101,9; x c where it is perhaps an

error for I c (i.e., x o e i c , q.v.): BG 83,1; 86,7; 87,9; 90,2; 100,4; 102,8;
106,11; 114,14; 117,13. ( x c in BG 112,15 four times, and 112,17 twice,
is clearly an error.) See further m c o y c .
PA PY R U S O X Y R H Y N C H U S 1081
GREEK FRAGMENT OF THE SOPHIA OF JESUS CHRIST
IN T R O D U C T IO N
P. Oxy. 1081 is closely parallel to both S/C -III, from 97,16 to 99,12, and
SJC-BG, from 88,18 to 91,15. It is related, but less closely, to the parallel
sections of the two Eug texts.
P. Oxy. 1081 was first edited and published by Hunt in 1911 (16-19), who
was not aware of its connection with the as yet unpublished 5/C-BG .
Wessely republished it 13 years later; he depended on the Hunt collation, but
added some restorations.1
In 1950 Puech identified the papyrus as a fragment of SJC (98, n.2; see
also 1963: 245). Till included edited portions of the text in his edition of BG,
but made no attempt to publish the complete text: he considered P. Oxy. 1081
too fragmentary to help with understanding the Coptic of 5/C -B G and parr.
(1955: 216) and expected Puech himself soon to publish a new edition of the
papyrus (1955: 53). That edition never appeared. In 1975, Attridge pub
lished an edition based on infrared photographs, taking into account all the
relevant Coptic texts with the exception of Eug-V, which is less useful than
the other texts mentioned above.
I began working on P. Oxy. 1081 in 1970 in preparation for this volume,
and at the suggestion of Alan Sparks, then Associate Director of the Institute
for Antiquity and Christianity in Claremont, I wrote to Peter Parsons of
Christ Church, Oxford, with the request that he examine the papyrus directly
and respond to my queries. This he graciously did in May 1971 and again in
November of the following year (in response to follow-up questions). More
recently Attridge generously lent me the photographs he used in his edition.
The text and translation published here, then, are the result of the rework
ing of the fragmentary text in the light of the earlier editions (especially that
of Attridge), with the aid both of the observations and suggestions of Parsons
and of Attridges photos. The numerous differences from earlier editions are
discussed in the notes.
The MS consists of three large fragments of one leaf from a papyrus codex,
with writing on both sides. The largest (A) measures 15.9 x 5.7 cm. The
next in size (B) is 12.9 x 5.1 cm. The smallest (C) is 6.5 x 5.8 cm. A has
the remains of the text along most of the inside margin, starting with the top
lines. B has the remains along with outside margin for the middle half of
the page. And C has what remains of the bottom of the page. The
1Hunts text was reprinted by E. Klostermann, and Wesseleys, by A. De Santos Otero.

210 PAPY RU S O XY RH Y N CH U S 1081
verso/recto designation given to sides one and two respectively by Hunt is

misleading as these terms are used today, since, in the codex from which the
leaf came, side one would have been the recto and side two the verso. The
recto has the vertical fibers, while the verso has the horizontal. It is evident
from a calculation of the average size of extant letters that those restored with
certainty in the lacuna between the lower part of B and C require a space
3 to 4 mm. wider than that provided in the present fragment placement. The
additional space (created by moving B) would also straighten the lines that
run between A and B, which now would, if written out, appear slightly
bowed.
In view of the above, the MS measurement given by Hunt (20.3 x 10.7
cm.) must be modified to 20.3 x 11.1 cm. The average length of the lines
whose beginnings and endings are extant (16 in all) is 9 cm., according to
Attridge; but this also must be changed by the addition of 4 mm. The MS is
located in the Library of Cambridge University, where it has been given the
acquisition number 5894. Paleographic evidence suggests that it is to be
dated early in the 4th century.
Attridge holds that the text of P. Oxy. 1081 is closer to that of 5/C-III
than 5/C -B G (8). He cites four instances where P. Oxy. 1081 agrees with
SJC-Ul against 5/C-BG: line 7 (III 97,21-22; BG 89,5-7); line 9 (III 97,23;
BG 89,7); line 25 (III 98,10; BG 90,2); and line 26 (III 98,11; BG 90,2).
Line 7 involves a shift of a phrase from one part of the sentence to another;
line 9 involves a difference in tenses (but in fact there is no agreement among
any of the texts here, and similar minor tense differences are found elsewhere
also); line 25 has to do with the difference between I c and x c , which might
be accounted for on the basis of individual scribal error, since confusion over
these terms is widespread; and line 26 involves a difference of pronominal
subject, which might be the result of dittography (see BG 90,2n.). Of these,
then, only the first may be significant.
As to the agreements between P. Oxy. 1081 and 5/C -B G against 5/C-III,
Attridge cites only two: line 11 (BG 89,10-11; III 98,1-2) involving the
difference of the number of the pronominal subject, which, as he says, is not
significant in this instance; and line 34 (misidentified by him as line 35) (BG
90,12; III 98,19), where there is a minor addition in 5/C -III, which is prob
ably a scribal gloss, as Attridge says. Neither of these can be considered
significant. There are two other agreements, overlooked by him, where
P. Oxy. 1081 and 5/C -B G have a phrase in common that is omitted in
5/C-III: line 18-19 (BG 89,16-17; III 98,7); and line 38 (BG 90,17-18; DI
98,24). Since the omissions in 5/C -III in these instances could be explained
as the result of homoioteleuton, one can say only that a special connection
between P. Oxy. 1081 and 5/C -B G is possible.
P. Oxy. 1081, then, is a text that is very close to the two Coptic texts of
5/C. Its special affinities to one or the other of those texts seem too minor to
permit a judgment about which one is closer to the Greek.
PA PY R U S O X Y R H Y N C H U S 1081 211
PAPYRUS OXYRHYNCHUS 1081

Fragment of SJC
( = NHC III 97,16-99,12; BG 88,18-91,15;
NHC III 73,16-75,11; NHC V 3,15^1,25)
[ xoiq |i.eta tau]

Vertical ta yeyovooi [v. eiq 8e]
Fibers 2 to e|A<paveq [otK e n e]
X.tiX,u0eiaav. [8ia<po]
4 p a te noAA.ri [n.etab]
tcov d<p0dp|r](pY. [o 8 e<pa>]
6 vei o excov S ta t[<bv a]

Ttepavttov [a]Ko[i)ei]v a
8 Kovetco Ka[i] tou; eypr)
yopou aiv [ey] XaXcb. e ti
10 npo [o0ei<; e]?jiev nav
to Ye[ivo|ie]vov aito
12 tn*; [(pQopaq] anoyei
ve t[a i (be; ajt]o <p0opa<;
14 yeylovo*;- to] 8eye[i]v6
Line 1, Att restores [ox>8k eiq]. For restoration here of movable v, see BDF sec. 20.
Line 2, Att restores e|i(pave[<; avxot r\]. For the position of the negative, relative of the verb,
see BDF sec. 433. ii is incorrect as the augment of the pluperfect in this case.
Line 4, xe may be a mistake for 8e. Att restores [fjv evxoq]. The use of the imperfect con
trasts with the Coptic of SJC. Regarding evxoq, Crum cites no instance where the Coptic par.,
oyTe, translates evxo<;. As Att himself notes, o y tc is commonly used to translate jiexaû.
Line 5, v: so also Att. H brackets it. The top of the left stroke is visible. Att restored [o 8e
(p]|vei. However, since the Coptic calls for an imperfect tense, he has in correspondence sug
gested the restoration adopted here. H restored [xuyxdjvei at the suggestion of Swete.
Lines 6- 8, o . . . d K o u ex co : S/C-III has the exact par. (97,20-22) in contrast to BG.
Line 6, Both H and Att bracket the first x. However, the photo shows the tip of the right end
of the crossbar.
Line 8, Both H and Att show the second x as certain. However all that remains is 1 mm. of
the right portion of a horizontal line, which would be compatible also with n. Att is undoubtedly
correct that e should be read rather than a (H) before ypT|, although the traces are not as clear-cut
as he indicates.
Line 9, oua: Att considers all as certain. H correctly places a dot under a. Only a trace of
the bottom of the u remains. Only a bit of the left side of the curve of the o remains, which
would be compatible also with e or a. Of the a only the top and bottom ends of the curve remain,
which would be compatible also with e.
Line 10, rcpo[a0ei<;: restored by W.
2 12 PAPYRUS O XY RH Y N CH U S 1081
|xev[ov onto] d<p[6]ap

16 criaq [ot>K djto]Yei'v[etai]
aXX,[a |x]ev[ei] a<p[0ap]
18 tov ax; ano a[<p]0[ap<ri]
[a]q yeyovoq. [q]t[e JtX.fi]
20 [0oq] t v dy[0p]co[jKov]
ercX*xvn0[r|aav Kai]
22 |i.ri ei56t[eq rr|v 8ia]
<p[o]pav ta [u tt|v arce]
24 0avov. [Xiyei 8e aika>]
Horizontal [M apid|i ot]i ice n&q ovv
Fibers 26 [ ta u ta yiv]<paKO|i.ev; Xive[i]
[o teXfiioq a](ornp 8ieX.0e
28 [te ajto ta>v] d<pav<bv Ka[i]
[eiq t]o xe[Xo]q tv (paivo
Line 16, Att inadvertently omitted the bracketing of the last four letters (acknowledged in
correspondence).
Line 19, Last half of line: [. ] x[ive<;] (H followed by T-S); [ ] ji[Aji0o] (Att). x seems more
likely than n since the portion of the crossbar to the left of the vertical (all that can be seen) is
longer than the crossbars of most of the rcs in the m s . Both H and Att accepted the placement of
the two fragments involved, relative to each other. When they are further separated by 3 or 4
mm. (see introductory discussion), then it becomes possible to make the restoration preferred by
Att and incorporated above. It also makes unnecessary Atts unlikely word division.
Line 20, Initial lacuna: H (followed by T-S) restores only two letters (8e). Att rightly finds
room for three (<; 8e).
Line 21, re: considered certain by H and Att, but all that remains is 1 mm. of the bottom of
the left leg. It would be compatible also with t , k , v etc.
Line 22, |jl: considered certain by H and Att, but much of it has been lost to holes and
flaking, and what remains is only a bit of the beginning and end and a small part of the center.
Lines 22-24, jif|. . . [cwte]0avov: Restorations made by T-S.
Line 23, 9 : considered certain by H and Att, but remaining traces would be compatible also
with \|f.
Line 24, An historical present is restored because of AiyEt in line 26 (so too Att), but note
the aorist in line 10.
Line 26, yiv]axTKO^v: late form (see BDF: sec. 34 [4]). T-S and Att restore Yiyv]cpaKO^V
(Att omits the dot). All that remains of the co is a 2 mm. vertical portion of its right side, which
made it possible for H to reconstruct t.
e: considered certain by H and Att, but only a portion of the curve remains and there is no
sign of the horizontal strokes. An 0 or a could also be read.
Line 28, ano: ek (Att); 81a (T-S). For ano rather than eic, see BDF: sec. 209. Regarding
8ta, Crum cites no instance of the Coptic x in (HI 98,13; BG 90,5) being used to translate it
(773a).
PA PY RU S O X Y R H Y N C H U S 1081 213
30 [|ie]va>Y koci oott) t| arcofp]

poia rrjfq e]vvoia<; a v a
32 Seiêi t>[|ii]v n&q r| Tciaxfiq]
xcov [a]8ri[X]cov
e\>p[et]e[oc x]f| <paivo|LiE
34 vr\ xox> <xy[evvti]to'd Spq.
o excov fiyz[a ockouJeiv a
36 kodetco. [o xcov oAJcov 8e
GTcoxriq oft) KaAixa]i Tip a k
38 Xa 7cpo7ca[xcop o ya]p itp [ap]
Line 29, Att brackets the first o, but a bit of the bottom of the letter is visible. H restores
[ei]<; to (incorrectly reported by Att), which leaves too much unfilled space in the lacuna, as H
admits. T S suggests, as an alternative to H, ei]<; xe[Xo]<; (incorrectly reported by Att).
Line 30, W, T-S and Att incorrectly accent aurri as a demonstrative. H, W, and Att do not
restore p at the end of the line, perhaps because of concern that the letter would have been
beyond the margin established by the scribe. But the vertical side shows the scribe exercising
considerable freedom regarding the right margin, and there is thus no reason to think that he
would not have done the same on the horizontal side when necessary. T-S restores p.
Line 32, Att inadvertently omitted the bracketing of the last two letters of the line
(confirmed in corresondence).
Words between dashes are in the left margin of the m s . A s to whether any letters preceded
xcov, H says it is not certain, but there is a speck of ink over the co, and the margin above is
imperfect. Att claims to see more than H and on that basis reconstructs [r|] eic. But a close
examination of the photos suggests that the ink traces Att describes are mostly shadows seen
through tiny holes in the papyrusholes resulting in part from the flaking off of the vertical layer
of papyrus on the opposite side of the leaf. The few genuine ink specks may have been either
random drops from the scribes pen, or the remains of a sign indicating an insertion, or the
remains of the fem. article relating the phrase attributively to r| mcxiq, or blotting from the oppo
site page.
Line 33, trj cpaivojiEvi], through that which appears*: Att suggests the reference is to r|
drcoppoia, the emanation, but that would yield doubtful sense in the context. A more likely
reference is TreNe* eTe mn mntppo zixcoc cboa , the Generation over Whom There Is No
Kingdom (III 99,18-20), i.e., the community of those who belong to Unbegotten Father (III
99,22-100,2).
Line 34, x: so also Att, but H reconstructs k . All that remains is 3 mm. of the right side of
the crossbar, but it is angled up about 20 degrees, unlike any other x found in the m s . As Att
notes, the presence of the Greek loanword in both versions of SJC seems to resolve the uncer
tainty of the trace. The scribe may have been forced by an imperfection in the papyrus to make
the top of his vertical stroke lower than usual, and then the crossbar was used to reestablish the
former line level. T-S reconstructs dy[evTi]xoD (omitting a dot under the x).
Line 35, e: so also H, but considered certain by Att. All that remains is the right tip of the
horizontal stroke.
Line 36, cp: considered certain by H and Att, but all that remains is the right curve, which
would be compatible also with o.
e: considered certain by H and Att, but only 2 mm. of the horizontal stroke remains.
214 PA PY RU S O X Y R H Y N CH U S 1081
Xil e[o]t[iv Tv nJeXXov
40 tcov [<pai'veo0av. efreivofq]
[8e o avapxoq jtpo]jidxa)[p].

42 [eioopa)]v aw toy [e]v ea\)x[(p]
[eao7tT]p(p- o|i[oio<;] eat)
44 [xco <paiv]exav at[xot) 8e]
[to o|i]o[v'(o](Jia av[e<pdvr| <;]
46 [jip07tdT](pp 0q ir jlp ] K[ai]
[avramo^ e]jti avx[(o]m[xo]
48 [xqj 7cpoov]xi dyevynT[(p]
[jcpTT iooxpovo]^ ixevTow
Line 38, Att inadvertently omitted the bracketing of the last two letters of the line.
Line 39, v: considered certain by H and Att, but only the left stroke is visible. It would be
compatible also with i.
Lines 40-41, v: considered certain by H and Att, but all that is visible is the top 2 mm. of
the left stroke.
Att restores 8e at the end of line 40 rather than in line 41, and omits the article in line 41. The
result is that line 40 is longer in his reconstruction than one would expect, while line 41 is
shorter.
Line 43, Att has Eiaorcxpcp, but eaoicxpcp is the more common form. Att restores e[a\)x], but
remains of both a and x>are clear in the photo.
Line 45, Att restores [ojioi]co[|ia]xa &v[a<paivei]. Although he makes no attempt to restore
the words, H records cp after the first lacuna, and fi immediately after the second. What remains
of the letter after the first lacuna is about of a circle, with the opening where one would expect if
it were the right half of an co. But the curve is rounder than with most of the cos in the text and
more resembles that of an o. In addition, there are signs in the photo of flaking where the
remainder of the circle would have been if the letter were an o.
As to what appears after the second lacuna, Att thinks he sees not the beginning of a \i but the
tail of an a (although he does not dot the a in his transcription). But a s in this text mosdy have
the long stroke steeply angled to the end of the tail, whereas the remnant is horizontal. It is cer
tainly not the beginning of a p., but is, in all likelihood, the end of one. The space between |f and
a is 2 mm. and does not offer room for the x proposed by Att. The vertical line he describes is
very uncertain, and there is no sign of a crossbar, which would be expected. The reconstruction
offered above agrees in number with the Coptic.
Atts reconstruction of the present active form of avowpai'vev disagrees with the Coptic,
which calls for an aorist and in BG, probably a middle (see BG 91,8n.). The reconstruction
adopted above, although passive in form, is understood as a middle (see Smyth: sec. 814), and is
compatible with the Coptic perfect without a reflexive pronoun in 5/C-III.
Line 46, cp: so also H, but considered certain by Att. All that remains is about 1 mm. of the
middle section of the curve on the right side. It would be compatible also with o, 0, and (p.
Att brackets k , overlooking the remains of the foot of the right leg, which had been seen by
H. Att places av, from avxamcx;, at the end of the line.
Line 47, dvx[co]7ci[xo]: Att restores dvx[co]7c[ei x<p]. Remains of the mid-portion of i are
clear. A Greek imperfect middle is called for (see III 75,8).
Line 48, Att puts the article in the preceding line, making his reconstruction of the first
PA PY R U S O X Y R H Y N C H U S 1081 215
50 [ovtoq repo at]To[\) (ptoxo^]
TRANSLATION
[ to those] that came to be

Vertical [afterward. But] they had not yet come
Fibers 2 [to] visibility.
Now there is a great difference
4 [among]
the imperishables. [Then he called out,]
6 Whoever has ears [to]
[hear] about the infinities,
8 let him hear. And I speak to those who
are awake. Still
10 [continuing] he said: All
that [comes] from
12 the [perishable] passes away,
[since] it [came] from the perishable.
14 But what comes
[from] imperishableness
16 [does not pass away]
but [remains] imperishable,
18 since it came from [imperishableness].
[So, many]
20 [men]
went astray, [and,]
22 not knowing
[this] difference, they died.
lacuna here too short.

Line 50, The second visible letter could be either o>or o, as Att notes.
Att reconstructs to line 52 thus: [itpodp%ovxo<;] xcp[v <pa)] | [xtbv aXka avoiioioi; 5uv]| [ajiei].
It is not clear that MneTZA TeqezH would have translated itpoapxovxoi;, and n n o y o Tn is
much more likely a translation of a sing, than a pi. (see IH 99,11).
216 PAPY RU S O XY RH Y N CH U S 1081
24 [And Mary said to him:]

Horizontal Lord, how then
Fibers 26 do we know [that? The perfect] Savior said:
Come
28 [from] invisible things even
[to the end] of those that are visible,
30 and the very emanation
of Thought will show
32 [you] how faithin the invisibles
must be found through that which appears
34 of [Unbegotten] Father.
Whoever has ears to [hear], let
36 him hear. [The] ruler [of everything]
[is not called] Father but
38 Forefather. For [the] Father [is the beginning]
[of those that] are
40 [to appear; but] that one is
[the beginningless] Forefather.
42 [Seeing] himself within himself
[in a mirror], he [appears]
44 [like] himself, [but his likeness]
[appeared as]
46 [Forefather], Divine Father, [and]
[Confronter], since [he] was confronting
48 [First Existent] Unbegotten
[Father]. [He is] indeed [of equal age] with the one
50 [before him, who is light]
NAG HAMMADI STUDIES
VOLUME X X V I
NAG HAMMADI STUDIES
ED ITED BY

FREDERIK WISSE
IN CONJUNCTION W IT H
A le x a n d e r B o h lig - J e a n D o re s s e - S 0 re n G iv ersen
H a n s J o n a s - R o d o lp h e K a s s e r - P a h o r Labib
G e o r g e W . M a c R a e - J a c q u e s -E . M e n a r d
T o r g n y S a v e -S o d e rb e rg h
R. McL. W ils o n - J a n Z a n d e e
XXVI
GENERAL ED ITO R O F T H E COPTIC g n o s t i c l i b r a r y
JAM ES M. ROBINSON
LEIDEN
E. J. BRILL
19 8 4
THE COPTIC GNOSTIC L IBR A R Y
EDITED W ITH ENGLISH TRANSLATION, INTRODUCTION AND NOTES
pub lish ed under the auspices o f
NAG HAMMADI CODEX

111,5
THE D IA LO G U E OF THE SAVIO R
CONTRIBUTORS
S t e p h e n E m m el - H e l m u t K o e s t e r - E l a in e P ag els
VOLUME EDITOR
ST E P H E N EMMEL
LEIDEN
E . J . B R IL L
1984
ISBN 90 04 07558 5
, ,
Copyright 1984 by E. J . Brill Leiden The Netherlands
A ll rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or

PR IN T E D IN T H E NETH ERLA N D S BY E . J . B RILL

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foreword James M. Robinson.......................................... vii
Preface Stephen Emmel....................................................xi
Table of Tractates in the Coptic Gnostic Library . . . . xiii
Abbreviations and Short T i t l e s .......................................... xv
Introduction...................................................................... i
Helmut Koester and Elaine Pagels
The Manuscript..................................................................19
Stephen Emmel
Text and Translation........................................................ 37
Stephen Emmel
Indexes............................................................................... 97
I. Words of Egyptian O rig in .......................................... 98
II. Words of Greek D e riv a tio n ..................................... 116
III. Proper N a m e s ........................................................ 119
IV. Grammatical F o r m s ............................................... 119
FOREWORD
The Coptic Gnostic Library is a complete edition of the Nag
Hammadi Codices, of Papyrus Berolinensis 8502, and of the Askew
and Bruce Codices, comprising a critical text with English transla
tions, introductions, notes, and indices. Its aim is to present these texts
in a uniform edition that will promptly follow the appearance of The
Facsimile Edition of the Nag Hammadi Codices and that can be a
basis for more detailed technical and interpretive investigations. Fur
ther studies of this sort are expected to appear in the monograph series
Nag Hammadi Studies of which the present edition is a part.
The gnostic religion was not only a force that interacted with early
Christianity and Judaism in their formative periods, but also a sig
nificant religious position in its own right. General acceptance of this
modern insight had been seriously impeded by the scarcity of original
source material. Now this situation has been decisively altered. It is
thus under a sense of obligation imposed by the discovery of these
largely unique documents that the present edition has been prepared.
This edition is a project of the Institute for Antiquity and Chris
tianity, Claremont, California. The translation team consists of Har
old W. Attridge, J. W. B. Barnst, Hans-Gebhard Bethge, Alexander
Bohlig, James Brashler, G. M. Browne, Roger A. Bullard, Peter A.
Dirkse, Stephen Emmel, Joseph A. Gibbons, Soren Giversen,
Charles W. Hedrick, Wesley W. Isenberg, T. O. Lambdin, Bentley
Layton, Violet MacDermot, George W. MacRae, Dieter Muellert,
William R. Murdock, Douglas M. Parrott, Birger A. Pearson, Mal
colm L. Peel, James M. Robinson, William C. Robinson, Jr.,
William R. Schoedel, J. C. Shelton, John H. Sieber, John D. Turner,
Francis E. Williams, R. McL. Wilson, Orval S. Wintermute,
Frederik Wisse, and Jan Zandee.
The project was initiated in 1966 with only a limited number of
tractates accessible, but rapidly developed as the texts became increas
ingly available. In view of the fact that the bulk of the material in
Codices I-VI had at that time either been published or announced for
imminent publication in complete editions in other languages, the edi
tion in the Coptic Gnostic Library was envisaged in the complemen
tary role of providing merely English translations in a single volume,
Vlll FOREWORD
which in subsequent planning was then envisaged as two volumes. It

was at this stage that preliminary announcements were made in New
Testament Studies 16 (1969/70), 185-90 and Novum Testamentum
12 (1970), 83-85, reprinted in Essays on the Coptic Gnostic Library
(Leiden: Brill, 1970). The publisher and editorial board of Nag
Hammadi Studies at their meeting in Uppsala, Sweden, in August
1973, recommended that the Coptic Gnostic Library edition be com
plete for Codices I-VI and P. Berol. 8502 as well as for Codices VII-
XIII. This plan was adopted by the volume editors at their September
I973 work session in Cairo. This resulted in Codices I-VI and P.
Berol. 8502 being planned for six, then nine volumes. They do not
correspond precisely to the seven codices, for it is preferable to publish
parallel texts together. After it was decided to include in Nag Ham
madi Studies a new English edition of the other Coptic gnostic codices
known previously, the Askew and Bruce Codices, the publisher in
cluded them in the Coptic Gnostic Library to make it complete.
The volumes and the editors of the Coptic Gnostic Library are as
follows: Nag Hammadi Codex I (The Jung Codex), Volume 1: Intro
duction, Texts and Translation; Volume 2: Notes, volume editor
Harold W. Attridge; Nag Hammadi Codices II,1 and IV ,1: The Apo-
cryphon ofJohn, Long Recension, volume editor Frederik Wisse; Nag
Hammadi Codex II,2-7, together with X III, 2*, Brit. Lib. Or. 4926(1)
and P. Oxy. 1, 654, 655, Volume 1: Gospel of Thomas, Gospel of
Philip, Hypostasis of the Archons, Indexes; Volume 2: On the Origin of
the World, Exegesis on the Soul, Book of Thomas, Indexes, edited by
Bentley Layton; Nag Hammadi Codex I I I, i and Papyrus Berolinen
sis 8502,2: The Apocryphon of John, Short Recension, volume editor
Frederik Wisse; Nag Hammadi Codices 111,2 and IV ,2: The Gospel oj
the Egyptians (The Holy Book of the Great Invisible Spirit), edited
by Alexander Bohlig and Frederik Wisse in cooperation with Pahor
Labib, NHS 4, 1975; Nag Hammadi Codices III, 3-4 and V,i with
Papyrus Berolinensis 8502,3: Eugnostos the Blessed and The Wisdom
of Jesus Christ, edited by Douglas M. Parrott; Nag Hammadi Codex
111,5 '. The Dialogue of the Savior, volume editor Stephen Emmel; Nag
Hammadi Codices V,2~5 and V I with Papyrus Berolinensis 8502,1
and 4, volume editor Douglas M. Parrott, NHS 11,1979; Nag Ham
madi Codex VII, volume editor Frederik Wisse; Nag Hammadi Co
dex V III, volume editor John H. Sieber; Nag Hammadi Codices IX
and X, volume editor Birger A. Pearson, NHS 15, 1981; Nag Ham
madi Codices X I, X I I and X III, volume editor Charles W. Hedrick;
FOREWORD ix
Nag Hammadi Codices: Greek and Coptic Papyri from the Carton-
nageofthe Covers, edited by J. W. B. Barnst, G. M. Browne, and J.
C. Shelton, NHS 16,1981; Pistis Sophia, text edited by Carl Schmidt,
translation and notes by Violet MacDermot, volume editor R. McL.
Wilson, NHS 9, 1978; The Books of feu and the Untitled Text in the
Bruce Codex, text edited by Carl Schmidt, translation and notes by
Violet MacDermot, volume editor R. McL. Wilson, NHS 13, 1978.
Thus, as now envisaged, the full scope of the edition is seventeen vol
umes. An English translation of all thirteen Nag Hammadi Codices
and P. Berol. 8502 has also been published in 1977 in a single volume,
The Nag Hammadi Library in English, by E. J. Brill and Harper &
Row. A first paperback edition of that preprint augmented by the
inclusion of Yale inv. 1784 of the Beinecke Library at NHC III
145/146 (p. 238) appeared in 1981. It was not possible to include
there subsequent improvements in translations. The translation ap
pearing in the present volume has been substantially revised.
The team research of the project has been supported primarily
through the Institute for Antiquity and Christianity by the National
Endowment for the Humanities, the American Philosophical Society,
the John Simon Guggenheim Memorial Foundation, and Claremont
Graduate School; and through the American Research Center in
Egypt by the Smithsonian Institution. Members of the project have
participated in the preparatory work of the Technical Sub-Commit
tee of the International Committee for the Nag Hammadi Codices,
which has been done at the Coptic Museum in Cairo under the spon
sorship of the Arab Republic of Egypt and UNESCO. The extensive
work on the reassembly of fragments, the reconstruction of page se
quence, and the collation of the transcriptions by the originals not
only served the immediate needs of the facsimile edition, but also pro
vided a basis for a critical edition. Without such generous support and
such mutual cooperation of all parties concerned this edition could not
have been prepared. Therefore we wish to express our sincere grati
tude to all who have been involved.
A special word of thanks is due to the Egyptian and UNESCO
officials through whose assistance the work has been carried on:
Gamal Mokhtar, President until 1977 of the Egyptian Antiquities
Organization, our gracious and able host in Egypt; Pahor Labib, Di
rector Emeritus, Victor Girgis, Director until 1977, and Mounir
Basta, Director since 1977 of the Coptic Museum, who together have
guided the work on the manuscript material; Samiha Abd El-Sha-
X FOREWORD
heed, First Curator for Manuscripts at the Coptic Museum, who is

personally responsible for the codices and was constantly by our side
in the library of the Coptic Museum; and, at UNESCO, N. Bam-
mate, Deputy Assistant Director General for the Social Sciences, Hu
man Sciences, and Culture until 1978, who has guided the UNESCO
planning since its beginning, and Dina Zeidan, specialist in the Arab
Program of the Division of Cultural Studies, who has always proved
ready with gracious assistance and helpful advice.
Richard E. Whitaker has done the page make up and prepared the
camera-ready copy for this volume on an Ibycus system using Coptic
characters produced by Whitaker and David W. Packard. Packard,
developer of the IBYCUS computer system, has given of his time and
skill with great generosity in fostering this project. The Institute for
Advanced Studies of Princeton has made available its printing facil
ities for the preparation of the camera-ready copy. The Coptic tran
scription was put in the computer system of the Institute for Antiquity
and Christianity on the basis of grants awarded by the Packard Foun
dation. We wish to express appreciation to all those involved in this
process.
We also wish to acknowledge our great indebtedness to the directors
of Brill during the years in which this volume was in preparation, F.
C. Wieder, Jr., Director Emeritus, the late T. A. Edridge, and Dr.
W. Backhuys, currently Managing Director.
J am es M . R obinson
PREFACE
When I was asked, during the summer of 1981, to prepare The
Dialogue of the Savior for publication in The Coptic Gnostic Library,
editorial responsibility for the text had already passed through several
pairs of hands. My task was to edit not just the Coptic text, but a
dossier of transcriptions and notes compiled across the years by vari
ous members of the Coptic Gnostic Library Project. I had been the
last member of this team of scholars to work extensively on the manu
script in Cairo; furthermore, a few years later it was my good fortune
to identify and publish the fragment of this manuscript hiding in the
Beinecke Library in New Haven, Connecticut. These circumstances
left me in a good position to accept responsibility for editing The Dia
logue of the Savior, and I thank James M. Robinson for providing me
with the opportunity to bring my work on this text to fruition.
This volumes introductory chapter by Helmut Koester and Elaine
Pagels was written in 1977. I am grateful for their willingness to re
vise it in light of subsequent work on the text and translation and in
view of the altered plans for publication.
The Dialogue of the Savior is of primary importance to the study of
the history of the transmission of the sayings of Jesus. It is the inten
tion of the present edition of the Coptic text to provide a reliable basis
on which all further study of The Dialogue of the Savior may build. I
dedicate this work to my father and to the memory of my mother.
St e p h en E m m el
TABLE OF TRACTATES IN THE
COPTIC GNOSTIC LIBRARY
The following table lists, for the thirteen Nag Hammadi Codices
and Papyrus Berolinensis 8502, the codex and tractate numbers, the
tractate titles as used in this edition (the titles found in the tractates
themselves, sometimes simplified and standardized, or, when the trac
tate bears no surviving title, one supplied by the editors), and the
abbreviations of these titles.
I,/ The Prayer of the Apostle Paul Pr. Paul

u The Apocryphon of James Ap. Jas.
1,3 The Gospel of Truth Gos. Truth
u The Treatise on the Resurrection Treat. Res.
1,5 The Tripartite Tractate Tri. Trac.
II,/ The Apocryphon of John Ap. John
II , 2 The Gospel of Thomas Gos. Thom.
H,J The Gospel of Philip Gos. Phil.
iu The Hypostasis of the Archons Hyp. Arch.
II ,5 On the Origin of the World Orig. World
11,6 The Exegesis on the Soul Exeg. Soul
11,7 The Book of Thomas the Contender Thom. Cont.
III,/ The Apocryphon of John Ap. John
111,2 The Gospel of the Egyptians Gos. Eg.
IH,3 Eugnostos the Blessed Eugnostos
111,4 The Sophia of Jesus Christ Soph. Jes. Chr.
111,5 The Dialogue of the Savior Dial. Sav.
IV,/ The Apocryphon of John Ap. John
IV, 2 The Gospel of the Egyptians Gos. Eg.
V,/ Eugnostos the Blessed Eugnostos
V, 2 The Apocalypse of Paul Apoc. Paul
V,J The (First) Apocalypse of James 1 Apoc. Jas
V,4 The (Second) Apocalypse of James 2 Apoc. Jas.

VI,/ The Acts of Peter and the Twelve Apostles Acts Pet. 12 Apost.
VI, 2 The Thunder: Perfect M ind Thund.
vi, 3 Authoritative Teaching Auth. Teach.
xiv TABLE OF TRACTATES
V I ,4 The Concept of our Great Power Great Pow.

V I,5 Plato, Republic 5886-5896 Plato Rep.
VI, 6 The Discourse on the Eighth and Ninth Disc. 8 - q
V I,7 The Prayer of Thanksgiving Pr. Thanks.
VI, 8 Asclepius 21-2Q Asclepius
V II,/ The Paraphrase of Shem Paraph. Shem
V II ,2 The Second Treatise of the Great Seth Treat. Seth
V II ,3 The Apocalypse of Peter Apoc. Pet.
V II ,4 The Teachings of Silvanus Teach. Silv.
V II ,5 The Three Steles of Seth Steles Seth
V III,/ Zostrianos Zost.
V III ,2 The Letter of Peter to Philip Ep. Pet. Phil.
IX ,/ Melchizedek Melch.
I X ,2 The Thought of Norea Norea
IX , 3 The Testimony of Truth Testim. Truth
X Marsanes Marsanes
X I,/ The Interpretation of Knowledge Interp. Know.
X I ,2 A Valentinian Exposition Val. Exp.
X I ,2a On the Anointing On Anoint.
XI,2b On Baptism A On Bap. A
X I ,2C On Baptism B On Bap. B
X I,2d On the Eucharist A On Euch. A
X I ,2e On the Eucharist B On Euch. B
X I ,3 Allogenes Allogenes
X I ,4 Hypsiphrone Hypsiph.
X II,/ The Sentences of Sextus Sent. Sextus
X II ,2 The Gospel of Truth Gos. Truth
X II, 3 Fragments Frm.
X III,/ Trimorphic Protennoia Trim. Prot.
X III ,2 On the Origin of the World Orig. World
B G ,/ The Gospel of Mary Gos. Mary
BG ,2 The Apocryphon of John Ap. John
BG , j The Sophia ofJesus Christ Soph. Jes. Chr.
b g ,^ The Act of Peter Act Pet.
ABBREVIATIONS AND SHORT TITLES
BASP Bulletin of the American Society of Papy-
rologists
Bohlig-Wisse, Gos. Eg. Alexander Bohlig and Frederik Wisse,
Nag Hammadi Codices 111,2 and IV ,2:
The Gospel of the Egyptians (The Holy
Book of the Great Invisible Spirit) (NHS
4; Leiden: Brill, 1975).
Facs. The Facsimile Edition of the Nag Ham
madi Codices, published under the aus
pices of the Department of Antiquities of
the Arab Republic of Egypt in conjunction
with the United Nations Educational, Sci
entific and Cultural Organization, 12 vols.
(Leiden: Brill, 1972-).
Hennecke-Schneemelcher Edgar Hennecke, New Testament Apoc
rypha, ed. Wilhelm Schneemelcher, trans.
R. McL. Wilson et al., vol. 1: Gospels and
Related Writings (Philadelphia: West
minster Press, 1963).
H TR Harvard Theological Review
NHC Nag Hammadi Codex
NHLibEng James M. Robinson and Marvin W.
Meyer (eds.), The Nag Hammadi Library
in English (San Francisco and Leiden:
Harper & Row and Brill, 1977).
NHS Nag Hammadi Studies
Wisse, Cod. Intro. Frederik Wisse, Nag Hammadi Codex
III: Codicological Introduction in Mar
tin Krause (ed.), Essays on the Nag Ham
madi Texts in Honour of Pahor Labib
(NHS 9; Leiden: Brill, 1975), pp. 225-38.
INTRODUCTION
H elm ut K o ester and E l a in e P a g el s
I. TITLE, AUTH O R, AND LITERARY CHARACTER
The title The Dialogue of the Savior occurs in the incipit (120:1)
and in the explicit (147:23). But the work begins with an address of
the Savior to his disciples that does not show any trace of the dialogue
scheme (Dial. Sav. 1-3 [120:3-124:22]).1 However, the main source
used by the author (first appearing in 4 [124:23]; see sec. II.A below)
is characterized by dialogues between Jesus and his disciples, of
whom Judas, Matthew, and Mary are frequently named explicitly.
Thus, the title Dialogue may derive from this main source. On the
other hand, the designation Savior is almost completely restricted to
passages composed by the final author, whereas the dialogue sections
use the designation Lord.
Nowhere does the author appear in the work, nor does the title
identify any author except the Savior, who (as the Savior or
Lord - the names Jesus or Jesus Christ never occur) is also the
main speaker, teacher, and revealer in most sections of the work. Also
missing is an indication of the setting in which the dialogue took place.
Only the apocalyptic vision (36-40 [134:24-137:3]; see sec. II.D be
low) must have contained a designation of a place, probably a high
mountain, though the text is defective at this point (135:1). It is, there
fore, not possible to determine whether or not this work was meant to
be a dialogue of Jesus with his disciples after the resurrection.
The several sections of the work exhibit great differences in style
and content. The work is, therefore, best seen as a compilation of vari
ous sources and traditions, or as the elaboration and expansion of an
older dialogue. The latter appears to us as the most plausible view,
because dialogue sections with a distinct style, genre, and language
'References to Dial. Sav. are first to the paragraph numbers of the translation
below, followed by more precise references in brackets to page and line numbers of the
Coptic text; all references are to Dial. Sav. unless otherwise noted. Quotations from the
text occasionally include material found only in the critical apparatus and footnotes to
the edition and translation below.
INTRODUCTION
can be identified quite easily. They are markedly different from other
sections in which longer monologues prevail, although the exact de
lineation of the different sections is sometimes made difficult by the
poor state of preservation of the text. The following is a tentative
analysis, listing the original dialogue sections and their secondary
additions:
Incipit (120:1) Title
1-3 (120:2-124:22) Introduction
4-14 (124:23-127:19) Dialogue, part I
15-18 (127:19-128:23) Creation myth
19-20 (128:23-129:16) Dialogue, part II
21-24 (129:16-131:18) Creation myth, continued
25 - 34 a (131 :i9 i3 3 :2i[?D Dialogue, part III
34b-35 ( I 33: I [?]- I 34: 4>
2 2
Wisdom list
36-40 (134:24-137:3) Apocalyptic vision
4i-io4a (137:3-146:20) Dialogue, part IV
104b (146:20-147:22) Concluding instructions
Explicit (147:23) Title
II. SOURCES AND TRADITIONS
A. A Dialogue between the Lord and his Disciples

These sections constitute the major source for the present work and
account for about 65% of its text. In its composition the dialogue fea
tures brief questions or statements of one of the individually named
disciples (sometimes also of all the disciples) and usually brief an
swers of the Lord. Several units comprise only one question and one
answer, thus resembling many of the sayings of The Gospel of Tho
mas. In other instances, several questions and answers form a
coherent unit discussing a particular topic. The final answer may
appear at the end in the form of a traditional saying, but sayings are
also used in an initial statement of the Lord, which is then elaborated
in the subsequent discussion, or in a question of a disciple. Parallels to
such sayings are found in the gospels of Matthew and Luke,
occasionally in John, and most frequently in The Gospel of Thomas.
The first of these units appears in 4-8 (124:23-126:5). Its theme is
no longer evident because of the poor state of preservation of the text.
The introductory question of Matthew is completely lost (4 [124:23-
125:1]), though the final answer of Jesus (here, and only here in the
IN TRO D U CTIO N 3
dialogue sections, designated both as Lord and as Savior) is clear
ly preserved in the form of a traditional saying: The lamp [of the
body] is the mind (8 [125:18-19]; cf. Matt 6:22-23, Luke 11:34-36,
Gos. Thom. 24X2 Typical for the hermeneutical process is the replace
ment of a metaphor in the saying by its interpretive equivalent. Thus
the lamp of the body is the eye becomes the lamp of the body is the
mind. and the following elaboration utilizes the contrasting pairs
body/heart and luminous/dark, most likely once more on the basis of
traditional sayings (cf. John 11:9-10, 12:35).
A question of the disciples (9 [126:6-8]), alluding to the saying
about seeking and finding (cf. Matt 7:7, Gos. Thom. 92, 94), opens a
new unit of the dialogue (9-12 [126:5-17]) which probably uses addi
tional sayings (cf. Gos. Thom. 33a). In a series of brief questions and
answers the argument isolates key terms from the traditional sayings
and arranges them in pairs: seek and reveal, listen and speak (cf. John
16:13), see and reveal.
The last unit of this first part of the dialogue (13-14 [126:17-
127:19]) is introduced by a question of Mary which utilizes a saying
about weeping and laughing (cf. Luke 6:21b, John 16:20, also Thom.
Cont. 145:5-8). The interpretation, in this instance taking the form of
a longer discourse of the Lord (14 [126:21-127:19]), resumes terms
from an earlier portion of the dialogue: body and mind, light and
darkness (for the latter, cf. Gos. Thom. 33b, John 12:35, Thom. Cont.
143:30-32); it concludes with a repetition of the initial topic weep
ing by quoting a phrase which appears frequently in the synoptic
gospels (Matt 8:12 etc.).
A fragment of the dialogue is inserted into the discussion of the
creation myth (see sec. B below). The initial question of Matthew (19
[128:23-129:3]) defies restoration, but the conclusion of the Lords an
swer (20 [129:12-16]) utilizes sayings for which there are parallels in
Mark 8:34, Gos. Thom. 2, 92, 94 (cf. also John 16:24). It is possible
that even 16 (127:22-128:11) reflects a traditional saying: the text of
128:2-5 0311be restored to read, And I say [to you, ... ] what you seek
[and] inquire after, [behold it is] within you (cf. Luke 17:21, Gos.
Thom. 92).
Marys question about a place (25 [131:19-21]) introduces the
third extant part of the older dialogue. Its core is a saying about the
References to Gos. Thom, are to the saying numbers which have become
standard (see the translation by Thomas O. Lambdin in N H LibEng, pp. 118- 3 0 , from
which quotations are taken).
4 INTRODUCTION
place of life (cf. Gos. Thom. 24). The composition of the questions
and answers in 25-30 (131:19-132:19) closely parallels the composi
tion of the dialogue in John 14:2-12. The conclusion (30 [132:15-19])
makes use of a saying about knowing oneself (cf. Gos. Thom. 3). The
parable of the stone and its interpretation (31-34 [132:19-134:1])
could also be based on older traditions and certainly employs apoca
lyptic materials (cf. Isa 24:18-20). For 133:15-16 see Gos. Thom. 50;
for 133:18-21 see John 1:11.14 and Gos. Thom. 28. In the transition to
the wisdom list (133:21-134:1; see sec. G below) the saying about light
and darkness (14 [127:1-6]) is repeated.
The last and most extensive part that is preserved from the dialogue
source (41-1048 [137:3-146:20]) is a topically arranged sequence of
sayings, discussions, and interpretations. It is, for the most part, com
posed of short units, consisting of one question and one answer only. If
the same topic seems to be reappearing in a subsequent unit, it is
probably due to catchword association of originally independent and
self-contained pieces of tradition. We will simply list them in the fol
lowing survey, noting parallels and adding brief comments, but with
out claiming to have achieved a complete analysis of the structure and
content.
41-46 (137:3-138:6): About the vision of God. No traditional say
ings are known which parallel the materials used here, but compare
John 14:8-9.
47-48 (138:6-10): The question asked in 47 is probably, Who will
rule over us? (cf. 49 [138:11-14]). Not more than a fragment of the
answer is preserved.
49-50 (138:11-20): About the rule of the governors. The answer
adds a saying about the bridal chamber; cf. Gos. Thom. 75.
51-52 (138:20-139:7): About the garments of life (cf. Gos. Thom.
37). The answer is expanded by a longer commentary.
53 (139:8-13): A remark by Mary points explicitly to three tradi
tional sayings known from Matt 6:34b, 10:10b, and John 13:16, Matt
10:24. An editorial comment praises Mary as a woman who had
understood completely. Here and elsewhere (see below, on 64 and
83) such statements by Mary seem to serve as summaries and as
transitions to new topics.
54 55 (I39:i3_2o): About the fullness (pleroma) and the deficiency.
56-57 (139:20-140:9): About the dead and the living. The question
uses a traditional saying (cf. Gos. Thom. 11); the answer is introduced
by the saying known from Gos. Thom. 17 (cf. 1 Cor 2:9).
INTRODUCTION 5
58-59 (140:9-14): Added ad vocem dead and living. For parallels
to the saying used here, cf. John 11=25, Gospel of the Egyptians (Cle
ment of Alexandria, Stromateis 3.9.63-64).3
60-63 (140:14-23): Two brief questions and answers about the
place, perhaps added to 59 (140:12) ad vocem truth (cf. also 62
[140:20-21]). For parallels see Gos. Thom. 24, and see above, on 25
(131:19-21).
64 (140:23-141:2): A praise of the Lord by Mary, marking the
transition to a new topic; see above, on 53.
65-66 (141:2-6): About the rest. For the saying used in the an
swer, compare Gos. Thom. 90, Matt 11:28; but Gos. Thom. 37 may be
the closest parallel.
67-68 (141:6-12): Added through catchword association; aban
don in 68 (141:9-10) and lay down in 66 (141:5-6) entail the same
Coptic verb.
69-70 (141:12-19): For the answer cf. James 5:3.
71-72 (141:19-142:4): Added ad vocem work (see 68 [141:10]).
The saying introduced by [Blessed] is the man . . . is probably tradi
tional, but the text is fragmentary.
73-74 (142:4-9): About the way. Cf. John 14:5.
75-76 (142:9-15): The structure of this question and its answer is
analogous to Gos. Thom. 51.
77-78 (142:16-19): Another saying about the place. See above, on
25 (131:19-21) and on 60-63.
79-80 (142:19-24): Restates the conclusion of an earlier part of the
dialogue; see above, on 9-12 (126:5-17).
81-82 (142:24-143:6): A request for instruction. Jesus is addressed
as Teacher. The text is very fragmentary.
83 (143:6-10): A statement by Mary, marking the transition to a
new section; see above, on 53 and 64.
84-85 (143:11-144:1): Another discussion of garments (cf. above,
on 51-52). The answer includes a longer commentary about the tran
sitory garments of the governors, but ends with a traditional saying
(143:21-144:1); cf. Gos. Thom. yj.
86-87 (I44;25): Only a few words are preserved.
88-89 (I44:5-I2): An interpretation of the parable of the mustard
seed; cf. Mark 4:30-32 and parallels, Gos. Thom. 20.
90-95 (144:12-145:7): A question about prayer (cf. Gos. Thom. 6)
^Fragments b and c in Hennecke-Schneemelcher, pp. 166-67.

6 INTRODUCTION
introduces several questions and answers about the works of woman

hood, certainly based on traditional sayings; cf. Gos. Thom. 114, Gos
pel of the Egyptians (see above, on 58-59).
96 (145:7-24): A secondary intrusion into the dialogue, presenting
an instruction about the path of the revealer.
97-98 (145:24-146:7): About the works; very fragmentary.
99-102 (146:7-13): Two brief parallel questions and answers about
the spirit and the light; the final answer is fragmentary.
103-1043 (146:13-20): Added ad vocem works (see above, on 97-
98). Parallels for the answer appear in John 6:28-29, 14:10-12.
104b (146:20-147:22): This section is the authors addition to the
dialogue source, but it seems to utilize a saying about seeking, rest,
and living forever which may have been the original conclusion of the
source; cf. John 6:63, 8:32, Gos. Thom. 1 and 2.
The dialogue source as a whole is based upon a tradition of sayings
of the Lord. The predominance of sayings with parallels in Gos.
Thom, suggests that this tradition is closely related to the older say
ings tradition which appears in that gospel. Individual sayings, orig
inally isolated, form the nucleus of the dialogical structure. Analogies
to this type of dialogue occur in the synoptic gospels as well as in Gos.
Thom. In contrast to the genre of the revelation discourse found in the
literary tradition of dialogical composition developed in such gnostic
works as The Sophia of Jesus Christ and Pistis Sophia, this source of
Dial. Sav. contains no elaborate theological discourses, nor is its com
position based upon the development of a philosophical or theological
concept. But there are analogies to the composition of the dialogues
and discourses in John, which also use sayings of Jesus as well as
other traditional materials. Indeed, some sections of this source of
Dial. Sav. belong to a stage in the development of dialogues from say
ings collections that is less advanced than the more elaborate analogies
in the fourth gospel. Usually the interpretation is focused on not more
than one or two sayings or terms derived from such sayings. Thus the
dialogue seems to satisfy the demand of Gos. Thom. 1: Whoever finds
the interpretation of these sayings will not experience death.
Examination of the sequence of topics discussed in this source re
veals other analogies with traditions preserved in Gos. Thom. Al
though at the beginning the dialogue source is too fragmentary to
allow us to identify the initial theme, in 8-14 and 19-20 (125:17-
127:19 and 128:23-129:16) are interpreted the sayings, The lamp [of
the body] is the mind (8 [125:18-19]) and Seek and you will find
INTRODUCTION 7
(both paralleled in Gos. Thom. 24 and 2, 92, 94), concluding with the
saying, And [let] him who [knows] seek and find and [rejoice] (20
[129:14-16]). When the dialogue resumes, at 25 (131:19), the disci
ples request for the place (cf. Gos. Thom. 24) is interpreted. After
the interruption by the apocalyptic fragment (see sec. D below), Ju
das introduces a new topic: Who will rule over us? (47ff. [138:6^.]).
The interpretation includes several traditional sayings (cf. Gos.
Thom. 75, 37, 36, Matt 10:10.24, Gos. Thom. 51,17). A further topic
is introduced in 65 (141:2-4): [Why] do we not rest [at once]? Again
the answer and subsequent units contain sayings, many of which have
parallels in Gos. Thom. (cf. Gos. Thom. 51, 24, 62, 37, 20, 6, 114).
This indicates a thematic arrangement of at least some sequences of
dialogical units. If the apocalyptic fragment was an original element
of the dialogue source, one finds the following sequence of topics:
seeking/finding, marvelling (represented by the apocalyptic
fragment), ruling/resting. This sequence coincides with the ordo
salutis of Gos. Thom. 2 (according to the Greek fragment, P.Oxy.
654): Let him who [seeks] not pause [until] he finds. When he finds,
[he shall marvel]. When he [marvels], he shall rule. [When he has
ruled, he shall find rest].4
As a commentary on Gos. Thom. 2, the dialogue explains the disci
ples place in the eschatological timetable: although they have sought
and found and marvelled, their rule and their rest will only come in
the future. At present they still bear the burden of the body and of
earthly labor; Mary, who recognizes this, receives the highest praise
(53 [I 39 : i I - I 3 l)-
The interpretation of another topic, dissolution of the works of
womanhood, introduced after the discussion of the ordo salutis, elab
orates a theme which is only briefly mentioned in Gos. Thom. (9iff.
[i44:i5ff.]; cf. Gos. Thom. 114). In the dialogue source, this topic has
a prominent place. It is closely related to the theme of carrying the
burden of earthly existence (65-66 [141:2-6]). The works of woman
hood are obviously the continuation of physical existence through
childbirth. Such emphasis in its final section places the dialogue
4The Coptic version: Let him who seeks continue seeking until he finds. When
he finds, he will become troubled. When he becomes troubled, he will be astonished,
and he will rule over the All. Cf. Clement of Alexandria, Stromateis 5.14.96: He that
seeks will not rest until he finds; and he that has found shall marvel, and he that has
marvelled shall reign; and he that has reigned shall rest (fragment 4b [cf. fragment 4a,
Stromateis 2.9.45: He that marvels shall reign, and he that has reigned shall rest.] of
Gospel of the Hebrews in Hennecke-Schneemelcher, p. 164).
8 INTRODUCTION
source in the immediate neighborhood of The Gospel of the Egyptians

(Clement of Alexandria, Stromateis 3.9.63-64).5It must be noted that
such polemic against the works of womanhood goes hand in hand
with a very high estimate for Mary as a woman who had understood
completely (53 [139:11-13]).
B. A Fragment of a Creation Myth
Fragments of a creation myth, based upon Genesis 1-2, and its
interpretation are incorporated into the present work in 15-18 and
21-24 (127:19-128:23 and 129:16-131:18). Allusions to Gen 1:1, [the
heaven and the] earth (15 [127:21]), Gen 1:2, darkness and water
and spirit upon [water] (16 [127:23-128:1]), Gen 1:4, signs over [the
earth] (21 [129:18-19]), and Gen 2:5, the lack of water on earth (22
[130:3-7]), are clearly present. The myth relates how the water which
was originally separated from the earth by a wall of fire made the
world fruitful: the Word cast forth from itself the four streams of
paradise - milk, honey, oil, and wine - which assure fruitfulness for
all generations. The author interrupts the account to interpret the
term spirit (16-20 [128:1-129:12]), explaining that the true mind
prevails over the powers above and below.
C. A Cosmological Wisdom List
Dial. Sav. 34-35 (133:23-134:24) is an expanded list (fire, water,
wind, body, etc.) formulated according to the pattern, If [one] does
not [understand how] fire came into existence, he will burn in it. In
its present form, it is a Christian revision of the expected list, com
monplace among Greek philosophers, of the four cosmic elements
(earth, air, fire, and water). The element earth has been replaced by
body: If one does not understand how body, which he bears, came
into existence, he will [perish] with it (35 [134:11-14]). Other Chris
tian expansions already included in the source used by the author are,
And how will someone who does [not] know [the Son] know the [Fa
ther]? (35 [134:14-15]; cf. Matt 11:27, John 14:7-9) and the root of
wickedness (35 [134:17-19]). The authors further comments on the
root of wickedness, which, even when hidden, persists internally,
offer a striking parallel to a similar teaching in The Gospel of Philip:
So long as the root of wickedness is hidden, it is strong. But when it is
recognized it is dissolved. When it is revealed it perishes. ... As for
ourselves, let each one of us dig down after the root of evil which is
5See n. 3 above.
IN TRO D U CTIO N 9
within one, and let one pluck it out of ones heart from the root. It will
be plucked out if we recognize it. But if we are ignorant of it, it takes
root in us and produces its fruit in our heart. It masters us. We are its
slaves. It takes us captive, to make us do what we do [not] want; and
what we do want we do [not] do.6 The influence of the final author is
also visible in the comment about baptism (35 [134:6-8]) and in the
conclusion (35 [134:19-24]; see further sec. Ill below). As a whole,
this portion of Dial. Sav. is a telling example of a Christian soteri-
ological interpretation of older wisdom material.
D. A Fragment of an Apocalyptic Vision
In spite of several layers of redactional work, some features of an
apocalyptic vision are still evident in 36-40 (134:24-137:3): only one
person receives the vision (note the third person singular in 36
[135:1415] and 40 [136:17]) in a place - probably on a mountain -
where the whole of heaven and earth, the high place and the place
of the abyss, can be seen (36 [135:1-2.5-7]); what is witnessed in the
vision (36 [135:12-15] and 40 [136:17-19]) is explained by an angelus
interpres called the Son of Man (37 [135:16-17] and 40 [136:21]).
Originally the term would not have referred to Jesus, since it is never
used as a title of Jesus in Dial. Sav. The original vision seems to have
spoken about the installation of someone before God; in this case the
garment (40 [136:22]) may signify investiture (cf. Zech 3:1-6 etc.).
That three persons, Judas, Matthew, and Mary, are made the re
cipients of the vision by a redactor (36 [134:24-25]) connects the vision
to the dialogue source in which these three disciples figure prominent
ly. Apparently the vision was introduced into the dialogue to illustrate
the theme of marvelling from the saying of Jesus (Gos. Thom. 2)
which gave the dialogue its basic outline (cf. 36 [135:7-11]; see sec. A
above).
The final author introduced all the disciples into the vision re
port: all give glory to the Lord (37-39 [136:1-17]; cf. 1-2 [121:2-4]);
and he interpreted the term garment (40 [136:22-137:1]; see sec. Ill
below).
III. T H E A U T H O R S L A N G U A G E A N D M E T H O D O F C O M P O S IT IO N
The introductory section 1-3 (120:2-124:22) consists of a discourse

on the passage of the soul through the heavenly powers (3 [122:1-
6Gos. Phil. 83:8-28, translated by Wesley W. Isenberg in N H L ibE ng , p. 149.
10 INTRODUCTION
124:22]), introduced by an exhortation (1 [120:2-121:3]) and a prayer

of thanksgiving (2 [121:3-122:1]). Although these three parts of the
introductory section, exhortation, prayer, and instruction, are distinct
in style, they reveal the language and thought of the final author. If
the prayer adapts a liturgical tradition, it may represent the tradition
of the authors church. Parallels to New Testament language are fre
quent, especially to the deutero-Pauline and catholic epistles and to
Hebrews, perhaps also to the Johannine writings. Among such New
Testament expressions are not only terms and phrases which could be
considered generally gnostic, such as stand at rest (1 [120:5-7]; cf.
Heb 4:11) or power of darkness (3 [122:4.16]; cf. Col 1:13), but other
phrases characteristic of this group of New Testament writings also
occur: to believe the truth (1 [121:2]; cf. 2 Thess 2:12); to save ones
soul (2 [121:22-23]; cf. 1 Pet 1:9, James 1:21); through Christs sacri
fice (2 [121:20-21]; cf. Eph 5:2, Heb 10:10.14); the armor of God (2
[121:10]; cf. especially Eph 6:11-17). The title Savior, typical of the
final author, could be gnostic, but it is more generally used, partic
ularly in Christian literature of the second century (cf. 1Tim 4:10 and
elsewhere in the pastoral epistles, 2 Pet 1:1.11 etc., 1 Clem. 59.3,
2 Clem. 20.5). Only-begotten son (2 [121:6-7]) represents the only
relationship to John (John 1:18) in this introductory section. Famili
arity with the synoptic gospels is not evident, but the phrase, which
the elect and solitary (monachos) will traverse (1 [120:25-26]; cf. 2
[121:18]), suggests that the author knew Gos. Thom. 49.
The author connects his introduction with the beginning of the dia
logue source by following the topic soul (or mind, heart), which
is central to the instruction about the disciples passing beyond the
power of darkness (2 [121:22-23], 3 [123:7-8.13.16, 124:6.14]). The
following dialogue refers to soul, spirit, and mind (or heart)
repeatedly (6 [125:6.9], 8 [125:19.22], 14 [126:23,I27:i])- The creation
myth, barely begun, is interrupted after spirit upon [water] (16
[128:1]) and this phrase from Gen 1:2 is taken as a point of departure
for a discussion of spirit, mind (or heart), and soul (16-20
[128:1-129:16]): the mystery of the spirit is the disposition which
overcomes the powers. In this composition the author apparently
adopts the style of the dialogue source. The creation account does not
occasion mythical elaboration in typical gnostic fashion; instead, the
author interprets only one specific word (spirit) from the creation
account. His exegetical method resembles that of Philo of Alexandria
in that he uses biblical terms as metaphors for the human religious
disposition.
IN TRO D U CTIO N 11
In reproducing the cosmological list (34-35 [133:23-134:24]), the
author has added an epexegetical comment to the mention of water:
For what use is there for him to be baptized in it? (35 [134:6-8]).
He also added a comment at the end of the list (35 [134:19-24]) which
resembles the familiar gnostic statement about baptism from Clement
of Alexandria, Excerpta ex Theodoto 78 (see sec. IV below).
The phrases the Greatness remembered and so that the First
Word might not fail (37 [135:20-21, 135:23-136:1]) which occur in
the apocalyptic vision (36-40 [134:24-137:3]) - both are paralleled in
the explanation of the parable of the stone (34 [133:6.9-10]) - indicate
discourses composed by the final author; cf. also the section which
ends with the disciples giving glory to the Lord (39 [136:10-17]). The
explanation of the command, Give them their garment! (40
[136:22]), appears to be a gnostic interpretation of a vestment scene:
The small one did as (or: became like) the big one. They were [like]
those who received them (40 [136:23-137:1]). Instead of receiving a
clean garment in order to appear before the throne, the souls meet
their heavenly counterparts (cf. Acts of Thomas 112 [ed. Lipsius-Bon
net 2.2.223]).
The conclusion of the work (104 [146:20-147:22]) also betrays the
authors hand, but is preserved only in such a fragmentary state that a
coherent interpretation is not possible. It is, of course, likely that the
author has added comments and expansions elsewhere in the dialogue
(see especially 96 [145:7-24]).
IV. T H E A U T H O R S IN T E R P R E T A T IO N
The authors interpretation of Jesus teaching, given in the intro

ductory section and in his interpretive comments, expresses a certain
degree of continuity with his major source, the dialogue between
Jesus and his disciples. The introduction places the themes of that
earlier dialogue into a new context: baptismal initiation. Thus, the
opening instruction invites the believer to baptism, relating the ritual
act to the metaphysical symbolism he finds in his dialogue source.
Parallels to such a theological endeavor occur in Ephesians, Hebrews,
1 Peter, The Letter of Peter to Philip, and The Gospel of Philip.
The introduction presents a paradox which is sustained throughout
the work: first, an emphasis upon realized eschatology; second, and
juxtaposed to this, an elaboration of a futuristic eschatology. At the
opening of the work, the Savior announces, Already the time has
come, brothers, for us to abandon our labor and stand at rest (1
12 INTRODUCTION
[120:3-6]). This invitation is paralleled in the realized eschatology of

the exhortations of Rom 13:11-12 and Heb 10:19-22. The prayer ac
knowledges the Savior as one who has received rest from many [la
bors] (2 [121:8-9]) and who enables the solitary to enter into rest. But
the following instruction refers to the future, when the time of disso
lution arrives (3 [122:2-3]). The Savior not only explains that the
first power of darkness will come upon you (3 [122:4-5]), but also
reveals the identity of that power, fear (3 [122:16]). He warns that,
although the process may be terrifying, whoever undertakes it in fear
will be swallowed up; whoever faces the transition without fear will
pass safely through dissolution, i.e. death. In the conclusion (104
[146:20-22]), the author adds an admonition that the disciples should
rid themselves of anger and jealousy, also characteristic of baptismal
instruction. Similar juxtapositions of baptismal realized eschatology
and instruction about the fearful passage at the hour of death charac
terize Ephesians (cf. Eph 2:1-8, 6:10-17; note Eph 6:12: the
powers ... the world rulers of this present darkness . . . ).
The interpretation added to the first part of the creation myth part
ly resolves the paradox: the true mind and the soul are established in
the height (18 [128:21-22]) and thus can prevail over the powers (20
[129:10]). The third part of the dialogue source adds a discussion
about seeing the place of life (27-30 [132:5-19]): one cannot see it as
long as one wears the flesh, but one can see it if one has known oneself.
Baptism mediates this knowledge. The redaction of the cosmological
list adds not only a comment about the baptismal water (35 [134:6-
8]), but also the statement, Whoever will not understand how he
came will not understand how he will go (35 [134:19-22]), which
parallels the famous gnostic statement from Clement of Alexandria,
Excerpta ex Theodoto 78: It is not the bath alone that makes us free,
but also the knowledge of who we were and what we have become;
where we were, whither we have been cast; whither we are hastening,
whence we are redeemed; what birth is, what rebirth. The apoca
lyptic vision, finally, shows how will the good be taken up to the
light (38 [136:9-10]). Those who believe and who have received the
teachings of the Savior no longer fear the future: they know that it is
useless to regard wickedness (37 [136:4-5]).
So far the structure of the authors theological position is clear:
invitation to enter into rest, instruction on prayer and warning about
the powers which threaten the initiate during the passage into rest,
exhortation to receive the teachings and to know oneself. References
INTRODUCTION 13
to baptism and to the gnostic baptismal formula indicate that this is
already experienced in baptism, a process that involves going through
dissolution, i.e. through death, and entering into the place of life.
The author superimposes this interpretation upon the original dia
logue. While the latter contains no allusions or references to the estab
lished Christian soteriological language as it appears in the later writ
ings of the New Testament, the author of Dial. Sav. uses such lang
uage and thought, especially insofar as it is related to baptism and to
its liturgy. To be sure, Paul had already understood baptism as a pro
cess of going through death, being buried with Christ through bap
tism into death (Rom 6:3-11). Unlike Paul, however, the author of
Dial. Sav. understands baptism in the same way as it is interpreted in
Eph 2:1-6 and Col 3:1-4: those baptized, having died, already have
attained true life (2-3 [121:18-122:24]); they already dwell above (1
[120:9-10]). So Clement of Alexandria, Excerpta ex Theodoto 77.1-2,
declares that therefore baptism is called death, and an end to the old
life, when we take leave of the evil principalities; but it is called life
according to Christ, of which he is the sole Lord. On Baptism A
(NHC XI,2b) 41:23-38 and On Baptism B (NHC XI,2c) 42:16-19
similarly say that those who receive the second baptism die (see On
the Eucharist B [NHC XI,2e] 44:32) and are brought out of the world
into the Aeon.7
The author of Dial. Sav., perhaps following his source, describes
how the Lord takes the three elect disciples, Judas, Matthew, and
Mary, to the edge of heaven [and] earth (36 [134:24-135:2]). The
author may have added here, [And] when he placed his [hand] upon
them, they hoped that they might [see] it (36 [135:2-4]), i.e. see a
vision. If this statement alludes to an element of the baptismal ritual,
the laying on of hands which followed baptism is understood as a pre
lude to receiving visions. The practice of the laying on of hands during
initiation which the Marcosians understood as a prelude to prophecy
may offer a parallel (see Irenaeus, Adversus haereses 1.13).
Yet in Dial. Sav. there is no attempt to dissolve the tension between
the present and the future. Receiving visions in the context of bap
tismal initiation is not the culmination of the experience of redemp
tion. Instead, through the interpretation of the visions and through the
dialogue which follows, the disciples receive a new and more complex
7The references to N H C X I accord with the line numbers and restorations in

the translation by John D. Turner in N H LibEng, pp. 441-42.
14 INTRODUCTION
understanding of their own situation. They must learn to distinguish

between what is merely a transient vision and an eternal vision, i.e.
the great vision of the Eternal Existent (42-44 [137:9-15]). The
former they have received already; the latter is reserved for the eschat-
ological future. Contrary to what we have been led to expect of gnostic
theology, we find Dial. Sav. dealing with the tension between what
the disciples have received already through baptism, initiation, and
visions, and what they anticipate as not yet.
In order to explain this tension, the author, in the final section of
the work, follows the thematic scheme of his dialogue source (seeking,
finding, marvelling, ruling, resting; see sec. II.A above) and utilizes its
materials. The disciples, having received baptism, are those who have
sought, found, marvelled, and attained rest. Now they are taught that
the rest is, in a sense, only provisional, that they will rest themselves
only when they lay down these burdens (65-66 [141:2-6]), for they
are still burdened by existence in the flesh (84 [143:11-15]). But the
disciples have a special task to fulfill in their present existence. Mary
asks the crucial question: Tell me, Lord, why I have come to this
place. For profit or for loss? The Lord replies: You make clear the
abundance of the revealer! (60-61 [140:14-19]). This is an extra
ordinary answer. The elect are not here to gain anything for them
selves: what more could they gain than what they have already re
ceived, the knowledge that the living God dwells within them, and
they in him (44 [137:22-138:2])? Nor are they here to suffer purga
tion. They are not here for their own sakes, but to accomplish the
tasks defined through the sayings which Mary quotes (53 [139:8-11]):
that the present is tainted with evil; that the elect is a laborer who, like
the Lord, anticipates future reward for his work; and that the disci
ples, like their Lord, share in the same task of revelation, revealing
the abundance of the revealer in the world: [Strive] to save him
[who] can follow (44 [137:16-17]).
In the interpretation of the tension between present and future, the
older dialogue with sayings of Jesus serves as a corrective to the typi
cally gnostic language and theology which the author of Dial. Sav.
uses in the introduction. In the latter, the experience of baptism medi
ates the awareness of the in-dwelling of the living God in the disciples
and of the passage through the powers into rest. But the tradition of
the sayings of Jesus, preserved in the older dialogue, prevents a com
pletely spiritualized understanding of the disciples religious exis
tence. It is here that the disciples present task is defined as work on
IN TRO D U CTION 15
behalf of the revelation while they are still wearing the flesh, carrying
a burden just as the Lord himself (cf. 52 [139:6-7], 96 [145:23-24]).
This also suggests that the Lord who is thus conversing with the disci
ples is not the exalted one after his resurrection (though this termi
nology does not appear in this work), but rather the earthly Jesus
who still carries the burden of the body. Indeed, the place of truth is
not defined in terms of otherworldly existence, but as the place where
the Lord is (62-63 [I4:i9 23]). And the authors interpretation of
the dissolution of the works of womanhood does not suggest a meta
physically motivated sexual asceticism, but speaks of the secret birth
through the one who is coming forth from the Father (96 [145:10-
13]). Dial. Sav. cannot be understood as a simple product of gnostic
theology. Rather, like the gospel of John, it is a testimony of the theo
logical reflection which took place as the tradition of the sayings of
Jesus was further developed within the horizon of gnostic thought.
V. D A T E
Dial. Sav. is not mentioned explicitly in any extant work from the
ancient church. Whether it was used by any church father or in any
other works from the Nag Hammadi collection can only be deter
mined after further investigation. The terminus ad quern for the com
position of Dial. Sav. must remain the date of the Coptic manuscript,
sometime during the fourth century c .e .
Determining the terminus a quo for the composition of the original
Greek text requires consideration of the following: (1) there are no
certain quotations from any work of the New Testament, nor from
any other work known to us with the possible exception of Gos.
Thom.', (2) the gospel tradition used in the dialogue source resembles
that of Gos. Thom, but does not show any signs of direct literary
dependence upon that document; (3) the development of the dialogical
elaboration of traditional sayings of Jesus in the dialogue source par
allels that of the discourses and dialogues in the gospel of John, but
may represent a somewhat earlier stage in that process; (4) terms and
phrases used in the authors language presuppose the development of
Christian language which is documented in the deutero-Pauline and
catholic epistles; (5) other sources used by the author either show no
traces of Christian influence (creation myth, apocalyptic vision) or
display only some expansion using a saying of Jesus (wisdom list).
The absence of any evidence for the use of the canonical gospels and
16 INTRODUCTION
the Pauline epistles, the affinity with deutero-Pauline language, and

the possible use of Gos. Thom, suggest a date for the composition of
Dial. Sav. in the early decades of the second century c .e . The work
certainly belongs to an earlier period than the Epistula apostolorum
(which presupposes the Pauline corpus and whose author possibly
knew several gospels of the New Testament canon) and Justin Mar
tyr (who used the gospels of Matthew and Luke). But the dialogue
source used by the author of Dial. Sav. should be dated in the last
decades of the first century c .e ., and certainly not later than the gospel
of John.
V I. B IB L IO G R A P H Y
Koester, Helmut. Apocryphal and Canonical Gospels. HTR 73

(1980), 105-30.
-------. Dialog und Spruchiiberlieferung in den gnostischen Texten
von Nag Hammadi. Evangelische Theologie 39 (1979), 536-56.
-------. Gnostic Writings as Witnesses for the Development of the
Sayings Tradition. In The Rediscovery of Gnosticism: Proceed
ings of the International Conference on Gnosticism at Yale; New
Haven, Connecticut, March 28-31, 1978. Vol. 1, The School of
Valentinus, edited by Bentley Layton, pp. 238-61. Studies in the
History of Religions (Supplements to Numen) 41. Leiden: Brill,
1980.
Krause, Martin. Der Dialog des Soter in Codex III von Nag Ham
madi. In Gnosis and Gnosticism: Papers read at the Seventh
International Conference on Patristic Studies (Oxford, Septem
ber 8th-i3th 1975), edited by Martin Krause, pp. 13-34. NHS 8.
Leiden: Brill, 1977.
Morard, Fran9oise. Encore quelques reflexions sur monachos.
Vigiliae Christianae 34 (1980), 395-401.
Pagels, Elaine and Koester, Helmut. Dialogue of the Savior (CG III,
5). In Nag Hammadi and Gnosis: Papers read at the First In
ternational Congress of Coptology (Cairo, December 1976), edi
ted by R. McL. Wilson, pp. 66-74. NHS 14. Leiden: Brill, 1978.
Perkins, Pheme. The Gnostic Dialogue: The Early Church and the
Crisis of Gnosticism. Theological Inquiries: Studies in Contem
porary Biblical and Theological Problems. New York, Ramsey,
and Toronto: Paulist Press, 1980.
IN TRO D U CTIO N 17
Rudolph, Kurt. Der gnostische Dialog als literarisches Genus. In
Probleme der koptischen Literatur, pp. 85-107. Wissenschaft-
liche Beitrage der Martin-Luther-Universitat Halle-Witten-
berg 1968/1 (K2). Halle: 1968.
THE MANUSCRIPT
St e p h e n E m m el
I. C O D IC O L O G Y
The Dialogue of the Savior is preserved in a single copy, the last of

five tractates in Nag Hammadi Codex III. The manuscript was dis
covered, together with the rest of the Nag Hammadi Codices, by Up
per Egyptian farmers late in 1945. It soon became the property of
Raghib Andarawus, a resident of Dishna. The codex first came to
scholarly attention in the summer of 1946, when Raghib showed it to
Georgy Sobhy in Cairo. Sobhy informed the Egyptian Department of
Antiquities of the existence of the codex, and in October 1946 it was
purchased from Raghib for the Coptic Museum.1Given the inventory
number 4851, the acquisition was registered as a papyrus manu
script ... with its cover. Seventy folios, most of them damaged and in
complete, some of them very small fragments.2
Togo Mina, the Director of the Coptic Museum, immediately be
gan to consolidate fragmentary leaves of the codex with small pieces of
transparent adhesive tape. In the autumn of 1947, when Mina began
to collaborate with Jean Doresse on an edition of the texts, the codex
was taken apart. The sheets of the single quire, if not already broken,
were cut in two at the spine, and the resulting leaves and fragments
were conserved between panes of glass. These glass frames, as well as
a number of small fragments which had not been glassed, were then
photographed.
These photographs, a complete set of which is kept by the Institute
for Antiquity and Christianity in Claremont, California, under the
siglum D III, provide the oldest detailed record of the physical re
mains of NHC III, excluding the leather cover. The extant remains of
the manuscript in Cairo are now somewhat less complete than the
'See James M. Robinson, From the Cliff to Cairo: The Story of the Dis
coverers and the Middlemen of the Nag Hammadi Codices in Bernard Bare (ed.),
CoUoque international sur les textes de Nag Hammadi (Quebec, 22-25 ao^ !97^)
(Bibliotheque copte de Nag Hammadi, Section Etudes 1; Quebec and Louvain:
Universite Laval and Peeters, 1981), pp. 21-58.
2Facs.: Codex III (1976), p. vii.
20 T H E MANUSCRIPT
photographs show, due to the loss of a few fragments.3 One small

fragment not shown in the D photographs has been associated with
the codex since 1970, but remains unplaced.4 Further slight, and for
the most part questionable, evidence for the text is provided by early
transcriptions made by Doresse and Mina.5
It is clear that some of what was already missing from the manu
script, when the D photographs were made, became separated from
the codex only after its discovery, but probably before its acquisition
by the Coptic Museum. This is certainly true of a large fragment from
the middle of pp. 145/146. This fragment became part of a miscel
laneous collection of papyri which was purchased early in the 1960s,
from an anonymous scholar-collector, by H. P. Kraus, the famous
rare book and manuscript dealer of New York. In 1964, Kraus sold
the collection to the Beinecke Rare Book and Manuscript Library
(New Haven, Connecticut), where the fragment (Yale inv. 1784) was
identified as part of NHC III in 1980.6
Six leaves (pp. 19/20, 45/46, 47/48, 79/80, 109/110, 115/116)
which must have been nearly complete when the codex was discov
ered, but which at present are not represented by even a single frag
ment, were probably also removed before the acquisition of the manu
script by the Coptic Museum. But the whereabouts of these leaves
remain unknown. One may conjecture a similar, or even more un
happy fate for any small fragments which may have broken loose
from the extant leaves during the course of their journey from Upper
Egypt to the Coptic Museum, as well as for whatever may have sur
vived of the last three leaves (pp. D/E, F/G, H/I), which were prob
ably not inscribed, and two missing stubs (pp. a/b, c/d).
In 1966, the Coptic Museum reconserved the remains of NHC III
in conformity with the rest of the Nag Hammadi collection. All but
four leaves (pp. 93-100, which were on public display at the time)
were removed from their glass frames and placed between panes of
plexiglass. In the process, top and bottom margins were trimmed to
3For details, see Stephen Emmel, Unique Photographic Evidence for Nag
Hammadi Texts, BASP 14 ( 1977 ), 109- 12, 120- 21 , 15 ( 1978), 195- 98 , 203- 5. Also,
Facs.: Codex II I ( 1976), pis. 143/144 fragments 1-5 are preserved only in old
photographs.
4Facs.: Codex II I ( 1976), pis. 143/144 fragment 8 .
5See Facs.: Introduction (in preparation), Addenda et Corrigenda to Codex III,
Bohlig-Wisse, Gos. E g., pp. 64 and 68 , and below, p. 38 , under the abbreviation
Doresse.
6See Stephen Emmel, A Fragment of Nag Hammadi Codex III in the Beinecke
Library: Yale inv. 1784 , BASP 17 ( 1980), 53 - 60 .
T H E MANUSCRIPT 21
suit the smaller size of the plexiglass.7 Beginning in 1970, an inter

national group of scholars led by James M. Robinson undertook the
physical reconstruction of the entire collection.8 Numerous fragments
were restored to and secured in their proper positions (of Codex III,
only eight small fragments remain unplaced; these are conserved with
pp. 147/C); the correct sequence of pages in each codex was deter
mined (in the case of Codex III, with complete certainty); the papyrus
was cleaned (in Codex III this entailed the removal of a number of
small pieces of transparent adhesive tape, and small fragments of
glass from pp. 93-100); and conjugate leaves were reunited to form
the original sheets of the quires. These reconstructed sheets were then
placed between plexiglass panes of a uniform size for storage in two
specially designed cabinets. The leather covers were similarly con
served in shallow plexiglass boxes.9 The reconstruction of Codex III
thus achieved was published in the ARE-UNESCO Facsimile Edi
tion10 and is the basis of the following codicological description.11
The book-block of NHC III was made up in a single quire of forty
sheets. These sheets were cut from six rolls of papyrus approximately
25.8 cm. tall.12 In the diagrammatic presentation below, the rolls are
7For details, see Wisse, Cod. Intro.,*' p. 231 n. 2 .
8This work was begun by a Technical Sub-Committee of the UNESCO Inter
national Committee for the Nag Hammadi Codices, aided by members of the Coptic
Gnostic Library Project of the Institute for Antiquity and Christianity. It was com
pleted as part of the Nag Hammadi Codices Editing Project of the American Research
Center in Egypt.
9See Stephen Emmel, The Nag Hammadi Codices Editing Project: A Final
Report, The American Research Center in Egypt, Inc., Newsletter 104 ( 1978), 10- 32 .
l0Facs.: Codex III ( 1976 ); see also the Addenda et Corrigenda to Codex III in
Facs.: Introduction (in preparation).
^Cf. Facs.: Codex II I ( 1976 ), pp. xiii-xv, James M. Robinson, The Future of
Papyrus Codicology in R. McL. Wilson (ed.), The Future of Coptic Studies (Coptic
Studies 1; Leiden: Brill, 1978), pp. 43-45 and 50 , and, with caution, Wisse, Cod.
Intro., pp. 227 - 31 . Readers unfamiliar with the terminology and presuppositions of
papyrus codicology should consult Robinson, The Future of Papyrus Codicology, esp.
PP- 23 - 43 > idem, Codicological Analysis of Nag Hammadi Codices V and VI and
Papyrus Berolinensis 8502 in Douglas M. Parrott (ed.), Nag Hammadi Codices V,2~5
and VI with Papyrus Berolinensis 8502,1 and 4 (NHS n ; Leiden: Brill, 1979 ), pp. 9 -
16, and E. G. Turner, The Typology of the Early Codex (Philadelphia: University of
Pennsylvania, 1977 ). See also James M. Robinson, The Construction of the Nag
Hammadi Codices in M artin Krause (ed.), Essays on the Nag Hammadi Texts in
Honour of Pahor Labib (NHS 6; Leiden: Brill, 1975 ), pp. 170- 90 , idem, On the
Codicology of the Nag Hammadi Codices in J.-E . M enard (ed.), Les textes de Nag
Hammadi: Colloque du Centre d Histoire des Religions (Strasbourg, 23-25 octobre
I974) (NHS 7 ; Leiden: Brill, 1975 ), pp. 15- 31 , and Facs.: Introduction (in
preparation).
12This is the height of the tallest extant leaf (pp. 99/ 100 ), which occurs in Roll 5 .
22 T H E MANUSCRIPT
shown with horizontal fibers (represented by undulating lines) facing

up and kolleseis stepping down from left to right; protocols, had there
been any, would have joined the rolls at the left-hand ends.13 No ac
count is taken of papyrus trimmed away between sheets; the rolls may
have been somewhat longer than shown here. The page numbers of
the finished codex are given, in square brackets if the leaf is wholly
missing, along the top edge of a roll. The orientation of these numbers
indicates the top of the leaf in the finished codex. A plus sign (+)
between page numbers indicates where a sheet was folded to make
two leaves. Such pairs of conjugate leaves are separated by vertical
lines indicating where the roll was cut into sheets. The measurements
of the sheets were taken at their widest extant breadths, except where
leaves have obviously suffered deterioration at the fore-edges.14 In
these cases, the measurements reflect what can be assumed to have
been the original breadths of the sheets. A gap in a roll (along the
horizontal axis) is indicated only when the missing papyrus must
have, or might have, preserved a kollesis. A kollesis is represented bya
vertical pair of broken and solid lines across the roll; the solid line
indicates the overlapping right-hand edge of one kollema and the bro
ken line indicates the left-hand edge of the kollema overlapped.15
The remains of Roll i are so fragmentary that its reconstruction is
somewhat hypothetical. Probably a single kollesis is lost between pp.
4 and 2, though fiber continuity from p. 2 to p. B cannot be established
with certainty. It is possible that the roll extended beyond p. H, for the
relative shortness of the roll as reconstructed could suggest that fur
ther sheets cut from the right-hand end were used as cartonnage and a
pastedown. But the evidence provided by the leather cover is not suf
ficient to warrant such a conclusion. The roll was cut from right to left
into four full sheets, with a partial sheet remaining at the end. The
sheets were stacked in the order in which they were cut, the final
partial sheet flush with the rest at the right-hand edge.
In Roll 2, a single kollesis crosses p. 137. The roll was cut from
right to left into six full sheets, with a partial sheet remaining at the
The dimensions of the leather cover indicate that none of the rolls could have been
much taller than this.
13Rolls 1, 3 , and 4 , in which no kolleseis are extant, are laid out in the diagram
on the assumption that the manufacturer of the codex handled them in the same way as
he handled Rolls 2 , 5 , and 6 .
14Viz. pp. A/B, 1/ 2 , 3 / 4 , 19/ 20 , 45 / 46 , 47 / 48 , 79 / 80 , 109/ 110, 115/ 116, D/E,
F /G , H /I. The missing stubs at the beginnings of Rolls 1 and 2 are shown with a
standardized breadth of 3.0 cm.
15A missing kollesis is shown with a standardized breadth of 3.0 cm.
T H E M ANUSCRIPT 23
end. The first sheet cut (pp. 8 + 145) was interchanged with the last
sheet cut from Roll 1 (pp. b + 143). The rest of the sheets from Roll 2
were then added to the stack in the order in which they were cut, the
final partial sheet flush with the rest at the right-hand edge.
In Roll 3, a single kollesis is lost between pp. 26 and 123. The roll
was cut from right to left into seven full sheets. The first sheet cut (pp.
20+131) was interchanged with the last sheet cut from Roll 2 (pp. d
+ 129). The rest of the sheets from Roll 3 were then added to the stack
in the order in which they were cut.
In Roll 4, probably a single kollesis is lost on p. 109. The roll was
cut from right to left into seven full sheets, which were added to the
stack in the order in which they were cut.
In Roll 5, a single kollesis crosses p. 95. The roll was cut from right
to left into seven full sheets, which were added to the stack in the order
in which they were cut.
In Roll 6, a single kollesis crosses p. 66. The roll was cut from right
to left into seven full sheets, which were added to the stack in the order
in which they were cut.
The resulting stack of forty sheets was then folded in half, the cen
ter of the quire thus formed falling between pp. 74 and 75. Pp. a/b
and c/d occurred as stubs between pp. 8 and 9 and between pp. 20 and
21 respectively.
The leather cover of NHC III was made from a single piece of
sheep leather without decoration. A pointed flap extending from the
front cover could be wrapped around the fore-edge to overlap the back
cover. A wrapping thong attached to the point of the flap served, along
with ties at the head and tail, to prevent the closed book from falling
open. The cover when open, excluding the flap, measures 26.2 x 35.0
cm.
The book-block was sewn with two leather thongs to an irregularly
shaped piece of leather, approximately 24.6 x 9.0 cm. The thongs
were knotted at the outside of the leather piece. (It may be assumed
that the thongs also held protective stays at the center of the quire, but
these are not extant.) This piece of leather was then used to line the
spine of the cover, thus concealing the knots of the thongs between the
lining and the cover. The front and back covers were then lined with
layers of papyrus into which the edges of the leather spine lining were
glued, thus binding the book-block to the cover.16 The turn-ins (in-
16It is conceivable that it was the dampness of the glue used in the cartonnage
that caused the ink on the pages near the front (pp. 1- 7 ) and the back (pp. 128- 147) to
24
Roll 1
[b] + 143 | 6 + 147 | 4 + (D) | 2 + (F] | B + [H]
T H E MANUSCRIPT
The six rolls of the papyn

T H E M ANUSCRIPT
O
+ oo
00
''t +
CM
CO
G)
0) in
+ oo
o +
io
CO
N-
0) CO
+ 00
CM
ID
+
CO
CO
ID
O)
+ 00
''t +
in 00
CO
co O)
o>
+ +
CO
in o
o> N-
N-
+ +
00 CM
in
o> in
oo N-
+ +
o
in co CO
ed in the manufacture of NHC III

26 T H E MANUSCRIPT
eluding one added along the fore-edge of the front cover) were then
glued on top of this cartonnage and the cartonnage and turn-ins wer<
covered by a pastedown. Unfortunately, all but meager traces of the
pastedown and cartonnage, some of which might have consisted of
datable texts, were removed by persons unknown; apart from the
blank scraps still adhering to the cover, nothing of the pastedown and
cartonnage is known to survive.17
In the book-block, a front flyleaf (pp. A/B) was neither paged nor
inscribed, except that the title of the first text (The Apocryphon oj
John) was written a little above center on p. B. Inscription and pagi
nation then run continuously from p. i through p. 147, excluding the
two stubs. P. C (the verso of p. 147) was left blank, as were, presum
ably, three missing back flyleaves, pp. D-I. Undecorated page num
bers were placed above, and often a little left of, the center of the single
column of inscription. Page numbers are fully or at least partially
preserved on pp. 17,18, 23-36, 38, 40, 42-44, 54~5660-76, 91-96,
99-108, m -1 1 4 ,117-120,123-125,127-134,136,139,141, and 143.
The codex was copied by one scribe in a single, simple column.18
There are no running titles and no capitals. Titles at the ends of the
texts (on pp. 40, 69, 90, 119, and 147) are written in slightly larger
characters and are set off by simple decorations.19 Otherwise, adorn
ments are limited to the occasional use of a paragraphos (on pp. 69,
76, and 96) and of diples to fill out short lines (passim). The scribe
kept his margins and lines of text more or less even, without the aid of
any sort of ruling. The text-block varies in width from 10.2 to 12.0
cm., averaging 11.1 cm., and in height from 20.1 to 22.6 cm., averaging
21.4 cm. The number of lines per page varies from 22 to 28, averaging
between 24 and 25, the average height of a line (including interlineal
space) being about 0.9 cm.20
As has already been noted, six inscribed leaves are entirely missing
run and blot.
17For a more detailed description of the cover, see Facs.: Codex III ( 1976), pp. xi-
xiii and pis. 1- 4 .
18For a brief description of the handwriting, see Wisse, Cod. Intro., pp.
2 32-33-
19Apart from Ap. John, the title of which is written both at the end of the text
and on the verso of the front flyleaf, only Dial. Sav. has a title written both at the end
and at the beginning ( 120: 1, without decoration) of the text.
20For Dial. Sav. in particular, the text-block varies in width from 10.4 to 119
cm., averaging 11.2 cm., and in height from 20.6 to 22.4 cm., averaging 21.25 cm*>w^ c
the number of lines per page varies from 23 to 25 , averaging between 23 and 24. Cf.
Wisse, Cod. Intro., pp. 233 - 34 .
(pp. 19/20,45/46, 47/48, 79/80,109/110,115/116). Of the remain

ing sixty-eight inscribed leaves, twenty-nine have suffered serious
deterioration, mostly along the inner margins (pp. 1-8,21-44, 57/58,
117-132, 137/138, 143-146, 147/C). The remaining thirty-nine in
scribed leaves are relatively well-preserved. Eight small inscribed
fragments remain unplaced; fragments 1-5 are preserved only in old
photographs.
The codex contains five texts: The Apocryphon ofJohn (1:1-40:11),
The Gospel of the Egyptians (40:12-69:20), Eugnostos the Blessed
(70:1-90:13), The Wisdom ofJesus (90:14-119:18), and The Dialogue
of the Savior (i2o:i-i47:23).21 The tabs affixed to the center of the
fore-edge of pp. 39/40, 69/70, 89/90, and 119/120, apparently to
mark the beginnings of the last four texts, are made of paper and so
may be assumed to have been attached sometime after the manuscript
was unearthed.
There is no basis on which to date and locate the manufacture of
NHC III with any degree of certainty. Archeological excavations near
Hamrah Dum at the site of the discovery of the Nag Hammadi
Codices have failed to bring any precision to determining the exact
context of the burial of the manuscripts. Any evidence that might have
been provided by inscribed papyrus used to line the cover is lost. In the
absence of a reliable chronological typology for Coptic paleography, it
is fruitless to speculate on the date of the scribes handwriting. We are
left only the association of NHC III with the rest of the Nag
Hammadi Codices, one of which (Codex VII) was certainly
manufactured no earlier than 348 c .e . and several of which (Codices
I, V, VII, XI) seem to have been manufactured in the Nag Hammadi
region.22 By this means, it is generally assumed that NHC III too was
manufactured in the latter half of the fourth century c .e ., possibly
somewhere in the Nag Hammadi region.
II. t h e t e x t o f The Dialogue of the Savior

A. Quality of the Copy
The copy of Dial. Sav. in NHC III contains twenty-seven correc-
21 For bibliography on the first four texts, see David M. Scholer, Nag Hammadi
Bibliography 1948-1969 (NHS 1; Leiden: Brill, 1971), supplemented annually in the
autumn issue of Novum Testamentum , beginning with vol. 13 ( 1971).
22See J. W. B. Bams, G. M. Browne, and J. C. Shelton, Nag Hammadi Codices:
Greek and Coptic Papyri from the Cartonnage of the Covers (NHS 16; Leiden: Brill,
1981), esp. p. n .
28 T H E MANUSCRIPT
tions.23 Judging by the handwriting, all of these corrections were

made by the scribe himself. They can be divided into two groups ac
cording to the manner in which they were made. It is reasonable to
suppose that the corrections in the first group were made by the scribe
in the course of copying the text, and that those in the second group
were made after the codex was completely copied.
In the first group of corrections, the scribe either (a) erased the erro
neous letters (one instance, at the end of a line: 121:9);or O5) wrote the
correct letters over the erroneous letters, most often first erasing the
erroneous letters more or less thoroughly (fifteen instances: 123:17,
123:22, 125:1, 127:14, 133:10, 133:24, 134:19, !35:i9> i 4:8, : , 1 4 1 9
141:21, 142:5, 144:8, 145:19 [6if]). The number of erroneous letters

deleted in each instance ranges from one to eight, averaging about
two.
In the second group of corrections, the scribe either (a) cancelled an
erroneous letter with diagonal strokes through it (one instance:
131:19, though here a superlinear stroke may also have been added at
the same time, and in either case the text is still corrupt; see further
below); or (b) cancelled the erroneous letters with diagonal strokes
through them and wrote the correct letters above the cancellations
(two instances: 132:8, 137:5); or (c) added missing letters by writing
above the line, beginning an addition directly above the letter before
which the addition should be inserted (eight instances: 122:7,126:15,
127:7, 132:16, 133:14, 134:21, 139:14, 140:11 [though in the last in
stance the text is probably still corrupt; see further below]). The num
ber of erroneous letters deleted in each instance is one; the number of
letters added in each instance ranges from one to eight (possibly more
at 127:7), averaging about three.
The error in 144:8 is the result of dittography, perhaps also in 140:8
and in 133:24, though here it seems more likely that the scribe, having
completed the last line of p. 133 by severely crowding the letters of
oyoeiN a .n , decided to erase this and write only oy over it, beginning
the next page with o g i n a n . The error in 142:5 is the result of haplo-
graphy, probably also in 125:1, 127:14, and 141:9, and presumably
also in all of the instances under (c) in the second group of corrections
listed above. The nature of the remaining errors is difficult to deter
mine, and the corrections of some of these errors alter the meaning of
23This is an average of one correction per page. It should be remembered,
however, that about 30% of the scribes work on this text has been lost through
deterioration of the papyrus.
the text significantly: 132:8, 134:19, 137:5, 140:8 (if this is not the
result of dittography), 141:21, 145:19; further instances of such signi
ficant alteration by the scribe can be added from throughout NHC
III.24
Alexander Bohlig and Frederik Wisse have suggested with regard
to such alterations of meaning in NHC 111,2 (Gos. Eg.) that the
scribe, or someone with indistinguishable handwriting, made changes
in the text on some basis other than the scribes initial exemplar.25 If
this hypothesis is entertained for Dial. Sav., the corrections by means
of superlinear addition in 122:7, 127:7, 132:16, 133:14, and 140:11
would need to be added to the list at the end of the preceding para
graph. Indeed, as interesting as it is, this hypothesis would be more
attractive if the corrections at issue were limited to those made by
means of cancellation and/or superlinear addition. For as things
stand, it would remain very unclear why this ancient editor chose to
alter the manuscript by means of erasure and/or overwriting in some
cases, and by means of cancellation and/or superlinear addition in
others. The hypothesis suffers from further complication if it is agreed
that corrections by means of erasure could only have been made im
mediately after the mistakes were made, before the ink had dried com
pletely. But even if consideration were to be limited to corrections
made by means of cancellation and/or superlinear adition, it would
still be very difficult to avoid subjectivity in deciding which of these
should be regarded as secondary alterations of the text, and which as
corrections of genuine copying errors.
An alternative solution to this problem is to conclude that at times
the scribe was capable of extreme carelessness. The large number of
corrections throughout NHC III already suggests this conclusion 26
but it also indicates that the scribe took some pains to correct his errors
(witness at least the corrections by means of erasure and/or overwrit
ing), possibly going so far as to proofread the entire manuscript after
he copied it (whence the corrections by means of cancellation and/or
superlinear addition).27 So even if the scribe deserves criticism for
24Cf. Wisse, Cod. Intro., p. 236.

25Bohlig-Wisse, Gos. Eg., p. 4; twelve of the relevant corrections listed by them
were made by means of cancellation and/or superlinear addition, three by means of
erasure and overwriting.
26Cf. Wisse, Cod. Intro.,' p. 236: There are far more corrections in Codex III
than in any other Nag Hammadi codex.
27For the present edition, I have accepted this alternative as the less extreme
means of judging the corrections in the text. Hence I have adopted all of the scribes
30 T H E MANUSCRIPT
being careless, the quality of the final copy must be judged not by the
number of his corrections, but by the number of errors which he failed
to notice and correct.
There are only two errors clearly left uncorrected by the scribe: (i)
In 131:19 the scribe either first wrote [a.ma.pi]2*mmh qjm e Nec-
c n h y and later cancelled c 1 with diagonal strokes and added a super-
linear stroke to n2, or first wrote [a.Ma.pi]a.MMH omnc ReccNHy
and later cancelled c 1. In either case the text as it stands, [aiMi.pi]-
A.mmh cyme NecNHy, is nonsense.28 The simplest solution is to
suppose that the initial error was the haplographic omission of n, and
that n g c c n h y or n e c c n h y should have been corrected to nngc-
c n h y (restoring x e - at the beginning of the following lacuna). But
because the scribes cancellation of c suggests that he was trying to
alter the possessive article into the definite article, one might rather
emend the text to n n g cn h y- (2) In 139:21 the scribe wrote
Jto o c e e p o e i, from which e 2 needs to be deleted (dittography).29
In addition, there are eight passages where corruption may be sus
pected. Probably in need of emendation is 140:11, where the scribe
altered c g m o o y t ' to C h o y o y t ', but probably meant to correct
this to ceMOY, a conclusion recommended by the following cecuNj
and by the parallelism with MeqMoy cpa.qMOY in 140:13-14.
Possible emendations are suggested in the critical apparatus to the
present edition for 121:2-3, I 3 o;6, 137:20, 139:8, 139:11, 140:9, and
143:11, though each of these passages is adequately comprehensible as
transmitted. Furthermore, a number of orthographic and
grammatical irregularities, detailed in the following section, could be
regarded as the result of scribal error.
O f course it is hazardous to judge the quality of a unique copy of a
text, but on the whole I am favorably impressed by the clarity of the
copy of Dial. Sav. in N H C I I I , leaving aside the orthographic in
stability evidenced by the text, as well as the arcane nature of much of
corrections in my edition, relegating notice of what he wrote first in each case to the
critical apparatus. I am of the opinion, however, that the corrections throughout NHC
III, especially those made by means of cancellation and/or superlinear addition, deserve
further synoptic scrutiny.
28In the critical apparatus to my edition, I have drawn attention to NHC III 96:2
where n i stands for n n i. If this passage is not also corrupt, one could argue that in
131:19 n stands legitimately for n n . But it is more likely that both passages are corrupt.
(Perhaps also cf. NHC III 54:5 where m ni stands for m n n i; cf. Bohlig-Wisse, Gos. Eg
P- 5 )
29A few errors in the superlineation and punctuation are not included here; see
sec. B below.
its subject matter. The scribe seems to have noticed and corrected most
of his copying errors himself. If a harsher judgement is warranted by
the scribes work on the other four texts in the codex,30 one must at
least consider the possibility that corruptions throughout the manu
script may not be due to the copyist of NHC III himself, but rather
may have existed already in his exemplars.
B. Orthography and Grammar
The surviving copy of Dial. Sav. is written in the Sahidic dialect.31
As the following description will show, however, the text contains a
number of orthographic and grammatical inconsistencies and irregu
larities. By and large, these non-Sahidic features are deviations in the
direction of Subachmimic (and, to a lesser extent, Achmimic). In this
respect, the text is reminiscent of the crypto-Subachmimic texts in
NHC II,32 though hardly so striking in its deviation from Sahidic.
The present edition is concluded by complete word indexes to the
Coptic text, together with an index of the grammatical forms in the
text. These should be consulted in conjunction with the following de
scription.
The text is punctuated in three ways.33 (i) A raised point (once a
colon, in 143:18) is used to mark the ends of some, though not all,
clauses.34 Apparently erroneous instances of this usage are 121:18
(i), 132:11,135:6,35 138:5, 142:10, and 142:11.
30With specific regard to NHC 111,2, Bohlig and Wisse (Gos. Eg., p. 5) found
that there are many scribal errors requiring emendation (they list thirty-one in
stances, noting ten others which could be added), and concluded that both the cor
rections and emendations indicate that the accuracy of the scribe of III, 2 left much to
be desired. Wisse (Cod. Intro., p. 236) has passed the same judgement on the scribes
work throughout the codex.
311 have found no reason to doubt the general assumption that the text was
translated into Coptic from Greek.
32See especially the discussion of NHC II,4 by Bentley Layton, The Hypostasis
of the Archons, HTR 67 ( 1974), 374-83.
33It should be noted that at the front and back of the codex the ink has run and
blotted, and throughout the codex the scribes pen seems to have splattered some. Both
of these circumstances make it difficult at times to distinguish punctuation marks
clearly.
34There are 120 (possibly 122; see 132:5ap and 146:3ap) instances of this usage
preserved in the text ( 120:1.5.6.8, 121:7 . 15. 18(2], 122:1.5.7 etc.) and raised points are
restored in a few places where the available space in a lacuna recommends it.
35Wisse (Cod. Intro., p. 234) has suggested that this point, after qjiic, might be
classed under the third usage below. In my opinion there are too few examples of k
being so marked (Wisse gives only one other example) to warrant this conclusion.
32 T H E MANUSCRIPT
(2) A raised point or hooked apostrophe36 is used occasionally to

separate two identical consonants within a word or bound group:
122:16 GM'MON, 125:9 TTTTNA., 128:23 MA.eeA.IOC (but cf. 132:10
etc.), 129:2 eTVat[ - - - ] and 132:9 eTTBBHoy (but cf. per
haps 136:13), 133:22 MNTTeAIOC, 137:4 TTTT0NHp0[.], 138:18
ÎCUT THOyTN (butcf. 143:20), 142:19 epeTTHOyTN, 145:16 [air]-
[re]AOC. Some of these intances, however, might be classed under the
following usage.
(3) A point (rarely, a hooked apostrophe) is placed above the right-
hand edge of the horizontal stroke of a word-final n or t .37 This mark
has been erroneously omitted in 126:23 cya>.xn, 133:17 o j o o t t ,
133:19 1cut, and perhaps also in 136:14 qjoon and 146:20 eicuT. In
120:26 both the t and the tt in ccuttt' are marked; exactly the same
error occurs in N H C I I I 65:7. It is noteworthy that in 144:10 the n in
ce.xn-â.Z, and in 143:1 t 1 in m nt'-at- are marked. All the other
occasional instances of the final n or t of a bound form being marked
can be classed under the second usage above: tt'- tt ... (125:9,137:4; cf.
120:1 etc.), e f - T ... (129:2,132:9; cf. 122:24 etc.), mnt- t ... (133:22;
cf. 132:19 etc.), îcut'-t ... (138:18), epeT- T ... (i42:i9).38
The scribe placed superlinear strokes over single letters, groups of
two letters, and, rarely, groups of three letters.39 In the present edi
tion, the two latter cases are represented with a superlinear stroke
over only the second of the two (e.g. n) or three (e.g. mnt) letters
involved.40 Occasionally, the extended arm of 6 can serve as a super-
linear stroke over the following letter: 121:13, I 3 I:4> 140:16, 145:13
(these have been transcribed as though the superlinear stroke was
written separately).41 The Conjunctive conjugation bases Nr- and Nq-
are marked with a superlinear stroke over both letters, but I have
chosen to transcribe them as Nr and Nq. Similarly, I have always tran-
36Here, as in the third usage, there appears to be no systematic distinction

between these two shapes.
3?It is interesting to note that this usage never occurs in conjunction with the first
usage described.
38Bohlig and Wisse (Gos. Eg., p. 2 n. 4) list eight instances in NHC 111,2 where
the final t of a bound form ( a t - , m n t - , and 6 T - ) has been marked even though it is
not followed by another t or by A precise rule governing the marking of such forms
remains elusive.
39In 141:16 and 142:6 m n t has a superlinear stroke over all three letters while
elsewhere the stroke covers only mn in this word.
40The indexes to the present edition include the superlineation. For the precise
placement of superlinear strokes, however, consult Facs.: Codex III ( 1976).
4,Cf. Wisse, Cod. Intro., p. 232 n. 2, and Bohlig-Wisse, Gos. Eg., p. 2 n. 1.
T H E MANUSCRIPT 33
scribed the negative particle n - though it is sometimes m arked w ith a

superlinear stroke over both it an d a following q - or c - .
The scribes use of the superlinear stroke is restricted to b , a , m, n,
p, c, and in some circumstances q: c b tc d t , t b b h o y , b bio -, oycu-
ojb, 2 bco ), ^ ojtb ;42 b a b ia c , cpata .m ;43 m-, 6-x m -, etc.; n-, cjcn -,
mnt-, etc. (also see further below);44 p-; ^ hbc (also see further be
low); on q, see below.
The plural definite article n - is not marked with a superlinear
stroke before e o o y (121:2, 136:14) or aicdn (131:6),45 nor after a
one-vowel morpheme, the only preserved instance of which is with the
preposition e- (129:10). The preposition n - is not marked with a
superlinear stroke after ttca.- (ten, possibly eleven, instances) except
in 135:9-10 and i35:i9-46
q is marked with a superlinear stroke only when it occurs as a suffix
pronoun (not in oycucq), and then regularly only when it follows t
(twenty-two instances). After other consonants the evidence varies:
6Fi6<UMq (121:13), coycuNq (132:16), c y o n q (121:7), THpq (130:3,
136:16, 141:23,^ 142:10, 144:1 i)/ T H p q (138:5, 139:13), OYêq
(i37:i7)/oya.2q (i29:6).47 The evidence for c as a suffix pronoun
after a consonant is much less extensive: - c after t (three instances),
[ t ] h p c (121 : i 8 ) ; 48 the only exception is 145:22 . x o o b c , but here
x o o s e c is expected (cf. 139:7 and i45:24).49 Of further relevance to
this evidence are: the peculiar superlineation in 142:25 m n t c n o o y c
and 145:5 m n t c [ - - - ], where M N T c f c i M e is a likely res
toration (but cf. 144:20); the tendency of t to join to a following syl
lable in such line breaks as 126:16-17 [n e]lT 6 a> A n , 127:15-16 Nel
[ t m t t ] c 3 ln t t it n , 130:8-9 [n e ]lT M T T c a .N 2 0 Y N , 140:15-16 e lT B e - ,
42B H o ye is only a n a p p a re n t exception since b an d h belong to the sam e

syllable; note the line b reak in 146:2-3 (cf. 145:1-2 ap).
43b a a g in 121:24 is probably an error for b a a g .
^ tn in 140:5 and in 143:22 are errors for t n . The affirmative existential predi
cate is spelled both oyN- and o y N - .
45The article retains syllabicity before ob (127:18), axêoc (136:9), and
*pxci)N (122:14, i 38:i2> i 4* 7> I 43: i 5> H 5- 5> M 5:2I)
46In 123:23-124:1 TTMa>N.xioop r*p it is noteworthy both that ttm^ njcioop is a
bound group (note the position of r * p ) and that n - is marked with a superlinear stroke.
47Cf. 140:3 coTMeq and 131:9 x o o p e q , and probably 142:3 OTB[eq]; in the I
Perfect negative paradigm the spelling R neq- is attested.
48In 145:20 I have restored coy[cuNc].
49k as a suffix pronoun is never marked with a superlinear stroke, even when it
follows t (125:20, 130:12, 136:15, 140:4); but cf. the Circumstantial not yet con
jugation base gmtt2ltgk - (136:12).
34 T H E MANUSCRIPT
and 146:16-17 e]lTKcu; and the Present Relative forms gtc -

(132:17), and eTq- (i39:6)/eTeq- (134:12).50
h (ri) is regularly marked with a circumflex, except perhaps in
140:21. Otherwise, the scribe seems to have used the circumflex rather
erratically: 143:14 T (but cf. 133:18 etc.), 143:12 Tm (but cf. 141:13
etc.), 142:19 cDê (but cf. 130:10 etc.).51
The assimilation of n- is irregular.52 n- can become m- before b
(121:24), M 043:22 etc.), tt (120:1 etc.), and 'J' (147:22), but it is note
worthy how often assimilation is not orthographically expressed: be
fore b (144:1), h (120:26, 143:12), tt (127:16, 129:11 [6w], 131:3,
131:11,131:14, i3 5 :7 I 35:i0 >!35:I9> *40:8 [but cf. ap], 141:23,144:1,
144:8 [but cf. ap], 146:20), 'J' (123:16).53
t*2 ... is regularly written as e ..., but tt- ... is not orthograph
ically combined as <J>... (122:13, 125:18, restored thus in 130:5ap,
133:22ap).
The diphthong Hy is regularly spelled Hoy (epHoy, k a ^ hoy,
NHoy, CNHoy, t b b h o y , THoy, t h o y t n , ^BHoye, ^Hoy), with
but a single exception in 131:19 CNHy (at the end of the line).
The spelling e i is preferred to T. The latter occurs regularly only in
2PA.T, Yoyjk-A-C, and as a personal suffix after the preposition iU"
(139:7, restored thus in 145:24; cf. epoei, e^ccuei, mmoci: 132:21,
139:20,139:21,140:1-2,140:15,142:4). The demonstrative pronoun is
spelled tta.T, ta.T, naT with but two exceptions in 141:16 (see ap)
[.a.]ei and 145:15 T*.ei. The corresponding demonstrative article,
however, is spelled neei-, Teei-, Neei- (except for the anomalous
naT- in 141:6).54 Word-initial ei becomes 1in tt-itn (passim) andn-
icut (121:1*, 133:19), though in the latter case rr-eiarr seems to be
the preferred spelling (121:5, 129:20-21*, 134:150^, 144:9*, 145:11,
146:20).55 The spelling of Greek verbs in -ea> varies between -ei (two,
possibly three, instances: en iK Â ei [?], HeT^Noei, <}>opei) and-i
(three instances: cyM<j)u>Ni, <J>opi).56
Two nouns are abbreviated as nomina sacra, ttna. (passim) and
50Cf. Wisse, Cod. Intro., pp. 235 - 36 , and Bohlig-Wisse, Gos. Eg., p. 3 .
51Cf. Wisse, Cod. Intro.,* pp. 234 - 3 5 , and Bohlig-Wisse, Gos. Eg., p. 3 .
52n- does not assimilate to either \ (e.g. 134 :6) or p (e.g. 133 :19). It is noteworthy
that the words subject to assimilation include the possessive article n e tn - ( 147:22).
5^Cf. Bohlig-Wisse, Gos. Eg., p. 3 .
54Although this evidence suggests a preference for '( after x, cf. Mi.eiN, .xpierr,
* ei-, and n t* i-.
55Cf. 131:5, where GT-eme is spelled e-fne.
56Cf. T 6 AIOC, XpiJL.
CHp (bis; ccu T H p is spelled out in full in the super- and subscript title
of the text, and once w ithin the text).
The long spelling of the definite article (n e -, Te-, Ne-) is used
where expected in Sahidic,57 with but three exceptions: 125:9 tt' ttna.,
129:7 N^BHoye, 130:2 ei[H.
Further orthographic fluctuation is evidenced by variations in the
spelling of individual words and grammatical forms: A.MA.Te ( ix ) /
eM3k.2 T (2x), a.pi- (ix )/e p i- (ix ), N 2 (1 oxV^N H ê ( 3 X),
ep*T* (i3 x )/e p e T - (142:19 epeT-TH oyTN ), Ke- (ix )/6 e - (if my
analysis of 144:20 is correct), mmo* (passim)/mm x - (138:12-13),
Meeye (ix )/M e o y e (ix ), c o y fi- (2 x)/co yo )N - ( 3 X), t h o y t n
(7x ) /t h n o y ( 3X), oycuqj (ix )/o y cu cy e (2x), cuê (6x )/x z e (ix ),
2H (ix )/e H (ix ), MA.pia.M (4x)/MA.pi2A.MMH ( 7 X), Rel Pres
eToy- (4 x )/e T e y - (ix ), Fut 2 pi. t c t n n a .- ( 4 x ) /t t n a .- ( 7 X),58
II I Fut neg NNeq- (2x)/N eq- (ix), nuja.n- (ix)/eNq>A.- (ix ), ep-
qjAN- ( ix ) / epqja.- (ix ), epcyaiTM- (ix)/e p T M T e - ( 5X), possessive
art 3 pi. n e y -, T e y -, N ey- (5 x )/n o y -, T o y - ( 3X), demonstrative
art neei-, T e e i-, N eei- (passim)/ ux'i- (141:6).
In addition, there are a number of words and forms which occur in
more or less unexpected spellings, without variants: mhc (i2 x), n a c
(ix), absolute possessive pron pi. ncu- (2x), nna^pn- (ix ), CA.eie
(ix), c e jc n - (ix ), ie (2x), O Ae6 (ix ), jccubb (2x), m onoxoc
(2x), I I I Fut neg 3 pi. NNoy- (ix ), Cond 2 sing, f epcya.N- (ix ).59
Vocalic reduction is not orthographically expressed in n tcd tn - (2x),
oyuxy- (ix ), and comic- (ix ).
The Relative Perfect forms are spelled with initial n (as also the I I
Perfect forms), never with eN. But ta .t tn is the only attested
spelling of the 2 pi. form (145:20), and the paradigm also contains the
forms neNTA.^- (146:18*), c t a .^- ( i 32:i 6), and ep- (133:10).60
Special mention deserves to be made of the peculiar form of the
prenominal Conditional negative e p T M T e - (127:1, 134:1, 134:5,
134:8,134:11),61 for which I have no explanation.
Clauses of purpose introduced by x e - or -xeicA. a.c are formed with
the I I I Future in the negative, but in the affirmative they are formed
57Including with o y n o y , o y o e iq j, zih, 2 0 0 Y> and 2 Y

58Cf. Rel Fut 1 pi. eTfiNi.- and II Fut i pi. eMi.-.
59Note also cmmon (if this means truly in 122:16), TaiJcpHoyT (if this is the
correct restoration in 129:4 ), and NTJipe- (if this is the Temporal 2 sing, f in 137 :7 ).
60But cf. 136:24 N6 NTAY-, 141:24 npcuMe NTa.q-, and probably 121:1 [naif]
NT1Y*
61The more standard form e p q jx m - occurs once, in 133 :23 .
36 T H E MANUSCRIPT
with the II Future. There is but a single instance of the III Future
affirmative in the text (135:3 eye-), though it is questionable because
it is followed immediately by a lacuna.
Negation by n - . . . a n , where expected, predominates only slightly
(ten instances) over negation by an alone (nine instances: 133:13,
134:6, 134:22-23, 141:2, 141:3-4, i 43:i8>!43:24, 144:20-21, 144:22-
23)-
Greek verbs are used with and without p- (Api-, epi-) as an aux
iliary in equal measure (seven instances of each).
There are five instances of m m o - standing for nHT- in the expres
sion c b o a m h o - (see also 140:23), and a few possible instances of n-
standing for N- (see esp. 136:13). Conversely, in the expression ^n-
t t t mma" (138:12-13), N-Tne is rather to be expected.
TEXT AND TRANSLATION
St e p h e n E m m el
The basis of the present edition is my own study of NHC III in

Cairo (including a complete collation of Dial. Sav. with the aid of
ultra-violet light) during 1975 and 1976, and of the Yale fragment in
New Haven in 1980.1 I have benefitted, however, from the work of
other members of the Coptic Gnostic Library Project in the form of
various transcriptions and notes made by Harold W. Attridge, James
A. Brashler, C. J. de Catanzaro, Bentley Layton, Dieter Mueller,
Douglas M. Parrott, H. J. Polotsky, James M. Robinson, John D.
Turner, Francis E. Williams, and Frederik Wisse.2
The present edition is an attempt to recover the Coptic version of
Dial. Sav., and is intentionally conservative, both in leaving the ortho
graphic and grammatical irregularities of the text unaltered, and in
avoiding overly speculative restorations of the many lacunas. In the
accompanying translation, I have enclosed in square brackets much
which is only slightly paleographically uncertain, preferring to risk
giving to non-Coptophones the impression that some portions of the
text are less securely established than may actually be the case. With
in the translation, three dots (... or [... ]) indicate an unspecified
number of untranslatable letters. The division of the translated text
into paragraphs, as well as the numeration of these paragraphs for
more convenient reference, is an entirely modern convention.
The sigla and abbreviations used in the text and critical apparatus
are as follows:
'See Stephen Emmel, A Fragment of Nag Hammadi Codex III in the Beinecke
Library: Yale inv. 1784, BASP 17 ( 1980), 53- 60. In the present edition I have
improved the transcriptions of 145:7 .9.22.24 and 146:8.
2A preliminary translation of Dial. Sav. was published by Attridge in NHLib-
Eng, pp. 229- 38. The paperback edition of this book issued in 1981 incorporates a
revised translation of the end of the text based on my edition and translation of the
Yale fragment. The new translation in the present volume has benefitted from com
ments by Hans-Martin Schenke, to whom I am grateful for his willingness to study my
work carefully prior to publication.
NAG HAMMADI CODEX 111,5
represents a letter which cannot be identified with complete

certainty. A dot placed beneath a letter indicates that the
letter is but one of at least two possible identifications of the
ambiguous trace of the letter. A dot placed beneath a letter
with a superlinear stroke, circumflex, diaeresis, or articula
tion mark (e.g. n) indicates that the letter is paleograph-
ically uncertain but the superlinear stroke, circumflex, di
aeresis, or articulation mark is clearly legible, unless a note
in the critical apparatus explains otherwise (e.g. 120:19).
[ ] enclose letters completely lost through deterioration of the
papyrus. Dots within square brackets (e.g. [ ...... ]) indi
cate the approximate number of letters lost, measured by an
average letter space (including interliteral space) of 0.5 cm.
Dashes are used within square brackets (e.g.
[ ]) to indicate that the entire lacuna could have
contained ten letters or more.
[[ J enclose letters deleted from the text by the scribe.
{ } enclose letters deleted from the text by the modern editor.
< > enclose letters added to the text by the modern editor.
( )enclose optional restorations,
cod. = the reading of the codex is
corr. = corrected
Doresse = uncorrected printers proofs (January 1952) of an edi
tion of NHC III 120-133 by Togo Mina and Jean Doresse;
a photocopy of the proofs is kept at the Institute for Anti
quity and Christianity, Claremont, California. Although it
is quite possible that portions of the text were more legible
at the time this transcription was made than they are now,
the proofs contain too many typographical errors to war
rant giving the few unique readings preserved in them more
than passing notice in the critical apparatus.
Krause = Martin Krause, Der Dialog des Soter in Codex III von
Nag Hammadi in Martin Krause (ed.), Gnosis and Gnos
ticism: Papers read at the Seventh International Conference
on Patristic Studies (Oxford, September 8th-l$th IQ75)
(NHS 8; Leiden: Brill, 1977), pp. 13-34-
poss. = possibly
prob. = probably
Schenke = Hans-Martin Schenke (by personal correspondence)
TH E DIALOGUE OF T H E SAVIOR
40 NAG HAMMADI CODEX 111,5
pic
__ TTAIAAOrOC MTTCCUTHp-
2 tt c h p n e JC ^ q N N e q M a q h th c
j ( h a h a L n e o y o e iq ? q jc u n e Ne
4 CNHOy OCKXA.C NAK. CD NCCUN
M n e N ^ ic e 1 NTNAê epATN n
6 t a n a t t a y c i c - neTNACDê rAp e
pATq ^ n t a n a t t a y c i c qNAMTON
8 MMoq NoÂCNe^' a n o k . A e ^ >-
jccd m m oc n h t n .x eu p cp n e N
io t it N o y o e ic y nim [ .............. ]
o y o e iq j x [ ]
1 2 MMOC NHTN [ ]
p e o T e H[t ------------ ]
1 4 epeDTN ]
x e T oprH o y ^ O T e T [ e ............... ]
1 6 K.IM GTOprH o y p . [ ...................]
AAAA CUC AT6 TN A n [................. ]
1 8 p o y q jc u n e b o a [ ]
Ay-Xi N N eeicyA .xe e p o c ^N oy^C o]
20 T MNOyCTCDT OiyCD ACTAÔ M
M ooy epA T oy m n ^cn ap x cu n
2 2 .xeeBO A m m oc m t t a a a y e i e
BOA" AAAA ANOK N T ep iei Al
2 4 oycuN T 2 ih a c i t c a b o o y e
T A ia.B a.cic eTeyN A occuB e mm [o c ]
2 6 R6 INCCDT TT* MNNMONOXOC
i 2 o:pagination lacuna over pK; pic Doresse

120:11 trace prob. from r , i , k , m , n , tt , or t
120:16 trace prob. from o or cu; prob. restore n e ort g in the lacuna
120:19 N certain, superlinear stroke restored
120:20 m: m certain, superlinear stroke restored
120 :23-24 A fingerprint is visible under ultra-violet light between *n (line 23) and
e T e (line 24 ); cf. NHC III 68 :11- 12.
120:25 T e y : i.e. T O y
120:26 c c d t tt : sic (cf. N H C III 65 :7 )
T H E DIALOGUE OF T H E SAVIOR 41
*p. 120
* The Dialogue of the Savior I

(i) The Savior said to his disciples, I Already the time has come,
I brothers, for us to abandon 5 our labor and stand at I rest. For
whoever stands I at rest will rest I forever. And I I say to you, [be]
always 10 [above ... ] I time . . . [ . . . ] I ... you [... ] I be afraid [of
... ] I ... you ...[...]*5 ... anger [is] fearful [... ] I arouse anger
.. . [. . . ] I but since you have . . . [ . . . ] I . . . [ . . . ] I they accepted
these words [concerning it] with [fear] 20 and trembling, and it set
I them up with governors, I for from it nothing was forthcoming. I
But when I came, I I opened the path and I taught them about 25 the
(i) 120:9 you: Throughout the translation, you" is plural unless it is indicated other-
wise in a note or by the context (e.g .121:6) .
120:16 prob. is . . . ]
120:19.20 it (bis): i.e. anger?
120:21 governors: Throughout the translation, "governor is used to translate a word
usually transliterated as "archon
120:22 it: i.e. anger?
42 N AG H A M M A D I C O D E X 111,5
[?K]
[ N a J ] N T a L y c o o y N m it ic u t ' e * Y
2 [ n liC T e y e e T M H e ^ y ^ N e o o y
[ T ] H p o y 6 T 6 T N rJ' N 0 Y 6 0 0 Y T
4 TNqjA.N'feooY 6 e 'J' NTeeiê
jceccuTM ep o N n e ic u T K.*T*.ee
6 nta.kccotm eneKMONOreNHC
NtyHpe *ycu a.K .qjonq epoK.-
8 [.kJ'J'mton NA.q s b o a 2**Z*-Z n
[ ........ n t ] o k n e [ n i ] I e T 6 T e q 6 oM
10 [ feK-ZOTTAON N
[ J.o Y o eiN
12 [ ]oYeqoN 2
[ ]eMA.y6M6cuMq
14 [ ]N 2 T T A O rO C M >-
[ ...............]m T A .N O IA . MTTCUN 2 '
1 6 [ ............] b o a mmok. n to k . n e
[n ]M eo Y e Jk-Y00 TMNTATpooycy
18 [T ]H p C - NM M O NOXO C- n & A IN CCD
[t]m epoN K 3k.TA.ee nta.k.ccotm e
20 N e iccco T n na.Y 2 N Teicnpoc<J>o
[p]a. e .N H O Y e ^ o Y N 2 n n Y 2 b h o y 6
22 [e T N A .]N O Y O Y NA.T N T A Y C C 0 T 6
[N N ]eY '|,Y x o o Y e g b o a nnik.cu
24 [a ] o n m ba a b Jc e K .A .a .c e Y N & u p c u n e
121:1 n: n certain, superlinear stroke restored; cq q y n read from very ambiguous

traces obscured by ink run along a papyrus fiber; h : m virtually certain,
superlinear stroke restored; tticdt: for the spelling cf. 133:19; T : t not certain,
articulation mark restored
121:2-3 xya) ... Noyeooy: passage poss. corrupt; poss. emend fioyeooy to m hooy
121:8 [x k ] or [eic]
121:9 poss. [zice* n t]o k (cf. 120:4-6); ire erased at the end of the line
121:10 poss. [ne ] or the like (cf. erasure at end of 121:9); prob. n]K
121:11 prob. [ ng ]
121:13 6 m : cod. 6m (see above, p. 32)
121:17 M : cod. [ . . ], but cf., e.g., n 1 in 124:23; Meoye: i.e. Meeye
121:21 undeciphered trace from k, y, or x ; prob. eyNHoy; eKNHoy Doresse
121:24 B A A e : sic; prob. emend to a \ \ e
*p. 121
passage which they will traverse, I the elect and solitary, * [who have
known the Father, having I believed] the truth and [all] the
praises I while you offered praise. I
(2) So when you offer praise, do so like this: 5 Hear us, Father, just
as I you heard your only-begotten I son and received him I [ . . . ]. . .
him rest from many ... I [ ---- You are the one] whose power 10
[... your] armor ... I [ . . . ] . . . light I [ . . . ]. . . living I [ . . . ]. . .
touch ... I [ . . . ] . . . the word ... *5 [...] repentance ... life I
[...]... you. You are I [the] thinking and the [entire] serenity I of
the solitary. Again, [hear] I us just as you heard 20 your elect.
Through your [sacrifice, I ... ] will enter by means of their I [good]
works. These have saved I their souls from these I blind [limbs] so
120:25-121:3 poss. the passage which the elect and solitary will traverse. [By having
believed] the truth and [all] the praises while you offered praise (or [all] the praises
<which> you offered), [these have known the Father].
121:3 Poss- <which> you offered.
(2) 121:7-8 received him [and] gave him rest or received him, giv[ing] him rest
121:8-9/7055. many [labors. You
121:10 poss. [ . . . is ... your] armor . ..
121:11 prob. [ . . . is . . . ] . . . light
121:20-22 if the repetition of n&I is tolerable, poss. These, entering through your
[sacrifice] by means of their [good] works, have saved
121:21 prob. these] will enter but poss. you] will enter
[pK.B]
Cp&NieNe? 2&MHN' 't'NA

2 t c a b c d t n ^ o t a n eqqpANcycu
n e N6 in e o y o e i q ? m ttb co a g b o a
4 T q jo p n ' n 6 om MTTKAice n a >
TCDMNT epOJTN MTTppÔTS
6 n t t n . x o o c J t e e ic n e o y o >-
e iq j A q a j a m e a a a a ecyATeTNNAy
8 ey6epcuB NoycoT e .......[.]
ne* TTA'f e .[ ] . . [ ........... ]
1 0 N ANNNOy[ ]
epeT N N [ ]
1 2 e iM e -xe.[ ]
GBOA MTT^CDB n [ ................... ]
1 4 Aycu NApXCDN . [ ................ ]
TCDMNT epCDTN m[ .................]
16 6 M M O N 0 O T 6 t 6 o [ ............ ]
T e e q jc u n e 6 e e T e T N N A p O T [e ]
18 HTq MneTNATCDMNT epcuT[fi]
neTM M Ay qNACOMICTHOYTN
2 0 e n e i MNoyA b o a n ^ h t o y eqN A
"1*00 epcuTN h eqN A NA e n [ h ] tn
22 AAAA N't2 e 6 cuqjT' NCA.[ . . n]
pA f NHTq' eATSTNJCpO e cy A
2 4 x e NIM T2l-XM nKA2' NTOq
122:7 e q j * T T N : q j * added above t g t ; y : for the shape, cf. the ends of 131:16.19
122:9 trace before first lacuna from n or t
122:12 trace before lacuna from the bottom of a vertical stroke
122:15 lacuna over m2 (poss. read m)
122:16 prob. 6 o [ m ; poss. 6 o [ m m ttk a.k.6 ] (cf. 122:4)
122:19 n: n restored, superlinear stroke certain
122:22 trace before lacuna from n or t
*p. 122
that they might exist * eternally. Amen.

(3) I will I teach you. When I the time of dissolution arrives, I
the first power of darkness will 5 come upon you. Do not be afraid I
and say, Behold! The time I has come! But seeing I a single staff
I ... this . . . [ . . . ) I . . . [ . . . ] I
understand I ... the work . . . [ . . . ] I and the governors
x5 come upon you I Truly, fear . . . [ . . . ] I __
So if you are going to be [afraid] I of what is about to come upon
[you], I it will engulf you. 20 For there is not one among them who
will I spare you or show [you] mercy. I But in this way, look at
...[...] I in it, since you have mastered every word I on earth. It
(3) 122:16-17 prob. Truly, fear is the [power .. . ] and poss. Truly, fear is the [power
of darkness]
122:20 them: i.e. uwhat is about to come upon [you] (the first power of darkness?) and
others like it
122:22 prob. look at [the . . . ]
122:23 *'* what is about to come upon [you] (the first power of darkness?)
122:23-24 poss. in it. Since you have mastered every word on earth, it (or he)
122:24 It: or He
pier
[ ........ JjC IT H O y T N p A l TTTO

2 [ ........ ]m A T M N A p X H N ^ H T q
[ ____ T y ]p A N N O C 6 T 6 T N U J A N >-
4 [ ........ ].e[T]eTNNANAY eNSTe
[ ................ ] o o y A y cu o n T e
6 [ t ] a m o m m cu tn x e
[ ]. R 6 in A 0 n c M 0 c
8 [ ]/S 0 riC M 0 C e q u ? o
[ ]..O C N T M H 6
10 [ ]oy^N AAAA c e
[ ] NTCUTN A
12 [ ].N T M H HAY
[ ].C 6 T O N 2 ' 6 T B 6
14 [ ].N T T T N p A C y
[ ].n 6e xckxxc
16 [ N j e T N 'p y x o o y e
[ ] MHTTOT6 Nq
18 [ ] NdinqjAJte
[ ] t a y t a a o m >-
20 [ ...........] . [ ........... Ic u M T T o y e q }
[ ....... ]q - n [ ............ ] e n e T N C A N
22 [ ........ ] - N n e [ .......... ] o a A A q n
[ ] b ttm an
123:pagination lacuna over pier; piTr Doresse

123:1-23 The location of the left margin on this page is very uncertain.
123:1 prob. restore q in the lacuna
123:1-2 poss. T ol[oy neei] or t o I [ t t o c t t i ]
123:8-9 prob. qjo I[on t ] o t t o c
123:11 n: n restored, superlinear strokecertain
123:12 trace from x, a , m, c , or ; lacuna over n (poss. read n)
123:13 poss. N o jy c
123:14 prob. ]mn
123:15 trace from n o r t
123:17 q corr. over false start of some letter (k?), giving false impression that fiq* is
be read
123:18 n: n not certain, superlinear stroke restored
123:19 prob. n]t*y> poss. efr^Y
123:20 trace from p, <J>, q, or
123:21 lacuna over q (poss. read q)
:
123 21-22 poss. c*nI[OYn] mntt[tncanb]oa; AAq: a 1 corr. over erased o
*p. 123
* [... take] you up to the ... I [ . . . place] where there is no rule

I [... tyrant]. When you I [ . . . you] w ill see those who 5 [ . . . ] . . .
and also ... I [ . . . tell] you ... I [ . . . ] . . . the reasoning power
I [... ] reasoning power ... I [ . . . ] . . . truth 10 [ . . . ] . . . but ...
I [...]. But you I [ . . . ] . . . truth, this I [ . . . ] . . . living ... I
[ . . . ] . . . your joy *5 [ . . . ]. So [ . . . ] . . . in order that I [ . . . ] your
souls I [ . . . ] lest it I [ . . . ] the word [ . . . I . . . ] . . . raise ... 20
I your ... I
123:1-2 poss. [ . . . take] you up to the [mountain, that place] where there is no rule or
[... take] you up to the [place], where there is no rule
123:4 who: or things which or whom
I23:9 Prb [ place] of truth
I23:i3 poss. [ . . . j living [mind] . . .
I23:i4 Prob. [ . . . and] your joy
123:17 it: or he
123:17-18 poss. [ . . . ] lest the word [ . . .
123:21-22 poss. your [in]side [and your outside] . . .
PICA
JCioop ra.p o y ^ O T e n e F in [. . . m]
2 TO 6 BOX- X W X NTCDTN M[NOy]
2 H t NoycuT n a .p a .r e MM[oq]
4 neqcyiK r a p o y N o 6 n e [- n e q ]
j c ic e o y N o 6 6 m a t [ 6 n e ]
6 o y ^ H T NoycoT* j c [ ................ ]
xycu m c o j^ T e . [ ................ ]
8 n e H M o y e io ).[ ]
n 6 om THp.[ ]
10 pCDTN CNA..[ ]
aycu n 6 o [ ]
1 2 n to o y n[ ]
e z ' 1'TaM.[ ]
1 4 f-'pyxH n t o [ ]
opcune n n o [ ]
1 6 ^N o y o N nim[ ]
TCOTN N6 N . [ ------------ ]
1 8 aycu -X n t[ ]
ttcdbo ? ^ n [ ]
2 0 RcyHpe m[ ]
ayco T t n [ ........ ]yN [ ]
2 2 n t c d t n . [ ....... ] e R n [ ]
n e .x a q N [6 iM a e ]e a .io c [.ace. . ]
2 4 x a ) R e e [ ------------ ]
124:1-2 prob. tt[ g t n m ] t o , though other possessives are also possible

124:7 trace prob. from n, t , or y
124:9 trace prob. from o (prob. T H p o f y ) , c, or q
124:11 prob. 6 o [m
124:16-17 prob. n] I tcdtn
124:17 trace from o, c, cd, qj, or 6
124:21 n : n restored, superlinear strokecertain; lacuna over n 2 (poss. read n)
124:23 prob. [x c n ], [jceoy], or [jceêN]
*p. 124
I [... ] ___ For the crossing place * is fearful [before... ]. I But

you, [with a] I single mind, pass [it] by! I For its depth is great; [its] 5
height [is] enormous [ . . . ] I a single mind . . . [ . . . ] I and the fire
. . . [ . . . ] I . . . [ . . . ] I ... power . . . [ . . . ] 10 ... you, they . . . [ . . . ]
I and . . . [ . . . ] I they . . . [ . . . ] I . . . [ . . . ] I ... soul . . . [ . . . ] x5
. . . [ . . . ] I in everyone [ . . . ] I ... are . . . [ . . . ] I and . . . [ . . . ] I
... forget . . . [ . . . ] 20 ... son . . . [ . . . ] I and you [ . . . ] . . . [ . . . ] I
you I
124:1 though other pronouns are possible, prob. [before you].

124:9 prob. [all] the powers [ . . . ]
124:10 poss. they will . . . [ . . . ]
124:11 prob. and the [powers ... ]
124:16-17 prob. [ . . . you] are the . . . [ . . . ]
M e
] n e o c a q Fi6 in c H p
X e ].0)NNeTN2HTK
].N au ? u > x n n t o k
4 ]T o y .a.a c o c e n .x o e ic
]e eN e^B H oye
6 l . i 'l 'y x o o y e Naf
]NIK.Oyei OTa.N
8 e ---------- ^ a ( n ) -------- ] y n a. a t tu n e tcdn
. ].a.N Jcen nNA.
10 n e .x a ] q f id m - x o e ic
x e ] n eyRI >-
12 ]n ap a* .a.M
BA.N6 h h ] o o y Na'f H e Y M o y >-
14 .......... ]. M eyTa.ico .x ex y co y cD N
... ]c y N Z y ro c n e T N A q jo
16 n o ] y e p o q ' tm h ra p cy acq p m e
N c a jn c a B e M N n A iita io c n e
18 aca.q N 6 ]in c a rrH p ^ te n ^ H s c
H nc]cuM a n e n N o y c e<J> o c o n
20 n t n 2 h ] t k c o y tc u n eT C T a f T e
........ ].C NeTNCCDMa ^ e N o y
22 o e rn ] N6' e<|) OCON neT N ^H T '
o y ic a.]ite n e ' n e T N o y o e m eT eT N
125:1 A q corr. over erased q

125:3 trace from r, e, e , n , or t
125:4 prob. [ n ex^q (N * .q ) n 6 i] or [ n e x e ]
125:6 prob. ] n i
125:8 prob. e]yN2i
125:10 poss. [ n e x x q NA]q
125:14 trace from r, h, i, tt, or t (lacuna over this letter); poss. [oyAe n 3l]J (i not
certain, diaeresis restored)
125:15 prob. [Ney] or [Noy], though other possessives are possible
125:20 [ n t n ^ h ] t k : cf. 125:2
125:21 trace prob. from h , i, n , cu, q j, or q
THE DIALOGUE OF THE SAVIOR 51
*p. 125
(4) [Matthew] said, [...] I . . . [. . . ]*[ ] ?

(5) The Savior said, I [ . . . ] . . . the things inside you I [ . . . ] . . .
will remain, you I [ . . . ]
(6) Judas [said], Lord, 5 [ . . . ] . . . the works I [ . . . ]. . . souls,
these I [... ] these little ones, when I [... ] where will they be? I
the spirit10 [... ].
(7) The Lord [said], I [ . . . ]. . . I [... receive] I them. These do
not die, I [.. . ]. . . they are not destroyed, for they have known *5
[...] consort and him who would [receive I them]. For the truth
seeks I [out the] wise and the righteous. I
(8) The Savior [said], The lamp I [of the body] is the mind. As
long as20 [the things inside] you are set in order, that is, I [ . . . ] . . . ,
your bodies are [luminous]. I As long as your hearts I are [dark], the
(4) 124:23- 125:1 prob. [How . . . ] ? or [Of what sort . . . ] ?

(5) 125:2-3 you (bis): masc. sing.
(6) 125:6 prob. [ . . . these] souls
(7) 125:10 poss. The Lord [said to him]
125:14 poss. [nor] are they destroyed
>25:15 though other possessives are possible, prob. [their] consorts and
(8) 125:20 you: masc. sing.
[pics]
6 o ) o >t ' cboa e [T q ]

2 ANOK A IHO yT[ ]
x e "fNABCDK ]
4 MTTACyA.Xe A t[ ]
fTNNOoy o >a [ ne-X A y (NAq)]
6 N6 iN eq M A H T[H C . x e n .x o e i c ]
nim n e T c p m e h [ ................ ]
8 6cd att eBOA* n e .x [ n . x o e ic ]
o cen e T ty iN e [ ]
io 6 co att c b o a n [ n e-X A q (N Aq)]
N 6 iM A e [e A io c . x e n . x o e ic 2 0 ]
12 TAN eeicp[A(N) ]
NTAcyA^ce nim n e T . [ ........... ]
14 t t g t c c d t m - rre.XAq N ()in [.x o e ic ]
.x e n e T q jA - x e N T o q on tt tc [ c d tm ]
1 6 Ayco n e T N A y c b o a N Toq o n [n e ]
T 6 c u A n eBO A- n e J C A C n 6 im[api]
18 ^ a m .x e n .x o e ic - e iC H H [ T e .. ]
<J)Opi MnCCUMA 6 BOA TCON [ e e i]
20 piM H 6BOA TCUN e e i [ ........ ]
neJCA q R6 i n . x o e i c a c e [ ........ ]
22 piM e e T B e N e q ^ B H o y e [ ....... ]
qjcu-xn Aycu n N o y c c a m e [.].[.]
126:7 h : h c e r t a i n , c i r c u m f l e x r e s t o r e d ; p o s s . [ n i m ( o n ) tt t ] (c f. 126:13-14)
126:8 prob. n e Jc [e n Jc o e ic N*y] or ne.x[a.q N 6in.xoeic]
126:9 poss. [ n t o c j o n tt t ] (cf. 126:15-17)
126:12 poss. eeiqj[a.(N)co)TM ] (cf. 126:13-15)
126:13 t r a c e f r o m cu o r qj; p o s s . Q)[xe h n im ] (c f. 126:15)
126:15 JceneTqÂJce: n e a d d e d a b o v e t o j ; c [ c u t m ] : c f. 126:14
126:16-17 [ne] I t : c f. 142:23-24
126:18 p r o b . H H [ T e ^ 2hh[tg eei], o r HH[Te êi]
126:19 [eei]: cf. 126:20
126:20 poss. [ccuse*] (cf. 126:22-23 piMe ... ccuse)
126:23 q^cujcn: sic; emend to qjcu-xn*; trace between lacunas from the bottom of a
vertical stroke
*p. 126
luminosity you * anticipate [... ] I I have I ... I will go

I ... my word . . . [ . . . ] 5 I send I
(9) His [disciples said, Lord], I who is it who seeks, and [... ] I
reveals?
(10) [The Lord said ... ], I He who seeks [... ] 10 reveals
[] I
(11) [Matthew said, Lord, when] I I [... ] I and [when] I speak,
who is it who . . . [ . . . ] I ... who listens?
(12) [The Lord] said, *5 It is the one who speaks who also [lis
tens], I and it is the one who can see who also I reveals.
(13) [Mary] said, I Lord, behold! I Whence [ . . . ] . . . the body
[while I]20 weep, and whence while I [... ]? I
(14) The Lord said, [...] I weep on account of its works [... ] I
(9) 126:6-8 poss. His [disciples said to him, Lord], who is it who seeks, and [who is it
{poss. add also) who] reveals?"
(10) 126:8 prob. [The Lord said to them] or just [The Lord said]
126:9-10 poss. [It is] the one who seeks [who also] reveals or [It is] that which seeks
[that also] reveals
(11) 126:11-14 poss. [Matthew said to him, Lord, when] I [listen . . . ] and [when] I
speak, who is it who [speaks, and who] is it who listens?
(12) 126:15-17 or It is that which speaks that also [listens], and it is that which can see
that also reveals.
(13) 126:17 Mary: In the manuscript this name is variously spelled Mariham (Greek
Mariam) andMarihamme (Greek Mariamme).
126:19 Whence [do I] bear the body or Whence [have I] borne the body
126:20 poss. and whence while I [laugh]?
(14) 126:22 its works: i.e. the works of the body
[pic]Z
............ ].TTNA ep T M T eo y a.
] kak . qNAcyNAy
.............. J'J'TAMO 6 e MMOJTN
4 ]o y o e iN n e m cA ice
jA co ^ e epA Tq >-
6 .............. ] n a y an e n o y o e i N
] tt6 o a [ ].A y q iT o y c b o a n
8 ]6[. . . ]cuc- T6TN A'f
] e m Aycu 5-
io q j] o o n ' q ^ A eN e^ '
J.NTMNT
12 ------------ ]NNOyA
]e N 2 t o t e ceN A
14 ___ ] 2 e mmcotn n 6 in 6 om
. . . ]y eTMTTC ANTTTe' Ayco Ne
16 TMn]CANTTITN MnMA CTMMAy
eq N A ]a ;cu n e N 6inpiM e mn
18 n ___] NNOBê G-XNOAH NNA'f TH
p o y n ] e x A q fidi'foy-AAC x e A .x ic
20 ep o N n .x ] o e ic x eÂ O H eM nA T e
T n e mn ] itk.a 2 o jc u n e N e o y n e
22 ........ ] neocA q N 6 m .x o e ic x e
oy]iCAKe n e m n o y m o o y Aycu
127pagination Z read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 120)

127:1 trace (ligatured) from r, e, o, tt, c, t, or y; e p T M T e : i.e. ep(qjAN)TM
127:2-3 poss. [cuê eparq fin]iCAice ... I [an enoyoeiN*] or I [enoyoeiN *n*]
(cf. 127:5-6, 133:23-134:1)
127:5 a read in p h o tographs ( BASP 14 [1977] 120)
127:5-6 poss. [Aycu epTMTeoy]A (or [Aycu epqjATMoy]A)... I [tticak.6 (ri)qNAq;]
(cf. 127:1-3, 133:23-134:1)
127:6 NAy read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 120)
127:7 tt6 and [ ].a read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 120); ]tt6oa
added above ].Ayqi; undeciphered trace prob. from r, tt, c , t, y, x, or x
127:8 6 read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 120)
127:14 m: m certain, superlinear stroke restored; t corr. over n
127:15 prob. [THpo]y
127:17-18 [eqNA]... 1[ tt Some spelling of jca^-X^ is to be restored at the
beginning of line 18; cf. Matt 8:12, 13:42.50, 22:13, 24:51, 25:30, Luke 13:28.
127:18 n : n certain, superlinear stroke restored
127:20 [epON: cf. 128:12-13, though [epoei is also possible
127:21-22 poss. ne I [eTqjoon*] or ne I[tojoott ]
*p. 127
remain and the mind laughs spirit. If one

does not I [... ] darkness, he will be able to see I [...]. So I tell
you I [... ] light is the darkness 5 [ . . . ] . . . stand in I [... ] not see the
light I [... ] the lie [ . . . ] . . . they brought them from I [ . . . ] . . .
[...]__ You will give I [ . . . ]. . . and 10 [... exist] forever. I
[...]... I [ . . . ]. . . I [... ] ever. Then I the powers !5 [ . . . ]. . .
which are above as well as those I [below] will [... ] you. In that
place I [there will] be weeping and I [gnashing] of teeth over the end
of [all] these things. I
(15) Judas [said], Tell20 [us, Lord], what was [... ] before I [the
heaven and the] earth existed. I
127:2-3 poss. [stand in the] darkness, he will [not] be able to see [the light].
127:4 poss. [ . . . ] is [ . . . ] light. The darkness
127:4-6 poss. [ . . . ] light is the darkness. [And if one does not] stand in [the darkness,
he will] not [be able] to see the light.
127:7 the lie: These words, and possibly others before them lost in the lacuna, are a
superlinear addition by the scribe.
127:14-15 prob. [all] the powers which are above
(15) 127:19-20 poss. Tell [me, Lord]
127:20 poss. what [there] was before
127:23 . ne (at the beginning of the line) Doresse

p[K.H]
oynNA. e q e iJC N o y M [o o y &noic]

2 A e i'-XO) MMOC N[HTN X C -----]
n eTeTN cym e n c o j[ .................. ]
4 e O T2T f i c c u q e i c [ ..................... ]
2N THN O Y a y . [ ............... ]
6 N T 6 0 M M N T T M y c [ T H p iO N . . . ]
n N i .xeeB O A n ^ [ ................ ]
8 T ic a K ia . e i e [ ]
T T N O y C M.[ ]
io e ic ^ H H T e e[ ]
NMn.[ ]
12 n e .x a .q n [ Jc e n ^ c o ]
e i c a.jcic ep o N jc[ t e c c u ]
1 4 z e e p a r c t o n xycu n N [ o y c m]
m hc e q u j o o n tc u n - n e[.x a.q ]
1 6 R 6 in .x o e ic JtenK cueT* fi[n e ]
TTNA NTA.qqjCDTTe NTOy[ . . . ]
1 8 M n e c N ^ y e T B e n a .f a i n [ . . . ]
cycune* a .q u )u m e N2 pa.[lf n ^ h ]
2 0 T o y N6 in N o y c MMH[e ]
n e ep q ja.o y p cu M e T a .[e e T (e )'j'y ]
2 2 x h epA T c ^ M n jc ic e t o t [ . . . ]
J t i c e M A .eea. 1 0 c A e a.q.N o[yq]
128:1 M[ooy: cf. Gen 1:2

128:3 prob. N c c p [ q ; poss. N c c p [ q ayco TTri]
128:4 poss. eipfcHHTe qcyoon ]
128:5 T H N O y : i.e. t h o y t n ; trace from cd or qp
128:6 y c [ read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977 ] 120)
128:7 n^[ read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977 ] 120)
128:9 poss. mm[h (cf. 128:14- 15 .20 )
128:11 trace from e or o
128:12 lacuna over n ; prob. N[6 iM x e e x io c x e or N[xq n 6 iT o y ax c x e
128:13 e c : cf. 128:14 (-c) and 128:15 (eq-); poss. ^[eT êJ+yxH e c (cf. 128:21- 22)
128:14-15 N[oyc m ]Im h: cf. 128:20
128:17 Toy: i.e. Tey (?); poss. [m h tg ] or [6om ]
128:18 poss. n [(e)T m i] or n [ N o y c ] (but against the latter, cf. 128:19- 20, which
would be made a bit redundant thus)
128:20-21 poss. m h[6 eqpcujlne
128:21 epqpx: i.e. epqpxN
128:22 prob. t o t [ q n x ]
*p. 128
(16) The Lord said, I There was darkness and water and * spirit
upon [water]. I And I say [to you, ... ] I ... you seek . . . [ . . . ] I
inquire after . . . [ . . . ] 5 within you . . . [ . . . ] I ... the power and the
[mystery ... ] I spirit, for from . . . [ . . . ] I wickedness [... ] come
...[...] I mind . . . [ . . . ] 10 behold . . . [ . . . ] I . . . [ . . . ]. I
(17) [... ] said, [Lord], I tell us I where [the ... is established]
and *5 where [the true mind] exists. I
(18) The Lord [said], The fire [of the] I spirit came into existence
...[...] I both. On this account, the [... ] I came into existence,
and 20 the [true] mind came into existence [within] them [...]. I If
someone [sets his soul] I up high, [then ... ] I be exalted.
(16) 128:3-4 poss. what you seek [and] inquire after, [behold it is]
128:9 Poss the [true] mind [ . . . ]
(17) 128:12 prob. [Matthew] said, [Lord] or [Judas] said [to him, Lord]
128:14 Pss. where [the soul is established]
(18) 128:17-18 poss. came into existence [amidst] them both or came into existence as
the [power] of them both
128:18 poss. the [spirit] or the [mind]
128:20-21 poss. came into existence [within] them. If someone [sets his soul]
128:22 prob. [then he will]
pice
[ ] b N T& qJCiTq n6 i
2 [ ] e N T o q n e g t t a
[ n e .X A ]q N 6 in . x o e ic ace
4 [ ........... t ]* jc p h o y t eneTN >-
[ ............... ].BO A MMCDTN M
6 [ ......... ][] MMoq eo yA ^q
[ n c c u ] t n A ycu N ^ B H o y e T H p o y
8 [ ......]n e T N H T ' Ne rA p e * ro y
[ ........] MMOC N d lN e T N ^ H T ' 6 T 6
io [ ___ ] e e e T E T N A J c p o e n 6 o m g t m
[ n C i N T ] n e M N N G T N n C A N n iT N
12 [ ..........] 'fOCCU MMOC NHTN X C
[ n e T e . . . ] t c |6 o m MA.peqpA.pNA. m
14 [ N q M e ]T A N o e i A ycu n e T C O
[ . . . m A ]p e q a jiN e R q 6 iN e N qpA
16 [c p e n e ja c A q N d i'fo y A A C . x e e ic ^ H
[ h t g ] n a y Jce ^co B n im c e q j o o n
18 [ ......] R e e n n i m a c i n eT ^ iJC M
[ ] e T B e n a t A y u jc u n e
20 [ n e .x A q ] N 6 m a c o e ic J c e f iT e p e n e i
[ c u t t a ] o e p A T q M n ic o c M O c A q
22 [ ......] 0 y M 0 0 y c b o a n ^ h t c )
[ ----- ]A O fO C 1 6 B O A MMoq- -
129:2-3 poss. T3i I [jcphoyt * ne.xa.]q (cf. 129:4)

129:3 poss. [ n e x x q N*Jq
129:5 trace prob. from n (not e); lacuna over this letter
129:6 trace before m prob. from x or m; lacuna over this letter; poss. [n il
btgm]n[(5o]m or [neTeoy]N [6o ]M ( n : n not certain, superlinear stroke restored;
cf. 137:16-18, 141:10-11)
129:9-10 poss. T I [TN2L6 N]
129:12 prob. [THpoy] or[a n o k ac]
129:13 prob. [nTe(o)yri]Tq or [iTBTBMN]jq
129:13-14 prob. [ n e T e ( o ) y N ] T q . . . m I [ m o c N qpM ejTA N oei (cf. Gos. Thom. 81b
[N H C II 47:16-17] n e T e y N T ^ q N o y A y N A M ic Ma.peqa.pNa.); for the syntax, cf.
129:14-15
129:14-15 poss. c o I [oyN Majpeq or c o l [ttt Majpeq
129:15 Majpeq: cf. 129:13
129:17 prob. '(']
129:19 poss. [ttica^]
*p. 129
(19) And Matthew [asked him] * [ . . . ] . . . took ... I [ . . . ] . . . it is

he who ... I [... ].
(20) The Lord [said], I [... stronger] than ... 5 [ . . . ] . . . you
... to follow I [you] and all the works I [... ]
your hearts. For just as I your hearts [...], so 10 [. . . ] the means to
overcome the powers I [above] as well as those below I [...]. I say to
you, I let him [who ... ] power renounce I [... and repent]. And !5
[let] him who [... ] seek and find and [rejoice]. I
(21) Judas [said], Behold! I [... ] see that all things exist I [... ]
like signs upon I [...]. On this account did they happen thus. 20
(22) The Lord [said], When the [Father I established] the cosmos,
(19) 129:2-3 poss. it is he who . . . [ . . . ] . The Lord [said to him] or it is he who [is
strong]. The Lord [said]
(20) 129:3 poss. The Lord [said to him] (see the previous note)
129:6 poss. [that which is (poss. add not) able] to follow
129:10-12 poss. [you will find] the means to overcome [all] the powers [above] as well as
those below. I say to you or [you will find] the means to overcome the powers [above]
as well as those below. [And] I say to you
129:13 poss. let him [who does not possess] power renounce or let him [who is able]
renounce or let him [who is unable] renounce; see the next note
129:13-14^06. let him [who possesses] power renounce [it and repent].
129:15 poss. [let] him who [knows] seek or [let] him who [is chosen] seek
(21) 129:17 prob. [I] see
129:18 or like a sign upon
129:18-19 or like signs over [the earth].
129:19 happen: or come into existence
(22) 129:21 just poss. established] himself in the cosmos, he
129:20 R: n restored, superlinear stroke certain

129:20-21 just poss. n e il[a > T a>]e e p a rq if m it ic o c m o c be understood as
Z m ttkocm oc (cf. 136:13 m itim a . = ^ m itim a . [?]? 140:23 MMoq = NHTq [?], and
passim c b o a . m m o * = c b o a n ^ h t *; but cf. 144:9-10, 133:10-11)
129:22 poss. [ccuoy 2 (cf. 130:4)
129*23 prob. [&neq], but poss. [eTp en ]
PA
a u j c p a m e 2 * * Z * Z R [ ................. ]
2 & q . x i c e N e o y o e i [ H ................... ]
T e e m e * . ? T H p q * y [ ................... ]
4 J te n M o o y e T C 0 0 y [ ..............]
ojoott' M n e y B O A * [ ...................... ]
6 MTTMOOy O y N O <5 NICU>2 T ' < |[k c u ]
T e e p o o y N e n n ic o b t x y . [ . .]
8 ncott N T e p e e ^ Z n c o p jc M [n e ]
T M ncxN eoyN N T e p e n [... ]
io c u e e p ^ T q * A .q 6 a > q jT e . [ . . . ]
n e . x a . q N ^ q jc g b c u k . n t n [ ]
12 6 B O A N2 HTIC' JC eK A A C N N [----- ]
6 p c u 2 jc n n jc c u m u ? a .x [( u m * y ]
14 cu JC N e N e e q ^ A .e N 2 TQtTe *<0
N o y j c e c b o a M M oq N e[N TTH ]
16 t h f i e p c o T e - M N eeN TTH [rH n ]
eB e ic u M N oyN ee* M N o yH [p n ]
18 M N e e N K a t p n o c e N A .N o [ y o y ]
A y cu o y ' t ' n e e c O A e 6 m n [ 2 n ]
20 N o y N e e N A . N o y o y . x [ e i c a .a .c ]
N N e q q ^ T X j c n n j c c u h [ o j a .]
22 JCCUM- A y cu J tN A N H
N H ^ e N T o q A e q f i T n e n .[.]
130:2-3 prob. k c o ] I T e ; poss. o i [ h Nficioy entcu]lTe, providing a plural

antecedent for n e y - (line 5) and -oy (line 7), and poss. ay- (lines 3 and 7)
130:5 poss. [ay cu mttboa] or [ay co MiTfcoyN]
130:6 poss. em end to m it m o o y o y N o y N o 6 (haplo g rap h y ; for oyN without
su p erlin ear stroke, cf. 135:10, 137:17, 140:20); t : t certain, articulation mark
restored
130:7 trace from a> or cy; poss. xyu>[n n]; iya)[ ] Doresse
130:9 prob. n[eicuT ] or n [ \ o r o c ] (cf. 129:20-23)
130:11 poss. N[oyjce] or N[oJcoy] (cf. 130:15)
130:12 poss. N (i[enK A 2 l
130:23 lacuna over n 4 (poss. read n)
*p. 13
he I [... ] water from it I [... ] word came forth from it * and it in

habited many I It was higher than the [path ... ] I ... the
entire earth . . . [ . . . ] I ... the [collected] water [... ] 5 existing out
side them. [... ] I ... the water, a great fire [encircling] I them like a
wall. . . . [ . . . ] I ... time once many things had become separated
[from what] I was inside. When the [... ] 10 was established, he
looked . . . [ . . . ] I and said to it, Go, and . . . [ . . . ] I from yourself in
order that . . . [ . . . ] I be in want from generation to [generation, and]
I from age to age. [Then it] 5 cast forth from itself [fountains] I of
milk and [fountains of] I honey and oil and [wine] I and [good]
fruits I and sweet flavor and 20 good roots, [in order that] I it might
not be deficient from generation [to] I generation, and from age [to
age]. I
129:22 poss. [collected] water from it (i.e. the cosmos? or from himself)
129:23 prob. [and his] Word came forth from it (i.e. the cosmos? the water? or from
him) or [in order to have the] Word come forth from it (as above)
130:1.2 it (bis): i.e. the Word, or he
130:2-3 poss. It (or He) was higher than the [path of the stars which surround] the
entire earth . . . [ . . . ]
I3o:5-7 them (bis): i.e. the stars? (see the previous note)
i3o:58 poss. [And outside (or inside)] the water, a great fire [encircled] them, like a
wall (or Cthere was> a great fire [encircling] them like a wall). The temporal
periods [were measured] once many things had become separated
130:9 Pss- When the [Father] or When the [Word]
130:11 it: i.e. the Word; poss. Go, and [spew] forth or Go, and [cast them] forth
130:12 poss. in order that [the earth might not]
130:14 it: i.e. the Word
130:21 it: i.e. the earth
62 N AG H A M M A D I CO D E X 111,5
tP * ]*
]e q A epA T q n 6 i
] .e n e q c A e ie n
................... ] ____ b - A y cu n t t b o a
4 ......... ] 6 N o y o e i N n e e q 6 M(5o M
..........J n e - f N e M M oq J c e N T o q
6 . . . ].6 M A T CJCNN AICUN 6 T M
n c i N T ] n e A y cu t m i t C h t '
8 ......... ] .q i c b o a ^ F m e ic p c u M h
..........] . n A y j c o o p e q c b o a M n e
10 ____] c u m a e T M n c A N T n e A y c o
e T M n c ] A N n iT N N e ^ B H o y e t h
12 p o y .. ]A q > e N ^ H T o y n t o o y n e
.......... ] e o c N T n e e T M n c i N T n e
14 A y co e J c ] r ? n K A 2 e T M n c i N m
tn * N 2 p ] a j N ^ H T o y e y A q j e n 6 i
16 N6 2 B ] H o y e T H p o y N T e p e Y o y
A & c A ] e c c u t m e n a T A .q n A 2 T q A q
18 ......... ] t A q 't e o o y F m - x o e i c "
A M A pO Â M M H O JIN C N |[ c ] | c N H Y
20 ..........] e T e T N c y m e M n q j H p e m
......... ] e p o o y 6 T 6 T N A lC A A y TCUN
22 n e x e n a c ] o e i c n a c - x e T C c u N e ' >-
........... ]N A q p q p iN n c a n a Y e i
24 ____] . . e y f i T A q T o n o c m m A y
131:1-24 The location of the left margin on this page is rather uncertain.
131:2 trace from a rounded letter, prob. cd or qj
131:4 prob. [NeyNo]6; 6 m: cod. 6 m (see above, p. 32)
I 3I:5 Poss- I^ôyo e] (cf. 130:2; [eôye] would seemto suitthe length of the
lacuna better but is not attested elsewhere in the text)
131:6 trace is a non-descript blur; poss. [ . . . JqeMA^Te or [ne efreMa^Te
131:8 trace prob. from t or y; prob. [ T H p o y ijy q i
131:9 poss. [noyoe]iN
131:10 poss. [cTepe]cDM2i or [itahp]cdm &
131:12 prob. e-rfccye (cf. 131:15-16), poss. e y ] or ce ]
131:13 what may be an articulation mark is preservedover the last letter in the
lacuna; poss. [eTqjoo]n
131:14 m: m not certain, superlinear stroke restored
! 3 i : i 5 J: 1not certain, diaeresis restored
131:16 [Ne^B]Hoye: cf. 131:11-12
131:18 poss. [oycDu;]T
*p. 131
(23) And it is above . . . [ . . . ] * [ . . . ] standing I its beau

ty ... I . and outside I [... ] is ... luminous, powerful 5
resemble it, for it I rules over the aeons I [above]
and below I [ . . . ] . . . take from the fire ... I [ . . . ] . . . it was scat
tered in the 10 [ . . . ] . . . above and I [below. All] the works I [... ]
depend on them. It is they I [... ] over the heaven above I [and over]
the earth [below]. *5 On them depend I all [the works].
(24) [And] when [Judas] I heard these things, he bowed down and
he I [... ] and he offered praise to the Lord. I
(25) [Mary] hailed her brethren 20 [ . . . ] . . . you ask the son ...
I [. ..]... them, where are you going to put them? I
(26) [The Lord said] to her, Sister, I [. .. ] will be able to inquire
(23) 130:23, 131:2 it (bis): i.e., prob., the Word

I3I:3I4 Poss anc* outside [there was a great] light, [more] powerful [than] the one
resembling it (i.e. the sun?), for that [is] the one [which] rules over [all] the aeons
[above] and below. [The light was] taken from the fire and it (i.e. the light) was
scattered in the [firmament (or fullness)] above and [below. All] the works [which]
depend on them, it is they [that exist] over the heaven above [and over] the earth
[below].
131:5 it . . . it: or him . . . he
131:11-12 poss. On them depend [all] the works, or [All] the works depend on them.
(24) 131:18/7055. [worshipped]
(25) 131:19 her: or the; either translation represents an emended text
131:19-21 poss. [Mary] hailed her brethren, [saying], Where are you going to put
[these things] about which you ask the Son of [Man]?
(26) 131:23-132:5 poss. [who], making the entire passage a question, or [no one] will be
able to inquire about these things [except for someone who] has somewhere to put
them in his [heart, and who is able] to come [forth from this cosmos] and enter [the
place of life] so that [he] might not be held back [in] this impoverished cosmos.
131:19 |[cD cancelled by the scribe with diagonal strokes (the scribe may have written
first NeccNHy, adding the superlinear stroke at the same time as he cancelled c);
prob. emend to n n g c c n h y or n n g c n h y (though for n = nn elsewhere in NHC
III, cf. 96:2 ni = n n i ); cf. above, p. 30
131:20 prob. [.xeN&T] (cf. 131:21 -oy)
i3i:21 poss. [npo>Me] (so Krause, p. 25; cf. 135:16-17, 136:21)
r3i:23 Prob. [ nim tt t ] or [ mna .&&y ]
!3 i :23 24 prob. ei I [m h ti e ] ij f though the traces are most uncertain
r3i:24 []TYNT*q Doresse
pAB
e ic A A y ^ M n e q ^ H t T ]
2 M M oq e e i b o [ a ]
NqBCDK. e ^ O Y N .[] . . [ .............. ]
4 a c e k. a AC N N O Y K A T e x e m . [ ...........]
n iK O C M O C N H K .e n e ^ C A q [ n 6 i m a ]
6 a i o c j c e n j c o e i c -fo Y c u a j [ c n a y ]
e n M A MITCUN2 6TM M a y [ ........]
8 T 6 M N K A t c je jlA MMAY ^ A A [A n O Y O ]
eiN n e t t b b h o y ' n e ^ c [A q n 6 i]
io n a c o e ic J c e n c o N m a a i [ o c]
KNAupNAY * n - e p o q e<|> o [ c o n e ic]
12 (Jjopi N T C A P 2 - n e J C A q N0 [|M A ]
a i o c j c e n j c o e i c k a [ ..........]
14 n a y e p o q a n m A p i c o [ ......... n e ]
JCAq f i 6 i n j c 0 e i c J c e o y o N n [ im ]
16 e T A ^ co Y tW N q m m in MM oq A qN AY e p o [ q . . ]
0 )B NIM 6 T C T O N A q A A q [ . . . ]
18 M Moq Ayco A q c p c o n e e q [ ]
MMOq 2 N T e q M N T A rA [o C A l]
20 o y a a c o y c o o jb e q a c c u m [m o c ]
jc e a c o o c e p o e i n . x o e i c j c [ e . . . ]
22 t o e T iciM e n ic A 2 n a o j fif e e e .]
k i m - A n a c o e ic jc i n o y c u [ n A q ]
24 e M A ^ T e M M oq 2 N T e q 6 u c [ . . ]
132:1 poss. h [t XyiD 6Yn6om] or the like

132:2 poss. 6bo[a 2Mn(i)KOCMOc] (cf. 132:4-5)
132:3 traces virtually indecipherable; poss. eôyN e[n]M& [mttcun^*] (cf. 132:6
132:4 NNoy: i.e. NNey; poss. mm[oc| ^ m]
132:5 N^HKe- ne-xaq Doresse
132:6 oycuoj [eN&y] (poss. oycDoj[NAy]; cf. 137:13): cf. 132:11
132:7 poss. [neeiM&] or the like
132:8 |[e j cancelled by the scribe with diagonal strokes, ix added above l e j
132:8-9 n o y o ]le m ne eTTBBHoy: i.e. n o yo eiN eTTBBHoy ne
132:10 The restoration leaves the line a little short; perhaps ma.002i|[oc
MA0 0 A|[OC N]?
132:13 prob. k a [ n eeiNAcy] or k a [n N't'N&q;]
132:14-15 prob. co[ycuNq- n e ]l xxq (cf. 132:16)
132:16 erxz'. i.e. NTAq; mmin MMoq added above aufN&ye; prob. epo[q n]
132:17 poss. [mmin]
132:18 poss. [erne]
132:20 m : m restored, superlinear stroke certain
*p. 132
about these things ... I [ . . . ] . . . he has somewhere * to put them in

his [heart ... ] I ... to come [forth ... ] I and enter . . . [ . . . ] . . .
[... ] I so that they might not hold back . . . [ . . . ] 5 this impoverished
cosmos.
(27) [Matthew] said, I Lord, I want [to see] I that place of life
[...] I where there is no wickedness, [but rather] I there is pure
[light]!
(28) The Lord [said],10 Brother [Matthew], I you will not be able
to see it [as long as you are] I carrying flesh around.
(29) [Matthew] said, I Lord, . . . [ . . . ] I not see it, let me
. . . [ . . . ]! >5
(30) The Lord [said], [Everyone] I who has known himself has
seen [it ... ] I everything given to him to do [... ] I ... and has come
to [... ] I it in his [goodness].
(31) [Judas]20 responded, saying, I Tell me, Lord, [how it is that
... ] I ... which shakes the earth I moves.
(32) The Lord picked up a [stone and] I held it in his hand [... ]
(27) 132:7 poss. that place of life, [this place]

132:8 wickedness: altered by the scribe from darkness
(29) 132:13-14 prob. Lord, [even if I will] not [be able] to see it, let me [know it]!
(30) 132:16 himself: translation guaranteed by a superlinear addition by the scribe, the
text prior to which could also be translated it; prob. has seen [it in]
132:17-19 poss. everything given to him [alone] to do, and has come to [resemble] it in
his (or its) [goodness].
132:19 his: or its
(31) 132:21-22 poss. that this quaking] which shakes the earth
(32) 132:24-133:1 prob. held it in his hand, [saying, What] am I holding or held it in
his hand [and said (poss. add to him or to them), What] am I holding
132:21-22 poss. ^[eniKM ]lTO . . . fifee eq]

132:24-133:1 prob. [eq ]l[xcu m m oc x e o y ] or [A q ]l[.xo o c x e o y ] o r [ne]l[*XAq
NAq (or n a y ) x e o y ] or the like
pAr
[ ........x e o y ] n e na.T e -fa -M A ^ T e m

2 [M o q ] n t a 6 [ i] .ic n e -X A q .x e o y c o N e
[ n e - n je .X A q n a y o c e n e T q i e ^ p A lf A
4 [ m c i j r NToq n e T q i e ^ p A f A T n e
^ o t a n e q u ^ A N e i c b o a f56 i o y A o r o c
6 c b o a n t m n t n o 6 q N A u ?e e ^ R n i T
e T q i e ^ p A 'f A T n e M N n K A Z t t k a ^
8 rAp NqKiM an eNeqKiM* NeqNA
Z e n e a a a a x c k x x c N N e n u ? A .x e n
io 2 Y e iT o y c o c q .x e F rr o q e p T A ^ e
n ic o c M o c e p A T q ^ycu A qu ?a>n e
12 N ^H T q A ycu A q x i C T o e i c b o a n ^ h
[T ]q - N[.].NIH TA.p 6 T K IM AN iN O K *|*
14 [ ..........] o y NHTN NO^Hpe T H p o y NNpCt)
[M e JC leN TC D T N êN eB O A 2 M n M 3l
16 [ t m ]m * y N e T u ^ A Jte c b o a M n p A
[q ?]e MNTMHe e T e T N q p o o n N^pAY
18 [ e ] M n o y 2 H T k a n e q q jA N e i c b o a
[n c ]o > M A F in ic u T îTN N pcD M e >-
20 [A y ]cu N c e T M J d T q e p o o y n A A iN >-
[ . . ]q K O T q e ^ p A f e n e q M a n e T C o o y N
22 [ . . ] . [ . . ]CDB N T M N T V e A IO C N q c o
[o y N a n ] n a a a y e p q jA T M o y A c u ^ e
24 [e p A ]T q ^ M n K A K e NqNAqpNAy e n o y

!33:4 [nK A ]e Tire: cf. 133:7 (Tire . . . t t k a )
133:10 YeiT: articulation mark obscured by following corrected letter o; oycu
corr. over erased ^ p x ; e p : i.e. neN TA q
133:13 trace prob. from a , e , Z, k, a , m , c, x, or z> poss. from b,a , or x: If it were
not for the position of rap, n [ k ] a nim would be avery attractiverestoration.
133*14 T H p o y added above NNp
!33:i7 q jo o n : sic; emend to q jo o n
i 33:i8 m : m not certain, superlinear stroke restored; n o y : i.e. n e y
133:19 icut: sic; emend to ia rr
133:21 prob. [Me]q or [q;A]q
133:22 trace is from a superlinear stroke; prob.[ a n ] m[ it 2 ] cub
133-23 epqjATM: i.e. ep(q;AN)TM
133:24 q: q certain, superlinear stroke restored; m : m certain, superlinear stroke
restored; o y corr. over erased o y o e i n a n
*P- x33
What] am I holding I [in] my [hand]?

(33) He said, [It is] a stone. I
(34) He [said] to them, That which supports I [the earth] is that
which supports the heaven. 5 When a Word comes forth I from the
Greatness, it will come on what I supports the heaven and the earth.
For the earth I does not move. Were it to move, it would I fall,
though in order that the First Word might not10 fail. For it was that
which established I the cosmos and inhabited I it and inhaled fra
grance from I it. For, . . . [ . . . ] . . . which do not move I I [ . . . ] . . .
you, all the sons of [men. *5 For] you are from [that] place. I [In] the
hearts of those who speak out of [joy] I and truth you exist. I Even if
it comes forth in I [the body] of the Father among men 20 and is not
received, still I it [... ] return to its place. Whoever knows I [... ]
. . . [. . . ]. . . perfection [knows] I nothing. If one does not stand I in
the darkness, he will not be able to see the light.
(34) I33:i3~I4 poss. For, [all things] which do not move I [ . . . ] them . . . you
i33:i4 all: This word is a superlinear addition by the scribe.
133:18 or Even if he (or it) comes forth from
133:21-23 it: or he; prob. it (or he) [does (poss. add not)] return to its (or his) place.
Whoever [does not] know [the work] of perfection [knows] nothing.
PA A
o e i N a n e p T M T e o y [ A e r n e -Xn ]
2 TA n K co^ T * q jc u n e n [a ]u j N [e]
q N A p a > K 2 N2 PAY N ^H Tq* 6 b [ O a ]
4 o ce fiq co o y N a n F rreq N oyN e
e p T M T e o y A e iM e R q^ opn e n i
6 M ooy qcooyN a n n a a a y o y rA p
t c T e x p iA e T p e q o c iB A n T iC H A
8 N ^ p A 'f N ^ H T q * e p T M T e o y A e i
M e e n T H o y e T N i q e J ce fiT A q
io c y c u n e N Acy N ^ e q N a tto jt "
N M M Aq* e p T M T e o y A e i M e e
12 tt c c u m a e T e q p < ()o p e i M M oq
J t e n c u c A q c y c u n e q N a t [a ] k o nm
14 M A q A y cu n e T C O o y N a [ n ]
p e n A cy N ^ e qN A C o y c u N n . [ . . ]
16 Aycu neTeN eqcoyN TN oyN [e]
n^cub nim* ce^H Tf epoq n e T e
18 NNeqcoyNTNoyNe ntk.ak.ia
NoycyMMO e p o c an n e * n e
20 TeRqNAeiMe an JceNAcy Nê
Aqei NqNAeiMe an oceNAcp n
22 z e eqNABCUK Aycu oyq^MKto
an n e e n i K O C M O c c t n [ ]
24 T 0 y N A B B i0 q t o t c A q .[.]fo [y ]
A A C MN M A O A I O C M N M A p i ^ A M ]
134:1 epT M T e: i.e. ep(q?&N)TM

134:1-2 o y [ x eiMe x e i * ] \ T x : cf. 134:5.8-9.11-13.20.21
134:2 n x: n not certain, su p erlin ea r stroke restored; n 2: n certain, superlinear stroke
restored
134:5.8.11 epT M T e: i.e. ep(qj&N)TM
134:14-15 prob. 3l[n M n q jH ]lp e
134:15 trace from a rounded letter (e , o , o , c , <J>, cu, q ;, q , or 6): prob. n^[icoT] (cf.
above, on 134:14-15 n q ;H ] lp e )
134:16 Neq: i.e. NNeq
x34: i 9 ujm m o e p o c a n ne: o x corr. over erased cu, c corr. over erased q, n poss.
corr. over erased t
134:21 &qei: 1 added above the line; n: n restored, su p erlin ea r stroke certain
134:22 ojm m q read from very am biguous traces
134:23 prob. eTN[A . . . ] (cf. 134:24 -N 3L-)
*P- *34
(35) * If [one] does not [understand I how] fire came into exis
tence, I he will burn in it, because I he does not know the root of it. 5
If one does not first understand I water, he knows nothing. For what
I use is there for him to be baptized I in it? If one does not under
stand I how blowing wind 10 came into existence, he will blow away
I with it. If one does not understand I how body, which he bears, I
came into existence, he will [perish] with I it. And how will someone
who does [not] know [... ] J5 ... know the . . . [ . . . ] ? I And to some
one who will not know the [root] I of all things, they remain hidden.
Someone who I will not know the root of wickedness I is no stranger
to it. Whoever 20 will not understand how I he came will not under
stand how I he will go, and he is no [stranger] I to this cosmos which
...[...], I which will be humiliated.
(35) I34:i4~ i5 prob. And how will someone who does [not] know [the Son] know the
[Father]?
134:17-19 Someone . . . it: altered by the scribe from To someone who will not know
the root of wickedness, it (i.e. the root, or wickedness) is no stranger.
:34;23 prob. which [will . . . ]
134:24 poss. or though the trace is very ambiguous; J: I not certain,

diaeresis restored
>34:25*35=1 poss. m&pi2[&m]I[mh
[p A 6 ]
[ ----- ] . [ ------ ].H MTTJtCUK. N T n e

2 [ m n ] it ic a .2 [A y]<u N T e p e q K A T e q
[ . . . ] e -x c o o y A y ^ e A n i Z e J t e e y e
4 [ . . e p o q A 'fo y A A C q m e q B A A e ^ p A T
A q N A y e y T o n o c e q j c o c e e M A Te
6 x y cu A q N A y e n T o n o c FinqjiK.-
eTM TTCANTTiTN n e - x e T o y A A C m
8 H A .e e A .io c J t e n c o N n im n e c t n a
o jb c u k . e ^ p A T e n e e i - x i c e A e n c A
io N n iT N M nojiK. J c e o y N o y N o 6
N iccu eT FiM Ay M F io y N o 6 N ^ O T e
12 N T e y N o y e T F iM A y A q e i c b o a m
Mo q N 6 io y A o r o c ^ c u c e q A ^ e e
14 [pAT]cj A q N A y e p o q R e e N T A q e i e
[n iT ] N T O T e ne.atA q NAq x e e T B e
16 [ o y ] A ice i e n iT N * Aycu A n q jn p e
M npcuM e o jN T o y n e .X A q N A y
18 J t e o y B A B iA e c b o a e fio y tfo M a c
o j t a Aycu a c b c u k e n c A f in iT N e
20 [n]q>iic F in iC A ^ atm n tn o 6
[ p n e c ] M e e y e A q T fiN O o y m it a o
22 [ r o c u ? A ]p o c A q e m e m m o c e ^ p A i m
[ne]c|M [To] c b o a a c e N e q o y c u c q n 6 i
135:1 first trace from a or x ; second trace from & or \

x35:3 prob. [6ix]
135:4 poss. [nx]y
135:12-13 m I M Oq: virtually certain
135:14 q : q certain, superlinear stroke restored
*35:i5 (ititI n: cf. 135:16
x35:i9 cyTA: x corr. over erased o
135:22 q;&]poc: poss. e]poc
x35:23 M not certain, superlinear stroke restored; N e q : i.e. N N eq
*p - 135
(36) Then he [... Judas] 25 and Matthew and [Mary] * [ . . . ] . . .

[...]... the edge of heaven I [and] earth. [And] when he placed his
I [... ] upon them, they hoped that they might I [ . . . ] . . . it. Judas
raised his eyes 5 and saw an exceedingly high place, I and he saw the
place of the abyss I below. Judas said to I Matthew, Brother, who
will I be able to climb up to such a height or down to the10 bottom of
the abyss? For there is a tremendous I fire there and something very
fearful! I At that moment, a Word came forth from I it. As it stood
there, I he saw how it had come *5 [down]. Then he said to it, [Why]
I have you come down?
(37) And the Son I of Man greeted them and said to them, I A
seed from a power was I deficient and it went down to 20 [the] abyss
of the earth. And the Greatness I remembered [it] and he sent the
(36) 134:24 poss. Then he [took Judas] or Then he [put Judas]

' 35:3 PTob. [hand]
'35:4 it: antecedent ambiguous, or him; poss. [see] it (or him).
' 35:i3 (l0): l-e- the high place? it (20): i.e. the Word, or he (see the next note)
!35:,4 he: i.e. Judas? it: i.e. the Word
(37) 35:21 he: i.e. the Father = the Greatness?
PAS
nq jop n' NqjA.xe t [o t A]Ne[qM a ]

2 o h th c pqjnHpe n[cu]b nim [n]
T A q -X O o y n a y * Y - X iT o y 2 N o y [ N A ]
4 zre ^Y00 *Y,M e -xeficpxpiA 6e
AN NNAY 6TKAKIA TOT6 TTG-XAq N
6 NeqMAOHTHC jccmh fim .x o o c
n h tn -xefiee noycm h Mfioye
8 BpH6e eqjAYNAY e p o o y t a t t c
e e eyNA-xi n n A rA e o c e^pA'f e
io n o y o e iN t o t c A N eqM aohthc
THpoy 'fe o o y NAq n e :xA y Jcen Jto
12 eiC ÂTC^H eMnATK.OYCON2 eBOA
MTTIMA N6 NIM n CT't'COOy NAK
14 JceepeN eooY THpoy cpoon [cb o a ]
2 it o o t k h nim n e eTNACM oy [epoK]
16 Jte ep e n e cM o y THpq n h o y 6 bo[a m]
mok- cuc e y A ^ e epA To y AqNAy
18 eTTNA c n a y e y q i N oy'j'yxH R o y
CUT NMMAy 2 N0 YN0 6 NBpH6e
20 Aycu oyujA-xe Aqei c b o a ^ ito o tc j
FinqjHpe RnpcoMe eqxcu m
22 moc JceMAt n a y n t Y 2 bccu [Aycu]
A n K o ye i pee R nN o6 N e y [.].. [.]
24 NNCNTAynApAAAMBAN 6 MM[o]
136:1-2 for the restoration cf. 136:10

i 36:3~4 for the restoration cf. 142:11-13
136:4 6e: for the syntax cf. Luke 22:71
136:13 i.e. ^MniMa. (though one could also understand ttima as the dir obj of
oycuN^, or oycuN^ c b o a m- to be for oycuN^ c b o a c b o a m-, i.e. gboa l MS
see above, on 129:20-21)
136:14 just poss. read q jo o n (n certain, articulation mark restored)
136:20 q: q restored, superlinear stroke certain
136:23 poss. Ney[ei]N[e]
*p. 136
[Word I to] it. It brought it up into I [his presence] so that * the

First Word might not fail. [Then his disciples] were I amazed at [all
the things] I he had said to them, and they accepted them on [faith].
I And they concluded that it is useless 5 to regard wickedness.
(38) Then he said to I his disciples, Have I not told I you that
like a visible voice and flash of I lightning I will the good be taken
up to 10 the light?
(39) Then all his disciples I offered him praise and said, Lord, I
before you appeared I here, who was it who offered you praise? I
For all praises exist on your account. J5 Or who is it who will bless
[you]? I For all blessing derives [from] I you.
(40) As they stood there, he saw I two spirits bringing a single
soul I with them in a great flash of lightning.20 And a Word came
forth from I the Son of Man, saying, I Give them their garment!
[And] I the small one did as the big one. They were [ . . . ] . . . [ . . . ] I
135:22 It brought it: i.e. the Word brought the seed

x35:23 his: See above, on 135:21.
(39) 136:12-13 poss. before you revealed that (or this) place, who was it who offered
you praise? or before you appeared out of that place, who was it who offered you
praise?
(40) 136:17 he: sic (see above, 135.14J
136:23 did as: or became like
136:23-137:1 poss. They were [like] those who received them.
[P A * ]
oy N 6 .[ ] N e y e p H o y
2 T O T 6 A N u rf ]m JIQ H T H C
naT N T A q J t[ ne.XAC ] n 6 im a
4 p i^ a m m h [ace ]n a y e n '
noNHpo[ ] epoffqloy -Xnn
6 qjopn" [ JepHoy ne
a c e n . x o e [ i c .............. ]. N T A p e N A y
8 e p o o y * . [ .................] c y c u n e n n o 6 c e
N A H oy[ ] .a . ^ o t a n A e epcyA N
10 n a y e n e T c y o o n ' cyA eN e^ t6 tm m a y
T e t n o 6 N e o p A c ic - t o t b n e - x ^ y NAq
12 T H p o y jc m a ta m o n e p o c n e a tA q n a y
Jce^N O Y e T e T N o y c u c y N A y e p o c
14 [2 N o ]y 2 o p A C ic e c N A o y c o c q j c n o y ^ o
[ p A c ] i c N t y A e N e ^ ' n A A iN n e J t A q x e
16 [A p iA ]rC D N l2 e N T 6 T N N O Y 2 H M nA 'f
[ e T e ] o y N 6 o M M M oq e o y A ^ q n c o j
18 [ . . ] A yco N T e T N c y iN e N c c u q i r r e
[T N ]c y A J c e N ^pA T N ^ H T q j c c k a a c
20 [ n k ] a n im e T e T N t y i N e N c c u q e y
[ n a p ] c y m <|>c uni n h h h t n - a n o k rA p
22 [. . accu] HM OC NHTN JCeAAHOCUC
[ ] . . ^N TH oyTN N 6 m N o y T e
137:1 trace prob. from m (lacuna over this letter)

x3 7 :5 n o N H p o [ c or n o N H p o [ N ; [q ] cancelled by the scribe with a diagonal stroke,
o y added above [q j
137:7 x e (and before it poss. n a c ) is to be restored in the lacuna; NTApe: i.e. NTepe
*3 7 :9 epqjAN: i.e. epeqÂN
137:16 Api: cf. 146:21, but poss. [epiaJrtDNiZe (cf. 144:19)
I 3 7 :I 7 _ I prob. nccuI[tn] (cf. 141:10-11), poss. NCU)l[ei]
137:20 One might expect either Nccuoy e y or Nccuq eq; poss. emend thus.
137:21 pOSS. [n A]c yM(f>CDN|
137:22 is to be expected.
x37:23 Poss- [eqqjo]on (n not certain, articulation mark restored)
p. 137
... those who received * them. . . . [ . . . ] each other. I Then . . . [ . . . ]

disciples, I [whom] he had . . . [. . . ] .
(41) Mary [said, I ... ] see 5 [evil . . . ] . . . them from the I first
[...] each other. I
(42) The [Lord] said, [ . . . ] . . . when you see I them . . . [ . . . ] be
come huge, they I will . . . [ . . . ] But when you 10 see the Eternal
Existent, that I is the great vision.
(43) Then they all said to him, I Tell us about it!
(44) He said to them, I How do you wish to see it? I [By means
of a] transient vision o r a n 15 eternal [vision]? He went on and said,
I [Strive] to save that I [which] can follow I [...], and to seek it
out, and to I speak from within it, so that,20 as you seek it out, [every
thing] I might be in harmony with you! For I I [say] to you, truly, I
(41) 137:5 them: altered by the scribe from him or it

(42) 137:7 poss. The [Lord] said [to her, . . . ] ; you: fem. sing.
137:9 you: fem. sing.
(43) *37:12 it: i.e. the great vision
(44) '37:13 it: i.e. the great vision
137:16-20 poss. [Strive] to save him [who] can follow [me (or you)], and to seek him
out, and to speak from within him, so that, as you seek him out, [everything]
137:18 prob. [you], poss. [me]
137:19-21 poss. emend to speak from within it, so that [everything] you seek out might
be in harmony with you!
[P A H ]
6 T O N 2 [ ] N H
2 T q - T o y A [ A C ......... J c e A A ]H c o c -J*
o y c u a j[ n e x ] A q NAq n
4 6 in J c [o e ic xe J s to n ^ eq
q j o o n ' [ ] T H p q -
6 R n e 6 p q j[2 Y o ]y A A C xe
n im n e btn[ ] nexA q
8 r i d i n j c o e i c [ . x e ......................... J ^ B H o y e
T H p o y e T c y o [ .............................] n i c e c e
io e n e n t o o y n e T [ t ] n [ . . . ] .[ .] jc c u o y
nexxq n 6 i T o y a a c .x e e ic ^ H H T e
12 e iC N A p x c u N q j o o n N Tne m
m an n to o y 6e n e e T N A p -x o e ic
14 e x c u N - neJC A q N 6 m .x o e ic jc c n
t c o t n n e e T N A p J C o e ic e x c u o y
16 a a a a O t a n e T e T N q jA N q i f i n [ e ]
4>ONOC B O A ^ N T H O y T N T O T 6
18 T 6 T N A 'f ^ IC O T T H O y T N M n O y O
e iN NT6TNBCUK e ^ o y N e n M A
20 N qjeA eeT n e Jte T o y A a c jccn
A cy N ? e e y N A e m e n a n n n c [ n ]
22 ^ b c o t n e x e n - x o e i c J te ^ e N
K o o y e N C T N A e m e n h t n [A y c o ]
24 2 eN ICO O Ye N 6TN A JCI MM[ . . . ]
138:2 prob. ToY4-[ic ne-XJiq Jce3iA]Hecuc, though the word order would be
unusual (only 120:2 can be compared); poss. iq -x o o c JceaiAlHecuc,
though -Xcu is not to be expected in such a phrase in this text
138:4 poss. .x[oeic JtenN oyT e] (cf. 137:23-138:1) or :x[oeic x e neicDT']
138:5 n : n not certain, articulation mark restored
138:6 prob. 6 p t p [ 2 n e x x q n 6 i To ] y a j l C , though poss. 6 p q ) [ ---------
neJceto]yA a.c
138:7 lacuna over n 2 (poss. read fi)
138:8 prob. [ x e ____ N e ] or [ . x e _____ n ]
138:10 lacuna over n2 (poss. read n)
138:12 2 RT n e : i.e. N T ir e (cf. 120:9-10, 130:23)
138:12-13 m I h j l n : i.e. h I m o n
138:16-17 poss. Rn I <}>e0N0c
138:24 prob. m m [(u t n ] or mm[ooy]
p. 138
the living God in you * in I him.

(45) [Judas said, Truly], I I want [. .. ]. I
(46) The [Lord said] to him, [. . . ] living [. .. ] 5 dwells [ . . . ] . . .
entire I ... the [deficiency ...].
(47) [Judas said], I Who . . . [ . . . ] ? I
(48) The Lord said, [. . . ] all [the] works I which . . . [ . . . ] the
remainder,10 it is they [which you . . . ] . . . [ . . . ] I
(49) Judas said, Behold! I The governors dwell above I us, so it
is they who will rule I over us!
(50) The Lord said, It is you who will rule over them! I But
when you rid yourselves of I jealousy, then I you will clothe your
selves in light ! and enter the bridal chamber. 20
(51) Judas said, I How will [our] garments be brought to us? I
(52) The Lord said, There are I some who will provide for you,
x37:23 poss. the living God [dwells] in you

138:2 him: or it
(46) 138:4 poss. [The] living [God] or [The] living [Father]
138:6 poss. . . . the [deficiency]. [Judas said],
f[ A ]
ntooy rA p N fe T N A 't n ] h t n n n e t n
2 ^BCCD* NIM r ^ [ p nT N A ]q^JC C O B M
n M A C T M M A y . . . [.] M n U J A n e
4 AAAA. A Y 'J'N ^B C O ) fin C O N ^ M 5-
npcuM e x e ir r o q q c o o y N n t s
6 z m eT qN A B cu K . fi^ H T C - k a i t a p o y
B A pO C N A f ^CUCDT ON T 6 e X O O B C
8 n e -X A C n 6 i m a p i a m x e i N A T c t
k a k ia H n e ^ o o y n e ^ o o y A y co n e p
10 TATHC M n c y A N T eqT pO <J>H A y cu
ttm aqhthc N q e iN e M n e q c A 2 n e
12 e iq ;A .x e A c x o o q c ^ iM e e A c e i
M e e n T H p q - n e x A y N A q n 6 im m a
14 h t h c x e o y n e n e n A H p c u M A A y cu
o y n e n q jc u c D T n e x A q N A y a c e
16 N T C U T N êN eB O A M n e n A H p c D
ma A y cu T e T N c y o o n " ^ M n M A e
18 x e n q j c u c u T M M Ay A y cu e i c ^ H
[h t ] 6 e i c n e q o y o e i N A q n a j ^ T e
20 f e p ]V f e - x c u e r n e x A q n 6 im a a i
[o c ] x e a c o o c e { e } p o e i n x o e i c a c e fi
22 [ a ] o ? N ^ e N e T M O o y T c e M o y >-
[A y ]c u N A ty N ^ e n b t o n ^ c e c u N ^ 5-

*39:3 read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 120); e virtually certain; prob.
e y e ln te M n q j* n e , unless MnqÂ be for eM are (in which case ey.[.]e mtto)*
n e could be read)
139:4 cu1 read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 120)
139:8 2INAT e: poss. ^ ina I is an error for or emend to ^ ina I < ^ cu> e (cf. Matt
6l34)
139:11 Nq: poss. corrupt; poss. understand Mnq}A (139:10) before N qeiN e (Schenke),
or poss. emend to N qeiN e < a n >
139:14 n e 2 added above n x
*p- 139
and I there are others who will receive [...]. * For [it is] they [who
will give you] your I garments. [For] who [will] be able to reach I
that place . . . [ . . . ] . . . ? I But the garments of life were given to 5
man because he knows the I path by which he will leave. And I it is
difficult even for me to reach it! I
(53) Mary said, Thus with respect to the I wickedness of each
day, and the laborer 10 is worthy of his food, and I the disciple
resembles his teacher. I She uttered this as a woman who had un
derstood I completely.
(54) The disciples said to him, I What is the fullness and *5 what
is the deficiency?
(55) He said to them, I You are from the fullness I and you
dwell in the place I where the deficiency is. And lo! I His light has
poured [down]20 upon me!
(56) [Matthew] said, I Tell me, Lord, I how the dead die I
[and] how the living live.
(52) 138:24 prob. [you] or [them]

139:3 prob. that place [which] is [the] reward? or poss. that place [which] is very
[...] ...?
139:7 it (20): i.e. the path
(53) >39:8-9 poss. emend to M ary said, The (or Thus, the) wickedness of each day
<is sufficient^ and the laborer
139:11 tense of the verb uncertain, poss. due to corruption; or poss. understand the
disciple deserves to resemble his teacher; or poss. emend to the disciple is <not> like
his teacher
139-13 completely: or everything
[pM ]
n e J t e n J c o e [ i c x e .. I q jm e mm o
2 ei eycyA Jce [... n a ]T e T e f i n e
b a a n a y epocj [ o ly jie fim co T M e q
4 e i MHTI N T O O T K -fJCO) A M M O C
N H TN J C e ^ O T A N e y t y A N C C U K M
6 tta Y g ticim enpcoM e c g n a m o y
t g e p o q - x e n e T M O O Y T ' A y t^ 2 OT3iN
8 epcyA N TieTO N ^ kcd fin eTM O O YT'
c n a m o y t eneT O N 2" n e -x e y o y
io a a c J c e e T B e o y rA p g - x n t m h g c g
M o y o y T A yo> c g c d n ^ n e . x e n . x o
12 e i c J C G n e T e o y e B O A 2 n t m h n e >-
M eqM oy n e T e o y e s o A ^ N T e c ^ i
14 M e n e t y A q M o y n e J c e M A p i^ A M
mh .x e .x o o c e p o e i n - x o e ic jc e e
16 T s e o y A e ie i e n e e iM A e d N ^ H o y
h e - j 'o c e n e . x e n . x o e i c . x e e p e o y
18 a>N c b o a R n e ^ o y o m i t m h n y
t h c n e .x e M A p i2 A .M M H NAq* J c [ e ]
20 n - x o e i c o y N T o n o c rA p e q A p i.
h eq6pa>2 c b o a 2 n tm h n e x e
22 n x o e i c x e n M A a n o k e T e N 'f
M M O q AN- n e . X M A p i 2 ^ M M H
24 x e n x o e i c n t k o y 2 0 t 2 ,(i>TT[ H]
140:1 prob. jcbak ]

140:2 tta.]T: cf. 140:3 (-q ... -q)
140:3 [o]y read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 120)
140:5 n h t n : sic; emend to n h t n
140:8 tt2 corr. over erased k or n
140:9 poss. corrupt: poss. MoyTe e<poq Jce>neTON^ (haplography) or MoyTe
eneTON^ < x e >
140:11 M oyoyT: y 1 added above 00; prob. emend to MoyfoyT*} (cf. 140:13-14
MeqMoy ... cyAqMoy)
140:16 6 n : cod. 6 n (see above, p. 32)
140:20 poss. eqapi.[.]
140:21 h : If this is the Greek word 77, and not the last letter of the final word in
140:20, one may expect A.
140:22 poss. eT eN 'ft.. ]
140:23 MMoq: i.e. N^HTq (unless something be restored at the end of 140:22)
p . 140
(57) * The [Lord] said, [. . . ] ask I me about a saying [... ] which

I eye has not see, [nor] have I heard it I except from you. But I say 5 to
you that when I what invigorates a man is removed, I he will be
called dead. And when I what is alive leaves what is dead, I what
is alive will be called upon.
(58) Judas said, 10 Why else, for the sake of truth, do they I kill
and live?
(59) The Lord said, I Whatever is born of truth I does not die.
Whatever is born of woman I dies.
(60) Mary said, *5 Tell me, Lord, why I I have come to this place
to profit I or to forfeit.
(61) The Lord said, You make clear I the abundance of the re-
vealer! I
(62) Mary said to him, 20 Lord, is there then a place which is
..., I or lacking truth? I
(63) The Lord said, The place where I I am not!
(57) 140:1 prob. [You (masc. sing.) have] asked

140:4 you: masc. sing.
140:8 what is dead: altered by the scribe, poss. from the dead (plural)
140:9 poss. emend to <he> will be called alive. or whatis alive will be called < . . . > .
(58) 140:10-11 do they kill and live: altered by the scribe from are they dead and do
they live, but see the following note
140:11 prob. emend to <die> and live
(60) 140:16-17 poss. place. For profit or for loss?*
(62) 140:20-21 or Lord, is there then a place which is lacking truth?*
(63) 140:22-23 poss. The place which I do not [ . . . ]!
P M [* ]
p e A y co o y . [ .......... ] c o t g e >-
2 BO A N N G T C O O y N M M [o .] ^ N ' TJB
a c e M A .e e a i o c J c e e T [ B ] e o y t n m
4 to n mmon an 2 i o y [ c ] o n n6.3C6
n ^ c o e i c J c e e T e T f iq jA N K c u e n i
6 tn N N A 'fe T n o )* n e x e M A e e A i
o c .x e N A c y N ^ e q ^ A p e m c o y e i
8 k o a a a m m o c) e n N o 6 n e .x e n .x o
e i c JC e ^ O T A N e T C T N q ;A N K .O ) N
io N e^B H oye ncco tn T n c n auj
O y A ^ O y NCCDTN AN T O T 6 T G T N N A M
12 TO N MMCUTN TTGJCeM ApiAM M H
X e l 'o y c u q ^ e e e i M e e ^ c u s n im n
14 [ e e ] e T o y q jo o n ' m m o c n e .x e n .x o
[ e ic ] Jce n e T N A q ^ m e n ca ttcu n ^
16 [ .A ] e i TAP T T O y M N T p M M A O -T A
[ . . . ] ^ y c i c rAp M n e e iic o c M o c o y
18 [ . . t ] c Ayco n e q N o y B M N neqÂT
[o y c]co p M n e 1 n e x A y NAq N6 m e q
20 [m a ] h t h c x e o y neT N N A A q x e
[ k a a ] c e p e n N 2 dJB n ax cd k. cb o a *
22 [ n e x ] e n x o e i c n a y x e q jc o n e g t g
[ t n c ] b t c d t NNA^PNTTTHpq' o y >-
24 [m a ]k a p io c n e npcuMG NTAq 6 m e
141:1 prob. k]cut or q]cuT

141:2 m : m certain, superlinear stroke restored; prob. m m [ o k ]
141:6 naT: i.e. Neei
141:9 t 1 corr. over erased n (incomplete) or poss. \
141:16 prob. [T * ]e i, poss. [ n a j e i (for the spelling, cf. 145:15); Toy: i.e. T e y
141:16-17 poss. 2J [ ttoa]* y c ic or a.l[Na.n]aLYCic
141:18 . . : space for 2V2 letters; poss. [6 0 a. T]e
141:21 c u b corr. over erased h t (articulation mark not erased)
141:23 b : b certain, superlinear stroke restored (cf. 145:7)
*p. 141
(64) Mary said, I Lord, you are fearful and [wonderful], * and
I ... those who do not know [. .. ]. I
(65) Matthew said, [Why] do we I not rest [at once]? 5
(66) The Lord said, When you lay down I these burdens!
(67) Matthew said, I How does the small I join itself to the big?
(68) The Lord said, I When you abandon10 the works which will
not be able I to follow you, then you will rest. I
(69) Mary said, I I want to understand all things, I [just as] they
are.
(70) The [Lord] said, 5 He who will seek out life! I For [this] is
their wealth. I For the . . . [ . . . ] . . . of this cosmos I is [... ], and its
gold and its silver I are [misleading].
(71) His [disciples] said to him, 20 What should we do to ensure
that I our work will be perfect? I
(72) The Lord [said] to them, Be I [prepared] in face of every-
(64) 141:1-2 prob. and turn] away (poss. add from) those or and
obliterate] those
141:2 prob. those who do not know [you],
(70) 141:17 poss. the [rest] of this cosmos or the [pleasure] of this cosmos
141:18 poss. is [false]
(71) 141:21 work: altered by the scribe from minds
[pMB]
m tt . o a . [ ............] . y e n A r a > N n
2 N eqBAA - [ .. H n e q ^ o J T B o y . a . e Fi
T T 0 y 2 0 T B [e q ] a a a a A q e i gb o a e q -x p A
4 tt-xo
e r r n e J c e T [o ]y jL A .c o c e o c o o c e p o e i
e i c J c e A q ; t T^pXH n t c ^ ih n e . X A q
6 JceTA.rA.nH m n tm n ta ta o o c eN e
o y F J o y e i r A p nnaT q j o o n ^ a t FJFJ
8 ApXCDN NeHNK.AK.IA NAUJCDne A
N Hê n e q c G H A Q Q A io c o c e n j c o e i c
io A ic c y A - x e e T B e e A H F in T H p q - a o c n ^ i
c e n e . x e n . x o e ic Jce ^cu B nih- n t a
12 e i - x o o y e p c o T N A T e T f ie iM e Fi m o
O y AYCO A T T N JC IT O y ^ N O y N A ^ T e
14 e q ^ Jc e A T e T N C o y c u N o y i e ncotn
Ne e q j - x e F i n e i e n c u t Fi a n N e
16 n eJC A y NAq x e A c p n e n T o n o c [e ]
tnnabcdk e p o q - n e .x e n .x o e i[ c ]
18 Jcen M A eT eT FiN A q^nco^ qjt ]
a J ^ e e p e T V n o y T F i h h Ay n [e ]
20 >X6MApiAMMH .Xe^COB NIH [ e . ]
cm ont" F i T e e i ^ e c e N A y e p o q [ n e ]
22 j c e n x o e i c x e x e i x o o c n h t n [ .x e ]
n e T N A y e B O A F iT o q n e T 6 c u A [ n ]
24 e B O A ' A y JC N o y q N 6 m e q H A H [T H c ]
e y n a ^ m F itc n o o y c jc e n c a ^ [ ]
142:1 first trace very obscure, second trace from e or o, third trace prob. from e,
o , or poss. no\e[M O C (Schenke)
142:2 space for 2V2 letters in the lacuna, trace very am biguous; prob. [oyA^;
m : m certain, superlinear stroke restored
142:5 ap x corr. over erased e ^ i
142:6 n : n restored, superlinear stroke certain
142:14 n c u t n : i.e. n o y t n ; n : n restored,superlinear stroke certain
142:15 n c d t n : i.e. n o y t n
142:18 prob. qrfapoq], poss. u j [ a t g t n ]
142:20 prob. [ g t ], poss. [eq]
142:23 6 cda.[tt]: cf. 126:16-17
142:25 MNTCNOOYC: sic
*p. 142
thing. I [Blessed] is the man who has found * . . . [ . . . ] . . . the contest

... I his eyes. [ . . . ] . . . he did not kill, nor I was [he] killed, but he
came forth victorious. I
(73) [Ju(las] said, Tell me, Lord, 5 what the beginning of the path
is.
(74) He said, I Love and goodness. For if I one of these existed
among the I governors, wickedness would never have come into exis
tence. I
(75) Matthew said, Lord, 10 you have spoken about the end of
everything without concern. I
(76) The Lord said, You have understood all the things I I have
said to you I and you have accepted them on faith. I If you have
known them, then they are [yours]. !5 If not, then they are not
yours. I
(77) They said to him, What is the place I to which we are go
ing?
(78) The [Lord] said, I The place you can reach . . . [. . . ] , I
stand there! 20
(79) Mary said, Everything [... ] I established thus is seen. I
(80) The Lord [said], I have told you [that] I it is the one who can
see who [reveals]. I
(81) His [disciples], numbering twelve, asked him, 25 Teacher,
(72) 142:1 poss. the [battle . . . ] . . .

142:2 prob. [Neither] did he kill, nor
(78) 142:18-19 prob. Stand in the place you can reach!" poss. [You will] stand in the
place you can reach.
(79) 142:20-21 prob. Everything established thus is seen. or Is everything thus
established seen? but poss. Thus [is] everything established. It is seen. or [Is]
everything thus established? Is it seen? or the like
(80) 142:23 or it is that which can see that [reveals].
f[H r]
[t ] mnt *ATpoo[ycy ] m ^
2 t c a b o n jc [ ] ne^ce
n jc o e ic Jce.[............ ].e e^coB
4 NIM N T A e iJ t [............. ]T T N A p A
[ ].y.eTTN[ l e z c o s
6 nim neJceMApite^M Jc]eoyqÂ
xe NoycuT ne'j'NA.tJColoq Mn.xo
8 e ic eTBCTTMyCTHpiON NTMH6 >-
nAT NTANtuê epATN n^htcj' Aycu
10 CNOyON^ CBOA NNK.OCMIK.ON >-
ir e ^ e T o y A A C m m a o o a io c jc c t n
12 [o ]y cu < y c c Tm c êêN A qj n m in c
[N] N^BCCO TOYNA[t ]AAY zicdcon
14 [e]NojANeT cb o a ^MnTAico n t
[ c a p ] * n e j c e n o c o e i c JteFiA pxcuN
16 [mn]naioik.hthc oyNTAy mmay
[N^leN^BCO) ey1* mmooy n p o c o y
18 [oei]oj eyMHN cb o a an: ntcdtn
[a c ] 2cuc qjHpe ntm hc c t g t n a'J'
20 [2 l]cUTTHOyTi3 an nni^bccu T<yO
[ o n ] n p o c o y o e i c y a a a a 'J'occu m m oc
22 [ n] htn J c e T T N N A < y c u n e m m a k a
[pi]0 C- ÔTAN 6TTN<yANBCtyTH
24 [N o]y oyNod rAp an n^cub n e
143:3 x o e i c -Xe.[................ ] read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 120, 15 [1978]

205); first trace prob. from e, second trace prob. from x, a , k, \ , m, or 2; poss.
[t6TNU)&N|]h Or 0[TBTNTMl]M (cf. 142:11-13)
143:4 n ta 6 ijc [............ ] read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 120); poss. *[ooy
eparrR] (cf. 142:11-13)
143:4-5 poss. pA I t ['m]PY if the line break (for which cf. above, p. 33- 34) >*
acceptable, poss. pi. I t M Q Y ? (Schenke)
143:5 first undeciphered trace from n or t, second undeciphered trace poss. from 0;
y read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 120); third undeciphered trace prob. from
X , poss. from X ; lacuna over t n (poss. read T^)> fourth undeciphered trace poss.
from e
143:6 m 1 read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 120)
143:9 R: n certain, superlinear stroke restored
143:11 m: emended, with hesitation, by Krause (p. 17 n. 33) to mn
143:22 [ n ] h t n : sic; emend to [ n ] h t n
143:23-24 TH I [NO]y: cf. 128:5; *e- THOyTN
*p- 143
serenity ... ] teach I us . ]. I

(82) The Lord said, . . . [ . . . ] . . . everything I which I have
...[...] you will ... 5 you everything. I
(83) [Mary] said, There is but one saying I I will [speak] to the
Lord I concerning the mystery of truth: I In this have we taken our
stand, and 10 to the cosmic are we transparent. I
(84) Judas said to Matthew, We I [want] to understand the sort
I of garments we are to be [clothed] with I [when] we depart the
decay of the *5 [flesh].
(85) The Lord said, The governors I [and] the administrators
possess I garments granted [only for a time], I which do not last.
[But] you, I as children of truth, 20 not with these transitory gar
ments are you to clothe yourselves. I Rather, I say I [to] you that
you will become [blessed] I when you strip [yourselves]! I For it is
(82) 143:3-5 poss. [If you have (poss. add not) understood] everything which I have
[told you], you will [be unworthy (or become immortal), for] you [ . . . ] . . . every
thing.
(84) 143:11 poss. emend to Judas <and> Matthew said, We
(85) >43:17 granted: or which they grant
[p M A ]
e[ ]N n C ANBO A
2 next xe I'f 'c y A . x e ^
q j t u n [ ................. ]. n e . x e n . x o
4 e ic x e .[ ..............] A p f i n e T N e i
cut nm[ ..............] o q n e . x [ e M A ]
6 piÂ M - ^ [ e o y a L l o j f i ^ e T e 'f'B A B [i]A e
n u ja t a [ m ] o y e B O A ^ N T n e T e h o y
8 b o a ^ n it k a ^ x e - n e .x e n .x o e ic
J c e N T e p e n e ic u T t a ^ o e p A T q f i n
io k o c m o c N A q' A q c e - x n ^ A ^ i t n
t m a a y HTTTHpq' e T B e n A Y q.xcu x y
12 a> q e ip e n e.xefoY -2k.A C .xeNTAK.
XOJ M nAT NAN B O A ^MTTNOyC fi
14 TM H 6 O t [ a ] n N<yAOÂHA N A
u â h a n A cy Nê* n e x e n j c o e i c [.x e ]
16 (y A H A 2 MTTMA e T C M N C ^ IM e m[mAY]
n e x e M A e e A i o c .x e e q -x c u m m [ o c ]
18 NAN JCeqÂHA ^ H n H A e T M [N C 2 l]
M e m m a y -x e e p iK A T A A Y e N N[e]
20 2 BHOY e N T M N T C ^ iM e ;x e 6 e .> c [n o ]
a n n e a a a a Jt e c e N A O Y c u N c e [ . x n o ]
22 n e -x e M A p i^ A M x e c e N A q o T O Y [ b o a ]
a n q ^ A e N e ^ ' n e - x e n x o e i c jc [ n im ]
24 n e eTCO O YN x e c e N a b cu a c b o a [a n ]
144:2 Some form of n e x e - is to be restored at the beginning of the line.

144:3 lacuna over n (poss. read n ); [ ................ ]. n e x e read in photographs
( BASP 14 [1977] 121); trace from o or 6
144:4 undeciphered trace from n or t j [ ............... ]a.pM ne read in photographs (BASP
14 [1977] 121)
144:6 \ not certain, su p erlin ea r stroke restored (cf. 135:18); b[i] read in
photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 121)
144:7 eA read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 121)
144:8 N n i c j L 2 T e . ; 2l t corr. over erased eT e* (raised point not erased; prob.
ttkjl2 t corr. over erased m e Te*)
144:10 cexn*: i.e. q je x r i
144:12 n t x k : poss. read n t o k
144:14 eNqjx: i.e. eNqjXN
144:16 m[may]: cf. 144:18-19
144:18-19 eTeM[NC2i]lMe: cf. 144:16
144:1 9-20 lacuna over n 2 (poss. read nn I ^B H o y e)
144:20 6e: i.e. Ke
p . 144
no great thing * outside. I

(86) [... said speak, II
(87) The Lord said, I . . . [ . . . ] . . . your Father 5 __
(88) [Mary said, I Of what] sort is that [mustard seed]? I Is it
something from heaven or I is it something from earth?
(89) The Lord said, I When the Father established the 10 cosmos
for himself, he left much over from I the Mother of the All. There
fore, he speaks and I he acts.
(90) Judas said, You have I told us this out of the mind of I
truth. When we pray, *5 how should we pray?
(91) The Lord said, I Pray in the place where there is no
woman. I
(92) Matthew said, I Pray in the place where there is [no wo
man], he tells us, I meaning, Destroy the 20 works of womanhood,
not because there is any other [manner of birth], I but because they
will cease [giving birth]. I
(93) Mary said, They will never be obliterated. I
(94) The Lord said, [Who] I knows that they will [not] dissolve
(93) 144:22 poss. Will they never be obliterated?

[p M e ]
[ a jy c u n c k [ ].
2 [.]. N T M N T [............... ] .. ITOC
n e J c e l o y A A C [m m a ]a io c xe
4 [ c J c n a b c d a c b [ o a 2 Bl HOY e R
[ t ] h R t c [ ]NApXCUN
6 [..]N A p e m [ ].A e N A u > cu
[ n ] e N 'j'2 e eNCBTOJT" [ e ] f o o y n e
8 [ . x e n j a c o e ic j c c m h rA p c e N A y e p cu
[TN MH C e N ]A Y eN eTTIApA.AA.M Ba.Ne
io [m m co]tn- e ic ^ H H T e 6 e o ya jxxe
[ n A T ] n e n h o y 6 b o a ^ iT M n e ia r r '
12 [ e n ] u j iK ^ N o y iC A p a jq M N oyeB pH
[6 e ] e q a tn o ccnay epoq A ce6 R
14 [ 6 o m ] ep o q * a a a a n t -
[ ............a .]a a a T A n [e i] c o T M N n ujH
18 [p e T ] e a c e [N T 0 0 ]y M ir[e ]c N A Y o y A n
[ . . . ] N6- A[yCO] T e T N [A ]M O O tp e ^ n
20 [T e ^ l]H 6 T A T 6 T N C O y [c O N C "] KAN
[ a ? ]q m e NApxcuN e [y u )A ]N p N o 6
22 [c e ]N A < y a c o o B C a n a a [ a a e i ] c t
[Jt]<p MMOC NHTN ^ [ e o y j s A p O C
24 [ n a 'O ^ c o o jt o n T e e [ j c o o ] B e c n e
145:1-2 poss. K[ar&AYe on nnc^bIh I[o]ye (cf. 144:19-20)

145:2 poss. MNT[CIM ^HTieeilTQlTOC (cf. 144:19-20)
145:3 n read from ink blotted onto 144:3; for the restoration cf. 135:7-8,143:11
145:4 prob. c b [o a n6in^b]hoy
145:5 prob. h n t c [ ^ i h ] (for the superlineation cf. 142:25 m n t C n o o y c )
145:6 prob. [ce]N&; first undeciphered trace prob. from ic, poss. from n ; second
undeciphered trace prob. from a , poss. from r, ic, m, n , or t ; third undeciphered
trace from *, e, , o, c , 2> or 6; fourth undeciphered trace prob. from n; poss.
peniic[^]A^[i] n [ ------ ].x (lacuna over n ; poss. read n ) , though x would be a bit
crowded
145:7 t : t not certain, articulation mark restored
145:10 n: n certain, superlinear stroke restored
145:12 traces of (K. rather ambiguous, but cf. 135:8-136:1
145:13 6m: cod. 6m (see above, p. 32)
!45:I5 [t i]h : cf. 120:23-26, 139:2-6, 142:5-9
145:15-17 See BASP 17 (1980) 57-58 ad loc.
145:17 poss. [ .......... c &]a a &; &]a a &: virtually certain
*P-145
* and I I
(95) Judas said [to Matthew], I [They] will dissolve [. .. works]
of 5 [ . . . ] . . . [ . . . ] the governors I [... ] will . . . [ . . . ] Thus will
we [become] I prepared [for] them. I
(96) [The] Lord [said], Right. For do they see I [you? Do they see]
those who receive10 [you]? Now behold, a Word! I [The one belong
ing to] heaven is coming forth from the Father I [to the abyss], in
silence with a [flash of lightning], I giving birth. Do they see it or
[overpower] I it? But you are even more r5 aware of [the path], this
one, [before] I either [angel or authority has I __ Rather it belongs
to the Father] and the [Son I because they] are both a single I [ __
And] you [will] go via 20 [the path] which you have [known]. Even
[if] I the governors become huge I [they will] not be able to reach it.
[But listen!] I I [tell] you [that] it is difficult I even [for] me [to reach]
it!
(94) 145:1-2 poss. and [the works] of [womanhood here] be [destroyed as well]?
(95) 145:4-6 poss. [The works] of [womanhood] will dissolve [ . . . ] the governors will
[call upon . . . ] ___
(96) 145:13-14 it (bis): i.e. the Word
145:17 poss. . . . it (i.e. the path). Rather; it: i.e. the path
145:19 via: altered by the scribe from to
145:22.24 it (bis): i.e. the path
145:18 [e]c read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 121)

145:19 first lacuna too short for o y c o t ; n * corr. over erased n ; [x]moo read in
photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 121); n corr. over erased cya.
145:20 [tejiJh: see above, on 145:15; eTxreTN: i.e. nta.tth
145:22 j c o o b c : sic ( j c o o b g c is expected); e i] p : cf. 122:6
>45:23-24 for the restoration cf. 139:6-7
[P M $ ]
jc g C m a p i^ a m H n x o ] e i c xezo
2 T A N G [ y ] U } [ a ( n ) ...........]. n 6 |N G
B H o y e o [ ........... g ] t b c o a g b o a
4 N 0 Y 0 }[. n e J c e n x o e ] i c jc g t g
c o o y N r * t p ......... ] G G IO JA N
6 BCOA 6 B O [ A ____ ] ------ NABCDK 6
TT6 q T 0 TT[0 C ] TTGJCGTfO yAAC JCG ^N
8 o y 6 q o y o N 2 g b o a n 6 it t g it n [ a ]
n e x e n x o e ic Jce ^ N o y [e c o y o N ^ ]
io g b o a F i6 iT C H q e n G J C 6 'f o y A A [ c ]
JC G ^ N o y c q o y o N ^ g b o a N 6 in o [ y ]
12 O G IN " TTGJCGTTJCOGIC J C G G ----- [ . . ]
N H T q N O JA G N G ^ n G J C 6 '/ O y A [ A C ]
14 JCGNIM TTG G TKCU N N G ^ B H O ty c ]
NNIM G B O A [ N G ^ B H O y G e T K [ . . ]
16 TTKO CM O C [ . ] .................... [ - G ]
tkco n n g ^ W h o y g g b o [ a ' TT6JC6]
18 TTJCOGIC X ? [ n ] | H n [ G . . . ] G I 7 G [n ]
T A ^ G IM G 6 n [ g ]^ B H O [ y g ] ITCUq IT [6 6 ]
20 e i p e N ir[o y c u ]q ^ G m t t g ic u t - n [ t c u ]
T N A G A p [ lA r a ) ] N lZ e G q i N T O [p rH ]
22 M N n G [< j)e o ]N O C G B O A N T H N O [y ]
A y c u N T [6T N ]K C O MMCOTN K A 2 H [ o y ]
24 N N 6 T N [ ___ ].G* N T G T N T M .[ . . ]
146:1 [m^ pi ^ m: cf. 146:4 (Te-); not enough room for Ma.p12a.MMH
146:2 poss. e[y]q;[a.NBCDA gbo Ja
146:3 poss. read c b o a *
146:4 prob. noy20)[b; poss. Noyû^n , i.e. ^Noyûm* (see BASP 17 [1980] 58 ad
loc., and above, on 129:20-21)
146:5 trace of 1 could also be from r or t
146:6 prob. a nominal subject for n ^ bcuk (qN*cannot be read)
146:9 [ecoyoN^]: cf. 146:8.11, but poss. [e c 6 o A n ]
146:13 ): 1 not certain, diaeresis restored
146:16 A connective superlinear stroke ispreserved over the fifth and sixth
undeciphered traces.
146:17 poss. 6 bo [a * n n e x e ]
146:18 17 virtually certain
146:18-19 ne[N]lT*.2: i.e. neNT^q
146:19 6N[e] read in photographs (BASP 14 [1977] 121); e restored at the end of the
line, though not strictly necessary, is recommended for a usual line length
146:20 m : m certain, superlinear stroke restored; e ia rr: eia)T is expected
*p. 146
(97) * [Mary] said [to the Lord], When I the works [ . . . ] . . .

I . .. [. . . which] dissolves I a . . . [ . . . ] .
(98) [The Lord said, Right. For] you 5 know [ . . . ] . . . if I I dis
solve [. . . ] . . . will go to I his [place].
(99) Judas said, How I is the [spirit] apparent? I
(100) The Lord said, How [is]10 the sword [apparent]?
(101) [Judas] said, I How is the [light] apparent? I
(102) The Lord said, . . . [ . . . ] I in it forever.
(103) [Judas] said, I Who forgives the [works] r5 of whom? [The
works] which . . . [ . . . ] I the cosmos [ . . . ] . . . [ . . . I who] forgives
the [works]. I
(104) The Lord [said], [Who . . . ] . . . ? I It behooves whomever
has understood [the works] 20 to do the [will] of the Father. I And as
for [you, strive] to rid [yourselves] of [anger] I and [jealousy], I and
[to strip] yourselves I of your [ . . . ] . . . s, and not to . . . [ . . . ]
(97) 146:1-3 poss. When the works [dissolve] . . . [ . . . which] dissolves

146:3 which: or who; dissolves: or dissolve
x46:3-4 poss. . . . [ . . . which] dissolves a [work.* The Lord said or . . . [ . . . which]
dissolves. [Privately, the Lord said
(98) 146:4 poss. [Privately, the Lord said (see the previous note); you: fern. sing.
146:7 his: or its
(99) 146:7 How: or In what
(100) 146:9 How: or In what
146:10 sword: or reed
(101) 146:11 How: or In what
(102) 146:13 in it: or by means of it
(103) 146:15 poss. [The works] which you (masc. sing.) [ . . . ]
146:17 poss. who] does [not] forgive the [works] or who] do [not] forgive the [works] or
who] forgive the [works]
(104) 146:18-19 or [Who . . . ] . . . the one who has understood [the works]? It
behooves him
146:21-22 for the restoration cf. 138:16-17

146:22 th n q [y ]: cf. 128:5; i.e. t h o y t n
146:24 first trace from n or t , or poss. from y; second trace from tu or uj
[PM Z]
A p p r o x i m a t e ly 7 lin e s a r e m is s in g .]
--------------].
]n
10 ]U )A
] e . . 't 'n e
12 ].M N T p e q >
] .a n o 6 n 6 6
14 I't'o c o ) r a .p m
]T N JC I N ^ e N
16 iT H T N ^ ^ O y
]TA.qajiN e * q
18 ] .e n x Y n a h >
]q N A c u N 2 o ja .
20 ................ ] . ') 'JCCU MMOC NH
T N ..........].eJCeN N G TN CCU pM >-
22 NNeTM jlTNA. M N N G T M '|'Y X O O Ye
[ n A I A A O ] r O C HTTCCDTHP
147:8-23 The location of the left margin on this page is very uncertain.
147:14-15 prob. mI[moc x e ], poss. mI[moc n h tn
x e ] (similarly Krause [p. 26 n. 102])
147:17 prob. N]T&q, poss. e]T&q
147:18-19 poss. m I[ to n mmo ]
147:20 prob. [eN (or ANHê) a n o k ] A e f
147:21 prob. oce is to be restored in the lacuna; trace prob. from r, h , 1, n , n, or t,
poss. from a , m, or y
147:23 For the decoration above and below this line, see Facs.: Codex HI (1976), pi-
141; for the restoration cf. 120:1.
*P- 147
*[] It.--] I 0 [ - ] . . . I I [ ] .. I [...]...

reproach I [...]. For I say ... *5 . you take . . . I [ . . . ] . . .
you ... ![] who has sought, having I this, will ...
I [... ] he will live ... 20 . I say to I [you ... ] ... so that you
will not lead I [your] spirits and your souls into error.
[The Dialogue] of the Savior
147:14-15 poss. For I say [to you, you take ...

147:18 poss. this one will ...
147:18-19 poss. this, will [rest ... ] he will live ... or ] . . . this one will
[rest ... ] he will live ...
147:19-20 prob. [ . . . ] he will live [forever. And] I say
INDEXES
The main entry is always the standard Sahidic form; if not actually
attested in the text, this form is given in parentheses, e.g. ( a n t - ) . The
entries are followed by a reference to W. E. Crum, A Coptic
Dictionary (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1939), e.g. 9 a.
vb tr = transitive verb, the infinitive of which can be followed

immediately by an object (dir obj); after the status absolutus the
direct object is governed by the preposition n - , m m o - ; the absence
of a direct object after the status absolutus is indicated by no dir
obj or by med
med = medium, middle voice, in which the infinitive of a transitive
verb without a direct object describes the entry of the actor into the
state otherwise described by the qualitative of that verb
vb intr = intransitive verb, one which can never be followed
immediately by an object
attrib = attributive construction, in which n- with a bare noun
modifies a preceding noun
* after a reference, e.g. 133:1*, indicates that the key word or
construction is wholly or partially restored or read from uncertain
letters
ap after a reference, e.g. 129:12ap, indicates that the key word or
construction is to be found in the apparatus to the text
Other abbreviations are as in Crum, with the following additions:

I = basic (not converted) tense
II = Second Tense
III Fut = Third Future
advb = adverb, adverbial
affirm = affirmative
Circumst = Circumstantial
Cond = Conditional
Conjunctv = Conjunctive
dat = dative, used to distinguish the preposition n-, N i' from
other words spelled n-
98 INDEXES
dir obj = direct object; see above under vb tr
foil, by = followed by
Fut = Future
Gk = Greek
Imperat = Imperative
infin = infinitive, including the Causative Infinitive
neg = negative
Perf = Perfect
Pres = Present
suffix vb = verb of suffix conjugation
t-caus = t-causative verb
w. = with
I. WORDS OF EGYPTIAN ORIGIN
x x -, see eipe. 2i 26: i 5 , 2i 26: i 6, 2i29:2,

A.MA.2T, IeMA.2T (9a) vb 4131:12 (see 131:13ap), 2133:4,
intr. 2i33:io, 4138:10, 4138:13,
------- eJC N - ! i 3 i : 6 . 3i 38 ;i4 , 4 1 3 9 :1 ,2 1 4 2 :2 3 .
------- m h o - . . . 2 N - I i 32:24, See also ant-.
i 33:i*_ ANHê, see eNe^.
(a .N r-), n t k .- , N t c d t n - ( i i b a.pi-, see eipe.
4up) copular pron. 1133:15, XT- (18 b) prefix forming nn.
140:24. See Hoy-
See also ne (20). HNT-.3k.T-, see pOOYCp-
ANOK., rN T O K , 2N T O q , 3NTCDTN, AYto (196) conjunction. 122:14,
4n to o y ( l l b) pron. 2i22:24, 123:5, 124:7, 124:11, 124:18,
3123:11*, 4124:12, 3124:16- 124:21, 127:9, 129:7, 131:3,
170^,3124:22, Ii25:3, 2i3i:5- 141:1.
in extraposition to subject joining independent clauses
120:8, 120:23, 126:2, 128:1*, 120:20, 126:16, 126:23, 127:5-
129:12ap, 2i3o:23, 133:13, 6ap (bis), 128:14, 129:141
137:21,2i39:5,140:22,3143:18, 130:5ap (bis), 132:18, 133:11,
3 i 4 5 : i 4*> 4 i 4 5 : i *> i 4 7 :2o ^ ; 133:12*, 134:14. i 34:i6>
before Imperat: 3124:2, 134:22, 135:2*, 135:6, 135:16,
3146:20*. I35:i9> I35 :20> i36;4, i 36:20>
predicate of a nominal sen 136:22*, 138:23*, 139:141
tence: Ii2i:9*, Ii2i:i6; of a I39 :I7>i 39:i8 I39:23*> r4o:7.
cleft sentence 2i26:9ap, 140:11, 141:18, 142:13, i43:9>
W ORDS OF EG Y PTIAN ORIGIN 99
144:11 >i 45: i9 CBOA I20:i8, 122:13, 128:7; W.
joining dependent clauses vb: see bcua, ei, iccu, iccutg,
121:7, 128:3ap, 131:7, 131:10, HoyN, mto, NAy, oycoN^,
132:1a/?. qcuTe, jccuk, occucupe,
before Conjunctv 133:20*, 6o>An, 6cucpT; also, cf.
137:18,145:1*, 146:23. further below.
joining prep phrases 130:13*, GBOA N-, NHT* 121:8,
130:22,131:14*. 121:23, 122:20, 127:7, 129:22,
joining nns 121:2, 121:17, I3I:> !33:6> 133:12*, 133:16,
125:15, 127:15, 127:23, 130:19, 135:18, 138:17, 140:21, 144:13,
i 39:9 (?)> I39:I (?) 146:22; as nn 133:15, 139:16,
(22a 1) interrog pron. 142:5, 140:12, 140:13, 144:7, 144:8;
142:16. also, see further below.
io ) n - 124:24,132:22*, 134:2*, GBOA ITOOT- 136:14*; also,
134:10, 134:15, 134:20, see further below.
134:21*, 138:21, 139:22*,
BOA TOJN 126:19, i26:20.
i 39:23> I4 i:7> i 43 :i2 144=6 *, gboa x e - 134:3*.
144:15.
NTTBOA 131:3.
Aupet, see eicye.
GBOA N-, MMO- 120:22, 141:2
xze, A2et, see cd^g.
(?); also, see further below.
a jc i* , see occu.
ajcn- (256) prep. 142:10. MTTBOA N- 130:5, 130:5ap.
gboa between vb and prep,
bcdk (29a) vb intr. 126:3, 130:11, prob. to be taken w. both
134:22. (gboa for gboa gboa):
---- e-, epo- 142:17,146:6. gboa ^n-, n^ht* 130:12,
---- n^ht' 139:6. 132:2ap, 133:18 (?), 143:14.
---- encA-N-niTN e- GBOA ITN-, ÎTOOT*
I35:i9- 136:20, 145:11.
---- eeoyN 132:3* (?). GBOA N-, MHO' 129:23,
---- eôyN e- 132:3* (see !3 o:i5> *36:i3aP>
ap), 138:19. 136:16*.
---- eepAf e - 135:9. bcua (32 a) vb tr.
bx\ (316 8) nn m. 135:4, 140:3, ----- gboa 146:3 (see
142:2. 146:4ap), 146:6* (?); med
B0* (336 9up) nn m. 121:16, 144:24*, i45:4*> 146:2a/?,
129:5. 146:3 (see 146:3 & 4ap); as nn
attrib: c a - n - b o a 123:21-22ap, m 122:3.
144:1 (for advb expression see babiag (37 b) nn f. 135:18,
c x [ i 0]). 144:6*.
100 INDEXES
baac, ibaa (38a) nn m. 127:10, 137:10,

q } A -e N 2
attrib 121:24, *121:24ap. 144:23,147:20a p , 1147:20ap.
(scu cy ), s e < y - (466) vb tr. ujA-NieNe? 122:1.
i 43 :23 - 0 C N -6 N 6 2 q p A - N 2 130:14,
*130:22*.
e - , ! e p o - (5 0 a) prep. xi2 o :i4 , epi-, see eipe.
I i2 o :i9 * , 125:5, ! i 34 : i 9 > epo-, see e-.
134:23,*137:5, 139:8; see b c u k , epAT-, IepeT-(THOYTN) (303a
e i, 6 IH 6 , KIM, KCUT6, 8 up) prep. 120:5,120:6,
M O yT C , NAY, NHY> C O B T 6 , 120:21, 127:2-3ap, 127:5,
CM OY, CCUTM, 'I', TAMO, 128:14, 128:22, 129:21, 130:10,
TCUMT, TNNOOY, T C ABO, 131:1, 133:11, 133:24*,
T A -x p o , OYtUN, c y m e , cycu n, I35 :I3 *> i 36:i7. *142:19.
2 0 ), z o m , jc i, xw, Jtp o , i 43 :9. x44 :9 -
6 in , KoXXaco, irK T T fV ti). epovre (586) nn m f.
before in fin : 129:23 ap, 134:7, attrib 130:16.
139:7, 140:16, 140:17, 145:24*, (epHY), epHOY (59a) nn m f.
146:19*; see also *f*, o y n - , i 37 :i>i 37:6*-
O Y N T 6 - , O Y C u q j, a y a > v i ( o f i a i . e c H T (60a) nn m.
e n c A - N - n iT N e - 135:19. MnecHT 131:7.
e e o Y N e - 132:3 ap, 138:19. TB- (61 a) prep. 123:13,
e e p A f e - 1 2 3:1,13 3 :2 1, 135:9, 126:22,142:10,143:8.
136:9. eT B e -T T A f 128:18, 129:19*,
N e o y o e - 130:2,131:5 ap. 144:11.
e i m hti e - 131:23-240/7. eTBe-oY 135:15*, 140:10,
forms advb expressions and 140:15,141:3*.
compound preps w. b o a , em eu (5326 4) nn f. 141:6.
ITN , MATE, C A (l ), T H p -, e o o Y (62a) nn m. 121:2, 121:3,
e Y N , e p a .f , e o Y o . 136:14.
( e b ic u ), e B e ic u (526) nn m. 'I '- e o o Y 121:4; foil, by n-, nv
attrib 130:17*. 131:18,136:11,136:13.
BpH6e (53 b) nn f. 136:7, ecycune (5806 16) conjunction.
136:19*, 145:12*. 122:17,128:20-21 ap, 145:20*.
6MMON, See MMON. eqpxe- (63 b) conjunction.
C M A ^ Te , see a m a ^ t c . 142:14,142:15.
N2> ! a n h 2 (57a) nn m. e ^ H , see ^ h .
127:13* (context unclear), eocN-, *ejtM-, 2eacco- (75703)
as advb 1142:8. prep. 127:18, 131:6, 131:13.
N cyA - N e 120:8, 137:15, *131:14*, 'I 33:6. 2i35:3>
146:13. 2138:14, 2138:15,140:10.
W ORDS OF EGYPTIAN ORIGIN 101
e z p a J eocN- 2139:20 *. i 43:4- 5aP)> I l 45:^> I *45:2I>
146:20; no dir obj 144:12.
Hpn (666) nn m. 130:17*.
p-, Api-, epi- before Gk vbs:
ei, *1 (70a, see also nhy) vb see ay<avl(op.ai, apveofxai,
intr. 120:23,128:8,134:21. aTifxoui, irtKa\<6 , KaraXvta,
---- e - 140:16. ptTavoeu), trvfj.<f><ava), <f>op(o.
---- 6BOA. 132:2* (?), 133:18 e ic- (8 5 a ) deictic particle. 122:6,
(?), 142:3. 128:4* (?)> i4 5 :22*
----- 6BOA 6BOA MMO' e ic - ^ H H T e 126:18*, 128:4 aP>
120:22; w. one cb oa standing 128:10 (?), 129:16*, 145:10.
for both 129:23, 135:12*. eic-^HHTe eic - 138:11-12,
----- eBOA CBOA N- 133:5; 139:18-19* .
w. one 6boa standing for both eicuT, *icut (86 b) nn m. *121:1*,
132:2* (see ap), 133:18 (?), 121:5, 129:20*, 130:9 ap,
>143:14. Ix33:i 9 I 34=I5aP> i 38:4*A
----- cboa (for 6 boa cboa ) 144:4, 144:9*, x45: i I > i 45:i 7*
2ITOOT- 136:20. 146:20.
------ e n iT N 135:14*, i 35 :i6- (citn ), itn (876) nn m.
eiMe, 'eiMe (77 6) vb intr. CA-N-TTITN 127:16*, 129:11,
i 39:i2 (?) 131:11*, 131:14*, 1357 ,
---- e- 134:5, 139:12 (?), 135:I0 I 35:i9 (for advb
141:13. J43:3aP (bis) 146:19; expressions and compound
foil, by x e - 134:8,134:11. prep see ca [i 0]).
---- hmo' 142:12. eniTN 135:15*, 135:16,141:5.
----- x e - 122:12 (?), 134:1*, (eiqje), Aqjet (886) vb tr.
134:20,134:21,136:4,1143:12. ----- nHt * 1131:12*.
erne (78b) vb tr bring. ------- N ^ p A l n ^ h t * +131:15**
---- na* 138:21; no dir obj
138:23. KA-, See KCL).
---- eepAT 135:22. KAA', see KCU.
erne (806) vb intr resemble. (Ke), Ke-, *6e-, pi 2K.ooye
----- N-, MMO' 131:5, (906) nn m f. 138:9, 2138:23,
132:18ap, 136:23ap, 139:11. 2138:24, *144:20.
(eioop), see Jtioop. (Koyi), Koyei (926) nn m f.
eipe, *p-, 2i i ' , Imperat 3a.pi-, 125:7,136:23,141:7.
4epi- (83a) vb tr. 1120:13, KCU, *KA-, 2KAA' (946) vb tr.
*122:5, *122:17, 2123:22, 2131:21, Ii34:24ap, 140:8.
2i32:i7, ^ S : 21*. l l & 2> ----- eoccu- *135:2.
Ii36:4, '136:23, *138:13, ----- nco)' 120:4,141:9-
Ix3*:i5 2i 4 i:20> '143:4 (cf- ----- N-2132:1.
102 INDEXES
----- CBOA 146:14*, 146:17*. M A-N -JCIO O p 1 123:23.

-------- g t t i t n 141:5. MTTIMA 136:13 (?).
-------- K A ^ H O y N - 146:23*. (m g ), m h g (1566 6up) nn f.
KA-pcu-q as nn m I i45:i2. 121:2, 123:9, 123:12, 125:16,
k a k g (1016 4) nn m. 122:4, 133:17, 140:10, 140:12,140:21,
122:16ap, 125:23*, 127:2, 143:8,143:19,144:14-
127:4, 127:5-60/7, 127:23*, attrib 128:9ap, 128:15*,
132:8 (see ap), 133:24. 128:20*.
kim (108a) vb intr. 132:23, 133:8 M oy, M O oyTt (159a) vb intr.
(bis), 133:13. 125:13, +139:22, 139:22, ti4o:7,
------- e - 1 2 0 :16 ,13 2:2 2 ,14 0 :6 . ti4o:8, 140:11 ap (i),
km to (109a 18 up) nn m. t i4 o :n ap, 140:13,140:14.
132:21-22ap. a t - m o y nn 143:4-50/7.
KpcoM (1156) nn m. 131:8. m m a - , see n - ( i ) .
kcutg , k o t ' (124a) vb tr. m m o - , see n - (i).
----- e-, epo-: no dir obj (m m n -), m n - (neg existential
130:2-3ap (bis), 130:6*. predicate), see oyN-.
----- cb o a 141:1ap (?). MMIN (1686).
----- c b o a n-: med MMIN M M O ' 132:16, 132:17 ap.
141:1a/? (?). ( m m o n ), 6MMON (169a)
------- G ^pA 'f e - 1133:21. interjection. 122:16.
Kooye, see k g . m n - (neg existential predicate),
KX2. (x3Ifl) nn m- 122:24,127:21, see oyN-.
129:19ap, 130:3, 130:12ap, m n -, !n m m a ' (1696) prep.
131:14, 132:22, 133:4*, 133:7 120:21, 124:2*, 1i34:n,
(bis), 135:2*, 135:20,144:8*. Il 34 :i3>
kco^ t (1336) nn m. 124:7, joining nns 120:20, 120:26,
128:16,130:6*, 134:2,135:11. 123:140/7 (?), 123:21-22ap,
KA^Hoy, see ku >. 125:17,127:17,127:21*, 127:23,
128:6, 129:11, 130:16, 130:17
aaay (1 4 6 a ) nn. 120:22, (bis), 130:18, 130:19*, 133:7,
i 3 i ; 23 ap, 1 3 3:2 3,1 34 :6 . *33 :I7 > *34:25 (bis)> W *.
135:11, 136:7, 141:18, 142:6*,
m-, see n- (i, 20). 143:110/7, 143:16*, 145:12,
m i -, see j*. 145:17,146:22,147:22.
ma, m i- (153a) nn m. 123:2*, m a g i n (1706) nn m . 129:18.
127:16, 132:3ap, 132:7, ( m o y n ) , MHNt (171 b) vb intr.
132:7ap, 133:15, 133:21, ------- G B O A ti4 3 :i8 .
i 38:i9> *39:3 > i 39:i7 > 140:16, m i n g (172 a) nn f.
140:22,142:18,144:16,144:18. Acy n m i n g : w . indefinite art
W ORDS OF EG Y PTIA N ORIGIN 103
143:12. maay (197a) nn f. 144:11.
mnt-, see MHT. Mooy (1976) nn m. 127:23,
mnt', see oyNTe-. 128:1*, 129:22, 130:4, 130:6,
mnt- (176 a) prefix forming nn f. 134:6.
127:11 (?). Meeye, Meoye (199a) vb intr.
See no6, pmmao, cîmc, as nn m 1121:17; p-nMeeye
ayados, tcAcios. (cf. eipe) fi- 135:21*.
mnt-at-: see pooyqj. M oyoyT (201a) vb tr. no dir obj
Rne (178a 16). 140:11.
eqjJce-Rne 142:15. M o o a je (203 b) vb intr.
m ttu ja ( 1 7 9 a ) v b in t r . ----- cy A -145:19* (see ap).
----- n- 139:10. ----- Z * - 145:19*.
w. Conjunctv 139:11 ap. ( m o y z ), m a - (208a) vb tr fill.
as nn m 139:3ap. 142:25.
mttoja (180a) advb. 139:3ap.
(hht), mnt- (1876) nn m f. N-, ! N-, 2M-, 3M M O ', 4mm A '
MNT-CNOOyC 142:25. (215a, b) prep. 3120:12,
M O o y T t, see M o y . 2i 2 i : i 5 , 3i 2i : i 6 , 2122:13 (?),
matc (190a) nn. 123:9, 2i2 6 :4 , 3127:14*, 128:6,
6MAT6 124:5*, 135:5. 3129:5, 3129:9, 133:22, 2i3 5 : i,
hht (1906) nn f. 2i 3 8 : 6 , 145:2,145:18 (?).
ntmhtc n - 128:17ap. genitive 2i2o:i, 121:18, 2i22:3,
HoyTe (191 b) vb intr. 2i22:4, 2i2 2 :i6 ap, 2i2 5 :i9 * ,
----- e - 140:9. i i 27: i 6, 127:18*, 127:18,
------ e-, epo- ... x e - 140:6, 2i2 8 :i6 * , Ii 2 9 : n , 130:2-3 ap,
140:9ap (bis). I i3 i:n , I i3i:i4 , 2i3i:20 (see
mto (193a) (vb as) nn m. 131:21 ap), 2132:3a/?, 2\yr.~j,
MTTMTO 6BOA N- 124:1* (see J 33 :I 4 > 2*33 : i 9 > i 34: i 7 ,
124:1-2ap), 135:23*. 134:18, 135:1, 2i3 5 -6, 135:7,
mton (1936) vb intr. 135:10, 2i 35 : i 7 *, i 35: i 9 >
----- MMO* refl 120:7, 141:3, 2i 3 5 ;2 0 , 2i 3 6 : 2 i , 2i3 6 :2 3 ,
141:11,147:18-190/?. 2i 39 ;4 , 2 i 39 :9 > 2i4 o :i8 ,
as nn m: '('-mton NA' ... 2i 4 i : i 7 , 142:1, 142:5, 142:7*,
cboa N -121:8. 2i4 2 :io , 143:8, 143:14, i 43 : i 9 >
M*y (*96b) nn. 2i 4 4 : i i , 144:13, 144:20, 145:4,
mmay i 3 2:8> ! 3 5 : i i > i 3 9 :i8> 146:15, 2i4 6 :2 0* , 2i4 7:23; see

142:19, 144:16*, 144:19; T- also compound preps formed
mmay 122:19, 127:16, 132:7, w. b o a , c a (i ), T n e , ze
133:16*, 135:12, 137:10, (20), 2 Y n (see a ^so mmin).
i 39 :3 *j' see also oyNTe-. continues suffix after ^ h t-,
104 INDEXES
ÎTOOT- (see îtn-). o y c u N 2 > -Xcu.

forms attrib construction: (a) ( n a ), n a c (2 1 6 6 ) vb intr.
before boa, b aac, sbicu, ------ n a - 122:21*.
epovre, ms, m e , oycuT, (noy> NAt), Fut auxiliary na-
qjeA eeT, oja6om, ^rnce, (2 1 9 a , 2 1 7 b) vb intr. 120:4,
ZoyN, ôyeiT, -Xioop; (b) 120:6, 120:7, 120:25, 121:24,
after no6, cpopn, novoycvys. 122:1, 122:4, 122:17, 122:18,
partitive after auj, Z*-Z- 122:19, 122:20, 122:21, 123:4,
governs dir obj after vbs tr: see 125:3, 125:8, 125:15, 126:3,
bcua, eiNe (i), eipe, k.u>, 127:2, 1 2 7 :5 -6 ap, 127:8,
iccuTe, noy^m, Noyoce, 127:13, 12 7:17* , 128:22ap,
CCDK., CCUpM, CCUT6, COOYN, 1 2 9 :9 -1 0 ap, 129:10, 131:21,
CCUOY2 , 1*> TAMO, TNNOOY, 13 1:23 , 132:11, 132:13a/) (bis),
ta ^ o , oyNTe-, oycuN^, cun, 1 3 3 :6 , 1 3 3 :8 , 133:24, 134:3.
q)me, qi, qcuTe, -Xi(i), -xcu, 134:10, 134:13. I 34;I 5>134:20,
XCDCUB6, 6me. 134:21, 134:22, 134:23 ap,
w. G k vbs: see apveo/xai, 134:24, 135:8, 136:9. i 36:i5>
KaraXvw, KaT\a>, KoXXam, 1 3 7 :9 . i 3 7 : i 4 . 137:21*, 138:13,
-napaycDy napaXay.âvui, 13 8 :15. 138:18, 138:21, 138:23,
<f>opea). 138:24, 139:1*, 139:2*, 139:6,
forms various expressions after 140:6, 140:9, 141:10, 141:11,
a m a ^ t c , eiMe, em e (20), 141:15, 141:20, 141:21, 142:8,
K.CU, MTTU>A (l), MTON, 142:17, 142:18, 143:4, 143:7,
ncopoc, oyN-, cycune, (p-) i 43: i 3> i 43:i 9. 143:22.144:14.
cynHpe. 144:21, 144:22, 144:24, 145:4,
governs infin after (p-)xpei'a. 145:6 (bis), i 4 5 : i 9*> i 45:22*>
forms advb expressions w. 1 4 6 :6 ,1 4 7 :1 8 , 147:19.
BOA, 6 N6 2 , e C H T , MAy, CA See also NHy.
(i), CNAy, m e , oyNoy, NoyB (221 b) nn m. 141:18.
oyoeiqj, qjopn, z e (2)> n k a ( 2 2 3 a ) nn m. 133:13 ap,
2PAT, 2oyo, jccum. 1 3 7 :2 0 * .
forms compound preps w. nim ( 2 2 5 a) interrog pron. 126:7,
BOA, MHT6, MTO, 6 (2), 126:7 aP, 126:13, 126:13a/),
oyN. 1 31:23 ap, 135:8, 136:13,
= N- 2I 29 :20 - 2 Iap, 2136:13 136 :15, 138 :7, 139:2, 144:23*.
^ (?), 3140:23 (?), 146:4*#. 1 4 6 :1 4 ,1 4 6 :1 5 ,1 4 6 :1 8 * .
n-, 'm-, 2na" (216a i up) prep. nim ( 2 2 5 b) adj. 120:10, 122:24,
2i2o:i2, 2i 3 3 :i 4 > 2i 3 9 :7 . 124:16*, 129:17, 132:15*.
2145:24*; see also em e (i), 132:17, i 33:i 3fl/ ,> ! 34 :I 7>
na, nejce-, 1% t a ^ o , 136:2*, 13 7 :2 0 , 141:13, i4 2:iI>
W ORDS OF EGYPTIAN ORIGIN 105
142:20, 143:4, 143:6. (NA2PN-), NNA2PN- (6496
nmma-, see MN- (2). 26up) prep. 141:23.
(nolnoy-), n a n o y - (227 a) n^ht-, see n-.
suffix vb. 121:22*, 130:18*, naT (246a) vb tr.
130:20. as nn m: ^ n -oyn a^ tc
noync (2276) nn f. 130:20, 136:3*, 142:13.
134:4*, 134:16*, 134:18. noy^CC, inojc* (247a) vb tr.
nn*2PN-, see NA2PN-. ----- 6BOA (for 6BOA boa)
nca -, ' ncoj - (314a 3) prep. MHO' 130:15.
'120:4, 122:22, 125:17*, ----- BOA (for 6BOA cboa)
! i28:3*, i i 28:4, *129:7 *, n^ht- 1130:1 n o dir obj
i3i:23> l *y7i 7> *137:18, 130:11ap.
^37:20, I i4i:io, 1141:11, no6 (250a) nn m f. 124:4, 124:5,
141:15. 136:23,137:8,141:8,145:21.
noytc (230 b) nn m. 137:23, no6 n- (attrib) 130:6,131:4ap,
138:4ap. I35:I. i 35:n> i 36:i9 . 137:11.
(NTN-), NTOOT-' (4276 15 up) 143:24.
prep. 140:4. mnt-no6 nn f 133:6,135:20.
nay (2336) vb intr. n6i- (252a) introducing subject.
----- e-, epo* 122:7*, I23:4> 120:26, 122:3, 123:7, 123:18*,
127:2* (see 127:2-3(2/?), 127:6*, 124:23*, 125:1, 125:4ap,
132:6*, 132:11, 132:14, 132:16, 125:10, 125:18*, 126:6,
i 33:24. *35:4/> i 35 :5 *35:6 126:8ap, 126:11, 126:14*,
I35:i4> i 36:5 i 3 6:8, i 36:i7 126:17, 126:21, 127:14, 127:17,
i 3 7 4 * 1 3 7 7 . i 3 7 : i o . 1 3 7 :1 3 . 127:19, 127:22, 128:12ap (bis),
140:3, 142:21, 145:8, 145:9*. 128:16, 128:20, 129:1, 129:3,
I45:i3 129:9, 129:16, 129:20*, 131:1,
----- BOA 126:16, 142:23. I3 I:I5 I32:5*> I32:9 *>
----- x e - 129:17. 132:12*, 132:15, 133:5,
(nhy), nhoy (2196 5, see also I35:I3 *> I35:23>I37:3 >i 37:23.
ei) vb intr (qual). 138:3, 138:6ap, 138:8, 138:11,
----- BOA (for 6BOA BOa ) 138:14, 139:8, 139:13, I39:2,
MMO* 136:16*. 141:19, 142:24, 145:4ap, 146:2,
----- BOA (for 6BOA BOa ) 146:8, 146:10, 146:11.
2 itn - . .. e - 145:11*. no6n6 (2526) vb tr. 147:13.
----- eÔYN 121:21.
Niqe (2386) vb tr. no dir obj ob (254a) nn f. 127:18.
i 34 :9 - on (2556) advb. 123:5, 126:7ap,
n2 (2406) nn m. 130:17. 126:9ap, 126:15, 126:16, 139:7,
noy2 m (2436) vb tr. 137:16. 145:1-20^, 145:24.
106 INDEXES
ONt, see CON. *145:24, 146:18* (?), 146:19*;

o c e (2566) nn m. (b) ternary *120:15*
'f-o c e 140:17. 2i2i:n a p, *122:17 (s
i22:i6ojb), 124:1, 124:4*
tta.-, ta-, 2n a )', 3no>* (259a, 124:5*, 2i2$:22,125:23,134:19,
2606 8 up) possessive pron. I i4i:i8*, 141:19, 2i45:i9.
3142:14, 3142:15, 145:11*, in medial position of ternary
*145:17*, 2i46:i9*. nominal sentence 121:9*,
ttaY, *nAei, 2taY, 3ta i, 4 nay 121:16, 2i24:i7 (?), 125:19,
(259 a) demonstrative pron. 127:4 (?), 133:1*, *134:7,
4i2i:20, 4i2i:22, 122:9, 123:12, *136:8 *137:11, 139:14,139:15.
4125:6, 4125:13, 4125:14ap, *141:16, 141:24, *142:5,142:16,
4127:18, 4131:17, 4131:23, 2i 4 3 ; i 3 *. '1 4 4 :6 .
4137:3, 3141:16ap, I i4 i:i6 ap, forming cleft sentence: (a) ne
4142:7, 143:9, 144:13, 3145:15, fused w. Relative converter
147:18*. 126:7, 126:7ap, 126:9aP>
as antecedent of Relative 126:13, 126:14 (see 126:13ap),
4 i2 i: i* , 121:9*, 129:6 ap, 126:15, 126:16*, 127:21-22ap,
4 1 3 1 :2 0 ^ , 133:1, 133:6, 131:23ap, 133:4, 2i 38:23,
137:16*, 140:2*, 140:6. 2i 38:24, 2i39:i*, 139:2*,
t a T Te e 2i36:8. 141:20, 142:23, 143:7; (b) ne
eTe-TAT re 2125:20. not fused w. Relative converter
eTBe-TTAY 128:18, 129:19*, 127:21-22ap, 129:2, 131:6ap,
144:11. 131:12 (see 131:13ap), 135:8,
Î-NAY 4 1 3 9 :8 . i 36:i3 . i 36:i5> *38:7.
ne (259a) nn f. 127:21*, 131:13, 138:13, 138:15,144:24,146:14;
i 3 3 :4 . i 3 3 ;7 I 3 5 : i> I 4 4 :7 (c) n e omitted 133:10.
i 4 5 :i1- See also ant -.
n e , 1T , 2n (2606 21) copular n o v , no)', see n i- .
pron. 120:16ap, *120:16ap, ncupx (271 b) vb tr.
121:9ap, 121:10ap. ----- N-: med 130:8*.
in final position of nominal ncoT (274a) vb intr. 134:10.
sentence: (a) binary *125:20 ncu^ (281 a) vb intr reach.
(?), 127:23, 131:4 (see ap), ----- qjApo* 142:18* (see
x3 2:9 >i 3 3 ;3 *113 4 :19 (seeap), ap).
I 34:23> I 39:3 (see ap), *139:7, nco^T, (283a) vb tr.
140:12, 140:14, 2i42:i5, *i3 i:i 7-
2i42:i5*, 143:24. 1447. ----- e^pjJ excu-: med
1144:8, 144:21, I i45:i8*, 139:19*.
nexe-, ' n e x i ' (285a) suffix (po), pco* (288a) nn m mouth.
vb. KA-pcu-q (cf. kcu) 145: 12.
---- n-, NA-'.-.xe- >120:2, policy ( 293a) vb tr.
125:4a/), Ii25:ioap, *126:5*, ------- N^pAf n ^ h t *: m ed
126:8a/), Ii26:io*, Ii28:i2* i 34 :3 -
(see ap), *129:3ap, *130:11, piMe (294a) vb intr. 126:20,
131:22*, 1132:24-133:10/?, 126:22.
i 33:3*. *35-7 . i 35 :*5. as nn m 127: 17.
Ii35:i7*, *136:5*, 137:6* (see po)Me (2946) nn m f. 128:21,
i377 /0 . I37:iI> 137:12*, 131:21ap, 133: 14*,i 33:i 9>
!i38:3* i 39 :i3> Ii 39 :i 5> I 35: i 7 . 136:21, 139:5, 140:6,
140:19*, *141:19, 141:22*, 141:24.
*142:16, i 43 :iI*> I45 :3 *> Pmmao ( 296a 19) nn m f.
145:24*. MNT-pMMAO nn f 141:16.
---- x e- *124:23*, *125:1*, PAT*, see epA T-.
125:4ap, *125:10*, *125:17*, pooyqj ( 3066) vb intr.
*126:8ap, *126:14, *126:17, MNT-AT-pooyqj nn f 121: 17,
*126:21, *127:19*, *127:22, i 43 :i*-
*128:12* (see ap), *128:15*, pAape (3086) vb intr. 129: 15*.
*129:3*, *129:16*, *129:20*, as nn m 123: 14, 133:16*.
*132:5, *132:9*, *132:12,
*132:14*, *133:2, *136:11, (c a ), c a - ( 313a) nn m side.
137:3*. ^ 7 :6 * ( ? ) , 1 3 7 :1 5 . ca-n -b o a. 123:21- 220/).
138:2ap, *138:6ap, 138:6ap, n ttca -n -b o a 144: 1.
*138:7*, *138:11, *138:14, C A -N -T T IT N
138:20,138:22, *139:8, *139:20, e n c A - N - T T i T N 135:19.
140:1*, 140:9, 140:11, 140:14, eTTCA-N-TTITN N- 135:9.
140:17, 140:21*, 140:23, 141:2, NTTC A-N-TTITN 127:16*,
141:4, 141:6, 141:8, 141:12*, 129:11, I3i:il*, I 3 i : i 4 *,
141:14, 142:4, *142:5, 142:9*, _ *3 5 7 -
142:11, 142:17, 142:19*, MTTC A-N-TTT6 127: 15, 129:11*,
142:21*, 143:2*, 143:6*, i 3 I7 *. i 3 i:i. I3 I:I3 -
143:15. H4:2ap, 144:3, 144:5*, C A - N - ^ O y N 123:21- 220/?.
144:8, 144:12, 144:15*, 144:17. HTTC A-N-ÔyN 130:9.
144:22,144:23. 1457 *. 146:4*. See also n c a -.
146:7, 146:9, 146:10, 146:12, ( c a ), C A e ie (315a ioup) nn m.
146:13*, 146:17*. I3i:2.
c o (317a) nn.
P-, see eipe. f-co e p o - 122:21.
108 INDEXES
c & B e (3 1 9 a ) n n m f. 125:17. 126: 14, 126: 15*.

(c h b c ), C H q e (3 2 0 6 11) nn f. ------- e -, epo*: no dir ob
146:10 (?). 121:5, i 2 i ;6, 121:18*, 121:19
ccuBe (3 2 0 6 ) vb in tr. 126:20 a p , *3 I:I7 -
126:23*. coyT C U N t, see c o o y T N .
c o b t (3 2 3 a ) nn m. 130:7. c a r r n , coTnt (3 6 5 a ) vb tr
( c o b t c ) , C B To rrt (3 2 3 a ) vb tr. +129:14-15 a p .
------- e p o * +145:7*. as nn m 120:26,121:20.
------- NNA-2PN- +141:23*. c t c ju t (3 6 6 6 ) vb intr.
c c u k (3 2 5 a ) vb tr. 140:5. as nn m 120:20.
c m h (3 3 4 6 ) n n f. 136:7. c i o y (368 a ) nn m. 130:2-3 ap.
CMOy (3 3 5 a) vb intr. cooyN , xc o y N - , 2coytUN-,
------- e p o * 136:15*. 3c o y c u N * (369 b) vb tr.
as nn m 136:16. 121:1*, 2i2 5 :i4 , 3132:14-150^,
(cm in c), CMONTt (3 3 7 a ) vb tr. 3132:16, 133:21 (see 133:220/)),
+142:21. 133:22*, 134:4, 134:6, 134:14
c o n , pi ^ N H y , 2c n h o y (3 4 2 b ) (see 1 3 4 :1 4 - 1 5 ^ ), 2i34:i5,
nn m. 2i2 o :4 , 113 1:19, 132:10, '134:16 , I i3 4 :i8 , 139:5, 141:2,
i 35 :8- 3142:14, 2i 45 : i 5 , 3 i 45:20*>
ccdn c (3 4 3 a 18) n n f. 131:22. 146:5 (? ); no d ir obj 129:14-
c n a y (3 4 6 6 ) nn m f. 15 a p .
im m ediately after nn 136:18. ------- xe-: no d ir obj 144:24.
m t t c n a y 128:18,145:18 *. (c o o y T N ), CoyTCUNt (371 a) vb
See also c n o o y c . tr. +125:20.
c n h (o )y , see c o n . ccuoy^, COOY2+ (372 b ) vb tr.
c n o o y c (3 4 7 a 12) nn m f. ti3 :4 * .
MNT-CNOOyC (cf. MHT) ------- 6 B O A n ^ h t - 129:22a/).
142:25. CH qe (3 7 9 a 12) nn f sword.
c o n (3 4 9 6 ) nn m. 130:8. 146:10 (? cf. C H s e ) .
^ i - o y c o n 141:4*. c x z (3 8 3 b 22) nn m f. 139:11,
c e e n e (351 b 5) n n m f. 142:25.
K e - c e e n e 138:9. C iM (3 8 5 a ) nn f. 139:12,
c c u p fi (3 5 5 a ) vb tr. 147:21. 140:13,144:16,144:18*.
as nn m 141:19*. m n t - c ^ im c nn f 144:20,
c c u T e (3 6 2 a ) vb tr. 1 4 5 :2 ^ , 145:5 a p .
------- eboa 2 n - 121:22. c e - x n - , see u p c u x n .
( c t o i) , C T o e i (362 b ) nn m.
i 33:i2- 1% I*-, T o t, Imperat
ccu tm , ' C O T M 6 ' (3 6 3 b ) vb t r . 3 m a- (3 9 2 a ) vb tr. 121:3,
126:12 a p , '1 4 0 :3; no d i r obj ! i2 i: 4 , 127:8 (?), *140:17,
143:17; no dir obj 121:4. (for advb expression see c a
---- epo- 122:21. [i ])-
---- n-, na - Ii2i:8, 1131:18, N T n e 120:10*, 130:23.
*136:11, *136:13, 136:22, N -r n e mma" 138:12.
i 39; i *, *139:4- fne (423a 25up) nn f taste.
---- 2ICUT-, ia)cu' 138:18, I3 o:i9 -
2i 43 :i 3 * i 4 3 :i 9 *- THP" (424a). 121:3*, I2i:i8*,
c -t o n a - ... e-infin +132:17. 124:9, 127:15ap, 127:18*,
ma- before: 'f 3136:22; t-caus 129:7, 129:12ap, 130:3,
3137:12,3143:1*. 131:8ap, 131:11*, 131:16,
(tb b o), t b b h o y + (3996) vb tr. i 33 :i4 >i 36:iI>*36:i4 . i 36:i6
ti 3 2:9 - i37:i2, 138:5,138:9.
t a k o (405a) vb tr. med 125:14, THp-q as nn m: 141:23, 142:10,
i 3 4 : i 3 *- 144:11; ejTTHp-q 139:13 (?).
asnnm 143:14. (Tcope), tn-, toot ", see ntn-,
t a a o (408a) vb tr. 123:19. ATN-, ITN-.
TAMO, *TAMO" ( 4 13 6) vb tr. (tcabo), tcabo " (4346) vb tr.
123:6*, 127:3. 122:2, 143:2.
---- epo- *137:12. ----- e - 120:24.
(tcdm t), tc d m n t (4166 20) vb (thy ), T H o y (4396) nn m.
intr meet. I34 :9 -
---- epo" 122:5, I22:I5> T o o y (4406) nn m. 123:1-2ap.
122:18. TAÔ , *TAe- (455a) vb tr.
to jn (4176) interrog advb. 125:8, ------- e p A T " : 120:20,
128:14,*28:15,131:21. *128:21*, 129:21*, *133:10; foil,
cboa. t o j n 126:19,126:20. by n a " 144:9.
t n n o o y (4196) vb tr. (obbio), eBBiO" (4576) vb tr.
---- epo" 135:21* (see 134:24.
135:22ap). (TAXpo), TA-XpHOyTt (4626)
---- qjApo" 126:5* (?)> vb tr. +129:2-3ap.
135:21*. ----- -+129:4*.
m e (259 a sub ne, in part;
corrected by Layton in D. W. oy (4676 16 up) interrog pron.
Young [ed.], Studies Presented 127:21, 133:1*, 134:6, i39:i4>
to Hans Jakob Polotsky i 3 9 :I5> 141:20.
[Gloucester, MA: Pirtle & eTBe-oy 135:16*, 140:10,
Poison, 1981], pp. 262-63) nn 140:16,141:3*.
m. e R -o y 137:13, i 46:8, 146:9,
attrib: C A - N - T n e 127:15, 146:11.
I29 : iI *> I 3 I: 7 *, i 3 i:i0 > *3 i:i3 oyA, f *oyei (469a) nn m f
110 INDEXES
one. 127:1, 127:5-6ap (bis), 136:13 ap), 140:17, +146:8*,

133:23, 134:1*, 134:5, 134:8, +146:9*, +146:11; med 136:12
134:11,1142:7,145:18. (? ).
oya. BOA n ^ h t- 122:20. ------ 6 b o a n - dat +143:10.
oycu (4736) vb intr. ------ c b o a (for g b o a cboa)
w. Conjunctv 144:21*. n -: med 136:12 (see 136:13ap).
oyN-, Ioyf 3-, neg 2mn- (481 a 20, o y c u c q (4926) vb tr. med
1666 4 up) existential I 33 :IO *35 :23 I 37 : i 4 -
predicate. 2i22:2o, 2i23:2, o y cu T (494 a).
130:6ap, * iy :2 y ip , 2i32:8, N -o ycu T (attrib) 122:8, 124:3,
135:10, 140:20, I i42:7, 2i42:8, 124:6,136:18,143:7.
2i 4 4 : i 6 , 2i 4 4 : i 8 * . o y o e iq j (4996) nn m. 120:3,
oyn-6om mmo' ... e-infin 120:11,122:3,122:6.
2i29:6ap, *129:6ap, 1132:1 ap, N o yo eiq p nim 120:10.
I37:I7 - n p o c -o y o e iq p 143:17*,
See also oyNTe-. 143:21.
oyoeiN (480a) nn m. 121:11, o y c u q j, Ioycoqpe, 2oycuai-
125:21*, 125:23, 127:2-3 ap (500 a) vb tr. 2i32:6ap.
(bis), 127:4*, 127:6, 131:4, 2i 37 : i 3 , 138:3* ( ?)-
131:90^, 132:8*, 133:24, ------- e-infin: no dir obj
136:10, 138:18*, 139:19, 132:6*, I i4 i: i3 , i 43 :I2*-
146:11*. as nn m *146:20*.
(oyoN-), see oyN-. oycucpB (502 6) vb tr. no dir obj
oyoN (482 a) indefinite pron. 132:20.
oyoN nim 124:16*, 132:15*. o y c u o jT (504a) vb intr.
oycuN (4826) vb intr. 131:18ap.
----- e - 120:24. (o y cu e ), o y A 2 * (5056) vbtr.
(oyNTe-), oyNTA.**, *oyNT*, ----- refl, foil, by nco)'
neg (mnt-), 2mnt" (481a 20, 129:6*, 137:17,141:11.
1676 5) suffix vb tr.
w. mmAy between vb and n- cd bu j (5186) vb tr.
(dir obj) 143:16*. as nn m 124:19.
foil, immediately by nominal ( cu m k ), comic- (523a) vb tr.
dir obj: *129:13ap, 2i2<):i$ap, 122:19.
*129:1314ap\ foil, by mmAy cun (524a) nn m. 132:23*,
e-infin 131:24. 133:2-
oyN oy (4846) nn f. cuN^, ON2+ (525a) vb intr.
NTeyNoy c t - mmay 135:12. t i2 i:i2 , +123:13, +138:1, +138:4,
oycuN^, oyoN^t (486a) vb tr. +I39:23> 139:23,+140:8,+140:9.
----- c b o a : 136:12 (see 140:11,147:19.
W ORDS OF EG Y PTIA N ORIG IN 111
as nnm 121:15,132:3a/?, 132:7, 144:7 .

139:4,141:15- o jm m o , f epM M eu (565 6) nn m f.
con (526a) vb tr. 130:7ap. 134:19. 134:19 (see ap),
(cuTn), for derived nn see 134:22*.
emeu. cyme, 'o jn t ' (569a) vb tr.
cuê, Icu2e, 2* z e , A.eet (5366 1135:17; no dir obj 126:7,
3 up) vb intr. 126:9* (seeap), 129:15,147:17.
----- epa.T*, epeT- refl ----- e-, epo* 131:20*, 140:1.
2i2o:5, 120:6, 127:2-3 ap, ----- n ca .-, nccd *: no dir obj
127:5, 128:13*, 129:20-21 ap, 125:16*, 128:3*, I 3I:23>
130:10, +131:1, i3 3 :23*> 137:18,137:20,141:15.
+I35 :I 3 *> +i3 6:i 7 > I i 42 :i 9 ------- xe- 131:19* (see 131:19
i 43 :9 - & 20ap).
cyorr*, see qpcun.
qj- (541a) vbal auxiliary. 127:2, qjoorrt, see cycune.
127:5-6ap, 131:23, 132:11, (ojcutt), qjon* (5746) vb tr.
132:130/? (bis), 133:24, 135:9, ----- e p o - 121:7,125:15*.
139:2,141:10,142:18,145:22. qjcune, cyoont (5776) vb intr.
ey*-, Â-po* (5416) prep. 120:3, I2o;9*> 120:18, 121:24,
126:5* ( ?)> i3 5 :22*> 122:2, 122:7, +123:8-90/?,
Ii42:i8a/>, 145:19 (see op). 124:15, 125:8, +127:10*,
XN-...UJA.- 130:13, 130:14, 127:17*, 127:21, +127:21-22ap
130:21*, 130:22*. (bis), +128:40/?, +128:15, 128:19
qpA-NieNe^ 122:1. (bis), +129:17, 129:19, 130:1,
ajA-eNe^ 127:10, 137:10, +I3 o:5> +13 I : I 3aP> I33 :iI
144:23, 147:19* (see +I33 :i 7, i 34 :2, 134:10, 134:13,
147:20ap). +136:14*, +137:10, +137:230/?,
Nqjai-eNe^ 120:8, 137:15, +138:5*, +138:12, +139:17,
146:13. +142:7,142:8, +143:20*.
upe (5446) vb intr. ----- N-, MMO' 128:17 (?),
----- e x N -133:6. 137:8,+141:14, 143:22.
qjiic (556a 8) nn m. 124:4,135:6, foil. by complementary
^ i o , i 3 5 :20 I 4 5 :I2*- Circumst 132:18, 141:22,
ojaha (559a) vb intr. 144:14, 145:6*.
I 44 :i 5 >i 44:i6, 144:18. For derived conjunction see
qjexeeT (5606) nn f. eqjeune.
attrib: ma N-cyeAeeT 138:20. qjTTHpe (581a) nn f. 140:24*.
(oja<>om), ujatam (563a) nn m p-qpnHpe (cf. eipe) n- 136:2.
f. qjA.po-, see oja.-.
attrib: babiac n-uiatam qpHpe (5840) nn m. 121:7,
112 INDEXES
124:20, 131:20, 133:14, 134:14- Ze (638 b) nn f.
15aP> i 35 :i6 , i 3 6:2I> *43 :i9 taK Te e e 136:9.
I45 :i7 *- Acp Nê: w. indefinite art
qpopn (587a 11) nn m f. 124:24* (see 124:230/*), 144:6*.
qpopn n- (attrib) 122:4,136:1. NAqp Nê 124:24* (see
fiupopn 134:5- 124:230^), 132:22*, 134:2*.
JCN-N ttjopn 137:6. 134:10, 134:15, 134:20*,
qjcucDT (593 a 21 up) nn m. 134:22*, 138:21*, 139:22*,
I39 :I5 i 39 :i8- i 39 :23 , 14 I:7 >i 44:i5-
cyTA. (5936 1 up) vb intr. 130:21, NTeeiê 121:4,142:21.
I35 :I9 *- Frfê 122:22,129:19,145:7.
(6126) vb intr. 126:13, riee foil, by Relative 129:8,
126:13 ap, 126:15, 144:2. I 3 5 : i 4^ i 4 i : i 4 *-
------- e T B e - 142:10. Nee n-: 136:7; See n-ni-
------ B O \ N - 133:16. 129:18,130:7.
------- N^pa/f N ^H T" 137:19. KATA-ee foil, by Relative
as nn m 120:19, 122:23, i 23: i 8> 121:5,121:19.
126:4, I 33:9, i 36 : i i 36:20> p-ee (cf. eipe) n- 136:23.
139:12,140:2*, 143:6,145:10. 6 f5-e e (cf. 6me) foil, by
qôoxn, xc e j c n - (6166) vb tr. Relative 129:10* (see 129:9-
no dir obj 125:3,126:23. 10ap).
------- |T N - I i 4 4 : i o . Z, 1SZH (6406) nn f forepart."
2A-0H, 2^-Te2H
qi, xq i-, 2q iT - (620a) vb tr. 127:20, Ii36:i2.
------- N M M i' 136:18. See also ^ht-.
-------- 6BO A N - 2l2j:j*, Zi-, 12 ic d t -(t h o y t n ), 22 ia)0)'
131:8 (see 131:9ap), 138:16, (6436 i9up) prep. Ii38:i8,
146:21. 2i 43 :i3 >Ii 43:20*-
------ e ^ p ^ T 1135:4. joining nns 140:24.
------- e^PA'f z \- : no dir obj |- na'( 139:8.
*33 :3. *33:4 . x33:7 - 21-oycon 141:4*.
q o rr e , Iq o T " (624a) vb tr. ie (6456 2up) conjunction.
-------- 6 B O A 141:1a/?, 1 144:22*. 142:14,142:15.
2iH (646a) nn f. 120:24, 130:2*,
Z*.- (632 a) prep. 139:6,142:5,145:15*, i45:2*
eep a.! z - 133 :3 >*33 :4 i 33 :7 - 2ICUCU-, see i-.
^ A -e H , 2 A _ T e 2 H e M n iT e - (2o), epN-, see NA.2PN-.
127:20,136:12. 2cu (651a) vb intr.
(2*.e), f (635a 25UP) nn m ----- e - 139:8ap (bis).
f. 127:18,142:10.. Z(ua>' (651 b). 139:7,145:24*.
Ze (637a) vb intr. 133:9. cdb, pi ^BHoye (653a) nnm.
WORDS OF EGYPTIAN ORIGIN 113
*121:21, 122:13, *125:5, *126:22, 2 i 3 i:x5 , 133:18*, 2 i 34 :3 ,
1129:7, 129:17, *131:11, 2134:8,2137:19.
131:16*, 132:17, 133:22 ap, fo rm s ad vb e xp re ssio n s an d
,34:, 7 , 136:2*, >138:8*, co m p o u n d p re p w. n a ^ tc,
*141:10, I 4 i : i 3 , I 4 i : 2 1 , I 4 2 : i l , Tne, oy.
142:20, 1 4 3 :3 , 1 4 3 :5 , I 4 3 :2 4 , 2 o y N (6856) n n m .
*144:20, *i45:i-2<zp, *145:4*. a ttrib : C A -N -^ o y N 123:21-
*146:2, 146:4ap, *146:14*, 22 ap, 130:9 (fo r advb
*146:15*, *146:17*, *146:19*. e xp re ssio n see c i [ i 0]).
H b c (658a) nn m. 125:18. e ^ o y N 121:21.
2BCO) (660a 23) nn f. 136:22*, eôyN e- 132:3* (see ap),
138:22, 139:2, 139:4*, i4 3 : i 3> ^ 3 8 : 19 -
i 43: i 7 > I 43 :2- H n ^ o y N n - 130:5 ap.
2BHoye, see ^cdb. 2 cutt, ^ H n t (695a) vb tr.
2Hice (664a 3) nn m f. ------ e p o - +134:17.
H-2HK6 (attrib) 132:5. as n n m : N o y ^ c u n 146:4 ap.
(Z\o6), O A e 6 t (673 a) vb intr. 2 P*.T (698a, 70 0 a) n n m .
1130:19. e z p x i 1 3 5 :4 , 135:22-
2N-, *M-, 2n H t - (683a) prep. e e p A Y e - 123:1, 133:21, 135:9,
120:5, 120:7, 120:19*, 121:20, 136:9.
121:21, 2i23:2, 124:16, 2i25:2, e ^ p ^ f e -x c u - 139:20*.
2125:20*, *127:2-30^, *127:5, e z p x i z - 133:3 , 133:4,133:7-
*127:16, 128:5, *128:22, 130:1, N^PA-'f 2 N* N ^ H T - 122:23*,
*131:9, 2131:12, *132:1, 128:19*, I 3 i ; i5* 133:17*,
*132:4ap, 132:16 ap, 132:19, i 34 :3 I34 :8, 137:19-
I 32:24 > i 33 :2*> 2 i 33 :i2 > 2 i c e (7 1 0 6 ) vb tr.
*133:18 (?), *133:24*, 136:19, as n n m 120:5,121:9 ap, 142:10.
137:14*, i 37 :23 > 2i 3 8 : i 2 a t (7 1 3 6 1) n n m s ilv e r.
i 38;i 7 , 2i 39 :6 , I i 39 : i 7 > 141:18.
2j 43:9*> 144:16, *144:18, H T (71 4 a ) n n m h e a rt. 124:3,
145:2ap, 145:12, i4 5 : i 9> 124:6, 125:22, 129:8, 129:9,
2i 4 6 : i 3 - 132:1*, 133:18,141:21 (see ap).
6BOA. N- I2 i:8 , 121:23, h t - (6406 23) (n n as) pre p .
2I22:20, 127:7, 2I29:22, 120:13*, 126:1*.
2i3o:i2, 131:8, *132:20/?, w . su ffix co n tin u e d by n -
! 33:6, 2i3 3 :i2 * , *133:16, 122:18.
*133:18 (?), 135:18, 140:21, 2 ICO T-, see i--
*143:14, *144:13, 146:22; as nn H H T e (856 19) d e ictic p a rticle .
133:15, 1i 39 :i6 > 140:12, e i c - H H T e 126:18*, 128:4 ap,
140:13,144:7,144:8. 128:10 (?), 129:16*, 145:10.
2I22:23*, 2i2 8 :i9 * , e ic -^ H H T e e ic - 138:11,
114 INDEXES
139:18*. same, elliptical 121:5*, 144:19.
Z o t s (720 b) nn f fear. 120:15, w. vbs of perception: see eiMe,
120:19*, i22:*6, 124:1, 135:11, n a y , co o yN , cA7rta>.
140:24. amplifies objs after eiMe (e-),
p-ÔTe (cf. eipe): 122:5; MoyTe (e-, epo-).
by ^ h t - 120:13*, 122:17*. introducing explicative clause
2cutb, *OTBe- (723 b) vb tr. 120:22, 124:18 (?), 125:14,
*142:3*; no dir obj 142:2. 128:7 (?), 131:5, 133:10,
2ITM-, see 21TN-. i 3 5 :i, 136:14.
âtn - (4286 n ) prep. 142:7. 136:16, i 39:5> 143 :4 - 5^ (bis),
ITN-, ÎTH -, 2ITOOT- (4286 144 :20,144 :21,145:18 *.
3 UP) PreP- r 3 3 :i 9 > 144: 10. 6BOA x e - 134:4*.
bo a îtn-: 2i36:i5*, introducing clause of purpose
*145:11; w. suffix continued by w. I l l Fut neg 135:23, 147:21
n - 2i36:20. (?)
^ o t ^ t (728 a) vb tr. Xi, *-Xi-, 2XIT* (747b) vb tr
----- ncco -: no dir obj 128:4. receive. 120:19, 2i29:i,
( 2 HY), 2 hoY ( 7 29 a) nn m- I 3 2:23 > 113 4 7 , 1134:24^.
6n-hc>y (cf. 6 in s) 140:16. 2i36;3, 138:24 (see ap),
^ o o y (730a) nn m. 2i 4 2:i 3 > i 4 7 :i 5 *
n e ^ o o y n e ^ o o y 1 3 9 :9 . ----- epo - 2i33:2o.
ôyo, *2oye- (7 3 5 a) nn m. ----- 6BOA NHT- *133:12*.
140:18. ------ e^pA 'f e- *123:1*,
eô ye- *131:5ap. i 3 6:9 -
R e o y o 145: 14- X i (751 b 9up), see xioop.
Nôyo e - 130:2,131:5ap. xco, *xoo-, Imperat 2xxi'
ôyeiT (738a) nn m f. (754 a) vb tr. *139:12; no dir obj
N-2 Y e *T (attrib) 133:10. 144:11.
Z * Z (7416). 130:8,144:10. ----- epo - *142:12, *143:40^.
Z * Z N - 121:8 (? ), 130:1 (?). ----- N-, NA- *136:3, *I43:7*.
îxn -, *2i-XH- (7 5 8 6 10) prep. 144:13*.
*122:24,128:1, *129:18. xco hm o - c , x o o -c , foil, by:
e p o -...x e - 2i27:i9*,
x e - (7466 3) conjunction. 125:9 2i28:i3*, *132:21*, *139:21,
(context unclear), *140:15, *142:4.
introduces discourse after N A - . . . x e - 120:9, 128:2*,
neoce-, u^me, XNoy. 129:12, *136:6, 137:22*)
same, w. discourse anticipated 140:4, *142:22*, 143:21*,
by neutral pron, after xo>. 144:17*, 145:23*, x47:i4*
(see 147:14-150/?), 147:20* -------- BO A ... N - 131:9.

(see 147:21a/?). xpo, xpAeiTt (7830) vb intr.
xe- 1122:6, 132:20*, tl 42:3 -
132:24-133:10/), *132:24- ----- e - 122:23,129:10.
133:1 ap, 136:21*, *138:2ap, x o e i c (7876) nn m. 125:4,
147:14* (see 147:14-150/)). 125:10, 126:6*, 126:8*,
jccu*, -XN-, see 6JCN-, 2IXN-. 126:11*, 126:14*, 126:18,
(.XCDCDBe), JCCUB6, *JCOOB(e)" 126:21, 127:20*, 127:22,
(759b) vb tr. 120:25, 139:2, 128:12*, 128:16, 129:3, 129:20,
*139:7, *i4 5 :22 (see aP)> 131:18, 131:22*, 132:6, 132:10,
*145:24*. I32:i3 > I32:i5> I32:2I> I32:23 >
Jtcuic (761 a) vb tr. 136:11, 137:7*, 138:4*, 138:8*,
------- c b o a : med 141:21. 138:14, 138:22, 139:21, 140:1*,
as nn m 135:1. 140:11, 140:15, 140:17, 140:20,
jcckaac (764a) conjunction. 140:22, 140:24, 141:5, 141:8,
123:15 (context unclear), 141:14*, 141:22, 142:4, 142:9,
w. I I Fut affirm 120:4, 121:24, 142:11, 142:17*, 142:22, 143:3,
137:19*, 141:20*. I43 :7 *> r43 :i 5> I44 :3>
w. I l l Fut neg 130:12*, 144:15, i 44 =23 , i 45 :8* 146:1*,
i3o:2*, 132:4,133:9. 146:4*, 146:9,146:12, 146:18.
jccum (770 b 5) nn m p -x o e ic (cf. e ip e ) exoy-
generation. i 3 8:i3 i 3 8:i5-
jcn- nxcum cyA-xcuM 130:13*, X ic e , (788b) vb tr.
o cocet
130:21-22*. +i35 :5; med i28:23>i 3o:2-
JCN- (772a) conjunction. 137:14. as nn m 124:5,128:22,135:9.
U in -), x n - (7726) prep. JUT", see xi.
130:13, 130:14, x x z x z (7986) vb tr.
130:21*, 130:22*. as nn m 127:17-18ap.
XN-Nqjopn 137:5.
(jcnoy), acNO-Y" (7746) vb tr. 6e-, see ice.
128:23*. 6e (802 a) conjunction. 121:4,
----- x e - 142:24. 122:17, 123:15, 127:3, 136:4*,
Xno (778 b) vb tr. no dir obj i 3 8:i3 , ^S:10-
i 4 4 :2i*> i 4 5 ;i 3 *. 6oa (8066 5) nn m. 127:7,
as nnm 144:20*. 141:18ap.
Xioop (826 17, 751 b 9up) nn m. 6 c d a t t , 6 o A n + (812a) vb tr.
attrib: MA-N-xioop 124:1. ----- c b o a : +146:90/); no dir
(xcocupe), x o o p e - (782a) vb obj 126:8, 126:10, 126:17,
tr. 142:23*.
116 INDEXES
6 m-, see 6me. *140:16, 141:24; no dir obj

6 om (8156) nn f. 121:9, *22:4, 129:15.
122:16ap (bis), 124:9, 6N-ee foil, by Relative
124:11ap, 127:14, 128:6, 1129:9-1 oap.
128:17ap, 129:10, 129:13, 6 m-6 om : 2i3i:4; foil, by epo
i3 5 :* 8 . 2i45 :i3*-
6epa>B (828a) nn m. 122:8.
OYN-, MN-60 M MHO- ... e-
6pa>2 (829 b) vb intr. 130:13.
infin 129:6ap (bis), 132:1ap, ------ b o a 140:21.
137:17. as nn m 138:6*.
6 m-6 om (cf. 6iNe): 131:4; foil, 6<d o jt (837a) vb intr. 130:10.
by epo- 145:14*. ----- N C i-122:22.
(6 om 6 m), 6 m6<um - (8186) vb ------ c b o a ^ H T - 126:1*.
tr. 121:13. 6 ix (8396) nn f. 132:24, 133:2*,
6me, *6?!-, 26 m- (820a) vb tr. ! 35:3aP-
II. WORDS OF GREEK DERIVATION
ayados. 136:9. air6\av<ris. 141:16-17 ap.

M NT-ArAeoc nn f 132:19*, (apv0fj.ai), p-A.pNA.
142:6. ------- mmo- 129:13* (see
ayaTTT). 142:6. 129 :13 -14 0 ^ ).
ayyeXoi. 145:16*. apxv. 123:2, 142:5.
aye'av. 142:1. apyatv. 120:21, 122:14, 138:12,
(ayoivi(ofiat), Imperat Api- 142:8 ,14 3:15, 14 5 '-21-
ArcuNiZe, Iepi-ArcuNi2 e. (aTip.ooi), p-ATtMoy. 143:4-5 ap.
137:16*, *137:16ap.
------ e-infin 146:21*. ftaTTTMTfxa. 134:7.
aidav. 131:6. papos. 139:7,145:23-
a\r}6S>s. 157:22,138:2*.
aXXa. 120:17, 120:23, 122:7, yap. 120:6, 124:1, 124:4, 125:16,
122:22, 123:10, 124:2, 132:8*, 129:8, 133:8, 133:13, 134:6,
*33:9, I39:4 , 142:3, i 37;21, I 39 : i
139:2*, i 40;i0,
143:21, 144:21, i45:i4, 140:20, 141:16, 141:17, 142:7*,
145:17*, 145:22*. 143:24,145:8,146:5*, i 47:i 4-
(afi-qv), A.mhn. 122:1. k a i r* p 139:6.
avairava-is. 120:6, 120:7, 141:16-
17ap. Se. 120:8, 123:11, 128:2, 128:23,
W ORDS OF G REEK DERIVATION 117
129:12a p , 130:23, 131:17*,

------- N- 144:19, 145:1-2a p .
137:9, 140:4, 143:19*, 146:21, (ic a W x ), K A T e x e .
147:10 (?), 147:200/7. ----- mmo" . . . 2 n- 132:4*
hia(3a<ris. 120:25. (see a p ).
h a k o y o s . 120:1,14 7:23*. (KoAAaa>), koaaa ..
iU a io s. 125:17. ------- 141:8.
m m o -... e -
b ioiK ijT ijs. 143:16. (Koo-fxiKos), -ov. 143:10.
Kotrfios. 129:21, 132:2a p , 132:5,
ei/xijn. 133:11, 134:23, 141:17, 144:10,
ei m hti e - 1 3 1 :2 3 -2 4 a p . 146:16.
ei m hti n t o o t - 140:4. kS}\ o v . 121:23*.
(eXmC) e e x n i Z e .
; * 6 -1 3 5 :3 . Aoyio-fios. 123:7,123:8*.
tov<ria. 145:16*. Aoyos. 121:14, i29:23*, 130:9a p ,
m t . 122:20. *33:5>I35:i3>I35:2I#-
(eiri), i 8 <rov.
(imicaXcco), p -e n iK A A e i. fiadrjT'qs. 120:2, 126:6*, 136:1*,
145:60/7. 136:6, 136:10, 137:2, 139:11,
(pyaTij$. 139:9. 139:13,141:20*, 142:24*.
o<rov. 125:19, 125:22, HaKaptos. 141:24*, 143:22*.
132:11*. (jjieravodoi), M 6TA N O i, p-
M TA.N oei. 129:14*, 129:13-
ij, A. 122:21, 126:7*, *126:13 a p , 14a p .
>126:20, 135:9, 136:15, fitTavoia. 121:15*.
140:17, 140:21 (b ut see a/?), 136:6,145:8,145:9*.
Il44:7, Ii45:i3 - fJLrfVVTljs. 140:18.
120:3. fX1JTT0T.
w. Conjunctv 123:17*.
Kai. see ci /u.ifri.
KAI TAP 139:6. ('jjL o v a \ 6 i ), m onoxoc. 120:26,
KOKia. 1 2 8 :8 ,132 :8 ,134 :18 ,13 6 :5 , 121:18.
^139:9,142:8. fi0 V 0 y V i]$ .
nap. 132:13 a p (b is), 133:18, M O N O reN H C n- (attrib)
145:20. 121:6*.
Kapiros. 130:18. m onoxoc, see fio va\os.
Kara. fxvo-Tijptov. 128:6*, 143:8*.
K A TA -ee foil, by R e la tiv e
121:5,121:19. vovs. 123:13a/), 125:19, 126:23,
(KaraXvto) , KA.TA.Aye, Im p e ra t 128:9, 128:14*, 128:18a p ,
epi-KATA.Aye. 128:20,144:13.
118 INDEXES
(ifarXov), 2 0 t t a o n . 121: 10. ( <rv(vyo$), c y N Z y r o c . 125:15*,
(iopatris), ôpacic. I37:iI> (<n>fuf>a>va>), cyM<)>U)Ni, *p.
I 3 7 : I 4 I 3 7 : i 4 *- cyH<t>(DNi.
opyij. 120:15, 12o:i6, 146:21*. ------- NMM A " 1137:21*
(&'<ros), -ov, see c<f>* &rov. 137:21a/?.
(o ra v ), ^ o t a n . c y N Z y r o c , see <rvt>yos.
w . C o n d : 122:2, 1 25:7, 126:11*, o-w/bia. 125:19*, 125:21, 126:19,
*3 3 : 5 *. x3 7 :9 *4 <>:5 x4 o: 7 > I 3 3 : I 9*> 134:12.
14 3 :2 3 , 144:14*, 146:1; a n d a-wT'qp, I C H p. 120:1, *120:2,
fo il, b y t o t e 1 3 8 :1 6 ,1 4 1 :9 . * 1 2 5 :1 ,1 2 5 :1 8 , 147:23-
o v b e . 12 5:14 a p , 14 0 :3 * , 142:20/7,
1 4 2 :2 ,1 4 5 :1 6 * . (reXctos), T e A io c .
h n t - t c a i o c nn f 133:22.
Ttakiv. 121:18,133:20,137:15. ro iro s. i2y.i-2ap, 123:8-90/),
(itapayw), n x p A re . I 3 I:2 4 > i 35 :5 i 35 ;6 . 140:20,
----- m ho" 124:3*. 142:16,14 5:2 ap, 146:7*.
(napaXanfSavia), nA pA A A M - TOT. 127:13, 128 : 22 *, 130:14*,
BAN6. 134:24. I 35 : I 5 > i 3 6:i* . 136:5.
------- MHO' 125:12* , 136 :24 *, 136 :1 0 ,1 3 7:2 ,1 3 7:1 1 .
in tro d u cin g apodosis after
I 45 :9 *-
TTTjyTJ. 130:15*, 130:16*. 2 0 T A N 138:17,141:11.
(jrto rev co ), n i C T e y e . rpo<f>ij. 139:10.
------- e - 121:2*. T v p a v v o s . 123:3*.
T tX ijp w u a . 131:10a p , 139:14,
<f>0ovos. 138:17,146:22*.
i 39: i 6 - _____
(<j>opc<a), <J)opi, *p-<|)opei.
(JTVVfJ.a), IT N i. 1 2 5 :9 , 127:1,
------- n -, hho -: 132:12,
I2 8 :i* , 12 8 :7 , 12 8 :1 7 ,
*134:12; foil, b y 6 b o a to n
128:18a/), 136:18, 146:8*,
126:19.
147:22*.
7roAe/xos. 142:1a/). (Xpcta), x p iA . 134:7.
irovqpos, 1-ov. i 31'-5&P> p -x p iA (cf. e ip e ) N-infin
1*37:5aP- 136:4.
Trpos.
n p o c -o y o e iq ; 1 4 3 :1 7 * , y /fv x v , p i ^ y x o o y e . *121:23,
143.21. *123:16, 124:14, *125:6,
TTpo<r<f>opd. 121:20*. 128:13 ap, 128:21*, 136:18,
TtSiS. 134:13. *147:22.
< r a p f 1 3 2 :1 2 ,1 4 3 :1 5 * . ( m ) , ^ o jc . 120:17.
a T p ca> na. 1 31:10 a p . w. C ircu m st 135:13,136:17-
PROPER NAMES 119
as prep 139:12, i43:i9*- ôttaon, see tiirAov.
ôpACic, see tipaais.
2*mhn, see anyv. 20TA.N, see 8rav.
êxniZe, see c\iri(a). 2coc, see a>s.
III. PROPER NAMES
(Iou&as), Toy-aac. 125:4, i 3 5 :8> 139:20*, 141:3, 141:6,

127:19, 128:12ap, 129:16, 14 2:9 ,143:11,144 :17,145:3* -
131:16*, 132:19*, 134:24*, (Mapia/m), MApiÂM, (Mapia/x-
i 35:4, 1357 , i 38:2*, i 38:6*, ft7|), MApiAMMH. 126:17 *,
138:11, 138:20, 140:9, 142:4*, 1i 3 i:i 9 *, 134:25* (?), Ii 34:25-
143:11, 144:12, 145:3*, x46 :7 , 135:1 ap, I i 3 7 :3>
146:10*, 146:13*. 140:14, 140:19, 140:23*,
MaMaios. 124:23*, 126:11*, 141:12, 142:20, 143:6*,
128:12ap, 128:23, 132:5*, 144:5*, 144:22,146:1*.
132:10*, 132:12*, 134:25,
IV. GRAMMATICAL FORMS
A. BIPARTITE SENTENCE 128:4a/?, 128:22ap, 130:23,

133:6 , *i33:8. 1133-22*,
f - , neg N't*-. . . a n 120:8, 122:1, *133:24, I34 :3 *134:4, 2i 34:6 ,
126:3, i2 6 :5 (? ), 126:18 ap, 134:10, 134:13* I34:i 5>
i2 7 :3(?) I 2 B:2, 129:12, 134:21, 139:5*. *i39 :iIA
129:17 ap, 132:6, 13 2 :1 3 ap, 144:11,144:12, i47:i9(?).
f 3 3 : i 3 137:22a/?, 138:2, 140:4, neg n c - . . . a n 136:4.
H i : i 3, 143:21, 144:2 (b is ), T N -, neg T N - . . . A N I4 I:3 >
145:22,147:14, 147:20. i 43 :i1-
neg N IC -... AN, K .-...A N T6TN-, in Fut T6TNA- 127:8,
132:10a/?, 1 3 2 :1 1 (? ). 138:18, 139:17, 141: . *143 :4 .
T e - 146:4. 143:5* (see 143:4-5 & 5aP)>
q-, neg R q - . . . a n , 2q - . . . A N 143:22, i45:i9*-
120:7, i2i:i2(?), 122:19, ce-, neg ce-. . . AN 124:10,
2127:2* (see 127:2-3 ap), 127:13, 129:17, 131:12 ap,
127:5-6ap, 2127:5-60/?, i 3 4 :i 7 , I 3 7 :8, 139:22, 139:23.
120 INDEXES
140:6, 140:9, 140:10, 140:11, 6T6TN-, in Fut *T6TNJl-

142:21, 144:21, 144:22, I 2 i : 3 ( ? ) , I 2 3 : 4 * ( ? ) , i24:2i* (?),
144:24*, 145:4*, 145:6a/), 125:23,128:3 (see ap), 128:3aP,
145:8, 145:9*, x4 5 :i3 (bis). *129:10, 131:20, i37:2o(?),
145:22*. 138:10* (see ap), 142:18.
eToy-, *eTey-, neg 2eT6Nce-
Preterite . . . AN *120:25, i2 9;8(?),
Neq- ... n e 133:8. 134:24, 2i 4 i : i , 141:14,
Ney- 136:23(?). I 43:I 3-
6T- (subject = definite
Circumst Preterite antecedent), eT-ei > 'et*,
eNeq- 133:8. neg 2e T - ... an 120:6, 122:18,
122:19, 122:24, 123:13, 125:2,
Circumst 125:15, 125:20*, 126:7,
eei-, neg e e i- ... an 126:19*, 126:7ap, 126:9,126:9a/), 126:13
126:20*, *132:13ap. (see ap), 126:14, 126:15 (M>
K- 121:8ap, 121:21 ap(?), 126:16, 126:16*, 127:15,
132:11*. 127:15*, 127:16, 127:21-22ap
eq- 122:20, 122:21, i23:8(?), (bis), 129:2, i29:4(?), 129:10,
128:1, i3o:6*(?), 131:4, 129:11, 129:14, 129:18, 130:2-
132:18*, 132:20, 132:24- 3ap, 130:4, 130:8*, *131:5,
133:1a/?, 135:5, 135:13, 136:21, 131:6, 131:6ap, 131:7, 131:10,
140:20,140:21,142:3, 145:13. 131:11*, 131:12ap, 131:13,
e c - 130:19,137:14. I3I : I 3aP> i 3 i:i 4 > 13i:23#>
N- 145:7. 132:7, I32:9, I32:22> !33:3>
6T6TN- 121:3, 122:7a/), 122:17, I33 :4 , ! 33:7. 2i33:i3>
i 23:4*(?)> i24:2i*(?), 137:20, 133:16, 2i33:2 i* (see
141:22*. 133:22a/)), 134:9, 2i34:i4*,
ey-, neg ey - an 134:23, 135:7, 135:8, 135:12,
121:21 ap(?), 131:12 ap(?), i 3 6 :i 3 > i 3 6 :i 5 > ^ T :10 M >
13 6 :17, 136:18, 142:25, 1 4 3 :1 7 , 138:1, 138:4, 138:7, 138:9*,
143:18. i 3 8 : i 3 > i 3 8 :i 5 > i 3 8:23 i 38:24>
i 39 : i *> 139:2*, 139:3, I 39:22>
Relative 139:23, i 4: 6, 140:7, M0*
e'f'-, neg e T e N 'f-... an 133:1, (bis), 140:9, 2141:2*, 141:15.
*140:22,143:7. 142:20ap, 142:23 (bis), 143:20,
eTK- i 4 6 : i 5 (?). 144:24, 145:9, 146:3*, 146:14,
eTq-, *eTeq-, neg 2eTer 5q- i4 6 :i5 (? ), 146:16*, 2146:16*
.^.. an *134:12, 2i3 4 :i9 ,139:6. (see 146:17a/)).
TC- 132:17. T- (before definite nn)
6TN- 141:20, 142:16*. 139:17*.
GRAMMATICAL FORMS 121
II 136:20, 138:2a/?,139:19,
eei* 126:18ap. *142:2*, 142:3,144:10.
eic-121:21 ap. ac- 120:20, 135:18, 135:19,
epe-140:17. i 39 :i2 -
eq- i23:8(?), 127:17*, 128:15, A T 6 T N - 120:17, 142:12, 142:13,
i3o:6*(?), 132:21-22 ap, 142:14.
134:22, 137:200/?, 137:23 ap, A y , neg *m tto y - 120:19, I2 5: I 4,
138:4c?), 142:20ap, 144:17, 129:19,130:7 (see ap), 131:8ap,
146:8,146:11. I 3 i : 9. ! 3 6:4 ,
e c - 128:13*, 146:9*. 139:4, *142:2,142:24.
6 N-, in Fut *n a - *120:4, a - (before nn), neg f in e - 120:3,
143:10*, *144:14, I i 4 5 :^- *120:22, 128:18, 129:23 ap,
6 T6TN-, in Fut *eTTNA-, neg I 3 i : i 9 *, I 32 :i 9 *, *3 2:23 ,
in Fut 2eT eT N A -... an I 35 :4 > i 35 :i6 , ^ S 120, I 3 ^: i *,
i 23:4*(?)> 124:21*1?), *129:9- 136:10,136:23.
10ap, *131:21, 133:17, 137:13,
2i 4 3 :i 9 - C ircu m st
e y -121:21ap, 121:24, *25:8ap(?), e A q - i 4 7 : i 7 (?).
131:12ap(?), 131:15, 136:9, e A C - 139:12.
137:20,138:21. A T 6 T N - 122:23.
epe- (before definite nn) 136:14, CAY" I2 i:i* .
136:16,141:21.
Relative
B. TRIPARTITE SENTENCE N T A e i- 142:11,143:4.
N TA K- 121:6, 121:19.
i. Sentence Conjugations NTAq-, *TAq- I2 9 :i(? ), 135:14,
136:2*, 137:3c?), I 4 i:2 4 ,
a. Perfect i47:i7a/?(?), *147:170/?.
Aei-, neg *mtti- 120:23, 120:24, 6 T A T 6 T N - 145:20.
126:2, 126:18a/), *136:6, NTAY", *-N T A Y _, 2TA Y *
*140:3*, 140:16,142:22. 121:1*, i2y.igap(?), 2i2y.it)ap,
ak- 121:7, 121:8ap, 135:16, * i 3 6 :2 4 .
140:1ap, 142:10. -6N TA 2* (subject = definite
iq-, neg *flneq- 122:7, 128:19, antecedent), * e T A -, 2e p -
128:23, 129:21, 130:1, 130:2, *132:16, 2i3 3 :io , 146:18*.
130:10, 130:14*, 131:17 (bis), neg e T e M n e - (before nn) 140:2.
131:18, 132:16, 132:18,
132:23*, 132:24-133:10/7, II
! 3 3 :n , *3 3 :i2 134:13, *34:21, N TA K-, *NTOIC- 144:12*,
134:24, 135:5, I 3 5 :^ I 3 5 :i2 , *144:12 ap.
! 3 5 :i 4 , I 3 5 :2I> *3 5 :22, i 3 6 :i 7 , N T A q - 128:17, I2 9 :i(? ), 134:9,
122 INDEXES
i37:3(?) i47:i7/>(?)- N q - 123:17, 129:14*, 129:15 (bis),

NTA.N- 143:9. 13 2:3 ,13 9 :11 (b ut see a p ).
NTAY* X2i:i*(?), 121:22. NTN- 120:5.
n t a - (before nn) 134:1*. ntgtn -, neg n t g t n t m - 122:6,
i 37 :i 6) 137:18, 137:18*,
b. not yet 138 :19 ,14 6 :23*, 146:24.
Circumst R ce-, neg n c c t m - 133:20,
eMTTATeic- 136:12. 144:21*, 145:1.
eMTTATe- (before nn) 127:20,
i45:i5*- b. T e m p o ra l
N T e p i - 120:23.
c. Aorist N T x p e - 137:7.
qjxq-, neg Meq- 1133:21a/), N T ep e q -135:2.
133:21 a p , '14 0 :13,14 0 :14 . NTepe- (before nn) 129:20,
o ja c - 125:16. 130:8 ,130:9 ,131:16 ,14 4 :9 .
q jA TeTN -142:18 a p , 145:15*.
neg M e y - 12 5 :13 ,12 5 :14 . c. Cond 125:8* (person
<ya.pe- (before nn) 141:7. u n certain ).
eeiq?&N-, eeiupa.- 126:12*
Circumst i26:i2*(?), 146:5*.
eqÂTeTN- 1227(F). epq jA N -137:9.
e o ) \y - 136:8. eq q jA N -122:2,133:5,133:18.
eNq^&N-, eNcyai- 143:14*,
d. Ill Fut 144:14.
neg NNeq-, Neq- 130:21, T TN U }A .N -, neg 6T6TNTM*
121:3*, 123:3, 138:16, 141:5,
neg NN6TN- 147:21. 141:9, i 43 :3flA 1143:3#
e y e -, neg fiNoy- 132:4, 1 4 3 :2 3 -
i 35 :3 ( ?)- eyqjaiN-, eyuja.- 140:5,

neg nn- (before nn) 130:12 a p , 145:21*, 146:2*, i46:2*(?).
! 33 :9 - e p c y A N - (before nn), epujv,
neg 2epqpATM -, 3epTMT6*
Relative 3127:1, 3 1 2 7 :5 -6 a p ,
neg eTeNNeq-, eTeN eq- 6a p , 128:21, 2i33:23, 3134:1,
134 :16 ,13 4 :17 *- 3134:5, 3134:8, 3134:11, 140:8.
2. C la u s e C o n ju g a t io n s C. IMPERAT n e g MTTp- 122:5.
a. Conjunctv D. CAUSATIVES
n t a - 126:13.
f i r - 130:11. In fin T p e q - 134:7; Tpe- (before
nn) 129:23 ap. 130:12, i 36:i3> 136:15,
Imperat M A.pi- 132:14; M & peq- i 3 6 : i 5 *> 136:17, 140:4,
129:13,129:15*. 141:2ap.
-q, *-q, 2-eq (after vb IIIae liqu.)
E. CONVERSIONS OF THE 120:2, *120:7, 120:8, 121:7,
EXISTENTIAL SENTENCE 121:8, 121:13, '122:18, *122:23,
*123:2,123:22,124:3*, 124:9 ap,
Preterite n - 142:8.
124:23, 125:1, 125:4ap (bis),
Circumst Preterite e N e -142:6.
125:10*, 125:10ap ( i ) , 125:16,
Circumst e - 132:1 ap.
125:18*, *126:1*, 126:5*,
Relative T - 123:2, 129:6ap
126:8ap, 126:10* (bis), 126:14,
(bis), 129:13*, 131:23-240/?,
126:21, *127:2-3 ap, *127:5,
132:8, 137:17*, 144:16,
127:19, 127:22, 128:3ap (bis),
144:18*.
128:4, 128:12, 128:12ap,
128:15*, 128:23*, *129:1,129:3,
F. CONVERSIONS OF VERBS OF
SUFFIX CONJUGATION 129:3ap (i ) , 129:6, *129:6,
*129:13, 129:16, 129:20*,
Circumst e - 130:18,130:20. *129:21, *129:22, 129:23, 130:3,
Relative c t - (subject = definite *130:10, 130:11 (bis), 130:15,
antecedent) 121:22*. ' i 3 i : i , i 3 i : 5 2 i 3 i : 9, ' i 3 i : i 7 ,
131:24, 132:2, 132:4ap, 132:5,
G. NEGATION AND CONVERSIONS *32:9*, I 32:i1, 132:12, 132:14,
OF THE NOMINAL SENTENCE *132:14-150/?, 132:15, *132:16,
132:16, 132:16*, 132:17,
neg N-...2k.N, *A.N 134:19,
I 32 :i7*> 132:18, 132:19,
*134:23, >142:15, *143:24, 132:24, 132:24-133:10/? (bis),
'144:21.
l 33:2 *> *33:2, 13 3 :3 , ' i 3 3 : i I
Preterite Ne- 127:21, 131:4ap,
* i 3 3 : i 2, * i33: i 3 > xi 3 3 :2 o,
136:13.
'133:21, '133:24*, '134:3,
Circumst e - 139:3 ap.
*134:8, 134:11, 134:12, 134:14,
Relative T e - 121:9 (see
134:17,134:19 (see a/?), 134:24,
121:10 ap), 125:20, 139:3 ap,
*35:4, I 3 5 : i 3 *> ! i 3 5 : i 4 *,
140:12,140:13.
I 35 : I 4 , I 3 5 : i 5 ( b is ), I 35: i 7,
H. PERSONAL SUFFIXES 136 5 :, 136 11:, : ,
136 16
*136:20*, 1 3 7 :5 (see ap),
*T, '-1, 2-'( 1127:200/?, 1 1 32:21, 137 :11, 137:12, i 3 7 : i 5> x3 7 : i 7
Ii37:i7-i8o/?, 2139:7, 139:7, (bis), 137:18, *137:19, 137:20,
*139:20, *139:21, *140:2, *138:2, 138:2 ap, 138:3 (bis),
140:15, *142:4, 2i45:24*, *138:5, 138:6 ap, 138:7, 138:11,
: -
1 4 5 2 4 138:14, 139:12, *139:13,
-K 121:7, I2i:i6, 125:2, 125:20, ! 39: i 3 I 3 9 ;20, 140:3*,
124 INDEXES
2140:3, 140:7, 140:9 ap, 140:19, ap), 141:10, 14 1:11, 141:12,
140:23, 141:8, 141:19, 141:20, 142:12, 142:14*, 142:15,
141:23,214 2:3*, 142:5, 142:10, '142:19, 142:22*, 143:4ap,
142:16, 142:17, 142:180/7, '143:20, 143:22 (see ap),
142:21, 142:24, 143:7, '143:9, 2i43:23*> i45:9* i45:>o*
'144:9, 144:10, 144:11, I 4 5 : i 2 > 145:23, 2146:22*, 146:23,
i 45: i 3> M 5: i 4 , '146:13, I47:i4 - I 5aP> 147:21*-
146:19. -oy, '- y 120:21 (bis), 120:24,
- c , ' - c , 2- e c (after vb I I I ae liq u .) 121:2-30/7, 121:3, 121:22,
120:9, 120:12, 120:19*, 120:22, 122:20, 123:5(7), 124:9ap,
120:25*, '121:18, 122:6, 125:13, 125:16*, '126:5*,
124:9 ap, 126:17, 127:19, 128:2, '126:80/7, 127:7*, 127:15ap,
128:13, '128:14, '128:22, 129:9, 127:19*, 128:20, 129:7,
129:12, 129:13-14 ap, 131:22, 129:120/7, 130:7, 130:11 ap,
132:20*, 132:21, 132:24- 130:18*, 130:20, '131:4 ap,
13 3: lap (bis), 134:19, I35'-22 131:80/7, 131:12*, 131:12,
(bis), 136:6, 136:22, 137:3*, I3 I:I5> i 3 i:i6 > i3 i;2i, '131:21,
' 37-7aP, i 37 : i 2 > I 37 : I 3 > '132:1, '132:24-133:10/),
137:22, 138:2 ap, '139:6, l *33:3> I33:i4(?) I33:i4i
2 i 39 :7 , J 39 : 2 I > H O- 4 , 133:20, i 35:3> i 35:i7>1i35:i7
140:15, 141:14, 142:4, 142:22, '136:3 (bis), 136:3, 136:8,
I 43 : 2 I > I 44 : I 7 *> I45 :i7aP> 136:11, '136 :11, 136:14,
'145:20*, i 4 5 :22 2l 45:22aP> 136:17, '136:19, '136:22,137:1,
145:23, 2145:24, 1 4 7 :1 4 -1 5 ap I37:5> i 37;8, Ii 37;iI > i37:ia>
(bis), 147:20. '137:12, 137:20a/?, 138:9,
- n , ' - n 120:4, '120:5, 121:5, 138:10, 138:15, 138:24^,
121:19,127:20*, 128:13,137:12, Il39:i3> Il39:i5 Mi: ,
138:13, 138:14, 138:21, 141:4, '14 1:19 , '141:22, '142:12,
i 43 :2 I j 43 :9 > M 3 : i 3 > l 44^ 3> 142:13 (bis), 142:14, '142:16,
144:18. '143:40/7, ' i 43:i3> x*43:i6
-t n (stem-final x > h, o > cu), i43:i7, 144:22,145:7-
'-T H O y T N , 2-THN O Y 120:9,
120:12, 120:14, 122:2, 122:5, I. A R T IC L E S
122:15, 122:18*, '122:19*,
122:21, 122:21*, '123:1, 123:6, i . Definite
124:10, 127:3, 127:14, 128:2*,
2128:5, I 2 9 :5> I 2 9 :7*> 129:12, n-, 'n e - 120:1 (bis), 120:2,
133 : 14 , 136:7. 137:17-180/?, '120:3, I2o:6, 121:1*, 121:5,
137:21, 137:22, '137:2 3, 121:14, 121:15, 1 21:1 7*, *122:3,
'138:17, '138:18, 138:23, 122:3, i22:4, '122:6, 122:13,
138:24 ap, 139:1*, 140:5 (see 122:160/7, 122:18, 122:19,
122:24, 123:1, 123:7, 123:18, i 3 5 : i 9 (b is), 135:20*, 135:20,
123:23, 124:7, 124:19, 125:1, i 35 :2I> i 36 : i > i 36 : i , 136:11,
125:4, 125:9, 125:10, 125:15, *136:16, 136:21 (b is), 136:23
125:17*, 125:17, 125:18 (bis), (b is), 137:4, 137:7, 137:10,
125:19*, 125:19, 126:6*, I 37 :2 3 > i 3 8:4 , i 38:4 &P (b is),
126:8*, 126:9, 126:11*, *138:6, 138:8, 138:9, 138:14,
126:14*, 126:15, 126:16, *138:16*, 138:16-170/), 138:18,
126:18, 126:19, 126:21, 126:23, i 38 ; i9 > i 3 8:22> I 39 :3 >
127:2-3a p (ter), 127:4, 127:5- *139:3 a p , 139:4, 139:5, *139:9
6ap, 127:6, 127:7, 127:15, (b is), 139:9, 139:11, 139:13,
127:16*, 127:16 (bis), 127:17, * i3 9 ; i 4, 139:15, *139:16,
127:18*, 127:20*, 127:21*, I 39 : i 7 , i 39 : i 8 > ! 39 :2I 140:1,
127:22, 128:3 (see a p ) , 128:6, 1 4 0 :6 ,1 4 0 :7 ,1 4 0 :8 (b is), 140:9,
128:9,128:12*, 128:14*, 128:16 140:11, 140:12, 140:13, 140:15,
(bis), *128:16*, *128:18, 140:17, *140:18, 140:18,
*128:18a p , 128:18 a p (bis), 140:20, 140:22 (b is), 140:24,
128:20, 128:22, 129:3, 129:4(7), 141:5 (b is), 141:7, 141:8 (b is),
129:6a p , 129:11*, 129:11 (bis), 141:14, 141:15 (b is), 141:22,
129:13*, 129:14, 129:19 a p , 141:23, 141:24, 142:1 (see a p ),
129:20 (bis), 129:21, 129:23a p , 142:1, 142:4, 142:9, 142:10,
130:3, l 5o:4, i3 o:5ap (bis), 142:11, 142:16, 142:17, 142:18,

130:8*, 130:6,130:9,130:9 (see 142:22, 142:23, 142:25, 143:3,
a p ), 130:12 a p , 131:3, 131:5, 143:7, 143:8, 143:14, 143:15,
131:7*, 131:7, *131:8, 144:1, 144:3, 144:8 *, i 44 :8 ,
' i 3 i: 9 ( ?)>! 3 i: 9aPi i 3i:i0 > 144:9*, 144:9, 144:11, 144:13,
i 3 i : i i *> I 3 I : I I > *3 i : i 3 > i 3 i : i 4 144:15, 144:16, 144:18, 144:23,

(ter), 131:18, 131:20, 131:21 a p , i 4 5 ;8*, 1 4 5 :1 1 ,145 : i2 *> i 45 : i 7
131:22*, 131:23-24 a p , 132:2 a p , (b is), *145:18*, 146:1*, 146:4*,
132:3a p (bis), 132:6, 132:7 *146:8*, 146:9, 146:11, 146:12,
(bis), 132:8*, 132:10 (bis), 146:16, 146:18, .146:18*,
i32:i3 !32:i5, 132:21, 132:22, 146:20*, 146:20, *146:22,

132:25, 133:3, 133:4*, 133:7 i 4 7 :2 3 *> i 4 7 :2 3 -
(bis), 133:9, 133:11, 133:15, , t - z > ! , 2t - 120:6, 120:7,
! 33:i6 > j 33 : i 9 *> *33 : i 9 120:15, i 2 o :i6 , 2i2 o : 2 4 , 120:25,
l3y-2i, 133:22a/), 133:24 (bis), 121:2, *121:5, 121:17, *121:19,
134:2, 134:9, 134:12, 134:14, 122:4, *122:16, 122:16, 123:9,
1 34:1 4 - 1 5aP, I 34: i 5 (see aP)> i2 3 :i2 ( ? ) , 125:16, 127:11,
r34:i6, 134:17, 134:19, 135:1, *127:18, *127:20, 127:21*,
l 35'-2*> i35:6 (bis), 135:7 (bis), 128:6, 128:8, 128:13*,
35:8, 135:9, 135:10 (bis), 2i2 8 : i3 a p , 128:21*, 2i2 8 :2 i* ,
I35:i5*> x35 : i 6 (bis), i3 5 : i 7> *129:8, *129:10, *129:18,
126 INDEXES
*130:2, *130:7, 131:13, 131:22, i 29:22(?), 130 :6, 130:17 (bis),

I 3 2:i2> *33 :4 , 33 :6> i 33 :7 I 30:i9> I32:23 l 33-2, 133:5,
I 33:i7 I 33:22>2i 3 4 7 134:16 , 134:19, 134:22, *135:5, 135:10,
134:18 (bis), 135:1, 2135:12, 1 3 5 :" , I35:i3, i 35:i8 (bis),
* i3 5 : i 4, 135:20, 136:5, *136:7, 136:3*, i 36:7 (bis), 136:18,
*136:9,136:12, *136:23,137:10, 136:19, 136:20, 137:14*,
137:11, 2139:5, 139:8, 140:10, 137:14, *139:3 ap, 139:6,
140:12, 2 i4o:i3, 140:21, *140:2, 140:12, 140:13, 140:24,
*141:14*, 141:16,142:5, 2142:5, 141:4, 141:17, 141:19*, 141:23,
142:6 (bis), *142:10, 143:1*, 142:13, 143:6, 143:24, 144:6*,
143:8, 143:14, i 43 :i 9 > I 4 4 7 > 144:7*, 144:7, 145:10, 145:12
144:11, 144:14, 144:20, 145:2, (b is), i 4 5 :2 3 *> 146:4-
145:5*, i 45 : i I *> 2i 45 :i 5 *> N- 120:21, 121:10, 124:23ap,
2145:20*, 146:10,146:21. 125:21, 130:15*, 130:16,
N-, *N-, 2M-, 3N e- 3l 20 :3 , 120:26 130:18, 130:19*, 133:15,
(bis), *121:2, 2i 2 i : i 8, 122:14, 138:22*, 138:24, 139:16,
*123:4, i24:9(?), 124:11(7), 143:12*, 143:17*, 147:15-
i2 4 :i7 ( ? ) , 124:20(7), *125:2,
3125:5, *125:20*, 127:14, 3. Possessive
*127:15, 127:18,129:7, *129:10,
*129:11, 130:2-3 ap, *131:6,
n i - , *t a .- 126:4, r i 3 3 :2-
3131:11, 3i 3 i : i 6 *, 3131:19a/?,
TTGK-, *TIC-, 2N eK. i 2i ;6(
i 3 3 :i4 (bis), *133:16, 133:19,
2i2 i:io ap, 2i2i:20*, *121:20.
136:9, *136:14, *136:24,
n e q -, * T eq -, 2N eq- 2i2o:2,
3138:8 ap, 138:8 ap, 138:12,
*121:9, I24:4, I24:4*, 2i26:6,
139:4, 2i 39 :i 3 , Ii 39 :22> 2126:22,129:23 ap, 131:2,132:1,
*139:23, *140:8 ap, *141:2,
*132:19, *132:24, 133:21,
3141:10, 142:7, 143:10, 143:13,
*134:4, *135:2,2i3 5 4 ,135:23*,
143:15, 143:16, 3144:19*,
2i 36: i * , 2i 36:6, 2i 36:io,
144:19-20 ap, 3145:1-2 ap,
*139:10, 139:11, 139:19,141:18
3145:4 ap, i 45 :5 (?), Il 45 :9 , (b is), 2i4 i : i 9 , 2i 42:2, 2142:24,
145:21, 3146:2, 3146:14, 146:7.
3146:15*, 3146:17, 3146:19*. nec-, *Nec- *131:19ap, 135:21*-
neN-, *nn- 120:5, *138:21*,
2. Indefinite 141:21.
neTN-, *NeTN-, 2nTm- 123:14,
o y -, *-y- 120:15, i 2 o:i 6, 120:19, *123:16*, 123:21, 123:21-22ap,
120:20, 121:3, *122:8, 124:1, 124:1-2 ap, *125:21,125:22,
124:2*, 124:4, 124:5, 124:6, 125:23, 129:4(7), 129:8*,
124:23 ap, 125:23*, 127:23*, *129:9, *139:1,144:4*, *146:24,
127:23, 128:1 (bis), 128:21, 2 i 4 7 :2 2 *, 2 1 4 7 :2 2 .
n e y -, * n o y -, 2T e y - , 3T o y - , 2i2o:i9, *121:4, 123:1-20/),
4N ey-, 5n o y - * 1 2 1:2 1, 132:7a/), 135:9, 139:11, 140:16,
4121:23*, 4125:15a/), 3141:6, 141:17, *142:21,
5125:15ap, 3128:17 (see ap), 145:2ap.
130:5, I l 33 : i > 2i 3 6:22>4 i 37 : i , m -, *'f-, 2n i - 2i2 i:2 3 , 2i 22: i ,
3141:16. *122:22, 123:1-20/?, 2i2 5 :6 ap,
2i 25:7, 2 i 29 : i 8, *129:19,
4. Demonstrative 2i 3 :7, 132:2 ap, 132:5, 132:21-
22ap, 134:5*, I 34 :23 > i 36 : i 3 ,

n e e i-, * T e e i- , 2N e e i- , 3n a.t- 2i 43 ;2o, *144:6, Ii 45 :7 -
NAG HAMMADI STUDIES
VOLUME X I
NAG H A M M A D I S T U D IE S
E D IT E D B Y

FREDERIK WISSE
IN CO NJUNTIO N W ITH
A l e x a n d e r B o h l ig - J e a n D o r e s s e - S 0 r e n G i v e r s e n
H a n s J o nas - R o d o lph e K a s s e r - P ah o r L a b ib
G e o r g e W . Ma c R a e - J a c q u e s- ^ . M e n a r d
T o r g n y S a v e -S o d e r b e r g h
W i l l e m C o r n e l is v a n U n n i k ^ - R. McL. W il s o n
J an Z a n d ee
XI
G E N E R A L E D IT O R OF T H E COPTIC GNOSTIC L IB R A R Y
JAMES M. ROBINSON
LEID EN
E. J. BRILL
1979
published under the auspices of
NAG H A M M A D I CODICES
V, 2 -5 AND VI
W ITH
PAPYRUS BEROLINENSIS 8502, 1 and 4
CO N TRIBU TO RS
J am es B r a s h l e r - P e t e r A. D i r k s e - C h a r l e s W . H e d r i c k
G eo r g e W . Ma c R a e - W il l ia m R . M u r d o c k
D o u g l a s M. P a r r o t t - J a m e s M. R o b in s o n
Willia m R . S c h o e d e l - R . McL. W il s o n - F r a n c is E. W i l l ia m s
F r e d e r ik W is s e
v o lu m e e d it o r
DOUGLAS M. PARROTT
LEID EN
E. J. BRILL
1979
IS B N 90 04 05798 6
Copyright 1979 by E. ]. Brill, Leiden, The Netherlands

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foreword James M. Robinson................................................ vn

Preface Douglas M. P a r r o tt.................................................... xi
Table of Tractates in the Coptic GnosticL i b r a r y ................. xm
Abbreviations and Short T i t l e s ................................................ xv
Textual Signs................................................................................ x x i
In tro d u c tio n ......................................................................................... i
Codicological Analysis of Nag Hammadi Codices V and VI and

Papyrus Berolinensis 8 5 0 2 ................................................ 9
James M. Robinson
NHC V,2: The Apocalypse of P a u l........................................ 47
William R. Murdock and George W. MacRae
NHC V,j: The (First) Apocalypse ofT am es.......................... 65
William R. Schoedel
NHC V,4: The (Second) Apocalypse ofT am es................... 105
Charles W. Hedrick
NHC V,5: The Apocalypse of A d a m .................................... 15 1
George W. MacRae
NHC VI,1 : The Acts of Peter and the TwelveApostles . . 197
R. McL. Wilson and Douglas M. Parrott
NHC VI,2: The Thunder: Perfect M ind............................ 231
George W. MacRae
NHC VI,3: Authoritative Teaching ................................257
George W. MacRae
NHC VI,^: The Concept of Our Great P o w e r ................ 291
Frederik Wisse and Francis E. Williams
NHC VI,5: Plato, Republic 58 8 b -58 g b ............................ 325
James Brashler
NHC VI,6: The Discourse on the Eighth and Ninth . . . 341
Peter A. Dirkse, James Brashler and Douglas M. Parrott
NHC VI,7: The Prayer of T h a n k sg iv in g ........................375
Peter A. Dirkse and James Brashler
VI TABLE OF CONTENTS
NHC VI,ya: Scribal N o te ........................................................389

Douglas M. Parrott
NHC VI,8 : Asclepius 2 1 - 2 9 ................................................... 395
Peter A. Dirkse and Douglas M. Parrott
BG,j : The Gospel of Mary....................................................... 453
R. McL. Wilson and George W. MacRae
BG ,4: The Act of P e te r........................................................... 473
James Brashler and Douglas M. Parrott
Word In d ices.............................................................................. 495
Coptic W ords................................ ' ....................................... 497
Greek Loan Words................................................................... 528
Proper Nouns...........................................................................541
References to Ancient Works and A u th o rs........................... 543
FOREWORD
The Coptic Gnostic Library is a complete edition of the Nag

Hammadi Codices and of Papyrus Berolinensis 8502, comprising a
critical text with English translations, introductions to each codex
and tractate, notes, and indices. Its aim is to present these texts in a
uniform edition that will promptly follow the appearance of The
Facsimile Edition of the Nag Hammadi Codices and that can be a
basis for more detailed technical and interpretive investigations.
Further studies of this sort are expected to appear in the monograph
series Nag Hammadi Studies of which the present edition is a part.
The gnostic religion was not only a force that interacted with
early Christianity and Judaism in their formative periods, but also
a significant religious position in its own right. General acceptance
of this modem insight had been seriously impeded by the scarcity
of original source material. Now this situation has been decisively
altered. It is thus under a sense of obligation imposed by the dis
covery of these largely unique documents that the present edition
has been prepared.
This edition is a project of the Institute for Antiquity and
Christianity, Claremont, California. The translation team consists
of Harold W. Attridge, J . W. B. Barns f, Hans-Gebhard Bethge,
Alexander Bohlig, James Brashler, G. M. Browne, Roger A.
Bullard, Peter A. Dirkse, Joseph A. Gibbons, S0ren Giversen,
Charles W. Hedrick, Wesley W. Isenberg, T. O. Lambdin, Bentley
Layton, George W. MacRae, Dieter Mueller f, William R. Murdock,
Douglas M. Parrott, Birger A. Pearson, Malcom L. Peel, James M.
Robinson, William C. Robinson, Jr., William R. Schoedel, John
Shelton, John H. Sieber, John D. Turner, Francis E. Williams,
R. McL. Wilson, Orval S. Wintermute, Frederik Wisse and Jan
Zandee. The project was initiated in 1966 with only a limited
number of tractates accessible, but rapidly developed as the texts
became increasingly available. In view of the fact that the bulk of
the material in Codices I-VI had at that time either been published
or announced for imminent publication in complete editions in other
languages, the edition in The Coptic Gnostic Library was envisaged
in the complementary role of providing merely English translations
in a single volume, which in subsequent planning was then envisaged
VIII FOREWORD
as two volumes. It was at this stage that preliminary announce

ments were made in N T S 16 (1969/70), 185-90 and Nov. Test. 12
(1970), 83-85, reprinted in Essays on the Coptic Gnostic Library
(Leiden: E. J . Brill, 1970). Whereas three volume editors were
mentioned for Codices I-VI, due to other assignments in The
Coptic Gnostic Library John D. Turner did not enter into this
activity; James Brashler was quite active in the editorial process
in early stages of the work, but then shifted his activity to preparing
The Facsimile Edition of the Nag Hammadi Codices for the press.
Thus Douglas M. Parrott, who had initially been commissioned as
Volume Editor of Codices I-VI and BG, has seen the present
volume through to completion.
The publisher and editorial board of Nag Hammadi Studies at
their meeting in Uppsala, Sweden, in August 1973, recommended
that The Coptic Gnostic Library edition be complete for Codices
I-VI and BG as well as for V II-X III. This plan was adopted by
the volume editors at their September 1973 work session in Cairo.
This resulted in Codices I-VI being planned for six volumes. The
volumes and the editors for the whole edition are as follows: Nag
Hammadi Codex I, volume editor Harold W. Attridge; Nag Ham
madi Codices I I , 1, I I I , 1 and IV ,1 with Papyrus Berolinensis 8502,2:
The Apocryphon of John, edited by Frederik Wisse; Nag Hammadi
Codices I I ,2-7 and 111,5, volume editor Bentley Layton; Nag Ham
madi Codices 111,2 and IV ,2: The Gospel of the Egyptians (The
Holy Book of the Great Invisible Spirit), edited by Alexander Bohlig
and Frederik Wisse in cooperation with Pahor Labib, Nag Ham
madi Studies, no. 4, 197 5 ; Nag Hammadi Codices I I I , 3-4 and V,i
with Papyrus Berolinensis 8502,3: Eugnostos the Blessed and the
Wisdom of Jesus Christ, edited by Douglas M. Parrott; Nag Ham
madi Codices V,2-5 and V I with Papyrus Berolinensis 8502,1 and 4,
volume editor Douglas M. Parrott; Nag Hammadi Codex VII,
volume editor Frederik Wisse; Nag Hammadi Codex V III, edited
by Bentley Layton, John Sieber and Frederik Wisse; Nag Ham
madi Codices I X and X , volume editor Birger A. Pearson; Nag
Hammadi Codices X I, X I I and X I I I , volume editor Charles W.
Hedrick; Nag Hammadi Codices: Greek and Coptic Papyri from the
Cartonnage of the Covers, edited by J . W. B. Barns f, G. M. Browne
and J. Shelton. Thus, as now envisaged, the full scope of the edition
is eleven volumes. The English translation of the texts of all thirteen
codices has also been published in a single volume, The Nag HaWr
madi Library in English, by E. J . Brill and Harper & Row (1977)-
FOREWORD IX
The team research of the project has been supported through the
Institute for Antiquity and Christianity primarily by the National
Endowment for the Humanities, the American Philosophical Socie
ty, the John Simon Guggenheim Memorial Foundation, the Smith
sonian Institution through the sponsorship of the American Re
search Center in Egypt, and Claremont Graduate School. Members
of the project have participated in the preparatory work of the
Technical Sub-Committee of the International Committee for the
Nag Hammadi Codices, which has been done at the Coptic Museum
in Cairo under the sponsorship of the Arab Republic of Egypt and
UNESCO. This extensive work in the reassembly of fragments, the
reconstitution of page sequence, and the collation of the transcrip
tions by the originals not only served the immediate needs of the
facsimile edition, but also provided a basis for a critical edition.
Especially collation with the help of ultraviolet lamps by Stephen
Emmel, Charles W. Hedrick, and Bentley Layton from 1975 to
1977, brought unexpected improvements to the transcription.
Without such generous support and such mutual cooperation of all
parties concerned this edition could not have been prepared. There
fore we wish to express our sincere gratitude to all who have been
involved.
A special word of thanks is due to the Egyptian and UNESCO
officials through whose assistance the work has been carried on:
Gamal Mokhtar, President until 1977 of the Egyptian Antiquities
Organization, our gracious and able host in Egypt; Pahor Labib,
Director Emeritus, and Victor Girgis, Director of the Coptic
Museum until 1977, who together have guided the work on the
manuscript material; Samiha Abd El-Shaheed, Curator for Manu
scripts at the Coptic Museum, who is personally responsible for the
codices and was constantly by our side in the library of the Coptic
Museum. And, at UNESCO, N. Bammate, Deputy Assistant
Director General for the Social Sciences, Human Sciences and
Culture until 1978, who has guided the UNESCO planning since
its beginning, and Dina Zeidan, specialist in the Arab Program of
the Division of Cultural Studies, who has always proved ready
with gracious assistance and helpful advice.
We also gratefully acknowledge the continued interest and sup
port of F. C. Wieder, Jr., Director, and T. A. Edridge, Adjunct
Director, of E. J . Brill.
J a m e s M. R o b in s o n
PREFACE
This has been a team effort. The names attached to the tractates
are those of the persons who have had primary responsibility for
their preparation. But in every case they have been aided by other
members of the Coptic Gnostic Library team who have done such
things as placing fragments, collating transcriptions, checking trans
lations, and passing along ideas and references. This volume would
have been impossible without these combined labors.
A word needs to be said about the tractate introductions, since
they vary considerably in fullness. Most of them were originally
written when it was thought that the tractates presented here would
be in the volume with only translations of Codices I-VI, mentioned
in the foreword. To conserve space the contributors were asked to
be as concise as possible. When it was decided to publish the trac
tates in the present volume, fuller treatment of introductory matters
became possible, since fewer tractates were involved. Pressures of
time made it impossible for some contributors to revise their intro
ductions extensively. Others, however, were able to do so. It has
seemed better to accept the imbalance thus created than to forego
the advantage of fuller treatment where that has been possible.
A number of persons have made substantial contributions to this
volume who are not elsewhere acknowledged. Neither the volume,
nor, indeed, the Coptic Gnostic Library project as a whole would
have been possible without the imagination and tireless efforts of
James M. Robinson. As volume editor, I am particularly conscious
of his wise guidance and counsel at various stages in the develop
ment and design of the volume. George W. MacRae, as special
consultant, has been more than generous with his time. It would
be difficult to find a portion of the volume that has not benefited
from his careful and judicious eye. Charles W. Hedrick has been of
considerable help in reading and reacting to various parts of the
volume. And the work of Francis E. Williams, who researched
parallels to Patristic literature, has been most useful. The volume
has also been improved in numerous ways by Stephen Emmels
painstaking examination of it at a late stage in the editorial process.
I am also grateful to the following for their help: James Crowell,
Peter Lowentraut, and James Strodtbeck, for initial copy editing,
XII PREFACE
and for compiling and checking indices, while students at the Uni
versity of California at Riverside; James E. Goehring, for correcting
the proofs of word indices; Lenore Brashler, Jo y Cronk, Sandra
Grajeda, Kathleen Hutton, Sharleen Martenas, and Mary Anne
Parrott, for typing.
Societe dfidition Les Belles Lettres has generously agreed to
allow reproduction of the Latin text of Asclepius 21-29 found in
Hermes Trismegiste, Vol. II, ed. by A. D. Nock and A.-J. Festugiere,
1946; reprinted, 1973 (p. 321, line 10, to p. 336, line 2; p. 353, line 1,
to p. 355, line 14).
The editing of this volume was made possible in part by grants
from the Graduate Theological Union and the Committee on Re
search of the University of California at Riverside.
In a work of this sort errors are inevitable. Readers axe requested
to communicate with the general editor of the Coptic Gnostic Libra
ry regarding any that are found so that a list of corrections may be
published.
Finally I want to express a special measure of appreciation to
my wife, Anne, and to our children, Elizabeth and Kirk, for their
help and patience during the years when this volume was being
prepared.
D o u g l a s M. P arrott
T A BLE OF TRACTATES IN THE
COPTIC GNOSTIC L IB R A R Y
The following table lists, for the thirteen Nag Hammadi Codices
and Papyrus Berolinensis 8502, the codex and tractate numbers,
the tractate titles as used in this edition (the titles found in the
tractates themselves, sometimes simplified and standardized, or,
when the tractate bears no surviving title, one supplied by the
editors), and the abbreviations of these titles.
U The Prayer of the Apostle Paul Pr. Paul

1.2 The Apocryphon of James A p. Ja s.
13 The Gospel of Truth Gos. Truth
U The Treatise on the Resurrection Treat. Res.
1.5 The Tripartite Tractate Tri. Trac.
II,1 The Apocryphon of John A p. John
H,2 The Gospel of Thomas Gos. Thom.
II,J The Gospel of Ph ilip Gos. Phil.
11,4 The Hypostasis of the Archons H yp. Arch.
11,5 On the Origin of the World Orig. World
11,6 The Exegesis on the Soul Exeg. Soul
11,7 The Book o f Thomas the Contender Thom. Cont.
III,1 The Apocryphon of John A p. John
111,2 The Gospel of the Egyptians Gos. Eg.
IH.J Eugnostos the Blessed Eugnostos
111,4 The Sophia of Jesus Christ Soph. Jes. Chr.
111,5 The Dialogue of the Savior Dial. Sav.
IV,1 The Apocryphon of John A p. John
IV,2 The Gospel of the Egyptians Gos. Eg.
V,i Eugnostos the Blessed Eugnostos
V,2 The Apocalypse of Paul Apoc. Paul
V,J The (First) Apocalypse of Jam es 1 Apoc. Ja s.
V. 4 The (Second) Apocalypse of James 2 Apoc. Ja s.
VI,1 The Acts of Peter and the Twelve Apostles Acts Pet. 12 Apost.
VI,2 The Thunder: Perfect M ind Thund.
VI,J Authoritative Teaching Auth. Teach.
VI, 4 The Concept of our Great Power Great Pow.
VI,5 Plato, Republic 5886-5896 Plato Rep.
VI,6 The Discourse on the Eighth and Ninth Disc. 8-9
VI ,7 The Prayer of Thanksgiving Pr. Thanks.
VI ,8 Asclepius 21-29 Asclepius
VII,j The Paraphrase of Shem Paraph. Shem
VII,2 The Second Treatise of the Great Seth Treat. Seth
XIV TABLE OF TRACTATES
V II, 3 Apocalypse of Peter Apoc. Pet.

V I I ,4 The Teachings of Silvanus Teach. Silv.
V II, 5 The Three Steles of Seth Steles Seth
V III, i Zostrianos Zost.
V III ,2 The Letter of Peter to P hilip E p . Pet. Phil.
IX , i \Melchizedek Melch.
I X ,2 The Thought of Nor ea Norea
I X ,J The Testimony of Truth Testim. Truth
X Marsanes Marsanes
X I ,j The Interpretation of Knowledge Interp. Know.
X I ,2 A Valentinian Exposition Vol. Exp.
X I, 2U On the Anointing On Anoint.
X I, 2b On Baptism A On Bap. A
X I , 2C On Baptism B On B a p . B
X I ,2d On the Eucharist A On Euch. A
X I,26 On the Eucharist B On Euch. B
X I ,3 Alio genes Alio genes
X I ,4 Hypsiphrone Hypsiph.
X I I ,i The Sentences of Sextus Sent. Sextus
X I I ,2 The Gospel of Truth Gos. Truth
X II, 3 Fragments Frm.
X I I I ,i Trimorphic Protennoia Trim. Prot.
X I I I ,2 On the Origin of the World Orig. World
B G ,j The Gospel of M ary Gos. Mary
BG,2 The Apocryphon of John Ap. John
B G ,j The Sophia of Jesus Christ Soph. Jes. Chr.
B G ,4 The Act of Peter Act Pet.
ABBREVIATIONS AND SHORT TITLES
i. Abbreviation of Biblical Books and Related Texts
a. Old Testament
Dan Daniel Lev Leviticus

Deut Deuteronomy Mic Micah
Eccl Ecclesiastes Num Numbers
Exod Exodus Pr Proverbs
Ezek Ezekiel Ps Psalms
Gen Genesis SongofS Song of Solomon
Hab Habakkuk
Isa Isaiah
Jer Jeremiah
b. New Testament
Ac Acts of the Apostles Mk Mark
Col Colossians Mt Matthew
i Cor i Corinthians i Pet i Peter
2 Cor 2 Corinthians Phil Philippians
Eph Ephesians R ev Revelation
Gal Galatians Rom Romans
Heb Hebrews i Thess i Thessalonians
Jas James 2 Thess 2 Thessalonians
Jn John i Tim i Timothy
1 Jn i John 2 Tim 2 Timothy
Lk Luke
c. Jewish Apocrypha and Pseudepigrapha

Apoc. Mos. Apocalypse of Moses iQ S Serek hayyahad (Rule
2 Bar 2 Baruch of the Community or
i En Ethiopic Enoch Manual of Discipline)
2 En Slavonic Enoch from Qumran Cave i.
2 Esdr 2 Esdras Sibyl Sibylline Oracles
iQH Hodayot (Thanksgiving Test. Abr. Testament of Abraham
Hymns) from Qumran Test. Sol. Testament of Solomon
Cave i. WisdSol Wisdom of Solomon
iQpHab Pesher on Habakkuk
from Qumran Cave i.
XVI ABBREVIATIONS AND SHORT TITLES
2. Other Abbreviations and Short Titles
Works are listed by editor or author, when he/she is referred to

in the footnotes and tractate bibliographies. Omitted are abbre
viations commonly found in standard English dictionaries.
Act.Jn. Acts of John

Act.Phil. Acts of Philip
Act.Pit. Acts of Pilate
Act.PI. Acts of Paul
Act.Pt. Acts of Peter
Act.Thom. Acts of Thomas
Allberry, Manichaean Allberry, C.R.C. A Manichaean Psalm Book.
Psalm Book Stuttgart: W. Kohlhammer, 1938.
A m erJ ournPhil American Journal of Philology
Athenag. Suppl. Athenagoras, Supplicatio
Bauer, Lexicon Arndt, W .F. and Gingrich, F.W. A Greek-

English Lexicon of the New Testament and Other
E arly Christian Literature. A translation and
adaptation of Walter Bauer's Griechisch-Deut-
sches Worterbuch zu den Schriften des Neuen
Testaments und der ubrigen urchristlichen
Literatur. Chicago: University of Chicago Press,
I957
Baynes, Coptic Gnostic Baynes, C.A. A Coptic Gnostic Treatise Contained
Treatise in the Codex Brucianus {Bruce M S 96, Bod. Lib.
Oxford): A Translation from the Coptic; Tran
scription and Commentary. Cambridge: Uni
versity Press, 1933.
BG Papyrus Berolinensis 8502 (cf. Till-Schenke
Papyrus Berolinensis 8502 2 in this list)
Bianchi, ed., Le origini Bianchi, U., ed., Le origini dello gnosticismo:
dello gnosticismo Colloquio di Messina 13 -18 Aprile 1966. Studies
in the History of Religions (supplements to
Numen) 12. Leiden: E .J. Brill, 1967.
Bohlig, Mysterion und Bohlig, A. Mysterion und Wahrheit: Gesammelte
Wahrheit Beitrdge zur spdtantiken Religionsgeschichte. Ar-
beiten zur Geschichte des spateren Judentums
und des Urchristentums 6. Leiden: E.J. Brill,
1968.
Bohlig-Labib, Koptisch- Bohlig, A. and Labib, P., eds. Koptisch-gnosti
gnostische Apokalypsen sche Apokalypsen aus Codex V von Nag Ham
madi im Koptischen Museum zu Alt-Kairo.
Sonderband, Wissenschaftliche Zeitschrift der
Martin-Luther-Universitat. Halle-Wittenberg,
19 6 3 .
ABBREVIATIONS AND SHORT TITLES XVII
Bohlig-Wisse, Gospel of Bohlig, A. and Wisse, F., eds. Nag Hammadi

the Egyptians Codices 1 1 1 , 2 and IV , 2: The Gospel of the E gyp
tians. (The Holy Book of the Great Invisible
Spirit). The Coptic Gnostic Library. Nag Ham
madi Studies 4. Leiden: E .J . Brill, 1975.
Cic. Cicero
Nat.deor. De natura deorum
Off De officiis
2 Clem. 2 Clement
C1.A1. Strom. Clement of Alexandria, Stromata
Cod. Bruc. (Untitled Text in Codex Brucianus (cf. Baynes, Coptic
text) Gnostic Treatise in this list)
Corp. Herm. Corpus Hermeticum (edited in Nock-Festugi6re,
cited in this list)
Crum Crum, W .E. A Coptic Dictionary. Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1939.
CSCO Corpus scriptorum christianorum orientalium
Doresse, Secret Books Doresse, J . The Secret Books of the Egyptian
Gnostics: A n Introduction to the Gnostic Coptic
Manuscripts Discovered at Chenoboskion. Trans
lated by P. Mairet. New Y ork: Viking Press;
London: Hollis and Carter, i960.
Epiph. Pan. Epiphanius, Panarion
Ep.apostol. Epistula apostolorum
Eus. Eusebius of Caesarea
Hist.Eccl. Historia Ecclesiastica
Praep.Ev. Praeparatio Evangelica
Ev.Barth. Evangelium Bartholomaei
Ex orbe religionum E x orbe religionum'. Studia Geo Widengren. 2
volumes. Studies in the History of Religions
(supplements to Numen) 21-22. Leiden: E .J.
Brill, 1972.
Exc.Theod. Excerpta ex Theodoto (Clement of Alexandria)
Festugi&re, La Rdvdlation Festugi&re, A .-J. L a Rdvdlation d*Herm&s Trismi-
giste. 4 volumes. Paris: Librairie Lecoffre,
1949-54-
Foerster, ed., Gnosis Foerster, W., ed. Gnosis: A Selection of Gnostic
Texts. Translation edited by R.M cL. Wilson.
2 volumes. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1972-74.
frag. fragment
GCS Die griechisch-christlichen Schriftsteller der
ersten Jahrhunderte
Gos. Eve Gospel of Eve
Grant, ed., Gnosticism: Grant, R.M., ed. Gnosticism: A Source Book of
A Source Book Heretical Writings from the E arly Christian
Period. New Y ork : Harper and Brothers, 1961.
b
XVIII ABBREVIATIONS AND SHORT TITLES
Hennecke, N T Apocrypha Schneemelcher, W., ed. Edgar Hennecke, New

Testament Apocrypha. Translated by R. McL.
Wilson. 2 volumes. Philadelphia: Westminster
Press, 1963-65.
Hipp. Hippolytus
Antichr. Demonstratio de Christo et antichristo
Ref. Refutatio omnium haeresium
H ThR Harvard Theological Review
Ign. Pol. Ignatius, Epistula ad Polycarpum

Iren. Haer. Irenaeus of Lyon, Adversus haereses (Massuets
division)
Jos. Josephus
Ant. Antiquitates Judaicae
Bell. Bellum Judaicum
Just. Justin Martyr
1 Apol. (First) Apologia
Dial. Dialogus cum Try phone Judaeo
Kore Kosmou E xtract of Stobaeus X X I I I (Nock-Festugi&re

IV, 1-50)
Krause, ed., Essays in Krause, M., ed. Essays on the Nag Hammadi
Honour of Bohlig Texts in Honour of Alexander Bohlig. Nag Ham
madi Studies 3. Leiden: E .J. Brill, 1972.
Krause, ed., Essays in Krause, M., ed. Essays on the Nag Hammadi
Honour of Labib Texts in Honour of Pahor Labib. Nag Hammadi
Studies 6. Leiden: E .J. Brill, 1975.
Krause-Labib, Gnostische Krause, M. and Labib, P. Gnostische und her
und hermetische metische Schriften aus Codex I I und Codex VI.
Schriften Abhandlungen des Deutschen Archaologischen
Instituts Kairo. Koptische Reihe 2. Gliickstadt:
J . J . Augustin, 19 7 1 (appeared 1972).
Lampe, Lexicon Lampe, G.W.H., ed. A Patristic Greek Lexicon.

Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1961.
Liddell-Scott Liddell, H .G .; Scott, R . ; and Jones, H.S. A
Greek-English Lexicon. 9th edition (with supple
ment). Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1968.
Mah6, Hermes en Haute- Mah6, J.-P ., ed. Herm&s en Haute-gypte: Les
ig yp te Textes hermitiques de Nag Hammadi et lews pa-
ra llies grecs et latins. Biblioth&que Copte de Nag
Hammadi; section *textes* * 3. 2 volumes.
Quebec: Les Presses de rUniversit6 Laval 1978-
M6nard, ed., Les Textes M6nard, J.-E ., ed. Les Textes de Nag Hammadi:
de Nag Hammadi Colloque du Centre d'Histoire des Religions
(Strasbourg, 23-23 octobre 1974). Nag Hammadi
Studies 7. Leiden: E .J. Brill, 1975.
ABBREVIATIONS AND SHORT TITLES XIX
Mishnah Mid. Mishnah tractate Middoth

Mishnah Sank. Mishnah tractate Sanhedrin
Museon Le Musion
NHC Nag Hammadi Codices

Nilsson, GGR Nilsson, M.P. Geschichte der griechischen Religion.
2 volumes. Handbuch der Altertumswissen-
schaft 5. 2nd ed. Munich: Beck, 1961.
Nock-Festugi&re Nock, A.D. and Festugi&re, A .-J., eds. Hermhs
TrismSgiste. 4 volumes. Paris: Soci6t6 d'Edition
Les Belles Lettres, 1946-54.
NovTest Novum Testamentum
NTS New Testament Studies
OLZ Orientalistische Literaturzeitung

Orig. Comm, in Joh. Origen, In Johannem commentarius
P.Ryl. Papyrus listed in A. Hunt et al., eds., Catalogue

of the Greek Papyri in the John Rylands Library
at Manchester. Manchester: University Press,
19 11-5 2 .
par(r). parallel(s)
Philo Philo of Alexandria
Conf.ling. De confusione linguorum
Congr. De congressu eruditionis gratia
Det.pot.ins. Quod deterius potiori insidiari soleat
Fug. De fuga et inventione
Leg. all. Legum allegoriae
Mut.nom. De mutatione nominum
Op.mund. De opificio mundi
Plant. De plantations
Poster.C. De posteritate Cain
Praem.poen. De praemiis et poenis
Rer.div.her. Quis rerum divinarum heres sit
Spec.leg. De specialibus legibus
Pist.Soph. Pistis Sophia
Plat. Plato
Polit. Politicus
Tim. Timaeus
Plin. E p. Pliny, the Younger, Epistulae
Plut. Plutarch of Chaeronea
Def.orac. De defectu oraculorum
Pyth.or. De pythiae oraculis
Ser.num.pun. De Us qui sero a numine puniuntur
Ps.-Clem. Pseudo-Clement
Horn. Homiliae
Recg. Recognitiones
XX ABBREVIATIONS AND SHORT TITLES
Reitzenstein, Point. Reitzenstein, R . Poimandres. Leipzig: B.G.

Teubner, 1904.
RevSR Revue des Sciences Religieuses
RH R Revue de VHistoire des Religions
Robinson et al. Robinson, J.M . et al. The Facsimile Edition of
Facsimile Edition the Nag Hammadi Codices. 12 volumes. Leiden:
E .J. Brill, 1972-
RThPh Revue de TMologie et de Philosophie
SBTh Studies in Biblical Theology

Scholer, Nag Hammadi Scholer, D.M. Nag Hammadi Bibliography: 194#-
Bibliography 1969. Nag Hammadi Studies 1. Leiden: E.J.
Brill, 19 71. (Updated annually in NovTest.)
Sozomen, Hist. Eccl. Sozomen, Historia Ecclesiastica
Studies in Honor of Coptic Studies in Honor of Walter Ewing Crum.
Crum Boston: Byzantine Institute, 1950.
s.v. sub verbo
TD NT Kittel, G. and Friedrich, G., eds. Theological

Dictionary of the New Testament. 10 volumes.
Translated and edited by G.W. Bromiley. Grand
Rapids: Wm.B. Eerdmans, 1964-76.
ThLZ Theologische Literaturzeitung
Till, Koptische Till, W. Koptische Grammatik (satdischer Dia-
Grammatik lekt) mit Bibliographie, Lesestucken und Worter-
verzeichnissen. Lehrbiicher fur das Studium der
orientalischen und afrikanischen Sprachen 1. 3rd
improved ed. Leipzig: Verlag Enzyklopadie, 1966.
Till, Papyrus Till, W.C., ed. Die gnostischen Schriften des kop-
Berolinensis 8502 tischen Papyrus Berolinensis 8502. TU 60. Berlin:
Akademie-Verlag, 1955.
Till-Schenke, Papyrus Till, W.C., ed. Die gnostischen Schriften des kop-
Berolinensis 85022 tischen Papyrus Berolinensis 8502. 2nd expanded
edition. Revised by H.-M. Schenke. TU 6o2.
Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1972.
Troger, ed., Gnosis Troger, K.-W ., ed. Gnosis und Neues Testament
und N T Berlin: Evangelische Verlagsanstalt, 1973.
TU Texte und Untersuchungen zur Geschichte der
altchristlichen Literatur
VigChr Vigiliae Christianae
Vit.Ad. Vita Adae et Evae (Books of Adam and Eve)
ZDM G Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen
Gesellschaft
ZKG Zeitschrift fu r Kirchengeschichte
ZPE Zeitschrift fu r Papyrologie und Epigraphik
TEXTUAL SIGNS
A dot placed under a letter in the transcription indicates

that the letter is visually uncertain, even though the con
text may make the reading certain. Dots on the line outside
of brackets in the transcription indicate missing letters that
cannot be reconstructed but of which vestiges of ink remain.
Square brackets in the transcription indicate a lacuna in
the MS in which there is every reason to believe that writing
existed at one time. When the text cannot be reconstructed,
or when it can only be partially reconstructed, the number
of estimated missing letters, up to five, is indicated in the
transcription by dots; beyond that an Arabic number is
used, followed by a plus or minus sign (). An exception
to this is made when a lacuna comes at the end of a line.
Then only the left bracket is shown (so that the line is left
open), and no attempt is made to estimate the number of
letters, since wide variations are possible. In the translation,
brackets indicate not only lacunae but also letters or por
tions of letters that do not make a translatable sense unit.
Also no estimates are given in the translation of the number
of letters missing, and a bracket is not allowed to divide a
word. In the latter case, a word is placed either entirely
inside brackets or wholly outside, depending on an estimate
of the certainty of the Coptic word it translates.
Pointed brackets indicate an editorial correction of a scribal
omission or error. In the latter case only, a footnote records
the MS reading.
Braces indicate letters or words unnecessarily added by the
scribe.
High strokes indicate that the letter so designated was
either written above the line by the scribe, or obviously
inserted by him into an already completed word.
Parentheses in the translation indicate material supplied by
the translator for the sake of clarity. Greek loan words in
the Coptic are also placed in parentheses in the translation,
except when transliterated.
TEXTUAL SIGNS
Two daggers in the Latin text indicate that the words

between them are considered corrupt.
Double square brackets in P. Ryl. 463 indicate an erased
letter in the MS.
INTRODUCTION
The thirteen codices of the Nag Hammadi library were discovered

in December, 1945, opposite the town of Nag Hammadi, at the base
of the sheer cliffs that are set back from the right bank of the Nile.1
Evidence from the cartonnage used in the leather covers suggests
that the volumes were bound sometime in the last half of the
fourth century A.D. and subsequently hidden.
This volume contains NHC V,2-5, VI,J-<S, and B G ,J and 4. NHC
V,i (Eugnostos) is omitted because it will appear in another volume
in this series in synopsis with NHC III,3 (Eugnostos), 4 (Soph. Jes.
Chr.), and B G ,j (Soph. Jes. Chr.). B G ,J and 4 are included in order
to be able to encompass in our edition all the BG tractates: BG,2
and 3 are parallel versions of texts in the Nag Hammadi library
and hence would have been published in any case. Introductory
material to BG may be found in Till-Schenke, Papyrus Berolinensis
85022, pp. 1-23, 331-36.
C o d ic e s V and V I : C om mon C o n s id e r a t io n s
On the leather covers, book construction, page size and appear
ance, the reader is referred to Robinson et al., Facsimile Edition:
Codex V and Facsimile Edition: Codex VI. Additions and corrections
to the facsimile edition are published in Robinson et al., Facsimile
Edition: Introduction.
J. Doresse, who was the first scholar to examine the whole library,
believed that the same scribe copied Codices V and VI, as well as
Codices IV, VIII, and IX .2 M. Krause concurred with his judg
ment.3 However a more recent, although rapid, survey of the
library by M. Manfredi of the G. Vitelli Papyrological Institute in
Florence, Italy, suggests that Codices V and VI are not by the
same scribe. He does not find the hand of V in any other codex,
1 For a full account of the discovery and subsequent events leading to the
bringing together of the codices at the Coptic Museum in Cairo, their conser
vation, and publication in facsimile, see Robinson et al., Facsimile Edition:
Introduction.
* Secret Books, pp. 141-42.
* Gnostiscke und hermetische Schriften, p. 26.
2 INTRODUCTION
but the hand of VI may also be that of V III.4 It is hoped that a

definitive study of the scribal hands in the library will be made in
the near future so that this issue can be resolved.
Not unrelated to the question of the scribal hands is the fact,
demonstrated by J . M. Robinson, that a grouping of the codices
based on the characteristics of their leather covers places V and VI
in different groups: V is akin to IV and V I I I ; VI, to IX, X, and
to a lesser extent II. Since no tractates are duplicated within groups
(of which at least three can be distinguished), it seems clear that
this way of dividing the codices is significant, although further
investigation will be required to determine its full meaning.8
The Coptic dialect of V,2-5 has been investigated by A. Bohlig;*
that of VI, by Krause, who examined each tractate individually and
then drew general conclusions.7 Both find that the dominant dialect,
in each case, is Sahidic. Bohlig perceives a significant Fayumic in
fluence in V,2-5. However, H.-M. Schenke disagrees, contending
that V,2"5 really displays a pre-classical Sahidic dialect with strong
Subachmimic features, and with only occasional signs of Fayumic.8
His position is supported by the recent recognition that the use of
ni -, 'J'-, n i- as articles (common in Codex V) is by no means confined
to the dialects of Lower and Middle Egypt, as had been previously
thought.9 In regard to Codex VI, Krause finds, in addition to the
dominant Sahidic dialect, the influence of Subachmimic, and a few
signs of Achmimic.10 It may be that a somewhat different, and
perhaps more precise, understanding of the dialectal situation in
these codices will result from the current discussion of the origins
of the Coptic dialects and their relationships to each other.11
4 Cf. J.M . Robinson, "On the Codicology of the Nag Hammadi Codices,
in Les Textes de Nag Hammadi, ed. by M6nard, p. 18.
* Cf. J.M . Robinson, "T he Construction of the Nag Hammadi Codices, in
Essays in Honour of Labib, ed. by Krause, pp. 186-87, I 9-
* Koptisch-gnostische Apokalypsen, pp. 11-14 .
7 Gnostische und hermetische Schriften, pp. 36-37.
8 Review of Bohlig-Labib, Koptisch-gnostische Apokalypsen, OLZ 61 (1966),
col. 24.
9 Cf. Krause-Labib, Gnostische und hermetische Schriften, p. 29.
10 Gnostische und hermetische Schriften, p. 63.
11 Cf. the brief summary of this discussion to 1975 in M. Krause, Zur Be-
deutung des gnostisch-hermetischen Handschriftenfundes von Nag Ham
madi, in Essays in Honour of Labib, ed. b y Krause, pp. 74-75.
INTRODUCTION 3
Co d ex V
Codex V includes five tractates. Eugnostos (V,x) contains authori

tative, but not revealed, cosmic speculation in the framework of a
letter from a teacher to his disciples. Apoc. Paul (V,2) is a revelation
in the sense that it describes the experiences of Paul as he journeys
to the tenth heaven, i Apoc. Jas. (V,j), 2 Apoc. Jas. (V,^), and
Apoc. Adam (V,5) share the characteristic of containing revelations
spoken by revealers without the recipients being involved in heaven
ly journeys or dreams and visions of supernatural places and events.
Christian elements are absent from Eugnostos and are probably also
absent from Apoc. Adam (cf. introduction to V,5). Apoc. Paul, 1
Apoc. Jas., and 2 Apoc. Jas., of course, clearly display Christian
influence. The dominant influence throughout the codex, however,
is gnostic. A common theme that runs through the last four trac
tates is the heavenly and earthly opposition that is faced by the
faithful (presumably Gnostics). It is not apparent why Eugnostos
would have been included with the other tractates.
The codex has 84 pages of text. One page (68) is uninscribed but
is nonetheless, following Bohlig, considered here as numbered.12 Thus
the total of pages assigned numbers in modern times is 85. The
pages were numbered by the scribe on the upper outside corners.
The numbers on 4, 5, 26, 57-64 remain clearly visible, while those on
24, 28, and 35 are only partially so; the rest are in lacunae.13
The MS is in an uneven state of preservation. The condition of
each tractate is described in detail in its introduction (and that of
Eugnostos in the synopsis mentioned above), but if one looks at the
codex as a whole, it is clear that no single page is without lacunae,
that the text at the bottoms of pages suffers throughout, and that
only on pp. 21-34, 5> 64-66 and 74-85 is the text at the tops of the
pages largely intact. Also extensive lacunae are found in the middle
of pp. 1-4,9-22,35-59, and 69-70. In addition one finds much flaking,
fading, and blotting throughout. To these problems, having to do
12 This view seemed to be supported by the fact that the pagination of

p. 69 was transcribed b y Bohlig as extant. However in a letter to J . M.
Robinson of April 12 1977, he has conceded the photographs he used do
not show the pagination and hence that the omission of square brackets
here may be an oversight in his edition. Hence the numeration of pp. 69-85
may have been 68-84.
13 On the establishment of the page sequence, see the preface to Robinson
et al., Facsimile Edition: Codex V.
4 INTRODUCTION
with the preservation of the MS, may be added the fact that the
quality of the papyrus sheets in Codex V is among the poorest in
the library.14 This resulted in a good deal of unevenness in the
scribes copying as he attempted to adapt to it. It appears that the
scribe left p. 68 blank because he found it unsuited and inappro
priate for writing, since it is a protokollon,16
Due to fragment placements since the publication of the editio
princefs of V.2-5, this edition contains more text than that edition
on pp. 35-44, 59-60, 65-66, and 79-80. Also many readings have been
improved through intensive examination of the text, including the
aid of ultraviolet light. It should be noted that in regard to 65-66,
the fragment was placed there after the publication of the facsimile
edition. It was frag. 15 on plates 99/100 (Robinson et al., Facsimile
Edition: Codex V), and was placed at 65,32-33 and 66,29-30.
Scribal errors in the text are numerous. Although Bohlig ex
amined them,16 a new presentation is in order in view of our im
proved knowledge of the text. For convenience of reference the
errors are listed in outline form.
I. Errors corrected by the scribe.

A. Omission of letters or words, corrected by insertion above
the line at the place of the omission: 6,6.24; 26,6.10.18; 27,3;
28,8.22; 31,9 .13; 56,23. A whole line appears to have been inserted
at 24,10.
B. Omission of letter, corrected by insertion of letter into the
body of the word: 27,3.
C. Letter(s) deleted by dotting: 7,25-26; 7,33; 85,5.
D. Letter(s) deleted by crossing out: 14,4; 73,7.
E. Letter(s) deleted both by crossing out and dotting: 60,3;
81,6.
F. Letters deleted and replaced by letter above line: 41,22;
7 7 .3 -
G. Letters corrected by changing the incorrect letter to the
correct one: 26,7.10; 27,3; 28,8; 31,4; 51,10 ; 53,1 (?).
14 Cf. vertical sides, pp. 3, 5, 17, 25, 29, 3 1, 4 1, 46, 58, 62, 70, 80; horizontal
sides, pp. 6, 14, 36, 47, 61, 65, 67, 77, 79.
15 Cf. J.M . Robinson, "On the Codicology of the Nag H a m m a d i Codices,
in Les Textes de Nag Hammadi, ed. by M6nard, pp. 21-22.
14 Koptisch-gnostische Apokalypsen, pp. 10 - n .
INTRODUCTION 5
II. Errors not corrected by the scribe.

A. Omission of letter(s): 4,16; 8,10; 27,13 (whole line); 33,5;
36,13.22; 45,22; 49,20; 5 1,14 ; 54,21; 55,8; 56,22; 59,22. Also
material has been omitted between 24,18a and 18b, and between
47,20 and 21, although the extent of the omission in each case is
uncertain.
B. Unnecessary letter(s), probably the result of dittography:
25.4; 33.19; 35,2i; 49,20; 69,6-9; 84,23.
C. Incorrect letter(s): 23,30; 39,19.20; 70,20; 72,21; 74,12.
Of considerable interest in this codex are the glosses, apparently
in the scribal hand, that provide alternative letters (81,18; 82,12)
and words (33,11; 34,23; 78,10; 79,10; 80,1.4; 81,16.19). All but
those at 33,11 and 34,23 are written above the appropriate letter
or word. In the case of 3 3 ,11 and 34,23 (apparently) a Greek
loan-word in the text is glossed by a Coptic expression in the margin,
to which the reader is referred by a special mark that appears both
over the glossed word and in the margin. Bohlig reasonably suggests
that the individual letter glosses may be explained by the linguistic
uncertainty of the scribe, noting that in 81,18 the alternative letter
has no etymological basis. He also proposes that the glosses of whole
words are for clarification.17 But this does not explain 81,16 and
81,19, where the same two words ( d H n e and k a o o a g ) are alter
nately glosses for, and glossed by, each other. It may be that at least
some of the glosses represent another text tradition to which the
scribe had access. Another kind of gloss is the placing of numeral
signs either over or (at the end of a line) next to the written num
ber. These all occur in V,5, and are discussed in its introduction.
Co d ex VI
Codex VI contains eight tractates and one scribal note. It is set
apart from the other codices in the library in that it contains three
tractates that are Hermetic (Disc. 8-9 [VI,6], Pr. Thanks. [VI,7], and
Asclepius [VI,5]). The tractates that precede these in the codex, on
the other hand, offer nothing that would allow a significant common
characterization. They seem to have neither Hermetism, nor Gnost
icism, nor Christianity in common, although individual tractates
display at least influences of the latter two. They have no common
form. Nor do they share a common theme.
17 Koptisch-gnostische Apokalypsen, p. x i.
6 INTRODUCTION
Codex VI has 78 pages of text. The pages were numbered by the

scribe on the upper outside corner. The numbers of 61-66 remain
clearly visible, while those on 1 1 , 1 2 , 1 3 , 1 4 , 1 6 , 1 8 , 1 9 , 36,44,46,56,
and 58 are only partially so; the rest are in lacunae.18
The text is well preserved except at the tops of most of the pages.
Only on 31, 33, 34, 43, and 45 have lacunae not affected the upper
part of the text. In addition blotting is a serious problem on 3-7,
As a result of fragment placements since the appearance of the
editio princeps and the facsimile edition, this edition has more text
than either on p. 10 (frag. 8 on plates 83/84 [Robinson et al.,
Facsimile Edition: Codex VT\ and a fragment previously conserved
with Codex IV, placed at 10,2-3), PP-17-18 (a fragment previously
conserved with Codex IV, placed at 17,8-9 and 18,7-8), p. 26 (a
fragment previously conserved with Codex IV, placed at 26,7), pp.
27-28 (a fragment previously conserved with Codex IV, placed at
27,6-7 and 28,6-8), and pp. 77-78 (frag. 1 on plates 83/84 [Robinson
et al., Facsimile Edition: Codex VI], placed at 77,5-7 and 78,5-7).
Many readings have also been improved through intensive examina
tion of the text both with and without the aid of ultraviolet light.
Although Krause has examined the scribal errors,19 it will be use
ful to deal with them here in view of the differences between the two
editions. For convenience of reference, they are listed in outline.
I. Errors corrected by the scribe.
A. Omission of letters or words, corrected by insertion above
the line at the place of the omission: 20,34; 4>7 44,19; 58,29;
59,15; 63,17; 64,20; 7 1,17.
B. Omission of letter, corrected by insertion of letter into the
body of the word: 49,29.
C. Omission of letters, corrected by writing letters in margin:
72,33-34-
D. Letter(s) deleted by dotting: 19,28-9 (dittography); 35,6'
E. Letter(s) deleted by crossing out: 6,21; 13,10 (dittography)
27,25; 40,23; 43,21; 77,16.
F. Letter(s) deleted by both crossing out and dotting: 60,15;
63,21.
G. Letter erased: 17,34.
18 On the page sequence, see Krause-Labib, Gnostische und hevmetisck
Schriften, pp. 24-25.
19 Gnostische und hermetische Schriften, p. 26.
INTRODUCTION 7
H. Letter(s) deleted and replaced by letter(s) above line: 55,30

(deletion by dotting); 71,8 (deletion by dotting and crossing out).
I. Letters corrected by changing the incorrect letter to the
correct one: 33,4; 54.25-
II. Errors not corrected by the scribe.

A. Omission of letter(s): 5,4; 13 ,17 ; 1 5 ,1 1 ; 35,1; 36,13; 37,35;
39,3.24; 40,12; 43,2.23; 52,29; 59,20; 63,21.22; 74,21.
B. Unnecessary letter(s): 2,27; 6,21; 9,17; 42,30; 43,5; 45,4.13;
56,14; 63,21; 67,30. The following are probably the result of ditto
graphy: 30,22; 44,26; 52,31; 54,13; 62,8; 64,6; 73,19.
C. Incorrect letter(s): 6,7; 9,31; 13,20; 23,26; 27,32; 28,27;
30,22.32; 32,16; 36,24; 38,3; 4 1,12 ; 43,13; 45,10; 48,13; 58,22.
D. Word misplaced in line: 40,14.
E. Metathesis39,9.
F. Interchange of words: 61,23.25.
G. Scribal error the nature of which cannot be exactly deter
mined: 60,1.
For a discussion of how the original layout of the codex was
apparently modified by the scribe, the reader is referred to the
introduction to the Scribal Note (VI ,ya).
M is c e l l a n e o u s N o t e s
Tractate bibliographies. The bibliographies at the beginning of each

tractate introduction are arranged in the following order: texts and
translations; translations; secondary literature. They are not in
tended to be complete, but have as their purpose to draw attention
to the most significant works consulted. These works are cited
subsequently within the introduction and notes of that tractate by
author or editor only. In cases where more than one work of an
author or editor is listed, numbers are assigned so that the source
is always clear. For complete bibliographical information, Scholer,
Nag Hammadi Bibliography, and its annual supplements in NovTest
(beginning in 1971) should be consulted.
Superlinear strokes. Because of printing limitations it has not
normally been possible to show superlinear strokes spanning two or
more consonants. Hence when a stroke spans two consonants in the
MS, it is in most instances shown over the second only. In cases
where an initially sounded m (em) or n (en) in first position in a
8 INTRODUCTION
word has a stroke that continues over an immediately following

consonant (common in BG), the stroke is placed over the first letter.
The same policy is followed throughout in regard to the conjunctive
conjugation.
When a stroke spans three letters in the MS, it is here placed over
the middle letter only. Exceptions are made in the case of proper
nouns and in those instances where the stroke is in effect the sign
of an abbreviation. In addition, it has seemed impractical to at
tempt to place superlinear strokes alone in brackets in cases where
a letter can be seen in the MS but the stroke over it is in lacuna.
On the ground that the stroke and the letter in fact form a unit, we
have shown both the letter and the stroke unbracketed. (The same
policy has been followed in regard to circumflexes.) For more exact
determination the reader is referred to the facsimile edition. A
related policy has been adopted where the stroke is visible but its
letter is in lacuna. In that case both stroke and letter are bracketed.
Instances where this occurs in this volume are found in the following
lines: V 23,2; 33,3; 48,7; 5 1 ,1 1 ; 55,28. VI 4,5; 21,8; 30,2; 30,6;
54,5; 56,2; 72,1.
Lines above and below Coptic page numbers. Because of printing
limitations it has not been possible to make clear when such lines
are visible and when they are not, where the number itself is
bracketed. Again the reader is referred to the facsimile edition
for exact determination.
Circumflexes. Circumflexes, when they appear with more than one
letter, connect two vowels (ei), or a consonant and a vowel (21).
Unfortunately scribes are not always careful to make the circumflex
so that it can be distinguished from the superlinear stroke. Rather
than attempting to follow the vagaries of the scribes in this matter,
we have used circumflexes throughout Codices V and VI in the
instances mentioned above. For more exact determination the
reader is referred to the facsimile edition. The problem does not
occur in BG.
Title and tractate decorations. No attempt has been made hereto
reproduce the often elaborate decorations with which the scribes set
off and surrounded superscript and subscript titles, and indicated
the conclusion of tractates. For these, the reader is referred to the
facsimile edition. For a general discussion of the titles in the library,
Krause-Labib, Gnostische und hermetische Schriften, pp. 16-21, should
be consulted.
CODICOLOGICAL ANALYSIS OF NAG HAMMADI CODICES V
AND VI AND PA PYRU S BERO LIN EN SIS 8502
J am es M. R o b in s o n
A. Annotated Bibliography
The foundations of papyrus codicology were laid by Hugo Ibscher,
working as conservator in the papyrus collection of the royal mu
seums of Berlin from the opening of the century, and were largely
published in his maturity in the editiones principes of Manichaean
codices from Medinet Madi and, posthumously, a codex of Proverbs
in Achmimic. These publications contain the insights that cumula
tively produced the generalizations upon which a science of papyrus
codicology can be built. Beobachtungen bei der Papyrusauf-
rollung, Archiv fiir Papyrusforschung, 5 (1909), 191-94: Evidence
that factories put rolls rather than individual kollemata on the
market; explanation of why horizontal fibres are on the inside of a
roll; explanation of the reversed fibre directions of the protokollon.
"Beschreibung der Handschrift, in Der achmimische Proverbien-
textnachMs. Berol. orient, oct. 987, Part I, Text und Rekonstruktion
der sahidischen Vorlage, ed. by A. Bohlig, Studien zur Erforschung
des christlischen Aegyptens 3, ed. by A. Bohlig (Munich: Verlag
Robert Lerche, 1958), pp. xix-xxvii (Hugo Ibschers son Rolf re
ported that this codicological analysis had been composed in the
1920s, Umkonservierung des Papyruscodex Ms. or. oct. 987,
Zentralblatt fiir Bibliothekswesen, 73 [1959], 367; it is presupposed
by W. Schubart, Das Buck bei den Griechen und Romern, 2nd rev.
ed. [Berlin and Leipzig: W. de Gruyter, 1921J, pp. 129 and 186.):
Existence of a back flyleaf; one quire constructed from more than
one roll; calculation of the breadth of each roll; the use of half
sheets plus stub-attributed not to scribal error but (like the use of
a protokollon) to economy in using the remainder of a roll that was
narrower than a full sheet; existence of eschatokollia as well as
protokoUa. Ibscher erred in assuming that the sheets were cut to a
standard breadth, rather than progressively narrower, as can be
demonstrated on the basis of the information he supplied. As a
result of his study of the Chester Beatty biblical papyrus II (P 46)
he himself later adopted the view that sheets were cut progressively
10 CODICOLOGICAL ANALYSIS
narrower. Hence one may infer that he would have edited out this
error had be been alive at the time the manuscript was being
prepared for publication. The Achmimic Proverbs codex, dated to
the Third or Fourth Century, is, in contrast to the Manichaejin
codices, constructed much like the Nag Hammadi codices.Die
Handschriften, in Ein Mani-Fund in Agypten: Originalschriften
des Mani und seiner Schuler, by C. Schmidt and H. J. Polotsky,
Sitzungsberichte der Preussischen Akademie der Wissenschafte-n,
philosophisch-historische Klasse, 1933, I (Berlin: Verlag der Aka
demie der Wissenschaften, 1933), 82-85: The codex form as char
acteristic of early Christian texts; in contrast to the low quality
of most Coptic codices, remarkably high-quality, silken papyrus
used in the Manichaean codices; in distinction from earlier tran
sitional codices, these codices not made from rolls but from in
dividual kollemata (measuring 31.5 cm. high by 36 cm. wide or
27 cm. high by 35 cm. wide), with a plurality of quires, and with
facing pages having the same fibre directions. "Die Handschrift,
in Manichaische Homilien, ed. by H. J. Polotsky, Manichaische
Handschriften der Sammlung A. Chester Beatty 1 (Stuttgart: W.
Kohlhammer, 1934), pp. ix-xiv: Description of the reassembling of
a codex on the basis of codicological observations. "Der Kodex,
Jahrbuch der Einbandkunst, 4 (1937), 3-15: The first effort at a broad
systematic statement on papyrus codicology, including generaliza
tions on the decreasing breadth of kollemata over three millennia,
the methodological policy of hypothetically reconstructing the rolls
from which codices were constructed, the recognition that the sta
tioner cut sheets progressively narrower in constructing a quire from
a roll, and the unfortunate retention of the view he never transcen
ded that there were only one-quire codices until the beginning of
the Fourth Century, in spite of the fact that he had conserved
Chester Beatty biblical papyrus I (P 45) constructed of a plurality
of one-sheet quires from the early Third Century. "Die Hand
schrift, in A Manichaean Psalm-Book, Part II, ed. by C. R. C. All
berry, Manichaean Manuscripts in the Chester Beatty Collection 2
(Stuttgart: W. Kohlhammer, 1938), pp. vii-xviii: The first explicit
attempt to produce a data base of codicological analysis in terms of
which a given codex can be put in profile, in that the reconstruction
of the rolls used in the codices of the Achmimic Proverbs, the
Chester Beatty Pauline letters (P 46), the Pierpont Morgan Greek
Homer, and Papyrus Berolinensis 8502 (inaccurately called a Psalms
CODICOLOGICAL ANALYSIS II
codex) points to the codicological distinctiveness of the Manichaean

codices and in passing draws attention to the then unheard-of phe
nomenon of a kollema a meter and a half in breadth, a phenomenon
frequent in the Nag Hammadi codices. "Die Handschrift, in
Kephdaia, first half (fascicles i-io), ed. by H. J . Polotsky and A.
Bohlig, Manichaische Handschriften der Stattlichen Museen Berlin i
(Stuttgart: W. Kohlhammer, 1940), pp. v-xiv: The presence both
of kolleseis with the right kollema overlapping the left as well as the
usual practice of the left kollema overlapping the right in the Ham
burg Greek papyrus codex containing Act. PL; front flyleaves; the
numeration of quires as well as pages as an indication of progress
in the Manichaean codices.
The same codicological analysis of BG has been published twice
by H.-M. Schenke: Erganzungen zur zweiten Auflage , in Till-
Schenke, Papyrus Berolinensis 85022, pp. 330-41, esp. pp. 331-32;
"Bermerkungen zum koptischen Papyrus Berolinensis 8502, in
Festschrift zum iôjahrigen Bestehen des Berliner agyptischen
Museums, Mitteilungen aus der agyptischen Sammlung 8 (Berlin:
Akademie-Verlag, 1974), pp. 315-22, esp. pp. 315-17. This analysis
has been superseded by data Schenke was kind enough to collect
anew as a basis for the codicological analysis of BG published in
the present volume.
An analysis of the construction of the leather covers of the Nag
Hammadi codices, with a resultant grouping of the codices, in
cluding the measurements of representative leaves of each codex,
and a codicological analysis of the construction of the quires, are
provided in two essays of 1975 by J . M. Robinson: "The Con
struction of the Nag Hammadi Codices, in Essays in Honour
of Labib, ed. by Krause, pp. 170-90; On the Codicology of the
Nag Hammadi Codices, in Les textes de Nag Hammadi, ed. by
Menard, pp. 15-31. A survey of the history and present status of
codicology related to the Nag Hammadi codices is forthcoming:
"The Future of Papyrus Codicology, in The Future of Coptology
in the new series Coptic Studies ed. by M. Krause (Leiden: E. J.
Brillj.
The most authoritative work on papyrus codicology is by E. G.
Turner: The Typology of the Early Codex (Philadelphia: University
of Pennsylvania Press, 1977). The technical terms kollema and
kollesis used below are derived from parts of that work he was kind
enough to make available in typescript. The book itself appeared
too late to be presupposed in the present text, and such data as are
included in the codicological analyses in The Coptic Gnostic Library,
collected in part through the encouragement of Turner, at times
supersede information supplied to him earlier and incorporated in
his book.
B . The Current Terminology and Generalizations o f Papyrus

Codicology
The basic unit of a papyrus roll was produced by laying thin
strips of the pith of the triangular stalk of the papyrus plant verti
cally side by side on a smooth surface; a second layer was super
imposed horizontally, at right angles to the lower layer. When
pressed, dried and polished this became the basic papyrus writing
surface, called a kollema (pi. kollemata ). Though often about 20 cm.
broad, kollemata do occur (especially in the Nag Hammadi codices)
that are over one meter in breadth. The term kollema, meaning that
which is pasted, derives from the custom of pasting side by side
such individual kollemata into a roll. This is done by overlapping
a few centimeters of the right end of the kollema on the left over the
left end of the kollema on the right, with the result that as one
writes from left to right the writing instrument will move down
ward at the seam, rather than bumping into a sudden rise in the
writing surface. The few overlapping centimeters at such a seam
are called a kollesis (pi. kolleseis).
A papyrus roll was rolled up with the horizontal fibres on the
inside and the vertical fibres on the outside. In this way the hori
zontal fibres are not strained when rolled, and are stretched back
out flat for reading when the roll is opened, whereas the vertical
fibres on the outside are bent away from each other when rolled;
if the vertical fibres had been on the inside, the rolling would have
pushed them one against the other, causing some to spring loose
and buckle. Since it was the protected inner surface that was used
for writing, it became customary to write on the horizontal side.
At the left end or beginning of the roll the first kollema was at
tached with reversed fibre directions, in order that, when the roll
was rolled up from right to left, what remained exposed on the out
side were the horizontal fibres, which were less likely to fray. This
outside kollema with reversed fibre directions was intended to pro
tect the rest of the roll. It itself was not inscribed with the text of
the document, though it later came to be used as a convenient
CODICOLOGICAL ANALYSIS 13
place to record stationers information or something approaching a

table of contents. The term protocol derives from the designation
of this first kollema as the protokollon (Martial also mentions an
eschatokollion).
A codex in distinction from a roll or scroll is a book produced
more like a modern book, by stacking sheets one on top of the other
and folding the stack down the middle, thus producing a quire.
Each sheet consisted of two leaves, called conjugate leaves, that
met at the fold, thus producing four pages. The terms sheet, leaf
and page should be clearly distinguished: a sheet has four pages, a
leaf two pages, a page one page. All the sheets to be used for a
book were often put in one stack and produced a single quire.
Such a stack if at all thick would put pressure on the spine of the
quire and cause leaves to break loose. This problem was solved by
replacing the single-quire codex with a codex of comparable size
consisting of several smaller quires. All the Nag Hammadi codices
have a single quire except Codex I, which consists of three quires.
The manufacture of papyrus rolls had behind it a tradition of
millennia by the time the codex format emerged in the first cen
turies A.D. The power of this tradition explains in part the fact that
the sheets for a quire were not produced directly from individual
kollemata. The Manichaean codices first document the liberation
of the codex from the scroll tradition to the extent that the sheets
seem to be kollemata produced at a standardized breadth specif
ically with the codex rather than the roll in view. But traditionally
kollemata of varying breadth were first pasted together into a roll,
and then this roll cut back up into sheets. This meant a saving of
papyrus. For if such kollemata had not been first pasted together,
some would have been too narrow to be used as a sheet in the quire
and others so broad as to leave considerable amounts to be discarded.
But when the kollemata were first pasted together into a roll and then
cut into sheets for the quire, each kollema could be fully used, in
that what was left of a kollema after one sheet had been cut from it
would be used in the next sheet, and a kollema narrower than a
sheet could nonetheless, since pasted to another, be used in a sheet.
Papyrus would need to be discarded only if there were a remainder
at that end of the roll which was the last to be cut (or at the be
ginning, if calculations were made in advance and the remainder
were cut first). Since rolls were usually cut from right to left, this
problem would usually occur at the protokollon, which seems to have
14 CO D ICO LO G ICA L A N A LY S IS
been usually omitted from the quire. Although in one case a pro
tokollon seems to have been used to produce a whole sheet (11,49/50
+ 91/92), the other three instances of a protokollon among the Nag
Hammadi codices may be due to a concern not to discard the re
mainder of the preceding kollema (V,6ylG ; VII, 115/116; VIII,
89/90). No instance of an eschatokollion has been detected in the Nag
Hammadi codices. The presence of a protokollon (or eschatokollion)
in a quire is an indication that one stands at the transition from one
roll to another in the stack of sheets.
There was a more common way to make use of such a remainder,
so long as it was only slightly broader than half a sheet. For if there
was breadth enough for the remainder of the roll to produce one
leaf and as much as a few centimeters of the conjugate leaf, then
the binding thongs passing through this half-sheet at the fold would
hold it securely in place. The papyrus at the inner margin of what
would have been the conjugate leaf is called a stub. One might
expect to find such half-sheets plus stub more or less frequently,
since rolls do not seem to have been made of a breadth calculated
to produce an exact number of sheets. A standard breadth could
in any case hardly have been economically adopted in view of the
varying breadth of the sheets from codex to codex and the pro
gressive narrowing of the sheets within a quire. A half-sheet plus
stub is in the Nag Hammadi codices an indication of the transition
from one roll to another in the stack of sheets cut from rolls for the
quire. A half-sheet plus stub occurs in Codex I, rolls 1 and 3 (with
out stub); Codex II, roll 1 ; Codex III, rolls 1 and 2; Codex V, roll 1;
Codex VII, rolls 2 and 3 and between rolls 1 and 2; Codex VIII,
rolls 1 and 2; Codex X I, roll 1. Usually the half-sheet plus stub
occurs at the end of the cutting process for a roll, but at times it
seems from its position as the bottom sheet to have been at the
beginning of the cutting process (Codex I, rolls 1 and 3; Codex II,
roll 1 ; Codex VII, roll 3). The edge of the end of the roll is not
necessarily used for the edge of the stub itself, since the edge of the
end of the roll can be made flush with the edge of the stack of sheets,
thus making the edge that had been created when the last whole
sheet had been cut from the half-sheet plus stub in fact the edge of
the stub (Codex II, roll 1 ; Codex V III, roll 1 ; Codex XI, roll 1).
A roll to be used in a quire was usually cut from right to left and
the sheets stacked in the sequence in which they were cut. The next
roll used for the quire would be similarly cut and stacked on the
CO D IC O LO G ICA L A N A LY S IS 15
sheets of the first roll. From two to six rolls per codex were used in
the Nag Hammadi codices (two rolls: Codices IV ?, V, VI, IX , X ? ,
XI, XII ?, X III ?; three rolls: BG ; four rolls: Codices I [in 3 quires],
II, VII, V III; six rolls: Codex III), a total of about 38 rolls in the
Nag Hammadi codices. Thus it is usually possible to trace the hori
zontal fibres of a kollema from one leaf across the fold to its conju
gate leaf, i.e., across the breadth of a sheet, and then from the left
edge of one sheet to the right edge of the next sheet above it in the
stack. Once the stack of sheets was folded and bound into the cover,
the leading edges of the leaves must have been trimmed flush. This
would mean that there would be a small amount of papyrus missing
between the left edge of one sheet and the right edge of the next
sheet above it. One can calculate the breadth of the trim rather
easily when there is a horizontal fibre that is irregular and hence lies
at an angle, by separating the sheets by the amount of space needed
to make the angling fibre align on the two sheets.
If all the sheets in a quire were cut at a standard breadth, the
sheets higher in the stack when folded would be nearer the center
of the quire and hence would protude further at the leading edge.
When the leading edges were trimmed flush, there would be an
increasing waste as one moved toward the center of the quire. It
may well be that this problem was anticipated and circumvented by
initially cutting the sheets progressively narrower, with the result
that the amount trimmed off would be reduced and would be more
nearly constant from sheet to sheet. The fact that the succeeding
rolls used in individual Nag Hammadi codices tend to produce more
sheets than the preceeding rolls suggests that the sheets were cut in
this way. For otherwise one would have to make the improbable
assumption that the stationer rather arbitrarily used successively
broader rolls.
Only if the trim had been rather broad would it be possible for a
whole kollesis to be trimmed away, unless the stationer in cutting
the roll intentionally trimmed off a kollesis lying at the edge of a
sheet. Except where there is such a kollesis lost in the trim, one
should be able to trace horizontal fibres from sheet to sheet through
out a roll, noting the extant kolleseis and shifting at each kollesis
from the fibre pattern of one kollema to that of the next. A trimmed-
off kollesis and the end of a roll may seem indistinguishable, al
though cumulative experience as to the breadth of rolls usually
permits one to identify the instances where a break in fibre conti-
i6 CO D ICO LO G ICA L A N A LY SIS
nuity may reasonably be attributed to the end of a roll. Only Codex

IV (if one may exclude the all-too-incomplete Codices X, XII and
X III) has not been clearly analyzed in terms of where rolls begin
and end.
Usually the kolleseis in the codex, as in the roll, present the left
kollema overlapping the right. At times however the reverse is the
case, with the right kollema overlapping the left (Codex I, rolls
three and four; Codex II, roll one; Codex V, roll two; Codex VIII,
roll four; Codex IX , rolls one and two; Codex X I, rolls one and two;
Codex X II, roll two; and BG, rolls one through three). In such
cases one may assume that the roll, being a much more traditional
artifact than the codex, has been produced conventionally. For the
irregularity can readily be explained in terms of the construction of
the codex. If a roll to be used for the codex had been rolled up from
the right to the left rather than from left to right, the stationer
might well have rotated it i8o in a horizontal plane so as to have
the loose edge to the right ready for cutting, with the result that
the kolleseis seem backwards. When one encounters within a quire
such a shift from one direction to the other in the overlapping of the
kolleseis, one may assume one has moved from one roll to another.
Since the rolls are usually cut from right to left, the left edge of
one sheet usually has continuity of horizontal fibres with the right
edge of the next sheet above it. At times the reverse is the case, in
that the right edge of one sheet has continuity of horizontal fibres
with the left edge of the next sheet above it (Codex II, roll four;
Codex V, roll one; Codex VII, roll one; BG, rolls one through three).
This may occur in the same roll that has the unusual overlapping
of the kolleseis (Codex VII, roll one; BG, rolls one through three).
When both of these irregularities occur together, it is simplest to
infer that the roll was cut as usual from right to left but then the
stack of sheets rotated i8o in a horizontal plane, thus giving the
impression of having been cut from left to right. Of course other
and more complex conceptualizations are possible to explain how
in each case the sheets came to be stacked as they are, since the
actual procedure of the stationer is not known but must be inferred
on the basis of the way the sheets lie.
C. Codex V
The goatskin cover of Codex V is part of a sub-group among the
eleven extant Nag Hammadi covers, of which Codices IV and VIII
are the main representatives. For they are the only two of the eleven
covers to lack a flap on the leading edge of the front cover, whereas
the cover of Codex V, though originally cut without making pro
vision for a flap, was made to conform to the usual practice by
sewing on an extra piece of leather. For details concerning the cover
of Codex V see Robinson et al., Facsim ile E d itio n : Codex V , pp. ix
and xi and plates 1-6.
The single quire of Codex V, which reaches a height of 24.3 cm.,
seems to have been constructed from two rolls. For the eleventh
sheet from the bottom of the stack of sheets is actually a half-sheet
plus stub, which usually occurs at the end of the roll. And the
twelfth sheet from the bottom contains a protokollon, which should
be the beginning of a roll. Furthermore both the direction in which
the rolls seem to have been cut and the direction of the overlap at
the kolleseis change between the eleventh and twelfth sheet. Thus
this seems to be a clear break in the construction of the quire,
perhaps the most obvious instance of a shift from one roll to another
in the Nag Hammadi library. Further corroborating evidence will
also emerge in the detailed analysis of the rolls.
Each of the two rolls diverges in some regards from the usual
practice in the Nag Hammadi codices. Roll one comprises the lower
part of the stack of sheets, or, when folded, the outer part of the
quire. The right edge of one sheet has continuity of horizontal fibres
with the left edge of the next sheet above it in the stack of sheets
that, when folded, forms the quire. This seems to indicate that the
roll was laid open with the horizontal fibres facing upward, cut
from left to right, and stacked one sheet on the other in the order
in which the sheets were cut. This is the reverse of the usual pattern
in the Nag Hammadi codices, where the left edge of one sheet joins
the right edge of the sheet above it, leading to the assumption the
rolls were usually cut from right to left.
Only roll four of Codex II, roll one of Codex VII, and the three
rolls of BG present, like roll one of Codex V, continuity of horizontal
fibres from the right edge of one sheet to the left edge of the next
sheet above it, as if the roll were cut from left to right. Now it is
the usual practice at the kolleseis that the left-hand kollema overlaps
the right-hand kollema, so that one may normally assume the rolls,
at the time they were cut, lay unrolled in the usual writing position,
with the horizontal fibres facing upward and the protokollon at the
left. But in the case of roll one of Codex V II and the three rolls of
i8 CO D IC O LO G ICA L A N A LY S IS
BG the right-hand kollema overlaps the left-hand kollema. Both of

these unusual traits shared by roll one of Codex V II and the three
rolls of BG can be reduced to the usual practise if one may postulate
that the roll had been laid out in the usual writing position, was cut
from right to left, and then the stack rotated horizontally i8o, thus
producing the secondary appearance of having been cut from left to
right. In the case of roll four of Codex II, the stack of sheets from
roll four has been turned over so that the vertical fibres face up
ward. If one assumes that the stack of sheets from roll four was
turned over from side to side, this would explain as secondary the
impression of having been cut from left to right; when the sheets
are hypothetically turned back over from side to side, the original
impression of having been cut from right to left is restored. One can
hence interpret the situation with Codex II, roll four, Codex VII,
roll one, and the three rolls of BG as minor variants in the usual
practice. But in roll one of Codex V the kolleseis present the usual
practice of the left-hand kollema overlapping the right-hand kollema,
thus providing no reason to assume the roll or stack of sheets had
been rotated i8o. Thus roll one of Codex V seems to be the only
instance in the Nag Hammadi library of a roll cut from left to right
rather than from right to left (unless one were to assume some more
complicated procedure, such as the roll having been rotated in a
horizontal plane i8o, then cut from right to left, then the stack of
sheets rotated back in a horizontal plane i8o, thereby producing
the appearance of having been cut from left to right; or the roll
turned over from top to bottom so that the vertical fibres face up
ward, cut from right to left, and then the stack of sheets turned
back over from top to bottom).
Roll two comprises the upper part of the stack of sheets, or, when
folded, the inner part of the quire. The left edge of one sheet has
continuity of horizontal fibres with the right edge of the next sheet
above it in the stack of sheets, suggesting that the roll was cut from
right to left, the usual practice. But at the kolleseis the right-hand
kollema overlaps the left-hand kollema, with an extant protokollon
at the right end of the roll. Hence the roll seems to have been cut
when lying open with the horizontal fibres facing upward but in the
reverse to the usual writing position, i.e., with the protokollon at the
right. One may assume that the roll had been rotated i8o in a
horizontal plane prior to cutting (or, in view of the possibility that
the first roll seems actually to have been cut from left to right, one
CO D IC O LO G ICA L A N A LY SIS 19
could conjecture this to be also the case with roll two, after which the
stack of sheets would have been rotated in a horizontal plane 180).
Roll one. When listed from the beginning of the roll (the left edge)
to the end (the right edge) and designated by the pagination of the
horizontal-fibre side of the sheets into which the roll was cut, i.e.,
the upper or inner surface, the original roll was as follows:
Flyleaves B + I, pp. 2 + 85, pp. 4 + 83, pp. 6 + 81, pp. 8 + 79,
pp. 10 + 77, pp. 12 + 75, pp. 14 + 73, pp. 16 + 71, pp. 18 +
69, p. 20 + [stub] (missing).
Sheets. Measurements of the sheets of Codex V were made from
the center of the sheet, rather than from the outer edges, since the
latter cannot always be identified with assurance as the original
extent of the sheet, whereas the distance outward from the inner
edges of a leaf can be determined by measuring from the center of
the sheet even if the inner edge is not extant due to lacunae at the
spine, to the extent the positioning of the conjugate leaves is ac
curate. Thus instances where the inner edge of a leaf is not extant
are not distinguished from those where it is extant. But in the case
of the outer edge, when it is clear that it is not extant, the empirical
measurement of what is extant is listed, but this is then followed,
in square brackets (the normal indication of non-extant material),
by the hypothetical measurement of the original leaf, as can be
inferred from preceding and succeeding leaves, in order that the
averages and other generalizations may not be distorted arbitrarily,
but can be considered to be reliable with a fluctuation of no more
than a millimeter or so.
The stack of sheets cut from roll one, with the measurements of
each, is presented in tabular form from top to bottom as they lay
before being folded into the quire.
Sheet 1 1 p. 20 + [stub] 12.4 cm. + [5.0] cm. = 12.4 [17.4]
Sheet 10 pp. 18 + 69 12.6 cm. + 12.8 cm. = 25.4 cm.
Sheet 9 pp. 16 + 71 12.8 cm. + 13.0 cm. = 25.8 cm.
Sheet 8 PP- 14 + 73 12.9 cm. + 12.9 cm. = 25.8 cm.
Sheet 7 pp. 12 + 75 13.0 cm. + 13.0 cm. = 26.0 cm.
Sheet 6 pp. 10 + 77 13.3 cm. + 13 .1 cm. = 26.4 cm.
Sheet 5 pp. 8+ 79 13.4 cm. + 13.0 cm. = 26.4 cm.
Sheet 4 pp. 6 + 81 13.5 cm. + 13 .1 cm. = 26.6 cm.
Sheet 3 PP- 4 + 83 13.7 cm. + 13.4 cm. = 27.1 cm.
Sheet 2 pp. 2 + 85 13.6 cm. + 13.4 cm. = 27.0 cm.
Sheet 1 PP- B + I 10 .1 [13.6] cm. + 13.5 cm. = 23.6 [27.1]
20 C O D IC O LO G ICA L A N A LY SIS
The total breadth of the sheets is hence 281.0 cm., the average (if
one may ignore the half-sheet plus stub) 26.0 cm. The breadth di
minishes 1.7 cm. as one moves from the bottom to the top of the
stack, an average of 0.17 cm. per sheet or 0.085 cm- Per leaf.
These empirical measurements, based on the leaves as conserved,
may in part reflect inexactitudes in the positioning of the conjugate
leaves in the plexiglass panes, but may also in part reflect inexacti
tudes in the folding and trimming of the quire when bound. One
would normally expect conjugate leaves to be of the same breadth
and successive sheets to become narrower in a regular progression.
In the conservation process in 1974 the conjugate leaves were placed
by centering the thong holes and by using the outline of the cover
and of preceding and succeeding sheets to align the often fragmen
tary leaves. On the basis of the subsequent measurements made for
the present codicological analysis a more precise alignment might
at times perhaps be attained in a future reconservation, from which
more nearly regular measurements would result. But rather than
anticipating conjecturally such an outcome, the empirical data, in
exact though they may be by a millimeter or so, are here employed,
so that averages and other generalizations can be derived from the
empirical data, from which one may infer the theoretical standard
ized measurements the quire can be conjectured ideally to have
had.
Kollemata. Roll one consists of twenty-one kollemata. Their
measurements are presented in tabular form below. After the num
ber of the kollema there are listed the leaves derived from the kolle
ma, followed by the measurements on each leaf that produce the
total breadth of the kollema. When the measurement given for a
leaf is narrower than the total breadth of the leaf, one may infer
that the kollema does not cover the whole leaf. In such cases the
position of the kollema on the leaf can be readily inferred, in that
the left part of a kollema would fall on the right part of a leaf and
the right part of a kollema on the left part of a leaf. A plus sign is
used to connect conjugate leaves, a comma to connect leaves of
successive sheets.
Kollema 1 pp. B + I 10 .1 [13.6] cm. + n . 2 cm. = 21.3 [24.8]cm.

Kollema 2 p. I, p. 2 4.6 cm., 10.5 cm. = 15 .1 cm.
Kollema 3pp. 2 + 85 6.0 cm. + 13.4 cm. = 19.4 cm.
Kollema 4 p. 85, p. 4 1.5 cm., 13.0 cm. = 14.5 cm.
Kollema 5pp. 4 + 83, p. 6 1.8 cm. + 13.4 cm., 0.7 cm. = 15.9 cm.
Kollema 6 pp. 6 + 81 13-5 cm. + 2.5 cm. = 16.0 cm.

Kollema 7 pp. 6 + 81, p. 8 4.3 cm. + 13 1 cm., 1.0 cm. = 18.4 cm.
Kollema 8 pp. 8 + 79 13-4 cm. + 3-5 cm. = 16.9 cm.
Kollema 9 pp. 8 + 79 0.9 cm. + 13 0 cm. = 13-9 cm.
Kollema 10 p. 10 133 cm.
Kollema 1 1 pp. 10 + 77 1-3 cm. + I 3-I cm. = 14.4 cm.
Kollema 12 p. 12 1 3 0 cm.
Kollema 13 pp. 12 + 75 2.2 cm. + 13 0 cm. = 15-2 cm.
Kollema 14 pp. 14 + 73 12.9 cm. + 03 cm. = 13.2 cm.
Kollema 15 pp. 14 + 73 3 1 cm. + 12.9 cm. = 16.0 cm.
Kollema 16 P- 73. P- 16 1.6 cm., 11.6 cm. = 1 3 2 cm.
Kollema 17 pp. 16 + 71 3-9 cm. + 1 3 0 cm. = 16.9 cm.
Kollema 18 P. l8 7-9 cm.
Kollema 19 pp. 1 8 + 6 9 6.9 cm. + 10.0 cm. = 16.9 cm.
Kollema 20 p. 69, p. 20 6.8 cm., 2.7 cm. = 9 5 cm.
Kollema 21 p. 20 + [stub] 11.8 cm. + [5-0 cm.] = 11.8 [16.8] cm.
The total breadth of the twenty-one kollemata of roll one is 320.6 cm.
The average breadth of a kollema is 15.27 cm. Since all the kollemata
except kollema 19 extend to the edge of a sheet and perhaps into the
trim beyond, an indeterminate amount may have been trimmed off
at least one edge. Hence the average breadth of a kollema may
actually have been nearer that of kollema 19, 16.9 cm.
Kolleseis. Roll one contains twenty kolleseis. The kolleseis are
numbered according to the numeration of the two kollemata that
join at the given kollesis. This numeration is followed by the pagina
tion of the two pages on which the beginning and end of the kollesis
are visible, or, if its beginning or end falls between two sheets, then
the page (in parentheses) the kollesis would have reached if it had
extended a bit further. This localization of the kollesis is then fol
lowed by the breadth of the kollesis, which is broken down into its
component parts if it begins on one leaf and ends on another. K ol
leseis are often not exactly vertical; their measurements are taken
at the top margin.
Kollesis 1/2 pp. j /i 2.3 cm.
Kollesis 2/3 p p . 1/2 2.9 cm.
Kollesis 3/4 p. 86, p. (4) 1.5 cm., 0.0 cm. = 1.5 cm.
Kollesis 4/5 PP- 3/4 1.6 cm.
Kollesis 5/6 p. (84), p. 6 0.0 cm., 0.7 cm. = 0.7 cm.
Kollesis 6/7 PP- 5 + 8 i 4.3 cm. + 2.5 cm. = 6.8 cm.
Kollesis 7/8 p. (82), p. 8 0.0 cm., 1.0 cm. = 1.0 cm.
Kollesis 8/9 PP- 7 + 79 0.9 cm. + 3*5 cm. = 4.4 cm.
Kollesis 9/10 p. (80), p. (10) 0.0 cm., 0.0 cm. = 0.0 cm.
Kollesis 10/11 PP- 9 + (77) 1.3 cm. + 0.0 cm. = 1.3 cm.
22 CO D IC O LO G ICA L A N A LY SIS
Kollesis 11/ 12 p. (7 8 ), p. (1 2 ) 0.0 cm., 0.0 cm. = 0.0 cm.

Kollesis 12/13 pp. 11/ 12 2.5 cm.
Kollesis 13/14 p. (7 6 ), p. (i4) 0.0 cm., 0.0 cm. = 0.0 cm.
Kollesis 14/15 p p -1 3 + 73 3 .1 cm. + 0.3 cm. = 3*4 cm.
Kollesis 15/16 p. 7 4 , p. (1 6 ) 1.6 cm., 0.0 cm. = 1.6 cm.
Kollesis 16/17 pp. 1 5 / 1 6 2.7 cm.
Kollesis 17/18 p. (7 2 ), p. (1 8 ) 0.0 cm., 0.0 cm. = 0.0 cm.
Kollesis 18/19 pp. 1 7 / 1 8 2.2 cm.
Kollesis 19/20 pp. 7 0 / 6 9 4.0 cm.
Kollesis 20/21 pp. 1 9 / 2 0 2.1 cm.
e average extant breadth of the twenty kolleseis is 2.05 cm. But

since an indeterminate amount has been trimmed off eight kolleseis
at the edge of the sheets, the average breadth of the twelve kolleseis
not involved in the trimming, 3.39 cm., may be a more accurate
average breadth of the kolleseis. Two kolleseis (5/6 and 7/8) begin in
the trim between sheets (between sheets 3 and 4 and between sheets
4 and 5) and end on the left edge of the higher of the two sheets
(sheets 4 and 5). The extant material measures 0.7 cm. in one case
and 1.0 cm. in the other, an average of 0.85 cm., 2.54 cm. less than
the general average. Unless the average of the two kolleseis was
unusually narrow, the amount of trim would have been an average
of at least 2.56 cm. per sheet or 1.27 cm. per leaf. Two kolleseis (3/4
and 15/16) begin near the right edge of a sheet and end in the trim
before the next sheet begins. Since the extant material measures
1.5 cm. in one case and 1.6 cm. in the other, the two kolleseis must
have been unusually narrow or the amount of trim an average of at
least 0.92 cm. per leaf. Four kolleseis (9/10, 11/12, 13/14 and 17/18)
are completely missing, which suggests that the trim must have
been an average of at least 3.39 cm. per sheet or 1.7 cm. per leaf,
unless the kolleseis were unusually narrow. Such irregularities in the
breadth of the trimming may actually be irregularities in the average
breadth of the kolleseis. But one may also conjecture that in some
cases the stationer, when first cutting the sheets, would, on finding
a kolleseis at the cutting edge, either cut the sheet unusually broad
so that the kollesis would in whole or part be cut away when the
quire was trimmed, or himself cut it away while cutting the roll,
in order to eliminate it or at least relegate it to a margin.
Roll. There are a total of 41.0 extant cm. involved in the over
lap at the kolleseis. When this overlap is subtracted from the total
breadth of the kollemata, 320.6 cm., one reaches a total breadth for
the roll of 279.6 cm. But if one may conjecture that the average
breadth of all the kolleseis was the same as the average breadth of
the twelve that are fully extant, 3.39 cm., then the total breadth of
the twenty kolleseis would rise beyond what is extant to a total of
67.8 cm. This conjectural increase of 26.8 cm. could then be added
to the total breadth of the roll, bringing it to 306.4 cm. Since the
trim of only 8 out of 1 1 sheets is at least partially accounted for in
this increment, the actual breadth of the roll would have been
greater. The total breadth would be even greater if one assumes
that there was a protokollon in the roll that was not employed in
the quire (though it may be extant on the pastedown, which however
is not included in the present calculations, even though its quality is
so comparable to that of the quire as to suggest it could have, as in
Codex VII, been part of the roll). Thus one may conjecture that roll
two originally had a breadth of about three and a quarter meters.
Two rolls. In addition to the striking indications listed above that

there is a shift from one roll to another between the eleventh and
twelfth sheets from the bottom of the stack, the analysis of roll one
provides further indications that sheets one through eleven are in
fact parts of the same roll. It is of course the continuity of horizontal
fibres from one sheet to the next that, when present, provides the
most certainty that the fibres belong to the same kollema and hence
the sheets to the same roll. But there is such continuity in only four
cases, between sheets 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 4 and 5, and 10 and 1 1 , i.e.,
kollemata 2, 5, 7 and 20. In other cases the continuity of the roll
from one sheet to the next may however be inferred. When a kollesis
(koUeseis 3/4 and 15/16) begins near the right edge of a sheet (sheets
2 and 8), but does not continue onto the left edge of the next sheet
above it (sheets 3 and 9), continuity from one sheet to the next
cannot be proven, since the horizontal fibres of the kollema begin
ning at the right edge of sheets 2 and 8 are hidden under the kollema
ending there. One may assume that the next sheet above lacks at
its left edge the rest of the kollesis because the kollesis ended in the
trim between the sheets. The very fact that a kollesis occurs near
the right edge of the sheet suggests that one has not reached the
end of the roll. Similarly when a kollesis (kolleseis 5/6 and 7/8) ends
at the left end of a sheet (sheets 4 and 5), but does not begin at the
right edge of the sheet below, one may assume it begins in the trim
between sheets (between sheets 3 and 4 and between sheets 4 and 5),
rather than assuming that the lack of fibre continuity indicates the
24 CO D IC O LO G ICA L A N A LY SIS
beginning of a new roll. For it would be unlikely that a new roll

would begin with a kollesis, unless the kollesis displayed the reversal
of fibre direction characteristic of a protokollon.
It is when the kollesis is wholly absent and its very existence a
postulate (between sheets 5 and 6, 6 and 7, 7 and 8, and 9 and 10,
i.e., kolleseis 9 /10 ,11/12,13/14 and 17/18) that alternate assumptions
to that of a trimmed-off kollesis should be more seriously considered.
One such assumption might be that the sheets were stacked out of
order. But this is statistically improbable. For this phenomenon is
remarkable rare in the Nag Hammadi codices. Although it may not
be excluded that this may be partly responsible for the difficulty in
analyzing Codex IV, a rearrangement of sheets has actually been
detected only twice, both times in Codex III. A stub and conjugate
leaf (p. 143) from the end of roll one was inserted out of sequence
between sheets 1 (pp. 8 + 145) and 2 (pp. 10 + 141) of roll two.
And a stub and conjugate leaf (p. 129) from the end of roll two was
inserted out of sequence between sheets 1 (pp. [20] + 131) and 2
(pp. 22 + 127) of roll three.
Another assumption might be that one has to do with an isolated
sheet that is not part of a roll, even though composed of more than
a single kollema. This possibility emerges only when both ends of the
sheet lack continuity of horizontal fibres with the next sheets above
and below in the stack of sheets, which is the case with only two
sheets (sheets 6 and 7). In the case of sheet 6, its two kollemata (10
and 11), measuring 13.3 cm. and 14.4 cm. broad, an average of
13.85 cm., would be brought up to the average breadth of a kollema
(15.27 cm., perhaps even 16.9 cm.), if one postulates an average
kollesis (3.39 cm.) trimmed off at the outer edge of the sheet (kollema
10 : [3*39] cm. + I 3-3 cm. = 16.69 cm. >kollema 1 1 : 14.4 + [3.39] =
17.79 cm.). The assumption that a kollesis was trimmed off at the
beginning of kollema 10 is strengthened by reference to kollema 9,
which would be brought up to an average breadth if one postulates
an average kollesis trimmed off at its right edge: 13.9 cm. + [3-39]
cm. = 17.29 cm. Similarly in the case of sheet 7, its two kollemata
(12 and 13), as well as kollema 14 on the left side of sheet 8, fall
below the average breadth of kollemata in this roll, unless one takes
into account the part cut off in the kollesis (kollema 12 :13 .0 cm. +
[3-39] cm. = 16.39 cm.; kollema 13 : 15.2 cm. + [3.39] cm. = 18.59
cm.; kollema 14 :13 .2 cm. + [3.39] cm. = 16.59 cm.). Thus in terms
of the breadth of the kollemata one may well assume that kolleseis
CO D IC O LO G ICA L A N A L Y S IS 25
were trimmed off at the edges of these sheets that otherwise might
have been considered independent sheets, and hence that they may
well belong to roll one, rather than being isolated sheets. The very
fact that each sheet consists of more than one kollema tends to
suggest the sheets are not isolated from a roll, but have been cut
from a roll, and hence most probably from the same roll as the
sheets just above and/or below in the stack.
There would be a further difficulty in considering them as isolated
sheets, since this would imply that the rolls used below and above
in the stack of sheets would be unusually narrow. For then roll one
would consist of only 5, 6 or 7 sheets, followed possibly by one or
two individual sheets, and then by a roll of 3^, 4 J or 5^ sheets,
before reaching the stub conjugate with p. 20. Now this small a
number of sheets may be all that can be cut from a roll when it is
the first or second roll of the broadest or next to the broadest codex
(Codex VII, roll one: 8| sheets [including the pastedown]; then roll
two: sheets; Codex III, roll one: 4% sheets; then roll two: 6
sheets), but not when it is one of the narrower codices (Codex VI,
roll one: 9 sheets; and roll two: 1 1 sheets; Codex IX , roll one:
9 sheets; and roll two: 10 sheets). Codex V is the narrowest codex
(apart from Codex X, which is too fragmentary to provide usable
codicological data, as is also the case with Codex IV, the third from
narrowest codex).
Roll two. Since the kollemata on the right overlap those on the
left, one may assume that the material was rotated 180 in a hori
zontal plane. This must have been done before the roll was cut,
since the sheets as they lie indicate the roll was cut from right to
left. Hence to analyze the roll in the usual position of a roll when
written or read one would need hypothetically to rotate it back 180.
As a result the pages in question have to be envisaged with the
writing upside down, a factor also to be recalled in subsequent ref
erences to right and left. When listed from the beginning of the
roll (the left edge after having been rotated back 180) to the end
(the right edge) and designated by the pagination of the horizontal-
fibre side of the sheets into which the roll was cut, i.e., the upper
or inner surface, the original roll was as follows:
Pp. 67 + 22, pp. 65 + 24, pp. 63 + 26, pp. 61 + 28, pp. 59 + 30,
PP- 57 + 32 , pp. 55 + 34 . PP- 53 + 36, pp- 51 + 38, pp- 49 +
40, pp. 47 + 42, pp. 45 + 44, pp. E + D (the uninscribed sheet
at the top of the stack).
26 CO D IC O LO G ICA L A N A LY S IS
Sheets. The stack of sheets cut from roll two, with the measure
ments of each, is presented in tabular form from top to bottom as
they lay before being folded into the quire.
Sheet 13 PP E + D 11.4 cm. + 11.2 cm. = 22.6 cm.
Sheet 12 PP 45 + 44 11 .5 cm. + 11.0 cm. = 22.5 cm.
Sheet 11 PP 47 + 42 12.4 cm. + 12.2 cm. = 24.6 cm.
Sheet 10 PP 49 + 4 12.3 cm. + 11.9 cm. = 24.2 cm.
Sheet 9 PP 5i + 38 12.5 cm. + 11.9 cm. = 24.4 cm.
Sheet 8 PP 53 + 36 12.9 cm. + 11.7 cm. = 24.6 cm.
Sheet 7 PP 55 + 34 12.6 cm. + 12 .1 cm. == 24.7 cm.
Sheet 6 PP 57 + 32 12.7 cm. + 12 .1 cm. = 24.8 cm.
Sheet 5 PP 59 + 30 12.7 cm. + 12.2 cm. = 24.9 cm.
Sheet 4 PP 61 + 28 13.0 cm. + 12.3 cm. = 25 3 cm.
Sheet 3 PP 63 + 26 12.8 cm. + 12.3 cm. = 25.1 cm.
Sheet 2 PP 65 + 24 12.9 cm. + 12.3 cm. = 25.2 cm.
Sheet 1 PP 67 + 22 10 .1 cm. + 12.4 cm. = 22.5 cm.
one may ignore sheet 1, which is unusually narrow, perhaps as a
result of the protokollon) 24.4 cm. The breadth diminishes 2.6 cm.
as one moves from the bottom to the top of the stack of roll two,
an average of 0.22 cm. per sheet, or 0 .11 cm. per leaf.
Kollemata. Roll two consists of twenty-three kollemata. Their
measurements are presented in a tabular form similar to that of
roll one.
Kollema i P- 67 7.2 cm.

Kollema 2 PP- 67 + 22 5.9 cm. + 12.4 cm. = 18.3 cm.
Kollema 3 pp. 65 + 24 12.9 cm. + 2.5 cm. = 15.4 cm.
Kollema 4 PP- 65 + 24, p. 63 1.3 cm. + 12.3 cm., 3.9 cm. = 17.5 cm.
Kollema 5 PP- 63 + 26 1 1 . 1 cm. + 8.5 cm. = 19.6 cm.
Kollema 6 P- 26, p. 61 5-5 cm., 9.3 cm. = 14.8 cm.
Kollema 8 P- 28, p. 59 3.0 cm., 11.4 cm. = 14.4 cm.
Kollema 9 pp. 59 + 30 4.2 cm. + 12 .1 cm. = 16.3 cm.
Kollema 11 pp. 57 + 32 3.7 cm. + 12 .1 cm. = 15.8 cm.
Kollema 12 P- 32, pp. 55 + 34 1.5 cm., 12.6 cm. + 0.3 cm. = 14.4 cm.
Kollema 13 pp. 55 + 34. p- 53 1.3 cm. + 12 .1 cm., 1.5 cm. = 14.9cm-
Kollema 14 P- 34. pp- 53 + 36 3.8 cm., 12.9 cm. + 3.1 cm. = 19.8 cm.
Kollema 15 P- 36, p. 5 1 11 .3 cm., 3.8 cm. = 15.1 cm.
Kollema 18 pp. 49 + 4 6.3 cm. + 10 .1 cm. == 16.4 cm.
Kollema 19 P- 40, pp. 47 + 42 5.9 cm., 12.4 cm. + 1.9 cm. = 20.2 cm.
CO D ICO LO G ICA L A N A LY SIS 27
Kollema 20 pp. 47 + 42, p.45 2.0 cm. + 11 .2 cm., 2.5 cm. = 15.7 cm.
Kollema 21 pp. 45 + 44 11 .5 cm. + 1.5 cm. = 13.0 cm.
Kollema 22 pp- 45 + 44, p- E 1.0 cm. + n.ocm ., 2.2 cm. = 14.2 cm.
Kollema 23 pp. E + D 11.4 cm. + 11 .2 cm. = 22.6 cm.
The total breadth of the twenty-three kollemata of roll two is 373.5

cm. The average breadth of a kollema (if one may ignore kollema 1,
the protokollon) is 16.65 cm- Since an indeterminate amount has
been trimmed off all kollemata except five (kollemata 5, 7, 9, 16 and
18, measuring 19.6 cm., 17 .1 cm., 16.3 cm., 17.7 cm., and 16.4 cm.)
the average breadth of a kollema may actually have been nearer
their average, 17.4 cm.
Kolleseis. Roll two contains twenty-two kolleseis. The measure
ments of the kolleseis of roll two, presented in tabular form as in
the case of roll one, are as follows :
Kollesis 1/2 p p . 6 8 /7 6 3.0 cm.
Kollesis 2/3 p. ( 2 1 ) , p. ( 6 5 ) 0.0 cm., 0.0 cm. = 0.0 cm.
Kollesis 3/4 pp. 66 + 24 1.3 cm. + 2.5 cm. = 3.8 cm.
Kollesis 4/5 p p . 6 4 /6 3 2.2 cm.
Kollesis 5/6 p p . 2 5 /2 6 1.7 cm.
Kollesis 6/7 pp. 62/61 2.2 cm.
Kollesis 7/8 p p . 2 7 /2 8 1.9 cm.
Kollesis 8/9 p p . 6 0 /5 9 2.9 cm.
Kollesis 9/10 pp. 2 9 / 3 0 2.6 cm.
Kollesis 10/11 p p - 58/57 2.7 cm.
Kollesis 11/12 p- 31. p- (55) 1.5 cm., o.ocm. = 1.5 cm.
Kollesis 12/13 pp- 56 + 34 1.3 cm. + 0.3 cm. = 1.6 cm.
Kollesis 13/14 p- 33, p- 53 3.8 cm., 1.5 cm. = 5-3 cm.
Kollesis 14/15 pp- 35/36 2.7 cm.
Kollesis 15/16 p p - 52/51 3.1 cm.
Kollesis 16/17 p p - 37/38 3.6 cm.
Kollesis 17/18 p p - 50/49 3.1 cm.
Kollesis 18/19 p p . 3 9 / 4 0 4.1 cm.
Kollesis 19/20 pp. 4 8 + 4 2 2.0 cm. + 1.9 cm. = 3.9 cm.
Kollesis 20/21 p. (4 i), p. 45 0.0 cm., 2.5 cm. = 2.5 cm.
Kollesis 21/22 pp. 4 6 + 4 4 1.0 cm. + 1.5 cm. = 2.5 cm.
Kollesis 22/23 PP- (43) + E 0.0 cm. + 2.2 cm. = 2.2 cm.
The average breadth of the twenty-two kolleseis is 2.69 cm. But
since an indeterminate amount has been trimmed off five kolleseis
(2/3, 11/12, 13/14, 20/21 and 22/23) at the edge of the sheets, the
average breadth of the seventeen kolleseis not involved in the trim
ming, 2.8 cm., may be a more accurate average breadth of the
kolleseis. One kollesis (13/14) begins on one sheet and ends on the
next, so that the trim took place near the middle of the kollesis.
Since this kollesis though trimmed is the broadest in the roll (5.3
cm.), it must originally have been unusually broad, even if the trim
was relatively narrow. Two kolleseis (20/21 and 22/23) begin in the
trim between sheets (between sheets 1 1 and 12 and between sheets
12 and 13) and end on the left edge of the higher of the two sheets
(sheets 12 and 13). The extant material measures 2.5 cm. in one case
and 2.2 cm. in the other, an average of 2.35 cm., only 0.45 cm. less
than the general average. Unless the average of the two kolleseis was
unusually broad, the amount of trim would have been an average
of no more than 0.45 cm. per sheet or 0.225 cm- Per leaf- One kollesis
(11/12) begins near the right edge of sheet 6 and ends in the trim
before sheet 7 begins. Since the extant material measures 1.5 cm.,
the amount of trim was about 1.3 cm. per sheet or 0.65 cm. per leaf,
if the kollesis was of average breadth. One kollesis (2/3) is completely
missing, which suggests that the trim must have been as much as
2.8 cm. per sheet or 1.4 cm. per leaf, unless the kollesis was unusually
narrow. Since this kollesis is missing between sheets 1 and 2, it is of
course possible that sheet 1 is a sheet independent of the roll; but
since it begins with a protokollon, it may be assumed to be the
beginning of roll two. Such irregularities in the breadth of the trim
ming may actually be irregularities in the average breadth of the
kolleseis. But one may also conjecture that in some cases the sta
tioner, when first cutting the sheets, would, on finding a kollesis at
the cutting edge, either cut the sheet unusually broad so that the
kollesis would in whole or in part be cut away when the quire was
trimmed, or himself cut it away while cutting the roll, in order to
eliminate it or at least relegate it to a margin. Perhaps in the case
of kollesis 13/14 the kollesis was so broad that the stationer could
not afford the waste of cutting it down, e.g., at least to the breadth
of the margin. Or this may be an indication that the stationer did
not seek to discard kolleseis.
Roll. There are a total of 59.1 extant cm. involved in the overlap
at the kolleseis. When this overlap is subtracted from the total
breadth of the kollemata, 373.5 cm., one reaches a total breadth for
the roll of 314.4 cm. But if one may conjecture that the average
breadth of all the kolleseis was the same as the average breadth of
the seventeen that are fully extant, 2.8 cm., then the total breadth
of the twenty-two kolleseis would rise beyond what is extant to a
total of 61.6 cm. This conjectural increase of 2.5 cm. could then be
added to the total breadth of the roll, bringing it to 316.9 cm. Since
the trim of only 5 out of 13 sheets is at least partially accounted for

in this increment, the actual breadth of the roll would have been
greater. Thus one may conjecture that roll two originally had a
breadth of about three and a quarter meters.
Summary. When the data for the two rolls of Codex V are com
bined, one reaches the following conclusions:
The average breadth of the sheets (if one may ignore the half
sheet plus stub of roll one and the unusually narrow sheet with the
protokollon of roll two) is 25.3 cm. The breadth diminishes 4.5 cm.
as one moves from the bottom to the top of the stack, an average
of 0.2 cm. per sheet or 0.1 cm. per leaf.
Both rolls made use of rather narrow kollemata, averaging 15.27
cm. and (if one may ignore the protokollon) 16.65 cm., a general
average of 15.97 cm. Such narrow kollemata are familiar to papyro-
logy, in contrast to the broad kollemata occurring in the Nag Ham
madi codices (except Codices IV and V and roll four of Codex VIII)
and BG. The correlation of exclusively narrow kollemata with the
sub-group of covers where the hide is too narrow to produce a flap
suggests economy. In the case of Codex V, the use of a protokollon
(as in the case of Codex VIII) and the relatively poor quality of the
papyrus add to this impression.
The two rolls of io | and 13 sheets measure 279.6 cm. and 314.4
cm. respectively, a total of 594.0 cm., an average of 297.0 cm. per roll.
If one were to assume all sheets were cut of equal breadth, namely
that of the bottom sheet of the stack (flyleaves B + I), estimated
to have been 27.1 cm. broad, one would postulate the rolls were
289.55 cm. and 349.6 cm. broad, a total breadth of 639.15 cm., an av
erage of 319.58 cm. per roll. There would thus have been an additional
and unnecessary waste of 45.15 cm., if the sheets were cut to a stan
dard breadth rather than progressively narrower. This would seem
to suggest that in fact the sheets were not cut to a standard breadth.
These measurements do not include the indeterminate amounts
discarded by the stationer in cutting the rolls or trimmed off in
justifying the leading edge of the folded quire. When the assumption
is made that the kolleseis that are not fully extant are of the same
breadth as those that are fully extant, the breadth of the rolls
becomes 306.4 cm. and 319.9 cm., a total of 626.3 cm., an average
3I3-I5 cm- per roll. The divergence in the breadth of the two
rolls may be due in part to the fact that use is made of the proto-
30 CO D ICO LO G ICA L A N A LY S IS
kollon of roll two (7.2 extant cm. broad), whereas that of roll one is not
used. If the approximate amount of trim that is perhaps to be inferred
in the instances of a kollesis at an edge is extended to the sheets with
out a kollesis at the edge and a frotokollon is postulated for roll one,
the breadth of each roll becomes about three meters and a quarter.
In sum, from two rolls a one-quire codex of 24 sheets (or 23 sheets
and 1 half-sheet plus stub), 47 leaves, or 94 pages was made.
D. Codex V I
The sheepskin cover of Codex VI is part of a sub-group among the
eleven extant Nag Hammadi covers, to which Codices IX, X and to
a lesser extent II also belong. For details concerning the cover of
Codex VI, see Robinson et al., Facsimile Edition: Codex VI, p.ix
and plates 1-4.
The single quire of Codex VI, which reaches a height of 27.9 cm.,
seems to have been constructed from two rolls. This is a reasonable
conjecture since the lack of continuity of horizontal fibres between
the ninth and tenth sheets from the bottom of the stack occurs
where one might, on the analogy of other codices such as Codex V,
expect to find the transition from one roll to another. The detailed
analysis will tend to provide some support for this working hypo
thesis.
Each of the two rolls used to produce the sheets of the quire of
Codex VI conforms to the usual practice in the Nag Hammadi
codices. Since the kollesis present the left-hand kollema overlapping
the right-hand kollema, one may assume that the rolls when cut lay
open with the horizontal fibres facing upward in the usual writing
position, i.e., with the protokollon at the left end. The left edge of
one sheet has continuity of horizontal fibres with the right edge of
the next sheet above it in the stack. Hence, one may assume that
the rolls were cut from right to left and the sheets stacked one on
top of the other in the order in which they were cut. The first roll,
comprising the lower part of the stack of sheets, or, when folded,
the outer part of the quire, produced nine sheets. The second roll,
comprising the upper part of the stack of sheets, or, when folded,
the inner part of the quire, produced eleven. The minor variations
in alignment as the fibres on one sheet are continued on the next
sheet are about the same at the top of the stack as they are at the
bottom, suggesting that about the same amount of papyrus is mis
sing between sheets due to the trimming when the leading edge of
the folded quire was justified. Hence one may conjecture that when
the rolls were cut the sheets were cut progressively narrower, in
anticipation of the narrowing effect of trimming the leading edges
to make them flush once the quire was folded. This tends to be
confirmed by data presented below. In any case the measurements
below do not include the indeterminate amount trimmed off or the
indeterminate amount that may not have been used at one or both
ends of the rolls.
Roll one. When listed from the beginning of the roll (the left
edge) to the end (the right edge) and designated by the pagina
tion of the horizontal-fibre side of the sheets into which the roll
was cut, i.e., the upper or inner surface, the original roll was as
follows:
Pp. 16 + 61, pp. 14 + 63, pp. 12 + 65, pp. 10 + 67, pp. 8 + 69,
pp. 6 + 71, pp. 4 + 73, pp. 2 + 75, pp. [BJ + 77.
Sheets. Measurements of the sheets of Codex VI were made in

the same way as in the case of Codex V. But the relative intactness
of Codex VI permits measurements having relatively few uncer
tainties and indeterminate factors.
The stack of sheets cut from roll one, with the measurements of
each, is presented in tabular form from top to bottom as they lay
before being folded into the quire.
Sheet 9 pp. 16 + 61 14.6 cm. + 14.2 cm. = 28.8 cm.
Sheet 8 pp. 14 + 63 14.7 cm. + 14.2 cm. = 28.9 cm.
Sheet 7 pp. 12 + 65 14.8 cm. + 14 .3 cm. = 29.1 cm.
Sheet 6 pp. 10 + 67 14.5 cm. + 14.4 cm. = 28.9 cm.
Sheet 5 pp. 8 + 69 14.7 cm. + 14.4 cm. = 29.1 cm.
Sheet 4 pp. 6 + 71 14.8 cm. + 14.5 cm. = 29.3 cm.
Sheet 3 PP- 4 + 73 14.7 cm. + 14.6 cm. = 29.3 cm.
Sheet 2 PP- 2 + 75 14.6 cm. + 14.7 cm. = 29.3 cm.
Sheet 1 pp. [B ] + 77 [14.7] cm. + 14.6 cm. = 29.3 cm.
The total breadth of the sheets is hence 262.0 cm., the average
29.11 cm. The breadth diminishes 0.5 cm. as one moves from the
bottom to the top of the stack, an average of 0.055 cm- Per sheet or
0.03 cm. per leaf.
Kollemata. Roll one consists of three kollemata. Their measure
ments are presented in tabular form below, much as in the case of
Codex V above.
Kollema i : pp. 16 + 61, pp. 14 + 63, pp. 12 + 65, pp. 10 + 67,

p. 8
14.6cm. + 14.2 cm., 14.7 cm. + 14.2 cm., 14.8 cm.-f-
14.3 cm., 14.5 cm. + 14.4 cm., 5.1 cm. = 120.8 cm.
Kollema 2: pp. 8 + 69, pp. 6 + 71, pp. 4 + 73, pp. 2 + 75, pp.
[B1 + 77
13.5 cm. + 14.4 cm., 14.5 cm. + 14-5 cm., 14.7 cm. +
14.6 cm., 14.6 cm. + 14.7 cm., [14.7] cm. + 0.2 cm.
= 130.7 cm.
Kollema 3: pp. [B] + 77
[3.7] cm. + 14-6 cm. = 18.3 cm.
(The beginning of kollema 3 on the front flyleaf [B] can only be

estimated, see under kolleseis below). The total breadth of the three
kollemata is 269.8 cm. Kollemata 1 and 2 are of comparable breadth,
an average of 125.75 cm., similar in breadth to those of BG, whereas
kollema 3, 18.3 cm., is comparable in breadth to the kollemata of
Codex V.
Kolleseis. Roll one contains two kolleseis. The kollesis joining
kollemata 1 and 2 on pp. 7/8 is 3.9 cm. broad. The kollesis joining
kollemata 2 and 3 is extant for only 0.2 cm. on p. 77, but if one may
assume its breadth to have been the same as that of kollesis 1/2,
then as much as 3.7 cm. is missing both from kollesis 2/3 and from
kollemata 2 and 3, distributed in an indeterminate way between the
front flyleaf [A] and the trim.
Roll. When the overlap of the two kolleseis, up to 7.8 cm., is sub
tracted from the total breadth of the three kollemata, 269.8 cm., one
reaches a total breadth for the roll of 262.0 cm. Since the trim is not
included, the actual breadth of the roll would have been somewhat
greater. The total breadth would be even greater if one assumes that
there was a frotokollon in the roll that was not employed in the
quire. Thus one may conjecture that roll one originally had a breadth
of about three meters.
Two rolls. The similarity of the breadth of roll one to the breadth
of roll two and to that of the rolls of Codex V and BG is not the
only indication that a shift from roll one to roll two takes place
between sheets 9 and 10, rather than there having been a kollesis
lost in the trim between the sheets. For it is probable that the nar
row kollemata were added at the end of the roll to approximate more
C O D IC O LO G ICA L A N A LY S IS 35
closely a standard breadth, rather than having been added toward

the middle of the roll. But if there is not a shift between rolls at this
juncture, the next two kollemata, designated below as kollemata 3
and 4 of roll two, though narrow, would occur near the middle of
the unusually broad single roll that would then have to be postu
lated for Codex VI. Although this is of course possible, it seems more
reasonable to assume that there were two rolls of similar breadth
each ending with one or two narrow kollemata to bring the breadth
up to something approaching a standardized breadth.
Roll two. When listed from the beginning of the roll (the left edge)
to the end (the right edge), the original roll was as follows:
Pp- 38 + 39. PP- 36 + 41 . PP- 34 + 43. PP- 32 + 45, PP- 30 + 47,
pp. 28 + 49, pp. 26 + 51, pp. 24 + 53, pp. 22 + 55, pp. 20 +
57, pp. 18 + 59.
Sheet 11 p p - 38 + 39 13.2 cm. + 13.6 cm. = 26.8 cm.
Sheet 10 pp. 36 + 41 13.8 cm. + 13.6 cm. = 27.4 cm.
Sheet 9 PP- 34 + 43 13.9 cm. + 13.7 cm. = 27.6 cm.
Sheet 8 pp. 32 + 45 13.9 cm. + 13.8 cm. = 27.7 cm.
Sheet 7 pp. 30 + 47 13.9 cm. + 13.9 cm. = 27.8 cm.
Sheet 6 pp. 28 + 49 14 .1 cm. + 13.9 cm. = 28.0 cm.
Sheet 5 pp. 26 + 51 14.2 cm. + 14.0 cm. = 28.2 cm.
Sheet 4 pp. 24 + 53 14.2 cm. + 14.0 cm. = 28.2 cm.
Sheet 3 pp. 22 + 55 14.3 cm. + 14.0 cm. = 28.3 cm.
Sheet 2 pp. 20 + 57 14.5 cm. + 13.9 cm. = 28.4 cm.
Sheet 1 pp. 18 + 59 14.5 cm. + 14.0 cm. = 28.5 cm.
The total breadth of the sheets is hence 306.9 cm., the average 27.9
cm. The breadth diminishes 1.7 cm. as one moves from the bottom to
the top of the stack, an average of 0.15 cm. per sheet or 0.08 cm. per
leaf.
Kollemata. Roll two consists of four kollemata.Their measure
ments are presented in tabular form below.
Kollema 1 : pp. 38 + 39, pp. 36 + 41, pp. 34 + 43, pp. 32 + 45,
pp. 30 + 47
13.2 cm. + 13.6 cm., 13.8 cm. + 13.6 cm., 13.9 cm. +
13.7 cm., 13.9 cm. + 13.8 cm., 13.9 cm. + 11.9 cm.
= 135.3 cm.
3
34 CO D ICO LO G ICA L A N A LY SIS
Kollema 2; p. 47, pp. 28 + 49, pp. 26 + 51, pp. 24 + 53, pp. 22

+ 55, PP- 20 + 57
5.2 cm., 14.1 cm. + 13.9 cm., 14.2 cm. -f 14.0 cm.,
14.2 cm. + 14.0 cm., 14.3 cm. + 14.0 cm., 14.5 cm.
+ 2.5 cm. = 134.9 cm-
Kollema 3: pp. 20 + 57, p. 18
1.5 cm. + 13.9 cm., 12.4 cm. = 27.8 cm.
Kollema 4: pp. 18 + 59
4.6 cm. + 14.0 cm. = 18.6 cm.
The total breadth of the four kollemata of roll two is 316.6 cm.
Kollemata 1 and 2 are of comparable breadth, an average of 135.1
cm., similar in breadth to those of BG, whereas kollemata 3 and 4
are of comparable breadth, an average of 23.2 cm., similar in
breadth to those of Codex V.
Kolleseis. Roll two contains three kolleseis. The measurements of
the kolleseis of roll two, presented in tabular form as in the case of
Codex V, are as follows:
Kollesis 2/3 pp. 19 + 57 1.5 cm. + 2.5 cm = 4.0 cm.
The average breadth of the three kolleseis is 3.23 cm.
Roll. When the total extant overlap at the kolleseis, 9.7 cm., is
subtracted from the total breadth of the kollemata, 316.6 cm., one
greater. The total breadth would have been even greater if one
assumes that there was a j>votokollon in the roll that was not em
ployed in the quire. Thus one may conjecture that roll two originally
had a breadth of about three and a quarter meters.
Summary. When the data for the two rolls of Codex VI are com
bined, one reaches the following conclusions:
The average breadth of the sheets is 28.4 cm. The breadth di
minishes 2.5 cm. as one moves from the bottom to the top of the
stack, an average of 0.12 cm. per sheet or 0.06 cm. per leaf.
Both rolls made use of rather broad kollemata, averaging at least
125.75 cm. and 138.1 cm., a general average of at least 131.9 cm.,
comparable in breadth to the broad kollemata present in all the rolls
of BG and all the Nag Hammadi rolls except those of Codices IV

and V and roll four of Codex V III. There is one narrow kollema in
roll one, 18.3 cm., and two narrow kollemata in roll two, averaging
23.2 cm., a general average of 21.57 cm., comparable in breadth to
those of Codex V. This suggests that there are kollemata of two
rather standard breadths, one around 10-30 cm., the other around
125-140 cm. Although there are rolls made exclusively of the narrow
(Codex V) or the broad (BG) kollemata, the two sizes can be mixed,
with the narrow kollemata being added at the end of the roll perhaps
to approximate by small increments a standardized breadth.
The two rolls of 9 and 1 1 sheets measure 262.0 cm. and 306.9 cm.,
a total breadth of 568.9 cm., an average of 284.45 cm. The divergence
in breadth between the two rolls of Codex VI is due primarily to the
absence in roll one of a kollema comparable to kollema 3 of roll two
(27.8 cm.), i.e., to the presence of two, rather than just one, supple
mentary kollemata in roll two.
that of the bottom sheet of the stack (pp. [B]-77), 29.3 cm. broad,
one would postulate the rolls were 263.7 cm. and 322.3 cm. broad, a
total breadth of 586.0 cm., an average of 293.0 cm. There would thus
have been an additional and unnecessary waste of 17 .1 cm., if the
sheets were cut to a standard breadth rather than progressively
narrower. This would seem to confirm the suggestion made above
that in fact the sheets were not cut to a standard breadth.
justifying the leading edge of the folded quire. When such material
is taken into account, one could think of rolls about three meters
and three-and-a-quarter meters in breadth.
In sum, from two rolls a one-quire codex of 20 sheets, 40 leaves,
or 80 pages was made.
Although the measurements made for Codices V and VI may in

some cases be imprecise by a few millimeters, and some conceptual
uncertainties remain, the basic picture seems to be clear. In each
case the codex was constructed of two three-meter or three-and-a-
quarter-meter rolls. The fact that Codex V has 23 sheets and Codex
VI only 20 is due primarily to the fact that the sheets of Codex V
are narrower than those of Codex VI. The basic difference between
the rolls used in the two codices is that the rolls of Codex V consist
exclusively of narrow kollemata, whereas those of Codex VI consist

primarily of wide kollemata. This divergence in kind of kollemata
corresponds to the poorer quality of the papyrus of Codex V, its use
of a protokollon and a stub, and its belonging to a sub-group of
codices with covers made from skins too small to include a flap, in
each of which aspects Codex VI seems to reflect a higher quality.
E. Papyrus Berolinensis 8502
The cover of BG is not extant. To judge by the sheets, it must
have been about 13.5 cm. high and 21.6 cm. broad when open.
The single quire of BG, which reaches a height of 13.5 cm., was
constructed from three rolls. Roll one comprises the lower part of
the stack of sheets, or, when folded, the outer part of the quire,
roll two the middle part of the stack of sheets, or, when folded, the
central part of each half of the quire, and roll three the top part of
the stack of sheets, or, when folded, the inner part of the quire. The
construction of the quire diverges from the usual practice in the
Nag Hammadi codices but does conform to the practice in roll one
of Codex VII, where there are two irregularities that in a sense
compensate for each other. First, there is continuity of horizontal
fibres from the right edge of one sheet to the left edge of the next
sheet above it in the stack of sheets that, when folded, forms the
quire. This seems at first glance to indicate that the opened roll was
cut from left to right. This is the reverse of the usual pattern in the
Nag Hammadi codices, where the left edge of one sheet joins the
right edge of the sheet above it, leading to the assumption the rolls
were usually cut from right to left. Furthermore it is the usual
practice at the kolleseis that the left-hand kollema overlaps the right-
hand kollema, so that one may assume the rolls, when cut, lay un
rolled in the usual writing position with the protokollon at the left
end. But in the case of roll one of Codex VII and all three rolls of
BG, the right-hand kollema overlaps the left-hand kollema. Both
irregularities can be adequately understood by assuming the roll
was laid out in the usual writing position and was cut from right to
left, after which the stack was rotated horizontally 180, thus pro
ducing the secondary appearance of having been cut from left to
right. In this way one can interpret the construction of the quire in
BG as but a minor variation from the usual practice in the Nag
Hammadi codices, a variation attested once in the Nag Hammadi
codices.
There is a half-sheet plus stub at one end of each of the three rolls
of BG. There are also twelve half-sheets plus stub in the Nag
Hammadi codices. In the case of rolls one and two of BG, the half
sheet plus stub is the last sheet cut, indicating that at the conclusion
of the cutting process there was not enough papyrus left to produce
a whole sheet. Similarly there are eight half-sheets plus stub at the
conclusion of the cutting process in Nag Hammadi codices: III, roll
one; III, roll two; V, roll one; VII, roll one; VII, roll two; VIII,
roll one; VIII, roll two; XI, roll one. But in the case of roll three
of BG the half-sheet plus stub is the first sheet cut, suggesting that
the stationer must have calculated the measurements of the sheets
before cutting and hence anticipated the problem by beginning the
cutting process with the half-sheet plus stub. Similarly there are
three stubs at the beginning of the cutting process in Nag Hammadi
codices: I, rolls one and three; II, roll one; VII, roll three. Since
both BG, roll three and II, roll one present the unusual practise of
the right-hand kollema overlapping the left-hand kollema as well as
the unusual practise of continuity of horizontal fibres from the right
edge of one sheet to the left edge of the next sheet above it, one may
assume some deviation from the usual position in which the material
lay. The stationer would have followed the usual practise of cutting
from right to left and cutting the half-sheet plus stub last if he had
first turned the roll over from top to bottom so that it lay open
with the vertical fibres facing upward, cut from right to left, and
then turned the stack of sheets back over from side to side. But in
the other two instances (I, roll one, and VII, roll three), it is easiest
to assume the usual procedure, since they present the usual position
with the left-hand kollema overlapping the right-hand kollema and
continuity of horizontal fibres from the left edge of one sheet to the
right edge of the next sheet above it. In these two cases the stationer
must have calculated in advance the measurements and begun by
cutting the half-sheet plus stub; therefore he could also have begun
by cutting the half-sheet plus stub in the other two cases, thus
making the conjecture of the more complicated cutting procedure
with vertical fibres facing upward unnecessary.
Roll one produced at least sheets. The lowest complete sheet
in the stack is pp. 8 + 139; the lowest leaf is p. 141, conjugate with
the missing p. 6. It is indeterminate how many sheets were still
lower in the stack, although one may conjecture two sheets [4] + [a
first back flyleaf A], and [2] + [a second back flyleaf C], on the
basis of the pagination; whether there were one or more front fly.
leaves and conjugate back flyleaves (conjectured by Schenke, in
analogy to the Achmimic Proverbs codex, to have been used as the
pastedown and perhaps even cartonnage) remains too uncertain for
statistics to be based on that possibility, even though the conjec
turing of three further sheets would more nearly standardize the
breadth of the kollemata and rolls. Roll two produced 12 sheets,
roll three 14J sheets. In view of this trend, also found in the Nag
Hammadi codices, to derive increasing numbers of sheets from the
rolls as one moves from the bottom to the top of the stack of sheets,
one must either assume that increasingly broad rolls were usually
employed, for which no practical value is apparent, or that, as seems
to be the case in Codices V and VI (see above), the sheets were cut
progressively narrower, which seems reasonable as an economy
measure in anticipation of the fact that, once the quire is folded and
the leading edge cut flush, the inner leaves of the quire will in fact
be narrower than the outer leaves. In any case, the measurements
below do not include the indeterminate amount trimmed off when
justifying the leading edge of the folded quire, nor what may have
been cut off by the stationer to eliminate part of a kollesis (p. 8) or
discarded at one or both ends of the roll (e.g., no protokkollon was
used in the quire). In view of the fact that kolleseis are often not
exactly vertical, the policy adopted is to derive the measurements
from the top of the sheet. The sheets of BG are conserved leaf by
leaf; at times part of the inner margin of one leaf is actually con
served with the conjugate leaf. However the measurements are in
terms of the original center of the sheets, irrespective of the point
at which they may have broken into individual leaves. When a leaf
or stub is missing, it is listed in square brackets [ ], as are its
measurements, inferred from the preceding and succeeding sheets
in the case of a missing leaf, or in terms of the average of the extant
stubs in the case of a missing stub. By including such non-extant
material in the measurements, the averages and other generaliza
tions will be protected from arbitrary distortion and can be con
sidered reliable with a fluctuation of no more than a millimeter orso.
Roll one. Since the kollemata on the right overlap those on the
left, one may assume that the roll was rotated 180 in a horizontal
plane. Hence, to analyze the roll in the usual position of a roll when
written or read, one would need hypothetically to rotate it back
i8o. As a result the pages in question have to be envisaged with the

writing upside down, a factor also to be recalled in subsequent refer
ences to right and left. When listed from the beginning of the roll
(the left edge, after having been rotated back i8o) to the end (the
right edge) and designated by the pagination of the horizontal-fibre
side of the sheets into which the roll was cut, i.e., the upper or inner
surface, the original roll was as follows:
Stub + p. 20, pp. 129 + 18, pp. 131 + 16, pp. [133] + [14], pp.
135 + [12], pp. 137 + 10. PP- 139 + 8, pp. 141 + [6], back fly
leaf [A] + p. [4], back flyleaf [C] + p. [2].
Sheets. The stack of sheets cut from roll one, with the measure
Sheet 10 stub + p. 20 1.2 cm. + 10.6 cm. = 11.8 cm.
Sheet 9 pp. 129 + 18 10.5 cm. + n .o cm. = 21.5 cm.
Sheet 8 pp. 13 1 + 16 10.5 cm. + 10.9 cm. = 21.4 cm.
Sheet 7 pp. [133] + [14] [10.6] cm. + [10.8] cm. = [21.4] cm.
Sheet 6 pp. 135 + [12] 10.6 cm. + [10.8] cm. = 21.4 cm.
Sheet 5 pp. 137 + 10 10.7 cm. + 10.7 cm. = 21.4 cm.
Sheet 4 pp. 139 + 8 10.6 cm. + 10.8 cm. = 21.4 cm.
Sheet 3 pp. 141 + [6] 10.7 cm. + [10.8] cm. = 21.5 cm.
Sheet 2 back flyleaf [A] + p. [4] [10.8] cm. + [10.8] cm. = [21.6] cm.
Sheet 1 back flyleaf [C] + p. [2] [10.8] cm. + [10.8] cm. = [21.6] cm.
one may ignore the half-sheet plus stub) 21.47 cm. The breadth
diminishes 0.1 cm. from the highest complete sheet to the lowest
as one moves from the top to the bottom of the stack, an average
of o.on cm. per sheet or 0.005 cm- Per leaf-
Kollemata. Roll one consists of two kollemata. Their measure
ments are presented in tabular form below, much as in the case of
Codex V above.
Kollema 1: stub + 20, pp. 129 + 18, pp. 131 + 16, pp. [133] +
[14], pp. 135 + [12], pp. 137 + 10, pp. 139 + 8
1.2 cm. + 10.6 cm., 10.5 cm + H-O cm., 10.5 cm. +
10.9cm., [10.6] cm. + [10.8] cm., 10.6 cm. + [10.8]
cm., 10.7 cm. + 10.7 cm., 10.6 cm. + 10.8 cm. =
140.3 cm.
Kollema 2: p. 8, pp. 141 + [6], pp. [A] + [4], pp. [C] + [2]
1.3 cm., 10.7 cm. + [10.8] cm., [10.8] cm. + [10.8] cm.,
[10.8] cm. 4- [10.8] cm. = 66.0 cm.
The total breadth of the two kollemata of roll one is 206.3 cm., the
average 103.15 cm. If there were, e.g., three further missing un
inscribed sheets at the bottom of the stack, the breadth of kollema 2
would have been doubled, bringing it nearer to that of the other
kollemata of BG.
Kolleseis. The only kollesis in roll one, on pp. 7/8, measures 1.3
cm. Since the kolleseis in the other rolls have an average breadth of
3.3 cm. and the kollesis in roll one ends at the right edge of the sheet,
it may have been broader. For some must have been trimmed off
when the quire was folded and trimmed flush with the leading edge
of the cover, and some may have been intentionally removed as
undesirable by the stationer when cutting the roll.
Roll. When the extant overlap at the kollesis (1.3 cm.) is sub
tracted from the total breadth of the two kollemata (206.3 cm.), one
greater. The total breadth would have been even greater if one
assumes that there was a protokollon in the roll that was not em
ployed in the quire. Thus one may conjecture that roll one originally
had a breadth of about two and a quarter meters, unless there were
further missing uninscribed sheets that would make roll one similar
in breadth to rolls two and three.
Roll two. Since the kollemata on the right overlap those on the
1800. As a result the pages in question have to be envisaged with
the writing upside down, a factor also to be recalled in subsequent
references to right and left. When listed from the beginning of the
roll (the left edge, after having been rotated back 180) to the end
fibre side of the sheets into which the roll was cut, i.e., the upper
or inner surface, the original roll was as follows:
[Stub] + p. 46, pp. 105 + 44, pp. 107 + 42, pp. 109 + 40. PP-111
+ 38, pp. 113 + 36, pp. 115 + 34, pp. 117 + 32, pp. 119 + 30,
pp. 121 + 28, pp. 123 + 26, pp. 125 + 24, pp. 127 + 22.
they lay before being folded into the quire. Measurements of sheets
lacking an edge are given twice, first the extant breadth, then in
square brackets the original breadth, inferred from the preceding
and succeeding sheets, to be used in calculating averages and other
generalizations.
Sheet 13 [stub] + P- 46 [1.0] cm. + 10.3 cm. = 11.3 cm.
Sheet 12 PP 105 + 44 10.3 cm. + 10.2 cm. = 20.5 cm.
Sheet 11 PP 107 + 42 10.2 cm. + 10.2 cm. = 20.4 cm.
Sheet 10 PP 109 + 40 10.2 cm. + 10.4 cm. = 20.6 cm.
Sheet 9 PP h i + 38 10.3 cm. + 10.4 cm. = 20.7 cm.
Sheet 8 PP 113 + 36 10.5 cm. + 10.4 cm. = 20.9 cm.
Sheet 7 PP 115 + 34 10.5 cm. + 10.5 cm. = 21.0 cm.
Sheet 6 PP 117 + 32 10.5 cm. + 10.5 cm. = 21.0 cm.
Sheet 5 PP 119 + 30 9.6 [10.5] cm- + IO-5 cm.= 20.1 or 21.0 cm.
Sheet 4 PP 12 1 + 28 9.6 [10.5] cm. + 10.6 cm.= 20.2 or 2 1.1 cm.
Sheet 3 PP 123 + 26 9.8 [10.5] cm. + 10.6 cm.= 20.4 or 2 1.1 cm.
Sheet 2 PP 125 + 24 9.8 [10.5] cm. + 10.6 cm.= 20.4 or 2 1.1 cm.
Sheet 1 PP 127 + 22 10.5 cm. + 10.6 cm. = 2 1.1 cm.
The total original breadth of the sheets is hence 261.8 cm., the
average (if one may ignore the half-sheet plus stub) 21.82 cm. The
breadth diminishes 0.6 cm. as one moves from the bottom to the
top of the stack, an average of 0.05 cm. per sheet or 0.025 cm. per
leaf.
Kollemata. Roll two consists of two kollemata. Their measure
ments are presented in a tabular form similar to that of roll one.
Kollema 1: [stub] + p. 46, pp. 105 + 44, pp. 107 + 42, pp. 109 +
40, pp. h i -(- 38, pp. 113 + 36, pp. 115 + 34, pp.
117
[1.0] cm. + 10.3 cm., 10.3 cm. + 10.2 cm., 10.2 cm. +
10.2 cm., 10.2 cm. + 10.4 cm., 10.3 cm. + 10.4 cm.,
10.5 cm. + 10.4 cm., 10.5 cm. + 10.5 cm., 8.6 cm.
= 143.8 cm.
Kollema 2: pp. 117 + 32, pp. 119 + 30, pp. 121 + 28, pp. 123 +
26, pp. 125 + 24, pp. 127 + 22
5.4 cm. + 10.5 cm., [10.5 ]cm. + 10.5 cm., [10.5] cm.
+ 10.6 cm., [10.5] cm. + 10.6 cm., [10.5] cm. + 10.6
cm., 10.5 cm. + 10.6 cm. - 121.3 cm.
The total breadth of the two kollemata of roll two is 265.1 cm. The
average breadth of a kollema is 132.55 cm.
Kollesis. The only kollesis in roll two, on pp. 118/117, measures
3-5 cm.
Roll. When the overlap at the kollesis (3.5 cm.) is subtracted from
the total breadth of the two kollemata (265.1 cm.), one reaches a
total breadth for the roll of 261.6 cm. Since the trim is not included,
the actual breadth of the roll would have been somewhat greater.
The total breadth would have been even greater if one assumes that
there was a protokollon in the roll that was not employed in the
quire. Thus one may conjecture that roll two originally had a breadth
approaching three meters.
Roll three. Since the kollemata on the right overlap those on the
180. As a result the pages in question have to be envisaged with the
writing upside down, a factor also to be recalled in subsequent re
ferences to right and left. When listed from the beginning of the
roll (the left edge, after having been rotated back 180) to the end
fibre side of the sheets into which the roll was cut, i.e. the upper or
inner surface, the original roll was as follows:
77 + 76PP- 79 + 74, PP- 81 + 72, pp. 83 + 70, pp. 85 + 68,
p P-
pp. 87 + 66, pp. 89 + 64, pp. 91 + 62, pp. 93 -1- 60, pp. 95 +
58, pp. 97 + 56, pp. 99 + 54, pp. 101 + 52, pp. 103 + 50, stub
+ p. 48.
Sheets. The stack of sheets into which roll three was cut, with
the measurements of each, is presented in tabular form from top to
bottom as they lay before being folded into the quire.
Sheet 15 PP- 77 + 76 9.4 cm. + 9*5 cm. = 18.9 cm.
Sheet 14 PP- 79 + 74 9.5 cm. + 9.6 cm. = 19.1 cm.
Sheet 13 pp. 81 + 72 9.6 cm. + 9.8 cm. = 19.4 cm.
Sheet 12 PP- 83 + 70 9.6 cm. + 9.8 cm. = 19.4 cm.
Sheet 11 pp. 85 + 68 9.7 cm. + 9.8 cm. = 19.5 cm.
Sheet 10 PP- 87 + 66 9.8 cm. + 9.8 cm. = 19.6 cm.
Sheet 9 pp. 89 + 64 9.8 cm. + 9.9 cm. = 19.7 cm.
Sheet 8 PP- 91 + 62 9.9 cm. + 9.9 cm. = 19.8 cm.
Sheet 7 pp. 93 + 60 9.9 cm. + 10.1 cm. = 20.0 cm.
Sheet 6 pp. 95 + 58 9.8 cm. + 10.1 cm. = 19.9 cm.
Sheet 5 pp. 97 + 56 10.1 cm. + 10.1 cm. = 20.2 cm.
Sheet 4 pp. 99 + 54 10.1 cm. + 10.1 cm. = 20.2 cm.
Sheet 3 pp. 101 + 52 10.2 cm. + 10.1 cm. = 20.3 cm.
Sheet 2 pp. 103 + 50 10.2 cm. + 10.1 cm. = 20.3 cm.
Sheet 1 stub + p. 48 0.8 cm. + 10.2 cm. = 11.0 cm.
one may ignore the half-sheet plus stub) 19.81 cm. The breadth
diminishes 1.4 cm. as one moves from the bottom to the top of the
stack, an average of 0.1 cm. per sheet or 0.05 cm. per leaf.
Kollemata. Roll three consists of two kollemata. Their measure
ments are presented in a tabular form similar to that of roll one.
Kollema 1: pp. 77 + 76, pp. 79 + 74, pp. 81 + 72, pp. 83 + 70,
pp. 85 + 68, pp. 87 + 66, pp. 89 + 64, pp. 91 + 62
9.4 cm. + 9.5 cm., 9.5 cm. + 9.6 cm., 9.6 cm. + 9.8
cm., 9.6 cm. + 9.8 cm., 9.7 cm. + 9-8 cm., 9.8 cm.
+ 9.8 cm., 9.8 cm. + 9.9 cm., 9.9 cm. + 8.4 cm. =
153.9 cm.
Kollema 2: p. 62, pp. 93 + 60, pp. 95 + 68, pp. 97 + 56, pp. 99 +
54, pp. 101 + 52, pp. 103 + 50, stub + p. 48
4.6 cm., 9.9 cm. + 10.1 cm., 9.8 cm. + 10.1 cm., 10.1
cm. + 10.1 cm., 10.1 cm. + 10.1 cm., 10.2 cm. +
10.1 cm., 10.2 cm. + 10.1 cm., 0.8 cm. + 10.2 cm.
= 136.5 cm.
The total breadth of the two kollemata of roll three is 290.4 cm., the
average 145.4 cm.
Kollesis. The only kollesis in roll three, on pp. 61/62, measures
3.1 cm.
Roll. When the overlap of the kollesis (3.1 cm.) is subtracted from
the total breadth of the two kollemata (290.4 cm.), one reaches a
total breadth for the roll of 287.3 cm. Since the trim is not included,
the actual breadth of the roll would have been somewhat greater.
The total breadth would have been even greater if one assumes that
there was a protokollon in the roll that was not employed in the
quire. Thus one may conjecture that roll three originally had a
breadth of about three meters.
Summary. When the data for the three rolls of BG are combined,
one reaches the following conclusions:
The average breadth of the sheets (if one may ignore the half
sheets plus stub) is 20.57 cm. The breadth diminishes 2.7 cm. as one
moves from the bottom to the top of the stack, an average of 0.077
cm. per sheet or 0.039 cm. Per lea-f-
All three rolls made use of rather broad kollemata, 140.3 cm., 66.0
cm., 143.8 cm., 121.3 cm., 153.9 cm. and T36-5 cm. broad, an average
breadth of 127.0 cm. If one excludes the kollema at the bottom of

the stack, which would have been broader if there were additional
missing uninscribed sheets, the average breadth is 139.16 cm. Thus
BG has the same broad kollemata as are characteristic of the Nag
Hammadi rolls, except those of Codices IV and V and roll four of
Codex VIII. Indeed it lacks the narrow kollemata that usually ac
company broad kollemata in the rolls of the Nag Hammadi codices.
The three rolls of 9^, i 2 \and 14^ sheets measure 205.0 cm., 261.6
cm. and 287.3 cm., a total breadth of 753.9 cm., an average of 251.3
cm. If one excludes roll one, which would have been broader if there
were additional missing uninscribed sheets, the average is 274.45 cm.
that of the bottom sheet of the stack (pp. 2 + C), [21.6] cm. broad,
one would postulate the rolls were 206.4 cm-> 271.0 cm., and 314.0
cm. broad, a total breadth of 791.4 cm., an average of 263.8 cm. If
one excludes roll one, which would have been broader if there were
additional missing uninscribed sheets, the average breadth would
have been 292.5 cm. There would thus have been an additional and
unnecessary waste of 37.5 cm., if the sheets were cut to a standard
breadth rather than progressively narrower. This would seem to
confirm the suggestion made above that in fact the sheets were not
cut to a standard breadth.
justifying the leading edge of the folded quire. When such material
is taken into account, one could think of rolls about three meters in
breadth, similar to those of Codices V and VI.
In sum, from three rolls a one-quire codex of at least 38 sheets
(or 35 sheets plus 3 half-sheets plus stub), 73 leaves, or 146 pages
was made.
Whereas BG is approximately half as high as the average of the

Nag Hammadi codices, its breadth is only slightly less than that of
the narrowest Nag Hammadi codices. Although no Nag Hammadi
codex is the product of three rolls, this is a median figure between
the two-roll and four-roll pattern characteristic of the Nag Hammadi
codices (except Codex III, which made use of six rolls). The unusual
pattern of the right kollema overlaying the left kollema and the right
edge of one sheet having continuity of horizontal fibres with the left
edge of the next sheet above it occurs only once in the Nag Hammadi
codices (Codex VII, roll one), but, like that instance, can, as only a
minor variation, be readily resolved into the predominant pattern in
the Nag Hammadi codices. BG is also similar to the Nag Hammadi
codices (except Codex I) in having but a single quire, in comparison
with the multiple-quire codices, be it those of one sheet (e.g., Chester
Beatty Papyrus i, P 46) or those of four sheets (e.g., the Hamburg
codex containing the Greek Act. PI.), both found in the period just
before the Nag Hammadi codices, or be it the codices of a plurality
of quires of various sizes characteristic of the subsequent period.
Thus one may say that the codicological analysis supports the in
ference from the parallel texts to the effect that BG is closely related
to the Nag Hammadi codices. Though BG would seem to be a bit
later than the Nag Hammadi codices in manufacture, one need only
think of the more-or-less contemporary Manichaean codices, with
their strikingly different pattern of a distinct kollema being used for
each sheet, to realize how similar BG is to the Nag Hammadi codices
in terms of codicology.
V ,2: 17,19-24,9
W illiam R . Murdock and G e o r g e W. Mac R a e *
Bohlig-Labib. Kofitisch-gnostische Apokcdypsen. Pp. 15-26.

Murdock, W. R. "The Apocalypse of Paul from Nag Hammadi.
Unpublished Th.D. dissertation, School of Theology at Clare
mont, 1968.
Troger, ed. Gnosis und NT. Pp. 43-44.
The first of the four apocalypses in Codex V is a highly syn-
cretistic, gnostic version of the ascension of Paul through the
heavens. The opening lines of the work are unfortunately lost be
cause the codex is badly damaged in the first few pages. There are
minor lacunae at the top and bottom of each page, in some of which
the text can be readily reconstructed. The title appears both at the
beginning (fragmentary) and at the end (complete). Apoc. Paul
bears no literary relationship to the Greek work of the same name,
though the latter also deals with Pauls vision of judgment in the
heavens. Whether it had affinities with the now lost "Ascension of
Paul used by the Gnostics according to Epiphanius (Pan. 38.2.5),
it is impossible to tell (see H.-Ch. Puech, "Les Nouveaux Merits
gnostiques decouverts en Haute-figypt, in Studies in Honor of
Crum, pp. 134-37), but it should be noted that in Epiphanius ac
count the "Ascension refers only to three heavens, whereas it is the
uniqueness of the present work that it describes Pauls experience
of the fourth to the tenth heavens; the third is mentioned only as a
starting point.
Apoc. Paul begins with a narrative of Pauls encounter with a
small child on the "mountain of Jericho en route to Jerusalem.
The child, who is Pauls guiding spirit or angelus interpres, some
times called the Holy Spirit, takes him to the heavens to meet his
fellow apostles, who accompany him during his further ascent. In
the fourth heaven Paul witnesses the judgment of souls; in the fifth,
angels driving souls to judgment. The sixth heaven is illuminated
*William R. Murdock prepared a preliminary transcription and translation.
George W. MacRae completed the work along the lines begun by Murdock.
48 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V ,2
by a light from above, and in the seventh Paul meets an old man
on a shining throne who threatens to block his further ascent. He
continues, however, into the Ogdoad and the ninth and tenth
heavens, and when he reaches the last he has been transformed so
that he greets, no longer his fellow-apostles, but his fellow-spirits.
The language of the narrative fluctuates from third person to first
at 19,8, back to third person at 19,18, and finally to first person
again from 20,5 on. The inconsistency may perhaps be attributed to
literary carelessness rather than to multiple sources, for at these
points in the narrative no clear seams can be detected on other
grounds.
For purposes of analysis, the contents of Apoc. Paul may be
divided into three distinct episodes: an epiphany scene, a scene of
judgment and punishment, and a heavenly journey. In the first, the
little child who meets Paul on the mountain and gives him a reve
lation most naturally suggests an epiphany of the risen Christ, who
is sometimes described as a small child, e.g., in Ap. John (BG,2)
20,19-21,4, Act. Jn. 88, and other passages. This experience, as the
allusion to Gal 1:15 (Jer 1:5) in 18,15-16 suggests, functions as the
calling of Paul to be an apostle and thus interprets Gal 1:11-17.
The heavenly visitor not only reveals to Paul but conducts him
above to (the heavenly) Jerusalem, to the apostles, thus interpreting
Gal 2:1-2 also. The ascent itself builds on 2 Cor 12:2-4.
The scene of the judgment and punishment of souls in the fourth
and fifth heavens has its closest parallel in Jewish apocalyptic litera
ture, notably in the Test. Abr. 10 (long recension) and even more
closely in the Coptic version of the short recension, which has several
details peculiar to it. The author of Apoc. Paul is indebted to other
traditions, however, for his picture of the three angels who rival
(spiêiv) one another in whipping the souls forward to judgment
(22,5-10). This is clearly an evocation of the Erinyes of Greek my
thology. Likewise the teXoovy)<; who is also judge belongs to Babylo
nian and Hellenistic astrology. The scene is thus the result of pop
ular syncretism.
The third main element of the work, the heavenly journey, is
concentrated for the most part in the sixth and seventh heavens.
The ascent theme may have been borrowed from Jewish apocalyptic
tradition, but its gnostic coloring is obvious in the depiction of the
old man on the throne in the seventh heaven (Dan 7:13; 1 En
46-47) as a hostile figure who tries to block the gnostic souls ascent
APOCALYPSE OF PAUL: INTRODUCTION 49
to the Ogdoad and the higher heavens. And the interrogation of

Paul also recalls similar dialogues or formulas in several gnostic
works, e.g., i Apoc. Jas. (V,j), Gos. Mary (BG.i), Gos. Thom. (11,2)
41,30-42,7 (logion 50).
The date and provenance of the document cannot be determined
with any certainty. That it comes from gnostic circles with a typical
anti-Jewish bias seems assured by the negative view of the deity
in the seventh heaven. The portrayal of Paul as exalted even above
the other apostles is at home in second-century Gnosticism, especial
ly Valentinianism, and, according to Iren. Haer. II.30.7, there was
a gnostic tradition of interpreting Pauls experience in 2 Cor
12:2-4. Nothing in Apoc. Paul demands any later date for its
composition.
V,2:17,19-24,9
nn
[ n n o k.a a y 'I'ic mtta.y ]a o c
20 [ io ] y . [. .] fJ 6 i TTt
[ x4 i ] ey[
( 4 i lines lacking)
tmi
(Line 1 lacking)
2 [.]u?e [. . ] n x [
[R]TeiH [Ajycu |>qoycuq}B N*.q]
4 [ e ] q jc c u m m o c x e [c in a b c u k 2 ^ *.<*?]
H ^ Ih 2 P a T c e ; h [ m - A q o y c u q p S ]
6 F61 n ic o y e i o jh [ m e q x c u m m o c ]
x e xxt n e K p i N jc k [a .a .c e f e T iM O R ]
8 m o k e T 6 2 iH - N e p [ e m c o y e i u ?hm ]
N e q c o o y N M n a .[ y A o c x e n i]m [ n e ]
10 A q o y c u c y e p u ? B H [ p R t y a J jc e nm
Mxq N e q q p a .jc e ^fiN*. x ] e eq
12 N A .6iN e F iN o y A A .e [i6 e ] Na>A..xe
N M M iq - A q o y c u q p S H61 n i c o y e i
14 o jh m e q x c u m m o c x e f c o o y N
MMOK TTA.YAOC X e F t K NIM* X e
16 R t o k n e F t a y c m o y e p o K j c in
2 N o h W TeqM A .A.y e n iA H a J[S t]
18 e p o K x e 6 I c n jl[ b ( u k e 2 P*.]T [ e e ] jt H M ]
OJA. NeKOJBH[p a t t o c t o a o c a.ya>]
20 e T [B e ] n a J A y [M o y T e e p o K x y c u ]
anok n e n e n [N A e T M o o c p e nm]
18,5 "to [Jerusalem] : The reading is not certain, and the letter e
seems to be a correction. Cf. Gal 1 :17 - 2 1; 2:1-2.
16-17 blessed from his mothers womb : Cf. 23,3-4; Je r 1 :5; Gal 1:15.
V,2:17,19-24,9
[17]
[ The Apocalypse of] Paul
20 [
[
(4 lines lacking)
[18]
(Line 1 lacking)
^ [
the road. And [he spoke to him],
4 saying: "[By which]
road [shall I go] up to [Jerusalem] ?
6 The little child [replied, saying]:
"Say your name, so that [I may show]
8 you the road. [The little child]
knew [who Paul was].
10 He wished to make conversation with
him through his words [in order that (tva)] he
12 might find an excuse for speaking
with him. The little child spoke,
14 saying: "I know
who you are, Paul.
16 You are he who was blessed from
his mothers womb. For (stciStq) I have [come]
18 to you that you may [go up to Jerusalem]
to your fellow [apostles. And]
20 for this reason [you were called. And]
I am the [Spirit (7cveo[xa) who accompanies]
-18 I have [come] to you : Alf[ NA y] would also be possible (though

long), and the translation would be: I have [seen] that you are
to [go up].
22 m ak- M A T o y tN o c n e K N o y c ]
[ tta] y a [ o c ] m R [
( 6 lin es la ck in g )
m
r* p [ n ] B[
2 M O [ ---- ] . [ ----- ] [ -T H ]p q e t . [
2 R n [ a p ] x h [M R N ] e e i e 3 o y c i A [M R ]
4 e N A .p x * [i* r]e A O C - m r 2 n 6 o m
m r n r ^ [N ]p c TH pq R t c n ijla i
6 M (D N [ . . . ] . e TTH ei*6cUATt R
2 e N c a > M A e y 6 p \6 m 'I'Y x h -
8 A y c u M N i i c i T e q x c u K m t t iu ja
xe e B O A A q o y c u q jB e q x c u m m o c
io naT x e M iT o y N O C n e K N o y c
n i [ y A ] o c - A ycu e N A y x e n iT O o y
12 T K 2cu m e x c u q R T O q n e n T o o y
R f t e p ix a r xe eK ecoycuN N ef
14 2 h t^ e%i>\'{ 2 ^ n e i * o y o N j e B O A
n iM R - f C N O o y c A e R N i n o c T O X O c
16 eT eK N A B cu K q jA p o o y 2 g n t t n x
rA p e y c o T T t Ne- A y c u e y N A p
18 ACTTAXe m m o k - a .q T c u o y N R
N e q b a a 2 P*T A q N A y e p o o y
2 [e ]y p A C T T A X e R M o q - t o t c n i
[ t in a ] e T [o y ]A A B e T e N e q q ? A .x e
22 N M [M Aq A q ]T c u p rt m m oq e2pa.T
e t r x i c e - qjA 2PA lf e t M e f c c p o M ]
24 T e F in e - A y c u A q o y q > [T B e ]
2P^-T e 'j M 2 q T O m [tt- A q o y ]
26 c u q jB NAq R61 t t it t n [ a e T o y A A B ]
e q x c u m m o c x e tfcu q ^ T 5]
28 A y cu e N A y e n e ic $ ! N [ e 21]
XM TTKA2 A y c u A q 0 [tu u ? T e ]
18,22-23 Let [your mind awaken, Paul] : The text is reconstructed on

the analogy of 19 ,10 -n . The name Paul is very uncertain here,
however.
*9.3-4 authorities [and] archangels : Cf. the list in Rom 8:38.
13-14 Cf. Eugnostos (111,3) 74.14-19; H y p . A rch . (II ,4) 87,10-11.
APOCALYPSE OF PAUL l 8 , 22- 19,2 9 53
22 you. Let [your mind (vou?) awaken,]

[Paul,] with [
(6 lines lacking)
[19]
For (yap) [
2 [ ] whole which [
among the [principalities (apx^) and] these authorities
(eou<na) [and]
4 archangels and powers
and the whole ra ce (yevo<;) of demons (Satficov),
6 [ ] the one that reveals
bodies (atdfxa) to a soul (<Jn>x,/))-seed.
8 And after he brought that speech
to an end, he spoke, saying
10 to me: Let your mind (vou?) awaken,
Paul, and see that this mountain
12 upon which you are standing is the mountain
of Jericho, so that you may know the
14 hidden things in those that are visible.
Now ( 8k) it is to the twelve apostles
16 that you shall go,
for (yap) they are elect spirits (7cveu|j.a), and they will
18 greet (a<77caea0at.) you. He raised
his eyes and saw them
20 greeting (a<yjrdce<T0ai) him. Then (r6re) the
Holy [Spirit (7cveu[i.a)] who was speaking
22 with [him] caught him up
on high to the third
24 heaven, and he passed
beyond to the fourth [heaven].
26 The [Holy] Spirit (7rveufj.a) spoke to him,
saying: "Look
28 and see your [likeness]
upon the earth. And he [looked]
I9,I7 "elect spirits : Cf. 24,8.

2 [ e ] y p ^ c n A .^ e : An alternative reconstruction, [ak.]ypA.CTTA.-
ZC, would be rendered, "they greeted him.
23-24 "to the third heaven : Cf. 2 Cor 12 :2 .
30 n e c H f AqN ^y gnh e [f l.x R ]

TTKAfc-] AqeicupM [Aycu AqNAy]
32 Ne[i*]?ijCN t [---- totg]
m
[^ q ] ? ![c o ]p M [ e n e c H i* A y t u A q ]N A y
2 [e ] n iM f )T c N o [ o y c ] ^ n a ^ t o c t o a o [ c ]
[ * ] T e q o y N A M [A y c u ] 2 * T e q d A x H
4 'I k t i c i c - N e p [e ]n iT T N A J i e N e q
M O O Cpe *T N A y A 6
6 2 ^ 1*M e 2 q T O F in e A T A r e N O c aT
n a y a s e m A fre A o c e y e iN e F
8 N o y T e - N iA i* r e A o c e y [ e ] | N e
W n o y ^ y x h b o a 2m t t k a 2 f lT e
10 N e -fM o o y i* - a y k a a c f n y A H
F iT e '(M e ^ q T O F in e - A [y]o > N e
12 p e N iA i* re A O c p M A C T ir o y m m o c
A c o y c u c p B FJ61 't ' 1'y x H e c a c c u R
14 m o c x e o y H n o b n e N T A tA A q
2m n K o c M o c - A q o y c u q jB F 6 1 n i
16 t b a c u n h c e tf^ M 0 0 0 2 ^ i" M e 2
q T O F in e e q x c u m m o c x e N e p e
18 n n u ^ A a n F e i p e F n Y a n o m i[ a ]
t h p o y eT*2P*f 2 R t t k o c ^ o c
20 W Te N e Y M O o y i* - A c p [ y c u ] q jB
W61 f '1 'y x H e c .x c u [m m o c ] x e a
22 n i M W Tpe M A p o y [T A M o ]ic x e
[ F t a ] T p a n o m i a 2*i *.<9 F c c u m [ a ]
24 [K o y ]c u o j e r n e N N o y x c u M e
[ecuqj î]qjcuq- Aytu Ayei Rdi
26 [na)o]Mei* MMWTpe- Aqoycu
[ u?b] n6 i ncpoprt eqxcu mmoc
19,31-20,2 The scene suggests Test. A br. 10 (long recension).

20,5-10 The passage is confused as it stands, with the phrase xarix yb0?
clearly out of place and perhaps one or more dittographies. The
simplest rearrangement would give, But in the fourth heaven I
saw angels resembling gods in race (xa-ra ybsoc,), and I saw the
angels bringing a soul.
9-10 "the land of the dead : Cf. also 20,19-20; 23,13-14. In all cases
the phrase may be translated the land (world) of mortals.
APOCALYPSE OF PAUL 1 9 ,3 0 -2 0 ,2 7 55
30 down and saw those [who were upon]

the earth. He stared [and saw]
32 those who were upon the [ Then ( tote )]
[20]
[he] gazed [down and] saw
2 the [twelve] apostles
[at] his right [and] at his left
4 in the creation (xtictu;) ; and (8e) the Spirit (7cveu(i.a) was
going before them. But (8e) I saw
6 in the fourth heaven according to (xardt) class (ylvo?)I
saw (+ e) the angels resembling
8 gods, the angels bringing
a soul ) out of the land of
10 the dead. They placed it at the gate (toSXt))
of the fourth heaven. And
12 the angels were whipping ([x<x<myouv) it.
The soul (tj/uxr]) spoke, saying:
14 "What sin was it that I committed
in the world (xoctjjloi;) ?
16 The toll-collector ( ts Xcovt)*;) who dwells in the
fourth heaven replied, saying:
18 "It was not right to commit all those lawless deeds
(avojjua)
that are in the world (xoctjxo?)
20 of the dead.
The soul (<Jmxir)) replied, saying:
22 "Bring witnesses! Let them [show] you
in what body (otofia) I committed lawless deeds (avofjua).
24 [Do you wish] to bring a book
[to read from] ? And
26 the three witnesses came.
The first spoke, saying:
20,16 "dwells in : or "sits at. Cf. 22,21, "who was in.

23 "in what body : The sense is obscure, but cf. 21,20. One could
also translate: "against what person.
24-25 "[Do you wish] to bring a book [to read from] ? : It is possible
to reconstruct the imperative [o y ]C U < p (though the lacuna has
room for another letter), "Please bring.
28 [ x e m h ] a n o k an ATqpcune
[eT^H] TTCCUMA x e r t CNAY
30 [ . . . a ]Ttcdcdn e^pAT e x cd
[ka]
qjAN[TecpcDTT]e [o]y< 5 <un [mH]
2 o y b c u [ a ] R m [R ] [ o ] y k . c u [ 2 ] a y c u A[q]
o y c d o jb R [6 i] TTMe^cNAY e q [x cu ]
4 M M O C x e M [H] A N O K AN C T C N e t
Zfi t t k o c m o c [ a ]y c u a T i e ^ o y N M
6 t t n a y N X ff'j'" a y c u AT N A y e p o
A T p e n i Y M i e p o - a y c u e i c h t
8 6 e 'f'NOY 'J c o g e m m o ni g tbc
2CUTB 6 T A A A Y ' AqOYCUOJB F l6 l

10 nM e^cyoM ei* e q x c u m m o c
x e m [h] a n o k a n ATei qpApo R x t ?
12 M F it c N O O Y c M T T e ^ o o Y e p e
n p H NA^CUTrt AT*t* K A K e N e
14 CpAN TCX CU K N G N O BG G B O V
naT e T A c c c u T M e p o o y 1*
16 'P y x h A c e ic u p M e n e c H i* e c q i
CpN^HT*' AYCU T O T e A C eiC U p M
18 e m e a y n o x c e n e c H f-
tttlY x n ctaynoxc en ecH f
20 [ a c 1] e[O Y ]C C U M A eA Y C B T C U T tj
[N A C AY]CU e ic 2 H T 6 A Y X CD K e B O A
22 [ f i 61 N e ] c M R T p e o Y - a n [ o k a g ]
[A 'fcup ]R e T n e a y [ cu] a T n [ a y ]
24 [ e n in ] N A e q x c u m m [ o c n a T]
[ x e tt]2i Y*- o c ^ m o y o y ^ I t b K]
26 [epo]T- a n o k e f M [ o o q je ]
a c o y c u n H61 T n Y ^ [ H a y c u ]
28 A 'fî e^pA T e + M e g l* R [ n e ]
A TN A y '2l N A q ^ B H [p A n O C ]
30 t o a o [c e]Y M o o [q je] n [ m m a T]
2029 xeTt C N A Y : Perhaps to be emended to < R x f f > CNAy;

cf. 2 1,6 .11.
30 The lacuna might be filled with M<J)OOY> the day (cf.
21,12) or Hq?CUpTT, of morning.
2 1,1 Also possible: q}AN[TOY<>jlT]e, "until you [were found].
APOCALYPSE OF PAUL 20 , 28- 21,30 57
28 "Was I [not M )]
[in] the body (<t<o(juc) the second hour
30 [ ] ? I rose up against you
[2 1 ]
until [you fell] into anger [and]

2 [rage] and envy. And
the second spoke, saying:
4 "Was I not (p))
in the world (xoofio?) ? And I entered at
6 the fifth hour, and I saw you
and desired (smOufietv) you. And behold,
8 then, now I charge you with the
murders you committed.
10 The third spoke, saying:
"Did I not ((jltj) come to you at
12 the twelfth hour of the day when
the sun was about to set ? I gave you darkness
14 until you should accomplish your sins.
When the soul (4>ux?)) heard these things,
16 it gazed downward in
sorrow. And then ( t o t e ) it gazed
18 upward. It was cast down.
The soul that had been cast down
20 [went] to [a] body (a&yux) which had been prepared
[for it. And] behold,
22 [its] witnesses were finished. [Then (te) I]
[gazed] upward and [saw]
24 [the] Spirit (rcveujia) saying [to me]:
"Paul, come! [Proceed]
26 [toward] me! Then ( te) as I [went],
the gate (mix?)) opened, [and]
28 I went up to the fifth [heaven].
And ($e) I saw my fellow apostles
30 [going with me]
21,19-21 Reincarnation is apparently seen as the lower powers' punish

ment for sins against them.
22 A.N[A.BA.a ], my eyes, is also possible for the second lacuna,
but note the form " I saw in line 23.
[M l
e p e n e n N A N e q M o o c p [e ] n R m a n -
2 a.Ya> ^ T n a y eyN o6 FA.freA.oc
fi 't M e ^ 'j H n [ e ] eqA.M A.Te
4 R N O YêptuB R n eM in e Teq
6 u c e y F I 2 e N K e i i * r e \ o c nm
6 m A q f a .y <d A.T t u p R e ^ O Y N e
neY Z O - R t o o y A e N e Y p e p ic e
8 mR N e Y e p H O Y - e p e ^ e N m a .c t i
k o c W t o o t o y e Y T O JB e c R n i
io 'I 'y x o o Y 2 P*T e T e i c p i c i c -
anok Ae NefMOoqpe hr nenNA.
12 A.YCU A.COYOJN naT W6i ttiyah
T O T e a .n i epA.T e + M e ^ c o m ttc
14 A.YÛ A.TNA.Y eN A.CyBHp A.TIO CTO AO C
e Y M o o q ^ e nRma.T- A y c u t t it t n a
16 e T O Y ^ B N e q x i R M o e i A..xtt>OY-
a.ycu a.Tcd p R e n x i c e a.Tna.y Y
18 n o 6 F o Y o e i N e q p O Y o e iN e n e c H T 4
C2PA.T i M e z c o R n e - A .e it o ]y u j
20 q jB e T x c u m m o c R n iT e A c p [ N H ] c
e -f^ R 'I M e ^ c o R n e [ace a .o y c d n ]
22 n a .T- a .y *d m m i X 6 t o [ y ^ a .b ei*]
[2A.TA.]e2H A q o y w N n [ a .T- t o t c ]
24 [ a n e ] ! e ^ p V e 'l M e ^ C A .Iq jq e R n e ]
[a.Tna.]y ? Y 2 ^ x o W p cu [M e
26 [ . . . . ] e R n o Y o e iN - [a.ycd e p e ]
[ n e q 2 o e i ] T e O Y O B e q j- N e p [ e n e q e p o ]
28 [ n o c e Jf^ W I M e ^ C A .q jq e R n e
[ N e q ] e f l o y o e i N F 2 Y e n p H Fi
30 [C A < y ]q flic cub F c o r t [ - ] A .q oY cu
H3
o jb F 6 1 n i^ A A o e q x c u R moc n a .[T]
22,4 iron rod : Cf. Rev 19 :15 ; Ps 2:9.

16 leading me before them : This implies giving Paul preeminence
over the other apostles. A slight emendation would produce
APOCALYPSE OF PAUL 22 , 1- 23,1 59
[2 2 ]
while the Spirit (7uveu(xa) accompanied us.

2 And I saw a great angel
in the fifth heaven holding
4 an iron rod in his
hand. There were three other angels with
6 him, and I stared into
their faces. But (81) they were rivalling (epiêiv)
8 each other, with whips (|j.a<m)
in their hands, goading the
10 souls (ûx^) on to the judgment (x.piai$).
But (Se) I went with the Spirit (7tveu(ia)
12 and the gate (toSXy)) opened for me.
Then ( t o t s ) we went up to the sixth heaven.
14 And I saw my fellow apostles
going with me, and the Holy Spirit (mtuy.cn)
16 was leading me before them.
And I gazed up on high and saw a
18 great light shining down
on the sixth heaven. I spoke,
20 saying to the toll-collector (TeXtovy^)
who was in the sixth heaven: [Open]
22 to me and the [Holy] Spirit (7uveu(xa) [who]
[is] before [me]. He opened [to me. Then (xoxe)]
24 [we went] up to the seventh [heaven]
[and I saw] an old man [
26 [ ] light [and]
[whose garment] was white. [His throne (0 povo<;),]
28 which is in the seventh heaven,
[was] brighter than the sun
30 by [seven] times.
[23]
The old man spoke, saying to [me]:
"leading the way before them, NeqJCI {m }m O I< T > 2 X ~

JCOJOy, but is probably unnecessary.
6o NAG HAMMADI CODEX V,2
2 .x e e K N A B c u k eT tu N t t a y a o c
n e t C M A M A A f Ayco n e N T it y ]
4 nopxq esoA xin f ^ h t C WTeqMAAy
iNOK Ae AT6 a>u?T* F c a ttittna
6 Ayco NeqKiM FTeqAne eqxcu
mmoc naT x e cyAxe nmMeq*
8 A ycu AToycuq^B eT xcu m m o c
m tti^ a a o x e c Tn a b c d k e n T o n o c
io f t a TSI g b o a F ^ H T q - A y o a . q o y
x e eicTcuN ne-
cl)u jb naT f 6 i t t i ^ a a o
12 A ToycuojB 2 <-D eTxcu m m o c x e
c T n a b c d k e^pAT e n ic o c M o c F T e
14 N e tM o o yi* x c k a a c eT n ApAi
XMAACUTlZe F'f'AIXMAACDCIA
16 T H B T A y p A I X M AACDTle MMOC
F 't'A IX M A A C D C IA F T e T B A B y A C D N "
18 A q o y c u q jB naT F 6 i t t ^ a a o eq
XCU M M O C x e FAOJ F e K A 6 F
20 6 o m e c i^ e c b o a 0 t o o t * * 6 cu
u?t* Aycu F fN A y n i a p x h m F
22 N ie s o y c iA - a.qoycuq}[B F 6 i n i]
ttn a e q x c u m m o c x e *J* NAq *i[ni]
24 c h m io n c t F to o tk - A ycp [ q n a ]
OyCUN NAK* Aycu T O T e AT+ [NAq]
26 MTTICH MION Aq KCUT R n q j[ o ]
e n e c m * ezpx'i en eq ccu N [i*]
28 m F n e T e Ncuq F N e s o y c [ iA Ne]
Aycu T P T ? W c o y c u N F 61 fMfcz]
30 < C A c p q e > Mn[e] Aycu a n 1 e^pAT [ c t ]
[ kIa
^ o i ' j l o a c - a T n a y A e e n iM F
2 T C N O O y C F N ATTOCTOAOC" A y
pACTTAê MMOT A yO ) AN Cl
23.3-4 "blessed o n e.. .womb : Cf. 18,15-16 and especially Gal 1 : 15

9-10 The formulaic response recalls the Marcosian formula in Iren.
Haer. 1.21.5 and 1 Apoc. Ja s. (V ,J) 35,24-25.
14-17 "to lead captive (alxnaXcoTlSeiv) : Cf. Eph 4:8 (Ps 68:19).
APOCALYPSE OF PAUL 23 , 2- 24,3
2 "Where are you going, Paul,

O blessed one and the one who was
4 set apart from his mothers womb?
But (Be) I looked at the Spirit (itveufjia),
6 and he was nodding his head, saying
to me: "Speak with him!
8 And I replied, saying
to the old man: " I am going to the place (to-koc,)
io from which I came. And
the old man responded to me: "Where are you from?
12 But I replied, saying:
"I am going down to the world (xo<Tfio<;) of
14 the dead in order to lead captive (aixH-aX<oTisiv)
the captivity (atx[AaX<o<yia)
16 that was led captive (ouxf*aXameiv)
in the captivity (aixtwcXcama) of Babylon.
18 The old man replied to me,
saying: "How will you be
20 able to get away from me ? Look
and see the principalities (apx*)) and
22 authorities (eôucria). [The]
Spirit (7rvsufia) spoke, saying: Give him [the]
24 sign (<n)[ietov) that you have, and [he will]
open for you. And then ( t o t e ) I gave [him]
26 the sign (tnjfietov). He turned his face
downwards to his creation
28 and to those who are his own authorities (eoo<na).
And then ( t o t e ) the
30 <seventh> heaven opened and we went up to [the]
[2]4
Ogdoad. And (86) I saw the
2 twelve apostles. They
greeted (d<j7t^so0ai) me, and we went
sign": or "token.
"that you have": Lit. "that is in your hand.
MS reads C O , "sixth.
62 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V,2
4 pa.T e - | ' M e 2 n c i T e R n e - a.T p a.c

naiê R nh th p o y et^R
6 n c i T e R n e - a .y u ) e^paJ
e 'J 'H e ^ M h t R n e - a .y u ) a^Tp
8 A cn i^ e FiNa.ajBHp mttTTX:
T^noKak.xy'J'ic MnAyAoc
APOCALYPSE OF PAUL 2 4 ,4 -9 63
4 up to the ninth heaven. I

greeted (aoroxêaOai) all those who were in the
6 ninth heaven, and we went up
to the tenth heaven. And I
8 greeted (a<yroxea0at.) my fellow spirits (7tveufia).
The Apocalypse of Paul
V ,j: 24,10-44,10
W illia m R. S c h o e d e l
Bohlig-Labib. Koptisch-gnostische Apokalypsen. Pp. 29-54. (Here

after, Bohlig [1]).
Kasser, R. Bibliotheque gnostique VI: Les Deux Apocalypses de
Jacques. RThPh 18 (1968), 163-86. (Hereafter, Kasser [1]).
Bohlig. Mysterion und Wahrheit. Pp. 102-18. (Hereafter, Bohlig [2]).
Kasser, R. Textes gnostiques: Remarques a propos des editions
recentes du Livre secret de Jean et des Apocalypses de Paul,
Jacques et Adam. Museon 78 (1965), 71-98. (Hereafter, Kasser
[2]).
---- . Textes gnostiques: Nouvelles remarques a propos des Apoca
lypses de Paul, Jacques et Adam. Museon 78 (1965), 299-306.
(Hereafter, Kasser [3]).
Schenke, H.-M. Review of Bohlig-Labib, Koptisch-gnostische Apo
kalypsen. OLZ 61 (1966), cols. 23-34.
Schoedel, W. R. Scripture and the Seventy-two Heavens of the
First Apocalypse of James. NovTest 12 (1970), 118-29.
Troger, ed. Gnosis und NT. Pp 44-45.
The third tractate in Codex V is entitled The Apocalypse of James
in the subscription (44,9-10) and in a secondary superscription
(24,11). To distinguish this tractate from the following one, which
bears the same title, we have followed the lead of Bohlig (1) and
have added the word first. The text has been lost at the bottom
few lines of pp. 25-34; and pp. 35-44 show increasingly severe dam
age to both the top and bottom of each page.
This document is an apocalypse in the sense that it conveys the
secret teachings of the Lord to James. It is cast in the form of a
dialogue within a narrative framework. Although most of the report
is in the third person, there are three places where the author speaks
of himself in the first person (24,11; 25,12; 27,18). This may
indicate the artificiality of the narrative framework. The reference
near the beginning (24,26-27) to an earlier question which is now
missing may indicate some rearrangement and loss of materials.
5
66 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V ,J
Whether there is sufficient evidence to justify a source theory, such

as that of Kasser ([2], 78-81), cannot be decided here.
The theme of this document is suffering, or more specifically, the
death of the Lord and the souls ascent after death. The allusion to
the crucifixion (30,12-13) is the turning point of the discussion and
divides it into two parts. The passion serves as a visible symbol of a
cosmic struggle centered in Jerusalem, a dwelling place of a great
number of archons (25,18-19), from which James must flee. Since
both the Lord and James function as prototypes of the Gnostic, the
crucifixion and its aftermath become a representation of the agony
through which every Gnostic must pass at death. We learn, how
ever, that in the last analysis no fear or distress actually touches the
Lord or his follower.
James, who is called the Just and whose martyrdom was prob
ably described in the concluding section, now almost entirely lost,
is the brother of the Lord. Although the figure of James enjoyed
considerable prominence among the Gnostics, he is more especially
connected with the Jewish-Christian community in Jerusalem.
Perhaps our apocalypse reflects contacts with Jewish-Christian as
well as gnostic circles, as Bohlig suggests ([2], p. 103). Unfortunately
our major source of information for Jewish Christianity, Ps.-Clem.
Horn, and Recg., seems to include gnostic features in its earliest
strata. Thus it is often difficult to identify Jewish-Christian elements
clearly, and no theme in our apocalypse can be assigned a Jewish-
Christian provenance without reservation. Compatible with both
Gnosticism and Jewish Christianity are the rejection of sacrifice
(41,7-15?), the discounting of a scriptural passage (26,2-7),
secret tradition (36,7-38,11), and the devaluation of femaleness"
(38,12-23; 40,21-41,20). Our apocalypses interest in martyrdom is,
however, unusual in a gnostic milieu and suggests the influence of
a rival spirituality.
A clear connection between this apocalypse and Valentinian
Gnosticism is shown by the formulas in 33,11-35,25. Irenaeus pro
vides close parallels to them at the end of his discussion of the
Marcosians (Haer. 1.21.5), and Epiphanius gives almost the same
report in his description of the Heracleonites (Pan. 36.3.1-6). The
major difference is a matter of form: our apocalypse has a long
series of replies to questions raised by three celestial toll collec
tors, whereas the Patristic sources pull the answers together into
two formulas taught to a dying Gnostic in connection with a sacra
( f i r s t ) APOCALYPSE OF JA M ES: INTRODUCTION 67
ment of extreme unction. Although the cultic context provided by

the heresiologists is lacking here, and the formulas are not used at
the same points in the ascent of the soul, there is obviously a close
connection between our apocalypse and the Valentinian rite. Other
elements in this tractate that are not peculiar to Valentinianism but
in harmony with it are the description of the Father as unnameable
and ineffable (24,20-21) and the doctrine of the transformation of
the female into the male (41,17-19).
Another significant item in determining the historical context of
this document are the references to Addai (36,15; 36,22), the reputed
founder of Syrian Christianity. Eusebius refers to him as Thaddaeus
in connection with an exchange of apocryphal letters between Jesus
and Abgar, King of Edessa (Hist.Eccl. 1.13). The name also occurs
in later Syrian documents, the Doctrine of Addai and the Chronicle
ofArbela. The connection here between James and Addai may reflect
a strong Jewish element in the earliest Christianity of eastern Syria.
(See also our note on 30,20). To what degree Syria was also the
home of gnostic or semi-gnostic forms of religion is difficult to say,
although a syncretistic Syrian Christianity embracing gnostic ele
ments would come as a surprise to no one. Perhaps 1 Apoc. Jas. may
be best understood as a product of Syrian Jewish Christianity pene
trated by a variety of forms of Gnosticism. It can be provisionally
dated after the rise of Valentinianism (the formulas were known to
Irenaeus in Gaul around A.D. 180), but no terminus ad quern can yet
be assigned save what is suggested by the dating of the library as a
whole.
V , j : 2 4 ,1 0 - 4 4 ,1 0
[jC]A
IO T A .n o KA.A-Y'I'IC ET a k c u b o c
n x o e i c j l neNTA.qapa.xe n m m a T
12 x e e N A y 6 e e n x c u K n t s m c c u T e
A?+ MAeiN NAK eNAT fAKCDBOC
14 nACON- e iK H TAP AN A'fMOYTC
e p o K x e nACON- c n t o k n i c o N
16 ^pAT Y^-H a n - o y T e Fi*|*e TJ
nAi*eiM e e p o K a n - x g k a a c e'f
18 qpAN'J' MAeiN NAK IM AyCJU
CCUTM- NMW AAAY CpOOTt RCA
20 netqpooTt- oyat*'|' pan epoq
mRn OYAi*qpAxe MMoq ne-
22 anok ^cu anok oyat*'|' pan epoq
boa 2 r netqjoort- w ee ctay
24 [*f* fioy]Hne npan ep oei ^Wcnay
[b]oa 2m netajooTt- anok Ae
26 [-fJajooTf 2ATeK2 H eniAH akoh
[N]e Fca 'jMFiT'cfTMe- Necujoorf
28 [R]6l tH N fcflM e- AAAA NCp 0)0
[ p n n 6 i] '( 'M W t c ^ iM e a n - a y c u
30 [ a c ] c o b t n a c R [ e ] N 6 oM mW N o y T e 0
[ N ] e [ c ] q j o o r t A e a n [e ]A Y t c b o a
Hce]
6ANO K o y ^ kcu n WTe nei*qpo[on]
24,10 The title in the MS is in a box connected to a grapevine decora

tion that precedes the text.
13 or " I have shown you these things.
18 o r if I show you. Since x e KAAC does not take the imperative
it is likely that some text has dropped out between NAK.
e m e.
26 There is insufficient space for Bohligs [ n e i] c y 0 0 T T (1).
V,j: 24,10-44,10
m
io The Apocalypse of James
It is (+ 8e) the Lord who spoke with me:
12 See now the completion of my redemption.
I have given you a sign of these things, James,
14 my brother. For (yap) not without reason (eixyj) have I
called
you my brother, although you are not my brother
16 materially (uXtj). And I am not (otfre) ignorant
concerning you; so that,
18 when I give you a sign,know and
hear. Nothing existed except
20 Him-who-is. He is unnameable
and ineffable.
22 I myself also am unnameable,
from Him-who-is, just as I have been
24 [given a] number of namestwo
from Him-who-is. And (8e) I,
26 [I] am before you. Since (etceiSiq) you have
[asked] concerning femaleness, femaleness existed,
28 but (aXXa) femaleness was
not [first]. And
3 [it] prepared for itself powers and gods.
But (8s) [it did] not exist [when] I came forth,
[25]
since I am an image (eixcov) of Him-who-is.
24,26-31 "Femaleness may also be translated "womanhood. This sec

tion seems to be connected with the discussion beginning at
38,15 (note especially 41,17); in both places it becomes clear
that it is a question not only of femaleness but of the nature of
our cosmos as the product of "a female from a female (35,12-13).
31 "it : Schenke reads [N ]e[Y ] x e A.q} Ne Ha>FiMO e i c ^ H T e
6 'I NA.6a}ATt N3k.K BO A Fl^CDB NIM
MTTI M yCTH pi ON' X CeNA.A.MA.2
8 x w x na.
T e M M o e i w ca. paiC T e-
ccutc qN^qpwne eqgHN eôyN-
io n e x e T a k o j b o c x e 2 P ^ .b b i a iK x o
o c x e c e N 3iAMJk.2 T e R M o e i- a n o k
12 A e o y n e 't NA.qj aa.q- n e x a . q na.T
x e H n p p 2<>Te T a k c d b o c - H
14 TAK 2 w a ) K CeNJL3iMak.2T e R
MOK- XAAX ntopx eBOA HeiHM*
16 taT ra.p Tet'f H n in o f R n c i
ape Royoeiap nim RFla^Hpe R
18 Te noyoeiN - oyM3i Ncycune
n e WNoyHne nnapxcun-
20 i \ \ i neKccDTe naccl>t
boa MMOoy x e K ^ c e
22 kgmmc x e nim Ne- *[yto x e ]
eN 2k.O> MMIH6 N KHin[
24 a.ya> ccutm W tooy [
A.N 2 e N 3 lP[X a ,N
26 n iM W T * c [N ]o o y g [
R T o y n [. . . . ]e [ . . . . e n e ]
28 CH"I*[
A.px[cuN
30 noy[
ks
e^p^T exN TeTe Tajq FiêBAOMAc-

2 x i e x e Takcuboc x e a.pa. oyN pa.B
? e i mWtcnooyc Fi2eBAOMA.c N e
25,2 WT e [ q ], of him : Suggested by Richard Parker (Brown Univer

sity). There is insufficient space for Bohligs [neTOJOOTT] (i).
5-7 Cf. 1 Cor 15 :5 1.
8-9 Cf. Mk 13:29.
16 Cf. Mk 10 :38 ; 14:34,36; Jn 1 8 :1 1 .
( f i r s t ) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 2 5 ,2 -2 6 ,3 71
2 But (8e) I have brought forth the image (elxd>v) of [him]

so that the sons of Him-who-is
4 might know what things are theirs
and what things are alien (to them). Behold,
6 I shall reveal to you everything
of this mystery (fiu < rn r)p io v ). For they will seize
8 me the day after tomorrow. But (aXAa) my
redemption will be near.
10 James said: "Rabbi, you have said:
They will seize me. But (8s) I,
12 what can I do? He said to me:
"Fear not, James.
14 You too will they seize.
But (aXXa) leave Jerusalem.
16 For (yap) it is she who always gives the cup of bitterness
to the sons
18 of light. She is a dwelling place
of a great number of archons.
20 But (aXXdt) your redemption will be preserved
from them. So that
22 you may understand who they are [and]
what kinds they are, you will [
24 And listen. They [are] not [
but (dXka.) [archons
26 These twelve [
[ ] down
28 [
archons [
3o [
26
upon his own hebdomad.
2 James said: "Rabbi, are there then (dtpa oCv)
twelve hebdomads
25,20-21 or "your redemption will preserve (you) from them.

21-23 The purpose clause may be taken with what precedes or with
what follows. The latter alternative seems better here.
24 Kasser (2) and Schenke supply [GN NoyTe], "gods.
4 a y cu cA q p q e c n 6 e N e F le e e
T o y a j o o r t 2 ^ NerpA<|>H- n e j c e
6 n x o e ic xe T a k c d b o c n e T A 'q 'o )A .x e
2 A T e T r p A < |> H W T A q c o o y N o ja
8 n e T M A - a n o k A e -fN A b c D A T t- n a k
6 B O A RTTH T A q 0 B O A 2 ** TTIAT*
io -f ' H ' n e e p o q - 'f'N A 'f m a in 2^- T e y
H n e - n e N T A q e i c b o a 2 ^ n iA i*
12 -I* a )i e p o q - 't Na.'t' m a c i n 2 ^ n e y
J* q ji- n e x e T a k c d b o c x e ApA
14 o y N 2 P ^-b b i- e i c 2 H T e a T x i FI
T e y H n e q j B e c N o o y c W o ja
16 q j o y Ne- n e x e n x o e i c x e naT
N e - f o j B e c N o o y c F in e e T e
18 F iK o y e i F iT e y 'N e T ' N e n i6 a m E t c
n e y A M ^ T e t h p o y - A ycu A y
20 a>ze e p A T o y c b o a R T O O T O y -
A y cd naT N e n h e T A y n c D q j
22 2 9 MA- N ,M e y u p o o T t 2 ^ T e
[ 3 o y c i ] A R n i M R T C N o o y c WAp
24 [x ]c d n - '( K o y e i F16 om e T f ^ H T o y
[A C .x n ]o n a c F i2 N A i r e A O c
26 [MfJ 2 N C T ]p A T lA N NA 1*'t' H n e
[ e p o o y n ]e [T q jo ]o rt A e A y f
28 [ 7 ]n [. . . . ]y-eTB e
[ 9 it n e ] f q p o o rf
30 [ 8 n i t -)-] H n e e p o o y
[]
Ne- e u p c u n e e K cy A N o y c u up
2 e*!* H n e e p o o y 'I'N o y - n k n [ a ]
6 F )6 o m a n u ) a n t k 'N / o ' y /x e [ b] o a
4 R M O K R 'j'A IA N O IA N B 6A A H -
26,7 An original 2N was corrected by the scribe to 2A.

10 An original '(' m was corrected by the scribe to *(' Hne.
15-16 I cyA C yoy, "pot or jar , is also used of a certain liquid meas-
| ure (Crum, 609a). The preceding remarks (26,8-14) about num
ber and measure suggest that the reference is to number
and measures here as well.
(f i r s t ) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 2 6 ,4 -2 7 ,4 73
4 and not seven, as

there are in the scriptures (ypa<pr)) ?
6 The Lord said: James, he who spoke
concerning this scripture (ypacp^) had a limited under
standing.
8 I, however (8s), shall reveal to you
what has come forth from him
io who has no number. I shall give a sign concerning their
number. As for what has come forth from him
12 who has no measure, I shall give a sign concerning their
measure. James said.
14 Rabbi, behold then (apa oOv), I have received
their number. There are seventy-two measures!
16 The Lord said: These
are the seventy-two heavens, which
18 are their subordinates: These are the powers of
all their might; and they were
20 established by them;
and these are they who were distributed
22 everywhere, existing under the [authority (eouma)]
of the twelve archons.
24 The inferior power among them
[brought forth] for itself angels
26 [and] unnumbered hosts (<rrpaTia).
He-who-is, however (8s), has been given
28 [ ] on account of
[ ] He-who-is
30 [ ] they are unnumbered.
[2 7 ]
If you want
2 to give them a number now, you [will]
not be able to (do so) until you cast away
4 from yourself blind thought (Siavoia),
26,22-23 Z* T e [ 5 o y C l]A , "under the authority : With Kasser (3) (for

the syllabification e - 5 o y C I A., see NHC II 108,26-27). Bohlig
(1) has 2A.Te[H MM]2i, "before the places.
27>3 An original o y e e was corrected by the scribe to N oyJCG.
n e ' i c N A .2 eYKOJ Te e p o K R t c
6 TCA.pa.5- AyOJ T OT 6 KNAKA
t a n t a e^pA'f e n e T * q j o o i t -
8 a y c u KNAupcune a n 6 e n t k
Takcuboc an- a a a a n t o k n e
io n H eT*q?ooTt- a y to NiAt't*
H n e e p o o Y t h p o y eYeqpcu
12 n e eA yl* P^n e p o o Y T H p o Y
< n e x e T a k c u b o c x e ApA o y n >
14 2 P^bbi N j e 't NAKATAN
t a e^ p^ T e n e T * u j o o T t e p e
16 n c T 6 o m t h p o y m r Neei
CTpATIA Y 2 hic O Y B H e r
18 n e x A q naT x e e p e NT 6 o m
2HK O yB HK OYÂK AN-
20 a a a a e Y ? H k o Y B e 6 e-
e p e nT6 o m 2 k o y B H e i
22 AYCO C 6 2 H K MW K 0[ OM]
AAAA CY2HK O YBH 6 I feW]
24 o Y K p i c i c H n o Y ' t t
epoT R ^ h t c c b o [ a
26 eBOA ^ I t o o t o y [
aT RneTMA q>A[
28 m o o 2 *| nai<:a.[
2 ht9[y ] n e q e n [
o y r e n ^ n a c a ^ c u o y a.n- e c e
qpcune A e N2HT* F i 6i o y c i t h mW
[ o ] y m y c t h p i o N eq ^H T t- a a a a *f
e n6ab2ht* 2 ^ eH RneYBCDAK-
n e x e T a k c u b o c x e 2 P ^ b b i- eup
x e ceN A 2 0 KOY o y b h k ' eTe mTJ
A p iK e a k 1 2 n Q Y r N c u c ic - x e e
2 7>23 [2 ^]> " i11 : Kasser (2).

27 Mi re'lMl, "in this place : Kasser (3).
28,2-4 Cf. Mk 14:34,61; 15:4-5-
(FIRST) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 2 7 ,5 -2 8 ,7 75
this bond of flesh (<rap), which encircles you.

6 And then ( t o t e ) you will reach (x a x a v T o c v )
Him-who-is.
8 And you will no longer be
James; rather (aXXa) you are
10 The One-who-is. And all those who are
unnumbered will
12 all have been named.
< James said: Then (Spa o5v),>
14 Rabbi, in what way shall I reach (xaTavxav)
Him-who-is, since
i6 all these powers and these
hosts (<TTpaT(.dc) are armed against me?
18 He said to me: These powers
are not armed against you specifically,
20 but (aXXa) are armed against another.
It is against me that they are armed.
22 And they are armed with other [powers].
But (aXXa) they are armed against me [in]
24 judgment (xpuric,). They did not give [
to me in it [
26 through them [
In this place [
28 suffering, I shall [
[ ]. He will [
[2]8
and I shall not ( o u t s )
rebuke them. But (Se) there shall
2 be within me a silence (<n*f)fj) and
a hidden mystery (pj<TT/)pt.ov). But (aXAa) I
4 am fainthearted before their anger.
James said: Rabbi,
6 if they arm themselves against you, then
is there no blame? You have come with knowledge (yvaj-
<n<;), that
We follow the punctation suggested by Schenke.

NAG HAMMADI CODEX V ,J
8 ic e c o ^ e 'w 'T e y B o je - A K e i 2 R Y
m n h m h x e e ic e c a i^ e t b y m R t *
io ATCOoyN- aaaa NeTqi pooycy
eTBHHTlc- AKei rAp 2PaT ey
12 N06 RMRYATR M" A A A A R
TTeKTCDAR e A A A y Z?x* R ^ h t C -
14 akei rap e^pAT eYMRi*ATMeeYe
Aya) Nepe't MNHMH N6 CMHN
l6 epoK- akmooojc 2 R oyoMe
nekô
A.YCU R n O Y T C D A M R61
18 eiTe- o y t RneKTCDMC
2 R TeYA-Aeiê- oyte n Yta
20 2 0 RMOK a n - AY<U NeTqjOOTt
RTeY^H AN- AAAA ATf 2 tUB
22 nim RtY Tcdt- 'e'qjoort R2 HT*
[R<5i o ] y B q je - a y u j ' f e i p e m
24 [nMeJeye R NeTe nojoyan '
[ c q ? o o ] {T R2HT* R<5i o y m R t*
26 [ ......... ] ^y ^ 'l'2R TeYMRi*
[ 6 ]aT2 RNOYrNOJCic
28 [ ............] a j AN 2^- N 6 Y M K 0 0 2
[ .......... ]A- A A A A A l p 2 0 T 6
30 [ R 2 H T o ] y y a m [ a 2 ] t X Y
Heel
rreTOYNAAAq- oy ne+NAqj
2 x o o q - fi a up F iq p A x e n e 'f 'N A a j
jc o o q - qpAN't p b o a e p o o Y * n e a c [e ]
4 n x o e i c x e T a k c d b o c * |'T M A e io
R T 6 K A I AN O l A MR T K 2 0 T e -
6 e q je u n e c k m h n e K e A < J > iA o n o
n 1 R n pT ecpM eA i n a k 2* KeoyA
8 e i M H TI T B TTeKCCUTe- 6 I C
2 H H T e rA p ' I ' n a x c u k n e T K A H p o c
cboa 0xR neTKA2 kata e
O in C 0 2 e is written over an erased A.

(FIRST) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 28 , 8- 29,10 77
8 you might rebuke their forgetfulness. You have come

with
recollection (fJtv^fjtYj), that you might rebuke their
io ignorance. But (aXXa) I was concerned
because of you. For (yap) you descended into a
12 great ignorance but (aXXa)
you have not been defiled by anything in it.
14 For (yap) you descended into a great mindlessness,
and your recollection (fi.v#){)) remained.
16 You walked in mud,
and your garments were not soiled,
18 and you have not (ouxe) been buried
in their filth and
20 you have not ( oute ) been caught. And I was
not like them, but (aXXa) I clothed myself with every
thing
22 of theirs. There is in me
forgetfulness, yet I
24 remember things that are not theirs.
There is in me [
26 [ J and I am in their
[ ] knowledge (yvco<7!^)
28 [ ] not in their sufferings
[ J. But (aXXa) I have become afraid
30 [before them], since they rule. For what
[2 9 ]
will they do ? What will I be able

2 to say? Or (^) what word will I be able
to say that I may escape them?
4 The Lord said: James, I praise
your understanding (Siavowc) and your fear.
6 If you continue to be distressed (<piXo7roveiv),
do not be concerned (fiiXav) for anything else
8 except (ei (jltjti,) your redemption.
For (yap) behold, I shall complete this destiny (xX^po?)
10 upon this earth as (xaxdt)
28,21 or, translating 2 H differently, not of their womb, b u t .. . .

e T A 'fx o o c b o a ^Fi F?nHoye-

12 A y c u 'f'NAdCDAT? NAK 6 B O A R
n e k c c u T e - n e ^ c e Ta k c u b o c
14 x e z p a B B i ttco c m R n c a n a T
K N A O yCU N ^ n a n 6 B O A AN-
16 M N N CA C A M A T e MMOK
A y c u KXCUK R n e T K A H p O C e B O A
18 A y cu kn ab cuk e^ pA 'f enei*q}o
o rt- n e x e n j c o e i c x e Takcuboc
20 MNNCA NAT ('NAOyCUNj NAK
eBOA Fl^CUB n i m - b t b h h t E
22 oyAAK AN- AAAA TB[ TMRT]
ATNAT FiTe NipcUM[e]
24 x c k a a c e p e o y n [iC T ic na ]
ajcun e FlHToy [o yR o y]
26 MH HCpe TAP NA[ATANTA]
62 PAT eTTTICT[lC Aycu]
28 c e N A A T [A ]e i 2 P [ 2 N
q?AN[ 6 ]T[
[A]
[A]ycu mFIFIca nAT j N AoycunJ
2 e y c o ^ e R niap xcun- F Ita o y
cuNg mttaT NAy c b o a x e oyA Te
4 MA^Te M M o q ne- eqpcune e y
OJANAMA^Te MMOq- TOT6
6 CpACJAMAT ixR OyON NIM-
'I'NOy A e 't'NABCUK Api nMe
8 e y e N N e N T A l x o o y A y c u ma
p o yB C U K e^pA T 2 h t K - n e x e
10 T a k c u b o c x e n x o e i c " fN A d e n H
k a t a e c t a k x o o c - A q a p F lT q
12 x e n x o e i c A ya > A q x c u K b o a
R nh e T e a jq p e - T a k c u b o c F It a
29,11 "from the heavens may be taken with what follows if the
A y c u at the beginning of 29,12 be understood in the sense of
"also, like the Greek xal. In view of the dot set after the ex
pression in the manuscript, the scribe probably understood it as
we have translated.
(FIRST) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 2 9 ,1 1 -3 0 ,1 3 79
I have said from the heavens.

12 And I shall reveal to you
your redemption. James said:
14 Rabbi, how (7rco<;), after these things,
will you appear to us again ?
i6 After they seize you,
and you complete this destiny (xArjpo*;),
18 you will go up to Him-
who-is. The Lord said: James,
20 after these things I shall reveal to you
everything, not for your sake
22 alone but (aXXa) for the sake of [the]
unbelief of men,
24 so that [faith (tticttk;)] may
exist in them.
26 For (yap) [a] multitude will [attain ( x a x a v x a v ) ]
to faith (7u< rxi< ;), [and]
28 they will increase [in
[
[ 30 ]
And after this I shall appear

2 for a reproof to the archons. And I shall
reveal to them that
4 he cannot be seized. If they
seize him, then ( x o x e )
6 he will overpower each of them.
But (SI) now I shall go. Remember
8 the things I have spoken and let them
go up before you.
10 James said: Lord, I shall hasten
as (xaxa) you have said.
12 The Lord said farewell to him and fulfilled
what was fitting. When James
Bohlig (1) reads MN N C X < NAT> , "after these things. We

understand the Coptic translator to be rendering with some un
certainty the Greek ptexa with a substantivized infinitive.
O Y n [ l C T I C ] , "faith : Kasser (3).
8o NAG HAMMADI CODEX V ,J
14 p e q e tU T M T B N e q H K 0 0 2
aycu AqM KA2 eM A Te-
16 Ney6ak.qj? c b o a 2* n T y n o c
RTeq 6 wi- Aqei Ae mnHca
18 2 e N 2 Y Taiccuboc
NeqMooqpe n e fiJCM nTOOY
20 e r e qjAYMOYTe epoq x e rxy
rHAiN MN NT NCUq MMAH
22 t h c NeTe NeyccuTR epoq
[eAY2]a ,<P f32H1*' ^Y10 NA.qN
24 [. .] . RMeoy NNOYpeq'l nam
[tg eql^cw mmoc x e nx'f ne
26 [ 7i ]CD MM2CNAY
[ t o t 6 tt] m h h ey e A q x c u c u p e
28 [G B O A Ta ]K CU B [O C ] J l A qupcu
[xtt m[. JnpoceY
30 [x h 9 ] fle e eTe
[Al]
O Y ^ T A q ROYTCDTt M MAY
2 a y c u A q o Y o N 2 e p o q f l6 i n x o e [ i c ]
f jT o q A.e A q ica T e n p o c e Y x [ H ]
4 c b o a A q M A A 2 q N 2 H T q Aq*!* m
epcuq e q x c u m m oc x e 2P a b b i
6 Af 2 e e p o K - A e ic c u T M e n e k
MK.0 0 2 6 T A K X IT O Y a y c u
8 aT m ica 2 R 2 h > e M a t " e i c c o
30,20 Gaugelan is probably Golgotha. In Syriac the name of the

mount is Gagultha (R. Payne Smith, Thesaurus Syriacus [Ox
ford: Clarendon Press, 1879], I, 648) of which the feminine
plural absolute would be Gagulan. (On a restricted basis, ab
solutes are used for place names in Syriac. Cf. Theodor Noldeke,
K urzgefasste Syrische G ram m atik [Darmstadt: Wissenschaft-
liche Buchgesellschaft, 1966], p. 145). There may also be a
link with Gaugal, a mountain near Amida, mentioned by Syriac
writers (Smith, Thesaurus S yriacus, I, 673) and the church
historian Sozomen (H ist. Eccl. III. 14.30). From the fourth
century, monks and ascetics lived about it. Sozomen calls it
Gaugalios. Could the name of a Syrian holy mountain have
migrated ? David Petersen (University of Illinois) has recalled
(FIRST) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 3 0 ,1 4 -3 1 ,8 8l
14 heard of his sufferings

and was much distressed,
16 they awaited the sign (tutzoq)
of his coming. And (te ) he came after
18 several days. And James
was walking upon the mountain,
20 which is called Gaugelan,
with his disciples ([ia0r)T7]s),
22 who listened to him
[because they had been distressed], and he was . . .
24 [ ] . . . a comforter,
[saying]: "This is
26 [] the (or "a ) second [
[Then (t o t s ) the] crowd dispersed,
28 but (te ) James remained
[ ] prayer (Ttpodeux^)
30 [ ], as
[3 i]
was his custom.
2 And the Lord appeared to him.
Then (te ) he stopped (his) prayer (7rpo<reux*))
4 and embraced him. He kissed
him, saying: "Rabbi,
6 I have found you! I have heard of your
sufferings, which you endured. And
8 I have been much distressed. My
a similar migration of Zaphon to Zion in the Biblical period

(cf. Richard S. Clifford, The Cosmic M ountain in Canaan and
the Old Testament [Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press,
i 972L PP- 131-60). It is possible that our apocalypse knew a
Greek form of the name with a feminine ending (Gaugala) and
that we have the accusative in the text.
30.24 Cf. Jn 14:16,26; 15:2 6 ; 16:7,8.
23 I owe the suggested reconstruction of this line to G. Michael
Browne (University of Illinois).
25 C|].CD, "saying : Schenke. Bohlig(1) reads 6 Y-X]CU, "for
it is said, and he regards what follows as a citation. This
is problematical.
3M The second C| is written over another letter, probably an x.
6
oyN RTAMRT'qjAN'T'^Hf* e
10 t b nAT N e T o y c u o j e lM e e y e
x e Rnanay eneTAAO c e y e
12 j* ATt e p o q 6 T B 6 n a T U t a y a a v
naT ta p U t a y a a y '^ e N 'n A p A n e
14 T e q jq p e Ne* n e x e n x o e i c
x e T a k c u b o c W npTecpM eA i
16 NAK 6 T B H H T O y A e 6 T B 6
neiAAOc- a n o k ne nH eTe
18 NeqqpooTt R^hY- Royoeiqp
NIM M niX I MKA2 2 N ^-AAy
20 oyTe Mnoyf ice n hei*
A y c u F in e n e T A A O c e ip e
22 n a T F J a a a y M n e i* 2 0 0 Y
N e p e n A 'f A e kh e^p^CT R ]
24 oyTYnoc R t c NiApxcp[N]
AYCU NeqMTTOJA Rq[BCUA]
26 BOA BOA îTOOTOy [
A NIApx[CU]N [
28 TAqx[
A6 ecp.[
30 6 cunt* e . [
Ra ik [a io c
[All
[ o y ] 2 M ea.A N A q n e - b t b e n A T o y N
2 j a k F in e T p A N x e T a k c u b o c
n iA IK A IO C - K N A y X RA O )
4 R KNApNH<J>e eTA KN A Y
e p o e r A y c u a k k cu R T e T n p o c
6 eyxH - e m A e R t c k o y a ik a i
o c R t n N o y T e - Aycu 6 e a k
8 m o a ^ k r ^ h t * A K - f n i e p c u e i-
2 AM HN " f x c u M M O C N A K X C
10 akkim e y N o 6 r 6 cun mRn o y
bcuak e ^ p A T e x c u K - aaaa
31,25 The suggestion for the lacuna is that of Schenke.

32,6 Reading e m A as ireel 8 rather than as a mistake for eTreiSr;.
(FIRST) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 3 1 ,9 -3 2 ,1 1 83
compassion you know.

10 Therefore, on reflection, I was wishing
that I would not see this people (Xao?). They must
12 be judged for these things that they have done.
For (yap) these things that they have done are contrary
to ( toxp <x )
14 what is fitting. The Lord said:
James, do not be concerned (fiiXeiv)
16 for me or (ouSe) for
this people (Xao?). I am he who
18 was within me. Never
have I suffered in any way,
20 nor ( o u t s ) have I been distressed.
And this people (Xao?) has done
22 me no harm.
But (Be) this (people) existed [as]
24 a type (tutzoc,) of the archons,
and it deserved to be [destroyed]
26 through them. But (Be) [
the archons, [
28 who (or, which ) has [
but (Be) since it (fem.) [
30 angry with [
[The] just (Bixcuoc,) [
[ 32]
is his servant. Therefore

2 your name is James
the Just (Scxaioc;). You see
4 how you will become sober (virj<peiv) when you see
me. And you stopped this prayer (npooeoxri).
6 Now since (knei Be) you are a just (Sixato?)
man of God, you have
8 embraced me and kissed me.
Truly (afiYjv), I say to you that
10 you have stirred up great anger and
wrath against yourself. But (aXXa)
I owe this suggestion to G. Michael Browne (University of

Illinois).
12 2 a ) C T e R T e N e T K -o o y e q p tu n e
Ta k c u b o c A e N e y 6 a .B 2 H Y n e
14 e q p m e - a y o > A qRKA 2 n2 ht *
6 M A T 6 - A y U ) A.Y2 M O O C R
16 n ecN A Y ix R O Y n e T p v n e x e
n x o e i c NAq x e T a k c u b o c 2 ab
20 2 h ^ T e- c n a x i n e N T A Y T A
cyq n a c H t o k a g R n p p
22 [6 a b ]2 h t- o y T e R n p p 2 0 T e
[ x q \ ] o F i6 i n x o e i c - Ta k c u b o c
24 [ a F J]T A .p e q cc o T R c n a T- A q q c u
[ T e R N e ] q p R e io o Y e e f f i
26 [N eqB A .A A.]ycu q p e c i e H i T e
[ 10 ]ht* eYujo
28 [o n . . . . n e x e ] n x o e ic N A [q ]
[ x e Ta k c u b o c e i c ] 2 H T e "fN A
[Xr]
6CDATt NAK. e B O A R n e K c c u T e
2 e u p c u n e eY <9A N A M A 2Te R m [o k ]
a y c u [R]i*^xi n n eT R k o o 2 o y R
4 O Y M H tfq je N3k.2 A.KOY O Y B H K
x e e < Y > n 3 l < a > MA.2Te R m o k - R 2 Y
6 A 6 OJOMT* e B O A N2 H T O Y c e
NA.3k.MA.2 T e R m o k - naT e f
8 2m ooc e N T C A C O N H C N ' 0 \
m o n o n e Y q je t TeA O C- aaaa.
10 N iK e 'J 'Y x o o Y e e y q i R m o
oy c T e p e c iM O c - e q p cu n e
12 6 e e K a jA N e l t o o t o y o y N
OYA e B O A R 2 H T O Y N A X O O C
14 n a k - Y p e q A p e 2 Ht a y n e
x e R t k n i m fi R t k o y g b o a
16 t c u n - e K e x o o c NAq x e a n a k
32,19-20 Cf. Mk 14:38.

22 Reconstruction may be one letter too long.
(FIRST) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 3 2 ,1 2 -3 3 ,1 6 85
12 (this has happened) so that (ghtxs) these others might

come to be.
But (SI) James was timid
14 (and) wept. And he was very distressed.
And they both sat down
16 upon a rock (irexpa). The Lord said
to him: James, thus (toaxe)
18 you will undergo these sufferings. But (aXXa) do not
be sad. For (yap) the flesh (crap) is
20 weak. It will receive what has been
ordained for it. But (81) as for you, do not
22 be [timid] or (ooxe) afraid.
The Lord [ceased]. [Now (SI)] when James
24 heard these things, he
wiped away [the] tears in
26 [his eyes] and very bitter (?)
[ ] which is
28 [ ] The Lord [said] to [him:]
["James,] behold, I shall
[33]
reveal to you your redemption.
2 When [you] are seized,
and you undergo these sufferings,
4 a multitude will arm themselves against you,
that <they> may seize you. And (SI), in particular,
6 three of them
will seize youthey who
8 sit (there) as toll collectors (xeXawjs). Not
only (ou [jlovov) do they demand toll (xlXo?), but (aXXa)
10 they also take away souls (^Z^)
by theft (ffxepeffifioos). When
12 you come into their power,
one of them who is their guard will say
14 to you:
Who are you or (^) where are you from?
16 You are to say to him: I am
33.11 The sign over C T e p e C I M O C refers to N K CDA l t ( by theft ),

a gloss in the margin of the MS.
o y u > H p e A ya> a n o k o y e B O A .
18 tticdt*- q N i J c o o c n a k x e
Wt k { tta } a o } FlupH pe- A y co
20 F T K TTAN I H R e i c u f - 6 K 6
JCOOC NAq x e ANOK OyeBQ^.
22 n i c u t T p q jo p T t [ f J u jo o n - ]
oyqjHpe A .e e q ^ M n e T [ p ]
24 q j o p n N q p o o n 1'1 e q [ N A X O o c ]
n a k x e A y[
26 6 K JC[O O C NAq ^ 6
ZM n H [
28 x e eTe[
[ l e r t
30 [
[A A ]
[F ]N IU JM M O - 6 K 6 JC O O C NAq
2 x e z e N q jM M O a n e n T H p q N e
[ A ] A A A 2 6 N 6 B O \ 2 W n A[XA] MCU
4 Ne- e T e T e c ^ i M e - Ayq> ^ a T
a ctam io o y eceiN e H n ire
6 noc en ecH f - cboa n H T P
q j o p r f F q j o o T t - ApA ^ e N q j M
8 MO AN N e - A A A A N 6 T 6 N O y N N6'
N 6 T 6 N O yN MN N ^ 6 T
10 to F ix o e ic e p o o y - O yeB O A
Te ne T p qjoprF Fiqpoon-
12 2 e N< y R M O A e Ne k ^ t a n e f
x e neT p qjoprt fjq jo o rt R n e q
14 p K O I N C U N I e p O C 1'1 T O T 6 e cN A
TA M io o y- e q N A Jc o o c n a k o n
16 x e eKNABWK eTcuN- e K e x o
33,20-34,18 A parallel passage is found in Iren. Haer. 1.21.5 (preserved in

Greek by Epiphanius in Pan. 36.3.2) and reads as follows: "I
am a son from the Father, the preexistent Father, and a son for
the present (Latin: in him who is preexistent). I came to see all
the things that are mine (ours) and all those that are alien; they
are not entirely alien, however, but are of Achamoth who is
(FIRST) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 33,17-34,16 87
a son, and I am from

i8 the Father. He will say to you:
What sort of son are you, and
20 to what father do you belong? You are to
say to him: I am from
22 the Pre-[existent] Father,
and (81) a son in the
24 Pre-existent One. [When he says]
to you: [
26 You are to [say to him:
in the [
28 that I might [
[ ] that [
30 [
[34 ]
[of] alien things? You are to say to him:
2 They are not entirely alien,
but (aXXa) they are from Achamoth,
4 who is the female. And these
she produced as she brought this race (yevo?)
6 down from the
Pre-existent One. So then (pa)
8 they are not alien, but (aXXa) they are ours.
They are indeed (fiiv) ours because she who
10 is mistress of them is from
the Pre-existent One.
12 At the same time ( 8s) they are alien because (+ x a x a )
the Pre-existent One did not
14 have intercourse ( x o i v t o v s i v ) with her, when ( r o x e ) she
later
produced them. When he also says to you:
16 Where will you go? you are to
female and made these things for herself. I bring down (Latin:
for she brought down) this race from him who is preexistent,
and I go again to the things that are mine (ours) whence I
came.
o c NAq x e enM i eTAtel cboa.

18 rhay eTNABa>K on 6 may
naTAe eKojiNJcooy knap
20 boa eNeynoAeMOC ecycu
^re Ae ku}an ei eTOOTOY
22 [NNi](poMef NpeqAMA^Te
[ nh e]fqi FNM'f'yxH c fe p e
24 [cimoc 2]m ttmA eTMMAY
[ II ] N I NAT K
26 [ 11 ]K oycKetY]
[o c 10 ]? o y o R[
28 [ 11 1^9 tt[
[ 6 ] .. [ 7 ] t fl-re
je T e T f i. e . [. . . ]ce tap [
NATfl [. . . ] e TecNoyNe- Rtcu
T[n 2<DT]THY^W TTNApNH
4>1AN[. . .] ANOK A 'J'NACUO)
e^pAT [exR] frN tuci c F NAf
tako e r e [ r ] c o < j> ix r e t h eY
q?ooTt tticdt*- eTe t h a a y
t Rt e axamu )- Fine eicon*
10 cpcone n n a x a m u ) * o y T e
[o Y C Y ]? Y r c n ^ o o y t ' a a a a
12 [ o ] y [ C 0 ]M 6 T e 6 BOA N Y
c ^ H [e a]ctam 1e th y t R e
14 x f i ^ [o o ]y t * e c c p o o T t o y a
ac - ece Fn atmme eN ef
34,23 Although the left margin is missing, the sign over C T epe may
well have the same significance as that in 33,11.
26-35,19 The appearance of what may be part of the term vessel in
34,26 and the term root in 35,3, along with the language that
follows, suggest that in 34,26 there begins some variant of the
formula in Iren. Haer. 1.21.5 (Epiph. Pan. 36.3.4-5), which
reads thus: They will reach the powers about the Demiurge
and will say: I am a vessel more precious than the female who
made you. If your mother is ignorant of her own root, I know
myself and understand whence I am, and I call upon the in
corruptible Sophia which is in the Father, mother of your mother
(f i r s t ) a p o c a l y p s e o f j a m e s 34,17-35,15 89
say to him: To the place from which I have come,

i8 there shall I return.
And (8e) if you say these things, you will
20 escape their attacks (7coXe(xo<;). But (8e) when
you come to
22 [these] three detainers
[who] take away souls (ûx*)) by
24 theft (oTepe<Tt(xco<;) in that place
[ ] these . You
26 [ ] a vessel (<rxeuo<;)
[ ] much more than [
28 [
3 [5]
[ ] of the one (fem.) whom
2 you [ ] for (yap) [
[ ] her root. You,
4 too, will
be sober (Wjcpeiv) [ ]. But (te) I shall call
6 [upon] the imperishable knowledge (yv&ou;),
which is Sophia, who
8 is in the Father (and) who is the mother
of Achamoth.
10 Achamoth had no father nor ( o u t c )
male consort (auûyoO, but (aXXa)
12 she is female from a
female. She produced you (pi.)
14 without a male, since she was alone
(and) in ignorance as to what
who has no father nor male consort. A female bom of a female

made you, who was ignorant of her mother and thought that
she herself was alone. But I call upon her mother.
The last lines of 34 may be reconstructed in the following
way:
26 [ x o o c n a y * e a n o ] k o Y C K e tY ]
[ o c e q T A e iH Y e f c o Y O h [ t ]
28 [c ^ m e 6 ].Q it[
They are translated: You are [to say to them: I am] a vessel
more [precious] than [the female].
yo NAG HAMMADI CODEX V ,J
16 [ o ] y 2 [^n] T e c M iA Y ' e c H e e y e
x e F Ito c oyA A C nei*< yoort
18 [ A N O ] K A 6 't NA. XI OJ KAK e ^ p A T
o y B e T e c M i a i y Ayo> t o
20 Te eyeqjT opT p eye6Fi
{6n} oygoiB egoyN eTey
22 N oyN e Mfi n r e N O [ c Fi]
TeyM AAy n t o k [A e]
24 eiceBcuK 6 2 PA.T ?[NeTe]
N CO K N Q [
26 N e T [eT ]N A .y[
[ ] .T [
(2 lines lacking)
[AS]
ijeT p qj[op ff n tp oo]i^ [c ]e [o ]
2 [ F i T ] y n o c [ R tti ] m FJ[ t c ] n o o y [ c ]
R M3l 9 H T H C ' Mfi [TTIMFiT]
4 c n o o y c JJcoeiq j n [. . . .] . .e
akxamcu te[T o y ]p 2 ep
6 M p e y e m h [ o c ] jc? c o ^ i v
ly cu A N O K J l a n o k nim
8 M i l T CO<J ) I A F i N A T T A K O T C t
KNACCDTe 6 B O A ftT O O T C -
10 mr N c p H p e t h p o y FiTe n e i *
qjooit- n A'f f l T A y c o I y a ) ]
12 N o y A y c u A y g a n t 2 [ p A Y ] *5
2H T oy eK eâm < R mooy> P[aT E ] h tk -
14 e K e q j a m e A e c k k c u fipcuK-
e K e 6 o A n o y A.e s b o a R a a
16 a a io c - e c p c u n e eK [N]A[i e ] b o a
35,20-21 6 F l { 6 F l } O Y 2 CUB e g o y N e: T h i s d i f f i c u l t p h ra se is made

in te llig ib le b y r e g a r d in g t h e s e c o n d 6 FI a s a d itto g ra p h y . The
id io m 6 FI 2 C DB e g o y N e - m e a n s t o b la m e (Crum, 820b).
T h is is s u p p o r te d b y t h e p a r a lle l in t h e G ree k t e x t th a t goes on
a fte r t h e s e c o n d fo r m u la (E p ip h . P a n . 3 6 . 3 . 6 ) : A t this, those
a b o u t t h e D e m iu r g e w h o h e a r a re g r e a tly d istu r b e d and con
d e m n th e ir ro o t a n d t h e ra ce o f th e ir m o t h e r ____
3 6 ,1 -4 F o r t h e 12 a s a t y p e , cf. Ire n . H a e r . I I . 2 1 . 1 . F o r a similar de
s c r ip tio n o f ty p e s , cf. V , j (E u g n o s to s ) 12 , 4 - 2 1 .
(f i r s t ) a p o c a l y p s e o f j a m e s 35,16-36,16 91
16 [lives through] her mother because she thought

that she alone existed.
18 But (Be) [I] shall cry out
to her mother. And then (tots)
20 they will fall into confusion (and) will
blame their
22 root and the race (yevo^) [of]
their mother. [But (8e)] you
24 will go up to [what is]
yours [
26 you will [
[
(2 lines lacking)
[36]
the [Pre-existent One]. [They are]
2 [a] type ( vjtzqc,) [of the] twelve
disciples (txa07]TY)<;) and [the] twelve
4 pairs, [
Achamoth, which is
6 translated (e p jn q v e iie iv ) , Sophia.
And (Be) who I myself am,
8 and (who) the imperishable Sophia (is)
through whom you will be redeemed,
10 and (who are) all the sons of Him-who-
isthese things they have known
12 and have hidden within
them. You are to hide < these things> within you,
14 and (Be) you are to keep silence.
But (Be) you are to reveal them to
16 Addai. When you [depart],
There axe traces of what may be an N at the beginning of the

lacuna (but no trace of a line over it); a vertical stroke three or
four letters from the end; and part of the tail of a A. or A before
the fin ale. A possible reconstruction would be n [6 T U )A ] h A. e,
"those who pray to. For the twelve pairs (counting each
member), cf. V ,j (Eugnostos) 10 ,15-11,2 .
Kasser (3) reads eK[qp]i.[N p]BOA, "escape.
Ayco N T e y N O Y e y N A [p ]n [o ]
18 \ m i M fi n e l K a . 2 m a.['| p M e i H ]
oyN R n e i* q jo o T t fiN ia h m
20 lA A e o c A e M Apeqqi naT
2 PA i f i ^ H T q - f i T M C ^ M H T e
22 f i[ p o ] M n e e q < e > 2 M o o c R 6 i i a a c
[ o c ] A y c u e q e c ^ A f c o y A y co
24 [e c p c u ]n e eq q p A N C ^ H T o y
[. . ] t o [. . ] A yco e y e T A A Y
26 [ 9 ] o y f iT A q R n [
[ 8 ] *Aq[
(2 lin es la ck in g )
[XU
(L in e s 1 an d 2 la ck in g )
[ 7 ][
4 CU[........... ] O J A N [ 6 ].
m im [. . .] R61 n [ . . . ] o y y
6 fiq j[....]. q j A Y i* ^ i e q [ p A ] N
x e A ey[ei]- t o t c e q eern e
8 NNOy[. .] fi upAxe GBOA
. N . [ . . . ]T O y 6BOA fi
10 [ n a T fiTAlfp] q j o p r f f i x o o y
[ ......... ] fiNoycfiM e fi
12 [ 2 i e ] p p y c A A H M 2M n ec
[ 6 A y ]cu e q x n o fiq jH
14 [p e C N A ]y 8 B O A fiHTC-
[eyep]K A H poN O M i rn a T
16 [Mfi] 'f'A IA N O IA M nH 6 T N 6
[. . ]. e x i c e - Aycu e y e q i
18 R [ . . ] N T O O T q 8 B O A M n e C|
N oyc- e p e n u coyei A e
20 eq A ^ iA f fi^ H T o y Aycu
M A pe n a T u p t i m e NAq
22 e y ^ H rt fi^ H T q q )A [N T q ]
3 6 ,1 8 -1 9 B o h lig (1) r e a d s m [ R A A A y ] o y f i e t c ., n o th in g , then, is left

in J e r u s a le m . T h e str o k e o v e r t h e M R w o u ld h a v e le ft a trace,
h o w e v e r , t o ju d g e fr o m o th e r e x a m p le s .
37,10 F o r r e s to r a tio n cf. I l l , 71 , 8; 7 4 , 1 0 ; 8 3 , 3 ; 8 3 , 1 1 .
( f i r s t ) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 3 6 ,1 7 -3 7 ,2 2 93
immediately war (7toXefjieiv) will be [made]

i8 with this land. [Weep],
then (oOv), for him who dwells in Jerusalem.
20 But (Se) let Addai take these things
to heart. In the tenth
22 year let Addai sit
and write them down.
24 And when he writes them down
[ ] and they are to give them
26 [ ] he has the [
[
(2 lines lacking)
[37]
(Lines i and 2 lacking)
6 [ ] he is [called]
Levi. Then ( t o t e ) he is to bring
8 [ ] word
[ ] from
10 [what I] said earlier
[ ] a woman
12 [ ] Jerusalem in her
[ and] he begets
14 [two] sons through her.
[They are to] inherit (xATjpovofieiv) these things
16 [and] the understanding (Siavoia) of him who
[ ] exalts. And they are to receive
18 [ ] through him from his
intellect (voo<;). Now (Ss), the younger of them
20 is greater. And
may these things remain
22 hidden in him until [he]
The suggestions that have been advanced to fill the lacuna are
too uncertain to merit translation. There is probably space for
only two letters; and that which follows may be either an y
or a c.
i e ^ p a if e T i e i H mm [F t ]
24 c a .q ? q e F poM ne[
[. . . eB]OA[
(4 lines lacking)
[A H ]
(Lines 1 and 2 lacking)

[ 8 ] h j[ 7 x]?
4 xh [ ........... t ........................] [ ] o y
^F b o [a
2T! t o o [ t o y e ly e n c u i*
6 NCCpq 6 M 1 T 6 e [ Y f i ] T O O T O Y
F Neqcy b h p F [ . . ]. e y e T *
8 u p e o e io j M [H O ]q [ i t o o ] t o y
a.Ycd n e T q jA .x e [ e Y e T ] A q j[ e ]
10 o e iq p M M o q - t [ o t 6 e q e ] o ) [ c u ]
n e R o y 6 p a .6 N T e [
12 n e x e T * k c d b o c x e * [ n o k A .e i*]
TCUT* F h t [
14 a .y o > c e q j o o r f k .[
t a .'J'y x h - e T i n iK [ e o ) A . x e ]
16 "J-qîNe m m o k . e p [ o q ] 'j [c a .a > ]q e
N C $ 7 M e NIM N e NTA.Y[p Mi.]
18 H T H C N A.K* A.YCU I C [H H T 6 ]
c e p M a .K a .p 1 2 e m m o k [ F ] 6 i c i
20 M e n i m - a .n o k a> "fp q jn H p e
xe t tcd c g e N a / n o N r n ^li *
22 [6 om ] 0i y 6 m 6 o m 2 n o y e c e [ H ]
[ c ic ] e c q jo o r t F ^ h t o y n [e ]
24 [ x e n x ] o e i c x e k x a c u c Kp[
[ 9 ]..[
(4 lines lacking)
im
(Line 1 lacking)
2 [ 7 ][
t . . o ]y n N a i[ F
4 o y t t [ n * M ]x iM e Y [e o y n N ] ^
38,4A letter that is perhaps a curiously shaped t precedes the R

8 z ' is written in the left margin.
(FIRST) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 3 8 ,2 3 -3 9 ,4 95
comes to the age of

24 seventeen years [
[
(4 lines lacking)
[38 ]
[ ] beginning (apx'O)
4 [
through [them]. They will pursue
6 him exceedingly, since [they are] from
his [ ] companions. He will be
8 proclaimed [through] them,
and [they will] proclaim this word.
10 [Then (tote ) he will become]
a seed of [
12 James said: [I am]
satisfied [
14 and they are [
my soul (4'ux^))- Yet (en) [another thing]
16 I ask of you: who are the [seven]
women who have [been] your disciples ((aocOyjttj*;) ?
18 And behold,
all women bless ((xaxap(eiv) you.
20 I also am amazed
how (nio<;) [powerless] vessels (ayyelov)
22 have become strong by a perception (aurOyjau;)
which is in them.
24 [The] Lord [said]: You [ ] well (xotXc5<;)
[
(4 lines lacking)
[39 ]
(Line 1 lacking)
2 [
[ ] a spirit (uveufia) [of
4 a [spirit (7tveu(ji.a)] of thought, [a spirit (7uveu(jta)]
38,16 I owe the suggested reconstruction of this line to G. Michael
Browne (University of Illinois).
39,i -8 Appears closely parallel to Isa 1 1 :2 .
Rq)ox[Ne] rJN9[y
6 o yn T n it 6 o y ] 1TnX
WrN<u[cic] p[. . .] ^Tey
8 "f 2 t [ . . . ]n e WTApeNciNe
2W [n ioY]<P<pc Nt6
10 [neTa.p]xa>N- nH e a j x y
[M o y T e e p o q ] x $ X X am S T o c*
12 [ 11 ]po<| A.yo)
[ . . . N]atqe UNJLfe iM e *
14 [ . .rJ T ]a .p i i c b o a F I^ H T q
[*.qp n M ] e e y e x e a n o k
16 [ o y ] q j H p e U TA .q a.qp ^m ot*
[nouT] R n i o y o e i q j z w c e Y
18 q p H p e F lT x q n e a.ya> t o
Te a n o k âoh eMna.<'|>OY
20 cd n 2 c b o a R n e T M i * .< q >
N o y jc e m m o o y ^ m [n e T ]
22 a jl o c - c b o a A e it[m jl]
F in e Ninpo<|>[HTHC
24 no[
(4 lines lacking)
[M]
(Line 1 lacking)
2 [ 18 ].
[ 6 ] m ? [ ...........].accpic*
4 .[ . n e x e T ]aLK tu [B oc oc]e 2 P ^ .b b i
x [ . . . . ] . x z H- [ ] n*T*
6 ft i zb ]Y ôycoT t
N I M. [ 7 ] f R2 h t o Y
8 N 2 0 Y [o 6 ]?[..-]Y e*
n e x e n ^ o ?|c x e f[a.K cuB]oc +
10 TM ieiO mmok[ ........... ] . .
TAAe n T O NMTl[
12 NOûe eq e Hm[
XW n q j . [
39,14 Schenke reads [ x e RT]a.pie i, "for when I came."

19 MS reads eMnATOY-
20 MS reads j*.
of counsel of [a
6 a spirit (7tveu(ta) [ a] spirit (7cveufi,a)
of knowledge ( y v & csic,) [ ] of their
8 fear. [ ] when we had passed
through [the breadth] of
10 [this] archon who
is [named] Adonaios
12 [ ] him and
[ ] he was ignorant
14 [ ] when I came forth from him,
[he] remembered that I
16 am [a] son of his. He was gracious
[to me] at that time as (ax;)
18 his son. And then (totc),
before 
20 appeared here, <he>
cast them among [this]
22 people (Xao<;). And (Se) from the [place]
of heaven the prophets (7rpo<p^Trj<;) [
24 [
[
(4 lines lacking)
[40]
(Line i lacking)
2 [
[
4 James [said]: Rabbi,
[
6 I [ ] all together
[ ] in them
8 especially [
The Lord said: [James], I
10 praise [you
walk upon the earth [
12 the words while he [
on the [
39,21 among": or perhaps from."
22 Bohlig (1) reads 6 B O A M [ttM-Jl], and from the place,"
but regards it as tenuous. The TI, however, is visible.
7
98 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V, J
14 N o y x e rAp c b o a m m [o k ffinA]
n o f nAT n e n c iu ? [e oyFI ^ c n ]
16 a a a y r^ p e b o a 2 ? [
A ^ epA T oy oyBH icIJ *.[k 1 t o ]
18 o t k rA.p e c o y c u N N e [y N o y ]
Ne x in q jo p it oja %xe- y o y x
20 B O A MMOK H A N O M IA N IM
A y c u MA'j T H K M H nCD C R
22 e p o K - e q jc o n e e K
[qjA]Nxe NeTqÂxe RTe Tef
24 [ e c ] H c i c t c u V R ^ h t* H n e e i
[q T O O y ] CAACDMH Mfi m a p i a m
26 [MFI M x p e x mR X p cJiT T o H
[ 14 ]TK
28 [ 14 ] 1**
[ I5 i 1
GUI
(L in es 1 a n d 2 la ckin g)
e . .[
4 xh ey[ 12 ]n
Mfii*[ 13 ]?
6 noyH [ 9 ]c eqÂq
Xi fi ey [ 7 ]cu naT
8 qjAq . [ ........ ]n6aia
m R [ ......... ]<j>opv a n o k A e
10 [ 7 i R ] T e ' l ' 2 AN- A A A A
[ . . . .A]lJApXH fiT N IAT*
12 [ 14 =b]e m e
[ ........................]A poy [x]?KAAC
14 [eceoy]cuN 2 c b o a fi6 i t 6 om
[HnNoyTje a ttitak o Aqpxcup;
16 [e 2 P]AT eniAi*TAKo- Aycu
[<J>]u>b R'f M R i'c fiM e Aqp
18 KATANTA e^pA'f <J>CDB FiTeY
m R t^ o o yt *' n e x e Ta k c u b o c
40,18 e<ye> COyCDN, they are to understand0 : Schenke.

25 Possibly [caiU jq e], seven0, should be read instead of four"
(cf. 38,16). But line 27 contains a few letters which do n o t look
(FIRST) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 40,14-41,19 99
14 For (yp) cast away from [you the]

cup, which is the bitterness.
i6 For (yp) some from [
set themselves against you. For (yap) [you have begun]
18 to understand [their roots]
from beginning to end. Cast
20 away from yourself all lawlessness ( a v o f u a ) .
And beware, lest (ii,Y)7wo<;)
22 they envy you. When you
speak these words of this
24 [perception (ouctOyjctis)], encourage these
[four]: Salome and Mariam
26 [and Martha and Arsinoe]
[
28 [
[
[41]
[
4 [
[
6 [ ] since he takes
some [ ] to me
8 he is [ ] burnt offerings
and [ ]. But (ft) I
10 [] not in this way; but (aXXa)
[ ] first-fruits (aTOxpx*)) of the
12 [ ] upward
[ ] so that
14 the power [of God might] appear.
The perishable has [gone (xcopeiv)]
16 [up] to the imperishable and
the female element has
18 attained (xaxavxocv) to this male element.
James said:
like they are parts of a name. The four mentioned are, as

Bohlig (1) notes, brought together twice in Allberry, ed.,
Manichaean Psalm Book, pp. 192, 21-24; 194, 19-22.
20 xe ^pabbi ettpoMTe oyN R

rxyuoyxe Rney. [
22 ay ' c ' oojoy r*P K*! rt*p ^Y]
ncuT* Wc c u o y p[
24 ot [. ]W[
*Y[
(4 lines lacking)
[HU
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 [ 15 ]N N l-
[ 12 e ic ] 2 H T
6 a[ 10 Jfi^cdb
NIM* A.[ 9 ]6BO A
8 aaay 7 ] e-
akxi rAp H [........ ] h N t s
10 o y rN C D cic- a y [ u >
n o y xe a o j n e n [
12 m o o o j[ ] 7 [
K N A 6 [lN e
14 a n o k A [e ] '|'NA.BC0[K BOA]
vytu BO]^.
16 xe a y n a ^ t c epoij. oc[e e y e ]
T ( u f FI^ht* 2 P^T Y c m [o y ]
18 n a y mW o y o y ^ T - a y <u R T e
n e To Y U JN g c b o a q jtu n e -
20 a y c o AqBCUK R n iO Y o e iq j FI
[ c a ] t [ o ] o t ZI A q c o g e mtti m R t*
22 [ c n o ] q y c - AYtu A qN O Y-xe
[CBOA] N[ h ]T O Y W OYTtUf H^HT*
24 [ T B 'tTT] P 01^ W t [ 0 ]Y rN O )C IC
[ 14 I't* xe
26 [ 16 ].Toy
(3 lines lacking)
[Hr]
41,22 The scribe corrected C2t.q? to COOJ^.

424 Perhaps the name here was Anna, Joanna, or Susanna.
(FIRST) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 4 1 ,2 0 -4 3 ,2 101
20 Rabbi, into these three (things) then (o5v),

has their [ ] been cast.
22 For (yap) they have been reviled, [and (xai yap) they
have been]
persecuted [
24 [
[
(4 lines lacking)
[42]
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 [
[ ] Behold
6 [ ] everything
[ ] from
8 anyone[
For (yap) you have received [ ] of
10 knowledge (yvtocn*;). [And
[ ] that what is the [
12 go[
you will [find
14 But (8e) I shall go [forth]
and shall reveal
16 that they believed in you [that they may]
be content with their [blessing]
18 and salvation, and
this revelation may come to pass.
20 And he went at that time
[immediately] and rebuked the
22 twelve, and cast
[out] of them contentment
24 [concerning the] way (7topeia) of knowledge (yvoocyu;)
[
26 [
(3 lines lacking)
[43 ]
42,12 There are some traces of writing in the left margin.

10 2 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V ,J
[]* .[
4 NT a[
neToc[
6 e n M i[ 8 ]N T q
N N i ? 7[ 6 ] T ie ^ o y o
8 A e N T [e y . . . .]f RTepoy
n a [ y a t t ip J m n ^ c d b xt e ^ o y N
i [ 6 ]A q e B O \ - N i K e
[ 6 ]7 tta . . a y a
12 [ 12 *]<*> m m o c
[ ...........] o y N e ^ p W 'f- xe h a
14 [. . . . mtt] a T c b o a ne'fKA^
[RqMTT]aj[A] rAp mttconJ an-
16 [Ay]p2OTe Y N N*"f ayto>
o yN o y eyxco mmoc xe t n
18 k o in cu n i ene'fcN oq an-
OypOJMe TAP RAIKAIOC
20 eq NATAKO fiN OyM[fJT]
AAIKOC- Aq BCDK [H]6[l Ya]
22 KOJBOC X C K A A [c] .[
N[
(6 lines lacking)
[M A ]
(Lines 1-3 lacking)

4 [ 14 ]9 .
[ 13 ]cu t
6 [ 12 ]N A Y
B [O A 7 ] r* p
8 anm [ 6 ] M Moq:
T A n o K ^ t y 'l'ic ]
10 n Ya k c u b [ o c ]
43,17-18 Cf. Mt 27:24.

[
4 these [
this [
6 to the [
[ ] And (8e) the majority
8 of [them ] when they
[saw, the] messenger took in
io [ ] The others
[
12 [ ] said:
[
14 [ ] him from this earth.
For (yap) [he is] not [worthy] of life.
i6 These, then (ouv), [were] afraid. They arose,
saying: We
18 have no part (xoivwveiv) in this blood,
for (yap) a just man (8ixouo<;)
20 will perish through
injustice (dcSixo?). James departed
22 so that [
[
(6 lines lacking)
[44]
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 [
[
6 [ ] look
[ ] for (yap)
8 we (?) [ ] him.
The Apocalypse
io of James
V,^: 44,11-63,32
Cha rles W. H e d r ic k
Bohlig-Labib. Koptisch-gnostische Apokalypsen. Pp. 56-85. (Here

after, Bohlig [1]).
Funk, W.-P., ed. Die zweite Apokalypse des Jakobus aus Nag-
Hammadi-Codex V. TU 119. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1976.
Kasser, R. Bibliotheque gnostique VI: Les Deux Apocalypses de
Jacques. RThPh 18 (1968), 163-86.
Bohlig. Mysterion und Wahrheit. Pp. 102-18. (Hereafter, Bohlig [2]).
Brown, S. K. James: A religio-historical study of the relations be
tween Jewish, Gnostic and Catholic Christianity in the early
period through an investigation of the traditions about James
the Lords brother. Unpublished Ph.D. dissertation, Brown
University, 1972. (Hereafter, Brown [1]).
---- . Jewish and Gnostic Elements in the Second Apocalypse of
James (CG V,^). NovTest (1975), 225-37. (Hereafter, Brown
[2]).
Little, D. H. The Death of James the Brother of Jesus. Un
published doctoral dissertation, Rice University, 1971.
Schenke, H.-M. Review of Bohlig-Labib, Koptisch-gnostische Apo
kalypsen. OLZ 61 (1966), cols. 24-34. (Hereafter, Schenke [1]).
---- . "Exegetische Probleme der zweiten Jakobus-Apokalypse in
Nag-Hammadi-Codex V. Probleme der koptischen Literatur.
Edited by P. Nagel. Wissenschaftliche Beitrage der Martin-
Luther-Universitat. Halle-Wittenberg, 1968. Pp. 109-14. (Here
after, Schenke [2]).
Troger, ed. Gnosis und N T. Pp. 45-46.
The fourth tractate in Codex V has been given the modern title
The (Second) Apocalypse of James in order to distinguish it from
V,j, since both documents have the same ancient title (44,8-12).
The twenty pages of the tractate (44-63) are preserved in a fragmen
tary state. With two exceptions (53/54,63), the bottoms of the pages
are lost. Pp. 44-52 have broken away at the top except for a small
strip that preserves part of the first line; 53-63 are missing text
io6 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V,4
in varying degrees at the top of the page. Page numbers are visible
only on pp. 57-63.
The literary form of the tractate is difficult to describe. The title
(44,11-12) refers to it as an apocalypse, and the incipit (44,13-15)
describes it as a discourse. In the sense that James relates a reve
lation received from the resurrected Jesus, it may be called a reve
lation discourse. However, the actual structure of the tractate is
cast in the form of a two-part report to Theuda, the father of James,
by Mareim, a priest and relative of Theuda, who apparently was
present at the stoning of James.
Due to the fragmentary character of the tractate the beginnings
and endings of the discourses reported by Mareim are not always
clear. The following outline will help the reader recognize when the
speakers change.
I. Prologue: 44,11-20.
II. The report of Mareim: 44,21-63,32.
A. Mareim comes to Theuda with the report: 44,21-45,3o( ?).
B. The discourses of James: 46,1 ( ?)-6o,29( ?).
1. James claims to be the revelation bearer: 46,i(?)-
4730(?).
2. The first discourse of Jesus reported by James:
4 8 ,i(?)- 4 9 ,3 (?).
3. The report of James on the appearance of Jesus:
5o,i(?)-3o(?).
4. The second discourse of Jesus reported by James:
5 i,i(? )-5 7 ,I i.
5. The reaction of James to the appearance of Jesus:
57>i2-i 9 .
6. The final exhortation of James: 57,20-60,29(?).
C. The death of James: 61,i( ?)-63,29-
1. The setting: 6i ,i (?)- i 4.
2. The account of the stoning: 61,15-62,12.
3. The prayer of James: 62,12-63,29.
4. Conclusion: 63,30-32.
The tractate contains at least four sections artistically arranged
in a systematic structure. Because of their balance and stylized
form they have been described by Bohlig as "harmonic prose pos
sessing a hymnic quality. Bohlig argues that a considerable part
of the tractate has a similar stylized form, but because of lacunae
( s e c o n d ) APOCALYPSE OF JAM ES: INTRODUCTION 107
and basic changes in structure such stylized arrangements for the

entire tractate are not certain ([i], p. 57).
Three of these units are aretalogies. One (49,5-15) is a series of
self-assertions by the resurrected Jesus in the eyto eljju style. Another
(58,2-20) is a series of predications about the resurrected Jesus made
by James in the third person (<x o t o <; e t m v ) . In a further aretalogy
(55,15-56,13) the resurrected Jesus describes Jamess special role in
the second person (<tu el). He is called illuminator (55,17) and
redeemer (55,18). People will be astonished because of his power
ful deeds (55,22-23). He is the one whom the heavens will bless
(55,24-25). It is because of James that people will "reign and become
kings (56,4-5). In short, the entire description suggests that James
is intended to perform the function of a gnostic redeemer.
The fourth unit (62,16-63,29) is a prayer attributed to James. The
present setting of the prayer requires that one read it as the prayer
of a martyr shortly before his death. However, it is by no means
certain that the present setting of the prayer was its original set
ting. Apart from its context, it has the character of a prayer that
one might pray if one were facing some future period of persecution
or trial. The request in 62,21-22 suggests that there was a prospect
of continued existence in the world. 63,23-24 speaks of something
other than a painful death, already mentioned in 63,5-6, and in
fact suggests trials and tribulations such as a man might anticipate
in his daily experience. It is true that 63,24-25 suggests an imminent
crisis, but it is not immediately evident that this crisis is death.
Compare the prayer in Tobit 3:1-6 where one observes similar re
quests without hint of immediate death in either prayer or context.
Funk recognizes correctly that there is a difference in both style
and perspective between the first part of the tractate (44-60) and
the second part (61-63) and convincingly argues that they are in
reality two separate documents brought together at the expense of
the conclusion of the former and the beginning of the latter (pp.
i93_98). He suggests that the prayer is an independent piece of
liturgical tradition whose life setting may be found either in some
sort of gnostic sacrament such as the celebration of final anointing
described in Iren. Haer. I.21.5, or the confession that the ascending
soul makes before its jailers on its journey to the Father (pp.
211-20). Bohlig (2), p. 118, on the other hand, sees no compelling
reason on the basis of the content of the prayer to regard it as
having a gnostic provenance.
io8 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V,4
The tractate as a whole is clearly gnostic in character, yet it shows

remarkable restraint in treating certain gnostic themes. For example,
aeons (53,8) and archons (56,19), common in gnostic texts, are each
only mentioned once. There is no involved or speculative cosmog
ony, and in only a few places does one sense the cosmology of the
author (54,7-23; 58,2-6). The tractate cannot be identified with any
of the known gnostic systems of the second century (Bohlig [i]t
p. 28). Such motifs as salvation through knowledge (57,4-8) and a
contrast between the arrogant boastful creator (56,20-57,3), who is
responsible for mans imprisonment in the world (54,10-15), and the
unknown gracious father, who exists without the creators knowl
edge (58,2-6), are too general to permit such an identification.
On the other hand, the author has made extensive use of Jewish-
Christian traditions. He regards James, who held a position of spe
cial prominence in Jewish-Christian circles, as the possessor of a
special revelation from Jesus and assigns him a role in the gnostic
tradition that rivals, and perhaps exceeds, that of Peter in the
canonical tradition. For example, James is the escort who guides
the Gnostic through the door of the heavenly kingdom and even
rewards him (55,6-14; cf. 55,15-56,13). The description is similar to
Peter's charge as the keeper of the keys of heaven (Mt 16:19).
As Bohlig has indicated, the relationship to Jewish-Christian tra
ditions is more than superficial ([2], pp. 107-10, 114-16). The report
on the stoning in 2 Apoc. Jas. and the Hegesippus report on the
martyrdom of James (Eus. Hist. Eccl. II.23) have certain verbal
similarities. Further, 2 Apoc. Jas. follows exactly the Jewish legal
regulations for execution as described in the Mishnah (Sanh. 6.6).
Even the structure of the tractate, Bohlig argues, can be understood
as the combination of a traditional report on the preaching of James
on the steps of the temple (Ps.-Clem. Recg. I.66-73) and a second
report on the stoning of James describing his death as a martyr,
following the model of Stephens martyrdom in Ac 6-7 (but cf.
Brown [2], pp. 226-27, note 6).
As to the date and place of composition, little can be said with
certainty. Because of the basic Jewish-Christian traditions out of
which the tractate is composed, it is probable that its origin is to be
associated with Jewish-Christian circles. The absence of allusions to
the later developed gnostic systems, the issues to which the author
addresses himself (Bohlig [i], p. 28; Funk, pp. 208-09), an(l the al
most total absence of allusions to the New Testament tradition
suggest an early date for the origin of the tractate.
(s e c o n d ) APOCALYPSE OF JA M ES: INTRODUCTION IO 9
The presence and order of the two James apocalypses in Codex V

may be attributed to deliberate scribal organization. The two apo
calypses stress different aspects of the James tradition and actually
complement one another. The setting of i Apoc. Jas. emphasizes
the period prior to the suffering of James, while 2 Apoc. Jas. de
scribes his suffering and death in line with the predictions in 1 Apoc.
Jas.
V,4 :[44],i i -63,32
Tha ]
T A .n o K A A Y 'p fl c ]
12 fi1TA.[lCtUBOC]
naJf n e [ n ] q ; a j c e e [ T A q c p A ]
14 x e M M o q 7161 Ya k c u [ b o c n i l ]
k a i o c Fi o i H M - n [ e ] T [ a . q ]
16 c A ^ q F i6 i MA.peiM- o y a . [H ]
N i o y H H B A q x o o q TI
18 e e y i i mcun* R n iA . i K A . 1 0 c
e n iA H N e y c y i* re N H C W
20 TA.q n e e q x c u R m o c x e
[6 e n ]H R m o k iM o y m W
22 [ M A p ] jA T e K C ^ i M e MN Nl
[ c y i * ] r e [ N ] H c W ta .k F i N e q
24 [ 8 ] .[ 6 ]IFQ [
(6 lines lacking)
fMel
[ . ] o j a 6 e TJ[
2 Aycu x e .[
Ne N e .[
4 RneT[
R n e T .[ 6 ] a .n [ . . ] . [
6 e p o q * 6 e n H 6 e [ M ] e c p i K [W]
t o k ^cucuij: [ t a . k ] x ! M o e [ i ] T
8 n a n u?A.poq [q N A .p ]N o e i*
e i c 2 H H T e rA.p [ o y ] R o y M H
44,11 B y matching the profile of p. 44 with p. 45, where a part of line

1 is extant, one is able to extrapolate the number of lines at the
top of p. 44. On this basis there appears to have been one line
more than Bohlig conjectured.
15-18 or which Mareim wrote. One [of] the priests told it to
Theuda.. . .
V ,* : [ 4 4 ],1 1 -6 3 ,3 2
[44]
The Apocalypse
12 of [James]
This is [the] discourse that James
14 [the] Just (Sixaio?) spoke
in Jerusalem, [which]
16 Mareim, one [of] the priests,
wrote. He had told it to
18 Theuda, the father of the Just One (Sixaio?),
since (eneiSr)) he was a relative (aoyyevyjt;)
20 of his. He said:
[Hasten]! Come with
22 [Mary], your wife and
your relatives (ouyyevrjs)
24 [
(6 lines lacking)
[45]
therefore [
2 and [
[
4 [
of this [
6 to him. Hasten then! Perhaps
[after] you yourself [have led]
8 us to [him, he will] understand (voetv).
For (yap) behold, a multitude
44.21 Reconstruction following Schenke (1), col. 29.

24 Where it can be ascertained, the total number of lines per page
varies from 26 to 32. Conjectured totals are based on the nearest
complete page.
45,6 Reconstruction following Schenke (1), col. 29.
8 UJA.poCj: Reconstruction following Funk.
xo H O je e y q j T p T C D p e x R
n e q [ . .a jy c u c e 6 a .N ?
12 [ e p o q R o ] y N o 6 R dcD N f*
[ 7 ] A G C e [ U ) ] X H A
14 [ 13 1Y
[ ] . N e T a > [ a .]x e r a p
16 [N e q ]a p [a x ]? R M o o y R o y
[ M H H ] q je R c o n mR ^ cn k o
18 o y e o n N e ru ^ A x e N e q x a >
M M ooy ey^M O oc R61
20 ttau jaT R R a a o c a.q l e
2 o y N R T o q a q ^ M o o c p[a.T]
22 n i M i e n e q c a > N ? [n e ]
x w x A q^M O O c R C iT [n e ]
24 R n M A 2 l * o y R tc o p * ? [ n e T ]
ta Th o y f* e p e ^ e N [A A ]
26 o c T H p q .[
e N O )[A ]x e [
28 T 6 . .[
[ .]a>.[
30 [ . . . ]q ? [
[M S]
[ 13 ]n e npo>
2 [ 13 ]6B O A R
[ 15 ]y q > *
4 [ 15 ]R n H
[ 14 ]xe oy
6 [ . . ] . . [ , ] e - i [ N ] o K i j [ e n ] H e T * .y
[6]q>ATt N[Aq B ]O A / 6 B O A i T R
8 l j n A H p a ) [ M A R t c ] 'f- ^ <l) e A P
45,22 Emendation following Funk.

23 Reconstruction following Funk.
24 "fifth flight of steps : See Jos. Bell. V. 194-201 and Mishnah Mid.
2.3,6. The place meant is probably the Nicanor gate leading into
the court of Herods temple from the east side. On three sides of
the temple area there were nine flights of five steps leading up to
nine gates: four on the north; four on the south; one on the east.
(There was also a gate inside the court of women that led into the
sanctuary proper. Apparently it did not have a flight of steps.)
(SECOND) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 45,10-46,8 113
10 are disturbed over

his [ ] and they are greatly
12 angry [at him].
[ ] and (B i) they pray
*4 [
[ ] For (yap)
16 [he would] often say these words,
and others
18 also. He used to speak these words
while the multitude of people (Xao?)
20 were seated. But (on this occasion) he entered
and did <not> sit down
22 in the place, as was his custom.
Rather (aXXa) he sat above
24 the fifth flight of steps, [which]
is (highly) esteemed, while all our people (Xa6<;)
26 [
the words [
28 [
[
30 [
[46]
] I am he who
received revelation from
the Pleroma [of] Imperishability (dKpOapcrwc).
If one counts from either side of the temple area, the Nicanor
gate is at the head of the fifth flight of steps. According to
Josephus this gate was made of heavy Corinthian bronze that
far exceeded the other eight gates in value. The other gates were
simply overlaid with gold and silver. It has been identified with
the beautiful gate of Ac 3:2. The location seems to have been
a gathering place for the community leaders to deliberate mat
ters of importance (Jos. Bell. II.4 11). See Funk, pp. 94-96.
8
ii 4 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V ,4
CIA- neN[TA.y]p ojoprt Rta .

io Meq nH eTNea.q* Aycu
AqccuTM Rea. n ^ Io e ic ]
12 neNTAqoYtOTB [ c b o a R]
R k o c [ moc
14 nH e [T . . . . ]*q[. . neNT*.q]
KAK.q A^Hoy o[y*A]q [Ayco]
16 iqMOO<ye eqicHK ^ [H o y ]
neNTAydRTq R n oy
18 T iic c eyNA.oyA.TBeq
t]2P^ eta.<|)ApciA-
20 [ne]Y xoeic eTHnetMA.-
[xqei] eyqjHpe ne eqNvy
22 [e B ]o \ ayco eycoN ne
[A.y]<p?lTq eqRNHoy qja.
24 [ .......].e [. . ]. [. ]*n o q xe
[ 10 l^ycu qTtoi*
26 [ 10 ]^.[A]q Rpijiê
t 14 ] oy[
(3 lines lacking)
m
? ? []? [ 9 nen]
2 TAqei u?[a.po
t i c *a [
4 niK[
Zn o[y
6 eTe[. . . . ]a.. [. ]tk .[ . . ] a [
fNoy on {e 5[pm]mao N
8 oyrN U)[cic a.y]tu ey[R]
t \ J 7>Noye[iMe R]oya>t
10 neNTayjcnoq cboa Flea
n c y t p e i o y A A q - MR m q ? o
12 [ 6 ]? [i] e B O A jt) o y H e
[ 6 ]H f iN O K n e ni
46,11 Reconstruction following Schenke (1), col. 29.

12-13 passed through the [worlds : Cf. Heb 4:14.
15 The translation ignores the punctuation mark following A2H0Y
17-19 perishable (state) and imperishability : Cf. 1 Cor 15:42-54-
(I am) he who was first summoned

10 by him who is great, and
who obeyed the [Lord],
12 he who passed [through]
the [worlds ( x o c tjjlo c ; )
14 he who [ he who]
stripped [himself and]
16 went about naked,
he who was found in a
18 perishable (state), though he was about to be brought
up into imperishability (a<p0ap<ua).
20 This Lord who is present
[came] as a son who sees,
22 and as a brother
[was he sought]. He will come to
24 [ J produced him because
[ ] and he unites
26 [ ] make him free
[
(3 rfc lines lacking)
[ 47 ]
in [
2 he who came [to
[
4 [
[
6 [
Now again am I rich in
8 knowledge (yv&ai<;) [and] I have
a unique [understanding],
10 which was produced only from
above and the [
12 [ ] comes from a [
[ ]. I am the
46,21 Reconstruction following Schenke (2), p. 1 1 1 .

26 The reading R was suggested by Schenke in conversation.
n6 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V ,4
14 [ IO ] - [-]? N O Y
[ 7 ] 9 t ] . [ ]1* eTAT
16 po y[cu N q ]- n e T A q o y u jN ^
NAT AqfcJCDTt RCiBO A NOY
18 o y n im - ayco eq e o yu JN ^
6BOA BOA iTOOT?j- n i
20 CNAY 6TNAY 6BOA ANOK
a y p ujoprt FiT A U jepIeiuj]
22 6BOA ÎTOOTOy RNIU}[AXe]
e y e t gATt e p o q mn [H a a i ]
24 k o c-n e N T A q cu N ^ x[cupic]
o y ^ ' Aq moy 2 Wn y W
26 nH eT*[y]N[o];icq [e b]oa
ceT[
28 eN[
(2 lines lacking)
TTTh I
[ 12 ]TAq upA
2 [ 13 ]* baa.
[ 15
4 [ 15 i le^
[ ......... ] [ ][ T]CApS
6 [Ay]cp e e iR [N ]tio Y e b o a
T [cA ]fA 3 2[Rn o yr]N U )cic-
8 a n o k eTM [oy] Rn oyM oy-
eyN A 6iN [e] A.e mmosi ^n
10 OyUJN^' ANOK ATTi] ? 2 Y n
x e e y N A t a [ tt 6 -fl
47,16-19 The subject of these sentences is assumed to be the content of

revelation. They may, however, refer to Jesus: "He who was
revealed to me was hidden from everyone and shall (only) be
revealed through it (i.e., understanding, line 9).
19-22 B6hlig (1) and Kasser regard the text as corrupt. Funk, follow
ing Schenke (1), col. 29, takes 47,19-20 as a two part nominal
sentence. However, it seems most probable that at least one line
has been lost through scribal error following ANOK. The missing
text would have resumed n iC N A y 6T N A Y e B O A . in the suffix
pronoun as the object of the missing verb. A certain identifica
tion of these two who see is not possible. Funk, following
(SECOND) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 4 7 ,1 4 - 4 8 ,I I II7
H [
[ ] whom I
16 knew. That which was revealed
to me was hidden from everyone
18 and shall (only) be revealed
through him. These
20 two who see I
(and) they have already proclaimed
22 through these [words]:
"He shall be judged with the [unrighteous (&8txo<;)].
24 He who lived [without (x<op[<;)]
blasphemy died by means of [blasphemy].
26 He who was cast out
they [
28 [
(2 lines lacking)
[48]
[
2 [
[
4 [
[ the] flesh (<rap)
6 [and] it is by knowledge (yvwau;)
that I shall come forth from the [flesh (<rap)].
8 I am surely dying,
but (Se) it is in life that I shall be found.
10 I entered
in order that they might judge [ I]
Schenke (i), col. 29, understands this to be a reference to the

two blind men in Mt 9:27-31; 20:29-34. However, cf. Jn 12 :4 1.
If the fragmentary section following the Isaiah citation (47,23)
contained a citation from another prophet, the two who see
would then refer to Isaiah and the other prophet.
47*23 Cf. Isa 5 3 :12 ; L k 22:37.
24-25 blasphemy : Cf. Gal 3 :13 .
27-48,6 In the lacuna the text passes from James's discourse to a dis
course by Jesus as related to James (cf.Schenke [2], p.109, and
cf. also Bohlig [1], p. 57, who does not take what follows to be a
discourse by Jesus).
n8 NAG HAMMADI CODEX Y ,4
12 Fl N H O Y 6 B O A [R
Hi* 7 '|*'J'T]aj
14 ; \ m a n e ^ P A T e x q ) [ o Y R ]R
^mâa R t netl? [ 1 ^
16 naT a n o k e j'b e n H mmoT
aay RpRê- ^Y410 eei

18 oYcotp e-xiTOY NCATne
pnH eTOYUjq? ep x o e ic
20 [e]pAT excwoY" eqpame
[e]yu)ANpBOHei epooy
22 [a ] n o k ne nicoN flN OY
fce] Fi-KiPY^ neNTAqpAp
24 [A ]ce[e] RneTcpf ojan
[Teq 7 ] efl
26 [ 14 ]tp
(4 lines lacking)
[Mel
mNn oy [
2 p pp o : a [
*t'A <)>[6A p CIA .......... OJO]
4 pit e[w
anok. [ n e n q j o ] p f f [ F J q jH p e ]
6 [e]TA Y -xno q - q[N]^.Bco^.
B O A K T e [ Y M H T ] X O e ip [t h ]
8 poy1 an o k [ne] rrm epiT
an ok ne niA[lK]AIOC'
10 a n o k n e n io jH p e fiT e
[nieitU T *] j ' o j A . x e Fi e
12 [ e ] T ^ [ T c ] a ) T H - J*'! A N C M M e
N e [ e ] T A 'f [ X l] N 'f e N T O A H 'j'
48,13 B o th B ohlig (1) a n d F u n k em end th e te x t as follows: FK "|*>t

e*TT A [N ].
17 T h e firs t le tte r in th e line (e ) is oversized a n d occupies the space
t h a t n o rm ally acco m m o d ates tw o lette rs.
23 R eco n stru ctio n follow ing Schenke (1), col. 30.
23-25 Cf. M t 6 :6 ; L k 11:5-8.
49,6-8 T h e sen ten ce seem s to b e a scribal gloss, since it interrupts the
series of self-assertions in th e first p erson b y introducing a third
perso n p ro n o u n .
(SECOND) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 4 8 ,1 2 -4 9 ,1 3 119
12 shall come forth [in

judge [ I do]
14 not bring blame against the
servants of his [
16 I hasten
to make them free and
18 want to take them above
him who wants to rule
20 over them. If
they are helped (Porj0etv),
22 I am the brother in
secret, who prayed (<pac0ai)
24 to the Father [until]
[he ] in
26 [
(4 lines lacking)
[49]
[
2 reign: [
[imperishability (acpOapafoc) ] first
4 in [
I [am the] first [son]
6 who was begotten.He will destroy
the dominion of [them] all
8 I am the beloved.
I am the righteous one (8xaio<;).
xo I am the son of
[the Father]. I speak even as
12 [I] heard. I command
even as I [received] the order (svtoXt)). I
49.8-15 Cf. Jn 8 :2 8 ; 12:49; 17:25-26.

9 THAI K.A.1 O C is translated as the righteous one to avoid con
fusing the speaker with James,
n or [na.eiO )T ], [My Father].
14 T iM [o ] Mtf[U>]TN- W ee N
ta Y 0 [in ] e i c ^ H H T e 'j'cijA-xe
16 a c e K i i c eYNAei c b o a - ma
f* 2 th tW e p o e i ?na h t b
18 t R n a y e p o e i- e c p x e aY
a? cone f i e a n o k nim- b n j
20 {t} a T 1 ta p < a n > N e e e T e ^ ie m
MOC- O Y T 6 WNY NAO[y ]
22 con s b o a a n W e e e -fta jo ]
ort R m o c - N e T q p o o n
24 r A p ^ f lN o y k o y ^ W H n[e]
F iN O Y o e !a j[. . ]o )N ? [
26 MN T*.[ 9 ]y .[
28 tu[
(2 lines lacking)
[I]
[ 11 ] eniAy
2 [ 12 ] ' ayco
[ 13 le e r y
4 [ -------] [ 8 ] coa
e T 2 M [ o ] o c Wn [ o ] y o
6 [ e i ] o r e Y [o ?o ]a cN e
[A q ]o Y C u [N R n ] p o A [ q ] e i n a T
8 e ^ o Y N y[6]j nAT b t R m a y
T T 6N TA T6 TR M 6 [ c ] T U ) q
10 a y c o A T e T f i n cu [ t n c c u q ]
I n e x A q naY x e X A [ i p ] e n [A ]
12 I CON- TTACO[n] X A ip [ e ] -
I WTepiTcotoy [R]nA[2]o e^pA'f
14I x e K A A C e T e e ic u p P i R c c u q -
I n e j c e t m a a y naY x e R
16 n p N O Y c p i f n A q j H p e x e
49,19-21 Emendation following Schenke (1), col. 30. Cf. Soph. Jes. Chr.
(Ill 4) 91,10-15 and Gos. P h il. (II, j) 57,29-58,2. F u n k transcribes
19-21, as e N T { T } A Y i t a p S e e e T e l f i e 3k.[N R]MOcand
translates 19-23 thus: "For I have come the way I am not; and
I shall not reveal the way I am.
(SECOND) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 4 9 ,1 4 - 5 0 ,1 6 121
14 show you (pi.) even as

I have [found]. Behold, I speak
16 in order that I may come forth. Pay
attention to me in order that (va) you
18 may see me! If I
have come into existence, who then am I ?
20 For (yap) I did <not> come as I am,
nor ( o u t e ) would I have appeared
22 as I am.
For (yap) I used to exist
24 for a brief period
of time [
26 [
[
28 [
(2 lines lacking)
[50]
[ ]. Since (erceiSy])
2 [ ]. And
[
4 [
[ ] Once when I was sitting
6 deliberating,
[he] opened [the] door.
8 That one
whom you hated
10 and persecuted came in to me.
He said to me: Hail (xatpe), my
12 brother; my brother, hail (xatps).
As I raised my [face]
14 to stare at him,
(my) mother said to me: Do not
16 be frightened, my son, because
49.25-50,1 In the lacuna there is a shift from the discourse of Jesus as re

ported by Jam es to Jam ess report on the appearance of Jesus.
5.J6 The first word in line 16 is written: TTpN o y ' cyTt-
i q j c o o c e p o K ace nACO n -
18 A y e a n SJ t h y t R rAp j n
[T ]e re p a > T e fioytDi*- e
20 [ t ] Be ttaT q jA q M o yT e
epoY x e TAM AAy R n o y
22 cpfiMo rAp R m on a n n e -
n co ^ i feA] n e K e ico i* ne-
24 na[ 10 ]?tR
[ 13 ]*pec
26 [ 16 ].
(4 lines lacking)
(EH
NAy ace n * [ 9
2 [N]eTq?Aac[e 6 ]Aq[
Rjm* a[ 6 ]cpp[
4 MMOC 4C ? [........... ] e z [
no6 mm?[ . ] . [. . ] . . . [
6 [ a ] n o k e't N A d fR T lo y R [ c e e i]
6BOV ANOK [A n] n;[U?]R
8 y o Aycu MR[TA]y co oyN
[m]moi ^ r N e [y ]^ e e y e
10 x e ce[c]o o Y N RMoe; ^m
[neT]Ton[o]c- a a a a Nene
12 [T e ]q jq je A e n e N TeêN KO
[o ]y e e r n e [b]oa 0 t o o t k -
14 < n A Y > ne*t'oca mmoc n a k ace
ccutm A y cd e m e - o y R
16 oyMHHcpe tap eycpAN
CCUTM CGNAp dAB^HT*-
18 r t o k A e eiM e R e e e*J'
NAcy j c o o c n a k - neKeicu[i*]
20 R n A fco t eN n e- a a a a
nAYcui* A qcpcune n a [k ]
22 R N o ye icu i* - TeYnAp
50,23 step-brother : Lit. brother by your father. Bohlig (1) has

emended the text to read: nco[N RT ]eK epC U T 6: milk-
brother. Funk emends it to read: n < O JN > c[ON Hn]eiC'
eiCDT: "nephew.
(SECOND) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 5 0 ,1 7 -5 1 ,2 2 I2 3
he said My brother to you (sg.).

18 For (yap) you (pi.) were nourished with
this same milk. Because of
20 this he calls
me My mother.
22 For (yap) he is not a stranger to us.
He is your [step-brother].
24 [
[
26 [
(4 lines lacking)
[51]
[
2 these words [
[
4 [
great [
6 I shall [find] them, and [they shall come]
forth. [However (8e)], I am the stranger,
8 and they have no knowledge
of me in [their] thoughts,
10 for they know me in
[this place (to7co?)]. But (aXXa, 8e) it
12 was fitting that others
know through you.
14 <This is> what I say to you:
Hear and understand
16 for (yap) a multitude, when they
hear, will be slow witted.
18 But (8s) you, understand as I
shall be able to tell you. Your father
20 is not my father. But (aXXa)
my father has become a father
22 to [you]. This virgin (7cap0evo<;)
The last two letters of M M 0 6 ] appear to have been written

originally as qj and then corrected to e i .
6 N O C eTeKCCOTM TB[h]
24 h t c *t a T Te e e [. . ]. k c ?[
n e M T .[ 8 e ]B o ^ [
26 R TA p ![
xe e . .[ 7 nAp]
28 N O [C
(2 lin e s la c k in g )
[H ]
[ 9 n ] 6 i "fn A p
2 [ n o ] C a [ ____ ] e x e n c u c
[. . . . ]* x c p [. . . ] .a [ .] n a T x e
4 [. . . . ]th [. . . . e ] m e n A
[ . . . . ] f iq [ . .]p e R e e a n
6 [ . . . ] e '| '[ . . .] q ? c - n A T r A p
[ -] Pe 2 P*t 1 Y 2 <i e Potl
8 A ycu t t a [T o ] n Tp N oqpe
n ak - n e K e ic u t b t c k
10 M e e y e e p o q ace 9 [ y ] p R t f ^ [ o ]
n e - e q e 'J ' n a k e p K A H p [ o ]
12 N O M I U N AT T H p o y e T K
nay epooy- an o k
14 a ^ M N o y q e n a k e*!' n a k
R n h e -J-N A a c o o y - e c p c u
16 n e e K c p A N cc u tm ^ N o y
6 e A y o y c u N fin k m a a o c 6
18 * ycu e m e - A ycu M ooqpe
[e ]y c iN e b t b h h t k e y p
20 [ e N ] e p n e p o o y cboa T
T O O T q RnH e T e f i N e o o y
22 e y o y c u q j A e e e ip e R n o y
q jT o p T t p m ]R n [ o y ] A M A 2 T e
52,6 The superlinear stroke over c is circumflex in form.

8 Reconstruction following Funk.
13 "proclaim : Lit. " I give good news.
13-16 Taking the dependent clause in lines 15-16 with the sentence
that precedes one might translate: I proclaim to you to teE
you these (words) that I shall speak if you hear (them). There
fore.... See Funk and Kasser.
about whom you hear

24 this is how [
[
26 [
[ ] virgin (7tocp0vo<;)
28 [
(2 lines lacking)
[52]
[] namely, the virgin (roxp0svo<;).
2 [ ]: How (&<;)
[ ] to me for
4 [ ] to know
[ ] not as
6 [ ] whom I [ J. For (yap) this one (masc.)
[ ] to him,
8 and this also is profitable
for you. Your father, whom you
xo consider to be [rich],
shall grant that you inherit (xXyjpovojxeiv)
12 all these (things) that you
see. I proclaim
14 to you to tell you
these (words) that I shall speak. When
16 you hear, therefore,
open your ears
18 and understand and walk (accordingly)!
It is because of you that they pass by,
20 activated (evspysiv) by
that one who is glorious.
22 And (8e) if they want to make a
disturbance and (seize) possession
52,14 "to tell you : Lit. in order to give to you.

17-21 The translation ignores the sentence divider in line 18 after
61 M. If one observes the divider, e y c i N might be circum
stantial, dependent upon M O O C y e .
21 Lit. who is as the glories. Cf. Zost. (V III,j) 47,16; 125,14.
24 [ . ] N . [ 8 ]. i N C
[ 13 A]AAA
26 [ 14 ]Ayo>
[ 15 ]e[
(3 lines lacking)
CEO
[ . ] e A q i t o o t <[ [
2 [M ]M o q a n - o y r [ e n] 0 t5 [nhoy]
eTAyTAoyoofy e] b o a [ ?t o ]
4 OTq x e e y e e i p e y rre lT c tD N f]
e q R n e f M A - m R n c a n[aT]
6 [eq ]q ?A N X i q j i n e e q e a jT E o p T p ]
xe n e q ^ t c e e T o y H o y [cb o a ]
8 h n i a i c u n o y A A [ A ] y n e - A y to
[ T ] e q k a h p o n o m 1a e c e o y t o
10 n J c b o a e y ic o y e i Te- t h
e - r A q a jp y a jo y R M oq epaT
12 [e x ]c u c xe o y N o 6 r e - Neq
[A ]q >p eA T e n n A r A e o n
14 a n Ne- N e q e p H f 2 e N q j o
j c n e y z o o y Ne- S t k o y
16 c b o a rA p 2 ^ N e q M fJi* q jA N
T M A 2 *? AN* A A A A eq JC I R
18 6 o n c c b o a ^ T to o tic - q o y
cucy e p A A I K l A NAN- A y c u
20 qNAp x o e i c oyxponoc
eAy-f- H n e e p o q NAq- a a a [ a ]
22 e r n e Ayco c o y a N n i c u f
e T e o y R T A q R m M R tq jA N
24 TMA2"?" n H e T e R n o y t NAq
53,4 Reconstruction following Schenke (1), col. 30. One should under
stand present in the sense of space, not time.
13 Reading T instead of A.G (Bohlig [1]), following Funk. What
Bohlig takes as writing over Ar is actually discoloration in the
papyrus.
15-16 Lit. you are not one from his compassions.
16 Something (c ?) appears to be written above e in n e q M
18 The superlinear stroke over c is circumflex in form.
24 [
[ J but (<ftXXdt)
26 [ ] and
[
(3 lines lacking)
[53]
[ ] he began [
2 not, nor (ovrre) those who are [coming],
who were sent forth [by]
4 him to make this present [creation].
After [these things],
6 [when he] is ashamed, he shall be disturbed
that his labor, which is far [from]
8 the aeons, is nothing. And
his inheritance (xXiqpovofzxa),
10 which he boasted
to be great, shall appear
12 small. And (re) his
gifts (Stopea) are not
14 blessings (ayaOov). His promises are evil
schemes. For (yap) you are not an (instrument)
16 of his compassion,
but (aXXa) it is through you
18 that he does violence. He wants
to do injustice (a&ixia) to us and
20 will exercise dominion for a time (xp6vo<;)
allotted to him. But (aXXa)
22 understand and know the Father
who has compassion.
24 He was not given
53.20-21 "time allotted to him ": Cf. 1 Apoc. Ja s. (V,3) 26,8-10 and
Allberry, M anichaean Psalm Book, p. 215, lines 20-24.
23 Lit. "who has the compassions."
24-28 Bohlig (1) senses a difficulty in the double negative in lines 24-
25. To say that the compassionate Father was not given an
"unlimited inheritance implies that he was given a limited
inheritance. However, the idea seems to be that the compas
sionate Father had not been given any inheritanceeither limited
or unlimited. His inheritance is eternal.
R o y k a h p o N Q M ia e M n o [ y ]
26 f Hne e p o c - o y r [ e ] m m n [ t j i c ]
R N o y H n e R y e e N o o [y ]
28 w a x e c q p o o n [ R n o ] o y 1?
Op3k. N 0 2 MR . [ ................] . n[
30 e c q jo o n [.]. c . m[ . . . .] 7 [
[na]
[. . . . i i c ] e i N e c e i i ep [
2 [. . . ]* q -a [y ]cu a q p x p a c e a i
[. . .] ica ira p R M o y e B O A R
4 [ m o o J y a n n e - e T B e n a T qpaq
[ x i c c u ]q j- ? t b $ n a T q q j o y
6 [q ? o ]y MMoq x e R N e y c o 2 ?
[R M ]o q - e T B e naT ra p q o y o
8 t b R N e f c i n e c H f R nh
e T a y d c u q jt e n e c H f e
10 xcuk. R ^ H T o y e T a q p a j
XMaACU TI R N I 6 B O A R [ m ]
12 cut- a q a M a ^ T e R M o o y
aycu a q T a M io o y e y e i
14 Ne R M o q - R t o o y A e e y
a j o o r t n R M a q - a N O ic aT
16 Nay eN eN Tayq^cune x R
R n x i c e - a y c u a e i f M a e iN
18 x e n c u c a y q jc u n e - aycu
[a ]y 6 m e R n ey q p m e e y
20 c j j o o r t R icecM O i*- a y c u
[ a y ] c o o y N < R m o T> ^ R N e " f* c o o y N
22 R M o o y R e e 'J 'o jo o T t
R m o c e T 6 a q j? c b o a -
24 a e H MeN R N C N T a y
[q j]c u n e e y N e e ip e R o y
54,15-18 or I saw from the height those that came to be, and I have ex
plained how they came to be.
21 "watching : Regarding the use of 6 x ( J ) f as an infinitive,
cf. Allberry, Manichaean Psalm Book, p. 162, 15, and p. 206,7-9-
(s e c o n d ) a p o c a ly p s e o f ja m e s 53,25-54,25 129
an inheritance (xXTjpovojiia) that was unlimited,

26 [nor (ofire)] does it (his inheritance) [have]
a (limited) number of days,
28 but (aXXa) it is as [the] eternal [day]
[
30 it is [
[54]
[ ] perceive (al<r0ave<j6ai) [
2 [ ]. And he used (xpaoQai)
[ ] For in fact (xal yap) he is not
4 one (come) from [them], (and) because of this he
[is despised]. Because of this he [boasts], so
6 that he may not be reproved.
For (yp) because of this he is superior to
8 those who are below, those
by whom you
10 were looked down upon. After he imprisoned (atxnX<o-
TU(,v)
those from [the] Father,
12 he seized them
and fashioned them to resemble
14 himself. And (8e) it is
with him that they exist. I
16 saw from the height
those (things) that happened, and I have explained
18 how (7ut5<;) they happened.
They were visited while they
20 were in another form, and,
while I was watching,
22 [they] came to know <m e> as I am
through those whom I know.
24 Now ((ilv) before those (things)
[have happened] they will make a
54,21-23 Cf. Jn 1 0 :1 4 .
26 [ . . ] 6 BOA' eTpooyN
[ x ] ? n q j[ c ] a y ? [ t ] o o t o y
28 [e]i e^r[ec]HT* eneeiMA
ED
[o ce ] e q e ^ c u N e ^ o y N e [
2 [ . . ,]N IK O y e i NNAAO[Y A A A i]
[eTo]Y<u<9 eoYUJNg [cboa e]
4 [B O A.] f i T O O T K - MR TTI[TTNA]
[Rt 6] om FiqOY<UN2 ? b[oa]
6 [S n] o y k a y J c e o Y q > [N m]
n ip o e T N A N O Y q ebo ^. [ j I t o ]
8 [o]t!c- < F i6 i> N e fo Y tu tp eC i e ^ o y N
[a]y<u eYiccuTe x ck a a c
i [e]yeM ooqje 1 Teîn etfqjo
[o n 2 ]^ eH R n ip o - ay<u R c e
12 [ o y a 2] o y FIccu k F ic e C i e ^ o y N
[ R r ] e n o o Y 2 Y N n i t* n B e
14 [K ]e m ito y a n o y*. eT*nH2 e p o q
f j t o k tap an n e m p e q c c u T e
16 M NN O Y B O H S O C F IT 6 N
U)M M O ' N T K O Y P e q T O O T e
18 e ^ o y N m ?I o Y p e q c c u T e
F iT e N e T e N o y e i - t N O Y A .e
20 N T e N T 6 m o y k 1 F iT O K e ic [ e ]
o y tu N ^ bbo a e tc e R ata o [ n ]
22 fj^htoy th poy- FItok e[yep]
tynHpe mmok eocR 6om n[im]
24 F iT O K n e T C Y P M A K A p i^ ^ *
m o k 7361 R n H o y e - F ) t [ o k ]
54,26 Bohlig (1) reconstructs [JCCU] K 6BOA, "completion. Funk re

constructs [bo>]k SBOA, "exodus.
55,1-5 Schenke (1), col. 30, is correct in observing that a new thought
must begin after N NA A O [ y ] (line 2). The context on the preced
ing page suggests that the "approaching (55,1) is a negative
act. If this is correct the evident contrast between the negative
"approaching and the positive revelation of p. 55 suggests
A A A A following R N A A O [y ]
3-15 For the role of James, cf. Gos. Thom. (II,a) 34,25-30 (logion 12);
Gos. Eg. ( Ill ,2) 64,12-13.
26 [ ]. I know
[how (to)?)] they attempted
28 [to come] down to this place
[55]
[that] he might approach [
2 [ ] the small children, [but (aXXa)]
[I] wish to reveal
4 through you and the [Spirit (7cveo{ia)]
[of Power], in order that he might reveal
6 [to those] who are yours. And
those who wish to enter,
8 and who seek to
walk in the way that is
10 before the door,
open the good door through you. And they
12 follow you; they enter
[and you] escort them inside and give a reward
14 to each one who is ready for it.
For (yap) you are not the redeemer
16 nor a helper ((3o7)0o<;) of strangers.
You are an illuminator
18 and a redeemer
of those who are mine, and (8) now
20 of those who are yours. You shall
reveal (to them); you shall bring good (ayaOov)
22 among them all. You [they shall]
admire, because of every powerful (deed).
24 You are he whom the heavens
bless ((jiaxapiêiv). You
55.4*5 The Spirit of Power may be a second object of the preposition

(line4) or the subject of H q oycU N ^ (line 5). The reconstruction
is questionable. The title appears in 2 Tim 1:7 .
8-11 Unless lines 8-11 (NeTOY<WOJ . . . MIT Ipo) are regarded as the
subject of COYCp[N] in line 6, one is required to regard all
the conjunctives in lines 11- 13 as 3rd future after [e]Y6M O O C pe
(line 10). But cf. Funk for another translation of 55,6-14.
8 Emendation following Schenke (1), col. 30.
x3 Reconstruction following Funk.
20-21 or "You shall appear (to them).
26 e q e i c a > 2 e p o i c F i6 i n y [e T a q ]
*|* n ip a .N epoq xe n [ jc o e ic ]
28 [ fi] t * * .n [ o ] k e in e [
[ 8 ]y e g b o [a
30 [ 8 ]CH [..]p[
[ 8 ] b o [ ..] .[
[NS]
[NH e ] l\ X I CBC U N 2 J NM[M3 l K ]
2 [C T B ]H H T K e Y N a .T a M [O O Y ]
[ c n a .?] F i c e M T O N R m[o o y ]
4 [ T B H ] H T lC CYN ap p p o [ fiC ]
[q j]c u n e F ip p o - tb h h [tk ]
6 [eYlNaNA. R n e'i eTOYNA

[n a . n ] a . y - H t o k ra p ^cuc
8 c n tk O Y q ^ o p f f e a .K 't
f ic u c o K - F iT O K on n e n
10 q j o p T f e T N 2k.KA.Aicq [ a ]
2 H O Y ayco e K e q jcp
12 ne F le e e N G K U jo o T t m
M OC J 1 0 H C M T T lT C K K i
14 x k a ^ h o y a y c o a .q 't n i
epcuY 3k.qMOA.2q n ^ ht* e q
16 acco R m o c xe n^M ep if
eiC HHT 'J'NA.dcOATt
18 [ n ] a k c b o a FiNH 6 T 6 R n e
[R n ]H y e e r n e e p o o Y oy
20 j e N eYA -pxcuN - e i c z H
H T tN O lO Y C O N j n a k
22 [b]oaF1nh eT < e> R neqcoY
55,27-28 There are other possibilities: n [ p e q KCU^]. the Jealous One"

(Funk), i j [ i c u t ], or lj[N O Y T e].
56,4-5 reign, [and will] become kings : Cf. 1 Cor 4:8.
7-10 Regarding clothing and stripping, cf. Col 1 :1 5 ,1 8 and Ap. Jas.
(1,2) 14,35-36.
15 took hold of MOA^q : The literal meaning given by Crumis
to be hooked into, twisted into, attached to. Y et the context
clearly calls for a meaning of embrace. Either embrace is a
variant meaning for MOY *-2 or MOA q was incorrectly written
for MOAJcq-
26 he shall envy, he [who has]

called himself your [Lord].
28 I am the [
[
30 [
[
[56]
[those who] are instructed in these (things) with [you.]

2 For your sake they will be told
[these (things)], and will come to rest.
4 For your sake they will reign, [and will]
become kings. For [your] sake
6 they will have pity on whomever they pity.
For (yap) just as (ox;)
8 you are first having clothed
yourself, you are also the
10 first who will strip himself,
and you shall become
12 as you were
before you stripped yourself.
14 And he kissed
my mouth. He took hold of me saying:
16 My beloved!
Behold, I shall reveal
18 to you those (things) that (neither)
[the] heavens nor (ouxe) their archons
20 have known. Behold,
I shall reveal to you
22 those (things) that he did not know,
56,13-14 6MTTAT6KAAK: Translation assumes elision of final K of

verb with pronominal suffix.
18-19 There is actually room for only one letter of normal size in the
lacuna at the beginning of line 19. However, because the final
two letters of line 18 are squeezed in (the letters are undersized
in comparison to the rest of the letters in the line) I assume that
the first M of 19 was also squeezed in. Apparently the scribe
wrote Pi/nHye and corrected to MTTe/MTTH Cf. A p. Jo h n
(II,j) 31,6-7 for a similar phenomenon.
[cu N o]y n 6 i tth eT A 'q 'cp P Y

24 [q jo y ] R M oq[
[ -------] x e a[
26 t [. . HR]
H
[K e jo y ^ R c a a n o k .- j ONZ a [ n ]
2 [ b o a ] x e a n o k O Y e icu t a n o k
[mR 6 o ] m mmoT eCUB m M -
4 [ e i c ;> ]h h tc "fNAdcuAiT y*.ic
[6BOA] R^CUB NIM nAM[pn*]
6 [ e i M ] e a y û c o y c u n o y [ x c k ] a
[a ] c e K e e i c b o a R t c T^h R [ e ] e
8 [e jfe m moc- e ic jH H T e t
[ n ] a 6 CUAlt NAK BOA MTTH Cl*
10 fcH ]itIJ 1* n o y e c o y t R t c k
[6 lX B]OA "j-NOY MOA2 K R^HI*"
12 [AY]CU "j-NOY A6ICOYTCUN NA
[ 6 i] x c b o a aycu R n i^ e e p o q
14 R e e e tM e e y e epoc- aa
a a M R R C C D C a Tc c u t m e p o q
16 e q x c u m m o c x e e r n e aycu
MOA2 K R^HT*- T O T e ATei
18 M e a y c u ATp O T e - a y c u
A eip A q p e^ R N o y n o 6 R p A q je
20 e T B e nAT fx c u m m oc
n h t R Nipeq*)' ÂTt- * Y 1*
22 2^-Tt e p c u T R aycu Rne
TR*|* CO- AAAA A Y + CO
24 epCU TR - ApiNH<t>e AYCP
C [. ]y . m[ .] T - . [ ]eY^.
26 [ 10 ]H[ . . ]AT
[ 14 ]co.
28 [ 14 ]y o [
56,23-57,3 For the motif of "father being woven into the boast of the
demiurge, cf. Trim. Prot. (XIII, 1) 43,35-44,2; Treat. Seth (VII,2)
64,19-22 and Iren. Haer. 1.30.6.
56,26-57,1 Reconstruction following Funk, who cites a close parallel in
Treat. Seth (VII,2) 53,30-31. Cf. Isa 4 3 :11; 44:6; 45:5-6,14,18,21-
22; 46:9; 47:8,10.
he who [boasted],
24 [
[
26 [ there is no]
[57]
other except me. Am I not alive ?
2 Because I am a father,
[do] I [not have power] for everything?
4 Behold, I shall reveal to you
everything, my beloved.
6 [Understand] and know them
[that] you may come forth just as
8 I am. Behold, I
[shall] reveal to you him who
10 [is hidden.] But (Se) now, stretch out your
[hand]. Now, take hold of me.
12 [And] then I stretched out my
hands and I did not find him
14 as I thought (he would be). But (aXXa)
afterward I heard him
16 saying: "Understand and
take hold of me. Then (tote) I understood
18 and I was afraid. And
I was exceedingly joyful.
20 Therefore, I tell
you (pi.), judges, you
22 have been judged. And you
did not spare, but (aXXa) you were spared.
24 Be sober (vrjcpsiv) and
[
26 [
[
28 [
RC3l X U O K . Cf. Till, Koptische Grammatik, sec. 235.

Reconstruction following Funk.
10 who [is hidden] : The title appears frequently in Zost. (VIII,j)
using the Greek loan word K ^ A yn T O C . Cf. V III 121,3.5; 125,12;
cf. also Steles Seth (VII,5) 123,1 and Allogenes (X I ,3) 62,15.
14 For incorporeal existence; cf. Act. J n . 93.
NH
FlTOJTFl N e T 6 T F lC O [ O Y N ]
2 a n n e - N S N T o q n e [nH e]
tR ^ ay Te Rneq[NAYl
4 e p o q Fl6i n e N T A q T A [ M i e ]
Tê mn nKA eqqjoo[Tt]
6 [ m ] m o ( | - N e f i T o q n e nauf [ e ]
[T ]e n c u N j n e - N e F lT o q
8 n e n o Y o e m - n e flT o q
n e nH eTNeq^cune*
io aycu n ^ A iN e q e 'f [R o y ]
XCUK BO\ FiTe NH [T]
12 I A Y p A p x e i m F)n o Y A p x y
FJTe NH TNU(DK 6BOA.-
14 N e fiT o q n e m n N A c t o y
I a a b - mn n i A T N A Y e p o q -
16 nH e T e R n e q ^ i e n e c H f
I exR nKA^* N e f i T o q n e
18 -fn A p e e N o c aycu n e
Te qj&qoYoqjq qjAqqjtu
20 I ne RM oq- anok. aTnay
epoq x e n e q k h k a^ho y
22 AYCU N6MTJ e N A Y M A T o e
ic u c u q - n e T e N A q q jA q
24 q j c u [ n e ] mmo q . [ ] . . [ - - ] T [
c q | [ ]eN [
26 t .*[
T?[
N0
[K]cp RCO JTFl F iT e Y ^ H e T N A O J 'f
2 [TAT] T F iO Y A T O F iC M O f-
[a y c u ] M o o q ? e kata nH e T e NAq
4 [xe e]TTNAqjcune FiêNpRê
58,6-8 For life and light, cf. Teach. Silv. (VII,4) 98,22-23; Jn 14:6.
10-13 For beginning and ending, cf. T rim . Prot. (X III,j) 42,18-22.
18-20 or "that one whom he loves comes to be in him.
23-24 or that which he wills happens in him.
58
you did not [know].
2 He was that one
whom he who created
4 the heaven and the earth,
and dwelled in it,
6 did not see. He was [this one who]
is the life. He
8 was the light. He
was that one who will come to be.
10 And again (toxXiv ) he shall provide [an]
end for what
12 has begun (ocpxeoOai) and a beginning (apx*))
for what is about to be ended.
14 He was the Holy Spirit (7cveuji.a)
and the Invisible One,
16 who did not descend
upon the earth. He was
18 the virgin (7tap0svo<;), and that which
he wishes happens
20 to him. I saw
that he was naked,
22 and there was no garment (ev$u(j.a) clothing
him. That which he wills
24 happens to him [
[
26 [
[
59
[Renounce] this difficult way,
2 which is (so) variable
[and] walk in accordance with (xaxa) him who desires
4 [that] you become free men
Lit. "which is as a multitude of forms. Cf. Bohligs hard (1).

For the idea of "changeable path, cf. 2 En 42,10.
or "walk according to that which he wills.
NAG HAMMADI CODEX V ,4
[ nm m ] a T e A T e T R p c u n e R m R*i*
6 [ x o e ] j c nim- o y rAp R qN A [-f A]rt
[a]n 6 jcn nh c t a t b t R a a y
8 [a ]* a a q NANA. n h t R - R t o j t R
[ rA ]p a n A TeTR A A y- a a a a n e
10 [ t n x ] 9 ? i c ne- N e y p e q d c u N t
[an n e ] ^ a a a N eyeicui* Fixe n e
i2 [ h t o jt J R A e A T e T R -f ATt epcu
[ t ] F i- A y c u e T B e n A l T e T N A 6 a>
14 R N e y c N A o y ^ ' R t c u t R a t g
T R ^ pAcp t h n o y- A yo) T e
16 TN ApM eTAN O ei N- TeTNA-f*
2 H o y n a a a y a n - e N A y enH
18 e 'fcp A xe - Aycu k o j t c n c a
n e f ic a j Fipcoq- co y cu N nH
20 e T A q e i ene'fMA- Aycu e r n e
eneN TA qg) c b o a - a n o k ne
22 n iA IK A IO C AyCU N'f t' ATt < a n >
Ra n o k o y x o e ic 6 e an a a a a
24 a n o k o y B O H Q o c - A y N o y x e
MMoq BO A AH eM nATeq
26 c o y r c p N T e q d j x [ b ] o a - a n o k
[ 14 ]o y cu N
28 [ 17 ]2
[
30 [ 17 ]<?*.
I
A y c u q Kcu m m o T eca>T[fi]
Bohligs reconstruction of [o y x ]A Y is problematic (1). The

circumstantial clause is in the perfect tense and therefore must
be prior to the time of the main clause. It would be awkward
to have James admonish his hearers to be saved after they have
passed above every dominion. Once they had ascended above
these powers they would have been saved, and James would
not need to admonish them.
For judgment, cf. 1 Apoc. Jas. (V,3) 3 1,11-12 .
(SECOND) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 5 9 ,5 - 6 0 ,1 139
[with] me, after you have passed above

6 every [dominion]. For (ou yap) he will not [judge] (you)
for those (things) that you did
8 but (aXXa) will have mercy on you.
For (yap) (it is) not you who did them, but (aXXa) it is
10 [your] Lord (who did them). [He was not]
awrathful one but (aXXa) he was a kind (xpv)<rro<;) Father.
12 But (8e) you have judged [yourselves],
and because of this you will remain
14 in their fetters. You
have oppressed yourselves and you
16 will repent ((xexavoeiv), (but) you will
not profit at all. Behold him
18 who speaks and seek
him who is silent. Know him
20 who came to this place and understand
him who went forth (from it). I am
22 the Just One (8txaio<;) and I do <not> judge.
I am not a master, then, but (aAAa)
24 I am a helper ((3oy)0o<;). He was cast
out before he
26 stretched out his hand. I
[
28 [
[
30 [
60
and he allows me to hear.
59,28-30 In 1973 in Cairo I placed a previously unidentified fragment at

the bottom of p. 59. The fragment proves the existence of at
least three lines beneath what Bohlig (1) had assumed to be the
last line (27) and renders impossible a continuous text connection
between 59,27 (oycUN) and the top of p. 60, as assumed by
Kasser, and as Schenke ([i], col. 31) must have assumed in re
constructing the first part of 59,27.
140 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V ,^
2 x y a j N eT fJcajv T T ii'ro c m[fi]

N 6TN CH B6 X W MMOO[y]
4 MN NCTN'I'AJVTHpiON n [T6]
it[i]hT- n ^ c o e ic n eN T 2Lqp*[i]
6 x [M ]a jv c u T e y e mmcutR
6 [ b ] o a M n ^ co eic- eqTCUM Fi
8 NGTfl M XeKXXC 6
NeyCCUTM 6T6CMH FlTG
10 n x u j x x e x y i D t b t n [ x o ) +]
2THTN N NeTNHT* [2lYCU]
12 t g t n 2 lm o y T G ep o T x e t t a i
KAIOC* 6 T B 6 TT2J 'J'JCCU M
14 MOC NHTN .x e e i c HTC
NHTN MTT6TN HT* TTGTe
16 TN^CCU MMOC x e TTNOyTe
AqTAMioq nH eTe pa.T
18 N2HTq 2Lq ep H f e ^ n h t n
N NOyKAH pONOMIA R^HTCj
20 tt2lY *|*N2LK2L2Lq ep2tf e y
T2LKO MN OyCCUBG NT6 NH
22 e f c y o o T t 2 n o y m n t *2lt*
60,2-3 C2lATTII'r o c : This form of oaXmyS is found in NT only in

Bohairic. In Sahidic only C2LA.TTir5 is attested. It is therefore
possible that C2LA.TTIl'rOC here is a genitive form. Cf. A. Bohlig,
D ie griechischen Lehnwdrter im sahidischen und bohairischen Neuen
Testament (Munich: Verlag Robert Lerche, 1954), s-v *
play : X iD is usually translated sing or say . However,the
sense of the passage here clearly argues that it be translated as
play. x y i D at the beginning of the sentence is awkward. One
can only assume that it links x CD to a preceding imperative now
lost in the lacuna at the bottom of p. 59. Before x < & the scribe
deleted n.
5-6 The Lord has taken you captive : Cf. Isa 6:9-10; Jn 12:40.
5-7 The double use of Lord is a problem. I understand the first
Lord to be the evil creator who has imprisoned men in the
body (54,10-14), and who keeps them enslaved through the temple
ritual. The second Lord is either Jesus or the compassionate
Father (53,21-23). However, it is possible that the scribe has
incorrectly written x o e \ C for x \ c e in line 7: The Lord has
taken you captive from the height.
7-12 Cf. Funk, for a different treatment of the text.
(SECOND) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 60 , 2-22 141
2 And play your trumpets (<i<xX7uy)>

your flutes
4 and your harps (âX-rQpiov) [of]
[this house]. The Lord has taken
6 you captive (aix[AXwTeuetv)
from the Lord, having closed
8 your ears, that
they may not hear the sound of
10 my word. Yet you [will be able to pay]
heed in your hearts [and]
12 you will call me the Just One (8ixouo<;).
Therefore, I tell
14 you: Behold, I gave
you your house, which
16 you say that God
has madethat (house) in which
18 he promised to give you
an inheritance (xXrjpovo[Aia) through it.
20 This (house) I shall doom to
destruction and derision of those
22 who are in ignorance.
60,14-22 It is difficult to reconcile this part of the discourse with James,

who is evidently the speaker. In it he exceeds the limits of his
own ability and makes statements that presume on the divine
prerogative. For example, in what sense can James be said to
have given the temple to the Jews (60,14-17) ? Since the temple
has a negative value in this context, it is doutbful that James
would make such a claim. It is apparently this difficulty that
prompted Schenke to insert eBOA.MTTJCOIC, "from the Lord,
after N H T N to you in line 14, after he had removed it from
line 7. The double emendation solved two problems. It corrected
a difficult reading in line 7 and in line 14 it made James speak
with prophetic authority (cf. Schenke [1], col. 31). The identity
of the divine personage for whom James is made to speak is un
clear, however. Something may have been omitted from the text
through scribal error (haplography). One possible solution to the
problem would be to emend the text at line 14 as follows:
A.T'('< 2 A .n > N H T N MTT6TNHT, Behold I have (judged) you
by your housewhich you say that God has made. However,
compare the similarity of the discourse with Jeremiahs temple
sermon (Jer 7: 2-15) , particularly Jer 7: 14 .
e r n e - e i c ^ h h t c ra.p c e
24 q p o x N e Fi6i nh en*| 2^rt
e T p e[ 12
26 M. [ 14 i ].
(3 =h lines lacking)

[ M ln e ^ o o y 6 tm h ^ y N e p e
2 n [ \ i o ] c TH pq N e q q jT p T tu p
mn tim h h eye* A.yoj wey
4 o yo N g eBOA z w c eMnoyTOJi*
Rgm* iy c o AqTCUcon A.ql
6 c b o a e q x t u m m oc N Te'f^[e]
A.qei a s e ^ o y N F i n ^ o o y [* ]q
8 c y A .x e N ^ e N K o y e i N o y N o y
[ i ] N O K A N eT M N N I O y H H B
10 A.ycu N e T o y C U N j A A A .Y C B O A A.N
n e R t g "( M Ri'cyN reN h c
12 [e]n[i]A H N eyxco m m o c t h p o y
2 n n oycM H o y o T e x e a.mh
14 eiTN n t R 2> <UNe exN nAiKA.i
o c- A.yoj A .YTajoyN oy
16 e y x tu mmoc x e eê ma
pNgtUTB Fim pcuMe R c e
18 qiTq 6 b o \ 2s TeNMHTe- qna.
p cyA.y rA.p na.n a.n n w \ y
20 N eyM M A y A e n e v y ^ e e p o q
I e q a ^ e p v rq 2 * tn n iT fi2 R t c
22 I n e p n e 2 * t n n i a j N e e f j e o o p
/ NK.002* A ya) A.yTO)qj e N o y
24 j xe MMoq e n e c H f c b o a 2 s
61,1-62,12 In addition to those reports on the death of James already cited

in the introduction, see Jos. Ant. XX.200; Kus.Hist.Eccl. II.
1.4-5; Allberry, M anichaean Psalmbook, p. 142,25-26 and p. 192.
8-9. See Brown (1) and Little for a discussion of the reports.
12-19 he will be of no use to us : Cf. Isa 3 :10 (L X X ); WisdSol 2:12-
20; Eus. H ist.Eccl. II.23.15.
21 columns : TN 2 *s difficult to translate in terms of the situation
in the text. Bohlig (1) translates it as pinnacle (cf. Mt 4:5)'
For (yap) behold,

24 those who judge deliberate
[
26 [
(3 lines lacking)
61
[On] that day
2 all the [people (Xao<;)] and the crowd
were disturbed and they
4 showed that (ox;) they had not been persuaded.
And he arose and went
6 forth speaking in this [manner].
And (8e) he entered (again) on that same day and
8 spoke a few hours.
And (8e) I was with the priests
10 and revealed nothing
of the relationship (cruyYevfc)>
12 since (stceiSt)) all of them were saying
with one voice: Come,
14 let us stone the Just One (Sixaio<;).
And they arose
16 saying: Yes, let
us kill this man, that
18 he may be taken from our midst.
For (yap) he will be of no use to us.
20 And (8e) they were there and found him
standing beside the columns of
22 the temple beside the mighty corner
stone. And they decided to throw
24 him down from
and Kasser translates it as cornice. I have translated it as

columns, since TFI2 can be used to translate 7rrep6v. In Greek
architecture 7rrep6v identified the rows of columns along the sides
of Greek temples. It is difficult to imagine James standing be
side the pinnacle of the temple at the same time he was stand
ing beside the corner stone. But see Funk, who understands the
tension as a literary combination from tradition.
I n o tice - Ayco A y N o y x e
26 I MMoq enecHf r jT o o y
I Ae . . ]A yN *.
28 e i. . [ 10 ] . ytcu
[
g~B
AYA.Ma.2Te MMoq A yccu [q} m]

2 Moq e y c y p e mmoq f i n[K]A 2
A yK.ecK.cucq b o a - a y k a
4 oycuN e NcqMAg"?1
a y ca N e y o y e p H T e ^ ix c u q
6 th p o y eyjccu m m o c x e
T T e N T A q C C D p M T TA A I N O N
8 A y T o y N o c q eq o N g A yTpeq
api ice N N o y fte ii* A yT A goq
10 epATq N2HTq A y 2 o q c q
a?A2PAT eNeqMA2T* A yfT
12 cuNe e x c u q W Te'ê- NToq
A e A q coyT U JN N e q 6 ix c b o a
14 A qxcu N T e Y n p o ce y x H
TeT a n e T e q c y N H o i n e x o o c
16 x e n A N o y T e Aycu nAfcui*
neNTAqNA2M ei* g b o a 2n
18 f 2 e A n ic ecM o o yi**
n eN T A q T A N 2o ei 2 nn o y
20 m ycT H p i o n NTe n e T e 2NAq-
N e K T p e y a jc ic n a T n 6 i
22 N e Y 2 o o y n t c n e lK o c M o c -
a a aa n e 2 o o y ntc neK
24 o y o e [iN 6 ]i?[ .]ajojC Tt
62,7 You have erred : n e NTAq CCD p M has also been translated as
seducer (Bohlig [1]). The form here seems to be intransitive.
Cf. Eus. Hist.Eccl. II.23.15: xal o Stacaux; |jrXav/j0). The crowd
believed that James had erred, and understood his discourses as
an attempt to mislead them. This is precisely the reason for
Jamess ceremonial execution. The crowd regarded him as a
irXivo? (rrnari) and Jewish law required death by stoning for
whoever attempted to lead the community astray (Mishnah
the height, and they cast

26 him down. And (81)
they [ ] they
28 [
[
62
They seized him and [struck]
2 him as they dragged (cnSpeiv) him upon the ground.
They stretched him out, and placed
4 a stone on his abdomen.
They all placed their feet on him
6 saying
You have erred! Again (toxXiv)
8 they raised him up, since he was alive, and made him
dig a hole. They made him stand
10 in it. After having covered him
up to his abdomen, they stoned
12 him in this manner. And (8e)
he stretched out his hands
14 and said this prayer (7tpo<jsuxv))
not that (one) which it is his custom (m>vir)0eia) to say:
16 My God and my Father,
who saved me from
18 this dead hope (eXm?),
who made me alive through a
20 mystery ((iuorryjpiov) of what he wills,
do not let these days of this world (xoorfzo*;)
22 be prolonged for me,
but (aXXa) the day of your (sg.)
24 [light ] remains
Sank. 7.4; Deut 13:14 ). Cf. Jn 7 :12 where the same charge is made
against Jesus.
62,10-12 Cf. A p . Ja s. (1,2) 5,18-20 where Jesus claims to have been buried
in the sand, and notes that James has not yet been so treated.
15 or which also it is his custom to say.
21-22 Do not le t .. .be prolonged for me : See Funk, for N e K T p e y -
CDCK as a negative third future.
10
R2ht[ 11 ]y
26 a) . [ 12 ] . CU N
an [
fr
[o y ]x V f' bo a e bo a R c a b o a RneT
2 h [a R 6 ]o e iA e - H n p T p e q u jc u x it
N ^ H f n 6 i neK^M O -f- a a a a h a
4 p e q u jc u n e e q o y A A B n 6 i n e ic
2 MOT*- NA 2 M e i l g b o a F l N o y
6 M oy e q jo o Y ' iN i f s b o a jn
n o y M 2 ^ o y e 'f o N g x e q o N ^ R
8 2 H1 neiC2HOT*- n e p c u c
e p 2ûb NOY2CUB F iT e o y r r A H
xo pcuHA- n a 2 H 6 t * e B O A 2 ^ n o y
c A .p l FiN O Be- x e aTtcut* n
12 2h t^ t j i 6 o m t h pc* x e R t o k
n e n c u N j N T e n c u N g - NA2Mei*
14 eBO A ^TOOTCj N N O Y X A X e R
p e q e B B io * N e m i f eT O O Tq
16 R N o y p e q * ^ 311*- R p e q q p c u c u i 1
e B O A 2M ITNOBe- KCD NAT 6 B O A
18 n nh eTepoY th p o y F iT e N e
2 o o y x e f O N^ a n o k n
20 2 h t K q o N j Fi2H'il R61 n e K
2 h o t * - A T p A p m c e e F io y o N
22 NIM- NTOK A e 1TOYON2K 6BOA-
N ^ M e i* c b o a 2*>n o y e A i'l'ic
24 e c 2 0 o y ^ N o y A e n o y o [e ia j]
n e A y c u T o y N o y T e - n in T iT x ]
26 eToyAAB' matR nooy 2 ^ -Ip o fl
63,2-3 "grace": Kasser suggests that the scribe or Coptic translator has
2
incorrectly written M O T 1 for 6 C U N T .
8-9 " L o v e .. .to accomplish a work of fullness" is thought by both
Funk and Bohlig (x) to be an interpolation.
16-17 who is severe with sin : The meaning of R p e q cytUCUT* 6B 0 A
2 M I T N O B G is unclear. It can be understood in at least three
ways. If one takes up CD UJT* by itself and links eBO A 2 ^
n N O B e , it could be translated, one who torments through sin.
If one links e B O A with qpcucui* a n d 2 H with n N O B 6 . i t could
(SECOND) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 62,25-63,26 I4 7
in [
26 [
[
63
salvation. Deliver me from this
2 [place of] sojourn! Do not let your grace be left behind
in me, but (aXXa) may
4 your grace become pure!
Save me from an
6 evil death! Bring me from
a tomb alive, because your grace
8 love (epw?)is alive in me
to accomplish a work of fullness (7uXY)pcofj.a)!
10 Save me from
sinful flesh (<rap), because I trusted
12 in you with all my strength! Because you
are the life of the life, save me
14 from a humiliating
enemy! Do not give me into the hand
16 of a judge who is severe
with sin! Forgive me
18 all my debts of the
days (of my life)! Because I am alive in
20 you, your grace is alive in me.
I have renounced (apveiaQai) everyone,
22 but (8e) you I have confessed.
Save me from evil
24 affliction (QXtyn;)! But (Se) now is the [time]
and the hour. O Holy
26 [Spirit (7Tveu|i.a)] send [me]
be translated, one severe through sin (Bohlig [1]). If one takes

6 BOA with OJCUCUT* it could be translated, one who cuts
off from sin (Kasser). Funk emends the text by inserting NA2-
MT* before eBO A 2 M TTNOB6- I take 6 BOA with qjCDCDT*.
63,15-17 Cf. Mt 6 :13 where the request is that one might not be led into
temptation.
17-19 Cf. M t6 :i2 .
21-22 "confessed : Cf. Lk 12:8-9.
26 Reconstruction suggested by Schenke (1).
F io y o y x t a u f . ] n o y o e ! N [
28 n o y o e i N [ . . ]e*f . h <^[
2R o y 6 o H [. .] [. . ] ko R[
30 f l T e p e q ; x o [ o c a .q ic]a ip cD [q
a j x x e x i ] * [ ] q e [ . . . . mT3]
32 flc c u [c . . . ]n ;v o r o c . [
63, end Contrary to Bohligs transcription (1) the title of the tractate
does not appear on a final line 33. What Bohlig reads as t
(SECOND) APOCALYPSE OF JAMES 6 3 ,2 7 -3 2 I4 9
salvation [ ] the light [

28 the light [
in a power [
30 After he [spoke, he] fell silent [
word [ afterward]
32 [ ] the discourse (Xoyo?) [
beneath line 32 in the left margin is a large paragraph sign simi

lar to those in Apoc. Adam.
V,5:64,1-85,32
G eorge W. Mac R ae
Bohlig-Labib. Koptisch-gnostische Apokalypsen. Pp. 86-117.

Krause, M. The Apocalypse of Adam. Gnosis. Edited by Foerster.
Vol. II. Pp. 13-23.
Troger, ed. Gnosis und NT. Pp. 46-47.
The final tractate of Codex V is the best preserved: of its 22 pages
(one left wholly blank, p. 68) none is completely intact, but the
lacunae at the tops and bottoms are sometimes minor and in a few
cases can be reconstructed with confidence. The papyrus is of poor
quality and, perhaps as a consequence, the scribal hand is very
uneven; both the number and the length of lines vary considerably.
There are a number of scribal peculiarities: the frequent use of
forked paragraph signs in the left-hand margin (extant after 79,18;
80,9.20.29; 81,15; 82,5.11; 85,19); the insertion of numeral signs
above written-out numbers (72,8; 73,15; 78,6.27; 79,28; 81,2.24;
82,7) or at the end of a line in addition to written-out numbers
(80,9.20; 81,14; 82,4.10); the use of the numeral sign alone (64,4) or
the omission of it (79,19); the insertion of Coptic synonyms written
above other Coptic words (78,10; 79,10; 80,1.4; 81,16.19); an(* the
insertion of alternative letters above the line (81,18 and 82,12). In
all these cases the insertions appear to be written prima manu.
As in the case of Apoc. Paul and 1 Apoc. Jas., the title appears
both at the beginning (complete) and at the end (fragmentary) and
without variation. Epiphanius (Pan. 26.8.1) refers to apocalypses
of Adam in use among the Gnostics, along with the books in
the name of Seth, but no closer identification with this tractate is
possible. The Cologne Mani Codex (48,16-50,7) also cites an Apo
calypse of Adam, which, however, has no apparent relation to our
document. In its content, Apoc. Adam is a revelation received by
Adam from three heavenly visitors and narrated by him to his son
Seth. He explains the loss of saving knowledge by himself and Eve
(the fall), its transmission to Seth and his descendants, and its pre
servation, despite the attempts of the creator-god to destroy man-
kind by flood and by fire, until the third coming of a savior figure,
the "Illuminator. The latter is persecuted by the powers of the
world but will ultimately triumph over them. At the mention of his
coming there is a long hymnic passage (77,27-83,4), which maybe
an interpolation into an original apocalypse, in which thirteen false
or inadequate explanations of his origin are contrasted with a true
one by the "generation without a king, i.e., the Gnostics. This
unusual passage is a remarkable example of gnostic syncretism.
In terms of literary form the work embodies a whole succession
of the traditional literary devices of revelation (see Festugire, La
Revelation I, 309-54). First, the revelation comes to Adam in a
dream vision (65,24-66,23) in which it is not clearly stated that he
sees the events of the future but perhaps is merely told them.
Secondly, Adams narration to Seth takes the form of a secret
traditio from father to son (85,19-22). Thirdly, though not written
in a book, these words are hidden on a high mountain (85,3-11).
Finally, since Adam's revelation takes place just before his death,
the work assumes the form of a testament. Though it is clearly
dependent on certain episodes of the Genesis story which are often
found in gnostic revelation literature, Apoc. Adam does not follow
closely the text of Genesis as do Hyp. Arch. (II,4) and Ap. John
(II, 1), for example.
The most notable feature of this work is the absence of any ex
plicit or clear borrowings from the Christian tradition. This has led
several interpreters to see in it a witness to a non-Christian Gnostic
ism which contains an already well developed redeemer myth. On
the other hand, its close dependence on Jewish apocalyptic tradition
suggests that it may represent a transitional stage in an evolution
from Jewish to gnostic apocalyptic. In this case the document may
be a very early one, perhaps first or second century A.D., but no
clear indications of its date have been perceived. Apoc. Adam is a
Sethian work in the sense that Seth and his posterity are the tra-
dents of the saving knowledge; it does not have any uniquely close
affinities to the description of the Sethians found in Hipp. Rtf-
V.19-21 or Epiph. Pan. 39. Within the Nag Hammadi collection it
has a great deal in common with Gos. Eg. (111,2), which s e e m s to
suppose a christianized version of the story. Using as a key the three
sets of angel names, which are not common in the gnostic writings
(Abrasax, Sablo, and Gamaliel, 75,22-23; Micheu, Michar, and
Mnesinous, 84,5-6; Iesseus Mazareus Iessedekeus, 85,30-31), w e find
APOCALYPSE OF ADAM: INTRODUCTION 153
that Afioc. Adam is related to the untitled work of Cod. Bruc., to

Gos. Eg., to Zostrianos (V III,j), and to Trim. Prot. (X III,j). In
addition several of these works share an interest in the personage
of Seth and some concern with the interpretation of baptism, thus
reflecting at least a remote connection with (Jewish) baptist circles.
In the following translation reconstructions have been introduced
only where they are highly probable.
V,5 :64 ,1 -85,32
3A
Ta.nOK.a.Ay'l'lC HJiAJiH
2 'J A n O K A A y ' I ' I C GTA.A.AA.[M t ] *
Me n e q q jH p e c h e p o e R
4 T M e ^ 'p R p o M n e - eq occu m
m o c x e c c u t m e N a o > a .x e na.
6 q^Hpe ch - otan RTApeqTa.
M i o e i R61 i T N o y T e c b o a . R
8 n ic A 2 m R T K M A a .y-
NeTMOOupe n m m i c n e R o y e
10 o o y eT a .C N a .y e p o q - c b o a . j m
m ecuN eN TaN qpcune c b o a
12 Fi^HTtj- a c t a m o T e y c p a x e
R T e o y rN c u c ic R t c n N o y T e
14 n i o j a . 6 N 6 2 - a.ycu N e N e m e
n e R R n o 6 R a .i're A O C Rq ja.
16 eN 2- N e N x o c e r*p n e e
n N o y T e e T a .q T a .M io N m r
18 N I 6 0 M T N MM A . q - NH 6 T 6
N N C O O yN MMOOya.N-
20 to tc a.qTcuqp Na.N R<Si n N o y
T e na.pxo>N R t c n g c u n
22 MR N 16 0M R O yBCDAK- TO
T e a .N q p cu n e e e c u N CN a.y-
24 a y c u a q ic a a N R c c o q R61
n i e o o y e i* 2 R n e N ^ rn *
64,4 "seven hundredth year : Of the several possibilities (reference

to Adam or Seth), it seems best to take this as a reference to
Gen 5:4 (LX X Adam lived 700 years after the birth of Seth).
Thus Adams revelation is a deathbed "testament, though his
death is not referred to in the text except in his own prediction
(67,22-27).
V,5:64,1-85,32
64
The Apocalypse of Adam
2 The revelation (a7roxdXu<Jn^) which Adam
taught his son, Seth, in
4 the seven hundredth year, saying:
Listen to my words, my
6 son Seth. When (8 t <xv)
god had created me out of
8 the earth along with Eve, your mother,
I went about with her in a
10 glory that she had seen in
the aeon from which we had come
12 forth. She taught me a word
of knowledge (yvo>(n<;) of the eternal God.
14 And we resembled
the great eternal angels,
16 for (yap) we were higher than
the god who had created us and
18 the powers with him, whom
we did not know.
20 Then ( t o t s ) god,
the ruler (apxwv) of the aeons
22 and the powers, divided us in wrath. Then (tote)
we became two aeons.
24 And the glory in our heart (s)
left us,
64,20-22 divided us, : Lit. set a limit, made a division, for us, i.e.,
the Demiurge split the primordial androgyne, a theme stressed
especially in Gos. P h il. (11,3) 68,22-24 and 70,9-11, and indirectly
in the gnostic commonplace of the restoration of the male and
female into a unity.
24-27 Parallel to the loss of glory and knowledge here is the loss of
righteousness and glory in Apoc. M os. 20,1-2 and 21,6.
NAG HAMMADI CODEX V ,5
26 1 NOK HR TKM AAy Y 2 ^

HR 't rN c u c ic RuôpTT e
28 [T]e N e c N iq e R ^ h t R- Ay[u>]
Aqntui* 6BOA MMON
30 [a.]qBq>K e o y N [ . ] n o 6
[ ...........] N[ . ]H[R . . ] CNO
32 [ . . . ] . e A [ . ] t t [ . . e ]T A cq j
II
cu[ne b o ] a 2 r tt Y aio jn a n t [ a n ]
2 qpu)[ne] c b o a R^HTq a n o k
h R e y ^ A T eK H A A y a a a a
4 acbcd k eô yN e f c n o p ji R t c
2 N N 0 6 RN6WN- 6T B 6 TTAY
6 2.W a n o k A e iH o y T e e p o K
RnpAN R npcuM e eTR M A y
8 T 'J CTTOpA T R'f'NOtf NT6N6A
fi CBOA RHTCj- HRRCA NIÔ
10 o y eTR M A y A c o y e c b o a
RMOY ANOK MR TCKMAAy
12 e y ^ A R 61 t r N O ) c ic R o ja e
N2 NT6 n N o y T e R T e TM6
14 jcin n o y o e i q j eTR M A y a n
x t cbcu e ^ e N ^ B H y e e y M o
16 o y f 2 a , c 2 e N PtUMe t o t c
A N c o y a jN n N o y T e eTAq
18 TAM ION- NN6NO rAp AN n e
RcpRMO RN eq6oM * Aycu
20 ANu^Rcpe MMoq oyô
T MR O y M R f^ M Z ^ '
22 RCA NAY A 6 A N C pw ne
N R N B H 2 R n e N ^ H f-
24 ANOK NeYRKOT* 2 R nM
e y e R t c tta2 ht*- n c Y
64,30 it (glory) entered : Coptic restoration is probable despite the

clear feminine ACBCUK, "it (knowledge) entered, at 65,4.
65,9 or from whom (it comes) : I.e., Seth, from whom the genera
tion of Gnostics descends. This interpretation of the syntactical
ly awkward phrase fi 6 B O A R 2 HTq makes sense only if it is
APOCALYPSE OF ADAM 64,26-65,25 157
26 me and your mother Eve,

along with the first knowledge (yw&aiq)
28 that breathed within us. And
it (glory) fled from us;
30 it entered into [ ] great
[
32 [ ] which (fem.)
65
[had come] forth, not from this aeon from which [we had]
2 come forth, I
and Eve your mother. But (aXXa)
4 it (knowledge) entered into the seed (<T7copa) of
great aeons. For this reason
6 I myself have called you
by the name of that man
8 who is the seed (<rrcopd) of the great generation (yeved)
or (rj) from whom (it comes). After
10 those days the eternal knowledge (yv&ou;)
of the God of truth
12 withdrew from me
and your mother Eve.
14 Since that time we
learned about dead things,
16 like (ax;) men. Then (tots)
we recognized the god who had
18 created us. For (yap) we were not
strangers to his powers. And
20 we served him in fear
and slavery.
22 And (8e) after these (events) we became
darkened in our heart (s).
24 Now (8e) I slept in the
thought of my heart.
a gloss. For the expression the seed (cjropd) of Seth, see Gos.
Eg. (111,2) 54 ,10 -11; Steles Seth (VII,5) 120,10; Zost. (VIII,j)
130,16-17. And see below 85,22.
65,20-21 fear and slavery : Cf. Ps 2 : 1 1 ; Deut 6 :1 3 ; and similar OT
formulas.
26 n a y r *P n e e q jO M e t
N pcu M e RTTAMTO B O A
28 NH 6 T 6 MTT16F16OM e c o Y
cun n e Y e iN e - e n iA H Ne
30 2 e N B O A AN N e 2 t R l n i 6 o m
^ T e n N o y T t a c | t [ a m i ] o Fi
32 [m o n N ]e Y [o ]Y O T B e[
[ ............]eooY' ay[ co
34 [ .................] F i p [ a > ] M e e [
[5 Sl
[ e Y l ^ c o FiM O C n a T oce t [ c o o y ] n F
2 MM AY A A A M B O A TTI N KO*l*
R t TTMOY' AYCO COJTFi
4 T B n ie C U N MFi 'J 'C n o p A
F in ip c u M e c t R m a y * nH
6 e T A n ic u N j n cu ^ q jA p o q - n H
6T A q l BOA n ^htk* aycu
8 6BOA e Y 2 A T e K .C Y N Z Y r o c
T O T e F i T e p i c c u T F i e N e 'f q jA
10 xe F J t o o t o y F iN > N o 6 F ip c u M e
T Fi M AY' n h T N C Y ^ e p A
12 T O Y FiNA^PAT- T O T a n q I A
2 0 M ANOK. MR 6 Y 2 A ZPx{ 2 M
14 ir e N ^ H * ^ a y c o A n o c o e i c t t n o y
T eT A qT A M IO N A q A ^ e p A T q
16 R n e N F iT O 6BOA' neocAq n a n
oce a a a m e T B e o y N e T e T F i
18 qi A 20M 2 m n e T F i^ H i* * i e
F iT C T F iC O O Y N AN 0C A N O K
20 n e t t n o y t e T A q T A M ie
65,26-27 three men : Cf. Gen 18:2 (Abraham) and the traditional
references to the three men (angels) in Abraham literature, e.g.,
Test. A br. 6. In the Armenian Adam literature the motif is some
times interpreted by Christians as a Trinitarian vision; see e.g.,
M. Stone, "The Death of Adaman Armenian Adam Book,
H T h R 59 (1966), 283-91. The alien appearance of angelic visitors
is also stressed in the Test. Abr. 3 (long recension). The m otif of
26 And (yp) I saw three

men before me
28 whose likeness I was unable
to recognize, since (erai<Wj) they
30 were not from the powers
of the god who had [created]
32 [us.] They surpassed [
[ J glory, and [
34 [ J men [
[661
saying to me: Arise,

2 Adam, from the sleep
of death, and hear
4 about the aeon and the seed (crreopd)
of that man
6 to whom life has come,
who came from you and
8 from Eve, your wife (<jiSi>yo<;).
When (t o t e ) I had heard these
10 words from the great men
who were standing
i2 before me, then (t o t s ) we
sighed, I and Eve, in
14 our heart (s). And the lord, the god
who had created us, stood
16 before us. He said to us:
Adam, why were you (pi.)
18 sighing in your heart ?
Do you not know that I
20 am the god who created
a triad of heavenly personages is a commonplace in Mandaean,

Manichaean, and gnostic literature; cf. e.g., Eugnostos (V,j ); Gos.
Eg. (111,2) 50,23-26 (Trinitarian). Cf. also Mk 9:2-9, parr. Pos
sibly the "three men are identified by the nom ina barbara in
85.30-31-
66,17-23 Although explicitly addressed to Adam, the "you pronouns
are all plural in this speech; cf. 66,16, "H e said to us.
i6o NAG HAMMADI CODEX V ,5
t h y t n - a .y cd A 'lN iq e e 2 0 Y N
22 epCDTN N O Y T T N A N T 6 TT CD N ^
6 2 PA.T e y 'i 'Y X H e c o N ^ - t o
24 t a y k . a k . 6 o jc D n e i . x f l n c n
b a a - t o t in N O Y T e e T A q
26 T A M I ON A q T A M IO N N O Y
Cl ^Hpe B O A NHT<j [M]Fi e [ Y ]
28 A t [ k .] i* a [ a ] y e n e [ . ] b a [
[ . . . ]KC a n . [
30 [. . .] IC
[. .]A e R n ? [
na
Tt 2 R1 e e y e [ F iT ] e
2 TTAO)[ . ]j- A T C O Y t p N
o Y e n i e Y M i A e c 2 0 A <5
4 N T T 6 K MA A Y" T O
T ACTAK.O 6 B O A N ^ H
6 TN N d l T AK MH N T
T T 6 N C OO Y N NOJA
8 N 2 " A Y O ) A C p A I CD K
N C C D N n 6 i O Y M N 1 * 6 cD B
10 e T B e ttaT a y p K o y e i
n 6 i N6 2 0 0 Y N T e n e N
12 CDNg- A f e i M e TAP x e a t
q jc u n e 2 * T e s o y c iA
14 NTe n M o y "^noy 6 e
n A o j H p e C H "f-NA
16 6 C D A T t NAK B O A R NA.T
t a y 6 o a t t o y naT e
18 BOA- xe N I pCD M e T M
M A Y n h t a T n a y
20 e p o o y f lq jo p it m
TTAMTO e B O A - Xe
22 MMfiNCA. TPAJCCDK
66,21-23 "breathed, etc. : Cf. Gen 2:7 (LXX), of which the gnostic inter
pretation in H y p . Arch. (II ,4) 88,3-15 and elsewhere is much
more complicated.
APOCALYPSE OF ADAM 66 , 21- 67,22
you ? And I breathed into

22 you a spirit (7tveu(ia) of life
as a living soul (4'UX:Q)
24 Then ( t o t e ) darkness came upon our
eyes. Then ( t o t e ) the god, who
26 created us, created a
son from himself [and] Eve,
28 [your mother], for [
[
30 [
[ ] in the [
[ in] the thought [of]

2 my [ ]. I knew
a sweet desire (smQujiia)
4 for your mother. Then ( t o t e )
the vigor (ax(X'/)) of
6 our eternal knowledge
was destroyed in us,
8 and weakness
pursued (Stwxsiv) us.
10 Therefore the days of
our life became few.
12 For (yap) I knew that I had
come under the authority (sou<na)
14 of death. Now then,
my son Seth, I will
16 reveal to you the things
which those men
18 whom I saw
before me
20 at first
revealed to me:
22 after I have completed
67.10-11 the days of our life became few : Cf. Gen 6 :3.
20 "a t first : Perhaps fl e p o p i t here translated nAXai,
i 62 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V ,5
6 b o a R n i o y o e i tp
24 fiT e T e tre N e A -
A yco R c e M o y N ?
26 [W61 N i]p o M n e fiT e
[jreN elA .- [t o ] t
28 [ ------ ] o [ . . 2 ]m 2 * a
[ 8 ]T*
30 [
page 68 blank
tm
(Line 1 lacking)
2 C N 3i [ 0 ] Y 0 T N 0 [Y BO]^.
TAP R[6]l 2NMOY[TY]e
4 N 2 t O O Y R T e j r [ N o y T ] e Tt
nA.NTOK.pA[Tcup- x e] $qe
6 T iK O F iC ip i S [nim ] ( flT e
TTNOYTe na.[NTO]KpA.
8 Tcup- x e e q e T [A .K ]e c x
pa .3 n i m } b o \ [2m ] nKA.2
10 BO A 0 T fi NH ^ T epK O J
T RCCD O y IJl[ieB]OA
12 1 c n o p a . n [ t ] Nipcu
Me- n h eT A .[q o y ]tp T B e
*4 2 P^T e p o o Y [W61 tti]<d n 2 A
Te 't'rN O J O ic [najej eTAcj
16 et 6 BOA n^ht* m[F1] 6 Y 2 A.
T e K M i i Y ' N e y e ra.p
18 R o jm m o MMoq ne-
MHFica. n a T c^flNHOY Fi
20 6 1 2NNo6 RafreAoc
2 *i 2 e N K * * e y x o c e
22 6YN A .XI R N ip O J M e TM
68 The entire page is left blank. Cf. volume introduction, section

on Codex V, and J . M. Robinsons codicological analysis of V
(pp. 16-30).
6 9 , 2- X I The flood: Cf. Gen 6:17 and 7:4 especially.
the times
24 of this generation, (yevea)
and [the] years of
26 [the generation (ysvca)]
have been accomplished, [then ( t o t e )]
28 [ ] slave
[
30 [
page 68 blank
[69]
(Line 1 lacking)
2 For (yap) rain-showers
of [god] the
4 almighty (7tavToxpaToop)
will be poured forth [so that] he
6 might destroy [all] flesh (oap^) {of
god the almighty (mxvToxpaTwp),
8 so that he might destroy all flesh (aap)}
from the earth
10 on account of the things that it seeks
after, along with [those from]
12 the seed (<r7uopa) [of] the men
to whom passed
14 the life of
the knowledge (yvataiz), which
16 came from me [and] Eve,
your mother. For (yap) they were
18 strangers to him.
Afterwards great
20 angels will come
on high clouds,
22 who will bring those men
69,10-11 that (pi.) which is around them : The plural refers either to
the rain-showers (line 2) or implicitly to the flood waters.
14 "the life , [Fi 6 1 TTl]CU N2 : One might expect "the revelation,
[R6l TTI o y jc u N j. but the lacuna does not seem large enough,
and normally one would expect 6BOA to follow oyCUNj-
164 NAG H AM M A D I CO D E X V ,5
m a y 2 Y n e i j T O n o c e T ? q
24 qjoorf W61 nenN [i]
[F t g n]cuNj n[
(4 i lines lacking)
[o]
[ 9 ]HT e[.]N[. .] n e o
2 [OY IT? [ - ]N 6TMMAY'
[. . ]ye [. . . u?]cpne x i n Tne
4 oja. nk[A2 t o t g ] qNAOjcuxrt
R61 ni[MHHqje T]inpq H t c tca.
6 pA.2 f i N[lMOOY-] TOT6 TTNOY
T6 NAM[t]ON MMOq SBOA H
8 n e q 6 c u [N ] - [a ]y cd q N e N O Y
x e F iT e q [6 ]o M e .x R n i m o o y -
10 a y c u [q N A ]'f [6 ]o m N N e q c p H p e
MN N 6 [ Y fi] o [ M ] e 6 B O A 2 ^ + *1
12 BCUTOC' MN [N l]T B N O O Y e e
TA.q"f* M 6T6 SJCCUOY' MN R
14 2 Â aiT e WT[e] T n e e T A q M O Y
T epO O Y" AqKAAY f i
16 JCFj TTKA.E2 ] AY> TTNOY
T N AX O O C NNO>2e- nH e
18 T e N ir e N e A m a m o y t b e p o q
xe AYK.AAICDN- x e e i c ZH
20 HT A'fA pe^ e p o < K > 2 N "f*K. 1 BCUTOC
MR T C K C ^ IM e MN NKCpH
22 p e m r N e y 0 O M MR n b y
[TB]nOOY6 [m]R R2 AAA.T6 [R]t[]
24 [Tne N]y TA.KMOY[Te epo]
[oy* akka]^.[y] 2T'-xm nKA2]
(4 lines lacking)
m
stbs [n]aJ i'Nai'J' m t t k [3i2 n ]3l k
70,10 "and [he will] give power to his sons : Either Noah is the im
plied subject or, more likely, God is, and in the latter case there
is a omission: he will give power to (Noah and his wife and)
his sons.
A PO CA LY PSE O F A D A M 6 9 , 2 3 -7 1 , 1
into the place (toto?)

24 where the spirit (7rvu(xa) [of] life dwells
[
(4 lines lacking)
&o]
[ ] glory
2[ ] there.
[ ] come from heaven
4 to earth. [Then (to te )]
the whole [multitude] of flesh (aap)
6 will be left behind in the [waters]. Then (to te ) god
will rest from
8 his wrath. And he will cast
his power upon the waters,
10 and [he will] give power to his sons
and their wives by means of the ark (xtptoTo?)
12 along with [the] animals,
whichever he pleased, and the
14 birds of heaven, which he
called and released
16 upon the earth. And god
will say to Noah
18 whom the generations (yeveoc) will call
Deucalion: Behold,
20 I have protected <you > in the ark (xi{3o>t6<;)
along with your wife and your sons
22 and their wives and their
animals and the birds of
24 [heaven], which you called
[and released upon the earth.]
(4 lines lacking)
[7 i]
Therefore I will give the [earth] to you
7ii4-I5 which he called and released : or called and placed. If the
reference were to releasing the birds after the flood, onewould
expect the future tense.
20 MS reads epOC|, him .
25 The reconstruction is modeled on lines 15-16 above.
166 NAG H A M M A D I C O D E X V ,5
2 W tok . h r N C K a jH p e fc]Fi o y
M flT ppO KNAp p p o e x t p q H t o k
4 HFI N K (y H pe* A ycu HHN
C n o p A N N H y B O \ Fi^HTK.
6 R T e NipCUMC s t s H c e N A A ^ e
p A T O y A N H T I A H T O 6 B O A fJ
8 i c e e o o y t o t b ce N A q ?a>
n e F ie e F i'fK A O O A e F iT e m
io n o 6 F i o y o e i N - c e f i N H Y Fl6i
F Jp cun e e T H M A y n h e T A y
12 NOXOy 6BOA t r N C U C I C Fi
T N IN 0 6 NN6CUN H R NIAl'
14 reA o c ceN AAêpAToy h
n e H T O FiNcoê mn NiecuN-
16 Ayco n N o y T e n a x o o c R
N cuê x e s t b s o y Aicp c a b o a
18 F ln e N T A T x o o q n a k - ak.
t a h i o R r e r e N e A x e e ic e
20 f ccu q ? F I t a 6 o h - t o t c q n a
x o o c r 6 i N cuê x e (na
22 p H flT p e R n e H T O R n e ic
xna^- x e F lT A T reN e A W
24 t N i p t u n e cy tu n e c b q a
[f iT OO ]t a n - o y T e 6 B [ O A i]
26 [ t R N A ]cy[H p]e [ A ] y [
[. . .]cp u [ . . . . ] ? [
(4 lines lacking)
Tom
[ . . . *t'rN ]o)cic- [A]y[cu q]N A

2 C -]<P[ ]a R F I p o n e e T H H A y
[Fi]qN Toy e ^ o y N en eyicA ^
4 eT H ^ iq jA FiqKcuT* n a y R N o y
h a H q jc u n e e q o y A A B * A y co
6 ceN A H oyT e e p o o y n ip A y
cth hay F ic e c y c u n e h h a y
8 R c o o y R c y e F lp o n n e Fl o y
71,2-3 In kingly fashion : or "In a kingdom."

7-8 in another glory : or possibly "in honor (of me).
A PO CA LY P SE O F A D A M 7 1 , 2 - 7 2 , 8 167
2 you and your sons. In

kingly fashion you will rule over it you
4 and your sons. And no
seed (<T7rop<x) will come from you
6 of the men who will not
stand in my presence in
8 another glory. Then (tote) they will
become as the cloud of the
10 great light. Those
men will come who have
12 been cast forth from the knowledge (yvtoai?)
of the great aeons and the
14 angels. They will stand
before Noah and the aeons.
16 And god will say to
Noah: Why have you departed from
18 what I told you? You have
created another generation (yevea) so that you
20 might scorn my power. Then (t o te )
Noah will say: I shall
22 testify before your
might that the generation (yevea)
24 of these men did not come
[from me] nor ( oute) [from]
26 [my sons,
[
(4 lines lacking)
[72 ]
[ ] knowledge (yvokni;). And [he] will

2 [ ] those men
and bring them into their proper
4 land and build them a
holy dwelling-place. And
6 they will be called by that
name and dwell there
8 six hundred years in a
7U2 "cast forth from : or perhaps "set apart from.

72.8 The numeral sign % (600) appears above the written number.
i6 8 N AG H A M M A D I C O D E X V ,5
C O O Y N R T C ' | ' A( J ) A p CI A -
IO A.YCD C N A . O ) a ) T T e N M M A Y
2 eN A freA oc R tc ttin o 6 r o y P
12 I N - R N 6 A A A Y W2 a , B fJ B O T 6
cpcune t t Y 2 h t 1' c b o a
14 e*fTN O )Cic o y a a c R tc ttn oy
Te- TOTe NO>2 e Niireq) ttka 2
16 THpq C2 PAY RN eqq^H pe-
X A M* MR IA<t>ee- MR CH M-
18 qNAJCOOC NAY NAOJHpe
cojtm eN A ajA oce- e i c ttka2
20 A Jn o a jq e ; x R t h y t R - aaaa
q?Mqj<H>Tq 2^ OY2OTe
22 oymRt2M23iA. RR200Y t h
p o Y R t c n eT N C uM j1 R n p T p e
24 [ n ] e T R c n e p M A p caboa R t t 2 [ o ]
[ R n ] N [ o ] y T e tTi t a n t o i j l Cp a t o j p ]
26 [ . . . . ] ANOK MN Tl[e]TR[
[ 6 ] M[. . . . ] * N[
(4 lines lacking)
[or]
[ .........] 07 h p e R n o j 2 -X? [tta]
2 6 p o 6 N [ A ] f AN Aq R T T e K M T O B[OA]
A Y t U RTT 6 M T O R t k 6 o m -
4 Apic<j>pAri2 e R M o q 2 ^ t c k
61.x e i V x o o p 2 n 0 Y 2 0 T e MR
6 o y a 2 CA2Ne- x e n i6 po6 th
p q T A q l cboa R 2 h t * R c e
8 NApAKTOY RCABOA RMOK
A N MR I T N O Y T e TTITTANTO
IO KpATOJp* A A A A CNAU^M
q > e 2^ o y o b b io .xcuq mr
12 o Y 2 OT RT TTeY e ,M e '
t o t epe2eN K ooYe c b o a
14 2r n cn ep M A R t c xam mR
72,15-17 The sons of Noah: Cf. Gen 9 :18-19.

21 "serve him, c p R c p H T q , emended from opMOJMTCj- Itisun-
derstood here as referring to God the almighty (cf. 73,9-12), but it
A PO CA LY PSE OF ADAM 7 2 , 9 - 7 3 , 1 4 169
knowledge of imperishability (a<p0ap<na).

10 And angels of the great
light will dwell with them.
12 No foul deed
will dwell in their heart(s), but
14 only the knowledge (yvwai?) of God.
Then (tote) Noah will divide the
16 whole earth among his sons,
Ham and Japheth and Shem.
18 He will say to them: My sons,
listen to my words. Behold,
20 I have divided the earth among you. But (aXXa)
serve him in fear and
22 slavery all the days
of your life. Let not
24 your seed (cmep^x) depart from the face
of god the almighty (7tavToxpaTcop).
26 [ J I and your [
[
(4 lines lacking)
[73]
[ J son of
Noah: [My]
2 seed [will be] pleasing before you
and before your power.
4 Seal (acppayÊiv) it by your
strong hand with fear and
6 commandment, so that the whole
seed which came forth from me
8 may not be inclined away from you
and god the almighty (7tavToxpaTp),
10 but (aXXa) it will serve
in humility and
12 fear of its knowledge.
Then (tote) others
14 from the seed (a n ep fia) of Ham and
is possible to refer it to the earth and translate minister to it,

i.e., till the soil. Cf. Gen 9:20.
A letter e is crossed out before fle e at the end of the line.
[Tf]A<J>ee eyeBcuK. w6i qTooy Hqje

16 n<yo RpcuMe- Rcgbcuk e
2oyN ckcka? RcetfoeiAe
18 GNpcUMe e T M M i y nh e
TAyqjcune gboa fj ^ 0 6
20 RrNCUCIC ROJA N' XG
AeiBec Rtg Tey6oM na
22 Ape^ e N e N T A y b o e iA e
e p o o y e b o a R^cdb n im e e o o y
24 mR e n ie y M iA n im c fc o o q -
t o t 6 n cn e p M A Rxam mR
26 [fA]< j> ee nap m R t* cn o o y[c]
R M F lT p p o - Aycu n [e ]y [ ic e ]
28 [c]nepM A nabcuk eoy[N ]
TM N Tpp[o] N IC?AAO C[-]
30 [TO T]e CN [A ]O JO XN e N0j [
[ .]q > [.] . . . [n]?cun 2 A N[
[o a ]
[. . ]m g e i * M 0 0 y i [Fi]T[e] n n o 6
2 [N ]N (DN F T C 't* A(J) ApCIA'
[A]ya> CeNABCDK. A c a k a a
4 u e y N o y T e - ccn a b cd k e^ oyN
n i6 om eyp K A T H rop i R n i n o 6
6 RpcuM e nh e ta jo o T t n e y e
o o y c e N A x o o c R c a ic a a x e
8 o y T 6 t 6 oM N N ip a ) M e TAY
A ^ epA Toy R ttc k R to g b o a
10 naT e T A y q iT o y c b o a m ni
cn ep M A F t c xam mn TA cJjee
12 eyN A p q T o o y fiq je < n u io > HpcuM e
73,15 "hundred : N t p e may have been first omitted then writtenin

with small letters. The numeral sign y (400) is written above
the written numeral.
15-16 "Four hundred thousand men : cf. 74,12. Bohlig r e f e r s to Manich
ean Homilies 68,18: 400,000 righteous. This is also the number
of the tribe of Judah in Jos. Ant. V II.320.
26-27 twelve kingdoms : Cf. Gen 10:2 and 6 (LXX) where the sons
of J apheth and Ham are twelve in number. The twelve plus one
(line 29) may be connected with the thirteen kingdoms of 77>27
82,19. Cf. Gos. Eg. (Ill 2) 63,18: "the god of the thirteen aeons.
A PO CA LY P SE O F A D A M 7 3 , 1 5 - 7 4 ,12 171
Japheth will come, four hundred

16 thousand men, and enter into
another land and sojourn
18 with those men who
came forth from the great
20 eternal knowledge (yvcoai<;). For
the shadow of their power will
22 protect those who have sojourned
with them from every evil thing
24 and every unclean desire (e7u0o[iia).
Then (tote) the seed (cnrspfia) of Ham and
26 Japheth will form twelve
kingdoms, and their
28 seed (<T7csp(ia) [also] will enter into
the kingdom of another people (Xao^).
30 [Then (tote) ] will take counsel
[ ] aeons [
[74]
[ ] who are dead, of the great

2 aeons of imperishability (<x<p0<xp<na).
And they will go to Sakla
4 their god. They will go in
to the powers, accusing (xaTTjyopeiv) the great
6 men who are in their
glory. They will say to Sakla:
8 What is the power of these men who
stood in your presence,
10 who were taken from the
seed (<T7cepfia) of Ham and Japheth,
12 who will number four hundred <thousand> men?
Sakla : One of the common names for the demiurge, Yaldabaoth,

Sammael, in the Nag Hammadi library; cf., e.g., Ap. John
(11,2 ) 11,17; Hyp. Arch. (11,4 ) 95 , 7 - In Gos. Eg. (111, 2 ) 57 5 8,
passim, Sakla is called the great angel and is paired with
Nebruel the great demon.
(thousand) : Inserted to conform to 73,15-16. The MS reads
only four hundred," and there is no number written above the
line; at 73,15 the number 400 (y) appears above the line.
172 NAG H AM M A D I C O D E X V ,5
x y.xiT O Y o yn eiceecuN nH
14 eT A Y q jtu n e c b o a fJ^HTcj a y u >
A.YK.TO M T i e O O Y T H p q R T 6 T 6 K
16 60M MR T M R T p p O R T T e K d l J C
x e in e c n e p M i R t no>2 c b o a
18 2r n eq q jH p e A q eip e R n eK oy
cuqj T H p q MR n i 6 o m T H p o Y
20 2 R NiecUN eTA .neK A .M a.2Te
p ppo ePA.T eJCtuoY' mn Nipcu
22 Me 6 TMMA.Y MR NH 6 T 6 R
pM RdAeiAe ^m n e Y e o o Y -
24 [e]MnoYeipe RneTe^NAK-
[aaa]a AYncucuNe RneK
26 [MH]HO)e THpq t o t nNOY
[Te] y[T]e NiecuN qNA*t* nay
28 [bbo]a 2 ^ nh eYuiWqpe MMo[q]
[ . . . ];yi* R ca " f s C . ]y c R k[
30 c ? n n h o y ejcfl ti[k]a.2 e[T]iji
[ m ] a [y ] u h [ e ] T O Y N A q j c u n e ilfeH]
2 R61 ni no 6 RpcuMe- nh e T [ e ]
Tq
MnoYJCU^M1 oytb RceNA
4 xo>2M an 2 nn eMieyMiA nim
x e rtatb y 'I'Yxn ujtune an
6 2R OY<5lOC 6CJCA2M- AAAA ACUJCU
n e c b o a 2 r o y n o 6 Roya2 cA2Ne
8 NTe 0YAi*reA0c n qÂ eN 2-
t o t b ceN AN O Y-xe R o yk< 0 2 ^
10 mr oyeHN MR o y a m p H 2 e e o c R
N ipcuM e 6t m m ay* a y c u e p e
12 o y k o > 2 :? mr o y 2 a o c t n ^ eXN
N iecuN tR m ay R cep KAKe
74,13-14 "another aeon from which": The sense seems to demand aeon
other (than) the one from which, bnt no comparison is indi
cated in the syntax.
75,9-io "fire and sulphur and asphalt": If the Genesis narrative is al
luded to here, the incident is probably the destruction of Sodom;
A PO CA LY PSE OF A D A M 74 , 13*75,13 173
They have been received into another aeon

14 from which they had come forth, and
they have overturned all the glory of your
16 power and the dominion of your hand.
For the seed (o7cep(xa) of Noah through
18 his son has done
all your will, and (so have) all the powers
20 in the aeons over which your might
rules, while both those
22 men and the ones who are
sojourners in their glory
24 have not done your will.
[But (aXAa)] they have turned (aside) your
26 whole throng. Then (tote) the god
of the aeons will give them
28 (some) of those who serve [him]
[
30 they will come upon that land
[7 5 ]
where the great men

2 will be who
have not been defiled, nor (ofrrc) will be
4 defiled by any desire (em0ufjda).
For their soul Oj'ox*)) did not come
6 from a defiled hand but (aXXoc) it
came from a great commandment
8 of an eternal angel.
Then (tots) fire
10 and sulphur and asphalt will be cast upon
those men, and
12 fire and (blinding) mist will come over
those aeons, and
cf. Gen 19:24. In Gos. Eg. (111, 2 ) 60,9-18 the "seed of the great
Seth" is associated with Sodom and Gomorrah.
75.9-21 H. Goedicke, "A n Unexpected Allusion to the Vesuvius Erup
tion in 79 A .D ., AmerJournPhil 90 (1969), 340-41, suggests
that this description is based on the Vesuvius disaster (cf. Plin.
Ep. VI.16 and 21).
174 N AG H AM M A D I C O D E X V ,5
14 F 6 1 F b a a F n i 6 o m H i e Ni<t>a)c
t h p H C e T R N i y 6 B O A MMOOy
16 f 6 i NiecuN gF N e ^ o o y e T M M i y
A y cu c e f i N H y e^pAT F 6 1 êN
18 no6 F k a o o a c R o yo ein F e e
i e^pAlf e x c u o y F 6 1 ^ e N i c e
20 k a o o a c F o y o e i N g b o a ^F
n i n o 6 f n c c u n * c n n h y e^pAT
22 t i 61 a b p a c a 5 MF CABAU) mR
ra.MA.Aih a - F c e e i N e F n i
24 pcUMe 6TM M i y 6 B O A M
niKcuî* Mfi nidcuNi* Ti
26 c e x i T o y F c A T n e F N iA j[ c uN ]
MF NIApXH F t c n i 6 o m F e e
28 [ x i ] T o y c b o î [
[. ]oy F cunJ a.[
30 [F ]cexiT o y e[BOA
n n ec u n* n i . [ ........... m a ]
[OS]
[F cp ]cu n e n t n i n [o ]6 m[. . ] ba
2 [ . ] p m m a y MW N iA i're A .o c e
[t ] q y a a b m F NiecuN- c e N A
4 a jc u n e F 6 1 N i p c u M e e y e m e
F n 1A i* r e A o c e T M M A y x e g e N
6 OJMMO MMOOy AN N 6" AA AA
e y p ^cub 1 c n o p A F a t * t a k o -
8 TTAAIN ON C| NACI N MTTM6 2
c p o M e i * F c o r t f 6 i nicuc
75,17 clouds of light : a common image of ascent; cf. e.g., Test. Abr. 9
(long recension); in Nag Hammadi literature, Zost. (VIII,x) 4,21-23.
22-23 InCod.Bruc. (untitled text), f. n o v,34-35 Gamaliel appears with
Strempsoukos and Agramas as one of the three guardians
(tpuXaxe?). All three names occur, but not as a trio, in the long
list of names in Zost. (VIII,1) 47: Abrasax (line 13), Samblo the
7tapaX^(X7tT<op (line 24), and Gamaliel, paired with Strempsouchos
(line 2). With the addition of Gabriel, these are the SiAxovoi of
the four great <po><rrijpes in Gos. Eg. ( I ll,2) 52,19-53,9 and else
where. See also Trim. Prot. (XIII, j ) 48 *,27-29.
26 the aeons, FNIA|[CUN]: It is possible to read NNIA|*[re-
AO C], the angels," but the line would be unusually long.
A PO CA LY PSE O F ADAM 7 5 ,1 4 -7 6 ,9 175
14 the eyes of the powers of the illuminators (cpoxTTrjp) will

be darkened,
and the aeons will not see by
16 them in those days.
And great clouds of light
18 will descend, and
other clouds of light
20 will come down upon them from
the great aeons.
22 Abrasax and Sablo and
Gamaliel will descend, and bring
24 those men out of
the fire and the wrath, and
26 take them above the aeons
and the rulers (apx*)) f the [powers], and
28 [take] them away [
[ ] of life [
30 and take them away [
aeons[
[7 6 ]
[dwelling-place] of the [great

2 [ ] there with the holy angels
and the aeons.
4 The men will be like
those angels for they
6 are not strangers to them. But (aXXoc)
they work in the imperishable seed (cnuopa).
8 Once again (tocAiv), for the
third time, the illuminator (cpcoarrip)
76,8-9 Once again, for the third time : Though the Illuminator's
coming was not mentioned before, this is the third time in rela
tion to the flood and the fire. Cf. Gos. Eg. (Ill,2) 63,4-8, where
the great Seth is said to have passed through three parousias :
the flood, and the conflagration, and the judgment of the
archons and the powers and the authorities.
9 illuminator : As a title (poxrnfjp is so common as to be of little
help in placing the document; e.g., Hipp. Ref. V.8.40 (the Savior
in the Naassene exegesis); Act. Phil. 21 (Jesus); Kephalaia 68
(Mani); Kephalaia, Introduction (7,27; Zarathustra).
IO THp RT6 *fTNCUCIC 2 ^ OYN06

NNeo oy f i Ni x e eqecpcujtTt
12 e B o \ 2 m nicnepM i n te NOije
MW NIUJHpe RT XXm MR TA(j)e
14 xe e q e c y c D - x r t n Aq R ^ c n u ^ h n
Rpeq*t* o y T A 2 A y c u qNACCD
16 T e N N e y ' p y x H g b o a jm n e ^ o
o y MTTMoy xe ttittaacm a
18 THpq e T A q a j c o n e c b o a
TTIKA2 e i'M o o y i* - c e N A c y c u
20 n e 2^ T e s o y c i A R n M o y
nh A e e t M e e y e e 'fr N tu c ic
22 N T e TTiq?A e N 2 n N o y x e
2M n e y 2 H i* R c b n a t a k o
24 an xe R n o y jti ttna
6 B O A 2 N T e T M R T p p O ROyCDT
26 [a ]a a a n t a y j c i RTOOTq R o y [
[. .] NAi*reAoc R o j a e N 6 2
28 [ 10 ]iji<t)ajCTH[p]
[ 9 RN]HOy JCN
30 [ 6 eT M ]ooyf- th
[ llZe MHO.
[Oil
[ . ] n [ . . ] R c h R q e i p e R 2 n
2 M A e i N m r 2 N < ^T TH p e x e e q e
j- c c d o j - R n 'i'6 o m mr neyApycptN]
4 TOTe q n a u jto p T p r 6 i n N o y T e
N T e n i 6 o m * e q x c u m m o c x e xa)
6 T e f d o M Rt b nipcuM e e f
jc o c e epoN- t o t c q n a t o y
8 n o c o y N o 6 R 6 a > N t eocR n i
ptDMe 6 t m M A y A y cd e q e
10 o y c D T B R61 n i e o o y R q c y c u
76,30-77,1 One might reconstruct TH

[e T q N A p c< | > p A r]!2 e m m o [c ]
[2 R ] n [ p A N ] R c h
which he will seal with the name of Seth.
77,3 "the powers : The MS originally read R N e y 6 o M , "their
powers, but dots over the letters e y indicate an erasure.
A PO CA LY PSE O F ADAM 7 6 ,1 0 - 7 7 , 1 0 177
10 of knowledge (yv&am) will pass by in great

glory, in order to (h<x) leave
12 (something) of the seed (o7tp{ia) of Noah
and the sons of Ham and Japheth
14 to leave for himself
fruit-bearing trees. And he will
16 redeem their souls (ûp)) from the
day of death. For the whole creation (7rXa<r(xa)
18 that came from
the dead earth will be
20 under the authority (soo<na) of death.
But (Sc) those who reflect upon the knowledge (yvwou;)
22 of the eternal God
in their heart (s) will not perish.
24 For they have not received spirit (7rveu(xa)
from this kingdom alone,
26 but (aXXdc) they have received (it) from an[
[ J eternal angel.
28 [ ] illuminator (<poo<mf)p)
[ will] come upon
30 [ that is] dead [
[
[77]
[ ] of Seth. And he will perform
2 signs and wonders in order to
scorn the powers and their ruler (dtpxwv).
4 Then (tote) the god
of the powers will be disturbed, saying: What
6 is the power of this man who
is higher than we? Then (tote) he will
8 arouse a great wrath against
that man. And
10 the glory will withdraw and
77,4-27 The theme of the deception or blindness of the powers in the

face of the savior is very widespread in gnostic literature; cf.
e.g. the docetic passion narrative in Treat. Seth (VII,2) 55,30-
56,19, and without reference to Jesus, Paraph. Shem (VII, j)
36,12-22.
12
178 NAG H AM M A D I CO D E X V ,5
2eN Hei eyoyAAB nh

12 e T A q c o T T T o y NAq- A y c u n
c e N i N i y e p o q a n r 6 i n i< 5 o m
14 R N eyBAA- o y T e R c g n a
[ N ] iy I N eTTIK.e<J>a>CTHp-
16 TO Te ceN ApKO AAê R t c a
pA5 R n ip c u H e e T A n in N A
18 e T o y A A B e i e^ccuq- t o t g
CeNApXpACSAI MTT i pAN R 6 l
20 N iA freA O C MR N i r e N e A
7 H p o y R t 6 n i 6 o m R o y
22 n\ANH eyjccu m m oc xe
Accpcune c b o a tcun fi R
24 TAyei e B o x tcun R61 N icy a
xe M M R tN o yjf naT e
26 Te m tto y6 rto y r<5 i n i 6 [ o m ]
t h p o y -f^ o y e iT e oy[N ]
28 p M R T p p [ 0 JCO) M M O C e p o q ]
[ . x e A ]q u ^ c u n [e g b o a R
30 [ ............... ] R t [
[ .............] [
[oH]
e T n e R61 o y n N A A [y c ]A N o y
2 eye} R F i T T H y e A q j c i n e o o y
mtth e T M M A y MR ' ( ' 6 o m - A q e i
4 e.xR k o y Rtc R T e q mAAy
Aycu R ^ e eocFi n i M o o y
6 - f - M e ^ C R T e A G M M R T p p O JCCU
m m oc t b h HTq xe A qutum e
8 6BO A 2 K 0 Y N 0 6 MTTpO<|)HTHC-
A ycu A q g l R61 oyÂA H i* A q q i
77,16 "punish the flesh": Cf. iQpHab 9,2: they committed "ven
geance upon his body of flesh.
2X-22 use of name in error : If one may suppose the Greek to be
XP?jc6(xi <5*;, one might render treat the name as a deception.
78,5 he came to the water : In all its occurrences this refrain might
be translated he came on the water. The statement might be
a reference to baptism (of Jesus ?) but probably refers to coining
A PO CA LY PSE O F ADAM 7 7 , 1 1 - 7 8 ,9 179
dwell in holy houses which

12 it has chosen for itself. And
the poweis will not see it
14 with their eyes nor (ouxe) will they
see the illuminator (<pG>av/)p) either.
16 Then ( t o t s ) they will punish (xoXaêiv) the flesh (aapl;)
of the man upon whom the
18 holy spirit (7rveij|xoc) has come. Then (tots )
the angels and all the
20 generations (yevea) of the powers
will use (xpvjaQai) the name
22 in error (7tXav7j), asking:
Where did it (the error) come from? or (^)
24 Where did the
words of deception, which
26 all the powers have failed
to discover, come from? [Now (ouv)] the first
28 kingdom [says of him]
[that] he came [from
30 [
[
[78]
A spirit (7uveu(Aa) [ ] to heaven. He was nour
ished
2 in the heavens. He received the glory
of that one and the power. He came
4 to the bosom of his mother.
And thus he came to the water.
6 And (e) the second kingdom says
about him that he came
8 from a great prophet (7tpo<pr)T7^).
And a bird came, took
into the world. Cf. Treat. Seth (VII,2) 50,16-18: TTI e l TTCHT*
e o c R n i M o o y W61 N i M e p o c e t c A n e c H t , "thedescent
upon the water, that is the regions below. Cf. also Paraph. Shem
(VII.j) 32,5-12. In Zost. (VIII,x) 18,2-3 the phrase "come to
the water ( n H y e ^ p a J TTI M O O y ) seems to refer to baptism.
The numeral sign b (two) appears over the written numeral.
i8o NAG H A M M A D I C O D E X V ,5
io n iA A O Y eTA Y -X n oq A q.xiTq
eôYN eYTOOY e q jco ce-
12 ay<d AYCANOY<pq c b o a j m
niÂAHT* fjt m e - A Y A fre
14 A O C 1 B O A MMAY TTJU.q N A [ q ]
x e tc d o y n F AnNOYTe *f* e o o Y
16 nak.- A q j c i R o y o o y mn o Y - x p o -
a y ^ > Fl - f^ e A q i .xm n i M O O Y -
18 -J-MeûjoHTe MHfiTppo jccu
mmoc e p o q x e A q q ? c u n e c b o a
20 n oym h tp a RnApeeN OC
AYNOJcq b o a 2^ T eq n o A ic
22 fjT oq mH T c q M A A Y A Y - X i T q
Y m a TiepH M O c- A q c A N O Y
24 qjq mmay* *q-Xi W o y e
[o ] o y mN o y ^ o m - a y <u N't*
26 f e e ] A q i jcm n i M O O Y '
[ + ] ^ ? ? [ q ] T [ o ] ? M[ M] HT pp O * [OJ ]
28 [ m m o c e p o q jc] ? A q q j t u [ n e ]
[ b o a Fi O Y n i p ] e e [ N O C
30 [ 9 ]t ac[oaom cun]
m
[K]<l)Te [ R ] C C D C f J TOq MfJ <| >HpCAACp
2 MR C A Y h a mR N e q C T p A T I A
e T A Y T A O Y O O Y - ACOAO M tD N
4 ^CUCDq T A Y O N T e q C T p A T I A N
T e n ia a im c u n eiccuTe A c a
6 n A p e e N O C - ay< m itoy^ m
TH e T O Y K C U T e R C C U C - A A A A
8 -fnA peeN oc b t a y ta a c n a y '
78,10 child : The synonym K O y e i is written above the word AAOY

18-26 With this explanation and details from some of the others,
especially nourishment of the child in the desert, cf. Rev 12.
23 He was nourished": Lit. "he nourished himself, or emend to
A y e A N O Y tp q In the repeated refrain the verb is given various
subjects.
24 He came and received : The word came does not fit in the
pattern of the refrain and may be a scribal error.
A PO CA LY PSE OF ADAM 78,10-79,8 l8 l
10 the child who was born and brought him

onto a high mountain.
12 And he was nourished by
the bird of heaven. An angel
14 came forth there. He said to him:
Arise! God has given glory
16 to you. He received glory and strength.
And thus he came to the water.
18 The third kingdom says
of him that he came
20 from a virgin (roxpOsvo*;) womb (jjir)Tpa).
He was cast out of his city (tuoXk;),
22 he and his mother; he was brought
to a desert (spy)jack;) place. He was nourished
24 there. He came and received
glory and power. And thus
26 he came to the water.
[The fourth] kingdom says
28 [of him that] he came
[from a virgin (roxpOevo^).]
30 [ Solomon]
[7 9 ]
[sought] her, he and Phersalo

2 and Sauel and his armies (cTpaxia),
which had been sent out. Solomon
4 himself sent his army (crrpoma)
of demons (Soupuov) to seek out the
6 virgin (7wcp0evoc). And they did not find
the one whom they sought, but (aXXa)
8 the virgin (7uap0evo<;) who was given to them.
78.27 The numeral sign J l (four) appears over the written numeral.
79.2 On the name Sauel, see Bohlig-Wisse, Gospel of the Egyptians,
p. 194.
4-5 Solomons army of demons is a feature of magic literature and
is often found elsewhere; cf. e.g., Test. Sol., passim; Jos. Ant.
VIII.45-49; in the Nag Hammadi library, Testim. Truth (IX,3)
72,5-8.
182 NAG H A M M A D I CO D E X V ,5
R t o c n e N T A y fiT c - A q .x iT C
IO F i6 l C O A O M C D N - A C e p BAK
R 6 i i'n A .p e e N O C a c m ic c m
12 ttia a o y m ttm a e T M M i y
A C C A N o y tp q o y q jc u A j
14 R T 6 T e p H M O C - F iT e
[p ]9 Y c A N y q jq Aq.xi F lo y e o
16 PY M f i 0 y 6 0 M B O A 2 ^ 1 ' C T T O
pA e T A Y - x n o q c b o a R^h t c
18 Ayco W1 '2 A .q l e .x fi ni
T M o o y i M e ^ l' A e RmR
20 tp p o jco ) m m oc ep o q x e
A.qqpCDTT B O A 2*i o y T A
22 (Ae m e m e - AycATcj
e e a .A 3 k .cc A a t t n o y N
24 qponq e p o q A q ^ n o q
A q oA q e T n e Aq^ci F lo y e
26 o o y mH o y 6 oM - Ayo>
F i ^ e A qe[i] e^Fi [ n m o o y ]
28 [+ ]M e 2 C o A [ e ] r [ m ]H t p p [ o ]
[ jccu] i ? H o c [.x e o ] y h R t [ ]-
30 [ . . . . ] e T [. . e 2 p] 3iT e n i e c u N
[S
e ic A 2 paLT xe e q e T [o o y ]T e n
2 2 eN 2 PHPe ACtud) boa 2^

T e n io y M iA R N i2 p e p e a c
4 M ecTq R n T on oc b tm may
A N A freA oc CANoyupq R
6 T T TIA N e eC D N O C A q jci H
o y e o o y Rttma e T M M A y
8 m R o y d o M - Ayo> Wl*2e Aql
e x R n iM Q o y + M 62
79,10 ep B A K is unattested in Sahidic; cf. Bohairic BO KI- The

synonym cD cD is written above e p BAIce.
13 "border": Lit. stake or mark, also used as a boundary
marker.
28 The numeral sign $ (six) appears over the written numeral.
80,1 T O O y T e is rare in Sahidic and perhaps should be written TOY*
A PO CA LY PSE OF ADAM 79,9-80,9 183
It was she whom they fetched.

10 Solomon took her.
The virgin (TtapOevo?) became pregnant and gave birth to
12 the child there.
She nourished him on a border
14 of the desert (ep7)(xo<;). When
he had been nourished, he received glory
16 and power from the seed (<nropa)
from which he had been begotten.
18 And thus he came to the
water. And (8) the fifth
20 kingdom says of him that
he came from a
22 drop from heaven. He was thrown
into the sea (OaXaooa). The abyss
24 received him, gave birth to him,
and brought him to heaven. He received
26 glory and power. And
thus he came to [the water].
28 And (86) [the] sixth kingdom
[says] that a [
30 [ down] to the aeon
[80]
which is below, in order to [gather]
2 flowers. She became pregnant from
the desire (e7u0ufna) of the flowers. She
4 gave birth to him in that place (toton;).
The angels of the
6 flower garden (av0 s6ivo<;) nourished him. He received
glory there
8 and power. And thus he came
to the water. And (8e) the
T 6 here. Its synonym, written above the line, but now largely
in lacuna, might have been either 2 CD[CDA] S or c tu [ o Y l?
80,4 XTTOCJ, a synonym of MSCTCJ, is written above it.
5-6 fiT 6 TTia.NeeCDNOC: The occurrence of a Greek genitive is
very unusual.
The numeral sign Z (seven) appears at the end of the line.
10 " f ca.q ?qe A e RM ^[T]ppo xcu R

m oc epoq xe o y T A 'f'A e n e
12 boa TTTe nica.^
A y j c i T q e ^ p a. ! e < > e N b h b n<5|
14 2NApa.K.CDN A q q p c u n e R o y
o y i y n N a 1 e ^c cu q a.q
16 x i T q e n t i c e e n M i eTA-J
T X 'j'A e o j t u n e c b o a m m ay
18 A qjci R o y e o o y m R oy6oM
r it m i e T M M iy Aycu R ^ I e ]
20 AqCi e x R n iM O o y "fM e^
T q j M o y N e A e R M H T p p o -Xcd R
22 moc epoq x e x y K \o o \e i
e^cR nKA.2 ACKtuTe Noy
24 ljeTpa. e ^ o y N A q c p c u n e
[ e ] B O A fi ^ h t c a L y c A N o y t p q
26 [r ] 6 [ i NiAi*r]eAoc nh etft[Jc]N
['|'K]AOOA[e ] A q [ x i ] N o y e o [ o y ]
28 i-i[Fi] 9 y 6 o M [ H ] T i M i [ e T R H i y ]
Ayaj N['f'2e *.q]t e[JtR niMOoy]
T
m
[1'M]e'p[i]Te A e R M R T p p o x<v R
2 moc epoq xe b b o a gR ' H ' l T e
R nepiA W N a o y^ i ncopX c b o a
4 a c i exW o y t o o y e q x o c e ACp
o y o e i q j e c j M O O c R m a y 2 cuc
6 Te R cpem eYM ei ep o c oyÂc
Xe e c e q jc u n e T J^ ooyfcfiM e
8 acjcojk R T e c e n ie y M ia c b o a
A c f i ) c b o a gN T e c e m e y M i a .
10 A y x n o q A. yc [A .] NO YO )q n 6 i n i
WfreAOC nh ei*i.xB 'f'enieyMia.
12 A y c u A q j c i N o y e o o y mitmjl
[e]T R M iy m R o y 6 o M - A y c u FJ
*4 if ? } e a.qi e .x R n r n o o y ^M eg
80,13 Since the word drop is feminine, the masculine pronoun here
must reflect a shift back to the "him of line n .
20 The numeral sign h (eight) appears at the end of the line.
A P O C A LY P SE O F ADAM 80,10-81,14 185
10 seventh kingdom says

of him that he is a drop.
12 It came from heaven to earth.
Dragons (Spaxcov) brought him down to caves.
14 He became a
child. A spirit (7uveu[xa) came upon him and
16 brought him on high to the place where the
drop had come forth.
18 He received glory and power
there. And thus
20 he came to the water. And (8) the
eighth kingdom says
22 of him that a cloud came
upon the earth and enveloped a
24 rock (TOxpa). He came
from it. The angels
26 who were above the cloud
nourished him. He [received] glory
28 [and] power [there].
And [thus he] came to [the water].
[81]
And (8e) the [ninth] kingdom says
2 of him that from the nine
Muses (meplSes) one separated away.
4 She came to a high mountain and spent
(some) time seated there, so that ( coctte)
6 she desired (e7u0u|xetv) herself alone
in order to become androgynous.
8 She fulfilled her desire (sm0 u|iia)
and became pregnant from her desire (e7u 0 u[iia).
10 He was born. The
angels who were over the desire (sm0u(ii<x) nourished him.
12 And he received glory there
and power. And
14 thus he came to the water. The
2 The numeral sign e (nine) appears above the written numeral.

6 The letter e is crossed out after R e in N c p e T T I e y M G l .
J4 The numeral sign T (ten) appears at the end of the line.
186 NAG H A M M A D I CO D E X V ,5
[ M ] H T H M R T p p O JCCU M M O C e p o q
16 x e A neqN O Y Te M epe o y d H n e
n tc f e n i e y M i a . A q j c n o RM oq
18 e^p^T e T e q b ijf Aycu A.qNoy.xe
[ e] J c F i - f - K A o o A e e ^ o y e epoq
20 c b o a R f T X f A e a . y t u A y
.x n o q - Aqaci R o y e o o y mR o y
22 [6 ]o m mttma e T M M ^ y aiytu
N'f'2 e e-XM n i M o o y
24 -j-M e^ M N Toye A e rm n
[x ]p p o j c c o R y o c x e a t t i c d t
26 [ p e n J ie y M i e [ T ] e q u j e e p e
[ o y A A ] T C a c c u 6> g t u c u c c b o [ a ]
28 [2m n e lc e ic u Y A C N o yjce
[ ......... ]y #[. ]yR2eoy[
EH
FI B O A f i T e p H M O C A.TTAfre
2 a o c C A N oyqjq Rttm a e
T R M A y Aycu a.qi e
4 jcm n m o o y : "fM e^
T MflTCNOOyC RMRTppO JC CU
6 m m oc e p o q x e i q ^ c u n e e b o a
M (fxUCTH p CNAy x y c x
8 N oycpq R M i y |>]q.xi R o y e o o y
m r o y d o M - a.y[tu] R -fê a.qi
10 e jtR n i M o o y -fMe^
T M R l * U J O M T e J l R M R T p p O JCtU
12 m m oc epoq xe 6 iN M ice nim
RTe neyApxcuN oyA oro[c n e ]
14 Aycu Aqjci RoyTcuq? Rttm[a]
c t R M A . y n 6 i n e T A o r o c - a.q
16 xt R o y e o o y MR o y d o M '
A y c o R ' f a e a.qi c j c R n m o o y
81,16 KAOOA6, a synonym of 6 HTT6, is written above it.

18 6 is written above X in N O y x e.
19 6 HTTe, a synonym of KAOOA6, is written above it.
near him": Following P. N agel,"Die Wolke neben ihm (Apk
Ad 81,19) in Wissenschaftliche Zeitschrift dev Mar tin-Luther-
TJniversitdt Halle-Wittenberg 22 (1973 ). m - 1 5 .
A PO CA LY PSE OF ADAM 8 1 ,1 5 -8 2 ,1 7 187
tenth kingdom says of him

16 that his god loved a cloud
of desire (emOufiia). He begot him
18 in his hand and cast
upon the cloud near him
20 (some) of the drop, and
he was born. He received glory and
22 power there. And
thus he came to the water.
24 And (8e) the eleventh
kingdom says that the father
26 desired (smOojAetv) his [own]
daughter. She herself became pregnant
28 [from] her father. She cast [
[ ] tomb
[82]
out in the desert (ep7][io?). The angel
2 nourished him there.
And thus he came
4 to the water. The
twelfth kingdom says
6 of him that he came from
two illuminators ((poxrnfjp). He was
8 nourished there. He received glory
and power. And thus he came
10 to the water. And (8e) the
thirteenth kingdom says
12 of him that every birth
of their ruler (<px<ov) is a word (Xoyo<;).
14 And this word (Xoyo?) received
a mandate there. He
16 received glory and power.
And thus he came to the water,
81,24 The numeral sign 7 5 (eleven) appears above the written number.
82,4 The numeral sign 7 b (twelve) appears at the end of the line.
7 The numeral sign b (two) appears above the written number.
7*8 "he was nourished": or "they (i.e., the illuminators, the sun and
the moon) nourished him.
10 The numeral sign Tr (thirteen) appears at the end of the line.
12 x is written above 6 in 6 1N MI c e .
NAG H AM M A D I C O D E X V ,5
18 x e e y e r w f fiT e n ie y
m13k. FItg NeT6oM* jreNeA jlg
20 n n a t p p p o e ^ p ^ T g j c c u c j c <d
MMOC x e ATTNOyTe ccdttt
22 M M O q GBOA N NieCDN TH poy
|>.]qTpe oyrNtucic n tg niAf
24 [jc]u>2m Rtg tmb aju)ne n
feHT]q nejca.q x e Aqgl g[boa]
26 [ ^ R ] p y A . H p N U J M M O e [ B O A 11]
[o y ]N o 6 H necun n 6 i [n i]
28 [ n o 6 ] M < J > a > C T H p - A .y [ a > A q T p e ]
[nf]
j r e N C e ] ^ N T S N ip C O M G 6 T M M ^ y
2 P o y o e i N NH T2lC| CO T T TO Y N3iq
^ c u c T e F ic e p o y o e i N g^cm n i
4 CCD N T H pcj* T O T e 't CTTOpa. N ^
o y s e f6 o M nh g tn ^^ ci R n e q
6 P3lN T T IM O O y ^ y C U f i T O T O y
t h p o y* * y c u oyFi o y k a o o a s
8 hkxks nnhy exw o y- to ts
c e u x a x j ) 6 b [o ]a n o y n o 6 n c m h
10 n6i n i a ^ o c ey ^ ccu m m o c .x e
H X t X T C N T 'l 'Y X H N T S N ip O )
12 mg e T M M v y x e ^ y c o y c u N
TTNoyTe oyrNcucic n
14 [T]e TMe* ceN^cuNj q)x Ne
[cu ]n fiTe NecuN x e Mnoy
16 t 2lko TeyenieyM i*
82,19-20 the generation without a king : A common designation for

the Gnostics; cf. e.g., H yp . Arch. (II, 4) 97,4-5; Soph. Jes. Chr.
(BG,j) 92,5-6. W ith the thirteen kingdom theories, compare the
thirteen seal explanations in Marsanes ( X , j ) 2 ,14-4,23 and the
thirteen aeons" in Gos. Eg. (111,2) 63,18; 64,4.
22 from all the aeons : or from all eternity. In the latter case,
cf. the election of Christians 7cp& xaTaPoXyjs x6aji.ou in Eph 1:4
(cf. 2 Tim 1 :q npb xpovcov atcovfccov), with its O T and Jewish back
ground in the election of Israel.
TTG.XACJ m ay be supported b y a minute trace of ink. The reading
TTe,xa.C, " I t (the generation or the gnosis) said, s e e m s less like
ly. In addition, it is uncertain where to terminate the quotation.
A PO CA LY PSE O F ADAM 82,18-83,16
18 in order that (E v a) the desire (e m O u jjiia )
of those powers might be satisfied. But (Be) the genera

tion (yevea)
20 without a king over it says
that God chose
22 him from all the aeons.
He caused a knowledge (yva>m<;) of the
24 undefiled one of truth to come to be
[in] him. [He (or it )] said: [Out of]
26 a foreign air (txrjp),
[from a] great aeon [the]
28 [great] illuminator (<pg><tty)p ) came forth. [And he made]
[83]
the generation (yevea) of those men
2 whom he had chosen for himself shine,
so that (idaze) they should shine upon the
4 whole aeon. Then (tote) the seed (anoptx),
those who will receive his
6 name upon the water and (that) of them all, will fight
against the power.
And a cloud
8 of darkness will come upon them. Then (tote)
the peoples (Xao?) will cry out with a
10 great voice, saying:
Blessed is the soul (<p<JX^l) of those
12 men because they have known
God with a knowledge (yv&aic,)
14 of the truth! They shall live forever (a u o v , bis),
because they have not been
16 corrupted by their desire ( s m Q u fiia ),
83.4-6 "Then . . . power : B y emending to < N> N H (line 5), one might
translate, "Then the seed will fight against the power (of) those
who will receive his name upon the water and yield to them all.
Here H T O T O Y (line 6) is taken with "t* (line 4).
6 "and (that) of them all : Lit. and of them all, taken here to
refer to the name (of Seth and of the Sethians). The awkward
expression may well be a gloss corresponding to the probable
gloss at 65,9.
m R NiAi*reAOC o y T e m
18 n o y x e K n i ^ b h y e FiTe ni
6 om boa a a a a x y \ 2 e ?*T y
20 R n e q R T O 2*J o y r N O J d c
FiTe n N o y T e flee R o y o
22 eiN eAqel b o a oyica>
2 ? m R o y c N o q - a n o n ^.e
24 A N p 2<v* nim 2 ^ oymRt*at*
2 Hi FiTe ni 6 om- i N o j o y
26 qpoy M M O N TTTApA
[ba]cic n t n N b h y e
28 [THp]oy ancdo> o y B e [ttnoy]
[t] FiTe [TMej x e Ne q^ BH fy e]
30 [T]ypo[y . . .]. a m .. . [
TnAl
o y q j A N 2 ne- NeT a n 6 n
2 TTNA* A N I M TAP 't'NOy JCe
NeN'l'yxH n a m o y 2 ^ o y M o y
4 t o t e a y c m h tytune c y A p o o y
ecxcu m m o c x e Mixey m R
6 MIXAP M R M N H C I N O y C * N H
en*îJcR n i x c u K M e T o y A A B
8 mR n i M O o y e T ONj x e eTBe
o y NeTeTRcpu) o y B e n N o y
10 T e e T O N j 2 r ^ [e ] N C M H n a n o
M O C M R 26NA.AC M R N O M O [ c ]
12 T e e T Q O T o y m R 2n'|'yxh
84,1-2 "against : Translation is uncertain because the immediately

preceding line is in lacuna.
5-6 "Micheu and Michar and Mnesinous : Cf. Cod. Bruc. (untitled
text), f. i36v,18-23: "These are the names of the powers who are
over the living water: Michar and Micheu, and they are purified
by Barpharanges. The name Mnesinous does not occur in this
work. In Zost. (VIII, j ) 6,8-17 there is an almost literal parallel
to the Cod. Bruc. passage, and in addition there is a second list:
"[Michar and] Micheus, and Seldao and Elainos and Zogenethlos.
Mnesinous occurs in this work in the long list of names on 47,4'
The names are also found in Gos. Eg. (111,2 ) 64,14-20, they
who preside over the baptism of the living, and the purifiers,
A PO CA LY P SE OF ADAM 83,17-84,12 191
along with the angels, nor (oure)

18 have they accomplished the works of the
powers, but (aXXa) they have stood
20 in his presence in a knowledge (yvto<n<;)
of God like light
22 that has come forth from
fire and blood. But (8s) we
24 have done every deed of the powers
senselessly. We have
26 boasted in the transgression (7capdc|3a<n<;)
of [all] our works.
28 We have [cried] against [the God]
of [truth] because all his works
30 [
[84]
is eternal. These are against our
2 spirits ( tcvU{x<x ) . For (yap) now we have known that
our souls ((Jûxtq) will die the death.
4 Then (tots ) a voice came to them
saying: Micheu and
6 Michar and Mnesinous, who
are over the holy baptism
8 and the living water, why
were you crying out against the
10 living God with lawless (avofio^) voices,
and tongues without law (vo[ao<;)
12 over them, and souls ((f^x^)
and Seseggen(bar)pharaggan, and they who preside over the

gates of the waters, Micheus and Michar.. . . In Trim. Prot.
(XIII,j) 48*,18-21 these three are called Paimaxrjc who baptize
in the jnjfr) of the water of life.
5-8 The role of these three personalities in the passage is unclear.
The statement may be direct address, or an affirmation ( Micheu
.. .are over ), or a parenthesis (or gloss) identifying the voice,
i.e., it is these three personalities who reproach the people who
have just been speaking, thus: A voice came to them saying
(Micheu and Michar and Mnesinous, who are over the holy
baptism and the living water): Why were you crying out
192 n a g H A M M A D I C O D E X V ,5
6 Y M 62 R C N O q MR 2 N ^ [ B H Y e ]
14 YC00q-eTTRM 2 ? [boa ]
^R ^ e N ^ B H Y e cn a tm e an n
16 A A A A N e T R ^ i o O Y e M2 R
O Y N O q MR TTT6AHA' A T
18 T R x e ^ M n m o o Y R t c ttcun[2]
a t c t R c o j k MMoq e ^ o Y N
20 e n o Y U ja j R t c ni6om
NH 6 T A Y 1* T H Y T R 6 T O O
22 t o y xe eT eT N eajH q je
m m o o y " a .y c u R n efn e}
24 T R M e e y e e i N e R tta ni
[ p]a>M 6 T M M A Y a n NH
26 [ e ] T e T R T T U ) T RCCUO[Y]
[. ]t i o y c [. ].[.] n c a n
28 [,]en i Y M [iA . . .] . e
m
M ^ .p en eY O Y T A 2 aojcum - a a a a
2 ceNAq^cune b y c o o y n m mooy
oja n in o 6 Rncun- xe N iuÂxe
4 eTAYApe^ e p o o y R Te n N o y T e
R tc N ecuN MTTOYîTOY e
6 n J C U) U) M O Y T 6 R c e c ^ H O Y I * AN-
A A A A 2NAI*rAIICOC 6 T N A R T O Y
8 na T e T e R c e N A M M e e p o o y a .n R
61 R r N A T H [ p o ] Y R R p t U M e - c e
xo NAupcune rA[p e ] x N o y t o o y eq
x o c e JixR o y n e T p A R t g tm c-
12 6 T B 6 TTAT C C N A ' t PAN e p O O Y
xe N I i p A J C e N T S ' t' A<t >e A pCI A
14 [ m r "(*]m R t m e R n h efcooyN
84,23 Regarding the dittography, the scribe may have thought of a

negative first perfect, MTTeneTN M e e y e , since the negation
AN is so far from the verb (line 25).
85,1 MApe- is a dialectal (Subachmimic) variant of Mepe-.
5 MTTOY0TOY. frm 2 lo Y e > kt- (^t)pdcXXeiv. The MS reads
R TTO Y 0 T O O T O Y with dots indicating the erasure of TOO.
io - i i on a high mountain, upon a rock : For the scheme of Sethian
A PO CA LY PSE OF ADAM 84,13-85,14 193
full of blood and foul

14 [deeds]? You are full of
works that are not of the truth,
16 but (aXXa) your ways are full of
joy and rejoicing.
18 Having defiled the water of life,
you have drawn it within
20 the will of the powers
to whom you have been given
22 to serve
them. And your
24 thought is not like that of
those men whom
26 you persecute
[
28 [ ] desire (smOujua) [
[85]
Their fruit does not wither. But (dcXAa)
2 they will be known
up to the great aeons, because the words
4 they have kept, of the God
of the aeons, were not committed to
6 the book nor (ovrt) were they written.
But (aXXa) angelic (beings) will bring
8 them, whom all the generations (yevea)
of men will not know.
10 For (yap) they will be on a high
mountain, upon a rock (nirpcc) of truth.
12 Therefore they will be named,
The Words of Imperishability (dc90ap<y[a)
14 [and] Truth, for those who know
revelations preserved from flood and fire on brick and stone, see
Jos. Ant. I.67-70 and Vit. Ad. 50,1-2. The Gos. Eg. is a book
written by Seth and placed in a high mountain unknown to men
throughout history (111, 2 ) 68,1-13. Cf. also the title Steles Seth
(VII,5); Allogenes (XI,3) 72,1-6.
85.14 "for those : or "of those.
13
[Fi]nNOYT Roja eN2 2 R Y

16 [c]o<|)ia FiTe OYrNcucic Mfi
oycbcu FiTe 2 NAi*reAOC oja
18 N 2 x e q co o yN H2 CUB ÎM:
na T n e N i A n o K A A Y ' l ' i c c t a
20 [ a ] a a m d A A n o y g b o a F i c H e n e q
qjHpe- a y c o A n e q q j H p e TAM e
22 T e q c n [ o ] p A e p o o Y ' t a T t c "tTNa)
c i c F i NAn o Kp Y< |) ON F i T e a a a m
24 e T A q T A A C f j c h - e T e ni^ccD
km T o y i 3 i B n e r n h ei*co
26 OY N W't r N O JC I C FJ6 N 62 6 B O [ a ]
2i t o o t o y F i N i A o r o r e N h c M[Fi]
28 NI<|)a>CTHp FiAT*TAK.O NH [CTAYl
BOA 2 ^ 1'Cn[o]pA eTOYA.[AB]
30 fe c c e Y C MA[z]ApeYc [Tecce]
X e lc e y c [ n i ] y o o Y t o [n |
32 tatto[kaay]'|, !C naa[am]
85,17-18 "angels forever : With a slight emendation one might read "eter
nal angels, 2e NAI* rAOC <F i>OJ A 6 N 6 2 . as at 64,15-16;
75,8; 76,27.
18 The translation supposes that the quotation of "the voice
(84,4-5) ends here, but this is uncertain; it may end in the lacuna
at the end of p. 84. In any case Adam's words end here.
28 "the imperishable illuminators : The translation supposes these
are Iesseus, etc., but the reference may be to the four (pwoTrjpes,
A PO CA LY PSE OF ADAM 8 5 , 1 5 - 3 2 195
the eternal God in

16 wisdom (crocpia) of knowledge (yvo><n<;)
and teaching of angels
18 forever, for he knows all things.
These are the revelations (dacoxaXuiJ'K;) which
20 Adam made known to Seth his
son. And his son taught
22 his seed (<T7ropa) about them. This is the
hidden (auoxpucpov) knowledge (yvtoffu;) of Adam,
24 which he gave to Seth, which is the
holy baptism of those who
26 know the eternal knowledge (yv&Gic,)
through those born of the word (Xoyoytvric,)
28 and the imperishable illuminators (9<o<mr)p), who
came from the holy seed (cnropa):
30 Yesseus, Mazareus,
[Yessejdekeus, [The Living] Water.
32 The Apocalypse of Adam
Harmozel, Oroiael, Dauithe, and Eleleth, prominent in Gos.

Eg., Ap. John, and numerous gnostic and magical sources.
85.30-31 "Yesseus, Mazareus, Yessedekeus : In Zost. (VIII,j) 47,5-6 these
are called "the immortal spirits. In Gos. Eg. (111,2) 65,10-11
(cf. 66,10-11): "the great attendant (roxpaorTdtTT)?) Yesseus Mazareus
Yessedekeus, the living water.
31 Cf. Gos. Eg. ( I ll,2) 64,10-11.
VI, j : 1,1-12,22
R. McL. W ilso n an d D ouglas M. P a r r o tt *
Krause-Labib. Gnostische und hermetische Schriften. Pp. 36-41, 107-

21. (Hereafter, Krause [1]).
Schenke, H.-M. Die Taten des Petrus und der zwolf Apostel.
ThLZ 98 (1973), cols. 13-19.
Krause, M. Die Petrusakten in Codex VI von Nag Hammadi.
Essays in Honour of Bohlig. Edited by Krause. Pp. 36-58.
(Hereafter, Krause [2]).
Some of the text is missing at the tops of all the pages. On pp. 1-8
serious damage occurs through line 10. On pp. 9-12 only minor gaps
occur. The remainder of the text is intact, except for a few letters
along the edge of the text on the lower right side of p. 2. Problems
for the transcriber occur because of severe blotting on parts of pp.
2-6.
A title for this hitherto unknown tractate is found only at the
end of the text: The Acts of Peter and the Twelve Apostles
(12,20-22). Although at first it might seem to be referring to thirteen
apostles (Peter plus the twelve), a reading of the text makes it clear
that the title probably has to do with two different acts : an act
of Peter (1,30-5,5) and an act of the apostolic group (5,5-12,19)
(so also Krause [2], p. 38). The title, however, must be secondary,
since the number twelve is in contradiction to the explicit statement
of the text that the number of the disciples was eleven (9,20-21)
(so also Schenke, col. 15). The title, then, was probably provided
by someone who had not read the tractate carefully or who fol
lowed the common practice of the second and third centuries of
using the number twelve to refer to the apostles as a group (cf.
W. Bauer in Hennecke, N T Apocrypha II, 35).
The tractate can be divided into four major units:
* R.McL. Wilson prepared a preliminary version. James Brashler con
tributed significantly to the transcription and translation. Douglas M.
Parrott provided the introduction and footnotes, and brought the tran
scription and translation to completion.
19 8 N AG H AM M A DI C O D E X V I , J
A. The introductory section (1,1-2,10). i,i-7a, which is too frag

mentary to reconstruct, might well have contained some indication
of purpose and initial setting. The speaker is Peter (1,30), and the
time is after the crucifixion, since the apostles undertake their jour
ney on their own immediate initiative and Jesus is not with them.
The similarity of their reaction when they finally meet Christ (9,10-
20) to that of the disciples in Mt 28:17 suggests that at the begin
ning of the account they have not yet seen the resurrected Christ
(see also 2,14), although there is no reason to think that they would
not have been aware of the resurrection itself. The fact that there
are only eleven disciples also supports the placing of the narrative
in the post-crucifixion pre-ascension period (Krause [2], p. 38).
The apostles determine to undertake their ministry together (1,9-
13). They then find a ship and set sail (1,16-26). Since they make
no inquiry about destination, we should probably assume that that
is being left to the Lord (cf. 1,22-23). The ship arrives at an island
city called Habitation (1,26-2,4), and Peter goes to find out about
lodgings (2,7-10).
B. Peters meeting with Lithargoel, and the response of the rich and
the poor to him (2,10-5,18). Peter meets a pearl-merchant whose garb
suggests both that he is a divine being and that he has been dead
(cf. notes to 2,10-13 and 2,14) (2,10-25). He carries the staff of a
traveler and a book (2,26-29) and is also a stranger in the city
(2,34-3,11). Peter observes that the rich turn away from him when
he hawks his wares because they think he really has none (3,11-31).
The poor, however, flock to him. Although they have nothing with
which to buy a pearl, they would still like to see one. But the
merchant says they may have one for nothing if they come to his
city (3,32-5 ,1).
They are concerned about the hardships involved in getting to
the city, and ask Peter about them. Peter tells them what he has
heard, and turns to the merchant, asking about his name and the
hardships of the way. He learns that the name is Lithargoel, which
is interpreted in the text as a light-weight, gazelle-like (i.e., gleam
ing; cf. note to 5,18) stone; that is, a pearl (5,1-18).
C. The journey of Peter and his friends to Lithargoels city (5,19*
8,11). The hardships of the way, according to Lithargoel, are caused
by robbers and various kinds of wild beasts, all of which prey upon
those who carry food and belongings with them. The only way to
avoid them is complete renunciation of possessions and a regimen
ACTS O F P E T E R A N D T H E T W E L V E : IN T R O D U C T IO N 19 9
of fasting, so that one will have nothing that the predators might
want (5,19-6,8). Lithargoel encourages Peter to believe that the
name of Jesus will give power to walk in the way (6,9-19) and also
tells him that the name of the city is Nine Gates (6,19-26).
Peter is about to go and call his friends when he notices the walls
of the city and the waves surrounding them. This leads to a dis
cussion with an old man about the name of the city (6,27-7,2). Those
who inhabit the city do so because they are able to endure, Peter
is told. He then observes that the same is true for those who endure
trials for their faith: they have habitations in the kingdom of heaven
(7,3-19). Peter then goes and calls his friends, and they successfully
make the journey because they have prepared themselves as Lith
argoel had instructed (7,19-8,3). At the gate of the city they rejoice
and talk piously among themselves (8,4-11).
D. The appearance of Lithargoel as a physician, his revelation of
himself as Jesus Christ, and the commissioning of the eleven disciples
(8,11-12,19).
Lithargoel comes out of the city disguised as a physician and
says that he will show them where Lithargoel lives (8,11-35). How
ever, instead of doing that, he reveals that he is Jesus Christ (9,1-19).
After the disciples prostrate themselves in worship and indicate their
willingness to do his will, the Lord gives them a box and pouch of
medicine and commissions them to return to Habitation. There they
are to teach the faithful and minister to the poor (9,1-10,13). Peter
objects that they have nothing to give the poor, since they have
renounced everything, but the Lord points out that they have his
name, which is of more value than anything else (10,13-30). Once
again he gives them the medicine pouch and commands them to
heal the sick. But John objects that they have had no training as
physicians. The Lord instructs them that physical healing is im
portant to open the way for spiritual healing. Physical healing is
to be done without medicines of the world (10,31-11,26). Finally
they are to avoid contact with the rich, and are not to show par
tiality toward them in the churches (11,26-12,13). The disciples
agree to do as he wills and once again prostrate themselves in
worship. He causes them to stand and departs (12,15-19).
The intention of the author appears to have been to depict the
disciples preparation for apostolic activity. The narrative shows
their initial determination to start their ministry, apparently with
out a clear idea of where they were going or what they were to do
200 N AG H A M M A D I C O D E X V I , J
(1,9-13). When they arrive at Habitation, Peter learns that it is the

poor, not the rich, who respond to the Lithargoel (Christ). Then he
and the other apostles go through a disciplinary journey in which
they themselves become poor, denying themselves possessions and
food. Finally, when they are fully prepared by their own poverty
to respond to Jesus, he appears to them and gives them their
apostolic commission. In this way then they ready themselves, and
are readied by the Lord, to carry out their work.
The tractate, as we have just described it, is not simply anotherof
the apocryphal acts of the apostles. As Krause has observed, at the
center of the narrative is not the activity of the apostles (as is the
case in other apocryphal acts) but the person and activity of Lith-
argoel-Christ ([2], p. 55; for the criteria for apocryphal acts of the
apostles, cf. Hennecke, N T Apocrypha II, 168-69, 174-78). It is
only at the end that the reader is prepared for true apostolic
activity to begin.
Krause has analysed the sources of VI, J and divides the text into
three originally independent parts: a framework section (1,3-1,29);
a first narrative (1,29-7,23); a second narrative (8,13-12,19). He
takes the division of the narratives from the title (cf. above), each
act being a narrative. The first narrative is Peters act and has as
its central figure Lithargoel, the god of the glistening stone, i.e.,
the god of the pearl, who sets ascetic requirements for salvation.
This narrative was originally non-Christian but has been Christian
ized by insertions and the addition of Peters name. The second
narrative is the act of the apostolic group. In the process of bringing
the two narratives together, the editor Christianized the pearl as
the name of Christ (10,25-30) (Krause [2], pp. 49-51).
This analysis is weakened by its dependence upon a division of
the text suggested by a secondary and inaccurate title. A more
persuasive division would be based on the forms and structures of
the text itself (this has been attempted above in the description of
the tractate). Krause supports his divisions by reference to contra
dictions that he finds among the sections ([2], p. 49-50). But some
are more convincing than others, and the more convincing ones can
be interpreted in more than one way, as we will see below in the
discussion of the physician material.
As to Lithargoels having been originally a non-Christian deity,
in the absence of evidence for a Lithargoel cult in late antiquity
(implied by Krause [2], p. 50; suggested by Schenke, col. 15) it seems
ACTS O F P E T E R A N D T H E T W E L V E : IN T R O D U C T IO N 201
more reasonable to think that the identification of Lithargoel with

Jesus Christ (9,8-15) was the intention when the word was first
coined. Support for this view is found in Act. Pt. 20, where Jesus
is called a pearl. The figure of Lithargoel and elements in the
surrounding narrative could well have been developed out of
Rev 2:17.
Although it is not our purpose here to offer a detailed source
analysis of the text, there is one portion that ought to be mentioned,
because it seems quite clearly secondary, namely, the sections where
Lithargoel-Christ is identified as a physician (8,15-9,1; 9,30-2; 10,31-
2). The reasons for thinking that this material is secondary are the
following: (1) It compromises the identification of Lithargoel with
Jesus, which is most important for the narrative. The physician is
the intermediate figure between the two, but within the narrative
itself the physician is never recognized as Lithargoel but only as
Christ by Peter and the disciples. To be sure, Peter, as narrator,
makes the identification of Lithargoel with the physician, but we do
not know how, since the text says explicitly, We did not recognize
him (the physician as Lithargoel) (8,20). Only in 10,12-13 do the
words of the Lord himself make clear the connection, and these are
not said in such a way as to make the reader think that something
new is being revealed to the disciples. If the physician material is
removed, the identification problem disappears. (2) There is no
reason within the narrative why Lithargoel, who is already a dis
guised figure, should appear in a second disguise to the disciples.
(3) This material produces three significant contradictions with
other parts of the text: (a) In 8,20 (quoted above) the assumption
is that all the disciples were involved in the earlier discussion with
Lithargoel and therefore might have been able to recognize him. In
fact, however, only Peter was present earlier (Krause [2], p. 49).
(b) In 8,28-32 Lithargoel-Christ, as the physician, wonders how
Peter came to know Lithargoel, since he does not reveal himself to
everyone. But earlier Lithargoel had appeared to both rich and poor
and he himself told Peter his name (5,16) (Krause [2], p. 49). (c) In
9.30-32 and 10,31-32 Christ gives the eleven various medicines for
use in healing, but when they ask him how to heal bodies he tells
them to do it without medicine of the world (11,23-24).
The intent of this physician material may be to identify Christ
ind Asclepius (Schenke, col. 14). The identification of Asclepius
with other gods of healing was not at all uncommon (H. J. Rose,
202 NAG H A M M A D I C O D E X V I,X
Religion in Greece and Rome [New York: Harper and Brothers, 1959^
p. 112), and probably symbolized the belief in the ultimate unity
of all healing power. An alternative explanation is that this material
was added to convince believers that since Christ himself is a phy
sician they do not need Asclepius. (On the cult of Asclepius and
Christianity, cf. A. Harnack, The Mission and Expansion of Chris
tianity in the First Three Centuries, trans. and ed. by J. Moffatt,
Harper Torchbooks [New York: Harper and Bros., 1962; originally
published in 1908 as vol. I of a two volume translation of the 2nd
German edition (1906)], pp. 101-24).
The thought-world of the text is mixed, but there is little here that
would have offended developing orthodoxy. The Christology is that
of the divine sonship (6,14-19; 9,11-12), and, although the cruci
fixion and death of Jesus are not mentioned in the extant text, they
may well be implied (cf. 2,14 and note). The theme of apostolic
poverty is rooted in the Gospels (Mt 10:9-10) and finds expression
in such a clearly orthodox work as The Didache (11:3-6). The po
lemic against the rich is likewise based on the New Testament (Mk
10:17-31, parr.; Jas 2:1-9). Encratite influence may be present in
the prohibition of the eating of meat (6,4-6), although the character
istic Encratite teaching against sexual intercourse and marriage is
absent. No distinctively gnostic views are found here, but gnostic
interpreters could have made good use of such elements as the
stranger motif (2,34-3,11), the hidden pearl, the journey, and the
costly garment of the world (5,31-2).
Krause contends that Acts Pet. 12 Apost. is the long-lost intro
ductory section of the apocryphal Act. Pt. He argues for this by
attempting to demonstrate a close connection between Acts Pet. 12
Apost. and Act Pet. (BG,4), which tractate is now widely accepted
as belonging to the first third of Act. Pt.a part entirely lost for so
long (cf. introduction to Act Pet. in this volume) (Krause [2], pp.
56-58). This bold thesis needs to be supported by more fully devel
oped arguments than Krause was able to include in his article (cf.
Schenke, col. 15, for opposing view); we will therefore await with
interest his forthcoming commentary.
Acts Pet. 12 Apost. almost certainly is to be grouped with the
apocryphal Acts of the second and third centuries, rather than with
the later ones, with which it has little in common (cf. Hennecke,
N T Apocrypha II, 571). A more precise date will have to await the
results of a detailed literary analysis of the text.
VI, j : 1 ,1 - 1 2 , 2 2
0
8 ]xe t [
. . . . n ]p o < t> a .c [ic
. . . ]c- .x e A c q j[ c o n ]e R [ ta p
. . . ]<u i * mmon c b o a e .[
. . . ]{ ON N A TT O C T O A O C ' A[
. . - ] . [ . . ] e A N p ^CDT* 6 N . [ . ] . R
. . . ] MTTICCDMA' mn 26NK6
[K o o y ]e e y o fip o o y q j ? m n e[y]
fern*-] A y cd Wc a ^ h t R ANp o y
io O ytD T *- I N )1 M 6 T 6 ^ K
j A l i K O N IA 6 B O A C T A q T O O j R
12 e p o c R 6i n jc o e ic - Ayco a n ^
RoycyNTArH fin n e p h o y
14 AN SI e B O A e J t f i AAA CC A- KA
t a o yeyK A ip iA e A c o )a m e
16 nan c b o a 0 tn n jcoeic- a n 6i
n e f io y x o e i eqM ONe e n e K p o
18 e q c o B T e MMoq e 6cuoy cboa-
A y c u A N q j A J c e mR f i N e e q fiTe
20 n x o e i e T p e N A A e nmmay* R
T o o y ^ c u o y A-YP o y n o 6 R
22 M f i f M A e i p C D M e N M MAN KA
T A N e f T H O ) B O A f t T M TT- XOei C'
24 ACOJCDTTe A e f i T A p f i d c O O Y
c b o a ANp a.Np o y g o o y
26 MR O y o y c p H - M f i f i C A N A l
A y T H o y N i q e fiCA n ^ c o e i Aq
28 seK fi e^paJ e y K o y e i m ttoaic
e c g f i TM H Te fieAAACCA* ANOK
1,1-7 No satisfactory reconstruction of these lines as a unit has yet been

proposed.
2 Reconstruction follows Schenke.
VI, i: 1,1-12,22
[i]
[ ] which [
2 [ ] purpose (7rpo<pa<n(;) [
[ J: [After
4 [ ] us [
[ ] apostles [
6 [ ]. We sailed [
[ ] of the body (coifjia). [Others] were not
8 anxious in [their]
[hearts.] And in our hearts, we were
io united. We agreed to fulfill
the ministry (Staxovia) to which
12 the Lord appointed us. And we made
a covenant (ctuvtocy-/)) with each other.
14 We went down to the sea (QaXaaaa) at (xaxa)
an opportune moment (euxocipia), which came
16to us from the Lord. We
found a ship moored at the shore
18 ready to embark
and we spoke with the sailors of
20 the ship about our coming aboard with them.
They showed great
22 kindliness toward us as (xara)
was ordained by the Lord.
24 And (8s) after we had embarked,
we sailed a day
26 and a night. After that,
a wind came up behind the ship and
28 brought us to a small city (716X11;)
in the midst of the sea (OaXaaaa).
1,10-12 Cf. Mk 3:13-19, parr., but see also Mt 28:19-20; Ac 1:8.

NAG H AM M A D I CO D E X V I , J
30 a c n e T p o c le iq jm e f i c i n p i N
NTe'fTTOAIC N T O O T O y Fiôei
32 N e f i n M i e T M M A y eyA ^ e
p A T o y ix Fl t m pco* Aqoycuq^B
[n 6 i o y p c u M e n ]2 h t [o y eqxcu m]
2 [ moc x e npAN Fi]Tefn[oAic ne xe]

[6copS e r e n]*.[T] ne TA.xpo [
4 [ 2 Y ] t t o [ m o ] n h- A.yo> [
[ n 6 i] îe2Hre[M]cuN eTFi^ tHToy]
6 [eqXl] pTTBAe N[TeMpcu]
A.c[cp]cune Ae R TA p E bcu[ k mn m]
8 ci<:?yo c e n i K p o - a 6 ibcu[k e ^ o y N ]
e [ 1 ] n o A i c e e i K c u T e A . n i [ q ? o x N e ]
10 y c A o y M A N c e o - A q i b [o a ]
561 o y p c u M e eq<}>opi noy ^[6] n t [i]
12 on e q M H p M M oq exFi T e q + n e
e y F i o y M o x ? FlNoyB eqMHp mM[oq]
14 eoyfi KecoyAApiON mhp exfi T?[q]
M e c fe H f' eqTAAHoyT exfi
16 Neqapconaj eqgtuBc FiTeqAne
MFJ Neqdix* NeeiMoy2 ne FJca m
18 p c u M e x e NeoycAeie ne m neq
moynK mFI Teq6iNAgepATq- qTO
20 oy MMepoc eTAeiNAy epooy
2M neqccuMA- fi6 o n S t 6 Neq
22 oyepHTe mfi oyMepoc FiTeq
Mect^HT*' cuMe S t c Neq
24 6 i x mFI Teq^lKcuN- naT entaT
"residents": Lit. "some of that place."

For reconstruction of name, cf. 10,3; for meaning, cf. note to 7,1"2,
"palm stick : Lit. "branch of a date palm". Perhaps used in
measuring. Mpu>: Cf. 1,33.
B cp[K] : The tiny trace of CD in the MS may be of another letter,
but the context makes this unlikely.
advice, G) O X N e : Other terms are possible here: "knowledge,"
C o o y N ; "message, w o rd ," ( S ) X X C . Krause (i) reconstructs
2 L T T I [ t n ] , but this does not fill the space.
ACTS OF P E T E R AN D T H E T W E L V E 1,30-2,24 207
30 And (8e) I, Peter, inquired about the name

of this city from residents
32 who were
standing on the dock.
[2]
[A man] among [them] answered [saying:]
2 [The name] of this [city (710X11;) is]
[Habitation, that is,] Foundation [
4 [ ] endurance (\yKo\xovr\). And
the leader (y)ys{jkov) [among them
6 [holding] the palm stick at the edge of [the dock.]
And (e) after we had gone ashore [with the]
8 baggage (ay.tu6 q), I [went]
into [the] city (nokic,) to seek [advice]
10 about lodging. A man came out
wearing (<popeiv) a cloth (Xsvtiov )
12 bound around his waist,
and a gold belt girded [it].
14 Also a napkin (oouSapiov) was tied over [his]
chest, extending over
16 his shoulders and covering his head
and his hands. I was staring at the
18 man, because he was beautiful in his
form and stature. There were four
20 parts ((iipo?) of his body (<jci[i.a) that
I saw: the soles of his
22 feet and a part ([iipo?) of his
chest and the palms of his
24 hands and his visage (sixtov).
2.10-13 The cloth and the golden belt are the garb of a divine being (so
also Schenke, col. I4 );cf. E z e k 9 : 2 , n ; Dan 10:5; Rev 1 :1 3 ; 15:6.
14 "napkin, C O y A A . p i O N : A cloth used to cover the head of one
who has died; cf. Jn 11:4 4 ; 20:7.
24 "visage : Lit. "likeness. Perhaps his whole form is referred to.
208 n a g h a m m a d i C O D E X V I,X
6 R 6 om c n a y e p o o y eyFi o y
26 KA eiê NJccoMe FinpH Te FIna.
Xtf {n J^ n T e q d ix n^boyp* e y
28 n o y q ^ B t o i * Fiqje FiCTypa .5 2N
T e q d ix FioyNAM- N e p e T e q
30 c m h cFicFl n e e q ^ o p q j e q q jijc e
e q w q? g b o a n - f n O A i c x e M A [ p ]
32 r a . p i T H C MJk.pra.piTHC- 1HOK
2tD N e T M e e y e n e x e oyptD[M e Fi]
34 *|*n oA ic eTM M A.y n e* n e ^ j i l
n Aq xe n ico N Aycu nA qjB H p
If]
[ A q o y a > q j B ] na.T 2 q j [ o > q e q x c u m m oc]
2 [xe ka.a]cd c a . k x o [ o c xe n A .coN ]
[A.yco n ] a . q ) B H f o y neT[K q^m e]
4 [epoq fi]T O O t- ne[x]A T NAq xe ['J'^ i]
[N e FicA o ] y M A F i c e o e p o K i [ n]o k
6 [m R n] k 6 c n h y c b o a x e i [n o] n
[^ eN q ^ ]H m o R n r n v n e x A q [ n ]a T
8 [xe e]T B e nAf A e i p qjoprF F l x o [ o ] c
[ i n o ] k < d ttacon iy a j nAU?BH[p]
10 c b o a x e i N O K o y a j B H p fJa^Fi
mo a> F i n e K p H T e - n a T A e
12 F i T A q x o o y A.qcuqj c b o a x e
M A p r A p IT H C M A . p r a . p i T H C
14 a y c c d t R eTeqcM H F161 n p R
MAO Fl't'nOAIC 6T M MA.y
16 Ayei 6BOA 2N N6YTA.MION
eeH it12 N K 0 0 ye A e N ey
18 6 a)O jf eBO A2N FiTiM IO N R
T e n oyH ei* z e N ic o o y e a y
20 6cDO)t c b o a N eyq jo y
q) - ? e f x o c e - A . y a > R n o y N A y
22 e A A A y FiTOOTq c b o a x e F?
2,28 "staff of styrax wood : Probably a travelers staff; cf. Mk 6:8.

29-32 Cf. Pr 8:1-4; Mt 13:45-46.
ACTS O F P E T E R AN D T H E T W E L V E 2 ,25- 3,22 209
These things I was able to see.

26 A book cover like (those of) my
books was in his left hand.
28 A staff of styrax (crropai;) wood was in
his right hand. His
30 voice was resounding as he slowly spoke,
crying out in the city (tzoKiq) :
32 Pearls ((juxpyapCnqs)! Pearls ((xapyapiT/)?)! I,
indeed, thought he was a man [of]
34 that city (tcoXk;). I said
to him: "M y brother and my friend!
[ 3]
[He answered] me, [then, saying :1

2 ["Rightly (xaXox;)] did you say: [My brother]
[and] my friend. What is it you [seek]
4 from me? I said to him: "[I]
[ask] you [about] lodging for me
6 [and the] brothers also, because we
are strangers here. He said [to] me:
8 For this reason have I myself just said:
My brother and m y friend,
10 because I also am a fellow stranger
like you. And (8s)
12 having said these things, he cried out:
"Pearls ([xapyaptTi]?)! Pearls ((iapyapiTi]?)!
14 The rich men of that
city (7roXt<;) heard his voice.
16 They came out of their hidden store rooms (toc^ isiov).
And (8e) some were
18 looking out from the store rooms (Tajiieiov)
of their houses. Others
22 looked out from their
upper windows. And they did not see (that they could
gain)
22 anything from him, because
3.14-27 Cf. M t 7 :1 9 -2 1 ; M k 10 :17 -2 5 , parr.
14
210 NAG H A M M A D I C O D E X V I , J
MR tthpa. ft TeqNA^B- oYê

24 MR M O Y P 2 M n e q A N T I O N
MR n i C O Y A . J k . p i O N - T B T O Y
26 M Ni*upAcpa>Me A e R n o y
q j R T q pc u e ^ p A q - R T O q 2 ^
28 cuq R n q o Y O N ^ q n a y gboa*
aykotoy eôYN cncyta
30 MI ON CY^XtU M M O C X 6 p
XieTptuMe c c u s e R m on *
32 A-YU) A Y C C D T M R61 R^HKe
[a ]
[ R - f n o A i c c t J m m a y [eTeqcMH ]
2 [ a y ^ i c b o a e ] n p a ) M e n[A'f rji
[ n eT ma ] p r[ a p 1t ] h c c b o a * n [ e x A Y ]
4 [ N A q x e ] f 2 o e ! P m o k R i * t [ * m o n ]
[em ]M A p rA p iT H C * k a n [*]tRn a y 2 n
6 e [p ]p q R n c n b a a * x e a n o n [RH ice]
M[R]TAN A R M A Y R T e 'f [T I M A ]
8 MH 6 T A A C ^ A p o q - A A A A M [ A T A M O N ]
Rt R x o o c R N eN cpseep x[e an n a y ]
10 eYM A prA piTH C RN6NBAA- A qO Y
cdoib eqxcu R m oc nay eo jx e
12 oyR o} 6 o m am h eiTR e T A n o A ic *
oy m onon Rtatamcutn epoq
14 R N6TFI BAA- A A A A R T A T A A q NH
t R Rx in x h * ayccdtm A e cdoy
16 r 6 i R^HKe R + n o A ic c t R may
eYJecu R m oc x e en iA H anon
18 êN OJAtfM RTN Ae- vyCD t R co
oyn x e mApepcume *|* MAprApiTHC

20 RqÂfMRTNAe- aaaa OYoeiK
MR oycATeepe eq)AY^ciT5 - Te
3,23-24 Cf. Mt 10:9-10.

27 acknowledge him :Lit."seek him in his face.
28 Cf. Mt 1 1 :27, par.
4,2 "and they came to :Following Schenke. Krause (1) has Ayfl)
A Y NAY e_>" and they saw."
ACTS OF P E T E R A N D T H E T W E L V E 3 , 2 3 -4 , 2 1 211
there was no pouch (7djpa) on his back nor (ou8)

24 bundle inside his cloth (X evtiov)
and napkin (couSapiov). And (8e) because of their
26 disdain they did not
even acknowledge him.
28 He, for his part, did not reveal himself to them.
They returned to their
30 store rooms (Tafiieiov) saying:
"This man is mocking us.
32 And the poor [of that city (tcoXk;)] heard
[4 ]
[his voice],
2 [and they came to] the man [who sells]
[this pearl (âpyapiTT^)]. [They said:]
4 Please take the trouble to [show us]
[the] pearl ((lapyap/)<;) [so that we may], then (xav), [see]
6 it with our (own) eyes. For we are [poor.]
And (86) we do not have this price (Tipâ)
8 to pay for it. But (aXXdc) [show us]
that we might say to our friends that [we saw]
10 a pearl ((xapyapiTT^) with our (own) eyes. He
answered, saying to them: "If
12 it is possible, come to my city (m'Kic),
so that I may not only (ou [jlo v o v ) show it
14 before your (very) eyes but (aXXa) give it to
you for nothing. And indeed they,
16 the poor of that city (tcoXk;), heard
and said: "Since (stoiSy)) we
18 are beggars, we surely
know that a man does not give a pearl (jAapyapm^)
20 to a beggar, but (it is) bread
and money that is usually received.
4>I5'34 This is a somewhat expanded repetition of 3,32-4,15.

212 N AG H AM M A D I C O D E X V I , J
22 N o y 6 e n N i e eT R o y eu j xiT q
RTOOTE X 6 K U C eK.eTCA.BON
24 eniMAprApiTHC R n g n b a a *
^ y c u R t R x o o c f l N e N o p B e e p ^R
26 o y q j o y q j o y x e a n n a .y e y M A p
TXpiTHC H N 6 NB 1 A' 6 B O A JC6
28 MAYCe e p o q R t R 2HK.6 MAAICT[A.]
NipeqTCUBj R n ip H T e- A q o y c u
30 ojb n e x A . q n a y x e e c y x e oyW
oj 6 o m - a m h c i t R ^cutf t h y t R
32 eTATTOAl C* OY HON ON RTA
TCABCDTR e p o q - AAAA RTATA.A.q
34 n h t TJ n x i n x h - A y p A o j e n 6 i
Ni^Hice mR N i p e q T t u B ^ e T B e
[e]
n i p t e q ' t Fi x] 1n x h * A t y c p i N e R61 ni]
2 pcu[Me R c f e N i f t ? ? e [ n e T p o c ]
n 6 [ i] n[eT]poc [Ay cu Aq ]
4 x o [ o y ] naT e T A q c a > T H < F J H 0 0 y > e y [ i f l c e ]
R T [ e ] 0 H- c b o a x e e N p [ e q B ] q j * . [ r n i ]
6 ic[e p]q> N e j N t yaia k o n ia -
ne[xA]q RnpcuM e ef't* Rneej
8 H [ A p r ] A p i T H C - 6 B O A X 'f-OyCUOJ
e[R]M e eneKpAN MR R^Tce R
10 T eflH eT eK n o A ic- x e anon
N UJR MO h r êNBATAIK R T C
12 n N o y i e - a n a i'ich epoN ecp tti
upA xe R T e n N o y T e c b o a R
14 n o A ic n i m {FI o y l * M e T e - A q
4,28 Krause (1) emends to < N > H K.G, but this seems unnecessary in
the light of Till, Koptische Grammatik, sec. 107.
5. 1-6 A careful study of the text, including the use of ultra-violet light,
has revealed more details than observed by either Krause or
Schenke, both of whose reconstructions differ considerably from
each other, and from ours. More space exists between the fragment
at the left and the rest of the text than is shown in Robinson et al.,
ACTS O F P E T E R A N D T H E T W E L V E 4 , 2 2 - 5 , 1 4 213
22 Now then, the kindness which we want to receive

from you (is) that you show us
24 the pearl ((iapYapm)<;) before our eyes.
And we will say to our friends
26 proudly that we saw a
pearl ([iapyapiTijq) with our (own) eyes because
28 it is not found among the poor, especially ([xaXicrra)
such beggars (as these). He answered
30 (and) said to them: If it is
possible, you yourselves come
32 to my city (710X11;), so that I may not only (ou (xovov)
show you it but (aXXa) give it
34 to you for nothing.
The poor and the beggars rejoiced because of
[5 ]
the man [who gives for] nothing. [The men]

2 [asked Peter] about the hardships.
Peter answered [and]
4 [told] those things that he had heard about the [hardships]
of [the] way. Because they are [interpreters of the]
6 hardships in their ministry (Siootovia),
he said to the man who sells this
8 pearl ((xapyaptTTj;): I want
to know your name and the hardships of
10 the way to your city (tcoXi;) because we
are strangers and servants of
12 God. It is necessary (avayxY)) for us to spread
the word of God in
14 every city (716X1;) harmoniously. He
Facsimile Edition: Codex VI, plate 9 (0.2 cm. at the top and
0.1 cm. at the bottom). See Addenda et Corrigenda, Facsimile
Edition: Introduction.
The reconstruction extends two letters to the right further than
one might expect. But the scribe exhibits considerable freedom
regarding the right margin throughout the codex.
214 N AG H A M M A D I CO D E X V I , J
oyujojb ne,XAq x e e a jx e Kcyi

16 N e R c i nApAN AieAproHA
n e nApAN eTe neqoyco^R n e
18 x e n o ) N e fid A ^ c e c t a c i c d o y
ay<u niceMoen* eTAKojfii*
20 epoq f i T e - j-n o A ic e e i e T A M O K
epoq- M A p e p c u M e nim e q j i
22 f i e iH e T R M iY ' c b o a e o y A
F iq p A .n o T A .c c e R R k a nim e
24 T fiTAq- a y u ) R q p N H C T e Y e
M M H N e JCIN M O N H U )A MONH*
26 cboa xe N A u ? e H a h c t h c Mfi
R h pi o n e - f f i T e f i H eTM
28 may* n e T N A q i o e iK nmmAq
e n i M o e i i * q j A p e N i o Y ^ o o p fi
30 KAMe O TBeq R T A o ei6 e R
N ioeiK - n e T N A q i royzbccd
32 N A q e c T A e i h o y *: , T e t t i k o
CMOC U JApeRAH CTH C O TBq
[s]
[ F l T A o e i 6 e n'J'2 ] ? c c d * n [ e T N 2 i q i ] M o [ o ] y
2 [ u x q G ) x p e H o y ] a > u U ) f e o T B e q F I]ta o
[ e i 6 e m t t m o o ] y [ e ] N e y o B e [m m o](|*
4 [ n e T N ] a i q i [ n ] p o o y c y Fl êNtaiq] m n
[2 N o y ] o o T e * c y a . p e m M o [ y e i o ] y o
6 [M]cf [ F l T ] A o e i 6 e N N i ^ q * e q u j [ a i N ] p b o a
5,i 6 Lithargoel : N ot the name of a Jewish angel (as Schenke, col.

1 4 ) , but a neologism (there is no evidence of its use in other liter
ature of this or earlier periods) meaning divine being who is a

glistening stone": X0o<;, stone; dcpyta glistening ; ^
divine being (similarly, Krause [2], p. 51). Krause takes Lithar
goel to be a god's name. However names constructed in a similar
fashion tend to be those of angels (e.g., Michael and Gabriel), and
in later usage Lithargoel was an angel (cf. C. D. G. Muller, ed.,
Die Bucher der Einsetzung der Erzengel Michael und Gabriel, CSCO
225 [Louvain, 1962], V , 7 1 , 3-5; V I, 5 , 16; 8 , 1 4 ) . If one a s s u m e s that
the name originated with this story, it is noteworthy that el is
ACTS O F P E T E R A N D T H E T W E L V E 5,15-6,6 215
answered and said: " I f you

16 seek my name, Lithargoel
is my name, the interpretation of which is,
18 the light, gazelle-like stone.
And also (concerning) the road to the city (toSAk;),
20 which you asked me about, I will tell you
about it. No man is able to go
22 on that road, except one
who has forsaken (a7coTac?c?ec?9ai) everything that
24 he has and has fasted (vvjcrcsiSeiv)
daily from stage ((jlov ?)) to stage ((xovr)).
26 For many are the robbers (Aflcmfc) and
wild beasts (Qvjpiov) on that road.
28 The one who carries bread with him
on the road, the black dogs
30 kill because of
the bread. The one who carries a costly garment
32 of the world ( x o g (j .oi; ) with him,
the robbers (A7]<tty)<;) kill
[6]
[because of the] garment. [The one who carries] water
2 [with him, the wolves kill because]
[of the water,] since they were thirsty [for] it.
4 [The one who] is anxious about [meat] and
green vegetables, the lions eat
6 because of the meat. [If] he evades
ignored in 5,18. It may be that the writer wished only to hint at

the divine character of the pearl merchant, saving a fuller dis
closure until later (cf. 9,11-15). Here the name suggests that the
pearl merchant is being identified with the pearl (cf. 10,25-30).
For possible source, cf. Rev 2:17. The identification of Jesus with
a pearl is found also in Act. P t. 20, and suggested in Just. Dial. 34.
"light, gazelle-like : "light" refers to weight, "gazelle-like refers
here to the flashing, gleaming character of the gazelle's eyes (cf.
86pxocs Liddell, Scott, s.v. [(yxQCG is the Coptic translation of
86pxoc<;]).
23 Cf. Mk 8: 34, parr.
2 l6 N AG H AM M A D I CO D E X V I , J
ntoot < o y > R n iM o y e i* u7Ape[N i]M Ace

8 OMKCj R T A o e i 6 e R n i o y o t [ - n]aT R
T A p e q x o o Y naT A e i q i a ^ o m [R^Jht*
io m j l y ^ e e u c u r m o c jce n n o 6
R ^ t c e f i n M o e n * - 2A.MA.ei po> fj
12 TeTc t 6 o m n a n R t R b c u k i c u o > c -
Aq n a y e p o T e p e n A o o i c R e e i
14 q i A.20M- n e x A q n a .T x e e T B e o y
icqi aj >o m * e a j x e i c c o o y N pa> Fi
16 ne' fp AN x e To a y <u k n a . T e p o q -
oyno 6 n 6 o m n e e-J* 6 o m - c b o a
18 x e anok 1*n a 2 T e n i c p f
n n eT Aq -T AO Yoq - A e i o Y A ^ M e t
20 e p o q e'fqpiNe R Moq x e nim e p R
{ n p A N R } ttma t k n a e p o q
22 eT eK n oA ic- n e x A q naT x e
nA.T n e n p A N R T A n o A i c x e ^ e N
24 R p o MApR'J' e o o y R n N o y
T e - e N p M 6 A 6 T A . X niMA^MHT*
26 n e 'I A n e - m R R c a n a T a T 1 c b o a
^ i T O O T q R o y e r pH n h - e T R n h
28 o y e H o y T e e N A U ^ B e e p - A.ei
n a y e^ eN ^ oeiM mr 2 n n o6
30 R x o a x X eY ^ x o ce eyiccuTe
e m ic p o R t b fnoA ic- A eip
32 qjnH pe R n i6 om e+NAY e p o o y
A eiN A Y Y 2 a a o Rpa>Me e q
34 2m o o c A e i q j R T q enpA.N R f n o
a ic x e Ne o n tc u c necpA N
6,7 MS has R T O O T q .
17e f 6 0 M, "for giving strength : Krause (1) suggests emending to
T 'j' 6 0 M, "who gives power.
20-21 NIM . . . e p o q : The scribe shows signs of confusion here. 6 TK is
deleted in MS b y diagonal lines, between n p A N and RTTMA- On
line 20, Krause (1) incorrectly identifies a blot from the opposite
page as a n written above the line b y the scribe. Also, incorrectly,
he considers that the two letters at the end of the line (pR) are
crossed out. In fact they are badly blotted by ink from the op
posite page.
ACTS OF P E T E R AND T H E T W E L V E 6 ,7 - 3 5 217
the lions, the bulls

8 devour him because of the green vegetables.
When he had said [these] things to me, I sighed
10 within myself saying: "[Great]
hardships are on the road! If only
12 Jesus would give us power to walk i t !
He looked at me since my face was sad, and I
14 sighed. He said to m e: Why
do you sigh, if you, indeed, know
16 this name Jesus and believe him?
He is a great power for giving strength.
18 For I too believe in the Father
who sent him. I replied,
20 asking him: "What is the name
of the place to which you go,
22 your city (noXiq) ? He said to me:
This is the name of my city (toXu;),
24 Nine Gates. Let us praise God
as we are mindful (neXexav) that the tenth
26 is the head. After this I went away
from him in peace (eipyjvYj). As I was
28 about to go and call my friends, I
saw waves and large
30 high walls surrounding
the bounds of the city (tcoXk;). I
32 marveled at the great things I saw.
I saw an old man
34 sitting and I asked him if the name of the
city (7*6X11;) was really ( ovtg><;)
26 Krause suggests a connection between "Nine Gates and V I,6

(Disc. 8-9) ([2], p. 54, note 4). The tenth is not referred to by
name in VI, 6, but may be the sphere of the highest level of deity
(cf. introduction to VI, 6). Schenke sees behind this the 9 gates
decorated with gold and silver, plus the still more elegant Nicanor
gate, of the Herodian Temple (Jos. Bell. V.5.2-3), all of which,
Schenke believes, the text intends to identify with the ten heavens
(col. 13).
2 l8 NAG H A M M A D I C O D E X V I, J
[II
[ 6 t u p 5 TTe-] AqT[
2 [ . . . ] . [ . ] x e 6 c p[ p 5
[ . . . ] n .- n e x [ A ] q na T x[e koja ]
4 [ x e ]fi o y M N T M e - e N 6 [a > p 5 e b o a ]
x e [eN ]p2Y noM iN e rnim a Ae[i]
6 9 [ Y t u ] q ? B n e x A ' f z<*> x e a i k a i w [ c ]
[. . . ] n RpcuMe a.y't* pntc x e
8 [. . . ]pTt- cboa x e oyoN nim
[eTjAp^ynoMiNe 2^. NeqnipA
10 c[m]oc q)Ay6 a>p5 R61 êNnoAic
Aytu ujApeoyMRTppo ecTa.
12 e i H o y f 1 c b o a F i 2 H T o y x e
c e p ^ y n o M iN e R t m h t b Uni
14 6 0 A MR N 6 M K J .2 R R T H O y
x c k a a c RTeTê o y o N nim
16 e T q i A n f i c e R tc neqNA2B
R T e T T I N A 2 T 6 C N A 6o > p 5 r 6 i
18 T e q n o A i c - A y a ? qNAOJrt a
TM fiTppo R R n H ye* A e i6 e n H
20 AeiB tuK A e iM o y T e eN A qjB e
ep x c k a a c cnabcdk g tito
22 a i c eTa.q't' N H e i e n a n epoc
x e ai A p roh a* 2^ oyM oyp
24 R t B ITN A 2 Te ANpATTOTAC
c e R f i K A NIM K A T A T T p H T e
26 e T A q X O O C A N p BOA 6 T O O
Toy R n iah cth c x e Rnoy
28 61 N e R t Y 2 b c c u R t o o t R -
A N p B O A R T O O T O Y R N IO y
30 c u n <5 x e Rnoy6M nM ooy
R tootR eT oyose R Moq-
32 ANp BOA R T O O T O y R N IM O y
7,1-2 For reconstruction of name, cf. 10,3. 6 cu p 5 could also mean

"Preparation, but the remainder of the discussion here (7,3I9)
makes this less likely. Probably the original was olxoujjiiv*),
habited world.
ACTS OF P E T E R AND T H E T W E L V E 7 , 1-32 219
[7 ]
[Habitation.] He [
2 [ ] [Habitation
[ ] He said to me: [You]
4 [speak] truly, for we [inhabit] here
because [we] endure (uTCOjiivetv). [I]
6 [responded] saying: Justly (8ixaUo<;)
[ ] have men named it
8 [ ], because (by) everyone
[who] endures (o7to[xivetv) his trials (7rsipa<7(i6 <;),
10 cities (nohc,) are inhabited,
and a precious kingdom
12 comes from them, because
they endure (uuo(ievei.v) in the midst of the
14 apostasies and the difficulties of the storms.
So that in this way, the city (noXic,) of everyone
16 who endures the burden of his yoke
of faith will be inhabited
18 and he will be included in
the kingdom of heaven. I hurried
20 and went and called my
friends so that we might go to the city (nolic,)
22 that he, Lithargoel, appointed for us.
In a bond
24 of faith we forsook ( a 7roTa<jcrscr0 a i )
everything as ( x a r a )
26 he had said (to do). We evaded
the robbers (Xy]ctty)<;), because they did not
28 find their garments with us.
We evaded the
30 wolves, because they did not find the water
with us for which they thirsted.
32 We evaded the lions,
7,10 axe inhabited : Following Schenke; Krause (i) translates, are

prepared."
J7 be inhabited": Following Schenke; Krause (i) translates, be
prepared."
220 N AG H A M M A D I CO D E X V I , I
ei x e MTToydiNe F iT e m e y
34 mia. FiTe NiAq FItootFI-
[H]
[AN p BOA NTOOTO]y n [ n IMAC
2 [ IO ]ANK.[
[. .M T T o y d iN e N ] N o y o T e [ - A q o ptu]
4 [n e na]n n6| o y N o b FipAa>[e MFI oy]
[MNi*]aLTpooyqj 2 R o y eip [H n h F lee m]
6 [TT]e[T]HneNjcoeic- in [ h t o m m]
MON 0 pcuc Fl't nyAH- A[yco]
8 [a.]n :xi F12Pa n m FI N e N e p H o y [en e]
Te Fioyxi 2Pa<1 an RTe niKO[CMOc]
io ttaT- a a a a nnmhn n e ey[M e]A e
t h FiTe nNA^Te- e N T A y o FIni
12 AHCTHC t I n M Oe r f TANp
b o a e p o o y e ic 2HHTe Aql g b o a
14 FI61 A i e A p r o H A e q q p B B i o e i f f i t o o
t FI- e q o R n e c M o f F ioycA eiN
16 eoyFl o y n a p t o c R n A 2 p e 2^
n eqjco- eyN o y A A o y FlC B oyei
18 M o o q p e Flccuq e q q i fioyrA O C
co k cu m o n eqM 2 S in o p e
20 a n o n M nF lcoycuN q A q o y c o
ojb Fldi n e T p o c ne-XAq n Aq x e
22 TFloycuqje eTpeKp oyMFlf
Mi6l ptDMe N MMAN Xe ANON
24 2 N<9mmo n^îtFI e n H e i fiai
eAproHA M n A T e p o y 2 e qjtD
26 ne- nejcAq x e 2N o y c o o y T f i
F12HT* "fNATAMtDTFi e p oq -
28 a a a a 'f p q^nHpe x e ntDC a t g
TFlcoycDN n i A r A e o c FlpcuMe
8,1-3 Schenke translates: [We escaped] the [bulls, for when they sur
rounded us they found no] vegetables [with us].
1-6 Krause (1) reconstructs: [AN p BOA FlTOOTO]y H[NI0Y*
2 0 0 p]/ [mn NiMAce x e mRt] an K [ p e A C Aya>]/[Mfl*
ta n AAAy] FI o y o T e [Acopcu] I [ne na]isi Fi6| oY(<0^
FlpA<p[e 6 n] / [o N]^.Tpooyq^ 2^ oyejp[Hnh] /e[.]-
ACTS OF P E T E R AN D T H E T W E L V E 7 ,33 - 8,29 221
because they did not find the desire (emGofiia)

34 for meat with us.
[8]
[We evaded the bulls
^ [
[they did not find] green vegetables.
4 A great joy [came upon] us [and a]
peaceful (elp^vif)) carefreeness [like]
6 [that of] our Lord. We [rested]
[ourselves] in front of the gate (toSXyj) [and]
8 we talked with each other [about that]
which is not a distraction of this [world (xo<y(jt.o<;)].
io Rather (aXXa) we continued in contemplation (êXenf))
of the faith. As we discussed the
12 robbers (Xir)<ro)<;) on the road, whom we
evaded, behold
14 Lithargoel, having changed, came out to
us. He had the appearance of a physician,
16 since an unguent box (vap07)) was under
his arm, and a young disciple was
18 following him carrying a pouch (YXcocrffoxofiov)
full of medicine.
20 We did not recognize him.
Peter responded and said to him:
22 "We want you to do
us a favor, because we are
24 strangers, and take us to the house of
Lithargoel before evening comes.
26 He said: In uprightness
of heart I will show it to you.
28 But (aXXa) I am amazed at how (n&c,)
you know this good (ayaQoi;) man.
TTeN JXOei C" [We escaped the dogs] / [and the bulls, because we
had no meat] / [nor] herbs. A great joy [came upon us, since we] /
were carefree in a [peace] / of our Lord . . . .
unguent box : Taking N i p T O C for v d c p c f . Krause[2], p. 58,
note 4.
222 NAG H AM M A D I C O D E X V I , J
30 eM AqoyoN^q rAp FiToq ep tD

M e n i m - g b o a j c e F iT o q a>u>q
32 n q j H pe n o y n o 6 F ip p o n e -
m ton H m ojtH N oyK oyei Fi
34 t a b c d k FlTAp n a ^ p e e n e T p c u
Me F Jta t A q eA tU A MMoq Aqi
[t ] a x y n e x A q M êTpoc- x e
2 [ n ] ? T p o c - A q n o y t p f f A e Fi di
neTpoc x e n tu c AqcoycuN
4 neqpAN x e neTpoc- A qoy
c u o j b Fi 6i n e T p o c M n c c u T H p
6 x eeK CO oyN m m o g i tcd n
x eAKM oyTe m it a p a n ' Aq
8 o y to ty B n6 i A ie A p ro H A x e -f*
oycuqj o jR tk x e n im Aq*f* ni
10 pan epoic x e neTpoc- n e
JCAq N A q x e T c n e x c n e n q j H
12 pe R n N o yT e to n RToq
Aq-f* n i p A N e p o e r Aqoyw cpB
14 nexAq x e a n o k n e c o y c u N F
n e T p e - A q B o q ^ q fJ't ^ B C t u
16 eTCTOe fitD tuq t a T e T A q upb
Tq n t o o t H F I ^ h t c e { T A } q o y
18 cuNg e p o N oyM FiTM e x e
F iT o q n e - ANnA^TFi e ^ R
20 nK A ^ A N o y c u q ^ t M M oq ANON
N 6N M A2 M F i Y o y e MM A G H
22 th c- A qcoyT fl T eq6iJC b b o a
A q T A ^ O N e p A T N AN U>AJCe NM
24 MAq 2 ^ o y B b i O ' N e p e x t D N
6oaX e n i T N Fl o y M f l T : x n i
26 h i 4 eNxa> m m o c x e n e T e i c
9.11 An inexplicable horizontal mark is over the third n .

n-13 Cf. Mt 16:16-18.
20-21 "W e . . . disciples : Word division and translation is that of
Gerald M. Browne in "Textual Notes on Nag Hammadi VI, ZPE
ACTS O F P E T E R AND T H E T W E L V E 8,30-9,26 223
30 For (yap) he does not reveal himself to

every man, because he himself
32 is the son of a great king.
Rest yourselves a little so
34 that I may go and heal this man
and come (back). He hurried and came (back)
L9J
quickly (xa/u). He said to Peter:
2 Peter! And (8s) Peter was frightened,
for how (*:&<;) did he know
4 that his name was Peter?
Peter responded to the Savior (ctoxTjp):
6 How do you know me,
for you called my name?
8 Lithargoel answered: I
want to ask you who gave the
io name Peter to you? He
said to him: "It was Jesus Christ, the
12 son of the living God. He
gave this name to me. He answered
14 and said: It is I! Recognize me,
Peter. He loosened the garment,
16 which clothed him, the one into which
he had changed himself because of us
18 revealing to us in truth that
it was he. We prostrated ourselves
20 on the ground and worshipped him. We
comprised eleven disciples ((xaOrjnf)*;).
22 He stretched forth his hand
and caused us to stand. We spoke with
24 him humbly. Our heads were
bowed down in unworthiness
26 as we said: "What you
13 (1974), 305. Krause (1) considers M a scribal error and trans

lates, "W e were the eleven disciples." Schenke takes N as a
sentence pronoun and translates in the present; but the N follow
ing N has no superlinear stroke. Cf. Ac 1:26.
o y o o i c j Tf J Na . a . a . q - a . A A a . Ma.
28 -j- NA.N f l o y t f o M eT p eN eip e
M neTe^Na-K rJcH o y n im -
30 a.q*t* N a . y R n m a p A O c R T e
't M W f c a . e i < N > Mf) n i r A O c c o
32 k.c u m o n eTW TOOTq R m a.A o y
a.q n a . p a . f r i A e n a y m t t i p H T e
Q]
eqoccD m m o [ c ] o ce b c d k e ^ o y N [e*t*]
2 n O A I C e T a . T T N l 6 B O A F12[ h ] t C -
t a T e T o y M o y T e e p o c oce 6 a>p3
4 MoyN ey^ynoMONH eTeTrJ'f-
cbcd R n aT t h p o y eT a.yN a.2 T e
6 ena.pa.N-oce a.eip2YnoM,Ne
2 fl 2 eN 0 c e Wtg niNa.2 Te- a.Nok
8 j*Na.*(* nhtn RneTRBeKe- ni
2 HKe N-j-noAic eTMMa.y j Na.y
io WToyxpia. lNa. eyNa.<DN^ epoc-
tpa.N't) Na.y mtih efcoTTt-
12 nH eTa.eiocooq nhtn oce j-Na.Ta.
a.q n h t R Hoci noch-a.qoycDU?B
14 R 6 1 n eT p o c neoca.q N a . q oce noco
e ic A t o k a.K'f c b c u Na.N epa.
16 n o T ic c e R n iK O C M O c m H R
Ka. n i m e T ? J T a . q a . N K a . a . y R c c d n
18 eTBHHTK- pe fJ o Y 2 0 o y o y
cut* n e T f l q i R n e c p o o y o r
20 e N a u p 6rJ f x p i a . T C D N eT lcqjiN e
R m o n e p o c eTa.a.c RFI2HKe-
22 a .q o y c D q jB fl6 i n o c o e i c neoca.q
o c e cu n e T p e N ecRncpa. n e
9,30 unguent box : Cf. note to 8,16.

31 MS has J M r J T c a . e i T .
10,1-3 Cf. Epiph. Pan. 31.4.1; 34.20.11.
3-4 Schenke takes the name to be 6 cup5 MoyN ey2ynoM0NH
and translates, Dwell and Remain inEndurance.
ACTS O F P E T E R AND T H E T W E L V E 9 ,27- 10,23 225
wish we will do. But (aXXa)

28 give us power to do
what you wish at all times.
30 He gave them the unguent box (v<xpOn))
and the pouch (y Xw <tct6 x o (xov)
32 that was in the hand of the young disciple.
He commanded (mxpxYfiXkti^) them like this,
[10]
saying: "Go into [the]

2 city ( tzoX ic,) from which you came,
which is called Habitation.
4 Continue in endurance (u7io[jicw)) as you
teach all those who have believed
6 in my name, because I have endured (u7to(xeveiv)
in hardships of the faith. I
8 will give you your reward. To the
poor of that city (toSAk;) give
10 what they need (xpeia) in order to (iva) live
until I give them what is better,
12 which I told you that I will give
you for nothing. Peter answered
14 and said to him:
"Lord, you have taught us to
16 forsake (a7toT<x<ycrs<y0ai) the world (x6<tjio<;) and
everything in it. We have renounced them
18 for your sake. What we are concerned about (now)
is the food for a single day.
20 Where will we be able to find the needs (xpeia) that you
ask
us to provide for the poor?
22 The Lord answered and said:
"0 (&) Peter, it was necessary
10,7-8 Cf. Jn 14:1-3.

9 "J* NAy. "give them ": Schenke translates, " I will give them,
assuming, apparently, that haplography has occurred. But cf.
lines 20-21.
18 Cf. Mt 6:11,34.
15
24 e T p e i c c o Y a > N J t t a p a b o a h
eTA.ei.xooc nak- kcooyn an
26 X & TTApAN eTK"j* CBCU RMOC|

qOYOTB eM tlTpM HIO NIM-
28 AYUJ TCO(|> IA F T TTNOYTe
coyotb enNOYB mn <|>at*
30 mFI ncuN e e T e nAcpe co YfiTq*
A q t NAY MTTITAOCCOKCDMON
32 WTe N inA ^pe e q xcu mmoc x e
Api nA^pe em peqcpcDN e t h
34 p o y R T e t n o A i c nh e t N A ^ T e
[e]îA.pAN' A q p ^ O T e n 6 i n e T p o c
2 [e]oYa.Metl e p o q R n M e g c e n
[ c ] n a y * a.qiciM e n H e i * t T O Y
4 cuq e T e T c d ^ a n n h c n e
x e 2 C0 C0 K. finicoTt- AqoYtu
6 o)b n 6 i T c d ^ a n n h c n e x ^ q
x e TTJtoeic Trip OTe A t b k
8 e^H e x e o y M H h e y e f lqjAJte-
AAAA NTOK e i * q j l N e MMON
10 eTe'fTexNH c a a c R n o y T c e
bon e p o c ep cAeiN* n cu c 6 e
12 TfJNAMMe ep nA gpe eêNCCD
MA KATA npHTe 6 TAKOCOOC NAN-
14 AqoycuqpB NAq x e k a a cu c a k
XOOC TCDAN N HC x e "t-COOYN
16 x e R c a in f i i e t tik o c m o c
ecpAYP nA^pe c n a ttk o cm o c-
18 n ic a in W to o y R T e n i'I'y **1
e q jA Y P nA ^ pe eni^HT*- Api nA
20 2 Pe Y N eNiccuMA Nqjoprt xe
KAAC eBOA îTOOTOY nni
22 6 0 M ei*CpOOTt NTS niTAA 6 o
10,24 "the parable : Probably refers to 2,10-5,1, the understanding

which is given in 5,16-18.
25-30 Cf. A c 3:6.
33 Cf. Mt 10:8, par.
ACTS OF P E T E R AN D T H E T W E L V E 10,24- 11,22 227
24 that you understand the parable (7tapa(5oXY))

that I told yo u ! Do you not understand
26 that my name, which you teach,
surpasses all riches,
28 and the wisdom (0091a) of God
surpasses gold and silver
30 and precious stone (s) ?
He gave them the pouch (yXtoCTCToxojxov)
32 of medicine and said:
Heal all the sick
34 of the city (toXi^) who believe
11
[in] my name. Peter was afraid
2 [to] reply to him for the second time.
He signaled to the one who was beside
4 him, who was John: You
talk this time.
6 John answered and said:
Lord, before you we are afraid
8 to say many words.
But (aXXa) it is you who asks us
10 to practice this skill (xexvr)). We have not been
taught to be physicians. How (tc&<;) then
12 will we know how to heal bodies (<jco[xa)
as ( x a r a ) you have told us?
14 He answered him: Rightly (xaAto<;) have you
spoken, John, for I know
16 that the physicians of this world (xocixoi;)
heal what belongs to the world (xoqjux;).
18 The physicians of souls (4>ux^)> however,
heal the heart. Heal
20 the bodies first, therefore (o 5 v ), so
that through the
22 real powers of healing
n.3-4 "beside him": Lit. "a t his breast." The Coptic idiom does not
normally have its literal meaning (cf. Crum, 4446). But here it
may, in view of Jn 13:23.
228 NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI,X
MnOyCCDMA. A 3CR TlXZ?e R T e

24 n i A i c u N n A f n c e N A ^ T e ep tD TF I-
x e o y f t o j 6 o m m m c d tR e T A A 6 e
26 NIKeqjCDNe flT e NipM
MA.O F T O O y H T e 'fn O A IC NH
28 fJTO O Y 6 T 6 MTTOYMTTOJA.
po> e q jflt e2PAf- aaaa . e y
30 oyN oq mmooy TeyM N
TpMMiO MW TeyMFlfCAOJ
32 p cu M e- naT oyN m tt ip H T e
H
MTTpOYUJM N M M 1 Y 2 M !TO [y]H !
2 o y A e M ir p p up b h p e p o o y [Fi]
N e c u p c u n e n h t FI F i6 i T o y M f l
4 T p e q o u 20* * Y MHH<i J e r3tP
.xe i nÔ FlNipMMAO BO A x e
6 c e p N O B e ^ tD o y ^ fl n ic k k a h
cia* Aycd ce*f Moeii*
8 K o o y e e e i p e * a a a a J* 2 * r t
e p o o y 2W oycooyTFJ' x e
10 k a a c e c N A ^ i e o o y fl6 i T e
T FiA IA K O N IA Aycu ANOK gtU
12 nq^ci e o o y FI61 nApAN 2 ^ ni
e K K A H cia * A y o y cu q jB fl6 i
14 f t m a o h t h c n e JC A y x e e z e
2FJ oyM e- nAT n e T e y R n q jA .
16 FlAAq* A.yN o j c o y e;*M t t k a .2
A y o Y t u q j - P MMoq* A .q T A 2 0
18 o y e p A T o y A q B tD K b o a f t
t o o t o y 2 ^ o y e ip H N H ^ m h n
20 N in p A S ic ftT e n e
Tp O C Mft niM W fCN O
22 o y c FJA nocTQ A oc
12,3 "their partiality": This probably refers to their preference for their
riches rather than Christ. But in view of lines 4 - 5 , it could refer to
the special treatment accorded the rich in some churches (follow
ing Schenke).
ACTS OF PETER AND THE TWELVE 11, 23- 12,22 229
for their bodies, without medicine of

24 this world (ocuov), they may believe in you,
that you have power to heal
26 the illnesses of the heart also. The
rich men of the city (nokic,), however, those
28 who did not see fit
even to acknowledge me, but (aXXa) who
30 reveled in their
wealth and pride
32 with such as these, therefore (o5v),
12
do not dine in [their] houses
2 nor ( o u S e ) be friends with them,
lest their partiality
4 influence you. For (yap) many in the churches (ibocAr)<na)
have
shown partiality to the rich, because
6 they also are sinful,
and they give occasion for
8 others to do (likewise). But (aXXa) judge
them with uprightness, so
10 that your ministry (Siocxovia) may
be glorified, and that
12 my name also, may be glorified in the
churches (e x x X rja ta ). The disciples ([i.aOyj'CTjc;)
14 answered and said: "Yes,
truly this is what is fitting
16 to do. They prostrated themselves on the ground
and worshipped him. He caused them
18 to stand and departed from
them in peace (eiprjvr)). Amen.
20 The Acts (-rcpaû;) of Peter
and the Twelve
22 Apostles
6 in the churches : This could also be placed after they also are
sinful (so Krause [1], and similarly, Schenke).
11 Cf. Jas 2:1-9.
VI,2:13,1-21,32
G eo rge W. M acR ae

Bethge, H.-G. Nebront. Die zweite Schrift aus Nag-Hammadi-
Codex V I. ThLZ 98 (1973), cols. 97-104.
Krause, M. Der Stand der Veroffentlichung der Nag Hammadi-
Texte. Le origini dello gnosticismo. Edited by Bianchi. Pp. 82-
MacRae, G. W. The Ego-Proclamation in Gnostic Sources. The
Trial of Jesus. Edited by E. Bammel. SBTh Second Series 13.
London: SCM Press. Pp. 129-34.
This short tractate is nearly intact, having very minor lacunae

at the top of the first four pages and more substantial damage to
the top ten lines of the remaining pages. It is set off in the codex by
a title at the beginning, with over- and underlining, and by several
decorative lines at the end filling out the page. The title appears to
be double: The Thunder is not syntactically related to Perfect
Mind but is separated by a mark of punctuation (:). It is nowhere
referred to in the body of the work (unless one should reconstruct
[perfect] mind at 18,9).
In content Thund. is virtually unique in the Nag Hammadi library
and very unusual. It is a revelation discourse by a female figure
who is, except possibly for the title, otherwise not specifically
identified. The work has no apparent structural divisions but is
written throughout in the first person, interweaving and combining
three types of statement: self-proclamation in the I am style,
exhortations to heed the speaker, and reproaches for failures to
heed or love, etc. The most distinctive feature is that the self-
proclamations are most often antithetical or even paradoxical. The
parallelism of form suggests that originally these may have been
part of a hymnic structure.
232 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V I ,2
Parallels for this revelatory genre can be adduced from a variety

of sources. In Orig. World (11,5) I I 47-I 5the heavenly Eve utters a
hymnic self-proclamation that is very similar to Thund. 13,19-14,5
(pointed out by Krause [2], p. 82), and a trace of the same material,
though not in the form of self-proclamation, occurs in a similar
context in Hyp. Arch. (11,4) 89,14-17. It may be significant that
the Thund. passage thus paralleled is not repeated in the work,
whereas many of the other self-proclamations occur more than once
in Thund., sometimes in varying forms. In such other Nag Hammadi
works as Trim. Prot. (X III, 1) and the longer ending of Ap. John
(II,x: 30,11-31,25), there are examples of the " I style of proclama
tion by a revealer figure, but without the antithetical context. There
are three interesting parallels to Thund., in content or in style or in
both, outside the Nag Hammadi corpus. One is the well-known
"Hymn of Christ in Act. Jn . 94-96, in which Christ sings of himself
in a succession of antitheses and contrasts, without, however, the
use of " I am formulas. The second example is a passage in the
Mandaean Ginza R, Book VI (M. Lidzbarski, Ginza [Gottingen:
Vandenhoeck und Ruprecht, 1925], pp. 205-12), the so-called Book
of Dinanukht, which is generally thought to be one of the older
sections of the Ginza. There the spirit Ewath recites a formula which
contains antitheses similar to, but for the most part not identical
with, those in Thund.: " I am death, I am life. I am darkness, I am
light. I am error, I am truth, etc. The third example is a series of
passages in ancient Indian literature in which contrasting or contra
dictory assertions are made of the Deity either in the I am form
(Bhagavad-Gita IX , 16-19) or *n the second or third person (Atharva-
Veda X, viii,27-28; Svetaivatara Upanishad IV,3). These examples
include both personal categories ( Thou art woman, Thou art man)
and non-personal ones ( Death am I and deathlessness, What is not
and that which is. Cf. R. C. Zaehner, Hindu Scriptures [London:
J. M. Dent and Sons, 1966], pp. 25-26, 210, 287).
In terms of the religious traditions represented in the Nag Ham
madi collection, Thund. is difficult to classify. It contains no distinc
tively Christian, Jewish, or gnostic allusions and does not seem
clearly to presuppose any particular gnostic myth. There are resem
blances to the tone and style of the wisdom hymns in the Biblical
and intertestamental wisdom literature, and the self-proclamations
are similar to the Isis aretalogy inscriptions. But if the multiple
assertions in these works are intended to assert the universality of
TH U N D ER: PERFECT M IN D : INTRODUCTION 233
Isis or of Gods wisdom, perhaps the antithetical assertions of

Thund. are a way of asserting the totally otherworldly transcendence
of the revealer.
References to Biblical and gnostic passages in the notes are merely
a sampling of obvious parallels.
VI,2:13,1-21,32
Ir
T e e p o N T H : N o y c H T e A e io c
2 [ R ] T A y T A 0 y 0 e i A N O K 6 BOA F 1
[ t ] 6 om- A y c u NTA'fei o>a N e t
4 M e e y e ep oY - A y c u A y 6 m e R
moT 2 ^ N e t a j i N e R c c u e r e
6 [ n ] a y e p o e i N e t M e e y e epoT-
A y c u rJ p e c j c c u t R c c u t R e p o T -
8 N e t d o a j T * b o a ^ht* o j o t t t 5
e p c u T N - A y c u R n p n c u i * FiccuT
10 R n C M T O R N e T H BAA 6 B O A
Aycu R n p T p e n e T F j^ p o o y M e c
12 T c u e i- Aycu t t c t F Ic c u t R - R
TTpp AT*CAyNe M M O e i KATA
14 m a - fi k a t a F l K e o y A e i a j - A p e ^
Rrrpp AtcooyN RMoer a n o k
16 t a p T e tcpopit A y c u g a h - a n o k
T e T e < T > T A e iA e n * Aycu T e ta jH C -
18 ANOK T TTTOpNH AyCU TC eM fclH "
anok T e T e c ^ M e Aycu tttap
20 eeN O c* a n o k < t > e i* M < A A > y {e }
Aycu T q j e e p e - anok R mcaoc
The Thunder : Cf. Ezek 1:2 4 ; Job 26 :14; Jn 12:29; Rev 6:1;
Epiph. Pan. 26.3.1, citing Gos. Eve. H.-M. Schenke and others
have read N e s p O N T H, i.e., Nebront, or . . cf. H.-M. Schenke,
Review of Robinson et al., Facsim ile E d itio n : Codex V I, OLZ 69
(1974), col. 230-31. However Schenke has recently accepted our
reading of the text in personal correspondence with J. M. Robinson
(October 2, 1976). Perfect Mind : cf. A p . Joh n (II, 1) 8,29, and
often elsewhere in the Nag Hammadi writings.
found.. .seek : Cf. Isa 6 5 :1; Rom 10 :2 0 ; Pr 8:17.
VI,2 : 13,1-21,32
13
The Thunder ((Jpovnr)) : Perfect (xzkzioc,) Mind (vou <;).
2 I was sent forth from

[the] power, and I have come to those who
4 reflect upon me, and I have been found
among those who seek after me.
6 Look upon me, you (pi.) who reflect upon me,
and you hearers, hear me.
8 You who axe waiting for me, take me
to yourselves. And do not banish me
xo from your sight.
And do not make your voice hate
12 me, nor your hearing.
Do not be ignorant of me anywhere (xaxa)
14 or (^) any (xaxa) time. Be on your guard!
Do not be ignorant of me.
16 For (y ap ) I am the first and the last. I
am the honored one and the scorned one.
18 I am the whore (TCopvrj) and the holy one (crefivif)).
I am the wife and the
20 virgin (7tap0vo<;). I am <the mother>
and the daughter. I am the members (fxiXo?)
The letters t R are written at the beginning of the line and subse
quently crossed out.
"the first and the last : Cf. Isa 44:6; 4 8 :12 ; Rev 1 :1 7 .
"the holy one : Another possible translation would be "the chaste
one ; cf. J . Drescher, "Graeco-Coptica, MusSon 82 (1969). 92-93-
" I am the mother : The MS reads ANOK T T e fM e e y e , which can
be translated, " I am the one who thinks." The sense demands
"mother, and one must either emend or consider M e e y e a variant
form. The form Me e y is attested; this text uses MAXy in 13,22.
236 NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI,2
22 FiTe TAMAAy ANOK T TA6pH N

Aycu NAqje N e c q j H p e - a n o k
24 Te TeTNAqje necrA M oc Aycu
Fini^cei 2^ ' a n o k t TMecito
26 Aycu T6T6 MACMICe* ANOK
n e n co A c X FiNANAAKe- a n o k
28 Te TqjeAeei*- Aycu n p R q jeA e
et- Aycu nAôoyi* neNTAq
30 jcnoei- a n o k Te tm aay FiTe
nAeicuT*- Aycu TCoiNe RnA
32 20 0 Y1*' RToq n e nA^cno-
a n o k Te T*6AoyooNe RneN
34 TAqCBTCDT*- ANOK T tJCOeiC
[iE
R n A . x n o - F iT o q A.e n e N T A q . x [ n o ' f ]
2 2 ^ e H R n e o y o e i q j 2 W o Y 2 9 tY]
M i c e - A y c u W T o q n e n A J c n o 2 [m]
4 n e o y o e i q j - Aycu t a a y n a m i c o [y ]
6 b o a F i^ H T q T e - a n o k n 6 e p q > [ B ]
6 F J T e q 6 o M 2 ^ Teqmn t*u} h m [ A y c o ]
N T o q n e f K e A e e \ e W T A M flf
8 2^ acu - Aycu n e T q o y o q jq q jA q
q^cune R m o e r anok n e n K A p tuq
10 e T e M AyqpTA2oq- A ytu T e n iN o i
a e T e NAqpe n e c p n M e e y e -
12 ANOK Te T6CMH T NAU} nC
2pooy- Aycu n A o ro c eTe n Aqpe
14 n e q e m e - a n o k n e nqjAJce m
nApAN- eTBe o y n ei*Mo c t b m
16 Moei TeTfiMe RMoei- Aycu
TeTFiMocTe RNeTMe RMoei-
13,22-23 "the barren one : Cf. Ps 1 13 :9 ; Isa 5 4 :1; Gos. Phil. (II,J)
59,31-60,1.
28 bridegroom : The form is also attested in E x eg. Soul (11,6)
132,9-I5-
34 prepared : In this context C O BT may imply something more,
such as created. Or the sense may be that of xoafxeiv, suggesting
the image of a slave who adorns her mistress.
THUNDER: PERFECT MIND 1 3 ,2 2 -1 4 ,1 7 237
22 of my mother. I am the barren one

and many are her sons. I
24 am she whose wedding (yan0?) is great, and
I have not taken a husband. I am the midwife
26 and she who does not bear. I
am the solace of my labor pains. I
28 am the bride and the bridegroom,
and it is my husband who
30 begot me. I am the mother of
my father and the sister of my
32 husband, and he is my offspring.
I am the slave of him who
34 prepared me. I am the ruler
M4
of my offspring. But (8) he is the one who [begot me],
2 before the time, on a birthday.
And he is my offspring [in]
4 (due) time, and my power (8iSva(u<;)
is from him. I am the staff
6 of his power in his youth, [and]
he is the rod of my
8 old age. And whatever he wills
happens to me. I am the silence
10 that is incomprehensible and the idea (smvota)
whose remembrance is frequent.
12 I am the voice whose sound is
manifold and the word (Xoyo?) whose appearance
14 is multiple. I am the utterance of
my name. Why, you who hate me,
16 do you love me and
hate those who love me ?
14.2 on a birthday : The reading is not entirely clear. G. M. Browne,

Textual Notes on Nag Hammadi Codex V I, Z P E 13 (1974), 306,
suggests that the scribe corrected e to o in the word 2 9 [ y ] .
15-17 By emending M M O e i in line 16 to M M O O y one might translate
with strict parallelism: Why do you love those who hate me and
hate those who love me ? In Pr 8 : 17, Wisdom says, I love those
who love me.
238 NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI ,2
18 N eTpA pN A H M o e i e p i^ o M O A -o re i
M H o e i- Ayco N e T p 2 0 M 0 A 0 r e i
20 M M o e i e p iA p N A M M o e r N e f x e
Me epoT x i 6 o a e p o e i- Aycu Ne
22 T A y x e <Soa e p o e i x e T M e e p o e r
N e f c o o y N MMoei e p i A t c o
24 o y N MMoer A y c u N e T e R n o y
c o y c u N t M A poycoycuN t*
26 a n o k rA p n e n c o o y N A ycu
T M R fA tco o y N - a n o k n e
28 n q p m e Aycu m A p ^ H c iA -
a n o k o y A T q jm e - a n o k o y
30 x n i H t * a n o k o y N A q jT e - Aycu
a n o k oy^pTe- a n o k n e n n o
32 A 6 M O C A y c u *|*pHNH- "I* 2
t R epoei ano k T etd A em o y
34 A y c u t n o 6* *|* 2 T H T fl e T A M R t
[I]
[2H ]K e - A ycu t a m R t p R m a o -
2 [ R ] n p x i c e R 2 h t* e p o e i e e i
N H X 6 B O \ f i x R n K A 2 - a.[yu>]
4 T 6 TN A 6 l N e M M o e i 2^1 N [e ]
[t]R n h o y - o y T e R n p n Ay
6 [e p ]o ei TKOnpiA NTeTNBCUK
[ R ] t t R k a a t * e e i N H x eB O A -
8 Aycu t t n a 6 i n g M M o e i 2 ^
R M F iT p p A e i- o y A e R n p N A y
10 e p o e i e e iN H x b o a 2^ N etd A
e iH o y - Aycu 2 ^ n c a a x i c t o c < R >
12 T o n o c n t t Rc c u B e R c c u e r
o y A e R n p N o x t e2P^.T e N e t
14 q j A A t 2*1 o y M R t A y c T H p o c -
14,18-22 The independent verbs "confess, deny, lie, tell axe all imperatives.
For the passage as a whole, cf. Mt 10:32-33; Lk 12:8-9; Jn 1:20.
20-22 "tell the truth about m e .. .lie about me : The rendering tell
me the tru th .. .lie to me" is also possible.
1 5,4-5 in [those that] axe to come : Translation uncertain; possibly
"those who are to come, or even in your houses.
t h u n d e r : p e r f e c t m in d 1 4 ,1 8 -1 5 ,1 4 239
18 You who deny (apveic8ai) me, confess (ojxoXoyeiv)

me, and you who confess (ojioXoyeiv)
20 me, deny (apveioQat) me. You who tell
the truth about me, lie about me, and you
22 who have lied about me, tell the truth about me.
You who know me, be ignorant
24 of me, and those who have not
known me, let them know me.
26 For (yap) I am knowledge and
ignorance. I am
28 shame and boldness (TOxppTjtrta).
I am shameless; I am
30 ashamed. I am strength and
I am fear. I am
32 war (7toXe(jt,o<;) and peace (eip^v/j). Give heed
to me. I am the one who is disgraced
34 and the great one. Give heed to my
[15]
poverty and my wealth.
2 Do not be arrogant to me when I am
cast out upon the earth, [and]
4 you will find me in [those]
[that] are to come. And ( o u t s ) do not look
6 [upon] me on the dung-heap (xo7tpia) nor go
and leave me cast out,
8 and you will find me in
the kingdoms. And (ouSe) do not look
10 upon me when I am cast out among those who
are disgraced and in the least (eXaxwmx;)
12 places (to7to<;), nor laugh at me.
And (ouSe) do not cast me down among those who
14 are slain in violence (aucr/jpo?).
nor go : Here and frequently hereafter the Coptic conjunctive

is understood as a continuation of a negative imperative.
among : or possibly from."
-12 least places : In Paraph. Shem (VII,j) 14,5-6 (see also 43,1) the
same phrase (but with the connective) seems to refer to the lower
world or the earth.
ANOK A ANOK OyOJAN THC-

16 A y CD ANOK OyAîHT*- ApH
M n p M eC T e TAMFitCTMHT*-
18 A y CD TAl*KpATl A FiTeTFi
M e p i T C FJ T A M N T * 6 C D B - M n p
20 bOJ t h n e e p o e r AycD H i e
TNTM p O T HTC RTA 6 0 M-
22 6 T B 6 o y TAP TeTflpKATA
<|) pO N I RTA^pTe- A y CD T e
24 T flC A ^ o y M n A q j o y q j o y
a n o k A e T e t q j o o T t ^Fl W
26 <]>OBOC TH p o y A y CD nNOJAT*
N OyCTCDT*' ANOK T 6 TT*
28 6 o o b A y c d e e i o y A X Fi o y
2 H JLO N H H T O n O C - A N O K O y
30 A HT* A y CD A N O K O y C A B H '
6 T B 6 Oy ATTNMeCTCDei
32 Fl N6TNUpOOCN6* 0C '{'NAKA
pcDei a n o k Ne-fKA pcDoy
34 ^YCD j'NAOyCD Nj 6 B O A NTA
u?Axe
[IE
6 T B 6 o y 6 e A T 6 T N M 6 C T C D 6 I FJ[A ]
2 A H N - J t e A N O K O y B A p B A p O C 2 N [R ]
[B ]A p B A p O C * A N O K TA p T T C O (J)[lA ]
4 [ F l F J ^ e A A H N - ^ . y t U T r N C D C I C N [F I]
? W p [ B ] i p o c a n o k n e <|>ATt n [ n ]
6 AAHN mR FiBApBApOC* A[NOK]
n e f N ic y e n e c e m e F1 k h m 6
8 Ay CD T 6 T 6 MNT6C 6 IN 6 Fl NBAp
BApOC- ANOK TeNTAyMeCTCDp
10 n im - Ay cd TeNTAyM epiTC
M MA NIM- ANOK T T OJAyMOy
15,18-19 The division of sentences is uncertain.

26-27 The passage is ambiguous and perhaps should be understood: "and
t h u n d e r : p e r f e c t m in d 1 5 ,1 5 -1 6 ,1 1 24 1
But (S) I, I am compassionate

16 and I am cruel. Be on your guard!
Do not hate my obedience
18 and do not love my self-control (syxpaxeia).
In my weakness, do not
20 forsake me, and do
not be afraid of my power.
22 For (yap) why do you despise (xaxacppovetv)
my fear and
24 curse my pride ?
But (8) I am she who exists in
26 all fears (cpo(3o<;), and strength
in trembling. I am she who is
28 weak, and I am well in a
pleasant (vjSovt)) place (x6to <;). I am
30 senseless and I am wise.
Why have you hated me
32 in your counsels? For I shall be
silent among those who are silent.
34 and I shall appear and
speak.
[i]6
Why then have you hated me, you Greeks ("EXX yjv) ?
2 Because I am a barbarian (|3<xpPapo<;) among [the]
barbarians ((3a p | 3apo<;) ? For (y a p ) I am the wisdom (cocpia)
4 [of the] Greeks ("EXXyjv) and the knowledge (y v t 5 <n<;) of
[the]
barbarians ((3ap(3apo<;). I am the judgment of [the]
6 Greeks ("EXX t]v ) and of the barbarians ((3<xp(3apo<;). [I]
am the one whose image is great in Egypt
8 and the one who has no image among the
barbarians ((3ap(3apo<;). I am the one who has been hated
10 everywhere and who has been loved
everywhere. I am the one whom they call
(I am) strength in trembling. The form n c y 2l 1*, strength, is

otherwise unattested as a noun.
16
12 T e e p o c .x e n c u N ^ ' A yo> a t c t W
m oytg xe n M o y a n o k t b t c
14 q jA y M o y T e e p o c x e ttn o m o c
A y c u a t t R m oyTe x e t a n o m i a -
16 a n o k TNTATeT?lrra>t F i c c u e r
Ay CD ANOK TCNTATCTflAMAT
l8 MMOei* ANOK T T6NTAT6TNJCO
open* e B o v A y c u a t c t F i c o o y
20 e^ O yN ' ANOK T N T A T e T fl
( p i n e 2H tC* Aycu a t t F p A Ttyi
22 n e N H 6 I ' ANOK T 6 T 6 MACp OJA"
A y a > ANOK T6T6 NAcpe NeCOJA*
24 A N O K A N O K o y A T N o y T e * A y CD
a n o k T 6 T 6 N A ape T r e c N o y T e *
26 a n o k n e N T A T T FM e e y e epoT
A y cd A T e T F l q j o c t - a n o k o y
28 A - f c B a v A y cd e y j c i c b c d c b o a
flTOOT*" A N O K T e T 6 N T A T 6 T N
30 KATA<|) p o N 1 M M O e i- A y CD T
T F iM e e y e e p o e i- a n o k n e N
32 T A T eT N ^cD T t e p o e r A y c o T e
T fio y o N g n a T b o a - ^ o t a n A e
34 e T e T F iq jA N ^ C D r t m m c u t n -
A N O K ^CDCDt 't 'N A O y O N ^ t
\m
[c b o a ^ o t a n ] r*Ap e p [ q j ] A N T e T ? l
2 [o yo N ^ T fi ]b o a - a n o k ^cdcdt*
[fNA^curt e]pcDTFr n e n t Ay . [
4 [ 6 ] ^TOOTCj Mlj[
[ 6 ] Fi oyM m *A[HT*
6 [ 6 ]t 6 q i M M Oei . [ . J t o Y
[e n iC T H ]M H c b o a Fi o y [ M ] k a
8 Ay cd RTeTfJqjOTrF
e[paj]TN s b o a oyeiTiCTHm[h]
10 [m ?1 o y ] ^ i K A 2 F^m ** F i T e T F i q j o
16,18-19 Cf. Epiph. Pan. 26.9.4.

17,7-9 It is possible that in this context in ia zr^ ri should be translated
THUNDER: PERFECT MIND l 6 , 12- 17,10 243
12 Life, and you have

called Death. I am the one whom
14 they call Law (v6(io<;),
and you have called Lawlessness (avofiia).
16 I am the one whom you have pursued,
and I am theone whom you have seized.
18 I am the one whom you have scattered,
and you have gathered me together.
20 I am the one before whom you have
been ashamed, and you have been
22 shameless to me. I am she who does not keep festival,
and I am she whose festivals are many.
24 I, I am godless, and
I am the one whose God is great.
26 I am the one whomyou have reflected upon,
and you have scorned me. I am
28 unlearned, and they learn from
me. I am the one whom you have
30 despised (xaxacppovelv), and you
reflect upon me. I am the one
32 whom you have hidden from, and you
appear to me. But (te) whenever (8xav)
34 you hide yourselves,
I myself will appear.
[17]
For (yap) [whenever (oxav)] you
2 [appear], I myself
[will hide] from you. Those who have [
4 [ ] to it [
[ ] senselessly [
6 [ ]. Take me [
[understanding (emor/jp))] from grief,
8 and take me
to yourselves from understanding (s7u<ro)p])
10 [and] grief. And take
recollection' or sobriety ; cf. J . Drescher, Graeco-Coptica,

M u sion 82 (1969), 86.
244 NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI, 2
[ n f f e p cp T fl e b o a 2 ^ j e N T o n o c
12 e y d A e m o y iy o ) 2 R oyta.no*
A y a> R T e T F iT c u p rF c b o a Ne
14 T N A N O y o y K A N 2 ** O y M f i t t f A
e ie b o a o y q jin e q jo n t
16 epcuTN 2 ^ o y M R tA T q ^ in e -
A y c u e b o a 2*5 o y M f i t A T q j i n e
18 mR o y q p i n e - x n i o F iN A M e
a o c 2 ^ t h y t n * Aycu H t g
20 T fi't n e T F i o y o e i 2 o y N epoT*
N e t c o o y N M M o ei Aycu N e t
22 cooyN n n a m ca o c* R t c t R
C M IN 6 H FJN 06 2 ^ N K O y e i N
24 q j o p i t NKTICM A* *J* TT6TR
o y o e i 6 2 PA.T e T M F i t u j H p e
26 U JH M * A y c u M tt p m e C T C D c
x e c c a b k Aycu o y K o y e i
28 Te* o y T e m t t p t c t o F i2 e N
m n tn i6 2^ 2 eNM ePo c eboa
30 2r M M R T K o y e i* e q jA y
c o y c D N M M F i t K o y e i rA p
32 6BOA 2 ^ M M R tN O d * 6TB6
o y T 6 T N C A 2 o y MMOei*
34 a.ya> T C T R T A eiO MMOCI*
A T e T U q jc u b e * A ycu a t c t R
36 n a *R n p n o p xt 6 b o a 2 r R q jo p it
[HE
naT R T A [T e ]T H c[o y a )N o y o y A e ]
2 M npN eoc A A A y [c b o a * Aya> n t c t R]
T C T C A A A Y 6 B O A N[
4 . T C T A T H N A y[C D
17,12 in ruin": Translation and syntax uncertain; perhaps "from

destruction.
14 "in ugliness : Translation and syntax uncertain; perhaps
disgracefully.
25-27 "childhood : Cf. Mt 18:2-6; Gos. Thom. (11,2) 33,5-10 (logion 4);
A p . Joh n (BG ,2) 21,4-5.
28-32 The precise meaning of greatnesses" and smallnesses is unclear.
t h u n d e r : p e r f e c t m in d 1 7 ,1 1 -1 8 ,4 245
me to yourselves from places ( to t c o ? )

12 that are ugly and in ruin,
and rob from those
14 which are good even though (x&v) in ugliness.
Out of shame, take me
16 to yourselves shamelessly;
and out of shamelessness
18 and shame, upbraid my members ([xeXo?)
in yourselves. And
20 come forward to me,
you who know me and you who
22 know my members (fjiXo<;), and
establish the great ones among the small
24 first creatures (xxtafia). Come
forward to childhood
26 and do not despise it
because it is small and it is little.
28 And (ooxe) do not turn away
greatnesses in some parts (|iipo<;) from
30 the smallnesses, for (yap)
the smallnesses are known
32 from the greatnesses. Why
do you curse me
34 and honor me ?
You have wounded and you have
36 had mercy. Do not separate me from the first
[i]8
ones whom you have [known. And (ouSe)]
2 do not cast anyone [out nor]
turn anyone away [
4 [ ] turn you away and [
17*29 "in some parts : Translation and syntax uncertain; perhaps

"individually.
34 "honor : The MS reads T 62ieiO , "condemn, with an apparent
erasure of the letter 6 . T A 6 IO, "honor, provides an antithetical
statement. Elsewhere in the tractate erasures are indicated by
dots above letters or by strokes through them; here the letter 6
has been rubbed out.
[co o ]y N M M oq a n - a n [
6 [ . . . ] . q- T 6 T 6 TCD6I [
'f C [ o ] o y N A N O K R R U )[ o p ] T t [ ] ^.ytu
8 n i* m R R c a . naT c e c p o [ y N M ] y o e i [ ]
in o k A e ne nN oyc n[
10 AyCD N A nA yC I C RTT[ ] [ ]
n o k n e n c o o y N R n ^ q j i N e - AycD
12 n 6 i N e N N e t q j m e R c a > e r 3k.ya>
n o Y ^ -2 C3L2 N e RNe TpA.iTei M M o e r
14 A y CD T6A.M RR6AM 2 ^ TATNCD
c i c RRa.i*reAOC- RT A .yT A .oyo
16 o y 2 R n A A O r o c A yco R N o y i e
2 R NoyTe eBOAjM nAqpoxNe-
18 A yco M n N i RpcDme nim e y
qpoort n m M i e r A yco R ^ i o M e
20 e y q j o o r t R2ht*- 3k.noic T e Ten*
t a c i H o y AycD T e T o y c M o y
22 e p o c * AycD TeToypKATA<|>po
ni m m o c 2 ^ oyqjcDC* a n o k
24 T e 'fpHNH AyCD R T i i f n O A e M O C
q jcD n e e T B H H f- AycD a n o k
26 oyqjRMCD AycD o y p F i R n o A i c -
a n o k T e T o y c i A - Ayco T e T e mR
28 T e c o yciA - N ei*qjooit g b o a
2 R TAcyN oyciA - c e p A t c o o y N
30 M M o e r AycD N e i * q j o o i t 2*1 t a
o y c iA N e fc o o y N mMoer
32 n t* 2 h n e p o e i - A y p A t c o o y N
MMoei- AycD N e f o y H o y R
34 ca. R b o a MMoei n e N T A y c o y
C D N f - 2 R n e 2 0 o y e e i 2 HN 2 0 7
18,9 The lacuna could be filled with R T A e iO C . Thus I am the

perfect mind" would be the only allusion in the body of the work
to the title.
12 "finding : Cf. Gos. Truth (1,3) 17,3-4.
15-17 Translation uncertain, especially "gods in their seasons by my
TH U N D ER: PERFECT MIND 1 8 ,5 -3 5 247
[know] him not. [

6 [ ]. What is mine [
I know the [first ones] and
8 those after them [know] me.
But (Se) I am the mind (vou?) of [
10 and the rest (dvaraxom^) of [
I am the knowledge of my inquiry, and
12 the finding of those who seek after me, and
the command of those who ask of (alxeiv) me,
14 and the power of the powers in my knowledge (yvtoou;)
of the angels, who have been
16 sent at my word (Xoyo<;), and of gods
in their seasons by my counsel,
18 and of spirits (7rveu[i<x) of every man who
exists with me, and of women
20 who dwell within me. I am the one who
is honored, and who is praised,
22 and who is despised (xaxaippovetv)
scornfully. I
24 am peace (eip^vT)), and war (7t6Xe[io<;)
has come because of me. And I
26 am an alien and a citizen (-7*6X1.;).
I am the substance (outria) and the one who
28 has no substance (ouaia). Those who are
without association (a u v o u a ia ) with me are ignorant
30 of me, and those who are in my
substance (ouaia) are the ones who know me.
32 Those who are close to me have been ignorant
of me, and those who are far
34 away from me are the ones who have known
me. On the day when I am close to
counsel." The translation takes N o y T 6 as N e y T H . Alternative

ly, R N O yT e F1 < N > N O yT e, "gods among the gods."
18,18-19 Alternatively one might translate: every male sp irit.. .female
(spirits)."
2 7 -3 1 There seems to be a play on oua[cc and au v o o ata, which the trans
lation does not reflect.
Ilf]
[ep cu TFi t g t ] R o y h o y U c a m o a
2 [M M o e i- a y ]c u n e ^ o o Y e?
[O Y H O Y R c i ] NB O A M M ( p [ T N '(]
4 [2H N e ^ o t y N e p c u T R [ ] i N [ o K n e ]
[ ........... ] c u b c m <(>h t *' a [ n o k n e ]
6 [ 7i ] n m < | > y c i c - i [ no] k n e
[ 6 ]T F J t k t i c i c n n m itn [a ]
8 [ ............]*. i t h m a R R ' | ' Y x o o Y e
[ a n o k ] tre nA M A gTe- a y cu nA TA
10 [ M A ] ^ T [ e - ] a n o k n e n z c u T p mn
n B c u A b o a - a n o k n e t*m onh-
12 a y c o a n o k n e n B cu A * a n o k
n e n ie n iT N aycu b y n n h o y
14 e ^ p A T e T O o f ' a n o k n e <J>ATt
MR nKCU B O A - A N O K A N O K
16 o y iT N O B e ' aycu t n o y n c
M n N O B e O Y e b o a R ^ht* T e
18 iN O K T e r e n ie Y M iA jH o y
^ O p A C I C - AY<U T 6 l* K p A T e iA
20 M<J)H"l* e c c p o o r t R ^HT * 3i N O K
n e n c c u T M e f q j H T t WoyoN
22 nim* mR n c p A x e e T e M A Y t p e
M A T M M o q * A N O K O YCBCU
24 eM A cqÂ xe- a y cu n a u ?
t a m R t 2^-2 FiqpA.xe- c c u t m
26 e p o e i gN o y ^ c u n * a y c u F iT e
t R j c i c b c u e p o e i R oYFJqjOT**
28 A N O K T 6 TAOJ 6 H A 6 BOA-
aycu e Y N O Y x e Fi
30 M o e i b o a f i x F i n g o F in K A -
a n o k e f c o B T e F i n o e i K m n
19.1-2 away from": RCAMOA is taken as a form of RCA RBOA-

8 request": Uncertain because of a lacuna before the word. Other
possible Greek words are SiatTâ, IvStatTTjpia, auv8ia,n)n.a, or iitd-
TT)(xa; "food, dwelling-place, intercourse, demand.
20-23 The meaning is obscure. An alternative would be: I am the re
port that is acceptable to everyone, and the word that cannot be
grasped."
THUNDER: PERFECT MIND 19, 1-31 249
i[ 9]
[you, you] are far away
2 [from me, and] on the day when I
[am far away] from you, [I am]
4 [close] to you. [I am]
[ ] within. [I am]
6 [ ] of the natures (9601?). I am
[ ] of the creation (xtImc) of the [spirits (7tveufia)]
8 [ ] request (am)[xa?) of the souls
[I am] control and the uncontrollable.
10 I am the union and
the dissolution. I am the abiding (fiovT))
12 and I am the dissolution. I
am the one below, and they come
14 up to me. I am the judgment
and the acquittal. I, I
16 am sinless, and the root
of sin derives from me.
18 I am lust (em0u(jia) in (outward) appearance (Spaai?),
and interior self-control (iryxpaTeia)
20 exists within me. I
am the hearing which is attainable to
22 everyone and the speech which cannot be
grasped. I am a mute
24 who does not speak, and great
is my multitude of words. Hear
26 me in gentleness, and
learn of me in roughness.
28 I am she who cries out,
and I am cast
30 forth upon the face of the earth.
I prepare the bread and
19,28 cries out : Cf. Pr 1:20-21, 8:1-4.

28-29 Between 6BOA. and A y CD ("out and and ) the scribe deleted
(with dots above the letters) n j>0 MTTK.A, "upon the face
of the earth, recognizing that it was a dittography (cf. line 30).
31 "bread : Cf. Ps 78:24; Pr 9:5; WisdSol 16:20-21; Jn 6:31-34;
Gos. P hil. (11,3) 55,6-14.
3r*32 Translation uncertain.
32 n i N o y c e g o y N - a n o k t c t*
TNCUCIC RnApAN" ANOK T
34 TAOJKAK 6BOA.' AyOJ ANOK 1*
JCI CHH-
m
f o y O N ^ 6 BOA Ay [ OJ
2 Mooqpe oyn[
cc|>[p]Aric ntam a [
4 e iO N RnJCN . [
[ . . . ]A.e[ ] a n o k n e [
6 [ . . . . ]TG TATTOAOn A . [
a n [o] k T e T e q jA y M o y r f e e p o c jcg ]
8 TMG' Aycu n , x i n 6 o n C [
T e T R T A e i O mmogi n [
10 A y c o T6TN K A C K C e p [ O l ] N [ T ] O y
jcpoen* e p o o y epiK piN e Rmo
12 o y e MT TAT oyt * ATt e p c u T R -
s b o a x e n e K p iT H C m R n^ci z e Y
14 cpo ort ^R T H N e - e y q jA N d A e ie
T H N e C B O A R H A T N IM T T e T N A
16 K A T H N e B O A - fi e y c p A N K A T H
N e BOA N gH Tq n im n e TN A tp A
18 m a ^t m m o jtn - neTHneTN
C A N ^ o y N rAp n e n e T R n e T R c A N
20 boa- Ayco n e T p n A A C c e R c a b o a
RmcdtR- N T A q p T y n o y R M oq
22 M neTfiCANôyN- Aycu neTe
t R n a y e p o q RneTFicANboa-
24 t c t R n a y epoq R n eT R can jjoy
qoyoN ^ eBOA- Aycu TeTR^Bco)
26 T e - c c u t R e p o f n a k p o a t h c
Aycu NT6TNJCI CBOJ NACpAJCe*
28 Nei*cooyN RMoei a n o k n e
ncojTR ei*qjHTt R ^ c d b NIM
20,18-19 or he who is inside of you, etc., referring to the judge.

THUNDER: PERFECT MIND 1 9 ,3 2 -2 0 ,2 9 251
32 my mind (vou?) within. I am the

knowledge (yvwau;) of my name. I am the one
34 who cries out, and I
listen.
[20]
I appear and [
2 walk in [
seal (<T<ppayk) of my [
4 [
[ ]. I am [
6 [ ] the defense (xnoXoyix) [
I am the one who is called
8 Truth, and iniquity [
You honor me [
10 and you whisper against [me]. You [who]
are vanquished, judge (xpiveiv) them (who vanquish you)
12 before they give judgment against you,
because the judge (xpirr)<;) and partiality
14 exist in you. If you are condemned
by this one, who will
16 acquit you? Or (^) if you are acquitted
by him, who will be able to
18 detain you? For (yap) what is
inside of you is what is outside of you,
20 and the one who fashions (wXaooeiv) you on the outside
is the one who shaped ( t u t c o u v )
22 the inside of you. And what
you see outside of you,
24 you see inside of you;
it is visible and it is your garment.
26 Hear me, you hearers (axpoarfc),
and learn of my words,
28 you who know me. I am
the hearing that is attainable to everything;
20,20-25 inside. . .outside": Cf. Lk 11:4 0; Act. Thom. 147; Gos. Thom.
(11,2) 37,26-27; Gos. P h il. (11,3) 68,4-6.
21-22 or possibly: shaped himself inside of you.
28-31 See 19,20-23.
30 a n o k n e n u ? A :x e e T e m ay
cpA M A ^Te MMoq- a n o k n e
32 npAN N1*CMH- A Y C D T 6 C M H
M npAN- a n o k n e n c H M e i
34 on M n c '^ 'A l' a y c u n o Y t D N ^ e B O \
W T A i^ e p e c ic - aycd a n o k
[Ei]
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 [ 7 dt Ju o Y o e iN [
[ 7 ] [
6 [ 6 N ]A K p O A T [H C
[ .............] e p c D T N 1 q o N[ . . . ] . [
8 [ ........... n ] t n o 6 R 6 o m ' aycd n .
[ ................. ] T C j N A K I M A N M n p A N '
10 [ ........... ] e p A T q n e N T A q T A M i o ' f -
a [n]o k A e -J' n axcd F in e q p A N *
12 a n a y 6e eN eqcpAxe mn n c âT
T H p O Y fJT A Y 'X C D K 6 B O A ' +
14 THTN 6e N A K p O A T H C A Y CD R
t c d t T J 2 c d t * t h y t T J F iN A i* re
16 A O C MR N e N T A Y T A O Y O O Y *
A Y C D M TTN A N T A Y T C D C D N 6 B O A
18 2^ N e f M O o y i 1, x e a n o k n e i*
O J O O T t OYA.A1*- A Y C D M M f i T A e i
20 neTNAKpiNe M Moei-2^2 ra-P
H e i A O C Y 2 A - 6 N e N e i*
22 q jo o rt 2 eN N O B e eN AcpcD
OY* A YCD 2 N M R l* A T A M A 2 T e
24 MfJ ^ e N n A e o c e Y ^ A e i H Y *
aycd ^ e N jH A O M H np o c ne
26 o Y o e iq j- y a .m A ^Te mm o
OY u ja n t o y p n H (J)e n e e
20,33-35 Meaning unclear. Perhaps a7)|xetov is contrasted with <n)|Mwl*

(nOYCDN^ BOA, "designation ).
21,10 It is possible to reconstruct [ n T A e ] e p A T C j or [neTA^Je
p A T C j , the one who stands (firm) is the one who created me.
The expression might be the equivalent of o iarchc,.
18-19 or possibly: "For I am alone, and ...
t h u n d e r : p e r f e c t m in d 20,30-21,27 253
30 I am the speech that cannot

be grasped. I am
32 the name of the sound and the sound
of the name. I am the sign (cnrjfietov)
34 of the letter and the designation
of the division (Statpeatc;). And I
[21]
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
] light [
] and [
] hearers (dxpoaxy)^) [
] to you [
] the great power. And [
] will not move the name.
10 [ ] the one who created me.
And (Se) I will speak his name.
12 Look thenat his words and all the
writings which have been completed. Give
14 heed then, you hearers (dxpoanf)?) and
you also, the angels
16 and those who have been sent,
and you spirits (7cveufia) who have arisen from
18 the dead. For I am the one who
alone exists, and I have no one
20 who will judge (xptveiv) me. For (yap) many
are the pleasant forms (elSo?) which
22 exist in numerous sins,
and incontinencies,
24 and disgraceful passions ( t o x 0 o < ;),
and fleeting (7cpo<;-) pleasures (yjSovrj),
26 which (men) embrace
until they become sober (vrjcpetv) and
21,25-26 "fleeting pleasures, which (men) embrace : Despite the lack of

syntactic connection, the translation takes n p o c T T e o y o e l (i)
as the adjective J tp 6 o x a tp o ^ , which in Auth. Teach. (VI,3) 31,27.33
is rendered n p o c o y o e i c p .
28 n o n * e^patf e n o y i c H M H
t h pioN * A y cu c e N A d i N e R
30 M o e i MTTMA E T M M i y ( J C 6
cun^' a.yoj rJceTMcaji*
32 eMoy:
t h u n d e r : p e r f e c t m in d 21,28-32 255
28 go up to their resting-place (xoi(iY)Ty)ptov).

And they will find
30 me there, and they will
live, and they will not die
32 again.
VI,3: 22,1-35.24
G eo rg e W. M acR ae

49.
Menard, J.-ls., ed. L Authentikos Logos. Bibliotheque copte de Nag
Hammadi; Section Textes 2. Quebec: Les Presses de lUni-
versite Laval, 1977.
Funk, W.-P. Authentikos Logos: Die dritte Schrift aus Nag-Ham-
madi-Codex V I. ThLZ 98 (1973), cols. 251-59.
MacRae, G. W. "A Nag Hammadi Tractate on the Soul. Ex orbe
religionum. Vol. I. Pp. 471-79.
The third tractate of Codex VI is not obviously related either to

what precedes or to what follows. It is a heavily metaphorical ex
position of the origin, condition, and ultimate destiny of the soul.
The work is substantially well preserved, although there are lacunae
of several lines at the top of the first seven pages. Because of the
lacuna on p. 22 it is impossible to ascertain whether a title stood at
the beginning as well as at the end, and if it did, whether the title
was the same in both places. The preceding tractate (VI,2) has a
title only at the beginning, the following (VI,^), at both beginning
and end. In translating the title at the endwhich is unusually
anarthrousthe words au O e v rix o ? X oyo? have been understood on
the model of several Hermetic and other titles using Xoyo<;; it is
possible, however, that it refers to the role of the medicinal Xoyo<;
mentioned several times in the tractate itself.
With respect to its contents, there are some reasons for regarding
Auth. Teach, as a composite or collection of several explanations of
the souls origin, fall, and victory over the material world. There is
a major break at 25,26, where the narrative returns to the world of
the Father where it has (presumably) begun, and from 26,20 on
ward there are several sections containing statements in the first
person plural. Moreover, a number of different extended metaphors
are introduced successively to explain the same phenomenon, the
17
condition of the soul in the world, although some key metaphors

such as those of the food, the medicine, the bridal relationship,
occur in several sections of the work. Some of these metaphors are
extremely common in the literature of the Roman Hellenistic era,
e.g., the bridegroom and life as an aywv, but others are highly
distinctive and almost unparalleled in their elaborateness, e.g., the
fisherman and the dealers in bodies.
Auth. Teach, contains no typical gnostic cosmogonic mythun
less it is alluded to in the passages now lost through some of the
early lacunae but it seems to presuppose a generally gnostic, i.e.,
anticosmic dualist, understanding of the fate of the soul in the
material world. It has a number of parallels in the remainder of the
Nag Hammadi library, notably with Gos. Phil. (II, 3), Exeg. Soul
(11,6), Teach. Silv. (V II, 4), and the Hermetic tractates of Codex VI,
as well as with the Corp. Herm. There is nothing in Auth. Teach.,
however, to suggest that it is itself a Hermetic composition. It is
also distinctively different from the De anima literature of the early
Christian centuries, whether of Tertullian and his sources, or of
Porphyry or Iamblichus, in that it is totally non-philosophical in
its forms of expression. Apart from a few expressions such as
"evangelists, "hearing the preaching, and the like, there is noth
ing specifically Christian in the document, nor is there any trace
of the heavy dependence on Jewish speculation which we find in so
many other Nag Hammadi tractates.
Perhaps there is a clue, though a veiled one, to be sure, to its
origin in the section 33,4-34,34, which contains a polemic against
the <x v 6 t )t o i who are distinguished both from the we with whom
the writer identifies and from the eOvr), who are more or less ex
cusable on grounds of ignorance. One is tempted to think of a
Christian berating the Jews for their failure to heed the message
which they have heard preached to them, but again there is no
unambiguous allusion to either Christian or Jewish belief or prac
tice. In its emphasis on the evil character of the material world,
on the heavenly origin of the spiritual soul, on the role of revealed
knowledge as salvific, Auth. Teach, appears to be a gnostic work.
But it lacks the tone of self-assurance and confidence, almost arro
gance, which characterizes many unquestionably gnostic treatises.
The soul is in perpetual danger of succumbing to the adversary,
or to the false attraction of the material, and consequently she must
maintain a practiced vigilance.
AUTHORITATIVE TEACHING: INTRODUCTION 259
The notes indicate the few textual emendations and uncertainties

in the text and suggest some of the more obvious parallels without
implying any direct relationship to Biblical or other literature.
Reconstructions within lacunae have been held to minimum and
are included only when the probabilities are extremely high.
VI,;j: 22,1-35,24
[ kb]
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 [ ........... ] n *e [
[ 6 ] Tt eqMOT[Fl
6 [ 6 T n e FI a . [
[ 6 ]it zpxi fJeHTq[
8 [.]^ jlay oytoNj 6BO[A.
HnHoye [
10 oyoN^ c b o a - Ayo> eM [n]ai[To]Y
OyCUN j 6 B O A fJ6i R kocm oc
12 fia^ o p a t o c RNA.T*qjA.Jce mmo
o y na Y Wt a t 'I' y x h F l A ^ o p A
14 TOC Htc T-AIKAIOCyNH FItac
e i cboa f J ^ H T o y e c q j o o i t
16 R e p Bp M M A O C * A y t D f l O J B p
RCCDMA- A y c o F l q j B p MTTNA*
18 eiTe ecqjooit Fi t k a t a b a c ic
eiTe ecqjooTt ttah p<Dma -
20 ecrropx an e p o o y aaa a ceNAy
epoc- Ayco cdAqjn* epooy pAT
22 2 r nAoroc FIaôpatoc* 8 o \
netZHrt NTATTecNyM<()ioc
24 erne MMoq AqTAAq epcuc e
TpecoycoM MMoq Flee Floy
26 Tpo<()h- Aycu Aq^ HnAoroc
Ncbaa wee FJoynA^pe
28 eTpecNAy cboa n e cN o y c
flcpNoei F3Neccyi*reNHc-
"invisible . . . worlds": The notion of a y.6oyioq 46paro? is notun-

common; cf. e.g. Philo Spec.leg. 1.302.
bridegroom": Cf. 35,11: bride-chamber. The i m a g e r y is com
mon in the Bible, the Fathers, Gnosticism (especially Valentinian).
See e.g., Gos. P h il. (11,3) 65,10-11 and passim; R.M. Grant, The
VI, j : 22,1-35,24
[22]
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 [
[
6 [ ] in heaven [
[ ] within him [
8 [ ] anyone appears [
the hidden heavens [
10 appear, and [before]
the invisible ( a o p a x o s ), ineffable worlds (xoopoq)
12 appeared.
From these the invisible (aopaxo?)
14 soul (<jwx*)) f righteousness (SixaioaiSvY))
came, being
16 a fellow member ([ikoq), and a fellow
body (<KO(jt.a), and a fellow spirit (-rcvsufjLa).
18 Whether ( s i t e ) she is in the descent (xaxaP<x<ri<;)
or ( sit e ) is in the Pleroma,
20 she is not separated from them, but (aXXa) they see
her and she looks at them
22 in the invisible (aopaxo?) word (koyoc,).
Secretly her bridegroom (vufi.cpio<;)
24 fetched it. He presented it to her mouth
to make her eat it like
26 food (xpo<py)), and he applied the word (Xoyo?)
to her eyes as a medicine
28 to make her see with her mind (vou<;)
and perceive (voetv) her kinsmen (<n>YYevyjs)
Mystery of Marriage in the Gospel of Philip,'* V igC hr 15 (1961),

129-40.
22,24-29 On the nutritive and medicinal character of the word, see Philo
Leg.all. III.174-78; on the relation between the word as food and
seeing, see Philo Rer.div.her. 79.
262 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V I,J
30 R c x i cooyN eTecNoyNe-
x e m c ecN ATa>6e e n e c K A i
32 a o c F iT A c p q jp rt Fil c b o a Fi
^H Tq- x c k i i c e c N i x i F in e
34 T e t t c d c F ic K c u F i c c u c F i e y
m
AH
6 ] . n e e <p[
6 ]. e AqM o[oc
6 ] e eyF iT A q [
. . . . ]q?Hpe- Fl qjHpe . e
........... ]M6 n a m e n a T Ht a y
q ja m e ] 6 B O A . JH n e q c n e p
10 m a ] q p A Y M o y T e eN Oi Hp e
F iT e c fiM e x e n e N cn h o y *
12 ta T ^ o k u c t c e FiT'j'YXH
MTTNATI KH RTepOYNOXC
14 e^pAT enccuMA- A c q j c o n e
FiCON F i T e m YM I A MFi TTMOC
16 T e MFi t\ko>Z' ^ Y ^ Fi'j'YXH
F i2 Y A , K H ' ^ t o c T e 6 e t t c c d
18 m a F iT A q ^ l b o a gFi T e n i Y
m i a - a y c u T e r n y m 1a Fi
20 T A C e i 6 B O A Fi t o y c i a F i ^ Y
A IK H - e T B e TTA'f Af'j'Y X H
22 cpcune n a y A c o n - k a i t o i re
^ e N q j p F i n o A Ne- MFJ 6 o m
22,30-32 "root.. .branch : Cf. Rom 11:16 -21.

23,13-14 "cast into : alternatively, simply put into. Of itself NOY^C
sometimes translates ti0v<xi, and even (SdcXXeiv et? does not always
stress the metaphor of throwing.
16-17 material soul : Cf. Exc.Theod. 50.1 and 51.2, where, however,
the implications of this notion are quite different.
23 outsiders : Cf. 23,29-30 and 24,33. The expression cpp flTTOA
(once n TTo A) is understood here as qj p ( = qj H p e) flTTB O K The
meaning might be either bastards or orphans ; for the latter
cf. Gos. P h il. (II, 3) 52,21-24. Funk translates stepsons/' i.e., the
AUTHORITATIVE TEACHING 22 , 30- 23,23 263
30 and learn about her root,

in order that she might cling to her branch (xXaSo?)
32 from which she had first come forth,
in order that she might receive what
34 is hers and renounce [matter (uXy))]
[23]
]as[
] h e [ d w e lt
] h a v in g [
] sons. The sons [
] truly, those who have
[come] from his seed (cnrepixa),
10 c a ll t h e s o n s
of the woman "our brothers.
12 I n t h i s v e r y w a y , w h e n t h e s p ir i t u a l (rcveujxaTix^)
s o u l (ûx*)) w a s c a s t
14 in t o t h e b o d y (o co fia ), i t b e c a m e
a brother to lust (s7ut.0u[ji<x) and hatred
16 and envy and a material (uXixtj)
s o u l (ûx*))- S o t h e r e f o r e (cocrre) t h e b o d y (<KO[xa)
18 c a m e f r o m l u s t (eTuOujjioc),
a n d l u s t (s 7u 0u(ji<x)
20 came from material (uXix^) substance (oucra).
F o r t h i s r e a s o n t h e s o u l (({'ux^)
22 b e c a m e a b r o t h e r t o t h e m . A n d y e t (x o u to i y e )
th e y are o u tsid e r s, w it h o u t p o w e r
mothers children by a former marriage; this fits the context well

(similarly, M6nard). Krause refers to Lev 18:9. Compare the ex
pressions insiders and "outsiders, NATTÔYN MR N ATT B O A ,
in Cod. Bruc., f. i28v, lines 2-3, and 130^, line 3 (Baynes, Coptic
Gnostic Treatise). For the unusual form MTTOA see Jn 6:18 in
Fayoumic: MTTA A for m TT B A A (E. M. Husselman, The Gospel of
John in Fayoum ic Coptic [Ann Arbor: Kelsey Museum of Arche
ology, 1962], and compare H C A M O A for N C A N B O A , Thund.
(VI, 2) 19,1-2.
24 e T p e y p K A H p o N O M i 3*. t t^ o
o y t - a a a a eyNApKAHpo
26 nomi ToyMAAy o y a a < c >
^ o t a n 6 e epqjA.NT'l'yxH
28 o y c o q j e epKAHpoNOMei
mFI Fi<pp Rno A- xe fixpHMi.
30 rA.p F i m q j p F Jn o A - Ne Nina.
o c F iA A ^ A e ^ - rjh a o n h
32 N T e TTBIOC- HKC 02 M M O C
T e - R n e p n e p o c - m<J>aoi
34 A p o c - F iK A T H r o p iA -
[M l
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 [ 6 ]. . . n?m . [
[ .......... ] a n o y e i e [
6 [ ..........]ttF NAC Fi. . [
T n [ o p m ] A - u ? A q u ) O N e [ c F lq N o ]
8 x e e rfn o p N io N - a[
r a p NAC n t m R t*cp n [ a .- a c k c d ]
10 F i c c u c F J T M fit < p A y [ ] n [ M ] o y
rA p mFI n c D N ^ c e K A A t e^pA'f Fi
12 o y o N n im - n e T o y o < p q 6 e
n e lfC N A y c e N i C o f n q N i y
14 taT 6 e e T M M i y CN A tp o m e
2Fi o y M F l t C A y 2 * 2 Rnprf 2 ?
16 OyMNT*CpNA" TT(p NA rAp n e
n H p r f - MACp n M e e y e 6 e FI
18 N e c c N H y mn n e c e i o j T * - x e
H A O N H TAP MR F I^ H O y 1*
20 O A e 6 C e p A n A T A MMOC- A C
kcu F l c c u c F i n c o o y N A c
22 ne o y M F ItT B N H - o y A N o
htoc tap eqqjoo Tt FJ o y M F l t
23,26 MS reads oyAAy.

24,10-13 For the choice between death and life, cf. Deut 30:15,19; Jer 21:8,
and the widespread doctrine of the two ways. On the importance
of the choice in Hermetism, see Festugifere, L a Rdvdlation III,
97-118.
AUTHORITATIVE TEACHING 2 3 ,2 4 -2 4 ,2 3 26 5
24 to inherit (xXyjpovojietv) from the male,

but (aXXa) they will inherit (xXyjpovofieiv)
26 from their mother only.
Whenever (6tocv), therefore, the soul (ûx^)
28 wishes to inherit (xX^povoêtv)
along with the outsidersfor (yap) the possessions (xp5j-
[ia) of
30 the outsiders are
proud passions (tox0o<;), the pleasures (yjSovyj)
32 of life ((3io<;), hateful envies,
vainglorious things (nipmpoq), nonsensical things (<pXua-
po),
34 accusations (xaryjyopia),
[24]
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 {
[
6 [ J for her [
[prostitution (7u o p v eia)], he excludes her [and puts]
8 her into the brothel (u o p v e io v ). For (yap) [
[debauchery] for her. [She left]
10 modesty behind. For (yap) death
and life are set before
i2 everyone. Whichever of these two they wish, then,
they will choose for themselves.
14 That one (fem.) then will fall
into drinking much wine in
16 debauchery. For (yap) wine is
the debaucher. Therefore she does not remember
18 her brothers and her father, for ( y a p )
pleasure (vjSovt)) and sweet profits
20 deceive (arcaT eiv) her. Having
left knowledge behind, she fell
22 into bestiality. For ( y a p ) a senseless person (avoT jro^)
exists in
24.15-17 w in e .. .debauchery : Cf. E p h 5 : 1 8 otv<j> v to l<m v AototIoc.

24 tbn h - e q c o o y N a n RneTec
q>e e x o o q * mfi n e T e q jq je e
26 x o o q a n - n q jH p e A.e R T o q Fi
pFipAOJ- U)AqpKAH PONOM6I
28 n n e q e ic u f 2 W o y a o 6 - e p e
neqeicDT* pAU?e e^pA'f e x c u q
30 x e q x i e o o Y t b h HTq FIt o
OTq FIo y o n n i m - e q q jm e o n
32 Flea. n p H T e R t o y k c u b FI61 n c n
T A q x iT O Y ' Fiqjp F in o A rAp
Heel
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 [ 10 ][
[ .......... ] 6 TCU2 MFi T[
6 [. . ]a i j o Y M e e Y e ra.[p Fie]ni
[eJyM ia. eqqjANî e[o]YN
8 [e]YP<OMe M TTApeeNoc- Aq
[ o y ]<d eqxcuzFi- a y 2 ra.p eqqjANTCU?
MFi n c o y o - nTO J 2 n e eq?Aq
14 xcd^m- aaaa. n c o y o n e- ey
T H 2 TAP MFI NCYepHY* MFi
16 a a a y n a t a y n e c o y o xe qxA
2M- CeNApKOAAKCYe A e
18 e p o q x e ma n a n n eeiTCU 2 e
boa eYN AY e n c o y o eqTH
20 NFiMAq- q jA N T O Y X iT q F ic e
N O Xq MFi 2 e NK.eTOJ2 T H p o Y -
22 FiTe n T cu ^ t m m a y r< )
TCD MFi 2 6 N Ke 2 Y AH T H p O Y
24 o Y c n e p M A FlToq e q o yA A B
25,1-34 A profile and line comparison between the top of this page a n d the
tops of preceding and subsequent pages (where line numbering had
already been established) has led to the conclusion that 4 lines are
missing at the top of the page rather than 3, as Krause, followed
AUTHORITATIVE TEACHING 2 4 ,2 4 -2 5 ,2 4 267
24 bestiality, not knowing what it is

proper to say and what it is proper
26 not to say. But (8e), on the other hand, the
gentle son inherits (xA^povofieiv)
28 from his father with pleasure, while
his father rejoices over him
30 because he receives honor on account of him from
everyone, as he looks again
32 for the way to double the things
that he has received. For (yap) the outsiders
[25]
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 [
[ J to mix with the [
6 [ J. For (yap) if a thought [of] lust (s7ci0ufiia)
enters into
8 [a] virgin (roxpQIvoi;) man, he has
[already] become contaminated. And their
10 gluttony cannot
mix with moderation (-{iiTpio?).
12 For (yap) if the chaff is mixed
with the wheat, it is not the chaff that is
14 contaminated, but (d&Aa) the wheat.
For (yap) since they are mixed with each other, no
16 one will buy her wheat because it is contaminated.
But (8e) they will coax (xoXaxeiSeiv)
18 him, "Give us this chaff!
seeing the wheat mixed
20 with it, until they get it and
throw it with all other chaff,
22 and that chaff
mixes with all other materials (uXt)).
24 But a pure seed (tntepfjia)
by Funk and Menard, assumed. Hence the extant lines numbered

4'33 by Krause are here numbered 5-34.
25.5 The word ImOuixla is an attractive conjecture to fill the lacuna:
"to mix with [lust], in contrast perhaps with lines 10-11.
12-26 Wheat and chaff: For the imagery, cf. Mt 3:12, par.
q ja .y p o e ic e p o q ^ e N in o
26 6 h kh eyope^c- NaJ 6 e t h p o y
fJT3LNX0 0 y aLytu â/re^H
28 eMTT3LTA3i3iY q jo m e -
n e ic u t oya.aiq n e t q jo o r t -
30 eM n A TeSKO cM oc
H n H o y e o y u jN ^ c b o a -
32 o y T e n K o c M o c ei*T.XM
T i K ^ o y T e a.pxH- o y T e
34 e s o y c i v o y T e fU tyN ^M ic-
lEs)
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 [. . . .O y lC D N j BO A N[
[ .......... ]^rM*.- aycu oj[
6 2 e N f ]o y e - MneAa.a.y [jte ]
u n t u n e eJCM n e q o y a j a j t ] A
8 T o q 6 e neicuT* e q o y c p lq je ]
e o ycD N ? b o a flTeqM [fii*pH]
10 M iO' mR n e q e o o y a.qica>
K n e e i n o 6 R^rcoN R ^p aJ
12 2 r neTKO CM O c- e q o y c o
q je T p e N a .rcD N icTH C o y
14 o jn J c b o a - flTeN ei*qja>Jce
t h p o y fic e K tu R c o jo y
16 R N eN Ta.yq}a>ne- K e e p
K.2k.T3k.<J>pO N I M M O O Y Y
18 c o o y N e q x o c e R * .tT e 2 o q -
R cencD i* e ^ o y N qja. n e i*q jo
20 oit- a.yto N e f c a jjc e nm m cn
e y o R ^ n t ik c im c n o c e y
22 qjcujce c ^ h t R R t R :x p o e T e y
M Rta.'fcooyN R^pM 2 R nR
24 c o o y N - n p qjprt R c o o y N
2L.TTIik.TR pTC| 6 NT 1 N 6 I BOA
25.33-34 "principality, or authority, or the powers : Cf. 1 Cor 15:24, where

the same terms occur in the same order.
26,6-7 Cf. J n i : 3 .
AUTHORITATIVE TEACHING 25 , 25- 26,25 269
is kept in storehouses (aTCo0i?]>a))

26 that are secure. All these things, then,
we have spoken. And before
28 anything came into being,
it was the Father alone who existed,
30 before the worlds (xo<Tfio<;) that are in
the heavens appeared,
32 or (oure) the world (xoqx.o<;) that is on
the earth, or (ofrre) principality (dpx^), or (ofrre)
34 authority (eôuaiot), or ( oote) the powers (Suvoqxn;).
[26]
(Lines 1-3 lacking)

4 [ ] appear [
[ ] and [
6 [ And (8s)] nothing
came into being without his wish.
8 He, then, the Father, wishing
to reveal his [wealth]
10 and his glory, brought about
this great contest (dytov)
12 in this world (x6<j[xo<;), wishing
to make the contestants (aYtovi<mf)<;) appear,
14 and make all those who contend
leave behind
16 the things that had come into being, and
despise (xaxacppovetv) them with a
18 lofty, incomprehensible knowledge,
and flee to the one who
20 exists. And (as for) those who contend with us,
being adversaries (<xvTtxei[xevo<;) who
22 contend against us, we are to be victorious over their
ignorance through our
24 knowledge, since we have already known
the Inscrutable One from whom we have
26,11-12 The metaphor of the <ywv is extremely widespread; see V. Pfitzner,

Paul and the Agon M o tif (Leiden: E .J. Brill, 1967)-
26 R ^ H T q - GM MHTAN AAAY R
ne'fKOCMOC' m h i t c d c H t g
28 t 6 5 o y c i a RnKOCMOC c n
T A c q jo m e F ic p K A T e x e h m o n
30 ^FJ H k o c m o c e i ^ F i MiTHYe*
NA*f T 6 n M O Y H u e O \ I K O N
32 cyo o rt n^HTOY* Y
K t u T e e p o q Fl6 i R M e p i i c o c
[]
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 [ ............ l Y t i o y 6 bo[ \
[. . . . ]a. T5k o c m ik [o c - A N ] U ) ( D
6 n[e] O N [e]NJCi q jin e feFi F1]k o c m o c
ecpM eA ei nan an ÂpooY* e Y
8 [o jA ].x e F ic c u N - i y c o n cub S?
[R m ]o n e p o o Y - eY ô o Y U J
10 ? P [ o ] n e y t q jin e eô yN e^R
neN ô- c n G a ^ t* F Ic o jo y - R
12 tH tm up A ^xe* naT r ^ p c t R
m a y e YP 2 ^ B e T O Y e p rA c iA *
14 ANON A 6 e N M O O O j e 2 * n ^ K O
2 A TTI BC" e N 6 A O ^ ? 6 B O A ZHT<\
16 RTTCN MA F J q p o m e - TTMA 6 T 6
T F J n o A . e i T e i A mFJ t F J c y n c i
18 AH Cl C 6x 0 )1 CBOA. ^ H T q * N
Ttu6e MMON AN G ^ O y N N N
20 TAYtpcune- a a a a c n c i ^ c
MMON M MOOY1 e p e ^ T H N
22 KAA*I* ANe i* <pOOl t* NCpCU
Ne cn 6 o o b c n m o k ^- e y R
24 oyno 6 A e R m Ni* jc c u c u p e H i t
R ttFJc a n ^ o y n T e N ' j ' Y X H
26,26-27 Cf. Jn 1 5 :1 9 and chs. 14-17, passim.

33 The precise meaning of ii.ept.x6i; is uncertain here because of the
following lacuna; it may be set in contrast to xa66Xucov in line 31
In the translation a passive construction is used to indicate where
26 come forth. We have nothing in

this world (xo ctjjlo ^ ), lest ([r^7C6>?)
28 the authority (!o u < n a) of the world (xo<t[xo<;) that
has come into being should detain (xarexeiv) us
30 in the worlds (x6<7(jlo<;) that are in the heavens,
those in which universal (xaQ oX ixov) death
32 exists,
surrounded by the individual ((xeptxo<;)
[27]
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 [
[ ] worldly (xo<7(jux6<;). [We have]
6 also become ashamed [of the] worlds (xoqjux;),
though we take no interest ((iiXeiv) in them when they
8 [malign] us. And we ignore
them when they curse
10 us. When they cast shame in
our face, we look at them
12 and do not speak. For (yap) they
work at their business (spyacTia),
14 but (8) we go about in hunger (and)
in thirst, looking toward
16 our dwelling-place, the place which
our conduct (7coXixeta) and our conscience (cuveiSTjcm;)
18 look toward,
not clinging to the things
20 which have come into being, but (aXXa) withdrawing
from them. Our hearts
22 are set on the things that exist, though we are ill,
(and) feeble, (and) in pain.
24 But (81) there is a great strength hidden
within us. Our soul (ûxifj)
the lacuna occurs; in the Coptic M M e p i K O C [ ] is the sub

ject of "surround.
27,17-18 For an example of the collocation of auvetSrjai,? and reoXiTetSeoOai,
see Ac 23:1.
25 The letter Jl has been crossed out before T e N ' l / Y XH>
26 m cn eccpcuN e xe e c q jo o T t
o y H e i M M N fjH K e ' e p e
28 y a h f q)6 x Fi n c c b j l a e c
O Y < o q je e w e F Ib a a h -
30 a 1a. t o y t o qpAcntuT* F I c a
n A o r o c F ic T A A q e n g c b a a
32 F l e e F ioY TT A ^pe e c o Y < o < N >
m m ooy* e c N O Y x e b o a
i m
(Lines 1-3 lacking)

4 [ . . . . ] y e e Y e F io yI
[ . . . m n ] t b a a 2 P a T 2[W
6 e i c [ . . ] e - mnFJcc dc o n e u jc p
n e ne T M M A Y q ? o o rt 2 F 9 Y
8 MFltAT'COOYN- OYK.A[Ke T]H
pq n e - a y < o o y 2 Y * | K 9 [ c n e ']
10 t a T t c e e FiT 'l'Y X H e c [ . ] .
F l o Y A o r o c FI n a y n i m t a
12 A q e N e c B A A - F i e e F io Y n A ^ p e -
JC 6K A A C e C N A N A Y BOA* Fi
14 T e n e c o y o e iN F iF in o
A 6 M O C e T p n O A B M e i NR
16 MAC- N C A A Y F iB A A e Fl^pAT 2 ^
n e c o y o e i N 1 F ic o T n o Y e
18 2 Y n ^2PA.if T e c n A p o Y C iA -
F i c e i o o Y e ^ p A f ^Fi OYMFiiAi*
20 flN H B * F i C p n A p ^ H C I A ^ e F i m o c
2M necKpATOC- a y <d ri T ec
22 6 p H n e - e p c N e c ^ A J c e 6 ao j* ?
r i c a j c e Y X i q jin e - ecnHT*
24 e n cA N T n e eôYN en ecA ^ o -
nA ? e T e n e c N o y c q j o o r t
26 Fi^pA'f H ^ H T q - a y <d T e c A n o
27<32 "(opening) : MS reads e c o y o ) M . It is conceivable, however,

that o y u > M was intended as an expression for the action of a
medicine. Crum (478a) cites an example from J . Leipoldt, ed.,
S in uth ii Archim andritae vita et opera omnia, CSCO 42 (Louvain,
1908), no. 195, which uses oyOJM with n A p e , "medicine," but
AUTHORITATIVE TEACHING 27,26-28,26 273
26 indeed ((iiv) is ill because she dwells

in a house of poverty, while
28 matter (uXyj) strikes blows at her eyes,
wishing to make her blind.
30 For this reason (Sta touto ) she pursues
the word (koyoc,) and applies it to her eyes
32 as a medicine, <opening>
them, casting away
[28]
(Lines 1-3 lacking)
4 [ ] thought of a[
[ ] blindness in [
6 [ ] afterwards when
that one is again in
8 ignorance, he is completely [darkened]
and [is] material (uXtxo<;).
10 Thus the soul (ûx^) [
a word (koyoc,) every hour, to apply
12 it to her eyes as a medicine
in order that she may see,
14 and her light may conceal the hostile forces (7uoXe(ji.o<;)
that fight (7toXe[Aeiv) with
16 her, and she may make them blind with
her light, and enclose them in
18 her presence (Ttapouatoc),
and make them fall down in sleeplessness,
20 and she may act boldly (7rappY)m<xe(T0ai)
with her strength (xpdro?) and with her
22 sceptre. While her enemies look
at her in shame, she runs
24 upward into her treasure-house
the one in which her mind (vou?)
26 isand (into) her
in Shenoute the afflicted organ is not the object of the verb to

eat. For the metaphor of using medicine on the eyes, see Rev
3:18.
28,23-29 Cf. Mt 6:19-21, par.
18
e hkh eTA.pe.x- e < M > n e A A A Y

28 n e n t a y cp cu it e a m a ^ t c
m m oc- o y A e R n e c x i R o y
30 oj m m o e ^ o Y N e n e c H e i -
x e n Acp cu o y t a p H61 N e c
32 M e c ^ ^ H e i y1* o y b h c m
n e ^ o o Y A yt u t c y o jh -
34 c m H t a y mm ay H nCM TO N
m
M T re2 o [o ]y o [Y ]T e Teycp H -
2 x e TOYenieYMeiA rA[pj c * oy
k2 mmooy' G T B e ttaT [6]e eNî
4 nhb an- o y * .e eNOBeap an [cn]
up NHOY ei*CHp CBOA N o y
6 ^curt- eYÂped epoN epcu^"?
MMON* eYUpA.NpA 2 TH TAP Fi
8 o[Y]<PNe o y iw t- qNACA^nfl
e[2p]AY pcuq- e p e n M o o Y c c u k
10 e [Jt]c u N e q ' l ' e ^ p A N - ay ^j ce N A
XITfl e n i T f l 6TABCU- a y c u RtFI
12 nao)6m6am an e^pAT Fi^H
tc - x e MM OYeiooYe c e x o c e
14 e^cuN - eY<i?OYO aciN m e o ja
i t i t R c y c u m c R n e N ^ H t 2PAT
16 2 r n o M e R T A A e i^ e - aycu t R
NACpp BOA AN HTOOTOY 6N
18 o y a m pcuMe TAP N T N A 6 c u n e
MMON R c e O M K f l YPa.<ye
20 R e e HoYXÂieYC e q N e j(
o e i M eiTMOOY qpAqNOY^xe
22 TAP HÂ^ MMI N RTpO<j)H
e n M o o y xe n o y i rA p t t o y ^
24 n R t b t * o y flT A q m m a y flT e q
28,27 MS reads e N i r e A A A Y -
29,18 man-eaters : In Gos. P h il. (11,3) 62,35 God is said to be a "man-
eater ; the reference is no doubt to the inferior creator-god.
2off. The "positive" use of the metaphor of "fishers of men in the
Bible is well known; the "negative use (as here) is quite rare:
storehouse (dbro0Y]>o)), which is secure, since nothing

28 among the things that have come into being has seized
her, nor (ouSe) has she received a
30 stranger into her house.
For (yap) many are her
32 homeborn ones who fight against her
by day and by night,
34 having no rest
[29]
by day nor (ouxe) by night,
2 for (yap) their lust (s7ti0u(ua) oppresses
them. For this reason, then, we do
4 not sleep, nor (ouSe) do we forget [the]
nets that are spread out in
6 hiding, lying in wait for us to catch
us. For (yap) if we are caught in
8 a single net, it will suck us
down into its mouth, while the water flows
10 over us, striking our face. And we will
be taken down into the dragnet, and we
12 will not be able to come up from
it because the waters are high
14 over us, flowing from above
downward, submerging our heart down
16 in the filthy mud. And we
will not be able to escape from them.
18 For (yap) man-eaters will seize
us and swallow us, rejoicing
20 like a fisherman (aXieii*;) casting
a hook into the water. For (yap)
22 he casts many kinds of food (xpocpTj)
into the water because (yap) each one
24 of the fish has his own
e.g., Hab 1:14-17; iQH 111,2 6 ; V.7-8. For additional references

see MacRae, pp. 474-75.
29,21-25 For the idea that each soul has its own food (perhaps a maxim ?)
see C1.A1. Strom. I .i (GCS I, p. 6, line 21). Cf. Gos. Phil. (11,3 )
8o,28ff.
T p o < |)H ' e o p A q a jc u A M e p o c

26 Nqrrcui* F ! c a n e c c T o e r
ô tan 6e e q ^ N o y o M c
28 q ? A c 6 a m e mm o q r 6 i to cim
eeH it R n c i N j o y N nt*tpo
30 <f>H F i c e m e F iM o q ezpx'i Fi
bia c b o a 2 ^ 2 e N M O O Y e N *
32 a j c u o y cmn oj6 om 6 e n e Fi
AAAY FipCUMe CAMAgTC MnTBT*
34 eTMHAY Figp^T ?Fi M M oyeiooye
[X]
e T N A q p c u o y - e i m[ h] ti e n e i c p o q
2 e N T A q A A q [F i6 ]i n g A A i e y c - F i t a a
e i 6 e RTpo<J)H A q e i N e Fin T ln*
4 e2P^-[T] Fl T o e i M - t a T 2 tua?c T e
e e e N U j o o r t Figp^-T 2 R n e ' f i c o c M o c
6 [ F i ] e e f i N T B t ' T T A N T iice iM e
n o c A e e q p o e ic oyBH n e q 6 o
8 pe6 epoN - n e e N o y g A A je y c
e q o y c u a je e 6 o n F i eq p [A ]u ?e
10 x e K A A C e q a o m ic n - u p [A q ]N o [y x e ]
rA p Fi 2^-2 NTpo<J>H M n e M T O
12 BOA F iN e N B A A e N A n e 'f ic o
c m o c Ne- e q o y c u a j e e T p e N
14 p e m e y H e r e o y i F im o o y
n tR jc i f n e F ih a t c R o y
16 K o y e i F i q d c u n e m m o n FigpAT
2N T e q n A g p e e e H r t - F i q e m e
18 m m o n 6 b o a gfi o y M F n * e A e y
e e p o c - F iq x iT F i e 2 o y N e y
20 m n t* 2 M 2 * A e q q jA N p A 2 T F i t a p
R 2 P^f 2 R o y T p o < J)H o y c u -f -
22 TANAI*KH TAP T { p } e C T p e < N > p
e m e y M e i e n ice c e e n e -
24 e e A H 6 e cpA p eN a Y f i T e f 2 e
30,17 poison : Here and in line 23 the word is nA 2PC , elsewhere

rendered medicine. In Greek <p<4pfiaxov can also have both senses.
AUTHORITATIVE TEACHING 2 9 ,2 5 - 3 0 ,2 4 277
food (xpocpr]). He smells it

26 and pursues its odor.
But when ( o t o c v ) he eats it,
28 the hook
hidden within the food (xpo^)
30 seizes him and brings him up by
force (pia) out of the deep waters.
32 No man is able, then,
to catch that fish
34 down in the deep waters,
[30 ]
except (d for the trap
2 that the fisherman (aXieii?) sets.
By the ruse of food (xpocpir)) he brought the fish
4 up on the hook. In this very
way we exist in this world ( x o <t (j .o <;),
6 like fish. The adversary (dvTixeifzevo?, -f- 8e)
spies on us, lying in wait
8 for us like a fisherman (akieuc,),
wishing to seize us, rejoicing
10 that he might swallow us. For (yap) [he places]
many foods (Tpo<pyj) before
12 our eyes, (things) which belong to this
world (xo<T[i.o<;). He wishes to make us
14 desire (s7ii0u{ielv) one of them
and to taste only a
16 little, so that he may seize us
with his hidden poison and bring
18 us out of freedom (-sXeii0 epo<;)
and take us into
20 slavery. For (yap) whenever he catches us
with a single food (xpo^),
22 it is indeed (yap) necessary (avdyxTj) for to
desire (smOofAeiv) the rest.
24 Finally, then, such things
30,17-20 "freedom.. .slavery : Cf. Gal 5 :1 .

22-23 MS reads T p e q p e n i Y M e i .
q jcu n e FiTpo<J>H H n M o y
26 naY a c Ne f?Tpo<J)H eq?Aq
6 cup 3 epoN n ^ h t o y n 6 i n A i
28 1BO AO C' o jo p it MSN OJAq
N o y jc e WoYA-YnH e n e K
30 ^HT* q?ANTKM KA2 FI^HT**
6 T B 6 OYK-OYei FI^CUB FlT
32 n e e i b i o c Flq 6 u >n e m m o < k >
2PAT FJ NeqnA^pe- Aycu
34 m FIFIccdc T e n ie Y M iA FI
o yo jth n HKqpoYq?OY
\M]
MMOK. F l^ H T C * A YCt) O Y M F l f
2 M A e i O M F lT * - O Y ^ O Y U J O Y "
O Y -X ice FJ^ht*- OYK.OJ2 eq
4 kcl>2 e K e K a > 2 O Y C A e ie FI
cu )m a * o y m FIt^ Y P p cp M [e ]
6 naY t h p o y n o Y N o 6 T e tmFIt*
a t* c o o y n - AYto tmFIt*at*0
8 c e - naY 6 e t h p o y F lT e e i^ e
u^[a] p e n a n t i K e i m n o c 6 ap
10 6 o [y ] k a a o jc - F lq c o p o Y c b o a
RnM TO c b o a RnccoM A- eq
12 O YCuqje eTpe<J>Hi* n t 'I'y
x h p e K T c e^cFl o y x m m ooy
14 F lq jco A K c- F le e F Io y o c im
e q c c u K m m oc FJbia ^FI o y
16 mFIt*at*cooyn- eqpATTATA
MMOC q?ANTCti) MnKAKON-
18 R cm i c e F l^ e N K A p n o c F ie y
ah* F lc f n o A iT e Y e c e A i
20 nacoj^M e cn H i* F Ica z ^Z
30,25 the food of death : For the expression Tpo<pT) t o o OocvAtou cf.
Orig. Comm, in Joh. XX.43 (GCS IV, p. 387, line 4); it seems to
be an extension of the common metaphor of tasting death as
in Jn 8:52; Mt 16:28, and other passages. Contrast 35,14.
32 MS reads MMON.
31,4 rivals : The Coptic word is the same as the noun for envy.
AUTHORITATIVE TEACHING 3 0 ,2 5 - 3 1 ,20 279
become the food (xpo<p^) of death.

26 Now (8s) these are the foods (xpo<p7)) with which
the devil (8 t.d|3oXo<;) lies in wait for us.
28 First (+ (j l s v ) he
injects a pain (Xu7nrj) into your
30 heart until you have heartache
on account of a small thing of
32 this life (|3io<;), and he seizes <you>
with his poisons. And
34 afterwards (he injects) the desire (em0u(jtia)
of a tunic so that you will pride yourself
[3i]
in it, and
2 love of money, pride,
vanity, envy that
4 rivals another envy, beauty of
body (<ro)(i.a), fraudulence.
6 The greatest of all these
are ignorance and ease.
8 Now all such things
the adversary (dcvxixsitxevoi;) prepares
10 beautifully (xaXco<;) and spreads out
before the body (crcofta),
12 wishing to make the mind of the soul (<J>ux^)
incline her toward one of them
14 and overwhelm her, like a hook
drawing her by force (|3ia) in
16 ignorance, deceiving (aroxTav)
her until she conceives evil (xaxov)
18 and bears fruit (xap7to?) of matter (uXyj)
and conducts herself (7ioXt.Teus(T0ai)
20 in uncleanness, pursuing many
fraudulence : The Coptic is uncertain both in reading and in

meaning. A Subachmimic form of the root ( ^ o o y p e ) (Crum,
737b) is supposed here.
"ease : The Coptic is not elsewhere attested; it would mean "the
condition of being without toil, hence "ease.
The subject of "overwhelm may be either mind (line 12) or
adversary (line 9).
28o NAG HAMMADI CODEX V I,J
F l N e n i e y M i v 2 nmfjt*
22 Ma.ei t o N ^ o y o - e p e n 2 A ^ 6
RCA.pK.IK.ON CCDlt M M OC 2 ^
24 o yM N 'fa.'fco o yN - T 'l'y x H
A 6 N T O C FTACOCI 'I'TTe R NA.T'
26 acm m c i e 2 N n ie o c e y
2 o a c 6 n c n p o c o y o e iq ? -
28 N e A c ^ i c o o y N tica .6 ia .
A.CqiTC CBO A M M O O y xc
30 q j a m e 2 n o y n o A iT e ia .
R B p p e - m R R c c d c q?a.c
32 K2iT2i<t>poNi R n e e iB io c
e y n p o c o y o e ic p n e - R e
34 O JIN 6 N C 2l NITpO<j)H 6TNJ1
.x i t c 2 o y N e n c o N ^ -
[A B ]
NCKC1) RCCUC R N ITpO<j)H R lC p o q

2 n c jc i c o o y N e n e c o y o e iN - e c
H o o q j e e c K H K a .2 H o y R n e T
4 KOCMOC- epTeC2BCO > M Me
6 o a mm oc R n e c c a .N 2 o y N -
6 e p e n e c jc i2 B o o c R q je A e e tf
t o fta > a > c 2 n oyM RT*ca.eie Fi
8 2 h1*' 0yAJk.2A.e2 Rca.pa. 5 -
F icjci c o o y N e n e c B A e o c R e
10 noji* e 2 o y N e T e c A y A y - ep[e]
n e c n o iM H N a.2epaiTq e n p o -
12 R q ? m e 6 e T H p o y mn R q jc u c
e N T A .c jciT o y 2 m n e T k o c
14 m o c - R n o yK CU B n
oyTBa. R c o r t R x a .p ic f i e o
16 o y - AC'I' R nccuM A e T 0 0 T < 0 y >
RN eN T a.yT a .a .q n a .c e y j c i
18 cym e- epeRnpairM aLTeyTH C
R R ccd m a 2 m o o c e2P*.T e y p i
32,6-8 The bridal clothing is a well-known Biblical image, e.g., Rey

19:7-8.
16 MS reads e T O O T q .
AUTHORITATIVE TEACHING 3 1 ,2 1 - 3 2 ,1 9
desires (e m O u fu a ),
22 covetousnesses, while
fleshly (aapxixov) pleasure draws her in
24 ignorance. But (8e) the soul (ûx^)
she who has tasted these things
26 realized that sweet passions (tox0 o<;)
are transitory (7tpo<;
28 She had learned about evil (xaxta);
she went away from them and she entered
30 into a new conduct (iroXtTeia).
Afterwards she
32 despises (x a x a 9 p o v s iv ) this life ((3fo<;)
because it is transitory (7tpo<; + ) . And she
34 looks for those foods (xpo<pvj) that will
take her into life,
[32 ]
and leaves behind her those deceitful foods (xpo<pyj).
2 And she learns about her light, as she
goes about stripping off this
4 world (x 6 d(xo<;), while her true garment
clothes her within,
6 (and) her bridal clothing
is placed upon her in beauty of
8 mind, not in pride of flesh (<i<xp).
And she learns about her depth ((id0 o<;) and
10 runs into her fold (auXrj), while
her shepherd (not|r/)v) stands at the door.
12 In return for all the shame and scorn, then,
that she received in this
14 world (xocrfioi;), she receives
ten thousand times the grace (xapm) and
16 glory. She gave the body (aSy.x) to
those who had given it to her, and they were
18 ashamed, while the dealers (7tpaY|JiaTeuT7)<;)
in bodies (craifia) sat down and wept
32,11 Cf. Rev 3:20.

20 Me- oce m t io y u ? 6 m 6 o m flp

n p a .r M a .T e y e c A .i FI c a n i c c o
22 ma. eTM may* o y T e R n o Y < > fl
a a a y F ie ie n qjtucuT* Flctuq-
24 AYo?Tt FiêN N od F i^ lc e o j a n
T O Y n A A C c e m t t c c u m a FiTe
26 ei'f'YX H - e Y O Y O Jty e eptu
2 "? FiT 'f'Y X H Fi^ 2 P ^ T O C e ^ P * ! '
28 a y -X I c y m e 6 e 2pAT Fi n o y
2UJB- ay1* o c e F i n e N T A Y
30 q?Tt i c e e p o q - m t t o y m M e
oceo y F I t a c R m a y F Io y c c u
32 MA RTTNATIK.ON FIAÔPATON-
e Y M e e y e oce anon ne n ec
34 n o iM H N e f M o o N e R m o c -
R n o Y ^ M e A e oce c c o o y N
F iic e ^ iH e c ^ H r t e p o o Y ta T
2 F iT A n e c n o iM H N F I a a h o in o c
T C A B O C e p o c Fi O Y C O O Y N -
4 NA'f A e F i T O O Y e T O F iN A T C O
o y n e Y t y iN e a n W ca nN O Y
6 T e - o y A e e Y 2 0 i*2 "? *.n F I c a
n o Y M A F i c y a m e e i* q ?o o T t
8 2 M o Y ^ N A n A Y C ic - a a a a e Y
M O O O j e j f l O y M N f T B N H" n a T
IO e T R MAY C 6 2 0 0 Y FI2 0 Y 0 6 N
2 e N o c - oce q j o p r t m c n c e
12 2 ' |*2:^ nNO YTe - oce
noYTCUM Fi 2Ht n e fc tu K
14 R M o o y e2PAT e T O Y M F i t o Y
a!ht* e T p e y e i p e Rmoc-
32,26 strike down : pcD^T G^p^JT. I*1 other contexts ( e . g . , 30,20)

the same or a similar expression is rendered catch, in keeping
with the fishing metaphor.
32 spiritual body : Cf. 1 Cor 15:44.
33,2 true shepherd : The precise expression is not Johannine but in-
AUTHORITATIVE TEACHING 32 , 20- 33,15 28 3
20 because they were not able to

do any business (TupaYtxaTeoeaQai) with
22 that body (<j>[j.a), nor (outs) did they find
any (other) merchandise except it.
24 They endured great labors
until they had shaped (7rXd<j<reiv) the body (crwâ) of this
26 soul ('J'ux*)). wishing to strike
down the invisible (aopaTo<;) soul (û/ yj).
28 They were therefore ashamed of their
work; they suffered the loss of the one
30 for whom they had endured labors. They did not realize
that she has an
32 invisible (aopaxov) spiritual (7tveofi.aTixov) body (otofxa),
thinking: We are her
34 shepherd (7toi[r/)v) who feeds her.
But (e) they did not realize that she knows
[33]
another way, which is hidden from them. This
2 her true (aXr)0ivo<;) shepherd (7coifjw)v)
taught her in knowledge.
4 But (Ss) thesethe ones who are ignorant
do not seek after God.
6 Nor (oOSe) do they inquire about
their dwelling-place, which exists
8 in rest (avdc7tao<ju;), but (aXXa) they
go about in bestiality. They
10 are more wicked than the
pagans (e'Ovoc), because first of all (+ fziv) they
12 do not inquire about God, for
their hardness of heart draws
14 them down to make them
exercise their cruelty.
vites comparison with Jn 1 0 : 1 1 and the Johannine use of dcXigOtvd?

in other contexts.
33.4 Final t is a scribal correction of *f*.
4-7 For polemic against those who do not inquire or seek after God,
cf. iQS V ,n (the men of falsehood).
r5 "exercise their cruelty : Lit. to their cruelty, to do it.
16 aycd o n CY cya.N 6iN e n ice

oya. e q cp iN e e T B e n e q o Y
18 o cA ei- q j A p e n o Y T C D M FI
2Hi* p e N e p re i e ^ o Y N e
20 npcuM e b tR m a Y ' e q T R
KApcuq A e e q c y m e - o ja y
22 O T B e q 6 b o a ^ I t o o t c Fi
TOYMFitoYAêiHi*- e\
24 M e e Y e oce F i T A Y e i p e R n o y
A r A e o N n A Y k a i t o i r e Fi
26 cyH pe Ne R ttai a b o a o c -
R ^ e e N o c r A p ^ c d o y ce*f*
28 M FiTN A- A Y < 1> C e C O O Y N
oce U N o y T e e t ^ F i R n H y e
30 o j o o r t - n i c u t R t t t h pJj e q
ococe e N e y e ia c o a o n b t o y
32 o Y C u q jt R h o o y
Ta X ]
R t t o y c c u t R A e e n A o r o c oce
2 e Y N A ^ o t^ ? Rcai N e q ^ o o Y e -
taT 6 e T e e R npcoM e FSa n o h
4 t o c e q c c u T R M N enTCO^R-
q o R A e FiN A T C 0 0 Y N enMA
6 eN TAYTA^M eq e p o q - ay<*>
R n e q q jm e pAT nTA cp e
8 o e iu r oce e p e n e p n e FiAcp R
HA- nAT e'j'NABCUK FiTAOYCD
IO q jt NTAêATTIC W^pAT Fi^HT^}-
e T B e T e q m nt*an o h t o c 6 e
12 q ^ o o Y F J2 Y Y2C noc-
oce T i ^ e e N o c rA p c e c o o y N
14 F ie iH FIbcdk e n o Y p n e Fi co Ne
eTNATAKo F ic e o Y c u a jt R
33,16-27 Cf. Mt 23:13.

21 Translation follows Funk.
28-32 Cf. Ac 17:24-31; Rom 1:19-21.
34,1-7 Cf. Rom 10:14-17.
AUTHORITATIVE TEACHING 3 3 ,1 6 -3 4 ,1 5 28 5
16 Furthermore, if they find someone else

who asks about his salvation,
18 their hardness of
heart sets to work (evep yciv) upon
20 that man.
And (8s) if he does not stop asking, they
22 kill him by
their cruelty,
24 thinking that they have done a
good thing (ayaOov) for themselves. Indeed (xaixoi ye)
26 they are sons of the devil (8 ioc|3oXo<;)!
For (yap) even the pagans (0vo<;) give
28 charity, and they know
that God who is in the heavens
30 exists, the Father of the universe,
exalted over their idols (sEStoXov), which
32 they worship.
[34 ]
But (8e) they have not heard the word (koyoc,), that
2 they should inquire about his ways.
Thus the senseless (avoTjro?) man
4 hears (+ (iiv) the call,
but (-8e) he is ignorant of the place
6 to which he has been called. And
he did not ask during the preaching:
8 Where is the temple
into which I should go and worship
10 my hope (eXm<;) ?
On account of his senselessness (-<scv6 t)to <;), then,
12 he is worse than a pagan (&0vo<;),
for (yap) the pagans (e0vo<;) know
14 the way to go to their stone temple,
which will perish, and they worship
34.3-32 For the judgment upon the "senseless man, cf. Pist. Soph. I ll,
ch. 124.
8-io The association of hope with the temple is also found in Heb
6:19.
NAG HAMMADI CODEX V I,J
16 n e y e iA C D A O N e p e ^ T H o y
k .h e p o q .xe f iT o q n e t o y 2 A
18 m e - n e e i A N O H T o c A e F iT A y
T A O je o e i c y n Aq R n A o r o c *
20 e y f c b o ) n A q x e a j m e fii*2ot*
2"? f i c i F i ^ t o o y e c t k n a b c d k
22 t c u o y eMFi 6 e \ x x y
C N A N o y q F le e RneTôJB -
24 x e c y iN A x e T o y c i A . R n T t u M
F i ^ H t c* f k.X'I' e^pA T e^cR
26 n e q N o y c - mFI T e N e p r e i
a F i T M F l t A . t c o o y N MFI
28 TTAAI MON ION NTUAiNH
eyK tu an R n e q N o y c
30 e T t u o j N e^ p A T x e N e q ^ e c
Tq e q c y iN e H q R M e A Teq
32 2 eA T TIC T 'J'Y X H A F I t o c
F iA o r iK H F i T A C 2 e c ' f < C > e c q j m e

2 a c jc i c o o y N e n N o y T e -
a c m o k ^ c e c 2 Ai*2 ? e c p T A
4 A A in c u p i nccuM A- e c ^ t T e
F iN e c o y e p H T e flp c o o y
6 F ifle Y A fre A iC T H C e c
x i c o o y N e n iA T F l p A T q -
8 AC6lNeHTeCA.NA.TOAH
A C M O T N 6 C z?*'i net
10 m o t Fi R M O q - A CN O JCC
Zm n M a W a j e A e e t - A c o y
12 cum b o a 2 ^ n J lI i t n o n e r e
N e C 2 K A l1 * R M o q - a c j c i
14 6BOA TpO<J>H NNATMOy*
a c 6 i n R n e T c c p m e F lc c u q -
MS reaxis n t a C 2 C t [ ], but lacuna is too small for C.

wearing out her feet after": The metaphor is somewhat uncertain;
e c f t T e F i N e c o y e p H T e l p c u o y , without c b o a , nay
possibly mean simply "moving her feet to and fro, or "following
16 their idol (eiStoXov), while their hearts

are set on it because it is their hope (eX-ru^).
18 But (te) to this senseless man (avo7]xo<;)
the word (Xoyo<;) has been preached,
20 teaching him: Seek and
inquire about the ways you should go,
22 since there is nothing else
that is as good as this thing.
24 The result is that (tva) the substance (oucria) of hardness
of heart strikes a blow upon
26 his mind (vou<;), along with the force (evepyeia)
of ignorance and
28 the demon (Saiôviov) of error (-rcXavy)).
They do not allow his mind (vou<;)
30 to rise up, because he was wearying
himself in seeking that he might learn about his
32 hope (lXm<;). But (te) the rational (Xoytxyj) soul (ôx^)
[35]
who (also) wearied herself in seeking
2 she learned about God.
She labored with inquiring, enduring
4 distress (xaXewutopsiv) in the body (crtojia), wearing out
her feet after
6 the evangelists (euayyeXiaxr)^),
learmng about the Inscrutable One.
8 She found her rising (avaxoXrj).
She came to rest in him who
10 is at rest. She reclined
in the bride-chamber. She ate
12 of the banquet (Sswcvov) for which
she had hungered. She partook
14 of the immortal food (xpocpYj).
She found what she had sought after.
35.6 the evangelists : On the almost exclusively Christian use of the

word, see T D N T II, 736-37 (G. Friedrich). MS reads Fi N the
dots indicating erasure.
8 her rising": On the meaning of dcvaxoXr) see T D N T I, 352-53
(H. Schlier); Lk 1:78; Philo Conf.ling. 60-63; Lampe, Lexicon, s.v.
16 acxi R t o n a N e c ^ ic e -
e p e n o y o e iN e Y n p p ic u o y
18 e^paJf e x c u c e M A q z cu T T t-
na.T 6 T 6 n c u q n e n e o o y
20 mH na.MA.2Te MFi n o y t u
Nj* 6 B O A OJA 6 N 62 N T 6
22 N ie N e ^ ^ A M H N :
A Y 6 N T IK O C
24 A o ro c:
AUTHORITATIVE TEACHING 3 5 ,1 6 -2 4 289
16 She received rest from her labors,

while the light that shines forth
18 upon her does not sink.
To it belongs the glory
20 and the power and the
revelation for ever and
22 ever. Amen.
Authoritative (auOevuxdi;)
24 Teaching (Xoyo?)
19
VI,4:36,1-48,15
F r e d e r i k W is s e a n d F r a n c is E. W illia m s *

65-
Fischer, K. M. "Der Gedanke unserer grossen Kraft (Noema): Die
vierte Schrift aus Nag-Hammadi Codex V I. ThLZ 98 (1973),
170-75.
This tractate is titled both in superscription and subscription.
The initial title seems to be an expansion of the latter, intended to
explain it, and may well be the work of another writer. "Our great
Power is the documents Supreme Being, he who is "above all
powers (47,33-34). His thought, perception, "intellect, or
concept go unmentioned in the body of the work; the title may
have been derived from the incipit, which promises rewards to
"those who know our great Power. The document Doresse named
The Thought of Our Great Power is not this tractate, but V I,5,
an untitled excerpt from Platos Republic {Secret Books, p. 143).
As it now stands the document is a complete salvation-history
cast in an apocalyptic form, with a number of ideas and expressions
which would be congenial to Gnostics. It deals, in order, with crea
tion, the flood, the origin of evil, and work of a savior who descends
into Hades and humbles hostile archons, the attempt of an anti
christ figure to rule the world, and the final consummation. History
is schematized into three aeons: the aeon of the flesh (38,13-14),
destroyed by the flood; the natural aeon (39,16-18; 40,23-27),
during which the savior appears; and the indestructible aeon of
the future (43,11).
But the work bristles with difficulties. The text is often so unclear
as to suggest serious corruption. The reference of the pronouns is
sometimes vague (e.g., in 38,22.26.29-30), making it difficult to
identify the personae of the story. There are various grammatical
and logical inconsistencies. Although most of the narration is in the
* Frederik Wisse contributed the translation and transcription; Francis
E. Williams, the introduction. The notes are the work of both authors.
third person, nine passages employ an unidentified I ; these in

variably display some inconsistency with the rest of the narrative,
or interrupt its flow. We also find occasional exhortations phrased
in the second person plural, and some of these seem to stem from a
thought-world at variance with that of their context.
Theologically the tractate reads like a hodge-podge of incompat
ible systems. At one extreme we find obviously gnostic mythology
(38,6-9); at the other an apparent warning against the Anomoean
heresy (39,33-40,9), two identifications of the savior with the Logos
(43,25-28; 44,2-4), and other orthodox-sounding passages. The term
"aeon' is used in a confusing and inconsistent fashion (e.g., in
43,3-20); the consistency of the accounts of creation and salvation
is dubious (36,3-5; 37I -I 9; 37.35-38,41 46,6-21; 48,7-8). Archons
appear abruptly as the saviors opponents without having been
mentioned in connection with creation. Technical terms and expres
sions not obviously compatible with the thought of the document
as a whole appear once, and thereafter go unmentioned (e.g., in
36,15-16.24-26; 40,29-30; 42,17-18; 44,32-34; 45.1-3)- The translator
has suggested that the work is composite; identification of its
Grundschrift will be a task for patient scholarship.
At this point neither the tractates date nor its provenance is clear,
though the reference to the Anomoeans provides a rough terminus
a quo after the middle of the fourth century, and 44,2-4 suggests that
its author lived west of Palestine, but both may be interpolations.
The account of creation, including the origin of the soul, seems
to be gnostic (37,34-38,9). So does the characterization of the Old
Testament god as father of the flesh (38,19-20). As in many gnos
tic documents, archons are the enemy (43,29-44,2 etc.); the commu
nity rejects what they have created (48,7-13). Other ideas in the
tractate seem to tend in a gnostic direction: entrance into the flesh
is defilement (38,17-19; 39,16-19), and the sons of matter are
destroyed at the end (47,7-8). He who knows the great Power will
become invisible (to escape the archons scrutiny?) (36,1-3). To
attain final beatitude is to "become as reflections in (the great
Powers) light (47,23-24).
Because of its complex literary history "The Concept of Our
Great Power is difficult to classify. Tentatively we may call it a
Christian gnostic apocalypse, or else a Christian apocalypse with
gnosticizing features. An ultimate origin in Jewish apocalyptic is
not impossible.
VI ,4 :36,1 -48,15
[A]?
TSCOHCIC Ra i ^ n o i^:
2 TIN OH m^l TItux 6 T\6 xm:
C x y cu n er u x c o y w H t R n o 6
r 6 o m q N ^ q j c u n e Hxzopx
[ t ] o n * x y cu m m R k c d ^
6 N ^ q j p o K ^ q - x\<D
t b b o * x y w quxqcvre s b o a
8 TlXMXZTe N IM FlTHTFI* XS
O Y O N N IM e T e p e T 3iM O pc|)H
10 u x o \ w u 2 s b o a R ^ H T c j qux
o y x x l j c i n cxa)q F I ^ o o y
12 o)x q j e j c o y c d t s R p o M i r e *
S T e N e e i z TOP e p o o y e T p e Y
14 c e y z n ^ e i e t h p q * xya>
R t R n x 6 T\6 x m- %inx
16 ^ce e c a L C ^ e i R n e K p ^ N Z ? ^
36,2 The great Power, also called "the Power who is exalted above
all powers (47,11-12.33-34), appears to be the supreme God. In
Hipp. Ref. V I.4.13 the "great indefinite Power" is the supreme
being. In Ac 8 :10 and Epiph. Pan. 2 1.1.2 "great Power is
God's highest emanation. Cf. also Paraph. Shem (VII, 1) 10,20.
5-6 Cf. 40,9-23; 46,11-12.16-18.29-32.
6-7 Cf. 46,21-32. "Purify," here and in 36,20, must mean purge ;
cf. xoc0apeiv in 40,19. The subject in line 3 may continue here
(so Krause and Fischer).
8 or "all your powers." Many or all of the sections that use the
second person plural may have been added by the final redactor;
cf. 36,27-37,5; 37,23-29; 39,33-4 ,9 ; 42,23-31; 45,29-3-
9 The question of the speaker's identity is complicated because
the tractate is composite and the text in places corrupt. The
first person singular also occurs in 36,13.25; 37,14.16.32.34; 38,7;
40,28; 45,12.16; 46,6.7.14; 47,13.14. In 36,9 the savior is not
the speaker (cf. 40,28). Like the great Power, the speaker has
writings (36,15; 37,15), and is associated with the light (47,Io;
37,34); knowledge of him is conducive to salvation (36,3; 46,6-7;
V I , * : 3 6 ,1 -4 8 ,1 5
[3]6
The Perception (afoSyjon?) of Understanding (Siavoia).
2 The Concept (voyjfxa) of the Great Power.
He who would know our great
4 Power will become invisible (a6parov).
And fire
6 will not be able to consume him. But it will
purify and destroy
8 all your (pi.) possessions. For
every one in whom my form ((xopcpY))
10 will appear will be
saved, from (the age of) seven days
12 up to one hundred and twenty years,
(those) whom I <compelled> to
14 gather the whole destruction,and
the writings of our great Power, in order that (tva)
16 she may inscribe your (sg.) name
47,13-14). This suggests that the speaker is identical with the

great Power; cf. A p . Jo h n (II, 1) 14,21-15,9, which indicates
that "m y image (cf. 38,7), which the powers desire to see, is
that of the supreme God.
36,10-11 For related sayings cf. Gos. Thom. (II ,2) 33,5-10 (logion 4); Hipp.
Ref. V.2.
12 "one hundred and twenty years : Cf. Gen 6:3. In 43,21-22 the
number 120 is associated with perfection.
13*14 The antecedent of the relative pronoun is obscure. The sentence
shows no relationship either to what precedes or to what fol
lows. The translation, "destruction" (3161 e), is uncertain. The
word could come from e ("fall ) or from a .e ("end ).
M-17 The sentence is incomplete and unrelated to the preceding or
following sentence. The second person singular is used only
here and in 43,25-28, another incomplete sentence.
15-17 The hero is "written in the glory" in Zost. (VIII, 1) 129 ,13; cf.
also Lk 10 :20 ; Phil 4 :3 ; Heb 12 :2 3. The subject may be our
our great Power: 6 0 M is fem.
2M t t T J n o 6 Fi o y o e i n a.ya>
18 F i c j c o K o y e b o a T ib i N o y e
n i N o i x m R N oy^B H ye*
20 . x e K A A c e y N A .T o y B a k .o y
c e j c o p o y e B O A - a .y a ) c e o
22 jc N o y F ic e c o o y ^ o y
t t t o t t o c e T e MMfl \ x x y
24 F i^ H T q NJk.y e p o < T > - ak.yo) T e
TflNA.Nak.Y e p o T - 3k.yo) R t c
26 T F i C O B T e FiN B T flM A . FiqjCD
n e 2 ^ T f iN o b r 6 o m * c o y
28 c u n n e N T A .q B o > K j c e n c u c
A .q < y c u n e - f t N a . xe eTe
30 T N A .c o y a > N n e T A N j i.q )c u
n e - x e x<i) T e e F ip N o e i
32 M M o q x e oyxa) Fieoyak.N n e
TTXi cdn eTMMak.y- fi o y
[All
xu) m m in 6 n e - h x e e[NT*q]
2 c p c u n e Fi*.q) e T B [e o y ]
T e T f i u p i N e a n x e a.qj [ R m i n g ]
4 e T e T N a L q jc u n e m m o q [- ak.qj]
F le e F iT o q A .T T F lq ^ c u n e [-]
6 a . p m o e i x e oyxa) F la ie iH n e
n i M O o y x e o y A i* q jiT q n e
8 FJak.-fTe2A.q- m n T e q a ^ p x H
MFi T e q e a iH e q q i 2 ^ n a 2 ' e q
10 N i q e 2m n iH p ' n a J e T o y fl
2 H T q F i6 i Fi N o y T e MFi F)ak.f
12 r e A o c - A ycu n e i* .x o c e e
36,17-18 It appears that unrelated sentences were joined together. The

object is introduced by Fi 6 1, which is very unusual. The only
possible antecedent for their is in 36,13-14.
22-24 Cf. Jude 6; 1 En 10:4-5; Iren. Haer. I.4.1; Thom. Cont. (11,7)
142,13.34-39; Paraph. Shem (VII,x) 48,17-19.
24 MS reads e p o q . Sees him or it makes n o s e n s e in the con
text, although sees himself could. The emendation is suggested
by the contrast implied in 36,25. Krause emends to epooy
( them ).
CONCEPT OF OUR GREAT POWER 3 6 ,1 7 -3 7 ,1 2 297
in our great light', and

18 may bring to an end their thoughts (eirtvoia)
and their works,
20 in order that they may be purified,
and be scattered, and be
22 destroyed, and be gathered in
the place ( to to n ; ) where no one
24 sees <m e>. But you (pi.)
will see me and
26 you will prepare your dwelling places
in our great Power. Know
28 how (too?) what has departed
came to be, in order that (tva) you
30 may know how to discern (voeiv)
what exists to become:
32 of what appearance
that aeon is, or ($j)
[37]
what kind it is, or (/))
2 in what way [it] came into being. [Why]
do you not ask what [kind]
4 you will become ?
(or), rather, how you came into being?
6 Discern (voetv) what size
this water is, that it is incomprehensibly immeasurable,
8 both its beginning (apx^)
and its end, supporting the earth (and)
10 blowing in the air (dWjp) where
the gods and the angels
12 are. But
36,31-37.1 Cf. A p. Jo h n (II,x) 1,24-25.29.

37.6-7 Cf. 43,4-8.
6-12 Cf. Gen 1 : 7 ; Ps 136 :6 .
8-9 or M ftT e q A PXH M flT e q a.H, I t has no beginning, no end
(Krause and Fischer).
n a T t h p o y e p e e p T e F I^ h
14 T q MR n o y a .e iN - A.ya> n a
c ^ a T e y o y o N j s b o a F l^ H T q
16 A 6 IT A A Y e y A IA K O N IA
k t k t i c i c fif ic a p a ie - .x e
18 h m K 6 om K t a a a y c u ^ e e p A
Tq o yeu p W neTH hay* o y
20 T e RmFI 6 o m R t t a ic u n n c u n J
FlO Yeqj TlBXAAq- eyFlTA q
22 R m ay R neTW ^H Tq eqpN O
e i 2 ^ 0 Y n e i* 0 Y A A B - t o t c
24 N A Y eTTNA fJ T 6 T t J R M e
x e o y e i t o n e - AqTAAq K
26 F lp c u M e x e e y n x x i c d n J
b o a F l^ H T q W ^ o o y n im
28 e y f lT A q R n e q c u N j FI^h
T q - e q 'f n a y t h po Y " t o
30 T e n K A K e m Kn e M K T e
A q jc e nK cu ^"?- a y 
[a h ]
[A Y ]cp A n K e q ^ c u jcW q jc u n e -
2 [a y ] cu t t a ic d n t h pq R t b t k t i
[c ic ] aycu n o y 6 o < m> FI t a
4 [ n ^ C D ^ " ? a )c u n e c b o a R
m o o y - A -fd o M u jc u n e Fi
6 T M H T e FiFidO M - AYCU A N
6 om pem YM ei b n a y eTA
37,17 or "o f the creation to the fleshly ones.

25 The translation, "where he is, is uncertain.Krause divides
the phrase o y e i T O n e , and translates "he is a great father.
28-29 Cf. Jn 5:26.
29-38,14 This section is obscure. 37,29-34, if part oftheGrundschrifi,
may represent the work of salvation before creation, as in
Paraph. Shem; 37,35-38,4 represents the creation of the aeon of
CONCEPT OF OUR GREAT POWER 3 7 ,1 3 -3 8 ,7 299
feax and light are in him who is exalted

above all these, and
through him are my writings revealed.
i6 I have provided them as a service (Siaxovta)
for the creation ( x t Jctk; ) of the physical things ( c ra p i;) , for
18 it is not possible for anyone to stand
without that One, nor (ofrre)
20 is it possible for the aeon to live
without him, since he possesses
22 what is in it, discerning (voetv) (it)
in purity. Then ( t o t s )
24 behold the Spirit (7tveu(xa) and know
where he is. He gave him (the Spirit) to
26 men in order that they may receive life
from him every day,
28 since he has his life within
him, giving to them all. Then ( t o t e )
30 the darkness and Hades
received the fire. And
32 he (the darkness) will release from it what is mine.
His eyes were not able
34 to endure my light.
The spirits (7uveufia) and the waters moved.
[38]
[And] the remainder came also into being,
2 and the whole aeon of the creation ( x t
and their <powers> from which
4 [the] fire came into being.
The Power came into
6 the midst of the powers. And the
powers desired (sm0u[xeiv) to see my
the flesh; 38,5-9 represents the creation of the soul. For the myth
see A p. Jo h n (II, 1) 14 ,2 1-15 ,9 ; Epiph. Pan. 2 3 .1.4 ; Iren. Haer.
1.24 .1; Treat. Seth (V II,2) 51,24 -31. Elsewhere in the tractate
the powers are called archons.
Cf. A p. Jo h n (BG,2) 23,1-3.
MS reads 6 0 N -
8 ftKOJN- A-Y40 ^t'J'YXH Q) 03

ne H n ecTYno c* n a J ne
10 n ? (U B e T A .2 NeajA-YtDTt epoc>Y R
16 2 eN N ^ H20 Y 2 R t i c t i c i c -
2 o t a .n ra.p FlTA.p0Y.xa.2M0Y
18 WTA.pOYBtt)K eÔYN 6TCA.
pA.3 ^ycd n e i c o f H tca.
20 p i5 n M o o y i q e i p e R n eq
2 * j t m m i n M M o q - 2 0 T A . N rxp
22 RTA.peq6FJ N tD je e q o F e Y
C 6 B H C e q M n q j A - A.ycu
24 n e it o f flTca.pa .3 eq p ^Y
n o n c c e FFA .fre A o c-
26 a^Y410 *qTA.qje oeiqp F It Y
c e B e ii. flq je .xoycDTe FI
28 poM ne- ^ycd HneAAAY
cojt H N^q- v y a )
30 m io F n o y < 5 ib c u to c Rape-
a.Y<D neN TA -qdFlTq A.qbcdk.
32 e ô Y N e p o c - a.y u j ^.mc*.
t ^ k a y c m o c qpam e-
Ell
3iYtu FiTeTê a.n co 2 oY[-x]*.ei
mR N e q a ^ H p e - x e e N e [ p ] e R n e
< t > 6 i b o j t o c qpw ne eTpepcoM e
bcuk eÔ YN e p o c 1 N enM O
38,13-14 Perhaps the giants of Gen 6:4 (LXX). The phraseology of the
verse in the L X X may have influenced the strange use of aeon"
here.
15-16 Cf. the life-spans in Gen 5.
17-18 Cf. Gen 6:1-8. See also 39,16-33.
19-20 The father of the flesh is the Old Testament god.
CONCEPT OF OUR GREAT POWER 3 8 ,8 -3 9 ,4 301
8 image (eixcov). And the soul (<J>ux*l) became

its (my images) replica (tuton;). This is
10 the thing that came into being. See
what it is like, that
12 before it comes into being it does not see,
because the aeon
14 of the flesh (crap) came to be in the great bodies (<jco(jLa).
And there were apportioned to them
16 great days in the creation (x-run<;).
For (yap) when (8xav) they had been corrupted
18 and had entered into the flesh (<rap),
the father of the flesh (<rap),
20 the water, avenged
himself. For (yap) when (Srav)
22 he had found Noah, who was pious (eu<re|3Y)<;)
(and) worthy,
24 the father of the flesh (<rdcp), who holds
the angels in subjection (uTcoracTcreiv),
26 preached piety (eu<js(3eia)
for one hundred and twenty
28 years. And no one
listened to him. And he
30 made a wooden ark (x i P<oto<;),
and he whom he had found entered
32 it. And the flood ( xoctocxXu <7{i 6<;)
took place.
[39]
And thus Noah was saved

2 with his sons. For if [indeed]
<the> ark (xt|3toT6<;) had not been meant for man
4 to enter, then the water
38,21-33 As the account stands the father of the flesh is the subject
throughout. A tradition similar to that of 1 Pet 3:19-20 may
lie behind this account.
22-23 Cf. Gen 6:9.
26 Noah himself does this in A p . Jo h n (II, 1) 29,2-5.
3I_32 Cf. Gen 7:7-13.
32-33 Cf. G en 7 :11- 12 .
oy M n K l T i K A Y C M O C NA.
6 cycune an- N +ê A q p N o e i
A qM eeye noy m H n o y
8 T e mFI F iA f r e A o c - a y c u F)6 o m
< R T > M f l T N 0 6 NNA.T TH PO Y '
IO AYH MFJ TTTpOTTOC*
ay N e q c A N e a ) R m o o y
2 W FlA IA M O N H " AYU) <|>A.Tt
14 N T C A p A S A qBCUA' A<t>(UB TJ
o y co t* H t 6 a m tu êp A T C j-
r6 to t i*NOY n ^ Y x ,K O C
F iA ic u n ^ c u c u q - O Y K o y e i
18 n e eqTH ^ mfj fI c c u m a -
e q j c n o n Fi 'J'y x h eqJC tu^M '
20 jc e n je cu ^ M F iq jo p it F J t ic t i
c i c A q 6 fi j c in a y c u A q x n e
22 e N e p r e i A n im - z *Z F lN e N e p
r e i A rjo p rH - t b a k .6 -
24 n K c u ^ -n < < J o n o c -o y m a c
T* O Y M l 5l*A IA B O A O C - OJCUC'
26 f) n 0 A M 0 C - n 6 A A mn n
q p o jc N e e y z o o y n a y
28 n H mH 2 e N 2 H*a-O N H 2 eN
M F In * e c x p o c - mn 2 eNTCU
30 AM* 2 N K p o q MFI êNOJCU
Ne- 2 N 2 ATt n jc i n 6 o n c -
32 eYKCU e^PA T KA TA N Y
O Y t u q je - e T i t t W F ) ic o t K -
39,9 MS reads t F) m FJt n o 6.

15 the work of the Power : Cf. 39,7-10.
16-17 The translation "next is uncertain. For "psychic cf. 1 Cor
2 :14 ; 15:44,46; Jas 3 :1 5 ; Jude 19; Iren. Haer.I.6.1-2; Hipp.
R e f VI.29.
16-19 This passage is obscure, and perhaps corrupt. It contains a
strange use of "aeon, as does 38,13-14. The reference may be
to the mixing of body and soul. Or, if aeon here is some sort of
a collective term referring to a group of supernatural beings,
CONCEPT OF OUR GREAT POWER 3 9 ,5 -3 3 303
of the flood (xaraxXuCT(xo<;) would

6 not have come. In this way he intended (voetv)
(and) planned to save the gods
8 and the angels, and the powers
<of the> greatness of all of these,
10 and wantonness (T pucprj) and the way of life ( t p o t o n ; ) ,
by moving them from
12 the aeon (and) nourishing them
in the permanent places (Siajiov^). And the judgment
14 of the flesh (aap) was unleashed.
Only the work of the Power stood up.
16 Next ( t o t e ) the psychic (4>uxi* 6<;)
aeon. It is a small one,
18 which is mixed with bodies (troika),
begetting in the souls (ûx^) (and) being defiled.
20 For the first defilement of the creation ( x t u t k ; )
found strength. And it begot
22 every work (evlpyeioc): many works (evlpyeta)
of wrath (6pyyj), anger,
24 envy, malice (<p0ovo<;), hatred,
slander (-&ta|3oXo<;), contempt
26 and war (7c6Xe[jio<;), lying and
evil counsels, sorrows (Xumr))
28 and pleasures ( yjS ovy) ) ,
basenesses (-atoxpo?) and defilements,
30 falsehoods and diseases,
evil judgments
32 that they abandon according to (xaxa) their
desires. Yet (ert) you (pi.) are sleeping,
it may mean that evil powers took possession of man. Cf. Hipp.
R e f VI.29, where it is said that some bodies are inhabited by
soul and demons.
39.32 or that they decree. . . Krause and Fischer translate the verb
passively.
33-40,1 Cf. G .W . MacRae, Sleep and Awakening in Gnostic Texts, in
Le o rig in i dello gnosticismo, ed. by Bianchi, pp. 496-507.
33-40,9 Cf. n o te o n 36,8. T h e fo o d a n d w a te r p r o b a b ly r e f e r to th e
e u c h a r is t a n d b a p tis m .
[M]
e x [e ]T fin e p e p a .c o y N e ^ c e
2 fly ^ T F i N O Y O Y 2 T H N 6 1 f j T 6
Thl-XI t n e R T e T F I O Y t O M F
4 p e R M ' *1 6 B O \ R n A o r o c
mF t t m o o y R n c o N g - a a c u t R
6 N ie n i Y M ia . e e o o y mR
N io Y t o q je mR n i a . n '2 'o m o io n -
8 2 eN M fiT * ep e cic 6 Y2 0 0 Y
e M flT a .Y pa.TO Y' ^ Y 40 M n e c
10 6 R 6 a m FI61 t m a a y F lT C A T e
a c H n K c u j? eJtR t 'P y x h mR
12 nKA^- A cp tu K ^ H < f i> He i
t h po Y e t q j o o T t H ^ h t c -
14 ^Y U J iT T e C M lN e {e B O A } CU-XR 
ayo > on e c T R 6 m e epcuK^'
16 C N A .T a k .K O C O Y A A C - A.YU)
qNAopcune R a .c c u m a .to n
18 F iN A T C C U M A - F iq p c U K j N 0 Y
AH 0 ) A N T 6 q p K A e A p i2 e R
20 TTTHpq- A Y tO TKA0IA THpc-
2 0 T A N TAP e q q ) A N T f l T R 6 N
22 aaay epcuK ^- qN AN O O Y^q
e p o q O Y ^ A q q jA N T e q o J C N q -
24 T O T 6 ^ R neTA ICU N 6 T 6 nAT
n e R 'J 'y x i k o n - qN A opcu
26 n e FJ61 n p c u M e e T e n e i*
c o o y n n e R t n o 6 r6 o m -
40,4-5 For "water of life" or "living waters," cf. SongofS 4:15; Jer
2 :1 3 ; 1 7 :13 ; Jn 4 :10 - 11; Rev 7 :17 ; 2 1:6 ; 22:17.
7 Anomoeans": Lit. "the dissimilar things (so Krause, and
similarly, Fischer). Lampe (Lexicon ) indicates that the word in
the Patristic period could refer to the Anomoean heresy. The
neuter used as a substantive would refer to the doctrines of
the Anomoeans. Epiphanius (Pan. 76.4.7-9) reports libertinism
among the Anomoeans.
8-9 Cf. Apoc. Pet. (VII,3) 74,15-22.
9-16 Cf. 40,16-23; 46,21-32. The meaning of "mother of fire is
obscure. In Paraph. Shem (VII, 1) 26,33-27,6 Physis gives birth
to fire.
CONCEPT OF OUR GREAT POWER 4 0 , 1 - 2 7 305
[40]
dreaming dreams. Wake up
2 and return,
taste and eat
4 the true food! Hand out the word (Xoyov)
and the water of life! Cease
6 from the evil lusts (s7u0u{Aia) and
desires and (the teachings of) the Anomoeans (avojxoiov),
8 evil heresies (-aipeai?)
that have no basis! And
10 the mother of the fire was impotent.
She brought the fire upon the soul (^x^) and
12 the earth, and she burned all <the> dwellings
that are in it (fem.) (the soul and the earth).
14 And its (fem.) shepherd perished.
Moreover, when she does not find (anything else) to burn,
16 she will destroy herself. And
it w ill become incorporeal (aacojAaxov),
18 without body (-acoâ), and it w ill burn m atter (uXyj),
until it has purged ( x a 0 a p i e iv )
20 everything and all wickedness (xocxia).
For (yap) when (orav) it does not find
22 anything else to burn, it will turn
to itself until it has destroyed itself.
24 Then ( t o t s ) , in this aeon, which
is the psychic one (tjjoxixov),
26 the man will come into being
who knows the great Power.
40,14 "shepherd : Cf. Auth. Teach. (VI, 3) 32,11.34; 33,2; E x eg. Soul
(11,6) 129,14.18. The scribe misplaced 6 B O A .
15-20 Cf. Iren. Haer. 1.7.1.
17 " It is masculine, and hence cannot refer to the soul. It prob
ably refers to the fire.
21 e q q j a n t n t F I 6 R : Cf. 46,30-31.
23 An e has been crossed out by the scribe between the last two
letters of the line.
25 "psychic : Cf. 39 :16-17.
26 For the redeemer as "the man", or some similar title, cf. 1 Cor
15:4 7; 1 Tim 2 :5 ; Hipp. Ref. V .1.2 ; Apoc. Adam (V,5) 66,5.
20
28 q A .x e i A y co q A C o y t o N t -
qA CCu e b o a R n e p t U T e Fi
30 T M A A y Fi<|>cdb- qA.qjA.Jce
2 Fi 2 eN nA.pA.BOAH- q A T A
32 q je o e iu ? mttaicun ei*TJ n h
[Ml]
o y W e e T A q q jA .x e Fi
2 n q ^ o p rF F iA i c o n F iT e t c a
pA 5 R N O )2 e - A y c o e T B e
4 N e q q }A .x e e t c q.xcu M M O o y
A qqÂ Jce F12HTOY t h p o y
6 2 r q j s e c n o o y c F5a a c -
A y co A q o y c o N e N n y \ H
8 Fin F?tth o y e 2 ^ N e q q jA
XG- a y c o Aq'l* o p in e mttaT
io ei*J.xFi e M F iT e - A q T o y
N O C N C f M O O Y f ' A y co
12 T e q M F ii* J C o e ic A q B A A e < c >
eB O A - T O T e a y n o 6 F J q jT o p
14 T p c p c o n e - a y t c o c o n 6 2 PaT
e x c u q n 6 i FiA p xcu N F iT o y
16 BAKe- A y o y t o q je eT A A q
e T O O T q F?nei*T;xFi c m R
18 T e - T O T e o y A b b o a 2*1
NeT o y H 2 F ic c u q A y c o y
20 cDNq- AYKCU2"? Xi e T e q
'I'Y X H A q p T T A p A A lA o y
22 F iM o q - e M n e A A A y c o y
4,30-31 in fact : translation uncertain.

31-32 Cf. T rim . Prot. (X III,j) 42,20-21.
32 The aeon that is to come : Cf. Mt 12 :3 2 ; Mk 10:30, par.;
Heb 6:5.
41,5-6 Derdekeas speaks in all languages in Paraph. Shem (VII, 1)
4 1,10 -11. After beginning his account of the savior in the pro
phetic future tense, the author reverts to the past. The omis
sion of specific references to Jesus and Judas may be a device
to make the passage look like genuine prophecy.
9-10 Cf. Heb 2 :14 .
28 He will receive (me) and he will know me.

He will drink from the milk of
30 the mother, in fact. He will speak
in parables (7rapa(3oXr]); he will proclaim
32 the aeon that is to come,
[41]
just as he spoke to Noah in
2 the first aeon of the flesh (<rap).
Now concerning
4 his words, which he uttered:
in all of them
6 he spoke in seventy-two tongues.
And he opened the gates (toSXt))
8 of the heavens with his words.
And he put to shame the
10 ruler of Hades; he raised
the dead, and
12 he destroyed his dominion.
Then ( t o t e ) a great disturbance
14 took place.
The archons raised up their wrath against him.
16 They wanted to hand him over
to the ruler of Hades.
18 Furthermore ( t o t s ) , they knew one of
his followers.
20 A fire took hold of his (Judas)
soul ((ûx^)' He handed (rcapa& iS ovai)
22 him over, since no one knew
41,10-11 Cf. Mk 5 :4 1; Lk 7 :14 ; Jn 5 :2 1 et al.

12 MS reads B A A eq .
13-14 A common motif in gnostic mythology; cf. T rim . Prot. (X III,j)
40,19-22; 43,8-26; A p . Jo h n (II, 1) 30,19-20; Treat. Seth (VII, 2)
51,24-29; 52,10-14; 53,20-21; 54,25-27.
I5I7 Christ crucified by archons: Cf. 1 Cor 2 :8 ; Iren. H aer. 1.30.13;
Treat. Seth (VII, 2) 54,31-55,10.
18-23 Cf. Mt 26:14-16 et al. "since no one knewhim : Cf. Ac 3 :17 .
For ignorance of the saviors identity, cf.Treat.Seth (VII, 2) 64,
13-15; Paraph. Shem (V II,j) 36,14-22.
cuNcj- A y e i p e a y a m a ^ t b
24 M M o q - A y e m e e ^pAT e p o
o y Wo y ^ A T t o y A A y -
26 i.y c u A .y p n A p a L A ijL o y R
M o q e^pA' f e T o o T q H n e f
28 T;xH eM FiTe* A y c u a y t a
A q e T O O T q FiCACAifelc
30 A geN BepcD T e ' A q c lT t o
T q e T p e q B c o K e n i T f l Wq
32 peAefxe R M o o y to t
n e t^ iJ c W e w S T e A q o c iT q -
rHBl
A yco n T p o n o c N T e q cA p A S
2 F in e q 6 F iT q a b m a ^ t c R m o q
eTpeqoyoN ^q cb o a H RApxar
4 a a a a N eq^ccu m m o c x e n im n e
nA t- o y o y n e - A n e q A o r o c
6 BCD A 6 B O A R n N O M O C M nA ICU N '
o y eB O A ^R n A o r o c n e R t6 o m
8 H n c o N g ' A yo> A q x p o e n o y
A 2 C A N WWApXCON- A y>
10 R n o yq ?6 R 6 o M enoy^coB
e p x o e i c e x c u q * a n A p xcu N
i2 k c u t R c a n e N T A q cpcune
F in o y M M e x e nAT n e n c H
14 M e i O N R n o y B c o A c b o a - A y cu
n q p iB e R n A ic u N n e * A n pH
16 ^ c u ttT H < |> o o y A n ^ o o y
P KAKe- AN AAI MO NI ON OJTOp
18 Tp- A y c o m R R c a naT q N A o y
conJ b o a e q M O O t p e e^pAY-
41,30 Cf. Mt 2 6 :15 ; 27:3.

42,4-5 Cf. Act. P it. (Latin A) 5.2; Ev. Barth. 1,12 ; T rim . Prot. (XIII,
1 ) 43,17-31-
5-6 Abolition of the Law: Cf. Rom 10 :4 ; Eph 2 :15 .
CONCEPT OF OUR GREAT POWER 4 1 ,2 3 - 4 2 ,1 9 309
him. They acted and seized

24 him. They brought
judgment upon themselves.
26 And they delivered him up (TOxpa&tSovai)
to the ruler
28 of Hades. And they handed
him over to Sasabek
30 for nine bronze coins. He prepared
himself to go down and
32 put them to shame (ekbf/ew). Then ( t o t s )
the ruler of Hades took him.
[42]
And he found that the nature (Tpo7to?) of his flesh (crap)
2 could not be seized,
in order to show it to the archons.
4 But (aXXa) he was saying: Who is
this? What is it? His word (X6yo<;) has
6 abolished the law (vo jjlo ? ) of the aeon.
He is from the Logos of the power
8 of life. And he was victorious over the command
of the archons, and
10 they were not able by their work
to rule over him. The archons
12 searched after that which had come to pass.
They did not know that this is the sign (<n){isEov)
14 of their dissolution, and (that)
it is the change of the aeon. The sun
16 set during the day; the day
became dark. The evil spirits (Satfioviov) were
18 troubled. And after these things he will appear
ascending.
42.7 Logos personified: Cf. 43,28; 44,3.13.

12 or him who had come into being"; cf. Mt 2:3-8 (?).
15*17 Cf. Mk 15 :3 3 .
I7'i8 Archons distressed: Cf. Treat. Seth (VII, 2)51,24-29; 52,10-14;
53,20-21.
19 or "descending ; cf. 43,35.
3io NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI,4
20 vyo) q N A o y c u N j c b o a W6i
n c H M e i o N Rttaicun c t n h
22 o y v yo ) oeNaiOYCUTj c b o a
W6i n a i c u n - a.ycu c e N A q j c u
24 n e RMA.KA.pioc W6i na.T g t n i
p N o e i Rna.T e T O Y q j a . J c e
26 n R m iy e p o o Y ' vycu c e
n a o y o n ^ o y b o a - a.ycu R
28 c e o jc u n e MMa.KA.pioc- xe.
c e N i q j c u n e e Y p N o e i R tm b -
30 xe A.TeTWA.NA.nA.Y{p}e e ^ p ^ T
iN n H O Y e- t o t c o y ^ Z*Z
32 NA.OYCO2 R c c u q - A.Y<1> 6YNA.
p e N e p re i 2 n N T o n o c Nnoy
34 jcno-
m
c e N A M o o q je c e N iK c u e^pxT
2 R N e q q j A . J c e ka.ta. n < o Y > O Y < u q j e
a n a y x e x y o y e i n e H6i n i a i
4 CUN T NA'f N # X e 0 ^ X 0)
Fi{a}magih n e n e q M O O Y W
6 T e n m c u N c tR m a .y e r x z
OYCUTj BOA- x e 2NA.ICUN
8 Ha o ) R a g i h Ne- x e a o j T e
e t flp cu M e na .c b t c u t o y
10 R c eA . 2 e p A . T O Y * R c e q j c u n e
tl Al CUN NAT*CUXN' 0 ) 0 pH J l
12 m HH c a . n e q T A . q j e o e i q j -
e q T A . q j e o e i c p R n M A .2
14 cun CNA.Y" A.YCU n q j o p r t -
a.ycu n c p o p r t Fi Al cu N OJA.
16 p eq cu JC R ? t R n o Y A . e i q j -
A q p n c p o p W R a ic u n eqM O
42,31-43,2 or they will activate a birth in the places (Krause). As here

translated this section refers to the expansion of the church,
and the perversion of orthodox Christianity; cf. 45,15-22.
43,1-2 or they will make known his words (Krause), or they will
write down his words (Fischer).
CONCEPT OF OUR GREAT POWER 4 2 ,2 0 -4 3 ,1 7 31 1
20 And
the sign (cnjfietov) of the aeon that is to come will appear.
22 And the aeons will dissolve.
And those who would
24 know (voetv) these things
that were discussed with them, will become
26 blessed (fiaxaptoi;). And they
will reveal them, and
28 they will become blessed (fiaxaptoi;), since
they will come to know (voetv) the truth.
30 For you (pi.) have found rest (ava7tauetv) in
the heavens. Then ( t o t e ) many
32 will follow him, and they will
labor (evepyetv) in their birth places (t67coi;).
[43]
They will go about; they will abandon

2 his words according to (xara) their desire.
Behold, these aeons have passed.
4 What size
is the water of
6 that aeon that has
dissolved?
8 What dimensions do aeons have ? How
will men prepare themselves,
10 and how will they endure, and how will they become
indestructible aeons? But (8e) at first,
12 after his preaching,
he proclaims the second aeon,
14 and the first
and the first aeon
16 perishes in the course of time.
He made the first aeon, going about
43.3'8 Cf. 36,27-37,11. This section appears unrelated to the preced

ing and following.
10-11 endure : Lit. stand. become ...a e o n s : Perhaps this
should be emended to read, come to be {in) indestructible
aeons, cf. 47,15-16; 48,12-13. indestructible aeon : Cf. Iren.
Haer. 1.30.14.
312 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V I,4
18 o q j e F ig H T q - q ja.N T eq cu.acFi
e q T A a je o e ic p R q j e .x o y cu
20 tc F ip o M n e F iH n e - e T e
n a.ei n e n ^ p i e M o c
22 N T e A e i o c e f j c o c e R tto ja -
A q e i p e RTTTATt R t t < c > a Fi
24 c u tt ? F i-X A e ie A y cu Aq
T A K O FiTA.NATOA.H- T O T
26 n e K c n e p M A h?J N e t o y
t u q je e M o o q j e FIca n e N
28 n o 6 F i A o r o c mR n e q T A q je
o e i q j- T O T 6 a t b a k c FiFiAp
30 x c u n jcepo- A y ^ i opine e
2PAT e^CM n o y B C U A c b o a -
32 A ycu A y o y c u q je a y b c u a k
encuN ^' a n t t o a ic q jo p < q j> p
34 a n to o y bcua b o a - A qei
e ^ P A 'f n 6 i n A p x c u N MFi Fi
M~X
ApXCUN R R M A Fi^C D Tff OJA

2 TANATOAH- XB nTOTTOC e T R
may e T A n A o ro c oycuN ^
4 boa R H T q R q p o p ff- t o t
ATTKA^ K.IM- AyCU ANTTOAIC
6 OJTOpTp- T O T e A N A A A T C
o ycu M - A ycu A y c e i cboa
8 N o y n e fM o o y i* - attk a ^
43.21 MS has n t 6 crossed out at end of line.

21-22 120 is the perfect number in Philo Praem. poen. 65, because
it is an image and imitation of the circle of the zodiac. In Ep.
Apostol. 17 (Coptic) the second advent is promised when "the
hundredth part and the twentieth part are fulfilled. Perfect
numbers" also occur at Hipp. Ref. V I.24,29.
23 Emendation based on 44,14. Krause emends to T T < M > A .
25-28 The sentence is incomplete; see note on 36,14-17.
28 "Logos : Cf. Iren. Haer. I.1.1-2 ; 1 1 . 1 ; Hipp. Ref. V .2,14,15,16;
VI.5,8,10,24,25,30.
32 fumed": Lit. "consume (by burning). The verb can also mean
"desire.
CONCEPT OF OUR GREAT POWER 4 3 ,1 8 -4 4 ,8 313
18 in it until it perished
while preaching one hundred and twenty
20 years in number.
This is the perfect ( t s Xs io ?) number (<xpi0 (i6 <;)
22 that is highly exalted.
He made the border of the West
24 desolate, and he
destroyed the East (avaxoXif)). Then ( t o t s )
26 your (sg.) seed (cnuepfxa) and those who wish
to follow our
28 great Logos and his proclamation
Then ( t o t s ) the wrath of the archons
30 burned. They were ashamed
of their dissolution.
32 And they fumed and were angry
at the life. The cities (tcoXi?) were <overturned> ;
34 the mountains dissolved.
The Archon came, with the
44
archons of the western regions, to
2 the East (avaxoXY)), i.e., that place (xotox;)
where the Logos appeared
4 at first. Then ( t o t s )
the earth trembled, and the cities (noXii;)
6 were troubled. Moreover ( t o t s ) , the birds
ate and were filled
8 with their dead. The earth
43.33 MS reads q jo p (U p .
35-44,2 For "the Archon, perhaps cf. "the Great Archon, Hipp. Ref.
V I I .11,12 ,13 ; the archon, Epiph. Pan. 26.17.6; the First
Archon, A p . Jo h n (II,j) 10,20, etc., or the figures mentioned
at Treat. Seth (VII,2) 64,18; Thom. Cont. (11,7) 142,31-32. In
Paraph. Shem (VII,j) 44,6-10 the demon is said to rest in
the depth of the east."
44.2*4 Apparently refers to Palestine. Cf. Mt 2:2.
5 Cf. Isa 24:19-20; Joel 2 :10 ; Mt 24:7; 27:51-52.
6-8 Cf. Ezek 39:17-20; Rev 19 :2 1.
8-10 Cf. Isa 24:4.
p n e M e e i mR t o i k o y m c n h
10 a y p .XAeie* t o t HTApeE
XpONOC JXCDK TOTe ATKA6IA
12 JXIC6 6 M i T ' AYUJ OJAeAH
mtttcaoc R n A o r o c - t o t
14 AqTCDCDN f J 6 i t t a p x c d n R R c a
R ^ aJTTt- A-YCO B O A R T A NA
16 toah e q N A p o y 2< d b N q - f c b c u
Fi N p c o M e e ^ o Y N e T c q k a 6 i a *
18 AYtu eqoYUjqp cbcu a c b o a
NCBCU NIM RAOrOC fiCO(|)IA' R T e TM6'
20 e q M e R t c o <|>i a r 6 o a - A q ^ o y
TOOTq rAp eiT Apx Ai o n e q o y
22 cDqpe e e m e g ^ o y n R t k a
6 i a Rq-J f i a j c u q R o y m R t*
24 ceMNOc- M n e q 6 R 6 oM
g b o a xe NAqpe neq^ccu^M
26 (m}FI Neq C NA YM A TOT6 Aq
bcdAle A qoy cu N^ b o a A q o y
28 cdape t a a o RqoY CDT l egpA'f
en T on o c etRm ay' t o t c
30 ATTKAipOC 1 Aq^NAN AY CD
q q j I B e FlRAIATArH TOT
32 A q i Fi6i n o Y o e i q j - êcDC
q p A N T e n u p H p e qpHM- A e i
34 R T A p e q l T6qAKM H
CHI]
TOTG 2lN2lPXCUN TNNO O y
2 mtt^l n t im c i m o n q)a.npcD
m g e T M M vy f lc e c o y c u N
44,10-11 the times were completed : Cf. Lk 21:2 4 ; Paraph. Shew

(VII,j ) 38,29-31.
11-12 Cf. Mic 7:4-6; Mt 10:35-36, par.; 2 Thess 2 :3; 2 Tim 3:1-5;
Mishnah Sotah 9.15; Job 2 3:19 ; 1 En 100:2; 2 Esdr 5:1-2,6,24
et al.; Paraph. Shem (VII,j) 43,31-44,2; Asclepius (VI,5)
72,20-73,12.
19 or every teaching of wise words of truth (Krause).
23-24 Cf. 2 Thess 2:4.
30 or . .came. And he drew near and. . (Krause).
CONCEPT OF OUR GREAT POWER 4 4 ,9 -4 5 ,3 315
mourned (ravOetv) together with the inhabited world (ot-

xoufjivY));
10 they became desolate. Then ( t o t s ) when the
times (xpovo?) were completed, then ( t o t s ) wickedness
(xaxioc)
12 arose mightily even until the final
end (reXo?) of the Logos. Then ( t o t s )
14 the archon of the western regions arose,
and from the East (avaroXif))
16 he will perform a work, and he will instruct
men in his wickedness (xaxta).
18 And he wanted to nullify
all teaching, the words (koyoq) of Sophia of truth,
20 while loving the lying Sophia. For (yip) he attacked
the old (apx<xtov), wishing
22 to introduce wickedness (xaxta)
and to put on
24 dignity (-aefjtvo?). He was incapable,
because the defilement
26 of his garments (ev&ufia) is great. Then ( t o t e ) he
became angry. He appeared and desired
28 to go up and to pass beyond
that place ( t o t o ? ) . Then ( t o t e )
30 the appointed time (xatpoq) came and drew near. And
he changes the commands (Siarayri). Then ( t o t e )
32 the time came until (eo><;)
the child would grow up.
34 When he had come to his maturity (axtnrj),
[45]
then ( t o t s ) the archons sent

2 the imitator ( a v T t f i i f i o v ) to
that man, in order that they may know
44,32-45.4 Apparently the temptation of Jesus. The imitator is probably

the devil (cf. Lampe, Lexicon). In other senses, "imitations also
occur in H y p . Arch. ( 11, 4) 87.33*35; 88,1; 89,30; 9>34; 96,33*34;
Apoc. Pet. (VII, 3) 71,23-24; 78,16; 79,9. In Treat. Seth (VII, 2)
there is a whole series of counterfeit figures: 60,20-21; 62,27-
30.35-39; 63,19-24.
3*6 NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI,4
4 { R } t R n o 6 r 6 o m * A.ycu R
T o o y N eycoN *? s b o a 2 h
6 T q x e q N A e ip e N A y R o y
C H M e io N - A y cu A q q i R ^ c n
8 n o 6 R c h m g i o n ' A.ycu A.qp
p p o e .x R ttk a .2 T H p q - A.ycu
10 a . c x > R N e i* 2 ^ T n e T H p o y
A q K A n e q e p o N o c i;x R e x
12 h R t g ttka. 2 " x e R t o k . "fNA.
{ t } a .a .k R N o y T e R t t k o c m o c -
14 q N A e ip e R ^ e N C H M e io N
m R êN cpnH pe- t o t c e
16 N iT ic u N e R ^ h t * R c e p rrA A .
n v t o t R pcuM e eT M M xy
18 e T N A .o y a .2 0 y R c c u q c e
N A .e m e e 2 o y N R n c B B e -
20 A.ycu Rq*|* 2 * r t eN en*2R i*
M R f iT C B B e 6 T e tta.T n e
22 TTAA.OC- KA.I TA-P A.qJCOOy 2*2
R k h p y 3 R c p o p it eyTA .
24 cpe o e iq ? 2 * P o t l' 2 OT* N
eqcpANJCtDK. bo a R nxpo
26 NOC eTA.yCM RTJ| R tm R
T p p o RTTKA.2 ' T O T e q N H y
28 R 6 1 TTKA.eA.pi c m o c R R 'I 'y
XH- B O A x e XCf 2 Y e Paj
30 t R R<5i t k a . 6 i v c e N a .n o e i n
r 6 i r6 a .m R g a .a a .c c a . t h p o y
32 R c e q j o o y e - A.ya> n e c T e
45,4-7 Cf. Mt 12 :3 8 ; 1 6 :i, par.; Lk 1 1 : 1 6 ; Jn 6:30.

5-15 Probably refers to the imitator.
7-8 Cf. Mk 13:22, par.; Rev 13 :13 - 14 ; 16 :14 .
7-15 Cf. Paraph. Shem (VII,j) 44,31-45,8.
8-9 Cf. Hipp. Antichr. 49.
10 MS reads
11-13 Cf. Paraph. Shem (VII,j) 45,6-8; 2 Esdr 5:6.
13 "god of the world": Cf. 2 Cor 4:4.
CONCEPT OF OUR GREAT POWER 4 5 ,4 -3 2 317
4 our great Power. And

they were expecting from
6 him that he would perform for them a
sign (tnjfxeiov). And he bore
8 great signs (otj^slov). And he
reigned over the whole earth and
10 <over> all those who are under heaven.
He placed his throne (0 povo<;) upon the end
12 of the earth, for I shall
<make> you (sg.) god of the world ( x o <t (i o < ; ) .
14 He will perform signs (<njfxetov)
and wonders. Then (roxe) they
16 will turn from me, and they will go astray (-rcXavav).
Then (tote) those men
18 who will follow after him
will introduce circumcision.
20 And he will pronounce judgment upon those who are
from the
uncircumcision, who are
22 the (true) people (Xoco<;). For in fact (xal yap) he sent
many
preachers (x7jpu) beforehand, who preached
24 on his behalf. When (8xav)
he has completed the established
26 time (xpovo?) of the kingdom
of the earth, then (tote)
28 the purging (xa0api<yfi6<;) of the souls (<J'ux-*))
will come, since
30 wickedness (xaxia) is greater than you (pL).
All the powers of the sea (0aXa<7<ra) will tremble
32 and dry up. And the firmament (crTpea>|i.a)
45.15-16 Cf. 2 Thess 2 :3 ; 1 Tim 4 :1 ; 2 Tim 4:3-4; Asclepius (VI,8)

70.29-35; 72,19-73,-
18-30 The subject is still theimitator.
20-22 Hipp. Antichr. 5.
22-24 Hipp. Antichr. 6.
pecDMA q A q p o y e e i a j T e
34 AN e ^ P A T - MTTHrH C e N A lU
jew- N ie p c u o y c e N e ^ e * ! an
[ m ]S
ezpx'f e N o y n H T H - A ycu R
M o y e i o o y e F in R it h p h F iT e
TTK.A2 C e N A C D ^ F r T O T 6 W NOyN
4 e e N A C C D A e x F ic e o y c u N - R c i o y
c e N A A .e iA .e r A y c u n p H q n a cd
6 ;xFi* A yo> '(NApa.NAXCDpei MFi
O yO N NIM eT N A C O yC D N T 5*
8 A yco ce N A B W K . e ^ o y N e n o y
O e iN W AM eTpHTON- 6MFI
io a a a y F iT e T C A p a .5 AMa.2 T e
R M o o y o y T e Tpy<J)H F iT e
12 nKCD^"? c e N 3 L q p o )n e e y e c i
o j o y e y o y A A B - eM Fi a a a y
14 c c d k M M o o y e n iT F i* e e i p
CK.eTTA2 e R M o o y 0 t o o t * -
l6 eyW TAy R m ay F m eN A y
MA 6 T O Y A A B - N i'f 6 T 6 RM fJ
18 qpboM F iT e mcco^T* XCU 2 e p o
o y e iT a . o y K A ic e MFi o y
20 T H o y MFi o y c T ir M H - zc
T e A TeqTC D M TJFiBeA- t o t b
22 q N H o y e q o T o y t h p o y bboa*
A y cd c e N A q p c D n e e y p ic o A A
2 4 Ze R M o o y q p A N T o y T B B o -
TO Te n o y x p o N o c b ta y ta
26 Aq NAy A T p e y e M A 2 T e e
T3k.yonq e p o o y R M FiT A q
28 T e R o p e F ip o M n e c e MFi q jM o y
Ne* 2 o t a n ep q p A N n K C D 2 *?
45.34-46,5 Cf. A sclepius (VI,8) 73,14-22.

46,16-17 "holy garments": Cf. Rev 3 :5 ; 1 En 62:15-16 ; 2 Esdr 2:39-
40; D ia l. Sav. (111,5) i 38.20- i39,5 ; 14 3,11-2 1.
21-33 Cf. 40,9-23.
CONCEPT OF OUR GREAT POWER 4 5 , 3 3 - 4 6 ,2 9 3 19
will not pour down dew.

34 The springs (nypr*\) will
cease. The rivers will not flow
m
down to their springs (70)775). And the
2 waters of the springs (tdqyt]) of
the earth will cease. Then ( t o t e ) the depths
4 will be laid bare and they will open. The stars
will grow in size, and the sun will cease.
6 And I shall withdraw (avax<opeiv) with
everyone who will know me.
8 And they will enter into the
immeasurable (a[ASTp7)Tov) light, (where) there is
10 no one of the flesh (<rap) nor (otfxe)
the wantonness (xpucpr)) of the fire
12 to seize them. They will be unhampered
(and) holy, since nothing
14 drags them down. I
myself protect (axetox ^ e i v ) them,
i6 since they have
holy garments (evSufia), which
18 the fire cannot touch,
nor (efre) darkness nor
20 wind nor a moment (<mYH^), so as (&are)
to cause one to shut the eyes. Then (t6te)
22 he will come to destroy all of them.
And they will be chastised (xoXaêiv)
24 until they become pure.
Moreover (tote) their period (xpovo<;), which was
26 given to them to have power, which
was apportioned to them, (is) fourteen
28 hundred and sixty eight years.
When (8tocv) the fire has
"he : Perhaps the fire.

Cf. Ap. Jo h n (II, 1) 26,32-27,11; Paraph. Shem (VII,r) 48,17-22.
Cf. Iren. H aer. 1.7.1.
30 p a .K 2 o y t h p o y a y <u e
q jA q T R T F id R a a a y e p c D K ^ '
32 T O T 6 qNACD.XFl B O A ÎT O O T C j
OY^.3k.<l T O T e qNA.XCDK 6 B O A
E3
r 6 i n [ .] e [
2 T e t m a ^ 6 am [c R T e
T e nN A f lN H o y [. . . . cboa ]
4 1 t R tco <J>i a e i [
T O T e N C T ep eo jM * [N Aê]
6 c t t it R enN O Y N - T O T e [ n]
( p H p e Fi y a h n a .cd .x R ' R c e
8 N A U icD n e a n j c in M n e T N A Y -
T O T 6 m 'I'Y x h n a o y u j n ^
10 b o a e Y O Y ^ B e Tt Fi t to [ y ]
oem Rt 6 om *ta T e fx o c e
12 n 6 o m t h p o Y ' *J ak.i*qji[Tc]
't K A .e O A IK H - AN O K MFi
14 Nei'NA.COYCUN"? T H p O Y -
a y J c e N A q jc D n e nan
16 cdn R tm N i* C A ei e* F iT e
TTAI CD N M (J)ATt eYCBTAT*
18 <J>i a - e A Y i" e o o y
tco
Finei*2N t m R t*o y a . R o y
20 cdt* N A fT e ^ o q - aycd eY
nay e p o q eT B e neqoYCD
22 q je e T R ^ H T O Y - a y c d
A Y < y tD n e t h p o y R 0
24 kcdn n e q o Y o e iN * a y
p o Y o e iN t h p o Y - a y m t o n
4 6 ,3 0 - 3 1 e q jA q T R T F lb R : Cf. 40,21.
47.5 There are several firmaments in A p . Joh n (II,j) 12,25-26; cf.
also Iren. Haer. I.24.3-7.
6-7 Cf. Iren. H aer. 1.5 .1; 6.1. In Iren. Haer. 1.7.1 all matter is
finally destroyed by fire. Cf. also Mt 24:29; Mk 13:25; Rev
6:13.
7 Cf. Autk. Teach. (VI,3) 28,9.
9-10 or . .will prove to be h o ly.. . Salvation of the soul alone:
Cf. Iren. Haer. 1.24.5.
30 consumed them all, and when

it does not find anything else to burn,
32 then ( t o t e ) it will perish by its own hand.
Then ( t o t e ) the [ ] will be completed
[47 ]
[
2 the [second] power [
the mercy will come [
4 through wisdom (ao<pi<x) [
Then (tote) the firmaments (<jrepco{za) [will fall]
6 down to the depth. Then ( t 6 t e ) [the]
sons of matter (uAt)) will perish; they
8 will not be, henceforth.
Then ( t o t s ) the souls ((Jjo/t)) will appear,
10 who are holy through the
light of the Power, who is exalted
12 above all powers, the immeasurable,
the universal one (xa0oXt,xYj), I and
14 all those who will know me.
And they will be in the aeon
16 of beauty of
the aeon of judgment, since they are ready
18 in wisdom (<io<pta), having given glory
to him who is in the
20 incomprehensible unity; and they
see him because of his will,
22 which is in them. And
they all have become as reflections (s!x<ov)
24 in his light. They
all have shone, and they have found rest
47-x3 "the universal one : Cf. Treat. Seth (VII, 2)57,26; 62,26.
16-17 There is a full stop after "beauty. It is not clear how "of the
aeon of judgment fits into the sentence.
21 "will : or love (Krause and Fischer).
24-25 Cf. Dan 1 2 :3 ; WisdSol 3:7 .
25-26 Cf. Heb 3 :1 8 - 4 :1 1 ; Gos. Thom. (II ,2) 43,12-22 (logion 60);
Auth. Teach. (VI,3) 33,8; A p . Jo h n (II, 1) 26,31.
21
26 H m ooy T e q A N A n A Y G iC
a.y<u m'I'YXh 6 to y P k .o
28 \xze R m o o y <|n a b o a o y
B O V a.Y<u F l c e q j c o n e
30 t t t o y b o * A.YOJ c c n a
NA-Y N T * O Y ^ B - C 6 N 1
32 x i <y kxk 6 b o a e p o o Y x e
NA. NA.N t 6 0 M TA.T G TfiTTTe
34 F )H 6 o m t h p o Y ' ^ O T i xe
[MH]
[ 1 0 ] ^Y ^ n q jH
2 [ f i m FI t -x i n]6 o n c e t q jo o T t e
[ 6 ] e p o q RNOYBA.A-
4 [a .Y tu c e ] K O J T e F lc t u q a n -
[ b o ] a x e c e i c t D T e FI c c u n in -
6 p l Y l ^ e n c e n i C T e Y e e p o N a.n*
AAAA. A -Y e ip e A.T*K.TICIC FJ
8 FI a p x CUN MFI N e C K e a p x C U N -
a.Ycu a .N p n p a .c c a . k x t x t H
10 r e N e c i c F J t c T c a .p a .3 R t k t i
C IC FIFUpXCUN e c j* NOM OC-
12 iN O N e a .N q jc u n e
na.io>N R A .T p < e > T rro c :
14 t t n o h m a F1t R n o 6
F !6 o m :
472 7"34 Cf. Paraph. Shem ( V II ,j) 48,19-22; A p . Joh n (II,x ) 26,33-27,11.
31-34 Cf. L k 16:22-24.
48,5-6 The first person plural is used only here, in 36,17, and 48,9.12,
and with the name "our great Power.
7 "according to : or for the benefit of (Krause).
9 lC.2k.T2k., "according to : It may be that xardt in the Greek Von
26 in his rest (ava7rau(j^).

And he will release the souls that
28 are being punished (xoXa^siv),
and they will come to be
30 in purity. And they will
see the saints and
32 cry out to them:
Have mercy on us, O Power who art above
34 all powers. For ( 6 t i )
[4 8 ]
[ ] and in the tree
2 [of] iniquity that exists
[ ] to him their eyes.
4 [And they] do not seek him
because they do not seek us
6 nor (ouSs) do they believe (7ui<7Teueiv) us,
but (aXXa) they acted according to the creation (xtutk;) of
8 the archons and its other rulers (otpx<ov).
But we have acted (7tpa<T(jeiv) according to (xara) our
10 birth (yeveat?) of the flesh (aapl;), in the creation (ktIgic,)
of the archons, which gives law (vo{zo<;).
12 We also have come to be
in the unchangeable (<5cTpe7rro<;) aeon.
x4 The Concept (voTjfxa) of our great
Power.
lage m e a n t a g a in s t , a n d w a s m is u n d e r s to o d b y th e C o p tic
tra n s la to r.
" i n " : K ra u s e h a s o v e r a g a in s t .
MS re a d s A T p O T T T O C . K ra u s e em ends to ATpOTTOC,
u n c h a n g e a b le . ''
PLATO, REPUBLIC 588b-589b
VI,5 :48,16 -51,23
J am es B rash ler

69.
Schenke, H.-M. Review of Robinson et al., Facsimile Edition: Codex
VI. OLZ 69 (1974), cols. 236-42.
Severe damage to the top four or five lines of each page of this
brief tractate as well as the extremely difficult Coptic in which it is
written made this document an unsolved riddle until H.-M. Schenke
identified it as a very poor translation of a section from Platos
Republic (588b-589b). Prior to this discovery it had been wrongly
associated with the title of the preceding tractate by J . Doresse
(Secret Books, p. 143). Without recognizing that it was an excerpt
from Plato, Krause published the editio princeps and described this
writing as an untitled work with Hermetic affinities.
As a comparison with the Greek parallel text clearly shows, this
attempt on the part of a Coptic translator to translate a summa
rizing excerpt from Platos Republic is a disastrous failure. Platos
words have been distorted and misunderstood so badly that they
are hardly recognizable. While there can be no doubt that the Coptic
translator was attempting to provide a faithful rendering of his
Greek text, Schenkes description of the translator as one who
makes typical beginners mistakes . . . and is completely in the
dark concerning the periods of the Platonic style and of the com
plicated dialogue . . . (col. 239) is apt.
It is difficult to account for the survival of this hopelessly con
fused translation. It certainly represents an exception to the rest
of the tractates in the Nag Hammadi codices, which generally have
been translated from the Greek with considerable skill and under
standing. Perhaps one may assume that this succinct statement of a
main theme in Platos Republic was taken from a collection of edi
fying quotations (Soôypa9ai) said to have circulated in late anti
quity as handbooks for students and others with intellectual aspira
tions but little philosophical sophistication. Evidence for such an
assumption is provided by Eusebius, who includes almost the exact

excerpt in Praep.Ev. XII.46.2-6. Allusions to this passage can also
be found in the Neoplatonic philosophers Plotinus and Proclus (cf.
Schenke, col. 238). If this excerpt did come from a handbook of
quotations, it was separated from its original context and need not
have been expressly associated with Plato. Schenke, on the other
hand, suggests that Plato was honored by Hermetic writers as a
student of Hermes, and therefore he considers it plausible that this
Platonic excerpt was at one time recognized as such and included
in a collection of Hermetic writings for that very reason. While this
may have been true at an earlier stage of the transmission of this
tractate, by the time it was transformed into the scarcely compre
hensible moralistic homily now preserved in Codex VI, its Platonic
character had probably long been forgotten. Perhaps the theme of
justice and the ethical rigor prescribed by the injunction to stamp
out the images of the beast (50,24-28) and pictured in the concluding
simile of the farmer (51,13-23) were sufficiently attractive to insure
the preservation of this tractate.
To characterize this tractate as gnostic or Hermetic is hazardous.
Although its basic tenor is compatible with gnostic or Hermetic
views, it does not betray a marked gnostic tendency, nor do the
translators errors reveal a gnosticizing approach to the text. Rather,
the theme of justice and the high moral tone evident in this docu
ment would have been congenial to the vast majority of its readers
in the late Hellenistic period. The inferior quality of the Coptic
translation suggests that it is a product of an intellectually un
sophisticated person who has lost contact with a living philosophical
tradition.
VI,5:48,16-51,23
[ESI
16 eniAH anon a n qjcune Floy
L A o ro c Rtti mv MA.pH.xi 6 e
18 nan RH qjopff eNTA.yjcooy
NA.N- Aycu TflNA.6lNe mmoc
20 eqxcu Rmoc- x e na.noy
n eN T A .y x iT q r 6 o n 5 t c a c
22 cue- qia.q.xi e o o y aik aicu c-
MH FITA.T AN T6 6 6 6NTA.y
24 jcnioq* TeT M e N T o ir e t e e
e T e q j q j e ' n ex A T a c x e T e
26 N o y 6e* A.NqjAoce- e n i A H
Plato, Republic 588b-589b

(Burnet, Ioannes, ed. Platonis Opera IV. Scriptorum Classicorum
Bibliotheca Oxoniensis. Oxford: 1902 [reprint, 1962]).
588b,I in e iS i) evrau0a Aoyou yeyova[iev, dcv<xX</|3ci>[iev r& np& rx Xe-
Ôsvra, 81 Sl Ssup Jjxofiev. 9)v S nou / Aeyoêvov AuaireXetv aSixelv to
Te\a)$ (xev aStxw, Soâô/fxlvtp S i StxaUo r) oux ootco<; eX^Qv); 588b,5
Ofixco (iv oSv. j Nuv Si\, e97)v, aoxco 8taAey<!>[ie0a, eneiSr)
48,19 t R N a 6 i N e translates etipV)ao(iev, a corruption or misreading of

Seup {jxoixev, and is followed by an object clause in the circum
stantial (cf. Till, KoptischeGrammatik, sec. 420). Schenke (col. 236)
translates, "We will find it! He said . . . .
20-25 NA.NOY neNTA-YJCITq H 6 o n c changes the active "to
do injustice, in the Greek, to the passive he who has been
done injustice." This may be the result of misreading ASocetv t#
as dtSixetxo. B y not translating fiiv <8bc(p and taking SotêoOai to
mean to be praised rather than "to be reputed" the Coptic
translator has produced a moralistic exhortation, as the addition
of e T e q ?U )e , "which is fitting, also suggests. P e r h a p s under
VI,5:48,16-51,23
[48]
16 "Since (stoiSt^) we have come
to this point in a discussion (Xdyo^), let us again take up
18 the first things that were said
to us. And we will find
20 that he says, Good is
he who has been done injustice completely (xeXeax;).
22 He is glorified justly (Sixaiox;).
Is not ((jly)) this how he was
24 reproached? This is certainly (jxivTotye) the
fitting w ay! And (Si) I said:
26 Now then, we have spoken because (stciSy))
Plato, Republic 588b-58gb
588b,1 Since we have come to this point in the discussion, let us

take up again / the first things that were said, by which we have
come to this point. Was it not somehow / stated that to do injustice
is profitable for the completely unjust man who is reputed / to be
just? Or was it not so stated? 588b,5 Yes, in just that way.
I Now then, I said, "let us discuss with him, because
the influence of the preceding rekiutQ, Sixaltp has become StxaUo;.

The confusion of iXt/Qi] with ijXiyx^7! has resulted in the mistrans
lation e NTA-YXTTI o <| in 48,23-24 and may also reflect a moraliz
ing tendency, although this is more likely an indication of corrup
tion in the Greek text tradition, since the translator rendered the
same Greek word Xex0vra correctly in 48,18.
48,26-27 The omission of a translation of auxw after A N U JA Jte and the
incorrect translation of Si.co|i.oXoY7)cra(j.e0a by means of AC]-XOOC
completely destroy the development of thought by attributing
Socrates's summary statement to his opponent.
J iq x o o c xe n e'fp eR n .au n
28 6 o nc - m FI n e ' f p e R i t a i k a i
o n - noyA noyA oyF lT A q
30 o y 6 o M - FIa o j 6e F iê n e
.XAq xe oyfiKCUN eMFiTAq
32 eiN e n e n \o r o c FiT'l'yxH*
.X eic a.a c eqNAMHe r 6 i neN
[Me]
T [A ]qxe na T*q[
2 [ . . . ,]A.p n e n-f[
N e fi R m o n a n [
4 q j o o i t n a T* a a a a R [
th poy eN T A yxooy [
6 ApXCUN- NAT '( N O y N6N
T A y q jc u n e R<J>ycic- Aycu
8 n xiM A p p A ic MFi n i c e p B o y
m FJ r i i c e c e e n e t h p q s h
Plato, Republic 588b-589b, cont.

St(Oji.oXoy7)cra-/
|xs6 t o re aSixeiv xal t o Stxaia 7t p a T T e i v yjv exaxepov i y t i / SiSvap. /
FI cT><^; <p7]. 588b,10 Eixova 7rXacravTe<; ty)<; <Jwx*)S 'iva. elSy) 0 Ixeiva /
Xeycov ola eXeyev. 588c,1 Iloiav Tiva; ^ S oc,- / Ttov t o l o u t c o v -ava, 9jv 8
syco, olai {AuOoXoyouvrai 7taXaial / yeva0ai <piScret<;, ^ te Xi(iaipa<; xal 7]
2 xuXXy)<; xal Kep/jSspou, xal (ScXXai -uve? cruxval
48.30-32 o y f t KCU N e MF iT Aq e i N e p r e su p p o s e s t h e m isread in g elxiv

aTrXatTTOt; in s te a d o f ebc6va jiXAoavres.
49,1-5 P o s s ib ly r e c o n s tr u c t a s fo llo w s: R M O C x e ] / [t ta T
r ] ^ . p n e n ^ I p e F i T e e i M i ] / N e Fi R R o n a n [ x o > R m o c
x e q ] / q j o o T t naY* a a a a R [ M y e o c ] / t h p o y eNTAy-
X O O y [FI 6 1 Fi] /. " H e [ a s k e d :] / I s [th is] th e n (y&p) t h a t which
[a c ts in th is m a n n e r] / o r (^) n o t ? ' W e [ag ree t h a t it] / is forme.
B u t (dtXXdc) a ll th e s e [ m y th s (jiGOoe)] / t h a t t h e ru le rs (fip/wv) told
n o w h a v e . . . I f th is is a c o rre c t re c o n s tr u c tio n , th e n w e m ust as
su m e t h a t t h e tr a n s l a to r r e n d e re d nolav a s if i t w ere reou&v by
m e a n s of n ' f p e . F o r N t 6 I MING cf. 5 0 ,3 0 . fi RMON trans
l a t e s ^ S ou in s te a d o f 9j S 8?. [ q ] c p 0 0 T t naT m a y b e a n attem pt
to tr a n s l a te ?jv S (iol in s te a d o f ?j S lyu>. T ra c e s a t t h e en d of 49.4
p l a t o , r e p u b l i c 5 8 8 b - 5 8 9 b 4 8 ,2 7 -4 9 ,9 331
he said that he who does injustice

28 and he who does justice (JMxaiov)
each has
30 a force. How then?
He said, An image (eixcov) that has no
32 likeness is the rationality (koyoc,) of the soul (4ux*))>
so that he who said these things will
[49]
understand. He [
* [
[ J or (^) not? We[
4 is for me. But (aXXa) all [
who told them [
6 ruler (<5cpxv), these now have
become natural creatures (<pu<ji<;)even
8 Chimaera, and Cerberus,
and all the rest that
Plato, Republic 5 8 8 b - 5 8 9 b, cont.

we have
agreed on / w hat force to do in ju stice an d to do ju stice / each
has. I "H o w ? he said. 5 8 8 b , 1 0 B y form ing in speech an im age
of the soul, so th a t h e who said those th in g s m ig h t know / w h at he
was saying. 5 8 8 0 , 1 W h a t k in d (of an im age) ? he said. / One of
those, I said, "lik e th e an cien t ones said in m y th s / to h av e becom e
natural forms, those of C him aera, a n d Scylla, an d Cerberus, / an d
many others
most likely belong to the letter M, and the Greek parallel text
suggests R [ M y e o c ] be reconstructed.
49.6 The occurrence of &pxv need not betray a gnosticizing tendency
on the part of the translator. It is not inconsistent with the
limited knowledge of Greek demonstrated by the translator to
suggest that he understood &px<ov as a synonym of roxXaiat possibly
as the result of confusing it with ipxatoi.
8 The translator has taken over the genitive forms of the names of
these mythological creatures without concern for gender or cor
rect spelling. What appears to be a x. in XIMA p pAI C is most
likely the result of the scribes having dragged his pen between
strokes.
10 T a.y q ja.jce e p o o y a.ypic^

T iN T J. t h p o y A.y|* o y
12 6 BOA T?2NMOp<J)H MFI N
e r n e - a.yu> a y q jc u n e t h
14 p o y F o y e i N e o y c u T * 'e y
jc o j R m o c x e a.pi U)b T e
16 N o y o y e i N e M eN T O ire
R o y c u i* n e - na.T N T aq q jco
18 rr e R r r m e H o y e H p io N e q
o jB B io e n * 2 ^ o y N o 6 Wa.ne-
20 2 e N 2 Y MeN e * ) W e e R
n i N e N o y e H p io N W arpioN -
22 T O T e q ja .q 6 n 6 o M N N o y -x e
g b o a R n iN e R o jo p rt- R t b
24 Na.T t h p o y NirrAA.CMa. e t
N a.u j?' a.yu> etM O K.^ R c e
26 f o y c u g b o a fl^H Tq 2W o y
e p ro N - e n iA H N e T o y p
28 n \ic c e R M o o y fM o y
o y \ \ ' z ' \ e Z ' a.yu> mW
30 r r i c e c e e n e TH pq e t T f l
tc d n e p o o y e y p n A a .c c e
32 j'N o y 2 r n q ja .jc e T e N o y

XyovTai aojZTOtpuxuiat
ISexi 58 8 c,5 7roXXat tiq ev yevsaQoci.. / Aeyovxai yap, &prj. / IlXaTxe xotvuv
(Atav (Jtev [Slav Ovjptou 7todXou x a l 7toXo/xe9 aXou, 7]jjipwv Se 0rjptwv
e'Xovtoc; xscpaXat; xuxXw x a l / ayplwv, x a l Suvarou (jieTapaXXetv xal <piieiv
e auTou 7ravTa 588c, 10 Tauxa. 5 8 8 d ,i Aetvou 7rXaaTou, 97), to Ipyov
8(ito<; 8, eneiSrj eu7 rXa/oT6 Tepov xirjpou x a l Ttov toloutwv Xoyo<;, nenTA-
CT06). j
49,10-14 This material is lacking in the citation of Plato by Eusebius,

Praep.Ev. X II.46.2-6, probably due to homoeoteleuton, which
caused the omission of the words between the first Xiyovrou and
the repetition of the same word a few lines later.
18-19 e q o j B B I o e n * translates ttoixiAou while o y N o 6 R ATie ex
presses in acceptable Coptic idiom (cf. Till, Koptische Grammatik,
sec. 119) the term ;?oXuxe(pdcXou.
20 2 eN2 Y *s resu^ f reading T)|x6p<ov, "tam e" as 7)(iepv,
days". The same error occurs again at 51,21.
p la to , re p u b lic 5 8 8 ^ 5 8 ^ 4 9 ,1 0 -3 2 333
10 were mentioned. They all

came down (xaxotvTotv) and they cast
12 off forms ((xop<pYj) and
images. And they all became
14 a single image. It was
said, Work now!
l6 Certainly ((xivTOiye) it is a
single image that became
18 the image of a complex beast (Gvjpiov)
with many heads.
20 Some days indeed (fiiv ) it is like
the image of a wild (<3cypiov) beast (Qrjpfov).
22 Then ( t o t e ) it is able to cast
off the first image. And
24 all these hard
and difficult forms (7tXa<T(i.a)
26 emanate from it with
effort (Ip y o v ), since (&ceiy\) these are
28 formed (Tck&aasw) now
with arrogance. And also
30 all the rest that are
like them are formed (7rXa<roeiv)
32 now through the word. For (yap) now
Plato, Republic 588b~589b, cont.

said to have grown many 5880,5 forms together to be
come one. I Yes, so they say, he said. / Make, then, a single
image of a manifold and many-headed beast / having heads of tame
and wild beasts in a circle / and being able to cast off and grow from
itself all 588c,10 these things. 588d,i It is the task of a clever
artisan, he said, but nevertheless, since / speech is more malleable
than wax and such materials, let it be formed. /
49,27-29 The translator may have understood etj7uXa<TT6Tepov as ol 7rXacr-

g6[lvjoi and mistakenly linked it with xal t w v t o io u t c o v . Schenke's
suggestion (col. 241) that N o y \ X 2 , \ G Z is the translator's
attempt to find an equivalent for eti- is dubious. He is probably
correct in seeing 'J'N O y as the result of mistaking xrjpou for xocipou.
32 The translator read Xoy$ instead of X6yo?.
33 4 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V I ,5
ra.p o y e i N e oycui* n e - o y
34 ei* m N e ra.p R n M o y e i
v y a ) o y e t n iN e R n p cu M e
[Fi]
[ 6 o ]y a )i* n e n [ . . . ] R
2 [ 6 ]T u > 6 e -a .[y ]q ) p a J
[ . . . . qp]BBiAeii* RncyA. R ^ o y o
4 [enajo]piFF- a.ya> nMA.2CNA-Y
[ n e o y ]q p R - 2k.ypnAA.cce MMoq-
6 [ T ] e N o y 6 e T O )6 e R M o o y e N e y
e p H o y FiTeTRA.a.y Fioya. Fi
8 oycui*- qjoM ei* r*.p Ne- 2 u>c
t Fice*)* o y c u MFi N e y e p H y
io N ceq pcu n e t h p o y 2^ o y e i
N6 OyO)1* C2k.BOA fieilCCDN
12 PinpcuM e- F ie e 2<*>u>q R n e
T e MFi cy6oM MMoq e T p e q N a .y
14 e N e T H n e q ^ o y N - x a a a . n ei*
T b o a MMATe neTqN3k.Y epoq*
16 ^.yco e q p < J> e N e ce a .i x e e p e
n e q e iN e 2** *.<9 FJ^cuon- A.ya>
18 x e F iT X Y p n A a ic c e MMoq
2Fi o y e m e FipcuMe- ne.XA.ei

M lgcv Srj xoivuv aXXr]v iS eav X e o v to c ;, ( i i a v 8 e avOpw/TOU- 7ioXu
Se yLefujzov e a r a) t o 7rpcoTov x a l SsuTepov t o 5 8 8 d ,5 Seuxepov. / Tauxa,
(prj, pcjca), x a l 7re 7cX aaT ai. / S u v o c tc te to lv u v aoT a eic, ev T p ia ovxa, wcrxe
7Tjf) (jujx/ 7ce 9 u x e v a t dXkrfkoiq. / Suv?)TCTai., ecpY). 5 8 8 d ,I O Ilpt~Xaaov
Sv) auToi<; e(D0 ev svoc; e tx 6 v a , t t j v t o u / avOpcorrou, ( S o t s to > [i.7] Suvajjivw
T a svToq o pav, dcXAa t o 5 8 8 e , l eto (jlovov eXoxpov opw vTi, ev a>ov <pat-
v eo 0 a i, (Scv0 p{>)7rov. / I Isp iT reT rX a crra t., scpy). / A eyw jj.v Stj
50,1-2 The lack of parallel material in the Greek text makes reconstruc
tion extremely speculative. Schenke (col. 238) proposes that
[a .Y tu ON o ] y e T n e i [ N e ] R / [ n e T p e q T ] c u 6 e a[y<d]
TT3Uf/be read. The first lacuna requires at least one more letter,
however, and the second is not filled with n e. Taking the traces
p l a t o , r e p u b l i c 5 8 8 b - 5 8 g b 4 9 ,3 3 -5 0 ,1 9 335
it is a single image.
34 For (yap) the image of the lion is one thing
and the image of the man is another.
[ 50]
[ ] single [ ] is the [ ] of
2 [ ] join. And this
[ ] much more complex
4 [than the first]. And the second
[is small]. It has been formed (7tXdccraeiv).
6 Now then, join them to
each other and make them a single
8 onefor (yap) they are threeso
that (&ore) they grow together
10 and all are in a
single image outside of the image (ebccov)
12 of the man just like him
who is unable to see
14 the things inside him. But (aXXa) what
is outside only is what he sees.
16 And it is apparent (<paivea0 ai)
what creature (<j>ov) his image is in and
18 that he was formed (7tXdc<jaetv)
in a human image. And (M) I spoke

Now, then, (form)
one other image of a lion and one of a man. / Let the first be very
large and the 588d,5 second smaller. / "These are easier, he said,
''and have been formed. / Now join these which are three into
one, so that somehow they grow / together. / They are joined,
he said. 588d,io Now make for them outwardly an image of one
thing, that of the / man, so that for him who is not able to see what
is inside but only what is 588e,i outside, it appears as one creature,
a man. / It has been formed, he said. / "Let us say, then,
in lin e 1 a f te r n e a s a t t , o n e c o u ld r e c o n s tr u c t [ o y e i N e
olycui* ne t t [ i N e ] R / , cf. 49,34-35 f o r t t i n e.
5,12 R e c 0 ) C D < | tr a n s l a te s w ? t s in s te a d o f &ane.
l7 The translator mistook Sv for b> and &vQpomov for AvOpcJwrou.
33^ NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI ,5
20 A e M n e N T A q o to o c x e c p N oq
p e Rtt.xi n 6 o n c R n p to M e*
22 nei*oci R 6 o n c Fl T oq Fi TMHTe
c p N o q p e NA.q a n - o y T e mR
24 TA.q o<t>AeiA. R M i y x w x
n e * r p N o q p e Na.q n e n a J e T p e q
26 T e y o e 2 P*T R n i N e nim W g h
p i o N e f e o o y A.ya> F i q ^ o
28 M o y mn F i e i N e R n M o y e r
n p o j M e A e q^W oyMFjT*6a>B
30 H T e e i M i N e - a.ya> Ne-rq
N2k.3k.2k.y TH p o y 2 e N 6 a ) B Ne-
32 2 t u C T e H c e c c u K MM oq e
nMA. t 2JP 2 0 o y e p o o y F iq j o
m
[p it 3 k]yaj H q[
2 [ . . . . ] N H G ^ | [ 2l
Hxq oyenic[

t(5 Xeyo'm ox;
"koansksZ t o u t c d a S tx e iv t c o / a v 0 pa>7rco, S i x a i a 8s 7rp a T T e iv ou crujxcpspeL,
6t l ouSev &XXo 5&&e >5 ( p y j c i v rj X ix tite X e iv ocutco t o 7ravTo8oc7u6v Orjptov
eu co x o u v x L j noisiv iayupov x a i t o v X ovtoc x a l T a 7rep l t o v Xovtoc, t 4v
5 8 9 a ,! 8s &v0 pco7uov X l( jlo x to v e iv x a l 7uoi*tv aaO evY ), & g t s eXxeaOou / 67U7J
a v exelvcov o T O T ep o v &YT), x a l (jly)8v exepov eT epco / a u v e O t^ e tv (jlt)8s cptXov
7C o teiv ,
50,23-24 o YTG may be confused with o68kv in the Greek text and 2lAA2l
is no doubt a misreading of <3cXXo.
25-30 The translator's errors have totally distorted the text. FJ<|2
MOY may be the result of understanding 7roeIv toxop&v asrcoietv
fyvoc;.
33-51,1 FJ cpofpTT] corresponds to 67r6Tepov misunderstood as 7cp6Tepov.
51,1-5 Schenke (col. 238) suggests the following reconstruction of these
badly damaged lines: [ p n x y ]CD NC][tm 61 p e n] / [TOycy]
tsiH e e [i2 i R c e p c p b h p ] / N^.q O Y en ic[T p o <J> H ] /
2 la a 2 l eqjxqeipe n [o y 2 cd ]/b efAMnrxxxe z p a i N
[HTOYl* However this reconstruction is two or three letters too
short to fill the lacuna at the end of line 1 and the beginning of line
p l a t o , r e p u b l ic 588^58^ 50,20-51,3 337
20 to him who said that there is profit

in the doing of injustice for the man.
22 He who does injustice truly
does not profit nor ( o u t s )
24 does he benefit (<5><peXeia). But (aXAa)
what is profitable for him is this: that he
26 cast down every image of the
evil beast (07)ptov) and trample
28 them along with the images of the lion.
But (8e) the man is in weakness
30 in this regard. And all the things that he
does are weak.
32 As a result ( cdctte ) he is drawn to
the place where he spends the day with them.
[5 i]
[ ]. And he [
2 [
to him in [

to him
who says that it is profitable for this man to do injustice / but to do
justice is not profitable, that he is saying nothing other than 588e,5
that it is profitable for him who lavishly feeds the manifold beast / to
make strong both the lion and those around the lion, 589a,! but to
starve the man and to make him weak, so that he is drawn / to
wherever one of them leads, and in no way accustoms the one to
the other / nor makes friends.
2 cannot accommodate the five letters proposed. The end of line 4

and the beginning of line 5 in this reconstruction are quite un
likely, since both the superlinear stroke over the first M in line 5
and the B at the beginning of the line indicate that the e belongs
with the B rather than the following word. An alternative recon
struction would be as follows: [ p n A.]yct> n q [T M T o n o y n ] j
[ o y c y ] N H e e |[ A F c jtm p u j b h p ] / NA.q 2 *? o y e n i c [ y N -
22
4 xaax e q ) a . q e ip e R [
B e R M ? li* x A .x e epAT Fi[
6 a.ya> MW o y M iq ^ e e y o y
com- MFi N e y e p H o y 2 P^.lf
8 F l g H T o y naT ra.p t h p o y
a .q ;x o o Y F io y o N n im e T jf
10 eT T A JN o y R n x i n 6 o n c -
o y ic o y N 6 e T T e fq ja .x e
12 2 cua)<) o y A iic ^ io N c p
N o q p e N xq - a.yu> eqcpa.N
14 e i p e Fi n a T F3q q ja k .x e F 2 h t o Y
R < j)o y N R n p c u M e c e a .
16 m ^ t c 2^ oyT A xp o- eTBe
tta.T R 2 o y o q ja .q c y iN e F ica .
18 q i n e y p o o y q j R q c a .N o y
q j o y F i e e cd cuq R n r e
20 c u p r o c ec9 A .q c2 a .N cp R n e q
r e N h M i R m h n e* A.ya> Fi
22 TeW h pi o n F la r p io N p
K.a>A.ye R M o q e T p e q p c u f :

a XX sav a u T a ev o c u t o i c ; j SaxveaOod t e xal ( x a x o ( i e v a e a O ie iv
aXXvjXoc. 589a,5 IIavTdt7ra<Ti ydcp, 97), to c u t* av Xeyoi o t o aStxetv STtaivwv.
I Ouxouv a5 0 xa Sbcaia Xeycov XuatTeXeiv cpair; av Seiv / xauxa ~parreiv
xal T a u T a Xeyeiv, 80ev t o u avOpwTrou o s v tc k ; 589b,10 (5tv0pa)7ro? eaiai
syxpaT E C T T aT O ^, xal t o u TroXuxecpaXou 0 p(j./(iaT O <; STTi.^.eXrja'ETai. &<ntep
y e c o p y o ? , T a [ l e v ^ j i e p a T p ^ c o v / xal T i O a a e u c o v , to c 8 s a y p t a gcttoxcoXuwv
9ueo0ai,
a .r a )r H ] / xaax e c y ^ q e i p e R t o y 'f o y ] / B e Rmnt*;xa-

X e 2 P^.T FietHTq] "[first.] And he does [not reconcile them] /
customarily (<ruvr]0eta) [nor does he take them] / to himself
[together (tmouvtxyuiy-t})]/, but (AXX<4) he makes hostile [enmity] /
within [himself.]
51,8-9 The translator wrongly separated 7ravTdt7raai into jcdtvTa, which he
associated with TocOra to arrive at N 2lY T H p o y , and nctel which
he translated by means of N oyO N NIM.
PLATO, r e p u b l i c 5 8 8 b - 5 8 9 b 51,4-23 339
4 But (aXXa) he brings about [

[ ] enmity [
6 And with strife they
devour each other among
8 themselves. Yes (yap), all these things
he said to everyone who
10 praises the doing of injustice.
Then (ouxouv) is it not
12 profitable for him who speaks
justly (Sixaiov)? "And if he
14 does these things and speaks in them,
within the man they
16 take hold firmly.
Therefore especially he strives
18 to take care of them and he nourishes
them, just as the
20 farmer (yetopYo^) nourishes his
produce (Yevvyjfia) daily. And
22 the wild (aypiov) beasts (Orjptov)
keep (xooAueiv) it from growing.
Plato, Republic 588^589^ cont.

But he allows them to bite each
other / and to devour each other as they fight. 589a,5 Yes, by all
means, he said, he who praises the doing of injustice would say
these things. / On the other hand, would not he who says that just
deeds are profitable say that it is necessary / to do and say these
things, whence the inner man 589b,! will be completely in control
of the man, and he will take charge of the many-headed creature, /
just like a farmer who nourishes and domesticates the tame ones,
on the one hand, / and keeps the wild ones from growing, on the
other hand . . . ?
THE DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH
V I,6:52,1-63,32
Peter A. D i r k s e , J am es B rash ler and D o u g las M. P a r r o t t *

84.
Mahe. Hermes en Haute-ligypte. Vol. I. (Hereafter, Mahe [1]).
Keizer, L. S. The Eighth Reveals the Ninth: A New Hermetic Initia
tion Discourse (Tractate 6, Nag Hammadi Codex VI): Translated
and Interpreted. Academy of Arts and Humanities Monograph
Series 1. Seaside, CA: Academy of Arts and Humanities, 1974.
Troger, K.-W. "Die sechste und siebte Schrift aus Nag-Hammadi-
Codex V I. ThLZ 98 (1973), cols. 495-503. (Hereafter, Troger
M).
Mah6, J.-P. Le Sens et la composition du traite hermetique, L Og-
doade et lenneade, conserve dans le Codex VI de Nag Ham
madi. RevSR 48 (1974), 54-65. (Hereafter, Mahe [2]).
Troger, ed. Gnosis und NT. Pp. 53-54. (Hereafter, Troger [2]).
Troger, K.-W. "Die hermetische Gnosis. Gnosis und N T. Edited
by Troger. Pp. 97-119. (Hereafter, Troger [3]).
In the MS the text is well preserved in the bottom and mid-page

areas throughout. However the text at the top of every page is
damaged, although the condition steadily improves as one moves
through the tractate.
Evidence remains in 52,1 of the title that once was there, but a
reconstruction is impossible. No title appears at the tractates end.
In view of this Krause simply calls V I,6, "Hermetic Writing Whose
Title Has Not Been Preserved. It seems desirable, however, to
avoid titleless tractates where possible. Titles for the largest part
of the tractate are found in 53,24-26, "The Discourse on the Eighth
* Peter A. Dirkse prepared a preliminary version with the editorial as

sistance of James Brashler. Following Dirkses withdrawal from the project,
Brashler made extensive improvements in the transcription and translation.
Douglas M. Parrott provided the introduction and footnotes and brought
the transcription and translation to completion.
342 n a g h a m m a d i c o d e x v i ,6
and the Ninth, and in 61,21-22, "The Eighth Reveals the Ninth.
Although these are not titles for the tractate as a whole, they do
refer to the main subject matter. Hence we have adopted for the
title The Discourse on the Eighth and Ninth.
The expression "eighth and ninth (or "ogdoad and ennead) is
understandable in the context of the belief in late antiquity that
concentric spheres surround the earth. The first seven (counting
from earth) were connected with the known planets (including the
sun and moon), and some, at least, were popularly thought to be
dominated by powers inimical to the best interests of mankind (cf.
Martin P. Nilson, The New Conception of the Universe in Late
Greek Paganism, Eranos 44 [1946], pp. 20-27). The eighth sphere
began the area beyond the control of the lower powers, and hence
marked the beginning of the divine realm. The Gnostics believed
that at death the soul would have to find its way through the seven
spheres in order to be saved and that at each sphere it was possible
that the soul might be denied passage to the next sphere. However,
once beyond the seventh, the soul need no longer fear, but could
move from one level of blessedness to the next (cf. A-poc. Paul [V,2]).
This tractate displays the (later ?) conviction that the spheres can
be gone through in a spiritual sense during the present life. Thus the
names of the spheres can also be attached to the stages in spiritual
progress. The prayer for illumination in VI,6 speaks, for example,
of the suppliants having attained the seventh (stage) (56,27); and
at other points the eighth and the ninth are spoken of as both stages
and spheres (52,2-6; 56,23-26). Thought of as a sphere, the eighth is
where the souls and angels are found who sing a hymn to the ninth
and its powers (59,29-32). The ninth sphere is where the powers of
universal mind dwell (59,31-32). Mind, however, is not the same as
the highest God (60,30-31). Therefore, whether the ninth sphere is
also thought of as the place of God is not clear (cf. Mahe [2], p. 63,
where this issue is raised). In Corp. Herm. I.26, the ninth seems to
be intermediary between the eighth and God himself. And in Afoc.
Paul (V,2) 24,7, a tenth sphere is mentioned. It may be then that
the writer of this tractate assumes a still higher sphere than the
ninth, a sphere where God himself dwells.
In addition to the conception of spheres, the writer seems to have
been working with a cosmological view close to that of the Middle
Platonist Albinus, in which First God (who is himself unmoved, as
in Aristotle) by attraction moves Mind (his active part) (60,17-61,2),
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND N IN TH : INTRODUCTION 343
which in turn influences the world soul (58,5-6) (cf. Albinus, Didas-
kalikos 163-64).
Considered as stages in spiritual development, the eighth and
ninth are preceded by stages one through seven. These are not de
scribed individually in V I,6, but it is clear that two things must
occur in order for one to pass through them to reach the eighth and
ninth: the attainment of purity of life according to the standard of
divine law (56,27-57,1) and the banishing of ignorance by mastering
the knowledge found in certain books (54,6-18). When one has done
these, he is ready for the eighth and ninth.
For the initiate to attain these two stages, it is first necessary that
the mystagogue himself achieve a sense of unity with universal mind
(the ninth); this occurs in his ecstatic vision in 58,1-22. The initiate
enters the eighth when he recognizes that this unity has occurred
and responds by what amounts to joining the chorus of the eighth
and singing a silent hymn to universal mind, as he has apprehended
it in the mystagogue (58,16-59,9). The ninth is reached when the
initiate experiences his own unity with universal mind and receives
the confirmatory vision in which the chorus of the eighth sings to
him (59,24-60,1).
The form of V I,6 is a dialogue between a teacher and a pupil. It
begins as a school dialogue depicting the passage of information
from the one to the other. But then at 55,22 the form shifts to a
dramatic dialogue, in which the immediate reactions to direct ex
perience are expressed (noted also by Mahe [2], pp. 64-65). The pur
pose of this was no doubt to involve the reader in the experience
being described. Another example of this mixed school-dramatic dia
logue form is Corf. Herm. X III, which is also closely related to
VI,6 both structurally and conceptually, as Mahe has shown ([2],
PP- 58-65).
Troger reasonably suggests that the Hermetic tractates (of which
VI,6 is one, as is shown below) were used in the context of small
groups devoted to secret knowledge, in which those who were more
advanced would teach the n e o p h y t e s and others who were curious,
and in which certain cultic activities were engaged in (note the
prayers and hymns in V I,6 and Corp. Herm. I, X III and Asclepius).
The tractates would have served as the basis for discussions and as
texts for individual meditation ([3], p. 119).
The participants in the dialogue in V I,6 are Trismegistus (identi
fied also as Hermes in 58,28; 5 9 ,11; 63,24), and an unnamed initiate.
The dialogue may be outlined in the following manner:

I. Introductory discussion in which the initiate refers to an
earlier promise by the mystagogue to bring him into the
eighth and ninth (52,2-7), and the mystagogue sets down the
condition (52,12-14) and indicates that he considers that both
the initiate and he are ready (52,16-18). He also impresses on
him the fact that he has brothers in the mystical fraternity,
which he is about to enter, and that he should honor them
(53,6-21).
II. The formal request for the discourse on the eighth and ninth
(53,24-27).
III. The prayer for the experience of the eighth and ninth. The
preliminary instruction deals with the communal nature of
the prayer (53,28-33), a reminder of the progress that the
initiate has made (54,6-32), the initiates affirmation of that
progress (54,6-32), and the roles the mystagogue and the ini
tiate are to play (55,10-22). The prayer (perhaps said jointly)
consists of a doxology (55,22-56,22), a request for wisdom of
speech (56,22-26), an assertion of the participants worthiness
(56,27-57,3), a request for the visionary experience (57,3-9),
a plea that the spirit in them be acknowledged (57,10-18),
and finally a request that the prayer be accepted (57,18-25).
IV. The embrace between mystagogue and initiate (57,26-27).
V. The vision of the mystagogue (57,28-58,22).
VI. The entering of the eighth by the initiate (58,22-59,9).
VII. The entering of the ninth by the initiate (59,15-60,1).
V III. The exhortation to silence about the vision by the mysta
gogue (60,1-4).
IX . The singing by the initiate of a hymn of praise to God for the
experience, in which the initiate acknowledges his attraction
to the being of the divine (60,4-61,17).
X. Arrangements for the preservation and use of the book. The
book is to be written on steles and deposited in the temple at
Diospolis (61,19-62,15). This is to be done at the correct astro
logical time (62,16-20). An oath is to be included indicating
that the book is only for those who have attained the proper
stage of development (62,22-63,14). A second oath is added
making the user promise that he will guard the words of
Hermes (63,15-30).
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND N IN TH : INTRODUCTION 345
The dialogue form, the use of the names Trismegistus and Hermes,
dose similarities to Corf. Herm. X III, and significant affinities with
Corj>. Herm. I.20-32, mark VI,6 as a heretofore unknown Hermetic
tractate. Troger groups V I,6 with Corp. Herm. I, IV. VI, VII, and
XIII ([3], pp. 103, h i) , since in his judgment these exhibit a dual-
istic type of Gnosticism characterized by a conviction of the divine
nature of the spirit (pneuma), a sense of estrangement from the
world, disengagement from the body, and the desire to return to the
heavenly home ([3], p. 107). These characteristics are combined
with elements common to Egyptian mystery communities, namely
visions, ecstasy as a means of uniting with the divine, purification
and asceticism, baptism and sacred meal conceptions, secret
teaching and the emphasis on the passing on of tradition, special
symbols, sacrifice, and secret discipline ([3], p. 103). He sees this
combination resulting from the influence of Gnosticism upon
Hermetic mystery communities in Egypt ([3], pp. 101-02). Hence
he describes the system of beliefs found in these tractates as
Hermetic Gnosticism.
Illuminating as Trogers analysis is, one would like to see a clearer
delimitation of the term Gnosticism before accepting it as apply
ing to this tractate. It may be that what is reflected here is a variant
of the dualistic Weltanschauung of the Graeco-Roman world that
is unrelated to Gnosticism.
Affinities with the thought of Albinus (noted above) make it likely
that VI,6 was composed sometime in the second century A.D.
THE DISCOURSE
ON THE EIGHTH AND THE NINTH
VI,6:52,1-63,32
TnT I
[ 10 ]. . [
2 [fi> n a . e ic u ] f A K.epH [i*] na[Y] f ic A q
[e T p e icW ] n jL M e e Y e e ^ o y N
4 [e T M ]A .2 a ?M O Y N e - a y u > mW
[F J] 0 >C f lK N ? 6 2 0 YN e T M A
6 ' p e i T e - tt j c a k x e t a Y t $ t*
ta $ i c Wt t t a p a a o c i c cu n a .
8 U^Hpe- T C f M6N T T*TA.$IC-
neprn* A a.q op tune k a ta tmH
10 T p a jM e - ^ e u o o c rA p n i k
WTA.pipa.pxei RnepH-f- A.ei
12 xooc e u ? x e K.p n M e e y e R
n o Y ^ . n o Y ^ . FJFJbasmoc* FI
14 TA.pixei TtTTNA 0 tFI t a y n a
M IC- A 6 IKCU NA.K PA.Y F lT C N e p
16 r e iA - 6 T N O H C I C M N OJO OTt
FipA.Y F J^ h tk * PaY W^ht* 2 a , c
18 e c e e f FI61 t a y n a m i c - W
T A .p iCl) TA.p 6 B O X TTTHTH
20 e T ^ e 'J 'e N H 6 i A e i jc n o - d>
n a c 1cut* u ? A x e n i m * a .k.x o o y
22 N A l KA.ACUC- "J-p e i y M l A e
R n e e i q p A x e J'n o y c t a .ic
24 x o o q - A.K.XOOC TAP ^ 6 T A y
NA.MIC T F l 2 Pa.Y W^HI*
26 xeq xe ie u n ic Roe R n iu j h
p e eqjA YX TTO O Y* * P * fi) tta
52,12-13 For a similar formula referring to an earlier promise, cf. Corf.

Herm . X I I I .1 ; Stobaeus 1.21.9 (Nock-Festugi&re III, Frag.
VI.i).
THE DISCOURSE
ON THE EIGHTH AND THE NINTH
VI,6:52,1-63,32
[52]
[
2 [ O (&) my father,] yesterday you promised [me]
[that you would bring] my mind into
4 [the] eighth and after
wards you would bring me into the
6 ninth. You said that this is the
order ( t <x i <;) of the tradition (7rapa8ocris). O (>) my
8 son, indeed ((iiv) this is the order (tais).
But (te) the promise was according to ( x <x t <x )
io human nature. For (yap) I told you
when I initiated (pxeo0ai) the promise, I
12 said: If you hold in mind
each one of the steps (PaOjjto?).
14 After I had received the spirit (7neuji.a) through the power
(SuvajjLi?),
I set forth the action (svpyeia) for you.
16 Indeed ( f i e v ) the understanding ( votjctk; ) dwells
in you; in me (it is) as though (&>?)
18 the power (&uva{us) were pregnant.
For (yap) when I conceived from the fountain (mgyif))
20 that flowed to me, I gave birth. O (&)
my father, you have spoken every word
22 well (xaXtos) to me. But (te) I am amazed (Oauâ)
at this statement that you have just
24 made. For (yap) you said: The
power (Suvajm;) that is in me.
26 He said: I gave birth to it (the power), as
children are born. Then (&pa), 0 (&) my
"power : Cf. discussion of $iiva(s (W. Grundmann) in T D N T

II, especially p. 290.
28 e i o ) i * o y W T A 'f 2 * 2 n c o n e q j
x e < c e > n x x tt'F mTJ flx c u c u M e -
30 ic a a c d c cd n ^ q ^ H p e n e 'fA rA
on e q {a )}c u rt c b o a itn
[NT]
(Line 1 lacking)
2 [ 7 ][
[ ] [ ...........] # [
4 [ . ] . * . [ ] [ ] n c - Aycu [
a [ ] . . . 5 o y o e i qj n i [ m - e]
6 t b 6 [n ]A 'f n A q j H p e o [ y A ]
n a i'k h e p o K T e e T p e f i c ]
8 COYCUN N6KCN H o y A.ycp
N f T A e io o y k a a c d c oy
10 n e T e c p c p e * 2 o ) N e i M M o q - A.ei'f' p a n
14 e p o q 2^>c e y q p o o rt F ix n o
W e e W N e e i q j H p e - A p A fi)
16 n A fcdt* o y F iT A y 2 a ) o y R
M A y fi) n A C ^ H p e 2 n t t n a
18 T iK O N N e e y q p o o r t rA p R
N e N e p re iA e y p A y S A N e
20 RW K e 'p y X H 6 T B G nAT 't XOJ
R m o c x e 2 n a t m o y Ne*
22 n e K q j A x e o y m e n e M W Teq
ANTIAOTIA R M A y x i n 'J N O y
24 fi) n A e i c D i * e p i A p x e c e A i R n
52.29 Krause (followed by Mah6 [1]) emends to < K > NAAni*, "you
will count me. offspring : or books. The same word (XU)CD-
M e ) can mean either one. Hence the context must determine
the translation. For the numerous instances in VI,6 cf. Coptic
Words index.
31 e q curt, is numbered : With more context one might emend
to e q c y c u n e , so that the whole would translate, This good
thing comes about through...
53.16 2 C U o y , day : The absence of the article may be the result
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH 5 2 ,2 8 - 5 3 ,2 4
28 father, I have many brothers, if

I am to be numbered among the offspring.
30 Right (xaXS<;), 0 (&) my son! This
good thing (ayaOov) is numbered by
[53]
(Line i lacking)
2 [
[
4 [ 1 And [
C ] at all times.
6 Therefore, O (&) my son,
it is necessary (a v a y x r)) for you to
8 recognize your brothers and
to honor them rightly (xaX&s) and
10 properly, because (&c,) they
come from the same father.
12 For (yap) each generation I have
called (7cpo<j9toveTv). I have named
14 it, because they were offspring
like these sons. Then (3cpa), O (<b)
16 my father, do they have
(a) day? O (d>) my son
18 they are spiritual ones (7rveu|j.aTi.x6v). For (yap)
they exist as forces (Irvepyeia) that grow (auâveiv)
20 other souls (ûxrj). Therefore I say
that they are immortal.
22 "Your word is true; it has no
refutation (avT iX o y ia) from now on.
24 O (&) my father, begin (apxeaOat) the
of elision caused by the x y of the preceding word. Probably

birthdays are referred to, in view of the preceding context.
This form of Ô O y *s n t found elsewhere in Codex VI. Krause
takes CDOy to mean "also and translates, O my father, do
they also have? An object is needed. Troger (i) (followed by
Mah6 [i]) takes MMA.y to mean "mothers, and translates,
"My father, do they then have mothers also? The latter is
doubtful because of the commonness of MMA.y, the adverb,
with oyNTA.*33, and because nowhere else in the codex is the
word for mother spelled M ^y.
35o NAG HAMMADI CODEX V I,6
<yxxe R T M A .2 q }M O Y N e
26 T M A .^ 'I'IT C W l'O n ^CDtDT*
MR NA.CN H O Y M A .pR q}A H A
28 D TTAOJHpe ATTeitD-f RTTTH
pq MR N 6 K C N H O Y T 6 NA.
30 q p H p e Ne* x b k x x c e q A /f Fi
TfffTTA R*f* a)xxe- A.OJ T
32 t o y ? a h a R m o c nA.ei<Di*
6 Y 2 0 T P e ^ o Y N eN JCO JtD M e
34 i* o Y q j TTA.eia>i* A .T p m i e c
Al
[M ]
[ -------A ]* A A ..[. . . ] . Y * [
4 [ . . . a ] n ne* o y T o y n o . . .
[ . . n ]e * a a a a q m o t [R R h ] t c
6 [ . . . ] e R M o q * A.Y<u o y m c n e
[ n a .k ] v r p e i c p n M e e y e R m p o
8 ic p n H e p c p c u n e n a k R t m R
TpM R^HT* R RJCCUMe*
io n A .q^H p e t R t o j n K e T a j o
fit r ^ h a i k i a .* R e R n i k o y
12 1 AKJCCD R N in p O B A H M A . R
NA.Ht* R n a n o h t o n : n A { l }
14 e ic u l* T n p o ic o n H e p c p c u n e
N H 1 J'NOY MR T n p O N O IA .
16 k a t a R j c w M e e p q p c u n e naY
egxoce A.nqjTA.* na.Y RpA.Y
18 R ^ H t R t p o p i t - n A .qjH pe*
2 0 TA.N K C p A N p N O e i R t a
20 a h e iA . R n e K q p A .x e - k n a
6 m e R n c k c n h o y eY JA .H A
22 n R m a k e T e N A.q?H pe Ne*
53,31 "of eloquence, R"J* c y A - X 6 : Mah6 (1) emends to < 0 J A > N -

'J 'O jA .x e , "(in order that) I may speak.
54,3-5 Mah6 (1) reconstructs A ] A A A o [ Y T e ] 9 Y^[NAI*]/[ KAIo]N
n e * O Y T e O Y N O M I / [ O N n ] e - , "However [that] (de
pends) [neither] on a [necessity] / nor a law.
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH 5 3 ,2 5 -5 4 ,2 2 351
discourse on the eighth and

26 the ninth, and include me also
with my brothers. Let us pray,
28 O (&) my son, to the father of the
universe, with your brothers who are my
30 sons, that he may give
the spirit (Tcveujxa) of eloquence. How
32 do they pray, O (S>) my father,
when joined with the generations?
34 I want to obey (7teC0 e<j0 at), O (&) my father.
[54]
[ ] But (aXXa) it is [not
4 [ J. Nor (ofrre) [is it] a [
But (aXXa) he is satisfied [with] it (fem.).
6 [ ] it (masc.). And it is right
[for you] to remember the progress (npoxoirf))
8 that came to you as
wisdom in the books. O (Si)
10 my son, compare yourself to the
early years of life. As children (do),
12 you have posed senseless,
unintelligent (avoujTo?) questions (7cp6pXn)(ia). O (a>) my
14 father, the progress (7cpoxo7rij) that has come
to me now and the foreknowledge (7tp6voia),
16 according to (xaxa) the books, that has come to me,
exceeding the deficiencythese things are
18 foremost in me. "O (&) my son,
when (oxav) you understand (voeiv) the
20 truth (aX7)0eta) of your statement, you will
find your brothers, who are my sons,
22 praying with you.
54i 5*6 Mah6 (1) reconstructs <jm o t [?I ep]9C / [fiCMje RMOCJ,
"that one rests [in] her / and she [loves] him.
6*7 Mah6 (1) reconstructs o y M e n e / [n a tf], [it] isloving (that
makes you remember).
*6 "according to the books : Cf.63,2-3.
17 n AT : Krause and Mah6 (1) emend t o < T T > A.Y.
fi) n a .e ia > i* f p N o e i a .n n ic e
24 o y x e i m h t i eni.N3k.T e p q ? a >
n e n a .Y ^F1 WJCOJMe- na.Y e
26 T lcq ?a .jce e p o q J t e n ^ N a Y
R t '|' y x h n K c u -f e p q jc u
28 n e n ^.k k a t ^. ba . m o c - m a .
p e T N O H d c qpcune n ^ k
30 ^ y a j iCN aiTceBO * a .e ip N O f
na.ei(D "f n o y * . n o y ^ t?
32 HJCA.M6- M iA A O N A Y
m]
[ 8 e ]T ? o o T t 2 W[
2 [ .......... ]<j) n a .q jH p e . [
[.]a>.[. . . To [ . . ] . [
4 [ ] e 2N J?N CM O Y B O ^ [ jti]
N[e]NT[*Yepa.Y3A.Ne e [ p o o Y l
6 na.eia)T * n q ja - x e [ t k n a . ]
. x o o q 't'NA.Jci T e q A Y N [ a .H ic ]
8 N TO O Tic- F ie e e T ^ Y u j^ J C t e ]
e p o q R n c N A y M i.p F i c^ a h a
10 a> n a .eia)T * : n a .c y H p e
n e T e q jc p e n e m n e N M [e ]
12 e Y e T H p q mn neN 2H T*TH pq
MN T N '( 'Y x h e T p N UpAH A
14 e n N O Y T e - N T F ip a .iT e i Fi
M o q m \a .a > p e a . H t m a .^
16 c p M o y N e e T p e c n c D g o)*-
poN* a iY 01 F iT e n O Y ^ . n o y i
18 e b o a 0 T O O T q xi n T n t u q
ne* n a j K m e n n e a .T p e ic
20 p N o e i* n c u e i a> cut* n e e
t p a .6 r
6 om excD M n u p A ê
22 e s o A 2 n T iT H rH e 'f ^ e 'J ' n*.Y:
54,25 The scribe changed an original N A K into N A.Y. K e iz e r continues

the initiates speech through line 28; Krause and Mah6 (1) to
the middle of line 27.
32- 55, 1 Mah6 (1) reconstructs Y / [ A H 6 c ] e q j O O T t 11, matter
[ they] are in. T seems more likely than e in 55,1-
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH 5 4 ,2 3 -5 5 ,2 2 353
" 0 (&) my father, I understand (voetv) nothing else

24 except (et ( j ly j t i) the beauty that
came to me in the books. "This is
26 what you call the beauty
of the soul (ûx^j), the edification that
28 came to you in ( x a r a ) stages ((3a 0[i 6<;).
May the understanding (vd-qcm;) come to you,
30 and you will teach. " I have understood (voetv),
0 (&) my father, each one of
32 the books. And (8 e) especially ((iaXXov) the (fem.).
[55]
[ ] which is in [
2 [ ] O (&) my son [
[
4 [ ] in praises from
[those who] extol (auâveiv) [them.]
6 O (d>) my father, from you
1 will receive the [power (8uva(ju<;)] of the
8 discourse [that you will] give. As it was told
to both (of us), let us pray,
10 0 (&) my father. " 0 (d>) my son,
what is fitting is to pray
12 to God with all our mind
and all our heart and our
14 soul (ûx^), and to ask (atxetv)
him that the gift (8 o>pea) of the
16 eighth extend to
us, and that each one
18 receive from him what
is his. Your part, then ((iiv), is
20 to understand (voetv); my own is
to be able to deliver the discourse
22 from the fountain (Tnrjyv)) that flows to me.
55.6-7 Mah< (1) reconstructs e[TAK] jxooq, (as to the discourse)

that [you have] / conducted.
10-14 Cf. 57,21-23; Deut 6:5.
*3
35 4 NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI,6
M A pflU >A H A TTAeiCDT*

24 f p e m ic A A e i mmok n e
T A M A T .Xt 3 T M fiT p p O
26 R t 6 o m - nAT e T e n e q A o r o c
q j c u n e f j ^ n o Fi o y o e i n
28 N e q q jA x e ,a.e ^ c n a t m o y
N e ^ e H O J i N 2 N e FiNAT*
30 o )iB e * nA'f e T e n e q 'o y a j q ^ '
x n o R ttc d n J F l N m e ^ R ma
32 NIM* T e q < |)Y C IC ( MOp<J)H
FlTOYCIA- 6BOA fl^HTCj e y K IM
[ N]S
t?6i FI'I'y x h i?T[MA20?MOYNe]
2 [M U ] F lA f r e A o c [
[ . . . . ] . [ . ] o c . [ . . . . ] e iA [
4 [ . ] . n Nei*ajooTt- T e q n [ p ] o N 9[i]
[a n]cp^ a j * o y o n n i y [. . . . ] t o
6 [ . .] q j^ n o H o y o N n i m * n e p
[ ]P e BOA. MTT2JCDN 2 ^ Z ^ n N A
8 ^qccD N T5 nim * n e x e o y A
T^q o y x i q ZP^ R^HTq- e q q i
10 oyoN n im - e q M e ^ - t t n o y
t g Ra.2 0 pa.T0 c e T o y ^ ^ - x e
12 epoq zJi oyK^pcjq- c g k im
e T e q ^ iK C D N e Y p A io i i c e i m
14 m oc ycD c { e } p A i o i i c e r tt.xcd
cupe R t a y n a m ic n e i \ x o c e
16 a .T M fiT *N o 6 - n e f c o T W a n
T ^ e iS ZWZXOXZiD X tDcu
55,23 It may be that this phrase should be taken to mean that the
prayer is spoken in common, as Mah6 proposes ([2], p. 56).
24-57,25 On prayers in Hermetism, cf. Nock-Festugi&re 1,27, note 79*
30 o y C D G ) replaces AOTOC, which is deleted by the scribe.
31 life for the forms : or, if one takes the double N before IN6
as an example of the normal doubling of a single initial N before
an initial vowel (as Krause does), one could translate, with
Krause, the life form.
56,1 Reconstruction supported by 58,15-20 and 59,28-30.
Mah6 restores m FI [R A yN A M IC], and [the powers]/'
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH 5 5 ,2 3 - 5 6 ,1 7 355
Let us pray, 0 (&) my father:

24 I call upon thee, who
rulest over the kingdom
26 of power, whose word (Xoyo?)
comes as (a) birth of light.
28 And (8e) his words are immortal.
They are eternal and un-
30 changing. He is the one whose will
begets life for the forms in
32 every place. His nature (<piS<n<;) gives form (|i.op<pr))
to substance (ou<na). B y him
[5]6
the souls (ûx'/)) of [the eighth]
2 [and] the angels are moved [
[
4 [ ] those that exist. His providence (7cpovoia)
extends to everyone [
6 [ ] begets everyone. He is the one who
[ ] the aeon among spirits (7rveu[xa).
8 He created everything. He who is
self-contained cares
10 for everything. He is perfect, the
invisible (aopaTo?) God to whom one speaks
12 in silence,his
image (d x co v ) is moved when it is directed (S io tx e iv ),
14 and i t governs (S ioixetiv) the
one mighty in power (Stivafiu;), who is exalted
16 above majesty, who is better than the
honored (ones), Zoxathazo a 00
56,2-4 Mah6 (1) reconstructs [ t t a T r a . p c t g ] / [n e q A ]o [r]o c

n[opqj] OJA. o[YON] / [ ni ] h , For he it is] / [whose] word
[reaches] to [all] / . . .
5-6 Mah6 (1) reconstructs [M n ] T o / [ n o c ] , in the place.
6-7 M ah6 (1) r e c o n s tr u c ts nep/[O CO J]p, (T h e one w ho) has
divided. . .
10 or for everything and is perfect. You are the (Troger [1]), or
"for all beings in his fullness (Mah6 [1]).
12-14 T h is s e n te n c e se e m s p a r e n th e tic a l. E m e n d a tio n fo llo w s K r a u s e s
p ro p o sa l.
14-16 A s K ra u s e p o in ts o u t, th is s e c tio n m a y b e ta k e n v o c a tiv e ly .
NAG HAMMADI CODEX V I,6
i8 e e CD CD 05 H h H cDcDcD CD
HH o 5cDcucDcDcD <5 o< 5 <5<5
20 a > a 5cDcDcDcD YYYYYY
05cucua5a5a5a5a5a5a5a5D
22 CDcDcD Z cdzslZ cu t t x o T c
M A + NAN F J N O y C O ^ IA G BO A
24 T 6 K A Y N A M IC G f l l H
0 )A p 0 N GTpSNJCCD NAN f l e e
26 c o p iA R e or' a o a c m R g s n n a c *
H A H A N p OJpTt RTTCD2 G 0 G B A O
28 m a c s n o s i F lR e y c e B H C s n
p n O A IT C Y e C G A I M t t c k n o
30 m o c * a ycu neKO YCuqp
TfiJCCDK M M O q G BO A R O Y O
32 e i q j n i m * A N M O O c y e t a p F1
m
[ t c k ^ i h A Ytu a n ] k o j H c c u n
2 [ 9 ih l^ T p e c q jc u n e
[ F i 6 i ] T e i < : [ e e a j ] p ! A . - n ^ c o e i c m a *!*
4 [ n a ] n F i T A A H e e i A Fi s i k c u n -
M[ a ]'( ^ i T M TTNA T p N
6 N ^ Y [e]-fM O p < t)H H e i KCDN
ta T e r e M H T ec o jta m m a y *
8 mtttyttoc HnAHpa>
MA. S T O O T H e B O A f l T M n F
10 C M O Y* H l'C O Y O J N TtlTNA
e T F i^ H T F i - e B O A TAP f i T O O
12 T K nT A TT T H p<j xi ' | ' Y x h
e B O A rA p W ^ h tIc n A r e N
14 N H T O C U T A T T r e N H T O N OJO)
n e - tt.x t t o R n A Y T o r e N H T O C -
16 e q q p o o it c b o a ^ It o o t k -
ttjctto F IF ire N N H T O N t h
18 p o Y e f q j o o T t o ce i R F I a o
"universe received soul : World soul was a concept in Middle

DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH 56,18-57,18 357
18 ee 000 eee 6600

ee 066660 00000
20 606606 uuuuuu
006666666666
22 000 Zozazoth. Lord,
grant us a wisdom (<ro<pta) from
24 thy power (Suva^) that reaches
us, so that we may describe to ourselves the
26 vision (0<opta) of the eighth (oySoa?) and the ninth (sv-
ve<?).
We have already advanced to the seventh (e(S8o|xa<;),
28 since we are pious (eO<Te(W)<;) and
walk (TuoXiTEuecrOou) in thy law (v6|xoi;).
30 And thy will
we fulfill
32 always. For (yap) we have walked in
[5 7 ]
[thy way, and we have] renounced
2 [ ], so that
thy [vision (Qecopia)] may come. Lord, grant
4 us the truth (dXr)0 eia) in the image (ebttov).
Allow us through the spirit (7cveu(xa) to
6 see the form ((xop<p^) of the image (eixcov)
that has no deficiency;
8 and receive the reflection (xu7ro<;) of the pleroma
from us through our praise.
10 And acknowledge the spirit (7cveu(xa)
that is in us. For (yap) from
12 thee the universe received soul (ÛX*))-
For (yap) from thee, the unbegotten one (ay^wyjTo?),
14 the begotten one (yevvTjrov) came into being.
The birth of the self-begotten one (auToy^vvyjTo?)
16 is through thee,
the birth of all begotten things (yewy)t6v)
18 that exist. Receive
Platonism taken over from Platos Tim aeus; cf. Albinus,

D idaskalikos 169.26-28.
r e iK H e y c i a . B t o o tn -
20 naT t Wt W n o o y m m o o y
Ni K e^pAT* t in ^ h t * t h
22 pq MN T e N 'l'Y X H mW t n
6 om t h p 5 * M A T O Y -xe n e i*
24 q j o o r t R ^ h t R Wi 1' N3tN
R t c o <|>i a N N i f M o y
26 M A pflpA C TT A Se W n c n
e p H O Y fi> T T A q jH p e oy
28 Me* p A U ? e eocM itaT* h a h rA p
6 B O \ M M O O Y TAYNA.MIC
30 6 t o W o Y o e i N W n h y q jA p o N *
'J NA.Y TAP i ' N A Y e ^ e N B A
32 e o c e M A Y ip c y A .x e epooy
A cp T e e e e 'f N A .a c o o c n a k
[ nI h
a? TiAqjHpe- e x [
2 Al JCIN T O [
m m v ao j T e e [ e e i-N A ^ o o c e]
4 n T H p q - a n o k n e [n N O ]y [c a y c d ]
(n a y e i c e N o y c n e f K [ i M ] e f
6 'P y x h - ('n a y e n e [ f ] ( : ! M e p o T
6BO\ O Y B O je eCO YAA B* K-f-
8 n H e i 6 a m - - J - n a y e p o e i i-O Y O JO j
ecp A Jce - o y R o y < J > o b o c p k a
10 Texe M M o e i* a n o k a i 6 n t a p
x h W t a y n a m i c e i* ^ ljc n W a y
12 N A H IC T H f O Y T 6 T 6 M H T 6 C
ApxH* (nay e y n H r H e c B p B p
14 fl^pA T o y c d n J " A e i x o o c fi)
TTAq^Hpe x e a n o k n e n N o y c
57,19 spiritual sacrifices : Cf. Corp. Herm . I .3 1 ; X III.18-19,21; Rom

1 2 : 1 ; Heb 1 3 :1 5 ; Eph 5 :19 ; Col 3 :16 .
27 affectionately : or "in truth.
28 rejoice : Cf. Corp. Herm . X III.8.
31-32 Troger (1) and Mah6 (1) assign these lines to theinitiate.
58,1-2 Mah6 (1) reconstructs: e j[ A N p A p x e c ]/ e A I JCIN T0[T6
eN A Y l. "[We have begun /to see immediately.]
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH 57 , 19- 58,15 359
from us these spiritual (Xoytxr)) sacrifices (0uma),

20 which we send
to thee with all our heart
22 and our soul (4'UX1')) and all
our strength. Save that which
24 is in us and grant us
the immortal wisdom (<ro<pla).
26 "Let us embrace (<x<rn:aetv)
each other affectionately, 0 (&) my son.
28 Rejoice over this! For (yap) already (^Srj)
from them the power (SiSvajxi?),
30 which is light, is coming to us.
For (y ^p) I see! I see
32 indescribable depths ((ia0o<;).
How shall I tell you,
[5]8
0 (&) my son ? [
2 from the (fern.) [
the places. How [shall I describe]
4 the universe? I [am Mind (vou?) and]
1 see another Mind (vou<;), the one that [moves] the
6 soul (tpuxrj)! I see the one that moves me
from pure forgetfulness. Thou dost give
8 me power! I see myself! I want
to speak! Fear (<po(}o?) restrains (x <x t I x w )
io me. I have found the
beginning (cxpx*)) of the power (8uvoqu<;) that is above
12 all powers (SuvajjLi,?), the one that has no
beginning (apxvj). I see a fountain (mpfy]) bubbling
14 with life. I have said, 0 (d>)
my son, that I am Mind (vou<;).
Reconstruction follows Troger (i) and Mah6 (i).

"another Mind : Cf. Corp. Herm . 1.21-23.
14a Troger (1) assigns these lines to the initiate.
14 " I se e .. .with life .": Mah6 (i) assigns this speech to the initiate.
" I see myself!": Cf. Corp. Herm . X I I I .13.
or "Fear overcomes me" (following Keizer).
36o NAG HAMMADI CODEX V I,6
16 a c i n a y q6R6AM a n w 6i ncpA
x e e y tO N j nAT b o a - 0i*Jl0
18 AC TAP TH p c CO nAOJHpe MR
R^YX H CTR^HTC Mil RAI*
20 r e x o c c e p ^ y M N e i fl o y K A
p c u q - a n o k A e n N o y c 'J'p
22 N o e r a o j T6 e e cboa. 0 t o o t < Z |>
e P2 Y M N l A K q jc o n e eyN A q ?
24 qÂê an e p o K - '(KApAeii*
fi) TTAeicuT*' 't o y c u q ? e p ^ y
26 m n e i e p o K e e iK A p A e ii* - a a a a
j c o o q a n o k rA p n e n N o y c -
28 * f p N o e i R n N o y c <J>epMHC
nAT T MAyqj '^ 'e p M H N e y e
30 R m o q e q A p e ^ 2PAT R ^ H T q :
(pAqje A.e fi) n A e ic o i* e l N A y
32 e p o K K C C 0 B e n T H p q A .e
[N6 ]
[ p A q j ] e - c t b c n A T mR a . a a y
2 [W k ] t ic ic e q N A p 6pco^
[n ]e K a )N 2 R t o k t a p n e n ;x o
4 [ l ] C U N R n O A C I T H C J R MA
n [ i ] iji - T C K n p o N O i A A p e -
6 '( M o y T e e p o K n e i c o i * n A i
CUN R N A l CD N itT T N A O N 6 C I O N
8 Aycu o y t t n a e q 'J' R n M o y
T I^ c d o y e^crl o y o N n im - o y
10 n e T K J C c o R M o q n a T cd n A
eiCDT* (f>epM H C 6T B C NAT -f
12 x e a . a a y a n co n A c p H p e - o y A i
k a i o n rA p R n N o y T e n e
58,16-17 Troger (1) and Mah6 (1) assign this to the initiate. Cf. Corp.
Herm . X.5.
17-22 Cf. Corp. Herm . X I I I .15; 1.26; Festugiere, L a Rivdlation III,
133-40.
MS has J i T O O T C . Presumably the scribe translated the
Greek fern, pronoun (for aiyrj) without considering that the
noun had changed gender.
28-29 Note the word-play, p|x?js and eptxijveiSeiv (Mah6 [2], p. 57)-
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH 5 8 ,1 6 -5 9 ,1 3 36 1
16 I have seen! Language is not able

to reveal this. For (yap) the entire
18 eighth (oy$oa<;), O (&) my son, and
the souls (<K(?)) that are in it, and the
20 angels, sing a hymn (u(i.vetv) in
silence. And (te) I, Mind (vou?),
22 understand (voetv). What is the way to sing
a hymn (ufAvstv) through it (silence)? Have you
become such that
24 you cannot be spoken to? I am silent,
O (&) my father. I want to
26 sing a hymn (u(i.veiv) to you while I am silent. "Then
(aXXa)
sing it, for (yap) I am Mind (vou?).
28 I understand (voetv) Mind (vou<;), Hermes,
who cannot be interpreted (ep(jiY)ve\kiv)
30 because he keeps within himself.
And (te) I rejoice, O (&) my father, because I see
32 thee smiling. And (te) the universe
[59 ]
[rejoices]. Therefore there is no
2 creature (x t laic) that will lack
thy life. For (yap) thou art the
4 lord of the citizens in
every place. Thy providence (7tpovoia) protects.
6 I call thee father, aeon
of the aeons, great divine (Getov) spirit (7tveu(xa).
8 And by a spirit (7cveu(i.a) he gives
rain upon everyone. What
10 do you say to me, O (&) my
father, Hermes? "Concerning these things I
12 do not say anything, O (&) my son.
For (yap) it is right (Sixaiov) before God
Krause reconstructs [ R N o ] H C I C , but the traces make [ R k ] -

T IC IC more likely.
"aeon : For the conception of aeon in Hermetism, cf. Corp.
Herm . X I .1-5,15,20.
Keizer ascribes this sentence to Trismegistus.
14 Cf. 60,3-4; Corp. Herm . X I I I .13,22.
3^2 NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI ,6
14 t pe n ka pcun A n e t e m t -
fi) n T p ' i ' c M e r i C T O C M R T p e
16 t a '| ' Y x h p x H p A A t f e e c u p e i A
o N e e i o N - o y R 6 o m rA p
18 MMOK e^CDB NIM 0 ) 0 C A
M n M l T H p t j 1 KOTK e^pA'f
20 t t < c > M o y fi) n A u ? H p e R i \ x o o c
eKKjk.pA.eii*- e p i A i T e i F i n e
22 T K o y A q jq R o y K A p c u q -
N T A p e q o y c u e q c n o y Aq
24 xi o jk ak xe n e ic u i* n T p i c
M e r i C T O C o y n e ' J 'N A . x o o q
26 A N otei R n e e i o y o e m - A y c u
a n o k "J-nay e T e e i e a > p i A
28 Ro yuJT* R^pA'f R h t k - a.Y*u
f-NAy e e o i ' A o i c m n N 'l 'y
30 x h e T R ^ H T C MW R A i* r e A o c
e y p 2Y MNei e e e N N A C h r
32 n e c A y N a h 1 c* A y t l ) - f N A y
epoq eyRTAq H h a y R T ey
34 A y N A H ic T H p o y e q c c u N ?
[5]
R <n gt>2m TtTTNX- c p q ja . y . x i n [ + N o y ]
2 RTHK2ipq)N 2 ^ o y M flT [n p o ]
neTHC* MU\>Q)xxe a /i* e e q > [p ia j
4 xih t g n o y c y c y e 2 L p 2 y [ M N e i ]
A n e ic u t o ja (J>ooy n k x [c]cp
59,15 Krause omits translating m FI T p G because he believes the scribe

crossed it out. The apparent line through the letters seems to
be only the bleeding of ink along a horizontal fiber, a situation
that may be observed elsewhere on the MS page.
15-16 Cf. Philo Det.pot.ins. 149; Spec.leg. II.31.
20 MS has TTMOy, the death/* which Krause, Keizer, and Mah6
(t2] P* 56) translate as it stands. Our emendation is accepted
by Troger (1) and Mah6 (1).
26-60,5 Keizer ascribes this speech to Trismegistus.
28 in you : Probably the Coptic word order is significant here
so that this means, in effect, the same vision that is in you.
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH 5 9 ,1 4 -6 0 ,5 363
14 that we keep silent about what is hidden.

0 (&) Trismegistus, let not
16 my soul (ûx^) be deprived (x^pa) of the
great divine (Oeiov) vision (O ecopia). For ( y a p )
18 everything is possible for you as (to?) master
of the universe. Return to
20 <praising>. O (&) my son, and sing
while you are silent. Ask (ocixetv) what
22 you want in silence.
When he had finished praising he
24 shouted: Father Tris
megistus! What shall I say?
26 We have received this light. And
I myself see this same vision (Oetopioc)
28 in you. And
I see the eighth (oy&oa?) and the souls (4ux*))
30 that are in it and the angels
singing a hymn (u ^ v e tv ) to the ninth (sv v ea?) and
32 its powers (Suvoqu?). And I see
him who has the
34 power (Suvoqxi?) of them all, creating
[60]
those cth at are> in the spirit (7cveu[xa). It is advan
tageous from [now on]
2 that we keep silence in a reverent posture (-7upo7ueTY)<;).
Do not speak about the vision (Oecopia)
4 from now on. It is proper to [sing a hymn (u[iveiv)]
to the father until the day to quit (the) body ((rco[xa).
Mah6, however, takes this to mean that Trismegistus is the

mediator of the vision ([2], p. 60).
Cf. Corp. Herm . 1.26.
34-60,1 MS has e q c cU N T Fl^M tFtt N2l, an impossible construction.
Two other possible emendations are suggested by Krause: eq-
CCUFIt F i2 < N > n N A creatingspirits,Mor e q ccU N T {N }2 M
TtTTNA creating in the spirit.*'
2 in a reverent posture : 7rpo7rT7)<; means a forward inclination
or drooping, hence our translation. Krause translates, in an
inclination/' Troger (1) and Mah6 (1) take it with the next
sentence, and translate, hastily.
NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI, 6
6 M l ne TK JC O J MMOq- fi) TT2J

cut* 't O Y O Jqj cdcdt * e ^ c o o q
8 'I'p^YMNei 2 P^.T F^ht*- e a j c
ik R t o n m m o k. c p q e in c M O Y 1
io a k 6 i n c n p R n e T R a p i N e Tl
ca>q- O Y n e T e q jq je ne-
12 a? naieiaJT* e T i C M O Y e e i
mh^ b o a 2 r tta^ ht** n e T e q j
14 q je A e n e n e K C M O Y g t K
N A .x o o q e^p A T e n N O Y T e -
16 T i c e c A ^ q e n e e iJ C t u c u M e
HNAfTAKO- "fNA-XOOY R
18 n c M o y e^p A T ^ r n A ^H i* eT
COTtCTt W e AH R n T H p q * AYYPMA
22 fia V m o y 'n p e q jc n o H n o y
o e i N m T) T A A H e e iA * n p e q
24 e iT e R n A o r o c TA rA nH R
n t U N j FI n a t m oy ' oy * oyoc
26 e q ^ H T t qNAup a^xxe an epoK
n j c o e i c TB 6 n A t n A N o y c
28 o y o j o j p 2Y M N ei e p o K R
m hn 6- a n o k n e no prA N O N
30 RneKnna* n N o y c neK
n \ H KTpon* neKupoJCN e
32 a s p + A A A e i R M o e r J-n a y
|5
e p o e i A e ijc i 6 o m R t o o t K a
Cf. Corp. Herm . X III.2 1.

Troger (1) and Mah6 (1) ascribe this to the initiate.
I am . . . yourself : Krause takes this as one sentence and as
cribes it to the initiate.
Keizer ascribes this to the initiate.
Cf. Corp. Herm . X III.20; Mt 7:7-8; Ac 17 :2 7 ; Rom 10:20.
Krause takes o y as the interrogative pronoun and translates,
"B u t what is fitting?
62,1 Cf. Corp. Herm . X III.21.
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH 6 o , 6 - 6 l , I 365
6 What you sing, O (&) my

father, I too want to sing.
8 I am singing a hymn (ujivetv) within myself.
While (w?) you rest yourself, be active in praise,
io For (yap) you have found what you seek.
But (86) is it proper,
12 O (&) my father, that I praise because I
am filled in my heart? What (-{- 86) is proper
14 is your praise that you
will sing to God
16 so that it might be written in this imperishable book.
I will offer up
18 the praise in my heart, as I
pray to the end of the universe and
20 the beginning (apxh) of the beginning (apx^), to the ob
ject
of mans quest (^nQfia), the
22 immortal discovery (eSprjp-a), the begetter of
light and truth (aXrjQeia), the
24 sower of reason (Xoyo<;), the love (dydwn)) of
immortal life. No
26 hidden word (Xoyoc) will be able to speak about thee,
Lord. Therefore my mind (vou?)
28 wants to sing a hymn (u(xvetv) to you
daily. I am the instrument (o p y av o v )
30 of thy spirit (7 tv eu (x a) ; Mind (vou?) is thy
plectrum (7tXrjxTpov). And (86) thy counsel
32 plucks ((JjaXXeiv) me. I see
61
myself! I have received power from thee.
60.15 T h e sc rib e f ir s t w ro te N A -X O O yq, " w ill s e n d h im , a n d th e n

d e le te d th e y .
20 the beginning of the beginning : For a similar phrase, cf. the
"Mithras Liturgy, 488 (M.W. Meyer, ed., The "M ith ra s L it u r
g y Missoula: Scholars Press, 1976).
20-21 Cf. 58 ,10 -11; 60,10.
23-24 "the sower of reason : Cf. Mk 4:14-20.
29-32 For metaphor, cf. Plut. Def.orac. 436F, and Pyth.or. 402B.
2 n e K M i e i e n p t [ ] 2 a n kx
a i d c id n ^ q p H p e - fi) t ^ m o t *
4 [ m]H H c i n a T- -fajT? ^ mot *
[e e i]p 2 Y MNei epoK- R n e i
6 jc [ i ] n t U N j n p Wt o o t k - W
T i p e m i 1 W c o < |) o c - *f'
8 c m o y e p o K -f-MOYTe m
neKpAN ei*2HTt z ?*1 B^ht*
io 5 e e 05 HHH CDCDCD ITT
cDcDcDcD o O o C O cDcDcD
12 cDcD YYYYYY
cDcDcDcDcD<I5 cuQ5 Q5
14 cDcDcDCDcDcDcDcDcD
0505 B t o k n e n e Y a j o
16 orf mR rtn N A "|*P2 Y m n i
ep o K O Y M H tN o y T e
18 id TTAO^Hpe n e e u c c u M e
ca ^ q in e p n e R a io c t t o a ic -
20 2 N C 2 3L|f W ca.2npA .N qj
e ic p o N O M ^ e e e o i'A o ic
22 O yO )N j 6 BOA. H 0 C N N 1 C
fN m c a ) n a . < e ic u T * > F l e e
24 eTe k o y a -2 CA^Ne m hoc (
N o y : cd n A < q j H p e > n q p x jc e
26 MTT-XCUCJUMC C A ^ q 1 N C T H
AH R KA.AA.6I N O C : CD IT IU )H
28 pe n e e u ccu M e q jq je ecA ^q
61,3 Troger (1) does not begin a second quotation at the end of the
line, hence the speech of Trismegistus continues through 61,22.
8-15 Cf. 56,17-22; Gos. Eg. (111,2) 66,12-22.
9 name : For the use of name (8vo[ioc) in Hermetic prayers,
cf. Reitzenstein, Poim ., p. 15, line 2; p. 18, line 12; p. 20, line
6; p. 27, line 8.
19 Diospolis : It is uncertain whether this is the ancient town of
Diospolis Parva (modern Heou near Nag Hammadi), or Dios
polis Magna (ancient Thebes at Luxor). Cf. J. M. Robinson,
Coptic Gnostic Library Today," N T S 14 (1968), 369-70.
20 "hieroglyphic characters : Lit. "letters of a scribe of the house
of life." Our translation is supported by a similar D e m o tic
phrase with this meaning; cf. F. LI. Griffith, Catalogue of the
Demotic P a p y ri in the Rylands L ib ra ry , Manchester III (Man-
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH 6 l , 2-28 367
2 For (yap) thy love has reached us.

Right (xaX&s), O (&) my son. O (&) grace!
4 After these things I give thanks
by singing a hymn (u jiv e tv ) to thee. For (yap) I have
6 received life from thee,
when thou madest me wise (cro<poq). I
8 praise thee. I call
thy name that is hidden within me.
10 a o ee o eee 600 iii
6 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12 00 uuuuuu 00
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 0
14 0 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 0
00. Thou art the one who exists

i6 with the spirit (7cveun<x). I sing a hymn (ujzvetv)
to thee reverently.
18 0 (&) my son,
write this book for the temple at Diospolis
20 in hieroglyphic characters,
entitling (ovofiaêiv) it The Eighth (oySod?)
22 Reveals the Ninth (svvea?).
I will do it, 0 (d>) my <father>, as
24 you command
now. O (6) my <son>,
26 write the language of the book on steles (<jt^Xt))
of turquoise (xaXd&vo?). O (d>) my son,
28 it is proper to write this book
Chester: University Press, London; Bernard Quaritch, and

Sherratt & Hughes, 1909), no. IX , 7.16; 13.19 ; 14 .2 1; n.b. note
13, p. 81. For a philological discussion of CA2Tipa.N <p, cf.
Enzo Lucchesi, A propos du mot copte Sphransh, Jo u rn a l
of Egyptian Archeology 61 (1975), 254-56.
MS has riA.cy H p e , , my son. Keizer does not emend here.
MS has TTAeiCDT, my father. Neither Troger (1) nor Keizer
emend here. Troger (1) emends in line 26 < ' f NA> CA^Cj, and
translates the sentence as a question: My father, shall I
write.
On the role of steles as vehicles of revelation in Hellenistic
texts, cf. Festugi&re, L a RivStation I, 319-24; Reitzenstein,
Point., p. 20, Prayer to Hermes, sentence 6; Steles Seth (VII,5).
e ^ e N C T H A H R K 3k.AAA.ei N O C
30 2 W c 2 e e i RCA.2npjk.e1qj-
n N o y c r i p oyAAq RTAq
32 q jc u n e R N e n i c K o n o c
5B
R N A f 6T B 6 nAT * t * p K A e Y e
2 A T p eY qjoocT * R n e e i q ? A . x e
a t t c d n c R f K A A q R 2 <>yn [ R ]
4 nAOY <une- e y R o j m o y [ n m]
4>YA.a5 p o e i c e p o q mR .
6 M<)>HAIOC' RÔOYT* M []N
oynam e y e R n poctu
8 n { p } o N R K p o Y P ' R f t o M e Jk.e
6boyp e y e RnpoccunoN
10 R e M o y koj R A e R o ytU N e
N T A A A K T IT H C RTTITR R R
12 n A A S R KA A A A C I N H e q e R T
TpATCDNON R^CÂT TTpAN 1*
14 nAAS R c u n R c A itn e ip iN O N -
2 R 2 RC 2 A 1 R c A ^ n p A e iq j-
16 CU n A O J H p e CKNAKCD MTTAT
e T q jo o r t 2 ^ T n i p e e N o c
18 mR n p H 2 ^ t t 6 C o y e i e R n e
2 0 0 Y - A M N TH R M O ip A p n A
62,3-4 o y o n e , translated here sanctuary, is not attested else

where. It may be related to o y o i l , be pure, holy. Cf. H.-M.
Schenke, Review of Robinson et al.. Facsim ile Edition: Codex
V I, O L Z 69 (1974), col. 242, where o y d J I i e is linked with the
Egyptian w'-b, sanctuary. Sanctuaries were popular places
to deposit revelations; cf. 2 Kings 22:8; Festugi&re, La Rivtla-
tion I, 320-24; Reitzenstein, Poim ., p. 20, line 6.
5 Krause sees 'j'lC , nine, at the end of the line, but this is un
supported by ultra-violet collation and would be difficult in
any case, since the following word has the article, which would
be surprising in a number construction. Schenke proposes
[ n ] A T 9 , the multitude, but the meaning is u n c le a r (Review
of Robinson et al., Facsim ile E d itio n : Codex V I, O LZ 69 [1974]*
col. S42).
4-9 Perhaps an allusion to the gods making up the primeval Ogdoad
in Egyptian mythology. It was a well-known tradition that
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH 6 1 ,2 9 -6 2 ,1 9
on steles (ar/jXyj) of turquoise (xaXaivo?),

30 in hieroglyphic characters.
For (yap) Mind (vou<;) himself has
32 become overseer (immurnot;)
62
of these. Therefore I command (xeX eueiv)
2 that this teaching be carved
on stone, and that you place it in
4 my sanctuary. Eight
guardians (<p6Xa) guard it with [
6 of the sun (^X io ? ). The males (-f- jilv )
on the right are frog-faced (7ip 6 <no7ro v ),
8 and (M) the females
on the left are cat-faced (7cpoo<i)7cov).
10 And (8e) put a square (xeTpaytovo?)
milk (YaXaxTinr)*;)-stone at the base of the
12 turquoise (xaXdci'vo?) tablets (ttXoc)
and write the name on the
14 azure (<7a7t<pipt.vo<;) stone tablet (irXaJ;)
in hieroglyphic characters.
16 O (&) my son, you will do this
when I am in Virgo (7cocp0svo<;),
18 and the sun is in the first half of the
day, and fifteen degrees ( jio tp a ) have
some of these gods were supposed to have faces of frogs, but

there does not seem to be any well-established tradition that
gods with faces of cats were part of the Ogdoad; cf. H. Bonnet,
Reallexikon der agyptischen Religionsgeschichte (Berlin: Walter
de Gruyter and Co., 1952), under Achtheit, Frosch, and Katze.
62,16-20 The meaning here seems to be that the work should be done in
the morning immediately following the most auspicious time,
viz., the exaltation of Hermes (our Mercury), which takes place
at night in the fifteenth degree of the sign of Virgo (Firmicus
Matemus, Mathesis II.3.4-5).
18-19 "the first half of the day," tt6 c O y e i 6 MTTeÔOy: Difficult
because o y e i e is elsewhere fem., while the construction here
requires a masc. form. Hence Mah6 (1) emends to O yA. Keizer
conjectures (on the basis of an early suggestion of Peter Dirkse)
that 6 c stands for the Greek KC, an abbreviation for xpi6?, i.e.,
Aries. But diligent search has uncovered no such abbreviation.
24
20 p a r e M M o e i : D n A e i t D i * o j a
xe nim e T icjcoj m m o o y 1* n a
22 aay 2^ o y o y p a Y - C2AT A e R
o y a n a o j en^ccDMe m h tt c u c
24 T O N O M 1CI1 R N O y R T C 620 Y N
N OYKAKOYpriA. R6 i Nef
26 n a c d o ? MnJCCDCUMe- o y t g
eTM't' OYBe R2BHOY6 R.xi
28 M ip M eN H ' YNA.pCTOIXei
RToq enN O M oc RnNOYTe-
30 eMnoYpnA.pA.BA. pcu t h p<J*
aaaa 2n oytbbo e y p A iT e i
32 H n N O Y T e iJN o y c o (j)i3 i mn
O Y r N a jc ic - ay> n e T O Y
5r
NAJCnOq AN NOJOpT? 2M ITNOy

2 Te- q q j c o n e 2 *J N [r]em Koc
A o r o c MfJ N e S C D A I A K O C
4 q n a u j coqj a n H N e i* C H 2
2M neY^ coojM e e T e q c y N
6 e iA H d c T O Y B ie if epoq- eq
e i p e a n R a a a y R 2 ct)B e q q j A
8 Aeq- eqp cY N eY -a.o6 ei an
NMMAq- A A A A KATA BA0 M O C
io eq M O o q je eqflN H y eoyN
e e i H R t m R t' a Y m o y - a y u >
12 R ^ e e q f i N H Y e 2 0 Y N en*
N O H C I C RO I* A OAC 6 T O Y
14 ojn ^ e a o A F ie e N N A C 'f* 2 e
62,22-63,14 Krause and Keizer ascribe this speech to the initiate.

27 "fate : For fuller treatment of the Hermetic belief, cf. Asclepius
3 9 -4 0 .
29 "law : Cf. 56,29, where it is associated with the seventh step
of initiation. What follows is a description of the requirements
for those who would eventually attain the illumination described
in the book (63,12-14).
63,2-3 "the general and guiding discourses, R [ r ] N I K O C / A O r O C
MR R 6 3 (DAI A KO C: Evidently the books mentioned in 54,13-
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH 6 2 ,2 0 - 6 3 ,1 4 371
20 passed by (raxpayeiv) me. 0 (&) my father,

everything that you say I will
22 do eagerly. And (Se) write
an oath in the book, lest (fiYjTccot;) those who
24 read the book bring
the language (ovofxaala) into
26 abuse (xaxoupy[<x), and not (outs) (use it)
to oppose the acts of fate (et(z<xp[jtivY]).
28 Rather, they should submit (cttoix^ v)
to the law (v6[ao?) of God,
30 without having transgressed (uapapaiveiv) at all,
but (aXXa) in purity asking (aireiv)
32 God for wisdom ((7091a) and
knowledge (yv&ffi?). And he who
63
will not be begotten at the start by God
2 comes to be by the general (yevix6?)
and guiding (eoSiocxo?) discourses (X6yo<;).
4 He will not be able to read the things written
in this book, although his
6 conscience ( a u v e iS - q tn ? ) is pure within him, since he
does not do anything shameful,
8 nor does he consent ( c ru v e u S o x e tv )
to it. Rather (aXXa), by (xaxa) stages (|3<x0 [jt.6 <;)
10 he advances and enters into
the way of immortality. And
12 thus he enters into the
understanding (votjctl?) of the eighth (oySoa?) that
14 reveals the ninth (swede?). So
32; cf. also Festuglares discussion of Hermetic courses of study,

L a Riv&lation II, 39-42. o8iax6<; is an unattested adjective
from o8a, "marching out, journey, and hence means per
taining to a journey. Thus the discourses so described are
those designed to help the initiate on his spiritual journey to
ward enlightenment. There is no need to emend to
(Krause, followed by Mah6 [1]) or !otix6? (Keizer, pp. 83-86).
Krause prefers this word division : <| N X OJ CD OJ A N Fi N E T C H
But the translation makes doubtful sense.
"fNAAAC* TTA.eiCDT* IT ll
16 n e N A q j JTA.pKO H n e T N i
cduj F i n e e i J t c u c D M e ' e T O Y A A B ' N i n e
18 mH t\ kx% mR n i c a j j f mR n M O
o y ' mR C A q j q R n o y c u p x H c
20 mR TtnNA b t R ^ h t o y R p e q
CCDNT5, MN TTNOYT6 R < A r > N { H }
22 N H T O C MR n A y T O r e N N H < C >
mR n e N T iy J c n o q eTpeqpTH
24 p e i N N e N T i(J)e p M H C x o o y
N eT N A pT H pei A e R n i N i c y
26 n N o y r e NA2CDTTt n m m a y
MN O y O N NIM e N T l N p O N O
28 MXZe R M 0 0 y ng tnap
nA.pA.BA J l MnA.NA.qj* TOpTH
30 H n o y i n o y A R n h o y e jp A l
e j c c u q nA'f n e n T e x e i o c ei*
32 q j o o i t u> n A q j H p e :
63,15-30 A second statement of the oath. The first (62,22-63,14) is

presented indirectly.
19 "rulers of substance : Cf. Asclepius 19.
21 MS reads R r e N H, with r e crossed out. Krause holds that the
dots above these letters indicate the desire of the scribe to
restore them after he had crossed them out (p. 238). Elsewhere
such dots are a way of indicating deletions, cf. V I 55,30; 60,15.
29-30 The Coptic sentence is awkward. Krause, followed by Troger
(1) and Mah6 (1), translates, The wrath of each one will come
upon those who break the oath.
DISCOURSE ON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH 6 3 ,1 5 -3 2 373
shall I do it, O (&) my father. This

16 is the oath: I make him who will
read this holy book swear by heaven
18 and earth and fire and
water and seven rulers of substance (oticriapx'/js)
20 and the creating spirit (7rveu[j.a) in them
and the < unbegotten (aYewY)T6<;)> God
22 and the self-begotten (aOxoyevifc) one
and him who has been begotten, that he will
24 guard (nrjpetv) the things that Hermes has said.
And (Se) those who keep ( rq p e lv ) the oath,
26 God will be reconciled with them
and everyone whom we have
28 named (6vo[i.aeiv).
But (8e) wrath (o p y /)) will come to each one
30 of those who violate (TrapaPouveiv) the oath.
This is the perfect one (xeXeioq) who is,
32 0 (d>) my son.
63,31-32 Probably refers to the initiate described in lines 11-14 . The inter
vening material may have been inserted, since it is the second
statement of the oath. The relative clause "who is" may relate
to he who . . . comes to be" in 62,33-63,2. Troger (1) emends
and translates, "This is the really complete (logos)." Mah6
argues for This initiation is the most complete possible, O my
son ([2], p. 65, note 18).
T H E P R A Y E R O F T H A N K S G IV IN G
v i , 7 : 6 3 ,3 3 - 6 5 .7
P eter D ir k s e a n d J am es B rashler *

86.
Mahe, J.-P. La Priere dactions de graces du Codex VI de Nag-
Hamadi et Le Discours parfait. ZPE 13 (1974), 40-60.
Nock-Festugiere. Vol. II. Pp. 353-55, 399-401.
Preisendanz, K. Papyri Graecae Magicae, 2nd ed. rev. Edited by A.
Henrichs. Vol. I. Stuttgart: Teubner, 1973. Pp. 56-59.
Reitzenstein, R. Die hettenistischen Mysterienreligionen. Darmstadt:
Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft, 1966 (reprint of 1927 ed.).
Pp. 285-87.
Scott, W., ed. Hermetica. Vols. I and III. London: Dawsons of
Pall Mall, 1968 (originally published, 1924 and 1926). Pp.
374-77 (Vol. I); 284-300 (Vol. III).
Troger, K.-W. Die sechste und siebte Schrift aus Nag Hammadi-
Codex V I. ThLZ 98 (1973), cols. 495-503.
This short, almost perfectly preserved Hermetic prayer expresses
in carefully constructed liturgical language the gratitude of one who
has received deifying knowledge. Although set off with decorations
like those regularly used with titles in the Nag Hammadi codices,
the heading, "This is the prayer that they spoke, was originally
only an incipit. Together with the concluding statement (65,3-7),
this heading forms a narrative framework for the prayer. The loca
tion of this tractate suggests that the scribe of Codex VI intended
it as an appendix to the immediately preceding tractate, Disc. 8-g,
where the knowledge for which this prayer gives thanks has been
revealed. The participants, referred to as they in the title, are
probably to be identified with Hermes Trismegistus and his pupil.
Prior to the discovery of the Coptic version of Pr. Thanks., two
other versions were known to exist, the Greek version found in the
Papyrus Mimaut (Paris, Louvre, Papyrus 2391) col. X V III, 591-611,
* Peter A. Dirkse prepared a preliminary version. James Brashler brought

the work to completion.
and the Latin version preserved in the Corp. Herm. Asclepius 41b.
Attempts by Reitzenstein and Scott to reconstruct the difficult and
poorly preserved Greek version relied heavily upon the Latin text.
In 1928 Preisendanz published a more reliable Greek text in his
edition of the Greek magical papyri. More recently J.-P. Mah6s
valuable study provided a synopsis of the Greek, Latin, and Coptic
versions with a French translation and critical notes. His Coptic
text differs only slightly (cf. 64,3.6) from that published by Martin
Krause in 1972. The text of Papyrus Mimaut used here follows
Preisendanz with variations based on Mahe and an independent
collation from published photos.
A comparison of the three versions of Pr. Thanks, reveals that
this relatively independent unit of tradition has had a complicated
textual history. The Latin text retains the substance and frequently
the exact language of the other two versions, but it is expanded to
the point where it can appropriately be called a paraphrase (cf.
Mahe, p. 54). It is especially noteworthy that the Latin concludes
with the narrative statement also found after the prayer in the
Coptic text but not in the Greek. The Greek and the Coptic texts
correspond very closely, although it is evident that both have suf
fered some corruption. The Coptic text contributes significantly to
the reconstruction of the Greek text at the following places: 63,35;
64,3-4.7.15-16.22.23-24.25.34. Conversely the Greek text is superior
to the Coptic at 64,7-8 and possibly 64,33.
The literary contexts in which Pr. Thanks, appears are different
in each case. In Papyrus Mimaut it is part of a longer prayer em
bedded in a magical composition. In the Latin Asclepius it forms
the conclusion of that tractate. In Codex VI it is an independent
unit of tradition loosely appended to Disc. 8-g. It seems likely that
the Coptic text reflects the independent character of Pr. Thanks.,
and its inclusion in Papyrus Mimaut and the Latin Asclepius are
unrelated redactional uses of the prayer.
Pr. Thanks, is especially significant for the clear evidence it pre
sents of the existence of Hermetic cultic practices. The prayer itself
is certainly liturgical, as its balanced language attests. Moreover the
concluding statement mentions a ritual embrace or kiss (also found
in VI,6 at 57,26-27) after the prayer, and a cultic meal. These ref
erences to cultic practices suggest that the primary Sitz im Leben
for Pr. Thanks, was a Hermetic gnostic community dedicated to
the preservation and transmission of the knowledge celebrated in
PRAYER OF THANKSGIVING: INTRODUCTION 377
this prayer (cf. K.-W. Troger, Die hermetische Gnosis, in Gnosis

undNT, ed. by Troger, pp. 118-19). While it is not possible to assign a
date to such communities, it is reasonable to assume that they flour
ishedin the second and third centuries A.D. and possibly even earlier.
V I, 7 : 63,33 -65,7
5r
TT2J n e n o ; a h a F l T ^ y x o o q :
34 T flq ^ T t MOT* f l T O O T K ^ Y XH
n im * x y cu <|>ht* r ro pqj l q^^pOK
36 fi) n i p a . N e Y p e N c u x A e i n 2lc| 2ln*
e q T a .e ia .e n * z** t o n o m 2 l c i 2 l
2 R n N o y [T ]e * a.ycD e y c M o y
Papyrus Mimaut (Paris, Louvre, Papyrus 2391), col. XVIII, 591-611

59 1 X a p iv aoi ol'Sa(Jiev 7ra(ya x a i x a p S ta { v } 7rpo<; / g[s] avaTeia-
(Jlvy){v} (StCppaCTTOV OVOjJia TeTl[IY)[livOV I [tt)] TOU 0OU 7TpO(T7)YOpia xal
euXoyoujjievov
Latin Asclepius 41b (Nock-Festugiere II, 353-55)

353,1 gratias tibi summe, exsuperantissime; tua enim / gratia tan-
tum sumus cognitionis tuae lumen conse/cuti, nomen sanctum et
honorandum, nomen unum, 354,1 quo solus deus est benedicendus
63,33 The heading at the beginning of this tractate is an incipit that has
become a title and is decorated as one. Similar decorations mark
the end of the tractate, although the title is not repeated there.
For a discussion of the meaning of the title, see introduction.
34 Numerous parallels to the opening thanksgiving formula can be
found in J. M. Robinson, Die Hodajot-Formel in Gebet und
Hymnus des Fruhchristentums, in Apophoreta: Festschrift fw
E rnst Haenchen, ed. by W. Eltester, Beiheft 30 to Z N W (Berlin:
Topelmann Verlag, 1964), pp. 194-235. For Hermetic parallels,
cf. Corp. Herm. 1.29 and NHC V I ,6 (Disc. 8-9) 61,4.
V I , 7 - 63,33-65.7
6 3
This is the prayer that they spoke:

34 We give thanks to Thee! Every soul (<J>ux*l)
and heart is lifted up to Thee,
36 0 (&) undisturbed (evoxX eiv) name,
6 4
honored with the name (6vo(i.a<rta),

2 God, and praised
Papyrus Mimaut (Paris, Louvre, Papyrus 2391), col. X V III, 591-611

591 We give thanks to Thee. Every soul and heart (is) stretched
out to I Thee, O inexpressible Name, honored / with [the] desig
nation of God, and blessed
Latin Asclepius 41b

353,1 Thanks be to Thee, Most High, Most Excellent, for by Thy /
grace we have received the great light of Thy knowledge. / (Your)
name (is) holy and to be honored, the only name 354,1 by which God
alone is to be blessed
63,35 Cf .Corp. Herm . 1.3 1: xal xapSta? 7tp&<; ak dcv<xTST<x(ivY)<;.

The Coptic text, which presupposes xapSta . . . ccvaxeTajjivT], pro
vides the basis for emending the corrupt Greek text, cf. Mah6,
p. 43. The photograph published by Mah6 confirms the reading
<?[] given by Preisendanz, p. 58.
36 The use of Iv o /X e tv where the parallel Greek text has &<ppa<iTov is
one of several instances (cf. Mah6, p. 52) where vocabulary varia
tions suggest that the Coptic text was a translation of a different
Greek recension from the one found in Papyrus Mimaut.
epoq ton o m 3l c u R tticd [ t*]

4 xe o ja o y o N nim* A y c u oja nTH
pq* r e y N o i A M n e i c u t mR
6 n M e mR noY{oY}cuq^- a y c u
ea)xe o y R oycbcu ecA A e 6
8 e c o n 2 ^ tta o y c - e c p x A p iz e
NAN MTTNOYC MTTAOrOC FI
10 t t n c d c ic * n N O Y C m c n :x e
KAAC e N A p N O e i MMOK* n A O
12 r o c A C JXCKAAC C N A ^ B p M H
ueye R m o k * t t n c d c ic a c
Papyrus Mimaut, col. X V III, cont.

Tf\ to u j < 7 r a T p o < ; o v o f i a a i a * > 'O q 7rp [o]< ; 7uavT a<; x a l
7c a v T a { < ; } T ra T p ix Y jv 595 [ e u ] v o i a v x a l a T o p y / j v x a l 8i ^ ( o , x a P ^ o c (J i v o (; T jjxiv v o u v / [ X o y j o v y v G ) a t v vouv
jx e < v > 2va a e v o Y ja c o jx e v , X o y o v / [ 8e t v ] a a e e 7u ix < x X e a < o (x e v , y v S a w < 8 >
Latin Asclepius 41b, cont.

religione paterna, / quoniam omnibus paternam pietatem et religio-
nem / et amorem et, quaecumque est dulcior efficacia, / praebere
dignaris condonans nos sensu, ratione, 354,5 intellegentia: sensu, ut
te cognouerimus; ratione, / ut te suspicionibus indagemus; cogni-
tione,
64,3-4 Krause's restoration of MTTI U?[a] X C is unacceptable because the

expected trace of the bottom of the qj is lacking. Mah6 (p. 50)
correctly equates the X B with o<; (= ox;) and, following the Coptic
emends [0e]oO to 7raTp6?. This emendation corrects the repetition
of the preceding parallel phrase, which is probably the result of
dittography. The Coptic suggests that 6vo(jLaaa should also be
included in the emendation.
6 Krause reads TTOYOYCD O}, ''their demand, and overlooks the
dittography.
6-8 AYCU eq ?.X OYN OY - confirms the suggestion by Scott
(III, 289) that xal et t i is the basis for the Latin et quaecumque est.
While it is conceivable that the original Greek text had xal et ti
(cf. Rom 13:9, where the same idiom occurs in an analogous
PRAYER OF THANKSGIVING 64,3-13 381
with the name (6v o (i.a m a ), Father,

4 for to everyone and everything
(comes) the fatherly kindness (euvoia) and
6 affection and love,
and any teaching there may be that is sweet
8 and plain (a7rXou<;), giving (xaptecr8ai)
us mind (vou<;), speech (Xoyo?),
10 (and) knowledge (yvtocru;): mind (voo<; + (iiv),
so that we may understand (voeiv) Thee,
12 speech (Xoyo? + &e), so that we may
expound (ep(i.Y]veuetv) Thee, knowledge (yv&au; 8s)

with the j <name of > the < Father. > For to everyone and
to all things Thou hast displayed paternal 595 kindness, devotion,
love, and yet sweeter / action, having granted to us mind, / [speechj,
(and) knowledge: mind, in order that we may understand Thee;
speech, / [in order that] we may call upon Thee; knowledge,

with ancestral reverence, / because Thou think-
est it good to display to all things, paternal kindness, devotion, /
love, and whatever virtue may be more sweet, / granting to us
mind, reason, 354,5 (and) knowledge: mind, in order that we may
understand Thee; reason, / in order that by means of hints we may
investigate Thee; knowledge,
context), it seems more likely that the unusual word iTuyXuxuTarTjv

or perhaps in yXuxuxaTTjv was misread as et t i yXuxiiTaTov. Although
the Coptic can be translated as it stands, the superior text is
found in Papyrus Mimaut. C B CD translates vSeiiv (cf. 64,17)
rather than v8lE,o> ( = triie lfa ) found in Papyrus Mimaut. The
translator misread co as tv and changed the verb into a noun.
ZATTAOyc is best explained as a translation of Ivapyyjv, which
has been confused with ivepfrjv (cf. Bauer, Lexicon, p. 261), as
suggested by F. Wisse in private communication, or possibly with
Ivepytav ( = Ivepyeiav), as proposed by Preisendanz, p. 58, on the
basis of the Latin efficacia. Mah6 (p. 43) reads vepy[ei]a<v> .
64,8-14 Cf. Corp. Herm . X I I .12 and A sclepius (VI,8) 66,30-34.
14 X C K X X C N N A C O y t U NK
T F p A q j e RTA .pR.x i o y o e i N
16 T e K T N O je ic - T R p A q je
x e a k tc b o n epoK- TRpA
18 < y e J c e e N 2 R c c u M A A . K A . 3LN
S n o y tc 2 W T eK rN O Jcic
20 n q j n 2 'm 'at* R n p c u M e t * t t h 2
cpApoK- o yA n e .x c k a c a t p R
22 coycuNK- AN COyCl) NK
ffi n o y o e iN F n o h t o n - ffi
24 n cu N j RncuN ^ a n c o y c u n k

tv a o e e 7c iY v c !> / o t ij(x e v . X a [ i ] p o ^ [ e ] v 8 t i a e a u T o v T )(xtv e 8 i a <; 600 X {-
p o [x s v o t l e v [7 r]X a .(j(i.a c7 LV Y )(ia < ; ovtocc; inedeo)/[<j](x.c; x y j a s a it T o o y v corei.
X a p i^ a v 0 p to 7t o u repo t; az f j i a t o / [ y j v t o p t a a t < cte > E y v c o p la a ^ e v
< ae> & < tp a > ^ v o t j t o v , &> Tvj<; dv0p<o7rv)<; / < g ) 7) > , eyvcopi-
CTapiev < < j e ,

ut te I cognoscentes gaudeamus. ac numine saluati tuo gau-
355,1 demus, quod te nobis ostenderis totum; gaudemus, / quod nos
in corporibus sitos aeternitati fueris con/secrare dignatus. haec est
enim humana sola gra/tulatio, cognitio maiestatis tuae. cognoui-
mus te et 355,5 lumen maximum solo intellectu sensibile; intelle/
gimus te, o uitae uera uita,
64,15-16 The Coptic indicates that a line has been lost in the Greek by
homoeoteleuton, cf. Mah.6, p. 45. o y o e i N in the Coptic version
supports the suggestion of Scott (III, 291) that numine in the
Latin version be emended to lumine.
18-19 Cf. Corp. Herm . 1.26 and IV.7. Corp. Herm . X.6 states that divi-
nization can not occur "b> <& jxaTi and in Corp. Herm. XIII.10
divine regeneration occurs after physical perception has been
transcended.
21-22 Cf. Corp. Herm. 1.27,32.
PRAYER OF THANKSGIVING 6 4 ,1 4 - 2 4 383
14 so that we may know Thee.

We rejoice, having been illumined
16 by Thy knowledge (y v o S a t.? ). We rejoice
because Thou hast shown us Thyself. We rejoice
18 because while we were in (the) body (aco[Aa), Thou hast
made us
divine through Thy knowledge (yvd><n<;).
20 The thanksgiving of the man who attains
to Thee is one thing: that we know
22 Thee. We have known Thee,
0 (&) intellectual ( v o t j t o v ) light. 0 (&)
24 life of life, we have known Thee.

in order
that we may know Thee. / We rejoice because Thou hast shown
Thyself to us. 600 We rejoice because, while we were (yet) in molded
shapes, Thou deified us / by the knowledge of Thyself. (The) thanks
giving of a man to Thee (is) one: / to know <Thee>. We have known
<Thee>, 0 <intellectual Light, O Life> of human life. / We have
known <Thee,

in order that / knowing Thee, we may
rejoice. And, redeemed by Thy power, 355,1 we do rejoice that Thou
hast shown Thyself to us completely. We rejoice / that Thou hast
thought it good to deify us for eternity while we are yet situated in
bodies. / For this is the only human / gratitude: the knowledge of
Thy majesty. We know Thee and 355,5 the greatest light percep
tible to the intellect alone. We understand / Thee, O true life of life.
64,22-24 On the deity as light and life, cf. Corp. Herm . 1.9,12,21,32; X I I I .18.
The Coptic and Latin indicate what has been omitted in the
Greek, probably by homoeoteleuton with &. Mah6 is most likely
correct in emending yvcoaecoc; to qjoaeuc; on the basis of the Coptic
and the Latin.
3^4 NAG HAMMADI CODEX V I ,7
CD T M H T f i. FiJCO NIM i N C O y
26 c d n t m h t p a . e n * ^ n o 2^
T<j>YCIC RTTICDT* ANCOyCD
28 n d) ttm o yn b o a oia. euez
FineicD'f en'jcno t e 'f ^ e a.n
30 o y c D q }? R n e K i r i e o N o y
o y c D q je oycDT* neTFipA.iTei
32 MMoq- eN oycu cp e T p e y p
TH p el MMON F1 TTNCDCIC-
34 oyA.pe2 *. oyaj'f neTN
ie
oyoqpq 6 T R T p e N C \iiT e
2 M n e e i B i o c H'f'tM]iNe* Fi
TA .poy.xe na.T e y q jA H A a.yp
j i c n ^ e R N e y e p H o y a.ycD

d > [i.7)Tpa toxcttji; p 6> o e to < ;, s y v < o p i< T < a > (i.e /v < a e > &
(x-^xpa x u v j 9 o p e 6(i. TCocTpoi; c p im a t y v a i - 6 0 5 < r a [ i e v < o e > , & 7raTpo$
xuy)cpopouv[T]o? aitt>vio<5 Siaji.o/vy). Outo < to[ > v] ctou ayaOov Tcpoayu-
VTjcravTS^, (i.yj8e(i.iav / fj-nqaafA ev [ x ] a [ p i v itX tjJv 0 sXy]<tov t){jwcs 8ia[T]v)pT)-
Oyjvat / c v T fi a f t yvojg[L M[]a B e T^[py)<rt^,] to (jlyj <j<paXyjvai / tou to io u to u
[piou] toutou. (Only unintelligible portions of the last z \ lines
remain.)

o naturarum omnium / fecunda praeg-
natio; cognouimus te, totius naturae / tuo conceptu plenissimae
[cognouimus te] aeterna / perseueratio. in omni enim ista oratione
adorantes 355,10 bonum bonitatis tuae hoc tantum deprecamur, ut/
nos uelis seruare perseuerantes in amore cognitio/nis tuae et num-
quam ab hoc uitae genere separari. / haec optantes
64,33 Perhaps emend to T < K> r N CDCIC as in the Latin and Greek
versions and also at 64,16.19.
PRAYER OF THANKSGIVING 6 4 ,2 5 -6 5 ,4 385
O (&) womb ((jtfrjTpa) of every creature, we have

26 known Thee. O (&) womb (tr/jTpa) pregnant with
the nature (<p'S<yt,<;) of the Father, we have known
28 Thee. 0 (&) eternal permanence
of the begetting Father, thus have we
30 worshipped Thy goodness (dyaQov).
There is one petition that we ask (aixetv):
32 we would be
preserved (nrjpetv) in knowledge (yvcocrK;).
34 And (8s) there is one protection that we
65
desire: that we not stumble
2 in this kind of life ((3io<;).
When they had said these things in prayer, they
4 embraced (acnuaêcrQat,) each other and

> Womb of all <nature>. We have known / <Thee>, 0
0
Womb pregnant in the nature of the Father. We have known 605
<Thee>, O eternal Continuation of the impregnating Father. /
Thus having worshipped Thy goodness, / we ask only one favor:
that thou might will that we be preserved / in Thy knowledge; and
one protection: that we not fall away / from a life such as this.
(Only unintelligible portions of the last z \ lines remain.)

0 pregnancy fertile with all natures, / we know Thee, Eternal con
tinuation of all nature / most full of Thy impregnating activity. /
For worshipping the good of Thy goodness in this whole prayer,
355,io we pray for just one thing: that Thou wiliest to keep us
persevering in the love of Thy knowledge ./ and never to be sepa
rated from a life such as this. / Wishing these things,
fy>34 65.2 Cf. Corp. Herm. I.32.
25
AyBWK eyNAoycDM H T e y
6 Tpo<()h ecoyA.a.B eMfl C N o q
F I ^ h tC :

conuertimus nos ad puram et sine / animalibus cenam.
PRAYER OF THANKSGIVING 6 5 ,5 -7 38 7
they went to eat their

6 holy food (xpocprj), which has no blood
in it.

we turn to a pure meal without / any flesh of animals.
T H E SC R IB A L N O T E
V I, 7a : 65 ,8-14
D o u g la s M. P a r r o t t
Krause-Labib. Gnostische und hermetische Schriften. Pp. 25, 187.

Mahe, J.-P. La Priere dactions de graces du Codex VI de Nag-
Hamadi et Le Discours parfait. Z P E 13 (1974), 58.
Troger, ed. Gnosis und N T. P. 55.
The Scribal Note is found between V I,7 and VI,8, and is separated
from both by a box drawn by the scribe, which he has decorated
modestly on both sides. Except for the last letter, which is partially
in a lacuna, the text is intact.
Interest in the Scribal Note has centered on the question of the
tractate to which it refers. The language itself would lead one to
think that it refers to the immediately preceding tractate. But
Krause has taken the position that in fact it refers to the immediate
ly following one: Asclepius (p. 25, followed by Mahe, p. 58). He
contends that the scribe was unable to include all that he had in
tended from Asclepius for lack of space and therefore desired to
explain to those who had commissioned him why this had happened.
Hence, Krause argues, he erased the title of Asclepius and inserted
this note. This accounts for the fact that a note referring to Asclepius
appears before it but speaks about the copying in the past tense.
However, a careful examination of the MS by J . M. Robinson in
1970, and by other scholars subsequently (using ultraviolet light in
some cases), has failed to detect any indication of erasure. This
means that the Scribal Note was written prior to the copying of
Asclepius. Hence it is more reasonable to think that the Scribal
Note has to do with Pr. Thanks, (so also Troger, p. 55).
It is, of course, possible that the scribe was speaking of both
VI,6 and 7 together. After all, he joins the end of V I,6 and the
beginning of VI,7 very closely on p. 63, whereas elsewhere, when a
tractate ends, he either leaves the rest of the page blank (pp. 12, 21,
35- 5i) or leaves space before the beginning of the next tractate
(p. 48; on p. 65 the Scribal Note serves as a separator). However
two things count against this. First, there is the decoration sur-
39 NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI,j a
rounding the title of V I,7. Such decoration is found elsewhere in

this codex only at the beginnings and endings of tractates. Secondly,
the fact that the scribe says that he has copied only one discourse
and indicates that he will copy no more (lines n -13 ) implies that
the kind of discourse he is speaking of is different from VI,8, which
is the next thing he copies. Therefore the one discourse most prob
ably did not include V I,6, which resembles V I,8 in that they are
both Hermetic dialogues, but rather refers only to Pr. Thanks.
The Note is apparently addressed to the persons who had asked
the scribe to inscribe the codex. The scribe admits to having copied
the immediately preceding discourse (line 8). Since he also copied
all the other tractates in the codex, this most probably means that
he is taking personal responsibility for this one, whereas he was
perhaps instructed to copy the others. He says he has collected
many discourses like this one (line 9) but that he has not copied
them because he thought those for whom he was working might
also have collected them (lines 9-10). He then repeats the latter
statement in other words, adding to his reason for not copying them
that he thought those for whom he was working might be burdened
by them (lines 11-13 )presumably because they would then have
duplicate copies. Finally he begins a new sentence with a reiteration
of what he had already said in line 9 (lines 13-14)and leaves the
sentence incomplete, apparently not wishing to use any more space.
The significance of this is not clear. Is the scribe excusing himself
for not including more of his collection ? Is he offering to provide
additional prayers if those who have commissioned him desire them?
Or is he trying to explain why he added Pr. Thanks. ?
Some help in understanding the Note comes when we observe the
crowding of the pages subsequent to Pr. Thanks., for which, pre
sumably, the inclusion of Pr. Thanks, and the Scribal Note was
responsible. Whereas pages before the Scribal Note (other than final
pages of tractates) have between 32 and 35 lines (except for pp. 17
and 52), after it such pages have between 35 and 38 lines, and the
final page of the codex (78) has 43. The scribes exercise of independ
ent judgement, then, seems to have forced a revision in a well-
plotted arrangement of lines per page resulting in the crowding of
the last 14 pages of the codex. (It should be noted that the pages of
the last tractate of NHC II are also crowded compared with earlier
pages.) It is possible that it also required him to shorten the final
tractate, but there is no way to be certain.
SCRIBAL N O TE: INTRODUCTION 391
The scribe may well have had reason to think that those who had
commissioned him would be unhappy with what he had done. It is
quite possible, then, that he was attempting to excuse himself. But
the excuse is very indirect. It involves his explaining why he did
not do more than he did (he did not wish to burden them), while
avoiding any explanation of what he in fact did do. In essence he
would be excusing himself by commending himself to them for not
having taken up any more space in the codex than he did.
S C R IB A L N O T E
V I, 7 a : 65,8-14
n
8 T T I O Y * M S N A O r O C FlTAGI CXZ^ FlTAq
r A P t o n c d F iT A q e l e r o o f Ffni
10 C A 2 0 Y e ' f M e e Y e x e xye\ s t R t h n g
K2U TAP ' t ' A I C T A ^ e eTC2AT FInaT n h
12 t f i .x e M e c p ^ K a y I g t f i t h n g f i t g
t t 2 c d b p z)c e n h t F I - e n i n a o ^ c d o y
14 r ^ p FI61 F l A o r o c e T A Y ^ i e - r o o f F I t g nH
TTI O Y * may simply be a demonstrative, in which case one should

be removed from the translation. FI TAG I CA2 q> taken here as a
second perfect, may also be a relative first perfect, but in that case
the first line would be an incomplete sentence. FlTAC|: Rendered
here of his, is considered by Krause to be an independent pro
noun, serving to emphasize the resumptive pronoun. Hence he
omits of his. This form of the independent pronoun is not found
elsewhere in the codex (although Krause holds that it is used also
in 67,30). his probably refers to Hermes (cf. Mah6, p. 58).
S C R IB A L N O T E
V I, 7 a : 65,8-14
65
8 I have copied this one ( + jaiv) discourse (Xoyo<;) of his.
Indeed (yap), very many have come-to me. I have not
10 copied them because I thought that they had come to
you (pi.).
Also (xal yap), I hesitate ( ic t t <x s i v ) to copy these for
i2 you because, perhaps, they have (already) come to you,
and
the matter may burden you. Since (enei, yap)
14 the discourses (Xoyo<;) of that one, which have come to
me, are numerous
65,13-14 Since.. .numerous : Taken here as an incomplete sentence. How

ever Krause (followed by Mah6) translates as an independent clause,
related to the preceding sentence, for (Inei) the treatises of the
[father] are indeed (y<*p) numerous, which have come into my
hand." There is not enough space in the area lined off by the scribe
for Krause's restoration of TTI C U T , the father/'
A S C L E P IU S 21-29
V I , 8 : 65, 15 - 78,43
P e t e r A. D i r k s e and D o u g la s M. P a r r o t t *

Mahe. Hermes en Haute-gypte. Vol. II (preliminary draft). (Here
after, Mahe [1]).
Nock-Festugiere. Vol. II. Pp. 257-401.
Derchain, P. L Authenticity de linspiration egyptienne dans le
Corpus Hermeticum. RHR 16 1 (1962), 175-98.
Krause, M. Agyptisches Gedankengut in der Apokalypse des
Asclepius. ZDMG, Supplementa I (1969), 48-57. (Hereafter,
Krause [2]).
Mahe, J.-P. Remarques dun Latiniste sur lAsclepius copte de
Nag Hammadi. RevSR 48 (1974), 136-55. (Hereafter, Mahe
M).
Scott, W., ed. Hermetica. Vol. III. London: Dawsons of Pall Mall,
1968 (originally published, 1926).
Troger, ed. Gnosis und N T. Pp. 55-57. (Hereafter, Troger [1]).
Troger, K.-W. Die hermetische Gnosis. Gnosis und N T. Edited
by Troger. Pp. 97-119. (Hereafter, Troger [2]).
Through p. 68, the MS is well preserved, with only small lacunae

in the top two or three lines of each page. From p. 69 to the end
of the codex, the MS deteriorates steadily: in pp. 69-72 much of the
first two or three lines is missing, pp. 73-77 lack most of the first
four lines, and significant amounts of the first nine lines of p. 78
are either missing or difficult to read.
VI,8 has no title either at its beginning or end. Between V I,7 and
VI,8, however, is found a brief seven-line scribal note, written in a
neatly blocked-off rectangular area. Krause maintains that the
scribe of Codex VI erased the title that he had originally placed at
* Peter A. Dirkse prepared a preliminary version with the editorial as

sistance of James Brashler. Douglas M. Parrott provided the introduction
and brought the rest of the work to completion.
the beginning of V I,8 and replaced it with the Note (VI,ya). A care
ful study of the MS, however, shows that an erasure between VI,7
and V I,8 is unlikely (cf. introduction to V I,7 a). What then could
be the reason for the lack of a title? If the introduction to the
Scribal Note is correct in suggesting that Pr. Thanks. (VI,7) was
added to the codex on the initiative of the scribe, then the original
plan of the codex was for V I,6 and V I,8 to be side by side. This
plan would have taken V I,8 to be a continuation of VI,6 (as the
reference to a preceding mystery in 65,16 suggests); therefore the
lost title of V I,6 (52,1) might well have been intended for VI,8 as
well.
The Hermetic tractate Asclepius (originally o loyoq xeXeio?The
Perfect Teaching) was composed in Greek but exists in toto now only
in a Latin translation. Although differing from the Latin at many
points, VI ,8 is still recognizably from the same source because of
the similarity of contents and the way they are ordered. It is
stylistically closer to the two extant Greek passages from Asclepius
21-29 ^ a n to the rather expansive and rhetorical Latin.
The form is that of a school dialogue between an Hermetic initiate,
Asclepius (Tat and Amon are also mentioned in 72,30-31), and the
mystagogue, Trismegistus (Hermes). As with V I,6 (Disc. 8-9), Ascle
pius as a whole was probably used in a Hermetic instructional-cultic
context (see introduction to V I,6). The contents are arranged in five
general areas.
A. 65,15-37, in which the mystery experience (here undescribed)
is likened to sexual intercourse, in that it requires an intimate
interaction between two parties in which (according to Tris-
megistuss view) each receives something from the other.
B. 65,37-68,19, which deals with the separation between the pious
and the impious, with the former being distinguished by
having learning (ImcmfjfAT)) and knowledge (yv&giq), and the
latter, ignorance. Man needs learning and knowledge to re
strain harmful passions (67,24-28) and to become good and
immortal (67,30-32). Indeed, with learning and knowledge
man becomes better than the gods, since then he is both mor
tal and immortal (67,32-68,12).
C. 68,20-70,2, where Trismegistus argues that men create gods
according to human likeness (69,26-27).
D. 70,3 marks the beginning of the apocalyptic section. It seems
to extend only to 74,6, in contrast to the Latin Asclepius,
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 - 2 9 : INTRODUCTION 397
where it clearly continues through 3 3 1,11 (parallel to 74,11).

Here are described the woes that will come upon Egypt and
the final action of the creator god to end them and bring the
universe to birth. The original independence of this section
has been argued convincingly, on the basis of the two addi
tional initiates (mentioned above) and the poor connection
with the previous section (Krause [2], pp. 51-52). There are a
significant number of parallels to Egyptian conceptions that
can be traced back to the Ptolemaic period and before. But
parallels are also found to Plato, Stoicism, the Sibylline Ora
cles, and the New Testament. Some have held that the apo
calypse was originally a Jewish writing, while the researches
of Krause and others on the Egyptian parallels suggest that
it was originally Egyptian because of the greater number and
antiquity of these parallels (Nock-Festugiere II, 288-89;
Krause [2], pp. 52-57). The two concepts need not be mutually
exclusive in view of the large, ancient, and literarily active
Jewish community in Egypt.
E. In V I,8 the major motif of the final section is individual
eschatology. In the Coptic text this section appears to begin
at 74,7 and to continue to the end of the tractate, in contrast
to the Latin Asclepius, where the shift to individual escha
tology begins later and is followed by other sections with
differing themes. The restoration of the nature of the pious
ones (74,7-8) is founded upon the eternal will of God, which
expresses itself in the design of the good universe (74,12-32).
The plan of the universe is then described. The "heights of
heaven are controlled by God (75,8-10). Other areas, in
cluding the earth, are controlled by other gods (75,13-25).
Every person must go to the city in the west (place of the
dead?). The soul separates from the body and goes to "the
middle of the air to be judged by the great daimon (76,22-33),
who determines reward or punishment (76,28-78,42).
Troger includes the Latin Asclepius in a group of Hermetic trac
tates that stands between those Hermetic tractates that are pan
theistic, and hence distinctively Hellenistic, and those that display
a gnostic dualism. The tractates in this group contain a mixture of
both emphases. In addition to Asclepius they are Corp. Herm. IX ,
X, and X II ([2], pp. 102-03). The excerpt from Asclepius that is
VI,8 has both pantheism and dualism. The pantheism is explicitly
expressed in 75,10-11 ( He [God] is in every place, and he looks out

over every place. ). It can also be seen in the conviction that the
universe is good (74,33-36) and that the demiurge and the earth
goddess are beneficent (75,13-24), as well as in the panegyric on
Egypt (7>3_9)- The dualism is found in the discussion of the two
natures of man (66,9-67,34), but whether this should be attributed
to Gnosticism, or is merely an expression of the dualism common
in the Graeco-Roman world generally, is not clear. Its combination
here with an emphasis on the importance of knowledge and under
standing for salvation, however, would seem to move the balance
in the direction of Gnosticism.
We have not included here the numerous textual notes for the
Latin Asclepius from Nock-Festugi&re. With a few exceptions neither
have we attempted to reproduce the excellent explanatory material
found in the notes of that edition.
ASCLEPIUS 21-29
VI,8 165,15-78,43
2
e q p jc e K o y c u q j A 6 e N a .y e<J>o>B m
16 n e T M y cT H p io N - x y a ) i k c u n
R q jT T H p e Ri'NaiY e p o c F iT e t c y n
18 o y c i a . e q j a . c q j a ) n e c b o a 1tm
<J)ooyi* mR T C ^ l M e - 2 0 T X N 6 e
20 e q c p a .N 1 c t i k m h q j x q q c u 6 e e b o a
R61 n e c n e p M i - F i T e y N o y e T F i
22 M xy cy aip eT C ^ iM e xi Rt*6om
Fi<j)ooyj*- <J)ooyT* 2 q qja.q
24 xi R t 6 o m R T * c tM e e p o q * z w c
e p e n c n e p M X p e N e p re i RnaJ-
Latin Asclepius 2 1 (middle)-29 (beginning) (Nock-Festugiere II, 322-

36)
322,10 (21) hoc ergo omni uero uerius manifestiusque mente / per-
cipito, quod ex domino illo totius naturae deo / hoc sit cunctis in
aeternum procreandi inuentum / tributumque mysterium, cui sum-
ma caritas, laeti/tia, hilaritas, cupiditas amorque diuinus innatus
est. 322,15 et dicendum foret quanta sit eius mysterii uis atque /
necessitas, nisi ex sui contemplatione unicuique ex / intimo sensu
nota esse potuisset. si enim illud extre/mum temporis, quo ex
crebro adtritu peruenimus, / ut utraque in utramque fundat natura
progeniem, 322,20 animaduertas, ut altera auide alterius rapiat
<semen> / interiusque recondat, denique eo tempore ex 323,1 com-
mixtione communi et uirtutem feminae marum / adipiscuntur et
mares femineo torpore lassescunt. /
65,16 For sexual love understood as a "mystery, cf. Eph 5:3i-32

also Nock-Festugi&re II, note 180, pp. 376-77.
17 Krause (1) takes FiTe as the nominal subject form of the
conjunctive and therefore assumes that an infinitive has been
omitted.
19 N.B. sexual union is not viewed as a fallen state or cosmic
evil here, as it is elsewhere in Hermetic literature (e.g., Corp.
Herm. 1.14-19,24).
A S C L E P IU S 21-29
V I,S: 65, 15 -78,43
65
And (Sc) if you (sg.) wish to see the reality of
16 this mystery ([xuaxyjptov) , then you should see the wonder
ful representation (etxcov)
of the intercourse (ouvoooioc)
18 that takes place between
the male and the female. For when ( 8 tocv )
20 the semen (aropfjLa) reaches the climax (axfjuf)), it leaps
forth.
In that moment
22 the female receives the strength
of the male; the male for his part
24 receives the strength of the female, while (<o<;)
the semen ( d r a p ^ a ) does (ervepyeiv) this.
Latin Asclepius 2 1 (middle)-29 (beginning), translated by George

W. MacRae
322,10 (21) Grasp with the mind, then, as more true and more
evident than any other truth, / the fact that God, the Lord of
all nature, / discovered for all beings and bestowed on them the
mystery of eternal procreation, / in which supreme affection, joy, /
gaiety, longing, and divine love are inherent. 322,15 And it would
be necessary to state how great is the force and urgency of that
mystery / if it could not be known to each individual by / an intimate
sensation as a result of self-contemplation. For if you consider that
last I moment when by repeated rubbing we arrive at the point /
where one nature pours out progeny into the other, 322,20 when
one avidly seizes the others <seed> / and stores it within herat
that moment, then, through 323,1 the mutual mingling the females
acquire the strength of the males / and the males grow tired by the
torpor of the females. /
65.21-25 Cf. 1 Cor 7 :3 -4 .

26
26 6 T B 6 TTA'f T T M yC T H pi O N f l T C y
N o y c i A e y e i p e m m o c| 2 R o y ^ c u i t
28 .x eK A A C e N e T c o e i u ? R ^ y c i c
p i c x H M O N i r n a 2 P n 2*-2 e y x o
30 n ? a n m<J)cub g t m m a y * n o y A
rA p n o y A m m o o y q 'f R n e q ^ c n o -
32 n 6 T 6 rA p H N i f c o o y N R n i^ tU B
e q p x e q q p o o rf n n a 2 P a y n c c u b s
34 a iy cu n n a t n a 2 T N ^ o y o A e
2 n m y c t h p iO N ey o y A A B Ne
36 n t F i A o r o c mn i ^ B H y e -
oy m onon xe eyTM ccdtm
38 a a a a N c e N A y c t b s ttaT
H
n a 'i N't'M 1 n e 2 N p e q j c e o y A N e
2 2 eNaL1 NC>Y T e N e 2 N aiC eBH C N e
NAT A e N't'M! N e N3 l2 6 N N '
4 a a a a 2 eN K O Y ei Ne e y n it n
6 1 n p M N N o y T e - 6 T B 6 ttaT
6 q j A .p e T K i.K iA . q j a m e 2 *J Z *Z'
ecpom e T ern cth m h a jo o rt
8 N A y AN 6 T B 6 N e f C M O N t
Latin Asclepius 2 1 (middle)-29 (beginning), cont.

effectus itaque huius tam blandi
necessariique mys/terii in occulto perpetratur, ne uulgo inriden-
tibus 323,5 inperitis utriusque naturae diuinitas ex commix/tione
sexus cogatur erubescere, multo magis etiam / si uisibus inreligio-
sorum hominum subiciantur. / (22) sunt autem non multi aut admo-
dum pauci, / ita ut numerari etiam in mundo possint, religiosi.
323,10 unde contingit in multis remanere malitiam defectu / pru-
dentiae scientiaeque rerum omnium, quae sunt. /
65,28-29 Cf. Rom 1:26-27.

34-38 This places the sex act in two of the categories usually em
ployed to classify the practice of the mysteries, the so-called
Xey6(xeva and the Spcofxeva (for this cf. Nilsson, GGR I, 661).
66,4 Cf. Mt 7:14 , par.; 2 2 :14 ; 1 Pet 3:20.
ASCLEPIUS 21-29 65,26- 66,8 403
26 Therefore the mystery ([xixmqpiov) of intercourse (ouv-

oooia)
is performed in secret,
28 in order that the two sexes (9<J<T1<;)
might not disgrace themselves (a<rx>](Jiovetv) in front of
many who do not experience
30 that reality.
For (yap) each of them (the sexes) contributes its (own
part in) begetting.
32 For (yap) if it happens in the presence of those who do
not understand the reality,
(it is) laughable
34 and unbelievable. And ($s), moreover,
they are holy mysteries ([xucrnqpiov)
36 of both words (X6yo<;) and deeds
because not only (ou jxovov) are they not heard
38 but also (aXAd) they are not seen. Therefore
66
such people ( the unbelievers) are blasphemers.
2 They are atheistic and impious (d<Te(3r)<;).
But (Sc) the others are not many;
4 rather (aXXa), the pious who are counted are few.
Therefore
6 wickedness (xaxia) remains among (the) many,
since learning (sTcurrijji,?))
8 concerning the things which are ordained does not exist
among them.

Thus the performance of this mysteryso
enticing and so urgent / is carried out in secret, lest 323,5 each
natures divinity, which arises from the mingling / of the sexes, be
forced to blush openly before the jeers of the ignorant, especially /
if subjected to the glances of the impious. / (22) There are not many
pious people, howeverso few / in fact that they can be counted
even throughout the world. 323,10 Whence it is the case that malice
persists in the many as a result of their lack / of prudence and
knowledge of all things that exist. /
404 n a g h am m ad i c o d e x v i ,8
T r N C D d c ra.p r J N e t C M O N ?
10 N i M e Wt o c n e n T X d o FiR na .
OC FI YA.H" 6 T B 6 TTA.Y T
12 n iC T H M H O y e B O A TrNCU
c i c Te* e q j c u n e &.e o y f l o y
14 M r J i* a it c o o Y N MFI o y e n i C T H
HH OJOOTt A.N FI T 'l'Y X H R n p c u
16 M e- q j a i p e R n A . e o c 6 cu
tc e M F J T e y T a .A 6 o - F i T e T K e
18 KAicia. q j c u n e N H M i y R rt
C M o i* r J o y c ^ q j e M r l T e q t 2 l a 6 o
20 n c a . q } A 6 q ; a . q o y a ) M Fica. T ^ y
XH FJcp qFli* 6 B O A 0 T O O T q TJ
22 tk.ak.ia. FJcp c i * B a ) c u N n N o y
T e j l q a j o o r t F J a . n 2 l i t i o c Fi
24 n a .1 ^CDC e ^ q T F i N o o y FiFipa>
M e F i T r N c u c i c MFi T e n i C T H
26 mh- D n T p i c M e r i C T O C Fi
T A q T N n o o y c e FJFJpcuMe
28 o y x x y e ^ e D A C K A H n ie Fi
T A q T F iN o o y c e N ^y o y a ^ Y
30 o y ^ S io N A e n e e T p e N .x o

ex enim intellectu
rationis diuinae, qua constituta / sunt omnia, contemptus medela-
que nascitur uitio/rum mundi totius. perseuerante autem inperitia
323,15 atque inscientia uitia omnia conualescunt uulne/rantque
animam insanabilibus uitiis, quae infecta / isdem atque uitiata quasi
uenenis tumescit nisi / eorum, quorum animarum disciplina et intel-
lectus I summa curatio est. 323,20 si solis ergo et paucis hoc proderit,
dignum est / hunc persequi atque expedire tractatum,
66,9-11 Cf. 66,16-17; 66,19-22; Plut. Ser.num .pun. 549f, 55id, 559^
56if, 562d, etc., Philo Poster.C. 74; Leg.all. III. 124; Congr.
138, etc.; Corp. Herm. X II.3; 2 Clem 9 : 7 : 1 Pet 2:24.
14 Ignorance at the root of sinful behavior: Cf. Corp. Hem.
X.8; T D N T I, 118 (R. Bultmann); and numerous places in
NT, e.g., Ac 3 :1 7 ; 1 Tim 1 : 1 3 ; Eph 4:18 .
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 -2 9 6 6 ,9 -3 0 405
For (yap) the knowledge (yvwaii;) of the things which are

ordained
10 is truly the healing of the passions (toxQoi;)
of matter (uXr)). Therefore learning (emcrojtXY))
12 is something derived from knowledge (yvS ok;).
But (8s) if there is
14 ignorance, and learning (smoTTjfry})
does not exist in the soul (4>ux^) of man,
16 (then) the incurable passions (7ra0 o<;) persist in it (the
soul).
And additional
18 evil (xaxloc) comes with them (the passions) in the
form of an incurable sore.
20 And (81) the sore constantly gnaws at the soul (<|a>x^),
and through it the soul produces worms from
22 the evil (xaxloc) and stinks. But (8s) God
is not the cause (avamo?) of
24 these things, since (<b<;) he sent to men
knowledge (yv&ctk;) and learning (emcrrrjfrr)).
26 0 (&) Trismegistus,
did he send them to men
28 alone? Yes, O (d>) Asclepius,
he sent them to them (men) alone.
30 And (8s) it is fitting (aiov) that we tell

For it is from understanding of
the divine reason by which all things are constituted / that contempt
for the vices / of the totality of matter, and a remedy for them,
arise. While inexperience and ignorance continue, 323,15 however,
all the vices gain strength and wound / the soul with incurable
defects. Once infected / and vitiated by them, the soul swells up as
though by poisons, / except in the case of those for whom the
supreme remedy is the knowledge / and understanding of souls.
323,20 If this situation benefits only the few, therefore, it is worth
while I to pursue and advance this discussion
66,22-25 Cf. Jas 1 : 1 3 ; Rom 3:3 -5; 9 :12 -14 .

28-34 Cf. Philo Mut.nom. 63; Corp. Herm . X.9; X II. 19.
o c e p o ic - e T B e oy W p cu M e
32 oya.aiY A q p x a i p i ^ e n a y N t
r N C U C I C MR T e n i C T H M H
34 n M e p o c R n e q A r A e o N - j'
NOY CCOTM TTNOYT6 MW
36 n ic o i* a.y ] y a [ h ]
2 e^ o Y N e n T A M io M[npa>]>jie
MTr[. . ] . y e - q jA p e i jin [ A e o ] c qjcu
4 n e 2 pA'f R 2 h t C b o a 2 m tt*T
qjA p c>Y 2 e 1' e 62PAT e . x R n e q
6 c c u m a - N e q N A c p a m e rA p a n
R K e p H T e e i m h t i x e q jci R t c T
8 Tpo<J)h R61 n e T ^ c u o N 2 ^ c
e Y p e q M O Y n e - ta n a i* k h
io T e T p e 2 e N K e e n ie Y M iA
q p c u n e NAq H N A T O Y o e i q j e y
12 p B A A T T T r F lN O Y T e TAP 2.03 C

quare solis /
hominibus intellegentiam et disciplinam diuinitas / suam sit inper-
tire dignata. audi itaque. deus pater / et dominus cum post deos
homines efficeret ex parte 323,25 corruptiore mundi et ex diuina
pari lance conpon- 324,1 derans, uitia contigit mundi corporibus
commixta / remanere et alia propter cibos uictumque, quem / neces-
sario habemus cum omnibus animalibus com/munem; quibus de
rebus necesse est cupiditatum 324,5 desideria et reliqua mentis uitia
animis humanis / insidere. diis uero, utpote
67,8-9 since . . . mortal": Mah6 argues from the Latin that this
belongs with the following sentence ([2], p. 142).
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 -2 9 6 6 ,3 1 -6 7 ,1 2 407
you why to men

32 alone he granted (x<xpeiv)
knowledge (yv&cii;) and learning (emcr/jp)),
34 the allotment (fiipo<;) of his good (ayocOov).
And (8e) now listen! God
36 and the Father, even the Lord, created
man subsequent to the gods,
38 and he took him from
[67]
the region ({lepL;) of matter (uXrj). [Since] matter (QXtj)
2 is involved in the creation of [man]
of [ ], the passions are
4 in it. Therefore
they continually flow over his
6 body (crcofjia), for (yap) this living creature (<oov) would
not exist
in any other way except (et (x t j t i ) that he take this
8 food (rpo<pY)), since (ox;)
he is mortal. It is also inevitable (dvd-po))
10 that inopportune desires (s7ct.Oufi.1a),
which are harmful (pXaTrreiv), dwell in him.
12 For (yap) the gods, since (a><;)

about why / the
divinity should have seen fit to impart its understanding and know
ledge to men alone. / Listen, then. When God the Father / and Lord
created men, after the gods, from a corruptible element 323,25 of
matter and from a divine element, weighing these out in equal meas
ure, 324,1 it happened that the defects of matter mixed in bodies
I remained, along with others that come because of the foods and
nourishment which / of necessity we have in common with all ani
mals. I From this it is inevitable that the desires of lust 324,5 and
the other vices of the mind are inherent in human souls. / But as for
the gods, inasmuch
eA Y tyojn e c b o a o y 2Yah
14 c o y a a b - c e p x p i A rAp a n R o y
e n iC T H M H mR o Y rN c u c ic
16 TMWT*AT*MOY TAP f ) f ) N O Y T 6
T e T e n i C T H M H Mf) T r N C U C IC
18 zoic A Y t y c o n e c b o a Y
AH 6 T O Y A A B - A C 0 ) 0)176 NAY
20 r t a s i c W T rN tu cic m R T e n i c
t h m h - k a t a o y ^. n a i ' k h Aq
22 p ^ o p i ^ e R n p c u M e A q k a a <|
2 R O Y e n i C T H M H Mf) o Y r N t u
24 C IC - 6 T B 6 N 6 N T A N JC O O Y
XIN R q j o p i t A q JC O K O Y eB O A -
26 JC 6K A A C G B O A 0 T R NA? RITA
e o c Mil H k . a 6 i a R q a j c u r f e p o
28 o y m m a y k a t a T r e q o Y ne
R A rA e o c W n atm o y W ee H

ex mundissima parte /
naturae effectis et nullis indigentibus rationis dis/ciplinaeque ad-
miniculis, quamuis inmortalitas et / unius semper aetatis uigor ipse
sit eis prudentia et 324,10 disciplina, tamen propter unitatem ratio
nis pro dis/ciplina et pro intellectu, ne ab his essent alieni, /
ordinem necessitatis lege conscriptum aeterna lege / constituit,
hominem ex animalibus cunctis de sola / ratione disciplinaque cog-
noscens, per quae uitia cor- 324,15 porum homines auertere atque
abalienare potuis/sent, ipsos ad inmortalitatis spem intentionem-
que I protendens. denique et bonum hominem et qui posset / in-
mortalis esse
67,13 pure matter : Cf. K ore Kosm ou 14-17; 24-30. According to

K ore Kosm ou the gods ( souls ) were created from the purest
portion of a primordial alchemical mixture. Man was created
later out of the baser remains of this same mixture (cf.
66, 37 ).
22 Cf. Ac 17 :2 6 .
ASCLEPIUS 21-29 6 7 ,1 3 -3 1 409
they came into being out of a pure matter (uXt)),

14 (+ yap) do not need (/pe(a)
learning (emanfjuy)) and knowledge (yvg><n<;).
16 For (yap) the immortality of the gods
is learning (smonljp)) and knowledge (yv<oat.^),
18 since (&<;) they came into being out of pure matter (oXr)).
It (immortality) assumed for them
20 the position (raî?) of knowledge (yvaja^) and learning
(s7 tK T T 7 )(1 7 )).
B y (xaxa) necessity (avayxr)) he (God)
22 set a boundary (op'êiv) for man; he placed him
in learning (e7tioTr)(XY)) and knowledge (yvaScri?).
24 Concerning these things (learning and knowledge), which
we have mentioned
from the beginning, he perfected them
26 in order that by means of these things
he might restrain passions ( tox 0 o <;) and evils (xaxia),
28 according to (xara) his will.
He brought his (mans) mortal existence (0vy)tov) into
30 immortality; he (man) became
good (dya0o^) (and) immortal, just as

as they were created from the purest element
I of nature and have no need of the assistance of reason and know
ledge, I although immortality and / the vigor of a single perennial
age serve as their prudence and 324,10 knowledge, nevertheless be
cause of the unity of his design, in place of knowledge / and under
standingso that they would not be unfamiliai with them / he
appointed by eternal law an order of necessity set down as a law for
them. I He distinguished man from all other animals by virtue of /
reason and knowledge alone, by which 324,15 men could avert and
repel the vices of bodies, / and directed them toward the hope and
purpose of immortality. / In a word, he composed man, as good and
capable / of being immortal,
67,29-32 For learning (imaxruj.-)]) and knowledge (yvcdcut;) as constituting

goodness and immortality within mans mortal nature, cf.
Corp. Herm . X.7-9.
4 10 NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI ,8
32 T A . e i . x o o c - A q T A M i e < J>ycic
C N T e rAp NAq- t a t * m o y Aycu
34 TeTeqjACMoy Aycu ac
attune R ^ e ctbc n o y c D a je
im
M [n N o y T ]e e T p e n p c u M e q jq j
2 n [ e e q c ] A T T t a n N o y i e - 2 CUC
e [ ic R n o ]y T e m cn e y [u jo ]o rt
4 R N [A ]fM o y RpcuM e A e
o y c e e R a t m o y Aycu R p e q
6 M O y 6 T B C HAT ATTptUMe
a ^ u m e R c y i* re N H C R R N o y
8 t" c e c o o y N A e R R ^B H oye
R N e y e p H o y 2*3 o y c u p X - R
10 N o y T e m cn e y c o o y N R n a
R pcuM e- Aycu R p cu M e c e
12 co o y N R na RN oyTe- eei
q jA J c e A e A N p c u M e cu a c i c a h
14 m e naT R T A 2 M 6 T 6 e T e n i c
TH M H MR Tr NCU C I C - N 6 f
16 cpo yen * A e cn a T R cpcpe
an eT peN Jte aaay R cJj a y a o n

ex utraque natura conposuit, diuina / atque mortali,
et sic conpositum est per uoluntatem 324,20 dei hominem constitu-
tum esse meliorem et diis, qui / sunt ex sola inmortali natura for-
mati, et omnium / mortalium. propter quod homo diis cognatione
con/iunctus ipsos religione et sancta mente ueneratur / diique
etiam pio affectu humana omnia respiciunt 324,25 atque custodiunt.
(23) sed de hominibus istud 325,1 dictum paucis sit pia mente prae-
ditis. de uitiosis / uero nihil dicendum est,
67,32-34 Cf. 68,4-5; Corp. Herm. 1.15; Philo Op.mund. 135.

68,6-12Cf. 68,20-22; Corp. Herm. X .22; X I I .19; Cic. Off. 1.153; Nat.
deor. 1 .116.
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 -2 9 6 7 ,3 2 -6 8 ,1 7 41 1
32 I have said. For (yap) he (God) created (a) two-fold

nature (9601^)
for him: the immortal and
34 the mortal. And it
happened this way because of the will
[68]
of [God] that men
2 be better than the gods, since (o><;)
indeed ((xev) [the] gods are
4 immortal, but (8e) men alone
are both immortal and mortal.
6 Therefore man has
become akin (ctuyY5^ 1?) to the gods,
8 and (Ss) they know the affairs
of each other with certainty. The
10 gods ( + fiiv) know the things of
men, and men
12 know the things of the gods.
And (Se) I am speaking about men, O (d>) Asclepius,
14 who have attained learning (em<rr7)[jL7))
and knowledge (yvwau;).
16 But (Se) (about) those who are more vain than these, it
is not fitting
that we say anything base (9<xoXov),

with a twofold nature, divine / and
mortal. And thus it was the disposition of Gods will 324,20 that
man should be constituted bettei than the gods, who / were formed
from the immortal nature alone, and all / other mortal beings.
For this reason, while man, joined to the gods in kinship, / worships
them in piety and holy dispositions, / the gods themselves watch
over and guard all human affairs with loyal affection. 324,25 (23)
Now this has been said of the few men 325,1 who are endowed with a
pious mind. But of the wicked / nothing is to be said,
68,16-19 Cf. E p h 5 :1 2 .
18 z<vc e N o jo o rf F le e io c c n
.x ei e ^ o y N eêN qÂ Jce e y
20 oyA.Jk.B- e n i A H a n e l e o y N
e r r q j A J t e H t k o i n c d n i a FIH
22 N o y T e m n Fip cu M e- m M e
ACKAHm e neTepenpcu
24 M e n a c ^ 6 m 6 o m F i ^ H T q - Fi
e rA p H n ic u i* n . x o e i c m
26 n T H p q e q T A M ie N o y T e -
t a Y t e ^ c u c u q ON MTTptUMe
28 n e T z c u o N e f ^ iJ C M n ic A ^ Fi
p e q M o y i t a Y e fT F iT C U N a n
30 e n N o y T e - F iT o q 2 a > a > q o n
q T A M ie N o y T e - o y m o n o n
32 qTAJCpO A A A A CC TA JC pO MMOq
o y m o n o n qp N o y T e a a a a
34 q T A M ie N O y T ' KpQ AyM A
Ze d) A C K A H n i e f j t o k ^co
36 (OK K e F iN A T N A ^ T e F l e FI2 A 2
a) T p ic M [e n c T e 'fq i mFI] nu?[a]

x $ exov 't*niCTe[ye m]cn n a k
eK[qpA]qce Aycu A[e]ip u^rmpe

ne sanctissimus sermo /
eorum contemplatione uioletur. / et quoniam de cognatione et con-
sortio hominum 325,5 deorumque nobis indicitur sermo, potestatem
homi/nis, o Asclepi, uimque cognosce, dominus et pater / uel,
quod est summum, deus ut effector est deorum / caelestium, ita
homo fictor est deorum, qui in tem/plis sunt humana proximitate
contenti, et non solum 325,10 inluminatur uerum etiam inluminat.
nec solum ad / deum proficit, uerum etiam conformat deos. mira- /
ris, o Asclepi, an numquid et tu diffidis ut multi ? / Confundor,
o Trismegiste,
68,33-34 Cf. 68,18. For the belief that the redeemed man is god, cf.
Corp. Herm. I.26; X.6; X III.10 ; Disc. 8-9 (VI,6) 61,17; &
Thanks. (VI,7) 64,18-19. N.B. the difference of the Latin at
this point.
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 -2 9 6 8 ,1 8 -6 9 ,3 413
18 since (&c) we are divine (0eto?) and are

introducing holy matters.
20 Since (s7ceiS^) we have entered
the matter of the communion (xoivama) between the
22 gods and men, know,
0 (&) Asclepius, that in which man
24 can be strong!
For (yap) just as the Father, the Lord of
26 the universe, creates gods,
in this very way man too,
28 this mortal, earthly, living creature (toov),
the one who is not like
30 God, also himself
creates gods. Not only (ou (jl o v o v )
32 does he strengthen, but (aXXd) he is also strengthened.
Not only (ou (jlo vo v ) is he god, but (aXXa)
34 he also creates gods. Are you astonished (0 a u [x a eiv ),
0 (&) Asclepius? Are you yourself
36 another disbeliever like the many?
[69]
" 0 (d>) Trismegistus, [I agree with] the words (spoken)
2 to me. [And (fiiv)] I believe (7u<rreiSeiv) you
as you [speak]. But (8s) I have also been astonished

lest this most
sacred discourse / be defiled by consideration of them. / Now that
the discussion about the kinship and fellowship between men 325,5
and the gods has been mentioned, Asclepius, you must learn the
power I and strength of man. Just as the Lord and Father / or,
his highest title, Godis the creator of heavenly gods, / so man is
a maker of gods who are held in temples / in proximity to men.
Not only 325,10 does man receive light, but he also gives light; not
only I does he advance toward God, but he also fashions gods. Are
you surprised, / Asclepius, or like the many are you too a dis
believer? j I am astonished, Trismegistus,
68,34 gods": The Coptic could be translated in the singular, but

the Latin supports the plural.
4 14 NAG h am m ad i CODEX V I ,8
4 A e R n a ) i j ( e Rn[AT]* a y c u *.ei
e rf n p cu M e x e o y m a .ica .p io c
6 n e - e i q M C T e e T e f N o d FI6 0 M
a y <d n e T M e iq eNAf t h p o Y
8 fi) A C K A H n i e q R n u ) A n p A Y
M A2e R M o q - q o y o N 2 m e n n a n
10 B O A T B n r e N O C FiR N O Y T e
a y o j T flp ^ o M O A o re i R M oq-
12 aycd o y o N nim xe NTAquâm e
G B O A 2N O Y Z Y ^ H e C O Y A A B - AY<D
14 NCYCCUMA 2 6 N A n e R H C T e -
r r e T e Fip ciJM e A e c c d nt* mmAq
16 n e n iN e F in n o y t b - 2 N b o a
N e g R <l>ê N M e p o c F iT e y a h
18 a y c d o y e B O A n e g R rrg A e F ie i
n a i F iT e FipcDM e- o y m o n o n
20 2 N 3 in H Y e N e ' î A A A n Ke M e p o c
t h p o y F iT e n c c u M A - a y <d k a

sed tuis uerbis / libenter adsensus felicissimum homi-
nem iudico, qui 325,15 sit tantam felicitatem consecutus. / Nec
inmerito miraculo dignus est, qui est / omnium maximus. deorum
genus omnium confes/sione manifestum est de mundissima parte
naturae / esse prognatum signaque eorum sola quasi capita 325,20
pro omnibus esse, species uero deorum, quas con/format humani-
tas, ex utraque natura conformatae / sunt; ex diuina, quae est purior
multoque diuinior, 326,1 et ex ea, quae intra homines est, id est ex
materia, / qua fuerint fabricatae, et non solum capitibus solis / sed
membris omnibus totoque corpore figurantur. / ita humanitas sem
per memor naturae et originis 326,5 suae in ilia diuinitatis imitatione
perseuerat,
69,7 Krause (1) takes this line with the previous one, rather than
the following.
17-18 e i N A l : The use of this Greek term is most unusual. T h e text
here could be emended to e IN < > , and the whole expression
translated, "the outer (part) of the likeness of men.
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 -2 9 6 9 ,4 -2 1 415
4 at the discourse about [this]. And I have

decided that man is blessed ((xaxapto?),
6 since he has enjoyed this great power.
And that which is greater than all these things,
8 O (d>) Asclepius, is worthy of admiration (0 ai> (iaeiv).
Now ((iiv) it is clear to us
10 concerning the race (ybos) of the gods,
and we confess (ofioX oyetv) it
12 along with everyone else, that it (the race of the gods)
has come into being
out of a pure matter (uXrj). And
14 their bodies (atofjia) are heads only.
But (Se) that which men create
16 is the likeness of the gods. They (the gods) are from
the farthest part ((xepoi?) of matter (uXy)),
18 and it (the object created by men) is from the outer
(part) of the being (elvat)
of men. Not only (ou (xovov)
20 are they (what men create) heads but (aXXa) (they are)
also all the other members (jiipo?)
of the body (<rco(j.a) and according to ( x a x a )

but gladly giving my
assent to your words, / I judge man supremely blessed 3 2 5 ,1 5 for
having attained such blessedness. / And he who is the greatest of
all is worthy of admiration. / It is clear, by the acknowledgement
of all, that the race of gods / is descended from the purest element
of nature / and their symbols are as it were only heads 3 2 5 ,2 0 in
place of the whole. But the images of the gods which / humanity
fashions, are fashioned from the twofold nature: / from the divine,
which is the purer and by far the more godlike, 3 2 6 ,1 and from that
which is within men, that is from the material / of which they were
made, and they are represented not only with heads / but with all
the members and the whole body. / Thus humanity, always mind
ful of its own nature and origin, 3 2 6 ,5 continues in such an imitation
of the divinity
4*6 NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI ,8
22 t a n o y e m e * k a ta e R t a
TTNoyTe o y c u q je e T p e n p t u
24 Me e t l n cA N ^ o y N t a m io ka
t a n e q T O N T R - ta Y T e e
26 R n p c u M e e q T A M i e N o y T e 1
XR TTKA^ k a t a n e q e i N e - D T p ic
28 M e n c T e m h e K q j A o c e a n t o y o j t 1-
fi) A C K A H n i e e K a j A J c e R t o k
30 e N T o y c o i* - kn ay xe Rto k 2 a>
a>K on & A C K A H n ie k c R na
32 t n a jt c e nupA Jce- K U )A :x e
6 N 6 T 6 OyN 'I'YXH R M o o y i
34 N iq e x e R T o y o T e * n a Y e T p e
N e p re i eN eY N o6 R 2B H o ye-
36 e K q p A J c e c n a Y et'f* R 2 eNTTP
<J)h t i a x e F i T o y o T e - n a Y e i* ')'
[O]
N O )[c u N e R R p c u M e mR n ]?tT X 6 o
2 e i * [ .......... j N F i M o y 2 t o y
Latin Asclepius 2 1 (middle)-^ (beginning), cont.

ut, j sicuti pater ac dominus, ut sui similes essent, deos /
fecit aeternos, ita humanitas deos suos ex sui uultus / similitudine
figuraret. / (24) Statuas dicis, o Trismegiste ? 326,10 Statuas,
o Asclepi. uidesne, quatenus tu ipse / diffidas? statuas animatas
sensu et spiritu plenas / tantaque facientes et talia, statuas futuro-
rum praes/cias eaque sorte, uate, somniis multisque aliis rebus /
praedicentes, inbedllitates hominibus facientes eas- 326,15 que cu-
rantes, tristitiam laetitiamque pro meritis.
69,22-27 inner man : Cf. Rom 7:22; 2 Cor 4 :16 ; Eph 3:16. For Philo,
the man" created in the image of God (xoct elx6va 6eoC)
is a "heavenly man" (oupavioc; &v6p<o7toi;) (Leg.all. 1.31,33) >
corresponding figure in Corp. Herm . I. i2 ,i4 is called the "image"
or the form of God." Philo also describes the human mind
(vous), when fully created, a s ' in the image of God (Op.mwnd.
134; Leg.all. III.95-96; Plant. 18-19, etc.).
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 -2 9 6 9 ,2 2 -7 0 ,2 417
22 their likeness. Just as (xaxa)

God has willed that the inner man
24 be created according to (xaxa)
his image, in the very same way
26 man on earth creates gods
according to (xaxa) his likeness. " 0 (&) Trismegistus
28 you are not (pf)) talking about idols, are you?
" 0 (&) Asclepius, you yourself are talking
30 about idols. You see that again you yourself,
O (&) Asclepius, are also a
32 disbeliever of the discourse. You say
about those who have soul and
34 breath, that they are idolsthese who
bring about ( e v e p y e tv ) these great events.
36 You are saying about these who give prophecies (7tpo-
<p7J T ta )
that they are idolsthese who give
[7 0 ]
[men sickness and] healing
2 that [ ] them.

that I just as the Father and Lord made the gods
eternal so as to be like him, / so humanity would represent its gods
with I the likeness of its own countenance. / (24) Do you mean
statues, Trismegistus? 326,10 Statues, Asclepiusdo you see to
what extent you yourself / are an unbeliever ?animated statues,
full of intellect and spirit, / which accomplish such great things;
statues which have foreknowledge of future things / and which pre
dict them through lots, oracles, dreams, and many other things, /
which cause illnesses for men and cure them, which cause 326,15
sadness and joy according to ones deserts.
69,32-70,2 O n t h e E g y p tia n id e a t h a t id o ls a r e a n im a te d , cf. D e rc h a in ,

p . 187.
*7
4*8 NAG HAMMADI CODEX VI,8
R e [ice W n I v t c o o y n 0 [a c ]k .a h
4 n ie x e k[ h] m 6 e c q jo o rt
k c d n F lT [ n ] e - F J ^ o y o A e ttm a
6 H q )(D n e F iT n e T e m R N e N e p
riA t h p o y et^ Fl T n e - e q t x e
8 ecpcpe eT peN X cu h t m c nH
kxz e q u j o o r t f l p n e R t t i c o c
io m oc* e c p c p e A e e p o i c c t R ] *
iT C O o y N x e o y fi o y o e iq j
12 N A O ^cun e Fl^pA'f W^HTcj c e n i
o y c u N ^ e B O \ f j 6 i F lp R F lK H M e
14 e A y ^ i c e e T M F lT N o y T e e
tt.x i n .x h - A y c u T o y n p A rM A T iA
16 T H p c FJ T O y M H T * N O y T e C N A
cp cu n e ecq^H C - tm Ht n o y tc
18 r a .p th pc naao 2^ ich m e He
n u j f e ^ p A 'f e T n e - A y a > khmc
20 NApxHpeye- q nap J t A e i e FIFI

N O y T e - N A A A O < j> y A O C TAP FI

an I ignoras, 0 Asclepi,
quod Aegyptus imago sit caeli / aut, quod est uerius, translatio aut
descensio om/nium, quae gubernantur atque exercentur in caelo ? /
et si dicendum est uerius, terra nostra mundi totius 326,20 est tem-
plum. I et tamen, quoniam praescire cuncta prudentes 327,1 decet,
istud uos ignorare fas non est: futurum tem/pus est, cum adpareat
Aegyptios incassum pia mente / diuinitatem sedula religione seruas-
se; et omnis eorum / sancta ueneratio in inritum casura frustrabitur.
e 327,5 terris enim et ad caelum recursura diuinitas lin/queturque
Aegyptus terraque, sedes religionum quae / fuit, uiduata numinum
praesentia destituetur. alie/nigenis enim
70,3-10 The transition to the apocalypse seems to draw its content

primarily from 71,31-33. For Egypt as the image (elxciv) of
heaven, focus of heavenly events, and the temple of the entire
cosmos, cf. Derchain, pp. 190-92.
11- 16 Cf. Sibyl VIII.29-31.
17-21 Cf. 7 1,11- 16 ; 73,5-6. For the deity abandoning its land and
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 -2 9 7 0 ,3 -2 1 419
Or (^) are you ignorant, O (<b) Asclepius,

4 that Egypt is (the) image (sbccov)
of heaven? Moreover (+ Se),
6 it is the dwelling place of heaven and all the forces
(sv e p y e ia )
that are in heaven. If
8 it is proper for us to speak the truth, our
land is (the) temple of the world (xoqjLo?).
10 And (8e) it is proper for you not to be
ignorant that a time
12 will come in it (our land)
(when) Egyptians will seem
14 to have served the divinity in
vain, and all their activity (7tpay[jLaTeia)
16 in their religion will
be despised. For (yap) all divinity
18 will leave Egypt and will
flee upward to heaven. And Egypt
20 will be widowed (xiQpetSsiv); it will be abandoned by the
gods. For (yap) foreigners (aXXo<puXo<;)

Do I you not realize,
Asclepius, that Egypt is an image of heaven, / orto be more ac
curatethe transferral or descent of everything / that is controlled
and operated in heaven ? / And, if one can speak even more ac
curately, our earth 326,20 is the temple of the whole world. / And
yet, since it is proper for the prudent to have foreknowledge of
everything, 327,1 there is something that you must not be unaware
of: the time is coming / when it will appear that the Egyptians /
have served the divinity, with pious mind and assiduous reverence,
in vain; and all their / holy worship, about to fall into worthlessness,
will become a deception. 327,5 For the divinity is about to return
from earth to heaven, / and Egypt will be forsaken, and the land,
which was once the home of religions, / widowed of its gods, will be
despoiled of their presence. / For once foreigners
people, cf. E z e k 8 :i2 ; 9:9; Jer 12:7-8 ; Plat. Polit. 272c, 274b.
Egyptian parallels are found in Krause (2), pp. 52-53.
22 n h y eÔYN 6 k h m 6 F lc e p xo
e i c e p o q k h m g H 2 Y 2 l r
24 p R H k h H e c eN a .p ica > A .Y e
R m o o y e T p e Y t p R q j e R rt
26 N O Y T e - H 2 Y 2lG c e N A q j i u
n e 2*1 a h f l T iM t u p iA - n e T O Y
28 NAê A e e p o q F I^ h t o y e q q jR
q je e q p c e B e c A i R x iN o y T e
30 M(|)O OY A e e T M M A Y T X O jp A
e T e F i p R F i n o y t n A p A Flxcu
32 pA t h p o y C N A q j c u n e e c e FI
A C 6 B H C O Y IC 6TI C A M O Y 2
34 F l p n e A A A A C A M O Y 2 NTA<j)OC*
OYTe ecAMOY 2 F In o y tc
36 A A A A 2 N K ( D ( D C ' D KH M G
k h M e A e N A q j c u n e F l e e FI n i
38 cyBcucuc- i y c u N e K e e iO N
[o5]
c e N A F l [ . . ] y t o y ^.[* ] ^ 2 ? [ h ]
2 o y ? F ia jn H p e m R . [ . . . . ]:x e
$ . [ . ] . a y co e q ? [ . x ] e ^ e N C D N e
4 Ne N e K q jA J t e e j [ e ] F lq p n H p e

regionem istam terram-
que conplenti/bus non solum neglectus religionum, sed, quod est
327,10 durius, quasi de legibus a religione, pietate cultuque / diuino
statuetur praescripta poena prohibitio. tunc / terra ista sanctissima,
sedes delubrorum atque tem/plorum, sepulcrorum erit mortuorum-
que plenissi/ma. o Aegypte, Aegypte, religionum tuarum solae
327,15 supererunt fabulae eaeque incredibiles posteris tuis / solaque
supererunt uerba lapidibus incisa tua pia / facta narrantibus
70,30-36 For impiety and atheism, conjoined with unimaginable horrors

and pogroms, as signs of the end, cf. Sibyl I II.330,568-79;
V.93-97-
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 -2 9 70 , 2 2 - 7 1 ,4 421
22 will come into Egypt, and they will rule

it. Egypt! Moreover (SI),
24 Egyptians will be prohibited (xtoXueiv)
from worshipping
26 God. Furthermore (+ Se), they will come
into the ultimate punishment (Tijjuopia), especially (Si)
whoever
28 among them is found worshipping
(and) honoring (aifieo0 ai) God.
30 And (Si) in that day the country (x<opa)
that was more pious than (7tapa) all countries (/copa)
32 will become
impious (aae|lY)<;). No longer (ooxsti) will it be full
34 of temples, but (aXXa) it will be full of tombs (xaipo?).
Neither ( o u t s ) will it be full of gods
36 but (aXXa) (it will be full of) corpses. O Egypt!
Egypt ( + Si) will become like the
38 fables. And your religious objects (Oetov)
[7 1 ]
will be [ ] the marvelous things
2 and [
[ ], and if your words aie
4 stones and are wonderful.

have filled this
region and land, / not only will religions be neglected, butwhat
is 327,10 even more severeas though by laws, there will be a pro
hibition, with a set penalty, / of religion, piety, and divine cult. Then
this most sacred land, home of shrines and temples, / will be com
pletely filled with tombs and dead things. / O Egypt, Egypt, of your
religions only 327,15 fables will survive, unbelievable to your
posterity, / and only words will survive inscribed on stones that
narrate your pious / accomplishments.
a .y o j n B a .p B a .p o c N a c o j T t F
6 F l ^ o y o e p o K * F It o k . d) [ n ] p R F l
k h m g j N T e q m FJtn o y T e fi o y
8 c i c y e H C fi ' F i ' ^ R T o y fi 6 e H
t c T m i n c - o y A e n e 'J 'j e a ) R M o q
io e n p R U K H M e * c e N a i c w r a p FI
c c u o y F I k h m c aN- n c o r t r a p H
12 t i n n o y T e kcu R c u > o y R n i c a ^
FJkhm g a y c o a y n t u f e ^ p a f e
14 T n e - t o t c n p R F lK H M e T H p o y
N a M o y a.ycu k h m c N a q ? u > n e
16 e q q j H q F l F l N o y T e mFI FlpRFI
k h m c B t o k a g D m ' e ' p o o y f l
18 o y ^ o o y N acycune F lf^ e ^ e
R C N o q R ^ o y o e n M o o y ayco
20 H ccuH a etfM o o y t ceN acpo)
n e e y j c o c e F i^ o y o aN TH N e-
22 a y a > c e N a p i M e aN RnefMo
o y f F le e R t t t o n 2 c e N a
24 M e e y e m gn e p o q x e o y p R f l
khm 6 n e eTBe T e q a c n e R

et in-
habitabit Aegyptum Scythes / aut Indus aut aliquis talis, id est
uicina barbaria. 328,1 diuinitas enim repetit caelum, deserti homines
toti I morientur atque ita Aegyptus deo et homine uiduata / desere-
tur. te uero appello, sanctissimum flumen, / tibique futura praedico:
torrenti sanguine plenus 328,5 adusque ripas erumpes undaeque
diuinae non solum / polluentur sanguine, sed totae rumpentur et
uiuis I multo maior numerus erit sepulcrorum; superstes / uero qui
foret, lingua sola cognoscetur Aegyptius, / actibus uero uidebitur
alienus.
71,8 o y is crossed out before F J T O y in the MS.

15-17 Cf. Ezek 29:8-12; Isa 19 :5-7; Nock-Festugi&re II, note 210,
p. 380.
18-20 Cf. Exod 7:17-25; Nock-Festugifere II, note 2 11, pp. 380-81.
22-24 Cf. Eccl 7 :1 ; Sibyl V III.353-54; Krause (2), p. 53.
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 -2 9 7 1 ,5 -2 5 423
And the barbarian ((3ap(3apo<;) will be

6 better than you, O Egyptian,
in his religion, whether ($j)
8 (he is) a Scythian, or (^) the Hindus, or (7)) some other
of this sort. And (Se) what is this that I say
10 about the Egyptian? For ( y a p ) they (the Egyptians) will
not abandon Egypt. For ( y a p ) (in) the time
12 (when) the gods have abandoned the land
of Egypt and have fled upward to
14 heaven, then ( t o t e ) all Egyptians
will die. And Egypt will be
16 made a desert by the gods and the Egyptians.
And (8s) as for you, O River, there
18 will be a day when you will flow
with blood more than water. And
20 dead bodies (aoSâ) will be
(stacked) higher than the dams.
22 And he who is dead will not be mourned
as much as he who is alive. Indeed ((iiv) the latter will be
24 known as an Egyptian
on account of his language in

And the Scythian / or the Indian or
some such other, that is, barbarian neighbors, will inhabit Egypt.
328,1 For the divinity will return to heaven; men, abandoned, / will
all die; and so Egypt, widowed of god and man, / will be deserted.
I call upon you, most sacred River, / and to you I foretell the
future: full of roaring blood 328,5 to the very banks, you will burst
forth, and your divine waters not only / will be polluted with blood
but will completely be burst apart, and / there will be a far greater
number of graves than of living men. But he who may survive / will
be recognized as Egyptian by his language alone, / by his deeds he
will seem a foreigner.
71.25-26 " i n . . . p e r io d : K r a u s e (1) ta k e s th i s p h r a s e w ith w h a t fo llo w s,

r a t h e r t h a n w ith w h a t p re c e d e s .
26 TTMe^ COTt C N A .y <D X C K A H n i e

A^poic eK pm e- qNA.oYtoN2
28 6 b o a ^cuc w \ o $ y \ o c k a . t a
Neq^BHOYe* k h m c F le e io N
30 q N iq je rt g e N n e e o o y e N e iy
6NA.T- K H M 6 R MA.GI N O Y T 6 1
32 AYto nMA Flq^cone FIFlNOYTe
R MA. A')' CBCU TlTMFlT*NOYTe
34 qNA.qja>ne FI1 k.cdn FItm Nt
1 C G B H C A.YCU R < j) O O Y c t R
36 MY C6NA.P 0 A.YM31 A.N MTTKOCMOC
mm
. [ .......... ] m H T tf[n fa O fm o y
2 o y [t 6 c]eNAOYcpu?f P[M oq]
A.N[......... ] . GNOCCD R M [O C JC]e NA
4 N oyq n . [. ]cuq an- o y t[ ] R
neq q)cu[ne] Roy*. WoYtuf* oy
6 T Ree<p[p]lA.- A.AAA qpKI NAY
Ne[Y]e e T p e q o jcu n e FlBA.poc
8 FIFlpCDMe TH pOY* AIA. TOYTO
CeNA.KATA.<J)pONI RMOq* nKO
10 c m o c e TN ecco q F It c ttn o y
Latin Asclepius 21 (middle)-29 (beginning), cont.

328,10 (25) quid fles, o Asclepi ? et his amplius multo/que
detenus ipsa Aegyptus suadebitur inbueturque / peioribus malis,
quae sancta quondam, diuinitatis / amantissima, deorum in terras
suae religionis me/rito sola deductio, sanctitatis et pietatis magis-
tra, 328,15 erit maximae crudelitatis exemplum. et tunc taedio /
hominum non admirandus uidebitur mundus nec / adorandus. hoc
totum bonum, quo melius nec fuit / nec est nec erit, quod uideri
possit, periclitabitur / eritque graue hominibus ac per hoc contem-
netur 328,20 nec diligetur totus hie mundus, dei opus inimita/bile,
71 ,35-72,16 The vision of the goodness, order, and beauty of the cosmos
is described here in typical Stoic fashion. Cf. elsewhere in
Hermetism, esp. Corp. Herm . V.1-5.
72,6-7 For the prediction that men will become world-weary in the
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 -2 9 7 1 ,2 6 -7 2 ,1 0 425
26 the second period (of time). O (&) Asclepius,

why are you weeping ? He will seem
28 like (ax;) (a) foreigner (aXAo<puXo<;) in regard to (xotTa)
his customs. Divine (Qetov) Egypt
30 will suffer evils greater
than these. Egypt, lover of God,
32 and the dwelling place of the gods,
school of religion,
34 will become an example (eixtov) of
impiousness (-a<re(37^). And in that day
36 the world (xoct(jlo<;) will not be marveled (0aij(i.a) at,
[72]
[ ] and [immortality]
2 [nor (ouxe)] will it be worshipped
[ ] since we say that it is
4 not good [ ]. It has become neither (outs )
a single thing nor (ofrre)
6 a vision (0e<opioc). But (aXXa) it is in danger (xivSoveiSeiv)
of becoming a burden (P<xpo<;)
8 to all men. Therefore (Sta t o u t o ) ,
it will be despised (xaxacppoveiv)the beautiful world
(x6<j[xo<;)
10 of God,

328,10 (25) Why do you weep, Asclep
greater and far worse / than this, Egypt herself will be dragged along,
and she will be stained / with worse evils. She who once was holy,
the beloved of the divinity, / sole dwelling of the gods on earth in
return for her reverence, / mistress of holiness and piety328,15 she
will be an example of the utmost cruelty. And then to the disgust /
of men the world will appear worthy neither of admiration / nor of
reverence. This total good, than which there has not been, / is not,
nor will be anything better to be seen, will be imperiled / and will
be a burden to men, and through it 328,20 this whole world will be
scorned and not lovedthis inimitable work of God, /
end-time, cf. Plat. P olit. 273d; Rev 6 :15 -17 ; 9:6; 16 :9 ,11,2 1;
Mt 2 4 :12 ; Lk 21:26.
T 6 <j>0 3 B 6MTJ n e i ' T R T C U N

12 e p o q * T e N e p r e ia . e re oyTi
t a c m M a y W Ta.peTH - ecu pi 3k.
14 6T? W C M O t- T X O p H ria .
e M icp < |)eo N i- nei*M e2
16 N e c u p i A. NI M- C e N 3k.CeTTt
n u K e F l^ o y o e n o y o e i N -
18 ceN AceTTt n M o y e
n io N ^ MH N êicupR
20 e^ pa/f e r n e - n p R T lN o y T e Ae
c e N & o n q ^ c u c p eqA O B e- n i
22 C6BHC A 6 np(U M e C 6 N m
e i o q c u c cjk.Be- n c a . N p 2 O T e
24 c e N 3k . o n c j ^ c u c x o j p e * a . Y^
ceN3k.KOA3k.2e Rn3k.r3k.eoc FI
26 pcuM e 2 ^ c pcuM e e q 2 Y '
e T B e t ' | ' y x h 2lG W ^bhyg
28 N T 'j 'Y X H T M F l * 3k.TMOY
mW n K e c e e n e T l T 3k . e i . x o o Y
30 e p O J T N d ) TAT* MR 3k.CKAHTTie
M il 3k.MM CUN- O Y M O N O N C
32 N iM eey e ep o o Y x e oycoj
B e n e - a.AA3k. c e N 3k.p T T K . e c n 3k.

gloriosa constructio, bonum multiformi ima/ginum uarietate con-
positum, machina uoluntatis dei / in suo opere absque inuidia suf-
fragantis, in unum / omnium, quae uenerari laudari amari denique a
329,1 uidentibus possunt, multiformis adunata congestio. / nam et
tenebrae praeponentur lumini et mors uita / utilior iudicabitur;
nemo suspiciet caelum; reli/giosus pro insano, inreligiosus puta-
bitur prudens, 329,5 furiosus fortis, pro bono habebitur pessimus.
anima / enim et omnia circum earn, quibus aut inmortalis / nata est
aut inmortalitatem se consecuturam esse / praesumit, secundum
quod uobis exposui, non solum / risui sed etiam putabitur uanitas.
72,20-33 For inversion of standards and values, cf. Isa 5:20; 2 Bar 70;
Plat. Polit. 272e-73a; Sibyl VII.43-45; V I I I . 35-54, 81-85.
33*34 CTT3k.T3k.A3k.: T3t is in the left margin of the MS.
ASCLEPIUS 21-29 72 . 11-33 427
the incomparable work,

12 the energy (svepyeia) that possesses
goodness (apery)), the many-formed vision (0ea>p(a),
14 the abundance (xP^Yâ)
that does not envy (<p0oveiv), that is full
16 of every vision (Oetopia).
Darkness will be preferred to light
18 and death will be preferred to
life. No one will gaze
20 into heaven. And (8s) the pious man
will be counted as (&><;) insane,
22 and (8s) the impious (dae(W)<;) man will be honored
as (&<;) wise. The man who is afraid
24 will be considered as (&><;) strong. And
the good man (ixyoSoc,) will be punished (xoXa^stv)
26 like (&q) a criminal.
And (8e) concerning the soul (ûx^), and the things
28 of the soul (<Ja>xti) and the things of immortality,
along with the rest of what I have said
30 to you, O (6) Tat, Asclepius,
and Ammon, not only (06 (i.ovov) will they
32 be considered ridiculous
but (aXXa) they will also be thought of as a vanity
tocXt)).

glorious con
struction, a good composed of a manifold variety of images, / instru
ment of the will of God, / which proceeds with favor in its work
ungrudgingly, / manifold accumulation uniting in one all things
which can be revered, praised, loved 329,1 by those who behold
them. I For darkness will be preferred to light and death will be /
judged more useful than life. No one will look up to heaven. The
pious man / will be taken for a fool, the impious will be thought
prudent, 329,5 the madman will be thought brave, the most wicked
will be held a good man. The soul / and everything about it by which
it is bom immortal / or believes it will attain immortality, / as I have
explained to you, are regarded not only / as the object of derision
but as nothingness.
428 NAG H AM M A D I CO D EX V I ,8
34 TA.AA. M M O O y x w x ep m icT ey
e Na.T x e n^T F l T e T M m e c e N i
3 6 6 iN A Y N e y e z R n a .e H 6 iN A y
NOC flT O Y + y X H - 3iy<D C
38 N iC R N O yN O M O C R B p p e
[or]
(Line I lacking)
2 [ 19 ]* *
[ 18 c]g n a
4 [ 19 ]< N
R A r a . e [ o c ] R a .[i* re]A O [c H ] n o
6 N H p o c [c]eNjk.cpcpjctT p [ y 3k.]Toy
f l f l p c u M e e y o j o o r f N ^ M J iy
8 e y c t u K ^ H j o y a .2 o y N a.MTTe*i*
2 0o y 2 ^ oyTOAMHpia.- a.yco a.2 Y N
IO 3lN MFT*ATN O y T MFI JGNnOAG
m o c mR ^ e N T O j p r t e y f c b c d N ^ y
12 e 2 fiT T A [p ] a .< |> Y c ic - M 2Y e
T R M 3l Y TTICA2 N A C MF I [ T ] q A N
14 ^ Y a ) ceN A TTA ea. a.n & x \x c c x
o y T e ceN ^ coyujN F lcio y an

sed, mihi credite, 329,10 et capitale periculum constituetur in eum,
qui se / mentis religioni dederit. noua constituentur iura, / lex noua;
nihil sanctum, nihil religiosum nec caelo / nec caelestibus dignum
audietur aut mente credetur. / fit deorum ab hominibus dolenda
secessio; soli 329,15 nocentes angeli remanent, qui humanitate com-
mixti I ad omnia audaciae mala miseros manu iniecta con/pellunt,
in bella, in rapinas, in fraudes et in omnia / quae sunt animarum
naturae contraria. tunc nec / terra constabit nec nauigabitur mare
nec caelum 329,20 astrorum cursibus nec siderum cursus constabit
in j caelo;
73.6 Krause (1) reconstructs e [ y M OJ C j e T O y , but the lacuna is

too small for four letters.
A S C LEP IU S 21-29 72 ,34 - 73,15 429
34 But (aXXa) believe ( t c l c j t e u s i v )

me (when I say) that people of this kind will
36 be endangered (xivSuveiieiv) by the ultimate danger (xiv-
Suvoi;)
to their soul (ûx^). And
38 a new law (vo(i.o<;) will be established.
[73]
(Line 1 lacking)
2 [
[ ] they will
4
good (dya06(;). [The] wicked (7cov7]po<;) angels
[
6 will remain among

men, (and) be with them
8 (and) lead them into wicked things
recklessly (roXjr/jpia), as well as into
10 atheisms, wars (nokeixoq),
and plunderings, by teaching them
12 things contrary to nature (7capa<pu<ii<;). In those days
the earth will not be stable,
14 and men will not sail (irXetv) the sea (QdXaaaa)
nor (otfxe) will they know the stars in heaven.

But believe me, 329,10 a capital sentence will
be decreed for one who / dedicates himself to the religion of the
mind. New laws will be enacted, / a new prescription; nothing holy,
nothing religious worthy of either heaven / or the heavenly beings
will be heard or believed in the mind. / There is a mournful departure
of the gods from men. Only 329,15 the injurious angels remain,
who, having mingled with humanity, / drive men by force to all
the evils of audacity: / wars, plunderings, crimes, and everything /
contrary to the nature of souls. Then neither / will the land remain
fixed nor the sea be navigated nor heaven 329,20 be set with the
courses of the stars nor the course of the stars be set in / heaven.
73.14-15 Cf. Sibyl V I I .1 2 4 -2 5 ; V III.348.

16 ei* 2 N T n e - cm h nim c t o y ^ b
NTG TTAOTOC MTTNOyTG C G N i
18 K A p cu o y e p o q - tta h p a g nau ?cd

Ne- TA'f T 6 { t s } T M N f ^ A O MTTK.O
20 CMOC' T M H t l T N O y T G MN
T M N f l T e O O y A y CO TMFlT*AT*
22 Aoroc NNcpA^ce g t n a n o y o y
epcuÂNA'i a g u n tu n e ic k \ h
24 n ie t o t n ^ o e i c n e ic o f i y o )
TTNoyTe M n q jo p rf o yA A q - n N o y
26 r e n A H M i o y p r o c GAq6coqj*F g
jcn N e p q jc u n e - Ayci) n e q a j o
28 j c n g g t g nA.rA.eoN n e A q c a
^cuq e p A T q eacFi t a t a S i a . - A q q i R
30 T T T A A N H MHA y A y C D T K .A 6 1 A

omnis uox diuina necessaria tacitumitate / mutescet;
fructus terrae conrumpentur nec fecunda / tellus erit et aer ipse
maesto torpore languescet. / (26) haec et talis senectus ueniet mundi:
inre- 329,25 ligio, inordinatio, inrationabilitas bonorum omnium.
330,1 cum haec cuncta contigerint, o Asclepi, tunc ille / dominus et
pater, deus primipotens et unius guber/nator dei, intuens in mores
factaque uoluntaria, / uoluntate sua, quae est dei benignitas, uitiis
resistens 330,5 et corruptelae omnium, errorem reuocans,
73,19 Cf. 2 Esdr 5:55 ; 14 :10 ,16 ; 2 Bar 85,10.

23-74,2(?) Lactantius, in his D ivinae institutiones (7.18.3-5), haspreserved
the following Greek parallel to this passage (quoted in Nock-
Festugi&re II, 330) : &t:om 89) x a u x a yivnjr at, 6 AaxXiQTri^, r 6 n i
x u p i 05 xal kccttjp xal 0e6<; xal to u 7rpcoxou xal v6? 0eou Sr](iioupY<5?
to i ? yevo(xivois, xal ttjv iauTOU poiSXnjaiv, t o u t cmv xi
iy a 06v, avTepetoa? Tjj dcxa^ta, xal &vaxaXeaa(ievo<; ttjv 7tX<vt;v,
xal t})v xaxtav sxxaOapac, ni) (ISaxi ttoXX5> xaxaxXuaa?, jri)
8k irupl 6!;uxaxco Siaxauaat;, hiio-re 8k TtoXiôig xal Xotjxotc ixnaloots,
fjyoiYev i n i x i dtpxaTov xal &7roxaxaT7]aev t6 v 4auxou x6o(xov.
Now when these things happened, O Asclepius, then the Lord,
and Father, and god, even the creator from the first and only
God, when he beheld the things that happened, firmly set his
ASCLEPIUS 21-29 73 , 16-30 431
16 Every sacred voice

of the word (Xoyo?) of God will
18 be silenced, and (8e) the air (dojp) will be diseased.
Such is the senility of the world (x6qj.o<;):
20 atheism,
dishonor, and the disregard (-X6yo<;)
22 of noble words.
And (8e) when these things had happened, O (&) Ascle
pius,
24 then ( t o t e ) the Lord, the Father and
god from the only first (God), god
26 the creator (SYjjxioupyoi;), when he looked upon
the things that happened, established his design,
28 which is good (ayccSdv),
against the disorder (dcra.t'tix). He took away
30 error (jrXavT)) and cut off evil (xaxia).

Every divine
voice will grow mute with forced silence. / The fruits of the land
will be destroyed, the soil will not be fertile, / and the air itself will
grow weak with gloomy torpor. / (26) Such is the old age that will
come upon the world: irreligion, 329,25 disorder, the disregard of
everything good. 330,1 When all this has happened, Asclepius, then
the I Lord and Father, the god first in power and the governor from
the one God, / looking upon these practices and deliberate actions, /
putting a stop by his own will, which is God's kindness, to vices
330,5 and to the corruption of all things, revoking error,
purpose, which is good, against disorder. He summoned error

(to account) and cleaned out wickedness, sometimes (by)
flooding with much water, sometimes (by) burning with fierc
est fire, and sometimes (by) casting out through wars and
plagues. (And thus) he brought (it) to (its) ancient state and
(so) restored his world/'
73,27-74,3 Cf. Plat. Tim . 22c-23a; Nock-Festugi&re II, note 224, p. 382;
Derchain, pp. 193-94. Here the Stoic myth of recurring cosmic
catastrophe and restoration appears; cf. Nock-Festugi&re II,
note 222, p. 382.
a.q 6 u>.xe m h o c - ^ e N C o r t m c n
32 iq o H e c o y n o 6 m m ooy
^ e N K e c o T t A e * q p o l i c e R Y
34 kcu^? eqjCA.Bjk.jk.1*- z e N K e c o T t
A 6 a.qAO)JC2 M H O C R 2 e N T T O A e
36 M O C MR 2 ^ N A O I M O C - C pjk.N T qeiN 6
tqai
(Line i lacking)
2 [
[
4 ?[ 14 ] e ^[
n [ 6 R ]T e niecp[B ]
6 a.[ya>] xta. tt.x tto p n i c o c
n e
MO[C- T]A.TTO KA.TA.CTA.CI C HT
8 < J > y c i c NNeyceBHC c t n i
N o y o y g c n a. a t t u n e R o y
10 n e p i o A o c R x p o N o c cm
n e c j c i a.pxH e N 6 2 n o y c u
12 q j e ra.p M n N o y [ T ] e NTeq
2 o y [ e i ] T e - k a t a . e R T e q 4 >y
Latin Asclepius 21 (middle)-^ (beginning), cont.

maligni-
331,1 tatem omnem uel inluuione diluens uel igne consu/mens uel
morbis pestilentibus iisque per diuersa / loca dispersis finiens ad
antiquam faciem mundum / reuocabit, ut et mundus ipse adorandus
uideatur 331,5 atque mirandus et tanti opens effector et restitutor /
deus ab hominibus, qui tunc erunt, frequentibus / laudum praeconiis
benedictionibusque celebretur. / haec enim mundi genitura: cunc-
tarum reformatio / rerum bonarum et naturae ipsius sanctissima et
reli- 331,10 giosissima restitutio percoacta temporis cursu, <sed /
uoluntate>, quae est et fuit sine initio sempitema. / uoluntas etenim
dei caret initio, quae eadem est et, /
74,7-8 Cf. Ac 3 :2 1.
8"of the pious ones : or "for the pious ones" (Krause [2]), or
"of holy (things) (Mah6 [1]).
ASCLEPIUS 21-29 7 3 ,3 1 -7 4 ,1 3 433
Sometimes (+ |iiv)
32 he submerged it in a great flood,
at other times ( + &e) he burned it in a
34 searing fire, and at still (te) other times,
he crushed it in wars (7r6Xeô^)
36 and plagues (X<h {z6<;), u n til he brought
[7 4 ]
(Line 1 lacking)
2 [
[
4 [
[ ] of the work.
6 And this is the birth of the world (x6c[xo<;).
The restoration (dbtoxaTdaTaau;) of the
8 nature (<pucri<;) of the pious ones (euae(3r)<;) who are good
will take place in a
10 period (ueptoSo?) of time (xp6vo<;) that
never had a beginning (apxh)-
i2 For (yap) the will of God has no
beginning, even as (xaroc) his nature (cpuo^),

331,1 either
washing away in a flood or burning up in a fire all malice / or putting
an end to it with pestilential diseases spread through various /
placeshe will recall the world to its former appearance / so that
the world itself may appear worthy of reverence 331,5 and admir
ation, and god, the creator and restorer of such a great work, / may
be honored by the men who will then exist, with many / hymns of
praise and with blessings. / For this is the birth of the world: the
restoration of all / good things and the most holy and pious 331,10
restitution of nature itself enforced in the course of time, <but / by
a will> which is and was eternal, without beginning. / For the will
of God has no beginning, since it is the same and /
28
14 c ic eT e neqoycuqpe ne-
T<J>ycic ra.p H n M o y i e n e n o y
16 coupe- n e q o y c u q j e a s n e n a
r ^ e o N ' fi) n T p i c M e n c T e
18 le T B oyA H cic n e n oycuqje*
e ^ e fi) a c K A H n i e e p e n o y
20 c d ey e q jo o T t m n q j o x N e -
oy rap n e ie oy flT aq q < q > o y A q jq
22 a.N ^ R n u j T a - ^ c u c e q q p o o r t
MMOY2 mttma THpq- q o y
24 cdoj n e T e o y N T a q q oyM oyC'
A r ^ e o N A e n im o y W T a q c e -
26 n eT q o y A ajq Ae qoyaepq-
o y f l T a q A.e M M a y FinA.rjk.eoN
28 e T q o y a q j q - a.p* o y W T a q R
M ay H nTHpq- aycu n N o y
30 T e q o y c u q j n e T q o y a q jZ J-
ayo> n K o c M o c N airx e o c
32 e q u p o o it R ^ Ik o jn R n a r a e o c -
fi) n T p i c M e n c T e t e o y a r a .
34 e o c n e m c o c M o c - fi) a c i c A H
m e o y a.ra.eo c ne- f le e e
36 e i a . + c b c d Na.K- K a r a e e r a p

sicuti est, sempitema. dei enim
natura consilium est / uoluntatis. 331,15 Bonitas summa consi
lium, o Trismegiste ? / Voluntas, 0 Asclepi, consilio nascitur et
ipsum I uelle e uoluntate. neque enim inpense aliquid uult, / qui est
omnium plenissimus et ea uult, quae habet. / uult autem omnia bona
et habet omnia, quae uult. 331,20 omnia autem bona et cogitat et
uult. hoc est autem / deus; eius imago mundus, boni <bonus>. /
(27) Bonus, o Trismegiste ? 332,1 Bonus, o Asclepi, ut ego te
docebo. sicuti / enim deus omnibus speciebus uel generibus, quae /
in mundo sunt, dispensator distributorque est bono/rum,
ASCLEPIUS 21-29 74 . I 4-36 435
14 which is his will, (has no beginning).

For (yap) the nature (<pu<ri<;) of God is will.
16 And (8s) his will is the good (aya06v).
"0 (&) Trismegistus,
18 is purpose ((SouX-qm^), then, will?
"Yes, 0 (d>) Asclepius, since will
20 is (included) in counsel.
For (yap) <he> does not (00) will what he has
22 from deficiency. Since (ax;) he is
complete in every part, he wills
24 what he (already) fully has.
And (8e) he has every good (aya06v).
26 And (8e) what he wills, he wills.
And (8s) he has the good (dyaGov)
28 that he wills. Therefore (<5cpa) he has
everything. And God
30 wills what he wills.
And the good (dyaOo?) world (x 6<t(jio<;)
32 is an image (sixciv) of the Good One (aya0o<;).
" 0 (d>) Trismegistus,
34 is the world (x6ay.o<;) good (dyaOo?) ? " 0 (&) Asclepius,
it is good (aya06<;), as
36 I shall teach you. For (yap) just as (xaxa)

is eternally as
it is. For the nature of God is the deliberation / of his will. 331,15
"Is deliberation the highest good, Trismegistus ? / The will, Ascle
pius, is bom of deliberation and / the act of willing itself is born of
the will. For he who is filled with all things and wills what he
possesses / does not will anything excessively. / But he wills all good
things and he possesses all that he wills. 331,20 He both thinks of
and wills all good things. But this is God; the world is his image,
<good> from the Good. / (27) "Good, Trismegistus ? 332,1 "Good,
Asclepius, as I shall teach you. For just as / God is for all the classes
andtypes / in the world the dispenser and distributor of good things,
[oe]
[ 7 R T'l'yxH mR n]cDN
4 [ ] m t t k [ o c m o c . . . ] . pH
[ e ] i 6 b [ o \ ] N e y \ H y [a ]T [ e ] T N [ a . N ] o y
6 [ o ] y n o j i B e R n i H p - a y [ c u n ] a N a 'f
m n n-xcpic b o a f l n x a p n o c m FI
8 N e f N e H n a T T H [ p ] o y c t b b naT
n N o y T e q e M a ^ T e bjcm n o t ic e
10 n m e -q ^ R NIM q ia p R
eJcH M a n im - n e q - r o n o c a c mFI
12 n e M M [ i ] y o y T e mR c i o y a y c u
q T o y q H o y a c c u m v n [A ]y M io y p
14 r o c j l e q a .M a .2 T e e n T o n o c e
T o y T e n i c a ^ Mfl m e - n a T e T o y
16 M oyTe epoq x e zeyc eT e
ncuN ^ n e - t t a o y t c d n io c F U e y c
18 F iT o q n e e i e R ^ c o e i c e . x R n i c a ^
m H e a A a c c a - a y c u M fiT a q T p o
20 <j>H R M a y n R a c o o n t h p o y n
o n h t o n - T K o p H r a p eT p<j>opi
22 M m c a p n o c * N e ' f e N e p r e i a Fi

id est
sensus, animae et uitae, sic et mundus 332,5 tributor est et praesti-
tor omnium, quae mortalibus / uidentur bona, id est et alternations
partuum tem/poralium, fructuum natiuitatis, augmentorum et /
maturitatis et horum similium; ac per hoc deus / supra uerticem
summi caeli consistens ubique est 332,10 omniaque circum inspirit,
sic est enim ultra caelum / locus sine stellis ab omnibus rebus cor-
pulentis alie/nus. dispensator qui est, inter caelum et terram /
obtinet locum, quem Iouem uocamus. terrae uero / et mari domi-
natur Iuppiter Plutonius et hie nutritor 332,15 est animantium mor-
talium et fructiferarum. horum / omnium uiribus
75,8-25 For the distinction between the wordly gods (pc6a(oi Oeol
Zeus, Kore, etc. understood as natural forces) and the
otherworldly gods (67repx6o(iioi Oeolthe highest transcendent
God and those who directly attend him), cf. Sallustius VI.2-3;
ASCLEPIUS 21-29 75 , 1-22 437
[75]
[ of soul (<J>ux^)) and] life
4 [ ] of the [world (x 6cf{ju><;)
come [forth] in matter (uAt)), [those that are good],
6 the change of the climate (dcYjp), and [the] beauty
and the ripening of the fruits (xap7c6<;), and
8 the things similar to all these. Because of this,
God has control over the heights
10 of heaven. He is in every place and he looks out
over every place. And (te) (in) his place (t6tzoc,) there is
neither
12 heaven nor (oute) star. And
he is free from (the) body (a&fia). Now (Si) the creator
(SY)[XtOUpYO?)
14 has control in the place ( z6tzo<;) that is
between the earth and heaven. He
16 is called Zeus, that is,
life. Plutonius Zeus
18 is lord over the earth
and sea (0aXa<r<7a). And he does not possess the nourish
ment (xpocpY))
20 for all mortal (0vt]t6v) living creatures (tjiov),
for (yap) (it is) Kore who bears (<popeZv)
22 the fruit (xocp7u6<;). These forces (svepysta)

I that is of intellect, soul, and life, so too the world 332,5 is the
granter and bestower of all things that seem good to mortals, / that
is, the succession of births in time, / the generation, increase, and
maturation of fruits, / and similar things. And thus, / positioned
above the high point of the highest heaven, God is everywhere
332,10 and he beholds everything all around. For thus there is a
place beyond heaven / without stars, distant from all corporeal
things. I He who is the dispenser, whom we call Jupiter, has his
place between heaven and earth. / But Jupiter Plutonius rules over
the land / and the sea, and he is the nourisher 332,15 of all animated
and fruit-bearing mortal things. / It is by the forces of all these
K o re Kosm ou 28-29; Corp. Herm . I.9 -11; Nock-Festugifere II,
notes 228-30, pp. 383-84.
o y o e i q j n im c 6 m 6 o m R t t k c d
24 T e n n K a . 2 ' na. H i c o o Y e A e Fi
o y o e i o j n im F iT e n e fq p o o T t
26 ceN ace^TO Y R m a y n 6 i FI
j c o e i c RnKA?- aYd> c e N v r e
28 2 Y e p a T o y 0 o y n o A ic ecT
o y K o o z FiTe kh m c- e y N iK O
30 tc R cai Bu>TTt WTe n p H -
pu>M nim nabidk eôyN e p o c
32 eiT e ngtFInhoy^W q x a x c c x
eiT e N6 TFINHOY niicpo-
34 fi) n T p ic M e n c T 0 c naT "J-n o y
eYNA.KA.21Y tojn- fi) ACKAHnie
36 F> t n o 6 R n o A ic taT etffl nTOOY
[05]
[RA.IBH
2 [

fructus, arbusta,
et terra uegetan/tur. aliorum uero uires et effectus per omnia
quae / sunt distribuentur. f distribuentur uero, j qui terrae / domi-
nantur, et conlocabuntur in ciuitate in summo 332,20 initio Aegypti,
quae a parte solis occidentis conde/tur, ad quam terra manque
festinabit omne mor/tale genus. 333,1 Modo tamen hoc in tem
pore ubi isti sunt, o / Trismegiste ? / Conlocati sunt in maxima
ciuitate in monte / Libyco. et haec usque eo narrata sint. 333,5 de
inmortali uero aut de mortali modo disseren/dum est. multos enim
spes timorque mortis
75,26-76,1 Cf. Rev 2 1:1- 2 ; Sibyl I II.288-98, 573-79; V II.144-45.

76,2-15 Stobaeus has preserved the following Greek parallel to this
section (quoted in Nock-Festugi&re II, 333): Ilepl t o o 0#v-
t o o vuv X ex-rôv, toiIx; y&ptto X X o u ? o Oavaxoi; <po(3e? xaxiv
arov, dcyvoiato o Tupdcy^tXTOi;. 0avaro?yapylyverai SidcXvoit; x(i6vto?
otbyLaroG xal to o dcpi6(iou 7rXrjpw0vTO<; tcov ap|i.cov to o oti(ienoc
dcpi6(x.6; yap t) ap[AOY$) to u acofxaToq, dtoroGvâxei 84 t6 o5(ia
8rav &ov)Tai <ppeiv t6 v fiv0pto7tov. xal to o t o mQdtvaro;,
ASCLEPIUS 21-29 7 5 ,2 3 -7 6 ,2 439
always are powerful in the circle

24 of the earth, but (81) those of others
are always from Him-who-is.
26 And (Be) the lords of the earth will withdraw themselves.
And they will establish
28 themselves in a city (toSXk;) that is in
a comer of Egypt and that will be built
30 toward the setting of the sun.
Every man will go into it,
32 whether (tUe) they come on the sea (0dXa<r<ra)
or (exe) on the shore.
34 O (&) Trismegistus,
where will these be settled now? O (&) Asclepius,
36 in the great city (tcoXi?) that is on the [Libyan] mountain
[76]
[
2 [

(gods) that fruits, trees, and the earth are invigorated. / But the
forces and operations of other (gods) will be distributed through all
that I exists. Those who rule over the land will be restored / and will
be located in a city at the farthest 332,20 limit of Egypt, one which
will be founded in the direction of the setting sun, / to which by
land and sea the whole mortal / race will hasten. 333,1 "But where
are these at the present time, / Trismegistus ? / "They are located
in a very great city on a Libyan mountain. / And let that be enough
discussion on this matter. 333,5 But now we must discourse on the
immortal and the mortal. / For the expectation and the fear of death
id&ucxi a<i(jtaxo? xal dtcpavi.afi.6t; aloOVjcxeco^ a to jx a T ix ^ ? . "But one

must speak now about death, for death frightens many as the
greatest evil by ignorance of the matter. For death is the
dissolution of the outworn body andsince the number has
been completedof the joints of the body. For the joining of
the body is the number, and the body dies when it is unable
any longer to support the man. And this is death, dissolution
of the body and destruction of bodily sensation.
[ 10 q]p [e]o [T e
4 [ . . . . w e e Wo ] y n o [6 R n e ] e o [ o y ]
f eW T ] M R f A T C O O y [ N ] R < t > a ) [ B ]
6 ij[ m o ]y ra.p e a ? A q c p c p n e e[Te]
ttbcua b o a n e R H f i c e R n c [ c u ]
8 Mi.' A y c u THn[e] e q u p A J t c u K e
b o a R rra .p ie M o c R n ccu M A
io n J i p i e M o c ra.p n e <|)a)Tp R
nccDM A- q jA q M o y a c R 6 i n e w
12 ma ^ o t a n e q T R Q J [ 6 R ] 6 [ o ] M R q i
Z*- n [ p ] a M e
A y c u nA'f n e n M o y
14 ttbcua b o a R n ccu M A - Aycu m e
KO R T A I C Q H C I C R nCCU M A -
16 A y c p e q j q j e a n e p O T e z HTQ
RnAT- o Y T e gA nAT- a a a a ^ a
18 n e T o y e R n a tco o y n epoq
e y e R A n i c T o c W ^htcJ- e y
20 A e n e T o y e W natcooyn epoq
fi e y e f l A n i C T O C e p o q - c c u

excru/ciat uerae rationis ignaros. mors enim
efficitur / dissolutione corporis labore defessi et numeri con/pleti,
quo corporis membra in unam machinam ad 333,10 usus uitalis
aptantur. moritur enim corpus, quando / hominis uitalia ferre posse
destiterit. haec est ergo / mors, corporis dissolutio et corporalis sen-
sus inte/ritus; de qua sollicitudo superuacua est. sed et alia /
necessaria, quam aut ignoratio aut incredibilitas 333,15 contemnit
humana. 334,1 Quid est, o Trismegiste, quod aut ignorant / aut
esse posse diffidunt ? / (28) Audi ergo,
76,3-5 Restorations follow those proposed by Gerald M. Browne in

"Textual Notes on Nag Hammadi Codex V I, Z P E 13 (1974),
308-09.
8-9 or "And as for the number, it (death) completes the number
of the body (Krause [1]). The problem of this passage is that
T H n e has no clear grammatical relationship to its context.
The Coptic translator seems to have intended that the reader
ASCLEPIUS 21-29 76 , 3-21 441
[ it frightens]
4 [ as a] great [evil],
[in] ignorance of the matter.
6 For (yap) death occurs, [which] is
the dissolution of the labors of the body ((j&fxoc)
8 and (the dissolution of) the number (of the body), when
it (death) completes
the number (api0[Ao<;) of the body (a&fia).
10 For (yap) the number (apiOfio?) is the union of
the body (<rc5{i.a). Now (8e) the body (atofxa) dies
12 when (8xav) it is not able to support
the man. And this is death:
14 the dissolution of the body (a>[i,a) and the destruction
of the sensation (at(j07)<n<;) of the body (acofxa).
16 And it is not necessary to be afraid
of this, nor (ou ts ) because of this, but (aXAa) because of
18 what is not known
and is disbelieved (faiiarotz) (one is afraid). But (S)
what is
20 not known
or (f)) is disbelieved (amaros) ? Listen,

torment many / who are ignorant of the true explanation. For death
is brought about / by the dissolution of the body wearied by labor,
once the number is completed / in which the bodys members are
fitted into one instrument for 3 3 3 , 1 0 the functions of life. For the
body dies when / it ceases to be able to support the vital operations
of man. This is what / death is, then: the dissolution of the body
and the destruction of bodily sensation; / and solicitude about this
is useless. But there is another solicitude / that is necessary, which
either human ignorance or incredulousness 333,15 despises. 334,1
What is it, Trismegistus, which either they ignore / or they do not
believe possible? / (28) "Listen,
carry over the context of the previous sentence and fit T HIT
into it.
76,21-27 Cf. Corp. Herm . 1.23; X .2 1; Plut. Ser.num .pun. 564e-f (Adra-
steia); Rev. 1 :1 3 - 1 8 ; Nock-Festugi&re II, note 238, pp. 385-86.
442 n a g ham madi c o d e x v i ,8
22 TM ffi A.CKA.HTTIC O y R 0 y N 0 6
N A ilM C D N tyOOTt i n N 0 6 FlN O Y
24 t T o q jq e q e F le n ic K o n o c
R R a i k i c t h c ejcR R 'l'Y * 11
26 F I R p c u M e - i n N o y T e A e KA.A.q
2 ? T M H T 6 RTTAH p O Y T TTKA.2
28 mR m e - 20TAN 6 e ep e q jA
t 'I'y x n e s o \ ^R c c d m a t a .
30 n a .i*k h T e c n a t c u m R t e n e T
AAIMO)N- R T 6 Y N O Y q N ! T K T 6
32 n e t R q M A . u ? T q i n c M i i 1 RTA.q
A.a.q ^M n e q B i o c - e q p c u n e A e
34 e q N A . 6 iN e M M o q eA.qp N e q
2 BHOY 6 T H p o Y R oymRt*
36 noytb R T ^ q e i e n ic o c M o c
eTBHHToy tta.T q NA.KA.Aq
[ 1 1 ]rq - [
2 [ 7 _ ]eicoT q[
[ 7 ]a.n A e e[qcyA.N NA]y xy
4 [ .......... ]N"F f e ] R n a T R . [ . . . ] A .q e iN [ e ]
R n e q B i o c R R ^ B H y e ? [T 2 o ] o v
6 a jA .p e q a .M ^ 2 T e R M o q e q [ n ] H f e z p a J
e n c [ i ] R ^pe- RqN o^cq e n c ^ R ttitR

o
mae e corpore facta discessio, tunc arbitrium exa- 334,5 menque
meriti eius transiet in summi daemonis / potestatem, isque earn cum
piam iustamque perui/derit, in sibi conpetentibus locis manere
permittit; / sin autem delictorum inlitam maculis uitiisque obli- /
tarn uiderit, desuper ad ima deturbans procellis tur- 334,10 binibus-
que aeris, ignis et aquae saepe discordantibus 335,1 tradit,
76,23-24 or The great God has appointed him, since he is . . (Krause

[1 ]).
27-32 Cf. Plut. Ser.num.pun. 565a-b.
ASCLEPIUS 21-29 7 6 ,2 2 -7 7 ,7 443
22 O (&) Asclepius! There is a great

daimon (Saijitov). The great God has
24 appointed him to be overseer (sm<7X07TOs)
or (75) judge (SixaertTji;) over the souls (ûx^l)
26 of men. And (Sc) God has placed him
in the middle of the air (dWjp) between the earth
28 and heaven. Now, when (6tocv)
the soul (<jwxv)) comes forth from (the) body ((Tcofjia), it is
necessary (avayxv))
30 that it meet this
daimon (8a((ji<ov). Immediately he (the daimon) will sur
round
32 this one (masc.) and he will examine him in regard to the
character that he has
developed in his life (pto<;). And (8e) if
34 he finds that he piously performed
all of his actions
36 for which he came into the world (x6<j{io<;),
this (demon) will allow him
[77]
[
2 [ ] turn him [
[ J. But (8i) [if he sees]
4 [ ] in this one [ ] he brought
his life (pio<;) into [evil] deeds,
6 he grasps him, as he [flees] upward
and throws him down

Asclepius. When the departure of
the soul I from the body has taken place, then a judgment and
examination 334,5 of its merit will follow under the power of the
supreme daimon. / When he has discerned that it is pious and just, /
he allows it to dwell in the regions under his authority. / But if he
observes that it is smeared with the stains of crimes and defiled
with vices, / then casting it down from the heights to the depths,
he hands it over to the storms and whirlwinds 334,10 that are fre
quently in discord in the air, fire, and water,
8 R c |q )[cu ]n e e q A q je f i r n e e n iT f i
eypÔAAXe RM oq o y N o 6 Ht i
io MCupjA.- W T o q A e q N A u p c u n e e y p
A TT O C T epi M M o q f l T e q ^ e A T T i c e q
12 o j o o r t [2]W o y N o 6 Wa y t t h - t 'I'Y
XH A [ e T ] R M A y O Y T 6 [R]TTOyiCAAC
14 2r oyTe RnoyKÂC T ire -
A c q j a m e A e ^ R r f n e A A r o c R it a
16 Hp R t t k o c m o c t t m a ^ T e p e o Y N o 6
H ic c u p ? R M A y h r o y M o o y A ic p y
18 C T A A A O N MW J G N T N O O M N C A T 6
MN 0 Y N 0 6 R q j T O p T p 11 e p e W C t U M A
20 q j T p T c o p N e 't'N e a n R N e y e p H o y
^ e N c o T t m n e Y p u j^ "? R m o o y e
22 JCR R M O y e i H e-fCCUK- 2 N K C O T t
A e cepcuîF R m o o y eniTfl eniccu
24 e T p c q T A K o o y Ayo> tN A JCo
oq an xe ttaT n e t t m o y W t ' | ' y x h
26 acttcdaS tap boa Rneeooy
AA A A O y K A T A A l KH R M O y T 6 1
28 A C K A H T T ie e q j q j e A n i c T e y e
c n a T A y c u WKp 2 O T e 2 HT o y x e
30 ic a a c e N e N ^ e e p o o y N e T e ta p

u t inter
caelum et terram mundanis fluctibus / in diuersa semper aeternis
poenis agitata rapiatur, / ut in hoc animae obsit aetemitas, quod sit
inmor/tali sententia aetemo supphcio subiugata. ergo ne 335,5 his
inplicemur, uerendum timendum cauendumque / esse cognosce.
77,16 MS has as the third letter a which is crossed out.

20 Lit. are tormentedthose that do not resemble each other."
24-27 For the distinction between sins that entail the death of the
soul and those that do not, cf. 1 Jn 5 :16 -17 ; Philo Poster.C.
73-74; Leg.all. I.105-06; Fug. 55-56.
27-28 Between these two lines, in the left margin of the MS, is a
horizontal mark that may be intended as a paragraph sign,
but it lacks the lower curved portion found at the beginning
of V I,5.
ASCLEPIUS 21-29 77 . 8-30 445
8 so that he is suspended between heaven and earth

and is punished (xoXaêiv) with a great p unishm ent
(Ti{jLp[<x).
10 And (8) he will be
deprived (aTOxrrepeiv) of his hope (ekmq) and
12 be in great pain (kbwr)). And (8) that soul (ôx1*))
has been put neither (outs)
14 on the earth nor (oute) in heaven.
But (8s) it has come into the open sea (nska.yctc,) of the
air (airjp)
16 of the world (x6<r(xo?), the place where there is a great
fire, and crystal (xpuoraXAov) water,
18 and furrows of fire,
and a great upheaval. The bodies (<ra)fi.<x)
20 are tormented (in) various (ways).
Sometimes ( + (iiv) they are cast
22 upon raging waters; at other times
(+ 8s), they are cast down into the fire
24 in order that it may destroy them. Now, I will not say
that this is the death of the soul (4'ux'*)),
26 for (yap) it has been delivered from evil,
but (aXXa) it is a death sentence (xaTaStxv)).
28 O (J>) Asclepius, it is necessary to believe (ttktteueiv)
these things and to fear them
30 in order that we might not encounter them. For (yap)

335,1 in order that it
might be dragged away by the cosmic turbulence between heaven
and earth, / forever tossed about in all directions by eternal punish
ments. / Thus even eternity is harmful to the soul because it is /
subjected to eternal punishment by an immortal decree. So you
must realize that, lest 335,5 we become involved in this fate, we
should fear, tremble, and beware. / For
77,28-37 Cf. Plut. Ser.num .pun. 56ia-b; Rev 22:6-7,10-12; 2 Thess

2 :1 1- 1 2 .
Wa t t i c t o c c e e W A c e B H C tJ A y o >
32 c e p NOBe- M R F i c c u c ceNA.pa.NAi*
K.A2 e m m o o y e T p e y n i c T e y e
34 e y NA C C U T M a n oyqjA -xe R
M 6 T 6 ' 1A. A. 1 e y N A e i p e N TOq m
36 4>cdb- N A Y p n i C T e y e t a p N e y
NAUÂTt naT a n n e - o y m o n o n
[OH]
[ 8 ]...[_
2 [ 7 n ] t y o p T t M6[N fi) ACKAHTTI6]
N*[T 6 TM n i C ] A 2 T H p o t y ] C p[ AY HOy ]
4 Ay[cu n t n ] c c u m a q j[A y ]o [y a >
t . [. . . . ] T e R k a k o c [ . ] m e , ! M . [ . ] y
6 NA[ . . . ] q ATFI NH N'J 2 ? ' N T N [ N ] e T
M^l r[A]p e y T N T C U N ^.N e N e [ T ] M 17M^.
8 e T R M A y - W e e n n a [a ] i m c u n e [ . ] o [
FIRpCUMe CKAT[A]()>pON! [ . ]|a [
10 e T R M A y - N + ^ e a n N o y t u f T e - a a .
A.A AA.H0CDC N N O y T e e T f l N e T M A
12 m aw o n n e N T A ^ o n q fJineTMA
c e N i K O A i ^ e MMo q m [ m h ] n c ijSMAy11

in-
credibiles enim post delicta cogen/tur credere, non uerbis sed
exemplis, nec minis sed / ipsa passione poenarum. / Non ergo,
Trismegiste, hominum delicta sola 335,10 humana lege puniuntur ?/
Primo, Asclepi, terrena quae sunt, omnia sunt / mortalia; tunc
ea etiam, quae sunt corporali ratione / uiuentia et a uiuendo eadem
corporum ratione defi/cientia. ea omnia pro uitae meritis aut delic-
tis poenis 335,15 obnoxia tanto post mortem seuerioribus subiciun-/
tur, quanto in uita forsitan fuerint celata, dum / uiuerent. praescia
etenim omnium rerum diuinitate / reddentur, perinde ut sunt, pro
delictorum quali/tatibus poenae.
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 -2 9 7 7 ,3 1 -7 8 ,1 3 447
unbelievers (dcmcrax;) are impious (dae|W)<;) and

32 commit sin. Afterwards they will be compelled (avayx<xeiv)
to believe (maretSeiv),
34 and they will not hear by word of mouth only
but (aXXa) will experience
36 the reality itself. For (yap) they kept believing (mciTetieiv)
that they would
not endure these things. Not only (ou (*6vov)
[78]
[
2 [ J First ( + (iiv), [O (&) Asclepius,]
all [those of the earth die]
4 [and those who are of the] body (c&yLoc) [cease
[ ] of evil (xax6<;) [
6 [ ] with these of this sort. For (yap) those who
are here
are not like those who are
8 there. So with the demons (Sodyuov) who [
men, they despise (xaTa<ppoveiv) [
10 there. Thus it is not the same. But (aXXa)
truly (aXy)0to?) the gods who are here
12 will punish (xoX<xeiv) more (fxaXXov) whoever has hidden
it here
every day.

the incredulous will be com
pelled to believe after their crimes, / not by words but by example,
not by threats but / by actually suffering punishment. / "Then,
Trismegistus, the crimes of men 335,10 are not punished by / human
law alone? "First of all, Asclepius, all things that are earthly are
I mortal, thus also those that have life in a bodily manner / and cease
from living in the same manner of bodies. / All these, liable to
punishments in accordance with the merits or crimes of their life,
335.15 will undergo penalties after death so much the more severe /
as the crimes may perhaps have been concealed during / their life
time. Punishments will be allotted by the divinity, / who has fore
knowledge of all things, / in proportion to the nature of the crimes.
14 ffl i ? T [ p i ] c M e r i c [ T e ] [ n e n]cM O T* R
tm Rt* ujAq*F e T rlN e [T ]M A - e K M e e y e
16 A e ffl A C K A H n i e x e e p e q j A o y a . q i R
o y R ic A R o y p n e e q e r a c b h c -
x8 o y a h [ c ] t h c ra.p n e na.T R 'l M n i e a y c u
o Y t p l e q ^ 1O Y e A n e T ^ q jB A e f po
20 o y a j H F iN O Y T e mR R p c u M e - n a n e T
MA ^ .e MR NA I T K G M i M n p T R T C U N O y
22 e N e y e p [ H ] o y 't o y u x y A e e jc c u
nai<l M neTqÂ ^ce ^ R o y m y c t h p i o n
24 nANTODC c e N A T R ^ o y r q ^ N' m ^ y x h
tap e y M e ? E n q jA r k a k i a c e N A cy e
26 1 M M O O y AN Z& TTAH P 1 A A 1 e y N A K A
A y R FiTonoc R R a a i m c u n n a I ei*
28 m R m o k ^ C naT R o y o e i q p n im
e y M 2 R C N o q 2 e T B e ' *YU> T o y
30 2 Pe T e n p i M e n e mR n N e ^ n e
mR jT A c p e ^ o M - fi) n T p i C M e r i C T O C
32 NIM N e naT- ffl A C K A H n i e N T q j A y
M o y T e e p o o y N e x e R p e q t u d ? N e mR
34 N e ye q jA y c K o p K p R R 'I'y x o o y e
X R R c i B e i * e n i T R * mR n c t c c y A y
36 M ^ C T i r o y R M O o y mR N e f N o y ^ x e
e n M O o y mR N T * N o y .x e e m c c u ^ ?
38 MR N 6 T 6 cpa.yp <OB A N M O K ^ C R R
ptU M e m R R c y M < |) o p A - n a T t a p R
40 -J-MiNe e y q ^ o o T t an cbox R O Y 'I'Y

335,20 (2
maioribus poenis, o Tris/megiste ? / Qui dammati humanis legi-
bus uitam uiolenter / amittunt, ut non naturae animam debitam sed-
poe/nam pro meritis reddidisse uideantur.
78,30 food : 2 P e could be an unattested absolute form of 2P00Y

(Crum, 704b), which would make sound a possible trans
lation here.
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 -2 9 7 8 ,1 4 -4 0 449
14 O (&) Trismegistus, what [is the] character of

the iniquity that is there? "Now (8&) you think,
16 O (&) Asclepius, that when one takes
something in a temple, he is impious (a a e ^ ).
18 For (yap) that kind of a person is a thief and
a bandit. And (8&) this matter concerns
20 gods and men.
But (8e) do not compare those here with those of the
other place.
22 Now (&e) I want to speak
this discourse to you confidentially ([auctty]piov) ;
24 no part of (toxvtto?) it will be believed. For (yap) the souls
OHr t )
that are filled with much evil (xaxia) will not come and go
26 in the air (dW]p), but (aXXa) they will be put
in the places (zonoc,) of the demons (Saipuov), which
28 are filled with pain, (and) which are always
filled with blood and slaughter, and their
30 food, which is weeping, mourning,
and groaning. "O (<b) Trismegistus,
32 who are these (demons) ? "O (&) Asclepius, they are the
ones who
are called stranglers, and
34 those who roll souls (4*ux*)) down on
the dirt, and those who
36 scourge ((zaariyouv) them, and those who cast
into the water, and those who cast into the fire,
38 and those who bring about the pains
and calamities (<ru{/.<popa) of men. For (yap)
40 such as these are not from a

335.20 (29) "Who are those who deserve the greater punishments,
/Trismegistus? / "Those who, condemned by human laws, lose
their life in a violent manner, / so that they appear to have given
up their soul, not as a debt to nature, but as a punishment / for
what they deserve.
29
x h H e e iO N - o y T e o y '|/ Y x h
42 AN f l A O r iK H FJT n p t U M e - x w x
2 N B O A N6 TK. 2k.KI2k. e O O O y

contra iusto 336,1 homi-
ni in dei religione et in summa pietate praesi/dium est. deus enim
tales ab omnibus tutatur malis. /
ASCLEPIUS 2 1 -2 9 7 8 ,4 1 -4 3 451
divine (Oetov) soul (<J>ux*))> nor (^T) from a

42 rational (XoyixY)) soul (4'UX'1Q) f naan. Rather (aXXa),
they are from the terrible evil (xax(a).

The just man, on the other hand, 336,1 has his
protection in the worship of God and in the loftiest piety, / for God
protects such men from all evils . . . .
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARY
BG, j : 7,1-19,5
R . M cL . W il so n and G eo r g e W . M ac R a e *
Till. Papyrus Berolinensis 8502. Pp. 24-32, 62-79.

Till-Schenke. Papyrus Berolinensis 85022. Pp. 24-32, 62-79.
Grant, ed. Gnosticism: A Source Book. Pp. 65-68.
Hennecke. N T Apocrypha. Vol. I. Pp. 340-45 (H.-Ch. Puech, The
Gospel according to Mary).
Roberts, C. H. Catalogue of the Greek Papyri in the John Rylands
Library. Vol. III. Manchester: University Press, 1938. Pp. 18-23.
Schmidt, C. Ein vorirenaisches gnostisches Originalwerk in kop-
tischer Sprache. Sitzungsberichte der preussischen Akademie der
Wissenschaften (1896). Pp. 839-47.
---- . Irenaus und seine Quelle in adv. haer. 1,29. Philotesia. Paul
Kleinert zum L X X . Geburtstag dargebracht. Berlin: Trowitzsch
und Sohn, 1907. Pp. 315-36.
Till, W. and Carratelli, G. P. EuocyysXiov xara Mapiaji. La parola
delpassato 1 (1946), 260-67.
Wilson, R. McL. Gnosis and the New Testament. Philadelphia: For
tress, 1968. Pp. 101-03.
The Gospel of M ary is the first of the three gnostic documents
contained in the Berlin codex. Although the existence of the MS
was known from 1896, and parts of it had appeared in translation,
it was not until 1955 that the full text was eventually published
(Till). Schenkes re-edition, with several new readings, appeared in
1972 (Till-Schenke). A Greek fragment of Gos. M ary showing con
siderable textual variation was found in the Rylands collection,
Papyrus 463. In his original report (1896) Schmidt identified Gos.
Mary with the following tractate in the codex, Ap. John, an
error later corrected (1907). Another error sometimes committed
results from failure to recognize the subscript at the end as the title,
sothat the disciples are made to go forth to proclaim and to preach
the Gospel according to Mary. All four works in the codex have
* R. McL. Wilson prepared a preliminary version. George W. MacRae
brought the work to completion.
454 p a p y r u s b e r o l i n e n s i s 8 5 0 2 ,1
titles at the end: whether Gos. Mary had one at the beginning also,
as does tractate 3, Soph. Jes. Chr., is no longer possible to say. The
tractate is apparently unrelated to the works called The Questions
of Mary, which Epiphanius ascribed to the Gnostics in Pan.
26.8.1-3.
The date of composition of Gos. Mary is unknown. Schmidt and
others dated the Coptic MS in the early fifth century (Till-Schenke,
p. 7), and the Greek fragment, dated by Roberts in the early third
century, suggests a terminus ad quem for the composition of the
tractate.
The document originally extended over the first 18 pages of the
codex with 5 lines on p. 19 (according to Till, the Greek version
must have been somewhat longer [p. 25]), but pp. 1-6 and 11-14 are
now completely missing. Most of the 8 surviving pages have slight
damage at the top and bottom, and in some places the ink has faded
so that many letters are no longer legible.
The text falls into two distinct and well-marked parts. In the
first, as in other Christian gnostic works, e.g., Soph. Jes. Chr., Did.
Sav., Ep. Pet. Phil., Pist. Soph., the risen Jesus in conversation with
his disciples provides answers to the questions that they raise. On
his departure, they are downcast and perplexed at the magnitude
of the task laid upon them, to preach the gospel to the Gentiles.
In their despair they are encouraged by Mary, who now appears
for the first time, and they ask her to impart to them the words of
the Savior, which she alone knows and they do not. This introduces
the second part, unfortunately interrupted by the lacuna at pp. 11-
14, containing the saviors words to Mary, and the disciples re
action. The negative attitude of Andrew and Peter here corresponds
to that ascribed to them in the Pist. Soph., and to that of Peter in
the final saying of Gos. Thom.
The contrast between Marys dominant role in the second part
and the modest place assigned her in the first, together with the
diversity of content, prompted Till (p. 26) and Puech (Hennecke,
p. 344) to the conclusion that two small independent writings had
been artificially combined through the introduction of Mary at the
end of the first part, where she has no real function, to provide a
connection. This conclusion seems to be confirmed by the fact that
the NT echoes are most thickly clustered precisely at the point of
transition (R. McL. Wilson, "The New Testament and the Gospel
of Mary, N T S 3 [1956-57]. 236-43). although it may remain open
GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARY: INTRODUCTION 455
to debate whether we should think of written sources or merely of

older material, and whether such older material was itself non-
Christian. Another indication of the unity of the two parts in their
present form is the fact that 18,17-21 alludes to 8,21-9,4. In any
event, the title strictly applies only to the second part of the docu
ment.
The text printed here has been collated with photos and has
benefited greatly from an ultraviolet collation of the MS done by
Anne Pasquier for the Projet canadien Nag Hammadi in 1978,
which she very generously made available to us. Major divergences
fromTill-Schenke have been noted.
BG, i : 7,1-19,5
(Pp. 1-6 lacking )
M
[. ]. [ 8 ]. . o [y ]^ h 6 e na
2 oY<p[<>]n -xn m m o n n e j c e n c c u p xe
<(>YCIC NIM TTAACMA NIM K .T IC IC
4 N iM e Y c p o n ^ W N e y e p H Y {m }n R
MAY ^ Y ^ ON GYNABCOA 6 B O A
6 T O Y N O Y N 6 MMIN M M O O Y Xe T
(|)Y C IC N YAH eCB CU A B O A 6 N A
8 T e c < j> Y c ic o y ^ a c n e i e o y n m a a
x e R m oq eca>TM M A peqccuT R
10 n e j c e n e T p o c NAq x e c d c a k t a
M O N eZCO B N I M JC CU MTTI K O y ^
12 epoN o y n e nNOBC m t t k o c m o c
ne^ce n cc u p x e m n n o b c o jo t t a a
14 a a n t c u t n n e 'fp e R t t n o b e y e
T F i e i p e N N e f N e F t c J j y c i c n t m J J t
16 N o e iK . e T < 0 Y > M 0 Y T e e p o c x e t t n o
B e 6 T B 6 t t a T A q e i F i6 i TTArA5
18 N T T R M H T e OJA NA <j>YCIC
NIM e q N AKA IC T A M M O C eC>Y
20 e i e c N O Y N e e T i A qoY O J^ e T O jq
n e j c A q x e e r e e n A i T T F i <9cu
22 [ N ] e a ycw t g t R m o y xe t[
oycu[6]n : The traces of letters seem to fit OY<d6tt (Till-

Schenke) better than o y .X A I, "saved (Schmidt in Till-Schenke),
though the former does not occur elsewhere in this codex. Lit.
be broken (up).
will be resolved again : Cf. Gos. P h il. (II,3) 53,20-21.
"the (roots) of : Coptic NA-, the things of or possibly "the es
sence of. The context suggests roots.
He who has ears to hear, let him hear : Cf. Mt 1 1 : 1 5 and else
where in the Synoptics and in Gos. Thom. (11,2); Soph. Jes. Chr.
(BG,j) 89,4-6 and several times thereafter.
BG, j : 7 ,1 -1 9 ,5
(Pp. 1-6 lacking)
[7]
[ ] will matter (uXyj) then
2 be [destroyed] or not? The Savior (<rtoT/)p) said:
All natures (cpucru;), all formations (-rcXacrpia), all crea
tures (xtlctic;)
4 exist in and with one another,
and they will be resolved again into
6 their own roots. For the
nature (9601*;) of m atter ((>Xy)) is resolved into the (roots)
of
8 its nature (<piiri<;) alone. He who has
ears to hear, let him hear.
10 Peter said to him: Since (d>?) you have
explained everything to us, tell us this also:
12 What is the sin of the world (xoojjto?) ?
The Savior (tftonfjp) said: There is no sin,
14 but (aXXa) it is you who make sin when
you do the things that are like the nature (q>\jtrt^) of
16 adultery, which is called sin.'
That is why the Good (ayaOov) came
18 into your midst, to the (essence) of every nature (<piSoi<;),
in order to restore (x a 0 i<jTavat) it
20 to its root. Then (u) he continued and
said: "That is why you
22 [become sick] and die, for [ ]
"the sin of the world : Cf. Jn 1:29.

MS reads e T C M O y T e .
"the (essence) of : Coptic N i- ; see note on 7,7.
22 opcu[N]e: Reconstruction follows Till-Schenke; cf. 1 Cor 11:3 0 .
CyU)[tt] e, "come into being, is also possible (Till).
8 ,1 Till-Schenke reconstructs X C T [ T N M ] M T T e T 3 ip [a .]lT A .[T a
M M CUT N , for you [love] that which will [deceive (drnxtav) y o u .
458 PAPYRUS BEROLINENSIS 8502 .X
[H]
MTTTA.p.u*[ y n ] ? T [p ]
2 noT MApeqpNoei [A.e]y*.H Jt[n]e o y
n i e o c eM N Tiq mma.y R n e iN e
4 eA.qei c b o a j n oytta.pa.<|>ycic t o
T e qpa.peoYTA.pAXH u j o j n e
6 ttccdma. t h pq TBe tta.T A lx o c nh
t n x e tycune T t n t h t F^ ht
8 A.Y<U eTCTfiO N NATT CUT 6 T 6
T N T H T M N N N A p M TTINe n i N C
io n t < |)y c ic n e T e o y n M iA ^ e m
M O q e C C U T M M A .p e q C C D T M N T A
12 p e q - x e n a T n 6 i n M A . K A . p i o c A.qA.c
nA. 2: e R m o o y t h p o y e q j c c u m m o ' c '
14 - x e O Y C i p H N H NHTFi T A e i p H N H
j c n o c n h t F J A .p e M T T p T p e A A .A .Y p
16 TTAA.NA. MMCDTN CqJCCU M M O C X S
e i c ^ H n e M n e T c A . h e i c j H n e Fi
18 n e e iM A N cy H p e rA p M n p cu M e e q
qpon m ttctn ^ o y n o y c ^ th y tF I
20 F ic c u q N e T o p iN e F ic cu q CG N A
6 NTq b cu k 6 e F lT T F iT A .q je o e ia j
22 M n e Y ^ r r e A i o N R t m N T e p o M ir p
KA. AA.Y H o o p o e 6 2 PA.Y TTApA. TTCN

2 T A . 'f T o q jq n h t F I o y i e F in p 'f n o
M O C F l e e M T T N O M O e e T H C M HTTO
4 T F iC e A .M A .2 T e Fi MOJTf] N H T q
8,3 "equal : Lit. image, likeness.

7 "B e of good courage : Cf. Mt 28:10 and many other passages in
the Synoptics.
14-15 "Peace be with you : Cf. Jn 14 :2 7; 20:19-21,26; Lk 24:36 (var.);
Soph. Jes. Chr. (BG,j) 79,10-12; E p . Pet. P h il. (VIII, 2) 140,17.
Till-Schenke emends to 'J 'p H N H , but this is unnecessary; cf.
NHC V I 8,5.
15-16 Cf. Mt 24:4, parr.
17-19 Cf. Lk 1 7 :2 1 ; Mt 24:23, parr.
20-21 seek . . . find : Cf. Mt 7 :7 ; Gos. Thom. (II,j), Logion 2; 92.
GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARY 8 ,1 - 9 ,4 459
[8]
of the one who [ He who]
2 understands (voetv), let him understand (voeiv). [Matter
(uXy)) gave birth to] a
passion (tox0o<;) that has no equal,
4 which proceeded from (something) contrary to nature
(7tapd, cpticm;).
Then ( t o t e ) there arises a disturbance (x a p o c x v )) in
6 the whole body (crcijxa). That is why I said to
you, Be of good courage,
8 and if you are discouraged
(be) encouraged ( + jj.lv) in the presence of the different
forms
10 of nature (<ptS<ri<;). He who has ears
to hear, let him hear.
12 When the blessed one (fiaxdpio*;) had said this, he
greeted (a<T7tae(j0 ou) them all, saying:
14 Peace (etpYjvYj) be with you. Receive
my peace (eiprjvy)) to yourselves. Beware that no one
16 lead you astray ( X tc ) saying,
ocvocv
Lo here! or ft) 'Lo

18 there! For (yap) the Son of Man
is within you. Follow
20 after him! Those who seek him will
find him. Go then and preach
22 the gospel (euayy^Xiov) of the kingdom. Do not
9
lay down any rules (opo?) beyond (wxpdt) what
2 I appointed for you, and (ouSe) do not give
a law (v6(ao<;) like the lawgiver (vo[ao0sty]<;) lest ((xy)7cot)
4 you be constrained by it.
22 "preach the gospel of the kingdom : Cf. Mt 4:23 and many other
passages in the Synoptics.
"Do not : MTTp rather than M[TTl], [I have not] (Till-Schenke).
See following note.
do not give : F in p 'l rather than FinY't (Till-Schenke). H.-M.
Schenke kindly verified these two readings in the original MS.
Note the later allusion to this passage at 18,19-21.
460 PAPYRUS BEROLINENSIS 8 5 0 2 .x
N T A p e q j c e naT ^ b o k n t o o y &-e
6 N e y p A y n e i A y p m e FinqjA e y
JCCU M M O C JCe NNAU? R N N A B O )K .
8 o ja N ^ e o N o c R T R T A u p e o e i u p FI
n e y A rre A io N N T M R T e p o m ttoj' h '
10 p e M TT pcuM e e q p a c e tt t h m a y m
n o y 'fc o e p o q naoj Rê anon ey
12 NA'f C O e p O N T O T 6 A M A p i A M T O )
o yN a c a c t t a 2 mM o o y t h p o y
14 neJCA C N N e c 'c 'N H y jc e M n p p iM e
Aycu M n p p A y n e i o y A e R n p p ^ h t
16 c n a y T e q x A p ic ta p NAqpcune
N F iM H T F ! T H p C A y CD N C p C K e T T A
18 ze M M CDTN M A A A O N J l 6 M A p R
cm o y TeqM RTNo6 xe A qcs
20 TtD TR AqAAN RpCDM C N T A p eM A
p i^ A M xg naT a c k t c n e y ^ H T
22 [ 2 ]o y N e n i r i e o N Ayoj AypApxe
[ c q a i ] y p ry M [N ]A ^ e ^ a n P^ n R o ja
24 [Jt]e M n [c o jp j
n e j c e n e i p o c m m a p i^ a m xe tcco
2 Ne T R c o o y N xe N ep en ccu p oyAqpe
N ^ o y o ttapa T n c e c e e n e nc^Tm g
4 jc co n a n N R q p A ^ c e m t t c c d p e T e e i p e
M n e y M e e y e naT e T e c o o y N Hmo
6 o y R n a n o n a n o y A e m t t R c o t m 'o 'y
A c o y c u q j B n 6 i M A p i^ A M n e ^ C A C
8 xe TTeeHTT e p O J T R 't N A T A M A T H y
tn e p o q A y o ) A C A p x e i R jc o j N Ay
10 RN eTqpA Jte xe a {T }n o k tt .x a c a i
N Ay e n l c ^ n o y ^ o p o M A Aycu A e i
9,9-10 "kingdom of the Son of Man": Cf. Mt 1 3 :4 1 ; 16:28; Soph. Jes.

Chr. (BG,j) 101,6-9.
10-12 For a positive evaluation of apostolic suffering in relation to
Christs suffering, see E p . Pet. P h il. (VIII, 2) 138,15-28.
17 TH p c : The trace is very uncertain, but there is room for only one
letter. Till-Schenke emends to T H p < T > N , "with you all."
GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARY 9 , 5- 10,11 461
When he had said this, he departed. But (86) they

6 were grieved (Xu7reia0at). They wept greatly
saying: How shall we go
8 to the gentiles (20vo?) and preach
the gospel (z\iarf{kiow) of the kingdom of the Son
10 of Man ? If they did
not spare him, how will
12 they spare us? Then (t o t e ) Mary
stood up, greeted (aercudêcrQai) them all,
14 and said to her brethren: Do not weep
and do not grieve (Xu7teT0at) nor (068s) be
16 irresolute, for (yap) his grace (xdpis) will be
entirely with you and will protect (cxeroxêtv)
18 you. But (8s) rather ((jloXXov) let us
praise his greatness, for he has
20 prepared us and made us into men. When
Mary said this, she turned their hearts
22 to the Good (dtya0ov), and they began (<5cpxe<r0ai)
to discuss (Yu(j.vae<T0at) the words
24 of the [Savior (atonfjp).]
10
Peter said to Mary: Sister,
2 we know that the Savior (awr/jp) loved you
more than (7capa) the rest of women.
4 Tell us the words of the Savior (<rtira)p) which you
rememberwhich you know
6 (but) we do not, nor (ou8) have we heard them.
Mary answered and said:
8 What is hidden from you I will proclaim to you.
And she began (itpxetrOat) to speak to them
10 these words: I, she said, I
saw the Lord in a vision (6pa(ia) and I
9.20 "made us into men : Cf. Gos. Thom. (11,2) 51,18-26 (logion 114),
and see below 18 ,11.
10,2-3 "the Savior loved you : Cf. Jn 1 1 :5 . See also 18 :14 -15 below;
Gos. P h il. (II, 3) 63,34-64,5.
462 PAPYRUS BEROLINENSIS 8 5 0 2 .x
12 xooc n Aq x e n S c a Y n a y e p o K m
nooy o y ^ o p o H A A q o y tu o jB n e
14 JCAq naY x e Na.YA.Te x e H t k i h a n
epeN AY e p o e i ttma tap e T e p e n N o y c
16 m h a y e q m h a y N^ i n e ^ o n e ^ t A f
NAq x e TT^C T 6 N O Y ^TTNAY 6<|>0
18 p o h a e q n a y e p o q < f i > T e 'p y x H < h >
n e n T lA A q o y cu cy B r 6 i n c c u p n e
20 jc A q x e e q n a y *.n T e 'l'y x H Y
A e z Mn e n N A a a a a n N o y c e T a j[o n ]
22 2 n T e y M H T e n n e y c N A y N T o [q n e T ]
n a y e < |)o p o M A A y [c u ] R T o q u [ e T
(Pp. 11-14 lacking)
H H o q aycd n e jc e T e m Y H iA
2 x e h n 1n a y e p o e p e B H k e n i T F i
T S N o y A e ( NAY e p o e p e s h k e
4 T n e n c u c A e T e ^ ci 6 o a e p e H n e
p o e i a c o y o j o j b n 6 i T e 'l'y x H n e
6 j c a c x e a Y n a y e p o H n e N A y epoY
o y A e M n e e r n e e p o e i N e e ia p o
8 o n Ne R ^B ccu aycu M n e c o y o j N T
R T A p e c jc e n a i a c b o d k e c T e A H A
10 N O Y O [ TIAAI N A c e i 6 T R T M
T ajoH N T e R N eso y ciA tc t o y m 'o 'y
12 T e e p o c x e t h n t a t c o o y n [a .c ]p
e s e T A ^ e R T e ' p y x H ec.x [cu h ]
14 h o c xe epeB H k btcu n [o]yU 9
N H p iA A y A H A ^ T C M MO A y [ A ] * A
16 T e A e m h o R n p K . p i N e A y [c u ] n e
xe t b 'P y x h xe A^po e p e Kp ; N $
10,16 "the treasure : Taking ne<>0 as the noun a<>0 ; it is also possible
to translate your countenance. For this variant of Mt 6:21,
see G. Quispel, Das Hebraerevangelium im gnostischen Evange-
lium nach Maria, V igChr 1 1 (1957), 139-44.
17 now : Till-Schenke reads T E N o y , where others had read
17No y c , "Does the mind (vou?) which sees... ?" The sense is
Now (tell me), does h e ... ?
GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARY 10, 12- 15,17 463
12 said to him: Lord, I saw you

today in a vision (fipajxa). He answered and
14 said to me: Blessed are you, that you did not waver
at the sight of me. For (yap) where the mind (vou?)
16 is, there is the treasure. I said
to him: Lord, now does he who sees the
18 vision (6pa(j.a) see it <through> the soul (tpox*)) <or W)>
through
the spirit (rcveufioc) ? The Savior (<rcor/)p) answered and
20 said: He does not see through the soul (tj;uxh)
nor (ouSe) through the spirit (7rveu[xa), but (aXXa) the
mind (voo<;) which [is]
22 between the twothat is [what]
sees the vision (5 pa(xa) and it is [
(Pp. 11-14 lacking)
15
. . . it. And desire (smOufiioc) said:
2 I did not see you descending
but (8e) now I see you ascending.
4 Why (7cco<; 8e) do you lie, since you belong to
me? The soul (<{'i>x'*)) answered and
6 said: I saw you. You did not see me
nor (ouSs) recognize me. I served
8 you as a garment, and you did not know me.'
When it had said this, it went away rejoicing
10 greatly. Again (tcocXiv) it came to the
third power (soo<na), which is
12 called ignorance. [It (the power)]
questioned (sêTaêiv) the soul (<Jwx*)) saying:
14 Where are you going? In
wickedness (7covv)pia) are you bound.
16 But (8e) you are bound; do not judge (xpiveiv) ! And
the soul (<Ja>X^)) said: Why do you judge (xptveiv)
10,18 MS reads H T e ' I ' Y ^ 2 ^-

I5i5-i6 "bound.. .bound : Possibly a dittography.
16 "do not judge : Cf. Mt 7 :1 . It is possible to read (with Till-Schenke)
MTTplcpiNe as a noun, "in judgment.
PAPYRUS BEROLINENSIS 8 5 0 2,1
18 mmoT e n m i c p i N e A y e H A ^ T e
mmoT eHnia.M a.2Te n n o y c o y
20 cunt a n o k . j c e A T c o y c u N o y e y
bcua. e b o a M n T H p q e i T e n a n
22
S
e i T e n a T n [e ] F iT e p e T e 'l'y x H o y
2 a>cq N T M e^cyoH N T e W N e so y c i
a a cbcjd k e n c A N T n e A ycu a c n a y
4 e T H A ^ q T o e n Ne ^ o y c i a A c p c a
c y q e MHop<t>H T c y o p n M M o p
6 <)>h n e n K A K e t m b ^ c n t c T e r n
e y M i A T M e ^ q ^ O M N T e t m Wt a t
8 c o o y N T M e ^ q T o e n e n ic c u ^ M n
M o y T M e ^ t 6 T e T M F l T e p o FI t c a p s
10 TM e^coe Te tm n tca bh n c 6 h
n C A p5 T H e ^ c A q p q e T e t c o <|)i
12 * [ N ] p e q N o y 6 c n a T N e T C A q ? q e Fi
N e [ 5] o y c i A N T e T o p r H e y u p m e
14 N T e ' p y x H . x e e p e N H y xi n t c u n
T ^ A T B p C D H e H epeBHK eTCUN
16 T o y ^ c q M A A co ycu o ^ B fi6 i T e
^ y x H n e jcA c x e n e T e M A ^ T e h
18 h o T A y i c o N c q A y c o n e T K / r o Fi
hoi A y o y o c q < q > Aycu T A e m e y n i A
20 AC.XCUIC 6BOA AycO T H N T A T C O O ^
a c m o y ' ^ W ' p y ic M o c o c w t a y b o a t e
\Z
BOA FiN o y K O C M O C [Ay]CU F 1 Y
2 T y n o c 6 b o a 2 n o y T y n o c eTFi
n c A N T n e A y c u t h p p e n t b o jg e T
4 c p o o n n p o c o y o T u j .xin R n i N A y
"overcome : or left behind. Also lines 16 and 19.

F! H O p<J) H : The M S has NMMOpijtH, but the N and H are joined
presumably the scribes attempt to correct a false start,
"excitement of death : or "envy of death.
G O SPEL A CCO R D IN G TO M A R Y 1 5 ,1 8 -1 7 ,4 465
18 me although I have not judged (xpiveiv) ? I was bound

though I have not bound. I was not
20 recognized. But (8e) I have recognized that
the All is being dissolved, both (efae) the
22 earthly (things)
16
and (eixe) the heavenly. When the soul (<|"->x^))

2 had overcome the third power (s o u < n a ),
it went upwards and saw
4 the fourth power (e o u < n a ), (which) took
seven forms ([xopcpr)). The first form ({iop<pY))
6 is darkness, the second
desire (emBufua), the third
8 ignorance, the fourth is the excitement of
death, the fifth is the kingdom of the flesh (odtpC),
10 the sixth is the foolish wisdom
of flesh (aap), the seventh is the
12 wrathful wisdom (ao<pta). These are the seven
[powers (eJ-ouorioc)] of wrath (opy^). They ask
14 the soul (<|iuxr)): Whence do you come,
slayer of men, or (?)) where are you going,
16 conqueror of space ? The soul (4>UX^) answered
and said: What binds
18 me has been slain, and what surrounds
me has been overcome, and my desire (smQufiia)
20 has been ended, and ignorance
has died. In a [world (koc^ o?)] I was released
17
from a world ( x o c t (x o ^ ) , [and] in a
2 type (vbnoc,) from a heavenly type (tutco?),
and (from) the fetter of oblivion which
4 is transient (7cpo?-). From this time on
16,10-11 wisdom of flesh : Cf. 2 Cor 1 : 1 2 aotploi trapxixr]. See also the
wisdom-folly contrast of 1 Cor 1-3, esp. 3 :19 .
13 [powers (eôuata)] : Till-Schenke reads M 6 [ t ] o yClA ., partici
pants, but the traces seem to fit N e S o y c ia . equally well.
17.2 heavenly type : or higher type.
30
466 PAPYRUS BEROLINENSIS 8^ 02,1
e e iN A J C i n t a n a t t Ay e i c H n e
6 X p O N O C MTTICAipOC MTT'ai'cUN 2 ^
N o y ic A p c u q N T e p e M A p i^ A M x e
8 naT a c k a p c u c 2 < u c T e W t a i t c c d p
u jA Jce N H H A C o ja n e e iM A
io A q o y c u q p B A e Fl6 i a n A p e A C n e x A q
Rnbcnhy x e xxi n e T e T W j e a j
12 MMOq 2 ^ TTpA FI N 6 NTACJ C [ o ] o y
a n o k HN f p n i C T e y e a n x &
14 A n c c u p x e naT e c y : x e n i c b o o y
e tap 2 H K M e e y e Ne A qo ycu
16 ojb n 6 i n e T p o c ne^X A q 2 * n p A
N N e e i 2 B H y e N T e e i m 1n e Aq
18 jc N o y o y 6TB 6 n c c u p x e m ht;
A q u ) A 3 .e m?J o y c 2 T M N J C i o y e
20 epoN 2 N oycuN 2 c b o a an c n ^ a
k t o n 2 c d cu n R t R c c u t m T y p f l
22 n c c d c f iT < A > q c o T n c N 2oyo epoN
IH
to t a [ m]a p i 2 ^ m pi H e n e ^ c R
P. Ryl. 463 (The extant leaf of a Greek version of Gos. Mary, with a
substantial lacuna at the bottom of the recto and with considerable
variation in the text. The provenance of the fragment is Oxyrhyn-
chus, and Roberts dates it in the early third century.)
x o to Aomov Spofxou xoci[po]u XP0V0U / awovos ava7rau<Tiv e[v] (nyr)
tocu/t[<x] e\'7coucra 7) Mapia(jt.(jtf) <ncD7nr)/<re[v] u>c, xou (TcoTY)po<; jxexpi. <p8e
(5) eipTjxoTo? AvSpea? Xeye[i a]SeX/cpOL t i ofieiv Soxei 7te[p]i xa>v (tie- /
pi T(i)v) XaXnjOevrtov eyw fzev / yap ou tcktteuw TauT([e|'a' < t > (MS has
a ) [o]v a [to ] /mrjpa eipy)xevai eSoxet y[ap e t e ] (10) poyvcofioveiv t t ) ex-
[e]iv[ou ev]/vota 7tepi toiout[co]v 7cpa[yfjta]/tcov eêTaôjiEvoc; 0 awfTrjp] /
XaSpa yyv[a]ixi sXaXei xai < o u > <p[a]/veptoi; iva 7ravTe? otxoyaa[i(iev]
(15) [ti a]îoXoya>Tepov a[.Jq>y[ * ] / [ - M ......... ] I [ 1 [ J
17,15 strange ideas : Lit. "other thoughts.

19 speak with a woman : Cf. Jn 4:27.
GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARY 1 7 ,5 -1 8 ,1 467
will I attain to the rest (ava7rao<ii<;) of the

6 time (xp6vo<;), of the season (xatp6?), of the aeon, in
silence. When Mary had said
8 this, she fell silent, since (<2><rrs) it was to this point that
the Savior (acmjp)
had spoken with her.
10 But (8s) Andrew answered and said
to the brethren: Say what you (wish to) say
12 about what she has said.
I at least ({iiv) do not believe (mcrreiktv) that
14 the Savior (aoynrjp) said this. For (yap) certainly these
teachings
are strange ideas.
16 Peter answered and spoke concerning
these same things. He
18 questioned them about the Savior (owr^p): "Did he real
ly (fl^Tl)
speak with a woman without our
20 knowledge (and) not openly? Are we to
turn about and all listen
22 to her? Did he prefer her to us?
18
Then (t 6t s ) Mary wept and said to
P. Ryl. 463
21 "... for the rest of the course of season, of time, / of aeon
(I will attain to) rest in silence. / When she had said this, Mary
fell silent, / since the Savior had spoken up to this point. (5) Andrew
said: / "Brethren, what do you think about / what has been said?
For I at least / do not believe that <the> Savior / said this, for she
seems to (10) have views that differ from his / thought. When he
was being questioned / about such things, did the Savior / speak
secretly with a woman and <not> / openly, so that we all might
hear (15) something more remarkable.. . / [ / ]
x7, 19-20 The peculiar Coptic word order is rendered here with the aid of
the Greek fragment.
22 MS reads WTOq.
468 PAPYRUS BEROLINENSIS 8502 , J
2 n e T p o c n i c o N n e T p e 2 'fe e K
H eey e e o y eK M eeye xe rta T
4 M e e y e e p o o y m a .y a .a t ^m i t a
2 H t h eeuxi 6 o \ encoup A q o y
6 cuqpB r 6 i x e y e i n e . x A q M n e T p o ' c '
xe n e T p e .x in e N e ^ ic u p o n N p e q
8 N O Y ^ C -j-NAY e p O K T 6 N O Y e * P
rY M N A ^ e e ^ N T e c ^ t M e R e e n
io N i A N T i i c e i M e N o c eqp^ce A n
C tU TH p A A C NA 5 IO C HTIC NIM
12 A 21 DUJK 6N O JC C B O \ n i N T C U ' c '
epencoiTHp c o o y N r m o c a c
14 <t>AA(DC 6 T B 6 nAY A q o y O U p C R O Y
O e p O N M iA A O N M A p f J a p in e R t n
16 -|* ^Tcdcdn M n p c u M e N T e x i o e
N T N J c n o q n a n i<:a t a e e NTAq
18 ^ cdn e T O O T R N T f i T A t y e o e i u p
M n e Y A r r e A i o N n k u > a n e^pA'f
20 N i c e ^ o p o c OY-a.6 K 6 N O M O C n A
pA n e N T A n c c u p j c o o q N T e p e
[i]e
[ 8 ]aT a y u j A YpApxei fl
P. R y l . 463, cont.
xp to d (T6>TY)po<; Aei>e[t]<; Xeyet IleTpcp / IleT pe a[et] ao[i] to opytXoy
7capaxei (20 ) toci xat, ocpTi odtgx; <7uvy)Tet[<;] tt) / y u v aix i co^ ocvTixei-
fievo^ ocut/j I si 0 (TG)T/)[p] a!;tav ocdtyjv tjyyjctocto / <ro ti<; ei eou0evcov
auTYjv t o w / t o ^ Ya P ?xetvo<; ato<; ocdtyjv ocg (2 5 ) <p[o&]<j>M Y)Ya7a](rev
|jlocXX[o]v ai<TXD[v]/Q(p[(Jie]v xoci evSi)(Ta[Jievo[t] to v / T[eXeto]v av ( 0p6>7t)ov
exeivo t o 7upo(iTa<x>/0[ev7)]fjLeiv 7u[o]LY)(T6>[xev X7)pi)(r{e}/g[eiv to ] euayY-
[e]XiovfjL7)8evo[p]iôv (30 ) t[s<; (xJtjSs vop,o0eT[o]ime<; ax; ei/ir[ev o ] o-cottjp
[Tau]Ta ei7C6>v 0 Aei>/[ei<; jjls]v a^feXGcov] Yjpêv
18 ,11 made her worthy : Cf. Gos. Thom. (II ,2) 51,18-26 (logion 114).
13-14 On the relationship of Jesus to Mary, cf. Lk 10:38-42; Jn 11:5;
Gos. P h il. (II,J) 59,8-11.
16 put on the perfect man : Cf. Gos. P h il. (II,3) 75,20-35; Gal 3:27.
17 Till-Schenke has N T N A T T O X O ) f j , "and separate.
GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARY l 8 ,2 - 1 9 , 1 469
2 Peter: "My brother Peter, what do you

think ? Do you think that I
4 thought this up myself in my
heart, or (%) that I am lying about the Savior (cromjp) ?
6 Levi answered and said to Peter:
Peter, you have always been
8 hot-tempered. Now I see you
contending (YO(xv<xeo0<xi) against the woman like
10 the adversaries (avTixeijxevo?). But (86) if the
Savior (otonrjp) made her worthy (&i*io<;), who are you
12 indeed (+ 8e) to reject her? Surely (7t<*vt<o<;)
the Savior (coynrjp) knows her
14 very well (doyaXcbq). That is why he loved her more
than us. Rather (jzaXXov) let us be ashamed and
16 put on the perfect ( t s X s k n ; ) man
and acquire him for ourselves as (xaxa) he
18 commanded us, and preach
the gospel (cvayyeXiov), not laying down
20 any other rule (opo?) or (ou8e) other law (vofio?)
beyond (roxpa) what the Savior (<rom)p) said. When
W9
[ ] and they began (&pxec0at) to
P. Ryl. 463, cont.

22 "... (I am lying about) the Savior? Levi said to Peter: / "Peter,
your hot temper is always with you, (20) and now you are question
ing the I woman as though an adversary to her. / If the Savior
deemed her worthy, / who are you to scorn her ? / For surely, know
ing her, (25) he loved her very well. Rather let us / be ashamed, and
having put on the / perfect man, let us do / what was commanded
us: preach / the gospel, not laying down any rule (30) or law, as /
the Savior said. When he had said this, / Levi departed and began
18,17-21 Cf. 8,21-9,4.

19,1 Till-Schenke reconstructs N T ? P ? / [ A e Y e i a-e -X N]AI, When
[Levi had said this], which seems to crowd the lacuna slightly and
leaves the following "and unaccounted for.
470 PAPYRUS BEROLINENSIS 8502 ,X
2 bcuk [eT p e y T ]a.H O n c e T A c p e o c i c y

ir[e]YA.rreAioN
4 K.ATA
MA.piA.MM
P. Ryl. 463, cont.

x7)[puo]/[oeiv to suaYYeXi]oy [
P. Ryl. 463:22,33: Roberts' reconstruction gospel [of Mary] is

not supported by the Coptic parallel. It is possible, however, that
xiQpuooetv ended on line 32 and that line 33 was wholly occupied by
the title, which would no doubt have been parellel to that of Gos.
M a ry . As the transcription stands, a more reasonable reconstruc
tion would be '[gospel of the kingdom]' in the light of BG 8,22.
GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARY 1 9 ,2 -5 471
2 go forth [to] proclaim and to preach.

[The] Gospel (euaYyeXi.ov)
4 according to (xax<)
Mary
P. Ryl. 463, cont.

[to preach] / [the gospel.]
THE ACT OF PETER
BG, 4:128,1-141,7
Jam es B r a s h le r a n d D o u g la s M. P a r r o tt*
Schmidt, C. Die alien Petrusakten. TU 24. Leipzig: J. C. Hinrichs-

sche Buchhandlung, 1903. Pp. 1-25. (Hereafter Schmidt [1]).
Till-Schenke. Papyrus Berolinensis 85022. Pp. 296-321, 333.
Vouaux, L., ed. Les Actes de Pierre. Paris: Librairie Letouzey et
Ane, 1922. Pp. 35-38, 221-27.
Hennecke. N T Apocrypha. Vol. II. Pp. 259-78 (W. Schneemelcher,
The Acts of Peter).
Ficker, G. Petrusakten. Handbuch zu den neutestamentlichen Apo-
kryphen. Edited by E. Hennecke. Tubingen: J. C. B. Mohr
(Paul Siebeck), 1904. Pp. 400-04. (The second edition of 1924,
pp. 227-28, presents the same position).
Krause, M. Die Petrusakten in Codex VI von Nag Hammadi.
Essays in Honour of Bohlig. Edited by Krause. Pp. 36-58, esp.
56-57-
Schmidt, C. Studien zu den alten Petrusakten I. ZKG 43 (1924),
321-48. (Hereafter, Schmidt [2]).
The text is generally well preserved, with the following excep
tions: a small lacuna in the middle of pp. 129-32, close to the outside
margin; a large lacuna affecting the beginning of the last eight lines
of p. 135 and the end of lines 11-14 on p. 136; a lacuna affecting
most of the first lines of pp. 139-40; severe fading on p. 142 (the
scribal post-script). In addition, all of pp. 133-34 is missing.
The Coptic dialect is Sahidic, with the presence of the following
non-Sahidic forms: second person, feminine, singular, possessive
article (130,3; 131,2); third person, plural, possessive article (140,
15); imperfect (132,5). Other variants noted by Schmidt (1) are
either now known to be Sahidic (as may fr maay in 132,17. and
eTpeTR for eTpeTeTN in 135,18) or can be accounted for as
scribal error resulting from dictation (cf. 136,11; 138,13; 139,17;
* James Brashler prepared a preliminary version of the transcription and
translation. Douglas M. Parrott provided the introduction and footnotes
and brought the rest of the work to completion.
474 PAPYRUS BEROLINENSIS 8 5 0 2 ,4
140,14). Striking here is the sparing use of superlinear strokes (true

throughout the codex), as well as the frequent appearance of the
first perfect used conjunctively with another first perfect.
The title is found at the conclusion of the tractate only (141,7),
and is set off from the rest of the text by a space of three lines width
and much decoration. The title is in the singular, and the text in
fact includes only one act.
The setting of Act Pet. is a Sunday (the place is not mentioned;
cf. discussion below), when, it appears, it was customary for Peter
to conduct his healing ministry. A challenge by one of the bystanders
leads Peter to employ the power of God to heal his daughter of
paralysis, which healing he immediately reverses (128,7-131,9).
Peters narrative, which constitutes most of the remainder of Act
Pet., begins with an explanation of how his daughter came to be
paralyzed. When she had grown to maturity, the girl was so attrac
tive that a rich man named Ptolemy burned with desire to marry
her. Her mother refused permission, whereupon Ptolemy abducted
her. Peters prayers caused her to be paralyzed before Ptolemy could
have intercourse with her, and hence her virginity was preserved
(131,12-135,17). Ptolemy went blind with grief, but a vision spared
him from suicide, revealed his guilt, and sent him to Peter, where
his sight was restored and his soul was made to see also (135,17-
138,10). Thereafter he lived an exemplary life and gave Peter and
his daughter a parcel of land when he died. This Peter sold and gave
the proceeds to the poor (138,12-139,17). Peter draws the moral
that God cares for his own, and the whole account ends with
Peter distributing bread to the crowd and retiring to his home.
Although the physical setting is not mentioned in the text, it is
reasonable to think of Jerusalem (Schmidt [1], p. 13; Hennecke,
p. 270). Peters home is mentioned (141,6), where he lives with his
wife and daughter (135,1-6) (Peter goes to Rome aloneAct.Pt. 5).
In addition, the action of Ptolemy in abducting the girl seems to
presuppose that the operative law is Jewish (cf. note to pp. 133-34)-
Scholarly discussion of Act Pet. has focused largely on its relation
ship to the early collection of Act.Pt., about two-thirds of which
has been preserved in the Latin MS, Actus Vercellenses. Schmidt
contended that Act Pet. was part of the otherwise lost beginning
third of the Act.Pt. His argument rested on a demonstration of
the extensive conceptual and literary agreement between Act Pet.
and the Actus Vercellenses Acts ([1], pp. 21-25) and was supported
ACT OF P E T E R : INTRODUCTION 475
by a number of testimonies of church fathers and other apocryphal

acts ([i], pp. 13-21). Schmidts stand was accepted by Vouaux (pp.
35-38) but was contested by Ficker, who proposed alternate ways
of interpreting the most significant testimonies (pp. 402-03). Schmidt
responded definitively (2), and his position has now gained general
acceptance (Hennecke, p. 270).
Recently Krause has argued for the close relationship between
Act Pet. and Acts Pet. 12 Afost. (VI,j), in order to support his con
tention that Acts Pet. 12 Afost. also belonged to the first part of the
ancient Act.Pt. and in fact was its initial section (cf. introduction
to VI,1).
Conceptually the emphasis of Act Pet. is Encratite. As Schmidt
says, the story is essentially about the preservation of the virginity
of a young Christian. It is not clear, however, that the Encratism
expressed here is as extreme as his characterization, "Better death
or a broken body, than marriage ([2], p. 329). After all, Peter was
married and still living with his wife. Also it is probably significant
that we do not learn the grounds for Peters wifes objection to
Ptolemy as a husband for her daughter (132,17-18). A strict Encra
tite (cf. Iren. Haer. I.28.1) could have used this as an opportunity
to denounce marriage and sexual relations as such. What is de
nounced, however, is the attempt to deprive a Christian maiden
forcibly of her virginity (137,1-11), probably as a means of gaining
her as a wife without her parents' consent. Thus this section does
not display the extreme view attributed to it by Schmidt and found
in Act Pt. 33-34. Its Encratism consists in its advocacy of rigorous
sexual self-control, which is little different from the view generally
held among Christians in the second century (cf. Ign. Pol. 5.1-2; 2
Clem 12:5-6; Just. 1 Apol. 15; Athenag. Swppl. 33). However there
is no doubt that the silence of the text mentioned above, as well as
the lack of any conceptualization of the meaning of the story, would
have allowed it to be interpreted in a more extreme sense by those
who chose to. The difference in emphasis between Act Pet. and
Ad.Pt. as we know it in Actus Vercellenses suggests that they
may represent different recensions of the ancient Acts (similarly,
Vouaux, p. 36).
Schmidt suggests that the reason for the inclusion of Act Pet. in
a codex containing three explicitly gnostic tractates is that the
scribe needed to fill up the pages after copying the first three trac
tates ([1], p. 2), and that he was attracted to Act Pet. by its appro-
priate length and by the Encratite ideas in it ([i], p. 13). But con
sidering the large amount of explicitly gnostic writing available one
wonders why he chose a work that was only marginally related. The
choice becomes somewhat more understandable when we note the
immediately preceding tractate (Soph. Jes. Chr. [BG,j]), which is
devoted to the teachings of the resurrected Christ given to the
disciples and seven women (77,9-78,2). When, at its end, Christ
disappears from them (126,17-127,1), we learn that his disciples
began to preach the Gospel of God, the eternal Father (129,5-9).
Thus the compiler of the codex may have intended to provide
continuity at this point, by having the next account be about
apostolic activity. But since many such accounts were circu
lating at the time, this does not yet answer fully why this particular
account should have been chosen.
Perhaps the sufficient reason is the rich possibilities for allegor-
ization this story would have presented to the Gnostics. Ptolemy
could have represented the soul, whose attraction to the things of
the world (represented by the beauty of Peters daughter) leads to
ignorance (represented by grief and blindness), and would have led
to death except for the coming of the light of true knowledge (in
Act Pet., the vision of light and the voice of Christ [136,17-137,17]),
which removes blindness (138,7-10). The paralysis of the daughter
could have represented the power of divine knowledge over the
powers of this world; and, of course, the daughter could also have
been seen as a type of the fallen Sophia. (For related gnostic views
in BG, cf. Soph. Jes. Chr. [BG,j] 103,10-106,9; 117,13-126,16.) It
may thus have been the deeper meanings seen in this text that
attracted the gnostic compiler to it and led him to use it in the
codex.
Act.Pt. are dated toward the end of the second century (Hen
necke, p. 275). Hence Act Pet. would have been extant by that
time, although it might well have had an earlier, independent
existence.
The text is essentially that of Till-Schenke, with minor diver
gences noted. Professor Schenke kindly provided us with photos
of the MS so that it was possible to verify uncertain readings.
THE ACT OF PETER
BG, 4:128,1-141,7
P KH
2 M TTOY* A e MTTC2lB B 2l
2 TON 6 T 6 T K Y P I ^ K H T 6
^yM HH cye c c u o y 2 ez Y
4 x y e m e e z o yu ne
t p o c N N oyM H H cye eY
6 q j cung Jteica.a.c e q e p >
t i x z pe e p o o Y * o y * a g p
8 T O A M 3L G B O A M TTMH
h o jg ^ q .x o o c M n e T p o c
io ^ce neTpe e ic j h h t g m
t t F Im t o g b o a a>KTpe 2 ^ 2
12 NB AA G N 3lY G B O A *YU>
Tpe FI kcd<j)oc ccutFI
14 3lYÛ 3iKTpe N62iAe MO
oqje 3lY ^ > 3LKpBOHei
16 n h 6 c d b x K f Hxy n o y
6 0 M 6 T B 6 OY NTOC TGK
18 cyeepe Mn^peeNOC e
a.caJ2uT e c o HcalH g*c
pic
ttic tg y g enpxH m t t n 'o 'y

2 T e M neK pBO H eei n^c
e ic j H H T e rxp u e c o y x
4 C3l c h 6 th p q x y cu cnhjc
mttic* N+KX^ce g c c o o jt
6 CGN^Y GNGTKT*a 6 o M
The second n is the result of a correction by the scribe of

an original n .
The literalness of the translation from the Greek is clear
here; the Greek would probably have been: v 8 rfi (iia
aaPPaTou (cf. 1 Cor 16:2).
THE ACT OF PETER
BG, 4:128,1-141,7
128
Now (Si) on the first (day) of the week (<rdcpp<xTov),
2 which is the Lords day (xupiaoo)),
a crowd gathered and
4 brought to Peter
many who were
6 sick, in order that he might
heal them. And (Si) a person
8 from the crowd made bold (toXjjlocv)
to say to Peter:
10 Peter, behold, in
our presence you have caused many
12 blind to see, and you have
caused the deaf (xo><p6<;) to hear,
14 and you have caused the lame to
walk. And you have helped ((3oy]0 eZv)
16 the weak and have given them
strength. But your
18 virgin (TOxpQevo?) daughter, who
has grown up to be beautiful and who has
129
believed (7ct<rreueiv) in the name of God,
2 why have you not helped ((3oY)0 eiv) her?
For (yap) behold, one
4 side of her is completely paralyzed and she lies
crippled there in the comer.
6 Those whom you have healed are seen (about us);
1-6 Cf. Ac 5 :16 ; Act.Pt. 31.

10-129,19 For a similar scene, with the opposite result, cf. Act.Thom.
4 1-
M o o y T e i c o j e e p e ^coio
8 AicpAMeA.i e p o c AneTpo'c'>
A e c c u B e neotAq NAq>
10 x e nAqjHpe e q o y o N f e ] e
TTNoyTe oyAAq x e c t b c
12 o y n e c c a ) M i motR e
p o c an e r n e ' 6 e' x e R N e p e
14 TTNoyTe 6 an n6cub h
n a t 6 o h eTpeqxApize
16 NTeqAcupeA NTAupeepe
x e K i c A e e p e T e K 'p y x H
18 NApniee hr NeTRm
h a e y N A n i C T e y e R>
^ o y o Aq6cuojT 6 e Rca>
2 T e q u j e e p e ne.XAq n a c
x e TcuoyN R n e M i e n
4 TT6AAAY *f" TOOT6 R C A Tc
oyAAq N T e M o o q j e R
6 n H T O 6 B O A FiNAT T H p o y
epeHOTfl NTeei opApo
8 ei N T O C A ACTCUOyN
A c e i e n e c H T opApoq a
10 TTMHHCye T 6 \ H A 6JCM
neN TA qqpcune n e j ( e
12 neTpoc nay * e e ic 2 H
HT 6 ATTeTN^HT TO)T>
14 xe o y a t 6 o m a n n e tt
> N O y T e 6 T B 6 2 cob n,m
16 > e T N p A I T I MM Oq T O T 6
AypAcpe R2 Y *Y*I* 60
18 o y R n y o y T e nejce n e
129,7-8 Till-Schenke takes this as a question.

10 -11 " I t is apparent to God alone : In view of the remainder of
the story, this can only mean that up to this time Peter had
not told anyone. For a similar expression, cf. 139,10-12.
ACT OF PETER 1 2 9 ,7 - 1 3 0 , 1 8 481
but your daughter

8 you have neglected (aêXeiv). Then (86) Peter
smiled and said to him:
10 My son, it is apparent to
God alone why
12 her body (<ro>(j.a) is not healthy.
Know, then, that
14 God was not weak or (Sj)
unable to give (x<xpieiv)
16 his gift (Stopea) to my daughter.
But (86) so that your soul (<Jwx^)
18 may be persuaded ( t o i Qe i v ) and those who are
here may have more faith (7tujTe<kiv)
130
Then he looked at
2 his daughter and said to her:
Arise from your place! Let
4 nobody help you except Jesus
alone, and walk restored in
6 the presence of all these (people)!
Come to
8 me! And (86) she arose
and went over to him.
10 The crowd rejoiced on account of
what happened.
12 Peter said to them: "Behold,
your heaits have been persuaded
14 that God is not powerless
regarding anything
16 we ask (atTeiv) of him. Then ( t 6 t s )
they rejoiced even more and praised
18 God. Peter said
I29.i3 flNepe: Schmidt (1 ) emends to Nepe, but the imperfect

does not clash with the context (with Till-Schenke).
31
P**
tp o c R Tequpeepe xe
2 BCUK e n C M i N T e j M O C
N T e u j c o n e M nq pco
4 N e N K e c o n nAY r A p n e
Tp N o q p e Ne n R m a g i
6 TTAAi n A T O j e e p e o j h m
no>T a c ^ m o o c M n e c
8 h a A c q jo m e on n t c c
6 ATTHHHCpe THptJ pi
10 M e Aycencn n e T p o c x e
K.AAC e q N A T p e C M T O ^
12 n e .x e n e T p o c n a y x e
q o N ? R61 n x c x e n A e i
14 p Noqpe n a c n R h a ci
^ m n ^ o o Y ta p N T A Y -X n o c
16 n a Y a Yn a y A Y ^ o p o M A
e p e n . x o e i c jccu m m o c
18 n a Y x e n e T p e a y .x t t o >
nak RnooY noyno 6
pXl
R m p A C H O C taY t a p
2 CNAopcucude NÂ2 R
'J'YXH e q j t u n e n e c c c u
4 ma N A u p c u n e e q M O T f l
e p o c a n o k . z<*> n a T m
6 e y e -xe e p e < |> o p o H A >
c c u B e R h o Y F iT e p e T
8 q p e e p e o jh m p m h t b
N p o M n e AYHHHqpe
10 p C K A N A A A l Z e 6 B O A Y
T O O T C AYtO O Y P M H A O
12 n B i o c x e TiTO\e
m a io c N T epeqN A Y e t
14 q j e e p e u jh m e c.xa > K .R
13 2 .5 Schmidt (1) and Till-Schenke divide 0>N a YH, but this

results in an error (CDN with ANOK), which both deal with
by emendation.
ACT OF PETER 1 3 1 ,1 - 1 3 2 ,1 4 483
131
to his daughter:
2 "Go to your place, sit down,
and become an invalid
4 again. For (yap) this
is beneficial for you and me.
6 The girl went back again (to& iv ),
sat down in her
8 place, and became again as she
was before. The whole crowd
10 wept and begged Peter
to make her healthy.
12 Peter said to them:
As the Lord lives, this
14 is beneficial for her and me.
For (yap) on the day she was bom
16 to me I saw a vision (6pa[xa) and
the Lord said
18 to me: Peter, there has been born
to you today a great
132
trial (7cetpa<j{io<;). For this (daughter)
2 will wound many
souls (4ux^) if her body (oSfia)
4 remains healthy.'
But I
6 thought the vision (Spajxa)
was mocking me. When
8 the girl became ten
years old, many were
10 tempted (entav8aXleiv) by
her. And a man rich
12 in property (pto?), Ptolemy,
after he had seen the
14 girl bathing
15-16 For visions and heavenly voices in Act.Pt., cf. Act.Pt. 1,5,6,16,
17,21,22,28,35.
mn t c c m a a y A q - x o o y
1 6 > nccuc x e e q e ^ i T C NAq
> Fic2 THe MneTecHiy
18 n i e e A q x o o y n a c N2*2
Neon M n e q c p 6 c u m
(Pp. 133-134 lacking)

[1 3 4 , 1 9 ] t 7 Wp c u Me R ]
pXe
n T O A C M A I O C f ? T O je e
2 p e o jh m a y k a a c 2^Pr
npo RnH ei aybcuk n tc
4 p e i e r n e A e a n o k m R>
T e c H i i y a n c i en iT fi
6 eTupeepe o jh m e
>Jk.noyA.caL th pq M n e c c c u
8 M A X I N N 6 C 6 I B OJA T C A
ne c c u 6 Aycu Aqqpooye
10 ANqiTC cn'J e o o y Rn
x o e i c nA'f N T A q T o y
12 [jco R jT e q ^ M ^ A A e y c t o c u q
[mn oyIjccu^R hn oyTe
14 [ko] ta T T6 t a it ia R
[<f)]tUB c T p e T q j e e p e ojh'm'
16 [6 c u ] F i T e e i ^ e q j A ^ o y N e n o
[o y ] R 2 Y T C N o y 6 e qj
18 epcDTH e T p e T R e i M e
[ e N je ^ B H y e MnTOACMAi
o c i --------
P*S
A qu^cune e q 'f 2 0 7
I 33 I 34 The sense of these two lost pages can be restored from the
context with the aid of a brief notice by Augustine in his
treatise against Adimantus, in which he refers to an apocryphal
work about the daughter of Peter himself who became
ACT OF PETER 1 3 2 , 1 5 - 1 3 6 , !
485
with her mother, sent
16 for her so that he might take her for his
wife. Her mother was not
18 persuaded (7reC0etv). He sent for her many
times. He could not cease
(Pp. 133-134 lacking)
[I34I9] [ The men-servants of]
135
Ptolemy [returned] the girl,
2 and put her down
before the house, and departed.
4 And ($) when I and her mother realized it,
we went down
6 and found the girl
with one whole side of her body (<ro>{jia),
8 from her toes to her
head, paralyzed and withered.
10 We picked her up, praising the
Lord who had
12 saved his servant from defilement,
[and] pollution, and [destruction].
14 This is the cause (atria) of
[the fact] that the girl
16 [remains] thus to this
day. Now then, it is
18 fitting for you to know
the (subsequent) deeds of Ptolemy.
136
He was smitten
paralysed through the prayers of her father (quoted in

Hennecke, 266). Ptolemy, in his passionate desire, apparently
abducted the girl and was about to force her to have inter
course with him (thus making her his wife without the parents'
consentDeut 22:28-29), when she was suddenly paralysed
by a divine act that had been sought by Peter in prayer.
I 35^-9 Cf. A ct.Pt. 2.
2 2 m n e q ^ H T e q p H
Be R T e y q jH h r n e
4 2 Y e-XM n e N T A q >
q ) a ) n e R m oq Aycu
6 eTBe j i ? N p rn e e q
e i p e m m o o y A q a jc u
8 ne Rbaac eqM eey
e eTpeqTCUoyN Rq
10 o T 6 q Aycu e i c 2 H H T e
H n N A y R .x n < '|'> iT e >
12 R n e z o o y 6 t h h [a y ]
e q R ^ o y N A e pyA[Aq]
14 2 r n e q K o i T t D N [A q ]
n a y e y N o 6 N o y o 'f N
16 eA qp oyoTN e n H e i
t h pq A y c u A q c c u T R
18 e y ^ p o o y e q ^ c u {n }>
M H O C NAq x e n T O A M i l
2 oc H ecKeyoc RnNoy
T e F iT A q T A A y a n e y >
4 T A K O HR OyJCCU^R H
t o k 2 <d<dk N e c c y e e
6 p o le eA K pm cTey
e e p o e i R rrR c o jc u q
8 N T A IT A p o e N O C TAT 6 T
K N A C O yC U N C NAK. NCO)
10 Ne 2 (w c e i f a j c o n e nh
tR R n e c N A y R noyttna
12 NOytUT AA A A TCUOyN>
R tbcdic^ n o y d e n H oja
14 nHei R n e T p o c n i n o c
T O A O C Aya> KN A N A y 6
16 n A e o o y q N A T o y < N > e iA T K
136 ,11 MS has N .x n c iT e .

137.3 vessels": Probably here believers (cf. Act.Pt. 2, where it
is used in the same sense as Rom 9:23). But it could refer to
women, as in 1 Thess 4:4.
ACT OF PETER 1 3 6 ,2 -1 3 7 ,l 6 487
2 in his heart and grieved

night and
4 day on account of what
happened to him. And
6 because of (the) many tears he
shed he became
8 blind. He intended
to go and
10 hang himself. And behold
in the ninth hour
12 of that day,
and (86) when he was alone
14 in his bedroom (xo itw v ), [he]
saw a great light
16 shining in the whole house
and heard
18 a voice saying
137
to him: Ptolemy,
2 God did not
give his vessels (axeuos) for
4 corruption and pollution.
But it was necessary
6 for you, since (w?) you believed (7u<rre6eiv)
in me, that you not defile
8 my virgin (7cap06vo<;), whom
you should have recognized as your sister,
xo since (<*><;) I have become
one Spirit (7tveu[xa) for you both.
12 But (aXXa) arise
and go quickly to
14 the house of Peter the
apostle and you will see
16 my glory. He will explain
J 37.9 Cf. 1 T im 5 :2 .
10 Cf. 1 C or 1 2:13.
PAPYRUS BEROLINENSIS 8 5 0 2 ,4
6 BOX e<J)U)B n T O \ e M l l
o c A c M ne qp A M e A i A q o y
e^CA^Ne RNeqpcuM e e
PAH
T p ey ju HoeiT^HTq
2 FiceFiTq cy A p o e i R>
T e p e q e i A e e?pAei
4 q jA poei Aqxcu A n
T A y q ja m e RMoq t h
6 p o y 2 r t 6 o h RTc n e
x c n f l J t o e i c t o t b Aq
8 n a y eBOA N R b a a
R T e q c A p S Ayo> fi>
io b a a R T e q ' l ' y x H Ay>
cu AyM h h e y e ^ e A n i
12 Ze e n e x c A q e i p e n a y
N^MneTNAN o y o Y
14 Ayo* A q x A p i ^ e n a y >
R tacupeA R nN oyT e
16 m R R c c u c An TOA e
MAI o c R t o n R MOq >
18 A q e i eB O A ^M n s i o c >
AqBtuK oja n e q ^ c R
[pXe]
T [e p e q ic ]c p a ? [R ]T e q
2 aiaohkh xqczxi Noy
c c u t n 6 c u m e n p ^ N h tx
4 q?eepe xe g t b h h t c R
T A q n iC T e y e e n N o y
Between these lines Schmidt (i) suggests that the scribe may
have left out something like the following: Then I placed
my hands on his eyes and said, 'Receive your sight. . "
(pp. 21-22); cf. Act.Pt. 21.
K CD is one of two Coptic words used to translate the verb in
the Greek expression for making a will (8taTi06vat). The
other, C M I N 6 , was used by Schmidt (i) and was rightly
ACT OF PETER I37 i 7-*395 489
the matter to you. And (Se) Ptolemy

18 did not hesitate (afieXetv). He
commanded his men-servants
1 3 8
to lead him
2 and to bring him to me.
And (8e) when he had come
4 to me he narrated everything that
had happened to him
6 in the power of Jesus
Christ our Lord. Then (t o t e ) he
8 saw with the eyes
of his flesh (oap) and the
10 eyes of his soul (^X^)- And
many hoped (sXmêiv)
12 in Christ. He did
good things for them
14 and he gave (x<xpeiv) them
the gift (Scopea) of God.
16 Afterwards Ptolemy
died.
18 He departed from life ((3io<;) and
went to his Lord.
[139 ]
And (8e) [when he made] his
2 will (Sia0YjxY)), he wrote in a
piece of land in the name of my
4 daughter, since because of her
he believed (7ri<jTetieiv) in God
rejected by Till-Schenke because of its incompatibility with

the remaining letter traces. Till-Schenke's choice, T X X p o ,
however, is not used to translate 8iaTiOvoct, and is at least
one letter too long for the lacuna. KCD seems the only pos
sible choice but provides a reconstruction that is shorter by
one or two letters than one would like.
139,5 The scribe erased an unnecessary between e and TTNOY*
6 Te Aqo y.*Aei i n o k 2 ^
TOIKONOMU NTAyTR
8 2 Y t e p o c 2<wc c n o y >
a a io c ATepe^ e p o c agi
10 -j* M n 6 ( U M g b o a : Ayto
n N o y T e oyAAq neTCO
12 oyN o yT e anok oyTe
T A q j e e p e { a T'J' M n 6 u ) M
14 6 bo \ } M niK i a a a y tta
2 o y 2 ^ T A C o y mt t 6cd m
16 a a a a n exp H M A THpq
A'f-xooyq R n g t m o x j
18 ern e 6 e ffl tt2M2aa m e
n e x c 7 c x e nNoyTe
[PH]
FO|[ k ]O n [OMI N N T]
2 Noyq N Ayo> qppBTe
MnneTNANoyq m
4 rroyA noyjk. anon 2 
6 cuqjT e b o a 2 t c Ay
14 cu 2RKeqÂxe ( t h p oy }
A n e T p o c AAy w n o y
16 RTO BOA TH
139 ,10 -17 Cf. Ac 5 : 1 - 1 1 .

11 - 1 2 "God alone knows : For a similar expression, cf. 129 ,11.
Here, however, it has the character of an oath,which may ex
plain the lack of a connective with the rest of the sentence.
Ficker and Vouaux add "th at.
13 -14 MTTIKA: A plural would have been normal.
ACT OF PETER 139,6-140,16 491
6 and was saved. I m yself

took care of the administration (obcovojjua)
8 entrusted to me most carefully (&<; crcouSaUoi;).
I sold
10 the land. And
God alone
12 knows, neither (o u ts) I, nor (ouxe)
m y daughter, {I sold the land}
14 kept anything
back from the price of the land.
16 B u t (aXXa) I sent the
entire sum of money (xp^[i.a) to the poor.
18 Know, then, O (&) servant of
Christ Jesu s, that God
[140]
[watches over (obtovonetv) those who]
2 are his and he prepares
what is good for
4 each one. B u t we
think that
6 God has forgotten us.
Now then, brothers, let
8 us be penitent, and
watchful, and pray.
10 And the goodness (-xyxQ6<;)
of God will look
12 down upon us and we
w ait for it. And
14 {all} other teachings
Peter spoke in the
16 presence of them all.
139,18-19 Perhaps the person who originally questioned Peter is ad

dressed (Ficker) (128,7-8), but this m ay also be an exhorta
tion to the reader.
140,14 { t h p o y } : Following both Schmidt (1) and Till-Schenke.
16 The scribe erased a second e B O A between 6 B O A and TH-
PAPYRUS BEROLINENSIS 8 5 0 2 ,4
poy e o o y MnpX
*PMA
M n x o e ic n e x c
x q f n 2 ly t h p o y
eboa n o e iK
N T epeqnocpq xq
TCU oyN xqscjK e
ZP^'f e n e q H e i -
Tenp*5ic MneTpoc
The whole page is decorated, and the title is boldly set off
from the last line of the text.
Probably a eucharistic celebration (cf. Act.Pt. 5). P. 142 has
a badly faded invocation. Till-Schenke reconstructs it,
ttn o yt N N [o y T e ] / T TN o yTe F In o ytg N nSc /
ACT OF PETER 1 4 0 , 1 7 - 1 4 1 , 7 493
Praising the name
141
of the Lord Christ,
2 he gave them all
bread.
4 When he had distributed it, he
arose and went
6 into his house.
The Act (wpaî?) of Peter
N JC O eiC T ip p o N p a ) [ o y ] , and translates, O God of

[gods], O God of gods, O Lord of lords, O King of kings!
An alternative translation would be, "O divine God, O divine
God of the lordly Lord, O kingly K in g!
WORD INDICES
Words in the Coptic Words index are ordered according to Crums

Coptic Dictionary, with minor exceptions. In the indices of Greek
Loan Words and Proper Nouns the order is according to the Greek
alphabet, with words beginning with letters peculiar to Coptic
coming at the end of the Proper Nouns index. In the Coptic Words
index nouns are indicated simply by gender designation (m. or f.),
where that is clear. Where it is not, nn. is used. Verbs are indicated
by v. + designates the qualitative form of the Coptic verb in both
the Coptic Words and Greek Loan Words indices. Definitions are
omitted as unnecessary in view of the translations to which the
entries refer. Where a word or phrase is split between two lines in
the text, only the first line is indicated. In the Greek Loan Words
index the Coptic form of Greek loan words is not shown when the
Coptic and Greek are identical in spelling; in this connection, a
Greek rough breathing mark and a Coptic z are considered identical.
Omissions from the Coptic Words index because of frequency of
occurrence and minor grammatical and lexical interest include the
conjunctions and mn , demonstratives (except eTMM^Y), pos
sessive pronouns, articles, the preposition (except in combina
tions), the negative particle a.n , and Fi6i. Omissions from the Greek
Loan Word index include the conjunctions (iiv, 86, yap, and aXXa.
From the Proper Nouns index are omitted all proper nouns con
structed from verbs or adjectives, and those derived directly from
single common nouns (except co<t>i^ and 6copS).
COPTIC WORDS
* VI 56,17; 61,10.
A e iA e i v. V I 44,33; 4 6 ,5 . 3k.TA.ei V 29,28. a c i a T V 37,20. aTaT B G 128,19.
A6IH f. V 37,23. V I 37,6; 43,8. 3k.MJk.eiH V I 43,5.
ABOJ f. V I 2 9 ,11.
AA v. V I 1,20. AACDTFi imperat. V I 40,5.
AAOY m. V 55,2; 78,10; 79 ,12; 80,15. V I 8 ,17 ; 9,32.
AMOY v - imperat. V 21,2 5 ; 44.21.
A M H eiT ft V 6 1,13 . V I 4 ,12 .31.
A M R T e m.: M N T C V I 37,30; 4 1,10 .17.28 .33.
A M pH ê m. V 75,10.
A M A 2T6V . V 2 2 ,3 ; 2 5 ,7 .11.14 ; 28, [30]; 29,16; 30,5.6; 33,2.5.7; 54 ,12; 62,1.
V I 16 ,17 ; 2 0 ,17 .3 1; 21,26 ; 28,28; 29,33; 4 X.2 3 ; 46,10; 5 1 ,1 5 ; 55.25; 75.
14 ; 77,6. B G 9,4; 15 ,18 .19 . e M A ^ T e V I 19,22; 42,2; 46,26; 75,9. B G
15 ,18 ; 16 ,17. Jk.M3k.2 T e m- V 26,19; 52,23; 74,20. V I 19,9; 35,20; 36,8.
3k.T3k.M3k.2Te V I 19,9. 3k.TeM3k.2T6 V 30,3. MNT3k.T3k.M3k.2Te V I 21,23.
p e.q 3k.M3k.2 T e V 34,22.
AN AT m. V I 54,24.26; 75,6. P A N A * v. V 73,22.
A N O K . pronoun V 18 ,2 1; 20,28; 2 1,4 .11.2 6 ; 2 2 ,11 ; 23,5; 24,22.22.25; 2 5 ,1 .1 1 ;
26,8; 3 1 ,1 7 ; 3 3 ,17 .2 1; 35,5.[18 ]; 36,7.7; 38,[12].20; 39,15-19; 4!.9;
42,14; 46,6; 47,13.20; 48,8.10.16.22; 49,5.8.9.10.19; 51,6 .7; 5 2 ,13 ; 54 ,15;
55,28; 57 ,1.2 .2; 58,20; 59,21.23.24.26; 61,9 ; 63,19; 64,26; 65,2.6.11.24;
66,13.19.28; 72,26. V I 1,29 ; 2,32; 3,[5].[9].10; 6,18; 9 ,14 ; 10 ,7 .12 .11; 13,2.
15. l6. l8 .19.20.21 . 22.23.25.26.27.30.33.34; 14,5.9.12.14.26.27.29.29.30.
3 1.3 1.3 3 ; 15,15.15.16 .25.27.29 .30 .33; 16,2.3.5. [6 ].9 .u .13.16 .17 .18 .20 .
22.23.24.24.25.26.27.29.31.35; 17 ,2 ; 18,7.9.10.20.23.25.27; i9 ,[4][5]-
[6]. [9]. 10 .11.12 .12 .14 .15 .15 .18 .2 0 .2 3 .2 8 .3 1.3 2 .3 3 .3 4 ; 20,5. [7].28.30.31.
33.35; 2 1 ,[ 1 1 ] .1 8 ; 4 7 ,13 ; 58,4 .10 .15.21.27; 59,27; 60,29. B G 10 ,ro;
15.20; 17,13; 132,5; 135,4 ; 139,6.12. A.NA.K. V 33,16.
ANON pronoun V 83,23. V I 3 ,[6 ]; 4,6 .17; 5,10 ; 8,20.23; 9,20; 27,14; 32,33;
48,12.16. B G 9 . 1 1 ; 10,6; 140,4.
A N C R M nn.: - f iH C M M e V 49,12.
3k.N3k.q? m- V I 62,23; 63,25.29. NAO ) V I 63,16.
3k.ne f. V 23,6. V I 2 ,16 ; 6,26; 49,19; 69,14. B G 135,8. pi. a i t h Y e 69,20.
ATTOT m. V 25,16 ; 40,[14].
Api K m. V 28,7.
A p e 2 Cf. z * ? e 2
ACAI v .: ACIOJOY'* V I 5,18. e C IO JO Y 1' V I 46,12.
A c n e f. V I 71.25.
a c o y f- B G 139 ,15
ATO m. V 59,2.
a y a n m.: e o y A N V I 36,32.
Atp V 20,23; 2 3 ,19 ; 25,4.5.23; 27 ,14 ; 29,2; 32,3; 33.19 ; 4 2 ,11; 77,5. V I
34,8; 36,3I -32; 3 7 ,1.2 .3 .[4].6; 3 8 ,1 1; 43,4.8.8; 48,30; 50 ,17; 5 3 ,3 1; 57,
33; 58,3 22; 78,14. B G 9.7 1 1 -
32
498 INDICES
a.cpa.T m. V 45,20.
m. V I 6,[4].6; 7,34.
A .0 m. V I 28,24.
a ^ o m m .: q i a.OM v 66,12.18. V I 6,9.14.15. a.o> e ^ o H m. V I 78,31.
X 2 P O * V I 71,27. B G 15 ,17 .
2epxT* d. wze epa.T<=>.
V I 11,2 3 . JCW V 35,13. V I 26,[7].
A.6pHN f. V I 13,22.
B3k.e m. V I 2,6.
BH B m. V 80,13.
BCD K v. V i8 ,[i8 ]; 19 ,16 ; 23,2.9.13; 29,18; 30,7.9; 34,16.18; 35,24; 42,20;
4 3 ,2 1; 7 3 ,15 ; 74,3. V I 2,[7].[8]; 6 ,12 ; 7,20.21; 8,34; 12 ,18 ; 15,6; 34,9;
36,28; 65,5. B G 8,21; 9,5.7; 15,9; 16 ,3; 19,2; 13 1,2 ; 135,3; 137.13;
138 ,19 ; 14 1,5 . BIC* V I 1,28. BCD K. BO\ V 42,[14]. BCDK eTTITR
V I 4 1,3 1. B G 15,2 (BHIC+). BCDIC e^ O Y N V64.30; 65,4; 73,16.28; 74,4.
V I IO,i; 3 8 ,18 .3 1; 39,4:46,8; 75,31. BCDKÎCD^ V I 6 ,12 :34 ,2 1. BHK+
B G 15 ,2 .3.14 ; 16 ,15. BCDK. nn. V I 34,14.
BCDK. m.: pi. Ba.ia.IK V I 5 ,11.
B K m. V 55,13. V I 10,8.
BOKI nn.: e p B ^ K 6 V 79,10.
BA.A m. V 19 ,19 ; 32,[26]; 48,2; 66,25; 75,14; 77,14. V I 4,6.10.14.24.27;
13 ,10 ; 22,27; 27,28.31; 28,12; 30 ,12; 37,33; 48,3. B G 138,8.10. BA
V I 46,21.
BCD A v. V I 39,14- BCDA 6 B O A . V 31, [25]; 49,6. V I 42,6; 43,34. BG 7,5.7;
15 ,2 1. B O A - 9 6 B O A V 63,1. V I 37,32; 47,29. B G 16 ,21. B Z .A * 6 B O A
V I 4 1,12 . BCDA m. V I 19 ,12. BCDA 6 B O A m. V I 19 ,11;4 2 ,14 ;4 3 ,3 1;
76,7.14. B O A m.: 21 b o a V I 50,15- P B O A V 29,3; 34,19- V I 6,6; 7,
26.29.32; 8,[i].I2,- 29,17. P C A B O A V 7 1,17 ; 72,24. H B A A a . * VI
37,12. (fl)CA. (TJ)BOA V 4 7,17; 5 7 ,1; 6 3,1; 73,8. V I 20,19.20.23; 50,11.
6 B O A Used nominally with prep. V 3 3 ,17 .2 1; 34,3.10; 53,16; 54,3.11;
69 ,11. V I 19 ,17 ; 42,7; 69,16.18; 78,43. B O A - V I 5,22. 6 B O A X C
V I 3,6.10.22; 4,27; 5,5.26; 6 ,17 ; 7,[4].8; 8 ,31; 20,13; 38>I 2 : 44.25 :
45,29; 48,5. p e q B C D A m. V I 5,[5].
BCDAK v. V 2 1,2 ; 28,4; 3 2 ,1 1; 64,22. V I 43,32; 44,27.
BAICe f. V I 39,23; 4 1,16 ; 43,29.
B A A e nn. V I 28,16. B G 12 8 ,12 ; 136,8. B6AAH V 27,4. BAAH V I 27,29.
M fJT B A A e V I 28,[5].
B e N i n e m.: n e N i n e V 22,4.
Bp Bp v. V I 58,13.
B p p e V I 3 1 ,3 1 ; 72,38.
BepcDT m. V I 41,30.
BO T 6 f. V 72,12.
bcd cp v .: B o q j= V I 9,15. Bq7<s epo<=> V I 15,20.
B c p e f. V 28,8.23. V I 58,7. B G 17,3.
V I 56,18.18; 6 1,10 .10 .

BH nn. V 65,23.
COPTIC WORDS 499
e H o y f. VI 62,10.
e H R T e Cf. i M f i T e .
6 H 1 T 6 V 30,15; 31,8; 32,15.26; 38,6. V I 8,25; 44,12.
eM A ^ Te Cf. AMA.2T6.
6 N 6 interrogative particle VI 39,2. n e VI 6,35.
eN Acy Cf. a n a u ).
6 N 6 2 m. V 85,26. VI 74,11. C N C 2 f ) T 6 N 1 N VI 35,22. .XI N
e N 2 B G l 8 , 7 . C ^ A C N 2 V 53,29; 64,14.16; 65,12; 67,7; 73,20; 75,8;
76,22. 27; 84,1; 85,15.17. VI 55,29; 64,28.
e p H T V. V 60,18; VI 52,1. e p H T m . V 53,14. VI 52,9.11.
e p O ) T m . V 50,19. VI 40,29.
e p H Y V 22,8. VI 50,9. B G 7,4. e p H O Y V I 1,13; 8,8; 25,15; 50,7; 51,7;
57.27; 65,4; 68,9; 77,20; 78,22.
e c H T m.: e n e c H T V 19,29; 20,[1]; 21,16.18.19; 22,18; 23,27; 25,27;34,6;
5 4 .9 - [28]; 61,24.26. B G 130,9.
e T B e - V 18,20; 21,8; 26,28; 29,8.22; 30,14; 31,9.12.16; 32,1; 42,24; 50,19;
59,13; 60,13; 66,4; 67,10; 79,[30]; 84,8; 85,12. VI 3,25; 4,35; 30,31;
33,17; 3 4 ,n ; 4 I>
3 ; 47,21; 66,8; 67,24.35; 69,10; 71,25; 72,27. B G 17,18;
130,15; 136,6. e T B H H T ^ V 28,11; 29,21; 31,16; 51,23; 52,19; 56,
[2 ].[4 ]-5 ; 7 ,7 - VI 10,18; 18,25; 24,30; 76,36. B G 139,4- e T B C TTA(e)l
v 54,4-5-7; 59,13;
57,20; 60,13; 65,5; 71,1. VI 3,8; 23,21; 29,3; 51,16;
53,5-20; 59,1; 60,27; 62,1; 65,26.38; 66,5.11; 68,6; 75,8. B G 7,17.21;
8,6; 18,4. T B NA.()l V I 59,II. T B C>Y V 33,25; 66,17; 71,17.
VI 6,14; 14,15; 15,22.31; 16,1; 17,32; 37,[2]; 66,31. B G 128,17; 129,11.
6TFJ-, 6 T O O T s Cf. T c u p e
e o o y m . v 52,21; 64,9.25; 65,33; 70,1; 74,6.15.23; 76,11; 77,10. VI 26,10;
32,15; 35,19- B G 137,16. M f l T A T e o o Y v i 73,21. -f
e o o Y v 78,15.
v i 6,24; 47,18. b g 130,17; 135,10; 140,17. xi e o o y
v 78,16.24; 79,
15.25; 80,7.18.[27]; 81,12.21; 82,8.16. VI 12,10.12; 24,30; 48,22.
e q jc u n e V 27,1; 29,6; 30,4; 33,2.11; 34,20; 36.16.f24]; 40,22; 48,20; 52,15.
VI 28,[6]; 66,7.13; 76,33. BG 132,3-
eajxe v 28,5; 49,18. VI 4,11.30; 5,15; 6,15; 52,12.28; 64,7; 65,15.33; 70,7.
B G 9,10; 17,14; 18,10.
eze V 61,16. VI 12,14; 66,28; 74,19.
e j O (= AÔ) m. B G 10,16.
eH Cf. H
e j p f l : e j p A * v 72,16.
e x f l - v 45,10; 55,23; 58,17; 5 9 ,7 15 ; 6 1,14 ; 70,9; 72,20; 74,30; 75,10.12;
77,8; 81,19; 83,3; 85,10. v i 2,12.15; 9,19; 12,16; 3 1,13 ; 34,25; 43,31;
45.9-10 (AJCR-); 57,28; 59,9;
7 5 ,9 - n ; 76,25; 77,23. B G 130,10; 136,4.
ejc<o v 19,12; 54,9; 62,12; 71,3; 75,19; 77,18; 83,8. v i 29,14; 42,11.
H VI 56,18.18.18.19.19; 61,10.10.10.
H61 m. V 7 7 ,11. V I 3 ,19 ; 8,24; 12 ,1 ; 27,27; 28,30; 40,12. B G 13 5 ,3 ; 136 ,16 ;
137,14; 141,6. h i v 60,[5].15. M e c ^ N H e i VI 28,32.
HTT6 f. V 24,24; 25,19; 26,11.15; 49,24; 5 3 ,2 7 - VI 43,20; 76,8.
J* H i r e V 27,2; 53,21.26. a t ' I H i r e V 26,9.26.30; 27,9.
H pff m. VI 24,15.17.
5 oo INDICES
6 HN m. V 75,10.
I VI 61,10.10.10.
gl V 18,[17]; 20,25; 21,11.[20 ]; 28,7.8; 30,17; 33,12; 34,21; 39,14; 46,
[2 1]; 47,2; 48,3; 49,20; 59,20; 78,9.24. v i 2,3; 5,21; 8,35.35; 13.3;
44,30.32.34; 65,20; 76,36. BG 7,17; 8,4; 15,10; 130,7.9; 138,3.18. j
6 T R - ( t o o t ) VI 65,9.14. BG 15,10. 1 eacfl- V 75,12; 77,18; 78,
3.5.17.26; 79,18.27; 80,8.12.15.20.22.[29]; 81,4.14.23; 82,3.9.17. i
6 BOX V 23,10; 24,31; 26,9.11; 34,17; 36,[16]; 47, [12]; 49,16; 51,[6];
57.7; 59.21; 61,5; 66,7; 69,16; 73,7.[13]; 77.24; 78.14; 82,!>5]; 83,22;
85,29. V I 1,14; 2,10; 3,16; 4,[2]; 6,26; 7,12; 8,13; 10,2; 22,15; 23,18.20;
26,25; 44.7 ; 75.5 ; 76.29- p q?pn 6 b o \ R 2 HTe VI 22.32- 1
e n e c H T V 58,16. BG 130,9. gi eniTFJ v i 65,10.12. b g 135,5. 1
e n i T R VI 19.13- e ^ o y n V 21,5; 45,20; 48,10; 50,7; 55,8.12;
61,7. V I 25,7; 68,20. e ^ p a J v 21,28; 22.13.f24]; 23,30; 24,3.6;
28,11.14; 37,23; 75,19- v i 29,12; 43.34- BG 138,3 (epa.ei). f.
v 30,17.
e'fe V 28,6. V 49,19; 66,18.
e iB m. BG 135.8-
e i B e V.: OBe+ VI 6,3; 7,31. 1B6 m. VI 27,15.
e r n e v. v 24,17.18; 25,4; 51,13.15.18; 52,[4].18; 53,22; 56,19; 57,[6].16.
17; 59.20; 67,12; 84,2. B G 15,7; 129,13; 135,4.18; 139,18. R M 6 V 25,
22; 85,8. VI 5,[9]; 11,12; 31,26; 32,30.35; 34,31; 37,24; 42,13; 48,33;
68,22. e m e m. V 47,[9]; 73,12. a t b i M e V 24,17; 39,13- M R T A r e i-
M 6 V 60,22. i T M M e V 30,24; 35,15. M R T JIT M H e V 28,12.
e i N e V. (carry) V 20,8.24; 34,5; 37,7. VI 22,4; 73,36; 77,4. B G 128,4. fj-
V 55,21. fiT V 79,9; 85,7. B G 138,2. JLNI imperat. V 20,21; 63,6.
e i N e b o a V25.2;75,23- e i N e e B O A ^ R - V I 30,17- ei N e e j o y N
v i 44,22; 45,19; 62,24; 67,29. B G 128,4. n - e^cN- v i 40,11. fj- e^ oyN
V I 52,[3]- e ^ o Y N V 72,3. VI 52,5; 62,24; 67,29. e m e egp*T
VI 29,30; 41,24. e m e e g p a J g fl- VI 3 ,3-
e i N e v. (resemble) V 20,7; 64,14; 76,4; 84,24. V I 75,8; 77,20. BG 7,15.
e m e m. V 19,28; 54,13; 65,29. VI 14,14; 16,7.8; 48,32; 49,13.14.16.
33; 50,10.17.19.28; 69,22.27. BG 8,3. r n e m. VI 49,18.21.23.34.35;
50,26; 55,31; 69,16. BG 8,9.9.
e i e p o m.: l e p o v i 71,17. pi. le p c u o y VI 45,35-
e i p e v. V 20,18; 28,23; 3 1,2 1; 52,22; 53,4; 54,25; 60,25; 74,18.24; 77,1.
v i 9,28; 12,8; 33,15.24; 38,20; 41,23; 43,23; 45,6.14; 48,7-27-28; 51,
4.14; 63,7; 65,27; 77,35. BG 7,14.15; 10,4; 136, 7:138,12. p-V20, 23;
31,29; 38,[17].20; 39,[15]; 63,9; 67,10; 73,26; 74,12; 76,7; 81,4; 83,24.
V I 1,9.21.25; 8,22; 43,17; 76,34. BG 16,4. (p- is found in various other
combinations throughout the Coptic and the Greek Loan Words in
dices). e p - V 53,19; 79,10; 81,6. e A - V 29,6. We* V 20,14; 21,9; 25,
12; 29,1; 3 1,12 .13 ; 48,17; 59,7-9- VI 9,27; 11,10 ; 12,16; 27,29; 28,16;
30,2; 50,7.31; 61,7.23; 62,22; 63,15; 64,18; 76,33. BG 9,20; 18,11;
140,15. A p i- imperat. V 30,7. e + V 22,29; 24,16; 28,4; 35,15; 39,13;
40,12; 47,7; 49,20; 52,21; 56,18; 57,8; 65,23; 69,10.17; 84,12. VI 62,
7.9.12; 65,32; 68,5; 70.f3J.32; 72,14; 76,19.21.24; 78,17. 0 + V 34,io;
COPTIC WORDS 501
36,[1];65,18. VI 1,8; 8,15; 21,7; 26,21; 34,5; 38,22; 49,20; 57,30; 64,8.
B G 8,8; 128,19; 129,14. o e i t VI 56,28.
e ic D p R V 19,31; 20,[1]; 21,16.17.[23]; 22,6.17:50,14. e ic u p R e ^ p a J V l
72,19. iA.pR+ e J tN - VI 75,10.
e i C 2 H ( H ) T e V 21,7.21; 26,14; 29,8; 32, [29]; 38,18; 42,5; 45,9; 49,15;
56,17.20; 57,[4].8; 60,14.23; 70,19. V I 8,13. B G 128,10; 129,3; 130,12;
136,10. e i c H n e b g 8,17.17. e i c v 72,19.
eiCUT V 33,20; 35,9; 48,24; 49,[II]; 50,23; 51,19.22; 52,9; 57,2; 59,11;
81,28. V I 13,31; 24,18.28.29; 25,29; 26,8; 38,19.24; 52,[2].21.28; 53,
11.24.28.32.33.34; 54,14.23.21; 55,6.10.23; 58,25.31; 59,6.11.24; 60,5.
12; 61,<23); 62,20; 63,15; 64,5.29; 73,24. ICUT V 33,18.22; 35,8; 44,
18; 51,20.21; 53,22; 54,11; 62,16; 81,25. VI 6,18; 33,30; 53,16; 60,6;
64,3.27; 66,36; 68,25.
e ic u T e m. V I 45,33.
i t 1 m.: e n i T H V I 77,8.23; 78,35. R t t i t B TJ- VI 62,11; 77,7. qja. ttitFI
VI 29,15. Cf. also BCDK, i, KCDAX, NOY-ate, C 3 l, CCDK, , (.xi-
e i o j v.: a .a je t VI 77,8.
ic e - V 22,5; 33,10; 38,15; 54,20; 71,8; 74,13; 75,19; 77,15- VI 1,7; 2,14;
3,6; 5,19; 11,26; 13,14; 25,21.23; 30,23; 31,4; 33,1.16; 38,1; 48,8; 49,
9-3; 53,r9; 54,23; 58.5; 66,17; 67,7.10; 69,20; 72,29.33; 73,33-34; 77,
22; 78,21. BG7.11; 10,3; 17,15; 18,20.6 e v 27,20. v i 71,8. pi. K o o y e
V 32,12; 45,17; 51,12; 73,13. VI 1,[8]; 3,1719; 12,8; 75,24. r e - V
7 I>
I9 -
ICOY6I V 18,8.13; 26,18.24; 78,10 (scribal gloss). V I 1,28; 17,23.27; 8,33;
30,16.31; 39.17; 54.11; 66,4. M f i T K o y e i VI 17,30.31.
KCD v. V 32,5; 60,1. V I 26,10; 34,29; 62,10.16. BG I39 .[i]- KX- V 3 1,3 ;
62,3.5. K2l2l * V 20,10; 64,24; 70,15. V I 15 ,7 ; 67,22; 75,35 ; 77,26.36;
77,13.14. BG 135,2. KH+ V I 34,17. ICAAT+ V I 27,22. ICCU (KAA*)
N C I (RCCDs>) V 5 9 ,1; 64,24. V I 10 ,17 ; 22,34; 24,[9].2 i ; 26 ,15; 3 2 ,1;
5 7 ,1; 7 1,10 .12 . k x - e n A ^ o Y BG 139,14- KA- (KAA.o') 0 OCF1- V 70,
[25]. V I 4 5 ,11. KCD (KA-) 6 B O A V 62,3; 63,17. V I 19 ,15 ; 20,16. KA-
6 B O \ F l^ H T - V I 20,16. KCD (K3L-, KX\<*) e ^ p a J V 60,20. V I 39,
32; 4 3 ,1; 52,15. B G g .i; 18,19. k h + e e p a J V 3 1,23. k a a t + e e p a J
V I 2 4 ,11. K A A * NÔ YN V I 62,3. KACCD M AVI6o,[5].ForKApCD
cf. p o .
KCD B V. VI 24,32. KCD B m. V 22,30. VI 32,14.
KCDKA.HYV : A ^H O Y V 46,15; 56,10.13. KHK+ A H (o )Y V
46,[16]; 58,21. V I 32,3.
K A K e m . V 66,24; 83,8. VI 28,[8]; 37,30; 46,19; 72,17- B G 16,6. + K 1 K 6
V 21,13. P K A K e V 75,13. V I 42,17.
i c e \ e e A e f. VI 14,7.
KAO O A6 f- V 6 9,21; 7 1,9 ; 75. l S ; 80,22.27; 8i,i6(scribal gloss).19 ; 83,7.
KCDATT V . : F KCD ATT V 3 3 ,1 1 ; 34,23 (both scribal glosses).
KA'I' im.: *f* K A ']' e ^ p A f C Jtrl- VI 3 4 25 -
k c d a X v.: 6 o a X + e n i T H V I 9,25. K A .x e f. B G 129,5.
KIM V. V 23,6; 32,10. VI 11,3; 21,9; 37,34; 44.5; 5 5 .3 3 ; 56,12; 58,[5]-6.
B G 10,14.
502 INDICES
IC1M6 VI 5,30.
KHM6 Cf . Proper Nouns index.
ICOyNT*8 nn. V 78,4.
K C D N C V . : K O N C = B G 16,18.
Kxpw* Cf. po.
K po m. VI 1,17 ; 2,8; 6,31; 75,33.
icp o yp m. V I 62,8.
Kpoq m. VI 30,1; 32,1; 39,30.
K 0 )0)0 nn. VI 70,36.
I O i C K C v . VI 2 0 , 1 0 .
K O C K C V .: KeCKO)C B O A V 62,3.
K C D T v. V 72,4. ICOTe* VI 75,29. K O ) T m. VI 54,27.
K C U T 6 v. V 27,5; 55,9. V I 6,30; 26,33. K O T * 9 VI 77,2. K C D T 6 RCA-
( n c o j ^ ) V 59,18;69,10; 7 9 ,[i]-5 -7 ; v i 42,12;48,4.5. k o ) T e n e c H T
V 23,26. k o )T a - (e p o ^ ) v i 2,9. KOJTe (k o t ^) e g o y N V 80,23.
VI 3,29. KOT9 6 2 PA.T e- V I 59,19. ICOJTe m. VI 75,23.
K T O V. V 74,15. B G 16,18. K T e - B G 9,21. K T O s * BG 17,21. Cf. a ls o
TKTO .
KXZ m - V I9 ,2 9 -3 I ; 2 0 ,9 ; 29,10; 36,18; 43,14; 58,517; 62,2; 64,8; 69,9; 70,
[4].i6.[25]; 71,[1]; 72,3.15.19; 73,17; 74,30; 76,19; 80,12.23. VI 9,20;
12,16; 15,3; 1 9 ,3 : 25,33; 3 7 ,9 ; 4,I2; 44,5-8; 45,9.12.27; 46,3; 63,18;
68,28; 69,27; 70,9; 71,12; 73,13; 75,15.18.24.27; 76,27; 77,14; 78,3.
B G 15,22.
ic o e ig m.: ic A e ig e m . VI 2,26.
IC0 0 2 nn- V 61,23; VI 75,29.
ICCU2 v. V 40,22; 55,26. VI 31,4. KO ) 2 m. V 21,2. VI 23,16.32; 31,3.4; 39,24.
KO)T m. V 75,9.12.25; 83,22. VI 36,5; 37,31; 38,4; 40,11:41,20 ,-46,12.18.
29; 63,18; 73,34; 7 7 .1 7 ; 17 23; 7 8 ,3 7 -
A O v. V 32,[23]. A O Fi VI 70,18.
a i b m. peqAOBe VI 72,21.
A U > U ) M v. V 85,1.
wc m. V 84,11. VI 41,6.
\xxy v 24,19; 28,13; 31,19-22; 40,16; 42,8; 53,8; 59,17; 61,10.19; 72,12.
VI 3,22; 18,2.3; 22,8; 25,16.28; 26,6.26; 28,27; 29,33; 32,23; 34,22;
36,23; 37,i8; 38,28; 40,22; 41,22; 46,10.13.31; 59,112; 63,7; 68,17;
72,19. B G 8,15; 9,1; 130,4; 139,14-
A A g A C g m. VI 23,21; 32,8; 49,29.
A o i g e f.: A A e ig e v 28,19. VI 29,16. A a J g e v 28,27.
AO)JX2 m. VI 73,35.
A O i 6 e f . : F iT A o ( e ) i6 e R - V I 5,30; 6 ,[i].2 .[6 ].8 . H T A A e i6 e V 18,12.
V I 30,2.
M3t m. V 26,8.22; 34,17.24; 39,20.[22]; 45,22; 46,20; 53,5; 54,28; 59,20;

78,23; 79,12; 80,7.16.19.[28]; 81,12.22; 82,2.[i4], VI 1,32; 3,7; 6,21;
7,5; 16,10.11; 21,30; 27,16; 34,5.9; 4 8>I 7 ; 5 0 .3 3 ; 5 5 .3 1; 58,3; 5 9 ,4 -I9 ;
7 I>
3 3 ; 7 4 ,2 3 ; 7 5 ,io .ii; 77,16; 78,7-[7]-H-i2.15-2I- B G 10,15; 16,16;
17,9; 130,3; 131,2.8. B G 8,18; 129,18. MA. R c e o VI 2,10; 3,5. M i
COPTIC WORDS 503
F l o j e x e e T V I 35-1 1 - m a R q p c u n e V 25,18; 75,31. V I 27,16; 33,7;

36,26; 70,5; 71,32. M l FlgCDTff V I 44,1. KATA MA V I 13 ,13 .
M 6 v . ( l o v e ) V I 14 ,16 .17 :4 4 ,2 0 . M e p e - V 8 1,16 . M e p i T = * V I 15 ,19 ; 16,10.
M t lT M ie i ptUMG V I 1,2 2 ; 8,22. M fiT M ie iT O V I 3 1,2 1. M em . V I
64,6. M i e i e V I 61,2. M e p iT adj. v 49,8; 56,16; 57,[5].
H6 f. (truth) V 4 7 ,12; 6 5 ,13 ; 82,24; 83,14.[29]; 84,15; 8 5 ,11. V I 12 ,15 ;
14 ,21.22; 20,8; 42,29; 44,19; 54.6; 57.28; 70,8. M ie V I 32,4; 40,4; 53,
22. m R t m e V 85,14. g fj o y m R t m c V I 7,4; 9,18. n i m g V I 23,8;
66,10.
M O y v .V 47,25; 48,8. VI 2 1,3 2 ; 67,34; 7 1,15 ; 7 6 ,11; 78,[3], B G 7,22; 16 ,2 1.
M o o y r t V 20,10.20; 23,14 ; 48,[8]; 6 2,18; 6 5,15; 7 4 ,1; 76,19.30. v i
2 1,18 ; 4 1 , 1 1 ; 44,8; 71,20.22. M o y m. V 48,8; 63,6; 66,3; 67,14; 76,
17.20; 84,3. VI 16 ,13 ; 24,10; 26 ,31; 30,25; 59,20; 72,18; 76,[6],13;
77,25.27. k u ?5> M U M o y B G 16,8. p e q M o y VI 67,9; 68,5.6.29. a t -
M o y VI 3 5 ,14 ; 5 3 ,2 1; 55,28; 57,25; 60,22.25; 6 7,31.33; 68,4. e + FiAT-
M O y VI 68,5. M W T lT M O y VI 6 3 ,1 1; 67,16.30; 72,[l].28.
M o y e i m. V I 6,[5].7; 7,32; 49,34; 50,28.
M O y K j v. V I 29,2. M O K J V I 35,3. MOX2 B G 139 ,17.
MICAgv.: M O V I 27,23; 49,25. MK.a.2 m - V I 7 .i4 .p l. MKOOg V 27,28;
28,28; 30,14 ; 3 1,7 ; 32 ,18 ; 33,3. X i MICAg V 3 1,19 . R g H T v.
V 30,15; 3 1,8 ; 32,14. V I 30,30. m KA WgHT m. V I i7 ,[7 ].io .
MOKgC f. V I 78,28.38.
M o y x j V .: M O \2 ' V 32,8; 56 ,15; 5 7 ,11.17 . MAX* V 31,4.
M M eC f. e iM e .
HMIN M M O* V I 38,21. B G 7,6.
RMON V I 49,3. B G 7,2.
(m ) m W (negation of existence) V 28,6; 58,22; 84 ,11. V I 3,23.24; 2 5 ,15 ;
34,22; 36,5.23; 46,9.13; 5 9 ,1; 65,6; 7 2 ,11.19 ; 7 5 ,11.12 . B G 7,13. m R t I '
v 5i , [8]; 53,[26]. V I 4,7; 2 1,19 ; 26,26; 28,34; 40,9 ; 48,31; 50,23; 75,
19. B G 8 .3 . mHT6= V I 16,8; 18,27; 37,8 ; 53,22; 57,7; 58 ,12; 66,17.19;
74,12. Cf. also 6 0 M.
M AeiN m. V 77,2. *( M A eiN V 2 4 ,13 .18 ; 2 6 ,10 .12; 54,17.
MU negative imperat. prefix. V I 59,15. R ir p - V 29,7; 3 1 ,1 5 ; 32,18 .21.22;
50 .15; 72,23. V I 60,3; 78,21. B G 8,22; 9 ,2 .14 .15 .15 ; 15,16 .
MOyN V. V I 10,4. M H N + V 2 8 ,15; 29,6. V I 8,10. MOyN e B O X m. V I 64,28.
MMHNe V I 5,25; 5 1 ,2 1 ; 60,28; 78,[13].
M iN e f. v 25,23. VI 29,22; 37,1; 38,11; 50,30; 65,2; 66,1.3; 71,9; 72,35;
78,18.40. B G 17 ,17 . ~
MOO N e v . V I 32,34. MAN e e B O X m . V I 40,14. M O N e v . W ith e -V I 1,17 .
M OyNK m. (a form) V I 2,19.
H o y N K V. (cease): M O y N f V 67,25.
M flT p e m . V 2 0 ,22.26. p M R T p e V 7 1 , 22. M R T M fiT p e o y (pi.) V 21,22.
MITO nn.: 6BO) V I 19,23.
R n q j i v. V 20,18; 3 1,2 5 ; 4 3 ,[15 ]; 72,4- V I 10 ,23; 11,2 8 ; 38,23; 69,8.
MTTOJA m. V I 12 ,15 . MTTUÂ adv. V I 43,22; 50,3; 78,25. B G 9,6.
M O y p v .: M Apo V 4 1,13 . M H p t V I 2 ,13. MHP+ eOCR- V I 2,12 .14 . M O yp
m. V I 3,24; 7,23.
Hpo) f. V I 1,33; 2,[6].
504 INDICES
M p p e f. B G 17,3.
M e p iT Cf. M e (love)
M i c e v. v 79,11. v i 13,26; 3 1,18 . M ecT* v 80,4. M ic e m. v i 14,3.
M i c e m. V I 6,7; 8,[i]. 6 i N M i c e f. V 82,12. ^ o y M i c e V I 14,2.
M e c ic u f. V I 13,25.
M O C Te v. v i 1,4 ; 15 ,17 . M e c T e - V I 15 ,17 . MecTO>*> V 50,9. v i 13 ,11 ;
15 ,3 1; 16 ,1.9 ; 17,26. M O C T e m. V I 23,15.32. M 1 C T 6 m. V I 39,24.
M e C T ^ H T f. V I 2,23. M e C T H T V I 2,15.
MHT, M R t- cardinal number occurring in the following cardinal and
ordinal numbers. M A^ M HT V I 6,25. M 6 M H T e V 24,7; 36,21; 81,14.
B G 132,8. m a .m N T o y e V I 9,21. M e ^ M R T o y e v 81,24. m R t c -
N o o y c v 19 ,15 ; 2o,[2]; 2 1,12 ; 24 ,1; 25,[26]; 26,3.23; 36,[2].[3]; 42,
[2 1]; 73,26. V I 12 ,2 1. M e j M N T C N O O y C V 82,4-5. Me^MFlTCpOM-
T e V 8 2 ,11. M N T A q T e V I 46,27. m H t h V I 62,19. M flT C A a jq e V
37,[23]-
M o e i T m. v i 5,19 29; 6 ,1 1 ; 8,12. M o e i T Vi 12,7. x \ M o e i T v 45,7.
B G 138 ,1.
M iT e v .: M 6 T 6 v i 68,14; 69,6. *|* M e T e v 70,13. v i i,io . oy*|*
M 6 T 6 V I 5,14.
MM1T6 V I 30 ,15; 50,15. R M Te V I 69,14; 77,34.
M H T f. (middle) V 6 1,18 . V I 1,29; 7 ,13 ; 38,6; 50,22; 76,27. BG 7,18; 10,22.
M o y i e v. V 18,[20]; 24,14; 30,20; 3 9 ,[ 11]; 50,20; 60,12; 65,6; 70,14.18.
[24]; 72.6. V I 6,28; 7,20; 9,7; 10 ,3; 16 ,11.13 .14 .15 ; 20,7; 23,10; 59,6;
6 1,8 ; 75,16; 78,33. B G 7,16 ; 1 5 ,1 1 .
M T O m . : MTTMTO 6 B O A V 65,27; 66,16; 6 7,21; 7 1,7 ; 73,2; 74,9 (without
6 B O A); 83,20. V I 3 1 , 1 1 . B G 128,10; 130,5; 140,15. MTTeMTO V 71,
15.22; 73,3. R n e M T O e B O A V I 13 ,10 ; 3 0 ,11.
MTON MMO v. V 56,3; 70,[7]. V I 8,[6].33; 60,9. B G 138,17. K t o n
M M O fJN V I 47,25. M OTflt M H O * V I 22,[5]; 35,io ; 54,5. BG 129,
12 ; 130,7; 1 3 1 ,1 1 . MTON m. V I 28,34. X I MTON V I 35,16.
MOyTfJ v .: MOTN* ZP*-i V I 35.9-
M A y: R M i y V 3 1 , 1 ; 34,18; 61,20; 66,2; 76,2; 78,14.24; 80,17; 81,5; 82,8.
V I 28,34; 29,24; 3 2 ,3 1; 37,22; 46,16; 50,24; 53,16.23; 57,7; 59,33; 67,
28; 7 2 ,13 ; 73,30; 74,27.28; 75,12.20.26; 7 7,13.17. e M ay v 34,18.
c t R m a y V 34,24; 65,7.10.14; 6 6 ,5 .11; 69,22; 7 1 , 1 1 ; 72,2.7; 73,18;
74,22.30; 7 5 ,11.13 .16 .2 4 ; 76,5; 77,9; 79,12; 80,4.19; 80,28; 8 1,13 ; 82,3.
15 ; 8 3 ,1.12 ; 84,25. V I 1,3 2 ; 2,34; 3 ,15 ; 4 ,1.16 ; 5,22.27; 10.9; 21,30;
24,14; 25,20; 27 ,12 ; 28,7; 29,34; 32,22; 33,10.20; 36,33; 37,19; 43,6;
44,2 29; 4 5,3.17; 65,21.30; 70,30; 7 2,13; 7 7 ,13; 78,8.10. BG 9,10; 136,
12. e T M M e y V I 71,35.
M AAy f. V 18 ,17 ; 23,4; 35,8.16.19.23; 50 ,15 .2 1; 64,8.26; 6 5 ,3 .11; 66,[28];
67,4; 69,17; 78,4.22. V I 13,<20>.22.30; 23,26; 40,10.30. BG 132,15.17;
135,5-
M o o y m. V 60,3; 70, [6], 9; 78,5.17.26; 79,I9 [27]; 8o,9.20.[29]; 81,14.23;
82,4.10.17; 83,6; 84,8.18; 85,31. VI 6,[3]; 7,30; 29,9.21.23.31; 37,7;
38,20; 39,4; 40,5; 43,5; 6 3,18; 7 1,19 ; 73,32; 7 7,17; 78,37. M o y w zcD oy
VI 59,8. pi. M o y T e y e f l ^ t u o y V 69,3- pi- M o y e iH v i 37,35 177,22.
pl. M o y e i o o y e VI 29,13.34; 46,2.
COPTIC WORDS 505
MAY*.*.- VI 6,10. B G 18,4.

H e e Y v - v 31.10; 35,16; 52,10; 57,14; 76,21. v i 2,33; 13,4.6; 16,26.31;
28,4; 32,33; 33,24; 39,7; 65,10; 71,24; 72,32; 78,15. b g 18,3.3.4; 132,
5; 136,8; 140,5. M e ( e ) y e m. v 28,[24]; 39,4; 51,9; 65,24; 67,1; 84,24.
VI 25,6; 52,3; 55,11. B G 17,15. p n M e e y e v 30,7; 39,15- VI 14,11;
24,17; 52,12; 54,7. e i p e M n e - M e e y e b g 10,5. M R m M e e y e
V 28,14.
M eq ?e : m euÂK V I 65,12.
MH H e m. V 29,26; 30,27; 33,4; 4 5 ,9 [ i 7 ]; 51.16; 61,3; 70,[5]; 74,[26].
VI 11,8; 12,4. B G 128,3.5.8; 130,10; 131,9; 132,9; 138,11.
M iq je m. VI 51,6.
M o o q j e v. V 18,[21]; 21,[26].[30]; 22,1.11.15; 30,19; 42,12; 46,16; 52,
18; 55.10; 59,3; 64,9- VI 20,2; 32,3; 43,1; 56,32; 63,10. B G 128,14;
130,5. M o o u ^ e F I c a -(FJc c d -) V I 8,18:43,27. M o o q j e 2 FI-(iJ 2 h t *)
V 28,16. v i 33,9; 43,17. M o o c p e A- VI 27,14. M o o c p e A.x;tD =
V 20,5. M o o c p e e^pA'f VI 42,19.
M oyqjT v.: m a u j t * VI 76,32.
M OY 2 v - (fU1) VI 7 . 3 3 -3 4 -3 5 - MA- VI 9,21; 43,13; 47,2. B G 16,4. M e-
B G 15,10; 16,2.6.11. M 6 2 + V 84,13.14.16. VI 8,19; 56,10; 72,15; 78,
25.28.29. M H^t B O A FI- VI 60,13. M O Y 2 m - V I 74,23.24. Cf. also
o ya, c n a y . o j o m R t , q T o o Y , c o o y , C A q jq e , o j m o y n , 'I'i t ,
M HT.
H O Y 2 v - (look): M O Y 2 N C I - VI 2,17.
MAT m. V 62,4.11. MFlTqjA.NTMA.2T V 53,16.23.
R A O Y m. V 63,7. M 2 G O Y V 81,29.
MAAJCe ni. V 52,17; 60,8. B G 7,8; 8,10.
M O X j m- VI 2,13.
NAv. (pity) V 56,6.[7]; 59,8. VI 17,36; 4 7 .3 3 - NA m. VI 47,3. MAC m. VI

4,22. ( M f]TN A V I 33,27. U JA T M F lT N A e nn. VI 4,18.20.
NA v. (go) V I 6,21.
NAA v.: N A V 46,10. VI 69,7; 71,30.
N6 Cf. C N C .
Nei f.: *|* N H e ie v i 7,22.
N O Y v -: N H Y ^ VI 45,27. B G 16,14. N H o y t VI 42,21; 46,22. FI N H Y ^ V
71,10. H N H o y t V53,[2]; 69,19. VI 6,27; 15,5; 40,32; 47,3. N H oyt
BOA 2 R-(FI2 H T* ) V 48,6.12; 71,5. n N H y t u j A p o - VI 57,30.
FI N H O Y ^ U )A - V 46,23. FJ N HY^" GJCCD 89 V 83,8. FI N H O Y ^ X F l- V
74,30; 76,29. F IN H Y + e g O Y N V I 63,10.12; 70,22. f i N H y t 62PAY V
75,17.21. f i n h o y t e ^ p A 'f e j c t u * VI 63,30. f i n h o y * GZPxi
e T o o T * v i 19,13-
NOYB m. V 20,14; 21,14; 63 .II I7 - VI 2,13; 10,29.
NOB6 m. V 20,14; 21,14; 63,11.17. VI 19,17; 21,22. p N O B 6 VI 12,6; 77,
32. A T N O B 6 VI 19,16.
N AAK f. V I 13,27.
WlCA m. V I 5,23; 7,25; 10,16; 56,8; 78,17.
RICOt E v. V I 39.33- FIICOT V 65,24. FIICOT m. V 66,2.
5 o6 INDICES
NIM interrog. pronoun V 18 ,15 ; 25.22; 33,15.20; 36,7; 38 ,17; 49,19. V I 6,

20; 9,9; 2 0 ,15 .17 ; 42,4; 78,32.
NIM indefinite pronoun V 25,6.17; 26,22; 28,22; 29,21; 3 1,19 ; 38,20; 40,7.
20; 42,7; 55,[23]; 57,3.5; 59,6; 69,[6].9; 73,23.24; 75,4; 82,12; 83,24;
85,18. V I 5 ,14 .2 1.2 3 ; 7,25; 8 ,3 1; 9,29; 10 ,17.27; 1 6 ,10 .1 1; 18,18:20,29;
2 8 ,11; 36,8; 37,27; 39,22; 44,19; 50,26; 52,21; 53,[5]; 55.32; 56,8.32;
59,5.18; 62,21; 63,35; 64,25; 72,16; 73,16; 74,25; 75,10 .11.23.25.31;
78,28. B G 7 ,3 .3 .4 .11.19 ; 18 ,11. Cf. also o y o N NIM.
N1 MT6 f.: p e q - f NXM T6 V 30,24.
N0 6 1 N v. V I 45,30.
NOYN m. V 79,33. V I 46,3; 47,6.
M lN O y o V. V 55,7. V I 17 ,14 ; 24,5; 34,23; 48,20; 72,3; 73,22; 74,8; 75,
[5]. B G 13 8 ,13 ; 140,3.
N o y N e f. v 35,3.22; 40,[18]. v i 19 ,16 ; 22,30. b g 7,6.20.
N e c e v .: n e c o ) = V I 72,10.
N2k.Ta.T* v. V 8 3 ,11. B G 10,14.
N o y T C m. V 20,8; 24,30; 32,7; 4 1,[15 ]; 60,16; 62,16; 64,7.13.17.20; 65,
13 .17 .3 1; 66,14.20.25; 69,[4].7; 70,6.16; 7 1,16 ; 72,14.25; 73,9; 74,4.
[26]; 76,22; 77,4; 78,15; 8 1,16 ; 82,21; 83,13.21.[28]; 84,9; 85,4.15. VI
5 ,12 .13 ; 6,24; 9 ,12; 10,28; 16,25; 18 ,16 .17 ; 33,5.12.29; 35,2; 3 7 ,11;
39,7; 4 5,13; 55.14; 56,10; 59 ,13: 60,15; 62,29.32; 63,1.21.26; 64,2.19;
66,22.35.37; 6 7,12.16 ; 68,[1].2.[3].7.10.12.22.26.30.31.34; 69,10.16.23.
26; 70,21.26.29.35; 7 1,12 .16 .3 2 ; 72,10; 73,17.25.25; 74,12.15.29; 75,9;
76,23; 76,26; 78,11.20. B G 12 9 ,1.11.14 ; 13 0 ,15 .18 ; 137,2; 138,15; 139,
5 .11 .19 ; 140 ,6 .11. p N o y T e V I 68,33. M fJT N o y T e V I 6 1,17 ; 70,14.
16 .17 ; 7 I >7-3 3 ; 76,36- M i e i N o y T e V I 7 1,3 1. p R R N o y T e V I 66,5;
70 ,31; 72,20. A T N O yT G V I 16,24; 66,2. M fiT A T N O yT e V I 73,10.20.
fJTOK. pronoun V 18 ,16 ; 24,15; 27,9; 3 2 ,2 1; 35,23; 45,6; 5 1,18 ; 55,15.20.
22.24.f25]; 56,7 9; 63,12.22; 71,2.3. V I 10 ,15 ; n , 9 ; 45,J 2; 59,3; 61,15;
68,35; 69,29.30; 71,6.17. B G 137,4. f iT I K V 25,13. fjT K - V 18 ,15; 27,
8; 3 3,15.15.19 .20 ; 5 3 ,15 ; 55 ,17 ; 56,8. B G 18 ,11. FITGK- V 32,6.
H t o c pronoun V 35,17; 79,9. V I 31,25; 34,32; 66,10. B G 128,17; 130,8.
fJT lD T fj pronoun V 35,3; 58,1; 59,8.[12],14. V I 21,14. B G 7,14.
f l T O O y pronoun V 22,7; 54,14; 61,26. V I 1,20; 11,18.27.28; 33,4; 45,4.
B G 9,5.
RTOC] pronoun V 19 ,12 ; 3 1,3 ; 4 5,21; 58,2.6.7.8.14.17; 62,12; 78,22; 79,1.
V I 3,27; 8,30.31; 9 ,12.19 ; 13,32; 14 ,1.3.7 ; 24,26; 25,24; 26,7; 34,17;
37,5 ; 50,22; 62,29; 68,30; 75,18 ; 77,10.35. B G 1 o,[22].23.
N A y v. V 19,19.30; 20,1.5.7; 2i,6.[23].29; 2 2,2 .i4 .i7 .[25 ]; 23,21; 24,1;
3 1 , 1 1 ; 32,3.28; 43,9; 49,18; 5 1 ,1 ; 5 2 ,13; 54-x6; 58,[3]2 o ; 64,10; 65,
26; 67,19; 75,15; 77.I 3 I 5 - V I 2,20.25; 3 .2 i; 4.[5] [9]-26; 6,13.29.32.33;
15.5 9; 20,23.24; 22,20; 25,19; 36,24.25; 38,7.10.12; 4 7,21.31; 50,13.15;
57 ,6 .3 1.3 1; 58,5.6.8.13.16.31; 58,5.6.8.13.16.31; 59,27.29.32;60,32; 65,15.
17.38; 69,30; 77,[3]. B G 10 ,11.12 .15 .17 .18 .2 0 .2 3 ; 15,2.3.6.6; 16,3; 18,8;
12 8 ,12 ; 129,6; 13 1 ,1 6 ; 13 2 ,13 ; 13 6 ,15 ; 13 7 ,15 ; 138,8. a.N3k.y imperat. VI
2 1,1 2 ; 43,3. e N A y imperat. V 19 ,11.2 8 :2 4 ,12 :5 9 ,17 . V I 13,5; 37,24. N a y
B O A V 44,6; 46,21; 47,20; 75,15. V I 22,28; 28,13. A. TNAY V 58,15.
NA.y m. V 21,6. V I 2 8 ,11; 47,8. B G 17,4; 13 6 ,11.
COPTIC WORDS 507
N o o y g e v.: n o y o y z * VI 40,2. n o o y ?* VI 40,22.

N A q je v .: N i y e - VI 5,26; 10,30; 13,23.24; 14,11.12.13; 16,7.23.25; 19,
24; 44,25. N A U )0)* VI 21,22; 28,31; 29,31; 30,1; 65,13.
NOY<pn v. v 50,16. v i 9,2.
Fiq jO T V.: NAOJT+ V 59,1. VI 49,25. R U )O T m. VI 19,27. f j o j a T m. VI
15.26. N A U )T nn. VI 14,30.
N e e q m. V I 1,19.
n i q e v .: n i q e W c a - VI 1,27. n i q e V 6 4 . 2 8 . V I 37,10. n i q e e g o y N
e- V 66,21. n 1q e m. V I 69,34.
N o q p e f.: p N O Y p e v 52,8. VI 50,20.23.25; 51,12. BG 131,5.14.
NA<>TJ f. VI 3,23; 7,16.
n o y 2 r v : VI 39,7. n a ^ h ^ e b o a V 62,17; 63,5.10.13.23.
N e g n e m. v i 78,30.
NA2 PW_: W N Agpfl- VI 65,29. FtNA2PA V 66,12. VI 65,33.
N e g c e v. VI 40,1.
NA2 T 6 V. V 42,16. VI 6,16.18; 10,5.34; II.2 4 - N A g T e m . VI 7,17.24; 8,11;
10,7. A T N A ^ T C VI 65,34. H R T A T N A ^ T e V 29,22. e t N N A T N A T 6
VI 68,36; 69,31.
NOY^C: M W TN O Y.X V 77,25.
NOY-Xe v. V 39,21; 41,21; 81,28. VI 29,21; 30,[10].29; 78,36.37. N6JC-
VI 18,2; 29,20. NO.X* V 47,[26]. NOJC- e - VI 24,[7]. NO*** BO A
e R - v 71,12; 78,21. B G 18,12. N O Y -x e eacW- V 70,8; 75,9. nox *
ejcw - VI 12,16. N o y x e b o a V 27,3; 40,14.19; 42,[22]; 59,24.
n o y - x g e n e c H T v 61,23.25; 81,18. n o j c * e n e c H T V 21,18.19.
NOJ( e^PAT A- V I 15,13; 23,13. N O Jt* MW-VI25.3I. NO.X-
-V I 35,10. NOJC * e n C A R tTITTJ V I 77,7. n HJC+BG 129,4. n mt'fr
e b o a v i 15,3.7.10.
n o 6 V 22,2.18; 28,12; 32,10; 45,12; 51,5; 53,12; 57,19; 64,15.30; 65,5.8;
66,10; 69,20; 71,10.13; 72,11; 73,19; 74,1.5; 75.2.7.18.21; 76,1.10; 77,8;
82.27.f28]; 83,9; 85,3. V I 1,21; 6,17.29; 8,4.32; 14,34; 17,23; 21,8; 26,11;
27,24; 31,6; 32,24; 36,3.17.27; 38,14.16; 40,27; 41,13; 43.28; 45,4.8;
48,14; 49,19; 69,6.35; 73,32; 75,36; 76,4.22.23; 77,9.12.16.19. B G 131,
19; 136,15. n a 6 VI 36,2.15. m Wt n o (J V I 17,32; 39,9; 56,16. B G 9 ,19.
mWt n a 6 VI 17,29.
no y 6 c v .: p e q N O Y ^ c b g 16 ,12 ; 18,8.
O VI 56,19 (5 times); 61,11 (5 times).

O VI 59,7.17.
o b Cf. e iB e .
o e i K m. V I 4,20; 5,28.31; 19,31. B G 141,3-
O H 6 nn. V 28,16. VI 29,16.
o e m f. VI 29,21.28; 30,4; 31,14.
ON V 34,15.18; 45,18; 47,7; 56,9; 62,7; 76,8. VI 24,31; 27,6; 28,6; 33,16;
40,15; 68,27.30; 69,31. B G 7,5; 131,8. AN V I 71,11.
o c e m .: -I* o c e V I 32,29.
n e f. V 19,24.[25]; 20,6.11.17; 2 I ,I9 .[2 4 ].[2 8 ]; 2 2 ,3 .i3 .i9 [2 4 ].2 8 ; 23,30;

24,4.6.7; 26,17; 39,23; 4 1*1 2 ; 55,28; 56,18; 58,5; 7 0 .3-i4.t24]; 78,1.13;
5 o8 INDICES
79,22.25; 80,12. VI 22,6; 29,14; 45,10; 47,33; 63,17; 70,[5]. 6.7.19;

71,14; 72,20; 73,16; 75,10.12.15; 76,28; 77,8.14. B G 15,4; 16,1.3; 17,3.
pi.
TTHye V 56,[19]; 78,2. VI 7,19; 26,30; 33,29- pi- TTH o ye V 29,11;
55,25. VI 22,9; 25,31; 41,8; 42,31. Cf. also CA.
TTGl f.: -f* TTI V 31,4; 32,8; 56,14.
TTCUa3 V.: TTCUA5 6 B O \ VI 7 7 .2 6 .
TTCDCUNG v. V 74,25. TTCDNG VI 39,11; 45,16.
n p p i G v ^ n p p i c u o y t e^ paJ exaj* V I 35,17. n e p e p A c o y V I 40,1.
TTcupqj v.: n o p ^ t VI 63,35.
TTCUpX V. V 25,15; 81,3. TTOPX** 6 BOA ?Fi-(Fi2 HT**) V 23,4^117,36.
T TO p X t VI 22,20.
'I'IT cardinal number: ^ I T G V 81,2. M A ^ I T G VI 53,26. MA^TTITG V
25,5. M Ge'I'ITG V 81,[I]. MG^TTCITG V 24,4. M Ag'l'GITG V I 52,5.
ITG B G 136,11.
TTCUT v. V 64,29. B G 131,7. TTCUT N C I - V 38,5; 41,23; 50,[10]; 84,26. V I
27,30; 29,26. TTCUT WCCU** V I 13,9; 16,16. TTCUT G g O y N V I 26,19;
32,10. TTCUT e ^ P ^ T V I 21,28; 70,19; 71,13. T T H T + N C I - V I 31,20.
T T H T + e n c l . V I 28,23. n H T + G g p A T G T T C A f l g p G VI 7 7 .6 -
t t c u u j v. V 26,21. t t g u j - V 72,15. t t o o j * V 72,20.B G 141,4.
t t c u v.: t t c u u jA .-fq jA .p o * * ) V 66,6. V I 55,16; 56,5. p qj p n R t t c d ^ V I
56,27. T T H + (O JA p O * * ) V 55,14. V I 56,24; 64,20; 56,25; 64,20.
T T A ^ p e n n . V I 8,16.19; 10,32; 11,23; 22,27; 27,32; 28,12; 30,17-33- F TTA^pe
V I 8,34; 10,33; 11,12.17.19. B G 128,6.
T T C U T v.: TTAT** G.XF1- V I 9,19.
TTAOy m.: GTTAÔy B G 139,14
t t g - x g - V 25,10; 26,2.5.13.16; 27,<13); 28,5; 29,3.13.19; 30,9; 31,14; 32,
16; 38,12.[23]; 40,[4].9; 41,19; s0.^- B G 7,2.10.13; 10,1; 15,1.16;
130,11.18; 131,12. n exA ** v 25,12; 27,18; 32,[28]; 50,11; 66,16; 78,
14; 82,25. VI 2,34; 3,[i]; 4,7.30; 5,[7].15; 6,14.22; 7,[3]-6; 8,21.26;
9,1.10.14; 10,14.22; 11,6; 12,14; 48,25.30; 50,19; 52,6. B G 9,14; 10,7.
10.13.16; 15.5; 16,17; 17,10.16; 18,1.6; 129,9; 130,2. nAê< VI 52,25.
pA m .: A jrp A B G 9,23; 17,12.16.

pH m. V 21,13; 22,29. VI 42,15; 46,5; 62,18; 75,30.
p o m. V 50,7; 55,7.11. VI 6,24; 32,11. B G 135,3. P<V<*
V 31,5; 32,8; 56,
15. VI 22,24; 2 9 ,9 . ip c u * VI 8,7; 35,5. KApCD** V 63,30. VI 15,32.
3 3 ; 33.2i; 59,14; 60,2; 76,18. B G 17,8. HA- Flpcu** V 36,14; 59,19.
KAPAGIT+ VI 58,24.26; 59,21. KApCDq m. VI 14,9; 56,12; 58,20;
5 9 ,2 2 .
pcu VI 3,27; 5,[6]; 6,11.15; 11,29; 62,30.
p i K G V.: p A K T * * V 73,8. p G K T * * VI 31,13-
PCUKJ v. V I 40,12.15.18.22; 46,31. pOK.2" VI 36,6; 73,33. PAK 2 ^ VI
46.30.
pi MG v. V 32,14. VI 32,19; 71,22.27. B G 9,6.14; 18,1; 131,9- pi MG m. VI
78.30. B G 136,6. p R c i H f.: pi. p R G I O O y G V 32,25. *) pRGIH V
36,[18].
pCUM Gm . V 22,[25]; 29,23; 43,19; 46,[1]; 61,17; 65,7.16.27.34; 66,5.10;
67,18; 69,12.22; 71,6.11.24; 72,2; 73,16.18; 74,6.8.12.21; 75,2.11.24;
COPTIC WORDS 509
76.4: 7 7 .6 .9 1 7 ; 83,1.11; 84,25; 85,9. VI 2,1.11.18.[33]; 3,31; 4,2.19;

5,[2].7.2i; 6,33; 7,7; 8,29.30.34; 18,18; 25,8; 29,33; 33.20; 34,3; 37,26;
39,3; 40.26; 43,9; 44,17; 45,2.17; 49,35; 50,12.19.21.29; 51,15; 56,[1];
60,21; 64,20; 66,15.24.27.31.37; 67,2.22; 68,1.4.6.11.11.13.22.23.27; 69,
5.15.19.23.26; 70,[1]; 72,8.22.26.26; 73,7; 75,31; 76,13.26; 78,9.20.39.42.
B G 8,18;9,9.20; i8,i6;[i34,19]; 137,19. M N T p cD M e V I 52,9. M R T H l-
e ip t U M e VI 1,22; 8,22. M NT- OJACpCDM e VI 3,26. MRTCACppOD-
H VI 11,31. M F iT ^ A y p e p C D M e VI 31,5. T^ A TB pC D M e B G 16,15.
p M eiH Cf. p iH e .
pMMAO V 47.C7]: 52.10. VI 3,14; 11,26; 12,5. B G 132,11. M f l T p M M A O
vi 10,27; n . 3 1 ; 15 ,1; 26,9.
p o M n e f. v 36,[22]; 37,24; 64,4; 67,26; 72,8. v i 36,12; 38,28; 43,20; 46,
28. B G 132,9.
pMge nn. V 48,17; 59,4.
pAN m. V 18,7; 24,24; 32,2; 46,26; 55,27; 65,7; 72,6; 77,19; 83,6. VI 1,30;
2,[2]; 5,916.17; 6,16.21.23.34.35; 9,4.7.10.13; 10,6.26; 11,1; 12,12; 14,
15; 1 9 ,3 3 ; 20,32.33; 21,9.11; 36,16; 61,9; 62,13; 63,36. B G 129,1; 139,3;
140.17. epFi- V I 6,20. 'I' p AN V 27,12; 37,6; 85,12. VI 53,13. pfiT*8
V I 7,7. AT"|' p A N V 24,20.22.
p n e m. VI 34,8.14; 61,19; 70,9.34; 78,17. e p n e V 61,22.
ppo m. V 49,2; 56,5. VI 8,32. p p p o V 56,4; 71,3; 74,21. VI 45,8; 78,19.
A T p p p o V 82,20. M flT p p O V 73,27.29; 74,16; 76,25; 77,28; 78,6.18.
27; 79,20.28; 80,10.21; 81,1.15.25; 82,5.11. VI 7,11; 45,26; 55,25. B G
8,22:9,9; 16,9. M N T p p O N N TTH ye V I 7,19. pi. M N T p p A C I V I 15,9.
p o e i c v. VI 25,25; 62,5. B G 140,9. p o e i c oyBH s* VI 30,7.
P A C T m. V 25,8.
PAT* VI 40,9. A T N p A T ^ V I 35,7. A T N p e T * > VI 26,25.
POJT V. V I 51,23.
P H T 6 m. V I 2,26; 3 ,1 1 ; 4,29; 7,25; 9,33; 11,13.32 ; 24,32; 67,7.
p o o y q j v.: 0 + R p o o y q j V I 1,8. q i (F i)p o o y q j V 28,10. V I 6,4; 10,19.
qi p o o y q j m. VI 51,18. H H T A T p o o y q j v i 8,5.
PAO}: p M p AOJ VI 24,27.
pAOê v. V57,I9. V I 4,34; 29,19; 30,[9]; 58,31; 5 9 ,[I]; 64,15.16.17. B G
130.17. pAO>e j c n - VI 57,28. pAqpe e g p a J .x c d VI 24,29.
pAqpe m. V 57,19- VI 8,4.
p o y g e m. VI 8,25.
pcDgT v. VI 29,6. pcugT e n i T N - VI 77,23. p c u T e g p A T VI 32,26.
ptu^T e-xFi- V I 77,21. pA2T=VI 29,7. p a ^ t** n jp a T 2 ^ " V I 30,2!.
a m . B G 8,17; 129,4.5; 135,7. c a R n i T F i VI 77,7. C A ( fi) T n e V 48,18;

59.5; 75.26. v i 28,24. 16,3; 17,3. c a Figpe VI 20,19; 77,7^ c a
H 2 Y n VI 20,19.22.24; 27,25; 29,29; 32,5; 69,24. C A Fi^CDTTT VI
43,23; 44,14; 75,30. R C A 2 HT* V I 1,9. F iC A -(R C O ) *) V 23,5; 24,19.
27; 25,8; 67,9; 84,27. VI 1,30; 27,8; 32,21.23. B G 17,22; 132,16. 6BO A
H C A - V 47,10. M FI 7I C A V 19,8; 29,14.16.20; 30,1.17; 53,5; 65,9.21;
67,22; 69,19. V I 1,26; 6,26; 18,8; 42,18; 43,12; 61,4; 66,37. m H S c c u c
v 57,15. VI 28,6; 30,34; 31,31; 52,4; 77,32. B G 138,16. R C A T (0 )0 T
V 42,[20]; 45,23. Cf. also BCDA.
5io INDICES
C A V .: C A i e nn. V I 2 ,18 ; 31,4. C A fH adj. B G 128,19. M N T C A d e VI

32,7; 47,16.
t C O v. V 57,23.23.
C cardinal number V I 46,28.
Cl v . : C l V I 44,27.
CO) V .: CO) 6 B O \ N- V I 40,29. H NTCA-Y- V I 24,15.
C i.B C V I 72,23. C 1 B H f. V I 15,30. h R T C A B H BG 16,10. C B O y e i m. VI
8,17. c B c u f. V 85,17. V I 44,19; 64,7. pi. C B O o y e b g 17,14. *j* cbco
V I 10,4.15.26; 34,20; 44,16; 7 1,3 3 ; 7 3 ,1 1; 74,36. XI CBCD V 56,1; 65,
15. V I 16,28; 19,27; 20,27. ATCBCD V I 16,28.
C H B C f. V 60,3.
C O ) B e v. V I 3 ,3 1; 15 ,12 ; 58,32. B G 129,9; 132,7. CODB m. V 60,21. VI
65.33; 72,32.
C B B 6 m. V I 45,19- M S T l T C B B e V I 45,21.
C B O K V.: CA.BCK+ V I 17,27.
C l BT f . : C l B 6 T V I 78,35.
C O B T C v. V 24,30. V I 1,18 ; 19 ,3 1; 36,26. B G 140,2. CBTCDT> V 21,20.
V I 13,34 ; 4 I >3 ; 43,9- B G 9,19. CBTA.T+ V I 47,17.
CCD K V. V I 3 1,15 .2 3 ; 50,32; 77,22. CCD K e X < D * V I 29,9- CCDK C JO yN
V 84,19. CCDK HT* A^ O yN V I 73,8. CCDK CgpAT - V I 33,13.
CCDK e n i T N - V I 46,14.
C K O p K p v. V I 78,34.
CACDA v. V I 8,35.
C O A C A m. V I 13,27.
C A i i T 6 V I 65,1.
CCDA.5 v .: CCDACX V I 46,4.
CMH f. V 60,9; 6 1,13 ; 83,9; 84,4.10. V I 2,30; 3 ,14 ; 4 ,[i]; 14 ,12 ; 20,32.32;
73,16 XI CM H V I 19,35.
C M O y v. V 18,16. V I 18 ,2 1; 59,23; 60,12; 61,8; 64,2. B G 9,19. CMAMAAT+
v 23,3. c m o y m. v 4 2,[17]; v i 55,4; 57,10; 60,9.14.18.
C M I N 6 V. V I 17,23. C R N- V I 72,38. C R NT* V I 45,26; 73,13. C M O N T t
V I 66,8.9.
C M O T m. V 54,20; 59,2. V I 66,19; 72,14; 78,14. C M 1 T V I 76,32. o t RTT6-
C M O T V I 8,15.
CA.CIN m. V I 8 ,15 ; 11,16 .18 . p CACIN V I I I , I I . m H t c a c i n V I 9,31.
CON m. V 2 4 ,14 .15 .15 ; 46,22; 48,22; 50,12.12.17.23. V I 2,35; 3,[2].9; 23,15.
22; 52,28. B G 18,2. pi. C N H y V I 3,6; 24,18. B G 9 ,i4 ; 1 7 ,1 1 ; 140,7. pi.
c N H o y V i 2 3 ,1 1; 53,8.27.29; 54,21. c c d n e f. v i 13 ,3 1. b g 10 ,1; 137,9.
c i n e v. V 39,8; 52,19; 76,8.
CRCFI v. V I 2,30.
CCD NT v. (be created) V I 56,8; 59,34; 69,15. p e q e c D N T V I 63,21. CCD NT
nn. V 23,27; 45,22; 53,[4l-
CCD NT V. (look): CO N T+ 6 B O A HT* V I 45,5-
CNA.y cardinal number V 20,29; 24,24; 32,16 ; 37 ,[14 ]; 47,20; 64,23; 82,7.
V I 24,13. B G 10,22. MA^CNA-Y V I 5 ,4 - MC^CNA-Y v 2 1,3; 3>26-
M e ^ C N T C V 78,6. B G 16,6. MA^flAICDN C N A Y V I 43,13. MA6AM
C N T V I 47,2. R n ( e ) C N A Y V I 55,9. B G 13 7 ,11. C N T S VI 67,33.
Cf. also m h t , c o n , q jB .
COPTIC WORDS
C i i H Oj V. VI 51,20. C A N QJ- V 50,18. C A N 6(9 VI 39,12. C A N O y q ) V

78,1.12.23; 79,13.15; 80,5.25; 81,10; 82,2.7. V I 51,18.
C N o q m. V 43,18; 83,23; 84,13. V I 65,6; 71,19; 78,29.
CCDN? V.; C N A 2 m. V 27,5. pi. C N A O y g V 59,14.
c o n m. V 22,30^5,17; 76,9. VI 32,15; 71,11; 7 3 .3 1 -3 3 -3 4 ; 77.21.22. B G
131,4; 132,19. MTTICOTT VI 11,5. R KeCOTT B G 131,4. RTTM CJ C6TT
( c o n ) C N A y VI 11,2; 71,26. T o y c o n V 40,6.
c e e n e m. VI 30,23; 49,9.30; 72,29. B G 10,3.
COTTCTF v. VI 60,19. CeTTCTT- B G 131,10.
ccu p v . V62,I. C p - V I 5,12. c o p * C B O A V I 31,10. CH p + 6 B O A V I 29,5.
CCUpM V. V 62,7.
c p q e VI 60,9.
C O J T v . (repeat) V I 2 1 , 3 1 .
CO)T nn. B G 139,3-
CATC f. V I 40,10; 77,18.
CIT6 V.: CAT* V 79,22. p e q C I T e VI 60,23.
C CUT C V. V 25,20; 36,9; 76,15. C C U T e m. V 24,12; 25,9.20; 29,8.13; 33,1.
p e q c c u T e V 55,15.18.
C T O e i m. VI 29,26. p c f BCDCDN VI 66,22.
C C U T R v . V 21,15; 24,19; 25,24; 30,14.22; 31,6; 32,24; 46,11; 48,25; 49,12;
51,15.17.23; 52,16; 57,15; 60,1.9; 64,5; 66,3.9; 72,19. VI 3,14-32; 4.15;
5.4; 13.7; 19,25; 20,26; 34,1.4; 38,29; 65,37; 66,35; 76,21; 77,34. B G
7,9; 8,11; 128,13; 136,17. C O T M = B G 10,6. C C D T R m. VI 13,12; 19,
21; 20,29. p e q c < U T R VI 13,7.
C T M H T nn.: M f l T C T M H T VI 15,17.
COJTTT v. V 82,21. VI 71,5. COTTT* V 77,12; 83,2. VI 24,13. B G 17,22.
C O T T f t V 19,17. VI I0,Ii; 56,16. CATTT't VI 68,2.
C A T e e p e f. v i 4,21.
CTCDT v. VI 15,27.
C H O y m. VI 9,29.
C l o y m. VI 46,4; 73,15; 75,12.
c o y o m. VI 25,13.14.16.19.
C O y e N m .: C O y N T * VI 10,30.
C O O y cardinal number V 72,8. M C^ C O V 22,13.19.21.; 23,29. M e g C O C
V 79,28. B G 16,10.
C O O y N v. V 18,9.14; 26,7; 31,8; 51,8.10; 54,21.21.26; 58,[1]; 64,19; 66,
19; 85,2.14.18.25. v i 4,18; 6,15; 9,6; 10,25; 11,15; 14,23; 17.21-22;
i 8.[5]-7[8]-3i ; 20,28; 24,24; 32,35; 33,28; 34,13; 40.27; 68,8.10.12.
BG 10,2.5; 18,13; 139.11. p <ppn N c o o y N V I 26,24. c o y c u N V i
4 5 .3 - C O y C D N - V 19,13; 4 >l 8 ; 53.22; 59,19; 65,17.28; 67,2; 83,12. VI
8,29; 9,3; 10,24; 17,3 J ; 36,3 27.30; 5 7 -10; 7 3 .1 5 - c o y c u N V 36,[11];
4 7 .[1 6]; 56,[22]; 57,6. V I 8,20; 9,14; 14,25.25; i8,[i].34; 40.28; 41.
19.22; 46,7; 47,14; 64,14.22.22.24.25.27. BG 15,8.19.20; 137,9. c o o y N
m. V 67,7; 72,9. V I 14,26; 18,11; 24,21; 26,18.24; 3 3 .3 - X I C O O y N
VI 22,30; 31,28; 32,2.9; 35,2.7. p A T C O O y N V I 13,15; 14,32; 18,29.32;
70,10. p A T C A y N e V I 13,13. o t R N A T C O O y N VI 33,4; 34,5. e t
f l N A T C O O y N V I 65,32; 70,3; 76,18.20. M f i T A T C O O y N V 28,9. VI
14,27; 26,23; 28,8; 31,6.16.24; 34,27; 66,14; 76,5- 15,12; 16,7.20.
512 INDICES
c o o y T f l v.: c o y t n - V 57,20. c o y t c u k - V 57,12; 59,26; 62,13. c o y -

t n - b o a VI 9,22. c o y r f i m. VI 8 , 2 6 . o y c o o y T R VI 12,9.
c c u o y e ( e e o y N ) v .B G 128,3. c e y e - V l 36,14. co o y z- efl VI 36,22.
cooyz* e ^ o y N VI 16,19.
c o e i u ? m. v 36,4. v i 65,28.
c c u q j v.: ca.qj= V 41,22. VI 66,22. q j o c * VI 16,27. o j h c + VI 13,17;
70.17. c a o j nn. VI 66,19. q jc u c m. VI 18,23; 32,12; 39,25. ( c cd u j
V 71,20; 77,3. xi ccuqp V 54,[5]. H R T q j A c p c u H e VI 3,26.
C lU j e m. V 25,16; 40,15.
c c u q j T v.: c o q j T t B G 129,5.
CA.q?q cardinal number V 22,[3o], VI 36,11; 63,19. C A .q jq e V 26,4; 38,
[16]. B G 16,4.12; 16,12. M e ^ c i u j q e v 22,[24].28; 23,[29]; 80,9.
B G 16,11.
C A q m.: FiCA q VI 52,2.
c cu cu q v. B G 137,7. c o o y t V 73,24; 84,14. ccu cu q nn. BG 135,12.
c i v - V 23,20. VI 27,20. c e ^ T - VI 75,26.
c o o ^ e v . V 21,8; 28,8; 30,2; 42,21; 54,6. CA^ e- V 28,9. c a ^ cd * V 28,1.
c a ^ co - epAT*= e x F i- V I 73,28.
C2AT v. V I 62,13.22; 6 5 ,11. B G 139,2. CA.ei V I 36,16. CA^*8 V 44,16.
VI 60,16; 61,19.26.28; 65,8.10. câT*8 V 36,23. czht *
V 36,24.
CH^t" VI 63,4. C 2 H O Y T + V 85,6. CÂT m. VI 20,34; 21,12; 36,15;
37,15; 61,20. c ^ A e i m. VI 62,15. c ^ e e i m. VI 61,30. c a j nn- VI
59.18. CA.2npA.N<p ( n p A e iq j) VI 61,20.30; 62,15.
c f l M e f. V 34,4; 35,[12]. 13; 37,11; 38,17.19; 44,21; 70,21. VI 13,19; 23,
n ; 65,19.22.24. B G 10,3; 17,19; 18,9; 132,17- P1- ÎOM V 70,[11].
22. VI 18,19; 62,8. M R T C ^ lM e V 24,27.28.29; 41,17.
CCD^n v.: C A ^ ff* VI 29,8.
ca . N Cf. o y e ? cxz Ne.
c A . o y v - VI i 5,24; 17.33
c o u x e v. V I 26,20.
C 0)6 v. B G 1 3 5 .9 - C H 6+ B G 129,4.
c c 6 h f .B G 16,10.
T A e i o v. VI 17,34; 20,9. TAeio** VI 53,9; 72,22. T A .e iH o y t VI 5,32;

18,21. t a g i h o y T + VI 7,11. t a T h o y T + V 45,25. t a g i a 6 i t + V I 13,
17; 64,1. TA.6IO m. VI 56,17.
*J*v. V 23,23.25; 24,[24]; 25,16; 26,27; 58,10; 60,14.18; 71,1; 74,27. VI 1,12;
4.!9; 5,7; 9.30; 10,8.9.11.31; 22,26; 37,29; 53.30; 55,32; 57.24: 58,7;
59,8; 65,31; 69,36.37. B G 128,16; 141,2. +- V 21,13; 26,10; 55, 27. VI
48,11. B G 9,2; 19,10; 130,17; 135,10; 140,17. TAA*8 V 36,25; 63,15;
79,8; 85,24. VI 4,8.14.33; 10,12.21; 22,24; 27,31; 28,11; 32,17:37,16.25;
45,13; 46,25. B G 137,3. M l BO A imperat. VI 25,18. MA.TOy.xe- im
perat. VI 57,23. ma*|* imperat. VI 9,27; 56,23; 5 7 .3 -5 - TO+ VI 32,5. f
S T O O T 88 V 84,21. VI 32,16; 41,16.28. T+ 6 TO O T* V 84,12. *j*
T O O T 88 N C I- B G 130,4. *f* oyB H VI 28,32; 62,27. *|* 5 1 a V
2.[25]; 56,8. V I 44,23. B G 18,16. *( fiC D - V 28,21. T O J ltD t O '
V i 32,7. T o e t ^ icdcu* V 58,22. VI 9,16. e^ oyN zM
n eq ^ H T
BG 136,i.*j* B O A VI 4,3; 5,7:40,4. B G 139,10. Cf. also e o o y , KA'j',
COPTIC WORDS 513
MACIN, H 6 T 6 , M O eiT , MftTNA, N H 6 I , O C , PAN, CBO),

o y o ) , o y o e i , c p i n e , q?A .xe, o j 6 a , g o , ^ att , gH T, 6 o m .
TO m. V 40,11.
T o e ^ v. C f . '('.
T o e f.: m H t m i e i t o R g o y o V I 3 1,2 1.
TBA m. cardinal number V I 32,15.
t b b o v. VI 36,7; 46,24. T o y B a .** vi 36,20. T o y B A .e iT + vi 63,6.
T o y q H o y t V i 75,13. t b b o m. V I 62,31. t o y b o V I 47,30.
TBNH f.: pi. T B N O O y e V 70,12.[23]. M RTTBN H V I 24,22.23; 39,9.
TBT m. V I 29,24.33; 30,3.6.
T O J B e c v. V 22,9.
TO)B^ V.: p e q T O J B j V I 4,29.35.
TA K O V. V 43,20; 67,5; 69,6; 76,23; 83,16. V I 34,15; 43 . 25 - T 1 K 6 - V [69,8].
T l K O V I 40,16; 77,24. T A K O m. V 41,15; 46,18; 60,21. B G 135,13;
137.4 - T 6 K O m. V I 76,14. 1 T T 1 K O V 35,6; 36,8; 41,16; 76,7; 85,28.
V I 60,17.
TKTO V.: T K T - V I 76,31. Cf. also KTO.
TAAO V. V I 44,28. T A A - V 4 0 ,11. T A A H O y T t V I 2,15.
T 6 A H A V. V 84,17. B G 15,9 ; 130,10.
TO)AM m. V 2 8 ,13 .17 ; 48,13. V I 39,29.
TA*J*AC f. V 79 ,21; 8 0 ,11.17 ; 81,20.
T A A 6 0 V. B G 129,6. t a 6 o V I 70,1. T A A 6 e - V I 11,2 5 . t a a 6 o m. V I 1 1 ,
22; 66,17.19. t a 6 o m. V I 66,10.
TO)H v. V 60,7. V I 46,21. TO)M FlgH T m. V I 3 3 ,13 .18 ; 34,24.
TAMIO v. V 6 5 ,[3 I]; 66,26; 71,19- V I 38,29; 69,24. T A M I6 - V 3 5 ,13 ; 58,
[4]; 66,20. V I 66,36; 67,32; 68,26.31.34; 69,26. TAM I O V 34,5.15;
54 ,13; 60,17; 64,6.17; 65,18; 66,15.26. V I 2 1,10 . TAMIO m. V I 67,2.
TAMO v. V 18 ,[7]; 49,14. B G 19,[2]. TAMA- B G 10,8. TAM 6 - V 64,2; 85,
21. TAMO* V 56,2; 64,12. V I 4 ,[4 ].13; 5,20; 8,27. B G 7,10. MATA-
MO imperat. V I 4,8.
T M A 6 I O V. V 29,4; 40,10.
TCDMC V. V 28,18.
TO)MT v .: TO)M NT V I 76,30.
i*NO Y Cf. T C N O y .
TO) N V 2 3 ,2 .11; 34,16. V I 9,6; 10,20; 75,35. TO V I 37,25. BOA TO) N V
3 3 ,15 ; 77,23.24. TO )N B G 15 ,14 ; 16 ,15 . JCIN TO)N B G 16,14.
TO )N O y: TO NO) V I 65,9.
TANO Cf. TN NO.
T H N 6 m. V I 71,21.
TH N pronoun V I 15,20; 18 ,14 ; 2 0 ,14 .15 .16 .16 ; 40,2; 65,10 .12. T H y T fi
V 50,18; 6 6 ,21; 72,20; 84,21. V I 4 ,3 1; 17 ,19 . TH N o y V 59,15-
TNOOM m. V I 77,18.
TN NO V.: TANO m. V I 17 ,12 .
TWNOOy V. V I 4 5 ,1; 57,20; 66,24. T U N O O ys* V 63,26. V I 66,27.29.
TONTfl V.; tR T O JN V I 54,10; 78,21. tH T O JN ^ V I 49,3 ; 68,29; 7 2 ,1 1;
78,7. T O N T fl m. V I 69,25.
T e N o y Cf. o y N o y .
T R g m. V 6 1,2 1.
33
514 INDICES
TANÔ V.: T A N Ô * V 62,19.

T A N ^ O Y T V .: T t lZ O y T * V I 78,24. B G 139,7
T i n m. V I 43,23.
T o r n m. V 3 1,1.
'j'TTe f. (loins) V I 2,12.
'j 'n e f. (taste): x i " f n e V I 30 ,15; 3 1,2 5 ; 40,3.
THP<* v 19,2.5; 20,19; 24,5; 26,19; 2 7 ,11.12 .16 ; 36,10; 45,26; 49,[7]; 52,
12 ; 55,22; 6 1,2 .12 ; 62,6; 6 3,12.18 ; 70,5; 72,16.22; 73,6; 74,15.19.19.26;
76,18; 77,21.27; 82,22; 83,4.7.28.[30]; 85,9. V I 10,5.33; 15,26; 21,13;
25,21.23.26; 26 ,15; 28,8; 31,6.8; 3 2 ,12 ; 36,14; 37,13.29; 38,2; 39,9;
40,13.20; 4 1,5 ; 4 5,9 .10.31; 46,22.30; 47,12.14.23.25.34; 49,5.9.11.13.24.
30; 5 0 ,10 .31; 51,8; 5 5 ,12 .12 ; 56 ,[1]; 57 ,17 .21.2 3; 58,12.18; 59,1934;
62,30; 69,7.21; 70,7.16.18.32; 7 1,14 ; 72,8; 74,23; 75,8.20; 76,35; 78,3.
B G 9 - 1 3 1 7 ; 17 .2 1; 13 1,9 ; 135,7 ; 13 6 ,17 ; 138,5; I39 ,i6 ; 140,16; 141,2.
T H p q m. V I 33,30; 40,20; 53,28; 57,12; 58,4.32; 60,19; 64,4; 68,26;
74,29. B G 15 ,2 1. e n T H p q adv. V 34,2.
TO) p e f. occurring in the following prepositions: 6TOOT** V 33,12; 34,21;
6 3,15; 8 4,12.21. V I 7,26. Ht n - V I 4,28. B G 18 ,15. WT0(0)T< V 22,9;
23,24; 37>l 8 ; 66,10; 76,26; 83,6. V I 1 ,3 1 ; 3,22; 6,7; 7,28.29.31.32.34;
8 ,[i].i4 ; 9,32; 24,30; 6 1,6 ; 63,34. A T N - v 61,21.22. ( 6 BOA) iT R -
V 46,7; 69,10; 71,[25]. V I 1,16 .2 3 ; 5 2 ,31; 57,9; 65,18; 67,26. (6BOA)
fiT O O T * V 23,20; 26,20; 27,26; 36,9; 38,[5] [8]; 47,19 22; 51,[13];
52,20; 53,[3].18 ; 55,[7]; 6 3,14; 71,[24]; 85,26. V I 1 1 ,2 1 ; 12,18 ; 16,28;
17,4; 33,22; 46,15.32; 55,18 ; 5 7 ,11.16 ; 58,22; 66,21. BG 132,10.
TApiCO v. V I 63,16.
T O jp ff v. V 19,22. V I 17 ,13 . T O Jp ff m. V I 7 3 ,11.
TO) pT m. V 45,24.
TCA.BO v : T C 6 B O V I 54,30. TCA.BO<* V I 4,23.33; 33,3. T C 6 B O * VI I I ,
10 ; 64,17.
f c o e - v. BG 9 ,11.12 .
T CTO v. V I 17,28. T C T 6 - V I 18,3. TCTA* V I 18,4.
TCUT v. V 46,25; 82,18. B G 130 ,13. THT"! BG 8,9. ATT CUT BG 8,8. TtUT
m. V 42,23. TtUT NH T v. V 38 ,13; 40,24; 42,17.23; 61,4; 6 3,11. THT+
WHT BG 8 ,7 -
taatg v. v 80,1. p e q T O O T e c ^ o y n V 55,17.
T H Y m- IO,8. TH O Y V I 1,2 7 ; 7 ,14 ; 46,20.
fO Y cardinal number: V 21,6. MA^'f OY V 45,24. M eT V 21,28; 22,3;
7 9 ,1 9 .
TO O Y m- V 19 ,11.12 ; 30,19; 78 ,11; 81,4; 85,10. V I 43,34; 75,36.
T O O Y v -: T A Y - V I 25,16.
TA YO v. V I 8 ,11. TA YO CBO A V 79,4. T 6 Y O e^PA-T V I 50,26. TAYO *
v 53,3; 79,3- TA .O YO - V I 6,19; 13,2; 18 ,15 ; 21,16 .
TOYlA.T v. BG 137,16 .
T O y i i ) * nn.: ^ I T O Y ^ U V I 11,3 .
TCUOYN v. V 19,18. B G 9 ,12; 130,3.8; 136,9; 13 7 ,12 ; 141,5. TO) O) N VI
44.14. T O ) CUN 6 B O A Fi V I 2 1,17 . T O ) O ) N e^PA 'f V 20,[30]; 50,13;
61,5. V I 34,30. T O ) 0 )N 2P A 'f J C O ) V I 41,14 . T C U O Y N O Y V 43,16.
6 1.15 . TO)OYNT imperat. V 6 6 ,[1]; 78,15.
COPTIC WORDS 515
T O y N O C v. V I 41,10. T O Y N O C - V 19,10; 77,7. TOyNOC V 62,8.
T o y o j T nn. VI 69,28.30. pi. T o y o T e VI 69,34.37.
T o y x o V. B G 135,11. M A .TO y.xe- imperat. VI 57,23.
TOJOJ v. V 61,23; 64,20. TAOJ8 V 32,20. TO O )* VI 1,11; 76,24. B G 9,2.
THOJ+ VI 1,23. TO)Op m. V 82,14.
T A O je o e i c y nn. V 3 8 .7 -C9 ]; 4 7 .[2 I]- VI 34,19; 38,26; 40,31; 43,13.19;
45,23. B G 8,21; 9,8; 18,18; 19,2. n q j e o e iq p nn. VI 34,7; 43,12.28.
TCUg m. VI 25,12.18.21.22.
TCUg v.: TCDg MR VI 25,5.11.23. T H g t MR VI 25,15; 39,18. T H g t
MRMA= VI 25,19.
TAgO v. V 28,19. TAgO< VI 14,10. TegA= VI 61,2. TAgO*5 epAT8 V
62.9. VI 9,23; 12,17. T g O =* e p A T = VI 75,27. A T T g O 88 VI 26,18;
47,20. A T T A VI 37,8.
T g lO V .: eio* egpAT gR VI 28,19.
o b b io v.: s b b i o x c u q m. V 73,11. gR o y e l B i o VI 9,24. p e q e l B i o
v 63,15.
TCUgM V .: TAgM8 V 46,9. VI 34,6. TCUgM m. VI 34,4.
e n o e g o y N v. v 55,13.
TAJCPO v. V I 2,3; 68,32.32. T A - X p o t VI 51,16.
T c u 6 e v. VI 22,31; 50,2.6. T6e e g o y N VI 27,19.
t 6 a i o v.: t 6 A IO V I 17,34. 6 A e i e - VI 20,14. 6 A e iH ( o ) y + V I 14,33;
15,10; 17,12; 21,24. m n t 6 a i e VI 17,14.
o y V 20,14; 25,12; 28,30; 29,1; 66,17; 71,17; 74,8; 84,9. VI 3,[3]; 42,5;
59.9 25; 71,9; 76,19.21. B G 7,12; 18,3; 128,17; 129,12.
o y * m- V 47,25.25. p e q x e o y A VI 66,1.
oyA cardinal number V 33,13; 44>l6 ; 57,1; 76,[26]. VI 5,22; 31,13; 33,17; 41,
18:50,7; 54,24; 64,21; 65,8; 72,5; 78,16. B G 128,1.7; ! 2 9 .3 ; I3 5 .7 - o y g i
V8i,3. v i 30,14. b g 19,6; 128,1.7. o y e i e v i 62,18. K e o y i v 29,7.
B G 7 ,ii.( t t ) o y a ( n ) o y A V55.14.Vi29,23;48,29;52,13; 5 4 .3 i ; 5 5 . i 7 ;
63,30:65,30. b g 140,4. m R t o y a v i 47,19. M f i T o y e V I 9,21.
OyAA= v 27,19; 29,22; 35,14.17; 46,[15]; 47,11; 72,14; 8i,6.[27], VI 21,
19; 23,26; 25,29; 40,16.23; 41,25; 46,33; 56,9; 61,31; 66,28.29.32; 73,
25. B G 7,8; 129,11; 130,5; 136,13; 139,11. oyAT VI 73,6.
o y e 6 b o \ v. V 65,10. o y H o y t V 53,[7]. o y H o y t n c a - (R) b o a .
R m o VI 18,33, I9 ,[3 ] o y H o y t r c a m o a m m o * VI 19,1
o y o e i m. j' tt o y o e i VI 17,20.24.
o y cu v. VI 25,[9]; 59,23; 78,[4].
o y cu nn.: *j* o y c u e s o A VI 49,11.26. *( o y t u m R VI 50,9.
o y s e - v 27,20; 84,9. o y B H *
V 27,17.19.21.23; 28,6; 33,4; 40,17. j* o y a e -
V 83,4.
o y A A B (qualitative of o y o n ) V 19,21.[26]; 22,i 6.[22]; 58,14; 63,4.26;
72,5; 76,3; 77.1118; 84.7; 85.25.t29]. v i 25,24; 37,23; 46,13.17; 47.31;
58,7;63,17; 65,6.35; 67,14.19; 68,20; 69,13; 71,[1]; 73,16. o y A A B e VI
47.10. o ycu TTe m. VI 62,4. O y H H B m. V 44,17; 61,9.
o y B A ty v.: o y o B e o j t V 22,27.
o ycu M v. VI 12,1; 22,25; 27,32; 40,3; 44,7; 51,6; 65,5. oyoM*> VI 6,5;
29,27. oyC D M 6 B O A g R - VI 35,11. OyCUM R C A - V I 66,20. O y A M -
pcUM e VI 29,18. M R T O y A M g A g VI 25,[10],
INDICES
o y o e iN m. V 22,18.26; 25,18; 58,8; 62,[24]; 63.t27j.28; 71,10; 72,11;

75,18.20; 83,21. VI 21,4; 28,14.17; 32,2; 35,17; 36,17; 37,34; 46,8; 47,
10.24; 55.27; 59,26; 60.22; 64.23; 72,17. B G 136,15. o y a .e iN VI37,
14. p o y o e i N V 22,18; 83,2.3. v i 47,25. B G 136,16. e+ R o y o e i N
V 22,29. 0 + R o y o e i N V I 57.30- xi o y o e i N V I 64,15.
oyW (affirmation of existence) v. V 22,5; 29,[25]; 33,3.12; 40,[15]; 51,16;
83.7. V I 2,13.14.25.27; 8,16.17; 27,23; 42,31; 58,9; 62,4; 64,7; 66,13;
6 9 .3 3 ; 70.11; 71.17; 76,22. B G 7,8; 8,10. o y N T A - V 31,1; 32,1; 36,26;
47.8; 53,23. VI 23,6; 29,24; 32,31; 37,21.28; 46,16; 48,29; 52,28; 53,16;
56,8; 5 9 ,3 3 ; 72,12; 74,21.24.25.27.28. Cf. a lso 6 o m .
O Y O N NIM V 30,6; 47,17; 63,21. VI 7,8.15; 19,21; 24,12.31; 36,9; 46,7;
5i,9; 56,5 6.10; 59,9; 63,27; 64,4; 69,12.
o y c u N v. V 21,27; 22,12.[21].23; 23,25.29; 50,7; 55,6; 59.27. V I 41,7;46,4.
a .y o y a ) N imperat. V 52,17.
o y e i N e v. v i 43,3.
o y N A H f. V 20,3. VI 2,29; 62,7.
o y N o y f. V 61,8; 63,25. F i T e y N o y v 36,17. VI 65,21; 76,31. T N o y
VI 4,21; 48,25; 49,15.32; 50,6; 60,4. B G 10,17; 15,3; 18,8; 135,17;
140.7. -J- N o y v 21,8; 27,2; 30,7; 47,7; 52,16; 55,19; 57.10.11.12;
63,24; 67,14; 84,2. VI 39,16; 49,6.28.32; 52,23; 53,23; 54,15; 60,[1];
61,24; 66,34; 75.34-
o y N o q v. VI 11,30. o y N o q m. V 84,17.
o y t U N q j m. V I 6,[2]; 7,29.
o y c u N j v - v 47.16- v i 9,17. o y o N j j V3 i,2 . o y c u N j g b o a V 29,15.20;
30,2; 39.19; 41,[14]; 42,[15]; 47.J8; 49.21; 53,9; 55,3.5.21; 56,21. VI
15,34; 22,8.11; 25,31; 26,[43.9.13; 42,18.20; 44,27; 47,9; 58,17; 61,22;
63,13; 70,13; 71,27. o y c u N g - V 30,1; 61,10. o y o N 2 ** v 63,22. VI
8,30. B G 129,10. oyoN^** B O A v i 3,28; 16,35; I7,[2]; 4 2> 3 -27 -
O y C U N g 6 B O A FjHT VI 36,10; 44,3. O Y O N ^ t BG- 129,10.
O y O N g t 6 B O A V 19,14; 61,4. VI 16,33; 20,[l].25; 22,10; 69,9.
O y O N j t e B O A FlHT VI 37,15. O y t U N j rn. V 42,19; 69,14. VI
20,34; 35,20. 2 R o y o y c u N j g b o a B G 17,20.
o y p o T v.: 2 FI o y o y p A T adv. VI 62,22.
o y e p H T e f. V 62,5. V I 2,22; 35,5.
o y c u c q v. B G 16,1. o y o c q * * B G 16,19. o y A cq -p a rticip le B G 16,16.
o y o o T e m. VI 6,5. o y o T e VI 6,8; 8,3.
o y t U T V47,g; 50,19; 76,25. VI 1,10; 10,18; 29,8; 30,21; 49,14-33; 50,111;
64,31.34. b g 137,12. F i o y o j T v i 39,14; 49,17; 50,7; 53.11; 59,28;
72,5; 78,10. o y o T e V 61,13.
o y T e V I 75,15; 76,27.
o y t U T e v.: o y e T VI 49,33-35
o y c u T B v. V 19,[24]; 69,13; 77,10. o y t U T l c b o a V 46,12. o y o iT B
e^ p aJ VI 44,28. oyATB** V 21,[25]. o y o T B + e - V 54,7; 65,32. VI
10,27.29.
o y c u T f l v.: oyoTN> V 69,2.
o y T A .2 m. V 85,1. peq-f* o y n j v 76,15-
o y o > T 2 6 b o a v. VI 42,22; 43,7.
o y e q j Fi- VI 37,19; 78,20. T io y e u ? FI VI 37,21.
COPTIC WORDS 517
o y o e i q j m. V 2 5 ,17 :3 1,18 :3 9 ,17 ; 42,20:49,25; 50, [5]; 63,24; 65,14; 67,23;
81,5. V I 14,2.4; 44,32; 53,5; 56 ,3 1; 7 0 ,11; 75,23.25; 78,28. B G 17,4.
n p o c n e o y o e i q j V I 21,25. n p o c o y o e i up V I 31,27.33. o y i -
e i q j V l4 3 ,i6 . K A T a .F lK e o Y a .e iq j V I 13 ,14 . A T o y o e i q j V I 6 7 ,11.
o y c u q ) v. V 18 ,10 ; 20,[24]; 2 7 ,1; 3 1,10 ; 48,18.19 ; 52,22; 53,18 ; 55,3.8.
V I 5,8; 9,9; 44,18; 53,35; 58,8.25; 60,7.28; 64,32; 6 5,15 ; 74,23.30; 78,
22. o y c u e y e V I 8,22; 23,28; 26 ,[8].i2; 27,29; 30,9.13; 3 1 ,1 2 ; 32,26;
4 1,16 ; 43,26.32; 44,21.27; 69,23. o y e q j - V I 4,22. o y o q j - V 58,19.
V I 9,27; 14,8; 24 ,12; 6 5,1. B G 18,14. oyAO }<* V I 59,22; 74,21.26.26.
28.30. B G 10,2. o y c u q j m. V 74,18; 84,20. V I 26,7; 55,30; 56,30; 64,6;
67,28. o y c u q j e m. V I 39,33; 40,7; 43,2; 4 7,21; 6 4 ,31; 67,35; 7 4 ,11.
14 .15 .16 .18 .19 .
o yq ?H f. V I 1,26; 28,33; 29 ,1. B G 136,3.
o y t o q j'B v. V 18 ,13 ; 19.9-25; 20 .13.15.f20 j.26 ; 21,3.9 ; 22,19.30; 23,8.10.12.
, 18.22. V I 1,3 3 ; 3 , [ i ] ; 4,10.29; 5 ,[3 ].15 ; 7,[6]; 8,[20]; 9,4-8.13; 10 ,13 .
22; 11,5 .14 ; 12 ,13 . B G 10 ,7 .13 .19 ; 15 ,5 ; 16 ,16 ; 17 ,10 .15 ; 18,5.
o y t o q jC m. V 39,9.
o y t o q jT v. V I 9,20; 12 ,17 ; 33.32; 3 4 ,9 15 ; 64,30; 72,2.
o y t o g v .: o y o >2 t o t * < B G 7,20. o y t u g n c a - v i 42,32. o y A g
F Ic c u * V I 45,18. o y e g - n c c d ^ B G 8,19. o y H g t Wccd<* V I 41,19 .
o y i g e V.: o y A ^ iH T participle V I 15 ,16 . M FiT O yA Î HT V I 33,14. m FIt-
o y A g e i h t V I 33,23.
o y c u g R v .: o y A g H " ' V I 6 ,19 ; 11,2 . o y c D g n m. V I 5.17-
Y 2 P m i-: P1- o y g o o p V I 5,29.
o y e g C A g N e v. b g 13 7 ,18 . o y A g c a ^ n c v i 61,24. o y A g c A g N e
m. V 73,6; 75,7. V I 18 ,13 ; 42,8.
o yjcA T v . v i 3 6 ,11. B G 139,6. o y x A e i v i 3 9 , i . o y A Jc + v i 15,28. o y x A f
m. V 42,18; 63,[i].27- O Y X A e i m. V I 33,17.
oyco6TT v. B G 7,[2].
y V I 56,20 (6 times); 6 1,12 (6 times).
CD V I 5 6 ,17 .17 .18 (3 and 4 times).19 (6 times).20 (6 times).2i (12 times).22
(3 times); 6 1,10 (1 time, 1 time, 3 times).1 1 (4 and 3 times).12 (2 and
2 times).13 (9 times).14 (9 times).14 (9 times).15 .15 .
CDCD v. V 80,2; 81,27. V 81,9. V I 3 1,17 . CD B O A gFl- V I 52,19. T +
V I 52,18.
cub up v. V I 27,8. o B e q j V I 29,4. oBop= e - B G 140,6.
cdk R v .: o k R + V I 6,13.
CDA v .: OA<* V 79,25.
CDMK v .; O M K V I 6,8; 29,19; 30,10.
CDRC v. V I 29,15. O M C V I 73,32.
CDNe m. V 6 1,14 .2 2 ; 62,4.12. V I 5 ,18 ; 10,30; 34 ,14 ; 6 2,3.10 .14 ; 71,3.
CDNg V 47,24; 83,14. V I 10 ,10 ; 2 1,3 1; 37,20. O N jt V 3 5 ,[16 ]; 5 7 ,1; 62,8;
63,7.7.19.20; 66,23; 84,8.10; 85,[31]. V I 9 ,12 ; 71,23. B G 13 1, 13. A N j t
V I 36,30. CDNj m. V 4 3 ,15 ; 48.10; 58,7; 6 3 ,13 .13 ; 66,6.22; 6 7 ,12; 69,
25; 72,23; 75,29; 84,18. V I 16 ,12 ; 2 4 ,11; 3 1,3 5 ; 37.28; 40,5; 42,8; 43,
33; 55.31 ; 58,14 ; 59,3; 60,25; 64,24.24; 72,19 ; 75.3-17- X I CD VI
37,26; 61,6.
5i8 INDICES
cun v. V I 7,18; 38,15; 52,31. e n - VI 69,5. o n - v i 46,27; 53,26; 72,21.24.

i n V I 52,29. Hn+ V i 66,4. BG 15,4.
c u p s v .: o p e jc + VI 25,25. * .p e jc t V I 28,27. 2?) O Y t u p x V i 68,9.
cucR v. V 62,21.
CUTTT v .: OTff** eÔYN V I 28,17.
cutS v .: o t 5 B G 136,10.
CUOJ v. V 20,[25]; 84,9. V I 62,26; 63,4.17. CUtt) GBOA V 83,9. VI 2,31; 3,12.
cuqj e ^ p a J e^CN- V 35,[5l- tu q j o y B e - V 83,28. Cf. also a jo m .
c u ^ e epA.T<=> v. V 26,20. V I 37,18. cu2ep3k.T V I 39,15- a ^ e p ^ T - t v
40,17; 6 1,2 1; 6 6 ,11.15 ; 7 1,6 .14 ; 74,9; 83,19. V I 1,32; 3 2 ,11; 43,10.
6 1 NA.êpa.T*' f. V I 2,19.
CU-XR V. V I 40,14; 4 3,16 .18 ; 45,34; 46,3.5.32; 47,7. o .X tJ'* V I 36,21; 40,23.
ATCU-Xfl V I 4 3 ,11.
c u 6 t v . : p e q c u 6 t V I 78,33.
q j - v . V 25,12 ; 29,1.2; 5 1,19 ; 60,[10]. V I 10,20; 14 ,10 ; 19,22; 20,17.31;
2 9 ,12 .17 ; 32,20; 36,6; 42,10; 46,18; 57,32; 58,23.29; 60,26; 63,4;68,24;
76,12. B G 132,19 . e q j- V I 5 ,2 1; 37,33. Cf. also 6 om.
q jA - V 18,20; 26,7; 40,19; 46,23; 53,29; 6 4,14.15; 65,12; 67,7; 70,4; 73,20;
75,8; 76,22.27; 83,14; 84,1; 85,3.15.17. V I 5,25; 13 ,3 ; 26,19; 36,12;
4 4 ,1.12 ; 45,2; 56,5; 60,5; 64,4.4. B G 7,18 ; 9,8; 17,9; 128,4; I 35.8 : I37I3J
138,19. cUA.po V 19 ,16 ; 2 1 , 1 1 ; 66,6; 84,4. V I 63,35. B G 130,7.9;
138,2.4.
OJA. nn. VI 16,23. pq?A VI 16,22.
eye nn. V I 2,28; 38,30.
e y e cardinal number V 72,8; 7 3 ,15 ; 74,12. V I 36,12; 38,27; 43,19; 46,28.
eye v .: c y e e i V I 78,25.
cyi m .: a t o j i t * * V I 37,7; 47,12. *( qjT m. V 26,13. A T'j' 0 ) 1 V 26,11.
0 ) 0 cardinal number V 73,16; 74,[12].
c y c u e i m. v 4 7 ,11.
q ? B cardinal number: q jB e C N O O y c V 26,15.17. V I 41,6.
q j i B e v. V I 44,31. qjBT* ntoot** n ^ h t- v i 9j i 6. qjBBiAeiTt VI
50,3. qjBBioeiTt V I 8,14; 49,19. cyi Bem. V I 42,15; 75,6. atoji Be
V I 55.29-
OJBHp m. V 18 ,19 ; 24,8; 38,7. V I 2,35; 3,3.9.10. OJBp V I 22,15.15.16. pi.
q j B e e p v i 4,9.25; 6,28; 7,20. o jb h p - V 2 i,2 9 ;22,14. P qjBH p epo*
V I 12,2. p q j bh p n - V 18,10.
u jb c u c u c nn. V I 70,38.
u jb c u t m. V I 2,28.
q j i K e v. V 62,9.
OJKAK 6 BOA v .: ACyKAK 6 BOA V I 19,34 -XI OJKAK V 35,18. VI 47,32;
59,24.
OJAHA v. V 45,13. V I 53,27.32; 54 .21; 55 ,9 13-23; 65,3. B G 140,9. OJAHA
m. V I 63,33.
qjcuAPi V I 29,25.
q j e A e e T f . V I 13,28; 32,6. p H q je A e e T v i 13,28. m a W q je A e e T VI
35.ii-
q jA o q v .: c y a .A e q + VI 63,7.
q jtu A ^ m. V 79,13.
CUF i iC WORDS
519
OJHH nn. V i8 ,6 .[8 ].I 4 . VI 44,33. m R t u j h m VI 14,6. q jH VI 50,5.
O jR M O V 25,5; 34,1.2.7.12; 50,22; 51,7; 55,17; 65,19; 69,18; 76,6; 82,26.
V I 3 .7 10; 5 . n ; 8,24; 28,30. (pH M CD VI 18,26.
( p H O y N cardinal number V I 62,4. O J M O y N e V I 46,28. M l ^ M O y N e
V I 52,4; 5 3 .2 5 ;5 5 .15 ; 56 ,[1]. M e g c y M o y N e V 80,20. Cf. alsodySodt?.
q j O M f l T cardinal number; 0 ) 0 M T V 33.6. CyOMGT V 20,26; 34,22; 65,26.
v i 50,8. M e g c y o M e T V 2 1,10 ; 76,8. M e g q p o M T e v 19 ,0 3 ] ; 78,18.
M e g q jO M N T e B G 1 5 , 1 1 ; 16,2.7.
q ^ M N o y q e nn. v 52,14.
u)M q)e v. v 65,20; 73,10; 74,28; 84,22. v i 70,25.28. u p R q jH T * V 72,21.
cpHN m. V 76,14. VI 48,1.
CpIN v. V 24,25; 38,16. VI 3,[3]; 6,20; 10,20; 11,9; 33,21; 34,20.31; 35,1; 37,
3. cy 1n e T B - V I 33,17. qj 1n e n - B G 16,13. a? 1n e R c a - ( w c c u -)
VI 1,30; 3,[4]; 5 .[i]-I5 ; 13.5; 18,12; 24,31; 31,34; 33,5; 34,7; 35.15; 51,
17; 60,10. B G 8,20. qjflT** V 30,11; 46,[23]. V I 5,19; 6,34; 9,9. c p flT *
e g p A - v i 3,27; 11,29. c y m e m. v i 18,11. Cf.also c p R N o y q e .
qjcu N e v . V I 27,22.26; 73,18. B G 7,[2I]; 128,6. cp cu N e m. VI 11,26; 39,
30; 70,[1]. B G 131,3. p e q c p c u N e V I 10,33.
qpcucDNev.: o jo n - v i 24,7.
U)NA m. VI 24,16. M H T U JN A VI 24,16.
cpNe m. VI 29,8. pi. q j N H o y V I 29,5.
q jO N T e f. V 41,20.
q jcu n v . VI 32,24; 48,16; 67,27. q}A.n- V I 77,37. q j e n - VI 71,30. q j o n
V 79,24. V I 13,8; 17,8.10.15. q j H ir t VI 19,21; 20,29. cp ff^ T ce VI
32.30.
q j in e v. B G 18,15. o p in e h t VI 16,21. o p in e m. VI 14,28; 17,15.18;
32,12. *|* o p in e v i 27,10; 41,9. xi q p m e V 53,6. V I 27,6; 28,23132,
17.28:43,30.a t o j 1n e V I 14,29. p A T q j m e VI 16,21. M flT A T O p m e
VI 17,16.17.
qpcune v. V 20,28; 21,[1]; 25,9; 27,8.11; 28,2; 29,25; 30,28;32,12;35,10;
36,14; 3 7 .2 i; 38.10; 42,19; 49,19; 51.21; 54>i6.i8.[25]; 56,[5].ii; 58,
9.19.O4]; 59.4; 63,4: 64,11.23.32; 65,2.22; 66,24; 67,13; 70,3; 71,8.24;
72,7.10.13; 73,19; 74>I4! 75>I-5-6; 76,1.4.18.19; 77,10.23.29; 78,7.19.
28; 79,21; 80,14.17.24; 81,7; 82,6.24; 84,4; 85,2.10. VI 1,[3].15.24; 2,7;
8,[3]-25; 12,3; 14,9; 18,25; 23,[9].14.22; 24,14.21; 25,28; 26,7.16.29;
27,5.20; 28,28; 30,25; 31,30; 36,4.29.30; 37,2.4.5; 38,1.4.5.8.10.12.13.33;
39,3.6; 40,17.25; 41,14; 42,12.23.28.29; 43,10; 46,12.23; 47,8.15.23.29;
48,12; 49,7.13.17; 50,10; 52,9; 53,10; 54,8.14.16.24.27.29; 55,27; 57,2.
14; 58,23; 61,32; 63,2; 65,18; 66,6.18; 67,3.6.11.13.18.19.30.35; 68,1.7;
69,12; 70,12.17.26.32.37; 71,15.18.20.34; 72,5.7; 73,23.27; 74,9; 76,6;
77,8.10.15. B G 8,5.7; 9,i6; 130,11; 131,3 8; 132,4; 136,15.7: i 3 7 .io;
138,5; 140,8. q j o o n t V 24,19.20.23.25.26.27.31; 25,[1].[3]; 26,5.22.
[27].29; 27,7.10.15; 28,20.22.[25]; 29,18; 31,18; 32,07]; 34,7.11.13;
35,8.14.17; 36,11.19; 38,14.23; 49.O2j.23; 53,28.30; 54,15.20.22; 55,
[10]; 56,12; 58,5; 60,22; 69,24; 74,6. V I 11,22; 15,25; 18,19.20.28.30;
19,20; 20,14; 21,19.22; 22,15.18.19; 24,23; 25,29; 26,19.32; 27,22.26;
28,7.25; 30,5; 33,7.30; 40,13; 48,2; 49,4; 52,16; 53,14.18; 55,1; 56,4;
57,16.18.24; 61,15; 62,17; 63,32; 65,33; 66,7.15.23; 68,[3].18; 70,4.9;
520 INDICES
7 3 .7 ; 74.20.22.32; 75,25; 76,23; 77,12; 78,40. B G 7,4.13; 8,19; 15,7;

17.4: i8-7-
ojtth p e nn. V 77,2. V I 4 5,15; 65,17. p ujTTHpe V 38,20; 55,22. V I 6,31;
8,28; 69,3; 71,2. 0 + FlqjTTHpe V I 71,4.
Cy CDTTCp m. V I 2,16.
q jH p e m. V 25,3.17; 3 3,17.19 .23; 36 ,10; 39 ,16.18; 46,21;49,[5]. 10; 50,16;
64,3.6; 66,27; 6 7,15; 70 ,10 .21; 7I,2.4.[26]; 12 ,16 .18 ; 7 3 ,1; 74,18; 76,
13 ; 85,21.21. V I 8,32; 9 ,1 1; 13,23; 23,7.7.10; 24,26; 33,26; 39,2; 47,7;
52,8.26.30; 53,6.15.17.28.30; 54,10.18.22; 55,2.10; 57,27; 58,1.15.18;
59,12.20; 6 1,3 .i8.<25>.27; 62,16; 63,32. BG 129,10. cu H p e OJHM VI
44.33- MW TOJHpe UJHM V I 17,25. CDHpe MTipCDMe BG 8,18; 9,9.
q j e e p e f . v 81,26. V I 13 ,2 1. BG 128,18; 129,7.16; 130,2; 1 3 1 ,1 ; 139,
4.13- c u e e p e o jh m BG 13 1,6 ; 132,8.14; 135 ,1.6 .15 . q jp R n o A V i2 3 ,
23.29; 24,33. q jp R n o A V I 23,30.
qjopTT ordinal number V 20,27; 4 , I 9 I 49,[5]; 56,8.10; 64,27. V I 13,16 ;
17,24.36; 18 ,[7]; 30,28; 3 3 .1 1 ; 4 1,2 ; 4 3 ,11.14 .15 .17 ; 48,18; 54,10; 73,
25; 78,2. BG 16,5. Flu?opfT V 67,20. V I 11,2 0 ; 39,20; 44,4; 45,23;49,
23: 5 .[ 4]-3 3 ; 54>l 8 ; 6 3 ,1; 67,25. p q j o p n V 24,28. p q jo p f f fl- V
37,10 ; 46,9; 47,21. V I 3,8. T p q j o p f f H o jo o i t V 3 3,[2 2 ].2 3;34,6.11.
13 ; 36,!!1 ]- P q jp n W- V I 22,32; 26,24.
u j o p u jp v. V I 43,33.
q jH c t , qpoc, o jc d c Cf. c c u q ?.
q j e c i m. (from c i q j e ?) V 32,26.
u jc d t m .: e i e n q jc u c u T V I 32,23.
UJCDCDT V .: O JT- V 33,9. q j H T + V I 15 ,14 . o jt a . m. V I 54,17; 57,7; 74,
22. peqqjcD C D T V 63,16.
OJTHN f. V I 30,35.
q jT o p T p V. V 35,20; 53,[6]; 77,4. V I 4 2,17; 44,6. q jT p T O jp t V 45,10;
61,2. V I 77,20. q jT O p T p m. V 52,23. V I 4 1,13 ; 77,19.
o j a y m.: p q jA y V 6 1,19 . V I 60,1. m H t o ja y V I 24,9.10.
q j o o Y e v. V I 45,32. B G 135.9-
o j o y o v. V I 29,14. q jO Y e - V I 45,33.
O JO Y IT v. V I 68,16.
q jO Y q jO Y v. V 5 3 ,11 ; 54,5; 56,[23]; 83,25. V I 15,24; 30,35; 31,2.
qjcDU? m .: oya)oy(goy V I 4,25.
q j q j e v . : e q j q j e V 3 0 ,13; 31,14; 51,12. VI 24,25; 48,25; 53,10; 55,11; 60,
4.11.13; 61,28; 68,16; 70,8.10; 76,16; 77,28. B G 135,17. c q j e VI 24,
24. B G 137,5.
o j o y o j T m. V I 3,20.
q j o q j o Y m : o j a o j o y m. V 26,15.
q?o>q v.: q ? H q t VI 71,16.
q j x q T e m.: M fiT O jA q T e VI 78,15.
q ja o c e v. V 18 ,[ 10 ] .11.12 ; 19 ,2 1; 23,7; 2 4 ,11; 26,6; 44,13; 45,[16]; 49,ii-
15 : 59.18; 6 1,8; 63,31. V I 1,19 ; 2,30; 7,[3]; 9,23; 11,4 ; 15,35; j 9,24;
27,[8].12; 40,30; 4 1,1.5 ; 42,25; 48,26; 49,10; 5 1 ,1 1 .1 4 ; 54.26; 55,[8];
5 6 ,11; 57,32; 58,9.24; 60,3.26; 68,13; 69.t3J.28.29.32.36. BG 17,9-X9-
A T O jA Jce R m o - V 24,20. V I 22,12. q j x x e m. v 18 ,12 ; 19,8; 29,2;
37.8; 38,9-[i5]; 40.23; 44.13; 4 5 .15 * 8 ; 5 1,2 ; 60,10; 64,5.12; 66,9; 72,
COPTIC WORDS 521
r9 ; 77>24 I 85,3.13. V I 5 ,13 ; 11,8 ; 14 ,14 ; 19,22.25; 20,27.30; 2 1,1 2 ; 41,

4.8; 43,2; 49,32; 52,21.23; 53,22.25; 54,20; 55,6.21.28; 58,16; 6 1,25;
62,2.20; 6 8 ,19 .21; 69,1.4.32; 7 1,4 ; 73,22; 77,34; 78,23. B G 9,23; 10,4.
10 ; 140,14. q j a x e V. or nn. ? V 40,12; 45,27. j- q j a x e V I 53,31.
q )(D .xe v. v i 26,14,22. c c u x e v i 26,20.
q p o X N e V. V 50,[6]; 60,24; 73,30- o j O - X N e m. V 39,5; 53,14. V I 2,[9];
15 ,32 ; 18 ,17 ; 39,27; 6 0 ,31; 73,27; 74,20.
qjaJXTT v. V 63,2; 70,4; 7 6 ,11.14 . V I 73,6. q j o x f f t V62.24- q j c u x n m .
V I 38,1.
qpojcT v. V I 62,2.
upa>a>6 e v. B G 132,2. o ) a > 6 e V I 17,35.
m .: ( q ) 6 \ V I 27,28.
qi v. V 3 3,10 ; 34,23. V I 5,28 .31; 6,[ i ].4 ; 8,18; 17,6; 45,7; 69,[1]; 73,29;
78,16. q i - V 36,20; 78,9. q i r - V 3 7 ,17 ; 6 1,18 ; 74,10. V I 31,29. BG
I 35>IO_ q i 2 * - V l 7 , i 6 ; 37,9 -3 4 : 56,9; 76,12. Cf. also a ^ o m , p o o y o j .
q R T nn.; p qFiT V I 66,21.
q c u T e v. V 32,[24]. q o j T e c b o a v i 36,7. q o T - c b o a v i 46,22.
q x o o y cardinal number V 40,[25]; 74,12. V I 2,19. q T O O y - V 73,15.
M e g q T o e V 19,25; 2 0 ,6 .11.16 ; 78,[27]. B G 16,8. M a g q T o e B G
16,4.
q c u 6 e c b o a v. V I 65,20.
ZX- V 20,[3]; 26 ,7.10 .12; 28,28; 29,7; 30,16 ; 5o,[23]; 6 7,13; 74,3; 76,20;
84,1. V I 7,9; 8 ,16 ; 23,24.26; 4 5,10 ; 76 ,17.17. 2 * p o * * V 63,[26]. V I
4,8; 45,24.
2 * h f. V I 37,9; 4 5 ,11 ; 60,19. e e i H V I 30,24. u j a e a H V I 44,12. g a e adj.
v 40,19. V I 6 9 ,17 .18 ; 72,36. 2 * . h V I 13 ,16 ; 70,27.
2 A.T m .: oce I 2 * 1 V I I 325-
Z e v. V 3 1,6 ; 5 7 ,13 ; 61,20. V I 4,28; 70,28; 77,30. B G 135,6. j e e n iT H V I
47,5- 2 ^ e , e m - V I 36,14.
z e i. V 48,[23]. V I 14 ,2 ; 48,23.24; 63,14. F iT e T g e v 4 1,10 ; 6 1,[6 ]; 62,12.
V I 7 ,15 ; 30,24; 3 1,8 ; 3 9 ,1; 64,29. B G 135 ,16 . N'f 2 V 78,5.i7.[26];
79,18.27; 80,8.[19].[29]; 8 1,[14 ].2 3 ; 82,3.9 17- V I 39,6; 6 3,12; 67,35;
78,6.10. n ( e ) i T e e V 51,24- V I 2 3 ,12 ; 28,10; 30,4; 34,3; 68,27;
69,25- F l e e v 24,23; 26,4; 30,30; 4 9 ,11.13 .14 .2 0 .2 2 ; 5 1,18 :5 2 ,5 :5 4 ,2 2 ;
56 ,12; 57,[ 7]-i 4 ; 7i ,9; 83,21. V I 8,[5]; 22,25.27; 23,4; 27,32; 28,12;
29,20; 30,6.8; 3 1,14 ; 34,23; 4 1 ,1 ; 50 ,12; 5 1,19 ; 52,26; 5 3 ,15 ; 5 4 .ir ;
55,8; 6 1,2 3 ; 6 7 ,3 1; 68,24.36; 70,37; 7 1,2 3 ; 74,35; 76,[4]; 78,8. B G 9,3;
18,9. F l T e c g e B G 13 1,9 . 0 + f l e e V I 49,20. k a .t a . e V 29,10; 3 0 ,11.
vi 69,22; 74,13.36. B G 18 ,17. N ? e v 23,19 ; 27,14; 32,3. V I 37,2.
4; 48,30. B G 9 ,7 .11. a o j T e e V I 3 6 ,3 1; 43,8; 5 3 ,3 1; 57,33; 58,3-22.
ZH V 28,21.
H, e H f. (forepart): a. H V 28,4; 39,19; 54.24; 55. n ; 56 ,13; 59.25-
V I 14 ,2 .2A .T62H v 22,[23]; 24,26; 26,22. V I 11,7 . g i T e g H e M n i T e
V I 25,26.
2 H f. (womb) V 18 ,17 ; 57,7. HT V 23,4.
522 INDICES
i- (ta>") v 28,22; 55,10; 62,2; 69,11; 70,6; 82,1. v i 3,23; 5,22.27;6 ,n ;

8,7.12; 11,3; 15,6; 32,15; 34,22; 39,26; 62,7.9; 69,24.33; 75,28.28.36;
78,29. ip N - B G 135,2. Cf. also T t u p e .
i e VI 74,18.33. B G 18,2.
2)H f. V 18,3.5.8; 55,10; 59,1. V I 5,5.10.22.27; 33,1; 34,14; 57,[1]; 63,11.
pi. T o o y e V 84,16. VI 34,2.21.
2 0 m. v 22,7; 23,[26]; 50,[13]; 72,[24]. v i 6,13; 19,30; 27,11. ezpx-
Vl 29,10. jc e i tt^ o VI 12,5. xi 2 m- VI 20,13. M f l T p e q x i 2 0 VI
12,3. xi Hz?*-* mR VI 88- xt VI 8>9-
201 nn.: "J* 2 0 l imperat. VI 4,4.
2 0 ) 0 ) - V 23,12; 24,22; 25,14; 35,[4]; 38.2o; 65,6; 79,4; 81,27. VI 3,[i].27;
8,31; 11,5; 16,35; 17.2; 23,12; 30,4; 39,17; 48*12; 50,12; 51,12.19; 53,
26; 55,20; 60,7; 65,23; 68,27.30.35; 69,30. B G 17,21; 18,12; 137,5;
139,6; 140,4. 20)* VI 1,21; 2,33; 3,911; 4,15.31; 6,18; 7,6; 12,6.11;
21,15; 33,27; 59,9; 68,4; 69,25. B G 129,7; 132,5-
20 ) B m . V 25,6; 28,21; 29,21; 35,21; 41,17.18; 42,6; 43,9; 57,3.5; 63,9; 72,
12; 73,23; 7 6,7 ; 83,24; 85,18. VI 20,29; 30,31; 32,29; 34,22.23; 38,10;
39,14; 40,30; 42,10; 59,18; 63,7; 65,13.15.30.32; 72,11; 74,[5]; 76,[5];
77,36; 78,19. B G 7,11; 130,15; 135,15; 137,17. pi. 2 B H y e V 65,15;
83.18.27.t29]; 84,[13].15. VI 36,19; 65,36; 72,27; 77,5. B G 17,17; 135,
19. 2 B H O y e VI 62,27; 68,8; 69,35; 7 I>[I].2 9 ; 76.35. p 2 a,B v 63 > 9-
VI 27,13; 44,16; 49,15; 78.38.
2H B nn.: p 2 H B B G 136,2; 140,8.
2A.ei B e e f. V 73,21.
2 B o y p f. VI 2,27. 6 B o y p VI 62,9.
2 0 ) B C v. VI 2,16. 20 < | C > V 62,10. 2 B C m. VI I9 ,[5 ]. 2 B O O C nn.: x i
2 b o o c R u j e A e e T VI 32,6. 2 b c o ) f. VI 5,31; 6,[1]; 7,28; 9,15; 20,
25; 32,4. B G 15,8.
2 0 ) K V .: 2 0 K V 28,6. 2AK.* V 33,4. 2 H K + V 27,17.19.20.21.22.23.
2K.O v.: 2K.A.eiTt VI 35,13. 2 k o m- VI 2 7 . 14 -
2 H K e nn. VI 3,32; 4,[6].16.28.35; 10,9.21. M R T 2 H k. VI 14,34; 27,
27.
2 A A O nn. V 22,25; 23,1.9.11.18. VI 6,33. m R t 2 A A O VI 73,19- m R t 2AAO)
VI 14,7.
2 A - O C T W m. V 7 5 , 12 .
2 A A H T m. V 78,9.13. pi. 2 *.*.vre V 70,14.23. VI 44,6.
2 A o 6 v.: 2 0 A 6 + V 67,3. 2 0 A e 6 + VI 21,21; 24,20; 31,27. 2 * A e 6 t v i
64,7- 2*-*-6 m- VI 3I>22. 2^ 0 Y 2 A 0 6 VI 24,28.
2 0 e 1m m. VI 6,29.
20) H v.: 2 0 M=* VI 50,27.
2 &MA.ei VI 6,11.
20) m v. V 19,12.
2 0 ) M e f. VI 2,23.
2 0 M F iT m.: M T?TM A.ei20M FiT VI 31,1.
2 M O O C V. V 20,16; 32,15; 3 3 .8 ; 36,22; 45,19.21.23; 50,5; 81,5. VI 6,34;
23,[5]; 32.19-B G 131,2.7. _
2 M O T m. V 63,3.5.8.21. VI 61,3. P 2 M O T V 39,16. OJTT 2 M O T VI 61,4;
63.34- UJTT 2 M O T rn. VI 64,20.
COPTIC WORDS 523
nn. V 3 2 ,1; 4 8,15; 67,28. B G 13 5 ,12 ; 139,18. MRT2M2A.A. V 6 5,21;

72,22; 30,20. V I 30,20.
j o y N m. V I 50,14; 5 1,15 . B G 8,19. 2 o y n passim. n 2 o y n B G 136 ,13.
2 CDn v. (be near): 2 NA.N V I 44,30. H t it V 25,9. V I 18,32. 2 CDN 2 C>YN
VI 55,i- 2H N + e g o y N V I 18,35; 19,[4]-
(DN v. (command): gtUN 6 T O O T B G 18,18.
g o e i N e V I 1,3 1.
g N - nn. forming verbal phrases: 2NA.* V I 9,29. egNA.** V 58,23; 59,3;
62,20; 74,24.
gIN H B V. V I 29,3. M N T A TglN H B V I 28,19.
2*TT m. V I 16 ,5; 19 ,14 ; 38 .21; 39,13 3 1 ; 4 1,25; 47.17- t 2 atTTV3 i,i2 ;4 7 ,
23; 4 8 ,11.13 ; 5 7 ,2 1; 59,[6].i2.22; 60,24. V I 12,8; 20,12; 45,20. pe<|+
2A.TT V 5 7 ,2 1; 63.16.
g a m v. V 3 6 ,12 .13 ; 47,17. V I 16,32.34; 17 ,[3 ]; 28,14. 2ott* V I 78,12.
2 H n + V 19 .14 ; 28,3; 37,22. V I 3 ,17 ; 22,9.23; 27,24; 29,29; 30,17; 33,
1 ; 59.14; 60,26; 61,9. B G 10,8. R o y ^ o m V I 29,5; 65,27.
j H n e Cf. e i c 2 h ( h ) t .
2P2d m. (No attempt is made here to distinguish between 2 p3k.T, upper
part," and ^pauT, "lower part ) : pAT ^'R -('R 2H'r,=') V 20,19; 24,16; 28,
13 ; 29,[28]; 3 6 ,12 .13 .2 1; 45,22; 60,17; 63,19; 66,13. V I 22,7.21; 2 6 ,11.
23; 26,32; 28,5.16.18.26; 29 ,15; 3 0 ,5 16 .3 3 ; 32,28; 34,7; 36,16; 51,5 .7 ;
5 2 ,17 .17 .25; 54 ,17 ; 56,9; 58,14.30; 59,28; 60,8; 61,9; 70.12. 2 P J J V
4 3 ,13; 46,19. B G 9 ,1. e^pa-V - V 18 ,5; 19,22.24; 22,10.24; 23,13.27;
27,7.15; 29,18.27; 35.24; 37.23; 4i .Ei 6] i8 ; 4 2,17; 66,23; 69,13; 79,
30; 80,13; 8 1,18 . V I 1,28 ; 42,30; 46,1. e ^ p a l egH T** V 30,9. e ^ p a l
e x R - (exo>) V 2 6 ,1; 3 2 ,1 1; 48,14.20; 53,[ x i] ; 74 ,21; 75,19; 82,20.
e z p a ! o y B e - V 35,18. e ^ p j J t o o t * V I 41,27. e ^ p a t f R - V I4 5 ,
34-e^ P ^ T 2 Fi- V 19 ,14 ; 22,19. V I 29,9.34; 30,4; 57>2 1 - G Z P * {
V 18,18. q ) X Z P * l e - V 19 ,23; 6 2 ,11. CA.2PAT v 80,1.
2 p e nn. V I 10 ,18 ; 40,4 ; 78.30.
2 P H p e nn. V 80,2. pi. ^ p e p e V 80,3.
Z f r e f. V I 14 ,3 1; 15 ,2 3 ; 37,13.
2 p o o y m. V I 1 3 ,1 1 ; 14,13. BG 136,18.
2 POU> v .: 2 P a .o j V 59,15 2 o p q j + V I 2,30.
2 * p e g v. V I 59,5. a.p 2 V 70,20; 73,22; 85,4. V I 13 .14 ; 58.30. B G 8.15.
epez B G 139,9- A-PH2 V I 15 ,16 . p e q a p e ^ V 33,14- ^ .p e ? m. V I
64-34-
i c e v. V I 70,14. 2 c t -> V I 34,30; 3 5,1. i c e t V 53,7. t c e m. V I
5,2.[4].6.9; 6 ,1 1 ; 7 ,16 ; 10 ,7; 32,24; 35,16 ; 76,7. p i c e V I 65,13. f
} C V 31,20. U)TT f T c e V I 32,30. M R T l T f i c e V I 31,7.
2A.T m. V I 10,29.
HT m. V 6 0 ,11; 64,25; 65,23.25; 6 6,14.18; 7 2 ,13 ; 76,23. V I i , [9]; 2,6; 8,27;
11,19 .2 6 ; 19,5.20; 29 ,15; 30,30; 3 1 ,1 2 ; 32,8; 5 5 ,12 ; 5 7 ,21; 60^13.18;
63,35. B G 9 ,2 1; 18 ,5; 13 0 ,13 ; 136,2. 2 th < * v i 27 ,2 1; 34,16. p 2 t
CN3k.y B G 9 ,15. p O Y 2H T O ytU T V I 1,9. i e H T V I 15,30; 54>I 3-
R O yM H T A Q H T V I 17,5. M R T p R R ^ H T V I 54,8. "( TH V 40,21;
49,17; 60,10. V I 14,32.34; 2 1,13 . OJAN^TH* V I 15,15- <|l q jR H T
V 2 1,16 ; 32,19. m R t a t ^ h t V 83,24. m R t o j a n t ^ h t V 31,9
524 INDICES
2H H T 6 Cf. e t c 2 H(h )T .
f t e i T m. V 62,9.
2 0 )T n n .: p 2 0 ) T V I 1,6.25.
2 A T 6 v .: 2. e f V I 45,35; 55,22. z e f e V I 52,20; 7 1,18 . ^ e + e e 2 patf
e x N - v i 67,5.
f i T e v. V I 35,4.
2 O0 IT 6 nn. V 22,27; 28,17.
2 0 T 6 f. V 29,5; 39,[8]; 65,20; 72,2 1; 73,5.12. P ^ O T e V 25,13; 32,22; 43,
16 ; 57,18. V I I I , I . P O T e V 28,29. p 2 O T e Z *~ V I 11,7.
P 2 O T 0 2HT V I 15 ,2 1; 76,16; 77,29. C A N p 2 0 T 6 V I 72,33.
2 0 )TB v. V 6 1 ,1 7 .2 O T B * V I 5.30-33; 6,[2]; 3 3,2 2 .2ATB-participle BG 16,
[15 ]. 0> T B m. V 21,9. 2 6 T B 6 m. V I 78,29.
2 v r f J - Cf. T O jp e .
2 IT N -, ^ J t o o t Cf. T O jp e .
20>TTT v. V 2 1,13 . V I 35.18 ; 42,16; 63,26. M l FlÔJTiT V I 43,23; 44,1. CA
W2<TTT V I 44,14; 75,30.
2 0 )T p v .: ^ O T p e ^ o y N V I 53,33. 2 0 )T p m. V I 19 ,10 ; 76,10.
2 T O p m .: p ^TO p V I 36,13-
Z O T Z 'f v -; 2 o t 2 *T f i c i - V I 33,6 .12; 34,2.20. 2 A T 2 !? t V I 35,3.
2 H o y m. V I 24,19. (' 2 h o Y V 59.16.
Zooy m. v 2 1,1 2 ; 30,18; 53,27.[28]; 6 1,1.7 ; 62,22.23; 63,19; 65,9; 6 7 ,11; 72,
22; 75,16 ; 76,16. V I 10 ,18 ; 18,35; 19.2; 28,33; 29 ,[1]; 3 6 ,11;37 ,2 7 ;3 8 ,
1 6 ; 4 2 ,i6 .[i6 ]; 49,20; 60,5; 62,19; 70.30; 7x.18.35; 73,12. BG 13 1,15 ; 136,
4 .12 .2 0 ) 0 y v i 53,16. f i n o o y B G 10 ,12 ; 131,9- p ( 0 y ) 2 0 0 y V i i , 2 5 ;
5,33- q jA ^ o y N e n o o y N ^ o o y BG 135,16. ^ o y M i c e V I 14,3-
2 0 o y + V 31,2 2 ; 5 3 ,15 ; 63,6.24; 73,23. V I 33,10 ; 34,12; 39,27; 40,6.8; 50,
27; 7 1.30 ; 72,26; 73,9; 76,[4]; 77.[5]-26; 78,43.
2cu o y Cf. M o o y .
i o y e v .: V 6 1,14 ; 6 2 ,11. I t V 85,5. 2 o y t o o t *1 V I 44,20.
T 0 (0 )T* V 40,17; 5 3 ,1; 54,27.
2 o y o m. V 34,27; 43,7. R 2 Y V 3 3 ,5; 40,8. V I 31,2 2 ; 33,10 ; 34,12; 50,3;
5 1 ,1 7 ; 65,34; 70,5-23-26; 7 1,6 .19 .2 1; 72,17. B G 10 ,3; 15 ,10 ; 17,22; 18,
14 ; 129,19; 130 ,17. W 2 o y o e - V 22,29. e 2 o y e e - V 81,19. p 2 o y e -
v i 4 5 .2 9 .
2 0 o y p e v .: m NT2 A y p e p o ) m e V I 31,5.
2 0 y e i T ordinal number: ^ O y G IT G V 77,27. V I 74,13.
2 0 o y T V 3 5 ,11.[14 ]. v i 13,29.32; 23,24; 62,6; 6 5,19.23.23.2 o o y T c f l Me
v 81,7. m T3t 2 0 o y t V 41,19 .
2 o o y q j v. V I 27,9.
2 0 ) 0 ) F12 HT v. V 30,23.
2 0 ) 0 ) q V 45,7.
2 * 2 V I 21,20; 24,15; 25,10; 29,22; 3 0 ,11; 31,20; 39,22; 42,31; 45,22; 52,
28; 65,9.29; 66,3.6; 68,36; 72,14. B G 12 8 ,11; 132,2.18 ; 136,6. mWt2 ^ 2
R q j A x e V I 19,25-
2A.XW-: 2 V 20,5; 22,16.
V 19 .f28 3.32; 29,10; 30,6.19; 32,16 ; 62,4; 66,24; 7 .I 5: 80,[26]; 81,
n ; 83,6; 84,7; 8 5,11. V I 1,3 3 ; 15 ,3 ; 19,30; 25,32; 41,10 .17.28.33; 45,ix;
5 8 ,11; 68,28; 69,26; 78,34. V 62,5.
COPTIC WORDS 525
x a e i e m. v i 43,24. p xxeie V I 44,10; 70,20.

XH : X IN XH m. V I 4,15.34; 10 ,13 . 6TTXI NXH V I 70,14. p e q + WXI N ^H
V I 5 .[i].
XI V. V 22,16 ; 26 ,14 ; 32,18 ; 33,3; 4 1,7 ; 42,9; 43.9 ; 49,[ 1 3 ] ; 76,26; 78,16.24;
79,15, 25; 80,6.18.[27]; 8 1,12 .2 1; 82,8.14.16; 83,5. V I 2,[6]; 8,8; 22,30;
32,2.9. 14 ; 4 1,20 ; 48 ,17; 55 ,18 ; 5 7 ,12 ; 65,22.24; 66,38; 67,7. B G 17,5.
x e i vi 40,28; 52 ,14 ; 59,26. x e - vi 37,31. xi- v 3 1,19 ; 32,20;
76,24; 78,2. vi 7 4 ,11. x e i - vi 13,25. j c i t - v 3 1,7 ; 48,18; 74,13; 75,
26.f283.30; 78,10.22; 79,9; 80,13.16. V I 4 ,21.22; 8,24; 24,33; 25,20; 3 2 ,13 ;
4 1,3 3 .B G 132,16 . xi H t o o t - V I 55,7; 57,8. xei W t o o t - V I 57,18.
xt e B O A . V I 35,!3 xi e ^ o y N v 69,22. vi 28,29. xei e ^ o y N
V I 68,19. JU T** e ^ O y N 74 ,13; 78,10; V I 30,19; 31,35. X IT ** 6TTITR
V I 2 9 ,11. Cf. also e o o y , M o e iT , m t o n . c b c u , c o o y N , ' f n e , o y -
o e m , cuN 2, ajKA K., c p m e , 2 0 , ^ b o o c , 6 o a , <5o m , R 6 o n c .
XO m. (sowing) V I 64,25.
XO m. (armpit) V I 8,17.
X O l m. V I 1,17.20.27.
XU) V. V 18,4.6.14; 19,9-27; 2 0 ,13 .17 .2 1.27 .30 ; 21,[3].10 .24 ; 22,20; 23,1.6.
8 .12.19 .23; 30,25; 3 1,5 ; 32,9; 4 3 ,[12 ].17 ; 44,19; 45.18; 5 1,14 ; 56,16;
57,16.20; 6 0 ,3.13.16 ; 6 1,6 .12 .16 ; 62,6.14; 64,4; 6 6 ,[i]; 77,5.22.[28]; 78,
6.i 8.[27]; 79,20.[29]; 8 0 ,10 .21; 8 1,1.15 .2 5 ; 82,5.11.14 .20 ; 83,10; 84,5.
V I 2 ,[ i] ; 3 ,[i].3 o ; 4 ,1 1 .1 7 ; 6 ,10 ; 9,26; 10 ,1.3 2 ; 2 1 , 1 1 ; 4 1,4 ; 42,4; 48,
20; 49,15; 53.2o; 54 ,12 ; 5 5 ,2 1; 56,25; 59,10; 60,6; 62,21; 70,8; 71,9 ;
72,3; 78,22. B G 7 ,1 1 ; 8 ,13 .16 ; 9,7; 10,4.9; 15 ,[ 13 ] ; 1 7 , 1 1 ; 1 3 1 ,1 7 ; 13 6 ,18 ;
138,4- Xe- V 40,23. V I n ,8 ; 14,20.22.22; 4 9 ,1; 59 ,12; 65,3; 68,17. B G
8,12; 9,5. X O O * V 2 5,10 ; 2 9 ,2 .3 .11; 3 0 ,8 .11; 3 3 ,13 .16 .18 .2 1. [24].[26];
3 4 ,1.15 .16 .19 ; 4 4 ,17 ; 50 ,17 ; 5 I >I 9; 5 2 ,15 ; 6 2,15; 63,[30]; 70,17; 7 1,16 .
18 .2 1; 7 2,18 ; 74,7. V I 3 ,[2 ].[8 ].i2 ; 4,9-25; 5,[4]; 6,9; 7,26; 10 ,12.25;
1 1 ,1 3 .1 5 ; 24,25.26; 25,27; 48,18.27; 49,5; 50,20; 51,9 ; 52,10.12.21.24.24;
5.7; 57.33; 58,[3] i4-25; 59,20.25; 60,7.15; 63,24.33:66,30; 67,24.32; 72,
29; 77,24. B G 10 ,12 ; 17 ,12 ; 18 ,2 1; 128,9. X O - B G 8,6. 21X I- imperat.
V 18,7. B G 1 7 ,1 1 .
X U ) m. V I 9,24.
(related to x o y q [1] ?) V I 73,34-
JCCUKV.V40,3 . V I 4 4 ,11. JC O ) K B O A V 2 i,2 1 :2 9 ,1 7 ; 30 ,12; 58 ,13; 67,22;
81,8. V I 2 1 ,1 3 ; 45,2 5 ; 46,33 ; 56,3i ; 76,8. B G 16,20. XGDK- B O A V
2 1,14 ; 29,9. X K - B O A V 83,18. V I 1,10 . XOK<* 6 B O A V I 36,18;
67,25. XCDK B O A m. V 19,8; 24 ,12; 5 8 ,11. V I 75,7.
XU)KM v. V 84,7; 85,24. B G 132 ,14 .
X C K H C V 2 3 ,14 ; 2 4 ,17 ; 25,3 .2 1; 29,24; 4 1,[ 13 ] ; 43,22; 49,16; 50,14; 55,9;
57,6; 60,8. V I 4,23; 7 ,15 -2 1; 11,2 0 ; 12,9 ; 22,31.33 ; 28 ,13; 30,10; 36,20;
48,33; 53 ,30 :6 4 ,10 .12 .14 :6 5 ,2 8 ; 67,26; 77,29. B G 128,6; 130,10. X C K A C
V I 64,21. B G 129 ,17.
XU )AK v .: JCOAIC V I 3 1,14 .
X O A X X m. V I 6,30.
XU) CDMB m. (book/generation) V 85,6. V I 52,29; 53,33; 60,16; 61,26; 62,
26; 6 3,5.17. x c u M e v 20,24. V I 2,26; 5 3 ,12 .12 ; 54,9.16.25; 6 1,18.28;
62,23. XA.M 6 V I 54,32. pi. X M V I 2,27.
526 INDICES
X N B G 7,2.
.X N O Y V.: X N O y * BG 17,18.
XI N- V 40,19; 65,14; 70,3. V I 5,25; 29,14; 3 6 ,11; 47,8; 53,23; 58,2; 60,1.4;
67,25. B G 17,4; 135,8. jc R R - V 54,16. JCIN 2W V 18 ,16 ; 23,4.
.XIN v .: 6TJ.XI N V I 39,21.
.XCD N'T v .: X O N T + V I 65,29.
X N A m. V 71,23.
JCINJCH Cf. X H .
JCTT- nn. V 2 1,6 .11. B G 13 6 ,11. .xeTT- V 20,29.
XTTIO v. V I 17,18. X T T I O * V I 48,24. .XTTIHT V I 14,30. O yM flT-
XTTIHT V I 9,25.
XTTO v. V 26,[25]; 3 7 ,13 ; 8 1,17 . V I 39,19; 52,20; 55 ,3 1; 56,6; 64,20.29. BG
13 1,18 . x n e - V I 39,21. B G 8,[2]. X T T O * V 46,24; 47,10; 49,6; 78,10;
79,17.24; 8 1,10 .2 1. V I 13,30; 14 ,1; 52,27; 63,1.23. B G 8 ,i5 ; 18 ,17 ; r3i, 15-
X T T X * V I 52,26. x n o m. V I 13,32; 14 ,1.3 ; 42.34; 53.14; 55.27; 57.15-
r7 ; 6 5,31; 74,6. p e q j c n o V I 60,22.
x e p o v. V I 43,30.
jccu cu p e v .: x .cu cu p e c b o a V 30,[27]. xoop* c b o a V I 16,18.
x o p - B O A V I 36,21.
XPO v. V 78,16. V I 26,22; 42,8. x p o e i T + V I 20 ,11. x o o p t V 6 1,21;
73,5- .x co p e V I 72,24. x c u c u p e m. V I 56,14. M W T x o je o p e VI
27,24.
x o e i C m. V 2 4 ,11; 26,6.16; 29,4.19; 30,10 .12; 3 1,[2 ].14 ; 32,17.23.28; 34,10;
38,24; 40,9; 4 6 ,[ii].2o ; 55,[27]; 59,[io].23; 60,5.7; 66,14. VI 1,12.16.
23; 8,6; 10,14.22; 1 1 ,7 ; 13,34 (f ): 57.3; 59,3; 60,27; 66,36; 68,25; 73,
24; 75,27. B G 1 3 1 ,1 7 ; 1 3 5 ,1 1 ; 138,7; I 4 I >1 - -XC B G 10 ,11.12 .17 ; 131,
13 ; 138.19- .XOifC VI 56,22. p JC O IC V 48,19; 53,20. VI 4 2 ,11; 70,22.
e+ R x o e i c VI 75,18. m R t j c o 6 i c V 49,7; 59,[5]. VI 4 1,12.
.xi c e v. vi 44,12. jc o c e + V 64,16; 69,21; 77,7; 7 8 ,11; 81,4; 8 5,11. vi 3,21;
6,30; 26,18; 29 ,13; 3 3 ,3 1; 3 7 ,12 ; 43,22; 4 7 ,11; 54,17; 56,16; 71,21.
j c i c e m. v 19,23; 22 ,17 ; 3 7 .!7 ; 54 ^ 7; 61,25; 80,16. vi 75,9. x i c e
Fl^HT v. V I 15,2. X i c e FlH T m. V I 31,3.
x o o y v. V 37,10. V I 45,22. B G 13 2 ,15 .18 . x o o y e ^ p jJ V I 60,17.
x o o y BG 139 ,17. xo o y e^ paJ e- V I 60,15.
x i o y e v 48,23. T U c io y e epo> BG 17,19- p e q x i o y e V I 78,19.
XOycUTG cardinal numeral V I 36 ,12; 38,27; 43,19.
X <& 2 v - V I 46,18.
X O J2H v. V 75,3.4. V I 25,9.14; 39,19. .XA.2M * V I 38,17. X G 2 H - V 84,18.
X A ^ R t v 75,6. V I 25,6. .X U ^ R m- V I 31,20; 39,20; 44,25. ATXO J^fl
V 82,23. B G 13 5 ,13 ; 137.4-
x x x e m. V 63,14. V I 28,22. MHTXA..XG V I 51,5.
6 a .g i g Cf. t 6 a i o .
- 6 g V 21,8 ; 24,12; 26,4; 27,8; 32,7; 3 3 ,12 ; 45,6; 52,17; 59,23; 67,14. VI
4,22; 1 1 , 1 1 ; 16 ,1; 2 1,12 .14 ; 23,17.27; 2 4 ,12.14 .17 ; 25,26; 26,8; 29,3.32;
30,24; 3 1,8 ; 32,12.28; 3 4 ,3 .11.2 2 ; 48,17.26.30; 50,6; 5 1 , 1 1 ; 65,19; 76,28.
B G 7 ,1; 8 ,21; 12 9 ,13 ; 13 0 ,1; 13 5 ,17 ; 139 ,18 ; 140,7.
6cd v. V 59,13. B G 13 2 ,19 ; 135 ,[16 ]. 6a> FJ^HT V I 66,16.
COPTIC WORDS 527
6 b b v.: 6 o o b + V I 15,28; 27,23; 6 o j b adj. VI 50,31. B G 128,16; 129,14.

m H t 6(DB V 67,9. VI 15,19; 50,29. 6a.BH T V 28,4; 32,13.19. p
d l B ^ H T V 32, [21]; 51,17.
6 B o y p Cf. ^ B o y p
6 H A m.: i q j 6H A V I 19,28.
6 0 A nn. VI 7,14; 44,20. 6x\
VI 39,26. xi 6 o a B G 15,4. xi 6 o\ e-
(ep o ) VI 14,21.22. B G 18,5.
6w e B G 128,14.
6 o e i A v. V 73,17.22. M l H 6 o e i A V 63,[2]. p M Fi6 a.IA V 74,23.
6a>cuA v.: 6 o a VI 32,5.
6 0 A X + Cf. KCUAX-
6 a i a nn. V 41,8.
6a>ATT (BOA) v. V 19,6; 25,6; 26,8; 29,12; 33,1; 46,7; 56,17; 5 7 -[4 ]-9 ;
67,16. 6
oAn-> 6 b o a V 36,15; 67,17. b o a V 85,20.
6 o m f. v 19,4; 24,30; 26,24; 27,16.18.21.[22]; 41,14; 55,5.23; 63,12.29; 64,
18.22; 65,19.30; 70,9; 71,20; 73,3.21; 74,5.8.16.19; 75. i 4-[27]; 77,3-5.6.
13.21.[26]; 78,3.25; 79,16.26; 80,8.18.28; 81,13.22; 82,9.16.19; 83,5.19.
25; 84,20. VI 6,17.32; 9,28; 11,22; 13,3; 14,6; 15,21; 21,8; 36,4.27; 38,
56.7; 39,8; 40,27; 42,7; 45,4; 47,11.12.33.34; 48,15.30; 55,26; 57,23;
65,22.24; 69,6. B G 128,17; 138,6. 6am V 26,18. VI 18,14.14; 36,2.15;
3 9 , i 5 ; 4 5 ,3 i; 47,2; 58,8. i t 6 o m
V 38,[21]. B G 129,15; 130,14. f
6 o m V 70,10. VI 6,12.17. o y W 6 o m VI 59,17. MfJ 6 o m V 57,[3].
VI 23,23. R m R 6 o m VI 37,18.20. m R o } 6 o m VI 29,32; 50,13. P i m n
o ) 6 o m VI 25,10; 46,17. o y R o j 6 o m VI 4,12.30; 11,25. X\ 6 o m
R t o o t o VI 61,1. 6 m 6 o m V 38,22; 65,28. V I 2,25; 44,24; 49,22; 55,
21; 75,23. 6 h 6 o m V 23,19; 27,3. 6 m 6 i m VI 40,10; 58,16. q ? 6 R 6 o m
)6 6
VI 32,20; 42,10; 68,24; 76,[12]. o m xm VI 29,12.
6 COM m. B G 139,3.10.15.
6 0 N m. VI 38,3.
6 m e V. V 18,12; 42,[13]; 48,9; 49,[15]. VI 1,16; 7,28.33; 8,[3]; 13,4; 15,
4.8; 21,29; 3 3 ,l6 ; 3 5 ,8 .1 5 ; 4 .I5 ; 48,19; 5 4 >
21; 60,10; 76,34. 6 R - V I
10,20; 32,22; 38,22; 39,21; 40,21; 46,31; 58,10. 6 R - V 79,6. VI 7,30.
6Ht - V 46,17; 51,[6]; 77,26. VI 38,31; 42,2. B G 8,21. 6 fl O Y 2 tUB
e g O Y N - V 35,20. 6 1 N M n u j l N V54,I9. 6 1 N m. VI 18,12. Cf.
6om .
6 cun (from 6 non, soft): N o y 6(DN V I 19,26.
6 o n c nn.: x i R 6 0 N C v. V 53,17. V I 50,22. XIT-
n 6 o n c VI 48,21.
Xi n 6 o n c m. VI 20,8; 39,31; 48,27; 50,21; 51,10. m H t x i n 6 o n c
VI 48,[2],
<
5 (DNT v. V 31,30. d l N T t V 45,11. 6 O ) N T m. V 21,1; 32,10; 45,12; 70,8;
75,25; 77.8. p e q 6 u > N T V 59,10.
60TT f. VI 2,21.
6 e T T H v. V 30,10; 44,[21]; 45,6; 48,16. V I 7,19. O y 6 T T H B G 137,13.
6HTTe f. V 81,16 (as a gloss).19.
6a> ne v. VI 29,18.28; 30,16.32. 6 ott- VI 30,9.
<5eptD B m. V 22,4. V I i4,[5].
6pHTT f. V I 28,22.
<5p o ) m.: p <Spa>2 V I 59.2.
528 INDICES
6 cu p 5 V. (waylay) V I 30,27. 6 o p e 6 + V I 30,7. 6 A .p e 6 t V I 29,6.

6 cu p 3 V. (prepare): 6 \ p 6 * V I 31,9.
6 c u p 6 v. (dwell) V I 7,[4].10.17. Cf. also Proper Nouns index.
6 p o 6 m. V 73,2.6. 6 p \ 6 V 19,7; 3 8 ,11.
6 c m. V I 62,18.
6 a > o y v .: 6 c u o y c b o a V I 1,18.24.
6A YO N nn.: 6 a .O YO O N V I 13,33.
6 a > q jT v. V 19,27; 23,20. d a jq p T e^cH- V I 73,26. BG 140,11. 6 a> a)T
N C I - V 23,5. BG 130,1. 6 CDOjT BOA ^ H T * V I 3,18.20. BG 140,13.
6 a .q jT + V I 22,21. 6A .qjT + W c a )-1 V I 2 7,11; 28,22. 6A.q)T+ c b o a V
54,23. 6A.qpT+ b o a V 30,16. 6 o < y T + c b o a ^ h t - VI x3-8-
6A.qpTt e b o a z Hr* VI 27,15.18. 6 a > q jT e n e c H T v 19,[29];
54,9 -
6 \ z ce f- VI 5 ,18-
6 1 X f - V 22,5; 5 7 ,[ 11] .13 ; 59,26; 6 2,13; 73,5; 74,16; 75,6. V I 2,17.24.27.29;
9,22.
6 a jc h f. V 20,3.
6 cu ace nn. V I 73,31.
G R E E K LO A N W O RD S
4Ya06? V I 8 , 2 9 ; 6 7 , 3 1 ; 72 , 2 5 ; 7 3 , 5 ; 74 , 3 1 .32 . 3 3 .3 5 . <*YWv v 53,13: 55 . 21 .

V I 3 3 . 2 5 ; 52 , 3 0 ; 64 , 3 0 ; 66 , 3 4 ; 7 3 , 2 8 ; 74 , 16 .25 .2 7 . B G 7 , 1 7 ; 9, 22.
M W T A . r a . e o c B G 140 , 10 .
<4ydbnrj V I 60 , 24 .
ikyyeiov. A m O N V 38 , 21 .
if f e X ix 6i; V 85 , 7 .
(SyyeXo? V 20 , 7 .8 . 1 2 ; 22 , 2 .5 ; 26 , 2 5 ; 64 , 1 5 ; 69 , 2 0 ; 7 1 , 1 3 ; 72 , 1 1 ; 75 , 8 ; 76 , 2 .5 .2 7 ;
7 7 , 2 0 ; 78 , 1 3 ; 80 , 5 . 26 ; 8 i , n ; 82 , 1 ; 83 , 1 7 ; 85 , 1 7 . v i 18 , 1 5 ; 21 , 1 5 ; 37 . 11 ;
38 , 2 5 ; 39 , 8 ; 56 , 2 ; 58 , 19 ; 59 , 3 0 ; 7 3 . 5 -
Ayvvt)tos V I 5 7 , 1 3 ; 63 , 2 1 .
Hypiov V I 49 , 2 1 ; 5 1 , 22 .
iycov V I 26 , 1 1 .
dyavioTfjt; V I 26 , 1 3 .
<Six(a V 5 3 , 19 .
fiSixo? V 4 7 , 2 3 . M R T A A I K O C V 4 3 , 2 1 .
dWjp V 82 , 26 . V I 3 7 , 1 0 ; 7 3 , 1 8 ; 7 5 , 6 ; 76 , 2 7 ; 7 7 , 1 5 ; 78 , 26 .
<x'ipeaiQ. M f l T ^ e p C C I C V I 40 , 8 .
aloOdcveoOai V 54 , 1 .
atoOrjoi? V I 76 , 15 . e C Q H d C V 38 ,2 2 ; 40 , 24 . V I 36 , 1 .
ataxpd?. M f l T C C X p O C V I 39 , 29 .
a k e iv . pA ITI B G 130 , 16 . p A IT C I V I 18 , 1 3 ; 55 , 1 4 ; 62 , 3 1 ; 64, 3 1 . e p i AIT6I
VI 59 , 2 1 .
atngfia V I 19 , 8 .
atxta B G 135 , 14 .
GREEK LOAN WORDS 529
aExtxocXtoala V 23,15.17.
alx(MtX<*>TeiSeiv. p i l X M l A C D T C Y 6 V 6o>5- P A .IX M 1A C D TI V 54,10.
alx(iaX<OTtêiv. p l I X M l A C D T I ^ e V 23,14.16.
attiv V 53,8; 65,1. V I 11,2 4 ; 363 3; 37>2 ; 382.13 ; 3 9 .12 .17 ; 40,24.32; 4 1,2;
4 2,6 .15.21; 4 3 ,3 .6 .7 .11.13 .15 .17 ; 4 7 ,1 5 1 7 ; 48,13; 56,7; 59,6.7. B G 17,6.
ecDN V 6 4 ,11.2 1.2 3 ; 65,5; 66,4; 7 1 ,13 .15 ; 7 3 ,3 1; 74,2.13.20.27; 75,13.
16 .2 1.3 1; 76,3; 79,30; 82,23.27; 8 3,4.14.15; 85,3.5.
ax|rf) V 67,6. V I 44,34; 65,20.
AxpoctT)<; V I 20,26; 21,6 .14.
iMfiela V I 54,19; 57.41 60,23.
&Xr)0iv6<; V I 33,2.
VI 7 8 ,11.
aXieiS? V I 29,20; 30,2.8.
iXlrqixa V I 19,8.
&XX6<puXo<; V I 70,21; 71,28.
4(teXeiv. p i M A I B G 129,8; 137,18 .
AnfrprjToi;: 4(irpY)Tov V I 46,9.
1M H N V 32,9. V I 12 ,19 ; 35.22.
dvayxaeiv. p iN l.rK A .2 e V I 77,32.
4v<yx7) V I 5 ,12 ; 30,22; 53,6; 67,9.21; 76,29.
(fcvatxioi; V I 66,23.
4vajcaikiv. I N l T T i y e V I 42,30.
iv&cauat? V I 18 ,10 ; 33,8; 47,26. B G 17,5.
ivaToXrj V I 35,8; 43,25; 44,2.15.
dtvaxcopsTv. p iN lX C D p e i V I 46,6.
dtv0e<iv: ivOe&vo; V 80,6.
<4v6r)To? V I 24,22; 34,3.18. Av6k)tov V I 54,13. M f iT l N O H T O C V I 34.H-
dtvo(i(a V 20,18.23; 40,20. V I 16 ,15 .
dv6jj.oi.ov. IN ^ O M O IO N V I 40,7.
(tvoyLoi; V 84,10.
4vTixet(xevo? V I 30,6; 31,9 . B G 18,10. 0 + R l N T I K l M 6 N O C V I 26,21.
ivnXoyta V I 53,23.
dwrt(xi(xos. I N T I M 6 I M ON V I 45,2.
&E,iot; B G 18 ,11. fiijiov V I 66,30.
46paTO?. I g O p i T O C V I 2 2 ,12 .13 .2 2 ; 32,27; 5 6 ,11. I g O p i T O N V I 32,32;
36,4-
inmpxii V 4 1 ,1 1 .
dhocTav. p i T T l T l V I 24,20; 3 1,16 .
&maro<;. e + F i i n i C T O C V I 7 6 ,19 .21; 77,30.
&7tXou<;. 0 + N 2 i n A o y c V I 64,8.
AuoOfyo) V I 25,25; 28,26.
47toxiXu+i? V 17,[19 ]; 24,9; 24,10; 4 4 ,9 .11; 63,[33]; 64,1.2; 85,19.32.
dtTroxaTioTaat? V I 74,7.
dt7t6xpu(pov V 85,23.
iitoXoyla. V I 20,6.
dbcoaTepeiv. p lT T O C T e p i V I 77,10.
AtoSotoXoi; V i8 ,[i9 ]; 19 ,15 ; 20,2; 21,29 ; 2 2 ,14 ; 24,2. V I 1,5 ; 12,22. B G 13 7 ,14 .
7toT<aasa0ai. p l T T O T l C C e V I 5,23; 7,24; 10 ,15.
34
530 INDICES
(Spa V 2 6 ,13; 34.7- V I 52.27 ; 74.28.

ip a (interrogative particle) V 26,2; < 2 7 ,i3 > . V I 53,15.
Ape-rfj V I 72,13.
4pi0(i6<; V I 4 3 ,2 1; 76,9.10.
4pveta0i. p A p m c e e V 48,23; 63,21. pApNA. V I 14,18.20.
dipxdrysôi; V 19,4.
Apxoclov V I 44,21.
fipxeaOat. e p i A p x e c e A i V I 53,24. p A .p x e c e A i BG 9,[22]. A p x e i BG
10,9. p A p x e i V 58,12. V I 5 2 ,11. B G 19 ,1.
ipxh v I9,[3]; 2 3 ,2 1; 38,3; 58 ,12; 75,27. V I 25,32; 37,8; 58 ,10 .13; 60,20.20.
X I A.pXH V I 7 4 ,11.
iSpXtov V 19,3; 25,19.25.29; 26,23; 30,2; 31,24.27; 39,10; 56,20; 64,21; 77,3;
82,13. V I 4 1,15 ; 4 2,3.9 .11; 43,29 35; 44.X I 4 ; 45, i ; 48.8-8.11; 49,6.
iae^ c, V I 66,2; 72,21. e + R 1 C 6 B H C V I 70,32; 7 7 ,3 1; 78,17. MRTAC6BHC
V I 71.34-
4o7t(êa0i. ACTTA* B G 8 ,12; 9,13. pa.CTTA.Xe V 19,18.20; 24,3.4.8. VI
57,26; 65,3.
&o<pctk&$ B G 18 ,13.
Aoxrj(iovetv. pACXHM ONI V I 65,29.
doct>|zaTo<;: dcocojj.aTov V I 40,17.
dcxa^ta V I 73,29.
(icTpSTTTO? V I 48,13.
au0evTix6? V I 35,23.
ocuXyj V I 32,10.
aoveiv. p A y S A N C V I 53,19 ; 55.5-
auo-rif)p<5(;. MWTAyCTH p o c V I 15,14.
dkoyevfc. A yT O rC N N HC V I 63,22.
auToy^vvTjToi;. AyTO TCN HTOC V I 57,15.
dc<p0apola V 46,8.19; 49,[3]; 72.9 ; 74.2 ; 85,13.
Pa0(x6? V I 5 2 ,13 ; 54,28; 63,9.

P40O? V I 32,9; 57,31.
pippapo? V I 16,2.3.5.6.8; 71,5.
Pipo? V I 72,7.
Pla. TIBIA V I 29,30; 3 1,15 .
ptoc V I 23,32; 30,32; 3 1,3 2 ; 65,2; 76,33; 77,5. B G 13 2 ,12 ; 138,18.
pxdtorreiv. pBAAJTTei V I 67,12.
PoY)0eIv. pBO H O I V 48,21. p B O H e e i B G 12 8 ,15; 129,2.
Poyj06; V 55,16 ; 59,24.
poiixyjoie v i 74,18.
PpOVTlQ V I 13 ,1.
yaXaxriTTji; V I 6 2 ,11.
yiy.0c, V I 13,24.
yeveA V 65,8; 67.24.f27]; 70,18; 7 1,19 .2 3 ; 77,20; 82,19; 8 3 ,1; 85,9.
ylve<si$ V I 48,10.
yevix6e V I 63,2.
Y^vo? V 19 ,5; 20,6; 34,5; 35,22. V I 69,10.
yivvr)n. T6N H M l V I 51,21.
Y6vvt)t6s: YevwjTiv V I 57,17. TCNHTON V I 57. 14-
V I 5 1,19 .
YXo>oa6xo(jiov. rAOCCOKCDMON V I 8,18; 9 ,3 1; 10 ,31.
YvSan; V 28,7.27; 35,6; 42,10.24; 47,8; 48,7; 64,13.27; 65,12; 69,15; 7 1,12 ;
7 2 ,1.14 ; 73,20; 76 .10.21; 82,23; 83,13.20; 85,16.22.26. V I 16,4; 18 ,14 ;
19.33; 62,33; 6 4 ,10 .13.16 .19 .33; 66,9.12.25.33; 67,15.17.20.23; 68,15.
Ypocqri) V 26,57.
YU|xveo6ai. p r y MN l i c e B G 9,23; 18,9.
8ai[x6viov V I 34,28; 42,17.

Satfiwv V 19,5; 79,5. V I 76,23.31; 78,27.
SeiTtvov. AITTNON V I 35,12.
SYjIxtoupY^s V I 73,26; 75.13.
Sid touto V I 27,30; 72,8.
8ia(3oXo<; V I 30,27; 33,26. m F IT J lI1B O A .O C V I 39,25.
SueO^xtj B G 139,2.
Siatpeoi?. A i e e p e c i c V I 20,35.
Staxovta V I 1 , 1 1 ; 5,6; I 2 , n ; 37,16.
8ia(iovr) V I 39,13.
Stivota V 27,4; 29,5; 37,16. V I 36,1.
Starayrj V I 44,31.
Slxocio? V 3 1,3 1; 32,3.6; 43,19; 44>i 4-i 8; 49.9 ; 59.22; 60,12; 6 1,14.
Slxaiov V I 48,28; 5 1 ,1 2 ; 59,12.
Sixoaoauvr) V I 22,14.
SixaUix; V I 7,6; 48,22.
Sixaarfjc V I 76,25.
Stoixeiv. p A I O IK e i V I 56,13.14.
Siaxdtêtv. A lC T l^ e V I 6 5 ,11.
Su&xeiv. pA IC U K e V 67,8.
Spdcxtov V 80,14.
8iiva(u<; V I 14,4; 25,34; 52,14.18.24; 55,7; 56,15.24; 57.29; 5 8 ,1 1 .1 1 ; 59,32.34.
So pat V 53,13. V I 55,15. B G 129 .16 ; 138 ,15.
V 26,1.3. V I 56,27.
frptpiiTeia V I 15 ,18 ; 19,19.
SOvo?. j e e N O C V I 3 3 ,11.2 7 ; 34 ,12.13. B G 9,8.
eZ8o; V I 2 1,2 1.
etSoXov V I 3 3 ,3 1; 34,16.
etxfj. eiKH V 24,14.
etxtiv. 2HCCDN V 25,1.2. V I 2,24; 38,8; 47,23; 48,31; 5 0 ,11; 56 ,13; 57.4-6;
65.16; 70,4; 71,34 ; 74,32.
el|xap|xvi). JC IM ip M 6 N H V I 62,27.
ei (x^ri V 29,8. V I 3 0 ,1 ; 54,24; 67,7.
elvai V I 69,18.
elp^vrj V I 6,27; 8,[5]; 12,19 . B G 8,14.14. 1 pH N H V I 14,32; 18,24.
I tix V I 46,19.
etTettxe V I 2 2 ,18 .19 ; 75,32.33. B G 15 ,2 1; 16 ,1.
34*
532 INDICES
exxXrjota VI 12,6.13.
X<4xioto? V I 1 5 ,1 1 .
i U Yxew. p e A e r x e V I 41,32.
eXeiSOepo?. M N T e A e y e e p o C V I 30,18.
l\n%sw. Z & \ U l Z e B G 13 8 ,11.
iXnlt;. geATTIC V 62,18. V I 34 ,10.17.32; 7 7 ,11.
2vSu(j.a V 58,22. V I 44,26; 46,16.
evipyeia V I 34,26; 39,22.22; 5 2 ,15 ; 53.19 ; 72,12; 75,22. e N e p r iA V I 70,6.
Ivepyeiv. p e N e p r i v 52,20. p e N e p r e i v i 33,19; 42.33; 65,25; 69,34.
vve&. 2 6 NNAC V I 56,26; 59 ,31; 6 1,22; 63,14.
^voxXetv. peN C U X A ei V I 63,36.
evToXrj V 49,13.
iZfiTdfew. p e s e T A ^ e BG 15 ,13 .
^ o 8iax<5?. 5 0 ) A I A K O C V I 63,3.
Iôuota V 19,3; 23,22.28; 26,[22]; 6 7,13; 76,20. V I 25,34; 26,28. BG 15 ,1 1;
i 6 ,2 .4 .[i 3 ],
SrtaiveTv. peiTAI N O y V I 5 1,10 .
im l. e n i v 32,6. V I 65,13.
e n iA H V 18 ,17 ; 24,26; 44,18; 50 ,1; 6 1,12 ; 65,29. V I 4,17; 48,16.26;
49,27; 68,20.
iTwOufjieiv. p e n i e y M i V 2 i,7 ; 81,26. e p e n i e y H e i V 8 i,6 . p e n i e y M e i
V I 30,14.22; 38,7.
ImOufita V 67,3; 73,24; 75,4; 80,3; 81,6 .8 .9 .11.17; 82,18; 83,16; 84,28. VI
7,33! 19 ,18 ; 2 3 ,15 .18 .19 ; 25.6; 30,34; 3 1,2 1; 40,6; 67,10. BG 15 ,1;
16,6.19. e n i e y M e i A v i 29,2.
emxaXeiv. peTTI KAA6I V I 55,24.
irclvoia. V I 14 ,10 ; 36,18.
inioxonot; V I 61,32. e t ReTTICICOTTOC V I 76,24.
lmor^(iK) V I I7,[7].g; 6 6 ,7.11.14.25.33; 67,15.17.20.23; 68,14.
Ipyaota V I 27,13.
gpyov V I 49,27.
gprjfio? V 78,23; 79,14; 82,1.
ipixrjvetieiv. p ^ e p M H N e y e V 36,5. ^ e p M H N e y e V I 58,29; 64,12.
pteiv. e p i c e v 22,7.
gp<0? V 63,8.
Sri V 38,15. V I 39,33- BG 7.20.
euayy^Xiov B G 8,22; 9,9; 18 ,19 ; I9,[3]-
euayYEXtCTTT)? V I 35,6.
euxaipta V I 1,15 .
etivoia V I 64,5.
eupeâ V I 60,21.
eOoipeta V I 38,26.
eOoeP^s V I 74,8; 0 ( e i ) t R e y c e B H C V I 38,22; 56,28.
&&<; V I 44,32.
r)nr)}ji.(x V I 60,20.
tj>ov V I 50,17; 67,8; 68,28; 75,20.
G R EE K LOAN WORDS 533
fj V 29,2; 3 3 .15 ; 65.9; 77.23- V I 13 .14 ; 20,16; 36,33; 3 7 ,1; 49,3; 71,7.8.8;
76,21.25. B G 8,17; 10 ,18 ; 16 ,15 ; 18,5; 129,14.
4)YC|i<&v V I 2,5.
V I 56,27; 57,28.
*)8ovfj V I 15,29; 21,2 5 ; 2 3 ,3 1; 24,19; 39,28.
ijXixlaVI 5 4 .11.
IjXto? V I 62,6.
0aXaaaa V 79.23. V I 1,14.29 ; 4 5,31; 73,14; 75.19.32.

Oaupoc. p e iy M A . V I 52,22; 71,36.
0au(iCetv. p eJk .Y M* * e VT 68,34; 69,8-9.
Oeto? V I 68,18. Oelov V I 59 .7 17 ; 70,38; 71,29 ; 78,41.
Oeopla V I 56,25; 57,[3]; 59,27; 60,3; 72,6.13.16. e e c u p e i l V I 59,16.
(h)plov V I 5,27; 49 ,18.21; 50,26; 51,22.
6XT<|>t{ V 63,23.
0vt)t6<;: 9vt)t6v V I 67,29; 75,21.
8p6vo? V 22,[27]. V I 4 5 ,11.
9uo(a V I 57,19.
tvaV 49,17. V I 10 ,10 ; 36,15.29. 1NA oce V i8 ,[ ii]; 7 6 ,11; 82,18. q jl NA. oce
V I 34.24-
xa0apleiv. p K & e & p iZ e V I 40,19.

xa0apio(i6c V I 45,28.
xa0ia-rivai. K ie lC T Jk . B G 7,19.
xa0oXix6<;: xaOoXtx^ V I 47,13. xa 0oXix6v V I 26,31.
xal yip V 4 1,22; 54,3. V I 45,22; 6 5 ,11.
xaip6c VI 44,30. B G 17,6.
xocItoi Ye V I 23,22; 33,25.
xaxta V I 66,6.18.22; 78,25.43; KA.61A V I 31,28 ; 40,20; 4 4 ,11.17 .2 2 ; 45,30;
67.27; 73.30-
xax^c VT 78,5. t6 xax6v V I 3 1,17 .
xaxoupYâ V I 62,25.
xaXiTvo? V I 61,27. K l W i e i N O C V I 61,29. K1 A.A1 6 I N H V I 62,12.
xaXto? V 38,24. V I 3,2; 1 1 .1 4 ; 3 1,10 ; 52,22.30; 53,9; 61,2.
xSv V I 4,5; 17,14 .
xaprcd? V I 3 1,18 ; 75,7.22.
xa-rdt V 20,6; 29,10; 3 0 ,11; 34 ,12; 59,3. V I 1,14 .2 2 ; 7,25; 1 1 , 1 3 ; 13 ,13 .14 ;
39,32; 43,2 ; 48.9 ; 52.9 ; 54.i6 -28; 63,9; 67,21.28; 69.21.22.24.27; 71,28;
74,13.36. B G 18 ,17 ; 19,4.
xaTdt|3aai<; V I 22,18.
xaraS(xT) VT 77,27.
xoct<xxXuo(x6<; V I 38,32; 39,5.
xottavTav. KA.TA.NTA. V 27,6.14; 29,[26]. pKATA.NTA. V 4 1,18 . V I 49,10.
xa-rafpovetv. KATA<)>pONI V I 16,30; 3 1,3 2 ; 72,9; 78,9. pKATA<t>pON I V I
15,22; 18,22; 26,16.
xaT^xetv. p K A T e x e V I 26,29; 58,9-
xa-njYopeiv. PK ATH TO pi V 74,5.
534 INDICES
xcenjYopta V I 23,34.
xeXetkiv. p ic e A - e y e V I 62,1.
xijpo^ V I 45,23.
xi(Wr6s V 70,11.20. 6 l BCDTOC V I 38,30; 39,3.
xivSoveiieiv. pici n a y n e y e V I 72,6. 6 1 n a y n e y e V I 72,36.
xlvSuvo?. 6 l N A yN O C V I 72,36.
xXa8o<; V I 22,31.
xXn)povo(ietv. pKA.H pONOMCI V I 23,28; 24,27. pKAHpONOMI V 37,15;
5 2 ,11. V I 23,24.25.
xXv)povo[ila V 53,9.25; 60,19.
xXTjpo? V 29,9.17.
xot(i)T^ptov. K H H H TH piO N V I 21,28.
xoivcoveZv. pKOINCDNI V 34,14. KOINCDNI V 43,18.
xoivcovta V I 68,21.
xoirciv B G 136,14.
xoXa&iv. K O \ X Z S V I 72,25; 78,13. p KOA AJ C e V 77,16. V I 46,23; 47,27;
77-9 -
xoXaxerSeiv. p K O A A K e y e V I 25,17.
xojtpla V I 15,6.
xoofiixd? V I 27,5.
x6ff(io? V 20,15.19 ; 2 1,5 ; 2 3 ,13 ; 46,13; 62,22. V I 5,32; 8,9; 10 ,16 ; 11,16 .17 ;
2 2 ,11 ; 25,30.32:26,12.27.28.30; 27,6; 30 ,5.12 :3 2 ,4 .13:4 5 ,13:7 0 ,9 :7 1,3 6 ;
72,9 ; 73,19; 74,6.31.34; 75,[3]; 76,36; 77,16. B G 7 ,12 ; i6,[2i]; 17,1.
xpaxot; V I 28,21.
xpfoeiv. K p iN e V I 21,20. B G 15 ,16 .17 .18 . p K p iN e V I 20,11.
xptats V 22,10; 27,24.
xpi-nfc V I 20,13.
xpiSaraXXov V I 77,17.
xtIoie V 20,4. V I 19,7; 3 7 ,17 ; 38,2.16; 39,20; 48,7.10; 59,2. BG 7,3.
xrtcriia V I 17,24.
xupiaxyj B G 128,2.
xcoXtietv. pK.CDA.ye V I 51,22 ; 70,24.
XW96S B G 128,13.
Xa6<; V 3 1 ,1 1 .1 7 .2 1 ; 39,22; 45.20.t25]; 61,[2]; 73,29; 83.10. V I 45,22.

X&mov V I 2 ,1 1 ; 3,24.
Xflad)(; V I 5,26.33; 7,27; 8,12; 78,18.
Xoyix6s: Xoyix^ V I 3 5 ,1; 78,42. A O re iK H V I 57,18.
XoyoyeviQS V 85,27.
X6yoc V 63,32; 8 2,13.15. V I 14 ,13 ; 18 ,16 ; 22,22.26; 27 ,31; 2 8 ,11; 34,1.19;
35,24; 40,4; 42,5.7; 43,28; 44,3.13.19 ; 48,17.32; 55,26; 60,24.25; 63,3;
64,9 .11-2; 65,8.14.36; 73,17. M f lT v r x o r o c v i 73,21.
Xot(i6; V I 73,36.
Xujreiaflai. p A y n e i B G 9,6.15.
XiSto) V I 30.29; 39,27; 77,12.
(iaeirnfc V 30 ,21; 36,3; 38,17. V I 9 ,21; 12,14.

|iaxapleiv. p M A K A p i^ e V 38,19; 55,24-
G R EEK LOAN WORDS 535
(laxapto? V I 42,24.28; 69,5. B G 8,12.

(laXiora V I 4,28.
(laXXov V I 54,32; 78,12. B G 9 ,18; 18,15.
(lapYapt-njc V I 2,31.32; 3 ,13 .13 ; 4,3.5.10.19.24.26; 5,8.
Ha<my 5 - M A . C T I K O C V 22, 8.
HawmyoOv. M A C T irO Y V I 78,36. pM A .C TirO Y V 20.12.
H&eiv. p M A l V 29,7; 3 1,15 . p M A l V I 27,7.
(ieXerav. pM A eT A . V I 6,25.
(isXtt) V I 8,10.
(iXo? V I 1 3 , 2 1 ; 1 7 , 1 8 . 2 2 . O j B p M M A O C V I 2 2 , 1 6 .
H^vToiye V I 48,24; 49,16.
(iepix6? V I 26,33.
(iepc V I 67,1.
(ipo? V I 2,20.22; 17,29; 66,34; 69,17.20.
(ieTavoelv. p M T J k . N O I N V 59,16.
(ieTouoCa B G 16 ,13 .
(jtlrpio?. M W T M T p i O C V I 2 5 , 1 1 .
(1^ V 20,[28]; 2 1,4 .11. V I 48,23; 69,28; 70,2.
(xr)7TOTe BG 9,3.
V 40,21. V I 26,27; 62,23.
BG 17,18.
prjTpa V 78,20. V I 64,25.26.
V 28,9.15.
jxolpa V I 62,19.
(iov^ V I 5,25.25; 19 ,11-
(lop^ V I 36,9; 49,12; 55.3 2 ; 57,6. B G 16,5.5.
tiua-rijpiov V 25,7; 28,3; 62,20. V I 65,16.26.35; 78,23.
vip0T)S. NApTO C V I 8,16. N A pA O C V I 9,30.

VYjOToSetv. p N H C T Y e V I 5,24.
vîpetv. pNH<)>e V 32,4. V I 21,27. pNH<|>l V 35,4. x p iN H (|)e V 57,24.
voeiv. p N O e i V I 22,29; 36.3 1 ; 37.6-22; 39,6; 42,25.29; 54,19.23; 55,20;
58,21.28; 6 4 ,11. B G 8,2. pNOT V I 54,30. B G 8,1.
v6i)(i V I 36,2; 48,14.
v6n)ai? V I 52,16; 54,29; 63,13.
voy)t6?: vot)t6v V I 64,23.
vo|io0nj<; B G 9,3.
v6|ios V 8 4 ,11. V I 16 ,14 ; 42,6; 4 8 ,11; 56,29; 62,29; 72,38. B G 9 ,2 ; 18,20.
vou? V i 8,[22]; 19 ,10 ; 37,19- V I 1 3 , 1 ; 18,9; 19,32; 22,28; 28,25; 34.26.29;
58,W-5-15-21-27.28; 60,27.30; 6 1,3 1; 64,9.10. B G 10 ,15 .2 1.
V I 22,23.
iySodti;. ôrA O A -C V 24,1. V I 56,26; 58 ,17 ; 59,29; 6 1,2 1; 63,13.

o[xou|ievT) V I 44,9.
olxovo(iia B G 139,7.
6(ioXoYeIv. p g O M O A O rei V I 14 ,18 .19 ; 6 9 ,11.
6vofieiv. pO N O M A Ze V I 6 1,2 1; 63,27.
ivofiocala V I 62,24; 64,1.3.
536 INDICES
6vtco<; V I 6,35.
67rcopa. OTTO pa. V 41,9.
6pa[xa. O p O M a BG 10 ,11.13 .17 .2 3 ; 13 1,16 ; 132,6.
6paot<; V I 19,19.
tfpyavov V I 60,29.
6prn V I 39,23; 63,29. b g 16 ,13.
opêtv. p 2 0 p i ^ V I 67,22.
6po<; B G 9 ,1; 18,20.
6tocv VI 16,33; 17.W 1 23,27; 29,27; 3 8 ,17 .21; 40,21; 45,24; 46,29; 54,19;
65,19; 76,12.28. O TaN V 64,6.
otl V I 47,34.
ou V 59,6. V I 74,22.
ou8 V 3 1,16 ; 56,19. V I 3,23; 12,2; 1 5 ,9 1 3 ; 18,[1]; 28,29; 29,4; 33,6; 48,6.
BG 9,2.15; 10,6.20; 15 ,7 ; 18,20.
ouxtl V I 70,33.
ouxouv V I 5 1 ,1 1 .
ou [x6vovdcXXdc V 33,8-9- V I 4,13-4.32-3; 65,37-8; 68,31-2.33; 69,19-20; 72,31-
3 ; 77>37-78>M-
o\5v V 26,2.14; 2 7 ,< i3 > ; 36,19; 41,20; 43,16. V I 11,20.32.
ouotoc V 24,28. V I 18,27.28.31; 23,20; 34,24; 55,33.
ouoi,dtpx?)<; V I 63,19.
ofrre V 24,15; 2 8 ,1.18 .19 ; 31,20; 32,22; 35,10; 49,21; 53,2.26; 71,25; 75,3;
77,14; 8 3,17; 85,6. V I 15 ,5 ; 17,28; 25,32.33.33.34; 29,1; 32,22; 37,19;
4 6 ,11; 50,23; 54,4; 62,26; 70,35; 72,[2].4.5; 73,15; 75,12; 76,17; 7 7 ,13 14 ;
78,41. BG 139 ,12.12.
7rdc0o? VI 21,24; 23,30; 31,26; 66,10.16; 67,3.26. BG 8,3.

7rdtXtv V 58,10; 62,7; 76,8. B G 15 ,10 ; 131,6 .
TravroxpdcTcop V 69,5.7; 72>25 ; 73,9-
7ravTco<; V I 78,24. BG 18,12.
Trapdc V 3 1,13 . V I 70,31. BG 9 ,1; 10 ,3; 18,20.
7rapaPatvetv. pna.pa.Ba. VI 62,30; 63,28.
7rapdtPaai<; V 83,26.
7rapaPoXY) V I 10,24; 40,31.
TrapayYêiv. n a p a r H A e V I 9,33.
7capayeiv. p n a p a r e V I 62,19.
7Tapa8i86vai. pT T apaA l A O y VI 41,21.26.
7capa8oau; V I 52,7.
7rap&puai<; V I 7 3 ,12 . B G 8,4.
7rap6vo<; V 51,22.27; 5 2 ,1; 58,18; 78,20.29; 79,6.8.11. V I 13 ,19 ; 25,8; 62,17.
BG 128 ,18; 137,8.
7rapouala V I 28,18.
7rapp7)oCa. n a p H c i a V I 14,28.
7rappY)otdcêo0at. pTTap2H C l i ^ e V I 28,20.
TretOetv. n i e e B G 132,18. p n i e e BG 129,18. n i e e c e a i V I 53,34-
7reipao[x6?. TTipaCMOC V I 7,9. BG 132 ,1.
Tr&ayos V I 77,15.
7rev0 etv. pT T G N eei V I 44,9.
neptoSoc V I 74,10.
Apropos V I 23,33.
rclTpa V 32,16 ; 80,24; 8 5 ,11.
jnjirt V I 45,34; 46.1.2; 52,19; 55,22; 58,13.
mfjpa V I 3.23.
TtwTCtkiv. n i C T e Y e V I 48,6; 69,2; 77,28.33. BG 12 9 ,1.19 ; 139,5. p n i c -
T e y e V I 72,34; 77,36. BG 17 ,13 ; 137,6.
TtloTl? V 29,24.27.
TtXavav. pTTAANA. V I 45,16. B G 8,16.
ittevri V 77,22. V I 34,28; 73,30.
wXii; V I 62,12.14.
7tXi(j(xa V 76,17. V I 49,24. BG 7,3.
7tX<4aaetv. pT TA A C C e V I 20,20; 49,27; 50,5.18. n A l C C C V I 32,25.
TtXetv. n A 6 1 V I 73,14.
JtXrjxTpov V I 60,31.
nXi^p(d(ia V 46,8; 63,9. V I 22,19; 57,8.
ttXoutwvio? V I 75,17.
uveujxa. TINA. V i8 ,[2i]; 19 ,16 .21.26 ; 20,4; 21,24; 2 2 ,1.11.15 .2 2 ; 23,5.23; 24,8;
39.3-W-W-6-6 ; 55,[4]; 58,14; 63,25; 66,22; 69,24; 76,24; 7 7 ,17 ; 78,1;
80,15; 84,2. V I 18 ,18 ; i 9,[7l; 2 1,17 ; 37.24 35; 52,14 ; 53.3H 56,7; 57,5.10;
59,7.8; 60,1.30; 6 1,16 ; 63,20. BG 10 ,19 .2 1; 127,4; I 37.n - <i)Bp RTTNA
V I 22,17.
7tveu(xanx6<;. n N l T I K O N V I 32,32; 53,17. T T N A T IK H V I 23,13.
noinVVT 3 2 ,11.3 4 ; 33,2.
itoXejietv. p n O A H I V 36,17. V I 28,15.
6Xe(xo<; V 34,20. V I 14 ,3 1; 18,24; 28,14; 39,26; 73.10.35.
wSXi? V 78,21. V I 1,2 8 .3 1; 2.M .9 .31.34 ; 3 ,15 ; 4 ,[1].12.16 .32; 5,10.14.20;
6,22.23.31.34; 7,10 .18 .21. 10,2.9.34; !i,2 7 ; 43.33; 44.5; 75.28.36.
pRWTTOAIC V I 18,26.
itoXweta V I 27 ,17 ; 31,30.
itoXiraSeaOat. p r r o A iT e Y e c e a k .i V I 3 1,19 ; 56,29.
itoXtTT)?. T T O A IT H C V I 59,4.
Jtovijpta BG 15,14 .
7tovr)p6? V I 73,5.
nopsla V 42,24.
Tropveta. n o p N IA V I 24,[7].
Jtopvetov. TTO p N IO N V I 24,8.
it6pvi) V I 13 ,18
7Cpocy(iaTe(a. ITp2k.rH3k.TIA. V I 70,15.
JtpaY(xaTetieo0ai. pTTpA.rM VreYCe.2k.l V I 32,20.
itpaYtiaTeuT^? V I 32,18.
Jcp5t5 V I 12,20. B G 14 1,7 .
Jtpiaoetv. p n p A C C A V I 48,9.
7tpdpXj)ji,a V I 54,12.
KPOXOTT^ V I 54,7.14.
Jtpivoia V I 5 4 ,15 ; 56,4; 59.5-
TCpoire-rfc. MHTnpOTTTHC V I 60,2.
itp6? V I 2 1,2 5 ; 31.27-33. B G I 7.4-
538 INDICES
npooeuxh V 30,29; 3 1,3 ; 32,5; 62,14.

7cpocTaYâ V I 26,5.
7rpoa<pcjveIv. pTTpOC(J)CUNei V I 53,12.
7rp6cG)7TOV. e + MTTpOCCUTTON V I 62,7.9.
7rp6<pact<; V I 1,2.
7rpo<py)Tela. TTpO<|)HTiaVI 69,36.
7CpO<pT)T7)<; V 39,23; 78,8.
7CUXY) V 20,10; 21,27; 22,12. V I 8,7; 41,7.
7tco<V 29,14; 36,21; 52,2; 54,18.27. V I 8,28; 9,3; 1 1 , 1 1 ; 36,28. BG 15,4.
pocppl V 25,10; 26,2.14; 27,14; 28,5; 29,14; 3 1,5 ; 40,4; 41,20.
aaPPaTOV BG 128,1.
ad&7CIy . CaATTIITOC V 60,2.
aa7T<pelpivo<;. CaTTTTei pi N ON V I 62,14.
aapxix6s: capxtxov V I 31,23.
<jap V 48,5; 6 3 ,11. BG 138,9. C a p ^ 5 V 27,6; 32,19; 48,7; 69,6.8; 70,5; 77,16.
v i 32,8; 37 ,17 ; 38,14.18.19.24; 39,14; 4 ^ 2; 42,1; 46>i; 48,10. t m r -
T e p o N T C ap S BG 16,9. TM NTC2lBH R C G 6 h R C ^ p S BG l6,I0.
cpec0at. p C S B G C e a i V I 70,29.
cejxv6<;: cejivrj V I 13,18. MFlTCGMNOC V I 44,23.
CTTjfxelov V I 20,33; 4 2,13.2 1; 45,7.8.14. CHMION V 23,24.26.
ctYh V 28,2.
<rxav8aXtea0ai. pC K2iN A 2lA IC BG 132,10.
axe7raeiv. p C K e n a Z e V I 46,14. BG 9,17.
axeuos V I 2,8. BG 137,2.
aouSdcpiov V I 2,14; 3,25.
co<pla V 35,7; 36,6.8; 85,16. V I 10,28; 16,3; 44,19.20; 47,4.18; 56,23; 57,25;
62,32. BG 16 ,11.
ao<po<; V I 61,7.
CTTOCTaXT). P TT K G C TT2i T V I 72,33.
C7r^pjia V 72,24; 73,14.25.28; 7 4 ,11.17 ; 76,12. V I 23,9; 25,24; 43,26; 65,21.25.
CTropa V 65,4.8; 66,4; 69,12; 7 1,5 ; 76,7; 79,16; 83,4; 85,22.29.
c7rouSato<; BG 139,8.
CTepcctjjLco?. C T G p eC IM O C V 3 3 ,1 1; 34,23.
CTeplofxa V I 45,32; 47,5.
cttjXy) V I 61,26.29.
CTtyjJLT) V I 46,20.
aroixetv. p C T O IX e i V I 62,28.
CTpaTta V 26,26; 27,17; 79,2.4.
CTiipa^ V I 2,28.
auyyevfc V 44,19.23. V I 22,29; 68,7. M flTCYNTGN HC V 6 1,II.
aûyos V 3 5 ,11. C Y N * Y r o c V 66,8.
cujx9opa V I 78,39.
auveHfyais V I 27,17; 63,5.
auveuSoxetv. p c y N e Y - ^ o 6 e i V I 63,8.
auv7j0etv. C yN H O I V 62,15.
auvoucta V I 18,29; 65,17.26.
G REEK LOAN WORDS 539
auvTayT) V I 1,1 3 .
o^peiv. c y p e V 62,2.
oippayêiv. pC<J>pAri2: e V 73,4.
aippafk V I 20,3.
(xa V 19,7; 20,23.29; 21,20. V I 1,7 ; 2 ,2 1; 11,12 .2 0 .2 3 ; 2 3 ,14 .17 ; 3 1 , 5 . 1 1 ;
32 ,16 .19 .2 1.2 5 .3 1; 35,4; 38,14; 39,18; 60,5; 64,18; 67,6; 6 9 ,14 .21; 7 1,2 0 ;
75.^3: 7 6 ,7 .9 .11.11.14 .15 .2 9 ; 77,19 ; 78,4- B G 8,6; 12 9 ,12 ; 13 2 ,3 ; 135,7.
OJBp R e CUMA. V I 22,16 ; ATCCDMA V I 40,18.
aut^p V I 9,5. B G 18 ,1 1.13 . CCDp B G 7,2.23; 9,[24]; 10,2.4.19; 17 ,8 .14 .18 ;
18,5.21.
TaXawwopeiv. pTAA.AITTCD pi V I 35,3.

T(Xiciov. TAM I ON V I 3,16.18.29.
T V I 52,7.8; 67,20.
Tapax^j B G 8,5.
-r<4<po<; V I 70,34.
TX<i V I 9,1.
T&eio<; V I 1 3 ,1 ; 43,22; 63,31. T6A .IO C B G 18,16.
teXco<; V I 48,21.
t& os V 33,9. V I 44,13.
TeXcbvrjc V 20,16; 22,20; 33,8.
TeTpiYtovos. e t flTCTpArCD N O N V I 62,12.
T^XVIJ V I II,IO .
njpeiv. p T H p e i V I 63,23.25; 64,32.
t i VI 4,7.
Ti(X<op(a V I 70,27; 77,9.
ToX(i>]p(a V I 73,9.
r6ito<; V 23,9; 5 1 , 1 1 ; 69,23; 80,4. V I 15 ,12 .2 9 ; 1 7 , 1 1 ; 36,23; 42,33; 44,2.29;
7 5 ,11.14 ; 78,27.
t6ts V 19.20.f32]; 2 1,1 7 ; 22.13.f23]; 23,25.29; 27,6; 30,5-27; 34.14; 35.19 ;
37.7; 38.[io]; 39.18; 5 7 ,17 ; 64,20.22; 65,16; 66,9.12.23.25; 67,4.[27] ;
70,6; 71.8.20; 7 2 ,15 ; 73,13.25.[30]; 74,26; 75,9; 77,4.7.16.18; 83,4.8; 84,4.
V I 37,23.29; 39,16; 40,24; 4 1,13 .18 .3 2 ; 4 2 ,3 1; 43,25.29; 4 4,4 .6 .10 .11.13.
26.29.31; 4 5 ,1.15 .17 .2 7 ; 46,3.21.25.32.33; 47,5.6.9; 49,22; 7 1,14 ; 73.24.
BG 8,4; 9 ,12 ; 18 ,1; 13 0 ,16 ; 138,7.
TpMTn^Yioros V I 59,15.24; 66,26; 75,34; 78,31. T p i c M e r i c T e V I 69,1.27;
74,17-33; 78.14-
Tp<7tO? V I 39 ,10; 42,1.
TpO<p^j V I 22,26; 29,22.25.29; 3 0 ,3.11.2 1.2 5 .2 6 ; 3 1,3 4 ; 32, i ; 35.14: 65,6; 67,8;
75.19-
Tp9^ V I 39,10; 4 6 ,11.
tOtio? V 30,16 ; 3 1,2 4 ; 36,2. V I 38,9; 57,8. B G 17,2.2.
tottouv. p T y n o y v i 20,21.
(5X7) V 24,16. V I 22.[34]; 25,23; 27,28; 3 1.18 ; 40.18; 47,7; 54,32; 6 6 ,11; 67,1.
1.1 3 .18 ; 6 9 ,13 .17 ; 75,5. B G 7,[i]-7; 8,[2].
6X1x6? V I 28,9. oXocil) V I 23,17.20.
tyvetv. p 2 Y M N l V I 58,20.23.25; 59 ,31; 60,4.8.28; 61,5. P 2Y M N I V I 6 1,16 .
540 INDICES
UTrofiiveiv. p^YTTO M INe VI 7,5.9.13; 10,6.

UTTOfAOVlfj. 2 Y nOMONH VI 2 ,4 ; 10 , 4 .
tiTTOT&iaeiv. p 2 Y n O T ^ c c e V I 3 8 ,2 4 .
<paive<i0ai. p ( J)e N e C a i V I 50,16.

<pauXo^: <pauXov V I 68,17.
90ovetv. p(J)0O N 1 V I 72,15.
<p06vo?. n 0 O N O c V I 39,24.
<piXa7Toveiv. 6A (|)IA O nO N I V 29,6.
<pX\Sapo<;. (J)AO la p O C V I 23,33.
96P0? V I 15,26; 58,9.
<popetv. (f)Opi V I 2 ,11. F<t>oP i V I 75,21.
<p<SXa V I 62,5.
<p<Sai<; V I 19,6; 49,7; 55.32 ; 64,27; 65,28; 67,32; 74,8.13.15. B G 7,3.7.8.15.18;
8,10.
<p<o<rrf)p V 7 5,14 ; 76,9.28; 7 7 ,15; 82,7.28; 85,28.
X<%(peiv: x Pe V 5 0 ,11.12 .
Xapêiv. X A p iZ e B G 12 9 ,15 ; 138,14. p X A .p i*e V I 64,8; 66,32.
X<*pi<; V I 32,15. B G 9,16.
Xfo pXH pai V I 59,16.
X7)pe\Seiv. pxH p e y e V I 70,20.
Xop7)Y* V I 72,14.
xpe(a. xpiJk. V I 10,10.20. p x p iA V I 67,14.
XP>)ii.a V I 23,29. B G 139,16.
Xp>)o6at. p x p a .C e A. I V 54,2; 77,19.
XP*)t6i;. X C V 59,11-
Xp6vo? V 53,20. V I 4 4 ,11; 45,25; 46,25; 74,10. B G 17,6.
Xt&pa V I 70,30.31.
Xtopetv. p x t u p i V 4 1,15 .
Xtopk V 47,[24].
(JjdeXXetv. p'f'AA.A.ei V I 60,32.

(jjaXtrjpcov V 60,4.
<JUX^ V 19,7; 20,9 .13.21; 2 1,16 .19 ; 34,23; 38 ,15; 66,23; 75,5 ; 76,16; 8 3,11;
84,3.12. V I 1 1 ,1 8 ; 22 ,13 ; 2 3,12.16 .21.2 7; 27,25; 28,10; 31,12 .24 ; 32,26.
27; 34,32 ; 38,8; 39, 19; 4 0 ,11; 4 i , 2 U 45,28; 47,9-27; 48,32; 53,20; 54,27;
55-z3; 56 ,1; 57,12.22; 58,6.19; 59,16.29; 63,34; 66,15.20; 69,33; 72,27-
28.37; 75,[3]; 76,25.29; 77,12.25; 78,24.40.41. B G 10,18.20; 15 ,5 .13.17 ;
16 ,1.14 .17 ; 129 ,17 ; 132,3; 138,10. 'J / y x o o y e V 22,10; 33,10. V I 19,8;
78,34-
(jjuxtx6? V I 39,16. <Juxt6v V I 40,25.
& V I 10,23; 52,[2].7.20.27.30; 53,6.15.17.24.28.32.34; 54,9-i3-i 8.23.3i; 55,[2].

6.10.10.23; 57,27; 5 8 ,1.14 .18 .2 5 .3 1; 59,10.12.15.20; 60,6.12; 61,3.3.18.
23.25.27; 62,16.20; 63,15.32.36; 64,23.23.25.26.28; 66,26.28; 68,13.23.35;
69,1.8.27.29.31; 70,3.36; 71,6 .17.26 ; 72,30; 73,23; 74,i7-i9-33-34; 75,34-
35; 76,22; 77,28; 78,2.14.16.31.32. B G 139.18.
PROPER NOUNS 541
<!>? V 39 ,17; 56,7; 61,4; 65,16. V I 5 2,17 ; 53,10 .14 ; 59,18; 60,8; 65,24; 66,24;
67,8.12.18; 68,2.18; 71,28; 72,21.23.24.26; 74,22. BG 7,10 ; 137,6.10;
139,8.
&are V 3 2 ,12 .17 ; 8 1,5; 83,3. V I 23 ,17 ; 46,20; 50,8.32. B G 17,8.
c!><pXei<x. 0 < t> e x e iA V I 50,24.
P R O P E R NOUNS
ABpACAS V 75,22.
AA&M V 64,1.2; 66,2.17; 85,20.23.32.
AAAA.IOC V 36,15. 2 A A 6 0 C V 36,20.22.
AACUNA.IOC V 3 9 ,11.
AMMCUN V I 72,31.
A N A p e a c BG 17,10 .
ApCINOH V 40,26.
ACK.AHTTIOC (AC K \H TTI e ) V I 66,28; 68,13.23.35; 69,8.29.31; 70,3; 71,26;
72,30; 73,23; 74>I 9-34; 75-35; 76.22; 77,28; 78,2.16.32.
A X A M c u e V 34,3; 3 5 ,9 10 ; 36,5.
BA B y A. CUN V 23,17.
rAMAAIHA V 75,23.
rxyrH A A N v 30,20.
A eyiC A X icu N V 70,19.

a i o c t t o a i c V I 61,19 .
AA H N V I 16,1.4.6.
2 6 PMHC V I 58,28; 5 9 ,11; 63,24.
e y A V 64,8.26; 65,3.12.27; 66,8.13.27; 69,16.
* e y c V I 75,16.17.
2 cu 2 a x c u e V I 56,22.
2 CD3 A e a 2 cu V I 56,17.
e e y A A v 44,18.
takcu b o c V 24,10 .13; 25,10 .13; 26,2.6.13; 27,9.[13]; 28,5; 29,4.13.19; 30,10.
13.18.28; 3 1,15 ; 32,2.13.17.23.29; 38,12; 40,[4].[9]; 41,19; 43.21; 44,10.
12.14; 63,[33]-
iA<|>ee v 72,17; 73,15.26; 7 4 ,11; 76,13.
Ziepixcu V 19 ,13.
2 ie p o y C A A H M V 37,12. IAHM V 3 6 ,19. eiH M V 18,5.[i 8]; 2 5 ,15 ; 44,15.
l e c c e A C K e y c v 85,30.
l e c c e y c v 85,30. __ __ __
m c o y c B G 130,4; 138,6; 139,19. i c V I 6,12.16 . i c n e x c V I 9 ,11.
Tc u j a n n h c V I 11,4 .6 .15 .
KepBOy (K^pPepo?) V I 49,8.

35
542 INDICES
KH M eVI 16,7; 70,4.18.19.22.23.36.37; 7 1,11.13 .15 .2 9 .3 1; 75,29. pRRK H H e

V I 70, 13.24; 71,6.10.14.16.24.
KOp H V I 75,21.
\e y e i V 37,7. BG 18,6.
AIBH V I 76,[1].
A i e a p r O H A VI 5,16; 7,23; 8,14.24; 9,8.
M * 2 a . p e Y C V 85,30.
M a p e iM v 44,16.
M a p e a v 40,[26].
M a p i a v 44,22.
M a p i a M V 40,25.
M apiâM BG 9,12.20; 10,1.7; 17.7; 18,1; 19,5.
M l X a p V 84,6.
Mixey v 84.5
M N H Cl N O Y C V 84,6.
NO?2e V 70,17; 7 1.15 .17 .2 1; 72.15; 73.1; 74 .J 7 ; 76,12. V I 38,22; 39,1; 41,3.
n a y A o c v 17,[19]; 18,9.15.[23]; 19 ,11; 21,25; 23,2; 24,9.
TTepi ACDN (IlieplSes) V 81,3.
neTpoc VI 1,30; 5,[2].3; 8,21; 9,1.2.3.4.5.10; 10,14; . i ; 12,20. BG7,io;
10,1; 17,16; 18,2.6; 128,4.9; 129,8; 130,12.18; 131,10 .12; 137,14; 140,15;
141,7. neTpe VI 9,15; 10,23. BG 18,2.7; 128,10; 131,18.
TTT OAGMJ UOC BG 132,12; 135,1.19 ; 137,1.17; 138,16.
c a B A U ) V 75,22.
C a K A a V 74,3.7.
CaA CDMH V 40,25.
C A C A B K V I 41,29.
C3LYHA V 79,2.
C H V 64,3.6; 67,15; 77,1; 85,20.24.
CHM V 72,17.
C K Y H C V I 71,8.
COAOMCUN V 78,[30]; 79,3-10.
c o< t > i a v 35, 7; 36,6.8.
T X T V I 72,30.
<|> H p d A U ) V 7 9 , 1 .
X i M V 7 2 , 1 7 ; 73 , 1 4 .2 5; 7 4 , 1 1 ; 76,13.
x m a p p a i c (Xln<*ipa) V I 49,8.
x c (XpiaT6<;) BG 138,7; 139,19; 14 1,1. Cf. also IHCOyC.
2 N S R p o V I 6,23.
2 R T O Y V I 71,8.
<S<up3 V I 2,[3]; 7,[I].[2]; 10,3.

R EFER EN C ES TO
ANCIENT WORKS AND AUTHORS
References to tractates in this volume in their own introductions and foot

notes are omitted, General references (e.g. to a whole tractate) are placed
at the end of sections.
A. NHC a n d B G T r a c t a t e s ; o th er G nostic L it e r a t u r e
, : Ap. J a s .
1 2 53,20-21 456
5,18-20 145 55,6-14 249
H35-36 13 2 57,29-58,2 120
59,8-h 468
1,3; Gos. Truth 59,3i -6o,i 236
I 734 246 62,35 274
63,34-64,5 461
I I ,j: Ap. John 65,10-11 and passim 260
1,24-25.29 297 68,4-6 251
8,29 234 68,22-24 155
10,20 3i3 70,9-11 155
11,17 171 75,20-35 468
12,25-26 320 8o,28ff 275
14,21-15,9 295, 299 General 258
26,31 321
26,32-27,11 319 [,4: H yp. Arch.
26,33-27, 11 322
87,10-11 52
29,2-5 301
87.33-35 315
30,11-31,25 232 88,i 3i 5
30,19-20 307 88,3-15 160
31,6-7 133 89,14-17 232
General 152, 195
89.30 315
II,2: Gos, Thom. 90,34 315
95.7 171
33>I 4"I 9 (logion 2) 458
33,5-io (logion 4) 96,33-34 3i5
244, 295 188
34.25-30 (logion 12) J3o 97.4-5
General 152
37.26-27 251
41,30-42,7 (logion 50) 49
43,12-22 (logion 60) 321 ,5: Orig. World
48.26-29 (logion 92) 458 108,26-27 73
51.18 -2 1 (logion 114) 461 H 4,7- i 5 232
51.18-26 (logion 114) 468
General 4 5 4 . 456 ,6: Exeg. Soul
129,14.18 305
11,3 : Gos. Phil. 132,9 .15 236
52,21-24 262 General 258
544 INDICES
11 ,7 : Thom. Cont. 12,4-21 90

142,13.34-39 296 General 159
142,31-32 3i 3
General 390 V ,2; Apoc. Paul
24>7 342
I I I , j : Ap. John General 1 5 1 , 342
General 195
V ,j.: j Jes.
1 1 1 ,2 : Gos. Eg. 26,8-10 127
50,23-26 159 3 1,11 - 1 2 138
52, 19-53,9 174 35,24-25 60
54,10 -11 157 General 49, 67, 109, 15 1
57-58, passim 17 1
60,9-18 173 V ,j: Adam
6348 175 66,5 3<>5
63,18 170, 188 General 149
64,4 188
64,10-11 195 V I ,j; Apost.
64,12-13 130 General 475
64,14-20 190
65,10 -11 195 V I,2 : Thund.
66,10-11 195 19,1-2 263
66,12-22 366 General 257
68,1-13 193
General 152, 153, 195 V I,3 : Teach.
28,9 320
I I I , J : Eugnostos
3i,27-33 253
71,8 92 3 2 ,1 1 3 4 3<>5
74,io 92 33,2 305
74>I 4I 9 52 33,8 321
83,3 92
8 3 ,11 92 V I,^ : Gmi/ Pow.
General 257
III,^ : Soph. Jes. Chr.
9 1,10 -15 120 V I,5 : Plato Rep. 88b~^8gb
General 291,444
1 1 1 ,5 : Dial. Sav.
138,20-139,5 318
V I,6: Disc. 8-9
14 3 ,11-2 1 318
5 2 ,1 396
General 454 57,26-27 376
I V ,j: A p. John 61,4 378
6 1,17 412
General 195
General 2i 7> 375, 376,
IV, 2 : Gos. Eg. 3 8 9 , 390, 396
General 153, 195
V I,7: P y . Thanks.
V , j: Eugnostos 64,18-19 412
10 ,15 -11,2 91 General 389, 390, 395, 396
ANCIENT WORKS AND AUTHORS 545
VI,7a: Scribal Note V II, 3: Apoc. Pet.

General 396 71,23-24 315
74,15-22 30 4
VI,8: Asclepius 7 8 ,1 6 3 15
66.30-34 381 79,9 3 15

70.29-35 3 17
72.19-73,12 3 17 V II, 4: Teach. Silv.
72.20-73,12 3 14 98,22-23 136
73.14-22 318 General 258
General 389, 390
V II,5 : Steles Seth
VII, 1 : Paraph. Shetn 120,10 157
26,33-27,6 30 4 12 3 ,1 135
10,20 2 9 4 General 193, 367
14.5-6 2 3 9
32.5-12 17 9 V III, 1 : Zost.

36.12-22 1 7 7 4,21-23 174
36.14-22 3 0 7 6,8-17 190
.
38 2 9 -3 1 3 14 18,2-3 179
4 1.10 -11 306 47 174
43.i 239 47,5-6 195
43.31-44.2 314 47, i 6 125
44.6-10 3 13 1 2 1 ,3 5 135
44.31-45.8 316 125 ,12 135
45.6-8 316 125,14 125
48.17-19 296 129 ,13 295
48.17-22 3*9 130 ,16-17 157
48.19-22 322 General 135, 153
General 298
V I I I, 2: Ep. Pet. Phil.
V II, 2: Treat. Seth 138,15-28 460
50,16-18 179 140,17 458
51.24-29 307. 39 General 454
.
5 1 2 4 -3 1
299
52.10-14 307. 39 I X , 3 : Testim. Truth
53.20-21 307. 309 72,5-8 18 1
53.30-31 134
X , j : Marsanes
54.25-27 307
2,14-4,23 188
54.31-55.10 307
55.30-56.19 177 X I , 3 : Allogenes
57.26 321 62,15 135
.
6 0 2 0 -2 1 315 72,1-6 193
6 2 .2 6 321
62,27-30.35-39 315 X II I , 1 : Trim. Prot.
63.19-24 315 40,19-22 3<>7
307 42,18-22 136
64.13-15
6 4 ,1 8 313 42,20-21 306
6 4 .1 9 - 2 2 134 43,8-26 3<>7
546 INDICES
4 3,17-31 308 General 454. 476

43,35-44,2 134
48,18-21 19 1 BG ,^: Act Pet.
48,27-29 174 General 202
General 153, 232
Cod. Bruc. (untitled text)
B G ,i: Gos. M ary f. 110 *34 -3 5 x74
General 49 f. I 28v,2-3 263
f. I 3v,3 263
B G ,2: A p. John f. 136*, 18-23 10 9
20,19-21,4 48 General 153

21,4-5 244
23, i -3 299 Exc. Theod.
General 453 50.1 262
51.2 262
B G ,j: Soph. Jes. Chr.
79,10-12 458 Gos. Eve.
89,4-6 456 General 234
92,5-6 188
101,6-9 460 Pist. Soph.
103,10-106,9 476 I l l , ch. 124 285
117 ,13 -12 6 ,16 476 General 454
B. H e rm e tic L it e r a t u r e
Corp. Herm. I General 345
9,12,21,32 383
9-11 437 Corp. Herm. V II
12 ,14 416 General 345
14-19,24 400
15 410 Corp. Herm. IX
20-32 345 General 397
21-23 359
23 441 Corp. Herm. X
26 342, 360, 363, 382, 412 5 360
27,32 382 6 382, 412
29 378 7-9 409
3i 358. 379 8 44
32 385 9 405
General 343. 345 21 441
22 410
Corp. Herm. IV General 397
7 382
General 345 Corp. Herm. X I
Corp. Herm. V 1-5,15,20 361
i -5 424
Corp. Herm. X II
Corp. Herm, V I 3 44
12 381 General 3 4 3 .3 4 5
19 405, 410
General Corp. Herm. 258
397
Asclepius
Corp. Herm. X I I I
19 372
1 346
39-40 370
8 358 4 1b 376
10 382, 412
13 359 Kore Kosmou
I3>22 36i 14-17 408
15 360 24-30 408
18 383 28-29 437
18-19,21 358
20 364 Stobaeus 1.2 1.9 (Nock-Festugire
21 364 III, Frag. VI. 1) 346
C. B i b l i c a l L i t e r a t u r e
I. Old Testament (canonical order)
Gen 1 :7 297 Job 2 6 :14 234
2 :7 (LXX ) 160 2 3 :19 3H
5 300
5:4 (LXX ) 154 Ps 2:9 58
6 :1-8 300 2 :11 157
6:3 16 1, 295 6 8 :19 60
6:4 (LX X ) 300 78:24 249
6:9 301 113 :9 236
6 :17 162 136 :6 297
7-4 162
7 : 7- i 3 301 Pr 1:20 -21 249
7 :1 1 - 1 2 301 8 :1-4 208, 249
9 :18 -19 168 8 :17 234> 237
9:20 169 9 :5 249
10 :2,6 (LX X ) 170
18 :2 158 Eccl 7 :1 422
19 :24 17 3
Song of S 4 :15 304
Exod 7:17-25 422
Isa 3 :1 0 (LX X ) 142
Lev 18 :9 263 5:20 426
6:9-10 140
Deut 6 :5 353 11:2 95
6 :13 15 7 19 :5 -7 422
13 :14 14 5 24:4 313
22:28-29 485 24:19-20 313
3 0 :15 ,19 264 43:n 134
44:6 134 , 235
2 Kings 22:8 368 45:5-6,14,18,21-22 *34
548 INDICES
46:9 134 8 :12 419

47:8 ,10 134 9 :2 ,1 1 207
48: 12 235 9:9 4x9
53^2 117 29:8-12 422
54^ 236 39:17-20 313
6 5 :1 234
Dan 7 :1 3 48
Je r 1 : 5 48, 50 10 :5 207
2 :1 3 304 12 :3 321
7 :2 -15 14 1
7 :1 4 14 1
Joel 2 :10 313
12:7-8 4*9
17^3 304
2 1 :8 264 Mic 7:4-6 314
Ezek 1:2 4 234 Hab 1 :1 4 - 17 275
2. Jewish Apocryph and Pseudipigrapha

Apoc. Mos. 20,1-2 155 Sibyl IH.288-98,573-79 438
21,6 155 330,568-79 420
V.93-97 420
2 Bar 70 426 VII.43-45 426
85,10 430 124-25 429
H 4-45 438
1 En 10:4-5 296 V III.29-31 418
46-47 48 35-54,81-85 426
6 2 :15 -16 318 348 429
100:2 314 353-54 422
2 En 42,10 137 Test. Abr. 3 (long recension) 158

6 158
2 Esdr 2:39-40 318 9 (long recension) 174
5:1-2,6,24 314 10 (long recension) 48, 54
5-6 316
5:55 430 Test. Sol., passim 181
14 :10 ,16 430
T o b it3 :i-6 107
iQH 111,26 275
V,7-8 275 Vit. Ad. 50,1-2 193
iQpHab 9,2 178 WisdSol 2:12-20 142

3:7 32i
iQS V ,n 283 16:20-21 249
3. New Testament (canonical order)

Mt 2 :2 313 3 :1 2 , par. 267
2:3-8 309 4:5 *4*
4:23 459 6:8 208

6:6 1x8 8:34, parr. 215
6 :11,3 4 225 9:2-9, parr. 159
6 .12 147 10 :17 -25, parr. 209
6 :13 H7 10 :17 -3 1, parr. 202
6 :19 -21, pax. 273 10:30, par. 306
6 :21 462 10 :38 70
7 :1 463 13 :2 2 , par. 316
7:7 458 13 :2 5 320
00
364 13 :2 9 70
1
7:14 , par. 402 14: 34.36 70

7:19 -21 209 14:34.6 1 74
9:27-31 11 7 14 :38 84
10:8, par. 226 15: 4-5 74
10:9-10 202, 210 15:33 309
10:32-33 238
35-36. Par* 314 L k 1:7 8 287
11:15 456 7:i4 307
1 1 :27, par. 210 10 :20 295
12 :32 306 10:38-42 468
12:38 316 11:5 -8 118
13 :4 1 460 11:16 316
13:45-46 208 11 :4 0 251
16 :1, par. 316 12:8-9 147. 238
16 :16 -18 222 16:22-24 322
16 :19 108 17 :2 1 458
16:28 278, 460 2 1 :24 314
18:2-6 244 21:26 425
20:29-34 117 22:37 11 7
2 2 :14 402 24:36 (var.) 458
2 3 :13 284
24:4, parr. 458 Jn 1 : 3 268
24:7 313 i : 20 238
24 :12 425 1:2 9 457
24:23, parr. 458 4 :10 - 11 304
24:29 320 4:27 466
26:14-16 307 5 :2 1 307
26 :15 308 5:26 298
27:3 308 6 :18 263
27:24 102 6:30 316
27:51-52 313 6 : 31-34 249
28 :10 458 7 :12 145
2 8 :17 198 8:28 119
28:19-20 205 8:52 278
1 0 :1 1 283
3 : i 3- i 9 parr. 205 10 :14 129
4:14-20 365 n :5 461, 468
5 :4 1 307 11:4 4 207
550 INDICES
12 :2 9 234 2:8 307

12 :4 0 140 2:14 302
12 :4 1 11 7 4:8 132
12:4 9 119 7 : 3-4 401
13 :2 3 227 11:30 457
14 :1- 3 225 12:13 487
14 :6 136 15 :2 4 268
14 :16 ,2 6 81 15: 42-54 1x4
14 :2 7 458 15:44 282
14-17, passim. 270 15:44.46 302
1 5 :1 9 270 15:47 305
15 :2 6 81 1 5 :5 1 70
16:7,8 81 16:2 478
17:25-26 119
18 :11 70 2 Cor 1 : 12 465
20:7 207 316
4:4
20:19 -21,26 458 4:16 416
12:2 53
Ac 1 :8 205 TO12:2-4 4s . 49
1:2 6 223
3 :2 113 Gal 1 : 11-17 48
3 :6 226
1:15 48,50,60
3 :1 7 307, 404 1:17-21 50
3 :2 1 432
2:1-2 48.50
5 :1- 11 490
3: i 3 n7
5 :16 479
3:27 468
6-7 108
5 :1 277
8 :10 294
17 :2 4 -3 1 284
17 :2 6 408 Eph 1:4 188
17 :2 7 364 2:15 308
2 3 :1 271 3:16 416
4:8 60
Rom 1:19 - 2 1 284 4 :18 44
1:26-27 402 5 :12 411
3 : 3-5 4<>5 5 :18 265
7:22 416 5 :19 358
8:38 52 5:3 1-3 2 400
9 :12 -14 405
9 :23 486 Phil 4 :3 295
10 :4 308
10 :14 -17 284 Col 1 :1 5 ,1 8 132
10 :20 234. 364 3 :1 6 358
11 :1 6 - 2 1 262
12 :1 358 1 Thess 4 :4 486
13 :9 380
2 Thess 2 :3 3i 43*7
1 Cor 1-3, esp. 3 :19 465 2 :4 314
2 :11- 12 445 J rude 6 296

19 302
1 Tim 1 : 1 3 404
2 :5 305 Rev 1 : 1 3 207
4 :1 3i 7 i : i 3 18 441
5^2 487 1:17 235
2 :1 7 2 0 1 ,2 1 5
2 Tim 1 :7 13 1 3:5 3i8
1 :9 r88 3 :1 8 273
3 ^ -5 3H 3 :2 0 281
4 : 3-4 317 6 :1 234
Heb 2 :14 306 6 :1 3 320
3 :1 8 - 4 :11 321 6 :15 - 17 425
4 :14 11 4 7^7 3<>4
6 :5 306 9 :6 425
6 :19 285 12 180
12 :2 3 295 I3-I3-I4 3i6
1 3 :1 5 358 15 :6 207
16 :9 ,1 1,2 1 425
Jas 1 : 1 3 405 16 :14 316
2:1-9 202, 229 19:7-8 280
3^5 302 1 9 :1 5 58
19 :2 1 3 13
1 Pet 2:24 44
3:19-20 301 2 1 :1 - 2 438
2 1:6 304
3:20 402
22:6-7,10-12 445
1 Jn 5 :16 -17 444 2 2 :17 304
4. New Testament Apocrypha

Act. Jn . 88 48
48 22 483
93 135
135 28 483
94-96 232
232 31
31 479
33-34 475
Act. Phil. 21 175 35 48 3
General 474* 475
Act. P il. (Latin A) 5.2 308
Act. Thom. 41 479
Act. Pt. 1 483 147 2 5 1
2 485, 486
5 483,
474. 4
474* 3> 492 E v . Barth. 1,12 E v . Barth. 1,12 308
6 483
16 483 Ps.-Clem.
17 483 Horn. 66
20 201, 2 15 Recg. I.66-73 108
21 483, 488 General 66
D. A p o s t o lic an d C h u rc h F a t h e r s
Athenag. Suppl. 33 475 Cl. A l. Strom. I .i (GCS I, p. 6,
552 INDICES
line 21) 275 2 295

2 ,14 ,15,16 312
2 Clem 9 :7 404 8.40 175
12 :5-6 475 19-21 152
V I.4.13 294
Didache 11:3 - 6 202 5,8,10,24,25,30 312
24,29 312
Ep. apostol. 17 (Coptic) 3 12 29 3 2, 303
V II.11,12 ,13 313
Epiph. Pan. 2 1.1.2 294
23.1.4 299 Ign. Pol. 5.1-2 475
26.3.1 234
26.8.1 Iren.
15 1
26.8.1-3 Haer. I.1.1-2 312
454
26.9.4 4.1 296
242
26.17.6 5-i 320
313 6.1 320
3I-4-I 224
34.20.11 224 6.1-2 302
.
3 6 3 1 - 6 66 71 3<>5, 319, 320
11.1 312
3 6 3 2 86
88
21.5 60, 66, 86, 88, 107
36.34-5 24.1
3 6 3 6 90 299
24-3-7 320
38.2.5 47
24-5 320
39 15 2
28.1 475
76.4.7-9 3 0 4
30.6 134
Eus. 3 0 13 307
Hist. Eccl. 1.13 67 3 0 14 3i i
II. 2 1.1 90
II.1.4-5 142
142, 144 30 7 49
2 3 1 5
23 108 Just.
Praep. Ev. XII.46.2-6 326, 332 1 Apol. 15 475
Dial. 34 215
Hipp.
Antichr. 5 317 Orig. Comm. in Joh. X X .43
6 317 (GCS IV, p. 387, line 4) 278
49 316
Ref. V .1.2 3<>5 Sozomen, Hist. Eccl. III. 14.30 80
E. P h ilo s o p h e rs
Albinus, Didaskalikos 163-64 343 Conf. ling. 60-63 287
169.26-28 357 Congr. 138, etc. 44

Det. pot. ins. 149 362
Cic. Fug. 55-56 444

Nat. deor. 1.116 410 Leg. all. 1.31,33 416
Off. 1.153 410 10 5 -0 6 444
Philo III. 9 5 - 9 6 416
124 44 2 7 3 d 425
174-178 261 Tim . 22c-23a 43i
Mut. nom. 63 45 General 357
Op. mund. 134 416
135 410 Plut.
Plant. 18-19, etc. 416 Def. orac. 436f 36 5
Poster. C . 73-74 444 Pyth. or. 402B 365
74 404 Ser. num. pun. 549f 404
Praem. poen. 65 3 12 55id 404
Rer. div. her. 79 261 559f 404
Spec. leg. I.302 260 56ia-b 445
II.3 1 36 2 56 if 404
5 6 2 d 404
Plat. j 6 4 e-f 441
Polit. 272e-73a 426 5 6 5 a-b 442
,
2 72 6 2 7 4 b 419 Sallustius V I.2-3 436
F . M is c e lla n e o u s
Atharva-Veda X , viii, 27-28 232 Manichean Homilies 68,18 170
Bhagavad-Gita IX , 16-19 232 Manichean Psalm Book (Allberry,

ed.)
142,25-26 142
Chronicle of Arbela 67 162,15 128
192,8-9 142
Cologne Mani Codex 48,16-50,7 15 1
192,21-24 99
194,19-22 99
206,7-9 128
Doctrine of A ddai 67 215,20-24 127
Jos. Matemus, Firmicus, Mathesis

Ant. I.67-70 193 11.3.4-5 36 9
V II.320 170
45-49 18 1 Mishnah
XX .200 142 M id. 2.3,6 112
Bell. II.4 11 1 1 3 Sanh. 6.6 108
v . 5 .2 - 3 217 M4-45
7-4
194-201 112 Sotah 9.15 3i 4
Kephalaiat Introduction (7,27) l 75
68 175 Plin. E p . V I. 16,21 173
Mandean Ginza R , Book V I 232 Svetasvatara Upanishad IV ,3 232

1the Coptic Gnostic Library A Complete Edition of The Nag Ham PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

1the Coptic Gnostic Library A Complete Edition of The Nag Ham PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

THE COPTIC GNOSTIC LIBRARY

EDITED WITH ENGLISH TRANSLATION, INTRODUCTION AND NOTES

THE INSTITUTE FOR ANTIQUITY AND CHRISTIANITY

EUGNOSTOS THE BLESSED AND THE SOPHIA OF JESUS CHRIST

ISBN 9004117024 (Set)

THIS BOOK IS PRINTED ON ACID-FREE PAPER.

Copyright 2000 by Koninklijke Brill NV, Leiden, The Netherlands

PRINTED IN THE NETHERLANDS

Nag H am m adi Codex I (The Jung Codex)

Nag H am m adi Codices II, 1; III, 1 ; and IV, 1

Nag H am m adi Codex II, 2-7

Nag H am m adi Codices III, 2 and IV, 2

Nag H am m adi Codices III, 3-4 and V, 1

Nag H am m adi C odex III, 5

Nag H am m adi Codex V, 2-5

Nag H am m adi Codex V I

P ap y ru s Berolinensis 8502,1 and 4

N ag H am m adi Codex V III

G reek and Coptic P ap y ri from the C artonnage of the Covers

Nag H am m adi Codex XI

Nag H am m adi Codex X II

Nag H am m adi Codex X III

MARTIN KRAUSE - JAMES M. ROBINSON

NAG HAMMADI CODICES

Eug n o sto s and T h e S o p h ia of Je su s C h r is t

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Eugnostos the Blessed. English & Coptic.

Copyright 1991 by E.J. Brill, Leiden, The Netherlands

Authorization to photocopy items fo r internal or personal

Foreword by JamesM. Robinson ................................................................ vii

in 1984 at E. J. Brill. It was not possible to include there subsequent improve

u 77*e Prayer of the Apostle Paul Pr. Paul

vn ,5 The Three Steles of Seth Steles Seth

(Abbreviations commonly found in standard English dictionaries are omitted

*See Works Consulted.

Pu (in notes) Puech (1963)*

* See Works Consulted.

Attridge, Harold W. P. Oxy. 1081 and the Sophia Jesu Christi.

Bams, John W. B. Greek and Coptic Papyri from the Covers

Bellet, Paulinus The Colophon of the Gospel of the Egyp

Bickerman, E. J. Chronology o f the Ancient World. Revised

Bohlig, Alexander and Labib, Koptisch-gnostische Apokalypsen aus Codex

Bultmann, Rudolf The History o f the Synoptic Tradition. 2nd

Colpe, Carsten Heidnische, jiidische und christliche Uber-

Crum, W. E. A Coptic Dictionary. Oxford: Clarendon.

De Santos Otero, Aurelio, ed. Los Evangelos Apocrifos. Madrid: Biblio-

Dillon, John The Middle Platonists: 80 B.C. to A.D. 220.

Doresse, Jean Trois livres gnostiques inedits. VC 2:

1960 The Secret Books o f the Egyptian Gnostics:

Emmel, Stephen Unique Photographic Evidence for Nag

1979 Unique Photographic Evidence for Nag

Facsimile Edition V The Facsimile Edition o f the Nag Hammadi

Facsimile Edition III The Facsimile Edition o f the Nag Hammadi

Fallon, Francis T. The Gnostic Apocalypses. Semeia 14:

Hedrick, C. W. Christian Motifs in the Gospel of the Egyp

Hunt, Arthur S. The Oxyrhynchus Papyri. Part 8. London:

Kasser, Rodolphe Complements au Dictionnaire copte de

Klostermann, Erich, ed. Apokrypha 2. 3rd ed. Kleine Texte 8. Ber

Krause, Martin Das literarische Verhaltnis des Eugnostos-

1974 The Letter of Eugnostos. In Gnosis: A

Krause, Martin and Labib, Gnostische und hermetische Schriften aus

Liddell, Henry George; Scott, A Greek-English Lexicon with a Supple

MacRae, George W. The Jewish Background of the Gnostic